LIBRARY
OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA.
GIKT OK
V
Received ...J24r&0j&:. /,
J*/ y^ ^7//^
Accessions No. ^* to'/ & Shelf No _ / f ^?
C-r
GRAMMAR
OF THE
GREEK LANGUAGE
BY
ALPHEUS CROSBY,
OP THB GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
DARTMOUTH COLLEGE.
THIRTY-SIXTH EDITION.
BOSTON:
CROSBY AND NICHOLS,
117 WASHINGTON STREET.
1 8G4.
" The LANGUAGE OF THE GREEKS was truly like themselves, it
conformable to their transcendent and universal Genius. * * * *
GREEK TONGUE, from its propriety and universality, is made for ail
that is great, and all that is beautiful, in every Subject, and undei every
Form of writing." Harris's Hermes, Bk. III. Ch. 5.
" Greek, the shrine of the genius of the old world ; as universal
as our race, as individual as ourselves ; of infinite flexibility, of inde-
fatigable strength, with the complication and the distinctness of nature
herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was exclud-
ed ; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English ;
with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the sum-
mer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and
the intensity of ^Eschylus ; not compressed to the closest by Thucydi-
des, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thun-
ders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean toouh of
Demosthenes ! " Coleridge's Study of the Greek Classic Poets, Geu.
Introd.
HMered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1846, by
AI.PHKUS CROSBY,
n tlic Clerk's office of the l>istnct Court of the District of New Hampshire
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
THE following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what
was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books ; viz.
a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into
the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scien-
tific and complete to accompany him through his whole course. The
volume from which the elements of a language are first learned be-
comes to the student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be
changed in the course of his study without a material derangement
of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The
familiar remark, " It must be remembered that, if the grammar be the
first book put into the learner's hands, it should also be the last to
leave them," though applying most happily to grammatical study in
general, was made by its accomplished author with particular refer-
ence to the manual used by the student.
In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged
me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced students ;
and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate the prin-
ciples of the language more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully,
than has been usual in grammatical treatises, even of far greater size.
At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of the
beginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and by
the reduction of the most important principles to the form of concise
rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation. Many valuable
works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, through
a cumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the understanding and
the memory of the learner. They have been the armor of Saul to the
youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I should consult
the advantage even of the beginner by a false representation of the
language, or by any departure from philosophical accuracy of state-
ment or propriety of arrangement. Truth is always better than false-
hood, and science than empiricism.
To secure, so far as might be, the double object of the work, it haa
been constructed upon the following plan.
IT PREFACE.
First, to state the usage of the language in comprehensive rules
and condensed tables, to be imprinted upon the memory of the student.
For convenient examples of the care with which brevity and simplicity
have been here studied, the reader will permit me to refer him to the
rules of syntax, as presented to the eye at a single view in ^f 64, and
tc the elementary tables of inflection and formation.
Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its his-
torical development , as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and the
present state of philological science, would permit. The student whc
thinks wishes to know, not only what is true, but why it is true ; and
to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the reason
is often like the silver cord of ^olus, confining a vast number of facts,
which otherwise, like the enfranchised winds, are scattered far and
wide beyond the power of control.
Thirdly, to illustrate the use of the language by great fulness of
remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well
as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep
myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting th
language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given
to the contrary ; believing that the grammarian has no more right
than the author to use indiscriminately, and without notice, the
vocabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities,
" A party-color'd dress
Of patch'd and pye-ball'd languages."
The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured
in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine
them in their connection, have been all cited from classic authors in
the precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places
where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of the
work, these examples have been mostly taken from the purest Attic
writers, beginning with ^schylus, and ending with ^Eschines. It
was also thought, that the practical value of such examples might be
greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, whose
works, as those of a model-writer, should be most frequently resorted
to; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single work of
this author, which could be in the hands of every student as a com-
panion to his grammar, in which he might consult the passages re-
ferred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a text-book
in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the choice, I
could not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, and among
his writings, the Anabasis. References also abound in the Etymology,
but chiefly in respect to peculiar and dialectic forms.
PREFACE. V
The subject of euphonic laws and changes has received a larger
share of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not larger
than I felt compelled to bestow, in treating of a language,
" Whose law was heavenly beauty, and whose breath
Enrapturing music."
The student will allow me to commend to his special notice two
principles of extensive use in the explanation of Greek forms ; viz.
the precession of vowels (i. e. the tendency of vowels, in the progress
of language, to pass from a more open to a closer sound ; see 28,
29, 44, 86, 93, 118, 123, 259, &c.), and the correspondence be-
tween the consonants v and a, and the vowels a and e ( 34, 46./?,
50, 56-58, 60, 63. R., 84, 100. 2, 105, 109, 132, 179, 181, 200, 201,
213, 248./, 300, &c.).
In treating of Greek etymology, I have wished to avoid every thing
like arbitrary formation ; and, instead of deducing one form from an-
other by empirical processes, which might often be quite as well re-
versed, I have endeavoured, by rigid analysis, to resolve all the forms
into their elements. The old method of forming the tenses of the
Greek verb one from another (compared by an excellent grammarian
to " The House that Jack built "), is liable to objection, not only on
account of its complexity and multiplication of arbitrary rules, but yet
more on account of the great number of imaginary forms which it re-
quires the student to suppose, and which often occupy a place in hia
memory, to the exclusion of the real forms of the language. To cite
but a single case, the second aorist passive, according to this method,
is formed from the second aorist active, although it is a general rule
of the language, that verbs which have the one tense want the other
( 255. /S). Nor is the method which makes the theme the foundation
of all the other forms free from objection, either in declension or in
conjugation. This method not only requires the assistance of many
imaginary nominatives and presents, but it often inverts the order of
nature, by deriving the simpler form from the more complicated, and
commits a species of grammatical anachronism, by making the later
form the origin of the earlier. See 84, 100, 256. V., 265. In
the following grammar, all the forms are immediately referred to the
root, and the analysis of the actual, as obtained from classic usage,
takes the place both of the metempsychosis of the obsolete, and of the
metamorphosis of the ideal.
Those parts of Greek Grammar of which I at first proposed to form
a separate volume, the Dialects, the History of Greek Inflection, the
Formation of Words, and Versification, I have concluded, with the
VI PREFACE.
advice of highly osteemed frieiuls, to incorporate in this ; so that a
single volume should constitute a complete manual of Greek Grammar.
To accomplish this object within moderate limits of size and expense,
a very condensed mode of printing has been adopted, giving to the
volume an unusual amount of matter in proportion to its size. I thank
my printers, that, through their skill and care, they have shown this
to be consistent with so much typographical clearness and beauty. It
has also been found necessary to reserve for a separate treatise those
parts of the first edition which were devoted to General Grammar,
and which it was at first proposed to include in the present edition as
an appendix. I submit to this necessity with the less reluctance,
because a systematic attention to the principles of General Grammar
ought not to be deferred till the study of the Greek, unless, in accord-
ance with the judicious advice of some distinguished scholars, this
should be the first language learned after our own ; and because the
wish has been expressed, that these parts might be published separ-
ately for the use of those who were not engaged in a course of classical
tudy.
I cannot conclude this preface without the expression of my most
sincere thanks to those personal friends and friends of learning who
have so kindly encouraged and aided me in my work. Among those
to whom I am especially indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the
loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while 1 am
writing, to a post which he will so much adorn, will not, I trust,
withdraw him from that department of study and authorship in which
he has won for himself so enviable a distinction ; Professors Felton
of Cambridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Hackett of Newton, Sanborn,
my highly esteemed associate in classical instruction, Stuart of An-
dover, and Tyler of Amherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden,
Sophocles of Hartford, and Taylor of Andover. Nor can I conclude
without tiie acknowledgment of my deep obligations to previous la-
borers in the same field, to the GREAT LIVING, and to the GREAT
DEAD Requiescant in pace ! It is almost superfluous that I should
mention, as among those to whom 1 am most greatly indebted, the
honored names of Ahrens, Bernhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmichael,
Fischer, Hartung, Hermann, Hoogeveen, Kiihner, Lobeck, MahV
taire, Matthias, Paasow, Rost, Thierech, and Viger.
A. C
HANOVER, Oct. 13, 184G
PREFACE TO THE TABLES.
THE following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Grmp
mnr. They are likewise published separately, for the greater com t .
ience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular Iff
rangement are too obvious to require remark ; nor is it less obvi<> ; ..
that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when prinu .,
together, than when scattered throughout a volume.
The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been o.i.
*tructed, are the following :
I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in grain
nnatical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only HU
material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which ;i-
sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student \.;\-
learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, ,-i.ni
vocative are always the same, why, in each neuter paradigm thai i,.
studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of HIM:
forms instead of three? why, in his daily exercises in declensn>,>.
must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weariness >.
the teacher's ear? With the ellipses in the following tables, the p;i>
adigms of neuter nouns contain only eight forms, instead of the twtlr.
which are usually, and the fifteen which are sometimes, given ; a IK;
the paradigms of participles and of adjectives similarly declined cont;i"
only twenty-two forms, instead of the usual thirty-six or forty-jiv>
See tf 4.
II. To give the forms just as they appear upon the Greek pai:* .
that is, without abbreviation and without hyphens. A dissected ;. r :
abbreviated mode of printing the paradigms exposes the young stud, hi
to mistake, arid familiarizes the eye, and of course the mind, wn:
fragments, instead of complete forms. If these fragments were s* j
arated upon analytical principles, the evil would be less; but they ar-
usually cut off just where convenience in printing may direct, so th;<-
they contain, sometimes a part of the affix, sometimes the whole afii.v.
and sometimes the affix with a part of the root. Hyphens are useiui
i
Vlii PREFACE TO THE TABLES.
in the analysis of forms, but a table of paradigms seems not to be the
most appropriate place for them. In the following tables, the affixes
are given by themselves, and the paradigms are so arranged in col-
umns, that the eye of the student will usually separate, at a glance,
the root from the affix.
III. To represent the language according to its actual use, and not
according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine
grammarians. Hence, for example,
1 . The first perfect active imperative, which has no existence in
pure writers, has been discarded.
2. For the imaginary imperative forms loraxh, T/#*TI, dldodi
dtlxvvdi, have been substituted the actual forms wii), T/#, didov,
dilxvv.
3. Together with analogical but rare forms, have been given the
usual forms, which in many grammars are noticed only as exceptions
or dialectic peculiarities. Thus, fiovhsveKaaccv and
and /3oi>lvaa?, i@e{3ov).ti>xsiaav and
34) ; Povfavsa&waav and /SovJUWadwv, fiovtev&driaav and /?ov-
[ 35) ; til&ip and hl&ovv (^[ 50) ; ij$ and ijatfa, HJS-
Tt and tarai (^f 55).
4. The second future active and middle, which, except as a eupho-
nic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly
rejected.
IV. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What
student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impression,
sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluperfect, the
second aorist and future, and the third future belong as regularly to
the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name ; when, in
point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents
only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect and pluperfect ,
eighty-five, which have the second* aorist active ; fifty, which have the
second aorist and future passive ; and forty, which have the second
aorist middle ? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double
these numbers. Carmichael, who has given us most fully the statis-
tics of the Greek verb, and whose labors deserve all praise, has
gathered, from all the dialects, a list of only eighty-eight verbs which
have the second perfect, one hundred and forty-five which have the
second aorist active, eighty-four which have the second aorist passive,
nd fifty-eight which have the second aorist middle. And, of hia
PREFACE TO THE TABLES. IX
catalogue of nearly eight hundred verbs, embracing the most common
verbs of the language, only fifty-five have the third future, and, in
the Attic dialect, only twenty-eight.
To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the vener-
erable shade of rimrw, but alas ! it is little more than a shade, and,
with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced,
after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra,
'Avri tpiXroirns
Nootyr/i, fffooov <ri KCU ITXIKV avutptXti,
and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a
false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as
the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes' bed
to which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned. The actual
future of TVJiio) is not TVIJJU, but ivm^ta, the perfect passive is both
TSTvupai and rsivmrjuai^ the aorists are in part dialectic or poetic,
the first and second perfect and pluperfect active are not found in
classic Greek, if, indeed, found at all, and the second future active
and middle are the mere figments of grammatical fancy. And yet
ail the regular verbs in the language must be gravely pronounced
defective, because they do not conform to this imaginary model.
In the following tables, the example of Kiihner has been followed,
in selecting ftovi&ha as the paradigm of regular conjugation. This
verb is strictly regular, it glides smoothly over the tongue, is not lia-
ble to be mispronounced, and presents, to the eye, the prefixes, root,
and affixes, with entire distinctness throughout. This is followed by
shorter paradigms, in part merely synoptical, which exhibit the dif-
ferent classes of verbs, -with their varieties of formation.
From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in writ-
ing Greek, to employ the form in -//#oi', little suspecting that it is
only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that the
learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere invention
of the Alexandrine grammarians? The teacher whb meets with it in
his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier called the
Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, " to gaze
upon that which they had never seen before, and would never see
again." In the secondary tenses of the indicative, and in the op-
tative, this form does not occur at all ; and, in the remaining tenses,
there have been found only five examples, two of which are quoted
by Athenaeus from a word-hunter (oro^arotf^ttf ), whose affectation
ho is ridiculing, while the three classical examples are all poetic, oc-
X PREFACE TO THE TABLES.
timing, one in Homer (II. V. 485), and the other two in Sophoclet
(El. 950 and Phil. 1079). And yet, in the single paradigm of
tvTrzw, as I learned it ia my boyhood, this " needless Alexandrine,"
" Which, like a wounded snake, drags ita slow length along, "
occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, that is, almost nine times as
often as in the whole range of the Greek classics.
With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used
so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that
no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly
modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend,
1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse , but gradu-
ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of the
grammar, and with other exercises.
2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference,
than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that
some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting
differences of accent, or individual peculiarities.
3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student
should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of
terminations, and with the rules of the grammar.
4. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service,
till the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as
legibly as upon the printed page, till they have become so familiar
to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, " the
words," in the expressive language of Milton, " like so many nimble
and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command 1 , and in well-
ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places."
In tin 1 orcs'-nt edition, the Tables of Inflection have been enlarged
by the addition of the Dialectic Forms, the Analysis of the Affixes,
the Changes in the Root of the Verb, &c. Tables of Ligatures, of
Derivation, of Pronominal Correlatives, of the Rules of Syntax, and
of Forms of Analysis and Parsing, have also been added. Some
references have been made to sections in the Grammar.
A. C.
HANOVER, Sept. 1, 1846.
*** The volume of Tables contains pp I, ii, rii - xll, 9 - 81
CONTENTS,
TABLES.
1. TABLES OF ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
Page.
I
'a g
A. ALPHABET, ...
9
C. VOCAL ELEMENTS, .
11
B. LIGATURES, . .
10
II. TABLES OF ETYMOLOGY.
Introductory Remarks,
12
Syncopated, Turfy, ^,
U-TT-np XtJ&IV U0OS
17
A. TABLES OF DECLENSION.
C. Liquid-Mute,
I. Affixes of the Three Declen-
Xft, obovs, yiyctf, ^etuutj
sions, ....
13
StvoQto*, '0-rat/;,
17
n. Analysis of the Affixes, .
13
D. Pure.
ill. Nouns of Declension I.
. Masculine and Feminine,
A. Masculine, ra^/aj, vavrv;,
$;, fyvs,*;;, J^ i X M f ,
rJ<&M* *T"' f^"*!
14
'**%*', * fas"rfpl* US '.
18
B. Feminine, trxiai, 3^,
*%&>, 'afius'J ^cax.^rnt,
yXuffffu,, <rt(&n, f&vcia t .
14
rLiioeciiv}, 'llea.x.KiYif,
19
Dialectic Forms, . .
14
/3. Neuter, n7%os , O.ITTU, yt*
rv. Nouns of Declension II.
pu-s,
19
A. Masculine and Feminine,
Dialectic Forms, .
19
*.eye;, Ov^o;, oYof, voos, a;,
15
VI. Irregidar and Dialectic De-
B. Neuter, eruxov, <r>rtov, po-
clension, Zsy',-, Otil-rous, FXat/j,
pitv, offrioy, avtuyiMV, .
15
vie;, vayf, $eav, ff-rio;, iTTiV),
Dialectic Forms, . .
15
<roXif, 'Qlutrffivc, 1 laTooxXaj,
*C
r. Nouns of Declension III.
vii. Adjectives of Two Termina-
A. Mute,
tions.
1. Labial, yv^J/, ty\'f$/,
16
A. Of Declension II., 2,* f ,
2. Palatal, xo^aj-, 5'^, ^a-
a.yvptz.og, ...
21
XyH> ^'"$i ...
16
B. Of Declension III., #,,
3. Lingual.
it/gagi;, J<Voy,-, *?',-, ^un'-
a. Masculine and Femi-
^wv, ....
21
nine, oraTj, TOUS, av|,
vin. Adjectives of Three Termi-
^a^/f, xXs/;, .
16
nations.
/?. Neuter, <rup.a. t <pus t
A. Of Declensions II. and I.,
Yt-ra.^ K'^UI, ovs,
16
IplXto;, ro$o;, .
22
B. Liquid,
Contracted, ^vtrtes, $i-rXaf,
2i
X,i/xv, Sa/^wv. pis, Srj, ^'i-
H. Of r>eclensions III. and I.,
T^g, ^UJ,
17
fti/.*s, flrS,-, ^<EI;, riByf, .
23
Xll
CONTENTS.
C. Of the Three Declensions,
fiiya;, yrtXug, . . .
Homeric Forms of foXus
?, . . . .
DC. Numerals, i7?, ovbtis, M
<pu, TgMSj riffffKgiSf
X. Participles, /Sot/Ati
tfixvuv, Xtvuv, .
xi. Substantive Pronouns.
A. Personal, tyta, , ow, .
B. Reflexive, tpcturov, o-tciv-
TOII, icLvrou, , .
C. Reciprocal, aXAjA.a;y, .
D. Indefinite, $s7y, . .
Xii. Adjective Pronouns.
A. Definite.
Article , Iterative avrot,
Relative 2?, Demonstrative
fit, Possessive, . .
Demonstrative euros, ro<rou-
ros, . . . .
B. Indefinite.
Simple Indefinite r/f, Inter-
rogative rig, Relative Indef-
inite oirnt . . .
Page.
23
, 24
24
24
25
26
27
28
28
28
30
B. TABLE OF NUMERALS.
I. Adjectives.
1. Cardinal, 2. Ordinal, . 31
3. Temporal, 4. Multiple,
5. Proportional, . . .32
II. Adverbs, ... 32
III. Substantives, ... 32
C. TABLES OF CONJUGATION.
i. The Tenses Classified, . . S3
ii. The Modes Classified, . 83
in. Formation of the Tenses, S3
iv. Affixes of the Active Voice, 84
v. A Hixes of the Passive Voice, 36
VI. Analysis of the Affixes, . 38
VII. Dialectic Forms, . . 39
vin. Active Voice of /5Xiw
Translated, ... 40
ix. Active Voice of QovXtva, . 42
x. Middle and Passive Voices of
fiovfayta, ... 44
xi. (A!) Mute Verbs.
i. Labial, 1. y {$&>, . 47
2. Xi/<rv ( . 48
ii. Palatal, vr^ettr<r&>, . 49
iii. Lingual, 1. -rtifo, . 50
2. xopil*, . 51
xn. (B.) Liquid Verbs.
1. a.yyiX\u, . . 52
2. p/vw, . . .54
xii. (C.) Double Consonant Verbs.
1. a,v\u or cti/^xvfki, , 55
2. *i*mftfHtt t iXvXfyftfu, 55
xrv. (D.) Pure Verbs.
i. Contract,
1. ,W, . . 56
2. 9Ut*, ... 58
3. foxiw, . . .60
iK Verbs in -^t*/,
1 . 'tcrrvfti, ... 62
2. xt'iu-ffSa.!, . . 63
3. rittifu, . . .64
4. 3'i'SeafAi, . . 66
5. 'btiKi/vpi, . .68
6. Qtiftf, ... 69
7. V' -70
8. tiui, . . . 71
9. iT^/, . . . .72
iii. Second Aorists,
1. ?g>,y ..... 73
2. acrt^, . . 73
3. ?yyv, ... 73
4. ?^y, ... 73
xv. (E.) Preteritive Verbs,
i. n, ... 74
2. 2s2o/xa and St5/*, . 74
3. ffuu, ... 74
4. KMvpx,, . . . 75
Xl7p.au, ... 75
xn. Changes in the Root, . 76
D. TABLES OF FORMATION.
I. Table of Derivation, .
n. Pronominal Correlatives,
III. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX,
IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING.
A. OF WORDS,
B. OF SENTENCES,
C. OF METRES,
77
78
80
84
CONTENTS.
INTRODUCTION. DIALECTS, .....
BOOK I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
Mil
Page
85
Page
CH. 1. CHARACTERS, . 90
Pronunciation, ... 93
History of Orthography, . 95
CH. 2. VOWELS, . . 97
I. Precession, . . 99
II. Union of Syllables, . 100
A. Contraction, . . 100
B. Crasis, . . . 102
C. Apostrophe, . . 104
' Dialectic Variations, . .104
CH. 3. CONSONANTS, . 108
Euphonic Changes,
A. In Formation of Words, 108
B. In Connection of Words, 1 1 3
C. Special Rules, . 114
Dialectic Variations, . .114
BOOK II. ETYMOLOGY.
CH. 1. PRINCIPLES or DE-
CLENSION, . . . 116
A. Gender, . . .116
B. Number, . . . 118
C. Case, D. Methods, . 119
E. History of Declension, 121
CH. 2. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
I. First Declension, . 126
Dialectic Forms, . .127
II. Second Declension, . 128
Dialectic Forms, . . 1 29
III. Third Declension, . 129
A. Mutes, . . .130
B. Liquids, . . 131
C. Liquid-Mutes, D. Pures, 133
Dialectic Forms, . .139
IV. Irregular Nouns, . 140
CH. 3. DECLENSION OF ADJEC-
TIVES AND PARTICIPLES, 146
CH. 4. NUMERALS, . . 152
CH. 5. PRONOUNS.
I. Substantive, . 155
II. Adjective, . . .159
CH. 6. COMPARISON, . 163
I. Of Adjectives, . . 1 63
A. In -Ti^oj, -rasTflf, . 1 63
B. In -fwv, -le-TOf, . .165
C. Irregular, . . 166
II. Of Adverbs, . .168
CH. 7. PRINCIPLES OF CON-
JUGATION, . . .169
A. Voice, . . . 169
B. Tense, . . .170
C. Mode, ... 171
D. Number and Person, . 171
E. History of Conjugation, 172
CH. 8. PREFIXES OF CONJU-
GATION, . . .182
I. Augment, . . 182
II. Reduplication, . .184
III. Of Compound Verbs, 185
Dialectic Use, . . .186
CH. 9. AFFIXES OF CONJU-
GATION.
I. Classification and Analysis, 187
A. Tense-Signs, . .188
B. Connecting Vowels, 1 90
C. Flexible Endings, . 1 93
II. Union of Affixes and Root, 1 96
A. Regular Open Affixes, 1 96
B. Regular Close Affixes, 1 96
C. Verbs in -^/, . 200
D. Complete Tenses, . 203
Dialectic Forms, . . 208
CH. 10. ROOT OF THE VERB, 215
A. Euphonic Changes, 2 1 7
B. Emphatic Changes, 2 1 9
C. Anomalous Changes, 241
CH. 1 1 . FORMATION OF WORDS, 243
I. Of Simple Words, . 244
A. Nouns, . . .244
B. Adjectives, . . 248
C. Pronouns, . .249
D. Verbs, . . 250
E. Adverbs, . . .251
II. Of Compound Words 252
BOOK III. SYNTAX.
CH. 1. THE SUBSTANTIVE.
I. Agreement, .
257
II. Use of Numbers,
III. Use of Cases,
259
260
CONTENTS.
Paee
A. Nominative, . . 262
B. Genitive, . . '264
I. Of Departure, . 2'> 4
J. Separation, . 264
2. Distinction, . "265
H. Of Cause, . '-J67
i. 1. Origin, . . '267
2. Material, . 267
3. Supply, . . 268
4. Partitive, . 269
ii.l. Motive, &c., . 274
2. Price, Value, &c., 276
3. Sensible and Men-
tal Object, . 276
4. Time and Place, 278
Hi. Active, . . 279
iv. Constituent, . 279
1. Property, . 281
2. Relation, . 281
C. Dative Objective, . 285
I. Of Approach, . 286
1. Nearness, . . 286
2. Likeness, . 287
II. Of Influence, . 287
D. Dative Residual, . 293
I. Instrumental and Modal, 293
ii. Temporal and Local, 295
E. Accusative, . . 296
I. Of Direct Object and
Effect, . . 297
Double Accusative, 301
II. Of Specification, . 3O2
in. Of Kxtent, SO i
rv. Adverbial, . . 304
F. Vocative, . . 304
CH. 2. TIIR ADJECTIVE.
I. Agreement, . . 305
II. Use of Degrees, . .31 2
Cn. 3. THK AKTICLE, . 315
I. As an Article, . . 316
II. As a Pronoun, .
CH. 4. TIIK PKONOUN.
I. Agreement,
II. Special ( )l>servations,
A. Personal, &c., .
B. ALro;,
C. Demonstrative, .
D. Indefinite,
E. Relative,
F. Complementary,
G. Interrogative, .
H. "Axxoj, . . .
CH. 5. THK VERB.
I. Agreement, . .
II. Use of the Voices,
A. Active, . .
B. Middle, .
C. Passive,
III. Use of the Tenses,
A. Definite and Indefinite.
B. Indefinite and Complete,
C. Future,
IV. Use of the Modes,
A. Intellective, . .
As used in sentences,
i. Desiderative, .
II. Final, . . .
HI. Conditional, .
iv. Relative,
v. Complementary,
B. Volitive, .
C. Incorporated,
i. Infinitive,
II. Participle,
III Verbal in -TISJ,
CH. 6. THK I'AKTU:I,K, .
A. The Ailvi-rb,
B. The Preposition,
C. The Conjunction, .
D. Concluding Remarks,
Page
325
327
329
329
332
333
336
337
344
346
347
348
352
353
354
356
358
360
364
36a
367
367
372
374
37.5
378
378
381
381
385
390
3 f '6
396
"7
397
4<H'
BOOK IV. PROSODY.
"n. 1. QUANTITY, . . 410
I. Natural Quantity, . .411
II. Local Quantity, . 414
< ii. 2. VKltsiKirATloX, . 416
A. Dactylic Verse, . 4-Jl
Ii. Anapaestic Verse, . . 423
<: Iambic Verse, . . 425
I). Trochaic Verse, . . U7
I-' Other Metros, . . 428
'ii. 3. ACCKMT, . . .429
INDEXES,
I. General Laws, . . 43 J
II. Accentual Changes, . 4 <i
Contraction, Xc., . 4 Ji!
Crave Accent, Anastrophe, 4 U
Proclitics. Kivli . 434
III. Determination of Accent-
ed Syllable, . . 435
In Declension, . . 436
In r..iu|.:m-'n, Conjugation, 439
In I'arlicl-s, . . 440
411
GRE
TABLES.
Order
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
XX.
XXI.
XXII.
xxi n
XXIV.
EPl-
SEMA.
H. 1.
Forma.
Large. Small.
A
B
r
A
K
Z
If
I
K
A
M
O
n
p
2
T
T
SI
a
h*
7T, 57
T,7
V
9
UK
&
F, F, /, g
?,<;
^
A.PHY AND ORTHOEPY.
L. THE
ALPHABET.
[ 10-12, 17
-22.]
Roman
Numeral
Letters.
Name.
Power.
a
I^Aqoa
Alpha
1
b
Bi]Ta
Beta
2
g, n
l^nfj^in
Gamma
3
d
dtkitt
Delta
4
e
"E yUov
Epsilon
5
z
ZijTvt
Zeta
7
e
V/ra
Eta
8
th
OljTCt
Theta
9
i
'/Witt
Iota
10
c
Kannn
Kappa
20
1
sJnufidit
Lambda
30-
m
Mv
Mil
40
n "^
Nv
Nu
50
X
Zl
Xi
60
6
"O pxQor
Omicron
70
P
m
Pi
80
r
C Pw
Rho
100
s
Stypa.
Sigma
200
t
Tav
Tau
300
y
V yllov
Upsilon
400
ph
<J>~i
Phi
500
ch
XI
Uhi
600
ps
vn
Psi
700
5
!a w
Omega
800
f
Buv
Vau
6
q
Komia
Koppa
90
sh
Savnl
Sampi
900
10
TABLES.
ou
OJU
,56
lu,
79
de
ft
ex
v
ni
IV
xa
H 2. B. LIGATURES,
[ 10. 2.]
0.1
CC7TO
av
rr
&
OCT
3
Of
a&ai
OCt
OT
*X
10.1
TO
70V
iav
vv
VTtO
fl 3. I ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 11
H 3. C. VOCAL ELEMENTS.
I. VOWELS, SIMPLE AND COMPOUND.
[ 24-26.]
Class I. IT. III. IV. V
A O E U I
Orders. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. Sounds. S-xind*
, T r , (Short, I. a o v I
Simple Vowels. < T
C Long, 2. a o T\ v t
C Proper, 3. di 01 a m
Diphthongs in L. < .
(Improper, 4. d a # vi
... u i . (Proper, 5. dv ov tv
Diphthongs in v. < _
( Improper, b. dv uv qv
II. CONSONANTS.
[49-51.]
A. Consonants associated in Classes and Orders.
Class L Class II. Class HI.
Orders. Labials. Palatals. Linguals.
1. Smooth Mutes, n x T
2. Middle Mutes, ft 7 8
3. Rough Mutes, y % &
4. Nasals, p ? v
5. Double Consonants, ^ | f
B. Additional Semivowels.
A Q 6
CONSONANTS (SECOND ARRANGEMENT).
( Smooth, TT, x, T.
C Mutes, < Middle, {3, y, d.
Smgle Consonants, ] ^ Rough qp^ ^
/ c, , ( Liquids, A, u. v. o, y nasal
( Semivowels, {sibilant,,,/
Double Consonants, y/, , ^.
III. BREATHINGS.
[ 13.]
Rough Breathing, or Aspirate ( l ).
Smooth or Soft Breathing ( ' ).
4 TABLKS. [II 4
II. ETYMOLOGY.
5j 4. REMARKS. I. To avoid needless repetition, alike burdensome
10 teacher and pupil, and to accustom the student early to the application
>T rule, the tables ot' paradigms have been constructed with the following
f. li.pses, which will be at once supplied from general rules.
1. In the paradigms of DECLENSION, the Voc. sing, is omitted whenever
ft has the same form with the Worn., and the following cases are omitted
"hroughout (see 80) ;
a. ) The Voc. piur., because it is always the same with the Noin.
tf.) The Out. dual, because it is always the same with the Gen.
y.) The Jcc. and Voc. dual, because they are always the same with
the JNom.
<J.) The Ace and Voc. neut., in all the numbers, because they are al-
ways the same with the Mom
2. In the paradigms of ADJECTIVES, and of words similarly inflected,
the Neuter is omitted in the Gen. and Dat. of all the numbers, and in the
jVom. dual. ; because in these cases it never differs from the Masculine
( 130. ).
3 In the paradigms of CONJUGATION, the 1st Pers. dual is omitted
throughout, as having the same form with the 1st Pers. plur., and the '3d
I'ers. dual is omitted whenever it has the same form with the 2d Pers.
dual, that is, in the primary tenses of the Indicative, and in the Subjunc-
tive ( 212. 2). For the form in -/ua^ov, whose empty shade has been so
multiplied by grammarians, and forced to stand, for idle show, in the rank
and nle of numbers and persons, see 212 N.
4. The compound forms of the PERFECT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE and
CPTATIVE are omitted, as belonging rather to Syntax than to inflection
234,6:^7).
II. The regular formation of the tenses is exhibited in the table (IT 28),
xv Inch may be thus read ; " The tense is formed from thf root by
nth'xing ," or, " by prefixing and affixing (or, in the nude
I >rm, )." In the application of this table, the forms of the root
must be distinguished, if it has moie than a single form ( 254).
III. In the table of translation (U 33). the form of the verb must, of
course, be adapted to the number and person of the pronoun ; thus, I am
jt'tinning, tkou art planning, he is planning, &/G. For the MIDDLE VOICE,
li-uige the forms of " plan " into the corresponding forms of"<ldib-
ctafe ' ; qnd, for the PASSIVE VOICE, into the corresponding forms of " be
planned."
IV. The Dialectic Forms, for the sake of distinction, arc uniform I j
printed in siiKillcr type. In connection with tli<>so forms, the ahbn'via
lions /Eol and /E. denote /Eolic ; Alex., Alexandrine; Alt., /Utic,
lio-oi and B., Bcnotic; Cornm , Common ; Dor. and D , Doric ; Ep. and
I) , F.pir :; Hoi , Hellenistic; Ion. and I., Ionic; Iter. and It, Iterative;
<>., Old ; Poet and P., Poetic.
V. A star (*) in the tables denotes that an affix or a form is wanting.
Pnrenthescs are sometimes used to inclose unusual, doubtful, peculiar, or
Mii|i|>le:nent;:rv forms. In UT! 21), 30, the x and >'* of th tense-signs, as
dropped in tlir si,-,, nil t<n.<rx (< \'.','.) \\ ), ;irr . ji;ipitr<I l>y a hyphen from
the rest of th- ;if1iv.
1] 5, 6.
A. TABLES OF
fl o. i. AFFIXES OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS.
Dec. I. ' Pec. II. Dec. III.
Mu.sc. Fern. M. F. Neut. M. F. Neu
Sing. Nom.
C, lytf I , 1)
oc | ov
$ *
Gen.
ov \ etc, r t g
ov
og
Dat.
, ry
M
i
Ace.
',' T}V
ov
>', U
Voc.
, ri
| ov
* *
Plur. Nom.
at,
ot | a
EC
Gen.
ftp
a*y
air
Dat.
(tig
o<c
ar(.)
Ace.
ng
OVC 1 ft
c
Voc.
rti
01 \ a
ef a
Dual Nom.
a
(a
1
Gen.
a iv
oiv
ot*
Dat.
niv
OiV
on
Ace.
it
M
1
Voc.
a
(a
8
U 6. ii. ANALYSIS OF THE AFFIXES.
[The figures in the last column denote the declensions. 1
Connecting Vowels.
Flexible Ln-n' M
Dec. I |Dec. II. Pec. III.
Sing. Ndm.
/
(X \1])
o
*
c. Fern. 1, *. Nn/t & > ,
Gen.
w
o ^
(o#) oc. 2anQ M'a&c. *, o.
Dat.
(TJ)
o
*
i.
Ace.
n ('?)
o
*
r, . Neut. 3, *.
Voc.
o()
*
*
Plur. Nom.
o
*
fc. 1 and 2, Neut. .
Gen.
a
*
w.
Dat.
a
*
(eat). 3, at. I and 2, tj.
Aec.
a
o
*
(vg) ag. Neil* .
D-ial Nom.
a
o
*
.
Gen.
\ u 1 o
*
IV. 3, Oil'.
14
TABLES. FIRST DECLENSION.
Ifi 7,
fi 7. m. NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION.
A. MASCULINE.
, steward, o, sailor. $, son of Atreus. a, Mercury. , norfA ii<mrf
S. N. ragtag raving 'AfQildijg
G. Totfilov vaviov 'AiQtldov
D. iap.la vniiTTj 'AiQtldrj
A. Tn^Lciv ravryv 3 AiQtlSi]V
V. xa/u/a vavia
P. N. Tatfiilai ravtflu
G. ra^iioiv vavTwv 'Aigeidtov
D. Taplvtis vaviaiq *AiQtldau$
A. Tafias vavTug ^Aioeldag
D.N.ta/1/a vvi !4rpWdT c
G.Totulotiv vctviaiv 'Arotidaiv *
?7, shadow.
S. N. tfXtM
G. axiag
D. axi
A. axiuv
P. N. axca/
G. axtajv
D.
A.
door.
B. FEMENTDTE.
^, tongue.
^ ' ' Egpni o, Gobryas.
N. /w^ua?
G. Jfefyvoc
I\o6gvd
A'
Eouaiv T7 *
V.
honor.
&V(JUV
&VQCU
&VQWV
TiprjC
lifjij
Tl^LWV
r), mina.
[j.vd(x, pva
fivdixg^ ftvcig
juva, (tvu
fivdciv, fiiav
p'ca
[iVWV
fivalg
D. N. <rxt<*
G. ax/alv
dvgn
^uraa/y,
8. DiALKcmc FORMS.
A.
f Ion. v, i<Z (masc.) ; .
< [/t/v,'A^/o-Tyo^)v, -idL
(^Dor. av vaurav, TI/J.O.V.
N. t t Ion. s
Uf, Dor. f tetvrds,
Old, a VroTd!,
, Ion. >j <r*<7, Sw^j. V. a, Ion. >:
*, Ion. tj Ep. aXuSi/n, */V<rj. *, Poet.
U, Dor. a T//<a, <J">xcc, -yet. j, Dor. a
G. t/, Old, da 'Arfifido, Bo^'ido. Old, a vi
Ion. tu, u ' 'Arpttiiit, lloe'iu. P. G. w, Old, aw
Dor. & 'Ar^iida, 'E^a. Ion. iw
j (Ion. nf <rx.tr;;, Sugnf. Dor. ; /.v
*lf (Dor. a f c/^Sy, y*.u<rfff. D. */f, Old, /<r,
Ep. u9*() A<ViJ/t}Si. Ion. 9**,
D. Clon. j ret/air,, 9-yjjj. A. f, Ion. f (masc.) ; 3i
y (Dor. ft uVa, TifiS.. Dor. a? M0?^f, vi
Ep. ^'() Sw^>}^/('). .ZEol. a,i( recif
Ap. Rh.
U 9, 10-]
SECOND DECLENSION.
15
fl 9. iv. NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION
A. MASCUIJNE AND FEMININE.
o, word, o, people. ^, way. o, mind. 6, temple.
S. N. Jioyog
G. Ao'/ov
D. Ao'^w
A. Ao/ov
V. Ao^e
P. N. Ao/CH
G. AO/WV
D.
A.,
dfjpog odog
drj^ov odov
odw
odov
nds
yoov, vov
*o, vaj
vovv
vov
voc,
ruov, vo
voi
VOWJ', VWV
vooig, volg
di/lpoi odol
dtiftrnv odwv
dfyoig odolg
drjpovg odovg voovg, vovg vaovg, veug
vuwv, vftav
vuoig, vfuig
I). N.
G. \6yoiv drjpoiv
o<5tJ
oddlv
row, vw
vooiv, voiv
vccov^ vav
B. NEUTER.
TO, fig. TO, wing. TO, part. TO, bone. TO, chamber,
S. N. avxov mtQov ^.oolov oaisor^ oarovv aixayswv
G. avxov nrfoov uoolov OOFTC'OV, oaTov . avwytw
D, - , >, 3 ~ - \ 3 '
. O~VKO) 7TTOO) flOQKti 0(JTfi), OaTO)
P . N. aVX TTTfOM
G. aVXOJV TtttQWV
D. auxot? megolg fiOQioig oaxsoig^ oaiotg avwyewg
D. N. awxca TTTfow IIOQIW ocm'w, oaTtu avioyfot
G. avxo/i' TiTcootv fioQiotv oo"TOiv, oaTolv avuysfov
U 1 O. DIALECTIC FORMS.
S N. ?, Laconic, -aXs% 70.4. S. D y, Boeot. i7 airy, r!J
G. oo, Ep. a/a Ta?o X7<9/a. P. N. , Boeot. P- xA.t "
Dor. w TU Xoyw. (G. u, Ion. iuv ' Vivi
(Ion. tu BaTT&i, K^tf/Viw.) D. f, Old, // Tor<r/ Xoyonrt.
Ep. fl9-s() v^ao9-v. Boeot. C? TUJ aXXCf f^
ft (contracted from aow), Ep. aa A. at/f , Dor. ay, f T&/J Xoyu; ,
D. y, Old, a/ 'ItrS-fAoTj roT
Ep. a^<(>)* avrotpi,
Ep. a9v ovgetvo&i '
Ta/j
D. G. a/, Ep. a/?y
16
TABLES.
[fl
U1I. v. NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
A. MUTE.
1. LABIAL. 2. PALATAI,.
o, vulture, favein. o, raven, o, fa go at. fa phalanx. f h hair
S1VT ' i ' j. >'?.
. IN. yt'Jjf/ qpAfc^ X0) BlJ
G. yvnoq <jpAf/?o'ff xoxo? t/oV
D. yvnl (f^f^l y.6(j<txi ctiyl
A. ^i;7r qpA/?a xdouxa at^a
P. N. ^VTTSff
G. yvndiv
D. yvtyl
A. yvnns
D. N. ^7T
G yvnolv
(pajirtyyi
tplnjtl
atycav
ai$i cpnhny^i
uiyag cpahayyag
itiyE (pn^ityyf.
alyolv (pcdayyoir
3. LINGUAL.
a. Masculine and Feminine.
o, fa child. o,foot. o, sovereign, fa grace.
novg
nodog
nodi
noda
key.
S- N.
G. naidog
D. mtidl
A. nuldtt
V. nut
P. N. 7i7<5e?
G. nitldoiv
D. nitun'
A.
nnul
7io'<5otff
D. N. nmds
G. naldotv nodoiv
/3. Neuter.
16, Ziuer. TO, Aom.
(JDCOff
7jrio
(jpwtff mrafof x^aroc, xtooff,
S. N.
G.
P. N. Muiara opcura
G. OitfUttW (pbntav rjnitTiav
D. u(j'iiittoi (fxaol ynaot
D. N. aW^T8 g)WT ^7lT8 Xf'pTf,
G. ouifjinToiv (fbnoiv ^nnroiv x*>rov,
TO, ear
J
Otff
or off
xeo,
xfo't/)v,
wal
xfoor
fl 12 13.J
THIRD DECLENSION.
17
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D N.
G.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
U 1 S. B. LIQUID.
o, harbour, o, deity. t h nose. o, beast, o, orator, r^hnna
Ar^/Tjv dalpwv $ig -&r,Q QI'JTMQ %t-r\)
lipivog daipovog qlrog \}ri()6g ^logoe X f '("''?
dotlfAOV QIV
QTjJOQ
lifjtvoiv datftavav QIVWV -d-r^viv faroytav
kifjevi dn/fioat glut drjQal 6r)TO(f<J4
Jii^itvag dai^orag QIVHS -&i](}ug yrjTofjug
lifidvs dnlftovs QIVS
Sjiicopated.
o, father. o, man. ^, mother, o, ^,
urdya
naio
nnrsga
TtdlfQ
</7J7fOO)V
TtltTt)tt(Jl
log. o,
x r ft) v
xvt'og agrog
XVt'l (X(JVl
xvva curvet
xvov
XVt'fc anrfg
xrrtav ctoi'wv
xvoi (xijvixal
xvi'txg aynxg
TKtTfQS
nmegotv
1} 1 3. C. LIQUID-MUTE.
o,lion. o, tooth, o, giant. f h wife.
o, Xenophon.
Jiioirog
AfOJ'Tt
odorta
yiyug
yiynvti
Uovitg
IfovTtav
It'ovot,
yiyuv
yiynrreg 8u(jnQTtg
yiyuvjutv d(xf.tii(iTO:iv S.
yl'/iHai
yiyctvrng
qpQOVTt yiynrif SniirtOTF
<x)6> rntv yiytiiTOtv d<t[j<tnT<nv
17, Opus.
N. V
G. V
D. OJIOVVJL
A. (>TlOi!t'ItX
18
TABLES.
11 14. D. PURE.
. Masculine and Feminine,
o, jackal, o, hero. o, weevil, o, i\, sheep. o,Jish.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
I 1 . N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
(w)
&0)WV
Qnol
tywtiq
dwotv rjQtaoiv
xi g
xlog
xli
xiv
x'ffg
xlwv
xi at
xtf
xioiv
oig
oiog
oil
olv
oifc, oig
oiwv
olai
ota;:, oig
o'is
ololv
fa&vt
o, knight.
S. N. Iniievg
G. inntwg
D. Imie'i, iTintl
o, y, OX.
fiovg
fioog
pd'C
TJ, old woman, y, ship,
ygotvg vavg
A.
mnsn
PVV
yyuvv
vctvv
V.
Innsv
/Sov
YQOV
P.
N.
In Tit eg, Innilq
pfae
yqitfg
rfa
(J.
Innttav
fiouv
youwv
VfUV
D.
Inrifvai
ftovai
y naval
vaval
A.
inntug, mniiq
/5oot^, ftovg
yguag, ygavg
vuvg
D.
N.
Innss
{toe
youf
Vt)S
a.
Innioiv
fioolv
yquoiv
vtolv
6, cubit.
7;, city.
TJ, trireme.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N
U
TioAfi',
nohv
71 6h
TTokffc, Tioleig
nuq,
,-, *dJuig
TtoJifF, no\r\
nrixioiv
11 14, 15.]
ri, echo. r), shame.
S. N. r t %(a uldwg
G. wooc, yxovg t<5oo, aldovg
D. TJ^O/., 77/01 i<5o'i, nldol
A. 7^o', 7)^00 aldoa, aidfo
V. r^ol aldot
THIRD DECLENSION.
o, Socrates.
6, Piraeus.
S N.
G.
D.
A. /lfl()(XlC( 9
o, Hercules.
19
lfgax\i]
TO,
S N.
G.
D. Itl/U,
P N.
G.
D.
D. N.
G.
/3. Neuter.
TO
15. DIALECTIC FORMS.
TO, honor.
ygctai
ysQctt,
ysgdoiv,
S. G. araj, Ion. ?
tos, Ion. wf 9-^st
iwy, Ep. o; /3<r/
Ion. and Dor. e
ias, Ion. and Dor.
/So;, Ion. and Dor.
Dor. /raj s^tt/Tay.
ot/f , Dor. and ^Eol. <ij, a?j &
3. 7, Ep. / /Saa-/X?i*.
Ion. t/' /Sat<r/Xj/'.
ii, Ion. r raXr, %vva,(ii
3i, Ion. 7 s-rf, araXr.
A. >, Poet, a tugia, i%3-u(t.
ece, Ion. a?/ 'lai/v, A*jTa?v
Dor. y "H^wv, Aar
a, Ep. ? /S<r/X.
Idll. a jSaa-/Xa.
Dor. ^ jSaa-/X>j.
V. If, ^Eol. 2dtf*aTt.
P. N. us, Old Att. f /3a-/Xf.
Ep. ^f /Sata-/X5Jf.
Ion. S? /3aa-;Xf .
i/f, Ion. and Dor. /?
, Poet. y, x^
Ion. Q/^
G. flv, Ion. 6&;v %tiviuv, a.v!icia<t.
icav, Ep. &>v )3aa'/X7wv.
Ay, Ion. and Dor. /wv raX/.
D. (), Old, () xi/gtr/.
Poet. e-a-/(y) Jfri-.
ifi(v), Ep. a-<p
Ion. i
A. taf, Ep. >??
Ion. a; /3ae
Comin. 7j /
i/f, Ion. and Dor.
D. G. a/y, Ep. a<i'y tra^0
TABLES. IH ^
11 t 6. vi. IRREGULAR AND DIALECTIC DECLENSION.
o, Jupiter. o, (Edipus, ', Glus.
S. N. Zivs, Z*v (Dor.) Oi&Vaws
D. A//,' Z*W, Zavi Ofl/Wi, [(poet.), [D. -,,,-, A. -, I
A. A/a;, Zjjva, Zava O/^/iroJa, O/^/TOfv [-v, V. -), -a 1
V. Zs Oft/aw [(Ep and Lyr.) 1
Attic, o, son Homeric. Doric. , sAip. Ionic.
S N. w/oj t/<es vayj ("*0 "WfJ (vw^j)
G. t//ow, v't'ios viau, t/7af, t//of vaaj ?, ve;
D. w/w, w/r f7/, w/g/j w/7 v/' vjj/'
A. viiv viov t via,, vi'fek vat/v (vav) v>ja, via, v)t/
V. m'i
P. N. 1//0/, VI'.Tf v7tSi "<J, //?? Vaf V^f, VHff
G. /<wv, viiMV v'tuv, VI'IMV vAuv !&iv, v&/y
D. uioTs, vl'tTt violin, vieitri^ vetvo-i, voitffffi vwvtri, v^nrtrt^ \
A. vlou;, v'nif viol!;, via.;, viictf vetetf was, via;
Attic. TO, spear. Homeric. Homeric. TO, 'ace.
S. N. Kp Kp
D. ^^TJ, Jagij Jo^4 (poet.) 7>ovotn, Saugi
P. N. J^*T, ^0(>n (pOet.) ^OVPXTtX,, ^OVfftK
C* \ ' \ ' '
D. $ogac<rt Sougteeri) 'bovg'.trfft ff-riffffi,
HOMERIC PARADIGMS.
, knight. 11, city.
S. N. i*irtvt roX/f
G. IfrntS waX/tff, <rrX/of, -raXfoy (<rXit/f Theog.), <rXa#
D. tirirrii (sraXr Hdt.), ?TTaXj/', 7oXf/, ?T''X>|i
A. <V-r>5 ?rX/v, -TaX/ (<roXja lies.
V. IfftU
P. N. <V5f, i^ririTs foXitf (roXff Hdt.),
D. i-ririvfi vraXitfffi (-ro>.iiffi Pind., ToXiffi Hdt.)
A. ivrirtjetf waX/j(roXrf Hdt.), roXf/f,
, ITlysses. ', Patroclus.
8. N. *O0W-|Jf, *O5u-iwj n*TfaxXf
A. 'OJttf-irj, 'Otvfffia.) "OSwa-Sa, 'O3t/(r>5 Ilar^axXav,
V. 'OJt/tf-tf-ii/, 'OSt/iriti IlTf*X,
1[ 17.] ADJECTIVKS.
1] I 7. vn. ADJECTIVES OF Two TERMINATIONS.
A. OK THE SECOND DECLENSION,
o, iy (iCtyUSt) TO o, tj (unfading) TO
&VT >' - ' ? ' ' - J ' ' '
L\. ftO(.xo uO/xor
(j. udfxov
D. M(5/X(W
A. ,XC
V. ^
P. N. ',
G. o5/j
D. awxoif
A. otwxovf
D. N. <5/.
G. (J t ',
nyjfjuoi, cc/oo) ayyyota,
B. OF THE THIKO DECLENSION.
o, 17 (male) TO o, TJ (pleasing) TO o, ? c / (two-footed) TO
SVT i' > < >' j <
i>. ttoor/v aoofv
G>' S J > ,
(XOOlVQg
- f.
A. (>!JJ
V. UQufV
P. N. ^r^
CT. itooivwv
D' s \
U(J(Jf(Jl
A. uoutvuc
dinov*
oim>d, dlnovv
dinov
dlnodfg dlnoda
D. N. (Vp'ofi'f
G. ad u ft
o, ^ (evident) TO
S. N. tf V /; ? om
D. tfiiy-fT,
A.
V.
<5fc r 7IO<5
^(7IO(5oV
o, ^ (greater) TO
P. N. og)6fc,
G. <j^ W,
D. a
A. a
D. N. aaqpt'f,
G.
22
TABLES.
S. N.
G.
1).
A.
V.
I 5 . N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
S. N.
G
D
A
P. N
G.
J).
A.
D. N.
1 8. vi;i. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS.
A. OF THE SECOND AND FIRST DECLENSIONS.
6 (friendly) 77 TO 6 (wise) % - TO
Cplkiog ffil.L(i (fiJiiov aoffog aocpr) aocpo*
qpdiov cpiMug aog>ov ooyrjg
qpiA/oi Cf>i\ict aoffw aoqr?;
cpihov (fiUav ao(f6v oocpyv
cpdiwv
cpiUoig
cplhat
cpiUag
cpillfx
tptMaiv
o (golden)
XOV
XQv
o (double)
dinloof, dinlovg
dtnkoov, fiin).ov
o^T/ofii, OinJuii
Contacted.
XQvasa,
c. %<jvaai<;
i/yy, dinlrjv
501, dl lt.nl
Iwv, 8in).MV dmkowv, 8tnJLn9
diTll.OOV?,
dtnlou,
aocpot, aoqpi
(JOCpUV
aocpolg
aoq>ovg aoqpwc
aoqpw tfoqpa
XQVOOW
Xyvutu,
, dinlovt
, dintix
fl 19, 20.
ADJECTIVES.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
1 O. B. OF TTDS THIRD AND FIRST DECLENSIONS.
o (black) y
[Afidvoiv
o (agreeable)
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
TO
o (all)
n
TO
petixv
nag
naoa.
ndv
nctv-ioq
ndayg
navTi
nday
ndvra
naoav
tittava
ndvifg
ndaai
navict
ndvTMV
naawv
ndai,
ndaaig
ndviag
ndaag
ndvrs
ndaa
ndvTOiv
ndoociv
TO o (sweet)
TO
rjdkog fjdslag
ydei, ydsl rjdfln
rjdvv ydsluv
rjdu
r/dsfg, i]di7.g Tjdiioti
yd slot ig
ydug ydtlag
yds lei
ydtlatv
ydte
rideoiv
o (great)
S. N. psyixg
G. (jiyuiov
D
A
V.
r. N.
G.
D.
A.
D. N.
G.
C. OF THE THREE DECLENSIONS.
i TO o (much) y
nolvg noUy
n ohvv
(many)
nolknl
nottovg
TO
n o A v
24
TABLES. NUMERALS.
Homeric Forms of
ft
aXvg, irouXvs craXXo?
7 jEsch.) iraXXw
S. N.
G.
A.
P. N.
G.
D.
A.
S. o (wi/d) ^ TO
N. n()MO? 7i(>f7
(jr. nyciov nyuilug
D. 7iju'o> 7i(jitf-l(x
A. n y a o t> nyutluv
, TevXuv
(?roXt yEsch.) ^aXXrf
jy, iraXXswv
P. ot
7i y it oi
t
nyntai nynea
nyuiatv rryixawv
nation;, nyusui 7i(juflai<j
n y a o v $, nyutlg nywtiag
. ix. NUMERALS.
M. (one) F. N. M.(noowe)F. N. M., none.
S. N. tic; fjiu I'v ov5tf<; ovfif-fjlu ovdiv P. ovdii'tg
G. Cl'Of iUtMtf OvSffOS UfdvjIlltC 01/'(5I'WV
D. m ^/
A. tV [iluv
OVUft'l OVuf-LtlfX
ovSinx oii(j^,m'fxi>
ovdsai
ovdivag
Ep. Dor. Ion. Ep.
N. Ins, *i> pin, &
G. /u-'^ii- r,f
D9- -
. tu (*''?> y
A ' v '-
Late. Ion. Late.
Ion.
elioat/uoi, N.
OUdU.fJt.UV
oi>oetfjt,o7f
.'
-ij
M. F. N., *>o.
M. F. N., both.
D. N. A. <5uo, ^i^w
G. D. dvolv, dutiv (Att.) P. D. dual (rare) aptfolr
Ep.
G.
D.
A.
M. F. (</ree) N,
P. N.
G.
I*
A. T(>ft?
Poet.
D.
Ep. Ion.
J/ai, -/, -
d'j/o/;, -o~<ri, di/oitri
$OIOU(, -OL(
M. F. (/our)
N.
T{IT^U
Ion. rifffi^ts, Dor. rirogis and
iEol. and Ep. w/Vt/^if, &c. ; Dat., Ep. and
in late prose, ri^
PARTICIPLES.
2,5
fl 22. x. PARTICIPLES.
1. Present Active.
o (advising)
S. N. ffovhvwv
G. fiovlevovTog
D.
A.
I*. N.
G.
D.
A. fiovkevovvag
D. N.
G.
fiovJitvovoix
fiovfavovarj
fiovfavovaav
{Sovfavovaou
fiovlsvovawv
fiovfovovaa
fiovktvovaaiv
TO
fiovltvov
2. Present Active Contracted.
6 (honoring)
S. N. Tij
G.
D. Ti^UttOVTi, TlflMVTl
A. T//lOJ'Ta, TlfKOVTCt
P. N. TlfilXOVTfS, TtjUWyZf?
G. TlfiaOVTtoV, Tl[A(OVT(OV
D. npaovai,
A.
D.N.
G.
n
Tiftdovaix,
TO
Tipwaa Tifuxov,
TL/J.OJV
rt|UWffat Tt^uaovra, Ttucuvn*
3. Liquid Future Active,
o (about to show) y
TO
S. N.
4. Aorist n. Active
o (having left) %
qp'(u'
qpwvovaa cpavovv
G. qxtvnvvTog cpavovarjg
D. (jparoi/J'Tt
A. cpixvovi'Tn
hnwv
kiTiovxo
JundrTi,
linovaa
cpnvovarj
cpvtvovcfuv
P N. qpvot5rrc (pavovaai cpnvovvra linovTfg Imovacu
G. qpntj'ovvr&jj' qprov(70)v iiTrovrtov AiTtovawv
D. yitroinj( (fHxi'ovvitig hnovai hnovauig
A. (fuvovt'T<*q (pwoiHjfig liniovTag JiiTiovaag
IUHOVTS Jiinovaa
D. N.
G.
(pvoii'T (jpavouaa
<fuyov>'Toiv cpuvuvaair
IITIOVJOIV liTiovaatv
26
TABLES.
5. Aorist i. Active.
6 (having raised) %
S. N. au
G.
D.
A.
P. N. agavTfg
G.
D.
A. u
aguaaiq
D. N. Qttvii
G.
6. At nst Passive.
(having appeared) y
(favtig cpavslaa
tpavevrog
cpavevra
(favsvrsg
(favivnav
(pavelaai
cpavstauv
<paveiaoug
cpavtlatxg
TO
yaviv
(paveiaaiv
7. Perfect Active.
8. Perfect Active Contracted.
o (knowing) 77 TO 6 (standing) j\ TO
S. N. tidwg eifivla tidog iatwg taiwaa kartag,
G. t idoi os tidvtag svTWTog
D. tt<5ort fid via
A. I^O'T tidvlav
P. N. Bidorsg fldvlai ddora taTUTtg kaiwaat
G. sidoTMV
D. fldoai
A flSoTctg
D.N. fldoTS
G fidoTOiv ildvluiv koTtatoiv earuaaiv
fldvlai ddora
eldviMV
fldviixtg kaimat
fldvlug kviwuxg
tlSvia
9. From Verbs in
o (having given)
S. N. dovg
G. ^OVTOff
D. doVTl
A. dovra
P. N. <5oW<?
G. ^OVTOJV
D.
A.
D.N.
G.
dovowv
dova'tg
dovait
dovuuiv
TO o (having entered) y 16
dovan dov
dovui)g
Savoy
dvg
dvvTog
dvvTt
dvvxa
dvvTfg
dvai
dvvrag
dvaa
dvoi]
dinjav
Svaat
dvoaJv
dvaaig
tivaag
dvaa
Svaaiv
fl 23. J PRONOUNS. 27
XL SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS.
[To those forms whicn are used as enclitic, the sign t is affixed. The initials affixed to
dialectic forms denote. JE. JEolic. B. Boeotic. D. Doric. E. Epic, I. Ionic. O. Old,
P. Poetic.]
A. PERSONAL.
1st P. /. 2d P. thou. 3d P. his, her.
S. N. f>' (jtf *
G. l/nov, povi 1 aoyt out
D. ffjoL, poll" ao/t oit
Ai ' '4. -J. c'J.
. f t uB, pit (jfT T
P. N. yptfs i>pdg O($ti$
G. r t p<av 'vpdJv o(f(av
D. r^li
A. i>f
D. N. vot o(/f')
G. VOJV
Homeric Forms.
S. N. lyy, lyu ffv, rtivn
G. ip'io, \p.Cto, \[*.iv, ff'u>\, fftTa, ffiu^, ?at **<>, *^t *9t
ytti?t> ^6^> (TfSfy, T-iar*
D. tftai, (*.ol\ cat, ro/t rtw i~i <"t
A. i^, /Kit "^t *t> **> ^t
P. N. flftlTf, a.f/-u-i( Vftlff) Sftuts
G. vpiuv, riftiicai tift'ituvj vpi'iu* ffQlurf, trQtiuv, ffQeUt
D. ^*?y, vifrtv, Zfjiiv, ufJt.'iv, vfjt.fu(^), vpfjt
^ ^N
D. N. l*r(MMf?) <r^
D. y&J/y ff$eitiV) fftyto* fQuivj
A. vw;, viw fftyut) fffyu fftyu't.\ t fftyu] Or ?^>M'
Additional Forms.
S. N. out, l*> B. TU D., raw B.
TSOU D.
D. ip'n D. r/y D. Frt M., 7y or ?y D.
A. T, T/t D. Fit ^-> 't D - P
P. N. fift'nt I., '^f D. y^sj I., y^tf D. Neut.
G. ' AfAUV D., Kf&ftlUt ^B. LfJLLiial yK.
A. 'a^s D. ' V> ^ D - W D., 2
D. N. vwi B.
28
TABLES.
B. REFLEXIVE.
2d P. M. (of thyself) F.
1st P. M. (of myself) F.
S. G. I,
D.
A. Sftaviov I^UVD]V
P. G. /^ueu' aviutv ijjiuv uviutv v^nav aviuv
I K i](4iv otviotg Tjfitv ctvinlg v^ilv auiolg
A. qpagrnvsovg rjfiag aviag v^iai, uviovg
3d P. M., of himself.
S. G. kdtVTOV, UVTOV
D. euvToj, avito
A. knviov, uinov
P. G. kuviwV) avTwv
D. eaviot?, avrotg
A. UTOV, ttVTOU?
acwi'zoy, ffwi'roy afnvrrjg, ancvrj]g
OtttVTb), OUl'TM OSUVlij,
(IfOtVlOV, OCtl'tOW
UVIOJV
UVTU$
F., of herself.
SUVTTJg,
UVTTjV
VVTUV
avroilg
N., of itself
lavto, avi9
', aviu
New Ionic.
S. G. iftiuvroZ
l^t/
writ
ffluwrou
r!Ai/<rj{
D. Iftiuvru
A. ^l/T
1/J.lbJVTV)
ffiuuru
rtuvrav
c-swi/r
S. G. Uvratf
\uurvs
P. Uvr
tuvru*
D. it/T^
A. it/T0y
tuvrJj
\uwrm
'tvvri
kfMraKn
Uwnlf
tuvretTffi
IUVTU.S \ut
3d P. S. G. cturetura, -as, D. -w, -a, A. ->, -a, -
P. G. aurctvTur, D. -oif, -an, A. -us, -as, -&, Dor.
M. (o/ one another} F.
P. G. a
D.
A.
C. RECIPROCAL.
N. M. N. F.
D. A. aUq'to
P. G. x;.x Dor. xxx<w Dor.
D. aXXaXo/ir/, -oif aXXaXa/<r/, -a.it
G. '
D. G. xx*iX0/r Ep
D. INDEFDJITE.
M. F. N., wcA a one.
S. N. 6, ^, TO ^etya
G. TOl!, T^ff dflVOf
D. TW, 717 3tvt
A. toy, TIJV, TO dtlvu
M.
P. ol
dtittav
TOV?
PRONOUNS.
29
11 24. xn. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
A. DEFINTTB.
Article.
Iterative.
M. (the) F.
N. M. (very, same, se(f) F.
N.
S. N. 6 ri
r > ^
TO ttVlOg fXVTfj
avio
G IV
. TOV trig
3 ~ 1 -
avTov avTrjg
D. TW Tfl
vrw avTrt
A. TOV Tlfv
> 9 3 */
i>. N. ol al
T avTol avTal
avia
G. TWr TCOV
UVTWV aviwv
D. TO?? Talg
ctVTolg avToug
A. TOUJ Tg
> > 3 e.
D.N. T
avTtu avTa
G. TOiV TttTv
CtVTOlV UVTttlv
S. N. ' D.
KVra, D.,
-^ I.
G. ra?a E., ru D. rZs D.
ttvrolo E., -iou I. auras D., -{; I.
D. r D.
alriif I. awra D.,
.i ? I.
A. r D.
> ^ T~\
awray JJ.
, -in, I.
P. N. ra/ E. D. T; E.
D.
G. rawvO.
, ravD. KVTIUI \. awra^vO
., -av D., -tut
I
D. ra7 0. ,>/
., r5;<r/, uvroTffi 0., -ia/o 1 / L atT>5<r<, -wj , -tjja-/ I.
A. r<yj, ray D.
[rj;j I. airsaz;; I. etvrias I.
Relative.
Demonstrative. Posses
live.
M. (who') F. N.
M. (rtfc) F. N.
S. N. oc ^o
O^S ^5 TO^S 1 P. S. )U(
)?
/^i ? r
(r. ov 1)$
Tovds Tr t ads p c
CTOOC
" * I
T^3 Tfids p' yffll
C IC^Sl/^
A. ov T;V
TOVOC TTyt'oe
V r*
P. N. ot tn "a
o'ids aids Tads % ? S. ao'<
>
/^ r r
d. (av <av
TtGl'^e TtOV^S P. v/U
Tf(>0^
D. olg aig
A. ovg ocg
Tota^g Talads J) < ff
rot'afo To5e
bi'CTtQog Ep.
D.N. o" "o
TOl'dfl T(5? 3P. S.S^
Poet.
G. otv lv
Tolvds Talvds P. aap
T00?
Dialectic and Paragogic Forms.
S. N. ?O.
"D.
?j E., c? f D.
G. Ta, aay E.
D. D.
A. '' D.
P. D. jjav, jf E.
V4 \4 I T> T) ' - 7 i - / XV
*ldf Tatf 1 1 . Jr. ufAo;, etfAOf U.,
rtjffoi ' 'etftirtgos D., a^t
&C. a.[x.[*.i<rt(>os JEi.
2 P. S. rs^ D. E.
O., ToTtTOiffl, P. 'iifAOi O., i
5sff K. 3 P. S. las E. D.
P. ,*', 0.
30
TABLES. PRONOUNS.
Demonstrative.
M. (this)
F. N.
M. (so much) F. N.
S.
JST.
QVXOC,
avir] lot/To
ToaovTog
xoaavxrj xoaovxo, xoaovio*
G.
TOVTOV
TaVXIjg
xoaovxov
xoaavxrjg
D.
TOVTM
XOtVTT]
xoaovrca
xoaavxr)
A.
TOVTOV
xavxrjv
XOOOVXOV
xoaamtjv
P.
N.
01)101
aVTUl TUVTU
XOOOVTOL
xoactvxai loauvia
G.
TOVTWV
TOVTWV
TOOOVTWV
xoaovTwv
D.
TOVTOig
xavTctig
xooovToig
xoaavxaig
A.
XOVXOVg
xavxag
Toaovxovg
xoaavxdig
1).
N.
XOVTW
xavia
Toaovxia
xooama
G.
TOVTOIV
xavxaiv
TOOOVTOIV
xoaavxcuv
Paragogic Declension.
S. N.
G.
D.
A.
P. N.
G.
OUTOffl
TOVTOUl
< .<
VTYll
Tavn
Mixed Paragogic Forms.
rat/rayf, r
TUVVOUTOiltj XSIVOUl, TWAlK
rvvvovriai. Adv. ounviri,
rovrcyt rauryi
rourot raurwvi
ourou uurarfi rat/Ti roiovro"n, roictural*,
voffouruvi, txitvuvi, &C.
, wv,
rovravi, &C.
B. INDEFINITE.
Simple Indefinite. Interrogative.
Relative Indefinite.
M. F. (any, some) N. M. F. (who?) N. M. (whoever)
S. N. xlg xl rig xl oaiis
G. xlvog, xov xtvog, xov ovrivog, oxov
D. TtV/, TW T/Vt, TW WTtVi, OTW
F.
N.
o T
A.
xiva
xlva
m
ovxiva
yvxiva
P. N.
riveg Ttv,
xlvsg xlva
oixivfg
alxivfq Tiv, axxa
G.
xivtav [TT
xlvwv
7 f o
(avTtvcav
D.
xial
xlai
oiaTioi) oxoiai
7
A.
Tirag
xlvctq
ovauvag
aaTivag
D.N.
xi vi
rlvs
(axtvt
anvs
G.
xivoiv
xivoiv
7
aivxivoiv
Homeric
Declension of
rift fitt and ortf
-= tffrtf.
S. N.
r} S T}
vif ri
ent
;,
'err.
G.
ria, nu
<rit, nv
crtu, or ria, errtv
D.
ri-*, ru
erte, orttf
A.
rua.
rivet
fclM
** N.
nvii tivaa.
rivif
T/
G.
riur
oriut
D.
orieifi
A.
rivdf
tTlttof
ifff*
D N
mi
U25.J
NUMERALS.
1F 25. B. TABLE OF
I. ADJECTIVES.
1. Cardinal.
Interrog.
Indef.
Rel. Ind.
Dimin.
Augment
Demonst.
UelaU
1 '
4 d'
5 '
6 ^
7
8 n >
9 a/
^f*
10 i'
11 m'
13 !/
14 &
15 ,.'
16 tf '
17 i?
18 ?>
19 i&'
20 x'
21 x'
30 A'
40 '
50 v'
60 '
70 o'
80 ;r'
90 ?
100 Q'
200 a'
300 i'
NUM
v'offai ; Ao many 9
trotroi, a certain number.
ixofot, how many soever.
M^few.
roXXai, many.
r'ofot t so many.
oraiy as many.
fig, ///a, IV, one.
8vo, 8v(*)f two.
rgfig, tgia, three.
?, riaaaga, four.
B, Jive.
&, six.
kmd, seven.
OXTU, eight.
Ivvscn, nine,
dexoc, ten.
tvdsxa, eleven,
dudexa, twelve.
nivTfxaldfxot
exxaldfxa
emaxaldexa
oxicaxaldsxa
evvsaxaldexa
ti'xoGiv eig, fig xal tl'xoot
TQlCtXOVTU
TtaaagaxovTot
evivrjxovTct
IxazoV
2. Ordinal.
vroffros ; which in order f ot,
one of how many 9
oToa-Tos, whichsoever in order.
iXiyoo-rcf, one of few.
iraXXo^raf, one of many t or,
one following many.
JiQUTog t -r),'Or, first.
dfvisQog^Ut-ov, second.
TQiTog,-i],-ov, third.
;, fourth.
- fifth.
txiog, sixth,
tfidoftog, seventh,
oydoog, eighth.
tvaTog, svvaiog, ninth,
dexarog, tenth,
tvdtxarog, eleventh.
8(adtxaiog, twelfth.
TQiaxaidexvtiog
reaaaguxaidtxaTog
exxaidsxarog
emaxatdsxarog
oxTwxaidsxaxog
fWfaxaids'xaiog
flxoaTog
flXOGTOg TT^tUTOff
TQiaxooTog
TtaaagaxooTog
dinxootomoc
TQtaxoaioi
TABLES. NUMERALS.
[1125
400 v'
500 <?'
600 x >
700 y'
800 o>'
900
1,000 ,
2,000 ,/?
10,000 ,t
20,000 ,x
1 00,000 /?
rsiQctxoaioi
ntviaxouioi
h^nxooiot
oxraxo'atoi
evvaxouioi
4.' Multiple.
3. Temporal.
Inter. rtrraTaf ; on what day 9
1. (av&rjufQog, on the same day.) dnXoog, dnlovg, simple, single
2. dsvTtQaiog, on the second day.
3. TfjiTcilog, on the third day.
4. ifTctQTcuog, on the fourth day
5. TiffiTiTalog, on the Jifth day.
6. kxntiog, on the sixth day.
7. tfidopciiog, on the seventh day.
8. oydooilog, on the eighth day.
dinlovg, double.
;, triple.
; t quadruple.
^, quintuple.
;, sextuple,
tnranlovg, septuple,
octuple.
5. Proportional. II. ADVERBS.
Inter.
III. SUBSTAN-
TIVES.
, quantity^
number.
St fewness.
*otu.vr1.a.<nof \ how many votriixis ; how nuiny
fold 9 times ?
Dim. faiyeixis, few times.
Augm. rX> ct*>.a.aiot , many fold. a-aXAax/; , many times.
1. (I'troc, equal.") uriaS, once. (jordc, monad.
2. di7i'f.dotog, twofold, dig, twice. dvdg, (lucid.
3. iQinldviog, threefold. TQIC, thrice. iQidg, triad.
4. Tf.TQctn](.dviog rfiydxig, four times.
5.
6.
7.
8.0
9.
10.
20.
100.
1,000.
10,000.
ttcig
dtxnxig
tixoaaxtg
ixarovidxig
oyduug
ivvitig
dtxdg
flxdg
11 26, 27, 28.
CONJURATION.
C. TABLES OF CONJUGATION
^1 26. i. THE TENSES CLASSIFIED.
I. PRIMARY.
Time. 1- Present. 2. Future.
Relations.
1 Definite. PRESENT.
7 am writing. I shall be writing.
II. SECONDARY.
3. Past.
IMPERFECT.
lYQutfov,
I was writing.
'2. Indefinite.
FUTURE.
AORIST.
*
7 write.
7 shall write.
tyQctifJU)
1 wrote.
3. Complete.
PERFECT.
yey^aqpw,
7 have written.
*
7 shall have written.
PLUPERFECT.
evs^aqpeiv,
7 had written.
I. Actual
INDICATIVE.
7 am writing.
27. n. THE MODES CLASSIFIED.
I. DISTINCT.
A. INTELLECTTVB.
2. Contingent.
. Present. . Past
SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE.
A. Substantive.
INFINITIVE.
TV) tcri/e.
7 may write.
B. VOLITIVB.
IMPERATIVE.
INCORPORATED.
might write
B. Adjective.
PARTICIPLE.
Writing.
2 8. HI. FORMATION OF THE TENSES.
PREFIXES.
TENSES.
Active.
PRESENT,
Augm. IMPERFECT,
FUTURK
FUT. n.,
Augm. AORIST,
Augm. AOR. n.,
Redpl. PERFECT,
Redpl. PERF. n., a.
Augm. Redpl. PLUPERFECT, x
Augm. Redpl. PLUPERF. n., i/
Redpl. FUT. PERF.
, 9
ftt
r*
, r
xot
Middle.
AFFIXES.
tfteii, fteti
eptjr, fttit
Passive.
34 TABLES. [fl 29
IT 29. iv. AFFIXES OF THE
Present.
Imperfect.
md.
S.
Nude.
1 ^
Euphonic.
0)
Nude. Euphonic
v ov
2 f
etf
C C
31 \
Gt(V J
81
w
p
1 niv
0/tf
ftsv o/ucv
2 is
T
T CT6
3 vai(v), aai(v)
ovat(i')
aav O y
D.
1 H"
0/1 V
//fv opev
2 iov
flOV
TOV SlOt
3 iov
flOV
J1]V 111)*
JSubj,
, S.
1
fit)
2
77?
3
'
P.
1
' v
2
3
toot(v)
D.
1
tapsv
3'
1JTOV
IjTOV
Opt.
S.
1 l n v
OlfJ.1
2 lr t g
QIC
3 117
01
P.
1 //,</>', t|Uey
Ol(.ltV
2 /JJTC, ITS
out
O ' ~
OlSV
D.
1 *Vfv, t^uev
OlMV
21 -
ItfTOVf tlOV
0110V
3 tTj'njv, /r^y
OITTJV
Imp. S. 2 v9t, j, a
3 iw iito
P. 2 T . 6T6
o itaoaV) vnav iitaaav^ o;
D. 2 iov Toy
3 TWV
Inf.
MM
.Part. N. yrff, yiffa, y <wv, ot/aa, or
*j. vTog 1 , viaijf oviog , ovoqy
1129
CONJUGATION.
35
\CTIVE VOICE.
Future.
Aorisl.
Perfect. f luperfect.
Ind.
S.
1
aw
oa
x- x-iv, x-i;
2
ang
aas
. xV$ x-ug
3
aft
ot(v)
x-e(v) x-et
P.
1
OOfttV
ouutv
x-afifv x-eifiev
2
a(Te
aT
x-aje x-iiis
3
aovai(v)
aav
x-aai(v) u-eiaav, x-toon>
D.
1
aopsv
aaptv
x-apsv x-sifjiev
2
(jtiov
aaiov
x-aiov x-fixov
3
OttOV
it
x-aiov x-dirv
'Subj.
S.
1
0(0
(x-w)
2
ays
( x ~?/?)
-
3
*9
P.
1
aw^ucv
(x-WfAfv)
2
OlJIt
(x-rjre)
3
o(aoi(v)
(X-MOI-V)
D.
1
aw/icv
(x-w^uev)
2
ajjiov
(x-yrov)
3
orjTOV
(x-7]TOv)
Opt.
S.
1
aoifit
aaifit
(x-oifti)
2
aotg
oaig, atiaq
(x-ot?)
3
aoi
aoti, aa(v)
(x-ot)
P.
1
ooifisv
aaififv
(x-oifisv \
2
aoiis
aaire
(x-OtT)
3
aoisv
aaitv, osiav
(x-oiey)
D.
1
aotpev
aatutv
(x-O//iv)
2
aonov
OttlTOV
(x-OtTOv)
3
(JOITT)V
aaiTijv
(x-ohriv)
Imp.
S.
2
999
(x-e)
3
ao^rw
(x-TO))
P.
2
anrs [TWV
(x-6T)
3
aarwaay, ay-
(x-Twav, x-oi^wy^
D.
2
ffWTOV
(x-eroy)
3
auiwv
(x-h<ov)
Inf.
ativ
aat
x-e'vai
Part.
N.
acov, &c.
a?, aaaa, ay
x-(og t x-vla t x-og
G.
aov-to?
aaj'TO?, aaarjg
X-O'TO?, x-vlag
TABLES.
Ifl s
Ind, S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 1
2
3
Subj. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 1
2
3
Opt. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 1
2
3
Imp. S. 2
3
P. 2
3
D. 2
3
H 3O. v. AFFIXES OF THE
Pres. Imperf. Perf. PI up.
Nude. Euph. Nude. Euph
pw
am, ret
tat,
vtai
10
ITO
ao, o
ao o ov
fT< TO
aou
TUl
ao
TO
so&e o&e ea&s
OVTUt VTO
OVTO
O&OV MI&QV
ta&ov o&ijv eoftyv
MfJUU
n
VTttl 1'TO
a^o>
W fit &Ct
010
OtTO
OtVTO
ov
Inf.
Part.
a^fi)av, oOtar e'a^wantv, iadtav
odov ea&ov
uftwv
a^a*
N.
G.
-TJ, -ov Ojuevoc, -?, -<
fit'tov -n$ Ofiivov, -r]g
(pevoq to)
(ptvo? ft)
(pevoi y
(flfVW CO
(fievog d'rjv)
((twos ffys)
(flfVOS ti'T))
(|U6'Ot i'rjf.tti
(pe'voi d'rjanv)
ao
-o
11 30.]
CONJUGATION.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Fut. Mid Aor. Mid.
Aor. Pass.
Fut. Pass.
tod. S. 1
4
3
a/7, act
afiai
a a)
aro
P.
1
2
3
oops ft a
OtO&8
OOVTCU
ad^if&a
aaa^e
aayro
D.
1
2
3
OBO&OV
oea&ov
oao&ov
Subj. S.
1
2
3
orjTctt
P.
1
2
3
mtfu&a
ayo&s
OWVTOtl
D.
1
2
3
oyo&ov
OTJO&OV
Opt. S.
1
2
3
0010
OOtTO
oalpijv
oaio
aairo
P.
1
2
3
ooipf&a
OOlO&S
OOIVTO
oaia&s
OttlVTO
D.
1
2
3
oolps&a
ooio&ov
aolo&rjv
oalfis&a
oaio&ov
Imp. S.
2
3
oat
ado&w
P.
2
3
oao&s
ado&waav,
ado&wv
D.
2
3
onadov
oda&aiv
Inf.
ofo&ai
aaa&at
Part.
N.
G.
oopsvog
Qopivov
occpfvog
anf-ifvOV
&-1QOOITO
&-1JT8
88
TABLES.
11131.
s !
JS
n i! 4 iid
**
UetiE til
AJBIUIJJ
-* *^ " >8 *
2%j^"^^ ^2S5
|._I_2_UJ 5.^^
i
8AllBJ9dlUJ
^b bb bbsrk
XjBpU009g
* ~ X
>-T ^ '8
*.O* *" fe
i:^ieV i? 1
'^JBUUJJ
llli,! in
H Pfl H '9AISSBJ 109JJ8J pUB ISUO^
npa
a S 2 \ ' S IPPIIM P UB 9A nV Jsuoy
V*
3~<j* -9AI10V 108JJ9J
aaninj puB 1U8S8JJ
'^
v*-^ v^x
' 8 IPP!W P UB 8A!ioy asuoy
sjLLJLJLJ iJ_i
-9Jmn j pUB 1U8S8JJ
SSSSS5 S_S_S
8AIS8BJ ISUOy
g Q 'irl- ui sqJSA J aAiaoy
555555 555
| ;r/- ui Bqaa A jo gjppUM
1 -BAUONnfans
8A ssBj '-jjgdnij pus '-jaaj '-joy
P J 8An V 108 -> J9dn W
3 3 S 3 3 V 333
9AUOy 109JJ8J
' 9 IPP!IAI P UB 9^poy isuoy
,*?*.* H.H.M,
8AI6SBJ l09JJ8dnjJ pUB 109JJ9J
OAissBj ojninj
bbbbbb bVsbbb
?????? I f I f f
9AISBBJ JKIJuy
4^44^7 77777
>8 TPP!W pUB9Aiioy 'isuoy PUB gjninj
riTiv; rrr^i
eo - eo -"Weo ,;
1f 32. j
CONJ7GATION.
JH ~* S gJ
s * ? -.*'
JF
e .
o s
tir
^ -8 8
u
~ s
11
C 2
3 xw ^-
fc- ****
i
!
v S
*
4
S
M
s^ 1 - 1 i
*i it
-4-
i
" i, =r . a * l i 'i T* . C
8 ,y =r-
.f k i ii*,.
a ^'
y. ""
^ S
K a
<< <
b ^ <
g 8 3
i* $
^li
8 I 'I
*
I
.
Q W
w
i
il
r h
v. (8 '8
1
^
*"
f
s^
a f* si ,s if 4 4
fl-Sd
?
^
S
S 3
E
fe ?
-
8 ^*
^
C
i
1
. > -f
S S> s" jj ^
5* . 2 8 v> 2 * .
$J -J %
S- 8 S j-Q
^
*' S^ T N 8 * b
5- o ca. ^v
' ^1=3 . 5s>.
JT *-. - ^ <^
o.
W
' s ~
40
TABLES.
[1188
I 33. vin. THE ACTIVE VOICE OF THE
Ind. S. 1 /
2 Thou, You
3 He, She, It
Present.
D. 1 We two
2 You two
3 They two
Imp. S. 2 Do thou
P. 2 7>o yoM
3 Let them
D. 2 Do you two
3 JLel them two
Infinitive,
planned.
^ be planning,
" or plan.
To be planning,
or
To plan.
Imperfect.
P. 1 We
am planning,
was planning
2 F, FOM
or
or
3 They
plan.
planned.
D.I ratoo
2 FOM two
~~
3 TAy too
Subj.S. 1 1
2 7%0M, FOM
3 He, She, It
P. 1 We
may plan,
2 F, FOM
can plan,
3 They
D. 1 We too
> or
plan.
2 FOM too
3 They two
Opt. S. 1 7
2 TYioM, FOM
3 He, She, It
P. 1 We
might plan,
should plan,
2 Fc, FOM
fl Thru
would plan,
could plan,
Participle,
Planning.
1133.]
CONJUGATTON.
4)
VERB fiovXeva (H 34) TRANSLATED.
Future. Aoriat, Perfect Pluperfect
planned,
shall plan, have planned,
or had planned,
will plan. or
plan. *
have planned, had planned
may plan,
may have planned,
can plan,
can have planned,
plan, or have planned.
might plan,
might have planned,
should plan,
should plan, should have planned,
or would plan,
would plan. would have planned,
could plan,
could have planned,
plan, or have planned,
plan, or have planned.
To be about To plan, or m i i
to plan. To have planned. T have P lanned -
About to plan. \
Having planned
42 TABLES. Lfl 34
ix. ACTIVE VOICE OF THE
Present Imperfect. Future.
Ind. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3 ftovJ*.vovfft tfiovksvov fiovktvtiovai
D. 2
3
Subj. S. I
2 @ovlevi]$
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
Opt. S. 1
- _ . ,
2 SovAsvoif povJisvaoi^
3
P. I
2 fiovfavout
3 ffovltitoifv fiovfavaouv
D. 2
3
Imp. S. 2 povltve
3
P. 2
3
D. 2
3
Infin. /Jot/iet'ft> ftovJitvaeiv
Part. ftovleviov /JovAevawx
REGULAK CONJUGATION.
43
REGULAR VERB
AoriiL
efiovktvaav
fiovltvaaitv,
fiovlfvaatTov
la, to plan, to counsel.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
fitfiovfovxars
e fit {So v A e vx eta v,
14 TABLES. 111 35.
H 35. x. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES OP
(In the Middle Voica
Present Imperfect. Future Mid.
Ind S. 1 povktvouai
2
3
P. 1
2 fiovltvsa&s
3
D. 2
3
Subj. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2 @ov)ivi)a&ov
Opt. S. 1 povltvoii
2 fiovlevoio
3
P. 1
2 fiovktvota&e
3
D. 2
3
Imp. S. 2 fiovlevov
3 (Jovlivta&a)
P. 2
3
D. 2 {Sovltviadov
3
Infill.
Part.
Povlsvaoio
Povjisvaoiro
Povlsvtwtrio
i; 35.]
RKGULAK CONJUGATION.
45
THE REGULAR VERB /SowUtfo, to plan, to counsel.
to deliberate, to resolve.}
Aorist Mid. Perfect. Pluperfect.
jSovhvowficn
ftovlewty
ftovfavarja&s
fiovfavaaio
Povtevaaiio
/5ouAcvaa///f#
flovfavaawro
fiovfavaaia&ov
fiovfavaai
Povfavada&wv
fiovktvaua&tav
{Sovlievaaa&ai,
fiefiovkeva&s
fiffiovJievao
/5e/?o i/A t va & w aai',
jSefiovlitva&ai
46 TABLES. [fl 35
TABLE x. COMPLETED.
Aorist Fas*. Future Pass.
Ind. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
Subj. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D 2
Opt. S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
Imp. S. 2
3
P. 2
3
D. 2
3
Infin.
Part
1136.1
MUTE VERBb.
47
H 36. xi. (A.) MUTE VERBS.
1. JT^dcpo, to write.
ACTIVE VOICE.
LABIAL.
Present.
Future.
Aorist.
Perfect
Ind. ygdyu*
yqdyw
tygaya
ysyqaqxx
Subj. ygdcpto
ygdyw
Opt. yQUCpoi^t
ygdyotfti
yQayiaipi
Imp. ygdcps
ygdyov
Inf. ygdcpsiv
yQatfjftv
ygdyai
yfygacptvoti,
Part, yydcpwv
ygdyav
ygdyas
yfyyttqxag
Imperfect.
Pluperfect.
Ind. jfacupow
*y*yuw*iv
Present.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Future Mid. Aorist Mid.
3 Future.
Ind.
Imperfect. 2 Aor. Pass.
Opt.
Imp. yodffov
Inf.
Part.
Ind.
St.bj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
2 Put. Pass.
yQu<pnr,v
Imp.
PERFECT, Ind.
S. 1
2
3 yiyQctmai
P. 1 yfyQdnpt&a
2 yiyQce(p&e
ytygawwo^
D. 2 yiyqttcf&ov yiyqaff&ov
3 ytygdcp&fov
ytygdcpda
yfygdcf&Mactv,
Inf.
yfygdcp&tti
Part
PLOFXRFKCT.
tfifjeroi,
[rjauv
TABLES.
Iff 37
ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
H 37. LABIAL. 2. Adita, to leave.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present. Imperfect. Future. 2 Perfect. 2 Pluperfect.
At/Tib) 1
Af/TIOl/U
Aftzce
ItlTlflV
kdnuv
lad.
t^LHOV
Ihntq
thne
Subj.
A/7IW
Imp.
ikmov
Ac/y/ot^u
Afi/y/ftv
Aay/wv
AoRIST II.
Opt.
A/7IOf^t
A/TIO<
A/TIOt AlTTfTCt)
Unoifiev
UTCOITS
Unoitv
A/TTOtTOV A/TfIOV
AtTTO/TTJl'
Inf.
Part.
JiiTtovaa
', A/7TOVTWJ' AiTTOV
AiTIOVTO^
Present.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Future Mid. Perfect
Aorist Pass.
Inf.
Part.
Ind.
8. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
AfiTiojueyo?
Imperfect.
iJLfinourjV
Ind.
3 Future.
Pluperfect.
Future Pass.
Subj.
AOKIST II. MIDDLE.
Opt Imp.
Inf.
iUnov
&C7IETO
A/71)/
Jilnijtitt
hnov
Part.
2lnoip
A/Tiotro
At7io//ueda
^A/7rfa^e A/7i)ja^e JiliToia&e JilnHj&e
fVtnovo Mntaviai llnoivio hnia&Maav, \miadtav
t'JiimaVov Unija&ov Mnoiadov Unsadov
ImoioOqv lintaduv
11 38. J MUTE VERBS. 4!
11 88. ii. PALATAL. Ilgdaao or ngdiio^ to do.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present. Future. Aorist. 1 Perfect. 2 Perfect
Ind. Trpauaw, ngnnm ngd^oj SvMrfa nenQ&xct nenqixya
Subj TT^tttfOO), TlQCtTHt) 7l()a$M
Opt. ngdaaotfAt, nQHTioipi nQa^oif^i nffd^at^t
Imp. nynaof) Tisane n^tx^ov [rt [v<
Inf. TToduufiv, noixTJfiv nydl-fiv nou^iti nfTiotx^s- ntTtoixvi-
Part.
Imperfect. 1 Pluperfect. 2 Pluf-Tfect
7i(>aaffoi' > tngairov ensngaxeiv inenQaynt
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present. Imperfect. Future Mid.
Ind.
Suhj. TlQCX
Opt.
Imp. nod
Inf.
Part.
Aorist Mid. Aorist Pass. Future Pass. S Future.
Ind.
Suhj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf. 7i()d!;<xa&ai nonx&rirai nort%&r}(}F(j&ni
Part.
PERFECT. PLUPERFECT.
Ind. Imp. Inf.
S. 1
2
3 TieTTQaxToel nfngdx&a Part.
P. 1 TifTTQdyftf&a nsngayfiivog
3 TifTiQaypevot nFTiQdxftwanv, ntTtQctynevot
[ttal
D 2
50
TABLES.
[1139.
H 39. iii. LINGUAL. 1. Heida, to persuade.
(2 Perfect, to trust ; Middle and Passive, to believe, to obey.)
ACTIVE VOICE.
Pre&eiit Future. 1 Aorist 2 Aorist 1 Perfect. 2 Perfect
Ind. neldta ni'usot intiua smdov nintixu,
Subj. ml&(a nflaoi
Opt. ntifJuifAi ntLooi^it, 711101*1^1 nl
Imp. nti&e nfluov
Inf. iitl&uv utiuiLV Tiiloai nidiiv ntnfiy.trui
Part, ntltiuv niiauv ntiouf m&tov ntntiK&s
Imperfect 1 Pluperfect. 2 Pluperfect
Imperfect.
Ind.
3. 1
%
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
PERFBCT.
Imp.
TlkJlltUO
ntJitiuitta
[uol
nintia&ov
nentlo&uv
Inf.
Part
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present Future Mid. 2 Aor. Mid. Aorist Pass. Future Pass.
Ind. nil&oput.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp. ntl&ou nidov
Inf. nel&sa&ai ntioea&cti
Part.
PLUPERFECT.
inenuuo
ntneiouevoi
tntniia&qr
MUTH VKKHS.
1 4O. 2. Koptfa,
(Middle, to receive.)
ACTIVE VOICK.
Present.
Future.
Iiiil
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
Aorist.
ixoftiaa
Perfect
xopaeiv
xofinjiti^i
xofitaov
xo/j/aat
imperfect,
xExofiixtug
Pluperfect.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
I nip.
Inf.
Part.
Ind
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
S. 1
O
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present. Future Mid. Aorist Mid. Aorist Pass.
XOfllOO^ttl
XOfJl'^OV
XOftl^OfJ
Imperfect
xopivai
xofj.lata&oti
Perfect. Pluperfect.
xofiiio&rjTt
xopia&rjvai
Future Pass.
ACTIVK.
ATTIC FUTURE.
Inf.
Part.
3 XOI.IIU
P. 1 XOftlOVfttV XOftlMV
2 xouiflrs xo/jiovaa
3 y.o/jiovai xo^iuvv
Ind.
OjU/oi
XO^JLlfl
MIDDLE,
Inf.
Part.
D. 2
xopiovvtog
jtofuovrfoi
TABLES.
11 4 I. xn. (B.) LIQUID VERBS,
1. '^///f'AAtt, to announce.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present. Imperfect. 2 Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect
r]yytkov
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
Ind.
a i > . .
1 (xyyfAw
2 nyytkiig
P. I a//f
2
3
D. 2
3
ayyikutv
FUTURE.
Opt.
Inf.
ayyiktlv
Part.
(tyyfJiov
uyyfloiif,
txyydoltv
Ind.
Subj.
AORIST L
Opt.
1
Imp.
uyytilov
3 yyytifo ayytllr) ayyttkai, (xyyilktif uyyfiluia)
'
P. 1 Tiyyellaiitv ayyfikwptv
2 ^yyflJiart ayyfttrjie ayyfl^nirt ttyytllart
3 yyyidav ayyittuai ayytt\aitv, uyyilldav ayytikuTtO(fnv,
nyynlnvTwv
D. 2 riyytthnrov ayyfttrjTOV otyytl\nirnv ttyyfl\nrov
3 yyyeildTrjv ayyfdairrjv txyyttltxjQJV
Inf. uyyilJiat. Part. ayy(lluc,-daa,'av G.-j'io?,-(;ijj.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present 2 Aor. Mid. 1 Aor. Pass. 2 Aor. Pro
Ind. ctyyiHofjicu rjyyfJiofiijv r)yyk^.9"i]v
Silbj. uyyM.Mf^nt otyytltofAtti ctyyfkddJ
Opt. ayyfMolpriv ayyeJiolfjirjv ayytldflrjv
Imp. ayytMov ayyeJiov (xyyelftyii
Inf. dtyytMico&ai ayytleadoti ayyfK&rivcu
Part. o^/eUd/ueyoc uyyiloptvug ayytldtlg
Imperfect
LIQUID VERBS,
1 Future.
2 Future.
Ind.
Ind.
Opt.
Inf.
Part.
S. 1
2
3
P. I
2
3
D. 2
3
Ind.
S. 1 r t yyn)(.n^r t v
2 ijyytllto
3 i,yyfi3iuro
P. 1 riyyfda/ut&a a
2 r^ (1 -"-
3
FUTURE MIDDLE.
Opt. Inf.
Part
/yfkoi
/yfkoi
>* , /'
ayytAovfjfvov
AORIST I. MIDDLE.
Subj. Opt.
Imp.
.
nyytL\tj'cni
nyytuniaftt
D 2 fjyyfllaoSov
3 i
rtyytilaatiov
Inf. ot
Ind.
Si "
I riyyt^^tm
3 r^y/f^tnt,
P. I riyy&(jit&a
PERFECT.
Imp.
Part.
Inf.
PLUPERFECT.
Part.
3 rjyyskpsvoi flat yy
rjaav
I). 2
3
51
TABLES.
42.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
5 42. LIQUID. 2. <Paiva, to show.
(2 Perf. and Middle, to apjKttr.)
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present. Future. Aorist. 1 Perfect 2 Perfect
(fxxi'raj (pavo) icprjra ntcpayxa nicpyvct
, (ffXVOl1]V qp
2 Pluperfect
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
o
3
n 2
3
qxxivi (jprjvov
tpalrfiv (pnvuv (fi t vixi
(prxliwv
Imperfect
tifMlVOV
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present Imperfect. Future Mid. Aorist Mid.
(farovfjtxi
<f>aroi[j.r l v
Cpotvov
1 Aor. Pass. 2 A or. Pass. 1 Fut. Pass.
i(f>av&r]V ((fui'ij
qpMVu/w qpotrai
(pav&elijv
(fav&ijvai
2 Fut Pass.
(fixvriao[ivu.
Ind.
TTfCpfta/jai
PERFECT.
Imp.
Inf.
Part
7r/qpi'#
7if(fuo^froi fiat Jifqifxvdwanv,
tntcpav&e
niynvdov nftpav&ov
tut yard ov
U 43.]
DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS.
55
H 43. xni. (C.) DOUBLE CONSONANT VERBS.
1. ^4vjo or avgdva, to increase.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Present. Future. Aorist. Perfect.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part. av$b)v,
Imperfect
Pluperfect
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part,
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
I rnp.
Part.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Present Future Mid. Aorist Mid.
Imperfect.
VjvSofirn', rjv:
Perfect. Pluperfect. Aorist Pass.
Future Pass.
P.
44. 2. Perfect Passive of xdpjtia, to bend,
and fAf/^w, to convict.
Indicative. Imperative.
), &-C.
Infinitive.
Participle.
[flat
D. 2 x'x/)r#o'
56
TABLES.
[1145
H 45. xiv. (D.) PURE VERBS, i. CONTRACT
1. 7'mao, to honor.
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT IND.
S. 1 rliiddl, TlflM
2 -u^utHc,
3 u in* ft,
P. I TI/JKO/JEV,
2 Ti^utrf,
3 ttfiaovut,
D. 2 Tltd
nuaif
T1//MTOV
hi\u(t
IMPERFECT.
S. 1 (Ttfjctov,
2
3
P. 1 erifjnofitv t
2 tTtdne,
3 fii
D. 2
3
PRESKNT IMP.
S. 2 rififtt,
3
P. 2
3 Ti
iiip.aiov
Future.
D. 2 . /j(ifjov,
3
Tnd.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part
Aorist.
ttlti,^ it
PRESENT SCBJ.
t<i(o, upta
nuatov
PRESENT On.
PRESENT INF.
ir, rif
PRESENT PART.
G. rifidovjoe,
Perfect Pluperfect
IfJlflTjXttf
1J45.J
CONTRACT VERR*.
57
S. 1
2
M.DDLB AND PASSIVE VOICES.
PRESENT SUBJ.
nftttfuu
3 TlLUXfTUl,
P. 1 TlflOtOfAf&O
2 Tipdta&t,
3
D. 2
PRESENT IND.
*'/
T</m
IMPERFECT.
S. 1 Tlfia6[A1]V,
2 itipdov,
3 srtfidfjo,
P. 1 eTt^ixofif&t
2 fiifidiotif,
3 f
D. 2
3
fTlflOJ
Future Mid. Aorist Mid.
PRESENT IMP.
S. 2 TlfjdoV, TlfJto
3
P. 2
3
Ttpaeadtov, Ti(Ad<f&tov
D. 2 Tl(JiUf(J&OV,
3 rt/7 (xea&ait',
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
Ind.
Opt.
Inf.
Part.
3 Future.
, Tipaa&ov
PRESENT OPT.
llfUXOW,
TtfAtoO
T/jUWTO
TlfAMU&OV
PRESENT INF.
PRESENT PART.
roc t
Perfect.
Aorist Paw.
Pluperfect.
Future Pass
TABLES.
H 4G. CONTRACT. 2.
F J
2
3
i |
2
3
D. 2
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT IND. PRESENT SDBJ.
0), qriAfu (fi)~EM,
9 tie tie
IMPERFECT.
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2 f(fdetie,
D. 2 eydssrov,
3
s. 2
3
P. 2
3
D. 2
;
Future.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf. (fil.t'ttruv
Part.
PRESENT OPT.
(ptlciifii,
cpdiottov,
iiTTjv, cptkoiiqv,
PRESENT IMP.
PRESENT INF.
tv y cpdfiv
PRESENT PART.
Aorist.
f'n i /.>,<> if
G.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
1146.1
CONTRACT VERBS.
59
PRESENT LVD.
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3 (fikfovrai, (pdovvrai
D. 2 ydkw&or,
IMPERFECT.
S. 1 tcpdsout)
3 <JD/ATO,
P. 1 fa
2
3
D. 2
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES
PRESENT SUBT.
ftplloVVTO
Future Mid. Aorist Mid. Perfect.
PRESENT IMP.
S. 2 (pdsov, cptXov
3
P. 2
3 ,
qp/Af e'ox^on', qptAfta^wv
D. 2 cpilita&ov, (pifa'la&or
3
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part
Ind.
Opt.
Inf.
Part.
PRESENT OPT.
(piteoio,
PRESENT INF.
PRESENT PART.
Aorist Pas*.
3 Future.
TTfcplJirjao
nHptlriftsvoe
Pluperfect. Future Pass.
60 TABLES. [fl 47.
H 47. CONTRACT. 3. //7/Aoo, /o manifest.
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT IND. PRESENT SUBJ.
S. 1 <5?jAoi), (5/;Aw
2 <5ryAofj, (Jj/Aotg
3 <5>/Aoa, <5fyAol
P 1 ^TyAoOjUfV,
2 (Ji/AofTf,
3 (5jAdoi>a<,
D 2 difionov, drjkvvtov
IMPERFECT. PRESENT OPT.
S. 1 dq)ioov t fdyjiovv Sr^ootfii, <5/yAo?^ut, Stfiofyv
3 ^(5/jAof, t5r/Aou
P. 1
o
fdrjkoviov drjloonov, dr^o'truv,
PRESENT IMP. PRESENT INF.
S. 2 JryAof, . f
3 djjAof'rw, (5/yAou/w PRESENT PART.
(Ji;Aotr<wov, (J;Ao'ofaa, dqlovoa
<JjAouiTwy (J/iAooy, dri^ovv
D. 2 ^r/AoTo> / , <5;AouTov G.
3
Future. Aorist Perfect Pluperfect.
I lid.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf. 8rj).(i')(jf.:9
Part.
H 47.)
CONTRACT VERBS.
6l
MIDDLE AND PASMVI-: VOITF.S.
PRESENT IND.
S. 1 i^tf^oo^tui,
2 fyAo'/,,
3 Si^otrcu,
P. 1 dijkoofjtOa, dt))(.ovfi&ct
2 dqloea&e, drjAoi'o&s
D. 2 <57jAoEa#o', dykova&ov
IMPERFECT.
2 f'di,)i6ov, fdijlov
3 *'<?;, >.OffO, tdfjkolllO
2 edi)i.6ta&s,
3 t<J> y Adoi'To,
D. 2 fdrjlioto&ov, fdrjkova&ov
3 l(5ryiofa^7jv,
S. 2
3
P. 2
3
D. 2 fir]l.oi(jdov, drjlova&ov
3 8^0 tad (av, drjlova&wv
PRESENT IMP.
ou, <5//Aou
Future Mid. Aorist Mid.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
3 Future.
Ind.
Opt.
Inf.
Part. dtdr t }.(a<j6[ttvo$
PRESENT SUBJ.
d'/yX.O/
PRESENT OPT.
dr^ooia&ov, drjldtafiov
loiatirjv, di
PRESENT INF.
PRESENT PART.
Perfect.
Aorist Pass.
Pluperfect Future Pass.
TABLES. [<] 48,
H 48. PURE VERBS, ii. VERBS IN -pi.
1. "IcrtTjpi, to place, to station.
(2 Aor., Perf., Plup., and 3 Put., to stand.)
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt Imp.
S. 1 !'(
2 '*(
3 l(
P. 1 ie
2 tOTT
3 lajaat larwat tara^aa*',
D. 2 laiaTov iarijTov laralijTor,
laTait]irjv, ioraiTijv
Inf. iardvat Part. loTttg,-a(ju t -av
IMPERFECT.
S. 1 'lOTIjV P. 'ioTOtfjlfV D.
2 itfTTff J(7TTf rffTaTOV
3
AORIST II.
Ind. Subj Opt. Imp. Inf.
S 1 tor//*' <;TO; viuirjv arijri
2 t?jrr?; <^^//? otntrjg arr^i (at)
3 tar?; UT] oralr) OTIJTW Part.
P. 1 tairintv orco^tfv oTtt/j^fy, arulfitv oitiq
2 e</T^T 0r?]re arw^r?, aralrf
3 tctTijuav arwoi aTfjtirjaav, ofinfv
D. 2 '0T7JT01> OTIJTOV (7T/7JTO', aitTOV
3
Future. 1 Aoriat Perfect. Pluperfect S Fufuie.
Ind. arrjoo) iUTt]<!(X tOTrjxa
Subj. arr/ao)
Opt. oryaoif*
Imp.
Inf. aTTjaftv
Part.
^1 48 ] VERBS IN -fit. 63
PKRFKCT IT. PLUPERF. II.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf.
S. 1 * ttnui kaTixiijv karnvnt #
2 * * ktna!i]g tina&t, *
3 # # kaiulrj kaiMTw Part. #
P. 1 "(trttfitv kuTWfi-sv &-C.
2 I'omre
3 ktnaai karoHJi &/C. IJTW^, eaio?
D. 2 farTov * laroiro? tarmov
3
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf.
S. 1 IV
2 iuTttou *'**/? I'orcxio IVmao, taro)
3 iVjTTat lai^rat laratTO laTji9tu Part.
P. 1 lauififdct laiMinf&at, latcdf^f&ci
2
3 'unavrai i<jT<anai liaraivro
D. 2 laiaa&ov iaTyaftov laraiaftov iarua&ov
3
IMPERFECT
S. 1 inrdfjrjv P. tar|Uf^ D
2 i'aT(/o, tcTTW %mito&t
3 I'tfTttTO l(/T1'TO
Fut. Mid. ar^aouni. Aor. Mid. larrjad^v. Perf. etnctftai.
Pluperf. iarccjii}!/. 3 Fut. Mid. gar^lo/icu. Aor. Pass.
Fut. Pass.
T 49. 2. THE SECOND AORIST ngt.aa&a.i,tobuy.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf.
Si j ' ' '
J (TlOUXUIjV 71OHOUVU TlQlCl.LU.1p>
2 CTlOLb) TlQlt] TlOiUlO TIOU'QO, TIQIW
3 fTtolnro "n^'ir\ini TIQIMITO TiQicttf&w Part.
P. 1
2
3
D. 2 tTTQtnadov notrj<j&ov TiQinia&ov TJQU
3
64
TABLES.
[lisa
5O. VERBS IN-UI. 3. 7Y#?^u, to put.
ACT1VB VOICE.
PRESENT.
Subj.
Ttt/U)
Ind.
S. 1 rUh t i>
2 Ti&r t g
3 rldr t u
P. I Tl&ffltV rt&OlfJfV
2 T/#*T
3
Opt.
Imp.
c, Tl&f'ifJf
TtdsTditJCtV,
D. 2 rt&nov Ti&rjTov
3
c, u&flrov
fl&tTOJV
Inf.
Part.
S. 1 til&rjv, irl&ow P. hl^ffifv
M tTl&l'IQ,
3 f J T/^u,
AORIST I.
IMPERFECT.
hl^fft
f rid us
AORIST II.
D.
Ind. Subj.
Ind.
S. 1
2 r/>,;
3 r^ij
p. i f'#ij
2 i Dottle
3 l&lfXUV idlOUV
D. 2 t^fTOV
3 ti}iTi]V
A OR. II. Inf. ^Iv t . Part.
Opt
Imp.
& fit) per,
Future.
Ind.
Opt.
Inf.
Part.
Perfect
TiMnxtt
', &t7rov
Ifliijv \)ero>v
, &kv' G. ^Wo?, del
Pluperfect
5J 50.] VERBS IN -//{.
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt
Si ,
I tiut^ni
2 ildtaui, tidy
3 Tidtrai
P 1 ndffifda
2 ildtade
3 ildfviai
D. 2 rldtadov
3
65
ndfjiat
TldtlTO, TldotCO
n, Tiddly f da
ndr t adov
rldiivio,
Tf'dflijdoV,
, rldov
Imp.
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2 Ttdtads
3 Tidsadajactv,
D. 2 rldtadov
3
Inf.
rititadat
Part.
, TtdoiodljV
IMPERFECT.
tiidsfirjV
>, hldov
(T id t [ltd 01
erldeads
fridtfTO
trldfadov
ertdtadyv
dr,i:at
Ind.
S. 1
2 i'tfow
3 E^JTO
P. 1 t&iptda
2 tdfade
3 fdfVTO
D. 2 tdtadov dyadov
3 edsadyv
AORIST II. MIDDLE.
Subj. Opt
Imp.
^ov
dilTO
dflpsd
dnadt
Inf.
dt'adat
Part.
Fut. Mid.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part.
Aor. Pass. Fut. Pass.
T(d<
diade
diodwaar, deodwv
diadov
Pluperfect
TtdrjTl
tfdrjvui
Perfect.
rid n (4 at,
tidtioo
rfdtiadai,
66
TABLES.
IT 51. VERBS IN-[AI. 4. 4t8ca(.u 9 to give.
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT.
Ind.
B. 1
2
3 dlduai
P. 1 dt'doiJtv
2 5/5ore
3 dtdouai,
diduvai
D. 2 5/5oTOi'
3
Inf. didorai.
Subj.
5i5w
Opt.
Sidotrjv
Imp.
dtdov
dlShl/ilfV
diduiu
didurov
v, 8 idol ft fv
dtdolrjaav, didolfv
5/<5oT
didoiwoav,
didorrwv
dl'SoTOV
didorwv
fdtdovv
fdldovg
tdldov
AORIST I.
Ind.
Ind.
di8nvg,-ov<j(x,-6v' G.
IMPERFECT.
P. fd'dofttv
fdidoanv
AORIST II.
Subj. Opt.
5e
5ciV
D.
IdldoTOV
Imp.
S. 1 ti
2
3
P. I
2 tf
3 i'duxav
D 2
3
AOR. II. Inf. dovrni. PTrt. dove, dovoa, 5ov* G. 5ovro?. Sovorjf.
Future. Perfect. Pluperfect.
Ind.
Opt.
Inf.
P;irt.
i'dme dont
tdooixv Suiai
e'5orov 5(urov
5oc
5()TW
>', doi{ifv
5o/JT, 5otTf 5oTF
dolyvnv, doiev
dovTotv
M, 5ofTO' 86lOV
', SotTljV 5oTO>V
5} 51.] VERBS IN -fit. 67
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt Imp.
2 didoaou Sidy dldoio dlSoao,3i'dov
3
P. 1
2
3
\J a
dldoa&f
Sidovtui
dido)o&t
didoia&e
dldoivro
n. 2
3
S. 1
2
3
<5t'(5oa3o'
Inf.
dtdwo&ov
didoa&ov
didoa&uv
Part. did6i*tvo$.
IMPERFECT.
D.
fdidnao, fdldov
edldojo
P. 'tditiopt&a
fdldoa&e
fdiSorTO
AORIST II. MIDDLE.
cdidoa&ov
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
S 1 fdo^rjv
9fuu
duiprjv
ftoif&ai
2 tdov
dtp
dolo
5ov
3 tdoro
danni
dolio
^oa^oi
Part.
P. 1 lUOUt:$tt
dupi&a
dnlps&a
doftwot
2 tdoa&t
#(/#
dolu&e
floats
3 fdovro
^olvTai
Soll'TO
doa&waar, doadtav
D. 2 tdoafov
5oii(T^OV
dola&ov
doa&ov
3 fdoaPnv
dolaftitv
doa&wv
Put Mid.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp
Inf.
Purl.
Aor. Pass. Put. Pass.
edo&yv do&yuopmi
dotiw
doOtirjv
Perfect. Pluperfect.
d(BOf(j&ai do&rji'ai
jq fio&flg
68
TABLES.
IT
VERBS IN -fit. 5.
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT.
Ind.
S. 1 Siixi'VH
2 dflxvvf
3
P. 1
2
3 <5axvi'<jt,
(5eixiiat
D. 2 dtixvuiov
3
Inf.
Subj.
Itixrvtj
Opt.
dtixvvoi
8ftXVVOHJl
8fixi'vr t Tov
8tlXI VOltV
8ftxrvoiTOV
[1152
to show.
Imp.
dfixrv
dtixi'VTto
dflXVVTf
dfixvviwonv,
Part, dtixrvst-iujtx^vv
IMPERFECT.
iS. 1 (delxvvv, tdfixvvov
2 edtlxvvc, &tixvvtf
3 idttxvv, idilxtve
Future
P. tdflxvvfisv
f'dtlxrvts
(Stlxvvaav
Aorist
D.
tfalxvviov
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt.
2 fWxrro'Mt dttxrvt] dfixriioio
3 bf-r/.i'vuu dfixrvrfini dtixvvotio
P. 1 8fixvi>iJt&a dfixvv(t)^ttOn dnxvvoi{jfftt
2 8n'.xt'imtti 8eixi'vr)<itie 8nxvvoioftt
3 8tixvvt'iai
Imp.
dstxrvao
D 2 fc/yw#o
3
Inf. 8(lxvva9at.
8fixvvoia&ov
8nxvvoiu&i]v
Part. 8tixri'fin'og.
<5f/XI'|)(7#f
duxfini fia
8tixi'vu\)
Stixrvatiov
SI
2 tdflxvvao
3 edtixvvio
Fiit. Mid. 5
Plupcrf.
IMPERFECT.
P. tdtutvvuttim
D.
tftflxwodov
fdtlxvvvio
. Aor. Mid. tfriSn/uq?. Perf.
Aor. Pnss. tftn'zfti t v. Fut. P;i?s.
1! 53.
VERBS IN -
H 53. 6. typi, to say.
PRESENT.
Ind.
S. 1 wpi,
2 (f^ (
O flpT^tft
P. 1
2
3
D. 2 qptxrov
3
s i r.j
O "
3 fylf,
Subj.
Opt.
(fljf
Imp.
q>t*3i
<pai(o
(jprtTC
Inf.
Cfnivak
Part.
cpulfv
fptxirjTOv,
IMPERFECT.
P. ?(jp(UV
(farov
(fUTOJV
D.
ecpnrov
i) efpaaav
SYNOPSIS OF ASSOCIATED FORMS.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Imperfect. Future.
Prevent.
(fif/(f/61
cpuaxui
Ind.
Subj,
Opt.
Imp.
Inf. cpnvat, cpnaxftv
Part. <jp, (jpaaxwv
1 Aorist.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt.
Imp.
Inf.
Part
tipuaxov
, IQHV
t()WV
Z.
2 Aorist.
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
7TOV
fins
flnfiv
tinwv
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES.
Pres. Inf.
Imperf.
pat, Aor. Pass.
Part.
Perf.
' Perf. Imp. S. 3
, Plup.. HQ^^V, 3 Fut. ttyrj
, Fut. Pass.
70
TABLES.
II 54. VERBS IN -pi. 7.
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRESENT.
to send.
Ind.
S 1 lrif.it
2 Irjg
3 i';/a 4
P 1 ft/icy
Subj. Opt
tw l/^v
ijj 46/1?
Itl^tv
Imp. Inf.
teVu
tia P&rU
2 I'eie
t^re ic^TS,
lilrs
I'fTS
3 ma/, teXat
Iwat ieir t aav,
itltv
tfTwaav, itviuv
D 2 leioy
ITJ1OV UIIJTOV,
lelrov
Itrov
3
Ui^V,
nLir t v
UlMV
IMPERFECT.
AORIST I.
AORIST II.
Ind. Ind.
Subj.
OpU Imp.
Infc
S 1 'ITJV, tow ('ifiv) //xa *
w
fi>5V
?
2 i)7, l'e/ff
7]xa ? *
r
fir^c f?
3 I'jj, let
fa #
J
ft/7,&c. I'rw
Part
Pi f
I lf(J.tV
^xaucv ftjucv
aiptv
?
r> f
<* 4T
7JXUT8 f'ltS
f/TS
TT
3 I'eaav
r
7)xv etaaf
r
c/ai
frwaay, Tyn
wv
D 2 I'fTOV
fiiov
TjtOV
fTOV
3 ;,,
UTIjV
trw>'
Future, /"aw
Perfect, x.
Pluperfect, ttxtty.
MIDDLE AiND PASSIVE VOICES.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj.
Opt. Imp.
Inf.
1 iH^fU itnf.i(ti
Iti^v, iol^v
I'ftfi^Oi
2 teawt, t/; liji
I'fto, t'o/o Vfao, I'oy
3ci r'-
IHCU irjiai
tf/io, lotto imftit)
Part.
&-C. &/C.
&LC. &/C. &-C.
itptros
IMPERFECT.
AORIST II. MIDDLE.
Ind.
Subj. Opt. Imp.
Inf.
1 IY/41JV i'//JX
r <
?<J#C*
2 icao, I'ou flao
f T
I) 010 OV
3 Jeto tiro
7)T(tl o'flO t(td(O
Part.
&LC. &6C.
&LC. &C. &C.
tuivoe
Fut. Mid. riaofioci. 1 Aor. Mid.
Perf.
Aor. Pass, u^r/v. Fut. Pass. l#Jao/mt.
/<at.
Plup
VERBS IN -pi. 71
I 55. 8. JL'tp, to 6e.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf.
D. 2 eotuv i]iot> tnjToy, tiiov I't/toy
3 a/JTwv, ct'rny caraiy
-6 IjTE,
3 ij<jy f'aorittt S0<MJ?o
D. 2 TjTOy, fjOlOV tti(J&QV 1(JOIO&QV
3 //'i
S. 1 ff/u u)
2 1 ? T "
*?> ** {ff
3 tail /] ti/j i'aiw
P. 1 c(j/iE> a3|Ufy tt'^/uv, Ee)ucv Part.
2 /ore 7;is a/jzf, ttre tare a/y
3 eta/ aJat it'^auv, ftey earcuaay, oi)aa
IMPERFECT. FUTURE.
Ind. Opt. Inf.
Si t - *
. 1 /;', /;, I^UIjV
2 ^ % j ^adu ^ ; / tVfi fctfoto
3 ^y tatiui, t'urut tooiro Part.
P. 1 Kiity
DIALECTIC FORMS.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Imp. Part.
S. 1 fa*/ D. S. 1 10, I. S. 2 Jr., ?<r- P. M. U I.
2 Tf I. i7 E. jnf F. \oloa. I.
io-o-; P. 3 E. | Ej UiV D.
3 Irri D. ifi^ E. j a< E !? D.
P. 1 !<> I. P. 1 UftU D. ^ w p^ lAfftt. D.
i4>if D. 3 7 I. J^^.va^ E. ^E. N - * L
'" P< Opt. /ei D. Gen.
S i,' D. S> 2 ,ft,^ P. i7/m D. i.Sr I.
* a<r< ^ 7f, 3 1 I. i?<i6iv D. iJvTflj D.
IMTERFECT.
S. 1 In* E. S. 2 Ins P. S. 3 ? I. P. 3 ?<r> I. P.
let E. infffat E. f D. I P.
!r* It. Us I. f^*i It. 7r It.
i* I. 3 nn E. P. 1 ^i; D. 70- I.
I. Ji(0 I. 2 *rt I. I;T E.
72
TABLES. - VERBS IN -
55 56
DIALECTIC FORMS OK i
FUTURE IND.
to t*
5. 1 1ffffoft.au E.
S. 3 ?<rtri E.
I 1 \ffop.ia6a. P.
2 Iffteu I.
(r<rir< E.
ifirefitfet E.
itfffictt E*
fo-sTra. D.
2 lW<r4i E.
l<r- ? P.
ifffftireti D.
3 *r*-Ta< E.
iffftj D.
IfftUVTOtl D
H56. 9. JEf^a, to
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp
S. 1 f?ut tVo 't'oiui, loli t v
2'^
3 f(
to/? .
I'oi
P. 1 J/lfV
2 rr t7/T f'otre
3 tuat tWt toitv
Mt (fi)
ircu
I'Tf
frojaav,
Inf. Part
uVcu toj'v
livaa
Iw
D. 2
3
S.
7; Toy
t'^TOV loirov I'TOV
PLUPERFECT II., or IMPERFECT.
2 w. nfta^ /7 f ' Tf ^ Tfi
8 ? \ ' '
MIDDLE (to hasten). Present, T^at. Imperfect, tc'^y.
DIALECTIC FORMS.
PRESENT.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Inf.
a 2 .7, i.
S. 1
7 P.
S. 3 t'ti E.
7^i. E. D.
Jrfe E.
2
*r,f6a. E.
H/H E.
"[4.1*1X1 E.
3
V- E.
'^^im^ E.
P. 3 Jn P.
P. 1
V, E.
7< P.
IMPERFECT.
8. 1 *TL
P. 1 /
mE.
D. 2 7ri E.
S iT/i I.
3 7<r
t, E.
Si E.
f)
r I.
*i E.
^i'o
K.
Mn>. Fut.
, Aor. tieiifw, Ep. (^ 252).
11 57.]
NUDE SI-XOND AOK1STS.
73
H .57. PURE VERBS, iii. SECOND AORISTS.
1. AORIST II. of
Ind.
s. i r/v
2 ^;
'Q j ',o
o 6/3JJ
p. i r/v"
O J '/P
3 /fyfIl'
1) 2 ?,V*
3
Subj.
Opt.
r ,utv, flnt(ii ti
?>Jr flfxh/jf, flittTf
lunji ftalifunv, ftitln 1
i^Tor /Wi/ror, fiitirov
to go.
Imp.
fif^f
Inf.
/;; > i/
Part.
2. AORIST II. of
Ind. Subj.
S. I
2
3
P. I
Q ' * -
o (XTTf OyiXfjtxV
D- 2 7Ii<5oTOV
3 a;
rrnxfij, /o r///< away.
Opt. Inf.
unuSouir t v cmvdyiira
Part.
&/C.
7Io5^TOI'
3. AORIST II. of yiyvwaxto, to know.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp.
S. 1 tyi'Mv yrut yro'rjv (/>'W'/'')
2 tyfun; yv<*>$ yv(jh]g yvwdt
3 /yj'O* / J1( J J yroit'i yi'Uib)
P. 1 tyrhifjit' yvotpfv yvoiijfifv, yvoif.itv
2 l^vajif yrmrs /ro/r/rf. yvoirt yvwrf
3 fyvwaav yrmat yvol^atxv, yi'ottv yi'wrbujar, yrorrwv
D. 2 tyvwiov yrwiov yrolijTnr, yi'olrov yrwiov
3 iyvoiTijV yroiijirji', yvuirijv yvwtMV
4. AORIST II. of <5i'r&), ^> enter, to put on.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. Inf.
Inf.
yi'aivai
Part.
S I
&*
dvo)
dvoiin
dvt'ai
2
f'fllJC
8&tjis
Svotg
5 i't) i
3
t(5u
8vot
dviw
Part.
P 1
tduftti)
dwautv
dvotu**
dvc
2
H^j'fg
di'rjTf
Svout
di'is
3
fdSuav
fvfaai
dvotfv
diiKuaav, duvrtov
D. 2
i'Sfroi'
dvrjiov
dvonov
dviov
3
f'8vT> t v
I'
dvoiir t v
dvTOV
74 TABLES. [fl 58, 59.
H 58. xv. (E.) PRETERITIVE VERBS.
1. OtSa, to know.
PERFECT II.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. In,
8 1 oldu fidui sldtltjv fidevat
2 oidag, oia&tt sldyg lidtlrjg I'u&i
3 aids etdtj sldfir] I'aio) Part.
P 1 oldapsv, lo/.itv fldofisv &/c. fldiog
2 old an s, I'OTS fldrjis I'OTS
3 olduai, lauai fidwai i'aTwaav
D. 2 oldctTov, i'arov eidiJTOV I'OTOV 3
PLUPERFECT II.
S. 1 ydsiv, ydy P. ydfifisr, fiapsv D.
2 jjdiig, ydy?, fjdsiTS, v)OT8 ydsnov, y
yei
3 f]dsi(v), fjdij ydtaav, yaav
Future, rfao/iai, sidrjaw. Aorist,
2. 48oixa or 8i8ia, to be afraid.
PERFECT II. PLUPERF. II
Ind. Subj. Imp. Inf.
S. 1 didia dsdiw dedie'vai fdf'bi'civ
3 dtdts dfdlrj dsdhio Part. fdtdlti
P. 1 didifjiv didluiptv dtditag edidi(AV
2 didiTS dtdlrjTS define t'didiTS
3 dfdittai dtdttaai dfdiTwauv idtdiau*
D. 2 didiTOv dtdlyiov diduov f'dediTov
3 dtdtTWV tdsdiTijv
1 Perf. Sidoixa. 1 Pluperf. sdedolxctv. Fut. dtlaofiui. Aor.
Z.dtiaa.
H 59. 3. *Hpai, to sit.
PERFECT. PLUPERFECT.
Ind. Imp. Inf. Part.
2 tjacu rjao Tjao
P. 1 ifoit&a
2 r t a&8 rj<J&8
3 7}vra ^(jdwauv, yo&tav VTO
D. 2 ya&ov yo&ov 3 ^a^w>' r^a&ov 3
11 59, 60.]
PRETER1TIVE VERBS.
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
2
3
D. 2
3
S 1
2
3
D. 2
Ind.
a&r
xd&ijaat
PRETERITIVE VERBS.
4. Kd&q{iau, to sit down.
PERFECT.
Subj, Opt. Imp.
Inf.
xn&oio
XU&OITO
xd&Tja&s
xd&rjvrai xd&wviai xd&oivio
XCL&IIQ&QV XOL&TJ(J\)OV xct&oia&ov
Part.
xot&r)pivo$
PLUPERFECT.
Ixn&qao, xn&rjoo
tXU&T)TO,
txd&rju&ov.
P. 1
2
3 fxtt'
D. 3 f'
X(x&r,vto
H6O. Kelpou, to lie down.
PRESENT or PERFECT.
Ind. Subj. Opt. Imp. In
S. 1
2
3
P. 1
3
D. 2
3
8. 1
2
HUfUU
xtlawi xey xsoio
xtlitxt xirjrai xdono
xfipf&a
xflao
xsoio&e
XEOIVTO xtia&oiaccv, xila&ow
xeiadov xiyoftov xeoia&ov xfta&ov
xsla&uv
txtia&ov
Part.
XflfifVOf
txsiao
IxetTO
IMPERFECT or PLUPERFECT.
P. sxslntda D.
IXSIVTO
Future,
76 TABLES. CHANGES IN THE ROOT. [1f 61
H 61. xvi. CHANGES IN THE ROOT
, T> . (a. of to i.
. Precession 1. . ,
(b. of i and a
2- Contraction.
S. Syncope.
EUPHONIC CHANGES.
[259-264.]
4. Metathesis.
to /. 5. To avoid Double Aspiratioa.
6. Omission or Addition of Consonant.
7. From the Omission of the Digamn.a.
B. EMPHATIC CHANGES.
I. BY LENGTHENING A SHORT VOWEL.
[266-270.]
1. to i. 4. f to ti.
2. to M. 5. r to r.
3. Various Changes of . 6. J to i/.
II. BY THE ADDITION OF CONSONANTS.
[271-282.]
7. to 00.
8. t? to ?.
9. v to iv.
1. Of T
2. Of
. To Labial Roots.
ft. To Other Roots.
a. Prefixed.
0. Affixed.
Uniting with a
y. Palatal to form <r<r(<!
.
3. Of
(". Prefixed to a Con son ant
I $. Affixed to a Consonant.
J y. Affixed to a Vowel.
I 3. Prefixed to .
a.. Without further change.
j8. Vowel changed by prece-
4. Of ex ^ y. Vowel lengthened, [sioa
J. Metathesis.
. Consonant dropped.
. Lingual
*. Labial " , <r*. 5. Of J, .
III. BY INCREASING THE NUMIJKR OF SYLLABLES.
[233-300.]
1. .By Reduplication ( 283-286).
a. Proper.
b. Attic.
c. Improper.
a. In Verbs in -pi.
ft. In Verbs in -VKU.
y. In Other Verbs.
a. and i*
2. J3y Syllabic Affixes ( 287 - if 99).
/". Without further change,
b if?*. With the Insertion of >.
(v. With a prolonged.
C. M.
(a. To Pa
d. , v ^/5. To Pal
(y. To Li
To Pare Roots,
alatal Roots.
Lingual and Liquid
[Roots,
g. Other Syllables.
3. By Exchange of Lettert ( 300).
f becoming i.
C. ANOMALOUS CHANGES.
tian.j
DERIVATION.
77
D. TABLES OF FORMATION.
fi 6S. i. TABLE OF DERIVATION.
1. FROM VERBS, denoting
A. NOUNS.
[305-313]
III. FROM OTHER NOUNS.
1. The Action; in -<n?, -a- /a, -n, -a,
-os (-aw), -ra;, -a? (-aj), ~l*-'oi, -ft*.
2. The Effect or Object, in -^a.
3. The Z>oer, in -T;, -TO, -ru^
(F. -T/a, -rs/, -Tg<f, -r/"j,) -*w>,
-Of.
4. The Place, Instrument, &c., in
II. FROM ADJECTIVES, expressing
the Abstract, in -la. (-tt&, -a<a), -<rj?,
1. Patrials, in -TJJS (F. -iff), -tut
(F. .*,).
2. Patronymics, in -t^jf, -^>jf,
./^5f (F. -f,-, .^,-, -;0 '*%
(F. -ituvn, -/u).
3. Female Appellatives, in -?$, -a/va,
-*a, - (-Tra).
4. Diminutives, in -rv (-1S/ov, -a^/a,
-wXX<ov, -y2^/ov, &c.), -A, -<^wf,
-/^v>j, -axi')7, -yXX/?, -i/Aof, &C.
5. Auymentatlccs, in -av t -uvta, -%
B. ADJECTIVES.
[ 314-316.]
L FROM VERBS ; in tx.os, -<rr,oies, patrial ; -go;,
-pur, active ; -rag, -rias, -ej, pas- ; -wXa;, -wXaj, -us, -u$*is> fulness or
sice; -7^*aj, fitness; -&f>a;, -u.;, &C. quality.
II. FROM NOUNS ; in -Us (-/?, -i/a?, III. FROM ADJECTIVES AND AD-
-<aj, -yog, -vtoi), belonying to; -fxaj, VERBS.
-not, -KXOS, -u'tKos, relating to; -tog, 1. As from Nouns.
-faf, -en, material; -tvos ("r), fi/ne 2. Strengthened Forms ; Com-
or prevalence ; -?vay, ->jvj, -avaf, i parative, Superlative.
C. PRONOUNS.
f [ 317.]
D. VERBS.
[ 318, 319.]
I. FROM NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES ; II. FROM OTHER VERBS ; in -/,
in -tea, -iva, -a.u, to be or do ; -ou, j -idea, -a,ea, desiderative ; -^u, -<rx.u,
-aivea, -vvea, to make; -/^w, -^w> | &c., frequentative, intensive, incep-
imitative, active, &c. ; -u with penult j five, diminutive, &c.
strengthened, active, &e.
E. ADVERBS.
[320-322.]
I OUTJQUE CASES OF NOUNS AND II. DERIVATIVES SIGNIFYING
AD.IKCTIVK.S.
1. Genitives, in -0tv, place whence;
-ou, place where ; -n;, &c.
2. Datives, in -ai, -o6~t, -a-r, -a7,
place where; -?, -, -a/, -f, u> 'y,
place where, time wfien ; &c.
1. Manner, in -a
2. Time when, in -TI, -f xa.
3. Place whither, in -a-i.
4. Number, in -x/f.
III. PREPOSITIONS WITH THEIR CASKS.
2ut ' IV. DERIVATIVE FROM PREPOSI-
TIONS. or PREPOSITIONS WITH-
OUT
Sing, and Plur. of Adjec-
7 *
TABLES. [fl 6a
U 63. n. PRONOMINAL
[Obsolete Primitives are printed in capitals
Negative. Relative.
Orders, I. II. UL Vf. V. VL
Interrog. Indef. Objective. Subjective. Definite. Indefinite
i
Positive, T/f j ris, evrtg,
no2 ; no2, e ti<j s ,
Compar., #ortga; ;
Superl., fotrros \
Quantity, waVey \
Quality, iro7os \
Age, Size, snjX/'xef ;
Country, weSawaf \
Day, vro<rra7o< ;
Whence, vofat
Where, raw i
Whither, <ra?i
'/, oilfadt,
g 2. Way, or wjii \ vrj,
o Place where,
3. Manner, tis
Sfrtf,
ono2,
ea-af,
ri^'ijco;, efriXixdff
OTOffToitOS
OTOV,
M,
Vi, yv,
f, <uf, a<rf,
7<Mf, OTOItof,
f, 09rori*t,
f General, wan i flrari, ay
? I
p ^ Specific, riw'
. j Various,
5. Number, waa-ax/r i tvltvtixif,
, ort,
iff Axis,
DERIVATIVE NOUNS. w-rnf, cT4/*rjy, *nX/*T?j, ai^^/vaT*)?, a-ra/arni
aTHf, iTt^*/aTi;, of/.iiorv!, iroTfit t irigrttirii, tfH&ffttt "ff&ff'f, XXa/waif, &C.
U63.J
CORRELATIVES.
Poetic and Dialectic Forms are not marked.]
PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES.
79
Definite or Demonstrative.
Universal. XII. XIII.
> Of Like- Of Identl-
XI. ness, and ty, Divers!
MM,
r'o6,,
tTi^ui,
VII. VIII. IX. X.
Simple. Emphatic: Deictic. Distributive. Collective. Equality, ty, &c.
a, eurof, o5i, -2;,
TO 2, a *t>TOf, &?.<?*,,
\jrvivof ,
TOPO$ t TOfOVTOf)
TOffXTiOf, rUVVOVTOf*
ro7oi* Toiev-Tos,
1xa*ros>
Jfc,
ixdrtoPiv,
K-jtfj/U.lOOS.
oftou, avrov,
op-acri,
?*
ran,
ourcixts,
lx.ctyra.xif.
DEKIVATIVTE VERBS. wao-ow,
tbove), ifAoioea, ifou, oiXXa/a^, fl^svi^
XXr.
mvrixm*
iSaw, \nootou (from tn^iTat, omitted
;, a^^aTij/^is;, ixttrtg'tu, aXXa-o-, &C.
TABLES. fl 64
III. PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.
11 G4U I. An APPOSITIVK agrees in case with its subject 331.
II. The SUBJECT OF A FINITE VERB is put in the Nominative. 342.
III. SUBSTANTIVES INDEPENDENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTKUCTION ar
put in the Nominative 343.
GENERAL RULE FOR THE GENITIVE. THE POINT OF DEPARTURE AND
THE CAUSE ARE PUT IN THE GENI^'VE. 345.
IV Words of SEPARATION and DISTINCTION govern the Genitive. 346
V. The COMPARATIVE DEGREE governs the Genitive. 351.
VI. The ORIGIN, SOURCE, and MATERIAL are put in the Genitive. 355
VII. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF THOUGHT is put in the Genitive.
\ 356.
VIII. Words of PLENTY and WANT govern the Genitive. 357.
IX. The WHOLE OF WHICH A PART is TAKEN is put in the Genitive
358.
X. Words of SHARING and TOUCH govern the Genitive. 367.
XI. The MOTIVE, REASON, and END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive
4 372.
XII PRICE, VALUE, MERIT, and CRIME are put in the Genitive. 374.
XIII. Words of SENSATION and of MENTAL STATE OR ACTION govern
fhe (u.'nitive. 375.
XIV. The TIME and PLACE in which are put in the Genitive. 378.
XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER are put in the Genitive. 380.
XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THING OR PROPERTY is put in the Gon-
itive 382.
GENERAL RULE FOR THE DATIVE OBJECTIVE. THE OBJECT OF AP-
PROACH AND OF INFLUENCE is PUT IN THE DATIVE; or, AN INDIRECT
OBJECT is PUT IN THE DATIVE 397.
XVII. Words of NEARNESS and LIKENESS govern the Dative 398.
XVIII. The OBJECT OF INFLUENCE is put in the Dative. 401.
GENERAL RULE- FOR THE DATIVE RESIDUAL. AN ATTENDANT THING
OR CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, is PUT IN THE DATIVE.
414.
XIX. The MEANS and MODE are put in the Dative. 415.
XX. The TIME and PLACE at which are put in the Dative. 420.
GENERAL RULE FOR THE ACCUSATIVE. AN ADJUNCT EXPRESSING
DIRECT LIMIT is PUT IN THE ACCUSATIVE. 422.
XXI. The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT of an action are put in the
Accusative. 423.
ADVERBS OF BWKARINO are followed hy the Accnsntivft.
CAUSATIVES govern the Accusative losether with the case of the Included verb. 430.
The same verb often sovurns TWO ACCUSATIVES, which limy be, (I.) The DIRECT
OBJECT and the EFFECT in apjtositinn with each pi her: as with verbs of making, appoint-
ing, choosing, esteeming, naminp, .Vc. (II ) The DIUK^T OHJKCT and the EFFECT, not
in apposition; ns with verbs ut lining, sat/ing, Ac. (111.) Two OBJECTS differently re-
lated, but which are Imih ruiwnled ns DIRECT; as with verbs of. ir^/.i/n' .ind rfjiiiring, of
clothing nnd unclothing, of '-unctaiing and rfepjiti'nj, of persuading and teaching, &c.
15 434-436.
PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 81
A XII An adjunct applying a word or expression to a PARTICULAR
FART, PROPERTY, THING, or PERSON, is put in the Accusative. 437.
XX I II. EXTENT OF TIME AND SPACE is put in the Accusative. 430.
XXIV. The Accusative is often used ADVERBIALLY, to express DE-
GRKK, MANNER, ORDER, &C. 440.
XXV. The COMPELLATIVE of a sentence is put in the Vocative. 442.
XXVI. An ADJECTIVE agrees with its subject in gender, number, and
case. 444.
XXVII. The ARTICLE is prefixed to SUBSTANTIVES, to mark them as
definite. 469.
XXVIII. A PRONOUN agrees with its subject in gender, number, and
person. 494.
The RELATIVE commonly takes the case of the antecedent, when the ANTECEDENT is a
Genitive or Dative, and the RELATIVE would properly be an Accusative depending upon
a verfi 526.
XXIX. A VERB agrees with its subject in number and person. 543.
The NEUTER PLURAL has its VERB in the singular. 549.
The PASSIVE VOICE has for its SUBJECT AD object of (.he Active, commonly a direct,
but sometimes an indirect object. Any other word governed by the Active remains un-
changed with the Passive. THE SUBJECT OF THE ACTIVE is commonly expressed, wilh
the Passive, by the Genitive with a preposition. 6l>2.
. ^ K tv, S Definite Tenses, as (a.) continued or prolonged ;
An act.on is represented by the j ^.^ M [ O j momentary or transient ,
UA.) a habit or continued course of conduct; (c.) doing at the time of, or until an-
? (6. ) a single act ; (c. ) simply done in its own time ;
{ other action ; (d.) begun, attempted, or designed; (e.) introductory. ) - s ,- 7n ,~ A
I (d.) accomplished ; (e.) conclusive. \**
The generic Aorist often supplies the place of the specific Perfect and Pluperfect
580.
The INDICATIVE expresses the actual; the SUBJUNCTIVE and OPTATIVE, the contingent.
PRESENT CONTINGENCY is expressed by the primary tenses ; PAST CONTINGENCY, by tha
sen, ntlary. 589.
The SUBJUNCTIVE for the most part, follows the primary tenses ; and the OPTATIVE,
the .tfi-midary. 592.
Sn : njsitinn a^ fact is expressed by the appmpriate tense of the Indicative; supposi-
tum /tint mail hr-rumi- fact, by the Subjunctive ; tupfoaition without regard to fact, by
Hie Optative; and ati/ipusition contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Indicative.
f><tt
The OPTATIVE is the distinct mode appropriate In the oratio obtiqua in past time. 608.
XXX. The INFINITIVE is construed as a neuter noun. 620.
The INFINITIVE often forms an elliptical command, request, counsel, salutation, excla-
mation, or question. 1)25.
XXXI. The SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE is put in the Accusative.
) ti&.
XXXII. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTANTIVE tire put ahsnlute in the Gen
\tive; an IMPERSONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative. 638.
The INTERJECTION is independent of grammatical construction. G45.
XXXIII. ADVERBS modify sentcncea, phrases, and tcords ; particularly
>erbs, adjectires, and other adverbs. 646.
XXXIV. PKK.POSITIONS govern substantives in the oblique cases, and
enark their relations. 648.
XXXV. CONJUNCTIONS connect sentences and like parts of a sentence
TABLES. [11 65.
IV. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING.
11 65. A. OF WORDS.
Common
Proper
1 \
Masc. "1
isa
Abstract
Collective
NOUN of the 2 > Dec.,
3 )
Fern. ,
Neut. f' fr m
Irregular
Comm. J
&c.
Nom.1
-.- 5 }
VOC.J
[ the subject of ,
governed by ,
< the Gen. of , ^ Rule. Remarks.
the Dat. of ,
l^the Ace. of , &c.,
Pos )
is an ADJECTIVE [in the Comp. > Degree, from --- (compcu V
Sup. )
. x fDerived from , T .
T 2| Terminations (Ac&ne) ; L [Compounded of 1_ j Root
Affix
(Norn
1 G(
(&,
.) Sing.) Masc. )
't Ur ;C M m ; C ;
,) Dual ) Neut. )
reei _
^ed substantivelv, &c
, Rule. Remark*.
Personal ~\
Reflexive I
is a Relative j PRONOUN
&c.
1)
, of the 2 >-
Pers. >, from (fo
e <] i
-J
Norn.} Sing.) Masc.)
Affix -; the Gen. f. Plur. t Fern. I ;
&c | Dual | Neut J
ject of , ) Sublet )
ed by , > Rule. [It refers to - as its Antecedent T Rute 5
ig with , &c.,)
(the sul ijcct of
Vgoveri
(agreeing
and connects to .] Re.mat-kt.
Transitive VERB,'
Intransitive "
-
Contract "
VERB in pi, &c.,
U65.J
FORMS OF ANALYSIS.
of',] I Roots
Pres. '
Impf.
jifc-j*.^
1 Aor.
&c.
Ind.
Subj.
Opt
Imp.
Inf.
Part
Act. )
Mid. >
Pass.)
(vary and
inflect) ;
Rule. Remarks.
1) Sing.)
(if finite) the 2 > Pers. Plur. V , agreeing with ,
3) Dual )
(if Inf.} having for its subject -, and {^"J ^
Interrogative "j Place
Indefinite Time
is an Demonstrative > ADVERB of Manner
Complementary Order
&c. J &c.
>Pos. )
, [in the Comp. > De-
Sup. )
gree, from (compare),] [^'ounded of~ ] modif >' in g ~ Rule - P*
refers to as its antecedent, and connects to .] Remarks.
, and marking
its relation to , Rule. Remarks.
Copulative
is a
&c. J
- to , Rule. Remarks.
[Derived from , ]
[Compounded of ,]
connect*
- I>. ? of '-,]-< Dependent of gr^n-
matical construction 645). Remarks.
NOTES (a) When declension in full is not desired, give the Norn, and Gen. in Sub
stantivesand in Adjectives of I Term., and the different forms of the Nora, in Adjectivei
of 2 or 3 Term. (6) In conjugating, give the Theme, with the corresponding Fut. and
Perf. (if in use), to which it is also well to add the 2 Aor. if used, (c) The term
" vary " is used above in a specific sense, to denote giting the different modes of a
tense, or, as it is sometimes called, giving the synopsis of the tense ; and the terra "
Jltct," to denote giving the numbers and persons (in the Participle, declension, of
course, takes the place of this), (d) After completing the formula above, which, to
avoid confusion and consequent omission or delay, should always be given in the pro-
scribed order, add such Remarks as may properly be made upon the form, signification,
and use of the word ; as, in respect to contraction, euphonic changes of consonants,
literal or figurative sense, the force or use of the number, case, degree, voice, mode,
tense, &c. ; citins, from the Grammar, the appropriate rule, remark, or note, (e) Som
particulars in the forms above, which do not apply to all wordd. are inclosed in brackets.
84 TABLES. ANALYSIS. [fl 66, 67
HOG. B. OF SENTENCES.
I. Describe tin Sentence.
( ( IntlWtivA 5 Declarative, $ Actual, $ Posi
< SimP ,e, S --. " ter* ) Co " linscnt ' j Ner
i9 J Compound, < ( Volit.ve, j Negalive ' ;
/ Incorporated in the sentence as a
live; )
ative; f connected by
\ following by
( Substantive.
ol a < Adjective.
( Adverb.
^ Cooniiriate Sentence.
? Subordinate Clause, performing the oflict
simple succeaaion.
II. Analyze the Sentence into its Logical and Grammatical Divisions, its Primary
ami Secondary Parts, J*c.
Compellative ) i i Cbm-
The Logical Subject \ u , containing the ^ *. { Grammatical Sub-
Predicate ^ Pre-
Adjective
pellative i Adverb
i.-ct J , modified by the Appositive V ~~~' Stunt* hov> these an
d.cate
Adjective N
) Adverb I
> , modified by the Appositive \ .
) Adjunct L
Dependent Clause )
ijicd, and analyze Subordinate or Incorporated Clauses, until tfa Sentence w
^1 67. C. OF METRES.
I. Give a general description of the Metre in which the Poem is written.
II. Describe the particular Verse.
Iambic ) Monometer ) Acatalectic ) 1 )
It la Dactylic > Dimeter [ Catalectic [, consisting of 2 > Feet, which VI
&c. ) <tc.
tnj -I Penthemim. ^
. The Caesura is the |p ^ '\ Hephthemim, > after
irem. j p^^pj^ &c ^ )
JR. Analyze by [Dipodies and] Feet.
Dactyl, ) 1 ) | , Nature, >
) a Spondee, f the 2 J Syllable J.f n! { by Position, > Rule.
Ac., ) *c. ^ lorl ' Ac., )
INTRODUCTION,
$ 1 . THE Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal
races ; the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric
and the jEolic. These races spoke the same general language
but with many dialectic peculiarities.
The ANCIENT GREEK LANGUAGE (commonly called simply
the Greek) has been accordingly divided by grammarians into
four principal DIALECTS, the ATTIC, the IONIC, the DORIC, and
the yEoLic. Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most
refined, and had far the greatest unity within themselves. The
Doric and ^Eolic were not only much ruder, but, as the dialects
of races widely extended, and united by no common bond of
literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of the varieties
of the Doric or ^Eolic were separated from each other by dif-
ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished
them in common from the other dialects. Of the JEolic, the
principal varieties were the Lesbian, the Boeotian, and the
Thessalian. The Doric, according as it was more or less
removed from the Attic and Ionic, was characterized as the
stricter or the milder Doric ; the former prevailing in the La-
conic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ;
the latter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian,
Rhodian, and some others.
2. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and
the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the
mother country in refinement ; and the first development of
Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions,
was among the Asiatic lonians. This development was EPIC
POETRY, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining
to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. The language
of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric, is the old Ionic,
with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard
8
86 INTRODUCTION.
would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city,
and those poetic licenses which are always allowed to early
minstrelsy, when as yet the language is unfixed, and critics are
unknown. Epic poetry was followed in Ionia by the Elegiac
of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of Colophon
were two great masters ; and this again by Ionic Prose, ir
which the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrates,
who chose this refined dialect, although themselves of Doric
descent. In distinction from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets
the language of the Elegiac poets may be termed the Middle
Ionic, and that of the prose -writers, the New Ionic.
3. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera
ture was the jEolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains ot
Alcseus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short-
lived, and we have scarce any thing remaining of the dialect
except some brief fragments. There arose later among the
jEolians of Boeotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which
Pindar was the most illustrious ornament: As writing, however
for the public festivals of Greece, he rejected the peculiarities
of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the
basis consisted of words and forms common to the Doric and
^Eolic, but which was greatly enriched from the now universal-
ly familiar Epic. He is commonly said, but loosely, to have
written in the Doric.
4t. Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race,
were gradually rising to suc.h political and commercial impor-
tance, and to such intellectual preeminence among the states
of Greece, that their dialect, adorned by such dramatists as
jEschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and Menander,
by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, by such phi-
losophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such orators as Lysias
jEschines, and Demosthenes, became at length the standard
language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted by the edu-
cated classes in all the states. It became the general medium
of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, which will be here-
af.er noticed, the universal language of composition. This
diffusion of the Attic dialect was especially promoted by the
conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it as their court
language. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its
peculiarities, and received many additions; and thus diffused
and modified, it ceased to be regarded as the language of a
particular state, and received the appellation of the COMMON
DIALECT or LANGUAGE.
The Attic- and Common dialects, therefore, do not differ in
DIALECTS. 8"
any essential feature, and may properly be regarded, the one
as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, form
of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or
later form, we find written nearly the whole that remains to us
of ancient Greek liters^ure. It may claim therefore to be re-
gnrded, notwithstanding a few splendid compositions in the
other dialects, as the national language of Greece ; and its
acquisition should form the commencement and the basis of
Greek study.
The pure Attic has been divided into three periods ; the Old,
used by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the
Middle, used by Xenophon and Plato ; and the New, used by
the Orators and the later Comedians. The period of the Com-
mon dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjec-
tion of Athens to the Macedonians.
5. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent,
we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our
knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon-
uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it-
self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch
of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian
colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by
the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timseus, &c.), in Mathematics by
the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his
successors, and in Pastoral Poetry by Theocritus, Bion, and
Moschus.
$ 6. To the universality acquired by the Attic dialect, an
exception must be made in poetry. Here the later writers felt
constrained to imitate the language of the great early models.
The Epic poet never felt at liberty to depart from the dialect
of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic language was regarded by
subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred tongue, the
language of the gods, from which they might enrich their sev-
eral compositions. The ^Eolic and Doric held such a place in
Lyric Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an jEolo-Doric
hue was given to the lyric portions by the use of the long ,
which formed so marked a characteristic of those dialects, and
which, by its openness of sound, was so favorable to musical
effect. Pastoral Poetry was confined to the Doric. The Dra-
matic was the only department of poetry in which the Attic
was the standard dialect.
7. Grammar flourished only in the decline of the Greek
language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dia-
88 INTRODUCTION.
lects with little precision. Whatever they found in the old
Ionic of Homer that seemed to them more akin to the later
cultivated vEolic, Doric, or even Attic, than to the new Ionic
they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dialects. Even in the
common language, whatever appeared to them irregular or pe
culiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming
the regular form xotvov, common, though perhaps this form was
either wholly unused,* or was found only as a dialectic variety
On the other hand, some critics used the appellation *otr6<; as a
lerm of reproach, designating by it that which was not pure
Attic. In the following Grammar, an attempt will be made to
exhibit first and distinctly, under each head, the Greek in its
standard form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common usage ;
and afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities.
It will not, however, be understood that every thing which is
ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through-
out, or is found in no other. This applies especially to the
Doric and ^Eolic, which, with great variety within themselves
( 1), are closely akin to each other; so that some (as Mait-
taire) have treated of both under .the general head of Doric ;
and in the following Grammar some forms will be simply men-
tioned as Doric, that also occur in the jEolic. By the term
JFjQ\\c, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted the
cultivated /Eolic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usually con-
fined to the language spoken (though, according to Herodotus,
with four varieties) by the lonians of Asia Minor and the adja-
cent islands.
8. It remains to notice the modifications of the latei
Greek. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude
and semi-barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused
some of the peculiarities of their native tongue. These are
termed Macedonia, or, sometimes, from Alexandria, the prin-
cipal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of later Greek culture
Alexandrine.
The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world,
was employed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and
the composition of the Christian. When so employed by na-
tive Jews, it naturally received a strong Hebrew coloring ; and,
as a Jew speaking Greek was called 'jKUbyyum^ (from knijvl.^
to speak Greek), this form of the language has been termed the
Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical} dialect. Its pecu-
liarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the
fathers, and through the diffusion of Christianity exerted a greal
general influence.
DIALECTS. 89
Another influence modifying the Greek came from the lan-
guage of the Roman conquerors of the world. Of necessity,
the Greek, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such
scholars as Arrian, Lucian, and ^Elian, and the precepts of a
class of critics, called Atticists, was continually becoming more
and more impure. The language of the Byzantine period was
especially degenerate. Since the destruction of the Eastern
Empire by the Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Eccle-
siastical Greek with the popular dialects of the different dis-
tricts and islands of Greece has produced the MODERN GREEK,
or, as it is often called, by a name derived from the Roman
Empire in the East, ROMAIC. This language has been es-
pecially cultivated and refined within the present century, and
has now a large body of original and translated literature.
$ 9. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never
ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the student a
series of compositions, not only including many of the highest
productions of genius, but extending through a period of nearly
three thousand years.
BOOK I.
ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY.
TI
^Eschylus, Prom. Vinst.
CHAPTER 1.
CHARACTERS.
[HIT 1, 2.]
1O. THE Greek language is written with
our letters, two breathings, three accents,
Jour marks of punctuation, and a few other char-
acters.
1. For the LETTERS, see Table, T 1.
REMARKS. 1. DOUBLE FORMS. Sigma final is written g ;
not final, a ; as, araai?. In compound words, some editors,
without authority from manuscripts, use y at the end of each
component word ; thus, nQoceiwsQftc:. The other double forms
are used indifferently ; as, fiov$ or 6ov$
2. LIGATURES. Two or more letters arc often united, except
in recent editions, into one character, called a ligature (liga-
tura, tie) ; as, * for xcu, 8 for or, e& for <r#, 5* (named art or
for at. For a list of the principal ligatures, see Table,
$11* 3. NUMERAL POWER. To denote numbers under a
thousand, the Greeks employed the letters of the alphabet, as
exhibited in the table, with the mark ( ' ) over them ; as, a 1,
i 10, t/f 12, Q*y 123. The first eight letters, with Vau, rep-
resented the nine units ; the next eight, with Koppa, the nine
t< us ; and the last eight, with Sampi, the nine hundreds. The
thousands were denoted by the same letters with the mark be-
neath - as, e' 5, t 5,000, x/ 23, ^7 or x^' 23,000, /xo^a 1841.
CH. l.J LETTERS. - BREATHINGS. 9 1
NOTES. . Vau, in its usual small form (5-), resembles the ligature for ft
< 10). Hence some editors confound them, and employ 2T, as the large form
*f Vau, to denote 6.
|8. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers, ac-
cording to their own order hi the alphabet. In this way the books of Homer
are marked; as, 'Ix/aSoj, A, Z, H, The Iliad, Books /., VI., XXIV.
y. Another method of writing numerals occurs in old inscriptions, by which
1 denotes one, IT (for HEVTS) five, A (for AU) ten, H (for Hsxarov, 22. a)
a hundred, X (for X/X/o/) a thousand, M (for M%) ten thousand. II drawn
around another numeral multiplies it by five. Thus, MXX]fl[H]A[ ^AIII
= 12,676.
13. 4. ROMAN LETTERS. By the side of the Greek
letters in the table (fl 1), are placed the Roman letters which
take their place when Greek words are transferred into Latin
or English ; as, A'l/xAwi//, Cyclops.
NOTES. . The letter y becomes n, when followed by another palatal ;
but, otherwise, g ; as, ayysXaj, Lat. angdus, Eng. angel ; ffvyxovhi syncope ;
a.vy, larynx ; K'lylva., jEgina.
/3. The diphthong ai becomes in Latin at ; ei, OR ; ti, I or e (before a conso-
nant almost always i) ; ov, u ; and vi, yi; as, <?$?, Phcedrus ; IWr/a,
BiEotia; Ne7A.9f, Nilus ; Aa^e?oy, Darius; M^EJB, Medea; Mat;<ra, Musa ,
E&Mfap, Ilithyia.
A few words ending in / and / are excepted ; as, Ma~a, Jfaia, T^ a/a,
Troia or 7Yq/a ; so also AJj, ^'aor.
y. The improper diphthongs a, ?j, iw, are written in Latin simply a, c, o ,
as, 0^x>j, Thrace, "Ai^tj?, Hades, Q^fffa., Thressa, <ilfi, ode. But in a few
compounds of ubri, ea becomes ce; as, rgayaJ/a, tragcedia, Eng. tragedy.
$. The roMt/A breathing becomes, in Latin and English, h, while the smooth is
not written ; as, "ExTtug, Hector, "E^w|, -Eryx, Tsa, Rhea (the ft being placed
after the r by the same inaccuracy as after the w in our while, pronounced
hoo-ile ; since in both cases the breathing introduces the word).
13. II. The BREATHINGS are the SMOOTH or
SOFT ( s ), and the ROUGH ( f ), also called the AS-
PIRATE (aspiro, to breathe). The first denotes a
gentle emission of the breath, such as must precede
every initial vowel ; the second, a strong emission,
such as in English is represented by h. One of
these is placed over every initial vowel, and over
every initial or doubled g.
NOTES. 1. An initial v has always the rough breathing to assist in its
utterance (as in English an initial long u is ahvays preceded by the sound of
y; thus, 5;, vpt7:, as, in English, use, pronounced yise, union); except in the
lic dialect, and in the Epic forms i^^j,-, v^pi or
92 CHARACTERS. [BOOK L
2. An initial g requires, for its proper vibration or rolling, a strong agita-
tion, and is therefore always marked with the rough breathing ; as, /5.
When is doubled, the first has the smooth breathing, and the second the
rough; as, llvppas. See 62. /3.
3. In diphthongs (except , , and ), the breathing is placed over the
second vowel ; as, at)raj, oSros- See 26.
4. In place of the rongh breathing, the ^Eolic seems commonly, and the
Epic often, to have used the digamma ( 22. S), or the smooth breathing. In
Homer we find the smooth for the rough particularly in words which are
strengthened in some other way ; as, g#xjXaj, *?, aJgay, sX/af, vppi^ for
^14. III. The ACCENTS are the ACUTE ('), the
GRAVE ("), and the CIRCUMFLEX ("or "). For
their use, see Prosody.
^ 1 *>. IV. The MARKS OF PUNCTUATION are the
COMMA ( , ), the COLON ( ), the PERIOD ( . ), and
the NOTE OF INTERROGATION ( ; ), which has the
form of ours (?) inverted.
To these, some editors have judiciously added the NOTE OF EXCLAMA-
TION ( ! ).
^16. V. OTHER CHARACTERS.
1 . CORONIS and APOSTROPHE. The mark ( ' ), which at the beginning of
a word is the smooth breathing, over the middle is the CORONIS (xo^aw'f, crook-
td mark\ or mark of crisis, and at the end, the APOSTROPHE ( 30) ; as, rau-
rti for ra. aura, aXX* \yu for aXXa iyu.
2. The HYPOUIASTOLE (urotieurroXv, separation beneath\ or DIASTOLE (S<-
<rTX7, separation), is a mark like a comma, placed, for distinction's sake,
after some forms of the article and relative pronoun, when followed by the en-
clitics ri and ri ; as, o,rt, T,T, a,ri, to distinguish them from the particles
e'rt, TTI, on. Some editors more wisely omit it, and merely separate the en-
clitic by a space.
3. The HVPIIKN, DIURESIS, DASH, and MARKS OF PARENTHESLS and
QUOTATION are used in Greek as in English.
4. Among the other signs used by critics and editors, are BRACKETS [ ], to
inclose words of doubtful authenticity; the OKKI.ISK ( f or ), to mark
verses or words as faulty ; the ASTKKISK ( * ), to denote that something ia
wanting in the text ; and MARKS OF QUANTITY, viz. ( - ), to mark a vowel
or syllable as long ; ( w ), as short ; ( or ~ ), as either long or short.
'.]
PRONUNCIATION. 93
PRONUNCIATION.
^17. There are three methods of pronouncing
Greek which deserve notice; the ENGLISH, the
MODERN GREEK, and the ERASMIAN.
The pronunciation of every language, from the very laws of language, is m
a continual process of change, more or less rapid. And in respect to the Greek,
there is full internal evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially
changed before its orthography became fixed, and that it has materially
changed since. Therefore, as there is no art of embalming sounds, the an
cient pronunciation of the Greek can now only be inferred, and, in part, with
great uncertainty. Modern scholars have commonly pronounced it according
to the analogy of their respective languages. The English method, which has
prevailed in the schools of England and this country, conforms, in general, to
the analogy of our own tongue, and to our method of pronouncing the Latin.
The Modern Greek method (also called the Reuchlinian, from its distinguished
advocate, the learned Reuchlin) is that which now prevails in Greece itself.
It is given below, as exhibited in the Grammar of Sophocles. The Erasmian
method (so named from the celebrated Erasmus) is that which is most exten-
sively followed in the schools upon the continent of Europe, and which con-
forms most nearly to the prevailing analogy of the continental tongues.
NOTE. To avoid confusion, the terms protracted and abrupt are employed
below to denote what, in English orthoepy, we commonly call long and short
sounds ; and the term ictus (stroke, beat), to denote that stress of the voice
which in English we commonly call accent. For the proper use of the terms
long and short, and accent, in Greek grammar, see Prosody.
A. ENGLISH METHOD.
1 8. 1. SIMPLE VOWELS. 77, v, and have always the
protracted sounds of e in mete, u in tube, and o in note ; as,
frugal, Tl>7IT(W, V'fptoV.
i and o have the abrupt sounds of e in let, and o in dot ; ex-
cept before another vowel, and at the end of a word, where
they are protracted, like e in real, and o fn go ; as, Uy<a, Ao'/o? *
dtoi;, j'ooc ' <3f, TO.
and i are, in general, sounded like a and i in English \
when protracted, like a in hate, and i in pine ; when abrupt,
like a in hat, and i in pin. At the end of a word, i always
maintains its protracted sound ; but a, except in monosyllables,
takes the indistinct sound of a in Columbia ; as,
NOTE. If a. or < receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and ia
followed by a single consonant or , it is protracted in the penult, but abrupt
in any preceding syllable ; as, a,yea, !XT/ ya!ps<rs, QiXitu, 'A$w7os. From
this rule is excepted in any syllable preceding the penult, when the vowel of
the next syllable is s or / before another vowel (both without the ictus), in
which case is protracted ; as, *ctri&>, vsavfoif, yttXio
94 PRONUNCIATION. [BOOK I.
2. DIPHTHONGS. The diphthongs are, for the most part
pronounced according to the prevailing sound of the same com
binations in our own language ; si like ei in height, ot, like oi in
boil, vi like ui in quiet, uv like au in aught, sv and rjv like eu in
Europe, neuter, ov and wv like ou in thou ; in is sounded like
the affirmative ay (ah-ee, the two sounds uttered with a single
impulse of the voice), and vl like whi in while. Thus, sidvla
l, nkfvaovftoti, t]v$ov, ^otv^u, vlog.
3. CONSONANTS. The consonants are pronounced like the
corresponding letters in our own alphabet, with the following
special remarks.
y, x, and x, are always hard in sound : y being pronounced like g in go
(except before a palatal, where it has the sound of ng in long, 49) ; * and ^
Uke c in cap, and ch in chaos, i. e. like k ; as, yivof, Hyyos (pron. ang-gos\
has the sharp sound of th in thin ; as, Ssaj.
f has the sharp sound of s in say ; except in the middle of a word before
ft, and at the end of a word after and , where it sounds like z ; as, vS'io-cu
tcixruos, TVS, ug.
ff and r never have the sound of sh ; thus 'Aa-ia, is pronounced A'-si-a, not
A'-shi-a ; K^r/aj, Krit'-i-as, not Krish'-i-as.
At the beginning of a word, g sounds like z, and -^ like s ; and, of two
consonants which cannot both be pronounced with ease, the first is silent ; as,
%<, HroXipa.7os, /SJsXX/oy. So, in English, xebec, psalm, &c.
4. BREATHINGS. The rough has the sound of h ; the smooth
has no sound ; as, OQO?, ogog. See 13.
5. ICTUS. The primary ictus is placed according to the fol-
lowing
RULE. In dissyllables, the penult takes the ictus. In poly-
syllables, the penult, if long, takes the ictus ; but, if short,
throws it upon the antepenult. Thus, nairiQ, pron. pa'-ter, yqa.-
q>rjif, gra-phe-te, yguynt, graph'-e-te.
NOTE. If two or more syllables precede the primary ictus, one of these,
receive! a secondary ictus, in placing which the ear and formation of the woii
will decide.
B. MODERN GREEK METHOD.
1O. tt and a. are pronounced like a in father ; after the sound I
V/, i, /, 01, v, vi} it i.s pronounced like a in peculiarity. at like i. civ, it;,
w, uv, before a vowel, a liquid, or a middle mute (/?, y, J) are pronounced
like av, ev, eev, nv, respectively ; in all other cases, like af, ef, eef, off. /3 like .
y before the sounds E and I is pronounced nearly like y in yes, York; in aH
other cases it is guttural, like the German g in Tag. yy and yx. like ng in
stroiitjext. y| like nx. y% like ng-h, nearly. $ like th in that. t like
e in fellow, nearly. u like t. tv, see ttv. % like z. n and like i.
fiv, see etv. S like th in thin. / like t in machine. x, like k. X like /;
before the sound I, like // in William. p. like m. pr like mi, as, i
CH. l.J
HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY.
95
fSi* pronounced tmbrosthen. p.-^/ (j*.<*tr) like mbs. like n ; before the
sound I, like n in oNion. The words rov, <rjv, tv, a-lv, before a word beginning
with x or , are pronounced like toy, ryy, iy, <rvy before x or (see yx, y$) ;
e. g. TOX xa/^ov, Iv %uXo%w, pronounced Toyxas^ov, ly^vXo^w ; before r or ^
they are pronounced TO^M, TJ^*, t/t*j ^y^tt ; e. g. TOK <rov>jgov, ^i/v "^ v x,yi pro*
nounced TO/*TOVJ^O'V, ffuft\^v^. vr like c/, as, ivrifAos pronounced eudimos*
| like a? or As. like o in porter. at like /. aw h'ke oo in moon. vr, g,
like p, r. like s in soft ; before /J, y, S, ,, , it is sounded like ; e. g.
xotrpas, fffiiffiti, S^t^vw, pronounced xo^ftof, %fi'iira.i, Zp,u(vn ; so also at the
end of a word, rovs $o.ffi\i7s TVS y>jf, pronounced Tot^/Ja^Xs/j rr^yni- rh'ke
t in tell. v like t. vi like i. <p like ph or /. ^ like German ch 01
Spanish j. ^ like j?s. a; and u Uke o. <;u, see aw.
" The rough breathing is silent hi Modern Greek. So far as quantity is con-
cerned, all the short vowels are equivalent to the long ones. The written ac-
cent guides the stress of the voice. The accent of the enclitic, however, is
disregarded in pronunciation. But when the attracting word has the accent
on the antepenult, its last syllable takes the secondary accent ; e. g. ^r|ov ^a/,
pronounced Ss/lav^o/, but XsXsxra/ pot has the primary accent on the first syl-
lable A, and the secondary on *ra/." Soph. Gr. Gr., pp. 21, 22.
C. ERASMIAN METHOD.
^ SO. The Erasmian method differs from the English chiefly in sound-
ing a protracted Uke a hi father, i protracted like i in machine, n like ey hi
they, a.u like ou in our, ou Uke ou hi ragout, vi Uke our pronoun we, and like a
softdz.
HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY.
31. That the Greek alphabet was borrowed from the
Phoenician is abundantly established both by historical and by
internal evidence.
According to common tradition, letters were first brought into Greece by
Cadmus, a Phoenician, who founded Thebes. In illustration, we give the com-
mon Hebrew alphabet, which is substantially the same with the old Phoenician,
placing the corresponding Greek letters by the side. It should be remarked,
however, that the forms of the letters in both alphabets have undergone much
change. It will be noticed that most of the Oriental names of the letters,
when transferred to the Greek, require modification hi accordance with the law
respecting final letters ( 63), and that this is commonly effected by adding a.
Hebrew.
Greek.
Hebrew.
Greek.
N
Aleph
A
a.
Alpha
s
Lamed
A
X
Lambda
3
Beth
B
e
Beta
D
Mem
M
i*
Mu
J
Gimel
r
y
Gamma
J
Nun
N
t
Nu
1
Daleth
A
5
Delta
D
Samech
2
tr
Sigma
n
He
E
*
E (psilon)
y
Ayin
e
O (micron)
i
Vau
F
F
Vau
Q
Pe
n
V
R
T
Zayin
z
:
Zeta
2f
Tsade
B
I
Xi
n
Hheth
H
u
Eta
P
Koph
?
Koppa
a
Teth
3-
Theta
1
Resh
P
e
Rho
lod
I
i
Iota
Iff
Shin
^
San er
Sampi
D
Kaph
K
X
Kappa
n
Tau
T
r
Tan
96 HISTORY OF GREEK ORTHOGRAPHY. [BOOK I
29. This borrowed alphabet received in the course of
time important modifications.
. The original Phoenician alphabet had no proper vowels. The Greeks,
therefore, employed as such those letters which were nearest akin to vowels ,
viz. A, E, F, H, I, and O. In the transition of these letters into vowels
there appears to have been nothing arbitrary. A, as the soft or entirely open
breathing, naturally passed into the most open and deepest of the vowels.
E and II, as weaker and stronger forms of the palatal breathing, naturally
became signs of the shorter and longer sounds of the palatal vowel e ; in like
manner, the lingual breathing I passed into the lingual vowel f, and the labial
breathing F into the labial vowel u (compare i and y, or in some languages
j, and also u and v or w*) ; appears to have been originally a nasal breath-
ing, and was hence employed to represent the vowel most akin to a nasal, o.
The aspirate use of E and F still continued for a period, and hence these
letters when employed as vowels were distinguished by the addition of ^rxa,
smooth ; thus "E ^rxy, *Y -v//f Av. It will be observed that the last of these
letters, when used as a vowel, was somewhat changed in form, and was put at
the end of the old alphabet. The aspirate use of H prevailed still later, even
to the period of the highest Greek refinement, and when at length it had
yielded to the vowel use, the grammarian Aristophanes of Byzantium, who
flourished at the court of Alexandria, about 200 years B. C., is said to have
divided the old character into the two marks, I- for the rough, and -\ for the
smooth breathing. These marks were abbreviated to L J or r ~i ? and were
afterwards rounded to their present forms, ' '. To the same Aristophanes has
been ascribed the first use of marks of accent and punctuation.
/3. The sibilants 2, 5, and "^J) exchanged places in the alphabet ; so that
S came after N, ^ after II (hence called Sa^T?, the <S which stood next to Pi) }
and -2 after P.
y. To the Phoenician alphabet, the Greeks added the aspirates <I> and X,
the double consonant Y, and the sign for long o, II. These new letters they
placed at the end. In distinction the short o was now termed "0 /U.IXPOV,
small O ; and the long o, r H ^tyat, great O. The names of the other new
letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them ; thus,
<t>7, X/~, as, in English, ie, ce.
S. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also 9 and
^, which were only rougher forms of K and 2, fell into disuse, and these
letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 m tne ' r proper
places in the alphabet, but ty at the end. Thus employed, they were termed
Sfitima (l<r/V>j,tiav, sign, mark). See ^f 1, 11.
F was also named from its form the Dlgamma, i. e. the double gamma ;
and from its being longest retained among the JSolians, the jEolic Dinnnnna.
It is still found upon sonic inscriptions and coins. In Latin it commonly ap-
pears as v ; thus, F/ds/v, video, to see, FaJVaf, vinum, wine. Its restoration by
Bentley to the poems of Homer has removed so many apparent hiatuses and
irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time of Homer,
though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. The general law in
respect to the disappearance of F, appears to be the following : Before a vowel
or an initial , it is usually dropped, or becomes one of the common breathings ; but
otherwise, it usually passes into the cognate vowel v ; thus, /3Ff , /3F' ? /SaFif
(Lat. bovis, hovi, boves) become /3aa;, /Sa/ 1 , /3ai; ; but /saFf, /3'F, /3aF, /3aF-< be-
come /3aUf, 0av, flaw, j3a,<r/ (^ 14).
en. 2.] VOWELS. 97
Y 2*> The alphabet in its present complete form was first adopted by
the lonians (cf. 2), and hence termed 'Iv/* yoa.(Aft.a.ra.. In Attic in-
scriptions it was first used in the archonship of Euclides, B. C. 403.
The Greeks first wrote, like the Phoenicians, from right to left ; and then
alternately from left to right and right to left (as it was termed, /3sirre<pi<jv,i.e.
as the ox turns with the plough). In this mode the laws of Solon were written.
Herodotus, however (II. 36), speaks of the method of writing from left to
right as the established custom of the Greeks in his time. Till a very late
period the Greeks wrote entirely in capitals, and without marking the division
of words. The small cursive character first appears in manuscripts in the
eighth century, though there is evidence of its having been used earlier in the
transactions of common life.
That there should be great variety in the orthography of the dialects re-
sults of necessity from the fact, that in each dialect words were written as
they were propounced. The Greeks had no standard of orthography until the
nrevalence o/ the Common dialect ( 4).
CHAPTER 11.
VOWELS.
[113.]
The Greek has Jive simple vowels, and
seven diphthongs. Each of the simple vowels may
be either long or short, and each of the diphthongs
may have either a long or short prepositive, or first
vowel.
REMARKS. 1. Of three vowels, the long and short sounds
are represented by the same letters (, ; T, r ; , v) ; but of
the other two, by different letters (c, ?7 ; o, w).
NOTES, a.. The long sounds of these two vowels occur far more frequently
than those of the other three, and are hence distinguished by separate char-
acters.
/3. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the Greek
has seven vowels ; and call i and the short vowels, because they always rep-
resent short sounds, n and u the long vowels, because they always represent
long sounds, and , /, and u. the doubtful vowels , because their form leaves *.
doubtful whether the sound is long or short.
y. There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels were pronounced
in the same manner as the corresponding vowels are now pronounced upon the
continent of Europe ; i. e. a, like a in father, wall, fan (not as in hate) ; , i,
like e in they, then (not as in mete) ', i like i in machine, pin (not as hi pine) :
w, a, like o in note, not ; u like u in tube, bull. They will hence be thus placed
Upon the scale of precession or attenuation.
VOWELS. DIPHTHONGS*.
[BOOK I
Scale of
uation by the tongue.
Entire
Openness.
Least
""" ' Opening.
Least
Opening.
In general, , t, and are termed the opera, and u and t the close vowels
but a. is more open than t and o, and t is somewhat closer than u.
25. 2. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes
from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or
last vowel is always t or v. Hence the combinations possible
are only seven, or, counting separately the proper and improper
diphthongs, fourteen. Of these, MV scarcely occurs, except in
the Ionic dialect.
A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunctive vowel,
and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combining two sounds ;
but a long prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the sound of the subjunc-
tive, and the diphthong was then termed improper, as though diphthongal
only hi appearance.
3. After long, ??, and w, the subjunctive t so lost its sound,
that it was at last merely written beneath the prepositive, if
this was a small letter, and was then termed iota subscript (sub-
scriptus, written beneath}. With capitals, it still remains in the
line, but is not sounded. Thus, "'Aidys or <5^, pron. Hades,
or //flq, ede ; 3 Jlidj or (ady, ode.
NOTES, a. The / subscript is often written where it does not belong, from
false views of etymology ; as in the Epic dative ^v^ifn, for Si^xp< (^[ 8) ;
and in the aorist of liquid verbs, which have en in the penult of the theme ;
thus, from Qetiiv, ttl^u (roots <pv, -), tQym, fax, *, for ?pja, ^, a.ou
SO Perf. II. rip?ya, for #i<f> >jva.
0. In some cases the best critics differ : thus, hi the infinitive of verbs in
-, some write r^av, as contracted from c/^ai/v, and others r/^v, as con-
tracted from an older form T/^H. So in the adverbial forms *>?, or>j, or ?,
Jrj, and the like.
2 6. 4. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned
(a, 17, and <>>), the breathings and accents are written over the
second vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels
as, nvrili herself, but ai/rq, cry ; yvda, but ^'i/o ' uigwiq (a)
but "Aidrjg ().
If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced separately
the second is marked with a diaeresis ( 16. 3) ; as, avrn, fort.
For a full exhibition of the Greek vowels, simple ana
CH. 2.] PLECESS1ON OF VOWELS. 99
compound, see the Table (fl 3). They are there divided into
classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or
leading element, as A sowids, &c. ; and into orders, according
to the length of this sound, or its combination with other sounds,
as short vowels, &c. The classes are arranged according to
the openness of the vowel from which they are named. Vow-
els belonging to the same class are termed cognate.
The Greek vowels are subject to a
great number of EUPHONIC CHANGES, which may
be referred, for the most part, to two great heads,
the PRECESSION OF VOWELS, and the UNION OF
SYLLABLES.
These changes diminish the effort in speaking, by reducing the volume of
sound employed, or by preventing hiatus, and lessening the number of syl-
lables.
I. PRECESSION OF VOWELS.
^28. The great tendency in Greek to the pre-
cession or attenuation of vowel sounds shows it-
self,
1.) In the change of simple vowels.
Precession especially affects or, as the most open of the
vowels, changing it, when short, to e and o, and, when long,
to ij, and sometimes to <w.
Hence these three vowels may be regarded as kindred, and are often inter-
changed in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the verbs r^t~
xu^ <TTip&>, we find the root in three forms, T^T-, T^S^T-, and T^OST-, trr^a.<p-^
ffT^np-, and ffTgaty- 5 and in priyvvfAij we find the forms poty-^ fay--) and pay-.
This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels inserted, for the
sake of euphony, in the inflection of words. Thus, in the first declension,
the connecting vowel is a, but hi the second, , for which in one case i ap-
pears. In the indicative active, the connecting vowel in the aorist and per-
fect is (passing, however, into t in the 3d pers. sing. ; compare the imper-
ative /s^Ast/fl-ac), while in the present, imperfect, and future, it is o before a
liquid, but otherwise i.
^ 9. 2.) In the lengthening of the short vow-
els, and in the general laws of contraction. Thus,
. The long vowel is regarded as the short vowel doubled
that is, ^n , TJ ~=. f, W =. oo, v ^^ vv, and I i7. When-
ever, therefore, in the formation of words, a short vowel is
lengthened, or two short vowels of the same class are united
100 . VOWELS. [BOOK i
in sound, the corresponding long vowel ought to result. Bu
through precession, which especially affects the long open
vowels, , unless it follows ?, i, 0, or go, is usually length-
ened, not to , but to the closer 17, and te and oo commonly
form, not ij and w, but the closer diphthongs ft and oi, which
are hence termed the corresponding diphthongs of i and o.
/?. Contraction more frequently exhibits some attenuation of
vowel sound. See 31-37. This naturally appears less in
the earlier than in the later contractions. Compare /SwotAJjs
with /3</aa ( 37. 2).
NOTE. A similar tendency to pass from a more open to a closer sound ap-
pears in the general law for the formation of diphthongs ( 25. 2).
II. UNION OF SYLLABLES.
^ 3O. The most important changes belonging
to this head are, A. CONTRACTION, which unites
two successive vowels in the same word; B. CRA-
sis (xpacrts, mingling), which unites the final and
initial vowels of successive words ; and C. APOS-
TROPHE or ELISION, which simply drops a final
vowel before a word beginning with a vowel.
In poetry, two vowels are often united in pronunciation, which are written
(separately. This union is termed synizesis (W0vf, placing togetiier\ or $yn-
ecphoriesit (rtnixQuvwns, pronouncing together).
A. CONTRACTION.
$31* Contraction takes place in three ways ; by simple
union, by absorption, and by union with precession. From the
law of diphthongs ( 25. 2), two vowels can unite without
change only when the latter is i or u, and the former a more
open vowel. In other cases, therefore, either one of the vow-
els is absorbed, i. e. simply lost in the other, which, if before
short, now of course becomes long ; or else precession lakes
place, changing one of the vowels to i or v, which then forms
a diphthong with the other vowel. The following are the gen-
eral rules of contraction, with the principal cases belonging to
each, and the prominent exceptions.
NOTE. An /, when absorbed in , u, or , is writt.cn beneath it. The
laws of contraction take effect, without regard to an < subscript, or the sub-
junctive t of the diphthong i< ; as, an ? , an a. ( 33).
CH. 2.J CONTRACTION. lOl
^ 3. t, Two vowels, which can form a diph-
thong, imte without further change. Thus,
become as become aa
|7 j, Qgrn'ffffa, Q^y.ffffa.. vt vt, vixv'i vixui (Ep.).
EXCEPTION, a/', like ai', becomes a ; as, yfy&i, y^a. ' unless, with Thiersch,
we prefer to write yri^a,i.
^33. II. a, (1.) before an E sound (H 3),
absorbs it ; but (2.) before another A sound, is it-
self absorbed. (3.) a, or (4.) ??, with an O sound,
forms o. Thus,
become aa become as
(!.} ai a, ripett riftec. e u, fl%oet ;
eta a, rtu.of.ii? npZ;. ttu a>, ri^au rtf&u.
ari a, <rt/u.titirt rtftetn. utx. &;, xoutz; wu$.
ety a, Tie&dy ripta. KOI ca, <rif&ec.oiftt TiftMfti.
(2.) aa a, ytoa,ei y'iooe,. aev a, nuxovyi ripttuffi.
aa a, (Avdet. (jwa.. ova, a, etletrof ur^g.
tta,t a<, fj-vcioc,! (Aya.7. (4) <"? ^5 *0r,\ni\ri oviXurt*
^3.) ao w, n/Aa.ouiv ri[AU[&ii. oy a;, ai^or,; oidcy;.
EXCEPTIONS, a. The closer takes the place of a in the contract forms
of four every-day verbs ; viz. cri/vaiw, to hunger, J/^aw, to thirst, %ga.a{tat, to
usf, and ^a', to /ice; as, T<va'/ <ruv%v t %gctiff&eti %t>ij<rS-tt,i. Add the verbs
xvaw, ffftctv, and ^aiw the Subjunctive of verbs in -fit, as, /Wa'j (from 7o-r-
^/) <VT>} and the liquid Aorist (see 56).
/3. In adjectives, o before a and is absorbed ; as, WXoa
y. In o Jaj, ear, the Nominative singular becomes aJj by an absorption of
the a, but the other forms are contracted according to the rule ; as, Jrof, uret.
S. For the change of aj into <w, in verbs in -ou, see 37. 3.
34:. REMARKS. 1. , taking the place of v before o
( 50) is contracted like e ; thus, in the Ace. plur., (Ao'/ot-?, Ao-
tottg f^fovg ' n
themes of Dec. m., (IV?, l?) ?ic, ({jprfvrc, <jprfc) <JD'/C, (odovr?,
o(5oc) o^ot'c, (^V?, ^wt,-) (M$* In feminine adjectives and par-
ticiples, (qpyfVra, <jpfxi'j?aa) fpotvfion^ {riyoviun, uyootaa) uyovoa *
in the 3d pers. plur. of verbs, (fiovltvovai, fiovfavoaai)
oi>at, (r/#5Kn) ttfreaat n^fltft, (^Wovat) 5t5oaai didovai,
xvuvat)
NOTES, a. By a similar contraction with /Sa'a? /Wy, we find also a? vxus
and you.u.s <y^a,Z; (^f 14). In like manner vw; occurs in the Nom. plur. by
contraction from v-;, but only in late writers.
*
102 VOWELS. CONTRACTION. [BOOK I
0. For xeicis x,*s-> see 116 - & For Kxiv*t OiJ*x, see 109. /3.
35. 2. When a long is contracted with an O sound
there is usually inserted before the w an f, which, however, is
not regarded in the accentuation as a distinct syllable ; as, 'o$
fro)?) *uc (^f 9), MfreJido? Mivifatas, 'AiQflduo AtQlidtti (fl 8).
So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. ( 48. 1, 242. a), when a is short.
36. III. (1.) fa becomes ??, and (2.) ff, /.
(3.) and o, with o, form ov ; but (4.) with other
O sounds are absorbed. (5.) In other combina-
tions not already given (^ 32, 33), e is absorbed.
Thus,
become as become as
la ;, %Vffia, %(>v<rii* too ev, tyiXiooffi
(2.) tf 11, foXiif woXti;* oca u, ^rt\'ou
*/ /, ^/X/y <piXs7v. oca w, vow vS.
lit 11, xX?; xX?;. 004 0j, vao/ H07.
^3.) to 0y, JI^/XEOV I<p/Xafy. 00w 0t/,
01 0f, ^>?XTi ^XatiT. (5.) ea/ a;,
0E< ov,
00 0V,
(4.) ,. ,
fW 0t, OffTtM OffTy.
^ 37. EXCEPTIOXS. 1. tat preceded by i, /, , or ^0 ( 29), or in
the plural or rfwa/ of the first or second declension, becomes a ; as, lyi'ia. ityta,^
a(>yv(>a{, a^yu^ta. a.^yu^a. t trux'tots ffvx.a,s t ffuxia ffuxJa.^ offria. otrra,. Yet
^, Gen. pr0y Qgvros ( 104).
2. In the dual of the third declension, tt becomes n ; as, rti%tt ni%*. In
the older Attic writers, we find the same contraction in the Nom. plur. of
nouns in -ivt j as, /Sas^Xus /3a0-/Xf (incorrectly written -??), instead of the
common /3a0-<X/V.
3. In verbs in -0a>, the syllables on and 0/, except in the Infinitive, become
M (i. e. the o and i unite, absorbing the n and i) ; as, Xt ^xr, ^X0t/; J>j-
X07,-. Bt JjX0K (Infiu.) JiX0wy, 5^>jf (from J/'^/) J^f; ( 33).
4. In the termination of the second person singular passive, i/ is con-
tracted into tj or n, and *eu into y ; as, /30t/Xi Jia< /SowXit/? or
5. For social contractions of i in the augment, see 188, 189.
RKMAKK. Contraction is omitted in many words in which it might take
f)jce according to the preceding rules ; particularly in nouns of the third de-
c*3nsion, and in dissyllabic verbs in -i.
R. CRASIS.
^ 3S. Crasis (1.), for the most part, follows the
CH. 2.J CRASIS. 103
laws of contraction, disregarding, however, an i
final, which, according to the best usage, is not
even subscribed. But often (2.), without respect
to these laws, a final, or (3.) an initial vowel is
entirely absorbed.
Crasis occurs most'y in poetry. It is commonly indicated by the coronis
( ) ( 1 6), except when this mark is excluded by the rough breathing ; as,
raf*ai } otipoi. When an initial vowel has been absorbed without any further
change, the words are more frequently separated in writing ; as, el 'pot. The
same is sometimes done when a final vowel has been absorbed. And, hence,
cases are often referred to aphoeresis and apostrophe which properly belong to
crasis. For the change of a smooth mute to its cognate rough, when the
second word is aspirated, see 65. For the accent, see Prosody.
3O. The principal words in which the final vowel is sub-
je<~t to crasis are the following :
. The article; thus, for
! ix, a IT/. yx, euar/. For
s/ E^a/', ovfto'i. 0,1 ayaS-a/', ayaS-a/.
5 fl^v/j, ougvif. TOV aurau, TUVTOV.
(2.) o avj, , or, less (3.) a aTvof, Jxaj.
Attic, avr,o. 01 ifio!^ el 'f-ai-
r av^a/', Tavd^/ TOW V^XTOS, 3-ovoa.TOS*
NOTICS. 1. The neuter forms TO and ra are especially subject to crasis
thus, for
(1.) TO avr/a, TovvetvTiev, For <ra eVXa, S-J-rXas.
TO OVOfta, TOVVOfAOS:. (2.) T8 aXjjS-SJ, 1
Tfl /^ar/av, $ol[Jt.a.Tiov. (3.) ra a.i<r%gd, 1
2. In crasis, tri^ay, o/Aer, retains the old form an^a? thus, for
^2.) 6 ITlOOf, UTtgOS. For TOV ITJ^at/,
re ST4^av, SaTi^ax. TIJ)' iTtgu,
4O. /?. The conjunction xa/, and; thus, for
(1.) xa/ af, xa/ lav, xav. For
xa/ iy, xa/ ix, xav, xax. (-) * a
Kui Tra, xara. (2, 3.)
y. A few other particles ; thus, for
For ^n^Tw $v,
TOV s^r/v, rat; a"T/y.
evfot aa avraa. ra \oov vroviv.
104 VOWELS. - APOSTROPHE. [l3OOK.,
<). Some forms of the pronouns ; thus, for
\yu oidas., jyaJ5. For o itycgii^ iiifltost.
tyu oiic-ci, fyafAai. oS m*, ouvixot-
fjt,ol iOffXSI) fjLS'JOOX,'!. OTOV 'iviX.CC., oQoUV-X.lt.
ffoi icrriV) tro'jcr-rtv. av, y. i/&i, v, u,u.i.
The few cases which remain are best learned from observation.
C. APOSTROPHE, OR ELISION.
41. Apostrophe affects only the short vowels
rt, , i, and o, and sometimes, in poetry, the passive
terminations in at (and perhaps 01 in the enclitics
poi, 0ot, rot). Jn monosyllables (except the Ep. pet,
and a few rare or doubtful cases), s only is elided.
For the mark of apostrophe, see 1 6. For the accentuation, see Prosody.
Elision is most common,
1.) In the prepositions, and other particles of constant use;
as, <*<f eaviov (for nno SHVTOV, 65), fji fxarov, xoti f/if, and,
in composition (where the sign ' is omitted ),uv^o/ii, <5tf>l)ro>,
' tr, y ovdiv, [i<i V, o^ J 6 (ors O),T^ uv.
2.) In a few pronouns, and in some phrases of frequent oc-
currence ; as, rovi AAo, tuvi r'jdt] ' yivoir V, tatf onov (tart
OTIOV), Ag'/Oi/i V, ot^ or/, qto/'jU f/aj.
^ 42, REMARKS, a. Elision is less frequent in *, than in the other
short vowels above mentioned. Particularly, it is never elided by the Attics
in -rifi or on (which might then be confounded with art) ', and never in the
Epic \ffffl (2d person singular of ilfti). It is never in prose, and very rarely
in At.tic poetry, elided in the Dative singular, which might then be confounded
with the Accusative. The forms which take paraaogic ( 66) are not elided
in prose, except irri.
/J. Elision ia least frequent in Ionic prose. In Attic prose, it is found chief-
ly in a few words, but these often recurring. In poetry, where hiatus is more
carefully avoided, its use is far more extended. In respect to its use or omis-
sion in prose, much seems to depend upon the rhythm of the sentence, the
emphasis, the pauses, and the taste of the writer. There is, also, in this
respect, a great difference among manuscripts.
DIALECTIC VARIATIONS.
$ 43. The dialectic variations in the vowels may be mostly
referred to the heads of PRECESSION, UNION or RESOLUTION,
, ann INSERTION or OMISSION.
$ 44. 1. PRECESSION prevailed most in ihr s0 Ionic, and
nil. 2.J DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 105
least in the rough Doric and ./Eolic ; while the Attic, \vhieh
blended strength and refinement, held a middle place. E. g.
1. Long a, for the most part, is retained in the Doric and ^Eolic, but in the
Ionic passes into >j ; while in the Attic it is retained after t., <, , and , but
otherwise passes into ( 29). Thus, Dor. 'a^iga, Att. fi/tiga, ton. fi/u.i^
Dor. Sa^oj, iraLya., etixvra;, Att. and Ion. ^tifto;, wyn, uxvrvs Dor. and Att.
<r>>$id t voa.'y/u.ei, Ion. ffotyin, T^Jjy^a. So, even in diphthongs, Ton. vt/f, yo*iv; t
for vj, y^af;, and in Dat. pi. of Dec. I., ->;<r;, ->]?, for -</, -a/j.
NOTE. The use of this long produced, in great measure, the Doric feature
called <T>.T/ytflj, broad pronunciation, which was imitated by the Attics in
the lyric parts of their drama ( 6).
2. Short a. is retained by the Doric in some words, where, in the Attic, it
passes into g ; and in some (particularly verbs in -<*/) by the Attic, where it
becomes t in the Ionic. Thus, Dor. r^a^, "Aora^jj, OK.&, <pa<r/, Att. r^i<fn,
fl'ri, <[>(>Sffi Att. again, <p/>ircieu, riff<ra,g<;^ a<rv, Ion. ogiw, <f>JiTlu,
3. In nouns in -/y, -tus, the characteristic t commonly passes, in the Ionic,
into i throughout ; as, ra>./j, <a?, u (contracted into f according to 29. a),
iv, us, /&>v, r/, /j (contr. f?).
4. As the long of t and o, or the contraction of n and oo or i, the stncter
Doric prefers the long vowels n and u to the closer diphthongs u and w ;
while, on the other hand, the Ionic is particularly fond of protracting t and o
to 11 and 9v or 01. Thus, Dor. ^j'^ lu^os Gen. of Dec. n., TU u^a.tu Infin.
lujjjv, ^;^>!v, vvvuv ' for /', ^oyXaj, row ovgctvov, lu^tTv^ ^a.ionv^ vvvovv. Ion.
|s?v;, fiovvos, roiy, for ^svaf, povos, foe*. Att. xo^o?, flv^a, fl'^a; Ion. xoupof,
otJ\fj.*, ou^of Dor. x<w0y, uvopa, ^os. Both the Doric and Ionic have <5v for
oJv, therefore, contracted from lav.
5. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels
( ; 28) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general law of
the dialects, the Ionic has a more open sound than the Attic, or the Attic than
the Doric or iEolic ; Att. '/, 'asra;, Ion. //, aura? Att. xoita, xXuu* Ion.
and Com. xaiu, xXet'iu Att. S-O.KOI, Ion. Seaxos Ion. r^aTeu, ru.fjt.vu, /uiyaB-o;,
Att. r^'i'ru, Tiftvca, ft<y^^os Ion. u,ppea$'uu, Att. Of'puliw Ion. ft'/retftpetet, Att.
f/.trniufioia. Dor. and Ep. a/, Att. it Dor. S-vaa-x^, Ion. and Att. Sv/jirxw,
/Eol. Svetiffxtu Att. o-Tjaraf, $oa.x i i.u;, cra^aX/j, ./Eol. trr^orog, figo%iu; t <x'efia.-
\is Att. ovofjia, vEol. ovufta, Att. IQTIT'OV, ^Eol. /-TrtTe*
45. II. UNION OR RESOLUTION. A. The CONTRACTION
of vowels prevailed most in the vivacious Attic, and least in
the luxurious Ionic. By the poets, it is often employed or
omitted according to the demands of the metre. There are
also dialectic differences in the mode of contraction, which, for
the most part, may be explained by precession. E. g.
1 In contracting a. with an O sound, the Doric often prefers & to the
ckver & ; in the first declension, regularly. Thus, Dor. 'Arsi^a, TV S-vcav
(^f 8), flas-s^av, -eiva;, rtiva.vn, 2/a-Tr^va^Ej, -retires, for 'Aroii^au (uncontraeted
-&\ TUV B-V^UV (-&>v), \\i)<rttbuv, -uvos (-eiuv, -atavay), vruicavri (-aavr/), oiot-vti^di-
iiiv (.at.9ft.iv). TguTos (-ftros). A like contraction appears in proper names in
-X*9j ; as, Dor. MmXj, for MtvA*af.
106 VOWELS. [BOOK i
2 For the contraction of a and oo or at, see 44. 4.
3. With the Ionics and some of the Dorics, the favorite contraction of t
and tov is into iv, instead of ov. This use of iu for jy sometimes extends tft
cases where this diphthong results from a different contraction. Thus, <p/Xsw-
for <piXoup.iv (-fa^sv), p/Xav (-*), e/*aw ("") 3^"
^ixKitutri) in Herodotus for t^ixeiiov (-ae), ibixn'iov.
(-aav), ^/fcawayav (-sava"/) Xft/rst/vra M. 283, for Awravvra (-osvra).
4. The Dorics (but not Pindar), contrary to the general law of the dialect,
commonly contract a with an E sound following, into ; as, l^rw, a^yJJv, X?j,
from 8<!urai, <r/y/v, Xasjj. Cf. 33. a.
5. In the contractions which follow the change of v before <r ( 58), the
^Eolic often employs 0.1 and a/, for and au ; as, Ace. pi. ruts r/^ta/'j, <ra/$ va-
pa/?, for rets riftcii, rov; voftiu; Nom. sing, of adj. and partic. ^sXa/j, ru^eug,
Tv^etiffct, t%oi<ra, for ^sXa;, TU^KS, TV^Affei, i%ot>ffei 3d pers. pi. of verbs,
ip/tiffi, XOUVTOKTI, for ^d-/, K^virrovffi. The Doric has here great variety, both
employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels (as though > were simply
dropped before ), the common diphthongs of contraction ( 34), and the
./Eolic diphthongs; thus, Ace. pi. rs^vaj and -ri%vus (Theoc. 21. 1) ; rovs
Xuxovs and rus Xvxof (Theoc. 4. 11) ; its and y, one; Mowo-a, M^<r (Theoc.),
Mo7<ra (Find.), and Laconic Ma/ Nom. sing, of partic. <p^Va/f (Find. 01.
2. 108), fate* (Ib. 73). So, likewise, for cu before r in * a< V, Theoc.
11. 78.
6. The Ionic use of av for aw in a few words, appears, at least in some of
them, to have arisen from a union of and to form u ; thus, for rawra,
l,wrav, o'sawray, lawrov, Ion. TUVTO, iftiuwrov, fftavTou, luvrovj from ra a^Ta,
t^fa alrov, via O.VTOV, 'la ctbreu. In the reciprocal pronouns, the a> passed
into the other cases. We find also Ion. S-wiJ^a, r^uv/^a. (yet better rj^),
for B-v//.K, r^ocvf^ee.. In all these words, ww is written by some with a dire-
8is ; as, Suvpct.
4O. B. Vowels which appear only as diphthongs in the
Attic are often RESOLVED in the other dialects, especially the
Ionic and jEolic, into separate sounds. In the Ionic, the reso
lution of , with c prolonged, into r/t, is especially common ; as
(faatlifirji xA/j'/c, for (SaatJitta^ xJidg.
NOTKS. a. On the other hand, the Ionic in a few cases employs contrac-
tion whene the Attic omits it, particularly of on into u ; as, ti s , i'/3(ra, tvu-
fety fiuSia, fly&vxavTa, for /^j, i/Sa>?a-, ivevira,
/3. The fondness of the Ionic for a concurrence of vowels leads it, in some
cases, to change v to a. ( 50) after a vowel (which, if before , now becomes
l) ; as, 'Agitrrayogia, t$wiTa, for 'Ag/0-Tasya^av, i^i/vay-ra.
C. In CRASIS, the Doric and Ionic often differ from the Attic
by uniting the o of the article with and ul initial, to form w
and ot ; as, TO oiff&lfi Kii^dsg ' ol wj^of?, an'dyfg ' ol ainoloi
(>j roAot.
In the following erases, which are found in Herodotus, and the two first
also in Homer, the smooth breathing has txken the place of the rough ; a up-
CH. *^. DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 107
el xx/, Jxxa/. Other dialectic erases are,
Dor. a i'Xaif'j,-, uXufyoi o t, w| xai Jx, xi?x xa/ tin, xji-n Ion. a iVaef,
47. III. QUANTITY. For a short vowel in the Attic, the
other dialects often employ a long vowel or diphthong, and the
converse. Thus,
Ion. $/rXjave? for /TXa-/aj Ion. T'/<r$saf, iloiy, aTa^|/j, f&i%uv,
for '-r/TJ^uoff, tuetToe,, a.-irobifys, (n't^uv, K/>tIff<re*v Dor. and Ep. i<raos for IrecT-
9" JEol. 'AXxia?, a^aof, for *AXxra?, a^a^f. See 44. f | 45. 5.
NOTE. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel
according to the metre. A short vowel when lengthened in Epic verse
usually passes into a cognate dipthohg ; as, i/XwXavS-asy for iXjjXwSaj, A. 202.
48. IV. INSERTION OR OMISSION. Vowels are often
inserted in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here,
as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial-
ly the Epic. These often double a vowel, or insert the half
of it (i. e. the short for the long), for the sake of the metre,
particularly in contract verbs ; as, ttyyrjvov A<3wp, for
, A. 41, (pdnv&ev, Tj/Swtoaa, oooo?, oQang, ^fAcJovif?,
/xofft, for (pdv&sV) ij/?w(ja, 0>w, 0, yikwvitg, <jpw?, ya-
Aw^, txoat.
REMARKS. 1. The Ionic is especially fond of the insertion of t ; as, Gen.
pi. av^iwv, %yiiuv, etvricav, for av$g<yv, &c. ; 2 Aor. infill, tvgiuv, Xnrinv, for
2. In the Doric and Epic, the particles , y', x-ra, -ra^a, cra, w-ra,
and -rori (Dor. for T^S), often omit the final vowel before a consonant, with
such assimilation of the preceding consonant as euphony may require ; as,
a.0 fftpwi, aft ^MftaTfi, Zyxgiiris, avrra? ( 68. 3), xa ^uvetfuv, KU.V
( 62. /3), xa* xsipaXJJf, xay yvu, xax^siJa/, xa^ ^eav, xaXX/rov,
wao Zv/, tovviff^ti, ^/SaXXs^v, TOT rav. When three consonants . are thus
brought together, the first is sometimes rejected ; as, xaxravs, a^vaVt/, for
xa'jexravi, apftvdirii. So, sometimes in the Doric, even before a single conso-
nant ^ as, xafixivc-JY.
NOTES. . From the close connection of the preposition with the follow-
ing word, these cases are not regarded as making any exception to the rule
in 63. Compare 68. /3. The two words are often written together, even
when there is no composition ; as, x$$yya^, rrry.
/5. In these words, the final vowel was probably a euphonic addition to the
original form. Compare a.v'o and VTO with the Latin ab and sub. The old
form <ror, in accordance with the rule ( 63), became w^ k and a^ar/, whence
7. Some of these forms even passed into the Attic, and into Ionic prose ;
3, xarSamry (poet.), u^drns (Xen.), a^iraty'a^a/ (Herod.).
I. *A has also, by aphaeresis, the Epic form /', which is enclitic.
1 08 CONSONANTS. [BOOH
CHAPTER III.
CONSONANTS.
[IT 3.]
The Greek has eighteen CONSONANTS,
represented by seventeen letters.
They are exhibited in the Table (^[ 3) according to two methods of divis-
ion, employed by orthoepists. Consonants of the same class, according to the
first method, are termed cognate; of the same order, coordinate.
REMARKS. 1. The letter y performs a double office. When followed by
another palatal, it is a nasal; otherwise a middle mute. As a nasal, it has r
for its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute, g ( 12). For its
pronunciation, see 18. 3.
2. From the representation of the Latin v by /3 ( VirgiUus, B/^y/X<f ), it is
probable that in the ancient, as in the modern Greek ( 19), the middle
mutes approached nearer to the aspirates than in our own language, and that,
in forming them, the organs were not wholly closed.
5O. 3. The semivowels v and a have corresponding
vowels in a and * ; that is, a may take the place of ?, and of
a, when euphony forbids the use of these consonants ; as, fcp&n-
Quiat, for i'tpttaovjixi) aiifoso) (contracted ant^u) for a-it-gato
See 34, 46. ,5, 56 - 58, 60, 63. R., &c.
NOTE. In like manner, v is the corresponding vowel of the old consonant
F. See 22. J.
^51. The following laws, mostly euphonic, are
observed in the formation and connection of words
A. IN THE FORMATION OF WORDS.
f. A labial mute before o forms with it i/>; and a
palatal, ; thus,
become as tin-nine
tfif %/, yfft* yoxu. %<r ,
NOTE. In like manner, is the union of a lingual with a sibilant sound,
and in many words has taken the place of <r$ ; e. g. adverbs of place in -%i
as, for 'A^rWS', 'ASwWi, for <=)iij3a*3i, 0>-/3*i and many vprbs in -2>
as, for pil.io'ttuj piXiZv, for QHeirbv, <PJ*'W. In those verbs, the old form." re-
main in the yEolic and Doric f 70. V.). For a lingual htfore , see 55.
Ch. 3.] EUPHONIC LAWS. 109
^ 52. II. Before a lingual mute, a (1.) labial
or (2.) palatal mute becomes coordinate (^ 49, H 3),
and (3.) a lingual mute, a ; thus,
become as become as
rtrgi-rrai. %$ yJ
yiyott-rrai. *$ ^
odfibnv. (3.) rr -T, utop.ot.rra. uv'o
X$/<9->. ^T 0-T,
(2.) yr *T,
rsruxra/.
EXCEPTION. Two lingual mutes may remain together, if both are radi-
cal ; as, ^arrar, 'ArS/'f.
^ 9>$. III. Before p, a labial mute becomes ,
a palatal, y, and a lingual, a ; thus,
become as become as
rfjt <r/u.^ eava/u.etTfteti JtitftttlTfUU*
Except in a few such words as ax^w, xsuS^v, vsa^^fl?, Terfios and some
others from the dialects ; as, in Homer, 0^*7, Jfytsv, iTiviSft.iv, xix.agv3-fx.ivos,
axuxfiivos.
54. IV. v before a (1.) labial or (2.) pala-
tal, is changed into the cognate nasal (^ 49, 4 3) ;
and (3.) before a liquid, into that liquid ; thus,
become as become as
(1.) iir pf, ffwreiir^M ffvft<raiff%ai. vy yy, yvvyivvs
/3 ^tt/3, IvjSflsXXw e^jSaXXa;. v^ y^;, (ryy^a/^
r$ ft<p, ffvvQigv ffUfiQiga. v| y|, iv%iu ly%iu
9/u, ftp, Ivft'iv/v 1/u.ftiva. (3.) X XX, 'ivXoyos 'i*.Xo
w ^j ivij/t%os tp.$u%of. ^ pp, trvvoci-rra v^a.
(2.) vx yx, vxXiw iyxaXsiw.
NOTES, a. Enclitics are here regarded as distinct words; thns,
Tcvye. We find, however, final v changed in like manner upon old i
tions ; as, MEM<l>2rXA2, for ^ ^>v^ (Insc. Potid.) ; so, Al'KAI,
TOAAOrON, and even E22AMOI (cf. 57. 5, 68. 3), for &, x/,
X0y0y, Iv situ.'*.
/3. Before ft in the Perfect passive, sometimes becomes <r and is some-
times dropped as, for <r5<pv/*a/, jr'iq>a,(rp.u,i for xsxX<y./, ijtXqwMfc
y. Before * in the Perfect active, y was commonly dropped, or the form
Avoided, except bv later writers ; as, for x*/9/v*, *i*."<
.0
110 CONSONANTS. [BOOK 1
^ 55. V. A lingual or liquid should not pre-
cede <y. This is prevented in various ways.
1. A lingual mute is simply dropped before a ; thus,
become aatwat, oral?,
5G. 2. In liquid verbs, the a formative of the Future
and Aorist is changed into e ( 50), which (1.) in the Future is
contracted with the affix, but (2.) in the Aorist is transposed
and contracted with the vowel of the penult.
Thus, in the Fut. and Aor. of the liquid verbs, ayytXXa/, to announce,
distribute, xftlvto, to judge, vKuvu, to wash, and Sg, to flay, for
Hvif&tret, (ivttftct)
tXPivtra, (Ix-onva.)
lorXvvff'a, (IwXwsva)
'&i(><ra, (e^8ja)
NOTES, a. Here as commonly passes into j, unless / or precedes ; thus,
, to cause to slip, <pa/v, to show (roots <r<paX-, <pv-), have in the Aor.
<r, to-^asXa) ir<p>?Xa, 2<pjva while -r/a/vw, fo fatten, ri^etlvu, to com-
plete (roots ir/av-, wscav-), have fWava, ETS^ava. But la^tttlvu, to make lean,
xifiattvea, to gain, x.oi'l.a.ivu, to hollow out, Xivxitlvu, to whiten, ogyaivu, to enrage,
<TT/v<w, to ripen, have a. in the penult of the Aor. ; nr^etlvea, to bore, n ; and
<rr,fjt.a.ivu, to give a signal, ftieti*ea, to stain, both n and a. A"gu, to raise, and
a'XAa^a/, to /ea^, have a, which in the Indicative is changed by the augment
into 9i ; thus, ^aa, a.au, cioaifAi.
/3. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with a- ; as, *iXX, to land,
x.'i\ffcu, 'ixiXffct ' xuoa, to meet with, to chance, xvf><ru, 'ixugffa, a^vufn (r. a^-),
to rouse, o^tru, u^aa. QUPU, to knead, 'l<$u(>ffa.. Add these forms, mostly from
Homer, %poet t (X^oe, iWa, 'io?o(*.a.i, x'lpffu, 'ixigtra.,
3. In the Nominative, the formative a (1.) after p,
and sometimes (2.) after v, becomes f, which is then trans-
posed, and absorbed ( 31) by the preceding vowel ; as, for
(2.) <ra.ia.n-i
(Jnretg) f*iru(>.
Except in Sa^ ( 109).
4. In the Dative plural of the third declension, v preceding
o without an intervening T, is dropped ; as, for
^.i>.a.<ri. For 1i
So also itu'/7t T, in the Dat. pi. of adjectives in -itf ; as, for
f/l<r<.
5. In the feminine of adjectives in -f/c, v before o becomes
a; as, for xnult
*:H. 3.] EUPHONIC LAWS. Ill
$ 58, 6. Otherwise, v before a is changed into , which is
then contracted with the preceding vowel ( 34, 50) ; as, for
Nom. Masc. Nom. Fern.
uiXavf, (^Aaay) f&iX{. For sravrira,
avTf, (5saj) Jaw;. devro'a, (daao'a) OOVITK.
P" s > U'"^ ''" Dat. Plur
Verbs in 3d Pers. Plur. <rvT<r/, (-raao-/) '*.
riSivffi, Ti^ixfft, nSiTtri. ^, /^/ \
, X5'- ^~ OuvTffi, (bvctin) dutr i.
'bitx.vvviru $<ixvud<ri t ^uxvvffi. Future.
NOTES, a. The forms T/9^ea<r/, ^^0<ri, and Ji/xvtJay/ were used by the
Attics, for the most part, without contraction ; *&ffi received no contraction.
j8. In nouns, if vS precede <r, the is retained ; as, for I'x^vSj, t'x^/vy, for
"x,tt/v^(r/, 'iXfjuviri (yet others, 8A.^r). It is also retained in some forms in
aa.i and derivatives hi -<r<j, from verbs in -/v, as iriq>a.v(ra.i from <petiva,
vi*ctv<ris from ruretit* and sometimes in the adverb a-aX/v, and the adjective
irv, in composition. Add the Homeric xivffcti, Y. 337. For !, <rwy, and
*v, see 68. 3. In the rough Argive and Cretan, seems to have been
extensively retained before ; thus, Ivy, T<3-v;, for /s, v&is
<5> 5O. 7. In the Dative plural of syncopated liquids, and
of d(jT7?(>, star, the combination -t^o-, by metathesis and the
change of t to , became -^<j- ; as, for naiegoi, nargoLoi' for
8. Elsewhere the combinations Aa and pa were permitted to
stand, except as a radical after Q was softened in the new Attic
to Q ( 70) ; as, UQ^V^ male, #a(fgo?, courage, xo^i;, temple,
cheek, for the older ugarjv, daQoog, xo^aij. The combination ^ua
is unknown in classic Greek.
^ 6O. VI. Between two consonants, <s forma-
tive is dropped, and v is changed to a (^ 50) ; as,
for
yi'ygaQtf&eti, yfygxipS-cu for A.iAsy<rSt, XX^;9-j for iifS-agvreti, lipSa^arai.
NOTE. So the compound foafr^uv is written by some rgr;g^v.
^61. VII. Before x formative, a /6i'a/ or
palatal mute unites with it in the cognate rough,
and a lingual mute is dropped ; thus,
CONSONANTS. [BOOK
become as become as
r* P,
ft* <p, ii'Xtf/axas s'/X^a. TX x, uvou.oc.Tx.at,
(fix <, yiyeoc-tyxM yiycatya., "Sx x, yr'afox^xx
VIII. If rough mutes begin two succes-
sive syllables, the first is often changed into its
cognate smooth, especially (1.) in reduplications, or
(2-) when both letters are radical; but (3.) in the
second person singular of the Aorist imperative pas-
sice, the second rough mute is changed ; thus, for
(1.) pt<p/Xxa, <Tip<'X>j*a. (2.) ^/^oj,
NOTES, a. Upon the same principle, i%u becomes i%*> and whenever p
is reduplicated, the first p becomes smooth, and, as it then cannot stand at the
beginning of a word ( 13. 2), is transposed; as, for pifitpa, 'ippiQet. Yet we
find, by a softening of the second , piguv&ftiva, . 59, p^tt^ta^iva, Anacr. Fr.
105, fify&< Find. Fr. 281.
/3. So, to avoid excessive aspiration, a rough mute is never preceded by the
same rough mute, bat, instead of it, by the cognate smooth ; as, the Epic
upon the same principle, ILvppos ( 13. 2).
O3. IX. The semivowels v, g, and s, are the
only consonants that may end a word. Any other
consonant, therefore, falling at the end of a word,
is either (1.) dropped, or (2.) changed into one of
these, or (3.) assumes a vowel ; thus, for
^ttX/r, fAiXi. <0<r, tfios.
eiyov. JTttr, <reta.
yvvttt,
eivetxr, ava. (3.)
/Q ^ " "" *
REMARK. A word can end with two consonants, only wher
*.hu last is o ; as, >lc, yvtp (yvn$\ rv$ (v uxc), xo'o5. Hence the
formative v of the Accusative is changed into (^ 50) after a
consonant, except in a few cases, in which a lingual mute
preceding v is dropped ; thus, for
ywT, yuT, For xX<r5, xXr5 and Xi7.
t^astv, KOpaxet, eov/'^v, o vi5>/K and opviv.
<r73v, T<'d. yiX4>T, yiXoira and 'yiXwi*
CH. 8.J EUPHONIC LAWS. 113
^64. X. A consonant is sometimes inserted or
transposed, to soften the sound. Thus,
1. When a simple vowel is brought by inflection or composi-
tion before an initial , a smooth Q is inserted ; as, igytaaa,
ccQQwatog, eniQ^cavvv^i, from Q(awvp,i (-, -, and inl prefixed)
but evguuTos (the diphthong tv prefixed).
2. When, by syncope or metathesis, a nasal is brought be
lore A or p, the cognate middle mute is inserted ; as, from
avdyog, from
NOTE. If the nasal is initial, it is then dropped from the difficulty of
Bounding it ; e. g., the roots of /SX/rrw and (&.*>* xu are thus changed ; ptXir-,
ftliT-, (U/3X/T-, /3A/T-; po\- t t**.o-, ^/3A-, 0A.a-; so fyoros, mortal, derived
from pofos, Lat. mors.
3. Transposition especially affects a liquid coming before
another consonant ; as, for* #o'^axw, #>waxw, for /?/5Ax, /&'-
^ 65. B. IN THE CONNECTION OF WORDS.
I. When a smooth mute is brought by (1.) era-
sis or (2.) elision before the rough breathing , it is
changed into its cognate rough ; as, for
(1.) xee.i o, xoti oi } %<u, %cu. For vvx.ro, o'
TO 1/u.itTtov, B-oi/^xTior. And in composition,
raw Irigou, SuTifiov. KT'O and VW
orov ivixct, oB-auvSKa. VIK.O. and n
(2.) TO aw, &,<$' ov. tTTei and
NOTE. In some compounds, this change takes place with aa intervening
; and in some words, it appears simply to have arisen from the tendency of
to aspiration (cf. 13. 2) ; as, <pov$os (from *<> and eJ?) ; <pt^? (-r^'o
ov (jr'iT<ru,ots t 'lir'xos) \ <f>go'if/.tov (<r^a> <]*>), S'ja* / from T
II. Some words and forms end eithei
with or without a final consonant according to <ui-
phony, emphasis, or rhythm
In most of these cases, the consonant appears not to belong to the jri
form, but to have been assumed. In some cases, however, the reversi appears
to be true ; and some cases are doubtful.
1. Datives plural in t, and verls of the third person in *
^ind t, assume v at the end of a sentence, or when the ne-\<
word begins with a vowel ; as,
Tleiiri ya.o J-ri TOVTO but, ET-rsv XVTO Teiftt.
I\ae,<ri Xtyiviri rwro but, \Ixriv ttlro Xsyamm.
114 CONSONANTS. - EUPHONIC LAWS. [ROOK 1.
NOTES. . So, likewise, adverbs of place in -<r< (properly datives plural
the adverb Trigvo-i, last year, the numeral ilxoffi (commonly), the demonstra-
tive -i preceded by <r (sometimes), the Epic case-ending -0/, aud the Epic
particles xi, vv, and v'oirQi as, rt IlAr/0-/v riyipovia.' ti'xoffiv 'irrt. See 21 1 . N.
(>. The v thus assumed is called y paragogic. It is sometimes employed by
the poets before a consonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most
kinds of verse, some of the best editors write it uniformly at the end of a line.
In Ionic prose it is generally neglected, but in Attic prose it is sometimes
found even befoi'e a consonant in the middle of a sentence. In grammars
and lexicons, a paragogic letter is commonly marked thus: "*o<r/(v).
67. 2. The. adverb oi/rwc, thus, commonly loses a before
a consonant; and SZQI and HWQI, until, often assume it before
a vowel ; as, OI/TW cptjol ' /ut^o/? ov.
3. Some other words have poetic or dialectic forms, in which a final or t
is dropped or assumed : as, local adverbs in -Stv (poel , chiefly Ep., -9-i\ nu-
meral adverbs in -xi; (loll. -*/), eivnx^s, *.rpa.s, f/ucraf, irayUv, St>$w(f),
#4. ' .
^ 68. C. SPECIAL RUL:S.
1. The preposition ?, out of, becomes ex before a consonant,
and admits no .further change ; as f'x xxo5v, fxastco,
2. The adverb ov, not, before a vowel, assumes x, which
becomes^ before the rough breathing; as ov <fr,ai, ovx
OV% Vtl, OVXSTI.
NOTES. . The adverb pvxiri, from p* and IT<, follows the analogy of
tvxin.
&. In these word, I* and ot> may perhaps be regarded as the original
forms. That in certain situations these forms are retained is owing to their
close connection as proclitics, or in composition, with the following word, and
therefore forms no real exception to the rule in 63. When orthotone, they
conform to the rule, the one by assuming f, and the other by dropping *.
3. In composition, the preposition fV, in, retains its v before
Q and a ; while avv, with, drops its v before a followed by an-
other consonant, and before ; but before a followed by a
vowel, changes v to a ; as, {vgnnKa, tvatlw (yet tQv9paq often-
er than frpvdyioc); avairjfjn (for aiWr^jtm), uvvyla ' ovaatvu
(for OVV<JBV(O), ovuifirta.
NOTE. The Epic av for av ( 48. 2) here imitates i as, iifrd;, ity^tret
DIALECTIC VARIATIONS.
69. A. The dialects often interchange consonants; most
frequently,
I. COGNATE MUTES ( 49); as, Ion. KVTK, ViKp.eu } for u.Z$ti, Vt
tf^ol. etfA-ri for a,f
CH. 3.] DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. 1 15
NOTES, a. The soft Ionic was less inclined than the Attic to the rough
mutes ; hence, in the Ionic, the smooth mute remains before the rough breath-
ing ( 65, 68. 2) ; as, it.*' J, $ixv/u.io;, ovx uti. In some compounds, this
passed into the Attic ; as, ua-vXtums, from ra and #A/OJ.
(>. Aspiration is sometimes transposed; as, Ion.
etXri^uv, for iru
II. COORDINATE MUTES 49) ; as, Ion. and ^Eol., x for <r in interroga-
tive and indefinite pronouns and adverbs; thus, xe?aj, xou, xori, for 7re7os, Toy,
wars Dor., x for <r in a-oxa, SW, raxa, for ?ra<rs, JVs, TOTS, and in similar
adverbs of time ; JEol. <rip.Ti for Tiyrt, <p^ for 9-r'g ^Eol. and Dor.
for /SAspagev, a for yj; Dor. obiKot for ojS'Xoj, o/3vl%os for
III. LIQUIDS ; as, Dor. vS-v, /SsvT/a-Toj, for ^x^av, /SsXr^Taf Ion. ^rXiw-
j(i/V for TVlllft&V.
7 O. IV. with other letters ; e. g.
1. The Ionic and Old Attic o-tr and go- pass, for the most part, in the later
Attic, into TT and pp ; as, Teifftru Tarro;, yXufffftt yXuTTU,^ cigffnv eipfav. See
59. 8.
2. Dor. T for o- 5 as, ITaT/^v, J'TSTSV, s7xaT/, for rTa^s/^k/v, iVso-av, ttxoffi*
This appears especially in the 2d personal pronoun, and in the 3d pers. of
verbs ; as, <ry, TS, for <ry, <rs (Lat. fM, <e) ; ^a<r/', <pavr/, Xsyovr;, for ^na 1 ', ^ar/,
Xsyat'ff-/ (Lat. legunt).
3. Dor. o- for in the verb-ending of 1st pers. pi. pis for ^g (Lat. mus) ;
as, Xsya^sj for %.iyop.iv (Lat. legimus).
4. The Laconic often changes $ to r ? and final f to g ; as, sraXsag Ar. Lys.
988, r/og, ffiXu, for a-aXa/aj, S-sa;, ^sXw woTg for fra?; (Lat puer^ compare
Marcipor).
V. The DOUBLE CONSONANTS with other letters; as, old |^v, later and
common o-uv (in the Lat. cum the o* has been dropped, instead of the x) ;
^Eol. '^Yo.'jrtyu for 2r<p^- JEol. o-xsvaj, <rxi<p<>S) for |svaj, /<p0j Dor. ^2, ^/y,
for o-^s, fl-^/y Ion. /ay, TPI%OS, for ^iffffOSj TftiffffOf*
For , we find, in the ^Eolic and Doric, a-J, S3, and 5 ; as, t!<r$as,
(^51. N.), aretiffia, ^ua^a, AsJj, for a^aj,
T 1 . B. Consonants are often doubled, inserted, omitted,
and transposed by the poets, especially the Epic, for the sake
of the metre ; as, l'AA/5o', (pgdaaofiat, vsxvaai, oaoo$, onnwg,
tdSstae, for f7./9ov, &C. ; 7TzoAf|Uoc, niohg, 8i%&i
AUUJ'OC, for 7roAf//o?, TioAi^, 5t;f, yco'j vaoc, n
*0dvafv<;, '^i^evg, cptxgvyoc, for tgytgov, 'Odvoaevg, v
xQadlt), xcxQTtQog, fidydtains, for xagdlct,
BOOK II.
ETYMOLOGY.
Homer.
Etymology treats of the INFLECTION and
of the FORMATION OF WORDS ; the former includ-
ing DECLENSION, COMPARISON, and CONJUGATION,
and the latter, DERIVATION and COMPOSITION.
For the distinction between the radical and the formative part of words,
and the use of the terms root, prefix, affix, open and close or vowel and consonant
ath'xes, characteristic, pure and impure words, mute, liquid, liquid-mute^ labial,
palatal, and lingual words, theme^ paradigm, &c., see General Grammar.
CHAPTER I.
PRINCIPLES OF DECLENSION.
The two classes of SUBSTANTIVES (in-
cluding Nouns and Substantive Pronouns) and
ADJECTIVES (including the Article, Adjectives com-
monly so called, Adjective Pronouns, and Partici-
ples) are declined to mark three distinctions, GEN-
DER, NUMBER, and CASE.
NOTE. Adjectives receive these distinctions merely for the sake cf con-
forming to the substantives to which they belong.
A. GENDER.
^ 74. The Greek has three genders; the MAS-
CULINE, the FEMININE, and the NEUTER.
NOTES a. Nouns which are both masculine and feminine, are said to be
of the common gender.
:H. l.J GKNUEH. 1 17
/S. T< mark the genders of Greek nouns, we employ the different forms of
the article , in the singular, for the masculine, o ; for the feminine, n ; for the
common, o, ; and for the neuter, TO : in the plural, for the masculine, el '
for the feminine, l ; for the common, ol, /; and, for the neuter, TK: as, a
<ro.p.tcts< stcicu/d, o, Tgotpo;, nurse, TO (ruxov, Jig.
In like manner, the different cases and numbers, according to their gender,
are marked by different forms of the article ; as the Gen. sing. masc. by
ay, &c.
y. In the case of most animals it is seldom important to distinguish the
gender. Hence in Greek, for the most part, the names of animals, instead
of being common, have but a single gender, which is used indifferently for
both sexes. Such nouns are termed epicene (tv-ixotvos, promiscuous^. Thus,
o *.vxes, wolf, ri o.'l.uTrrfe, fox, whether the male or the female is spoken of.
. Words which change their forms to denote change of gender are termed
movable; and this change is termed motion; as, o ftuiriXtvs, king, fi /3a<r/Xt<a,
queen ; o ro^os, wise, fi <ro<prj, TO iroQov.
t. In words in which the feminine may either have a common form with
the masculine or a distinct form, the Attic sometimes prefers the common
form, where the Ionic and Common dialects prefer the distinct form ; as, c, fi
3-fl,-, god, goddess, and fi & or S-sauva, goddess. So, likewise, in adjectives.
75. The masculine gender belongs pYoperly to words
denoting males ; the feminine, to words denoting females ; and
the neuter to words denoting neither males nor females. In
Greek, however, the names of most things without life are
masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied posses-
sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in
their formation to other nouns of these genders.
Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers
(from their power and violence), and also of the months, are
masculine ; and the names of trees, plants, countries, islands,
and cities (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants)
are feminine; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply-
ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially
diminutives, are neuter ; as, 6 orrf/joc, wind, o BoQ&as, Boreas,
o TioTrtjuoV, river, 6 IWiAoe, the Nile, o n^r, month,
a'tv, June- July, ^ ovy.r,, jig-tree, r t p>;AeVx, apple-tree,
pear-tree, y ^Trf/loc, vine, ?} fivfaof, papyrus, y ^w(, country,
ri Alyvnioc, Egypt, $ vrjaos, island, TJ 2'a^oc, Samos, y nolic,
tity, fj sltxxfdni t uMr, Laced(zmo?i ; TO ovyor,Jig, 10 ^lov, apple,
il Tty.vov, child, TO urdounodvt', slave, TO yvvaiov, dim. of yvrrji
woman, TO -nuidlov, little boy or girl.
$ 7 6. The gender of nouns, when not determined by the
signification, may be, for the most part, inferred from the form
of the theme or root, according to the following rules.
I. In the FIRST DECLENSION (fl 7), all words in -aj and -^
118 DECLENSION. [BOOK II
are masculine ; all in -a and -y, feminine ; as, o ictpiag, 6 vav-
irjg' 7? OiXi'a, 77 Tt^UJ?.
II. In the SECOND DECLENSION (ff 9), most words in -og and
-ojg are masculine, but some are feminine or common ; vvordi
in -oy and -wv are neuter ; as, o AO/O, 6 ytJ? * ^ o5o^, ^ f'w,
dawn; o, ^ ^EO?, gorf, o, rj aoxros, bear ; TO ovxov, TO avw/fwr.
Except when the diminutive fonn in -ay is given to feminine proper names ;
w Asavr/ov, Yxtixtttov.
III. In the THIRD DECLENSION (J[f[ 11-14),
a. All words in -evg are masculine ; all in -to and -nvg, femi-
nine ; and all in -a, -t, -v, and -o?, neuter ; as, o tTiTui;?, o |U-
vg, amphora; rj ^w, 15 >'i'? * *b aw^a, TO fte'At, honey, TO
TO
b. All abstracts in -r?c and -t?, and most other words in
are feminine ; as, 17 ^/UXI'T;C, sweetness; % dvra^ig^ power,
, poesy ; r) ylg, y nohg.
c. All labials and palatals, all liquids (except a few in
which o is the characteristic), and all liquid-mutes are either
masculine or feminine.
d. Nouns in which the root ends in,
1.) -WT-, -*v-, or -J/T-, are masculine ; as, o /e'io^, -WTO?, laugh
ter ; 6 AI/UJJV, -eVo? o Af'tov, -ovroc, 6 udovg, o ylyag, o Ifiag, -dviog,
thong.
Except r ouf, uros, ear, TO q>us, <p<vros, light (both contracts), <p^j, <f>otvos,
mind, and a few names of cities ( 75) ; as, i 'Puftvous, -ovvros, Rliamnus.
2.) -3-, or -i9-, are feminine ; as, ?y lu^nrdg, -'^oc, ^orcA, ^
toi?, -idog, strife, r\ gfapvd -vdog, cloak ; T) xo'ouc, -v&oc, helmet.
Except ', tt ?;, ra/3'f, child, o *ous, *ol'os, foot, o, f> agv/f, -I^af, A/rf.
3.) -r-, or --, are neuter ; as, TO ^'TTO, -uiog, TO xc'oa^, -TOJ,
-aog.
B. NUMBER.
The Greek has three numbers; the SIN-
GULAR, denoting one; the PLURAL, denoting more
than one ; and the DUAL (dufilis, from duo, two),
a variety of the plural, which may be employed
when only two are spoken of.
Thus, the singular avS^ray signifies man, the plural uvfyavei, men (whetn
er two or more), and the dual &&&>*(, two men.
TVe dual is most usr-d in the Attic Greek. In the ^Eolic dialect
CH. l.J CASE. 119
(as in the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly of the Greek dialects,)
and in the Hellenistic Greek, the dual does not occur, except in Ivo, two, and
, both (Lat. duo, ambo).
C. CASE.
^78. The Greek has five cases;
1. The Nominative, expressing the subject of a sentence.
2. " Genitive, " the point of departure, or cause.
3. " Dative, the indirect object, or accom-
paniment.
4. " Accusative, direct limit.
5. " Vocative, address.
NOTES, a.. From the general character of the relations which they denote,
the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative are termed the direct, and the
Genitive and Dative, the indirect cases.
/3. The Nominative and Vocative are also termed casus recti, the right case*
and the other three, casus obliqui, the oblique cases.
y. For a fuller statement of the use of the cases, see Syntax.
D. METHODS OF DECLENSION.
^79. Words are declined, in Greek, by an-
nexing to the root certain AFFIXES, which mark
the distinctions of gender, number, and case.
There are three sets of these affixes ; and hence
arise three distinct methods of declining words,
called the FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD DECLENSIONS.
The first of these methods applies only to words of the mas-
culine and feminine genders ; the second and third apply to
words of all the genders. In some of the cases, however, the
affixes vary, in the same declension, according to the gender ;
so that, to know how a word is declined, it is necessary to
ascertain three things ; 1. its root, 2. the declension to which it
belongs, and 3. its gender.
The mode in which the gender is marked has been already stated ( 74, /S).
From the theme (i. e. the Nom. sing.) and the gender, we can often determine
at once the root and the declension. If it is necessary to mark these expli-
citly, it is commonly done by giving, with the theme, the Genitive singular, or
its ending. If the Genitive singular ends in -0.9 or -r,;, or in -ov from a theme
in -a; or -ns, the word is of the first declension; if it ends in -ov from a theme in
-os or -ay, the word is of the second declension ; if it ends in -o;, tlie word is of
the third declension. The root is obtained by throwing off the affix of the Genitive}
or it may be obtained by throwing off any affix beginning with a voweL
Thus the nrwns, o r&uiett, steward. r\ O'IXIK, house, v y?,*W*, tonque, o "o7,u,af,
DECLENSION. - GENERAL RULES. [BOOK II
pe.ople, and o"A^a.-^, d.rab, make in the Genitive, rap'tov, a/x/
ftou, and "A/>a.fio{. From these genitives, we ascertain that ra^/a?, /*/, anc,
yXuntra. belong to the first declension, ^jj^a? to the second, and "A^a^ to the
third. By throwing off the affixes -ay, -as?, -;, and -at, we obtain the roots
retfti-) oixi-, y^uiro-, 5^-, and 'A^a/3-. The words are then declined by an-
nexing to these roots the affixes in the table (^f 5).
(j 8O. In the declension of words, the follow-
ing GENERAL RULES are observed.
I. The masculine and feminine affixes are the
same, except in the Nominative and Genitive sin-
gular of the first declension. The neuter affixes
are the same with the masculine and feminine,
except in the direct cases, singular and plural.
II. In neuters, the three direct cases have the
same affix, and in the plural this affix is always a.
III. The dual has but two forms ; one for the
direct, and the other for the indirect cases.
IV. In the feminine singular of the first declen
sion, and in the plural of all words, the Vocative is
the same with the Nominative.
81. RKMARKB. 1. The use of the Voc. as a distinct form is still
further limited. Few substantives or adjectives, except proper names and per-
sonal appellatives and epithets, are sufficiently employed hi address to require
n separate form for this purpose. Hence the partici]>le, pronoun, article, and
numeral have no distinct Voc. ; and in respect to other words which are de-
clined, the following observations may be made.
. Masculines of Dec. I. are commonly names or epithets of persons, and
therefore form the Voc. sing.
ft. In Dec. II., the distinct form of the Voc. is commonly used, except for
euphony or rhythm ; as, T H 0/Xaj, u <p/Xaj, my friend! my friend ! Ar. Kub.
1 167. * 4>/Xaj 2, MiviAat A. 189. 'HiX/aj n *r. 277. To avoid the double
i, Sta,-, god (like deus in Latin), has, hi classic writers, no distinct Voc. ; yet
0u St. Matth. 27. 46.
y. In Dec. III., few words, except proper names and personal appellatives
and epithets, have a distinct Voc. ; and even in those which have, the Norn.
is sometimes employed in its stead, especially by Attic writers ; thus, r ll -raa-at
xX< Ar. Ach. 971 ; but T ft ra'X/f Soph. Phil. 1213. ATv Soph. Aj. 89 ; but
*fl <p/'X ' Arf Ib. 529. In many words of this declension, the Voc. cannot
be formed without such a mutilation of the root as scarcely to leave it inteUi-
gible(63, 101).
CH. I.J HISTORY. 1521
<$> 89. 2. An inspection of the table (fl 5) will likewise
sho\v, that, in regular declension,
a.) The Nom. sing. masc. and (except in Dec. I.) fern, always ends in ?.
.) The Uat. sing, always ends in t, either written in the line or subscribed.
y.) The Ace. sing, (except in neuters of Dec. III.) always ends in v, or its
corresponding vowel ($ 50) ; and the Ace. plur. masc. and fern, is always
formed by adding j to the Ace. sing. ( 34, 58).
S.) The Gen. plur. always ends in uv.
.) In Dec. I. and II., the affixes are all open (i. e. begin with a vowel),
and ill constitute a distinct syllable. In Dec. III., three of the affixes, tr, >,
and fft, are clone (i. e. begin with a consonant}, and of these the two first,
having no vowel, must unite with the last syllable of the root.
.) In the singular of Dec. III., the direct cases neut., and the Voc. masc.
and fern., have no affixes.
NOTE. It follows, from nos. t and , that words of Dec. I. and II. are
par i syllabic (par, e(jwtl\ that is, have the same number of syllables in all
their cases ; but words of Dec. III. are imparisyllabic, that is, have more
syllables in some of their cases than in others.
3. The Table (fl 6) exhibits the affixes as resolved into
their two classes of ELEMENTS ; T. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS, which
are significant additions, marking distinctions of number, case,
and gender ; and II. CONNECTING VOWELS, which are euphonic
in their origin, and serve to unite the flexible endings with the
root. For farther illustration, see the following sections upon
the history of Greek declension.
E. HISTORY OF GREEK DECLENSION.
\> 83. The early history of Greek declension is beyond the period not
merely of written records, but even of tradition. It can be traced, therefore,
only by the way-marks which have been left upon the language itself, and by
the aid of comparative philology. The following view of the subject has
much evidence in its support, and serves to explain the general phenomena of
Greek declension, and of the use of the numbers and cases.
Greek declension was progressive. At first, the simple root was used, as in
some languages even at the present day, without any change to denote num-
ber or case ; thus, !%S-u, fish, yv-r, vulture, whether one or more were spoken
of. Then the plural number was marked, by affixing to the root i, the sim- ,
pie root, of course, now becoming singular, as each new formation limits the
gse of prior forms . thus,
Singular, /^9-u, fish, Plural, i^vs, fishes.
yvTT, vulture, yviri, vultures.
The next step was to make a separate form, to express the indirect, as
distinguished from the direct relations. This was done by annexing i to the
root, and this form became plural by adding one of the common signs of the
plural, We have now the distinction of case ; thus,
u
122 DECLENSION. [BOOK 11
Singular. Plnral.
Direct Case, l^M ; x M t
yvT yvri
Indirect Case, I%&u7 <$"
yvtri ywiv
^> 8 41 Each of these cases was afterwards subdivided. (A.) From
the Direct Case were separated, in the masculine and feminine genders, tw
new cases, the one to express the subject, and the other the direct object, of an
action, i. e. the Nominative, and Accusative cases.
The Nominative was formed by adding 5, as the sign of 'the subject, to the
old Direct forms ; thus, Sing. i%$vi, yuvs, Plur. 'i%Svis t yu*a-
The Accusative was formed by adding to the root, as the sign of the direct
object, v, which in the plural took one of the common signs of the plural, j ;
thus, Sing. i%Suv, yvirv, Plur. 1%3-uvt, yv-rvt, or, by the euphonic change of
into its corresponding vowel ( 58, 63, R.), Sing, yvxa., Plur. 4%3-vKf,
yufxc.
(13.) From the Indirect Case was separated a new case to express the
subjective, as distinguished from the objective relations, i. e. the Genitive. This
was formed by affixing $, or commonly, with a euphonic vowel, oS-. In the
plural, this took the plural affix v ; thus, aS-v. But by the laws of euphony,
which afterwards prevailed, neither $, nor 3-v could end a word ( 63).
Therefore, 3- either was changed to e, or was dropped, or assumed the vowel i
(commonly written with paragogic t, 67. 3) ; and oSv became uv by the
absorption of the S ($, perhaps, first passing into <r, as in the singular, then r
being changed into its corresponding vowel , and this absorbed). Thus &
became eg, o, or aS-sv ; and oSv, eat.
The old Indirect Case remained as a Dative, without change, except that a
new plural was formed by annexing the dative sign t ( 83) to the Nomina-
tive plural.
8 5. The plural had now throughout a new form, but the old form
had so attached Itself to various names of incessant use, that in most of the
dialects it was still preserved. But these household plurals, which could not
be shaken off, would be principally such as referred to objects double by nature
or custom, as the eyes, hands, feet, shoes, wings, &c. Hence this form came
at length to be appropriated to a dual sense, though in the time of Homer
this restriction of its use seems not as yet to have been fully made. The
simple form of the root was likewise retained in the singular as a case of ad-
dress ( Vocative), in words in which there was occasion for such a form, and
the laws of euphony allowed it. In the plural the Vocative had never an\
form distinct from the Nominative. We have now the three numbers, ant
the five cases, which, with the euphonic changes already mentioned, appeal
thus.
Sing. Nom. -t
Gen. -of
Dat. -i
Ace. -, -at
Voc. IK$
Plur. N. V. -if l%&vtf -yv-ru
Gen. -a/ !*$(; ywriiv
Dat. -tn !%$utfft (/$!/*) yvvift
Ace. -at ixva.t yv*af
CH. 1 ' HISTORY. 123
Dual Dir. -i i%&vt yv*t
Indir. -<v /^3-u/v (i%Su9iv) yvriv \ywroti}.
For the sake of completeness, ve have added in the table above two latei
modifications; viz., the common shorter Dat. plur., formed by dropping!
(unless one chooses to form it from the Dat. sing, by inserting the plural sign
f] ; and the Indirect Case dual prolonged by inserting o, after the analogy of
the Gen. sing, and plur.
S SO. We have exhibited above the primitive nude declension, now
called the third. But subsequently two other modes of declension sprang up,
having connecting vowels, which united the flexible endings to the root ; the
one having o, now called the second declension ; and the other, , now called
the first. These declensions chose rather to drop than to change the final S of
the Gen. sing., apparently to avoid confusion with the Nom. ; and likewise to
retain the old Direct Case as a Nom. plur., which became afterwards distin-
guished from the dual by a different mode of contraction, its more frequent use
leading to precession. In all the affixes of these declensions in which two
vowels came together, contraction naturally took place in one or another of its
forms ; and in the Dat. plur. a shorter form became the more common one,
made either by dropping t from the longer form, or by adding the plural sign f
to the Dat. sing. For t in the Voc., instead of a, see 28. "We give as an
example of Dec. II., o X.oyes, word, and of Dec. I., o <r^/aj, steward.
Sing. Nom. Xay-a-j, Xayaj ra.ftt-a.-s, ra,ftia,f
Gen. Xoy-o-o, Xayav ra.fj.t-a.-o, ra.ft.iov
Dat. Xoy-o-t, Xayw ra.ftt-a.-i, ra,ftia,
Ace. Xay-a->, Xayan ra,fti-u-v, ra.ftta.9
Voc. Xay-a, Xayi ra.fti-a,, ru-ft'ta.
Plur. N. V. \by-o-t, Aaym ra.ftt-a.-i, retftieti
Gen. Xay-f-eav, Xayw ra.ftt-a.-uv, rufttuv
Dat. Xay-a-sa-/, Xbyotfft, -aij rufti-ei-tft, ra.ftia.iffi, -a.it
Ace. Xay-a-a;, Xflyaw; ra.ftt-a.-as, ra.ft'ia.s
Dual N. A.V. Xoy-a-s, Xay ra.fti-a.-i, roift'ta.
G. D. Xy-a-;>, Xaya/> ra.ftl-a.-iv, ru.ftia.it
In the Nom. and Ace. sing, -of these declensions, the primitive direct form,
without s or > appended, was sometimes retained ; as, Nom. Qviirra,, 'fr-rbrA
( 95. 2 ; compare the Latin nauta, poeta), o Ace. via, iu, *A$a ( 97). So
the neuters ro, aXXa, a.vr'o, ixi7ve, o ( 97).
- 87. We have thus far treated only of the masculine gender. In the
neuter (which occurs only in the second and third declensions), since things
without life have no voluntary action, the distinction of subject and object is
obviously of far less consequence, and therefore in this gender the separation
of the Nom., Ace., and Voc. was never made. The place of these three cases
-continied to be supplied by a single Direct Case, which in the singular of
Dec. III. was the simple root, and in the singular of Dec. II. ended in a (the
> being either euphonic, or more probably having the same force as in the
>cc., and marking the objective character of the gender). The plural has the
same form in both declensions, simply appending, instead of the old i, a, (which,
as the corresponding vowel of v ( 50), is more objective in its character), and
without a connecting vowel. We give, as examples, ro ^tixov (poetic), tear,
ul Dcr. III., and , i * v. /fy. of DPC. II.
124 DECLENSION. [BOOK II
Sing. N. A. V. $eixV <rvx-or
Gen. ^a,Kau-o; cvx-ou
Dat. ^oc.x,ov-t ffUx-u
Plur. N. A. V. ^a.x.^u-0, ffvx-ee.
Gen. 'ba.xov-uY ffvx-uv
Dat. tidxgv-trt ffvx-oif
Dual N. A. V. $eixV-i ffvx-a
G. D. da.Kev-cuv ffvx-otv
88. The distinction of subject and object is less striking in the fern-
*-- than in the masculine ; and hence, in the first declension, where ther
*v no nouters with which a distinction must be maintained, thp feminine is
Tt languished from the masculine by not appending the subjective ? in the
Num. sing. ( 84 , and by retaining the form a; in the Gen. sing., as tli3
reason for preferring the shorter form does not now exist ( 86). The a of
this onding is absorbed in the preceding a, unless one chooses to consider the
t as htre appended without the euphonic vowel ( 84. B). In all the other
cases, 'he feminine has precisely the same form as the masculine. Thus, *
Sing. Norn, erxt-di, ffxia, Plur. Nora, ffxiai
Gen. ffxi-oi-o;, fxicit Gen. axiuv
Dat. ffx.i-a.-ly ffxix Dat. ffxi7s
Ace. ffxi-d-v, ffxi&v Acc. otidi
For the \ recession which has taken place so extensively in the singular of
Dec. I., set fc 93.
8 9. In the earlier Greek, the prevalent mode of avoiding hiatus was
not, as aflenvu 3s, by contraction, but by the insertion of a strong breathing
or aspirate <y>rs.rnant (cf. 117). Of these the most prominent appears to
have been tbe rtigamma ( 22. J). And, although this has disappeared from
the language, yt it has left other consonants which have either taken its
place, or which were used in like manner with it. The insertion of these
consonants, together with different modes of contraction, has given an especial
variety of form, in the first and second declensions, to the Dative, singular, which,
as the primitive indirect case ( 83), originally performed the offices of both
the Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find,
1.) The i appended with the insertion of p, the natural successor of the
digamraa. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and Dat.,
and sometimes oven supplying the place of these cases in the plural, is evi-
dently of great antiquity. E. g.
Gen. Sing. Dec. I. i| iiw<p< O. 580, /3. 2 ; a-ro vtv&Qn 0. 300 : Dec. II.
&TO xa.<rffa.l.o$t II. 2C8 ; IK fovroQiv u. 83 ; u-ro -rXotrios KrvoQii N. 588
UTO, riitet <I>. 295 ; et-r' avrott A. 44.
Dat Sing. Dec. I. f<p/ /3/wip/ cnmrf X. 107 ; a?/*' w <p/o/jp/ 3. 407,
I. 618; ivignfj II. 734; Sw ? <p> . 238: Dec. II. ?' airoQt M. 302 ; if'
Itlttyn N. 308 ; 9f?< H. 366.
Gen. and Dat. Plur. Dec. II. a<r<ri ^ax^voifn *-x%r$t> P. 696, T. 397, J.
705 ; av' orrtoQiv %. 134 ; atpQ' orrtoQiv *. 145 ; !xi<piv ft. 414.
NOTES, a. The <p likewise appears in the Dative plural of a few words of
the third declension, v^ere it seems to have been inserted for the sak3 of
HISTORY. 125
c'H. 1.]
lengthening the preceding syllable ; as, SxurQt for S%tfi. These forms were
also used as both Gen. and Dat.; thus, Gen. xar' op<r$t A. 452; <rg0V$' ...
E. 107 ; O.-TO ffTJ&ifftptv 5. 214 ; 5< ^i rr&tvQn E. 41 : Dat. <rv>
n. 811 ; Sprf! A. 474 (cf. 479), X. 139.
ft. The following forms in -<p<(v) require special notice ; (a) ttrxagotpiv i. 59,
ar d x.arv\r^ovo(fiv t. 433, which are formed as from nouns of Dec. II., while
the themes in ose are Iff^a^n of Dec. I., and xoruXribtuv of Dec. III. ; (6)
*.^aTi(T<p< K. 156, and '"Egifiicnpiv (probably the correct form for 'E^i/Ssi/T^v I.
572, Horn. Cer. 350, Hes. Th. 669), which appear to have plural forms,
though singular in their use ; (c) vctvipiv, an irregular plural form for vetua-i, N.
700 ; also used as Gen. H. 246, &c. ; (<f) the Epic adverb T<p/, with might,
A.. 38, which appears to be an old Dat. sing, from 7j.
y. Compare with these forms in -<p<, the Latin Datives tibi, sibi, nobis,
vobis, deabus, sermonibus, rebus, and the Latin adverbs of place in -bi ; as, ibi,
alibi, utribi, from -is, alms, uter. The forms in -<p/ when used as Datives are
often written incorrectly with an / subscript (-r t (fn, 25. a), as though <p/ had
been added to the complete Dat. form. For the paragogic, see 66. a.
O CK 2.) The / appended with the insertion of 3. This form became
adverbial (chiefly poetic), denoting the place where ; as, o"xoS-t, at home, aXXo-
S-/, elsewhere, auroS-i, o'3v, Ko^/vS-oS/. It was mostly confined to the second
declension, and, in the few instances in which it was made from nouns of other
declensions, it still imitated the forms of this. Traces of its old use as the
Indirect Case still remain in Homer ; thus, Gen. aw^avo9-< vgo, vgo ovgcivou,
T. 3, 'Ix/o3/ ir^o 0. 561, w$i -r^o . 36 ; Dat. *>?^/ I. 300, o. 370.
3.) The / appended with the insertion of #. This form appears only in
the Epic %%! (improperly written by some ?/, cf. 89. y), for the adverbial
Dative $, where, A. 607. "
4.) The / contracted with the preceding o in the second declension into at
( 32). This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in
adverbial Datives ; as, o'xoi, at home (but o!x,u>, to a house ; cf. in Latin, domi
and domus), viloi, 'IirSftoT, 01, o-roi. Yet lv 'Itr^oT Simon. Fr. 209 ; l
Inscr. Cret. ; rol ldp.ot Inscr. Boeot.
5.) The common form, in which the / is absorbed by the preceding vowel ;
as, a.-i a, o-i of ; thus,
O 1 . The forms of the Genitive in -o$tv or -3-u ( 84. B) remained
"in the common language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence; as,
"xo9-sv, from home, aXXeSsv, avroSiv, 'AS-jv>j9^iy. As examples of their use
a>? decided Genitives, may be cited ig Attruft.v$tv 0. 304, l| ay^evoS-tv 0. 19,
XT' a^oS-v X. 18; and the pronominal forms i^sSiy, O-J^EV, t^t, which
even occur in Attic poets.
11
120 DECLENSION. [BOOK II
CHAPTER II.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
I. THE FIRST DECLENSION.
[For the affixes and paradigms, see TT1T 5 -8. J
<$> OS. For the original affixes of Dec. I., which all had a
as a connecting vowel, see 86, 88. In most of these affix.
es, either became part of a diphthong, or else, either through
contraction or the force of analogy, became long. Short
however remained in the singular,
1.) In the direct cases of feminines, whose characteristic
was a, a double consonant, or H; as, yluaoa, /Awaaav (fl 7),
dtifiie, thirst, <5o'|, opinion, c', root, w^tPJU*, contest.
NOTES, a. Add a few feminines in -Xa, and some in -v, particularly femaif.
a})}>ellatives ; as, wayXa and avasrawAa, rest, 'i%i$v&, viper, ftigtftva,, care, Vioirot
va, mistress, Xta/va, lioness; likewise axavSa, thorn.
/3. Add, also, many feminines in -a pure and -^. These have mostly a
diphthong in the penult, and may all be recognized by the accent, except the
proper names K/p^*, TLvppa,, and the numeral /n/a, one. The principal classes
are, (a) Polysyllables in -no. and -<, except abstracts in -/ from verbs in
-ivu ; as, X]3-t/a, truth, tUvaid., good-will, /3<r/X/a, queen, but /3ff-/A/, reign,
from /3<r/Xw*; (/;) Female designations in -r< ; as, ^AT^*, female musi-
cian : (c) Dissyllables and some polysyllabic names of places in -/ ; as,
^fltr, ^ooc? mother, t la-ria.i& (rf) Words in -w/as ; as, ftvTi, fly : (e) Most
words in -, whose penult is lengthened by a diphthong (except ), by C, or
by pp ; as, ftti^at^, sword, ytipw^a, iriWgre, IIv^A.
y. The accent commonly shows the quantity of final a. in the theme.
Thus, in all proparoxytones and properispomena, it must be short by the general
laws of accent ; while, by a special law of the declension, it is long in all
oxytoncs, and in all paroxytones in -, Gen. -at, except the three mentioned in
Note/3.
2.) In tHe Vocative of nouns in -T^C, and of gentiles and
Compound verbals in -77? ; as vavrys (fl 7), JSxutfj,?, Scythian,
Jit oa TIC, Persian, yfwpiiQriq (yy, earth, pfTQw, to measure],
geometer, [ivQovctirjs (pvyov, perfume, 7iw>U'w, to sell), perfumer ,
Voc. vaviix, 2xvftt*, //f'(Kj (but l/eyays, Perses, a man's name,
VOC. UiQtjri), ytO)fltTQ(X, (JIVQOTlw'ku.
^ O3. In the singular, long passed, by precession, into
TJ, unless preceded by f, i, o, or po (^ 29) ; as,
OH. 2.J FIRST DECLENSION. ] 11
but TK^utac, T ( tm*, (/x:, ax<, #r^, dvytxv (fl 7), Idta, i< ea
fof/w, need, po, color.
NOTE. Long a. likewise remains in the pures, vo&, grass, O-TOK, jiorch, yv&,
field, o-ocvet, gourd, XK^UK, walnut-tree, /., olive-tree, Nava^xaa, Nuusicaa; in
the words, oc.Xa.Xa,, war-cry, i<r//Sa, </y after a feast, ffx.u.ii%u.X&, trap-spring,
yjwaSaj, noble ; and in some proper names, particularly those which are Doric
or foreign ; as, 'Av^a^a, Aiftf, O/Xa^Xa, Asv/$a?, Txj, 2y'xx? and it
became after ^ or ^a in the words $:, necA, XO^TJ, maiden, xoppt}, cheek, ad-a^,
p/>, a'aw, stream ; in some proper names, as Tvgws and in compounds of ^s-
<r^, to measure, as yt^^tT^*?; ( 92. 2). In some words, usage fluctuates
between long or short and ; as, 'A^dfr&s Cyr. vi. 1. 31, 'A^aa-T^j Ib. v. 1.
4, -y^y* and Ttivtj, r^f^vS. and argvftvn.
94, CONTRACTS. A few nouns, in which the character-
istic is or , and feminine adjectives in -fa and -017, are con-
tracted ; as, fivuix /uv, 'jfyfisjif 'jfyftfa ^o^eixg {JoQQixg (Q being
here doubled after contraction), auxf' arx^, fig-tree, %Qv<sitt
xyvatj, Smlor, duily. For the rules, see 33, 36, 37 ; for the
paradigms, ^ 7, 18.
DIALECTIC FORMS.
\j> 9*5. I. In the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect retains
throughout the original a ; while in the singular, the Ionic has in most of
those words in which the Attic and Common dialects have long , and even in
some in which they have short , particularly derivatives in -u* and -a/a
($ 44) ; thus, Dor. Ttpu,, r</tj, -n^a, T/^av Ion. <r*<jj, <rx;Sjj, ffxiy, fxwv
Ep. aXfjSs/Sj, ivrX/fi, New Ion. x*&flfa, ^u/w, for Xs{3/*, wVx/a, /t/&.
2. In words in -jj, the primitive Direct Case in -a is sometimes retained by
Homer and some of the other poets as Nom. ( 86), for the sake of the
metre or euphony : as, o O.UTS. Qtiia-ra, B. 107- IV-TOTO, Neo-T/i/j B. 336; /u.*-
ritret Zivs A. 175 ; /Sa9-i/^7<ra Xs/^wv Find. N. 3. 92 ; <W<ra MevaXxaj TllCOC.
8. 30. So in feminiiu's in -n, the poets sometimes retain the old short a in
the Voc. : as, vvpttp& <p'i^n Y. 130 : v f> A/x-x, Sapph. 66 (44). On the other
hand, A/u'ri? Ap. Rh. 3. 386, for A/T&, Voc. of
3. The old genitive affixes, and uv, which often occur in the Epic writ-
ers, were contracted as follows :
a.) In the Ionic dialect, they were regularly contracted into u and wv, with
the insertion of t after a consonant ( 35) ; as, 'A-r^/Saa (' \-rotfiu} 'Ar^s/^w,
A3-^5wy (Arf/**J>J AvgUMMV* Bateau B^y, 'Rgfttieo O. 214, ivfAfjtiKtu A.
165, 'A*-/* B. 461.
/S.) In the Doric, absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became
and av ( 45. 1) ; as, 'Ar^s/Baa 'Ar^t/Sa, 'A.rosiba.uv 'Ar^<5av.
y.) In the Attic, 0.0 and a^/v were contracted into ov (by precession from ea,
28, 29) and uv ; as, 'Ar^/^afl ('Arg*) *Ar^/Jav, 'Ar^tAMw 'AT^/^A<V.
4. In the Accusative of masculines, the Ionic often changes
lo a, the old connecting vowel a. now becoming t (^. 46. /S) ; as, Iter-ranS.
Hdt i. 11, pi. S:9-ra-r*s Ib. Ill, for Surarornv,
5. The dative plural in Homer commonly ends in -yo-i, or -r,s before
128 SECOND DECLENSION. [BOOK II.
vowel (which may be referred to apostrophe). There are, however, a few in
stances of -jj before a consonant (crr,s */ A. 179, ir'n^s a-^aj . 279, &c.)
and two, where we even find -/s, which ought, perhaps, to be changed to -ys
(etxrctis M. 284, $;> t. 119). An old contraction into -&<ri, instead of -0.1*1,
remained in the common language in adverbs of placa ; as, FlXaTa/aav, al
Platate, Sugcio-i.
6. For the Epic Gen. hi -9-sv, see 91. For the Epic Datives in -<f>i, -9-*,
and -%i, see 89, 90. For the Doric and ^Eolic forms of the Ace. plur.,
*cc 45. 5.
7. Antique, Ionic, and Doric forms are sometimes found in Attic writers
particularly,
a.) The Dor. Gen. in -a", from some nouns in -as, mostly proper names ;
as, ogviS-oS-ns&S) fowler, Tufyva.;, KaXX/a; Gen. flw3-o&jg, Tufi/avct, KA.-
A/a. So ah 1 contracts in -j ; as, (Zappa.;, G. fioppa (^ 7).
/3.) The Ion. Gen. in -, from a few proper names in -y ; as,
r>jf Gen.
y.) The old Dat. plur. in -r/, which is frequent in the poets. So, in Pla-
to, ri%vemri Leg. 920 e, /i/u.'^aurt Phaedr. 276 b.
II. THE SECOND DECLENSION.
[For the affixes and paradigms, see 86, 87 ; TT1T 5, 6, 9, 10.]
97. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa
ive singular are wanting ( 86),
1.) In the theme of the article; thus, o for og.
2.) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns aUog,
d?, txflvog, and og thus, TO, aJUo, avio, fxttvo, o, for TO'V,
, &c.
NOTE. In crasis with the article ( 39), and in composition with the pro-
nouns rtuos and rofof, the neuter a.lr more frequently becomes aura'v thus,
TOtlrov and TO.VTO, for TO a,uri roiovrev and voiovro, TOITOVTOV and
3.) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension
98), particularly in f t i'o^c, dawn, r\ Aw?, threshing-floor, y
r) K<ug, rj Time, 6 ".4ftw$ ' thus, Ace. yfcov and vfo') (^] 9),
f"cu ( "Adw. So, in the adjectives nyr^Qtaq (^ 17),
, competent.
CONTRACTS. If the characteristic is , f, or o, it
may be contracted with the affix according to the rules ( 33-
37). See ttyr^uog (T[ 17), onrtov, roo? (H 9). The contract de-
clension in -oc and -OM-, from -nog and -oi, is termed by gram-
marians the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic
writers, although it is far from being peculiar to them ( 7).
NOTES. *. The numter of words belongim: to tin- Attic dodension is
tnall. In some of thenj, the uneontracted fonn docs not invur, o< occurs
CH. 2.1 THIRD DECLENSION. 129
J
only with sonic change. Thus, for <iveuya.ov, ivy&os (which are compounds of
7, the original fonn of y, earth, and from winch come by contraction
uvuyiuv, luy.uf) we tind the extended forms a.vuyaiov v. 4. 29, ivyxio; or iu-
yuos. Some of them are variously declined. See ^ 123. y, 124. y.
/?. If the characteristic is long , t is inserted after the contraction ( 35)
thus, v&'os (wj) vieas (^f 9), vttou (vaJ) v*w, va/ (v) va7, veto* (wwv) viv PlllT.
/ (<y) *a>, &C.
7. In the Attic declension, the Nom. plur. neut. is contracted, like the
the: cases, into <a ; thus, a.yn^u (^ 17), as if from uyn^u-a-et, a form with
the connecting vowel. See 87.
DIALECTIC FORMS.
^ OO. 1. The affix of the Gen. sing, o-o ( 86), which was com-
monly contracted to aw, or, in the ^Eolic and stricter Doric, to w ( 44. 4),
was often prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the
Tragic in lyric portions), to a/a; thus, vrovrou 'Ixagioio B. 145 ; Vopou
. 126; a7a Sa^wa a. 330; 3sa Find. O. 2. 37 ; &? Ib. 6. 60 ;
A;,- Ale. 1 (20) ; i^s^eva/a Id. 37; xe-Ta.po!o...'Kva. Theoc. 1. 68; /*-
Xa.x.u xfyroio Id. 4. 18. The Epic genitives llii-wo (A. 327, &c.) and II-
VIA-IUO (3. 489) are made by a single contraction, with the usual insertion of
i ( 98. /3), from the original forms rUraaa, n^vfXaaa. The Epic dual forms
in oit\, which alone are used by Homer, arise from a mere poetic doubling of
( 48).
2. Some proper names in -aj have the Gen. sing, in Herodotus, after the
analogy of Dec. I.; as, K^a/Va;, K^oitrttu viii. 122, but Kpoitrau i. 6; BTTS
iv. 160 ; Kteoftfyonw v. 32. The Gen. plur. forms -rsa-a-Lv (Hdt. i. 94) and
vvpiMv (Id. ii. 36), if genuine, may be referred to the Ionic insertion of i
( 48. 1).
3. The old Dat. plur. in -oia-i is common in the poets of all classes., and m
Ionic prose. So, even in Plato, 9-io7<ri Leg. 955 e.
4. For the Epic Gen. in -a$ y, see 91. For the Epic Datives in -o<p t and
&, and the old Dat. in -a/, see 89, 90. For the Doric and ^Eolic forms
of the Ace. plur., see 45. 5.
5. Contracts in -ovg from -oaf occur in Homer, though rarely ; as, vovg
x.. ,240 (elsewhere vaaj). In words in -tog, -tor, he sometimes protracts the*
to n ( 47. N. , and sometimes employs synizesis ( 30\
III. THE THIRD DECLENSION.
[For the affixes and paradigms, see 85, 87; TTTT 5, 6, 11 - 16.]
1OO. In this declension, the Nominative, though regard-
ed as ihe theme of the word, seldom exhibits the root in its
simple, distinct form. This form must therefore be obtained
from the Genitive, or from some case which has an open af
fix (^ 79, 82. e ).
REMARKS. 1. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes
which occur in those cases which have either close affixes, or no affixes ; that
is in the Nominative and Vocative singular, the Dative plural, and the Ac-
130 THIRD DECLENSION. [BOOK 11
cusalive singular in -. For these changes, see in general 51, 55, 57 -
59, 63.
2. The flexible ending of the Ace. sing, in this, as in the other two de-
clensions, seems to have been originally v. But the v was so extensively
changed into a. in accordance with 63. R., that the became the prevailing
aftix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will therefore be understood
that the affix is , if no statement is made to the contrary. When the affix
is , the root receives the same changes as in the theme ( 1 10).
Words of the third declension are divided according to the
characteristic, into MUTES, LIQUIDS, LIQUID-MUTES, and PURES.
A. MUTES.
[IT 11.1
1O1. LABIALS AND PALATALS. These are all either
masculine or feminine, and in none is the Voc. formed except
yvvvi (N. y).
NOTES, a. For the ^ and in the theme and Dat. pi., see 51.
/5. In 9-i|, the root is S^x- In those cases in which ^ remains, S be-
comes r, according to 62. In aX&)T>i, -txos, fox, the last vowel of the
root is lengthened in the theme. Compare 112. .
y. Fyvsi, woman, wife, which is irregular in having its theme after the form
of Dec. I., and also in its accentuation, is thus declined : S. N. yv\r tj G. yv-
va.tM.bs, D. yifvatxi, A. yvva.7x.tx,, V. yvveci P. N. yvvKixiSi G. yvva.ix.uv, D. yv*
/!/, A. ywxTxKf D. N. ywaTxt, G. yvva.ix.oiv. The old grammarians ha\-e
alsd cited from Comic writers the forms, A. yvvfa, P. N. ywtti, A. yvv&s, ac-
cording to Dec. I.
1 02. MASCULINE AND FEMININE LINGUALS. These
lose their characteristic in the theme and Dat. pi. ( 55), in the
Ace. sing., when formed in v ( 63. R., 100. 2), and in the
Voc. ( 63).
NOTKS. a. If a palatal is thus brought before *, it unites with it in Jj
( 51), as (avaxT?, avaxj) av (^f 11), fi (vvxrs) vv%, night ; if to the end
of a word, it is dropped ( 63), as (avax-r, v*) v. Tliis distinct Yoc.,
however, is used only in addressing a god ; otherwise, S. v*$ (or, by frequent
crasis, i'va|).
/3. For the change of when brought before the affixes s and , or to the
end of a word, see 112. *, 113. 3.
y. Barytones in -if and -vf form the Ace. sing, in both and , the latter
being the more common affix ; as, ^^/j (T 1 1 ), fi fyif, strife, i, '* %/*, bird;
Ace. %cioira, and %a.oiv (as the name of a goddess, the form in -a is always
used, and sonn-t lines, also, in poetry ; but, otherwise, the form in -, yet see
H. Gr. iii. 5. 16), loiv and poet. ?/$, v/ and poet. S^i^a.. So also, xXtif
(^f 11), o yi^v;, linu/hter, and the compounds of TUI/?, font ; thus, Ace. xXi?3a
and xXtiv, yi'^ura. and yi^wv, OtiiToix and (">/3<Vt/v (^f 16), 3/r5a and J/.
m-ovv (T 17). Add i^a/j, /ope, Ace. i^wra and rare poetic form fy. Sc
rf, when resolved by the jtoet.s into -ran, may have Ace. a-aiV, Ap. Rh.
CH. '2.] MUTtfS. - LIQUIDS. 131
4. 697. In oxytones, the accent served to prevent the lingual from falling
awa.
lOIfc. NEUTER LINGUALS. In these, the characteristic
is always T, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after
f.nt, but otherwise becomes g or y ( 63) ; as, aw^ua, (pug, xe'(ic;,
Z-iuy (IT 11), eidog (IT 22), from the roots oo^ca-, qpwr-, xe^ai-,
'jr7-, tidoi-.
NOTE. The r is also dropped in fti).i, /t*X/raj, honey ; in yaXa, yaXaxraf,
milk, which also drops x. ; and in yow, yov&ros, knee, and Sc&t/, Sogetrof, spear,
uhuh then change to v (compare 113). In the poetic ^a, ^aaro;,
r/ ty, r is changed into o after j*a ; and in 'tfSuf, ffietres, water, and OKU^, <rxat-
T 5,-, ./zft/i, T is changed into , and a into <w. See 123. y.
^ ] O4. CONTRACT LINGUALS. A few linguals drop the
cliaracteristic before some or all of the open affixes, and are
then contracted ; thus, x/U7<5f$ (x^afc) xAft?, xA?<5?
^Af/C' XfQMTOg XOC XC^W?, X6^'<7 Xf'()a X^ (IT 11) ; TO
prodigy, P. N. rf'^ra Tf'^, G. Tf^Krcov Tc^wy o /^ftJc,
S. D. ^wTt (/^au) /o& (in the phrase V ^w). So, in Homer,
from o i^oJc? sweat, o /gylojc, laughter, o ZQUK;, love, S. D. i(
, for IduMTt, &c. ; A. t^^oii, y&w, for
Compare $ 107, 119, 123. .
NOTE. In the following words, the contraction is confined to the root
TO ovs, UT'OS, ear (^f 11), contracted from the old ?*, ovxras ( 33. y).
TO StXtag, bait, Gen. $t\ia,<ros, Vi^nras.
ro <rria., contr. trrfi, tallow, Gen. <rrixros, ffrnref.
TO <pe'ta, wett, Gen. tf>^Kros (a or ), pgqv-a; ( 37. 1 ).
REMARK. Those linguals in which a liquid precedes the
lingual will be treated as a distinct class ( 109).
B. LIQUIDS.
[IT 12.]
^ 1O5. MASCULINE AND FEMININE LIQUIDS. In these,
except >lc, salt, sea (in the singular, only Ionic and poetic), the
characteristic is always either v or Q. For the changes in the
theme and Dat. pi., see ^ 57-59. When the characteristic
is r, it depends upon the preceding vowel whether the v or the
$ is changed in the theme ; as follows.
1.) If an E or vowel precede, the g is changed ; as in
ijy, -8vo?, ditlptov, -ovog (IT 12) ; o fir t v, fi^vog-, month, o jgttf*k t
, storm, winter.
Except o unit, xrsv'.f, comb, the numeral &, lves,one (^[ 21), and the Ionic
pits (as from root /*EV-, yet Gen. f*wos) for />jy, month (Hdt. ii. 82).
2.) If precede, in nouns the g is changed, but in adjectives
THIRD DECLENSION. - LIQUIDS. [BOOK II.
the v ; thus, o //', /Zuvoc, Pan, o naiar^ -avo?, j9#an ; but
jieAas, -avos -(IT 19;, T'Aw?, -MVOC, wretched.
3.) If t or v precede, the v is changed; as in ^'c, giro's
(IF 12), 6 foAqpfc* -Jroe, dolphin, o *o'^x^, -Bros, Phorcys.
NOTES. . The v remains in ^so-j/v, -t7v?, wooden tower ; and most words
in -<y and -i/; have a second, but less classic form, in -/ and -w as, p/j an*
fiv, SsX^/j and ^X(p/y, Oo^xt/; and <flXfv.
/3. In the pronoun rls, (^f 24), the v of the root T/V- is simply dropped in
the theme. Yet see 152. /3.
REMARK. VOCATIVE. In the Voc. of 'AiroXX&rv, -?, Apollo, II <$,
-uvos, Neptune, and o ffurvi^, -ti^os, saviour, the natural tone of address has
led to the throwing back of the accent, and the shortening of the last sylla-
ble 5 thus, "AvToXXav, TloffitSov, ffuft^.
1OG. SYNCOPATED LIQUIDS. I. In a few liquids of fa
miliar use, a short vowel preceding the characteristic is syn-
copated in some or most of the cases ; as follows.
1.) In these three, the syncope takes place before all the open terminations :
;, man (t 12). For the insertion of the S, see 64. 2.
Kueuv, dog (Tf 12), which has, for its root, xuov-, by syncope, xvt-. In this
word, the syncope extends to the Dat. plur.
ipos, lamb's (^f 12), which has, for its root, a^sv-, by syncope, *-. The
Nom. sing, is not used, and its place is supplied by a/e*vof .
2.) These five are syncopated in the genitive and dative singular:
var-nt, father, and ^JJT^, mottier (^ 1 2).
ft &wyu<r(> t daughter, G. S-vyuTt^s 9-z/yar^oj, D. Svyarioi SwyaTgi.
vt yaffTri^, stomach, G. ya.<rr'ioos ya,<r<r(>os, D. yatffriot yetrr^i.
fl Anf*,vrv, Ceres, G. Af*.vrtot A^fir^e;, D. Ati/u.^Tioi A*J^JT^ also,
A. AjJMJJTl
NOTES. . In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and
sometimes employ it in other cases than those which are specified.
/3. For the Dat. pi., see 59. FWrrj has not only <yu<rr^ei<ri (Dio Cass.
54. 22), but also in Hipp, yety-r^ffi.
^ 1 O7. II. In comparatives in -wv, the v is more frequently
syncopated before and f, after which contraction takes place ;
as, [ifivit (ftflfcoa) fififri), (jtioi>fc; (jttl^Mf) /nil^ovc
f/Vo.v (5| 17). Compare .104, 119, 123. .
NOTE. A similar contraction is common in the Ace. of "A-rflXXwv, Ajx>llo,
and Heirtituv, Neptune; thus, 'A<r>.Aft/, ('AoraXXwa) 'AwaXXw (iii. 1. 6);
Hoviiluvn, Yloiriiiu. See, for both the uncontracted and the contracted forms,
PI. Oat. 402 d, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, o xvxiuv, .*!, mixed drink ;
Ace. xvxiuva, and, rather poetic, KVJUU (x. 316 ; xuxnu \. 624) : >j yXrf^wx,
-<wvof, pennyroyal; Ace. yXyi-^uva, yX'^ (Ar. Ach. 874) ; and by a like
syncope of f, o I%UP, ichor ; Arc. /';<:^a and (only E. 416) l^u.
1O8. NEUTER LIQUIDS. A few nouns, in which
:m. 2.J LIQUID-MUTES. PURES. 133
the characteristic, are neuter. They are, for the most part,
confined to the singular, and require, in their declension, no
euphonic changes of letters.
NOTE. In i, spring, and the poetic xi, heart, contraction takes place
in the root ; thus, N. i^, poetic fy, G. ta^os, commonly Z^os, D. 'ix.y t com-
monly wgi N. *s, in Homer always x?j, D. x^<.
C. LlQUID-MuTES.
[IT 13.]
1 O O. All nouns of this class are either masculine o
feminine. The characteristic of the class is IT, except in the
feminities ddpnQ, -rcproc, wife, thrive, -tv&oc, worm, KBIQIVS, -iv~
#oc, carriage-basket, and 7fyi/v?, -vvflo?, Tiryns. The T or #
is affected as in simple linguals ( 102). When, by the drop-
ping of , v is brought before q in the theme, it depends upon
the preceding vowel whether the v or the ? is changed ( 57,
58), according to the following rule : If an O vowel precede, the
s is changed ; otherwise, the v.
Thus, Xswv, -ovras, SivoQuv, -uvros (^f 13), o S^axa/v, -ovros, dragon; but
yiya,;, -O.VTO: (^f 13), o Ipti;, -avraj, thong, o "Siftotis, -ivros, the Siiiiols, ^intvu;,
-VVTOS, showing.
NOTES. . Except tious, -ovro;, tooth (t 13 ; yet Ion. o^v Hdt. vi. 107),
and participles from verbs in -u(u\ as, $av;, ^ovro; (^[ 22), from 2^^, to p(/t;e.
/3. Some Latin names received into the Greek have -r>; in the theme, instead
of -us ; as, K*.vft,r,;, -tore;, Clemens, Outers, -ivros, Valens.
y. If the characteristic is -v9--, the v remains before ; ( 58. 0). In 'ba.pZo
(^ 13), the s is simply dropped in the theme.
REMARKS. 1. A few proper names in -a?, -avros, form the Voc. after the
analogy of the theme ; that is, v becomes , and is then contracted ; thus,
"ArXaj, -KVTOS, V. ("ArXavr, "A-rXav, "ArXaa) "ArXa n.oXwS^}, V.
HaXw^a^a.
2. Nouns and adjectives in -/<, -ivroe, preceded by a or >?, are usually con
tracted ; as, o fXoLxbii; TXasxanj, cake, G. TXaxoivraj TXaxot/VTaj Vifnim
r;/u%;, honored, F. rift^itriree, Tifj^naaa., N. rift<v n/*,)jv, G. riftnivros rifwvros, &c-
D. PURES.
[IT 14.]
1 1 O. The euphonic changes in the declension of pures
may be mosuy referred, (I.) to a special law of Greek declen-
sion, and (II.) to contraction.
I. SPECIAL LAW OF GREEK DECLENSION. The
short vowels, s and o, can never remain in the root,
either before the affixes s and v (H 5), or at the end
rf a word. Hence,
12
134 THIRD DECLENSION. [BOOK IL
111. (A.) Before the affixes s and v, s be-
comes 77, t, v, or sv ; and o becomes a or ov ; as
follows.
1.) In masculine nouns, e becomes ev in simple, and rj in
compound words; as, simple, 6 tercet;?, -HOC (51 14; root E
o fiuvdevt;, -tug, king, o ifyfvg, -stag, priest, o Orjasvg, -i we,
SCMS, o Mf/ugfvg, -e'wc, Megarian ; compound, o
(51 14; from awe, entire, and xpa'ro?, strength), o '
-tog, Aristotle, o ^//^uoafoV^?, -tog.
Except the simples o "Ag>jf, -tos, Mars, o <rvjs, trio;, moth ; and the following,
L; which j becomes w or /, o TJ^V?, -sa/j, Ace. r^f (1 14), o creXtxt/?, -s<w?,
a.re, o Tt<rfivs, -ies, elder (properly an adj.) ; %/j, -iws, viper, o oQtg, -tus,
terpent, o r^t/Vav<f , -ius t president, and also xo^s, Kvgfiif, ^ta^/y, and
2.) In feminine and common nouns, ( becomes i ; as, ?]
Ace. no\iv (5f 14), ^ dvvapig, -<f, power ; o,
-tug, prophet, prophetess.
119. 3.) In adjectives, t becomes t in simple, and / in
compound words ; as, simple, ydvc, -toe;, Ace. rjdvv (51 19), ^Av-
xuc, -so?, sweet, o$v<;, -co?, sharp; compound, aly&iJG, -tog, true,
fiJit^g, -s'o?, cheap, acprjy.Mdrtf, -fog, wasp-like, iqiijQyti -oc, ^flu-
t/i^ ^Aree Z>ans py oars, or, as a substantive (vat;?, vessel, being
understood), trireme (51 14).
Except a few simple adjectives, in which becomes ; as, retQns, -iet
(51 17), frXfl'fnf, -iof,full, ^it/^Tj'f, -iof, false.
4.) In monosyllables, o becomes ou ; otherwise, w ; us,
V, Ace. /?otv (5f 14), o, ?} ^oi/tf, (>oo?, sumach, o
o/* earth; but t<5w\-, -do? (5f 14).
NOTES. . Tlu's rule applies also to linguals in which 9 precedes the char
acteristic ; thus, <rovs, -ratios (5[ 11), and its compounds, Ot&irous, -olos (51 1 6),
JiVr, .* (t 17); but i/^, -i (1 22).
/3. In feminities of more than one syllable, in which the characteristic is a,
the affix f is changed to i, and is then absorbed. Thus from the root rt%,i- is
formed the theme (;?, fi%ot) ri^u (^f 14 . So (rt/S-a;, -oot, persuasion, n
A.VTU, -oaj, Latona, &c. Except, as above, afiuf, and the Ionic ft %&/;, i1u-n.
These feminines in -u> and -a; have no plural or dual, except by metapla^m
( 122) ; unless, perhaps, t'ncavt ( 123. ) is to be regarded as simply con-
tracted from tineas-
^113. (B.) In cases which have no affix,
characteristic becomes c, v, or ft/, or else assumes a
euphonic s; and o characteristic becomes 01 , ov .
as follows.
1.) If the theme ends in -^c, f becomes tg ; but, otherwise
PURES. 13.")
is changed as in the theme ; thus, Norn. neut. auq>tg (1f 17),
fjdv (Tl 19) ; Voc. T^tjjoft;, JSwx^aifft noh, nfi%v, Innti (fl 14),
W (fl 19).
2.) In the theme of neuter nouns, assumes $, becoming
itself o ( 28) ; as, TO m^og, -eoc (fl 14), TO i&vos, -eo$, nation,
TO o'o?, -5, mountain.
Except TO a*-, -105, toum (^ 14), the Epic ra iruiJ, -tot, .flock, and a few
foreign names of natural productions in -/, as TO ifi-ri^, -*,-, pepper.
3.) In the Vocative, o becomes o7, if the theme ends in -a' or
-we ; but ov, if it ends in -ovg', as, foot, i<5o7, fiov (fl 14) ; and
in like manner (cf. 112. ), Oldinov (ft 16).
1 14. REMARKS. 1. After the analogy of s and o,
characteristic becomes av in ygaitg and rav<; (tl 14), and as-
sumes in the theme of neuters ; as, TO yigag, -uog (|f 14), TO
oc, o/rf a'e.
2. In the Accusative singular of pures, the formative v be-
comes ( 100. 2) except when the theme ends in -c, -1$,
-fc, -avg, or -ot/c ; thus, #w'?, t/'(>o)c, nWrtv^, To<fo7;t:, aldo>g, i]^(o
(Tf 14), ooKprjS (tf 17) ; Acc. ^oj, ^'oo>, Innia, To<^f, uiSotx,
rtfu<t, aotcpia; but 6 /lc, siowe, x/c, oli; (contracted from 6'iV),
7io'Ac, ix&vt;, Ti^t 1 ?, /oyc, yyc, /5oic (H 14), r^duf (H 19) ; Acc
kuv, ytiv, olv, nohv, l^dvv, nrtfvv, yyvevv, vavv, fiovv,
NOTE. Proper names in -us, -to;, for the most part, admit both forms of
the Acc.; as, 2x^ar>j 5 - (t 14), A. 2x a<r>j (Plat.), 2x S a-rw (Xen.); i
"Aen;, Mars, A. "Ao and "A^jv.
3. When the characteristic is changed to a diphthong before
o in the theme, the same change is made before at in the Da-
tive plural ; as, Irnievoi, fioval, yQuval, vuvul (fl 14).
115. II. CONTRACTION. For the general
laws, see ^ 31-37. The following remarks may
be added.
1. Pures in -rjc, -oc. -oJ, and -w$, -oo^, are contracted in all the
cases which have open terminations. See TQi^Q^g, .Ta^ar*^-,
c //oxA8r/?, TfT^oc, fata, nidus (f[ 14), (woX? (ff 17). Add a few
neuters in -ng ; as, TO yfQ<*$ (H 14), TO xo6c, meat.
XOTKS. . Of nouns in -u and -j, -aj, the uncontracted form scarcely
occurs, even in the poets and dialects.
/3. In proner names in -X*K, contracted -*X>Jf (from xXsy, renown), the
Dat. and sometimes the Acc. sing, are doubly contracted. See 'H^axXsjjj
(1 14). For the later Voc. "H^Xsj, compute 6 105. R. The Norn, pi
H*XUJ, in the Ion. form ( 121. 4), occurs, with Qvfiis, PL Theaet
169 b.
136 THIRD DECLENSION [BOOK II
2. In other pures, contraction is, for the most part, con
fined to three cases ; the Nom. and Ace. plur., and the Dat
sing.
The contractions which are usual or frequent in these words are exhibited
in the tables. Contraction sometimes occurs in cases in which it is not given
in the tables, and is sometimes omitted in cases in which it is given. These
deviations from common usage are chiefly found hi the poets.
116. 3. In the Attic and Common dialects, the endings
go?, -, and -eas, instead of the common contraction, receive
in certain words a peculiar change, which lengthens the last
vowel. This change takes place,
a.) In the Gen. sing, of nouns in -/?, -vg, and -tt-c, and
sometimes of nouns in -t and -v ; as, Tio'At?, Gen. nofoog
JirixvG, -&), iTiTisuc, -a>, 'UTI>, -tog and -t<ag (^j 14), nin
( 1 13. 2). Also o ''-/pry?, Mars, G. "Agio*; and sometimes "
(as if from a second theme "Ayevg, cited by grammarians from
Alcseus).
b.) In the Ace. sing, and plur. of nouns in -eug ; as, innfvg,
Ace. sing. inn to, innf.it, pi. inniug inneag.
NOTES, a. This change appears to be simply an early and less perfect
mode of contraction. From the accentuation of such words as TO*.IU;, it is
evident that the i (as in 'Arifttw, MmXta?, 35) has not the full force of a
distinct syllable ; while it is equally evident from the use of the poets, that it
has not wholly lost its syllabic power. It seems, therefore, to have united as
a species of semivowel (of the same class with our y and JT ) with the follow-
ing vowel, which consequently, as in other cases of contraction, became long.
An especial reason for regarding this method of contraction as early, consists
in the fact that it is confined to those classes of words which have dropped F
or A from the root ( 117, 118). The poets sometimes complete the con-
traction by synizesis ; as, $a.in\ius Eur. Ale. 240, 'Eot^S-iw* Id. Hipp. 1095,
'A%iX*.ia, Id. Iph. A. 1341. Sometimes, also, the unchanged Gen. in -toy,
and rarely the Ace. in -t* and -txs occur in the Attic poets as, N,- Eur.
Ion, 1082, -roXtes Id. Hec. 866, Qovia, Ib. 882. The poets likewise employ
in the Ac*-,, sing, the regular contraction into 55 ; as, \vyy^a.<$n Ar. Ach. 1 1 50,
'Qtivfffffi tiur. Rh. 708, and even itftj Id. Ale. 25. The regularly contracted
Acr. pi. in -H;, instead of ~t&<, became in the later Greek the common form,
and although regarded as less Attic, yet is not unfrequent in the manuscripts
and editions of genuine Attic writers, particularly of Xenophon ; as, ft%<n*.t7e
Mem. iii. 9. 10. ,
/3. If another vowel precedes, the i is commonly absorbed by the us , a, and
&( ; thus, llli^uiius iltt^xiui, lliioKi'a, lltigitia, (^f 14); %o&!, %,, %oS
( 123).
y. For the earlier contraction of the Nom. pi. of nouns in -wi into ;, see
37. 2. The uncontracted Q*i<riif occurs PI. Theact. 169 b.
3. The form of the Gen. in -i*f is termed by grammarians the Attic Geni-
tive. For its accentuation, see Prosody. The Gen. pi. in -i accented upon
CH. 2.J PURES. 137
the antepenult i also termed Attic ; as, roXi. The regularly contracted
<r^(wv occurs iv. 7. 16.
i. The Gen. in -uug is also found in a few adjectives in -is (as,
-i;), <.n tiftHrus, half (Gen. commonly -;, but also -tos and -oui), and, in
later -writers, hi other adjectives in -us (thus, ^a^'tus Plut.).
1 1 7. REMARKS ON THE DECLENSION OF PURES. The various
and peculiar changes hi the declension of pures appear to have chiefly arisen
from the successive methods which were employed to avoid the hiatus pro-
duced by appending the open affixes to the characteristic vowel. Of these
methods, the earlier consisted mainly in the insertion of a strong breathing or
aspirate consonant (cf. 89) ; and the later, in contraction. The inserted
aspirate became so intimately associated with the root, that its use extended
even to the cases which had not an open affix ; and although it fell away in
the refining of the language (cf. 22. $), yet it left distinct memorials of it-
self, either in a "kindred vowel or consonant, or in a prolonged svllable. The
aspirates chiefly inserted appear to have been the labial F, and a dental breath-
ing, which was most akin to <r (in Latin it passed extensively into r ; for dis-
tinction's sake, we here represent it by a capital 2). From the classes of
words in which these aspirates were respectively inserted, the former appears
to have prevailed in an earlier period of the language, than the latter. In
the modifications which subsequently took place, the following law prevailed :
When 1 .) followed by a vowel^ both the aspirates were simply dropped. When
not followed by a vowel, the labial hreathinq united (2.) with a, t, and a pre-
ceding to form KV, iv, and ou, and (3.) with t and v (except in the Dot, plur.\
to form T and v ; while the dental breathing (4.) at the end of a word became j,
and (5.) before the affix s lengthened a preceding short vowel. Thus,
(1.) /3Fo? fioo;, yF? y^os, KlF'os xid;, i%StFos t%B$i>s, IvviFtS twits'
ettio'Sis afioos, T/2oj rii%io? } ya2<jj <y'^ao; (^ 14), ffuQi'Sos ffoKpios
(I 17).
(2.) yoiiFs y^ctvs, vapf vetu; (Lat. navis\ vetpffi vavffi, iwzriFs tvfvfivs, /rrF
'wiv, pops fiou;, fiopv POUV, /3o'F fiou (^f 14).
(3.) *tFj *';, n F xf, :%$$Ft iz$is, IxttF '%$& (f 14) ; but Dat. pi.
(4.) Nom. neut. <ra<ps2 <ra<pi; (^ 17), -rsT^sS Ti~x<>f (t passing into its
kindred vowel, 28), y2 yej (^ 14) ; Voc. 2war2 ^tux^a-n;, rein-
fs2 Ttvt; (^ 14). The peculiar form of the Voc. of })%&> and a.'&us has
arisen from the change of ? to its corresponding vowel ( 50) and then con-
traction with precession ( 29) ; thus, ^o2 foot ^a/~ (cf. 45, 5, 86,
112. /3).
(5.) r<pi2$ fttfrii (1 17), 2*ea<rs2? 2&;x ? r>j?, a^o'2f aft at s (f 14).
For y%u, see 112. /3, and compare w%o7 above (4.). In the Dat. p!, the
short vowel remains unchanged ; as, <ra.<[>i.<ri.
NOTE. In adjectives, and in a few masculine and neuter nouns, the diph-
thong tu appears to have been reduced to a simple short v ; as, ^F? n^ti, titF
tiu (^[ 19) J ir^sFf fyi^S, v>i%iFv -rrtxiJii, xri%,iF fvtv, ai/rrtF eiffTt)
(t 14).
v ^ In feminines, it was natural that the inserted breathing or
consonant should commonly assume a softer form. In this fonn, it appear* to
1-2
138 THIRD DECLENSION. [BOOK 11
have been most nearly akin to the lingual middle mute 2 (cf. 49. 2) ; and
in a great number of feminines, it acquired a permanent place in the language
as this letter. In its previous, and as yet unfixed state, we represent it, for
distinction's sake, by a capital A. Before this inserted lingual, a. could re-
main, but there was a uniform tendency in t to pass by precession into /. It
is a remarkable illustration of this, that in the whole declension, there is not
a single instance of t before a characteristic lingual mute. In the progress
of the language, feminines in -i-, or with the inserted lingual -sA-, assumed
three forms :
1.) The A fell away, leaving the vowel of precession / in the Nom., Ace.,
and Voc. sing., but the original t in the other cases ; thus, voXis, vroXius, wo-
Xu, iroX<v, JTX< vroXin, -ffo^iuv, ToXs<r<, vomits (^[ 14). This became the
usual form of feminine pures hi -is, in the Attic and Common dialects.
2.) The A fell away, and precession took place throughout. This became
the regular form of feminine pures in -is in the Ionic dialect ( 44. 3) ; thus,
Ion. N. -Is, G. -rj, D. -f/, always contracted into -r, A. -Fv, V. -<" ; PI. N. -?u,
sometimes contr. into -r?, G. -iuv, D. -Fr/, A. -1s, commonly contr. into -is ;
as, foXis, woX/oj, roXr, croX/v vroXns, -iuv, <roXi<ri, <roX/aj, -Tf. The / was also
the prevalent vowel in the Doric ; thus, Dor. rX/f , rX<of, troXr and croXs/,
<TflX<v raXy, troXiuv, <rX/W<r< and vreXti
3.) The A became fixed in the root, and the word passed into the class of
linguals. Thus, the root Mt-yu^t-, Megarian, had two forms, Mtyaj sF- masc.,
and with precession Msya^/ A- fern. ; from the former we have Mtyajit/s, -*>?,
Megarian man, and from the latter, Msya^'y, -tios, Megarian woman. This
became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in -is, if we except the
large class of abstract nouns in -trig . Especially many feminine adjectives, or
words which are properly such, are thus declined.
NOTE. We find, also, the same forms in a few masculine or common
nouns and adjectives ( 111, 119. 2), and even, in a few words, a corre-
sponding neuter formation in -i ( 113. 2).
I 1 9. As might have been expected, these three forms are far from
being kept entirely separate. Thus,
1.) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the latter
especially in the Ionic and Doric dialects, which were less averse than the
Attic to hiatus ( 45, 46) ; as, ri pwi;, wrath, G. pyvi$as and privies * T*-
<*, keel, G. To-ribot, r^o-ries, and r^tus particularly proper names, as,
KvTfif, G. -itf, and -tot *I<r<f, G. -/Sj and ~ios i<ris, G. Qi<ritos 0. 370,
D. 0rr 2. 407. For similar cases of the use and omission of a lingual
characteristic, see 104 ; of a liquid characteristic, 107, 123. .
2 ) In some pures in -it, the Attic adopts, in whole or in part (particularly
in the Gen. sing.), the Ionic forms ; as, ft rv^trif, tower, G. rv^fiaf vii. 8. 1 2
but PI. N. rvfffiH iv. 4. 2, ru^uv H. Gr. iv. 7. 6, rv^firt Cyr. vii. 5. 10
o -rafis, spouse, G. -its, D. -i/ w ,naya$/?, -tot, a kind of harj>, D. p.a.'ya.'bl
vii. 3. 32 . o, ft riypis, tijer, (I. riyotof, and in later writers riy^as, PI. N.
rlyoiit, G. viygtw some pnpi.'.r names, as, i 2vi**urit, G. -ios, i. 2. 12,
r l^/j, G. -it vi. 2. 1 : and the adjectives foif, intelligent, vvrrit, abstemious
In like mannei, , j fy^iXwf ( 117. N.), eel, G. iyx'tlvos, PI. N.
G i^Xiy rfl <ririg< ( 118. N.), pepper, G. -f and ~ig.
HH. 2.] DIALECTIC FORMS. 139
DIALECTIC FORMS.
12O. (A.) Dialectic changes affecting the AFFIX.
1. In the poets, especially the Epic, the Ace. sing, sometimes ends in -a, in
words in which it has commonly -v ; as, ivg'sa, Z. 291, v?5a or vs, voXr.K, for
fyi5v, vatyy, craX/y /^Swa Theoc. 21. 45. On the other hand, the New Ionic
often forms the Ace. of nouns in -u or -us, -oo;, in -ovv ; as, '\c!>, In, ATW,
Latona, r,&>s, dawn, Ace. 'lavy Hdt. i. 1, AjjTatJy, '^oUy. The ^Eolic and stricter
Doric have here -uv for -ouv ( 44. 4); as, "H^wv Sapph. 75 (91), AT
Inscr. Cret.
2. In the Gen. plur., the Ionic sometimes inserts t (cf. 48. 1, 99. 2),
S, %riviuv Hdt. ii. 45, /^voittotuv^ Kvdg'ituv, for y^nvuv, [AVOIO^
3. In the Dat. plur., for the common affix -<n(y), the poets often employ
the old or prolonged forms -se-i(v), -t<rtrt(v), and -<r<r/(>0- See 71, 84, 85.
Homer uses the four forms, though -sv(y) rarely. The forms -s<7^() and
!<r<(v) are also common in Doric and /Eolic prose and -sa-/(y) is used in Ionic
prose after the characteristic v. Thus, S<nv A. 14, %itgtir<rt F. 271, %t'ioitn
1C. 468 ; vraa'i E. 745, <ro<r<ri B. 44, z-o^ifftrtv F. 407 ; 'ivritriv B. 73, 't-Trnrfft S.
597, ivritfffftv B. 75 ; "Senrv/^oviffi Hdt. vi. 57. So, F not passing into v be-
fore a vowel ( 117), fi'ourat B. 481, vunra-t Find. P. 4. 98, a.^<rr^irat A.
227.
4. In the Dual, the Epic prolongs -oiv (as in Dec. II., 99. 1) to -n'iv ;
thus, valour S. 228, 2s^Wv p. 52.
11. (B.) Dialectic changes affecting the ROOT, either
simply or in connection with the affix.
1 . Many changes result from dialectic preferences of vowels ; as, Ion. &u,
'"?, y!v?, for S-uga.^ &c. ; Dor. wa/^av, eaxvTdf, Tiftxcis, contr. T/^as, for
w-tf/^^y, &C. ; ^;j^ for ^/^, ea; for avj, jSa/;, /5<wv, for /3at/j, )3ayv (the Ace. /3<wv in
the sense of a shield covered with ox-hide occurs also H. 738), oi%us for r,%ovs,
&c. See 44, 45.
2. The dialects and poets vary greatly in the extent to which they employ
contraction, and in the mode of contraction. The Epic has here especial li-
cense. In the poets, contractions are often made by synizesis ( 30), which
are not written. In respect to the usage of Homer, we remark as follows :
(a) In the Gen. sing., contraction is commonly omitted, except in nouns in
ea and -us, G. -oa;. In a few words, the contraction of -ios into -iv; occurs
( 45. 3), and there are a few instances of synizesis (which we mark thus,
He); e. g. 'E^/Sit/j 0. 368, $K/*&ivi u. 394, ^iu s . 118; UtixTos A. 489,
Mjjx/a-rsa; B. 566, croX/a? B. 811. (6) In the Dat. sing., both the contracted
and uncontracted forms are used in most words with equal freedom ; as, y^i*
aud y7a, Sign and S-i/>ii, rt^s/and ni^ti, II?>.s/and FI^Xs?, 9reAi/, x'ToXn,
and raAu, YIOU! and %*> H. 453. The endings -//, -vi, and - (except in xgt'fy
are always contracted ( 118. 2, 115. a); as, xv^a-rr A. 640, V'DCVI II. 526
(this contraction of -ui into -ui is Epic), M I. 618. (c) The endings -to,,
-iv, and -sat; are commonly uncontracted, except by synizesis ; as, Stoiti'ia,
F. 27, tyiptpi* S. 757, aXyia fi. 7, /SiXsi O. 444, y <. 283; wSCv* K.
95; -To/.U; A. 559, TsX^ia,- Y. 114. So -raX;aj S. 560. (d) The ending
it; is used both with and without contraction ; as, TTu<ro<jra.yiis vionv%ii>
E. 194. (e) The neut. plur. ending -# is always contracted, or drops one
140 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [BOOK I*.
K (cf. 4. below) ; as, K^O., M-rct, yigx B. 237. The form with the single short
a sometimes occurs in the Attic poets; as, xgiA Ar. Pax. 192. (/.) Of eT,-,
sheep, out, ear, and 'ygxu;, old woman, the following forms occur in Homer ; N.
a'/V, G. oia;, oiog, A. ot'v P. N. '/?, G. oiuv, oluv, D. oliiffffi, o'ilfft, oifftri (cf
119. 2), A. S7 S . N. oZt, G. oSttros' P. N. ouaru, D. 08*,,, v<r' ( 33. y).
N. y^ug, i yt>*iut, D. yojj/', V. y^jjt/, 7?y' the Gen. and Ace. are supplied by
yoo-ins and y^rv of Dec. I.
3. In common nouns in -ivs, the characteristic tf before a vowel regularly
becomes n, in the Epic; as, ivxwas, l-wrii, <V-T>5a, /VcrSjsj (once in Horn. <r-
wi?? A. 151, also &.ffi*.t7s Hes. Op. 246), /Wa'v (f 16), fyiffrwrt A. 227
(so, by imitation, ^ao-/x5Jaf Eur. Phoen. 829). This change also extends to
proper names in -tu; (in which the Epic has great freedom in using the long
or short vowel according to the metre), to "A^nj, Mars ( 116. a), and to
iraX/;. See Homeric Paradigms, 1 16. In common nouns in -it>;, this
change occurs also in Herodotus, although questioned by critics ; as, /3a<nX7o,-,
/W<Xj, vii. 137, ficttriXw iii. 137, /3a<r;X'<wv vi. 58. The regular inflection
of nouns in -ivs, in Ionic prose, and also in the Doric, is in -to?, &c. The
Ace. in -no. or -s is sometimes contracted by the poets into ->J ; as, 'O^^jj r.
136, Tvtt A. 384, /Saw*? Hdt. vii. 220 (Oracle). We find fa<nXws with
synizesis Hes. Op. 261.
4. In words whose root ends in it-, the Epic often unites it into ? (as regu-
larly in proper names in -*.?), or into /; but sometimes in the Epic and
oilier poets, and in dialectic prose, one i is dropped. Still further variety of
form is sometimes given by the Epic protraction of i to it or ?, or by the
Ionic or poetic neglect of contraction. Thus, 'H^axXs*?? Hes. Th. 318, Hdt.
ii. 43, Pind. 0. 6. 115 ; G. 'H^xX^oj S, 266, 'R^x^ios Hdt. ii. 43, Find.
O. 3. 20 ; D. 'HfaxXi' S. 224, Pind. I. 5. 47, 'H^axXsJ' Hdt. ii. 145, 'H^-
*A*r Pind. P. 9. 151 ; A. H ? xX 3. 324, 'H e a*xU Hdt. ii. 43, Pind. O.
10. 20, 'HeaxXejjv Theoc. 13. 73 (for the Attic forms of 'H e *X? ; , see ^ 14
and Mem. ii. 1. 21 -26) ; a.ya.^o; II. 738 : ifcA.!?*; (Ace. pi. of tl*.lt*s}
K. 281, ilx*.i&s Find. 0. 2. 163 ; iutfti* (Gen. of i e i',-) Z. 508 ; *XE/-*
(pi. of *Xaj) Hes. 111. 100 : WxA* B. 115, vrifi<'2 P. 330 : axX^s/j (Noin.
pi. of axXfik) M. 318. For the Homeric forms of **?, and for those of
nrfoxXj, which, like some other compounds of xXios, has forms both of
Dec. II. and of Dec. III., see ^ 16.
5. For the Ionic and Doric declension of words in -/?, -teas, and for the
omission of 3 in words in -/,-, -/$,-, see 118, 119. The Ionic likewise omits
the r in xt^as and ri^aj and then in these, as in other neuters in -as, -etos,
the later Ionic often changes into i ( 44. 2.), except in the theme ; as,
xigii, x'igtet, xtg'suv, rigios, y't^iat, Hdt.
6. In vaw,-, the Doric retains throughout the original , and is here some-
times imitated by the Attic poets. In the Ionic, the passes throughout by
pf( rk-ssun either into w, or with short quantity, especially in the later lon'p,
into i. The Attic retains the in the diphthong uu, but has otherwise or i
(the latter having, perhaps, been inserted in the Gen. sing, and pi. after the
contraction of do and , according to 35, and the Gen. dual having fol-
lowed the analogy of the other numbers). For the Ionic and Doric forms,
see 1 16; for the Attic, ^ 14.
IV. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Irregularities in the declension of nouns which
CH iJ.j METAPLASTS. Ml
nave not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two
heads ; variety of declension, and defect of declension.
A. VARIETY OF DECLENSION.
A noun may vary, (1.) in its root. ; (2.) in its method of
declension; and (3.) in its gender ( 79). In the first case, it
is termed a metaplast (pfiunlnaioc, transformed] ; in the sec-
ond, a heteroclite (er^oxAiroc, of different declensions} ; in the
third, heterogeneous (tr^o/n^c, of different genders).
Words which have distinct double forms, either throughout or in part, are
termed redundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some of the usual
forms, are termed defective.
The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the different kinds of
anomaly, and likewise to present, in a classified arrangement, the principa
anomalous nouns. It will be observed, that some of the words might have
been arranged with equal propriety under other heads, from their exhibiting
more than one species of anomaly.
123. 1. METAPLASTS.
Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the root, in the progress of
the language, for the sake of euphony or emphasis, chiefly by the precession
of an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus ; while, at
the same time, forms have remained from the old root, especially in the poets
and in the dialects.
a. With a Double Root, in - and in o-.
*i xiduv, nightingale, G. amoves, &C. ; from the root aSa-, G. urdous Soph.
Aj. 628, D. *? Ar. Av. 679.
*) Yogya, -ov;, and YogyuV) -cvaj, Gorgon.
fi iixeat, image, G. s/xavaj, &c. ; from r. ttxo-, G. t'txavs Eur. Hel. 77, A
ilxu Hdt. vii. 69 ; from r. /*-, by the second declension, PI. A. tixovt Eur.
Tro. 1178, Ar. Nub. 559. Yet see 112. ft.
ri ^sxr^v, swallow, G. ^iXT^ovos, &c. ; from r. tAj$0-, V. xtKrboT Ar. Av.
1411 from Simon.
Compare 104, 107, 119.
ft. With a Double Root, in a- and in i-.
re fytTxs, wooden image, poetic, G. ftgirtes, D. ftgirtt PL N. ft^irti, G,
s, darkness, G. Epic xii<pot, Attic xvityovt Ar. Eccl. 291, latei
>ifaTf Polyb., D. x/tQett xviQct Cyr. iv. 2. 15.
TO xux.s, fleece, poetic, ir. 47 ; PL N. nuia. u. 3, D. XUKTI y. 38.
TO ou^xs, floor, poetic, G. otTSso;, D. ovbt'i oititi (all in Horn.).
y. Miscellaneous Examples.
TO yaw, knee, and TO Voov, spear, G. yovatrog, ^o^xTef, &C. ( 103. N.). For
the various forms of Vo^v (of which in the theme there is even the late^form
Antiphil. 9), see ^ 16. Those which occur of yoiv correspond;
thus, Ion. and poet. y*/T<f, youvaTx, yt>vvu.<n and yovvet<r<ri (I. 488, P. 451,
142 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [BOOK II
for which some write yovvi<r<ri) ; ah>^ poet, yewas , yeovi, yauva, yevvuv, and
y'ovuv Sapph. 14 (25), yovviffffi.
n "tea;, dawn (r. '&-, Attic Dec. II.), G. t*>, D. tea, A. tu and "u> ( 97. 3)
Dor. 'dtus (r. 'aa-), G. 0.009 iovt Ion. nus, G. wa?;, D. not, A. <w and too
( 120. 1).
Qiptt, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. 0i^/$af, Epic Qiu^rae
/3; 68, Ionic 0^/a? Hdt. ii. 50, Doric Qipiros Find. O. 13. 11, also PL Rep.
380 a. In the Attic, Si^/j occurs mostly in certain forms of expression,
where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter noun ; thus,
$ip.ts Iffvi, it is lawful; <fnttri ... Sipis Jva/, they say that it is lawful, PL Gorg.
505 d ; TO pvi 3-ifAis, that which is not lawful, ^Esch. Sup. 335.
a Sifciviuv, attendant, G. 9-Egaflrayra?, &c. ; poet. A. $*, PL N. Sioa-rtg
Ear. Ion, 94.
o xeiXus, cable (r. xXa-, Att. Dec. II.), G. xoi\u, &C. ; Ion. xaXoj, -ay, &C.,
i. 260 and Hdt. ; hi the later Epic, PL xeiXuis, &c., Ap. Rh. 2. 725.
a Xaywf, hare (r. Xayat-, Att. Dec. II.), G. Xayu, A. Xuyui, \ttyu, &C. \
Ion. Xaya'j, -a?, &C., Hdt., also PL N. Xaya/ Soph. Fr. 1 1 3, A. Dor. ( 45. 5)
Xaya? Hes. Sc. 302 ; Epic Xaya/aj, -aw, Horn.
0, ptagrus (in late writers jttagTy^), witness, G. ^ajrt/^aj, D. ftdgrvgt, A.
u.a.(>rv(>ec., rarer ft,a.gr$v D. pi. ftagruiri Epic a fAK^rv^as, -ev, vr. 423.
o, jj a^7f, Wrd, G. %vr$a? (Dor. e^vr^aj, 69. II.), D. a^vrS/, A. e^vr^a and
e^v-r PL o^vr^jf, &c. ; from r. e^i-, Sing. N. S^TS, A. a^vr, PL N. egvw,-, G.
ogvtuv, A. o'^vt/f and e^r (^ 119). Another form is ro ogvtov, -ov.
o of>Qt!>s and ogtyos, a sea-fish, G. l^fyu and l^ov. Compare xtiXu;, \u.yu(.
fl <rvy|, pnyx, G. vruxvo;, D. <rvxvt, A. fryxvae later G. wvyxaj, D. -rvuxi, A.
vrvvx.*. The proper root is ryxv- (compare the adj. a-yxvay) ; but from the
difficulty of appending t in the theme, transposition took place ( 64. 3),
which afterwards extended, through the influence of analogy, to the oblique
cases.
o fit, moth, G. a-taj, and in later writers <rnrof.
fj fff*eu$i%, weal, B. 267, G. ffftuliyyos, &c. ; N. pi. ffMtbiyytf "V. 716.
e pSeJV, contr. <po~f, cuke, G. <peiof N. pi. $&o7t and 0$ai/j also ft <p$ott
-ftot - N. pi. pSafttf. See 119.
fi %i'i, hand, G. xi^of and ^ijap, &c. For the common forms, see f 12.
The other forms are also found in the poets and in Ionic prose.
%*" { ^ ne n ^ m e of a measure, G. ^;aaf, &c., like j8yj (^ 1 4) ; from r.
-, the better Attic G. #ai*f, #8**, A. %oi xoZ, PL A. %eiu{ %oeit
( 1 16. /3) ; also Dat. Ion. ^aii'Hipp.
Ep. xetTof, 47), debt, G. xfiw PL N. ^i ( 37. l) ; from
-, N. Gtaf , 4/0 ^{*f > G. (^faiaf, %atovt, %(>*f) %('**{ ( 33, 35).
vt, skin, surface, G. %(vrof, D. ^{*>W Otfi 104) A. JA/T Ion.
and poet. G. ^jaaj, D. ^ja?, A. ^jaat.
For Ziy'f, O/7/a-ai/f, nr^a*Xaf, and w/af, see f 16.
NOTE. Add the poetic Norn. A $ir Hes. Op. 354, = SoV/f, ^/l ; Ace. X//3
^Esch. Fr. 49, 65, = X//33 from X//Jf , libation ; Nom. a X?j O. 275, Ace.
X? A. 480, = X8w T. 23, XaT 2. 161, lion (in the later Epic, PL X/if,
X/i<r^) ; Dat. ftAffr'i Y. 500, Ace. ^aa- a. 182, = pa-eriyi E. 748,
E. 226, from fi ^eaa-r/l, scourge ; e 2a5W3J, G. 2a6^rj^aar and
V 2or$9V Noit). pi. rrolyf Ap. Rh. 4. <??*>, =*,^T*yu from
<JH. 2.J HETEROCLITES. 143
drop; Dat. fin lies. Op. 61, Theog. 955, = vJW* from TO fou^, water (so
Norn. Sin Call. Fr. 466).
'2. HETEKOCLITES.
a. Of the First and Third Declensions.
"A^n(, poetic 'AftK, 7/w/w, G. *, &c. ; Dec. III. Epic G.*Attf ( D.'Aili
Another poetic form is 'AJ&tMp?, (1. -;, Ton. -JJo;.
0X?j, r/ifi/ro, G. 0Xsa; ( 96. 7^1 and 0aX?Tf.
a X?, contracted Xa,-, .s/onr. G. Xaoc, and Xaoy Soph. (Ed. C. 196, D >sj
A xav, xv, and Xi Call. Fr. 10-t, PI. N. X2?, &c.
o ftuxn;, mushroom, G. JAVXOU and ftvxrirof.
fi <r<rvxri, -*?, and mostly Ep. srTt/g, G. TTW^OJ, fold.
ft <f>xn, -,-, poetic <p/, G. tpgTxo'f, shudder, ripple.
NOTI?S. a. Add some proper names in -?$, of which a part admit a double
formation throughout, as Xaj hut others only in particular cases; thus
^Tof^ieion;, -au, has (Ar. Nub. 1'206) Voc. 2-r^-^/a^f. Some refer to this
head the double Ace. in i j 114. N. For yvvj, see , 101.7.
b. Add, also, the Epic Dat. uXxi (always in the phrase aXx/ irfrotSus E
299), = aXx>J (u. 509) from X*j, might; Nom. r, ciowu.% lies. Op. 354, =
aflcrayw, robbery; Ace. /<wxa A. 6O!, = lux.r t v from <<wx9j (E. 740), battle-din
Ace. xgoxet lies. Op. 5:16, = n^oxnv from x^oxn, woo/ (also PL N. xgoxt; Antip.
Th. 10. .i); Dat. pi. potitrrn Ap. Rh. 3. 102O, = ftius from ^, rose;
Dat. iiirftTvi B. 86:J, 0. 06, = utrft'ivy (T. 'J4.5) from u^/'v*?, battle; Ace. <p;y
(only in <puya5s, to flight, 0. 157, &c. ', = <p/yjy from <pwy, flight; and the
Doric Gen. fern. a/y y Theoc. 5. 148, 8. 49, for a/y^v from ", jroat (so Gen
Krawv Call. Del. 66, '275, for vjjs-o/y from vyro; of Dec. II.).
/3. Of the Second and Third Declensions.
TO "Sux^vey and poet. $dxou, tear, G. Setxgvau, D. ^eixgva PI. N. Jax^va, G.
Jax^ya/v, D. $ux/>vois and ^dx^viri Th. vii. 75.
TO Sev^ov and Ion. Ssv^sav, ree, G. ^'tvl^u, &c. ; Dec. III. D. Vtfyu, A.
jv^; Hdt. vi. 79, PI. N. Vtvlcvi. D. Viv^^tiri (the more common form of the
Dat. pi. even in Attic prose ; e^ g. Th. ii. 75).
6 txrivo?, hawk, G. ixr'vau, &c. ; Dec. III. rarer A. JWi"va Ar. Fr. 525, PI.
N. "xrlvis Pausan. 5. 14.
o xXetios, twig, G. xX5*w, &c. ; Dec. III. poet. D. xXadt, A. *xSa, PI. D.
K}.biffi Ar. Av. 239, xXa^fSO-av, A. xXa^aj.
o xoivaava;, sharer, G. xetvtuvou, &c. ; Dec. III. PI. N. xoivuvis Cyr. viii. 1. 5,
A. xoivavas Ib. 1 6.
TO * ? /'vav, %, G. xt'ivau, &c. ; Dec. III. PI. N. x^'ma. Hdt. ii. 92, D. g/.
< Ar. Nub. 911.
TO ovuoov and o OVIIPOS, dream, G. oviigav and OVS'IOKTOS PI. ovtigx, and mor
frequently fivs/^ara. Derived from oWj ( 127).
<reo%oia;, cOntr. *-(>o%ous, ewer, G. w^a^ow, &c. ; Dec. III. PI. D. r^a^ouft
Ar. Nub. 272.
TO -Uf, /r, G. fl-^of, D. r^/ Dec. II. PI. N. <r ? , waith-fires, D
144 IRREGULAR NOUNS. [BOOK II
i <rri%os, row, G. f-r^av, &c. ; Dec. III. poet. fern. G. ffri%og H. 173, PI
N. frl^ts Find. P. 4. 373, A. a-r/^aj AT. Eq. 163.
NOTE. Add the poet. Dat. pi. y^aTc$<r<r/ H. 475, = a.^^a.-rolois from
av^aToJov, slave; Nom. ^j S. 315, Ace. i^av I. 92, = a i'^wf T. 442, /ave,
A. 'i^uTtt. Horn. Merc. 449; Gen. pi ^Xarwv Lye. 106, = ^jjXs/v from /t?Xav,
sAee// ; Ace. Tx (only in oix.a'Si, homeward, often in Horn, and even used in
Attic prose, vii. 7. 57), = slx-iv from a/xa,-, house; PI. N. *- Tar a. 192,
D. T^offu-Tra.ffi H. 212, = a-^ao-w T, ffgoffctiwcij, from {rvaVwarov, face. For
Ilar^axXay, and f /a;, see <| 1 fi.
7. Of the Attic Second and Third Declensions.
, threshing-floor, G. aXw, aXeavof, and poet.
s, maternal uncle, G. ^r^u and ftvrguo; PL
o Hfvo*;, Minos, G. M/v& and M<y<w;.
c a-ar^wf , paternal uncle, G. iruT^tu and vrctrguos PI. wargaiij.
r<xa>; and T^V, peacock, G. raw and ruuvoi PI. N. <rau, -ras/, and retSttf
1 rv$u;, whirlwind, G. rw^J and rvtyuvo;.
3. HETEROGENEOUS NOUNS.
a. Of the Second Declension.
e Jifl-^af, band, PL ra $i(r/u.a. and a/ Jso-^a/.
TO l^vyov and a %vyo;, yoke, PI. <r ^wya.
o iffp'os (Dor. <rfy*a;), institute, PI. /' &t<rftoi and ra
o Xvo,-, /?np, PI. ra Xt/^;va and a/ Xw^va/.
ra vaJrav and a vuroi, back, PI. ra &Jra.
7Ta:, corn, PI. <r tnTU..
raS^af, station, balance, PI. a/ ffraSpei and ra fret&pa, stations, ret ffr.
balances.
o Td^r^of (A Pind. P. 1. 29), Tartarus, PI. ra T^r e .
/S. Of the Third Declension.
re and (Soph. Ph. 1 457) *ara, Aeat/, poetic, G. x^etr'ot (rt, Eat.
El. 140), D. x^ar/ and x^ Soph. Ant. 1272, A. ra xa^a, re and ra x^ara
Kur. El. 148 (cf. 150), Fr. Arch. 16, Soph. (Ed. T. 263; PI. A. rtiit xgira,-
l.ur. Phoen. 1 H9. The following forms are found in Homer:
s N. *e
G. X.UOHI-TO; xoco^ari; K^d,T<n
D. KKonn Ka.^na.Ti X.CO.TI
A. xj, * f TT. 392 xfira, S. 92
P. N. xaoa Cer. 1 2 xa^'ira Xa*.ra xai^a,
G. xfarwy xa^rxa/i
D. xf<r/, x^-ria-ip/, K. 152, 156
Other poets (not Attic) have also forms of x^ as a fern of Dec. I. ; thus,
G. x^s Call. Fr. 125, Mosch. 4. 74, xa^r, Theog. 1018.
y. Of Different Declensions.
Dec. I. and II. wAi/{ and r <rXit/, ri& ; fSoyyot and n
:H. 2.\ DEFECTIVE. 145
voia ; v %&>a. and o %uos, space : Dec. I. and III. Sn^a, -uj, and ro $i$of
-s*:, M /;*; yVj and TO yaTaj, dell; y /3Xa/3j and ro /3X/3ay, injury; fi yvu-
p.r and Ion. and poet. TO yvu/*, -aras, opinion ; re -raS-a; and *$;, sujfer-
ini : Dec. II. and III. o^aj (Dor. o%o;), -ou, and TO o^a?, -taj, and also T
^ (Ca, -ares, carriage; o and TO ffxoros (and also fxoriee.), darkness; o and
xuQos, cup; &c.
B. DEFECT OF DECLENSION.
^ ISC. 1. Some words receive no declension, as the
nxmes of the letters, some foreign proper names, and a few
ouier foreign words. Thus, TO, TOU, roi V.qp o, rov, TW, TO>
16, TOU, roi 7ia^, passover.
NOTE. A word of this kind is termed indeclinable, or an aptote (ci
without cases).
2. A few diminutives and foreign proper names, whose root
onds with a vowel, receive c in the Nom., v in the Ace., and,
& the vowel admits it, an iota subscript in the Dat., but have
no further declension ; as
o A<vt/f (dim. from A<yo-aj, Bacchus), G. A/avw, D. A/avt/, A. A*avv, V.
&I6VV.
Mvay (dim. from Mva^9j), G. Mjv. D. Mrjva, A. Mjyav, V. M*jva.
o M<nta;, G. Ma-a, D. Mao-xa, A. M<rxa, V. Mao-xis.
o' 'law*??, G. *Iv?, D. 'law?, A. 'lavvJjv, V. 'law?.
'lr,<rov; t Jesus, G. 'Ivtrov, D. 'Irjo-aw, A. '\r,erovv, V. '\nirau.
o Vims. See ^ 16.
3 Many nouns are defective in number. Thus,
. Many nouns, from their signification, want the plural ; as, o',
ajV, a ,-^aXxac, copper, ro i'Xaov, oz7, T^;wTJ5j, siviftness. Proper and abstract
nouns are seldom found in the plural, except when employed as common nouns-
jS. The names of festivals, some names of cities, and a few other words,
want the singular ; as. ra, Aiovurta, the feast of Bacchus, at 'AS-jJva/, Athens,
oJ irrifficii, the ti ade-winds.
127. 4. Some nouns are employed only in particular
cases, and these, it may be, occurring only in certain forms of
expression. Of this kind are,
Js/etaj, body, form, Nom. and Ace. neut.
1-r'm.Xnv, surname, Acc.fem. (= \vix\nffiv\ commonly used adverbially.
X<V, with oil, Dat. neut., perhaps shortened from x<V7. Some regard it
as Ace.
/ud.Xf, arm-pit. Gen. fern., only in the phrase WTO pu^ns, under the arm,
secretly ; also, in late writers, vvo p.ci*.v9. Otherwise the longer form, ft pa.
ff^dxr., is employed.
^tXi, Voc. masc. and fern., used only in familiar address ; u ^1X1, my good
friend.
13
146 DECLENSION. [BOOK II
sleep, dream, and V, waking, reality, N. and A. neut. See ovupoi
( 124.
Sim, eyes, Du. N. and A. neut. ; PI. G. otrtruv, D. cWa/f.
ipA0f, advantage, and os (Ep.), pleasure, N. neut.
rav or <rav, only Attic and in the phrase rv, #od sir, sirrah.
NOTES. . Add the poet. Nom. and Ace. neut. } (root lup., 63) A
4'26, = ^upa., Aowse, *^~ (r. xo/9--) 0. 56-4, = w *^rS>}, barley, etXtfii (r. aA.p<T-)
Horn. Cer. 208, = ix^, barley-meal, yXa<pw, AoOw, Hes. Op. .531, % Phi-
let. ap. Strab. 364, = i^ot, wool (compare, with these neuters, fy7 and ^ ,
1:>6. /3) ; Dat. fern. 2*t (r), 6ofc, N. 286 (akin to this, Ace. & Call. Fr.
243) ; Dat. X/T/ 2. 352, Ace. sing. masc. or pi. neut. Xlra. . 1 30, = Dat.
and Ace. of TO X/'vav, linen; Ace. fern. v/<p, AVtow, Hes. Op. 533 (from which
f> viQeif, -dlas t snow-flake) ; Voc. fat 0. 128, = fati ft. 243, from Xsoj, crazed.
j8. A word which is only employed in a single case, is termed a monoptote
(P.OVOS, single, -rr&jffts, case) ; in two cases, a diptote ; in ffoee, a triptote ; iu
/our, a tetraptote.
CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES.
[irir 17-20,22.]
^ IS 8. Adjectives are declined like substan
tives, except so far as they vary their form to de-
note variation of gender (^ 74. 8). In this respect,
they are divided into three classes, adjectives oj
one, of two, and of three terminations.
NOTE. In adjectives of more than one termination, the masculine is re-
garded as the primary gender, and the root, theme, and declension of the
masculine, as the general root, theme, and declension of the word. The mode
of declining an adjective is commonly marked by subjoining to the theme the
other forms of the Nom. sing., or their endings; and, if necessary, the form
jf the Gen. sing. Thus, $,*, . rf *';, -is <f>^, 0( , -, . i, f,
139. I. ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION are de-
clined precisely like nouns, and therefore 'require no separate
rules or paradigms. They are confined, in the language of
prose, to the masculine and feminine genders, and some of
them are employed in a single gender only. E. g.
1. Masculine. Dec. I. ymaSa?, -ou, noble, i pavi**, -v, solitary, o i$iAi>.
rri ft -w, voluntary; Dec. III. yi ? v, -tvrot, old, i <rij, ->jTf, poor (yet
Hesych. gives fi irivvunrei}.
CH. 3.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 147
2. Feminine. Dec. III. /*/>,-, -otoo;, frantic, TKT^S, -fits, native, fi
Tgucis, -5o;, Trojan, A*>/?, -So;, Dorian.
3. Masculine and Feminine. Dec. III. i, fi ayws, -urs, unknown, o,
ra/j, -ados, childless, e, fi X/|, -txos, of the same age, o, ty*;Svf, -Jjroj, /io//"-
dead, o, fi Qwytis, a^os, fugitive.
NOTE. The indirect cases of adjectives of one termination and of Dec. III.,
are sometimes employed by the poets as neuter ; as, yvupw TI p.tya.\w lv vrivDTi
7ufjt.a.rt Eur. El. 372, ftctvteio-iv Xvtrartfj.a.ffiv Id. Or. '210, Sgopeiffi ^ivtueuv /3>i-
<pdgoi; Ib. 837.
1 SO. II. ADJECTIVES OF Two TERMINATIONS have tie
same form for the feminine as for the masculine, but have a
distinct form for the neuter in the direct cases singular and
plural.
REMARKS, a. Adjectives which form the neuter must be either of Dec.
II. or III. ( 79), and, if of Dec. III., cannot have either a labial or a pala-
tal characteristic ( 101). To adjectives which cannot form the neuter, this
gender is sometimes supplied from a kindred or derived root ; as, e, f> agva,%,
-ay a;, rapacious, TO a,^ra.xTixov.
. The neuter must have two distinct forms, and can have only two, one
for the direct cases singular, and the other for the direct cases plural ( 80).
Hence, every complete adjective must have two terminations. A neuter plural
is sometimes given, though rarely, to adjectives which do not form the neuter
singular ; as, T'IKIO. to-T^os arara^a Eur. Here. 1 14, i'3-vsa ... iw>j'X^a Hdt.
viii. 7:?.
y. In ^Ivavs (^ 1 7), and in similar compounds of TOVS, foot, the Neuter
sing:, on account of the difficulty of forming it from the root, is formed from
the theme, after the analogy of contracts of Dec. II. (^ 18) ; thus, o, ii Ji-
rat/f, TO VITOVV o, ri T^iwevi, -c^aj, three- footed, TO T^tirouv. Cf. 136. 2.
131. III. ADJECTIVES OF THREE TERMINATIONS differ
fiom those of two in having a distinct form for the feminine.
It is only in the first declension that the feminine has a
distinct form from the masculine. These adjectives, therefore,
must be of two declensions, uniting the feminine forms of the
Jirst with the masculine and neuter of the second or third.
The feminine is formed according to the following rules.
RULE i. If the theme belongs to the second
declension, the feminine affixes of the first are an-
nexed to the simple root.
If the root ends in f, t, p, or po, the feminine is declined like
oxt otherwise, like n^r, (If 7, 93).
Thus, ^X/, QiXi&s ' ffatpj, ffoQrt; %V<ria,, ^t<r\or> (^ 1 8) ; ftetx^as, -a, -,
long, oi3-(>6<>s, -&, -fl, dense ; xXa;, -, -o, beautiful, p,i<rt>f, -t>, -cv, middle,
^f, -n, -av, written.
148 ADJECTIVES. [BOOK 11
^132. RULE n. If the theme belongs to the
third declension, the feminine affixes of the first
are annexed to the root increased by a (i. e. to the
theme before euphonic changes).
Thus, from the roots vravr-, %aitvr- (^ 19), /Sai/Xti/ovr-, a^ayr-, Qunvr
(^ 22), are formed the feminines (sravra-a, travtra) va.<r& t (j^et^'nvvret, %a.-
/sy<r) %a/>'u<rffa,, (fiouteuovrffei) &ou*.iuou<r&, (eigavrffct) eigaerei, (tpetvivrret) $et
tit fit ( 55, 57, 58).
The following SPECIAL RULES are observed in the formation
of the feminine, when the theme belongs to Dec. III.
1. After s or o, the p which is added to the root becomes s
( 50), which is then contracted, with s into , and with o
into vi. Thus, from the roots ?]<5e- (fl 19), and tidor- (fl 22),
are formed the feminines (jdeW, vjdtia) ydtlu, (ctdoraa, ctdo'aa,
sldvla.
NOTES, a. The diphthong cv never stands before the affixes of Dec. I.
The concurrence of open vowels which would be thus produced seems to have
displeased the Greek ear. Hence the contraction, in this case, of at into the
closer diphthong vt.
/3. In the contracted perfect participles, which have a long vowel in the last
syllable of the root, the r remains. Thus, from r. \<rrur- (contr. from Irraor-,
from the verb Irrupt, to stand} is formed the feminine (trrurfu') *<r<ra/<ra
(1 22).
y. The fern, termination -t~& is commonly shortened hi Ionic prose, and
sometimes ha Epic and other poetry, to * (sometimes Ion. tti, especially hi
Hipp.); as, /3S*, i^ta Hdt. i. 178, /3S^y Ib. 75, 03jf E. 147 (but
faSi'itif B. 92), ux.'ia. B. 786, alia. Theoc. 3. 20, ra^iv Theog. 715. So,
even in Attic prose, Buttmann edits from the best Mss. A^^iaf PL Meno,
83 c. On the other hand, the poets, hi a few instances, prolong -i of the
Neut. pi. to -i? for the sake of the metre ( 47. N.) ; as, jgua Hes. Sc. 348,
aatTa, Soph. Tr. 122 (so rxiotn for rxioti, Ap. Rh. 2. 404, lux^'mi Id. 4.
1291).
2. After a liquid, the a which is added becomes , which is
then transposed, and contracted with the preceding vowel into
a diphthong. Thus, from the roots ptlav- (fl 19), TSQW- (r. of
tender), JIISQ-, are formed the feminines (ftttavan, ^s-
n&aiva, (rcpeyaa, ifgeeva) Tegetva, nitiQa (^ 134. d^
Compare 56, 57.
3. If the root, after the addition of a, and the consequent
changes, ends in t or p, the feminine is declined like axta but
if it ends in a or y, like yAwaaa (ff 7, 92, 93) ; as, ijfota,
ydtlug ' 7ifi, 7idar)$ ' jueAatva, (i^alvr,g (^f 19) ; m'ft^a, nitiQuq.
Observe that the in the direct cases is always short. See
CH. 3.] OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 149
133. Of those words which belong to the general class
of ADJECTIVES ( 73), the following have three terminations:
1. All participles ; as, /JovAsiW, ?, fldtog (fl 22).
NOTE. In participles, which partake of the verb and the adjective, a dis-
tinction must be made between the root, affix, connecting vowel, and flexible
ending of conjugation, and those of declension ; thus, in the genitive &ov*.tuovros,
the root of conjugation is /Jat/Xty-, and the affix -oirof while the root of de-
clension is /30Aiyo<r-, and the affix -os.
2. All comparatives and superlatives in -05 ;
-, -or, wiser ; aoqpw'raio?, -77, -ov, wisest.
3. All numerals, except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive ;
as, diaxoaioi) -at, -, two hundred, rgliog, -?, -ov, third.
4. The article and adjective pronouns, except ilg (ilg). See
1124.
5. Simple adjectives in -oc, -ft?, and -i>e, with a few other
adjectives ; as, cplhog, t/oqpo?, ^ptWo? (1J 18) ; ^apttf, ijdv?* ncig,
/if'Aa? (fl 19); sxwv, -oi)(w, -ov, G. -oWo?, willing ; ra^a?, -atva,
-a?', G. -ayo^, wretched ; Tt'^Tjv, -ara, -ey, G. -tyo?, tender.
NOTES, a. For the number of terminations in adjectives in -as, only gen-
eral rules can be given. For the most part, simples have three terminations,
and compounds, but two. Yet some compounds have three, and many sim-
ples, particularly derivatives in -uos, -tog, and -ipos, have but two. Deriva-
tives from compound verbs, as being themselves uncompounded, especially
those hi -xos, -<ros, and -<ria;, have more commonly three terminations. In
many words, usage is variable. See y.
P>. Adjectives in -us, of the Attic Dec. II., have but two terminations ; as,
iyr^us (U 17), o, f> ivytus, TO ivyiuv, fertile. For rXsa/f, see 135.
y. In (a.) words in which the Fern, has commonly a distinct form, the
form of the Masc. is sometimes employed in its stead. And (b.), on the other
hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the Fern, hi words hi which it is
commonly the same with the Masc. Thus, we find as feminine,
(a.) Adjectives in -os (particularly in Attic writers, 74. i), ^SJXa? Eur. Med.
1 197, (payXoj Id. Hipp. 435, Th. vi. 21, uvefynuieu Th. i. 2, xXwre; B. 742
Adjectives in -t/j (particularly in Epic and Doric poetry), rfivs ft,. 369, ai
Theoc. 20. 8, 3->jXw; T. 97, xov'kvv K. 27 ; Comparatives, Superlatives, Parti-
ciples, and Pronouns (all rarely, except in the dual, see $.), a*o&>TSos Th. v.
110, Wi^/SoX^Tara; Id. iii. 101, faoururot S. 442 ; ri^ivns ^Esch. Ag. 560;
nlixoZros Soph. El. 613, (Ed. C. 751.
(b.) aSavarj K. 404, 9^<xpov Theog. 1 1 , <jroXv%ivKV Pind. N. 3. 3, vo>.vrt-
pvrv Ar. Pax, 978, for the common f> u&eivuros, &c. This use is especially
epic and lyric.
3. This use of the .masc. form for the fern, is particularly frequent in the
dual, in which, from its limited use, the distinction of gender is least impor-
tant ; as, TU x,tii vi. 1. 8 (the fern, form <ra scarcely belongs to classic
Greek) ; rttiru ru r./jLioa. Cyr. i. 2. 1 1 ; TOUTOH In rt7v *<vj<rsv PL Leg,
io *
150 ADJECTIVES. [BOOK II
898 a.; $v rm \<rrov ibitt KP^OVTI XKI eiyotn, oTv tTOft&cc ... r o ur a
PI. Phaedr. 237 d.; tiotrt xut *a.oZ<ra. Soph. CEd. C. 1676; <rA.uy*vr
0. 455.
134. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied
from a kindred or derived root. These forms may be eithei
required to complete the adjective, or they may be onry specia
feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by tl e
side of forms of the common gender (cf. 74. ). The fem-
inines thus supplied most frequently end in -iq, G. -idog, but
also in -e, G. -ados, in -/, -ei^a, &c. (for the use of d as a
feminine formative, see 118). Thus,
a. Masculines in -? of Dec. I., and in -tv? of Dec. III., have often cor-
responding feminines in -/?, -/Say. These words are chiefly patrials and gen-
tiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as substantives.
Thus, o vratirvs, -ov, belonging to a city (S-soJ <roX7roe,t ^Esch. Th. 253), citizen,
fl TaXTns, -i$os o ixirns, fi ixirt;, suppliant ; o SxvS-jjy, f) 2xv$tf, Scythian ;
o Miyetgtu;, -ia;, Myag/y, Megarian.
/3. The compounds of 'iros, year (in -ns, -ts of Dec. III., but sometimes in
us, G. -ov of Dec. I.), have often a special fern, in -<;, -i$os ; as, o, f> tvrirm,
ro ivrriris, seven years old, and fi tirr'tris, -ibog rov i%irn xut TV l^inv PL
Leg. 794 c. ; ray rgiaxovrourus tr-rov^cis Th. i. 23, but rgiKxovrovrtieM ffvrevSut
Ib. 87.
y. Some compounds in -, -y have a poetic (particularly Epic) fern, in
*/; as, ^/yivy, -is, n fi^yivna A. 477. So ftevvoyinic^ ^<ra, Stff-rti-
vtua. Soph. (Ed. T. 463.
J. Add , fi vriuv, and fi *iii&, ro *?<>*, fat; o *ifffiu{, old, venerable, Fern.,
chiefly poet., r^i<r/3a, -gt<r/3?, ir^iffp>ii^y., Tgia-firis, vgifffiif e, fi ftaixet^, and
fi ftoixeti&, blessed, poetic ; a, fi -r^^uv, and Ep. fi ^otp^etffffo. K. 290, kind.
^135. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. Among the adjectives
which deserve special notice are the following.
fiiyetf, great, and wxJy, much (^ 20). In these adjectives, the Norn, and
Ace. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the roots p-tya- and <rXi-, accord-
ing to Dec. III. The other cases are formed from the roots /*iyaX- and xoXX-,
according to Dec. I. and II. The Voc. ^tyX occurs only ^Esch. Th. 822.
From its signification, vo\6 { has no dual. For the Homeric inflection of r-
*.v{, see ^ 20. In Herodotus, the forms from waXAa'f prevail throughout, yet
not to the entire exclusion of the other forms. The Epic forms sometimes
occur in the Attic poets.
o viius, * **.id, ro <rA.iv, full. The Masc. and Neut. are formed from r.
-X-, according to the Attic Dec. II. ( 98) ; the Fern, is formed from r.
<rXi-. Ion. <rXi*f, Ep. -rXuix, -, -. So, likewise, in Att. writers, the plural
compounds l/jurXw, ?**>. Cyr. vi. 2. 7, <ri/VXi* Ib. 33. In like mannej
";u PI. Phaedo, 95 a, N. pi. from fa.iay, -*, contr. from "Xetot, ->.
o -ratios (by some written *?), fi #(><ti7a, ro (w^aav), mild. In this
adj., forms from r. *-, of Dec. II., and from r. {-, of Dec. III., ara
blended (see ^ 20). Ion. -r^us-
, fi ffus, ro rZv, safe. In this adj., contract forms from r. <ra.- are blended
CH, 3.] IRREGULAR. 151
with forms from r. rv- (contr. from tat-\ belonging partly to Dec. II. and
partly to Dec. IIL Thus,
a, *
S. N. (,&<} ffZs rZt iii. 1. 32 (rS) r
A. (<rac) aut
P. N. &//, (ffuii) ffug (fact) fZ, a uat
A. ffuovi^ (<rua,s) ff*S
There is also an Epic form roos. With the above may be compared the
Homeric s E. 87, Ace. II. 445, contr. from &6(, >, = the common
*'j, , living.
1 3 G. RKMARKS. 1. Some compounds of ytXa*;, laughter, and xi(*i,
Aorn, may receive either the Attic second, or the third declension ; as, p/Xay-
Xy, -, G. -a and -aTaf, laughter-loving, ^vfoxt^ws, -, G. -w and -uros,
golden-horned. Shorter forms also occur, according to the common Dec. II. ;
as, 2/*a, vqxtgai, eixigK.
2. Some compounds of -revs, foot, have secondary forms according to Dec.
II. ; as, voZ.ii'Tovs (poet. vouXvvovi), many-footed, G. <raXt/?ra$af and voXvxov
r(>irov;, -o$os, and Ep. r^tvro;, -at/, X. 16'4, three-footed; *lg<; afXXaVa; 0.
109; t**oi<m aXXaTa$<ra-/v Horn. Yen. 218. See Oti'i-rov (^ 16), and
compare 130. y.
3. Among other examples of varied formation, we notice the Homeric a \Sf
B. 819, and S S H. 464, good, brave, ro it T. 2s5, i? E. 650 (both adverbial),
and f,S P. 456, Gen. iifo A. 393 (cf. 121. 3), Ace. IS, 0. 303, and tfv E.
628 ; Gen. pi. neut. \aLuv H. 528 ; l^/j^aj A. 266, *rs<y, PI. i^in^is, ig^^af,
F. 47, 378 ; a vro\vppnvot X. 257, n'c/j m sheep, PL <ro*.vppnvis I- 154 (see also
iraXwv* below, 4. JT) ; a/Vi/f eXiS-^aj N. 773, "IX/ov <Vv O. 7l,"IX/aj a<Vt/v)i
N. 773, <raA/ a/T;y N. 625, at** f'tt^et 0. 369, Tlfletfo, a<Ver<ra <I>. 87 ;
4 1 9, a^ra 0. 133, et^yi-ri A. 818, a^yer* <D>. 127; ? yi/(pa> 2.
. 621 ; TeX; ... ivrti%tov A. 129, ?roX/v iuri!%ta, II. 57 ; T^o/n
T. 74, T^a/wx iot&ulov I. 329 ; *Xu-rXaf i. 171, *a*.wrl.yif*.uv ff. 319,
X. 38 ; &c. Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of
synonymous adjectives with different forms, might be greatly multiplied.
4. Among defective adjectives, we notice,
.) The following, chiefly poetic : a', ctio.xvs, ro $*, tearless, Ace. $-
* wv (the other cases supplied by aJax^Prej, -av) ; -reXySax^t/f, tearful (supplied
in like manner by <raXt/Sa*oo<rsj) ; a r^iff^vs (for fern, see 134. 5), o/d, as
6ubst. elder, ambassador (in the last sense G. rfe-/3<wj Ar. Ach. 93), A. v^ia--
$ut, V. <ra-/3w PI. ?r^a-/Ss<5, <r^y/3^if Hes. Sc. 245, elders, ambassadors, G.
*/>i<r@tuv, D. ir(>iir$iffi, Tgtfffiiufiv Lye. 1056, A. w^a-jSs/y, Du. v^iir^Yi Ar. Fr.
495 (the plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the
word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by <r<r/3wTj?, old
man, and a rtfffitv<rv;, ambassador) (^ai/Vc, -, -av, pone, which, with the
Nom throughout, has only the Gen. <p^ou3ov Soph. Aj. 264.
/3.) Poetic feminines and neuters, which have no corresponding masc. ; as,
(and sometimes TTV), revered^ T^V x-'oviiu.v, ett vrorvieti SX/ot,
, blooming, rich (Horn.), fi xf j and X/a-a-x (always with TT^J), /A. 64,
79, y. 293, . -112, = X/a, fern, of X?aj, smooth; ro /3^7 (r. /Sj/S--) Hes. ap.
Strabi 364, = neut. of /tySifc, /ievy ; re ^ (r. ;^-) Soph. Fr. 932, = neut.
of pdlios, easy (compare with Qo7 and poi, the neuters lu, *^7, &c., 127. ) ;
^.^a and iirivpet, )>lf>,iusing (Hom.).
152 NUMERALS. [BOOK II
y.) Poetic plurals which have no corresponding sing. ; as ol B-,f*.iis K. 264,
and rctgtpiss A. 387 (yet <ra,o(pvs ^Esch. Th. 535), thick, frequent, a,l a,/Aita.i
A. 52, and ragQueti T. 357 (accented as if from 3-yMj;aj and ra.o<puos), TA
. 69, Ifivffos.gfta.'rf.s ..."wei II. 370 ; ol ?rXsj A. 395, TOUS
B. 129 = orAimf, rXsovaj, more.
Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Norn. ; as, TOU Ivabu.
s, unhappily wedded, ^Esch. Ag. 1319 ; xa.XXi'yuvcii>cas, having beautify*
women, Sapph. (135), xaXX;ywva/x< Pind. P. 9. 131, 'EXX<5 *XX/yvyaux
B. 683; KoXua.pi Quiffrri B. 106; ToXwraraya $ty*iXay Pratin. ap. Ath.
617 c; v^ixigdrot rir^ttv Ar. Nub. 597; %ig*ios, %igi, #*> a ^ so ^* %>*'
tin, XW (of which ^^a <r. 229, w. 310, is a doubtful variation), A. 80,
A. 400, &c. = #E/vf, &c., worse.
CH A PTER IV.
NUMERALS.
[TUT 21, 25.]
137. I. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. Of numeral adjectives,
the principal are, (1.) the CARDINAL, answering the question
nooot ; how many ? (2. ) the ORDINAL, answering the question
Tioaiog ; which in order 7 or, one of how many ? (3.) the TEM-
PORAL, answering the question, noaimos; on what day ? or, in
how many days? (4.) the MULTIPLE (multiplex, having many
folds), showing to what extent any thing is complicated; and
the PROPORTIONAL, showing the proportion which one thing
hears to another.
1. CARDINAL. For the declension of the first four cardinals,
see IT 21. The cardinals from 5 to 100, inclusive, are inde-
clinable ; aS, ol, t, T, 7WV, T(HC, Ttt?, TOt>, T, Tlfi'lTS, JlVC-
Those above 100 are declined like the plural of yttio? (IT 18).
NOTES, at. E7f, from its signiiication, is used only in the singular ; l-jw,
only in the dual and plural ; and the other cardinals only in the plural (except
with collective nouns, in such expressions as a-vieis pu^'ict *< TST^o<r/a,
10,400 infantry, \. 7. 10, <Wov oxTxr<X/', 8,000 horse, ITdt. vii. 85).
For the iialectic as well as common decleus. of the first four cardinals, see ^| 21.
We add references to authors for some of the less frequent forms : /* lies.
Th. 145, ns Theoc. 11. 33 (in some Mas.), Inscr. Ileracl., Of '/.. 422, awSa^i-
j (by some written ovtapeig') Ildt. iv. 114, 3o/<w T. 236, Ivuv Hdt. i. 94,
tvo7<rt Ib. 32, rficTn Ilipi'oii. Kr. 8, riro^is Hdt. vii. 228 (Inscr. Lac.), riro^tt
Hes. Op. 696, TIT^WV Theoc. 14. 16, K'IIVOVI \. 70, <r'nTu^a.s O. 680, rirgotfi
Hes. Fr. 47. 5, Pind. O. 10. 83. Diabetic forms of some of the higher
niiiiilirrs arc, 5 TtfA-ri /Eol., 12 ^vu^txa ami 5t/*;ar/Je*a Inn. and Poet.,
20 iiixaei Kp., iixan Dor., 30 Tf/Jixovra Ion. (we even find (icn. T^>!XT
CH. 4.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 153
Hes. Op. 694, Dat *-oinx,ovrt<ro-iv Anthol.), 40 riffftgixxotret and 7t<rat^xovr
Ion., Tir^xevra, Dor., 80 orfuxovret ( 46. ) Ion., 90 ivvjxovra. r. 174,
200 ttvxiffioi Ion., 9,000 iwiu^i^oi S. 148, 10,000 Sixa^rXa/ Ib.
/S. E7? has two roots, i- and ^/-. Its compounds auSs/j and ftvttif (which,
for the sake of emphasis, are also written separately, efii its, p,*di tli) have
the masc. plur.
y. The common form of the second cardinal is Mo, shortened from the
regular Ivu, which is by some excluded entirely from the Attic and from He-
rodotus. The second form of the Gen. Ivitv is only Attic, and is even ex-
cluded from some of the best editions of good Att. writers. The Dat. pi.
Ivffi occurs Th. viii. 101. Both SJa ($viu) and K^U, both (which is placed in
^| 2 1 , -as partaking of the nature of a numeral, with that of an emphatic pro-
noun), are sometimes indeclinable (in Horn, never otherwise) ; as, ^uo ftnvuv
vii. 6. 1, 1vt> ftoioduv K.. 253, "bva xxvovitrtrt X. 407, %ip<riv elf*,' eiftifu Mom.
Cer. 15.
. For the double forms of <rio-<rKgss, see 70. 1. In the compounds $ixa-
rgi7s, rurffttgiirxcttiixct, and its equivalent $ixari<r tracts, the components rgtTy
and riffffotgis are declined ; thus, ^ixetrgiTg, titxetrgiet, ^ixt&rgtuv ra7s riffffa.(>ffi*
xcti^ixx. Yet we sometimes find Ti/Tffagi<rxi'%txet (Ion. ruro-igsrxatiixa,), and
even norKOKxaiStxa, used as indeclinable. See Hdt. i. 86, Mem. ii. 7. 2, and
Lob. ad Phryn. p. 409. The compounds from 13 to 19 are also written sep-
arately : riffcret^ts xeti lixat.. So rgsT; yi X.KI 'b'txa. Find. O. 1. 127, T/' xott
tixa. Hdt. i. 119.
i The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with <rvv
as, ffvv'&vo, two together, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, fvvT/tiis t. 429, trw'Su^tx.tt
Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also expressed by means of the
prepositions avd, XKT&, and, in some connections, its and iri as, ?|
ava ixctrov eivSpots, six companies, each a hundred men, iii. 4. 21 ; xa.ro.
xia-^iXiau;, 4,000 at a time, iii. 5. 8 ; tls ixarov, 100 deep, Cyr. vi. 3. 23 ;
(Ti TiTTei^uv, four deep, i. 2. 15.
. The numeral ^tot, 1 0,000, is distinguished from ftv^ioi, plur. of (tv^ot*
vast, countless, with which it was originally one, by the accent.
138. 2. ORDINAL. The ordinal numbers are all de-
rived from the cardinal, except Ti^wroc, and are all declined
with three terminations. They all end in -TO*;, except devitgos,
, and oydoog. Those from 20, upwards, all end in -oaro?.
NOTES, a. Dialectic forms are, 1 x-gciros Dor., 3 r^iretrof Ep., 4
Pp., 7 l&ofta.ros Ep., 8 oy^aaraj Ep., 9 ifvaray Ep., 12 ^v<u$'ix,u,res Ion.,
1 4 T&<r<rtiffx.ti'ix,a,ros Ion., 30 r^nxoffros Ion., &c.
0. Instead of the compound numbers from 13 to 19 in the table (1 25),
we also find the combinations T^'iros xai $ixa<ros, Th. v. 56 ; TTJTJ xal
lixarot, Ib. 81 ; <*ip.<XTi>i xat Sixuros, Ib. 83 ; &c. Also, Jj xctt uxoffros, Th.
viii. 109. See 140. 1.
3. TEMPORAL. The temporal numbers are formed from the
ordinals, by changing the final -o? into -to?, -a, -ov ; thus,
dfVTtQoi;, divrfQcuo?) -a, -ov. From TT^WTO?, no temporal number
is formed. Its place is supplied by i}#?^if@o, -ov.
154 NUMERALS. [BOOK II
4. MULTIPLE. The multiple numbers end in -TT/IOO?, con
traded -nlovg, and are declined like dmloo?, dtnlov? (IT 18).
Other forms are those in -<p<r/j, chiefly Ion., as, $/<pavo?, r^itfux-trios alsc^
Juntos, r^trffos, Ion. Itfyi, *<? ( 70. V.), &c.
5. PROPORTIONAI The proportional numbers have double
forms, in -ntftaiog, -, -ov, and, more rarely, -nhtulwv, -ov
G. -o'o?. Thus the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by dmJicivios
-a, -of, or oinlaaiwv, _ y, G. -ovo?' and that of 10 to 1, by dt-
xuTtltxaiog or dixmilotalow. The ratio of 1 to 1, or of equality
is expressed by i'vog (Ep. Too?), -rj, -ov.
II. NUMERAL ADVERBS. 1. The numeral ad-
verbs which reply to the interrogative noadxig ; how many
times 1 all end in -dxig, except the three first ; thus, dixiixig
ten times, fi'v((xxai(ixoaixai(7riaxo(fionJ(.aaidxig^29 times, PL Rep.
587 e.
These adverbs are employed in the formation of the higher
cardinal and ordinal numbers ; thus, diaxlhoi, two thousand,
jisviaxiaxihtovTog, Jive thousandth.
2. Other numeral adverbs relate to division, order, place.
manner, &c. ; as, dl^n, in two divisions, r^a, in three divis-
ions ; 8eiijfQot>, secondly, ryliov, thirdly ; TQI%OV, in three places,
ntvruxov, in Jive places ; n:f/T^aJ?, in Jive ways, eSaxug, in six
ways.
III. NUMERAL SUBSTANTIVES. The numeral substantives,
for the most part, end in -'?, -ddog, and are employed both as
abstract and as collective nouns. Thus, ^ ftvQiug may signify,
either the number 10,000, considered abstractly, or a collection
of 10,000. These numerals often take the place of the cardi-
nals, particularly in the expression of the higher numbers ; as,
dsxu pvQiudt;;, ten myriads 100,000 ; kxarov pvQiddfg, a mil-
lion.
REMARKS. 1. When numerals are combined, the
less commonly precedes with xal but often the greater without
xt, and sometimes also with it.
Thus, TJVTI x< tixonv, Jive and twenty, i. 4. 2 ; rTrtfxflr <ri*<ri, forty-
five, v. 5. 5 ; r^eiKovra. xai Tiv<ri, thirty and five, i. 4. 2 ; <r<ret$/tot r^iTf
Ka,} mvJixflvTac, ra.va.ffot.yyai T'IVTI itott Tpieixovra, KaCi TivretKeffiai, ffTtioiai Tivrj-
K9v<ru. Kcti iZ.'z.x.itr^iXiai xeit ftvvioi, \\. 2. 6 ', ffrxB-ftit ^lemoirtat oix/xTivri, <rct-
rav TtvTV>tv<ra, rvn, araia.
vii. 8. 26. See v. 5. 4, and 138.
NOTES, a.. From the division of the Greek month into decades, the days
were, often designated as follows ; pwos &on%e<>p.iv*of iW IT) lix.ee., upon tht
CH. 5.] PRONOJNS. 155
[6th after 10] 16th of the month Boedromion, Dem. 261. 12 ;
ixry t<ri Sixaerjj, Id. 279. 17 ; fta^^ofAiuvas ixry *ur tixetia, ' the 26th,' Id
265. 5. In like manner, r^lros yi yivvetv irgof Six' ci^Xxienv yaws, -<Esch
Prom. 773.
ft. Instead of adding eight or nine, subtraction is often employed ; as, '
...ftta.; Viouffou <ri<nra,(>a.xoirot:, forty ships wanting one [40 1 =39], Th.
via. 7 ; va.ua-} $uo7v $iov<ruis xwrnxevra. [50 2 = 48], Ib. 25 ; $t/o/V $tov-
ffaif ilxatri vKuffi, H. Gr. i. 1. 5 ; -rivr^xovru. $va7v Vioito. <f<rj, Th. ii. 2 ; ivos
lie* tixao-rev \<rs, Id. viii. 6 (cf. SySaav no,} Stxarav iraj, Id. vii. 18) ; ivot
^iavros rgittxoffTM trti, in the thirtieth year, one wanting, Id. iv. 102. In like
manner, T^ntxatriav <robiovru, p.v(>tu., Id. ii. 13. It will be observed, that the
participle may either agree with the greater number, or, by a rarer construc-
tion, be put absolute with the less. See Syntax.
y. The combinations of fractions with whole numbers are variously ex-
prassed; thus, (a) v^a. ^juU^unJ^ three, half -dories, i. e. l darics, i, 3. 21
(b) Particularly in Herodotus, T ? /TV ^trd^etvrov, the third talent a half one
i. e. 2^ talents, Hdt. i. 50 ; 'i&opo* ^/raXavrav -\~ Ttret^rav vfttrciXavrav =-
raXavra Sixet, 6^ -f- 3^ = 10, Ib. (compare hi Lat. sestertius, shortened from
semistertius) ' (c) Less classic, ^uo xett fift/met* ftvti, "$vu xcti npie-u $gct%ftKi,
Poll. ix. 56, 62 : (d) i-/r^r, a third in addition, i. e. l, Vect. 3. 9 } T-
15, Ib. : (e) nptoXiov, half us much again, i. e. l, i. 3. 21.
2. The Table (fl 25) exhibits the most common numerals
with some of the interrogatives, indefinites, diminutives, &c.
which correspond with them.
CHAPTER V.
PRONOUNS.
I. SUBSTANTIVE.
[IT 23.]
141. PERSONAL, /w, aw, ou. The declension of these
pronouns is peculiar.
The numbers are distinguished not less by difference of root, than of affix.
Thus, the 1st Person has the roots, Sing, ft,-, or, as a more emphatic form, ip-,
PI Yift,-, Du. v- ; the 2d Pers., Sing, a--, PI. up,-, Du. r<f>- ; the 3d Pers., Sing,
the rough breathing, PI. and Du. a-<p'-. Most of the forms have a connecting
vowel, which in the Sing, and PI. is -$- (in the Dat. sing, passing into the
kindred -a-, 28), but in the Du., -u-. The flexible endings are Sing. Gen.
-a, Dat. -r, Ace. none (the primitive Direct Case remained as Ace., while the
Nom., in the 1st and 2d Persons, had the peculiar forms \yu and tru, and in
the 3d, from its reflexive use, early disappeared ; compare the Lat. me, te, se ;
ego, tu, Nom. of 3d Pers. wanting) ; PI. Nom. -EJ, Gen. -/, Dat. -fv (the
flexible ending of the old Indirect Case, 83), Ace. -&s 5 Du. Nom. - (in the
prolonged forms vui, <f$ui, the -i appears to have come from an imitation of
156 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK 11
the Gen.), Gen. -r. In all the forms in common use, the connecting vowa
and flexible ending are contracted ; thus, ip-i-a ip-ov, y-i-a <rov, '-i-a ov (e^-i-*
\fjt,-'e-i] ifto'i, (ff-i-i) troi, ('--/) ?* iift-i-is V(ti7s, i>f*-i-is v/u.ti;, (<r0-i-j) ff<f>i~s
tlft-i-uv {I/HUH, iifA-i-u* v/u.u*, enp-i-eav irQuv (^-s-iv) i^r, (v/tt-t-fy) i>/u.7* (<r<pi<r
exhibits a different formation without a connecting vowel) ; rip-i-ds r,p.eif
i/fi-i-ai I/pots, cr<p-i-/zs ff(p; v-u-i *u, ff(p~u-i <r<f>u (iu and fftytu are sometimes
\vritten incorrectly vy and <r<p/?, as if contracted from vut\ <r<p<3/', 25. ) ;
t-u-iv y&'y, <r<p-<w-/y r<pf (ff$coh, from its limited use, remained uncontracted)
1 4S. REMARKS. 1. The Table (1 23) exhibits, 1st, the common
forms of the personal pronouns ; 3d, the forms which >ccur in Homer, whether
common or dialectic ; 3d, the principal other forms which occur. The forms
to which the sign f is affixed are enclitic when used without emphasis (see
Prosody). When the oblique cases Sing, of tyu are not enclitic, the longer
forms iftav, Ipoi, ipi are employed.
2. The pronoun ov is used, both as a simple personal pronoun, and as a *e-
flexive. In the Attic and Common dialects, however, it is not greatly u ed
in either sense, its place being commonly supplied by other pronouns. The
plur. forms trQiTg and fftpio. first occur in Hdt. (vii. 168, i. 46). For the lim-
itations and peculiarities in the use of this pronoun, see Syntax.
3. Besides the forms which are common in prose, the Attic poets also em-
ploy, (a) the Epic Genitives I^ISsv, o-iS-in, V9-e (6) the Accusatives / and
ff$i, without distinction of number or gender ; (c) the Dat. pi. cQiv, which
even occurs, though rarely, both in Attic and in other poetry, as sing. ;
(d) the Dat.pl. of \yu and av with the ultima short (especially Sophocles) ;
thus, */*;, VJMV, or fait, Spiv. See 5. below.
4. The DIALECTIC FORMS arise chiefly, a) from want of contraction, as,
tp.it, &c. ; (b) from protraction, as, ip,i7o, vi7a, i7a, fiftitu*, vp.ilci, ff<p*icat
( 47. N.^ ; (c) from peculiar contraction, as, iftiv, ftv, iu ( 45. 3 1 ;
(d\ from the use of different affixes, as Gen. Ep. -Stv (f'^sSiv, <rj$t, 'in,
$ 84), Dor. -as d/u,ios, contr. 1/u.av;, tutus, riot, contr. nvs, with i doubled
Tioufj and, similarly formed, iovf i ; Dat. sing. Dor. -< (i^.v, n'iv, r/'v, 7. ;
(e) from the retention of primitive forms without the flexible ending, as '&p.'t,
a^i, vfti, vftpi, <r<pi (compare the sing, i/ti, <ri, i, and see i^ 83, 86:;
( f : from variation of root ; as, Dor. r- for <r- ( TV, rtv, rot, ri, Lat. tu, tut,
tifri, te, 70. 2) ; vEol. F- for the rough breathing (F&iv, Po7, F Lat. s-:
mi, xibi, xe) ; Dor. 'dft-, JEoL and Ep. a^^-, for fift- ('df*is, *p./*is, &c.) ;
,Eol. and Ep. up./*- for 'Op- (uftpis, &c.) ; l>or. *]/- and $-, Mol. a<r<p-, for <r$-
C^iy, ^i, ^/v, eiffifn, u.9$i}. See Table, and 5. below.
5. We add a few references to authors for the dialectic and poftio forms
y&-v A. 76 'used by Horn, only before vowels), Ar. Ach. 748 Mog. , Ar.
I -vs. ( J8.'i ( Lac. , Thaoe. 1. 14,"^Esch. Peiu 931, /vy* (s=y y yr Cor. 12,
;*y* Ar. Ach. 898; ipio K. 124, Hdt. i. 126, \^7o A. 174, Ipti A. 88,
H.li. vii. 158, IAIV A. 37, Ilrtt. vii. 209, ipit t , A. 525, Eur. Or. 98fi, i^t*
rSiipph. 89; i^/ Tlieoc. 2. 144, Ar. Av. 930; fi^.it Ildt. ii 6, 'd/^ii Ar.
Lys. 168, otfipif <]\ 432, Theoc. 5. 67 : u.'iui \\ 101, M^IW* E. 258,
'/*ui Theoc. 2. 158, etpftiu* Ale. 77; far* A. 147, r^r* or r,f , X. 344,
,So,,h. CEd. T. 39, 42, 103, Ar. Av. 386, 'dpT* Thcoc. 5. 106, fyfu A. 384,
Theoc. 1. 102, Zfip.iv N. 379, Ale. 86 (15), a^s Ale. 91 (78); A
C-). 211, Hrlt. i. 30, fy&i *. 372, 'dpi Ar. I.ys. 95. Sfipt A. 59, S
93 (13), Theoc. 8. 25; v^ Cor. 16, w . 418, li. 99 (/?), E. 219,
OH. 5.] PERSONAL. lf>7
wV X. 88 : TV Ar. Lys. 1188, Sapph. 1. 13, ruvn E. 485, rnv Cor. 2 ; <ri
A. 396 Hdt. i. 8, n7* T. 137, <rw F. 206, Hdt. i. 9, ?& A. 180, Eur
Ale. 51, rtara 0. 37, 468, Tiut Theoc. 2. 126, novs Theou. 11. 25 ; A.
2S, Hdt. i. 9, TI?V 3. 619 (not in II.), Hdt. v. 60 (Inscr.), Ar. Av. 930, T/
Theoc. 2. 11, Pind. 0. 10. 113 ; ri Theoc. 1. 5, rv Theoc. 1. 56, Ar. Eq.
1225 ; vp'iis Hdt. vi. 11, upis Ar. Ach. 760, Spptt A. 274, Sapph. 95 (17),
Theoe. 5. Ill ; vpiu* H. 159, Hdt. iii. 50, fati A. 348, vppiw Ale. 77 ;
^t or Spit, Soph. Ant. 308, Sppiv A. 249, Theoc. 1. 116, Sftfu Z. 77, tfo*
K. 551 ; upias /3. 75, Hdt. i. 53, u/*s, Ar. Lys. 87, Sftpt Ib. 1076, Sppg T.
412, Pind. O. 8. 19, Theoc. 5. 145, Soph. Ant. 846; ff<f>ui A. 336, <r$u A.
574 ; f^io'iv A. 257, v/'. 52 (here considered Nora, bv some), o-tpSv 3. 62 : to
B. 239, -Jo A. 400, It7 Ap. Rh. 1. 1032, S J T. 464, ( Hdt. iii. 135, ?&
A. 114, /Esch. Sup. 66, F^S-sv Ale. 6 (71) ; i N. 495, ?v (or ft) lies FT. 66,
Fr Sapph. 2. 1 ; Fs Ale. 56 (84), H T. 171, ^ A. 29, Hdt. i. 9, wv Pind.
0. 1. 40, Theoc. 1. 150,^Esch. Prom. 55; f <p t * Hdt. i.46; <r$t u * 2. 3 11, Hdt.
1. 31, f <p t ;*,v A. 535 ; <r0/v A. 73, ^sch. Prom. 252, as sing. Horn. H. 19. 19,
jsch. Pcrs. 759, <r^ B. 614, Hdt. i. 1, <rp' T. 300, ^<v Sophr. 83 (87), <p
Call. Di. 125, <r<pi Sapph. 98 (40); a-^jaj B. 96, ^w; Hdt. i. 4, rp; ? v.
213, ,$&} K. 567, ^s A. Ill, Tlieoc. 15.80, Soph. Ant. 44, ^ Theoc. 4. 3,
a<r<pt Aic. 92 (80); <r<p*>i A. 8, r^ or rQu P. 531 ; ff <puiv A. 338: i^i*,-,
i^flj/f, ipiiJs, ^s^sv, Tiaj, rio, bv,-, &c., cited by Apollonius in his treatise <>n
the Greek Pronoun.
Y 14:3 6. HISTORY, a. The distinction of person, like those of case and
number (\ 83), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely separating the
person speaking from all other persons, whether spoken to or spoken of. We
find traces of this early use not only in the roots common to the 2d and 3d
persons, but also in the common fonns of these persons in the dual of verbs.
The most natural way of designating one's self by gesture is to bring home
the hand ; of designating another, to stretch it out towards him. The voice
here follows the analogy of the hand. To denote ourselves, we naturally
keep the voice at home as much as is consistent with enunciation ; while we
denote another by a forcible emission of it, a pointing, as it were, of the
voice towards the person. The former of these is accomplished by closing the
lips and murmuring within, that is, by uttering wi, which hence became the
great root of the 1st personal pronouns. The latter is accomplished by sending
the voice out forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place
of the aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a
lingual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d
and 3d personal pronouns. In the progress of language, these two persons
were separated, and their forms became, for the most part, distinct, although
founded, in general, upon common roots.
/S. The u.- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old Plur. (which afterwards be-
came the Dual, 85) into the kindred v- (compare Lat. nos) ; and in the
Sing., when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial & (compare the /Eol.
aerQi, unfit), which passed by precession into t. In the new Plur., the idea of
plurality was conveyed by doubling the p. (dp/*-, in the Ep. and yEol. ajup<;,
jipftiuv, el/u.fttv, KftfAtiri, oLftfts) ', or more commonly by doubling the 8. to
( 29), pronounced with the rough breathing (V-> m V <?> &c.), or, in the
Dor., to ('ap,-, in 'etuis, V/^aJv, 'f*7v, 'dut). From this the new Plur. of
the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, by changing, for propriety of ex-
pression, a, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (fy*/*-, in the
Ep. and ^Eol. t^,iaj, vpftiuv, ilp,p.iv, vp./u,i and '>,-, in iiu.i7s, &c.) With the
158 PRONOUNS. - SUBSTANTIVE. ffiOOK II.
exception of this imitative plural, the Plur. and Du. of the 2d and 3d per-
fions have the same root, in which plurality is expressed by joining two of the
signs of these persons (trip- = <r -f- F)' In the separation of the two persons,
the sign r- became appropriated to the 2d Pers. (but in the Dor., *-, as in the
Lat., and also in the verb-endings -, -rev, -tis) ; and the rough breathing t<r
the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the language, this was F- ; in Lat. it be-
came s- ; while in the article we find both the rough breathing and T-, and in
verb-endings of the 3d Pers. both <r, and more frequently r).
<y. In the Nora, sing., the subjective force appears to have been expressed
by peculiar modes of strengthening ; hi the 1st Pers. by a double prefix to
the ft, thus, i-y-'o-fA (the -y being inserted simply to prevent hiatus), or, as ft
cannot end a word, lyav, which passed, by a change of to its corresponding
vowel ( 50) and contraction, into (iyoot) iyu (compare the Sanscrit aham,
the Zend azem, the Boeotic lu, the Lathi ego, and the verb -ending of the
1st Pers. u in Greek, and o in Lat.) ; in the 2d Pers. by affixing F, which
with the preceding t passed into v in the common Greek (cf. 117. N.), but
in the Boeot. into eu (compare the Lat. tu, 1 2. 0) ; in the 3d Pers. by
affixing A (perhaps chosen rather than F, on account of the initial F), before
which precession took place ( 1 1 8), so that the form became F< A, and from
this, "A or 7A, and, by dropping the A, 7 or 7 (this obsolete form is cited by
Apollonius; compare the Lat. is, eo, id). With this Norn, there appears to
have been associated an Ace. 7v or 7>, of which ph and / are strengthened
forms.
14:4. B. REFLEXIVE, cpavTov, ami/rov, eetvrov. These
pronouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first
also the neuter. They are formed by uniting the personal pro-
nouns with
In the Plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and sometimes of the 3d, the two
elements remain distinct ; fif^uv etuTav, iif&uv OLVTUY, atyuv KUTUV = tetUTwv. In
Homer, they are distinct in both Sing, and Plur.; thus, if^' avrov A. 271,
i : ui$iv * ig/?<r<ytj a,l<rr)f $. 78, uvrov pi* . 244. In the common compound
forms, the personal pronouns omit the flexible ending, in uniting with .v<r'os,
and in the 1st Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place:
ifAi-rtvTW if4a.uTou, ffi-ttuTov ffauTou, i-ttwroiv otuTou. In the New Ionic, on
the other hand, the flexible ending of the Gen. is retained, and is contracted
with a.v into uu ( 45. 6) iftio-eturou iftiuurov. The other cases imitate the
form of the Gen. : iftiwrc!!, -ov. The Doric forms UUTO.UTU, au<rt/rov, a.1-
rawToiv, a,vra,u<ra. t &c., which occur chiefly in Pythagorean fragments, are
formed by doubling ulros. Apollonius cites the comic Nom. ipeturis from
the Metceci of the comedian Plato.
1 4*5. C. RECIPROCAL, uUr^Mt: This pronoun is formed
by doubling '>Uoc, other. From its nature, it wants the N^rn.
and the Sing., and is not common in the Dual.
NOTE. For A.A<xX (Theoc. 14. 46), see 44. 1. For iXX^'Xa/JV (K. 65),
ee 99. 1.
146. D. INDEFINITE, o dtlva. This pronoun may be
termed, with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. It
is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the
CH. 5.J ADJECTIVE. 15U
speaker either cannot, or does not care to name ; or, in the
language of Matthiae, it " indefinitely expresses a definite person
or thing" ; as, Tor Suva yiyruaxeis ; Do you know Mr. So and
So ? Ar. Thesm. 620. C delva rov dslvos TOV delva tivnyyeMu,
A. B., the son of C. D., impeaches E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In
the Sing, this pronpun is of the three genders ; in the Plur. it
is masc. only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indeclina-
ble ; as, TOV delta Ar. Thesm. 622.
NOTE. The article is an essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better
written as a single word, ffiitvet. It appears to be simply an extension of the
demonstrative fit, by adding -<v- or -/va, which gives to it an indefinite force
(cf. 152. 1), making it a demonstrative indefinite. When ->-was appended,
it received a double declension ; when -iv, it had only the declension of the
article. It belongs properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aris-
tophanes.
II. ADJECTIVE.
[TT24.J
j 1 47. All the pronouns which are declined in IF 24 may
be traced back to a common foundation in an old DEFINITIVE,
which had two roots, the rough breathing and T- (cf. 143.
, /?), and which performed the offices both of an article and
of a demonstrative, personal, and relative pronoun.
REMARKS. . To this definitive the Greeks gave the name a^an, joint,
from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing spoken
of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to be spoken
of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek name a^S-^av be-
can>e, in Latin, articulus (small joint, from artus, joint, a word of the same
origin \vith *9^ov), from which has come the English name, article. This
definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the definite article,
naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken of; but when
used as a relative, usually follows it ; as, euros \<TTI* a vj v tTSt;, this is
THE man WHOM you saw ; TO pooov o avS^e?, THE rose WHICH blooms. Hence, in
the former use, it was termed the prepositive, and, in the latter, the postpositive
article. When prepositive, it was so closely connected with the following
word that its aspirated forms became proclitic.
fl. In the progress of the language, the forms of this old DEFINITIVE be-
came specially appropriated, and other pronouns arose from it by derivation
and composition (see the following sections). The forms TOJ and T of the
Nom. sing, became obsolete.
A. DEFINITE.
1 48. 1. ARTICLE, o, y, TO. The prepositive article, or.
as it is commonly termed, simply the article, unites the pro-
clitic aspirated forms of the old definitive, o, >,, 01, t, with the
t- forms of the neuter, the oblique cases, and the dual.
NOTE. The forms rat and rut are also used, for the sake of metre, euphony,
160 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK U
or empaasis, in the Ionic (chiefly the Epic), and in the Doric ; e. g. rot A
i47, Hdt. viii. 68. 1 (where it is strongly demonstrative), Theoc. 1. 80 ; ra.'
r. 5, Theoc. 1.9. So, even in the Attic poets, rot ft Msch. Pers. 423, Soph,
Aj. 1404 ; r; Ar. Eq. 1329. For the other dialectic forms, see 95, 96
99. For the forms and re, see 97.
2. RELATIVE, o?, rj, o. The postpositive^ article, or as it is
now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone
aspirated forms of the old definitive.
NOTE. For the old Masc. Z (II. 835, 0. 262), as well as for the Neut. ?,
see 97. For the reduplicated Sou (B. 325) and fa (FL 208), see 48.
149. 3. ITERATIVE, avrog, -ij, -o ( 97). This pronoun
appears to be compounded of the particle av, again, back, and
the old definitive xog ( 147. /?). It is hence a PRONOUN OP
RETURN (or, as it may be termed, an iterative pronoun), mark-
ing the return of the mind to the same person or thing.
NOTES, . The New Ionic often inserts i in tti/ros and its compounds,
before a long vowel in the affix (see 48. 1, f 24). This belongs especially
to Hippocrates and his imitator Aretaeus ; in Hdt., it is chiefly confined to
the forms in - and -v of etvros and ovrof e. g. etv-riu, a.vriuv and a.uruv t
Hdt. i. 133, Kvrieav rouriuv Ib. ii. 3. For the other dialectic forms of tturot,
see 95, 96, 99.
ft. The article and auros are often united by crasis ( 39) ; as, auros,
raurov ( 97. N.) or rauro (Ion. rulr'o Hdt. i. 53, 45. 6), rttlrou, ravrei,
for o auroi, ro etvr'o, rov nlrou, rot, eturei.
4. DEMONSTRATIVE. The primary demonstratives
are ovro?, this, compounded of the article and uvrog ' o<5t, this,
compounded of the article and <5c (an inseparable particle mark-
ing direction towards), and declined precisely like the article,
with this addition ; and exuvo?, that, derived from txfl, there.
NOTE. Of IxiTvos (which, with aXXaj, other, is declined like xvro;, 97)
there are also the forms, Ion. xtTvos, which is also common in the Att. poets,
jol. wot Sapph. 2. 1, Dor. <r*vo s Theoc. 1.4. In the Epic forms of fti,
rtivoiin <f>. 93, ro7o^i<rffi K. 462, ro7<rh<r<ri /3. 47, there is a species of double
dwilen.sion.
REMARKS. . The definitives roto?, such, roang, so great,
T7?/l/xo?, so old, and ivwoq, so little, are strengthened, in the
same manner as the article, by composition with avtos and de
thus, loiovio? and Taioadt, just such, joaoviog and loooudt, just
so much, TrjJitxovTos and rrjhxoadf, rvvvovrog. These compound
pronouns are commonly employed, instead of the simple, even
when there is no special emphasis.
/?. In declining the compounds of aviog with the article and
adjective pronouns, the following rule is observed : If the ter-
mination of the article or adjective pronoun has an O vowel* it
ttl. 5.] DEFINITE. -INDEFINITE. 16l
unites with the fir si syllable of wuro's, to form ov ; but is other-
wise absorbed.
Thus, (a ctlroi) OUTOS, ( eturvi) eturn, (<ro avrli) rovra G. (raw etlrou] rau
row, (<rt)i asirJjf) Tu,v<rr)i PI. (a/ wra<) a(Tra<, (as* awrai) etureu t (raj U.VTU,)
G. (T ttvruv) rourtui (^f 24) (roeos KUT'OS) rafourof, (raV*) awrw)
j, (roffo* ctlro) rorovra and roffovrov ( 97. N.)
^. To demonstratives, for the sake of stronger express! ?n,
an t is affixed, which is always long and acute, and before
which a short vowel is dropped, and a Jong vowel or diphthong
regarded as short ; thus, OVTOOI , otmffi* TOUT/, this here ; PI. ov~
TOU, ttUTttit, rcivil ' exeivoal) that there ; otJt, roanvToai.
NOTE. This / paragogic is Attic, and belongs especially to the style of con-
versation and popular discourse. It was also affixed to adverbs ; as, ounuo-i,
*bi, vuvi, ItruuS-t, iirivSivi. So, in comic language, even with an inserted
particle, tvvptvi Ar. Av. 448, ivyt>retv$t Id. Thesra. 646, ivfAtvriuS-ivi Ath.
269 f.
^> 1 5 1 . 5. POSSESSIVE. The possessive pronouns are de-
rived from the personal, and are regularly declined as adjec
tives of three terminations.
We add references for the less common possessives : vcatngos, O. 39 ; a$ui-
rios, A. 216, in Ap. Rh. = ff(f>iri^os, 1. 643, 2. 544 ; o f , T. 333, Hdt. i.
205, Soph. Aj. 442; apo; or 0,^09, Z. 414, Find. O. 10. 10, Theoc. 5. 108,
.&sch. Cho. 428 (used particularly in the Att. poets as sing.) ; a/u,irt(>os,
Theoc. 2. 31; a^o,-, Ale. 103; K^TI^OS, Ale. 104 ; ra;, y. 122, ^Esch.
Prom. 162 ; upi>{, . 375, Pind. P. 7. 15 ; ios, a. 409, Theoc. 17. 50 ; rtpis,
A. 534 ; Foi (= of), 3/u.ftof, cited by Apollonius. For the use of the posses-
sives, particularly os, ios, fffingos, <nfo; t and ff<f>uir^os y see Syntax.
B. INDEFINITE.
1 52. 1. The SIMPLE INDEFINITE is Tt?, which has two
roots, iiv- and T-, both appearing to be formed from T-, the
root of the article, by adding -iv- and -- to give an indefinite
force (cf. 146. N.).
REMARKS. . The later root riv- is declined throughout after Dec. III., but
the earlier rt- only in the Gen. and Dat., after Dec. II. (except in the Gen.
Sing., which imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction ; thus, rrj, it t
T/VO'S, Tir/, &c. ( 105. &} ; G. rio TOW, D. riy rf, and, in the compound,
PI. G. onuv oruv, D. or'ifitri orotffi (also Ion. <rluv, Ttoiffi, 153. y). Fur the
accentuation, and the forms arras, Va-, see 2. below, and 5 153. .
/J..The short < of r?f, rta-'i, and the omission of v hi rl", suggest an inter-
mediate root T<-, formed from n- by precession, and afterwards increased by
y 'cf. " 119, and oov/j, <; 123. y}. To this intermediate root may be referred,
according to Dec. II., the JEol. r!y ; Sapph. 55 (34), rtaur,* Id. 109 (113).
2. The INTERROGATORS in Groek are simply the indefinites
with a change of acrrr>t (see Syntax).
14*
162 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS [LOOK II
Thus, the forms of the indefinite ns (except tKj peculiar TT, which is
rarely used except in connection with an adjective, and which is never used
interrogatively) are enclitic ; while those of the interrogative T/J are orthotone,
and never take the grave accent. In lexicons and grammars, for the sake of
distinction, the forms of the indefinite, ns and n, are written with the grant
v-cent, or without an accent.
1 53. 3. The composition of og with ilg forms the RELATIVE
INDEFINITE oartc, whoever, of which both parts are declined in
those forms which have the root nv-, but the latter only in those
which have the root TC- ; thus, ovuvos, but or so OTOV. The
longer forms of the Gen. and Dat. are very rare in the Attic
poets.
NOTES. . The forms <r<r t Att. a-r<r ( 70. 1), appear to be shorter
forms of anvct, and are said by Eustathius to be compounded of and the
Doric ira, = nva,. In certain connections, they passed into simple indefinites,
and then, by a softer pronunciation, became a-<ra, O.TTU,.
$. The forms which occur in Homer of ns, ns, and ens, which is the same
with orris, except that it has no double declension, are exhibited in ^ 24.
Homer has also the regular forms of erns- The doubling of r in some of
the forms is simply poetic, for the sake of the metre.
<y. References are added for many of the forms of ns, ns, and erns : ens
P. 279 (ee-ns 167), 7 rn 0. 408; rev Cyr. viii. 5. 7, rev ; Soph. CEd T.
1435, o-rov i. 9. 21, rto *. 305, Hdt. i. 58, rio ; B. 225, fcrto .. 124, nu
( 45. 3) B. 388, Hdt. i. 19, 2f 2. 192, Hdt. v. 106, ino ? . 422, Hdt. i.
119, fa f . 121 ; A. 299, i. 9. 7, rS -, Soph. El. 679, 2W ii. 6. 23,
vita Hdt. ii. 48, vita-, Hdt. i. 117, ?ri $. 114, Hdt. i. 95, or? v M. 428;
IrmiS. 204 (cvr/va B. 188); ir^ arr* C}T. ii. 2. 13, I**"* 1 Zo-oet -r.
218, S.TTO. Rep. Ath. 2. 17, Jiff** A. 554, Hdt. i. 138, Sma X. 450 (nvet
A. 289) ; TI Hdt. v. 57, rfo* ; H. 387, rCut ; >. 200, oVi x. 39, Hdt
viii. 65, ?rv vii. 6. 24 : riurt Hdt. ix. 27, JriTin* 0. 491, Man Hdt. ii.
82, faun Soph. Ant. 1335 ; envois 0. 492 (at/Vr/vaj A. 240).
^ I fi^. REMARKS. 1. Adjective Pronouns which have not been
specially mentioned are regularly declined as adjectives of three terminations
(S 133. 4). For the Correlative Pronouns, and for the Particles which are
affixed to pronouns, see f 63, 317, 328.
2. Special care is required in distinguishing the forms of e, es, o$, TIS, and
ns- Forms which have the same letters may be often distinguished by the
accentuation ; as, /, el, a". Special care is also required in distinguishing the
fcrms of ovros, those of et-lres. the combined forms of e a.vrtt^ the same, and
the contracted forms of
CH. 6.J COMPARISON. 163
CHAPTER VI.
COMPARISON.
^ 155. ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS have, in
Greek, three degrees of comparison, the POSITIVE,
the COMPARATIVE, and the SUPERLATIVE.
I. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
In adjectives, the comparative is usually formed
in -T6os, -a, -ov, and the superlative in -TCCTOS, -??,
-ov ; but sometimes the comparative "is formed in
-toy, -7ov, Gen. -tovos, and the superlative^ in -ttfros,
-??, -ov.
A. COMPARISON IN -Tfgog, -TTO?.
^156. In receiving the affixes -rfpos and
-TCCTOS, the endings of the theme are changed as
follows ;
1.) -os, preceded by a long syllable, becomes
-o- ; by a short syllable, -a- ; as,
xouqpo?, ilgfit, yovapoifQog, xovqpozaTOff.
aocpdg, wise, . aoqpw'rf^oc, C;O<JPCTTO?.
REMARKS. . This change to -<w- takes place to avoid the succession of
too many short syllables. Three successive short syllables are inadmissible in
hexameter verse. We also find, for the sake of the metre, x,a.x,o% > uve!><ri(>os
v. 376, l.d.ura.ro; /3. 350, o'l^u^un^n P. 446, o^U^ururov t. 105. In respect
to xtvas, empty, and irrtvos, narrow, authorities vary.
/3. A mute and liquid preceding -as have commonly the same effect as a
long syllable ; as, irQoSgo;, vehement, tr<po$(>orii>os, f^yS^aruroi. Yet here, also,
the Attic poets sometimes employ -u- for the sake of the metre ; as, iu<r-ro-
rfjuuritot. Eur. Ph. 1348, ^vvvrp.uru.ra.; Ib. 1345, ivnxvura-rt Id. Hec. 620.
y. In a few words, -og is dropped ; and, in a few, it becomes
-<-, -ea-, or -ia- ; as,
'?, ancient,
, dear,
friendly,
)c, quiet.,
:, strong,
JUxJLo.-, talkative,
164 COMPARISON. [BOOK n.
NOTES, (a.) Tet also ^aXa/or^a?, Find. N. 6. 91, p/Xw-rs^j, Mem. iii. 11
18, i*xt ( 159) u. 268, ffafros, Soph. Aj. 842, S,fu X art^ s , Id. Ant. 1089
(b.) The change of -os into -to-- belongs particularly to contracts in -oot
These contracts, and those in -u tt are likewise contracted in the Comp. and
Sup. ; as,
oos, simple, a.veXoio-r&os,
j,
;, purple,
But Ax-Xounps, less fit for sea, Th. vii. 60, tv^aan^os, CEc. 10. 1 1,
s, Eq. 1. 10, &c.
(c.) Other examples of -os dropped in comparison are ytfaios, old, a-go*
S, at leisure ; of -a; changed to -/-, iu$ios, clear, 'fbios, private, tiros, equal
s, middle (see S. below), og&tios, at dawn, tyios, late, -r^ta'ios, early; of -os
changed to -t<r-, cttioTo;, august, cix^ocro;, unmixed, ciir/ttvos, glad, utyS-ovos ,
bountiful, Ivr't-riSo;, Ifvel, tu^u^a?, pure, rftupos, sweet (poet.) ; of -aj changed to
s, eating alone, o^/o^a.yos, dainty, veru^'os, poor.
and vios have old superlatives of limited and chiefly poetic use hi
-ara? ; thus, pitrxros, midmost, AT. Vesp. 1 502, Ep. p.iff<raros, 0. 223, vsaroj,
last, lowest, A. 712, Soph. Ant. 627, Ep. nittros, B. 824. Compare fr&ar**,
(#0001.701} Tgaro;, and u-retTof ( 161. 2).
2.) -sis and -?/g become -0-; as,
, agreeable, x a Q lB>(JTf Q?^
evident, aoKf^aitQog,
poor, 7ifveai(jo$,
REMARK. In adjectives of the first declension, and in -^/ivbfis, -*tf becomes
- ; as, trXiavJXT*};, -ov, covetous, vr^tovix'riff'rot'ros * $>iti$ris, -ios, false, ijsiv
retrof. Except, for the sake of euphony, u^^io-rrts, -ov, insolent, vfyifrort
t v. 8. 3, v^iffTorcires, Ib. 22 (referred by some to vfyifros)-
3.) -vs becomes -v- ; as,
7i(jia(Svg, old, nQsaflvngos,
For the sake of the metre, /Swyrara 2. 508.
^ 158. 4.) In adjectives of other endings,
-TSQOS and -xaios are either added to the simple
root, or to the root increased by -<y-, -ttf-, or -co- ;
as,
, -avog, wretched, roddvifyoc;, TaAavzaTo?.
-oroc, discreet, auifQoreareQog, aw<pQov6oraio$.
$, -/o?, rapacious, uymtyloTmoq.
ioq, pleasing, tni^dfjiranfQoc, e7r<^^iTWTTo?.
NOTKS. . Other examples are f/.ttxef*, blessed, u-cmeifruTos X. 483 ; /u,i).en
CH. 6.] ADJECTIVES. 165
-aac, black. fti>.<iv>rio;, A. 277, and (ttXetvarigos, Strab. ; <p>jA./, -ixo{, elder-
ly, K<p*.ix.'ur<r!6; /3Xg, -xo,-, stupid, /SXax^rs^ay, -earttros, Mem. iii. 13. 4,
iv. 2. 40, for which some read /SXaxeV^oy, and /3x*TTaj or /SXaxiVrara?
From ;/?, disagreeable, we liud the shorter form ag<Wiflj, w. 392.
/J. The insertion of -10-- is particularly made in adjectives in -v. Yet some
of these employ shorter forms ; as, rivuv, ripe, vivairteos ^Eseh. Fr. 244 ;
triuv, fat, *iortos, Horn. Ap. 48, vioraro;, I. 577 (as from the rare *??,
Orph. Arg. 508) ; l-ri^y^ut, forgetful, \xiXvffpora.ros, Ar. Nub,
s, Apol. 6).
B. COMPARISON IN -fair, -taiog.
^ 159. A few adjectives are compared bjr
changing -vs, -as, -os, and even -0os, final, into -icov
and -LOTOS. In some of these, -iov with the pre-
ceding consonant passes into -oacov (-TTGJJ/, ^ 70. 1)
or -fv. Thus,
fjdvz, pleasant, r\8i wr,
TO^UC, swift; -frdaawv
Tthfltav,
jg, beautiful,
jg, base, aia%t(av, al'a%iarog.
yg, hostile, fxdiiov, tyfriOTog.
REMARKS. . For the declension of comparatives in -, see ^ 17 and
107. The / in the affix -luv is long in the Attic poets, but short in the
Epic, and variable in the later.
/3. The forms in -<r<r and -&v observe this distinction : -<r<rcav can arise
only when the consonant preceding -iav is K, %, <r, , or 9- ; -v, only when
this consonant is y. The vowel preceding becomes long by nature, perhaps
from a transposition, and absorption or contraction, of the /. Thus, r%.%vs
(originally Sa,%us, 62), 3-et%iuv Qa<r<ruv, Neut. B-ei<rtrov (the regular <ra.%iuv is
also common in late prose) ; l*.*%vs (Epic ; iXa.%uu. Horn. Ap. 197), small,
iXa-ffffuv -rai^u;, thick, <r%;<uv (Arat.) veio-eruv, ?. 230 ; from r. fix-, Comp.
Vfftrav, inferior (Ion. ttro-uv, Hdt. V. 86) ; yXCxus, sweet, yKvxiuv (2. 109)
y^.tiir<rcav, Xenophan. ; ftecx^o;, long, v,a.ffffuv poet., 9>. 203, ^sch. Ag. 598 ;
x^a-rwf (Epic, II. 181), strong, xot'itrffuv (Ion. xfaffeav, Hdt. i. 66) ; /3^a^'j,
glow, fyoiXuv (Hes. Op. 526) fyl<r<ruv K. 226 ; /Sa^yj, deep, (h&'mi (Tyrt.
3. 6) fiuffiruv, Epicharm. ; /u-iya.} (the only adj. in -aj compared in -/w, -/C-TO;),
psy/v fM% m (Ion. fiX^tn Hdt. i. 202) : O xtyj, axf^v, Call. Jov. 72 (&r-
X/'^v5f 2. 519). It will be observed that many of these comparatives are
nerely poetic. Compare the formation of verbs in -ff<ru and *;.
y. The root of <rXy is <rXi-, by syncope -rXs-. From this short root are
formed the comparative and superlative. ITxewv is a yet shorter form for
-X<. The longer form is more common in the contracted cases and plural,
but the neut. TXsav is more used than v\itov, especially as an adverb. The
neut. <rXi7av sometimes becomes <rXs/V, but only in such phrases as <rXt< 3 pv-
{40i, more than ten thousand. The Ionic contracts -10- into -i- ( 45. 3) ; as,
166 COMPARISON. [BOOK n
v, -rXtvvof, crXsyvsj, &c. Hdt. ii. 19, i. 97, 199, &c. The Ep. -rXti.
A. 395, and i-Xtus B. 129, are comparative in sense, though positive in form
$. In the Comp. and Sup. of xuXos, X is doubled, as in the noun re
-tes, beauty. In the adjectives hi -got which are compared hi -/a/v and -tares,
the Comp. and Sup. appear to have come either from a simpler form of the
positive, or from a corresponding noun. See 161. R.
i. Most adjectives which are compared as above have also forms in -rioof
and -rctros ; thus, /3^^t/j, slow, (?>a%uri(>os, figuSiuv, and Pgeiir<ruv, fioat%vra.ros,
(>ci$i<rros, and by poetic metath. ( 71), Qufiiffro;, T". 310 ; pax^a?, long, p,et-
xorst>s and pei/rirav, fActx^oraras and (a. becoming by precession , as in the
noun ro (jwxos, -so?, length) ttrixtcrras, Cyr. iv. 5. 28, Dor. puxttrro;, Soph
(Ed. T. 1301. Other examples of double formation are u'tf^o;, ixfyos, xv-
l^'os (poet), renowned, otxr^os, pitiable, /SaSivj, fyaxvs, short, yXvxus, #/?,
uxvf, twift, xetxof ( 160), ^/Xaj ( 156. a), &C.
C. IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
Some adjectives in the comparative and superla-
tive degrees are formed from positives which are not in use,
from words which are themselves comparative^ or superlatives.
or from other parts of speech. Some of these are usually re
ferred to positives in use, which have a similar signification
and some of which are also regularly compared ; thus,
good,
Poet. eifAtivert^as Mimn. 11. 9; !/ JEsch. Ag. 81, a^tiart^of, Theog
548 ; /3iXTiof, J5sch. Th. 337, /SsXraraf, Id. Eum. 487 ; <p%r^ f , Id. Pr
768, (fi'^rctrof H. 289, (fti^ros, Sojth. (Ed. T. 1159, and even PI. Pluedr
238 d, <p'i^rnrrot, Pind. Fr. 92; X<wi^, /3. 169, Xutn^of, a. 376 (the pos,
form Xuia, occurs Theoc. 26. 32); xu^na-ros, A. 266 ( 71 ; so always in
Horn.). Dor. Qivrio-ros, Theoc. 5. 76, *#, Tim. ap. PL 102 d ; Ion
xoiftruv ( 159. /3). Late ctyctSuraros, Diod. 16. 85.
os, painful^ a\yiwv,
alyeivoi
xaxo'?, bad, xroawv, xtixiaroi;.
Poet. xKKuriot t a. 343 ; ;i/faVif, O. 513, ^igi/w A. 114,
] 248 (for the Epic #iw, &c., which, though positive hi form, are com-
p tive in sense, see 136. S) ; tfxiffros or rfxtrrof "i 7 ". 531 (tfxirra as an ad-
verb was common in Attic prose ; ./Elian uses jxtirras as an adj.), Ion. fcr
( 159.^).
'ff, small, f
, little, few, )
"
CH. 6.J ADJECTIVES. 16?
Poet iXa^v'f, flX/ ( 159. 0) ; puirtpt Ap. Rh. 2. 368,
5. 10 (yet common reading pf.ovtt).
qaiog, easy, (5w',
Poet. fVS/aj, X. 146, pfiios, Theog. 574, faints, 2. 258, ^an^f Find. O.
8. 78, p^irras, 5. 565, pa.''i<rTaf, Theoc. 11. 7, putretres, T. 577. The common
foundation of the forms of this word appears to have been pd'iA- (see 118,
119).
161. 1. Examples of double comparison.
iff%ctro;, last, extreme, Iff^ctruTi^os (Ovn ya.% rov Iff^arou i^rari* tin
i* n. Aristl. Metaph. 10. 4), i<r%ctrvrct>ros, H. Gr. ii. 3. 49.
before, comic -rgirigetirtgos AT. Eq. 1164 ;
KA. 'Ova.; ; \yu ffoi Tgortgo; IK
AA. 'AXX.' aw r^awi^av, aXX* ly
;, first, rguriirrof, first of all, B. 228.
lJ(.*%ifros, least, i*.ct%nrroTtos, less than the least, Ep. Ephes. 3. 8.
NOTE. See also examples of a poetic double formation of the Comp.
(apuvorifas, aguaVsga?, &C.) in 160. For xaAX/wrtgov Th. iv. 1^8, is now
read
2. Examples of adjectives in the comparative and superla-
tive degrees, formed from other parts of speech.
king, (ZetffiXivrtgos, more kingly, a greater king, I. 160, /3<r/Xtyr-
rf, the greatest king, I. 69.
IretT^os, friend, iretiforares, best friend, PL GrOrg. 487 d.
xXiirrwy, thief, xXtx-rierraros, most adroit thief, AT. Plut. 27.
xvuv, dog, xvvri0f, more dog-like, more impudent, 0. 483, xvtretrot, K. 503.
xifiof, -tos, gain, xtfiiav, more gainful, F. 41, *i$ifros, ^sch. Pr. 385.
alr'os, himself, ctvrorsgas Epich. 2 (1), etvrorarot (ipsissumus Plaut. Trinum.
Iv. 2), his very self, AT. Plut. 83.
*y/t' or Ziy^ou, near, ety^on^of, nearer, Hdt. vii. 175, iy^orarot, Eur.
PeL 2, oftener &y%iffrat Soph. (Ed. T. 919.
yai, up, ivuT^os, upper, a.vurotros, uppermost, Hdt. ii. 125.
, quietly, *itf*s<rrtos, more quiet, Cyr. vii. 5. 63.
near (**.n<riot poet, and Ion.), tr^ffiain^f i. 10. 5, f>.n<riatrxrs,
vii. 3. 29, also **.nffii<rnt>os, -t.ffTa.rot.
, of importance, ^ov^ytatr^of) more important, PI. Gorg. 458 c,
l|, out of, i(r%a<res t extreme.
9To, before, rgaVs^af, former, K^ures ( 156. &), first (Dor. a-jaraf Theoo.
8. 5, 45. 1).
*, above, v<r'^<rt^o{, superior, vtri^rarts and Stfarof,
Pind. N. 8. 73).
vf'o (?), vs-rigo;, later, vcrretros, last.
REMARKS. We find an explanation of these formations in the use of prep-
ositions as adverbs, and of adverbs as adjectives ; in the fact that many nount
1G8 COMPARISON. [BOOK n.
are originally adjectives ; and in the still more important fact, that in the
earliest period of language there is as yet no grammatical distinction of the
different parts of speech. For other examples of comparatives and superla-
tives which appear to be formed from nouns, see, in 160, uXytuv, -iirrof
(from etXyog, -sos, pain), and a.ai<r<ro; (like gsr, from *Af>y; or a common
root, and signifying originally best in war\ and also 159. $, i. Add the
poetic xv$i<r<ros, I. 642, ftyicav, -iirres, A. 325, E. 873, fAv^arag, Ap. Kh. 1.
170, puxoiretTOs <p. 146, ovlortgos, -raros, B. 707, Hes. Th. 137, &c. ; and,
from adverbs, o#tff<rtos, -raros, 0. 342, -ru^oirs^as, -retro;, Y. 459, Ap. Kh.
2. 29, Wtnges, Theoc. 8. 46, ii-^'iuv, Find. Fr. 232, v^rros, JSsch. Pr.
720, &c.
II. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.
^ 162. I. Adverbs derived from adjectives are
commonly compared by taking the neuter singular
comparative, and the neuter plural superlative of
these adjectives ; as,
aocpwg (from aocpoq, 156), aoqxoTtQov,
wisely, more wisely, most wiseL
ou<f(aq (from oraqpT^, ^ 157), acKpsarsQov, aaqpearaTa,
clearly, more clearly, most clearly.
(from ia%vi;, ^ 159), &aaaov,
(from alaxyog, ^ 159),
NOTE. The adverbial termination -us is sometimes given to the Comp.
as, %et\frariou{, more severely, i%S-iovus, in a more hostile manner. So Sup.
t, most concisely, Soph. (Ed. C. 1579.
^ 163. II. Adverbs not derived from adjec-
tives are, for the most part, compared in -iiga and
; as,
area, up, avfatdgw,
kxag, afar,
REMARKS. . The following are compared after the analogy of adverbs
derived from adjectives :
/twcXa, eery,
So <**;?, early, and o\^i, late, employ forms of the adjectives -r^u'i'oi, S-^ut
( 156. c), derived from them. In affori^u {. 572, we have a poetic double
form ( 161. N.).
/3. Some adverbs vary in their comparison ; as,
\yyvs, near, lyyvr't^, lyyurartt.
\yyuriov, lyyvrttr*.
(Not Att) !yy, lyyirrm.
CH. 7. j CONJUGATION. 169
CHAPTER VII.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION.
Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to
mark five distinctions, VOICE, TENSE, MODE, NUM-
BER, and PERSON. Of these distinctions, the first
shows how the action of a verb is related to its
subject ; the second, how it is related to time ; and
the third, how it is related to the mind of the
speaker, or to some other action. The two remain-
ing distinctions merely show the number and person
of the subject.
Greek verbs are conjugated both by PREFIXES and by AFFIXES. For the
prefixes, see Ch. VIII. ; for the affixes, see ^ff 28-31, and Ch. IX.; for
the modifications which the root itself receives, see Ch. X.
A. VOICE.
165. The Greek has three voices, the Ac
TIVE, the MIDDLE, and the PASSIVE.
The ACTIVE represents the subject of the verb as the doer
of the action, or its agent; as, xot'w rtr, I ivash some one.
The PASSIVE represents the subject of the verb as the re-
ceiver of the action, or its object ; as, lovpai vno nvo?, I am
washed by some one.
The MIDDLE is intermediate in sense between the Active and
the Passive, and commonly represents the subject of the verb
as, either more or less directly, both the agent and the ob-
ject of the action; as, Aowra/jqis I washed myself, I bathed.
166. REMARKS. 1. The middle and passive voices
have a common form, except in the Future and Aorist. In
Etymology, this form is usually spoken of as passive. And
even in the Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between
the two voices is not always preserved.
2. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so
indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its
use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the
middle voice takes the place of the active. This is particu-
15
170 CONJUGATION. - TENSE. [BOOK II.
larly frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme
(.170. ), the verb is termed deponent (deponens, laying aside
sc. the peculiar signification of the middle form). E. g.
(.) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the mid-
dle form : O.KOVU, to hear, ctx.ovoop.u.1 fiotlveu, to go, fiynro/ta,i ytyvutrxca, to
know, yvutropKi ' lifti, to be, ttrofteti ftetvffxvea, to learn,
(/3.) Deponent Verbs : a<W<y*a/, to perceive, yiyvofiai, to become,
fc receive, iuva.ftai, to be able, rdopa.t, to rejoice.
NOTE. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent passive,
according as its Aorist has the middle or the passive form.
B. TENSE.
^167. The Greek has six tenses; the PRES-
ENT, the IMPERFECT, the FUTURE, the AORIST, the
PERFECT, and the PLUPERFECT.
1. The PRESENT represents an action as doing at the present
time ; as, ygdyw, I am writing, I write.
2. The IMPERFECT represents an action as doing at some
past time ; as, tyQayov, I was writing.
3. The FUTURE represents an action as one that will be done
at some future, time ; as, ygdyo), I shall write.
4. The AORIST (aopiaro?, indefinite) represents an action
simply as done ; as, tyga^a, I wrote, I have written, I had
written.
5. The PERFECT represents an action as complete at the pres-
ent time ; as, yiyqayn, I have written.
6. The PLUPERECT represents an action as complete at somo
past time ; as, eyeyfjuyeiv, I had written.
1 68. Tenses may be classified in two ways ; I. with
respect to the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the
relation which the action bears to this time.
I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present, 2. fu-
ture, or 3. past.
The reference to time is most distinct in the Indicative. In this mode,
those tenses which refer to present or future time are termed primary or chief
tenses, and those which refer to past time secondary or historical tenses.
II. The action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at
the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time.
The tenses which denote the first of these relations may be termed definite ;
the second, indefinite; and the third, complete. For a classified table of ths
Greek tenses, see ^ 26.
CH. 7.] MODE. 171
NOTES. . Some verbs have a complete future tense, called the Future
Perfect, or the Third Future ( 239) ; but, otherwise, the three tenses which
are wanting in the table (f 26), viz. the indefinite present, the definite future,
and the complete future, are supplied by forms belonging to other tenses, or
by participles combined with auxiliary verbs.
/3. Foi the general formation of the Greek tenses, see ^ 28.
C. MODE.
The Greek has six modes; the IN-
DICATIVE, the SUBJUNCTIVE, the OPTATIVE, the IM-
PERATIVE, the INFINITIVE, and the PARTICIPLE.
1. The INDICATIVE expresses direct assertion or inquiry ; as
yqdqxa, I am writing ; /0'<pw / am I writing 1
2. The SUBJUNCTIVE expresses present contingence ; as, ova
olda, OTIOL TQantopai, I know not, whither 1 can turn.
3. The OPTATIVE (opto, to wish, hecause often used in the
expression of a wish) expresses past contingence ; as, ovx yftuv,
onoi TQcmolfiiiv, I knew not, whither I could turn.
4. The IMPERATIVE expresses direct command, or entreaty ,
as, y^dcff, write ; ivmivdw, let him be beaten ; do$ /uot, give me
5. The INFINITIVE partakes of the nature of an abstract
noun ; as, ygdcpetv, to write.
6. The PARTICIPLE partakes of the nature of an adjective ,
as, yQaycav, writing.
NOTES. . For a table of the Greek modes classified according to the
character of the sentences which they form, see f 27.
0. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Present and Aorist have
all the modes ; but the Future wants the Subjunctive and Imperative ; and
the Perfect, for the most part, wants the Subjunctive and Optative, and like-
wise, in the active voice, the Imperative. The Imperfect has the same form
with the Present, and the Pluperfect the same form with the Perfect, except
in the Indicative.
y. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each other as
present and past, or as primary and secondary, tenses ( 168. I.) ; and some
have therefore chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general
conjunctive or contingent mode. With this change, the number and offices
of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspond-
ence between the Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes
more obvious.
D. NUMBER AND PERSON.
^17O. The numbers and persons of verbs
correspond to those of nouns and pronouns (^ 164).
172 CONJUGATION. [BOOK II
NOTE. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person ; th
Infinitive, from its abstract nature, wants the distinctions of number and per-
son altogether ; and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an Adjectiv^
has the distinctions of gender and case, instead of person.
REMARKS, a. The first person singular of the Present indicative active, 01
in deponent verbs (^ 166. 2), middle, is regarded as the THEME of the verb
The KOOT is obtained by throwing off the affix of the theme, or it may be
obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing off the prefix and affix, and
allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is conjugated by adding to the root
the prefixes and affixes in ^f*| 28 - 30.
/3. Verbs are divided, according to the characteristic, into MUTE, LIQUID
DOUBLE CONSONANT, and Pu RE VERBS ; and according to the affix in the
theme, into VERBS IN -u, and VERBS IN -^ ( 208. 2). For a paradigm of
regular conjugation without euphonic changes, see ^ 34, 35 ; for shorter para-
digms of the several classes of verbs, see *|f^f 36 60.
y. For a fuller view of the use of the Greek verb in its several forms, see
Syntax.
E. HISTORY OF GREEK CONJUGATION.
1 7 1 The early history of Greek conjugation can be traced only in
the same way with that of declension ( 83). The following view is offered
as one which has much in its support, and which serves to explain the general
phenomena of the Greek verb.
Greek conjugation, like declension ( 83, 143), was progressive. At first,
the root was used, as in nouns, without inflection. The first distinction ap-
pears to have been that of person, which was, at first, only twofold, affixing ft
to express the first person, and a lingual or sibilant to express the other two.
Of this second pronominal affix, the simplest and most demonstrative form ap-
pears to have been -r (cf. 143, 148). By uniting these affixes with the
root $*-, to say, we have the forms,
I or we say, $&r, you, he, or they nay.
1 7 3. A plural was then formed by affixing the plural sign ( 83\
with the insertion of i to assist in the utterance. Thus,
1 Person. 2 and 3 Persons.
Sing. ifaft $u.r
Plur. QafAir tfdnt
Upon the separation of the 2d and 3d Persons ( 143. /S), the 2d, as being
lass demonstrative, took in the Sing, the softer form t (in some cases, <rv
or 6, in both which forms the 6 would, by the subsequent laws of euphony,
pass into f, unless dropped or sustained by an assumed vowel, 63) ; while
in the Plur. there was a new formation (cf. 84, 85), in which plurality
was marked, in the 2d Pers. by affixing i (cf. 83), and in the 3d Pers. by
inserting v (cf. -*-<, 85). The old Plur. now became, as in nouns ( 85), a
Dual, and the system of numbers and persons was complete. Thus,
1 Pers. 2 Pere. 3 Pers.
Sing. $d.fA <fnis Qa-r
Plur. <pa.fi.t9 <f>a.rt <f>a.vr
Dual (fidfuf Qaru Qartr
CH. 7.] HISTORY. U K 173
1 7 3. Tne distinction of tense, like thoje-of number, case, and per-
son (<} 83, 113), was at first only twofold, simply d^tingui.shiiitf a punt ac-
tion from a. present or future one. Tin's was naturally done by prefixing i- (in
Sanscrit, 5-), to express, as it were, the throwing back of the action into past
time (5 187). This expression, it will be observed, is aided by the throwing
',.ack of the accent. With the prefix of -, a distinction was also made be-
tween the 2d and 3d Persons dual (perhaps because, the more remote the
action, the more important becomes the specific designation of the subject).
In the 3d Pers. the inserted i ( 172) was lengthened to , while in the 2d
IVrs., as in both the 2d and 3d Persons of the unaugmented tense, it passed
into the kindred o ( 28). We have now two tenses, the unaugmented Pn-
mary Tense, which supplied the place of both the Present and the Future, and
the augmented Secondary Tense, which expressed past action both definitely
and indefinitely, and supplied the place of all the past tenses ( 168). Thus,
PRIMARY TENSE. SECONDARY TENSE.
IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P.
S. $a.fA (pas q>iir
P. Qufttv <purt Qiivr
D.
At first, there was no distinction of voice. The affix merely
showed the connection of the person with the action, but did not distinguish
his relation to it as agent or object. This distinction seems to have arisen as
follows. A transitive action passes immediately from the agent, but its effect
often continues long upon the object. This continuance would naturally be
denoted by prolonging the affix. Thus, if I may be pardoned such an illus-
tration, while the striker simply says with vivacity rvvroft, I strike, the one
struck rubs his head and cries ruvrofteti, tuptom-ah-ee, / am struck. Hence
the objective form was distinguished from the subjective ( 195), simply by the
prolongation of the affix. This took place in various ways, but all affecting
the personal and not the numeral element of the affix. If the affix ended with
the sign of person, it was prolonged by annexing, in the Primary Tense, a/ ;
but in the Secondary Tense (on account of the augment, which had a natural
tendency to shorten the affix), the shorter o, except in the 1st Pers., where a
species of reduplication seems to have taken place (-/>j^, passing of course
into -ftw, 63). Thus -^ became -p.i and -/aw ; -?, -/ and -tro ; -r, -rut
and -ro ; -VT, -vrcti and -vro. If the' affix ended with the sign of number, the
preceding sign of person took a longer form. In the 2d and 3d Persons, this
was f6 (which might be considered as arising from the r by the addition of 6,
since r6 must pass into trd, ~> 52). The 1st Pers., in imitation of the others,
inserted 6 (or, if a long syllable was wanted by the poets, tr6\ after which
either o was inserted, to aid in the utterance, or, what became the common
form, the final passed into its corresponding vowel a. ( 50). Thus -n, -rav,
-T>jy became -<rt!t, -o-0av, -a$m ; and -/tv became -pi6ov (-fi<r0ov), or commonly
-fido. (-niffSa^). In respect to the form -pi6ov, see 212. 1. We place the
subjective and objective inflections side by side for comparison.
SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE.
IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P.
Prim. S. ty-[A (fioi-S <p-r ^a-^t/ <pa-o-/ <pa-ri
P. pa-^f* 0a-<ri <pa-vr <pa.-fx.iJa, <pa-<^ (pd-vra
D. Qti-fAti pa-ro 0a-ro <fet-fe,iffx
15*
174 CONJUGATION. [COOK li.
" SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE.
IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P.
Sec. S. Ityn-ft, %<[>K-S tcpa-<r l(f>a,-ft>jy i<pa,-<ro ttfin-ra
P.
D.
1 7 > It will be observed, that all the affixes above begin with a
consonant. While, therefore, they could be readily attached to roots end-
ing with a vowel, euphony required that, hi their attachment to the far
greater number of roots ending with a consonant, a connecting vowel should be
inserted. This vowel, which was purely euphonic in its origin, was, doubtless
also from euphonic preference, -a- before a liquid, but otherwise -t- (the forma-
tion of the Opt. and the analogy of Dec. II. lead us rather to consider the -i-
as a euphonic substitute for the -a- than the reverse, 28, 86, 177). As
an example of euphonic inflection (in distinction from which the inflection
without connecting vowels is termed nude), we select the root yg<p-, to write
SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE.
IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P.
Prim. S. y^i^-ofjt, -ts -IT ygeity-of&ai -tffai -ivnt
P. <ygti(p-ofitiv "IT -avT y^ct^-'ft,i6et -1061
D. <y{a<p-of&i9 -tray -trot yf>a.<Q-bp.tt}. -laioi
Sec. S. 1yga<p-of& -is -IT i<yga<p-6fAii9 -ifft
P. \y^a.ty-o[t.iv -ITI -off \y^a.(^-'o[ii6a. -tffft
D. lci-o&iv -trot -irti* iett-ottfa -lain
1 ^ G. The distinction of mode in the inflection of verbs commences
with that of person. For the very attachment of personal affixes makes a
distinction between a personal mode (i. e. the verb used as finite) and a non-
personal mode (i. e. the verb used as an infinitive or participle). The latter
had doubtless, at first, no affix. But the Infinitive is in its use a substantive,
commonly sustaining the office, either of a direct, or yet more frequently indi-
rect object of another word. Hence it naturally took the objective endings of
nouns. Of these the simplest and the earliest in its objective force appears to
have been ( 84, 87), which was, accordingly, affixed to the Inf., to ex-
press in general the objective character of this mode. To pure roots this affix
was attached directly ; but to impure roots with the insertion of t to assist the
utterance. Thus the Inf. of <f>et- was p ; and of y^a^-, y^aipi*. Subse-
quently, to mark more specifically the prevalent relation of the Inf., that of
indirect object, the dative affix of Dec. I. ( 8(5) was added to these forms ;
thus, tfavai, yza.tpiva.i. Voice appears to have been distinguished by the in-
sertion, in these forms, of rO (before which the > fell away, cf. 55, 57), after
the analogy of 5 174 ; thus, Act. (or Subject.) Form, <pav/, y;p ( Mu Mid.
and Pass, (or Obj.) Form, ($iv-a6-ai) <$da6a.i t (y(iq>iv-ff6-a.i) y(>a.q>iff6a.i. But
the verb is also used as an adjective, and, as such, receives declension. The
root of this declension, in the Act. (or Subject.) Form, may be derived from
the original form of the non-personal mode in -, by adding T, which is used
so extensively in the formation of verbal substantives and adjectives ; thus,
<pdv <pT-, or, with the affix of declension (^[ 5), <f>avr-s, y<pi y^d<pevr-s
(the kindred was here preferred as a connecting vowel to i, cf. 175). The
Mid. and Pass, (or Obj.) form of the Participle may be derived from the
by a reduplication analogous to that in 174 (since the Aoc. affix, 84,
CII. 7.J HISTORY. 175
is strictly a nasal, which could be either /* or , according to euphonic pref-
erence ; as, fto^ietn, but Lat. boream) ; thus, Qeiv Qeipiv-os, y^aipiv <yget<poft,i*-ot
We have now the single non-personal mode developed into a system of Infini-
tives and Participles ; thus,
SUBJECTIVE. OBJECTIVE.
Inf. 0'va<, y^ivett Qcifftlai,
Part. <peiv<rs, y(>oi$ovTS <p<tftivo;,
^> ITT*. In the personal mode, a threefold distinction arose. DouDt
leads to hesitation in closing a word or sentence ; and hence the idea of con-
tingence was naturally expressed by dwelling upon the connecting vowel (or
upon the final vowel of the root), as if it were a matter of question whether
the verb ought to be united with its subject. The strongest expression of
contingency that of past contingence, protracted the connecting vowel, or final
vowel of the root, to the cognate diphthong in i (^ 3), and thus formed what
is termed the Optative mode, which, as denoting past time, takes the secondary
affixes ; thus, '<, q>a,7[*., i<pei/u.tiv tptzifttiv, tyt>oc.<poft ygKQoifi,, \y^a.^>o^.nv y^ee.-
<pt>if*v*. The weaker expression of contingence, that of present contingence,
as less needed, seems to have arisen later, after the conjugation with the con-
necting vowels -o- and -t- had become established as the prevailing analogy
of the language ; and to have consisted simply in prolonging these vowels to
-ta- and --, attaching the same affixes to all verbs. This weaker form, termed
the Subjunctive mode (yet see 169. 7), as denoting present time, takes the
primary affixes. Thus, yoa,<pfjL y^atyufj., yoti^o/^ai ygci<f>cofAix.i, <pu.[*. <pat,Jft,
<pa,{4ot.i tpdtufixi. The original mode now became an Indicative, expressing the
actual, in distinction from the contingent.
A third mode arose for the expression of command. This obviously required
no 1st Pers. ; and in the 2d, it required no essential change, as the- tone of
voice would sufficiently indicate the intent of the speaker. There would,
however, be a preference of short forms, as the language of direct command
is laconic : hence, we find in the objective inflection -<ro rather than -/, and
in the subjective, a tendency to drop the affix of the 2d Pers. sing. The
3d Pers., on the other hand, has throughout a peculiar form, in which the affix
is emphatically prolonged. This is done in the Sing, subjective by adding u ;
thus, -rta. In the objective inflection, -<nw, of course, becomes -e6u ( 174).
The old Plur., afterwards the Du., was formed by adding the plural sign v
( 172) ; thus, -TWV, -a6uv. The new Plur. was still further strengthened by
prefixing v (which in the obj. form would make no change, cf. 176), or by
adding the later plur. ending <rv ( 181. y) instead of v ; thus, -vrav or
-Tufa.v, (-vfffav) -<r6ut or -<r6u<rttv. In the 2d Pers., it is convenient to regard -t
as the proper flexible ending ( 172). The system of personal modes is now
complete ; thus,
SUBJECTIVE INFLECTION.
INDICATIVE. CONJUNCTIVE.
IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P
Prim. S. ya,<p-op -is -ir y^ex,tf>-cof^ -vt -IT
P. ygaip-eftiv -ITS -ovr y^a.^-eafjt.ii -tin -uvr
D. u-oiv -trot -trot titp-ufiiv -nro* -qroi
Sec. S- %ypec.tf>-eu -i; -IT y^eity-oi/jt, -01; -air
P. iygoitp-oftiv -in -DVT y^a.ty-oiu.1.* -em -etvr
D. i-yoKQ-ou.tr -tr* -irr>f ypa.to-otu.lv -oirov -aim*
176 CONJUGATION. [BOOK II
IMPERATIVE.
2 P. 3 P. 2 P. 3 P.
T> - / ^ ' - /
OBJECTIVE INFLECTION.
INDICATIVE. CONJUNCTIVE.
IP. 2 P. 3 P. IP. 2 P. 3 P.
Pfim. S. yt>dq>-op.a,i -tffeti -1*0.1
P. y(>a,(f>-o[*,i6a, -tfffa -01*0,1
D.
Sec S. ly/jaQ-b/Arii -itro -1*0 y^atp-oiftvii -OHTO
P. tygutp-oftttiot -iv6i -01*0 ygotty-oifAiQa, -oieSt
D. ly^otty-OfAiSa, -iffffoi -iffDrii yoify-oi(&i6ct -010601
IMPERATIVE.
2 P. 3 P. 2 P. 3 P.
D. tyd-ffQoi (pd-trSui
^178. We have, aa yet, but two tenses, the Primary, denoting
present and future tune, and the Secondary, denoting past time, both definitely
and indefinitely. In a few verbs, mostly poetic, the formation appears never
to have proceeded farther. In other verbs, more specific tenses were developed
from these, as follows.
1. In most verbs, the Future was distinguished from the Present, and the
Aorist (the indefinite past) from the Imperfect (the definite past) by new forms,
in which the greater energy of the Fut. and Aor. was expressed by a a added
to the root (cf. ^ 84) ; and consequently, if the old Primary and Secondary
Tenses remained, they remained as Present and Imperfect. The Fut. followed
throughout the inflection of the Pres., except that it wanted the Subjunctive
and Imperative, which were not needed in this tense. The Aor. had all
the modes, following in general the inflection of the Pres. and Impf., except
that it preferred -a- as a connecting vowel, and simply appended the later affix
-* t in the Inf. act. ( 176) ; thus,
SUBJECTIVE INFLECTION.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTTVTE.
S. 1ypjtfy-a&(4. -fctf -fa,* y^d<p-0u ~f*is -trtif
P. \y(>d(Q-0*ftii -fo.*t -trttvr <y^df-ffu/u.ii -fftirt -SUIT
D. iy/>d<p-<rec/u.li -0a.*oi -ffd*mi ygdtp-iruftii -rn*oi -a*ot
OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE.
S. y^d^-TenfA -fftiis 'ffu.tr
P. yffd$-auift,n -ffcurt -ffcctiT
D. ygd<p-<Ta.if*,iy -ffctroi -ffa,i*vii
I.NK1MT1VK, ypd$-ff*l I'AUTICII'U:,
3H. 7.] HISTORY. 177
OBJECTIVE INFLECTION.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
S. iygetQ-ffaftiiv -tretiro ~<rK<ro yoeiQ-ffai(x.ot,t -ainaeti
P. i / ygx<p-irei/u,i0et -<ru.ffSi -ffctvn y^a.<^-iu^6a. -a-nah
D. iytt.$-ca.(jt.i6ai -fftt,<i0o9 -ffiiffSnt *y(>a,q>-iru(*,i0tt, -<rti<r0a
OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE.
S. I y^tt(p-a'a,lftriv -ffuiffo -ffaiTa yfidty-ffaffo -aa.a6
P. y(>u.fy-<ra.'t(jii6a, -<rai<r0t -
D.
INFINITIVE, yoaQ-ffUffSat PARTICIPLE,
2. In many verbs, by a change of root, a new Pres. and Inipf. were formed,
which expressed more specifically the action as doing ; and in some of these
verbs, the old Secondary Tense remained as an Aorist (called, for distinction's
sake, the Second Aorist, 199. a) ; and in a few, the old Primary, as a Fu-
ture ( 200. b).
1 T O. The complete tenses were, probably, still later in their forma-
tion. These tenses, in their precise import, represent the state consequent upon
the completion of an action (<rjv IfiffroXtiv yiy^afya., I have the letter written),
or in other words they represent the action as done, but its effect remaining.
This idea was naturally expressed by an initial reduplication ( 190). These
tenses admit a threefold distinction of time, and may express either present,
past, or future completeness. The present complete tense (the Perfect) nat-
urally took the primary endings ; the past complete tense (the Pluperfect),
the augment and the secondary endings ; and the future complete tense (the
Future Perfect, or Third Future), the common future affixes. In the Perf.
and Plup., the objective endings were affixed without a connecting vowel ; and,
of course, with many euphonic changes. See the inflection of (ysy^afp-^a/)
yiy^ctfA^eti (^ 36), f'fr^tx.y-fjt,a.t (^f 38), (*i<7ii6-pu.t} vifno-pa.! (^f 39), &C.
The subjective endings appear to have been at first appended in the same way ;
thus, Perf. Ind. y\y^-^ Inf. ytyaiq>-vai, Part, yiy^d^-vrg. But all these
forms were forbidden by euphony. Hence in the Ind. -p. became - (which,
since ^ final passes into , may be considered the corresponding vowel of p. as
well as of v, 50) ; thus, y'ty^ot.^fA yiy < and after this change the in-
flection proceeded according to the analogy of the Aor., except so far as the
primary form differs from the secondary. The a in this way became simply a
connecting vowel ; thus, yiy^a.$u. (or, if the analogy of the Aor. be followed
here also, yiyooiQ-et.-/*?), yiyoeiQ-a,-!) --T, -a-^sv, -#-T, -a-v<r, -a-rov. In the
Part., y also became a, which by precession passed into o (i 28). Indeed, in
Dec. III. no masculine or feminine has a root ending in -<r- ( 76. d. 3).
Thus, ys^flKp-o-rf. The in the Inf., instead of a similar change (as it was
followed by ), took -s- before it ; thus, yiyoa.q-i*a.i. In the Plup. act., there
was a kind of double augment, prefixing , both to the reduplication, and also
to the connecting vowel of the Perf., making the connective of the Plup. -to,- ;
thus, \.yiy odtp -m-i*. This ea remained in the Ionic, but in the old Attic waa
contracted into j, which afterwards passed by precession into u.
\j> S O The middle and passive voices were at first undistinguished.
The form simply showed that the subject was affected by the action, but did
not determine whether the action were his own or that of another. In the
J78 CONJUGATION. [BOOK II.
definite and complete tenses, the action is so represented, that this would be
commonly understood without special designation. But in the indefinite tenses,
there would be greater need of marking the distinction. Hence, a special Aor
and Fut. passive were formed by employing the verb tiptt, to be, as an auxilia~y
and compounding its past and future tenses with the root of the verb (th
augment being prefixed in the Aor., as in other past tenses, and the i being
lengthened in some of the forms from the influence of analogy or for euphony) ,
thus, Aor. i-yd<p-w, Fut. yget<p-v<rop.ai. The old Aor. and Fut. now became mid-
dle, and the two voices Avere so far distinct. They had still, however, so much
hi common, that it is not wonderful that this distinction was not always ob-
served (S 166. 1). The Aor. and Fut. pass, were afterwards strengthened by
the insertion of 0, which came, perhaps, from employing in the composition
the passive verbal in -rag, instead of the simple root of the verb ; thus,
WXT-O? fly !<T;09jv. From the prevalence of the 0, the tenses formed with
it were denominated first, and those formed without it, second tenses ( 1 99. II.).
1 8 1 The system of Greek conjugation was now complete, having
three persons, three numbers, three voices, six modes, if the Subj. and Opt. are
separated, and no fewer than eleven tenses, if the first and second are counted
separately. Some remarks remain to be added, chiefly upon euphonic changes.
I. By a law which became so established in the language as to allow no ex-
ception ( 63), final ft, r, and 6 could not remain. They were, therefore,
either dropped, changed, prolonged, or both changed and prolonged; as follows.
1. Final p., after -a- connective, was dropped ; after -o- or -a -connective,* was
changed to -a. and then contracted with the preceding vowel ; after -<- and
-/- connective, and in the primary nude form ( 173), was prolonged to -p t ;
and, in all other cases, became -v. Thus, ty^a.-^ .(*., y>iyoa.<pa.{A, iyiyfdtpiecft
became ty^a,^/a,, yiygetipx., lyty^d<f>iee, ygdipofx, and y^a-tyup. became (yt>a.q>oa.,
y^dQua.} y^d$u, and y^d-^o/ji, and yt>d^*>(4, became yf>d-$/u yf>dq>oi(Jt,, ygdij/oif*,,
ygd-Jsetift, tfdf* became y/>d$aif*i, ygd-^oip.!, y^d-^utfji.!, tydfti lygettpof*,, iytygei-
<piiu., 'ifyot,(/. became tygctfyw, tyiy^dtyiiv, itf>o,.
2. Final r, in the secondary forms throughout, and in the Perf. sing., was
dropped ; but, in other cases, was changed into -; , which after -i- or -u- con-
nective passed into -i and was then contracted, but otherwise was prolonged
to -ft. When, by the dropping of -<r, -- connective became final, it passed
into -I (5 28). Thus, i<pT t<fnt, tygenpir ty/>ct<pi, tyott(f>ovr fygettpov, iy^et,^>o,T
'iy PU.-^/ O.Y , y^dtyoir ygdQot, y^a.^etir y^ei-^/ai, yiya.fya.r yi-
yt<pi y<p-i-T (y.<pi;, you^i) y^n, y^a.-t-r
(written with the i subsc. in imitation of the Ind.),
<pd<ri, (fieivr (jtya.vat, 58) tya,tn, yf>tt.Qovr (yfitt.Qovo'i) yt>ei
NOTES, a.. In the prolonged forms of the endings -T and -VT, the Doric
retained the T ( 70. 2j ; as, <pri ITieoc. 1. 51, rtf*rt 3. 48, <P<*VT/ 2. 45,
fiXfgyn 16. 101, u1*x.*vr t 1. 43, Xiyovri Puid. 0. 2. 51, ir/r^i^oT/ 6. 36.
/3. Epic fonns of the Subjunctive, with -p, and -T prolonged to -fti and -*/,
are not unfrequent ; as, \di">>.up.t A. 549, rv^ufjti E. 279, "xufti I. 414, 7S<v/*<
X. 450, i0t*.r,<rtv ( 66) A. 408, -ravryo-t 3. 191, 3i!<r/ 2. 601 ; so Dor.
iSi^rirt (N. j Theoc. 16. 28. A similar form of the' Opt., though not fre
from doubt, occurs in tragettyfainrt K. 346.
y. A new form of the 3 Pers. pi. secondary was formed by changing T of
the Sing, into -ret* (i. e. by affixing v instead of prefixing it, with a change
of r into y, a.? above, and the necessary insertion of a union-vowel, which
In primary form* (i 209),
OH. 7.] HISTORY. 179
here, as after <r in the Aor., was --, 185). This form, in the Attic, is noi
used in those tenses which have as a connecting vowel -a- or --, and scarcely
in those which have -at- or -<- ; but in most other tenses is either the com-
mon form, or may be freely used ; thus, for if^avr,
v ( 183).
3. Final 6 was dropped after -*- connective ; after a short vowel in the root,
it became hi the 2 Aor. -;, and in the Pres. (except <p*ifti and tipti) -, which
was then contracted with the preceding vowel (e becoming ) ; in other cases
(except the irregular substitution of -ov for -a.6 in the Aor.) it was prolonged
to ~6i. Thus, yd$i6 y*d<pi, Vo6 fos, ^06 ()fioi) tftov, $0.6 <pdh,
1 8 9 II. A stronger form of the 2 Pers. sing, subjective was ii\
-<r6 (compare the Eng. and German -s), which, according to 63, must either
drop 6 and thus become the same with the common form, or assume a vowel.
In the latter case, it assumed a, becoming -a6at. (compare the affix -sti of the
Lat. Perf.). This remained the common form in 'i$w<r6a. (^f 53), *ff6a. (^[ 55),
ytiffffat (^ 56), oJirUa,, : fi<i<r6a., and 'fincrdu. (^f 58). Other examples are fur-
nished by the poets (particularly in the Subjunctive, by Homer) ; as, r'dwda.
i. 404, faurtm T. 270, \6i\yv6at A. 554, favlivyrfa I. 99, tfcyft* T. 250,
/3Xar4 O. 571, *X/W4 h. 619, i^turSa., ft^UfJ* Sapph. '89, ItfeXWa
Theoc. 29. 4, ^<r6a. Ar. Ach. 778. This form, like many others belonging
to the old language, is termed by grammarians JEolic.
III. The objective endings of the 2 Pers. sing., -<ra/ and -<ro, commonly
dropped <r hi those tenses in which a vowel uniformly preceded (cf. 117,
200. 2, 201. 2), and were then contracted with this vowel except in the Opt. ;
thus, yf>d<f>i<rat ygd(f>icci y^a.^ Or y^ti^ii ( 37. 4), >y^a,^&ffeti y^d-^y Or -,
iy^dtyuro ty^difta iygeityou, ygdtyiffo ygeityov, \ypd^/a,<ro iyod-
i-^citro y^K^mo ygci-^ctt (the contraction is here irregular),
183. IV. In the Greek verb, there is a great tendency to lengthen
a short vowel before an affix beginning with a consonant. This will be ob-
served in pure verbs before the tense- signs ( 218) ; in the tense-signs of the
Aor. and Fut. pass. ( 180); in the -- often inserted in the Opt. ( 184) ;
in verbs in -pi before the subjective endings, especially in the Ind. sing. ( 224) ;
in the euphonic affixes -is and -$v of the Pres. and Fut. act. ( 203. ,
206. /3) > &c. This tendency does not appear before endings beginning with
T, since here the syllable is already long by position. Of other endings, it
appears chiefly before the shorter ; hence, before the subjective far more than
the objective, and in the Sing, more than the Plur. or Dual. We give here ex-
amples of the two last only of the cases that have been mentioned above : <p^<
PK^/ (we now change the regular accentuation of the word to that which is
usually given to it as an enclitic), <pd;*<pvs, <pd<n <pv<ri, but PL Qcipciv i<p&v
<p?v, t(f>; tQvsy t<f>et tQti, but PL iQxfti* (^[ 53) ; 2 Pers. y^d<f>ts ygdipus
(so some form y^dQu and ygdQti by lengthening the connecting vowel and
dropping the flexible ending), y^d-^ts y^d^/ng y^dtpiv (the old form of the
Inf., 176) y^dQuv (this became the common form of the Pres. and Fut.
inf. act.), y^d-^tv ygd\l>iiv.
NOTE. The old short forms of the 2d Pers. and Inf. in -is and -it remain
in some varieties of the Doric; as, fu^elis Theoc. 1. 3, u/ti*.yis 4. 3,
1. 14, /3o<r*sy 4. 2, y^viv Find. 0. 1. 5, r^difnv Ar. Ach. 788.
180 CONJUGATION. [BOOK II
1 84, V. The Opt. subjective was often rendered still more ex
pressive, by adding to its connective j, which was lengthened to n excep*
before vr ( 183). This addition was most common before the endings which
have no vowel, -/*, -s, -r, -vr. In the 3d Pers. pi. this addition was always
made ; but, except here, it was never made to -/- connective, and rarely to
ei- connective except in contract forms. Thus, {yga.q>-ot-vr) ygoiipaitv, (^a'-v/'-
ett-vr) 'ygei'^KtiV) (<px-7-f*) ^a/^v, (^a-7-?) (petiti;, (^a-7-r) ifa/*?, (fiKi/Atv ipctin/u-iv,
<f>o.7ri (ftet'itiri, (<fnx-7-vr^) <po,7tv and <p/j<rv, uyytXoiyv (^[ 41), rifAuyjv (^J 45),
iftX.oitjy (T 46).
NOTES, . In the Aor. opt. act., a special prolonged form arose, in which
the connective was that of the Ind. with =/ prefixed. This form occurs only
in the 2d and 3d Persons sing, and the 3d Pers. pi. ; but in these persons was
far more common than the other form. Thus, y^ei-^-n-u-s, (y^ei-^-n-K-r,
181. 2) y^u^ui, y^K-^nav. This form, like many other remains of old
usage, was termed by grammarians JEolic. It was especially employed by
the Attics ; yet was not confined to them, nor employed by them to the ex-
clusion of the other fonns ; thus, -nVnv A. 42, pimms F. 52, -^xutrtit Pind.
P. 9. 213, ayys/A.v Theoc. 12. 19, iMfpftuete Hdt. iii. 12; a.\yuva. ts Soph.
(Ed. T. 446, $<*r/f Ar. Vesp. 726, ffoeut PI. Gorg. 477 b, a^waX/Va* ^Esch.
Eum. 983, QtareuH Th. tii. 49.
/3. In analyzing Opt. forms of the 3d Pers. pi., it is often convenient to
'oin the inserted t with the flexible ending, although in strict propriety it is
an extension of the connecting vowel. See ^ 31.
1 8 5. VI. One important analogy we ought not to pass unnoticed.
The oldest inflection both of verbs and of nouns, that of the nude Pres. and
Impf., and of Dec. III., had no connecting vowels. The next inflection in or-
der of time, that of the euphonic Pres. and Impf., of the Fut., and of Dec. II.,
took the connecting vowels -a- and -i- ; while the latest inflection, that of thfa
Aor., of the Perf. Act., and of Dec. I., took the connecting vowel -- (cf.
176). But the analogy does not stop here. As some nouns fluctuated
between the different declensions ( 124, 125), so some form* of verbs fluc-
tuated between the different methods of inflection. Thus we find,
.) Verbs in both -pi and -u, particularly the large class in -Dpi and -tu ,
as, ^i'ix.vu/n.1 and ^ttxvuu, to show.
/3.) That verbs in -/*/ whose roots end in i, a, or u, have, in the Impf. act.
sing., a second and more common form in -v ; as, \i-i8nv and (ir/Vi-av) Ir.Soui
(t 50),M$;$w and tifiouv (^ 51), tiilxvu* and iSi/xvuai. (t 52).
7.) That verbs in -u have the 2 Aor. nude, if the root ends in a vowel,
oxrcjit / ; as, (H 57) lf/3j (r. -), ?yva/v (r. yva-), ttuv (r. 2-) ; but iV<
(r. <n-), 2 Aor. of five*, to drink.
3.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) 2 Aorists rtu'ddle which want the connecting vowel
even after a consonant; as, ctX.ro A. 532 ; aj^ivav (Part.) 2. t>00 ; yjr
(=s"XiTfl) 0. 43; yivra (= \yiviro} lies. Th. 199, lyw> Theec. 1.88;
tiiy/*** i. 513, Vix.ro O. 88 (so even Pres. 3 Pers. pi., Si^r< M. 147, for
}i%rai, 60), Imp. Kg. T. 10, Si^i Ap. Rh. 4. 1554, Inf. titf*, A. 23,
Part. Viym*oi B. 794 : iXtLxro A. 39 ; 7*r lies. Th. 481 ; ixi^v /. 335,
Xi*T J. 451, Xiga ft. 650 ; ^/av^v (3 Pers. du. for i/tiu**tv, $ 60)*; I^/*T
. 433, p.',xro A. 354 ; rt E. 590, ^sch. Ag. 987, V ^- 204 > k fttl
0.474, SSMW, A. 572, Soph. (Ed. T. 177; a-aXra O. 645 ; -i e ^ (for
o5, 60) x 708. * A. Uli.
TH. 7.] HISTORY. Ifll
. NOTE. These Aorists, being nude, agree in their formation with the Perf
and riup. ( 179), except that they want the reduplication.
i.) Poetic (chiefly Epic) Aorists which have the tense-sign -<r- with the
connectives -a- and -i-, and thus unite the forms of the 1st and 2d Aorists;
a.s, &<;*<<, Horn. II. 16. 1 ; iZtfftro v. 75, frfaw E. 1U9, '221 ; liiviro 11. 405,
Stm* II. 129 ; J|0v E. 773 ; Xi?ia I. 617 ; Z^no 1'. 250, contr. a^trtu 45. 3)
A. 264 . 07<ri x,' 481 > Uall. ^ er 136 Ar - Kan - 48 ~> 'T* T. 173, 070-tri
u. 1 54. The use of this form in the 2 Pers. Imp. will be specially noticed.
Perhaps the common 2 Aor. tvruror, fell, and the rare, if not doubtful, i'^iry,
belong here.
. ^ Aorists without the tense-sign --, but with the connecting vowel --.
See 201. 2. Compare the omission of -a- both here and 200. 2 with
117, 182. III.
w.) Reduplicated tenses, having the connectives -0- and -i-, and thus unit-
ing the forms of the Perf. or Plup., and of the 2 Aor. See 194. 3.
NOTB. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1st or 2d Ao-
nst according to the connective ; a classification which is rather convenient
than philosophical.
^ I f 56 * fo VII. The formation of the complete tenses requires further
remark. The affixes of the Perf. and Plup. seem to have been originally
nude throughout, and they continued such in the objective inflection, inasmuch
as here each flexible ending has a vowel of its own. That this was the reason
appears from the fact, that in the subjective inflection also we find remains
of the nude formation, but only in cases where the flexible ending has a vowel
of its own. These remains abound most in the old Epic, but are also found
in the Attic (SS 237, 238). The inflection with the connecting vowel, how-
ever, became the established analogy of the language ; so much so, that even
pure verbs, no less than impure, adopted it (cf. 100. 2). Here arose the
need of another euphonic device. The attachment of the open affixes to pure
roots produced hiatus, and to prevent this, x was inserted. This insertion
appears to have been just commencing in the Homeric period. It afterwards
became the prevalent law of the language, extending, through the force of
analogy, to impure, as well as to pure roots. Other euphonic changes were
now required, for which see 61, 64. 3. The history of the Perf. and Plup.
active, therefore, is a history of euphonic devices, to meet the successive de-
mands of pure and impure roots. The latter first demanded a connecting
vowel : then the former, the insertion of -x- ; and then the latter, that thi?
-x- after a labial or palatal mute should be softened to an aspiration uniting
with the mute. We have thus four successive formations : 1. the primitive
nude formation ; 2. the formation in -a, -j/v ; 3. the formation in -xa, -xtiv
after a vowel ; 4. the formation in -xa,, -xuv after a consonant (after a labial
or palatal mute, softened to -a, -tiv, 61). The last formation nowhere ap-
pears in Horn., and the third only in a few words. The forms with the in-
serted * are distinguished as the First Perf. and Plup. ; and those without it,
although older, as the Second ( 199. II.).
16
1S2 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK li
CHAPTER VIII.
PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION.
VI 8 7. The Greek verb has two prefixes
he AUGMENT, and II. the REDUPLICATION.
I. AUGMENT.
The Augment (augmentum, increase) prefixes -
in the SECONDARY TENSES of the Indicative, to de-
note past time (^ 168. I., 173).
A. If the verb begins with a consonant, the -
constitutes a distinct syllable, and the augment is
termed SYLLABIC. E. g.
Theme. Impf. Aor.
/3fiwXiy, to counsel, ISovXivov^ tGovXiuo-et.
yvu^u, to recognize, iyvu/av, tyvueiira,.
p't-rvu, to throw, tppnrrov, typist* ( 64. 1).
B. If the verb begins with a vowel, the s- unites
with it, and the augment is termed TEMPORAL.
NOTE. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number
of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time}, because it increases
the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic augment
before a vowel, see 189. 2. The breathing of an initial vowel remains the
same after the augment.
1 8 8. SPECIAL RULES OF THE TEMPORAL AUGMENT.
1. The prefix f- unites with to form 77, and with the other
vowels, if short, to form the corresponding long vowels ; as,
'<zJ/xf<u, to injure, (i*2/xiay) fi'bix.ovv, (iaJ/x^a) rblx.r,tTK.
'dSKiu, to contend, %6\ow, %&Kn<ra..
iXvr/ft>, to hope, rfx-/^o, XTT.
'ixtrtuw, to supplicate, 'txirtvov, 'rxinviret.
t0ov, to erect, ugjovv, H^fuxra..
VCflZ*, to insult, "DtyZtr, "Dtyff*.
2. In like manner, the f- unites with the prepositive of the
diphthong at, and of the diphthongs av and ot followed by a
consonant, as,
Ulrica, to ask, yrovi (25. 8), yrrtfftt.
nl^dvu, to increase, v$%a,voi, t>S%vf.
ixriu, to pity, % XT/, UK-THTO..
So also, ttopau, to think, yopw, 5Vv.
CH. 8.J AUGMENT. 183
3. In other cases, the t- is absorbed by the initial vowel or
diphthong, without producing any change ; as,
tiyioftat, to lead, fiyouftnv, Ytynira,(x.nv.
u$i\'.u, to profit, uty'iXaw, ^<f>i^Yiff.
t'i'xcj, to yield, T*a, il.
tieo*iZ,op,.i, to augur, eiMvi^o/u-nv, f/MMM^JM*
ouTciZu, to wound, ovret^ov, ovrettrot.
NOTE. In verbs beginning with w, and in i/*<w, to conjecture, and o
aba, to dry, usage is variable ; as,
iv^ofAtt.!, to pray , tv%of&nv, riu%!>f/riv, iv%etftt)v, *iv%et/u.tiv.
i}x.aZ,ca, i"xa.^ov, y,x,ct^ov (Att.), iixetv
See, also, the Plup. fi tn (f 58), and 2/v (t 56).
1 89. REMARKS. 1. The verbs /WAo^w, to will, dv-
?///, to be able, and ^A/lw, to purpose, sometimes add the tem-
poral to the syllabic augment, particularly in the later Attic ;
thus, Impf. i6ovlo^i]v and ri6ov).6^v, Aor. P. eSovlij&yv and i]6ov-
2. In a few verbs beginning with a vowel, the e- constitutes*
a distinct syllable, with, sometimes, a double augment ; as,
yvOf*i, to breaA, ia.
uvoiyu, to open, ivituyoi ( 188. 2), iv'ita^a..
u6iu, to push, Itu0avv t 'iuaa..
Add aX/Vxa^a/, to be captured, etvteivu (Ion. and Poet.), to please, o^uu, h
tee, eloiu, uviopat, to buy, and some Epic forms. Cf. 5 191. 3. The sylla-
bic augment in these words is to be referred, in part, at least, to an original
digamma ' 22. S) ; as, Fa| {!, y. 298, iv. 2. 20 ; ifdv^eivi IMV^KVI Hdt.
\\. 5, bfelvN y. 143, iFa^s ?2i Hdt. i. 151, i'FF^sv i3s (cf. 71, 117. 2)
H. 340.
3. In a few verbs beginning with , the usual contraction of
is into ei ( 36) takes place ; as, /. j /
law, to permit, fitai, t'aira.
Add Wi^u, to accustom, \\itrtra, to roll, (Xxo, to draw, ?r, to 6e occupied
vith, i^yei^e/*xi, to work, tg-ru, to creep, iffrieiu, to entertain, i%u, to have ; the
A.orists it\i*, took, Ura, (Ion. and poet.), set, tTfttv and tipw (\ 54) ; and the
Plup. iltrrvxiiv (^| 48), stood,
4. An initial , followed by a vowel, remains in the augmented tenses of a
very few verbs, chiefly poetic ; as, <&>, to hear, ai'/jy (yet iwwtri Hdt. 9. 93).
See, also, uvee.xiirx.ta ($ 280). An initial 01 sometimes remains even when
followed by a consonant ; as, aitrrgieu, to sting, i*<rTgnirct Eur. Bac. 32 (cf. !?,
191. 3). So IA.XJJV/WJJH (that the word "Exxjy may not be disguised), Th.
ii. 68, and hi poetry l^o/u.tit, x.ufo&f*tiv, ^Esch. Eum. 3, Prom. 229. In these
words t is long by position.
5. An initial i followed by o unites with this vowel, instead of uniting with
the augment ; thus, lo^roi^u, to celebrate a feast, (Ugr*f) i&erat^ov. So,
in the Plup., iyxuv, and the poet. laX-rt/v, tu^ym, from Perf.
184 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK t.
11. REDUPLICATION.
^ 19O. The Reduplication (reduplico, to re
double) doubles the initial letter of the COMPLETE
TEissES, in all the modes (^ 168. II., 179).
RULE. If the verb begins with a single consonant, or with a
mute and liquid (except yv, and, commonly, {& and //), the
initial consonant is repeated, with the insertion of s ; but, other
wise, the reduplication has the same form with the augment.
In the PLUPERFECT, the augment is prefixed to the reduplication,
except when this has the same form with the augment. Thus
Theme. Pevf. PIup.
to counsel, $iov*.i.ica,, \*&>>u'kivKit<i.
to write, yiyoctiQa., iytygeiftiv.
i, to lave, rf^/XifM ( 62), i<r<p/X7xs/v.
ti, to use, x,i%(>vfiteti,
, to die, riSv-nxct,
, to prate, ippa-^'u^nx
, to recognize ( 187), lyvu^tKa., iyvaeixuv.
to bud, tXaWj*a, iZXao-ryxst
Tw, to hurt, /3sXa<pa, SoS?Xa'<pj<y
ca, to sculpture^ fyXv/ttfteti, yiy\vfAfjLKt, l<yl(.6ftfutf.
>, to emulate, ifykuxx, iZ,nXeax.<iY.
to lie, tytVtfHU, i^tuo-ftn*.
ffrt<p>>tvou, to crown, i/r-n^aivuxx, ivrnpavax
O^IK'-W I 188. I , (atetb'ixvxet} vdixvxa,, ifrtm4U*>
a.iz.civu, to increase ( 1 88. 2),
riyioftai, to leail 1 88. 3),
oooitv, to set; ( 189. 2 , lu^dnet, i&^cc.x.nv.
uviofActi, to huy ( 1 89. 2 , ieuvn/u.ai, UmyMlf.
i, to work ( 1 89. 3), tl^ycto p.a.i, iigyei<r/u.Yiv
1O1. REMARKS. 1. In five verbs beginning with a
liquid, tl- commonly takes the place of the regular reduplica-
tion, for the sake of euphony :
w, to obtain by lot, ifX,^ and XtXuy^ei, itXvyft.ni.
, to take, tfarxpet, t'i\n/u./u,a.i and XlX^^MM*
Jiiyw, to collect, tJXo^et, ilXiyfton and XiXty^UM
p.iiot/jt.a.1, to xhare, fffUtQfUU, i/^aa'^/tojv.
r. ft-, to mt y, (**, ilftiftcti (f 53).
2. Some verbs beginning with , e, or o, followed by a single
consonant, prefix to the usual reduplication the two first let
trrs of the root ; thus,
, to anoint, iXw'X/ipa, &Kr,\ t ufuu.
to drive, iXu'Xotxa, iXjjXa^a*.
oguffffu, to dig, . e^ca^u^et, 0&>ouy/u,a.i.
This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropriately ( 7),
CH 8.] COMPOUND VERBS. 1 {-..")
the Attic Reduplication. It seldom receives an augment in the Plup., except
in the verb axiuu, to hear ; thus, aXwX/ipa, XX/<p<v but, from OC.XO-JM, O.X.YI-
xoa,, r,K.nx'onv. This reduplication prefers a short vowel in the penult ; as,
?.)Ap, though fcula ( 269); \\fav6a. ( 301).
3. Tlie verb ftif&vjffxeu, to remember, has, in the Perf., fttfAvn/xKi XT 'doftKi,
to acquire, has commonly xix<rtjf&a,i (i. 7. 3), but also txrvpteti (properly Ion.,
as Hdt. ii. 42, yet also ^Esch. Pr. 795, PL Prot. 340 d, e). There are, also,
apparent exceptions to the rule, arising from syncope ; as, Trivrruxu., TSTT
ftat. For t9tx, to seem, and the poet. toXva,, iooya,, cf. 189. 2. For oTSo
(^f 58), cf. 189. 4. The poet, uvuya, to command, receives no reduplication.
4. When the augment and the reduplication have a common form, this form
is not to be explained in both upon the same principle. Thus, in the Aor.
lyveu^itra, ( 187), i- is prefixed to denote past time, but in the Perf. iyvagiza
(^ 190), it is a euphonic substitute for the full redupl. yi-. In like manner,
analogy would lead us to regard the Aor. tiixwru ( 188. 1) as contracted
from la,$/xr,ffet, but the Perf. fi'Sixyxet (? 190), as contracted from otK$ix.?ixct,
the initial vowel being doubled to denote completeness of action. In the Per-
fects tifAtxg/u,eu (R. 1), and sWjx (^f 48), the rough breathing seems to supply,
in part, the place of the initial consonant. Some irregularities in the redu-
plication appear to have arisen from an imitation of the augment ; as, l&i^dxat^
Uwfw ( 190).
III. PREFIXES OF COMPOUND VERBS.
^ 19S. I. Verbs compounded with a preposition, receive
the augment and reduplication after the preposition ; thus,
7Offyoa,Qu, to ascribe, ^^a-
, to drive out, l^Xauvov,
REMARKS. 1. Prepositions ending in a vowel, except -rt^i and r^, suffer
elision (41) before the prefix t-. The final vowel of *o often unites with
the <- by crasis ( 38). Thus, a-roSoixXa, to throw away, a.*'ta.XXov Tigi.
fa'AAw, to throw around, xtgi<Sa.X*.ov vouX*.u, to throw before, roiu>,*.oi
and
2. Prepositions ending in a consonant which is changed in the theme, re-
sume that consonant before the prefix j- ; as, lpa.XXu, to throw in ( 54),
meaXAov IxGciXXv, to throw out ( 68), i%iGal*.o9.
3. A/ew verbs receive the augment and reduplication before the preposi-
tion ; a few receive them both before and after; and a few are variable; 33,
Ivi/rrafAeu, to understand, v<ri<rrce.p.*iv ivo%X.<iu, to trouble,
xa0-itiea, to sleep, Ixcifaidov, xaSniibov, and xa.feu'bov ( 188. N.).
4. Some derivative verbs, resembling compounds in their form, follow the
<$ame analogy; as, ^letird/a, to regulate 'from S/;T, mode of life}, ^ifi-rwra
nd ioiriTTiirK, djS/>5T;xa, iSsJ/^TTj^^v IxxXriffioi^u, to hold an assembly i 8^*Xj-
'ict^v and txK^Yifictl^ov, iZzxXyieria,ff vretgoivicti, to act thr. drunkttra
y-ot.Qtovvc'a, v. 8. 4 ; lyyvu,oa, to pledge, for the various forms of
which see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 1 55.
1 O3. IT. Verbs compounded with the particles dva-, ill,
and ft-, 7tffi/7, and beginning with a vowel which is changed by
the augment. ( 188). commonly receive their prefixes after
16*
186 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK I
these particles ; as, dvaaQiaTiu, to be displeased, d
tvtyyiTto), to benejlt, fv^oyttow and [vtyyt'ioi".
III. Other compounds receive the augment and reduplica
tion at the beginning ; as, hoyonouu, to fable, lh>yonoiow
SvaTv^iw, to be unfortunate, iduurv^rjau, dtdvarvxuxa ' iinv%tw
to be fortunate, eviv^ow or rjvrv^oin' (^ 188. N.) ; dvutontta, tc
shame, fdvaumovv. Yet innoiftyoyiixu, Lycurg. 167. 31.
DIALECTIC USE.
1 O4L* 1. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign
of past time ( 173} became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets
it appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at
pleasure ; thus, 'i6wtv A. 2, 3-tjxt 55 ; us t^etro A. 33, 457, 568, ' u; <pVa
188, 245, 345, 357, 511, 595; fgXi A. 459, 473, /SaXt 480, 499, 519,
527 ; oguoH 2. 493, u^u^n 498. This license continued in Ionic prose in
respect to the temporal augment, and the augment of the Pluperfect, and was
even extended to the reduplication when it had the same form with the tem-
poral augment ; thus, ayav Hdt. i. 70, wyov iii. 47 ; TjxXa Id. i. 16, awaX-
Xeiffffiro 17; aWfXast/vavro Id. vii. 210, a-r^Xavvov 211 ', "bibovXeuvro Id. i. 94;
&(p6ri) K^UTO Id. i. 19, af&ftiwis 86 ; igyet^ovro Ib. 66, x.a.Ti^'ya.a'ro^ x,a,<riiQyu,<r[*,i-
vov 123 . a-x-tfyftivos ii. 99 (so Ep. fcpt*<N II. 481, i^aro P - 354 cf - 189
4). So, more rarely, in respect to the syllabic augment, and the reduplication
having the same form ; as, van or Ivan Hdt. i. 155 ; x-a.viffxi.uKbu.'ro vii. 218,
ff.(>a.7X:iudSa.'ro 219; and even, for euphony's sake, jfraX/XXoywra i. 118. In
respect to the augment of the Pluperfect, and of the impersonal i%(>v, this
freedom remained even in Attic prose; thus, iftw TtrtXiurriKii vi. 4. 11, a-ra-
$$i*/ Ib. 13, ;EIX/ vii. 3. 20 (this omission of the augment occurs
chiefly after a vowel) ; i%g*iv Cyr. viii. 1.1, oftener %(>*iv Kep. Ath. 3. 6.
Of the poets, the Ij-ric approached the nearest to the freedom of the old
Epic, while the dramatic, in the iambic trimeter, were confined the most closely
to the usage of Attic prose. Yet even here rare cases occur of the omission
of the syllabic augment (though not undisputed by critics), chiefly in the
narratives of messengers and at the beginning of a verse ; as, xrvirvo-t Soph.
(Ed. C. 1606, fawn 1607, S^tv 1624, x^Xj/ 1626.
2. For such forms as f^i^ov -^. 56, itv B. 274, t^tv Horn. Merc. 79,
and for such as i23t/<rt>> A. 33, tXXa 0. 371, ifj.pa.fav . 226, i'mov <1>. 11,
tffftva E. 208, see 71. For the Dor. ya for wyav (Theoc. 13. TO), &c.,
see 44. 1. For piUTap.ivet, &c., see 62. . On the other hand, we find,
after the analogy of verbs beginning with p, ippip A. 278, \affv^a.t N. 79.
For Sn'W, I. 224, ^i^/* A. 555, Sn'S/i 2. 34, tiax7*i 2. 418, sec 47. N.
Compare *xX7<rTa/ Ap. lih. 4. 618, and ixXtjiWa/ Ib. 990, with words be-
ginning with 0X- and yX- ( 190).
3. In the Epic language, the 2 Aor. act. and mid. often receives the redu-
plication ( 185. ), which remains through all the modes, while the Ind. ad-
mits the augment in addition (especially in case of the Att. redupl.) ; as,
StSai S. 448, KHtaSuv A. 334, xi**$vra A. 497, *!**> A. 168, xixu/W
. 303, Xi\a.^ufft H. 80, XX6<r&*/ ^. 388, ixXiXa^v B. 600, XtXa&vri
A. 127, XiX*ayro Horn. Merc. 145, ^iftd-riitiv Hes. Sc. 252, ^i^a^jrin Ib
24f>. a^-riwaXwv T. 355, firttoiTv or <riir?iTv Pind. P. 2. 105, rnr<V^*i
A. 100, WwrihUt K. 204, nrn-yuv A. 591, rtra,e-rif/.ivo( a.. 310, TJTS^OV in
C7I. 9.] AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION.
Hesych., rt<rux,ovro A. 467, -rtrvx-ovrts Call. Di. 61, vtQitioifAviv i. 277,
otv Ft. 600 ; with the augment sometimes added, xixXtro A. 508, Ix
Z. 66, Wi<rX>jytfv 9-. 264, xt<x\vyiTo M. 162, i-rs^rXjjyay E. 504, -^
S. 500, i-ritp^o> K. 127, -rsr^sv Z. 374, ITST^EV 515, rirpoipiv Theoc. 25.
61, <ri<pvi N. 363, tvtQn A. 397 ; Att. Redupl. fyetytv A. 179, jjyaygra X.
116, xa^i II. 822, a,xei X ovTo *. 342, ci*.ctXxi Y. 185, a^ov M. 105, ^a^s
A. 110, a^a/Wo Ap. Rh. 1. 369, wa^T<psv H. 360, ^ > a.-ra.^oiro I. 376,
iyvr?riy (also edited mwa-rti- and IVSV/O-TSV) 0. 546, 552, T. 473, '^s B. 146.
Two Second Aorists are reduplicated at the end of the root : vt tra^r-ov from
r. v<-, B. 245, and wx*x-av from r. tyx-, E. 321.
NOTE. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Att. poetry ; thus, ^a.
fe Soph. El. 147, KiK\oft.ivos Id. (Ed. T. 159, iVi^vi Ib. 1497, i&*-afu E\ar.
Ion, 704. "Hyayav remained even in Att. prose ; as, i. 3. 17.
CHAPTER IX.
AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION.
[TT1T2S-31.]
I. CLASSIFICATION AND ANALYSIS.
The AFFIXES of the Greek verb may
be divided into two great CLASSES ;
I. The SUBJECTIVE, belonging to all the tenses
of the ACTIVE VOICE, and to the Aorist passive.
II. The OBJECTIVE, belonging to all the tenses
of the MIDDLE VOICE, and to the Future passive.
NOTE. The affixes of the Aor. pass, appear to have been derived from the
Impf. of the verb tlpl, to be ; and those of the Fut. pass., from the Fut. of this
verb ( 180). Hence the former are subjective, and the latter, objective.
Of the affixes which are not thus derived, the subjective represent the subject
of the verb as the doer of the action, and the objective, as, more or less directly,
its object. See 165.
196. The affixes of the verb may likewise
be divided into the following ORDERS ;
1. The PRIMARY, belonging to the primary tenses of the
Indicative mode, and to all the tenses of the Subjunctive
( 168, 169. y ).
2. The SECONDARY, belonging to the secondary tenses of the
Indicative, and to all the tenses of the Optative.
188 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK U.
3. The IMPERATIVE, belonging to the Imperative mode
4. The INFINITIVE, belonging to the Infinitive mode.
5. The PARTICIPIAL, belonging to the Participle.
E97. These affixes may be resolved into the
following ELEMENTS ; A. TENSE-SIGNS, B. CON-
NECTING VOWELS, and C. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS
NOTE. When there is no danger of mistake, these elements may be de-
nominated simply signs, connectives, and endings. For a synopsis of thest
elements, see *|[ 31.
A. TENSE-SIGNS.
198. The tense-signs are letters or syllables
which are added to the root in particular tenses,
and to which the flexible endings are appended,
either immediately or with connecting vowels.
In the Future and Aorist, active and middle, and
in the Future Perfect (^ 168. a), the tense-sign is
-a- ; in the Perfect and Pluperfect active, it is -x- ;
in the Aorist passive, it is -6s- ; in the Future pas-
sive, it is -Ono- ; in the other tenses, it is wanting
See H 31.
Thus, /?OI>AV-<J-C,
34, 35) ; Ttfcpi'^-a-ofiiu (fl 46) ; /?e6'oiUfu-x-,
REMARKS. I. The sign -*-, except when followed
by a Vowel or by vr, becomes -9y- ( 183). When followed
by a vowel it is contracted with it. Thus, f'6ovhv-&r)
y-vw ' (fiov)itv-dt-(Hi ^ 36)
58) p
II. The letters x and #, of the tense-signs, are sometimes
omifted. Tenses formed with this omission are denominated
second, and, in distinction from them, tenses which have these
letters are denominated y/V.sV ; thus, 1 Perf. ninnxn, 2 Perf. ne-
noi'hf- 1 Plup. f'nuidxHr, 2 Pliij). {nrnnittfiv (IT 3'.)); 1 Aor
pass, riyy&drjv, 2 Aor. pass, ^yy^v ' 1 Put. pass.
'2 Put. pass. tt'^fAijuofiwi (fl 41). See 180, 186.
i.ll. 9.] TENSE-SIGNS. 18^
NOTKS. a. The tense in the active and middle voices, which is termed the
Second Aorht, is simply an old form of the Imperfect (-j 178. 2).
ft. The regular or first tenses will be usually spoken of simply as the Ao-
rist, the Perfect, &c.
III. In the FUTURE ACTIVE and MIDDLE, changes
affecting the tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which
are then contracted.
]. Th. tense-sign -a- becomes -e- ( 50),
.) In the Future of liquid verbs. See 56.
/3.) In Futures in 4*, from verbs in -%&> ; thus, Ko^'urea (xeftitu) xopnu,
xa/u.ifftiv xofunv, xnftiirav xoftiuv Mid. JttfMftfttU (xef4tic/u,cci) xofAioufAou, xof&i-
fftfftieti xofAiiifffai, xop.tffOft.ivts xo/u,iovft.tvos (*|f 40;.
y.} In the Future of xx0i%oftat, to sit (root iJ.) ; thus, (xetff&a-oftai, xuHt-
"ttiofsai) xK0i'bov{Acti. Add the poetic (rx<rs<r^<) <rixtiff0a.i Horn. Ven. 127, and
45. 3) futSivfuu Theoc. 1 1. 60. See also b. below.
2. Some Futures in - MOW and -taw drop -a-.
Thus, \XKVVU, to drive, F. \Xtio-u (iXeiu) \\u, iX<rs<j tXaj, tXafti
\Xeitriiv tXax iXeijuv tX&iv rtXtta, to finish, F. rtXtffu (^TiXiu) Tt\u, T
<ri\i7s nXitritv rt^tTv TtXtvuv TS^UV Mid. riXiffopteu Irt3.itpun) Ti%.ouftai t
TsA.E<rs<r^a< riX^ada.^ ri*.i<ro/tsvo; TiXovpivas %'tca, to pour, F. ( ' %iru) %iu,
(%'t7tif, %'uis) x,^> ' MW. (%ietuu) %'toftxt. Add xuXtu, to cull, p.ci%oju.ai t
to fight, up.<piiwijf*.t, to clothe ; all verbs in -eivvvft.i ; sometimes verbs in -,
particularly /3<a<w, &c.
NOTE. The contracted form of Futures in -ovy, -ira, and -f via, is termed
the Attic Future, from the common use of this form by Attic writers. It is
not, however, confined to them ; nor do they employ it without exception ;
thus, Ixao-ovTa; vii. 7. 55, r&xitrovffiv Cyr. viii. 6. 3. It is not found in the
Optative. A similar contraction appears, in a few instances, to have taken
place in other Futures ; thus, igtipovrt ; will you lay waste ? for \^[^ufftn t
Th. iii. 58.
3. A few verbs, in the Future middle with an active sense,
sometimes add e to -a-, after the Doric form ( 245. 2).
Thus, -rXita, to sail, F. <r\tvffo/j.a.i, oftener (crXsy-<r -//) v^vyovfi.Ki' Qiuyu,
tof.ee, Qiu&uai and (^si/lss^a/) <psu%ovftou. This form of the Future is termed
tl 3 Doric Future. Other examples in Attic Greek are *>./, to weep, viu, to
swim, */, to sport, vrt-rru, to fall, vrviu, to blow, 7rvv6u.vof^ot,i, to inquire,
%'%*>-
REMARK, a.) The Liquid, Attic, and Doric Futures, from their formation,
are inflected like the Present of contract verbs (^ 45, 46). It will be ob-
served, that in a few verbs the Pres. and the Att. Fut. have the same form.
b.) In a very few instances, the Fut. is in form an old Pres. ( 178. 2) ;
as, IffSica, to eat, F. JfSa^ai, A. 237, Ar. Nub. 121 (in later comedy eSsU^ai,
cf. y. above) ; /, to drink, F. or/'o^a/, x. 1 60, Cyr. i. 3. 9 (later -riou^ui) ;
tipt, to go, commonly used as Fut. of s%epeti. Add a very few poetic forma,
which will be noticed under the verbs to which they belong.
190 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK E
2O 1. IV. The sign of the AORIST,
1.) Becomes -i- in liquid verbs. See 56.
2.) Is omitted in iH-ra, (^[ 53), jjvsyxa (r. myx-, to bear}, 1%ia (Ep. t%tvtt)
from %'iu, to pour, and the poetic 'ixia, (Ep. txtta and 'ixu\ from xxiu, to burn
Add the Epic jjXsa/*>jv and faivtipvv, N. 436, 184, jWswa E. 208, Sa-rsa^a
Hes. Op. 765. See 185. .
3.) Is the same with that of the Perf. in 'i6nxa, n&ixa, and xa. These
Aorists are used only in the Indicative, and rarely except in the Sing, and
in the 3d Pers. plur. In the middle voice, the Att. writers use only the Ind.
r,x.ci(*.nv Ear. El. 622, with the very rare Part, fixei/t&vo;, ^Eschin. 72. 9
The other dialects add iSnxdpw, K. 31, Snxdptvos Find. P. 4. 52.
NOTE. These Aorists in -K.U. are only euphonic extensions of the 2 Aor.,
after the analogy of the Perf. First the iinal -v (originally -ft) passed into
-, which became a connecting vowel ; and then -x- was inserted to pre-
vent the hiatus ( 179, 186) ; thus, ttv-v 16*-* Wu-*-, Wu*.-. W*. *
5v ffiaxa, vv fix*. This form became common only where the flexible end-
ing had no vowel (cf. 5 186), i. e. in the Sing, and in the 3d Pers. pi. ; and
was properly confined to the Ind. act., although a few middle forms are found
after the same analogy. The nude form disappeared in the Ind. act. sing.
(cf. 186), but was elsewhere either the sole or the common form. See
tt 50, 51, 54.
B. CONNECTING VOWELS.
^ 2 O2. The connecting vowels serve to unite
the flexible endings with the root or tense-sign,
and assist in marking the distinctions of mode and
tense.
NOTES. . In each tense, that which precedes the connecting vowel (or,
if this is wanting, the flexible ending) may be termed the base of the tense
(/3a<r/y, foundation)', as, in the Pres. of-fiouXiuu, /SanXsv-; in the Fut., /Saw-
Xivv- ; in the Perf. act.,
/3. The regular additions, which are made to the base in the Present and
Future, are throughout the same ; as, frovi.iv-u, &3vXiv<r-u, ovXtv-tts, fiovXtixr
2O 3. I. In the INDICATIVE, the connecting vowel is --
in the Aorist and Perfect, and -ti- in the Pluperfect ; in tho
other tenses, it is -o- before a liquid, but otherwise --.
Thus, A. \5ev).iv<r-ct-fAiv, iovXiu<r-d-fin* Pf. faouXtvx-et-fAtv Plup.
\-VX-II-Y Pres. QauXiu-o-fttv, /3ai/Xit/-i-n, (jSat/Xiw-a-n^, ^ 58) fiouXtvouffi /Jw-
Xiu-a-fAett, (/3yXiw-i-a/, 37. 4) /SawXiw*), /3i/Xii/-i-T/ Impf. iCovXtv-o-*, iSau-
/ iu-i-S iauXiv-6-f*.vv, ISavXiv-i-re F.
REMARKS. *. In the Sing, of the Pres. and Fut. act. the connectives -
and -i-, either by union with the ending, or by simple protraction, become -*-
and -i;- ; as, (&uXiu-e-/u,, -a-at) /SwXiw<w, (/3/Xit/-i-f) /JafXiwuf, (/JatiXiw-i-r,
i-O /3v>.ii/'ii /3>.ic, /3v>.ii;ff/f /Si/X*i. Sc 5 181. 1, 2; 183.
CH. 9.J CONNECTING VOWELS. 191
/3. In the 3d Pers. sing, of the Aor. and Perf. act., -- takes the place of
it- ; as, (ISavXtuo-it- r) ISavXtvffi, fiiGovXivxt. See 181. 2.
y. In the 3d Pers. pi. of the Plup., -- commonly takes the place of -ti-
NOTE. The original connective of the Plup. was -ta-, which remained in
the Ion. ( 179); as, 3i 3. 71, Hdt. ii. 150, intfaut . 166, \ntfai* s
v. 90, j$if B. 832, puf 2. 404, l-yt-yntt Hdt. i. 11, trw-An Id. ix. 58.
The earlier contraction into -j- is especially old Attic, but also occurs in the
jEp. and Dor. ; as, I Pers. *>$ Soph. Ant. 18, tTfrovdv Ar. Eccl. 650, x.t%jvt)
Id. Ach. 10 ; 2 Pers. j$i? Soph. Ant. 447, >$W r. 93, UiAn'Sn; Ar. Eq.
S22 ; 3 Pers. * A. 70, Soph. CEd. T. 1525, IxiX^u Theoc. 10. 38. By
precession ( 29), ->j- passed into -<-, which became the common connective,
and in the 3 Pers. sing, is already found in Horn, (arising from -it) ; as, iirr-n-
x*i 2. 557 ; so XiXcuru Theoc. 1. 139. In the 3 Pers. pi., -*- became -i-,
by the omission of the , which was only euphonic in its origin (179). So,
hi the 2 Pers. pi., ** for $uri, Eur. Bac. 1345.
SO4. II. The SUBJUNCTIVE takes the connecting vowels
of the Pres. ind., lengthening -- to -77- and -o- to -w- ( 177).
Thus, Ind. &evXtu-u, Subj. fiovXtv-u, fiovXtvo-tu fievXtv-ti-s, fiauXtv-y-s,
fiauXiv-tt, QavXtu-y, fiovXiur-n fiouXtv-o-fttv, fiovXtu-u-f*.s fieu-
v<rt, fiouXtv-w-vffi, 58) fiovXtv
uXtvff-ea-fjt.au fiavXiu-t-rctt, ftovXt6-fi-
9O5. III. The OPTATIVE has, for its connective, t, either
alone or with other vowels ( 177, 184).
RULE. If the Ind. has no connecting vowel, and the base
ends in , E, or o, then the i is followed by 77 in the subjective
forms, but receives no addition in the objective. In other
cases, the i takes before it in the Aor., and o in the other
tenses. The connective i always forms a diphthong with the
preceding vowel.
Thus, iffTK-ii)-9, i<r<ra-i-nnv (^ 48), nfa-tu-v, <ri0t-i-p,vv (^f 50), (ZouXivffi
in -r (^ 35), $t$o-in-v t $i$o-i-ftn9 (^ 51); fiavXtvff-ett-fti, &auXiuo-eti-ftnv fiov-
(^ 56), $ilX,VV-OI-[4l, %llVV-OI-/U,7IV (^[ 52).
REMARKS. 1. In Optatives in -/, the n is often omitted in the Plur.,
especially in the 3d Pers., and also in the Dual ; as, itrrxT^v, /Wr<re, /Warn
iWauVay (1 48), frovXivStn* (^ 35). In the 3d Pers. pi. of the Aor. pass.
the longer form is rare hi classic Greek ( ixx-inQfaittrw Th. i. 38).
2 . In contract subjective forms, whether Pres. or Fut., the connective ei oftei I
assumes * ; as, fyti-u-fu, contr. <ptXo7-pi or QiXein-v (f 46) ; u.yy\\oi*~i
(\ 41, 56).
NOTES. . The form of the Opt. in -/, for -at/*i, is called the Attic Op-
tative, though not confined to Attic writers ; as, ivwoiui Hdt. i. 89, olxo'inrt
ITieoc. 12. 28. This form is most employed in the Sing., where it is the com-
mon form 'n contracts in -ica and -ou, and almost the- exclusive fonn in con-
tracts in -. In the 3d Pers. pi., it .-oarcely oonirs $,,V T W /Kschin. 4 I .
192 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK 11.
29 >. It is likewise found in the Perf., as vtx-odaiv (f 39) AT. Ach. 940
ixyrKpivyoinv Soph. CEd. T. 840, tr^otXnXvfoins Cyr. ii. 4. 17; and in the
2 Aor. of 'ix, u i to have, which has, for its Opt., o-%oiw in the simple verb
(Cyr. vii. 1.36), but f%oipi in compounds (xar<i<r%ots Mem. iii. 11. 11).
So low (H 56) Symp. 4. 16.
ft. See, in respect to the insertion of * (e) in the Opt., 184.
3. The Aor. opt. act. has a second form, termed JEolic, in which the con
nective is that of the Ind. with u prefixed ; as, /3ai/Xswo--s/a-y. See 18 1. a
2O6. IV. In the IMPERATIVE and INFINITIVE, the con.
necting vowel is -- in the Aorist, and -s- in the other tenses.
Thus, /3avXi/<r-a-TS, &au*.tv<r-a,-fffa, ftouXtvtr-a-i, ftouXtvy-a-irSctt /3at/Xsw-t-<ri,
REMARKS. a. Before v in the Imperative, -e- takes the place of -i-, and,
in the '2d Pers. sing., of -a- ; OS, (ZevXiv-o-vrcov, &0uXtucr-o-v ( 210. 2).
0. In the Infinitive of the Pres. and Fut. act., -i- is lengthened to -i*
( 183) ; as,
V. In the PARTICIPLE, the connecting vowel is
-a- in the Aorist, and -o- in the other tenses.
Thus, (&ov\iv<r-a.-vrs, 109) /Sat/Xswa-aj, pouXivff-ei-/u.tvos (/3at/Xsy-a-Tf,
109) fcovXiuuv, (&u*.iu-o-v<r<rct, 132) &ouXtuou<rcc, (fiovXtv-o-vr, 63) &ou-
Aewav /3at/Xew<r<w (/Ss^awXifx-a-Tf, 112. a, 179) fitovX&vx.us, (fitSovXivx-
o-Tffu, 132. 1) ft&^ov^.ivx.v7u., ($iouXivx.-b-r t 103J $i*>ov\ivx.'ot ftav^iv-o-
The INDICATIVE, IMPERATIVE, INFINITIVE, and
PARTICIPLE are nude (nudus, naked), i. e. have no connecting
vow^l ( 175),
) ) In the Aor., Perf., and Plup., passive, of all verbs.
I* the Aor. pass., the flexible endings are affixed, in these modes, to the
tense-sign ( 198); in the Perf. and Plup. pass., they are affixed to the root;
as, \Zou\iv -6n- ( 199);
2.) In the Pres. and Impf. of some verbs in which the char
acteristic is a short vowel. These verbs are termed, from the
<: riding of the theme, VERBS IN -^ut, and, in distinction from
tiiem, other verbs are termed VERBS IN -w ( 209).
The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, <W-,iv, /Wa--
"<rret-p.au, 'nr<rti-/u,v* (^ 48). In the Inf. and Part., the connecting vowels -i-
and -e- are inserted after/; thus, i-i-vxi, (1-o-vrt) !u* (^ 56). So, in the
Imperative, /av-rwv. Cf. 185. <y, 205.
3.) In a few Second Perf. and Plup. forms ( 186).
The flexible endings are here affixed to the root; thus, ya-ra-^i*, ttrra.-6t,
\ari-ian (^ 48). In the I'jiri., lln- roiiinrtiii;,' vowol IM inserted; as,
(^f 58). So, in the /;*/., Itliivai, with which compare Uvui, above.
CH. 9.] FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 193
C. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS.
The flexible endings (fiexibilis, change
able) are the chief instruments of conjugation,
marking by their changes the distinctions of voice,
number, person, and, in part, of tense and mode.
They are exhibited in 1 31, according to the classi-
fication (^ 195, 196).
SPECIAL RULES AND REMARKS.
FIRST PERS. SING. The ending -p, after -- connective,
and, in primary forms ( 196. 1), after -o- and -w- connec-
tive^is dropped or absorbed; after -o/- and -*-, and in the
nude Present ( 208. 2), it becomes -(jn, ; in other cases, it be-
comes -i ; as, (Ind. flavlfv-o-fi, Subj. fiovhv-fo-p) finvfav-w,
-n (so after -?-, contr. -17-, 203. N.) ;
i, fiovlf-t'nt-ot<~f*t, Ivrrj-fjt (If 48) ; f6ov-
tfioi'lfvVrj-i; fitVJLtvfttiij-v ' quluirj-v,
iri-v ( 205. 2) ; I'oTij-r, icmVv (1] 48). See 181. 1.
NOTE. Tfifwtf, for rpifeiftt, occurs for the sake of the metre Eur. Fr. Inc.
152.
$2IO. SECOND PERS. SING. 1. Fur the form -a#, see
$ 182.
2. The ending -# is dropped after -f- connective ; after --
connective, it becomes -v, with a change of -- to -o- ( 206. ) ;
after a short rowel in the root, it becomes in the 2d Aor. a, and
in the Pres. f, which is then contracted with the preceding
vowel ((tf becoming r y ) ; in other cases, it becomes -#t (see
^ 181. 3). Thus, ftovltv-9 ' fiovltva-o-v &t-g, do-c, t-q
(1J1T 50, 51, 54) ; (i'ara-f) ton?, (ilf)(-f) rl&ti, (dl-do-f) didov,
((W/xrD-f) diiwT, (HH 48-52); (p ,lv ri t ffl 42), povl*v&vi
( 62), ?au*i W 48), ?.a^<, (Jfc5i,^ (ff 58), and, in like manner,
v ,'h, 'T^/ (]Tf 53, 56, 181. 3), and the poet. Uwtfi Theoc.
15. 143, tnopvvfti Theog. 1195.
NOTE. In composition, <rr5A, /S^/, and 16t (^ 48, 56, 57) are often
Shortened to a-ra, /3a, and s/ as, <ra.^a.ffra, for vretgeiffTtiJi, tcctreiSu for xr
C>;^/, <rgo:rti for T09<ri0t.
3. The endings -ot and -ao drop the a, except in the Perf.
and Plup. pass., and sometimes in the nude Pres. and Impf.
(^208. 2) ; as, ( f 5oi/;n'-f-t, 37. 4) povltvy or flovtevci, (fiov-
lfv-f-n} .joi'Afi'oi', (X^oi'Af J'-F-O) ov>Uuov, (ffiovlfva-a-o) e'Sovlfv-
o( ' .^ot'/ft'-oi-o, j5oi if i'<j-f^i-o ' fitf)oi'\fv-acti, fiifiovkt v-oo, i6t6ov-
liv-ao ' i'uru-out, VOIK-./O and (lara-o) larw (^j 48) ; rl&e-aon
194 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BuOK II
and (r/.9e-0 rl&r,, (i#s-o) tftov (ff '50) ; iVflu-oo and (<5/<5o o^
<5o'o) <5ou (5| 51). See 182. 111.
REMARKS, (a) The Aor. imperat. is irregularly contracted ; thus, (fiou-
Xtvff-tt-o) &av*.ivffai. (b) The contraction of -<eti into -it ( 37. 4) is a
special Attic form, which was extensively used by pure writers ; and which,
after yielding in other words to the common contraction into -j, remained in
BavXu, oht, and o-^u. (c) In verbs in -/M, -<ro.t remained more frequently
than -<r, and was the common form if or preceded. Yet poet. irli<ra.
^Esch. Eum. 86, luvo. or Ivvy (? 29) Soph. Ph. 798. Further particulars
respecting the use or omission of the -<r- in verbs in -/u.i are best learned from
the tables and from observation.
211. THIRD PERS. SING. The ending -T becomes -at
in the nude Pres., but in othtr cases is dropped, or lost in a
diphthong ; as, (tor*;-?) tur^at, to^r; (fl 48) ; {Govfavt, jft
See 181. 2.
NOTE. The paragogic ( 66), which is regularly affixed only to i and
Bimple /, is, in a few instances, found after -/ in the Plup., and follows in
the Impf. of tip 1, even before a consonant ; thus, 3 Pers. fiur us (^ 58)
Ar. Vesp. 635, $u, tlliiru (f 56) Id. Plut. 696, iw*fe> olx Id. Nub.
1347, rTjj*s/v *vroZ T. 691, bitifain al %f tt E. 661, ?v ti i. 2. 3. In all
these cases, the v appears to have been retained from an uncontracted form in
-i(). See 203. N., 230. y. So Impf. fr* c < 7 ? / T. 388.
2 1 2. FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS PL., WITH THE DUAL.
1. The 1st Pers. is the same in the Plur. and Du., having, for
its subjective ending, -^ucv, and for its objective, -pf .9, or some-
times in the poets, -fitta&tx thus,
and poet,
NOTE. Of the form in -pdov ( 1 74), there have been found only three
classical examples, ah" in the dual primary, and all occurring in poetry before
a vowel: 9i$(Aiin Y. 485, AtXe/>^t4av Soph. El. 950, oytupdov Id. Ph.
1079. Two examples more are quoted by Athenaeus (98 a) from a word-
hunter (ovofAitTo6riiis), whose affectation he is ridiculing.
2. The 2d Pers. pi. always ends in -i. The 2d Pers. du. is
obtained by changing this vowel into -ov ; and the 3d Pers. du.,
by changing it into -ov in the primary inflection, into -t\v in the
secondary, and into -wv in the imperative. Thus, PI. 2, fiovltv-
fte, (6ovitvtTB Du. 2, fiuvhvfrov* tBovfavetov ' Du. 3,
REMARK. In the secondary dual, the 3d Pers. seems originally to have
had the same form with the 2d ; and we find in Horn, such cases as 3d Pers.
huxtro* K. 364, TiTiw^ira* N. 346, X<pvV<ri 2. 583, Sutfffoiffav N. 301.
On the other hand, the lengthening to -? (with which compare the lengthen-
ing of the Plup. affix, 179) was sometimes extended by the Attics even to
the 2d Pers. ; as, 2d Pers. ii x iw Soph. (Ed. T. 1511, AXr,,v Ear. Ale.
661, I^ITJ>, iflrtS^i/THv PI. Euthyd. 273 e.
$ 2 1 3. THIRD PERS. PL. 1. The en ling -IT, in the pri
<:H. 9.J FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 195
mary tenses, becomes -vat. In the secondary, after -o- or --
connective, it becomes -v ; after a diphthong in the Opt., -tv ;
hut, otherwise, -auv. Thus, (/JovAfvoytft, 58) fiovhvovui,
fiovfavaovat, /tfctfoi/Aevxaat, fiovfavuoi, ' loiciai, euTuoi (fl 48) ;
fGoiifav-o-v, I6ovkev(j-a-v ' fiovfavoi-tv, fiovkevaai-ev, Pov\tvdti-sv'
tCtSovktvxB-aav, t6ovktvdr]-aav, fiovksv&tlTj-auv ' taTa-aav, I'aTif-
av, laralrt-aav (fl 48). See 181, 184. /?.
2. In the Perf. and Plup. pass, of impure verbs, the 3d Pers.
ol. is either formed in -TCU and -TO ( 60), or, more com
monly, supplied by the Part, with elal and your (fl 55) ; as
f'qi&tiy-uTui Th. iii. 18, from cpdtlyo) (r. qpi9a^-), to waste, yt-
/'Qixfjipivoi tlal, ytya(i(tiv6i ^aav (^[ 36).
REMARK. The forms in -TI and -u.ro are termed Ionic. Before these
endings, a labial or palatal mute must be rough (<p, %), and a lingual, middle () ;
as, from TTai (r. T^ar-), to fwrw; (rsT^acr-vra/) rsT^a^a-ra/ PI. Rep. 533 b ;
from roiffffu (r. ray-), to arrange, (TTay-vra<) TT^;ra/ iv. 8. 5, irETot^aTa
Th. vii. 4.
3. In the Imperative, the shorter forms in -TTWV and
( 177), which are termed ^.i/.ic ( 7), are the more common.
In Homer, they are the sole forms.
NOTE. In to-ru* and Irut (THf 55, 56), ?he old plur. form has remained
without change.
214. 1. INFINITIVE. The subjective ending, after -n-
connective ( 206. /5), has the form -v ; after -- connective, -i
forming a diphthong with -- ; but, in other cases, -VUL ; as,
vat,' iard-vai, az^-ycet, saxd-rcti (^\ 48). See 176, 183.
2. PARTICIPLE. For the change of v to a connecting vowel
in the Perf. act., see 179. For the declension of the Part.,
see Ch. III., and the paradigms (IT 22).
215. REMARKS. 1. For the REGULAR AFFIXES of the verb,
whicn are those of the euphanic Pres. and Impf., and of the regularly foimed
Fnt., Aor., Perf., and Plup., see ^f 29, 30. These affixes are open in the
Pres. and Impf., and close in the other tenses. For the AFFIXES of the Pres.
and Impf. of VERBS IN -^ (5 208. 2), see [ffl 29, 30. The AFFIXES of the
2d Aor. ret. and mid. are the same with those of the Impf. ( 199. a), or,
except in the Ind., the same with those of the Pres. ( 169. /2). The AFFIX-
ES of the other tenses denominated second (except the nude 2d Perf. and Plup.,
186) differ from the regular affixes only in the tense-sign ( 199. II.). The
Fut. Perf. or 3d Fut. has the same affixes with the common Fut. act. and
mid. (179).
2. Special care is required in distinguishing forms which have the same
letters. In fiouXtva (^5 34, 35), we remark (besides the forms which are the
same in the Plur. and Du., 212) the following: Ind. and Subj. fao*.tvef
Fut. Ind. and Aor. Subj. /Sot/Xt^a; Ind. and Imp. ^ov^tvirt, frovXivurOi, Ind.
196 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. - CONTRACTION. [BOOK II.
PI. 3, and Part. PL Dat. QovXtvovrt, (ZavXtvraviri Imp. -PI. 3, and Part. PI
Gen. jSavXsnavTu/v, fiitiXivruvruv, $oul.tv6ivreav Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, j->'iu
htini, fiovXivffn Subj. Act. S. 3, and Ind. and Subj. Mid. S. 2, /SonXsw*) Fut
Ind. Mid. S. 2, and Aor. Subj. Act. S. 3, and Mid. S. 2, frovXiwy Aor.
Imp. /Sat/Ast/frov, Fut. Part, fiovteutrov Opt. Act. S. 3, $ou\ivffu.t, Inf. Act.
fiovXivsui, Imp. Mid. S. 2,
3. With respect to the changes which take place in the root, or in the union,
of the affixes with the root, the tenses are thus associated : 1. the Pres. uncl
Iinpf. act. and pass. ; 2. the Fut. act. and Mid. ; 3. the Aor. act. and mid.
4. the Perf. and Plup. act. , 5, the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; 6. the Aor. and
Fut. pass. It will be understood, that whatever change of the kind mentioned
above takes place in one of the tenses, belongs likewise to the associated tensus,
if nothing appears to the contrary. For the Fut. Perf., see 239.
II. UNION OF THE AFFIXES WITH THE ROOT
A REGULAR OPEN AFFIXES.
^ S 1 6. When the regular of e% altkes ( 215. 1 )
are annexed to roots ending in a, , or o, CONTRAC-
TION takes place, according to the rules (^ 31 -37).
See the paradigms (HH 45-47).
NOTES. . Verbs in which this contraction takes place are termed CON-
TRACT VERBS, or, from the accent of the theme, Perlspomtna. In distinction
from them, other verbs are termed Barytone Verbs. See Prosody.
/3. The verbs *, to burn, and xXaw, to weep, which have likewise the
forms Jtat'tu and xX/w, are not contracted. Dissyllabic Verbs in -iu admit
only the contractions into u ; thus, vxiu, to suil, vXitis <r\i7s, -rhni <*\ii,
9Thiofe.lv, wXJiri T^iiTi^ rXeaw. Except Vtu, to bind; as, <ro SoiJv, TV IOVVT
PL Crat 419 a, b.
y. The contract Ind. and Subj. of verbs in -a.u are throughout the same.
See H 45. The contract Inf. in -.Zv is likewise written without the < subsc. ;
thus, rifteiv, as contr. from the old <rt/u,ciiv ( 25. /S, 176, 183). So <pt*.t7t,
JjjXatJv may be formed from the old p/Xitv, ^Xt.
B. REGULAR CLOSE AFFIXES.
^317. I. When the close affixes are annexed
to a consonant, changes are often required by the
general laws of orthography and euphony ; as,
36, root y0-) ; y^d^u, lyoee.-^a. t yfy^a-^a/ ( 51) ;
i/v ( 61) ; ysy^a^^a/, yiy^a^^ivaf ( 53) ; yiy f (TT ( 52)
, y\y^6u ( 60).
(f 37, r. X/T-, Xi/r-) ; lX/'(p^, Xi/<p^V^a/ ( 52).
i> (^ 38, r. *y) i w^a^w, vrgufyfteti, if^^df*nv, vrir^a^o ( 51)
( 61)^ <riTfa*<-a i-g^^jy, iTi'rga^s, mrra.-^&a.i ( 52, 60).
CH. 9.] OTHER EUPHONIC CHANGES. 197
r!/V (^ 39, r. -riff-, vitff-) ; T/'O<W, Ivi-rntra, ITS-TE/^S, vnTiTa-Jeci ( 55)
rivrtixa. ( 61) *, rT/.r/t/, i^riT/V^>? ( ; 53); -TtTS^rra/, iTs<Wjy (v 52).
otyyiXXu (^[41, r. ayysX-) '. ctyyi^u, ayyiXovftai, riyyu^a., tiyyu^a^t
56). i?yyiX*( 60).
REMARKS, . In the //^MM/ verfis xX/y, to bend, xgi'vu, to judge, xn'ivu,
to slaii, r<y<y, to stretch, and TXUVW, to M.VI.S/I, v is dropped before the allixes
which remain close ( 56), except sometimes in the Aor. pass, (chiefly in po-
etry for the sake of the metre) ; as, xixX^ai, ixXttiw and txXivDw, r. 360,
II. Gr. iv. 1. 30 ; xixpxx, x'ixetpcti, ix.^** and Ep. txoivfav, N. 129.
p. In otlier verbs, v characteristic, before ft, more frequently becomes <r, but
sometimes becomes ^ or is dropped ( 54) ; as, vri<f>ir^xt, vtipffp,ivo; (^ 42);
*-oj-L/v<w, to exasperate, Pf. P. Part, ^rao^lf^jttlvaj or ^-a^<w|;//4jv<}f.
y. Before ^ in the affix, neither /* nor y can be doubled ; hence, xixaftft&i,
(*[f 44), for xtxatftftfAKi, tX^Xsyy^ta.!.
218. II. Before the regular close affixes, a
s/ior vowel is commonly lengthened ; and here d
becomes ??, unless preceded by , 6, >, or ^o
ft 29) ; as,
vipciia (^f 45), Tiftvffu, tTi/u.^ffx, nr'i/jt.'nx.a., Tirlfjinu.a,i, irifiriSvii.
(fitXiu (^| 46), ^Xjjyw, $iXr,ffof&cti, iri(f>iXn{4aii, vi(pi%.ricro/4at.
JjjXsa; l ^f 47), S!X<uo - 6;, ^>jXi;ff i / tt>jy, ^bCor^aiu.r,v^ ^n\ut)wffoftettt
<rieu, to honor, poet., F. <rfr&;, A. trivet, Pf. P. TirTftai.
<ptu, to produce, F. <f>vtre, A. i^uffot,, Pf. -ri^Uxx.
iu, to permit, F. <r, A. sJWa (^ 189. 3), Pf. tfdxet.
*ooLu, to hunt, F. d->/iKffu, A. s^aa-a, Pf. nQfyoixa, ( 62).
NOTES. . Xjaw, to wtter aw oracle, %ga,o/u.oti, to use, and nr^otivw^r. T-),
to 6ore, lengthen to v ; as, F. ^^>j<rw, %ow<ro/u.i, T^O-U. 'A.Xoa,&>, to thresh,
with the common F. a.\w<ru, has also the Old-Att. aXoaa-w.
/?. In the Perf. of verbs in -pi, t is lengthened to u, instead of n ( 29) ;
as, rtttixet, rihifteti (*|f 50) ; tlxa., iipa.i (^ 54).
21O. REMARKS. 1. Some verbs retain the short vowel,
and others are variable ; as,
?*.*>, to draw, F. r^,r<v, A. tffK&ra,, Pf. <rwa*a, Pf. P. iWao^a/ ( 221%
A. P. iff-xuffSw.
TiXsw, to finish, F. -rsXsirw, -rsXw ( 200. 2), A. IriXarct, Pf. rtrfXsx,
Pf. P. TSTsXe-r^a/, A. P. \ri\iff6viv*
a.^, to plough, F. a^aVw, A. fyoffu, A. P. ^Vj> (Ion. Pf. P. Part. i
H'vo;, 2. 548, Hdt. iv. 97, 191. 2).
liu, to bind, F. Mra, A. ftnffa, 3 F. Wropai Pf. Si^xa, Pf. P.
(S&lO-fttt,! Hipp.), A. P. ^^>J.
Svu(-ij), to sacrifice, F. Stria, A. i^ua-a, A. M. liSr&pw Pf.
Pf. P. vifSftatt, A. P. JT^V ( 62).
. Verbs in -awi)/*/ and -iwvpt, and those in which the root ends
198 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II.
in >.-, for the most part retain the short vowel ; as, yeXa/w, to laugh, F. v*
t, A. lyi)>.cii<r, A. P. lysXacr^v.
ft. The short vowel remains most frequently before 6, and least frequently
before a. In the PERFECT and PLUPERFECT, it remains more frequently in
the passive, than in the active voice.
S2O. 2. In seven familiar dissyllables, mostly imply-
ing motion, F appears to have been once attached to the roc
(see ^22. <5, 117):
Siu, to run (r. $p-), F. (SiFe-opeu} &tvffi?uu (tv<ru only Lye. 1119). See
166. a.
j*;, to swim, F. nuffoput, -oZftai ( 200. 3), iv. 3. 12, A. jyira, Pf. vivtuxct.
wXew, to saz'Z, F. r/Uwo-<w, commonly rXiutrof&xi, v. 6. 12, or <x\iu<Tovp.a.i^ v.
I." 10, A. ia-Xit/ra, Pf. frfa-Xu/xa, Pf. P. *i<r*.iucrfteu ( 221).
<rv&;, to breathe, F. ?rvy<r<w, Dem. 284. 17, commonly cptvripMU Eur. Andr
555, or xvfcvv/UH, Ar. Ran. 1221, A. fotvfttit, Pf. wsTvswxa.
Add /5ew, to ./&>>, xetiu, to burn, and xXa/o>, to weep.
. III. After a short vowel or a diphthong,
a is usually inserted before the regular affixes of the
Passive beginning with 6, p, or r ; as,
fffuu, to draw _( 219), Pass. Pf. "iffira.-ff-p.u.i, farasau, "fffK-ff-nti,
fttGa. iffvra.-'T-fjt.f.vo; A. Ircra-ir-^v F. ff<TK-ff-0ri<roft,ai.
riXiiu, to finish ( 219), Pass. Pf. nrsXE^a/, -riTiXttrftivos Plup.
ffftnv, iTiTi^.tao, ITSTEXSOTO A. srsXsV^jjv F. 7t%.iT0r><r'}(AtJti.
KiXivu, to command. Pass. Pf.
Plll|). fxixiXEi/o-^y A. ixjXfJir^y F.
REMARKS, a. In some verbs, r is omitted after a *fo>r vou-e! or dipJithnng
in some it is in sat ted after a swn;;/f /o?^ vowel; and some are variable ; thus,
n^v. Ji^^a/, f^^?, rifSpeti, \rv6yv ( 219) ; ^OV^IV^KI, iSouXiufav (^f 35)'
^;*<u, to heap up, *t%*ffMU, i%<va0wv ^oa.n(jt.a.t, to use, x,i%gy/u.tti, \%gfolq
p.'i/u.vn/u.u.i, to remember, i^^aS-nt va.vu, to stop, ir'ii-u,vp.a.^ l-ravtrf^v and i-ruu-
6r>* PMVVU/U.I (r. po-}, to strengthen, tppuftui, Vf'ptu<rfnv J^aw, to do, Jj^a^a*
and 3:Sja^a/, l^a<r^v Sgotuea, to dash, ri^ee,tnr^a,i and <ri0(>a.i>p,tti, \6(>a.va6vv.
It will lil observed that the </ is attracted most strongly by the affixes begin-
ning -.vith S.
(>. \Vlicn <r is inserted in the Perf. and Plup., the 3d Pers. pi. wants the
ivrm ; as, PI. 3, Ir-rciffftivai i<V/, xtKt^ivtr^ivat <rv. See 213. 2.
IV. The regular close affixes are an
nexed with the insertion of ??,
1.) To double cnjixoHdti/ roots, except those which end in a
or pfilffl.al mute not preceded by a, and those which end
in a lingual mute jirccedt'd by v ; as,
avg-M (r. all-, 1 *3)i i5--* wl-*-'*, v$--*a, a
OH. 9.J EUPHONIC CHANGES. 199
, to boll, F. tyjeu, A. W*i<rx. S&, to smell, F. ?ifav, A. &<rtt.
, to be about to, to purpose, to delay, F. ^iXAj<r, A. t^tXAj<ra; and
( 189. 1).
i/9/5<w, to (70 awa^. t . Ifp^g-u^ A. vpprjira, Pf. jjppvxa.
fioffxu, to pasture, to feed, F. froex-ncra.
But Keip-ru, to shine, F. X*t^w, A. tXet/u.-^et, 2 Pf. XsXa^-ra <*, to
/earf, to ri*2e, F. af^a,, A. Jgga, Pf. P. fftwe**, A. P. %^>v rw*J, to mate
a libation, F. (<rrsv^-<r<w, 55, 58) OVI'HTU, A. ttrvua-a., Pf. P. (Wjv$-^a/,
IrvSMjpMM, 53) i<rvti<rp,a.i, A. P. if-riifffav, late Pf. A. tfirtixet*
2.) To liquid roots in which the characteristic is preceded
Ly a diphthong, and to a few in which it is preceded by c ; as,
00vXapa/, to will, F. favlfooftai, Pf. QtGifatifuu (Ep. 2 Pf. 0fti;X A. 113),
A. iov).Mn and nSou^nv i 189. 1).
i^tXw, and shortened S^eXw, to an'sA, F. i^>.jj<rft; and S-X<rw, A. Mfanfet and
\6i>.v<Ttt,, Pf. WtXnxK, and late re^Xjxa.
^sXw, to concern, F. pi AnVw, A. l^fXjjo-a, Pf. ptpt.\vix.. (Ep. 2 Pf. as Pres.
fAift7iX.et, B. 25), A. P. fitiXiilfly. This verb is commonly used impersonally:
ftiXtt, it concerns, ^eXwa-s/, &C.
/KEDAf, to remain, F. ^sv&I, A. {jtts/va, 1 Pf. ^s^svjjxa (cf. 54. y), 2 Pf. ^-
VE^W, to distribute, F. v/*iw, and later vi/u.w*u, A. Zviifttt, Pf. vcv^;, Pf. P.
ttyipe.yp.ai, A. P. tvs^^nv and InpiSAi* (R. ).
3.) To a few other roots ; as,
Sidtf, to need, F. ^wru, A. l^sjjo'a (J^(rsv 2. 100), Pf. ^zbinxot Mid. diof/,i t
to need, to beg, F. Ss^o-^/, Pf. 'biVivpKt, A. P. tbirdw. The Act. is most com-
mon as impersonal : Ss7, Mere is weerf, ^Vs/, s5ij(r, &c. See R. y.
twJw, to s/eep, Impf. tfon and nv^av ( 188. N.), F. tSSfou.
ciop.a.1, to think, F. owirofteti, A. P. u-nf'/iv. When used parenthetically, the
1st Pers. sing, of the Pres. and Impf. has the nude forms otftai, upnv. In
Horn, we find the forms <W>, oiu, olta (Dor. olu Ar. Lys. 156), <w/Va/ctv,
uiffS-n*, with / commonly long. See R. 7.
ot%ap.at, to depart, to be gone (the Pres. having commonly the force of the
Perf.), F. oi%iffi>fiai, Pf. w^jj^a/, and poet. OI^MKO. or eu^uxa. (R. /3) Soph.
Aj. 896 Ofc*s K. 252).
jfetlea, to strike, F. veiiyu, ill Att. poetry <jra.tfi<ria, Ar. Nub. 1125, A. !ra/(ra f
Pf. ?TTa;xa, A. P. IflWrAl*.
REMARKS. . In a few verbs, i is inserted instead of n (cf. 219) ; as,
to be vexed, F. a.%0'i(raftm, A. P. ^^'iirSinv.
i, to fight, F. ^a^s^a^a/, ^MCVoVjiMjU ( 200. 2), A. Ip.a.xiffo.f&vv, Pf.
(Ion. ita.xiopot.1, Hdt. vii. 104, F. fiei^iro/^ui A. 298).
/S. In a very few verbs, we find the insertion of a or a>. See e"%op,cti
(3. above), Spuvfti, \v6ta, a.yu, I'luGa. (in the two last the inserted vowel even
precedes the characteristic).
y. In most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake of
vuphony. That the vowel should be commonly j, rather than t, results from
200 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II
218. Tn \<u, to need, and Ja^a/, to think, there appears to have been one*
a digamma, of which we find traces in the Homeric (^sFwa*) Jst^a/, ^tiir,a-o-
fttti, ibsvviira,, and in the long / of oto[/.ot,t,
V. In a few liquid roots, METATHESIS
takes place before the terminations that remain
close (^ 56), to avoid the concurrence of conso-
nants (^ 64. 3) ; as,
(r. /3X-, transp. /3Xa-), to throw, F. /SX<w, and in Att. poetry l*x
Afr ($ 222), Ar. Vesp. 222, 2 A. Zxv, Pf. /3<xj** ( 218), Pf.* P. /3s-
fAw^a/, 3 F. /3 ;U<ra;*/, A. P. CXj;S*}i>.
Kot.fjt.vu> (r. zap-, transp. x^-), to labor, to be weary, F. xapovftai, 2 A. i'x
ttov, Pf. xix/Arixcc.
C. VERBS IN -^t.
[For the paradigms, see 1T1T48-57.]
^324. I. Before the nwc?e affixes, the CHAR-
ACTERISTIC SHORT VOWEL (^ 183, 208. 2) is
lengthened (a becoming ??,' unless preceded by p,
^ 29 ; and ^, ft),
1.) In the Indicative singular of the PRESENT
and IMPERFECT ACTIVE.
Thus, toriMu (1j 48; r. ai-), IW^v r/^^t (ff 50; r. ^s-),
ldwfii, (^\ 51 ; r. <5o-), fSldwv dslxvvpi (^f 52; r. <5x-,
i;-), tdflxvvv' dpi (fl 56; r. 'I-), ft, flat.
2. N In the SECOND AORIST ACTIVE throughout,
except before VT (^ 183).
Thus, e'tfTTjv, tajrjftfv, aT^t, aT^rwanv^ arrival, *
(ata-i'i?) ata? " aTridyav (^| 57 ; r. 5^a-), anodqavoni ' eyrotv
(If 5T; r. yvo-)^ tyvupev, tyvwiov^ yvw&i) yvwvai
(yvov-iq) yvovg.
EXCEPTION. The short vowel remains, in the 2 Aor. of r/V*?^/, $/S,w/, and
Inpi, except in the Inf., where it is changed into its corresponding diphthong
( 29) ; thus, ili/tcir, ^if, !?*, l^i-vrj) St/f l^/uiy, Say, 3oJy4, (l^-vrf)
iouf tiptt (^ 54; r. I- ; for the augment, see 189. 3), ?f, 7*/, (' vr?^
i7j (for the Sing, of these Aorists, see 201. 3). Except, also, the poet.
fitr&v and awrav.
3.) In a few MIDDLE forms, mostly poetic.
Thus, dl?niai (r. <5/f-), to seek; urn >,in, tn profit, 2 A. M
b>n'i(j.tjr, and later wvu^t^v ' n^^Ar/w/, to fill, 2 A. M. poet
H. 9.] VERBS IN -fit. 201
22o. IT. If the characteristic is c, o, or v, the singular
of the IMPERFECT ACTIVE is commonly formed with the con-
necting vowel (^ 185. /?) ; thus, tiidtov, contr. nltiovv, fil&seg
fdlSoov sdldovv tbtixvvw (flfl 50-52).
REMARK. In like manner, the regular affixes sometimes take the place of
the nude, in other forms, particularly in verbs in -vpi, which may be regarded
as having a second but less Attic theme in -vu ( I 8.5. } ; thus, hixvufti and
^nnvvca, s/xv<r< and Juxvui/, &six,vvffv and ibtixvuav, $nxvv; and ^HKVVUV.
III. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 1. In the
Sub]., verbs in -pi differ from other verbs only in the mode of
contracting -? and -oy ( 33, 37. 3) ; thus, lard-to tatw,
l(jTvi-iif*ai lortti^tai, laid-)] tor*/? ' Tt^e'-w
ri9wfj.ni, Tt&e-y ii&f) ' 8i86-w
l-ca (^j 56). If, however, Q precede -?j, the contraction
is into a ; as, dnodgng (^ 57).
2. VERBS IN -oj^ut have a second form of the Opt. act. in
-Mr]*, which is most frequent in late writers, but is not confined
to them , as, cUw?} 5. 183 (aioiV x - 253), /Jiojjjv Ar. Ran. 177
(the other form is not used in this word, perhaps to avoid con-
fusion with the Att. Pres. opt., 205. 2), /Wq PI. Gorg. 512 e.
3. In the Opt. mid., **, if not in the initial syllable, is often
changed before the flexible ending into ot, in imitation of verbs
in -w ; thus, it^o/^v, lolprjv (fifi 50, 54), and the compound
forms, eTiiftoiprjv, avv&olp.riv, i. 9. 7, Tiyootpyv, Ib. 10. So even
for xQifjaia&t, Ar. Vesp. 298 ; ^Qvol^tf^it for
, L 513; and dyloiTt for dylsnf, PI. Apol. 29 d.
4. In a few instances, verbs in -vp.i, instead of inserting a connecting vowel
in the Subj. and Opt., simply lengthen the u (cf. ^ 177) ; as, ^ia.trx.i%a.vvvei,
liot.ffx.iba.vvv'roc.i for $iu,(rx.-ovvvy, $ia<rxi$avvvt;'rou, PI. Phiedo, 77 b, d ; v'/fyvOrt
for -xvywoiTo, Ib. 118 a. Add the poet. ixK^tm II. 99, fun Theoc. 1 5. 94,
Itz'tvvro 11. 665, 2u,ivua,ro (for -Svra} <r. 248 ; and the similarly formed <p^j
*. 51, Qfflra \. 330.
$ 227. IV. SECOND AORIST. The 2 Aor. from a pure
root retains the primitive nude form, whatever may be. the
form of the theme (^ 185. y} ; as, t6r)v, uTifdyuv, lyvotv, Zdvv
(H 57 .
NOTES. K. Except t-riav (cf. 205, 208. 2, 3), which yet has the Imp.
rift.
/3. A few roots are transposed, in order to admit the nude form ; thus,
, to dry up, 2 A. (r. ffx,o,X- } 0-xXa-) ?o-xXy, Opt. 0-*X/jv, Inf. 0-x.Xn-
i Ar. Vesp. 160.
y. We add a list of nude 2 Aorists, which may not be hereafter mentioned ;
aw, to break, 2 A. Part. xXaj Anacr. Fr. 16; xXw'w, to hear, poet. 2 A.
AFFIXES OF C ^NTUGATION. [BOOK II
Imp. K\.vfa A. 37, Ear. Hipp. 872, xXun B. 56, ^Esch. Cho. 399, redupL
xixXijSt K. 284, xiic^vrt F. 86 ; \uea, to loose, 2 A. M. Xw^v <1>. 80, Xvrt
114, At/vro H. 16 ; Qua, to produce, 2 A. tyvv, Cyr. ii. 1. 15, Sufi;. Qua, Opt,
<t>tw ( 226. 4), Inf. Qvveti, Part. <f>vs.
REMARKS UPON PARTICULAR VERBS.
4>iftut, to say.
[IT 53.]
228. (a) In certain connections, Quftt, tQw, and tyj are shortened,
for the sake of vivacity, to ^/, v, and thus, v S' ly&, aatdf /, Ar. Eq. 634 ;
jf $' o?, said he, PI. Rep. 327 b, c 5 J, Ae s/jaAe, A. 219; r7, ^/, srr, <rr,
6oy/ / say, 6oy / 6oy/ Ar. Nub. 1145. (6) The 2 Pers. sing, of the Pres.
ind. is commonly written q>ys, as if contracted from <pa,u's. For 'ityna-fa, m
the Imp., see 182. (c) To the forms in the table, may be added the Ep.
Pres. M. PI. 2 $ii(r6i x. 562, Imp. Quo -r. 168, <$a.<r6u v. 1OO, $0.061 I. 422
(//. <p<r4a/ A. 187, ^Esch. Pers. 700); Pf. P. S. 3 riQurou Ap. Rh. 1.
988, Part. re<p<r<e*5v$, 3. 127.
"/^i, to send.
ft*.]
^ 92O. (a) Many of the forms of this verb occur only in composi-
tion. (6) Of the contract forms ta.<n and h7<ri (for 7-v<r/, <r/, 58), the
former is preferred in the Attic, and the latter in the Ionic, (c) The Impf.
form Inv, which occurs only in composition (-r^aniv i. 88, fi<p!uv PI. Euthyd.
293 a), seems either to have come from "jv (which is of doubtful occurrence)
by precession, or to have been formed after the analogy of "us, 7u, or of thi
Plup. (d) For the Opt. forms ia'iftnv and o'tpw, the latter of which can be
employed only in composition, see 226. 3. (e) In the dialects, we find
forms from the simpler themes '/ and 'lu thus, Impf. tyvtov A. 27;J, Imp.
gywi Theog. 1240, Pf. P. Part, ^s^s-n^vfl,- Hdt. v. 1O8 ( 69. a, 192. 3;
cf. p'.fAihixei, Anacr. Fr. 7S) ; Pr. avsov-ra* Hdt. ii. 165. In the S. S. we
find 4>i Mk. 1. 34, tyilt Rev. 2. 20, Pf. P. ^iwvra, Mt. 9. 2, 5.
Elpl, to be.
[IT 55.]
In the Present and Imperfect of this verb, the
radical syllable e-,
1.) Before a vowel, unites with it ; thus, (-j>on, t-ixai, 58)
f ial ' (f'-w) w, (i-n?) V." (e-inv) ei'rjv.
2.) Before rr, becomes o (cf. ^ 203, 206) ; thus, (I--VTS,
o'-fTs, ^ 109) wV, Imp. (t-vifav) OVTUV (less used than tie other
forms, PI. Leg. 879 b).
3.) In other cases, is lengthened, as follows.
.) It becomes tJ in the forms tipi, iTf, 7, iTv< (cf. 218. /S, 224. E).
The form J, both here and in 1| 56, is either shortened from iTf (which is not
used by the Attics), or is a middle form employed in its stead.
/3.) In the remaining forms of the Pres., it assumes f (compare 221) ;
CH. 9.1 COMPLETE TENSES.
thus, i-ff-fti^ l-tr-ri t t-<r-r, 7-<r-r<w, f-<r-r<w(rv, l-f-rav ( 213. N.). After
the -, the T in the 3d Pers. sing, is retained ; thus, t-<r-r/. Before the a, i in
the 2d Pers. sing, of the Imperative becomes I by precession (cf. 118);
thus, 1-ff-6t.
y.) In the Impf. it becomes , and may likewise assume <r before r ; thus,
, HTI or rather n-ff-n. The Old-Att. form of the 1st Pers. (Ar. Av. 1 363),
and the 3d Pers. ^v, appear to have been contracted from and v (cf. 1 79,
201. N., 211. N.). For frfe, see 182. The middle form fyw is lidle
used by the more classic writers (Cyr. vi. 1. 9). The Imp. r, which follows
the analog}- of the Impf., occurs but once in the classic writers (PI. Rep.
361 c.), and is there doubtful.
REMARKS, a. In the Fut., instead of ifftrm, the Attics always use the
nude form loroti.
b. Some regard the root of this verb as being If-, and adduce in support of
this view, the Lat. (esum) sum, es, est, (e)sumus, estis, (e)sunt, and the San-
scrit asmi, asi, asti, &c.
Elpi, to go.
[IT 56.]
23 1. (a) The Pres. of tipi has commonly in the Ind., and some-
times hi the other modes, the sense of the Fut. ( 200. b); thus, fai, (I am
going] I will go. (6) For jfe/v, in the Plup., the common Attic form was ?,
which appears to be a remnant of the old formation noticed in 203. N. ' A
Perf. i7, corresponding to this Plup., nowhere appears, and some regard fan
(omitting the subsc.) as an Impf. doubly augmented (^ 189). For the use
of this tense, see 233. (c) For toipi and toittv, see 205 ; for 7-r/wv, 213.
N. ; for iivxt, luv, and tovruv, 208. 2 ; for yiurSci, ^ 182 ; for t>nv in the
3d Pers., 21 1. N. ; for faiv, $n, &c., $ 237. ' (d) The middle forms "tpat,
Up** are regarded by some of the best critics as incorrectly written
from "vpu (^ 54).
to He down.
[IT 60.]
233. (a) This verb appears to be contracted from xiifioti, a de-
ponent inflected like r/Vs^aw (^ 50) ; thus, x.itpu,i xt7/u.a,i, xiivreti xiTvrai, xiifft
In the Subj. and Opt. the contraction is commonly omitted ; thus, xiuftai,
(Ec. 8. 1 9, xtoifAw, iv. 1 . 1 6, like <ri6u>p.Ki (also accented T/Va/^a*) and <ri6oi-
tiw yet xtjrxi (also written xt7rxi\ for xi^Ttti, T. 32, /3. 102. (6) The
Subj. sometimes retains the form of the Ind. ( 177) ; as, Subj. $/axe/^/ PI.
Phsedo, 84 e. (c) We find the following forms in the dialects, some of which
have the shorter root xs- : Pres. S. 2 xiTeu Horn. Merc. 254, S. 3 xitrai Hdt.
vi. 139, PI. '3 x'w X. 510, xtiurut H. 527, *f 7 j A. 659, Hdt. i. 14;
Impf. PI. 3 Ixt'ictro Ap. Rh. 4. 1295, Kiia.ro Q. 418, ixixre Hdt. i. 167, xixrt
N. 763 ; Fut. KtirtofMu Theoc. 3. 53 ( 200. 3); old Pres. as Fut. ( 200. b)
xie, . 342, xtia r. 340. (d) Some of the best grammarians regard xtTpeu
as a Perf. having the sense of the Pres. ( 233).
D. COMPLETE TENSES.
^233. I. In some verbs, the sense of the complete
204 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK li
tenses, by a natural transition (see Syntax), passes into that or
other tenses ; and the PERFECT becomes, in signification, a
Present ; the PLUPERFECT, an Imperfect, or Aorist ; and the
FUTURE PERFECT, a common Future. Thus, \otii fjn (fl 48), to
station, Pf. tajyxa, (I have stationed myself) I stand, Plup. karr,
*nr, I stood, F. Pf. iorijSoj, I shall stand ; -u/^vijaxw, to remind,
Pf. P. (MpnyfUHi (I have been reminded) I remember, Plup. fy-
(ivypiivi I remembered, F. Pf. pep^uoiiai, / sAa// remember ;
Plup. JW (fl 56), I went.
REMARK. In a few of these verbs, the Pres. is not used, and the PERF. ia
regarded as the theme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the theme,
are termed PRETERITIVE. See ^ 58, 59.
234. II. MODES. 1. The PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE and
OPTATIVE are commonly supplied by the Participle with the
auxiliary verb sipl (fl 55, 169. /J) ; thus, Pf. Act. Sui;. /fc-
a), Op2. fitSovfavxtog ei'yv ' Pf. P. 5w^/. foSoVltvptvof &),
s efyv.
REMARKS. . Sometimes, however, the Perf. forms these modes according
to the general rules ( 204, 205, &c.), chiefly when it is employed as a
Pres.; as, iffrtxtu, vi. 5, 10, Itrru, PI. Gorg. 468 b, \traiw, T. 101 (J 48),
iriruh'w ( 20.5. ), }i*j' (f 58), Rep. Ath. 1. 11 ; tlltyufn PL Pol.
269 c, vtvruKoi v. 7. 26, /^exw'xa/sv Th. ii. 48, vuruwu Id. viii. 108.
/S. In the Per/*, pass., these modes are formed in only a few pure verbs,
and in these without a fixed analogy ; thus,
, to call; Pf. P. x.ix.Xn^xi, I have been called, I am named, Opt.
(xsxA-/-/ttjv) xsxA^jjv, *Xja Soph. Ph. 1 1 9, xi*XT#, &c.
to acquire; Pf. xtxriyiuu, F have acquired, I possess, Svbj. (KIX-TO.-
u-pni) KiKTUftctt, xiKTy, xtxryreti Syrnp. 1.8; Opt. (xs*T-/- / ttjy) xtx'rf l /u.tiv t
xiicrrie, xiKryro PI. Leg. 731 C, Or (xixra-a/'-^^y) XSXTA/^JJ*, xix-ruo, xixrtpra
Ages. 9. 7.
piftviifMi ( 233), 5Wi/. fttpwiu.*!, PI. Phil. 31 a, -Opt. ptftiyfmii H. 745,
fjbifjt,v7>Ta Ar. Plut. 991, or fAiftwfAiiv, ptftvuo (or fti/u,v<no) i. 7. 5, ftiftvZra
Cyr. i. C%3.
For Ko.Snfta.i, see f 59. Add SWy. /JiffxW* Andoc. 22. 41, rir/uWc* PL
Uep. 564 c ; O/^. XiXJJ <r. 238 (cf. 226. 4).
2. The Perfect, in its -proper sense, may have the
IMPERATIVE in the '3d Pers. pass. ; but, otherwise, this mode
belongs only to those Perfects which have the sense of the
Pres. ; and, even in these, the Imperative active is scarcely
found except in the nude form of the 2d Perf. ( 237, 288) ;
yet nvai/F, xfxpa'/frf (^ 238. /?), yt'yMv* Eur. Or. 1220, peGi)-
Luc. de Hist. Scrib. 45, t'oixt'zeu Ib. 49.
236. III. VOWKL CHANGES. The utlixns in -, -uv of
CH. 9.] COMPLETE TENSES. 205
the SECOND PERFECT and PLUPERFECT are annexed with the
following changes in the preceding syllable.
1.) e becomes o, and si becomes <u ; as, pivw, to remain,
2 Pf. [tsfjiova ' fo'^xopai, to see, poet., dsdogxa ' faino), liloina
(11 37) ; TK/tfai, ninoida (fl 39).
NOTES, (a) The same changes take place in the 1st Perf. and Plup.
of a few verbs ; as, xXivrtu, to steal, xixXoftt r^'i-ru, to turn, rirgotyct vri/u,-
**>, to send, ^riro^at Vtloix.* (\ 58). (6) Analogous to the change of i
into e, is that of into u in pvyvupi, to break, V Pf. ippuyu. (c) In the fol-
lowing Perfects, there appears to be an insertion of o or u (} 222. ft) : ctyco,
to It-ail, a.yrto-^et (^ 191. 2), Dem. 239. 1, i/r0iu, to eat, i^oxet, iv. 8. 20 (Ep.
Pf. P. &$3/u4u, %. 56'), uuSa. (r. sV-), to be wont, preteritive, o'!%ux.a, ( 22i :i).
(d) In the following dialectic forms, the change or insertion of vowels lias
extended to the passive: a.<p'iuvrou ( 229. e) ; ciuaro y. 272, Theoc. 24. 43,
for $i(><ro or jj^Ts, Plup. S. :i of cciigu or a/'^iw, to raise; i-ru^etTo M. 340, Plup.
PI. 3 Of ii^ i^ 0/ tai (N. c).
2.) Short , t, or u, before a single consonant, is lengthrned
(ft, not preceded by * or p, 29, becoming r y ) ; as, qpu/ro), TIS-
] 42 ; r. qpw*'-) ; ^AAa, ^o bloom, Tk&rjhut ' ayvtyii (r. /-),
break, siiyui jc^^o, xix^/ (^ 238. /5) ; x6x^I/ (r. x^i/ ),
creak, pret. 5 ftv*a&pat (r. ^uux-), io bellow,
EXCEPTIONS. After the Attic reduplication, the short vowel remains ; as,
$ 191. 2). In KKITX.U (r. Xx-), to sound, a. is not changed into
in the Att. ; thus, 2 Pf. ;uxxa, Ar. Ach. 410 (xUj*a, X. 141).
IV. NUDE FORMS. In the SECOND PERFECT and
PLUPERFECT, the connecting vowel is sometimes omitted in the
Indicative plural and dual ( 186). When this omission takes
place, (a) the Ind. sing, is commonly supplied by forms from
a longer base (cf. 201. N.); which forms likewise occur in
the plural and dual, but less frequently ; (b) the Subj., Opt.,
Imp., and Inf. are formed after the analogy of verbs in -//t ;
(c) the Part, is contracted, if the characteristic is or o,
Thus,
Pf. Ind. Sing. <Wjx (^ 48 ; r. <rra-, base i<rra-, prolonged to IO-TJ?*-,
186), Wj*af,. tffrvx.'., PL iffrd-ftiv PI. Gorg. 468 b, and rarely Ifrr^a^sv,
t<r<r*-T, (tffrot-vffi, \vrdc,-a.<ri, 58) tffrHirt (i-jrwxciffi A. 434) ; Subj. (itrra.-u}
irr*i,and ifTr,xM Opt. Irretimv (poet.) ; Imp. 'iffra.-Si (poet.) Ar. Av. 2Of> ;
Inf. Efl-rava/ iv. 7. 9 ', Part. Ep. t<r<r-iu;, -flTaj T. 79 (also itrrvas Hes. Til.
519), commonly contr. \<j<rus (^ 22. 8) i. :3. 2, (I^Tar-fl-T^a) s<rr<r, ^I<r7-a-
e-j; iffTtus and sometimes, by syncope, \<rros PI. Parm. 146 a, Ion. ivr'.ui
( 48. 1), .re s Hdt. ii. 38 ; also iem**; PI. Meno, 93 d. Plup. Sing. !<rr-
< or /Wjx/y, -/j, -e/, /*/. iffr&-p,tv t iffra-n, t<rra,-fttv i. 5. 13 (itrrvixiffa,*
Cyr. viii. 3. 9).
3v5<rxw, to rf/e (r. ^y-, &-, 64), Pf. Ind. Sing, rifanxct (base n^va-,
TtfvnK.}, -ay, - t , /*/. r^va^Ev PI. Gorg. 492 e, Tf^vart, TiSvnffi iv. 2. 17, Z>M.
T^VT iv. 1. 19 ; Subj. rfl*'x, Th. viii. 74 ; Opt. r^v;iv, Cyr. iv. 2. 3 ;
18
CO"; AFF1XKS OF COX.JltfiATTON. . [BOOK II
Imp. ritvatt X. 365, <r<Jva>rio PL Leg. 933 e, &c. ; Inf. r0vv/ Mem. i. 2.
16, ri6vDx,i*u.i Soph. Aj 474, and Poet. (Vs^va-e-va/) rs^vava< ^Esch. Ag. 539
Part. rtSvnxus (fern. X 734), Ttfva,-tus, Find. Nem. 10. )39, commonly contr.,
with t inserted (cf. 35, 4. l), rtfatia;, -uffo,, -us or -os, vii. 4. 19, <r. 331,
Ep. nSvnias or rsfatitus, -are? or -rf, . 289, P. 435. Plup. Sing. inSw-
<v, -us, ~<j Pl> TVva ( 6csv, -T, -tf"v H. Gr. vi. 4. 16.
Pf. Ind. Sing, Itiotxa, Cyr. i. 4. 12, and Vttia, Soph. CEd. C. 1469 (f 58 ,
base $$;-, ltbotx.-\ ^otxas and $$<?, SfSwxi and li%n. PL $t$(ftiv Th. iii. 53,
$$m, (JiJi, 58) ^idffi PL Apol. 29 a; Subj. 2i3/ Imp. littt, Ar.
Vesp. 373 ; Inf. 2ihivai ( 208. 3) Rep. Ath. 1.11, and 2i$oixi*cci Eur. Sup.
548 ; Part. ^id>s PL Prot. 320 a (contr. or sync, tutrittt Ap. Rh. 3. 753),
and li&oixus Eur. Ion, 624. Plup. Sing, l^o'ixtiv PL Charm. 175 a, and
t^^itiv, -us, -ii PI. ^5/^s, titdin, iSibiiruv PL Leg. 685 C (t&i$ot*tffetv Jii.
5. 18).
Pf. Ind. Sing. ofta. (J 58 ; base ^-, /^-), 7^ (for a TS-^, 182 ; Jfia.,
scarce occurs in the Att., yet Eur. Ale. 780 ; the Att. poets, by a mingling
of forms, sometimes use !><>? Eur. Ion, 999), otit PL (ft-pi, 53) f<r^
ii. 4. 6, (73-7-6, 5'J) ?<rr, (i^-viri, the J becoming r in imitation of the other
persons) 7<ra*v, and rarely o'tiaftiv PL Ale. 141 e, o^r, oHoLvt' Imp. (7S-&)
"<r^ ii. 1. 13. Plup. Sing, fin*, PI. 'fiupiv, &c., and poet, (p-^gi/) yo-fti* Eur.
Hec. 1 1 1 2, (p-<rs) ^re, (S-<rv) ytr'av ^Esch. Prom. 451.
Plup. Sing. $iiv (f 56), ^s/j, yti, PI. yupiv, -TS, commonly ^tv PL Rep.
328 b, TE vii. 7. 6, <ra Cyr. iv. 5. 55, sometimes Ion. ytrav r. 445, Hdt.
ii. 163.'
In the following examples, the nude forms are
chiefly poetic, and, in part, Epic only.
. PURE. a.Ki<rd.tu, to dine ; Pf. PI. 1 ^/VrS^iv Ar. Fr. 428, Inf.
Ath. 423 a. In imitation of these comic forms, we find also, from $r<w, to
mp, ttti'w&ftiv and SE$S/TVV/ Ath. 422 e, Ar. Fr. 243.
/3/va>, to go; Pf. /3tjx (r. /3-), 2 Pf PI. poet.
B. 134, 0t& Soph. El. 136 ; Subj. PI. 3 faSS-i PI. Phajdr. 252 e ; Inf.
/3ify< Eur. Heracl. 610, Hdt. iii. 146, Part. Ep. /SsSa^j, -i/r, -ra;, E.
I9R. H. 81, Att. contr. /Ss^j, -Z<r, -Zros, Soph. Ant. 67, 996, (Ed. C. 314,
H. Gr. vii. -'. M, PL Phaedr. 254 b. 2 Plup. PI. iiapf, -, -^ B. 720.
/3/^<r*<w, <o ea< ; 1 IY. /3j^**a (r. /3 ? -), 2 Pf. Part. (/SC ? -f) /Sc^f,
-WTSJ," Sonh. Ant. 1022.
ylyvopat (r. y-, 7-, 7/yv-), to become ; 2 Pf. -j/syova, poet. /Y. S? yiyaaen
(Ep. for yiyan , Hum. Batr. 143, 3 ytyaa^v A. 4 1 ; Inf. ytya^tv (Ep.
for yiyav/) E. 248; Part. Ep. yiya^f, -w, -WTO;, T. 1$;9, I. 456, Att
COntr. ytyeuf, -u<ra,, -uros, Eur. Ale. 532, 677. Plup. Du. 3 <ytya<rv *. I '8
fj.iu.tfti. (r. ^*-, A*I-, ^ 236. 1), to be eager, pret., K. ^H2, ^lu'jvaj ^Esch.
Sept. CH6, ^t^ovi Soph. Tr. 982, />/. ^t^a^ix I. 64 I, ^i^an II. 160, ^i-
ttddrt K. 208, 7>M. ^iftaroy 0. 413; Imp. S. 3 ftiudru A. 304 ; Part. ,u-
^a^;, -i/r, -*T9f, A. 40, 440, 0. 118, and ^ittafii;, -Ty, II. 754, B
818. Plup. PL 3 ^arav H. 863.
<r<W<u, <o /a//; 1 Pf. <riTTx (r. WTI-, rr-) ; 2 Pf. Part. .Ep. *frrt*s
-Zrof, 0. 503, and wr-ma;, -via, -OTS and -uref, t. 98, Ap. Rh. 2. 832
Att. contr. -rtrrui, -vros, Soph. Ant. G97, 1018.
TtrXflxa (r. rX-), to /ear, pret., /'/. TirXa^tv t/. 311 ; Imp. rirXa^ A-
CII. 9.] COXT-LETE TENSES. 207
586; Inf. -rirXa^iv (Ep. for TjTXy<) y. 209; Part. rtrXw;, -via., -oros,
v. 23, E. 873.
/3. IMTURK. In the nude forms of the first four verbs mentioned below,
<r passes into $, after the analogy either of the 2d Pers. sing., or of the
objective inflection.
Zwyct, to command, poet, preteritive, PL a,vuy/tiv Horn. Ap. 5?S ; Imp.
ivuyi Eur. Or. 1 19, and uvurft Id. Ale. 1044, uvuiy'i &. 1 95, and (a.vuy<ru)
u.iux,6u A. 189, PL a,vuyiri ^. 132, civu%0t Eur. Here. 241.
x<w, commonly 2 Pf xixgdyu., to cry; Imp. xix*%0t Ar. Vesp. 198,
PL xixotiyin Ib. 415, and x'ix.pa.-^h Ar. Ach. 3:35.
iy'l^w, to rouse; 2 Pf. \y^r,yeoa. Imp. PL 2 ly^ya^i 2. 299 ; Inf. iy/>n~
yo^ai (as if from lyptyfffuct) K. 67.
<jrei(r%w, to suffer; 2 Pf. OTETOV^Z, PL 2 (srsVov^rs, vrirovff'rt, 52, iT
55) *i*o<r0t l\ 99, x. 465.
toixa, to be like, pret. (base */*-, t/x-, 191. 3, 236. l), PJ. trag.
Soph. Aj. 1239, Z>M. Ep. lirn J. 27, Plup. ifxr*)* A. 104.
t%eftxi, to come; 2 Pf. iXX^, Ep. P/. 1 i<X^Xai/^v (47. N.) 7. 81.
vivoiftt, to trust (<| 39; base WST/^-, rg*^-, rsT/^-, 236. l); Imp.
trag. <rsTW* ^Esch. Eum. 599; Plup. Ep. PL 1 e-rsV/fym B. 341.
V. FUTURE PERFECT, or THIRD FUTURE. The
Fut. Perf. unites the base of the Perf. with the affixes of the
buc. act. and mid. ; as, (IdT/jx-acu, fl 48) cazTjIw, (ytyywqp-voftaii
|, 36) yfyQuyonat.
KEJLVRKS. 1. The Fut. Perf. is scarcely found in liquid verbs, or in verbs
.eginning with a vowel (ntyv^triytSu.i Pind. Nem. 1. 104, t'lgnffoftett, ^ 53, Cyr.
vii. 1 . 9), and is frequent in those verbs only in which it has the sense of the
common future ( 233).
2. (a) Of the Fut. Perf. act., the only examples in Attic prose are ia-r^a
and n6vyfea t both formed from Perfects having the sense of the Pres., jW?x
and riforixa, ( 233, 237), and both giving rise to middle forms of the same
signification ( 166. 2), ttrrrfco/tcu and t i0vr l %/>p.ai. (6) Other examples of a
reduplicated Fut. in the active voice are nrofau Ar. Pax, 381, and the Ep.
KX-tt^ffea, Hom. Merc. 286, xixuSwffea, <p. 153, TriTrtSrio'u X. 223, xi^x^a-u,
O. 98 (also xixur l ffop.xi, $. 266), all from verbs which have reduplicated
2 Aorists ( 194. 3). (c) Other examples of the Fut. Perf. mid. with the
Perf. act., are xix.Xa.yya., xix*.a.yo/u,cu Ar. Vesp. 930, xfxg&ya,, xtxgd%e/u.eu
Ar. Ran. 265, **$, xtxu.2vfop,a.i, 0. 353. (d) An example of a redupli-
cated Fut. mid. with a reduplicated 2 Aor. is <ri^<re^a. t , 0. 215.
24O. VI. The student will observe, in respect to the
complete tenses, the following particulars, which are far more
striking in the Act. than in the Pass, voice ( 256) ; 1. their
defective formation ; 2. the entire want of these lenses in many
verbs ; 3. the comparative infrequency of their use ; and 4. their
more frequent occurrence in the later than in the earlier
writers.
208 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II,
DIALECTIC FORMS.
A, CONTRACTION.
\) 2 4t I Forms which are contracted in the Att. (and which are also
commonly contracted in the Dor., but often with a different vowel of contrac-
tion) mure frequently remain uncontracted in Ion. prose, while the Ep. has
great freedom in the employment of either uncontracted, contracted, or variously
protracted forms. Here belong, Contract Verbs in -*/, -<&>, and- ( 216),
the Liquid, Att., and Dor. Fut. ( '200), the Aor. Pass. Subj. ( 199), the
Subj. of Verbs in -ftt (^ 226), and the 2d Pers. Sing, in -< and -o ( -210
3). In these forms, the first vowel is either (I.) , (II.) t or , or (III.) *
Of these, t or is far the most frequently uncontracted.
243. I. The first vowel . (a.) In the Ion., the is commonly
contracted or changed into t ( 44. 2) ; and when with an O vowel is con-
tracted into u, t is often inserted ( 48. 1, cf. 35). Thus we find, as va-
rious readings, cguvns, o^savrsj, and ogieavTi;, Hdt. i. R'J, 99. So luga/as*
i. 120, u^ir>[jt,tv ii. 1:51, xgu.aSa.t vii. 141, %grjtr0a.i ( 3.'?. ) i. 47, ^t^a-fa.1
1.57, \%(>suvro 53, X>^ u (for %ociou) 1.55, if/iii%a.viat.'ro (for l,a>j^avaavTa, one t
dropped; see 248. 2, 248, /) v. 6:5 Subj. of Verbs in -pi, Stma^tla
iv. 97, 2 Aor. xrsa^sv or xricu^^ %. 216, for xruuf&tv, contr. KTfuft.iv (see also
b. below).
NOTE. In the 2 Pers., the termination -aa commonly remains ; as, \w*~
OHO Hdt. i. 117, \fltvM vii. 209.
(b.) In the Ep., protracted forms are made by doubling the vowel of con-
traction, either in whole, or in part (i. e. by inserting one of its elements, or
its corresponding short vowel, commonly e with <w, and a with a, 4rt) ; and
sometimes by prolonging a short vowel, particularly t used for a to ; as,
c, contr. o^u T. 234, protracted o^ou E. '/4'1, o^as/y a^aj A. 202, gaf
II. 448, oo,u>v oguv E. 87 -', o^out A. 350, o^'outrat A. 9, ou*0oti X. 156,
Of>iiu.'jdtti -r. 1O7, ogayn A. 347, u.vri'ouHra.v A. 31, -^;aX B. '_'!>3, a^^aXa-
y 297, 1/u.vaovro 6'f<6, yXwvTi-- a*. 40, ysAaJavTEy 111, aXow , Imp. for aAt^
-w) i. 377 ; fA\>a,a.ff6a.t a.. 39, fAtvaivuu N. 79 (^iva/viay M. 59), ^<w^<r< . 324 ;
tguatftt 317, vZcaiifAi II. 157 (viZiufu 13:<), (' ftveiio, p.vo.fu, p.vu) fivuit Ap. Ilh.
1. H9f), va/JTa,w<r>j T. 387 ; (Aivaiwr,<rt O. S ', for ^svo/vaji, *^a/i I. 2():<, for
*t ? ai- Att. Pnt.U**r< N. 315, j.'319, sXaav i. '290 (see '200. 2); * ? s^a
H. 83: 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -p,, mfpi P. 30, c-rw E. 598, r<V O.
297 (<rT^ A. 348), r<rW< P. 95, rnlT <r. 183; 'ySs/w Z. 113, for
(^ 57), /5 ? I. 501, /SuVtv K. 97 (ftiufuv Hdt. vii. 50. -2).
NOTES. 1 . is not prefixed, when the flexible ending begins with r ; aa
in a'^a-Ti, 9ja-r<. Yet "cLareti Hes. Sc. 1O1, for T< ( being resolved into
da, 2!);.
2. We also find in Ion. prose, in imitntion of the Ep., Kipnuai licit, iv. 191,
vi. 11. So Dor. KOftotntv-ri Theoc. 4. 57.
(c.) The Dor. sometimes contracts with an O sound following into a
and commonly a with an E sound following into * (ij 45. 1, 4) ; as, TS<VVT.
Theoc. 15, 148, ^ t a.-riivufci t Ar. Ach. 751 ; 1 Aor. Sing. 2 i*-a Theoc. 4
28, for iTjga, -, iig Ar. Ach. 913 ; roX^^f Theoc. 5. 35, X^ 64, c^.Tt 1 10
ny^y Ar. Ach. 77H, \^UTVI 800. The latter contraction appears in some Ion
prose-writers (as Hipp. ; so 9-t//*/?ri Hdt iv. 7.5) ; and in the Ep. often \
CH. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS. 209
343 (written by some ?*/, as if from %v*<\ and in the Du. forms,
Sa'rflv A. 136, ffvXJrvr N. 202, <ryavmW *r. 3:53, Qoirjrw M. 266.
243. II. The first vowel t or *. (a.) In Ion. prose, contraction
is commonly omitted, except as to and tou often become tv ', as, Trotiu lldt. i.
38, vroii.il} 39, ira/i 22, -roitofAivog 73, votiv/u,svos 68, vonutri 131, vouvpu.
afytvfttvos ix. 11 ; Fut. trvpaviu Ib. i. 75, xggSamj; 35, l^a/v 5 ; Aor. Subj
a-ritio'Jiu Ib. iii. 65, Quviafft i. 41, &(n iv. 71 (see '226. l) ; 2 Pers. /3aw-
Xia/, riugfa* Ib. i. 90, tyma 35, lh vii. 209.
NOTES. 1. In like manner, a, used for 0.0 ( 242. a), may become v ; as,
ugvnvv Hdt. iii. 140, tigurtvvrets 62 (tl^eariuvTOf v. 13). So in the Dor.,
fyu-Ttvv TV -SOC. i. 81, 7XtJvr< 90, for ysXaaye-*, &C.
2. If a is followed by another distinct vowel, one is often dropped ; a%
f 0?ii, <pasa Hdt. vii. 52 (<pa& i. 9), for QoSiieti, <poS'na. So Ep. Uxi II.
202, -rwXfa or r<wX/ $.811. A similar omission of o appears in avaxamj
Theog. 73.
3. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. extends the 2 Aor. Inf.
in -iIV, as if formed by contraction, to -<;v ; as, /$<, ra^ss/v Hdt. i. 32, <pu-
7!/ 1, B. 393 (^/yi7 401), <r//v A. 363.
4. The Ion. often renders impure verbs pure, by the insertion of its favorite
t (48. l) ; as, ffUf^SxXX'.o^ivos (cf. <rimX>.<r<9) Hdt. i. 68, ivti%n 118, ctyto-
iii. 14, ivbvviou'Ti 98.
(b.) The Ep. commonly omits contraction if the last vowel is u, u, a/, or eu
^except in the Aor. pass, subj., and in the Perf. subj. tllu) ; but otherwise
employs or omits it according to the metre (to, when contracted, becoming iu ;
yet \-roo6ouv A. 308, vsp^W*wv v. 78). Synizesis is frequent when i pre-
cedes a long vowel, and sometimes occurs in m, and even in MI, The Ep.,
also, often protracts t to it, and sometimes doubles the vowel of contraction >j.
Thus, Qtxioi o. 305 (yet p/Xa/w 3. 692, and $oo'tti i- 320), <p/X^^sv 6. 42, olx'iot-
ro A. 18, vrtin6w(Aiv X. 381, iftu A. 515, id( v. 236 ; ^/X? B. 197, <p<-
X/ I. 342, if^u P. 86, Ifiu N. 539, try r. 254, ^ ( j A. 563, t rfft eu 2. 95,
Jf<ro-a/ ^. 33, yvft!^ B. 367, yv<w<r>) 365 ; /ui/^rai ^. ISO (pottoi or pvtiy
|3. 202, 243. a. 2), v7; X. 114, for pvftieu, nt.t - i*\io X. 281, jf^rXtw
T. 69, 0gs E. 440, ^^v 5. 395, xaXav A. 477, xaX?av ^. 550, xuXwra
B. 6H4 ; viixsi&i A. 359, irtXliim A. 5, I^CM^MI 62, s^s/a A. 611, -sr7 K.
285 , Aor. Pass. Subj. Setfttia <r. 51, ,!;!? F. 4.56, $etf&r,y X. 246, io^Mj'M*
H. Ti 1 ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in .fu, &/ n. 83 ($j* Hdt. i 108 , Su',,,
. S4J, Si/ ? 30 i, av>j! B. 34, Siupsv a. 485, &s/p(y A. 143, Stiopeu 2. 409.
(c,) For the Dor. contraction of a and aw into tv, and, in the stricter Dor.,
ot % into n, see 45. 3, 44. 4 ; e. g. 1X1711; Theoc. 1. 86, ^a^t/ 113,
uftx^nw 2.73, tuira. 76; vroin Ar. Lys. 1318. So, in Horn., ofiugrvw
N. 534, KKtiXri'rtiv X. 313.
REMARKS, a. Some varieties of the Dor. change a into 10 or iu, and <
into / ; as, ftoyioftts Ar. Lys. 100'2, ofAiupiQot, 183, bniifS* 198, for fAoyioftiv,
-Ot/f/.iV, OfAOUftiffoi, i-TTKIVOJ.
/3. The later Dor., from the influence of analogy ( 44. 1, 248. d), haa
sometimes * for , in verbs in - ; as, qn\&<ru Theoc. 3. 1 9, $ 5. 1 1 8
So. Aor. Pass. t<-*-v Id. 4. 53.
18*
210 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. | BOOK II.
$ 344. III. The first vowel . (a.) Here the Ton. and Dor. usually
employ contraction, following the common rules, except that the Ion. some*
times uses iu for au, and the Dor. u and u for ov and 01 (S 44. 4, 45. 3) ; as,
^ix.a.nua-1 Hdt. i. 133, iSatei'sai \'i. 15, o/*s<wvra/ i. 4, ar<Q.viiivra.i viii. 59;
VTVW* Ar. Lys. J43, pao-ri'yuv Epich. 19 (1). The Dor. u is likewise used
by other dialects in fiy'ou, to be cold, and in the Ion. /^<w, to sweat ; as, piyai
Ar. Vesp. 446 (piyovv Cyr. v. 1. 11), piy* PI. Gorg. 517 d; ;^^/ A. ,598.
(b.) The Ep. sometimes protracts the o to u, and sometimes employs the
combination after the analogy of verbs in - ; as, /^wavra 2. 372, <$-
9Vff A. 119, b"TvaJavraf e. 48 ; a.^ouirit /. 108, "Sn't'ouvro N. 675, r/ioa/sv S. 226;
2 Aor. Subj of Verbs in -fu, yvuu %. 118, a.Xuu \. 405, $<uy p. 216, luy<rn
A. 324 (Sf<r/ 129), luopiv H. 299 (^s T. 537), ^uuffiv A. 'l37.
B. TKNSE-SIGNS.
1. In verbs in -%,&, the Dor. commonly employs | for 0-, in
the Fut. and Aor. ; as, xa#i%us Theoc. 1. 12, for x^*V? from x4/, %etgiz*i
5. 71, ixofti^av Find. N. 2. 31. This change appears also in a few other
verbs in which short a, precedes; as, ysA.|y Theoc. 7. 42, i'<p&*g 2. 115,
from ytXeiw ( 219. a), Q0d.vu ( 278). Similar forms sometimes occur in
other poets besides the Dor., for the sake of the metre ; as, -ipT^/|a/t*{a
jEsch. Sup. 39, $*// Ar. Lys. 380, !x<pAy|a< (<p*.vu) Ap. Rh. 1. 275.
2. In the Fut. act. and mid., the Dor. commonly adds to the tense-sign i,
which is then contracted with the connecting vowel ; as, (&/) <*,*> Theoc.
1. 145, (dffiofteci, 45. 3) <asy^ai 3. 38, vroffi7< 3. 9, agj) 1. 11, vt^tT 6.
31, li^itTui Call. Lav. 116, y^X/ls/Vs Ar. Ach. 746, r/fa?<r^i 745, for
&<ru, airofActi, &c. See 200. 3.
3. The Ep. employs the Att. Fut. ( 200. 2), both uncontracted, contracted,
and protracted; and has also other examples of the Fut. with <r dropped (or
of the Pres. used as Fut.) ; as, a.vuu A. 365, tyovri 454, %ivu /3. 2-^2. So
ixyfyuovrai (from Pf. base yt-yet-, see 238. , 239. c) Horn. Ven. 198.
4. The formation of the 1 Aor. without 9 is extended, (a) in the Ion. and
poet, language, to a very few liquids, in which the characteristic is preceded
by a diphthong (cf. 222. 2), or by another consonant ; thus, UTOV^US A.
856, ofrnv(>u vEsch. Prom. 28, irat/fa^v Hipp., ivga.ro Ap. Rh. 4. 11:53,
otr(f>ga.vTo Hipp. i. 80 : (6) in the Alex, and Hellenist, dialects, to a number of
verbs which in the classic Greek employ the 2 Aor. ; as, X^TI Mt. 25. 36,
I/XTO Acts 7. 21.
5. For the doubling of <r by the poets, especially the Ep., to make a shcrt
rowel bng by position (*Xj<rrira A. 54, opoffirov 76, /A<rrt/ 147), see 71.
For Ep. examples of * retained in liquid verbs, see 56. fl. In cpixxiw II
651, /3. 334, the >. is doubled to compensate for the loss (f the r.
C. CONNECTING VOWELS.
^ 24G. 1. For -ti~ connective, the Dor. and ^Eol. sometimes employ
- ( 44. 4); as, MiXnrfe Theoc. 29. 4, for MAi/f, ivfiv 1 1. 4, for tfyt7*,
&yw Sapph. 1.19. For the Dor. forms in -if and -iv, see 183. N.
2. The Dor. and Mo\. sometimes give to the Perf. the connecting vowel of
the Pres. ( 185), especially in the Inf. ; as, $$<,/* Theoc. 15. 58, for $&-
*a, rivro*0r>f 10. 1 (see 1. above), crtu'm 5. 7, x-witti 5. 28; Inf. Ititxw
CH. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS*. 211
I. 102, ytyixw Find. 0. 6. 83, rdvuxw Sapph. 2. 15; Part.
Find. P. 4. 318, Ts<p^f*avr*f 3^5. Instances likewise occur in the Ep. of the
Perf. passing over into the form of the Pres., and of the Plup. into that of
the Impf. ; as, xtxXjjyovra? M. 125, t^tyovn Hes. Sc. 228 ; ipip.vx.ov i. 4:59,
iritpOxov Hes. Th. 152.
NOTE. In this way new verbs arose, not confined to the Ep. ; as, from
avuya., avuyu, to order, 0. 4.'}, A. 287, Hdt. vii. 104, Impf. tjvuyav I. 578
(weayiov H. M94), F. cmu^u <r. 404, A. JVA, Hes. Sc. 479 ; from ta^txa,,
oX-y.u, to destroy, 2. 172, A. 10, Soph, Ant. 1286 ; from yiyuta., ytyuviu
and yiyuviffxu, to cry aloud.
8. In the Subjunctive, the Ep. often retains the old short connective
( 177), for the sake of the metre; as, ayt'igo/Atv A. 142, "aptv, iyiigopti
B. 440, <f>6i'opio-6a. 5. 87, Qtit-reu T. 173, tfiopH A. 363, tfttrt 0. 18.
4. In the following poet, chiefly Ep. forms, the connecting vowel is omitted :
a.) Of Pure Verbs. a.vvu, to accomplish ; Impf. tjvuro t. 243, "avtra
Theoc. 2. 92, "avvpis 7. 10.
iguu, Ion. and Poet, tlgvu, to draw, Mid. to draw to one's self, to protect ; Act.
Inf. iigt/Aivxi Hes. Op. 816'; Mid. igOrou Ap. Kh. 1208, tigta-reti A. 239,
lovffo X. 507, 'i^vro A. 138, t't^vro II. 542, 'i^vvra Theoc. 25. 76, ifyuvro M.
4*54, l^ffSa-i i. 484, ifyvffat ^. 82 ; Pass. <^7 Hes. Th. 3O1 ; from the
shorter puopai, ippuro Soph. CEd. T. 1352, pta.ro 2. 515, fuffSai O. 141 ; Iter.
fufKtu II. 730.
ffivM, to shake, trivrai Soph. Tr. 645.
ffnvreti, he takes his stand, purposes, I\ 83, irrtvvrai uEsch. Pers. 49, ffrturt
B. 597, X. 583.
rctvvtv, to stretch ; -ruvvrxi P. 393.
/3.) Of Impure Verbs. i^, comm. to-^, to eaf ; Inf. ftfttvui A. 345.
Xs/crw, to leave; Impf. sXs/Tra Ap. Rh. 1. 45.
waste, Inf. Pass, (x-ty-ftai, 60) we&w IL 708.
;, to Aear; Imp. ^^Tt I. 171.
to watch, (r. 0wXax-) ; Imp. !r^a-^wXa^;^i (cf. 238. ft) Horn.
Ap. 538.
D. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS.
S47. a. 2<f Pers. Siny. (a) For the form -<r<a, see 182. II.
(6) For uncontracted, variously contracted, and protracted objective forms,
see 243. (c) The Ep. sometimes drops a in the Perf. and Plup. pass. ; as,
piiwau <X>. 442, contr. pipvy 0. 18, Theoc. 21. 41, /3xja/ E. 284, farus
II. 585. (d) On the other hand, in the S. S., we find <r retained in some
contract forms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fut. rio/tai, <feiyo.
ftai' thus, (xetv^a.tffa,i) xetv%ei<rat Rom. 2. 17, obuvZffixi Lk. 16. 25, vrito-eu,
Id. 17. 8.
b. 1st Pers. PL and Du. The Dor. uses -p.t s for .^jv ( 70. 3) ; as, 3i-
loix..pis Theoc. 1. 16, i&opis 2. 25. For the endings -purSa. and -pi6ov,
see ^212.
^48. c . 3d Pers. PL (a) For the Dor. -, see 181. .
( bj The ^Eol. uses -oitn for -ovat, and -etin for -< (^ 45. 5) ; as,
AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. BOOK II
Ale. 7 (1), frA&ia Find. P. 9. 1 10, $*,*', Sapph. 35 (88). (c) In the Alex-
andrine Greek we find -ay for -e<ri of the Perf., and -<ry for -ay of the Iinpf.
as, vi$lx..v Lye. 252, yy<wxay St. Jn. 17. 7 (so to^yai Horn. liatr. 179)
sV^a^o-av Lyc. 21, #X^a<ray LXX. Ps. 79. 1, 'tdiXuuffav Rom. :'}. 13. So. in
the Opt., ilifQHTOtv Ps. 35. ti5, To/^a/o'ay Deut. 1. 41, for s/Va/sv, Ta<>7<r<v
(<f) Rare instances occur in the poets of -Aoi in the Perf. with a short penult
(cf. 45. 5); thus the old reading Xi*.'oy%a,ffiv x. 304, vinvx^yiv Autim
(e) In the nude Iinpf. and 2 Aor., and in the Aor. pass., the Ep. and Dor.
often retain the older ending - ( 181. y) ; as, Vr*v A. .335, Pind. P. 4.
240 r>rr N. 488), ?i M. 33, Pind. I. 1. 34, ,,'fc, Id. P. 3. 1 14, ft,2f
Honi. Cer. 437, ?yav Pind. P. 4. 214, and 'iywv Ib. 9. 137, ffft i. 481,
Pind. P. 1. 82, #yigS A. 57, rgttyiv 251, <py^y 200, Mosch. 2. 33, ty/A-
&y Theoc. 7. 60, <pavs Pind. O. 10. 101. So, in imitation of the Ep., i*.
fe^Ev Ai. Pax, 1283, fxgc/p&y Eur. Hipp. 1247. We even find, as 3 Pers,,
pi., niftm Ap. Rh. 4. 1 700, f$/v 2. 65.
(/) In the Ion., the endings -ra/ and -a.ro, for -vr/ and -yr ( 213. ;,
are the common forms in the Perf. and Plup., are very frequent in the Opt.,
and are also employed in the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these
endings, a short vowel in the root is not lengthened ( 218), except in the
ooets for the sake of the metre, the connective -i- is used instead of -a-
( 203), a and sometimes u become i, and consonants are changed according
to 213. R. Thus, olx.ia.reu Hdt. i. 142, for UKWTOU, tureu r. 13-1, Hdt. if.
8<>', i'la.ra.1 ( 47. N.) B. 137, ?r H. 414, AUTO V. 149, for yr*/, VTO, -n-
q>a&/ia.To C I>. 206 ; tSov^aTO Hdt. i. 4, for ISovXovro, 0,'rix.iet'ra 152; ^utietTMt
Id. ii. 142, ^varo iv. 114, ayaTTTaT; ix. 9, for ^i/yavrai, &C. ; x,ia.r.t
A. 659, Hdt. i. 14, i/r/ H. 527, ix.ia.ro Hdt. i. 167, xtiaro <p. 4 ] S,
a,<roxi>tXia.ra Hdt. ix. 50, for xwrcii, &c. (so, with an intervening consonant,
i^^etro.1 ^. 284, IgtigiSura . 95, from ^/^<i;) ; rir^o,ra.t (r. rgiG-) Id.
ii. 93, lili^a.ra.1 (r. S/x-, Ion. $-) 65 (yet acr/'xT< vii. 209, cf. 69. a),
K,i^uo'iltt.ra.i i. 1 40, iffx.tvctia.ro vii. 67 (so, as if from verbs in -<w, {X^XaSara
fl . 86, a**}^aTa< P. 637, ifpettetrai v. 354, -ra M. 431, iffrK.Xttia.ro Hdt.
Vii. 89) ; /SawXo/ara Hdt. i. 3, -rn^a-ro iv. 139, yiuira.iu.ro ii. 47. The Opt
forms in -a-ra are likewise used by the Att. poets ; as, li%a.ia,ro Soph. (Ed. C
44, vip^tt.ia.ro 602, xv6oia.ro 921.
(0) In the Imperative, a third form is found in Dor. inscriptions, made bj
prefixing y to the flex, ending of the Sing. (cf. ^ 172) ; as, voiouvrta (com
pare Lat. faciunto), QtbovaQu, cf. 177) Itb'ooSu Inscr. Corcyr.
d. For the Subj. forms in .p,t and -fi, see 1 8 1 . /3. For the Dor. Sing. 3
fc -11, see 181 . . For the Dor. Sing. 1 in -p.v, and Du. 3 in -ray, -fSSa
(Ibr -ffjy, -rjy, -<r0y), cf. 44. 1, 243. c. /3.
2 4: 9. e. Iterative Form. The Ion., especially the Ep., to express
with more emphasis the idea cf repeated or continued action, often prolongs
the flex, endings of the Impf. and Aor., in the sing, and the 3d Pers. pi., tc
-TXOV, -<?>cts, -o-*i(y), -ffxo* in the subject in- /////'<>, and to -a-x.op.vv, -vx.it
(-iw, -ou), -ffxtro, -ffx,o*ro in the utiji-rtir.i;. This form, wliich is callcil the itria-
tive (itero, to repeat) is likewise used by the Dor. poets, ami soim-times in
lyric portions by the tragic. It sometimes a|pc-ars to be used for metrical
etFeit, rather than for spivial fiii|>liasi.s. It coiunioiily wants the augment.
Thus, Impf. 'i%iffx.ot, I was in tin: hulnl uj citrri/imj, ^. 2.37, l%^ftt E. 472,
\^TM 126, lldt. vi. 12, PI 3 ii,r* S. fi27, for J^y, -.j, -t, -y, ^mrxi,
the kept weaving, fi. 104, XXiif<rxi 105, -t^Ttff*t, STi/^TKr*ay Hdt. i. 1OO,
CH. 9.] DIALECTIC FORMS.
Q'oiffx! Thtoc. 25. 138, *itvi<rxt Soph. Ant. 963, fA/tx'tirxir6 H. HO, TI>,SXIO
X. -I:}:'), ifAifyitrxovra u. 7, ^vvvurrxiro E. 857; "2 Aor. "%'trxi \\ 2i7, Aa<7jc
H.lt. iv. 78, iXuGiffxav ISO, 2ii<rxs 0. '271, ysvs^sro X. 2O8, flXs<r*ra .80
1 Aor. (only poet.), <rr^ i\^<rxav 2. 546, utra-erxi. X. .jfjy, (it-no u. <rx.no A. 566
NOTKS. (a) That the connecting vowel before -<rx- is < rather than o,
follows from '20.5. i&) Before -<rx-, a short vowel remains, and c takes the
place of 11 ; as, a-Taso-xtv Y. 217, for iWj (r. <TT-!, Sa^xav I. SSI, v/<r#i
Hes. Th. 157, for avfo, ipavs^xjy A. 64, for t<pv7 (i; 199), k'axov II. 1.5:5, for
W, xd/.icrxi Ap. Kh. 4. 1514, for sxaXu (xa.Xii.trxt . 402, for lxXss), xaXs-
irxtTo O. 338, for IxaXsTVa, xsa-xsro $. 41, for sxs/ro. (c) Verbs in -&> have
connnonly the iterative hnpf. in -atrxov, sometimes doubling the for the sake
of the metre (cf. 24'2. b) ; as, 'ixa-xtg T. 295, for t"aj, va/s-raao-xav B. 5.'59 ;
so PI. 1 vtx.ciffxo/u.iv X. 5 I 2, for ivixtoju.<v. (d) There appears to be a blending
of Impf. and Aor. forms (or formation as if from a theme in -a), in x^tiv-
retffxt 0. 272, p'nr<ra.ffx.ov 0. 23, poi%et<rxi Hes. Th. 835, a,vK<r<rita.axi Honi.
Ap. 403, from xguvrra, p'tTru, poi^ia/^ and tx.va.iniu.
25O. f. Infinitive. In the Inf., instead of -/, the Dor. and ^Eol.
commonly retain the old ending -v ( 176), or, with the Ep., reduplicate this
ending to -pi* (cf. 5 174, 176), which may be still farther prolonged (chiefly
bv the poets) to -fttvtti. (a) Thus the ^Eol. forms the Aor. pass. inf. in -jv,
the Dor. in -jj^sv, and the Ep. (which also employs the common form) in
-tusvoii as, ^virf^v Ale. 28(29), o^va^v (for ava,*vWj5v<) Theoc. 29. 26;
^ia.x.oi6r,[Atv Th. v. 79 ; tfuutfitfMMu A. ! 87. (6) In other tenses, the nude
Inf. has commonly in the Dor. the form -ptv, in the ^Eol. -v and -ftivcn, and
in the Ep. -v*, -/u.tv, and -pnou ; as, $s<as Theoc. 5. 21, Find. P. 4. 492,
X. 315, Sipivai Inscr. Cum., B. 285, Find. O. 14. 15, Swat A. 26 (cf. 57),
p^sv Find. 0. 1. 55, S^sv Th. v. 77, A. 379, lopueu A. 98, 116, a. 317,
S^va/ 316, yv^sva/ a. 411 ; v/*v ( 251. 2) Ale. 86(15), avrXjjy 1 1 (S) ;
Ts^vO. 497, ^-^va^svai II. '225, ?V S A - 7 ' 9- <Vj N. 273. So <7<ra-
fAivui Hdt. i. 17. Before -pi* and -ftsva.i, a short vowel in the 2 Aor. does
not pass into a diphthong ( 224. E.). (c) In like manner the non-Attic
poets employ, for -u (originally -, 1 76), the prolonged -ip.<.v and -iptvoii ;
as, (eixav-tv) x.viu.iv A. 547, Find. O. 3. 44, Theoc. 8. 83, uxoviptvai X. 380,
a&/*<.v Y. Ill, iZifttvai 50, ^eXutripiv A. 78, U^E^jva/ 151. (d) So, in the
Perf., jrnr^y'tfAit II. 728. For the Ferf. inf. in -s/v or -v, see 246. 2.
The common form in -ivai first occurs in Hdt. (e) Verbs in -& and -iu have
a contract form in -r^sva/ ; as, (yaa-sv) yovpiva.! 5. 5U2, <ruvvp,ivu,i v. 1 37,
xaXr//*sva< K. 125, Xtv6f,p.tva,i ff. 174, from yotiu, -TTUVKU, xaXiu, -ny^iea. Yet
(as^asva;) *etf&tveti <&. 70. In ay/vs^-va/ /. 213, from aymw, and upefAftsva..
lies. Op. 22, from go<w, the connecting vowel is omitted.
g. Participle. For the ^Eol. contraction into / and at in the Part., see
45. 5 ; thus, x/^va/j Ale. 27, ptyetis Find. P. 1. 86, S^a/ 8. 37, gsrfga*-
r Sapph. 1. 9, ** 77(76), Find. P. 8. 4, Theoc. 1. 96. For the Fein.
-oviru, the Laconic uses -ua. \ as, Ux/cr^a, xXs^a, S-y^o-a^wSv ( 70. V.), for
Ux^aScra, xXat/(ra, dvgragoww, Ar. Lys. 1297, 1299, 1313. So M
1293 ( 45. 5).
E. VERBS IN -pi.
25 1. 1. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the
forms with a connecting vowel ( 225), especially in the Pres. sing, of verbs
whose characteristic is t or ; as, nhit Find. P. 8. 14, #i7. 192, Hdt. i.
AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. [BOOK II
133, $3o7 s I. 164, 3/3*75 19, Hdt. i. 1O7 ; irvZ Ib. iv. 103, Imp.
202 ; vgotiioutri (unredupl., for x(>ort0iaiffi} A. 291 ; 2 Aor. Opt.
Hdt. i. 53 ; Inf. rmtM Theog. 5G5, $<Sv ( 244. a) Theoc. 29. 9.
2. On the other hand, the ^Eol., Dor., and Ep. retain the form hi -pi in
some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in -u ; as,
xaAjj^ Sapph. 1. 16, o^pi 2. 1 1, p/Xa^ 79(23), ttivnfu Hes. Op. 681, v/xj-
p.t Theoc. 7. 40, for *aXs<w, , &C. ; av^j<r/, Qigtjffi, P>t6vifft r. Ill, 112,
for avs^u, &c. (unless rather Subj. vs;!<r/, &c.) ; Qafiveu B. 107.
3. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another to i (cf. 242. a), and
sometimes inserts t before a ( 48. l) ; as, (<W, 58) iffr'tun Hdt. v.
7 I , Swvsa<r< ( 248. /), tfriuira Hdt. iv. 166. So, in the nude Perf., itrriun
Hdt. i. 200, Ifvutn v. 49.
4. The Ep. sometimes differs from the common language in the length of
the characteristic vowel ( 224) ; as, Inf. nMfttvui '*. 247, libovvat H. 425,
^Et/yvvjctsv II. 145, for riJiveu, &c. ; Part. <riMftiov K. 34 ; Imp. /fxj&, Ifiu&t
y. 380 (so nude Perf. sW^ri A. 243, 246, for sWar*) : 2 Aor. /3<rv M,
469, /3Tjv A. 327, for K<ruv, &c.
5. For the Impf. Mfat and ft, the Ion. has ir/Si* Hdt. iii. 155, and fc
0. 313, unaugmeuted ? A. 321, Hdt. ii. 19. So l* s Hdt. i. 187, % A. 381,
iWi Hdt. iv. 119, ta<rav ix. 31. Cf. 179, 201. Iff, 252. b.
6. Dialectic forms of />/', to 6e (f 55). (a) Those which
arise from different modes of lengthening the radical syllable ( 230. 3) :
ipfti Theoc. 20. 32, Sapph. 2. 15, ia-tri (/ assumed after the analogy of the
ether persons) A. 176, Theoc. 5. 75, S. 3 ivr'i (v inserted instead of <r) Id. 1.
17, tiftiv E. 873, Hdt. i. 97 ; Inf. fat* (for which some give the form ^t?,
cf. 7O. 3) Theoc. 2. 41. (6) Uncontracted forms, and forms like those of
verbs in - : Jfa<r/y B. 1 25, 1u A. 11 9, Hdt. iv. 98, ?ri<ri B. 366, SUIT, I. 1 40,
Hdt. i. 155, tats I. 284, lot 142, Hdt. vii. 6, i B/27, Hdt. i. 86, lwt P.
159, io7<ra Find. P. 4. 471, Theoc. 2. 64, tv<ra. 76, (f-vnra, 58) ta<ra Of
i<r<ra Tim. Locr. 96 a, fa A. 762, ijra Theoc. 2. 3. (c) Variously pro-
tracted forms: fy (1 P.) A. 762, (3 P.) B. 642, Hdt. vii. 143, t s Theoc.
19. 8, !fW X. 435, fa A. 808, i1 u Y. 47; Impf. iter. ( 249. b\ l ffxn
(I P.) H. 153, (3 P.) Hdt. 1. 196, ?<r*i Ib., E. .536, ^Esch. Pers. 656.
((/) Middle forms: lira, commonly l<r<ro a. 302, Sapph. 1. 28, t"ro v. 106
(for vro, cf. <S. 1 flftw others read I"T, Ep. for j?vra from ^a/). (e) Old
short nd unaugmented forms : i/iv Call. Fr. 294, Jfrav A. 267, Pind. P. 4.
371, io-r Id. O. 9. 79. (/) For i7? II. 515, Hdt. vii. 9, see 230. ;
for P. 3 UT/ Pind. 0. 9. 158, Th. v. 77, Theoc. 5. 109, 181. ; for i', r,
iW, JU(), ZTI, if<r, 251. 5; -for fa T. 202, and i 7 n, 181. /3 ; for
i":^a Theog. 715, fW, 182; for iVif, ^ic Theoc. 15. 9, W,MIJ 14. 29,
247. b ; for Impf. S. 3 (W) n* Theoc. 2. 90, 2:iO. 7 ; for Inf. tp.it A.
299, Vi T. 40, r^^t* Pind. O. 5. 38, Theoc. 7. 28, Soph. Ant. 623, ?/*-
/MMMJL 117, Sapph. 2. 2, ,tti Theoc. 2. 41, i/pi* (for which some write
i/jttjf, cf. a above) Th. v. 79, Tim. Locr. 93 a, if/cma< or i/*i/ Ar. Ach. 775,
250. 6; for ir<r^, A. 267, t,<rtra t A. 164, ^Esch. Pers. 121 (7r< A.
211), 71 ; for l<r/ A. 563, 7- a< 2. 95, 243 ; for i<r<rj} Theoc. 10. 5,
irTi Eur. Iph. A. 782, i<T*i7<r*, B. 393, Theoc. 7. 67, Uwrrm Th. v. 77,
245. 2.
7. Dialectic Forms of t!pt t to go (\ 56). (a) The protraction of / t w
( 224) likewise appears in /*. 3 fitt (or !/, or perhaps i/V7 from i/^i,
CH. 10.] ROOT OF THE VERB. 21ft
Hes. Sc. ! 13, Theog. llfi, i? only Sophr. 2 (23), fa (by some ascribed to
u>/, to 6e) . 49S ft. 139, tJfofteti 3. 8, sJVara A. 1 3S, | S< VT O. 41,5, tu-
fftitrffnv 544. (b) In the Impf., we find both nude forms and forms with a
connecting vowel, from the root <-, both unaugmented, doubly augmented
( 1^9), and doubly augmented with contraction; thus, (/v, cf. 251. 5) nice.
(from which may be formed by contr. the Att. /;, ^ 231. It) $. 427, JIdt. i.
42, n'ii A. 47, Hdt. i. 65, ru M 371, It B. 87'-% jpopttt x. 25!, JVy A. 494,
wiVav K. 197, Hdt. i. 62, #; <],. 37O, 7w A. 347'. (c) The Opt. hi* (only
T. 2O9) is formed, as if from the root h- (cf. 5 231. rf). (d) The Inf. Tv.
Ath. .ISO c, is the regular nude form, (e) For tis see 230. ; for slW
K. 450, JW K. 67, 182; for 5V/ I. 701, 18! . ; for Vsv B. 44O.
24(J. 3'; for 7^j A. 170, Find.' 0. 6. 108, fyava/ T. 32, J^sv** 365,
'250. 6.
F. PERFECT PARTICIPLE.
1. In Perf. Participles ending in -a; pure, the Ep. mon
frequently lengthens the preceding vowel ; and the Part, is then declined in
-oro; or -UTOS, according to the metre. If the preceding vowel remains short,
the form in -urog is commonly required by the metre. Thus, fi<Zctorss y
139, HiKpn'orots A. 801, xtxfttiSru x. 31. See, also, 237, 238.
2. In some fern, forms, the antepenult is shortened on account of the verse >
as, XEAaxyr p.. 85 (XgA.*xa; X. 141), fttfAa.xu7Ki A. 435 (ptfttixvs K. S62)
ip.uia. S T. 331, Tt^aXway I. 208.
CHAPTER X.
ROOT OF THE VERB.
^ 254. The root of the Greek verb, although
not properly varied by inflection, yet received many
changes in the progress of the language. These
changes affected the different tenses unequally, so
that there are but few primitive verbs in which the
root appears in only a single form.
NOTE. The earlier, intermediate, and later forms of the root
may be termed, for the sake of brevity, o/d, middle, and new
roots. The final syllable of the earliest form of the root is
commonly short ; and the oldest roots of the language are mon-
osyllabic.
2*15. The tenses may be arranged, with respect to the
degree in which they exhibit the departure of the root from its
original form, in the following order.
I. THE SECOND AORIST AND SECOND FUTURE.
REMARKS, a. The 2d Aor. act. and mid. is simply the Impf. of an old root
216 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK li
( 178. 2) ; thus t^t-rov and iXt-roftw (f 37) are formed from the old root A/w-
in precisely the same way as tXtivev and i*.u<rap,w from the new root XS/-T-.
/3. The 2d Aor. and Fut. pass, are chiefly found in impure verbs which want
the 2d Aor. act. and mid. They affix -jv and -wopy-i ( 180) to the sim-
plest form of the root.
y. These tenses (except the nude 2 Aor. act., 224. 2) have commonly a
short syllable before the affix ( 254. N.).
^. In a few verbs, the original root appears to have received some change
even in the 2 Aor. ; chiefly, in accordance with the prevailing analogy of the
tense, to render the root monosyllabic, or its last syllable short ( 254. N.), or
to enable it to receive the nude form ( 227. /3).
256. II. THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE.
These tenses have not only a more complete, uniform, and
simple formation than the Perf. and Plup. act. ( 179, 186
235), but are like wist; more common, and are formed in some
verbs (see T^f'^tu, 263, qptfs^w, 268, &c.) from an earlier
root.
III. THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. For the van
ous formations of these tenses, see 179, 186, 234-238
IV. THE FIRST AORIST AND FUTURE.
V. THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. These tenses, with
very few exceptions, exhibit the root in its latest and most pro-
tracted form.
REMARKS. 1. The 2 Aor. and 2 Fut. are widely distin-
guished from the other tenses by their attachment to the original form of the
root ; while the Pres. and Impf. are distinguished no less widely by their in-
clhi'itinn to depart from this form. The other tenses differ comparatively but
little from each other in the form of the root. If the verb has three roots,
they are commonly formed from the middle root. See, for example, Xa^?av<*
( 290).
2. Many verbs are DEFECTIVE, either from the want of a complete forma-
tion, or from the disuse of some of their forms. In both cases, the defect is
often supplied by other verbs having the same signification ( 301). In the
poets, especially the older, we find many fragments of verbs belonging to the
earlier language. These occur often in but a single tense, and sometimes in
only a single form of that tense ; as, 2 A. S. 3 iifya%t, rang, A. 420, Star*
(r. Jia-), appeared, . 242, 1 A. ixei'rva'fiv, breathed, X. 46'7, A/yt, twanged,
A. I 25, Pf. Pt. xixctQvorct, gasping, E. 698.
3. On the other hand, many verbs are REDUNDANT, either through a double
formation from the same root, or the use of forms from different roots. It
should be observed, however, that two or more forms of the same tense, with
few exceptions, either,
(a.) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition; thus,
urtivu, and later xrivtvpi ( 295) ; rafffu ( 274. y), A. P. irK%0w, and
later lrayv KO.IU ( 267. 3), A. P. txetvtw, and Ion. i*an wWavojtta*
and poet. -riii0ofi.en ( 290); *ti6u (^ 39), A. fauo-a, and poet. JWe.
SIT7 1
OB. 10.J EUPHONIC CHAN ^t - 17
Or, (g.) Differ in their use ; thus, 1 Pf. Ttws/x.e, transitive, / have persuad-
ed, 2 Pf. <ri*W, intransitive, / frus* (^f 39) ; 1 A. to-ruo-a, trans. / placed,
2 A. Jfa-rijv, intrans. / stoorf (^f 48). The second tenses are more inclined than
the first to an intransitive use. From the prevalence of this use in the 2d
Perf. and Plup., these tenses were formerly called the Per/, and Plup. middle.
Or, (y.) Are supplementary to each other. See 2O1. N., 237. a.
NOTE. From the various changes which take place in the root, many
verbs, together with their common themes, have others, either derived or col-
lateral. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they should be
rather viewed as redundant forms of the same verb, or as the forms of distinct
but kindred verbs.
38. The changes in the root of the Greek
verb are of three kinds ; EUPHONIC, EMPHATIC, and
ANOMALOUS.
NOTE. The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the various
changes of the root, and likewise to present, in a classified arrangement, all
those verbs upon whose inflection farther remark seemed to be required. It
will be observed, that some of the words might have been arranged with equal
propriety under other heads, from their exhibiting more than one species of
change in the root
A. EUPHONIC CHANGES.
259. 1. Radical vowels are sometimes changed by'
PRECESSION (^ 28), becoming f, and e and o becoming i.
a* Change of a to t.
NOTE. If the is preceded or followed by a liquid, it is sometimes retained
hi the Perfect, particularly the Perfect passive.
3fxiei fr. Sgx-, 2fgx.)> and 2 Pf. St^xa, to see, poet., T. 342, Soph. (Ed,
T. 389, "2 A. ftgax< () 262) Eur. Or. 1456, 1 A. P. $itx&!v, JEsch. Pr.
53, 2 A. P. iSgaxfly, Pind. N. 7. 4.
2g (r. $*-)> to flay, F. Itfi, A. ftuga, Pf. P. 2ft0ej, 2 A. P. ftt^u^
iii. 5. 9. Poet, and Ion. 2/0a, Ar. Nub. 442, 2<g, Hdt. ii. 39.
^i-rw, to pluck, poet. ^s<rr ( 272), Mosch. 2. 69, F. l^ca, A. ftgi^a.
2 A. &*, Pind. P. 4. 231.
*ix, to U7reatfi, F. vXcgw, A. icrAfga, Pf. P. creorXsy^a/, 1 A. P.
^nx, 2 A. P. l^rXaxj)*, A. M. i**.i%uf*vv. In Hipp., Pf.
, to twist, F. fr^u, A. iffrp^u, Pf. P. iW^a^a/, 1. A. P. ifrfty.
*v, "2 A. P. lo-r^a^Tjv. Pf. iy-8-r ? ^, Ath. 10-1 c. 1 A. P. Ion. and Dor
i<rrap4jjy, Hdt. i. 1 .'30, Theoc. 7. 1 32. Extended forms, chiefly poet., <rrp-
<f>aiu, . 53, ffrek><paoftKi, Eur. Ale. 1052, Hdt. ii, 85, F. ffru$*ffo[*,iti Theog.
837 ; rrpQi*, Ar. Pax, 175.
r^i-ru (Ion. v^a.-rea Hdt. ii. 92), to turn, F. r^i^a, A. ir^t^a, Pf.
( 236. a) and -re-r^pa, Pf. P. rirz<tftftcti, 1 A. P. Ir^f^y, 2 A. P.
1 A. M. commonly trans. \r^a.pr.*, 2 A. M. intrans. irfa<ra/*j. 2 A.
, E. 187, F. Pf. TETga-^^a/ Hesych.
218 SOOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II
b. Change of i and o to /.
The change of t and a to * is almost wholly confined to syllables which be-
come long in the Pres. and Impf., by the addition of one or more consonant*
as, rlxru ( 272. ft), tl^p, ( 278. $), ^gx/ra* ( 280).
2 GO. 2. Some roots are CONTRACTED ; as,
qtiu, to sing, F. aVa^a/, A. f t <ret, Pf. P. yffp.cu, A. P. Wjv contr. froir
A. 1, Ktia-oftct'i, x,> 352 '(i/r Theoc. 22. 26, Eur. Here. 681), &c-
For aiiffto, see 185. i.
a.ffau or urrea ( 70. l), to rush, F. <w, A. Jl-a contr. from a'tcv, &.
88,' &c. A. P. flj;gSj|, T. 368.
Xay, to wash, F. Xawovw, A. tXautrx, Pf. P. XeXaw^a/, A. P. Xy&j contr.
from Ep. Xae, 3. 252, F. Xas<r, &c. From the old r. Xa-^we have the Ep.
Impf. or 2 A. Xa x. 361, Xaa Horn. Ap. 12O, Mid. Inf. x'oio-dott or xl^<
Hes. Op. 747 ; and from the same root, or from Xa- with the omission of
the connecting vowels, are the common shorter forms of the Impf. act. and
Pres. and Impf. mid. ; as, (for sXaa^sv or eXava^iv) \Xovpiv Ar. PI. 657, XazJ^ai,
\ovrett Cyr. i. 3. II, kmrteu .216.
. 3. Some roots are SYNCOPATED in the theme,
chiefly in cases of reduplication; as, (r. ///si'-, /</>'-) ylyvopni,
nljiioj, n^vo) ( 286) : others in the 2d Aor. ( 255. 8) ; as,
(r. iysQ-, f>0-) WQOMV ( 268), rjli&ov ( 301. 3), Ep. defect.
(r. TC/U-) tittnov ( 194. 3), found : others in other tenses ; as,
*Xta, to call, F. xaX6<r, *X ( 200. 2), A. UX<ra, Pf. (r.
X.) *ixXxa, Pf. P. iX*i/wai, F. Pf. xfx*.j<roftot t , Ar. Av. 184, A. P.
^ (IxaXiffOnt, Hipp.). Poet., xixXjrxu ^sch. Sup. 217, -r^a-x
r. 19.
to concern ( 222. 2) ; Ep. Pf. P. ^i^ffXira/, -ieh, T. 343, Plup.
3>. 516. See 64. 2, 222. .
NOTE. In regard to some forms, it seems doubtful whether they are best
referred to syncope, or to metathesis with, in some cases, contraction ; thus,
(r. xaXf-, xXaet-, xX*i-
262. 4. In some roots, METATHESIS takes place, chiefly
by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs, (a) in the
theme; as, /5Aw'axw, ^y^'axw, &Qtaaxta (281): (b) in the 2d
Aor. ( 255. <3) ; as, laxA^ ( 227. /?), m^v ( 301. 2) i'
xov ( 259. a), wQa&ov ( 288) : (c) in oJ/ier tenses ; is,
( 223).
263. 5. A few roots are changed to avoid a IOUBLB
ASPIRATION (^ 62) ; as,
r. $-, ^i^. 259, reip-, T^I^.)> to nourish (Old T^U, Pind.
P. 4. 205), F. ^J^, A. W e i^a, Pf. Tir e p*, Pf. P. ri^^^/, 1 A. P
l/i<p^>, commonly 2 A. P. irg^j. Ep. 2 Aor. intrans. or pass.
E. 555, Pf. fut-ir^etpt Hipp.
NOT*. Se, also, ^ ( SCO), SVr, S^Jrr* ( 272), SJ* (
CH. 10.] EUPHONIC AND EMPHAHC CHANGES. " 219
rt%u ( 1501), TVQ* ( '270). A few other roots have both aspirated ana
unaspirated forms ; as, rv%. and rvx.- ( 27O. 9, '285, C 29O), $- and x$-
( '27.5. ), ^u X n, to cool, F. tyl*, &c., 2 A. P. t^yywv, Ar. Nub. 151, and
^Esch. FT. 95.
6. In a few cases, a consonant is DROPPED or ADDED for the
sake of euphony or the metre ; as, /U/w, to pour out, Ep. el'fta,
11. 11 ; dovnsw, to sound, A. IdovTryoct, i. 8. 18, A. 504, and
tydovjtviaa, A. 45 ; Affcw, to ZtcAr, Pf. P. Isleizpas Hes. Th. 826.
So, in reduplicated forms, nlfm^fit, nl^ngrj^ii ( 284), and in
the Att. Redupl., tyyrjyoQa ( 268), ^u, to bow down, tpvrjpv-
xs X. 491 (for tufavxe, ty- being prefixed according to analogy,
191. 2, although the 77 is radical). With
to fo angry, we have also the Ep. (xooofiai, 29.
ao^uou, 4. 80 (see r. 413, 414).
3G4. 7. In some verbs, the omission of the DIGAMMA
( 22. <5) has given rise to different forms of the root ; as,
&Xivt (r. aXsF-, A-, Xst/-), to at?er#, poet. ^Esch. Prom. 568, F. u^ivtet
Soph. Fr. 825, A. jXsw<ra, ^Esch. Sept. 87 ; Mid. faupuu and dXivoftai, to
avoid, 2. 586, . 29, A. Xs^v and YiXwa.ff.nv ( 201. 2). Deriv., aXj/,
A. 794, iXwo-x ( 273. ).
ava-TVW, Ep. atA-fVUU ( 48. 2 J f. 5TVF-, 5TVI-, X-VtV; 9TVU-, VTVUV- 277),
to recocer 6reaM, X. 222, A. P. a/vrvvvhr, E. 697, nude 2 A. M. a^-rvwr*
A. 359. From the root TVW- are formed the extended xnvffxu and nvW,
to maAe tmse, JEsch. Pers. 830, 3. 249, and the Pf. P. <rs*viyt/, to 6e wise,
ft. 377, referred by some to riw, by others to x-ivurxu..
fiu (r. /$F-, /-) *o /OM?, F. pivffopeH ( 220), A. ipptvra, and better Att.
F. M. (or 2 F. P.) pwffo/tat, 2 A. P. (or 2 A. Act. r. /-) Iftfat, Pi. i^'yjjxa.
Ion. Pres. Ft. piovftuoi Hdt. vii. 140. Late F. pifcet.
ffsva/Aeti and rao/tai (r. ^F-, w-, -, ft-, whence fa- 28), to rsA, poet.
Soph. Tr. 645 ( 246. ), JEsch. Pers. 25, A. ffivdpm ( 2O1. 2) H. 2O8,
Pf., as Pres., tffffSp.* t , Z. 361, A. P. irvfa or i<r<r^jy, Eur. Hel. 13O2, Soph.
Aj. 294, 2 A. M. IfSftw or irrvftw, Eur. Hel. 1162, H. 519. Ep. A. Act.
tfffftva. E. 208. Lacon. 2 A. P. etv-ur<ravot H. Gr. i. 1. 23, for a.xi<rffvn. Ob-
serve the augm. and redupl.
%ta (r. ^ t p-, ^w-)> to F> r F - ^ ( 20 - 2 )> A - ? A;* ( 201 2), rare
and doubtful fas**, Pf. P. xt^Sftai, A. P. i^w^v. Ep. F. xtveu, xivtt
ft. 222, A. l%tu<ret, l x iv, A. 269, 2 A. M. i X ufw t A. 526, ^sch. Cho.
401. Late Pf. *i x 8*a, Anth. Late form,
NOTE. See, also, $i*>, net, *-X (| 22O), }/, xa/a>, x/ ( 267. 3).
An Ep. and Ion. form of <rXi* is r).*,*, -u<ru, &c., . 240, Hdt. vi. 97, 2 A.
i-x, -y. 15; extended, <rx(?, Th. L 13.
B. EMPHATIC CHANGES.
^265. Most impure roots and many jmre
roots are PROTRACTED in the Present and Imper-
220 ROOT OF THE VERB. [fiOOK I,
feet, to express with more emphasis the idea ol
continued action. This protraction takes place,
^ 266. I. Bj LENGTHENING A SHORT VOWEL
as follows.
In mute verbs, a becomes 77 ; in liquid verbs, and in some
mute verbs, I and v are simply lengthened ; in other cases, the
short vowel is usually changed to a diphthong.
In mute verbs, the change commonly extends to all the reg-
ular tenses (^215. 1).
1. Change of & to j.
ayra (r. <r<r-, rnf-"), to rot, trans., F. rii^, 2 Pf. intrans. ( 257. /3) r-
rnra, iv. 5. 12, 2 A. P. io-acojy.
rnxw, to weft (Dor. TX Theoc. 2. 28), F. r^*/, A. *, 2 Pf. intrans.
iv. 5. 15, 1 A. P. irw^HK, commonly 2 A. P. iraxDV. Pf. P. ri
Anth.
2. Change of to /.
( r - ^ a -> &'-)> to divide, chiefly poet. . MO, F. 5a-a^;, A.
^v, CEc. 7. 24, &$<r^<, A. 125, J^*/^/, a. 23. Kindred,
rend, ^Esch. Ag. 2O7, Sart^a/, to divide, 2. 264, Hdt. i. 216, A.
(201. 2).
Ku.6a.'iu (r. xa^a^-), to purify, F. x.6a.u, A. Ixa^^a (sometimes written
Uatefa, cf. ^? 56. a), Pf. P. xixalagiMu, A. P. Ua^^v.
xa/vw, to Aifl, chiefly poet., F. xavw, '2 A. ?xavo.
/ (r. -), to diwe//, poet., Soph. Tr. 40, F. va<rra^/ (7') Ap. Rh. 2.
747, A. ?va<r<r aj 6/ft, J. 1 74, Pf. P. viva^a/, Herod. Att., A. P. iv<r^i- Eur.
Med. 166. Ep. deriv. va/traw, A. 45.
to u>eae, F. w<pv, A. w<pjva, Pf. P. u<pa<r^a/ ( 217. 0), A. P.
From the pure root w^a-, Ep. w<pa<r/ ( 1 242. b) . 105.
^/v<w (^f 42 i, to <Aot&, F. <fvu, &c. The Pf. Tipy*a is late, first occur-
ring in Dinarch., who employs it hi composition with o. Kindred poet.
verbs, <puvu, to shine, p.. 383 ; from r. <f>et-, Impf. <f>oit %. 502, F.
P. 155 ; from r. <pii~, Pt. tpaifa* A. 735, Soph. El. S24.
X*k u ( r ^ a ?-' ^'e-) to rejoice, F. ^tutfe* ( 222. 2), Pf.
,?f. P. xie^t*< and xi^a^a/, 2 A. P. i%dgv. Ep., redupl. F.
*i%atfrftM (jj 239. 6), 2 A. M. *i^^>v ( 194. 3), 1 A. M.
. 270, 2 Pf. /><. *i^ e j ( 253. 1), H. f 12. Late, 1 Aor.
2 F. P.
3. Various Changes of .
(r. JF-, J-, ^'-) to 6um, poet. ^Esch. Ag. 496, 2 Pf. as Pres. in-
trans., $i$j, T. 18, 2 A. M. i5^, T. 316, Pf. P. SJt/^/, Call. Ep. 52.
xa/ii/ and xa.u (r. xF~ -, *- 259, */-, -), to 6urn, F. x.a.vffu and
i5-a^ai, A. i*/<r and poet. i* (201. 2), yEsch. Ag. 849 (Ep. ix, A,
40, 7>, p. 176), Pf. xtxairxa, Pf. P. xtxi/uj, A. P. IxavVqy. Ion. 2 A. P
U, Hdt. ii. 180.
'.H. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 221
xA.ot.iet and xXai, to weep, F. K\a.uffoft.Ki or x\,vtrov 1^.0.1 ( 200. S), and
*Xa/7<r or xXuvau ( 222), A. ixXat/<r, Pf. P. xixXetvpai, 3 F. xixXetuffopcti,
Ar. Nub. 143. F. xXavra, Theoc. 23. 34. Late, A. P. UXavrSn*, Pf. P
xixXaufffteti, Anth.
NOTE. K and xX are Att. forms, and are not contracted ( 216. /3).
For KU.VITU, xXavtrefAtzi) ^ibtnvfAott, from xapffu, x^ccFtrof^on, ^'ibuFpteti, &C., see
(r. rgy-, r^uy- 28. l), to eat, F. Tgatofttxi, 2 A. ?<rya, Pf P
i. Ion. 1 A. irgwga Horn. Batr. 126.
2G 8. 4. Change of i to u.
(r. ay-, ay/-), to collect, F. ays^w, A. %ytiK, A. P. vtyitfvi.
Ep., Pf. P. yfly ( 0ej, A. -J1 1, 2 A. M. Jiyicfaw, B. 91, -P*. sync, ay^s?,
H. 134. Ep. forms, riytgWopteti, F. 231, j5ygs<yta/, K. 127 ; later Ep. a,y'i-
iopa.i Ap. Rh. a. 895.
as/{M (r. as^-, a,'iio-\ to raise, poet, and Ion., F. $&, contr. 'a^, ^Esch.
Pers. 795, A. #uga, Pf. P. f^i (for a^-ra, see 2.16. rf), A. P. ns^y
commonly au^u (r. 'a^-, sync, from ^- 261, a/'^. 267), F. '&&, A. ^,
Subj. "oi^u (" 5^. a), Pf. *, Pf. P. ^/a;, A. P. Jj^v, 1 A. M. ^^)v,
'ct'UfiKi, 'aoa/ye*}v, Eur. Or. 3, 2 A. M. poet. yipefAiiV) "oiap.ce.t^ 'eigaifAriv Soph.
EK 34. ^Eol. biff*, Sapph. 44(73). Poet, deriv., rn^So/j.ce.t, F. 108, ^TK.
&, Ap. Rh. 1. 738, cievuftet, Soph. Ant. 903, u^iJftxi ( 293. 3), |. 144.
tys/ow (r. lys^-, ly^- 261, lyii-\ to rouse, F. sys^, 2 Pf., as Pres. in-
trans., (the sync, root prefixed, by a peculiar Att. redupl., 263. 6) ly^riyo^x,
Pf. P. lyy^^/, A. P. yiy't^Snv, 2 A. M. riy^'opw. For ty^riyo^t, \y^ny'o^6a.i^
see 238. 0. 2 Pf. PL 3 ly^y'otfdffi (as from r. yi0-) K. 419. Hipp, has
\\-vyiort and tytigctro. Deriv., Ep. \y^yo^a.ca^ v. 6, \y^r,ffffta u. 33 ; late
i?X (r. aX-, tX-- 259), to roll up, press hard, Ep. E. 203, A.
( 56. 0) A. 409, Pf. P. JfsA^a,, H. 662, 2 A. P. eaXjjv, N. 408. Att.
forms, j7xx or t'ixxu, Ar. Nub. 761, Th. ii. 76, and ?XX Soph. Ant. 340.
Deriv. sixiu or ii\'uu, -wea, ei*.vu, -ta-u (Ep., A. P. sXwV^v, Y. 393 ; Deriv.
tiXvQdu, A. 156, s/Xy^a^w, T. 492), eXWo;, -/|a (poet, and Ion. iiXiffffAl Or
i/X/Ww, ^Esch. Pr. 1085, Hdt. ii. 38), IXsX/^, -/'*;, Ep. A. 53O.
i/, to sm^e, poet., F. ^sv<S, 2 A. Ifan, Ar. Av. 54, 1 A. Utn*, T. 481.
*$/^w (r. xa^-, xs^- 259), to shear, F. !&;, A. t'xi/^a, Pf. P. niffuu
F. x^cr, Mosch. '_'. 32, A. txt^tru, x. 456, Ix^a-ei/Ativ, ^sch. Pers. 952 ( 56.
/3), 1 A. P. IxiglD*, Find. P. 4. 146, 2 A. P. i**,^*, Anth.
ftsi^oftxi (r. ^ag-), to obtain, chiefly poet., I. 616, 2 Pf jf^a^a, A. 278,
Pf. P. stftKgrai (; 191. 1), i< has been fated, PL Rep. 566 a, P*. ttfMt^ftites,
later Ep. piftoovrcti Ap. Rh. 1. 646, Dor. ^^.o^xreti Tim. Locr. 95 a.
oQi'iXu, to owe, ought (Ep. oQ&Xa 9-. 462), F. oQmXJiru ( 222. 2), 1 A.
t*Q<iXw<rat, 2. A., used only in the expression of a wish, <w<pAov, Pf. &><piiXvxa.
Kindred verbs, eiptXXw, to assist, poet, (for opsXXm, see 245. 5), apxrxav,
to incur ( 289), uQtXw, to assist.
(r. <ra^-) to pierce, F. **, Pf. P. -ri-rtt^tti. A. i!T^a, A. 465,
2 A. P. i^ ? v, Hdt. 4. 94, Ath. 349 c.
to sow, F. o-Tsaai, A. f<7"T-/a, Pf. P. iff-ratgfteii, 2 A. P. <
ri/i (r. ray-), to sfrete/J, F. nw, A. T/v, Pf. T*X ( 217. a), Pf. P
A. P. T0a. Kindred Ep. forms, nretlw, B. 390, A. Ft. nT'f
it; *
ROOT Of- THE VF.RB. [BOOK II.
N. 534 J rnvvu P. 390, F. rttvtxru, &c. ; Imp. -rJ (contr. from rat, r. r*-'
S. 219 ; 2 Aor. />*. T<ry*v ( 194. 3 ; r. ray-) A. 591.
<p^<^, to destroy, F. <p^, A. t(f>h^, 1 Pf. ipfe{*, 2 Pf. i<p^, Pf. P
?<p4C6<, 2 A. P. i<$6a.r>v. F. 0^, N. 625, F. M. <f>0et^off.xi Hdt. viil
108, ^iofca, ix. 42, 2 A. M. tyfegiar* ( 248. /) Id. viii. 90.
269. 5. Change of r to r.
xXtva/, to tewrf, F. xxrvw, A. *Xfva ( 56), Pf. P. xixMpcu ( 217- *;
J A. P. IxXfSnv and ixXj'vSny, 2 A. P. Uxtnv.
r</3a>, to rwfe, to wear, F. r^i-^/eo, A. ir^-v^a, Pf. rsr^^a, Pf. P. ri
1 A. P. ir{iQ0w, commonly 2 A. P. irgf v.
6. Change of ? into /.
aXt/'ipw (r. Xp-, aXt/(p-) * anoint, F. aXsrvJ-w, A. fatr^a, Pf. a
( 191. 2) and fatitpa, Pf. P. aA^'X/^a* and jj'Xs/^^a/, 1 A. P.
2 A. P. fcfynv.
i^t/'x^, to fcreaA, F. te '1 4 '' ! A - e '? a > Ar - Ves P- 649 > and e^ a ' Hipp.,
2 A. ;^xo, P. 295, Pf. P. l^i'y^oci, Hipp. Collat., Ep. i^i^u, t. 83.
t^s/Tw, to cas^ rfown, F. l^t'i-^u, A. ^s^a, A. P. fytiftw. 2 A., comm.
tntrans., figi-rov, E. 47, Plup. P. l^irro S. 15, late Pf. P. i^gt/^a/.
See, also, Xf/V (t 37) and wt/V (^ 39).
7. Change of into au.
a.x.t>vu (T. -, &xov-\ to hear, F. axou/repoti, A. tfxovtrtt, 2 Pf. a*x t
2 Plup. j*,xi/v ( 191. 2), A. P. fatMw. Late, F. ixowVw, Pf. P. faov.
Ep. axewa^w, Horn. Merc. 423.
2 7 O. 8. Change of v into 0.
$y, to afflict, F. Xy0w, A. ffryvwe, A. P.
t<>uoo[jt.a.i and itigo/Acti, to lament, F. ii$vov/u,eu t A.
q-Xwvw, to M>o*A, F. ?rXCyw, A. ?TXffa, Pf. P. wicrXw^ai ( 217. ), A. P
TW^- 263), to fumigate, to burn, F. v-4><u, Pf. P.
2 A. P.
9. Change of C into
vlw (r. *t/^-, xiv6-\ to hide, poet. ^Esch. Pr. 571, F. *jw<r, 1 A.
t. 2fi:{, 2 A. i*w^, y. 1 6 (x*i/^v, 1 94. 3), 2 Pf. xixtuJa, Soph. El. 1 1 20.
Ep. Kiu6a.vu, T. 453.
nv%u, to prepare, poet., F. TII/|W, A. Iriv^a,, Pf. P. rirwy^a/, A. P.
Pf. P<. intrans. T(Ty^;<w,- (. 423, Pf. P. TtTJw^;ar (^ 248. /) /
lrTy^r A. 808, Pf. P. Inf. rtTtv^fffen %. 104, F. Pf. <rtrtv%efActt, M.
345, A. P. l<riu%6vv, Hipp. Kindred verbs, rvy^uvu ( 290), nrvtrxopeu
( 285).
(fivytu, and sometimes ^wyyavw ( 2QO), to ^ee, F. f wa/xi and
( 200. 3), 1 A. fyivga, commonly 2 A. ?^>t;ya, 2 Pf. <ri>i/y. Ep. Pf.
orts (cf. 274. ^) 4>. 6, vtfvyttlvtt . 18.
CH. 10. | EMPHATIC CHANGES. 223
10. Change of i, in the diphthong u, to j.
*X/' and *X?, to shut, F. xXs/<ra/ and xX^a-ea, A. ixXiiffa. and ?*Xj<ra,
Pf. P. xixXl/ayta/, xsxXs/^a/, and xsxXjj^a/, F. Pf. xtxXtirofteti, AT. Lys.
1072, A. P. ixXuWjjv. Ion. *Xi, ./o-o/,' Hdt. iii. 117 ; Dor. F. xXa or
Theoc. 6. 32, A. i*X|a, &c., as from xXa* or X2> ^ 245. 1).
II. By the ADDITION OF CONSONANTS,
usually either z, tf, i>, tfx, or ?.
Of these consonants, T is chiefly added to labial roots ; a, to
palatal and lingual roots ; i/ (without further addition, 289. 2),
to liquid and pure roots; ax, , &c., to pwrfi roots. In a few
instances, the close terminations are affixed to the protracted
root.
2 73. 1. ADDITION OF r (see 52).
. To Labial Roots.
(r. p-, a-TT-), to fasten to, to set on fire, F. u-^/u, A. H\, Pf. P.
i, A. P. flippy (oi^nv, Hdt. i. 1 9, U<p^jy, v. 543). Kindred, a0, to
handle, Ion. <pa<rovw, A. #<p<r, Hdt. iii. 69, atvct<pio-xa> ( 296).
(iet-rru (T. @ct<p-, /3Tr-), to <//p, F. /Sa-v^a/, A. i'ea-^a, Pf. P. fiiGaftftcu,
1 A. P. iGd,<p0nv, commonly 2 A. P. tSai^v.
/3Xayr (r. /SXa^-), to Awrf, F. /3A.a^6;, A. e^Xa-^a, Pf. /S^Xa^a, Pf. P.
/JigXa^a/, 1 A. P. tgAa^v, 2 A. P. eSXa^v. F. Pf. /S^Xa^a/, Hipp.
Ep. /SXag^a*, T. 82.
(r. ^y<p-), to fear the flesh, poet. Eur. El. 150, F. Sgttyw, 1 A.
, II. 324, 2 A. Op*. tt.-rofyvQoi T. 187, A. P. fyvffav, t. 435.
(r. Saip-), to 6ttry, F. ^a-^-w, A. Va-^a, Pf. P. r^a^^a/, 3 F. -r-
U-toftou, Soph. Aj. 577, 2 A. P. tra<pjv ( 263). 1 A. P. i&tylnv, Hdt. ii.
81. From the r. $<p- in another sense, come the Ep. and Ion. _' Pf., as Pres.,
rUmret, to be amazed, A. 243, Hdt. ii. 156, 2 A. Va<pv, I. 193 ; and the
late 1 Pf. trans. r^<p, Ath. 258 c.
Sgu-rrcti (r. S-K<p-), to break in pieces, F. B-^v-^tu, Pf. P. rifyuftfteti.
A. 'ie^<t, Hipp., 1 A. P. iteWw, Anth., 2 A. P. fr e v>* ( 263), T. 363.
xac.ff.frea (r. xa^r-), to 6enrf, F. xaftij/tu, A. i'xa^-v^a, Pf. P. xixap.ftati
( 217. y), A. P. ixa^*?*. Kindred, y^vru.
(r. *X-T-, *Xtr- 259), to sfeaZ, F. xXE-v^w, A. tx\.f-^et, Pf. *t-
( 236. a), Pf. P. xix*.i/tp.o,i, 1 A. P. i*X^jy, commonly 2 A. P.
Late 2 A. ixXarav.
xovru (r. xer-), to CM*, to sfriie, F. x'e^iu, A. ixo^tt, Pf. *xp, Pf. P. *-
8 ^//, 3 F. xixo^op.*,, Ar. Kan. 1223, 2 A. P. i*aTn. 2 Pf. jP*. *iafr;
N. 60.
(r. xv-), to hide, F. x^u^/u, A. 'ix^v^o., Pf. P. xixUftv,cti, 1 A. P
w, sometimes 2 A. P. ix^vStiv. In Hipp., Pf. xixgv<p*, F. Pf. xsx^w\/'.
For xv<rra.trxi, see 249. rf.
A - W**^f Pf - P - fff*fth 2 A. P
(r. ^r-), to seize, poet., F. fieif^a, 0. 1 37, 1 A. iftct^a., Ar. Eq
ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II
197, Ep 2 A. /*>a e cr fl y, shortened pipum ( 194. 3, 255. $, 263. 6j,
and i> ray, Hes. Sc. 23 1 , 2 Pf. pipa^*, Id. Op. 202.
rw3-<r (r. TV*--, TK-TT-), F. rvirrnfu ( 222. 1 ), 2 A. i'rixra*, Pf. P. <r<n5
^TtifAa,! and rirvp.f4.eti, 2 A. P. iruvvv. Ion. 1 A. irwv^a, A. 531, iru^u.u,rn>
Hdt. ii. 40. For rsrwaravTEy, see 194. 3.
. To Other Roots.
avta, KVuru (r. otvv-, ctvvr-), to accomplish, F. avw<ra;, A. vvvcra., Pf. jjv^ae
Pf. P. %vvffft.a.i. A. P. wuffffw, Hes. Sc. 311. The simpler form 'v like-
wise occurs in the Pres. and Irapf. For 4'vwra, &c., see 246. a.
r'mrta (r. rgx-, T/XT- 259), to beget, to brine/ forth, F. TS*, ^ mmoiily
Ts|a^/, 1 A. Ta, commonly 2 A. enxov, 2 Pf. rsroxa, A. P. i<ri%0r.v.
Late Pf. P. rinypttt. For r^jiWai, see 200. y.
973. 2. ADDITION OF f.
This letter is sometimes simply prefixed or affixed to the
characteristic, but commonly unites with it, if a palatal, to form
<jor (TT, 70. 1), or less frequently , and, if a lingual, to form
( 51. N.), or less frequently a (TI).
NOTES. (1.) Palatals in - are mostly onomatopes. (2.) Lingfuals in
-<*; are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses, and, by reason of eu-
phonic changes, nowhere exhibiting the root in its simple form. The charac-
teristic may, however, be often determined from another word. It is most
frequently S, and may be assumed to be this letter, if not known to be another.
(3.) In a few instances, o unites with yy to fonn , and even with a labial to
form or 9*.
. Prefixed.
XJ<ne (r. aXi/*-, Xw<r*-), to avoid, poet., F. iXve*, A. #Au. Extended
Ep. forms, >.i/<r*a Z. 44.?, Xt5<r*avi #. 330.
ik* (r. ir*-, u'- 260, *;>*-), to //Aen, Ep. F. 19' (also * t <r*.u I. 279.),
Pf. P., as Pres., %iyn.^ to fo //Ac, Eur. Ale. 1063, Plup P. tj^jiv, $. 790.
The common trans, fonn is /**, -a<ra;, &c., and the common intrans., the
pret. lotxu, ($ 238. /}), ibr which are also used the simpler !* (having in the
3d Pers. pi. the irregular form iTgan Ar. Av. 96 ; cf. *<r*< , > 237. ?), an^
Ion. oTxfe Hdt. i. 1.55 ; Plup., a Impf., ^'*/ ( 189. 5,. F i7w, Ar. Nub.
1OO1. Ep. Impf. intrans. (or Pf.) i7* 2. 520.
IT and iyvi-rw (r. I'VIT-, i/r- 259, iW<r-), *o pe*l.. t"^, poet. A. 64 .1,
B. 761, Soph. (Ed. T. 3.3O, F. sv/^*, H. 447, and inr^tvu ($ 222) i. 98
2 A. ifi<r-ra, Eur. Sup. 435. Kindred, !*iVr* and j<V<r ( 276. /), to re-
proacA, Ep. T. 438, O. 198, 2 A. f<ra,r fl and ivivra-ay ( 19 *. 3). Related
to iTa-fly ( 301. 7).
A<rx<w (r. Xa*-), to owf, to wrtcr, poet., F. A*o-^* (^ 222), A. iXj.
r, commonly 2 A. ifXa*ay, 2 Pf. XiXaxa ( ^ 236. E.). 2 A. M. XXaxr
(^ 194. 3). For XiX4*i/r, see > 253. 2. Deriv. forms, Tp. Xuxiw, ^. 379
Dor. X*i, Theoc. 2. -J4, Att. Xx, ^Esch. Sup. 872.
/*. Affixed.
(r. aXix-, Xig-)> to wnrdoff, poet, in the Act., F. JXf|wVw, Z. 109,
y. 346, and #Xi, ^Isch. Sup. 1O5J, 2 A. X ^* (^ 194. 3,
10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 225
261), faxetfn (N 299) jfcsch. Fr. 417 ; Mid. to repel, F. aXt&jVo^a/, \\\. 7.3
A. flXsga^uy, i. 3. 6.
0$aga,ttfln, to bite, Ion. and Poet., F. o^a^Vo^ai, Hipp., A. ^Sa^a^v, Anth.,
Pf. P. ubt*.y/*Kt. Act. $, to smart from a bite, Symp. 4. 27.
274. y. Uniting with a Palatal to form 99 (TT).
X/.<r<rai or aXXarTu* (r. XXy-), to change, F. XXi;, A. #XXaa, Pf.
Xa;, Pf. P. Jj'XXay^a/, 1 A. P. jXXa;<V, 2 A. P. flXXay^y.
<rXj5-- (r. <rXjy-), to strike, in composition with sx or XT, to sfr/Ae zt'tVA
/-, F. irXrfa;, A. iVX|, 2 Pf. Ti<rX?ya, Pf. P. <rg-rXiy/i/, 3 F. trirXv-
Ar. Eq. 272, 1 A. P. i-rX^^v, commonly 2 A. P. lrXiyiy, but !.-
wXyv, xarsTXayjjy ( -yjv, F. 31, 2. 225). For rs^X^yav, &c., see 5} 194. 3.
The form rXjjyviV**' ( 293) occurs Th. iv. 125. In the simple sense to
strike, the Att. writers associate the Act. of ira.Tot.jffu with the Pass, of <rX??<r-
($ 301).
rrviffffet (r. wrax-, <rrjx- ^ 26(j), to crouch from fear, F. cr7->j^<w, 1 A.
tvrnla., poet. 2 A. iVraxov, ^Esch. Eum. 252, Pf. JsTTTJj^a. Ep., from r. wrat-,
2 A. Z>. 3 TTjjrjjy H.-136, Pf. PL *i**v*,s ( 253. 1), B. 312 (cf. 238. a).
Kindred, -rreaiTfiu, A. 371, -rrurxa^a, A. 372.
Tctoa-fffu (r. raoa^;-), to disturb, F. <ra<w, A. T^a|, Pf. P. rsra^ay-
/, A. P. tT^^^v. From <ru.^a.areru is formed, by metathesis, contraction,
and the aspiration of T before ^( 65. N.), S-^aavrw (ra^ar^-, rgatairir-, S-geiffff-),
F. ^, A. t^a^a, A. P. s^^^v. Ep. Pf., as Pr. intrans., Tir S >j^ ( 62),
H. 346.
reiffff* (r. ray-), to arrange, F. ra|, A. iTa, Pf. rsra^a, Pf. P. -ri-
rnyfAiu, F. Pf. TiTa^a/, Th. V. 71, 1 A. P. ira;^jv, rare 2 A. P. Irayjjy.
<f>i<rfu (r. $px-\ to shudder, F. lg/ga, A. tipcat, 2 Pf. <rs^rxa. For ri-
^*arf, see 5 246. 2.
$. Uniting with a Palatal to form .
* e 2>*and 2 Pf. i e 7 ( 238. j8), to cry, F. Pf. xix^^m ( 239. c),
2 A. ix^aysy. Kindred, xX2> (^ 277. a), ^^, -ul*>, xX^u.
oi/*.<v%a (r. a/^wy-), to bewail, F. olft&>%t>ftati, A. af*.u%ot, Pf. P. o7ftuy>ftcu
(; 189. 4). A. P. Pf. l(tu X 6t'is Theog. 1204, late F. 0<>jugw, Anth.
oXaXtJ^u (r. flXoXwy-), to shout, to shriek, F. oXeXt^o^a/, A. XXw|a.
ffrtvci^u, and poet, trrtvai^u, to groan, F. arivaQw, A. ItrTiva.^. Poet, forms,
fl-Taya^sw, Soph. El. 133, ffrtK%i%u or o-rtvat.%%it>, B. 781, A. t<rrova;)<r,
2. 124.
trqxil^ea and ff^a-rru (r. -^y-), to S/ay, F. <r^o6|a;, A. 'ia$>t.\K, 1 A. P. l<r<f>ei%-
inv, commonly 2 A. P. e<r<pyny. Pf. P. iVpay^ai, x. 532. The shorter
root (p- appears in the Ep. Pf. P. vi<p*ftai, E. 531, F. Pf. vitpyxropat, N. 829.
Hence (r. (pa-, py- 259, 277), the poet. 2 A. i<rs<pv<y ( \ 194. 3, 261).
i. Uniting with yy to form .
rXa&; (r. irXayy-), to catwe to wander, poet. (= -rXayasw), B. 132,
A. IrXay!-*, w. 307 ; Mid. *Xa'^o/ta<, to wander, Soph. Aj. 886, F. <rXay-
^ta/ . 312, A- P. IrXa'y^^" Ear. Hipp. 240.
<raX<rigu (r. (TXT/yy-), to sownd a trumpet, F. c-aXWylw, A.
Late F. O-XT<VW, &c.
See, also, *Xa$> C 277. ).
'226 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II.
2 7 5. . Uniting with a Lingual to form .
KttB'^u (r. i-, it- 282, !-, <- ^259), to *ea, to p/ace, F. xa&Vw, xafiS
200. /3), A. lxV<V and xra { 192. 3), Ar. Ran. 911. Mid. *#
/tta/, and rarely xa#a/ct/, PI. Ax. 371 c, to sz'f, F. xa&^Va/etai ( 222), PL
Phaedr. 229 a," and x^oZpat ( 200. 7), PI. Theset. 146 a, ^ A. commonly
trans. ixettiveifAtiv, Dem. 897. 3, and Ka.6tnra.fAnv (^ 189. :<), Eur. Hipp. 31
2 A. intrans. IxaSsg^uijv, i. 5. 9. Late, A. P. \*at4iffdn, Anth., F. M. xo.fa
liffopKi, Diog. Laert. ii. 72. The simple forms are chiefly poet, and dialectic
*, to seat, sit, B. 53, ^sch. Eum. 18 (extended %eiv*>, Th. ii. 76), A. tl<ret>
B. 549, Pt. 1r*f, x, 361 (Ion. ine-iit*t Hdt. iii. 126); Mid. '%o(*i, T. 162,
and rarely i^*, Soph. CEd. T. 32, F. ty-ifffuOeti I. 455, later fYrqtuei Ap. Rb.
2. 807, i" A. ilrupw, Theog. 12, irpn, Pind. P. 4. 363, hava^v, g. 295,
2 A. i$y** ^Esch. Eum. 3 ; Pf. P. /, to sit ft 59), A. 134, Eur. Ale,
604, of which the comp. xMnpeu is also common in Att. prose. Derir.
fyvet, -txru, &c., A. P. AgvSnv and RtwSw ( 278. y).
ovoftei^u (r. avatar-), to name, F. ovopiiiru, A. avoftettra, Pf. uvof/.axet, Pf. P.
uv'rt(jt.a.ff[t,a.t, A. P. uvttft.a.ff6v)v. Ion. olvoft.a,^u ( 44. 4), Hdt. IV. 6, ^Eol. o-
^a2> ( 44. 5), Puid. P. 2. 82, chiefly Ep. nofutlvu, B. 488.
f^a^w (r. (p ? a$-), to'fe//, F. <pfa<rw, A. %a<r, Pf. cr^^axa, Pf. P. fi^et-
ff/AKi, A. P. ifyaftw. Pf. P. Pf. r{-<rilgaV" *> Hes - P- 653 For <r *'
^a5av, &c., see 1 94. 3. Extended, 1 A. <pe W Pind. Nem. 3. 45.
#2> (r. ^a^-, xa$- 263. N.), < drive back, retire (- iv. 1. 16),
more frequently, but chiefly Ep., Mid. %<i%of&ai, to retire^ F. ^ao-o^a/, 1 A.
I%*rraftri9, A. 535. Ep. 2 A. P. xexa^wv, 2 A. M. xixutovrt ( 194. 3j.
F. ia^V ( 239. 6).
n. Uniting with a Lingual to form gg (TT).
tttitirr*, to be unused, Ep. K. 493, A. Mm, Ap. Rh. 1. 1 171.
d^u, and Att. U^OTTU (r. a^o^-), F. u^ftofu, fiftotrftui, Dor. A. P.
y, Diog. Laert. viii. 85.
ffffu or ftXirrv (r. pi^tr-, ft.'ktr- 261, /3X/T- 64. K), to tae Aoej/
<Ae hive, F. /3/uV<w, A. t*.ur*.
(r. x^^-), to arm, poet., Pf. P. Pf. xixa^v^ivot ( 53), T. 18
Eur. Andr. 279. A. M. Pt. xo^vtrfftiftivos ( 71) T. 397, Dor. A. 1*6
( 24:5. I), Theoc. 3. 5.
ireiiro-Mf to sprinkle, F. <r<r;, A. forao-a, A. P. tTao-^^v.
ir\eiff<ru, to fashion, F. <rXa<r<w, A. JfwXaira, Pf. P. tri-r^ar/tai, A. P. J*
Wb.
S. Uniting vith a Labial to form or fir.
.'**/ (r. <#-), to wash, F. vtyta, A. ify/^a, Pf. P. vivifji^.a.i, A. P. Iv
Hipp. Late v/Vrw, Plut., but a.-Jfo-tlvr 1^60.1 ir. 178.
ri<r<r* or rirT<w (r. Tnr-)i to cooA, F. ri-^, A. ifn-^a, Pf. P. vriTt/t
A. P. iari&jv. Late -!TTA;.
See, also, !y<Vr ( 273. ), X*^/**' ( 290).
^ 27G. REMARK. As verbs in - and - are formed from both
palatal -and lingual roots, and as pure verbs often pass into verbs in -, it is
not strange that in some verbs there should be an intermingling of forma.
Thus,
CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 227
, to snatch, F. fy-rciff*,, A. **, Pf. *, Pf. P.
A. P. 4(<nrlff. Non-Alt. F. ^T|, X. 310, A. P. Ae*"*'*'* Hdt - "
&c. Late 2 A. M. Ft. (r. e <r-, 227) fy-rapivos, Anth.
ive/2>, to fay, rfrip, poet., F. iva/g, A. 191, A. lv e /| P. 187, and
fiva,i<ra, Anacr., Pf. P. tivapfftai, Soph. Aj. 26, wttie8nv, JEsch. Cho. 347,
Primitive, lv/e* 0. 296, 2 A. jfrg, Soph. Ant. 87 J, 1 A. M. iv^a^v,
E. 43.
fg}* (or ?g&) and |S (r. i^y-, fay 262, l e $-), to do, poet, and Ion
jEsch. Sept. 231, <I>. 214, F. ?g* i. 360, and fifa Eur. Ale. 262, A. Z{g
^Esch. Sept. 924, and Z#ig or Zgiga, I. 536, Soph. (Ed. C. 539 (observe the
augment), 2 Pf. fyy, B. 272, 2 Plup. iJ e yi/y ( 189. 5), $. 693, l^yta,
Hdt. i. 1 27, A. P. Pt. pix^'is, I. 250.
uigungig*!, to ponder, poet., F. ftt^n^ *. 261, A. i^^/ga, A. 189.
and lfe.ifAVKra, Ar. Vesp. 5.
<r/^w, to jo/ay, F. -ra/^ai, wa/^v^a/ ( 200. 3), A. s-ra/fra, Pf. <rra/x,
Pf. P. vrwretlfffieu. Later, -ra'^ta, tirai^x, r'tfa.i^tt, xi'ffttiyfji.a.i, ivreti%0tiv.
NOTE. See 245. 1 . The Dorics sometimes extend the palatal forms to
other tenses, besides the Fut. and Aor. act. and mid. ; as, iXvy'i^^s (for -<Wjf)
Theoc. 1 98, T^Xay^a/ ($Xa) Id. 22. 45, a.^o^v ( 275. ).
9 7 7. 3. ADDITION OF .
In impure roots, v is commonly prefixed to the characteristic ,
but in pure roots, affixed.
NOTE. In a few poetic forms, v is prefixed to characteristic. For the
changes of > before a consonant, see 54. A short vowel is sometimes
lengthened before .
a. Prefixed to a Consonant.
(r. 'aX-, avA.-, aXX-), to Zea/7, F. aXaw/Ka/, A. Xa/*|v, SM^;'. '>.
^*a< ( 56. a), &C., 2 A. ^Xa^jjv, fi'Mi;. 'aXeapoti, &C. Ep. nude 2 A. S. 2
aXr <r. 754, 3 aXra 755, Pi. aX^svaj A. 421 ( 13. 4, 185. S).
flXX (r. /3x-, /3X- 262, /3 X- 28, 288), F. /S*X, &c., see 223.
Ep., F. fiXwftKi, T. 335, 2 A. J'xiv ( 227. /S), <p. 15, lxi>jv, S. 39,
commonly pass. A. 675, Opt. S. 2 /SXjja or (r. /3X- 259, cf. %iiri,
284) /3Xr N. 288, Inf. /3x5J<rAz< A.'l 15, &C. ; Pf. P. jSs^X^a/, I. 9.
*X^<w (r. xXy-, *Xayy-, xX2^- 274. ), to c/aw^r, to scream, F.
1 A. i*Xay|a, 2 A. ixXayov, Pf., as Pres., xsxXayya or xsxXay^a, Ar. Vesp.
929 (xtxXfiya, B. 222, see 246. 2), F. Pf. xixXaygapa/ ( 239. c). Ex-
tet.ded forms, xXatyyew, Theoc. Ep. 6. 5, *Xayya/vw, JEsch. Eum. 131,
*;,77 Soph. Fr. 782.
<r<paXX (r. c-ipaX.), to cfecetre, F. -^aXw, A. i^<piXa, Pf. P. ItrQttXpai,
<2 A. P. ia-(paXjx.
e-TsXXw (r. o-TX-, <r-riX- 259), to enrf, F. ffrtXu, A. icrrs/Xa, Pf. i<rraXx,
Pf. P. la-raX^ai, ? A. P. t<rraXjy, rarely 1 A. P. \ara.*.6w. For irTXJT9,
see 248. /.
/3. Affixed to a Consonant.
**xv (r. Sax., $*- 266), to 6ife, F. ^g/ca, 2 A. ftaxav, Pf. P. Si^n
yft.a.1, A. P. t^'^^wv. Poet. Mid. iaxva^a/, ^Esch. Pers. 571.
228 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK 11
re/*yw (r. ru.ft.-t rifjt,- 259), to cut, F. T'^U, 2 A. trctuov and trfftev, Pf
TiTjttjjxa ( 261), Pf. P. riTftriftKi, 3 F. TtTftyvopteti, A. P. tT/jt-^viv. Ion.
To.fjt.vu, I'. 1O5. For nrfitjfffat, see } 234. /S. Kindred Ep. rftyyu, H. 390
(rftfar*, Mosch. 2. 81), F. -T^AI, 1 A. Vj|, 2 A. ?rpy f 2 A. P.
yrr, later IT^^^V. Some read r^s/, as Pres., N. 707.
See, also, x/ey ( 223).
278. y . Affixed to a Vowel.
and poet, frdirxu ( 279 ; r. /3-) to #0, F. frfapni, 2 A.
(1 57; see 227, 242. b, 251. 4), Pf. /3s* (see 5 238. ). Poet, ano
Ton., F. (M, / M7/ cause to go, Eur. Iph. T. 742, 1 A. j-7, Hdt. i. 46
In composition, Pf. P. fiiGetpai and piGetffftai ( 221. ), A. P. ISdS-vv. Foi
/3i<rio, &c., see fy 185. . Kindred forms, /Saw in Dor. tx?y<rs Th. v. 77
Ep. /3/, T. 22, QiGtfu, H. 213, faGarfa N. 809; Ion. frtZa.*,, Hipp.;
the common causative /3<w ; and apparently the Ep. Pres. used as Fut.
( 200. b) /3w^/, / sAatf u.-att, lice, O. 194, X. 431, PL Q>'<api<r6. (or /3<a
fw^) Horn. Ap. 528.
$y (r. Jfi-), to CTi^er, F. Ju^o^a/, 2 A. Ji7 (f 57 ; see ^ 227, 226. 4),
Pf. ^'^i7xa. For ^vswr/, see 243. 4. The primitive Sw is commonly
causative, to maAe to enter (yet = $uvu, t. 272), F. ^ii<ru t A. ^t7<ra, Pf. ?ra.
ttivxa, v. 8. 23, Pf. P. XtSpeu, A. P. e$y^v. Chiefly Ep. and Ion., Pres. M.
tutftou, E. 140, A. M. ftuff&fw, B. 578, 2 A. P. tiuw, Hipp. For luiriro, &c.,
see ^ 185. t. Later Ep. form, $/*, Ap. Rh. 1. 1008, A. PL Iv^ets 1326.
sXaw, commonly lAavvw, to drive, F. IXutru, iXea (^ 200. 2), A. #A.ra, Pf.
iXwXaxa (^ 19!), Pf. P. IXrXa^a/, A. P. Xa^>jy. Ion., Pf. P. iXrfXar/eaf
Hipp., A. P. Xar^y, Hdt. iii. 54. For UjAa$<rfl, see 248. /. Ion. and
Poet. i).utrr<u, 2. 543.
peiatuott and ju.Kio/u.o.1 (r. /-, ^a/- ^ 267, fjt.iv- 259), to seek after, poet.
Soph. (Ed. C. 83(J, . 367, Ep. F. ^^a, ( 71) A. 190, A. i^aoW^v,
t. 429, 2 Pf. ^s^ (^ 238. ). Pres. />H/J. ^a5i ( 242. b) Mem. ii. I. 20
(Epich.), Inf. (as from r. ^a-) ^^a, Theog. 769. Extended, paiftdv,
ftffu, Soph. Aj. 50.
<rtv (r. ra-, r<- ^ 259), to rfn'nA, F. -r'a^a/ (^ VOO. b), later <riovpeti
' 200. 3), 2 A. 1-rToi ( 227. a), Imp. Wi, commonly , Pf. <riT*i*a,
Pf. P. riirofuit, A. P. ia-aln*.
T/y< (r. r/-), to />ay, to expiate, F. -rf/rw, A. irfira, Pf. rrr*a, Pf. P. TfW-
raai, Ai P. tr!<r6w>. Mid. r/vo/^ui, and rlvuftai or <rtvvt>p.a.i (^ 293), to avenge,
to punish, chiefly poet. T. 279, 366, Eur. Or. 323, 1 1 72, Hdt. v. 77. Poet.
T/W, to pay honor to, F. T'O-* I. I 4 2, trTru, Soph. Ant. 22, Pf. P. Ft. rtnpivaf,
r. 426.
^>va (r. <p&B-), to anticipate, F. q>6a,tra, commonly $6*rofjt.i ( 2 1 9), I A.
p^<r, 2 A. i'^^v ( 2-J7), IY. i'^*. Ep. 2 A. M. 7'f. (p^^tj E. I ! 9.
<P^'v (r. ^^/-) to perish, to tli-.xtroy, F. trans. Qfltria, Qttu, So|)h. Aj. 1 027,
intraus ^eiirtp.a.i, A. trans, 'i^iurn, Pf. P. i'f A><, Plup. P. and 2 A. M.
(^> 227, 'J26. 4) tyfffw. Ep., pfi, i-. 446, /3. 368, A. P. i>^^, ^. 33 1,
2 A. Act. fytifn (cf. 299) E. HO. Extended poet, form, fSi*fo, A.
49 ! , . 250.
J. Prefixed to .
irm/xi, rx.'&in(ju ( 29"),
i C 285),
:H. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 229
4. ADDITION or r.
The addition of these letters is commonly attended with the
precession or protraction of the preceding vowel, with metathe-
sis* or with the loss of a consonant.
u. Without further Change.
a^lrx*, (r. -), to please, F. agiavw, A. fyi<ra, A. P. *<r6ni. See ajag/-
ffxu ( 285).
yr,^at.n and yr,aa.TKu^ to grow old, F. ynfaa-u and ytiget/TOftai, 1 A. lyfy&ffa,
2 A. lynoav ( 227), Pf. yfytt^asxa.
iXa.Tx.of^ee.1 (r. /Xa-)> to propitiate, F. /Xaa-a^a/, A. tXa.aiip.nv, -A. P. <Xr^jy.
Kindred Att. forms, /As^< ^Esch. Sup. 1 1 7, iXioep,<*i, PI. Leg. 804 b. Ep.,
fraa/teau, B. 550, Pf. Sufy'. fowew, p. 365, 0/rf. it.vxoipi, Horn. Ap. 165 ;
forms as from J'XIMM, Imp. i'x<^< Ap. Rh. 4. 1014, "AnS* ( 251. 4), Mid.
foajtMu Horn. Hym. 20. 5 ; later Ep., F. /Xa^a/ Ap. Rh. 2. 808, A. ;*.
^, 1. 1093.
pi$i>ffx.u (r. fiifu-}, to intoxicate, F. fti0uff&>, A. i/u,i0Sffct, A. P. l^s^iW'/jv.
fhe intrans. /KS^V^, to 6e drunk, occurs in the Pres. and Impf.
9 8O. ]8. Vowel changed by Precession.
, commonly a^xitrxta (r. a^fXa-, a^A/s-*- 259), to miscarry,
F. */**.&>*&>, A. l^tCXMW, Pf. J}>A<WX, Pf. P. vpSxuftai. 2 A. >?^Sx^v in
Suid. Ion. tl-a^Aura/ Hipp.
avaXfw, communly avaX/Vxw (r. X0-, aX/ff-x-), to expend, F. KvaXuffu,
A. a,vr,*.utra, Pf. av^Xwxa, Pf. P. vx&//ta/, A. P. avwXiw^v. This verb often
retains a in the augment ( 189. 4), especially in the older Att.; and some-
times, hi double composition, augments the second preposition ( 192. 3);
thus, A. avaXwira, Soph. Aj. 1049, xa<njvaX<w-, Isoc. 201 b.
y. Vowel Lengthened.
(r. /3/a-, &iuf-\ chiefly in the comp. &vK-iu(rxoftxi, to revive,
both trans, and intrans., F. $iu 701*0.1, 1 A. trans, l&wa-a^fjv, 2 A. intrans.
i;*y ( 227), /3/<S, /3/^'rjy ( 226. 2), /3/wA, /3wv<, /3/aw',-. Primitive, /3/a, to
live, Fut. fiiuxra, commonly /3/wTa^a/, 1 A. ?/, commonly 2 A. e;&v,
Pf. /SsS/'wxa, Pf. P. jgfgj'wpa*. Shorter Ep. forms, &iefts<rfa (Pupurfa Wolf.,
i ; 78) Horn. Ap. 528, F. fituffirSi Ap. Rh. 1. 685. For /3jaa t we commonly
find, in the Pres. and Impf., a<w, which again in the other tenses (F. %v<r&> or
fy*e[t,eti, A. 'H^nea., &c.) is rare or late. For the contraction of , see
33. a,. From the contr. forms of the Impf. ('sj) tfyf, i'^>, appears *3
have arisen a 1st Pers. i'*v Eur. Ale. 295, and a late Imp. %%0i Anth. Th*
prolonged ^ and ?* ( 242. b) have given rise to A *-* Hdt.i. 12O,
Inf. & M Simon. Fr. 231. 17.
* *. Metathesis.
j3xrxw (r. ^9X-, jctXa-, /SXa- 64. N.), to go, to come (in the Pres., Ep.
and found only in composition, <r. 466), F. ^aXaZ/^a/, 2 A. fytaXo, Pf.
fttft:>.uu ( 223)
d*n'r (r. Sv-, Sv.), to <//, F. $Mtyef, 2 A. i^avav, Pf. rihvxet ( 237),
F. Pf. rilMgw and ri^yitg/Ma< ( 239. a). See ri/y ( 295).
20
230 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II
(r. S-, $<>-) to leap, F. $oofyai, 2 A. tfo^oi. Collat.
Hdt. iii. 109.
. Consonant Dropped.
%a.ffxu (r. #-, 55), to gape, F. ^etvovftxi, 2 A. slavey, 2 Pf. xi%r>va.
Late XKIVU. Extended ^eta-xii^u, Ar. Vesp. 695.
u (r. *4-, <r^- 259, 277, *a0<rx~, VKC-%-, the aspiration of the &,
is dropped before <r, being transferred to the x, which thus becomes #),
to suffer, F. vrtifopai ( 58), 2 A. fraftv, 2 Pf. -iW. Poet. 1 A. Pt. *'-
*a f (but vraiffus Bind.) ^Esch. Ag. 1624, Ep. Pf. Pt. vi-r&tvi* ( 253. 2)
f. 555, Dor. Pf. *'urr x *, Epich. 7(2). For <rt*Wt, see 238. /?.
2 8 2. 5. ADDITION OF I, , 3-, AND #.
afttt^u and K/tifiu (r. a^t^-), to deprive, poet. Pind. P. 6. 27, r. 18,
F. ctfAi^ffu, A. %pi<ra,, &. 64, A. P. tifAi0tiv, X. 58.
S/a and ^;J (r. ^/-, Ss/S- 269. 6) both Ep. I. 433, A. 470, commonly
$& or ttiaixa. (1 58, 237), to fear, F. Ep. hire/tat, O. 299, A. 'ftit<ra,
Cyr. i. 4. 22 ; Mid. Kofiai, to frighten, poet. E. 763, ^Esch. Eum. 357. Deriv.
^ibtffxofActi or libirropa,!, to frighten, ^tuxu ( 299), and Ep. $ir>/u,i, to chase.
vMa (r. vi; *r>6- 266), to spin, F. VYI<TU, A. P. ivMvv. Ep. via, Hes. Op.
775, A. lwa, T. 128, iv^^^v, . 198. Late Pf. P. vsv^*,.
ovra-^u (r. oura-), to. wound, F. ouruffu, &C. Ep. oureia, %. 356, F. ovrriffu,
1 A. wrj<ra, 2 A. 5. 3 Jra ( 224. E.), 7n/. O yra^, -a^sva/, E. 132,
2 A. M. Pt., as Pass., ovr^ivos, A. 659.
rA.a<w, and poet. <rtx4*>, Eur. Rh. 555, or -rXaitiu, Soph. El. 220 (r. <rX-,
<rtX-, -rtXa^-, -rXi&6-, <r\&6-, 260, 262), to approach, F. wiA.a(ra, irtXal
( 200. 2), A. i<rtA.a<ra, A. P. irsXa<r^;v and poet. IwXa^jjv ( 261. N.),
^Esch. Pr. 896. Ep., <rtXa, Lom, Bac. 44, Pf. P. wirA^/ ^. 108, 2 A. M.
tTA^fjy, A. 449 5 r/Xva, to 6rin^ near, Hes. Op. 508, riXvaift.ee.i, to approach,
T. 93.
and T/, to atr, F. -r^ivu, A. Jr^a, Pf. P. <ri<r(>ierft,ai, A. P.
r^w (r. ffo.0-, *v- 261), to save, F. ^<rw, A. iffura, Pf. triiruxu, Pf. P.
ffi/rupxi and ffi<ru<rp.ai, A. P. i-*^iv. Ep., **, Call. Del. 22, ffauorv, A. 83,
&C. ; Pres. 7m/). (Wot, raaw, <r, 242. b) <rau v. 230, Impf. S. 3 (i<rai)
ir^*, or ffi. w II. 363, 0>. 238 ; contr. , Ap. Rh. 4. 1 97 ; <re*>, in the Subj.
viyt I. 6*1, r 424.
T^'W, to afflict, F. T^UITU, Pf. P. rir(>v/u.eti and r(>u%u (r. T^I/-, *"%-,
r V %a- $ 298), F. T f ^, Pf. P. TIT^^A.^/, Th. iv. 60. So yto> ( 220), to
poet. n^, i. 375 ; -^uu and ^*x,u, to rub.
^ 283. III. Bj INCREASING THE NUMBER OF
SYLLABLES, either, 1. by reduplication, or 2. by
syllabic affixes, or 3. by exchange of letters.
1. REDUPLICATION.
Reduplication in the root is most frequent in
verbs in -i and -axa. Jt is of three kinds :
CH 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 23l
a. Proper, which belongs to roots beginning with a single
consonant, with a mute and liquid, or witli pv, and which pre-
fixes the initial consonant with i, or rarely with e. See dl-
dotfjii, xlxyr^i (^ 284) ; {3i6(jd!)<}x<o, /tu/jyqaxa ( 285).
b. Attic, which belongs to roots beginning with a short vowel
followed by a single consonant, and which prefixes the two
jirst letters. See o/oxw ( 285).
In3(.<-!ai of repeating the initial vowel, < is sometimes inserted, in imitation
of the proper reduplication. See ovivvftt ( 284).
c. Improper, which belongs to roots not included above, and
which simply prefixes i with the rough breathing.
Compare 190, 191. 2. 4.
284. . Verbs in .fu.
1i*>, to bind, rarely ltt*(u (r. Ss-, S/Si-), v. 8. 24 (Impf. ^ A. 105),
F. 3*V. See 219, 216. 0.
titvfiu (r. $-, $/$-), to 0ire, F. $, Ep. \tiuau, . 358. See f 51.
tT.pi (r. i-, /-), to sewrf, F. fr. See 1 54, 229.
"urrvpi (r. ffT-, <W-), to place, F. ffrwa. See ^ 48. Poet. 1 A. ttrrxo-a,
M. 56. Late Pf. trans. sW*x Anth., Dor. I A. P. irrattii Call. Lav. 83.
Kindred forms, ia-ruvu in composition only, Dem. 807. 6 ; rare io-rvxe*
( 246. N.) Ath. 412 e; late <rrjx*>, Rom. *14. 4 ; *riqte< ( 246. )
- A^e a - *'^ a - 62 ) fo fenrf F - /te" /(rii; A - ^" Pf - p - **
Mid. xi%g&f4ai, to borrow. The primitive sense of the root #-
appears to be to supply need. Hence we have,
1 . Ktxcr.fti, to supply the need of another, by lending him what he requires.
Mid. Ki%pap.*x.i, to supply -ones own need by borrowing.
2. ; (5 218. a), to supply the need of one who consults an oracle, by
answering his inquiries, F. %(>ncru, A. 'i^n<ra. t Pf. P. xi%gnju.cci and x'i%/>vffft(xi,
A. P. l^rtffSnv. Mid. ^ao/^a*, to consult an oracle. Poet. %(>ri'.u or x,tf^> w i
Eur. Hel. 5 1 6.
3. xgciaftiti, to supply one's own need by making use of a thing, F. %(>v<rofAKi,
Pf. x.i%gvf*,i t A. P. l^ir^>jv, A. M. i%oinroi/u.t)v. In the Att. contract forms
of %eeia and xa,ofjtou, * takes the place of ( ?3. a), which, on the other
hand, is commonly retained by the Ion. ; as ^ Hdt. i. 55.
4. XQVI (3 Pers. sing., for < or xfifft}, it supplies need, i. e. it is useful
or necessary, it must or ought to be, impers. ; Subj. %(>*, Opt. * %oa,-, %,t-
259) /!, // xfivut, and poet. (;s/v) x,&v, Part. Neut. (%oce.ov. i in-
serted after contraction, 35) x,itov Impf. i%or,v (with y paragogic, for i'^oaj,
or ;{/?, cf. 211. N.) or unaugm. ( 194. J ) -goTi* Fut. ^VHTII. The par-
ticiple ^fiv is sometimes used as an indeclinable noun : thus, rov %otuv.
Personally, S. 2 x,^- ( 18 ^) y **'. AT. Ach. 778 (Meg.) Pf. 1\, as
Pres., xi%gn/u.eti, to need, want, Eur. Iph. A. 382, a. 1 15, F. Pf. xixgya-oftKi,
Theoc. 16. 73. Kindred, WT&U, to want, desire, Ion. x,^^> u Hdt. i. 41,
Dor. xwrta Theoc. 8. 12, and'^ ? '^, Ar. Ach. 734-( 70. V.); Ion. depon.
gjk*s/t/, Hdt. Hi. 1 1 7.
232 ROOT OF THE VERB. | BOOK If
5. a.-r'n-xp, it fully supplies need, i. e. it suffices, it is eno-ugh ; Inf. u<ra
%r,v Impf. avi^n, F. u.-ra^^cFii, A. a-ri%/>ri<ri. Ion. cfro^a.,
(see 3 above), Hdt. ix. 79. So ett%Air ( 242. a) Id. viii. 14,
i. 164, lx-%ritr<t iii. 137. These verbs are also used personally.
himftt.(T. ova-, ov;v-), to benefit^ F. ovvffu, A. uvnffac., A. P. uvvfav, 2 A. M
(ivj^jjv and uvoif^rtv ( 2'_4. 3), Op. ova/^v, //. ovafffai, Ep. and Ion. /mp
Svntro T. 68, //. ovvtrfai Hipp., />. ovj/ttvos /3. 33. Doubtful 2 A. Act //"
avjjva/ PL Rep. 600 d ; late 1 A. M. wvsio-a/^v, Antb.
*-,>irXVM (r. <rX-, *<-, -<rX- 263. 6), to ///, F. -rXVw, A. iTXj<r,
Pf. irin-Xvxet, Pf. P. <rj-rX?<7/a/ (Plup. tv-tfi-r^vro Lys. 180. 4),
A. P. ?TXr>4jv, 2 A. M. ssrXy>jv ( 224. 3), Opt. (rXj-/Vjv) **.faii Of
(rX-, rXs- 2.59) {rXi/^*?* (cf. %titi, 4 above, /SXsro, 277. a), //>. orX?-
<r*. Part. vX-npivog. Imp. ift-ri-r^i ( 251. 4) <1>. 31 1, Pt. (r. TAS.) i^
#vXiis, Hipp. Collat. Ion. forms, ^r/^TXa^, -&, Hes. Th. 88(>, 5nVx, Hea.
Sc. 291 Gaisf., jn/u.-rt.iivoftcti I. 679. Kindred, ^rXj^aw, and the intrans.
a-X^w (2 Pf. r^xj<', Theoc. 22. :58), whence rXj^<w and -rX*)^^**;.
TifA-x-gnfAi (r. -, T/^-r^a-), to 6wrw, F. -rjiiff-a;, A. tvonret, Pf. P.
// or vi-argnirfteu, A. P. i-T^rnrffnv. Pf. ucra-TJ-r^xa, Hipp., F. Pf. r5fT
^we/, Hdt. vi. 9, A. !T^rs Hes. r fh. 8.56, Ep. 6 r A;'. (as from T/^w^&O -r/
r ( 181. ) Ar. Lys. 248. Rare Ep. form, <r(nV, I. -^9-
NOTE. The epenthetic /t* of <rife,-rXvp.i and -T/^T^*)^/ is commonly omitted,
when these verbs, in composition, are preceded by ft, ; thus, t/ttnVx*]^*, but
riVn^u (r. ^i-, r/^i-, 62), to ;>, F. 3V<w. See f 50.
REMARK. O*)^/ (^ 53) is the only verb in - / c*< having a monosyllabic
root, and beginning with a consonant, which is not reduplicated.
$ 3 85. /3. Verbs hi -<r*a,.
i^.ffxv (r. ? -, i e j-, i^a^/^*. 296), to fit, Ep. . 23, 1 A. ?r,
fi. 16'7, a. '280, 2 A. siW^av Ji. ' 10, Soph. El. 147 ( 194. s), 2 Pf. in-
trans., as Pres., u^^u, N. fOO, also Att. a^a^a, uEsch. Prom. 60, H. Gr. iv.
7. 6, A. P. # ? A), II. 211. Pf. P. ii^ifuu, Hes. Op. 4.9, Ap. Rh. 1. 787.
For &KvTct, see v > 253. 2. Deriv., upitrxu ( 279), K^TVU and a^T^vw, &c.
IliS^utrxu (r. /Sao-, /3/f^(w<rx-, ^ 280. y), to e< (the Pres. rare\ Pf. /3jto^*
(see $ 238. ), Pf. P. QifyMfw. Ep., 2 A. ({, Horn. Ap. I 27, 2 Pf. "o/^.
(r. /3^<w^- ; or from new Pres. fafyutu) /3i^<? A. 3.5, F. Pf. (SuS^utrafcxi,
&. 203; Ion. A. P. ie e hv Hdt. iii. 16; late Ep. 1 A. Keg, Ap. Kh.
2. 271 ; late F. fi^oftKi. The deficiencies of this verb are supplied by \<r6\t>
^ 29H) and r^uyu ( 267. 3).
yiyvu/rxu (r. yfl-), to know, F. yvutroftai, 2 A. i'yvwv (^f 57), Pf. t'yvwxa.,
Pf. P. fyva^a;, A. P. ty<r^y. 2 A. M. O/rf. <rwy-yva/>fl yEech. Sup. 210',
Ion. 1 A. av-iyvuffa, /mmutitlnl. Ildt. i. 68.
NOTE. The Ion. (not Horn.) and the later Greek softened / ywaxu and
y'iyvo(/.a.i ( 286) to yltuffxu and ytvoftxi.
(r. 5., W^., ^>r-), to /eac/,, F. J^^, A. l$;$*. Pf. JtS,^.,
Pf. P. }tl&a>yti*i t A. P. iU^. Ep., 1 A. i^<rx^, Horn. Ccr. Ml,
2 A. f3,, Ap. Rh. 3. 529, 3i2 ( 194. 3). From the r. let. u.v .-slsi
formed, with the sense to fearn, the poet. F. la.ri<rona.i ( 'J22), y. lo,', i'f
ltla.x.a., ft. 61, ltltirift.a.1, Theoc. 8. 4, tfiJaa, ^. 5 1 D (hence li%.a,>>(a.i r. . : . (>
CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 233
246. 2), 2 A. P. &jy, Soph. El. 1 69. Hence, likewise, the Ep. F. contr.
(la.i<ru, 1.iu t 200. 2) $', I. 418.
1&ou.ffx.u (r. Jf<r-), to run, used only in composition with <*, S/a, or f|,
F. fylffofteu, I A. i'^ara, 2 A. i'^av (^ 57), Pf. Ss^axa. Kindred, ^a<a;,
Lys. 117. 35, $t)tr<rsuu, Hdt. iv. 79.
[AifAvJiffKu (r. /*y-), to remind, F. ftvriiru, A. i^vjjiras, Pf. P. ftiuvvfteti (see
-234. /3), 3 F. ptftviffoftai, Cyr. iii. 1. 27, A. P. ip.vrnr0vv. As from ^^vu-
<*/ and ix.ipva.pott, Imp. pi/Ano Hdt. v. IO5, /*. tiipvopivos Archil. Fr. 1,
Opt. PI. 3 ptM-vxittro Pind. Fr. 277. Prim. Mid. ^va^a/, to remember (Ep.
5. 106), to nvK), vii. 3. 18. Collat. forms, f*.vri<rx,u, Orph. Hyni. 77. 6, p,vn
/xip.u.t, Anacr. Fr. 69.
vivrgeiirxu, and poet, vr'igvv/u.1 (r. <riga-, vrga- 261, rigva- '278. J), to se#,
Pf. Ti-r^dxa, Pf. P. iri<x-tt,p.i, 3 F. <rsir^aro/u.eei, vii. 1. 36, commonly used
for the rare Tr^w/tai (Ath. 160 f), A. P. 1*^6**. Ep., Fut. //. ;*-
/y) <T*y ( '^45. 3) d>. 454, A. t^- ? a<ra O. 4^8, Pf. P. Pt. <r 'trtin f^ivef
(!>. 58. The Fut. and Aor. of this verb are supplied by a,voluo-ot*.*i and acrs-
$o/*jjv, mid. tenses of aro'Stiufti.
TI-CUO-X.U (r. roo-\ to ivound, F. <rou<rea, A. trgu<r t Pf. P. T&Tcupeti, A. P.
\voufnv. Kindred, T^&, Ep. p. 'J93, Ta&;, to pierce, Ep. Horn. Merc. '283,
F. Toov;ffu, Ib. 178, 1 A. iropna-a., E. 337, 2 A. sra^ov, A. '236 (for rirogo*
and rT0jVa;, see 194. 3, 239. 6), -r^sva/, Ar. Thesm. 986, riT<v
(i 286).
ttt (r. TWX-, 263. N., 273. ), to prepare, Ep. <I>. 342, 2 A. ri.
( 194. 3) . 77, nrvKo/tvv, A. 467.
386. y . Other Verbs.
a.x.ax.'& (*' *X-> **#-, **^'C- 297), to afflict, Ep. w. 43'2, F. axa^w-
rw. 1 A. axa^nira, commonly 2 A. vxotxov, Pf. P. a,x.u,%rifjt.a.i and ax^i^a*
(P. 3 X;$T< 248. /^. Collat., u.%o[jt.oii r. .129, and ei^vvpai, Soph.
Ant. 6 1 27, to sorrow; Pres. .P. a^s^v B. f>94, a^swwv E. 869.
7/yvo^a/ (r. ya-, 7v- '259, 277, y<<ysv-, -yiyv- 26 1 ), to become, F. 7$
tr.ffou.tti (^ 2'22), '2 A. lyiv'opvtv, Pf. yE^jv^a/, 2 Pf. yyva (see 2'58. a),
F. P. yivvff'/iiro[jt.ot,t, 1 A. trans. jyE/va^v, / 6e(?a or 6ore. Ion. and late
A. P. iyivMw, Hipp. For yVT9, see 18.5. <J; for 1 Pf. Dor. yiyu.x.m,
v 246. -2 ; for UysyaavTa/, '24,-j. 3 ; for ylvaftcu, 285. N, Kindred, ys/.
tttftju, Ep. X. 477, yvva&;, -YIJU, to beget.
X;Aa<V/ (r. X-, X/X-, 267), to rfes/re earnestly, Ep. N. 253, Pf. P.
(one X dropped, 263. 6) ;uX<V/, A. 465. The prim. Xaw is used by the
Dorics; Thecc. 1. 12.
H>vu>, and poet, pipvu, ^Esch. Ag. 74, F. ptvZ. See 222. 2. Ep. deriv.
pipvu^w, B. 39'2.
w<W (r -rtr-, -riff. '273. /S, -r^Tr-), to /aff, F. -rurovftati ( ; 200. 3),
1 A. iVso-a, commonly 2 A. jTse-ay, Pf. (TT-, <rrs- >S *262, -rra- '236. a)
TSflrTx* (see 238. a). Dor. 2 A. Trtray, Rnd. 0. 7. 126 ; late Pf. TS-
<rrxa, Anth. Poet, forms, -rirvu, Soph. (Ed. C. t 754, and perhaps ^TV.*
(Eur. Ph. 293) and virvcitv (Pind. I. 2. 39), with which some connect I'T/T
av as C 2 Aor.
TtTgKtva) (r. T^a-, rtrgxtv- 277), to 6ore, F. r^<ru, A. ir^/ret, Pf. P. rt-
i, A. P. i<r^i6r,v, A. M. ETST^^vajajjy. F. nrgetvi&i, Hdt. iii. 1 '2, A. ET-E-
E. 247, A. P. IrETfav^v, Anth. Late or doubtful, T/rgaa/, T<T^a/v<i;,
V
20*
234 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II
2. SYLLABIC AFFIXES.
^287. The syllables which are most frequent
ly affixed to protract the root are a, , dr, v, i/v,
HJX, and i.
a. ADDITION OF a. AND i.
REMARKS. (1.) When a. is affixed, t in the preceding syllable usually
becomes u ; but, when t is affixed, . See a-r^paw and vr^'iu ( 259. a).
(2.) The vowel which is added is more frequently retained before the close
terminations.
u. Addition of a.
fiopxuofAKi (T. $;-), to roar, F. jS^f^^o^a/, A. igv%v<ra.fvv, A. P. iSou-
%r,6nv, 2 Pf., as Pres., ftiS^u^et. Kindred, (sgt/xu, later &gu%eo (Hipp.), to
gnash the teeth. Similar onomatopes are /Sx^ao^a/ and /u.^xa,opa,i, to bleat,
and f*.vxa,apu,i, to low, F. -yiffopo.!, Ep. 'J Pf. {tift,*ix,K, K. 362, ftiftvx.0,, 2. 580,
2 A. E>*OV, FT. 469, *>iyxay, E. 749.
yoeiu (r. ya-), to bewail, Ep. II. 664, F. yon<rapa.i, 2 A. t yaav, Z. 500. Mid.
yaao^a, also Att., Soph. CEd. T. 1249.
F. vupvffu, poet, for v-ftu ( 222. 2), to distribute. Also Ep. Impf.
A. 635.
<rirofAoei, poet, -rsrv.ftxi, Find. P. 8. 128, and -rarao^a/, B. 46'J, ^Esch. Sept.
84, later <V<r* / aa/, Eur. Iph. A. 1 608 (r. VTIT-, vtret-, <rorct-, fret- 261, "TT-
283. c), to fly, F. TT9jV<Y*/, commonly wrrtoofAttt, 2 A. tyrrnv, 2 A. M.
i-TTa^^v, commonly IfTr^jjv (S 261), Pf. P. <rtvorriju,ut, A. P. soraTr'^jn.
F. vrorrxrofAui, Mosch. 2. 141. Other collat. forms, Tarts^a/, T. 357, trairao-
fiui, M. 287, irt7a.ofAKi, Hdt. iii. 111.
8 8. /S. Addition of i.
K^iof*,*!, and poet. 7S<y*a/, ^Esch. Eum. 549 (r. /-, /^i-), to respect,
F. a/$i*<yta<, A. M. ^<ra^jv, Pf. fiurpitt (P. 3 ^o-^ictro, 248. /, Hdt. i.
61), A. P. jjS^v.
, t. 478, and &t)pti, I. 5 (r. -, i-), to breathe, blow, Ep. ; 7mp. ajTft>,
/TI/. iJiv*/, P<. / Pass. ^a/, ?. 131. Deriv., i^, 0. 252, and <iiW,
II. 468, to breathe out, expire. Kindred, A. citffet, to breathe in sleep, to sleep,
y. I51,^ontr. a<rtt, x. 367.
y/u.iu (r. yet/u.-}, to marry, said of the man, F. yetfteu, A. lynfta., Pf. yiyoi-
/*r*ei, Pf. P. yiya.fAn/u.xi. Mid. y a. pi op 0.1, to marry, said of the woman,
F. ya.povfjta.1, A. ly^a/tojv. Late F. yetprtffen, A. iya/**!^*, A. P. iya^nVjjn
(ya.(Ai6ilffet Theoc. 8. 91). Ep. F. M. ya/AiWo^a/, will provide a wife for,
I. 394.
3/, to <foW, consider, poet, and Ion. TI. 713, Mid. 2/qua<, commonly
J/^ai (i 224. 3 ; r. $<-, J/^i-), ^ sf-eA, Theoc. 25. 37, X. 100, Hdt. i. 95,
F. $iv<rop.ai, A. llfaftip.**.
lo*iu (r. J*-)> to *^ 7 "' /rt /A ' W * F ' ^5 A - 5 I. Pf - P- Vtloyftett, A. P.
iSe^^v. Poet, and Ion., F. SoxtiV*, A. t Vown*,, Pf. Ji5*j*a, I'f. P. $i3ox/*ett
A. P. t5x}Vjy. Impers. Soxi/", <7 seems, F. Ja^i/, &c.
iV^ i X ,*/ and f-r/^iXi^a/ (r. ^iX-, /iXi.). to <^ ca^ o/", F.
/*<, Pf. P. \<rip,tjAiA.Y)[Aa.i, A. P. !T
CM. 10.J EMPHATIC CHANGES. 235
xrvriv, to sound, to crash, poet., F. xrwrjffu, 1 A. Ixrvfnira, 2 A. Ixro
and xt/X/y$<w, to roll, F. (xfX--&/, 58) xr/xta-a;, A. *vXiV
Pf. P. xsxt/'x/9ya/, A. P. IxvX/Wjjy. Late F. xvX^Va;. Rare Pres. xx< ,
Ar. Vesp. '202. Kindred, xaX/v^so^a^ to 6e 6wserf iw, Cyr. i. 4. 5, aX/v^jw or
aX/vSw, A. #Xr<ra, Ar. Nub. 32, Pf. #xrxa, Ib. 33.
xv(>u and xv^lu, to meet with, to chance, chiefly poet, and Ion. Eur. Hipp.
746, Med. 23, F. KU^U ( 56. jS), Soph. (Ed. (3. 225, and xw^Vw, Eur. Heracl.
252, A. i'xt/<r, T. 23, and txv^fx, Hdt. i. 31, Pf. xtxv^xa, Pf. P. xx^-
^a/.
jra.rioft.iti (r. -rar-), to tasfe, Ion. and Poet. Hdt. ii. 37, F. <r<r<y*a/, A. i-rci-
r*^y, A. 464, Soph. Ant. 202, Plup. fl-iwa^jjv H. 642.
ro(>$f.u (r. T#-, ;rs^- 259, *&-), to /ay waste, F. fo^6^<ru, Pf. wuroj-
^xat, &c. Poet, -r^^, F. -sr^(7-6;, Soph. Ph. 114, 1 A. ivrttret, a. 2, Ep. 2 A.
i^a^av ( 262), A. 367. For trivia*, see 246. /3.
P/TTW and fi-rriea (r. p/<p-, ^^rr- --'72), to throw, F. //^uw, A. t'ppi^u, Pf.
tppl<pa, Pf. P. 'iffitAfAKt, 1 A. P. ipp'iQtivv, 2 A. P. Ipp^Qnv. For pi-rree.ffx.ov, see
249. rf. Deriv. pWra2>.
i, commonly <rxTy or ffxov'iaf/.a.i (r. O-XST-), F. ffxtij/efiiai, A. to~xt
y, Pf. EirxE^^a/, F. Pf. \.ffx.i-$<o[ioc.i, PI. Rep. 392 C.
(r. /w^-), to /?MsA, F. &;, and poet. &jV, A. ( 189. 2), Pf. P.
/, A. P. ^}y. Late Pf. '&>*, Plut. ; Ep. and Ion., A. <J<ra, A. 220
as, for *-ga-ufftts, Anth.), Pf. P. uapou, Hdt. v. 69; o.x-tu6w Hipp.
Deriv. Airri^oftui, to justle, Ar. Ach. 42.
b. ADDITION OF y.
REMARKS. (1.) Roots which receive i* without further
change are mostly double consonant. (2. ) -Mwte roots receiv-
ing av commonly insert v before the characteristic. (3.) Roots
which do not insert v sometimes prolong iiv to aiv or uv.
. Without further Change.
ai<r0eivaptKi, and rarely o."o6op.a.i (r. a/<r^-, a/V^av-\ to perceive, F. aiff^ffafieu
( 222, 1 ), 2 A. jvtipw, Pf. P. Mnftat.
(r. X<p.), to /nd, poet. Eur. Med. 298, 2 A. X<pav 0>. 79.
a.tu (r. a^aa^r-), to ^rr, to m?'ss, F. KfAx^ffeftKi, 2 A. sj^a^rov, Pf.
, Pf. P. M^a^TJj^a/, A. P. fiftagrMnv. F. a^a^rwVw, Hipp., 1 A.
t Orph. Arg. 646, Ep. 2 A. (a^a^r-, etft^etr- '^62, otpGoar-, 13.4,
28, 64. 2) Sfteprav, E. 287 (a>a f <r A. 491). Hence (^ dropped, cf. a-X-
xiv, 296) a^ara^isw, only in A. (S"u6/. a.^^ora^off.iv K. 65.
aT^^ava^a/, and sometimes aT^a^a/ (r. t^;^-), to 6e /taferf, F. a#i%6nn-
fAtt.i, 2 A. aa-jj^^a^^v, Pf. iirn%ftiftiu* +
(tv^ai and at|av(w, poet, and Ion. a|w (r. aFiy-, aiy-, asy-, 22. , ai|-,
?-, 273), Z. 261, to increase, F. c^nVw, &c. See 1 43, and cf. Lat.
au^eo.
$>KirTtivu, and poet. p>\a.irria (r. jSXao-r-), to sprout, to bud, F. $\a.ffrviffu,
2 A. f/3A,, Pf. /Sx<rT^* ( 1 90 ; Plup. i*x a *-r>;*< Th. iii. 26). 1 A.
, Ap. Rh. 1. 1131.
"236 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II
iKpfdvu (r. $0-), to sleep, usually in composition with xar*, 2 A.
Pf. SsSagSuxa, 2 A. P. poet, iliitfnv. Ep. 2 A. ftptOn $. 296, 2 A. P. l^a-
<7>jv, s. 471 ( 262).
e-pX/rxavai (r. (*-, oQXirx- 296), to inewr, F. oQXwa, 1 A. <S<pXj-
commonly 2 A. JpXey, Pf. pxjx. Ion. Irapf. or 2 A. <px ( 243. 4)
Hdt. viii. 26. See o^t/Xw ( 268).
29O. /S. With the Insertion of (see 54).
avSava; (r. $ , a-v-Sav-), to please, poet, and Ion. B. 114, Soph. Ant. 504
F. 3ijV, Hdt. v. 39, 2 A. Utm, Id. i. 151, SuA;. V &c., 2 Pf. ?J, I. 173
(f*$, Theoc. 27. 22 ; 1 Pf. $jxa, Hippon.)* For the augm., see 189. 2.
Kindred, %$&>, to please, commonly fyoftai, to be pleased, F. rxr^ira/ta/, A. wW
(A. M. riVara /. 353).
igwyyavu (r. ty-) to disgorge, 2 A. #i/yav. Ion. \(n.vyo(t.a,i, O. 621,
F. igiv&f&eu, Pf. i^svy^a*, Hipp.
&yyy<w (r. 9-<y-), to towcA, F. Sfyf** 1 ) 2 A. W/yav. Lat. tara^o.
xr^avw or x/y^ax (r. /;-), to ^nrf, poet. Eur. Ale. 477, F. xr%j<rt>ftKi t
Soph. (Ed. C. 1487, 2 A. Jf^a, Eur. Ale. 22. Ep. xr^v, P. 672, and
xtx'iu u. 284 (Mid. Pf. Kixnpttos, E. 187), F. xi^7, Ap. Rh. 4. 1482,
2 A. (from r. x<6-, or Pass, with sense of Act.) lxf^jv, r. 379, Subj. (xt%)
KI^I'IU ('- 243. b), A. 26, &c. 1 A. M. l^^trdftnv, A. 385.
Xy^va> Cr. Xa^-, X^- 266, Xy^- 259, 277, Xay^av-), to obtain
by lot, F. Xnloptti, 2 A. i'Xa^av, Pf. iJ'Xw^a ( 191. 1 ) and XsXay^a, Pf. P.
tfXwyttKi, A. P. Uw'^^v. Ion. F. Xags^a*, Hdt. vii. 144. For 2 Aor. Swfy*.
XsXa^;<w, causative, see 1 94. 3.
X^?avw (r. X*-, Xf-, Xa^S-), to to^e, F. X^-^a^a/, 2 A. s'Xafav,
Pf. sfxj<pa ( 19!. 1), Pf. P. tfav/tttai, and poet. XiX^^a/, Eur. Iph. A. 363,
A. P. sX^wv. Ion., F. lafr4,ft*i, Hdt. i. 199, Pf. P. XeXa^^a/, iii. 117,
A. P. iXa^jv, ii. 89, Pf. A. XjXajxa ( 222), iv. 79. For XfXa^^a/, SCO
194. 3. Poet, forms, Xa/**< and Xa^a/, A. 357, Ar. Lys. 209.
Xav^avw, and sometimes X^w (r. X^-, X^-), to /z'e A/rf, to escape notice,
F. Xvtru, 1 A. 1'Xwa-a, commonly 2 A. i'Xa^a*, 2 Pf. XtX)^fl6. Mid. Xv<>ava/M<
and X'/j^a/, to forget, F. XflVa^a/, 2 A. \Xa.6'ofArtv, Pf. X{X<r^a<, F. Pf. XtXu'-
c-a^a/, P:ur. Ale. 198. Ep. Pf. P. XtXaa-^a/, E. 834, late 1 A. M JX<r^r,v,
Quint. 3. 99, Dor. A. P. fXaa-^>iv, Theoc. 2. 46. For XX*&, &c., see 1 94. 3
Collate U-X^avw, . 221.
XI/TW (r. x/r-, Xt/cr-), to feare, and sometimes in composition X/^wavw, Th
viii. 17, F. Xu'V'*;, &c. (t 37). Late 1 A. i'X<^.
^v^ay (r. ^.) to karn i F - P*M<rP*' ( 222), 2 A. ?,*&, Pf. ,uv*a^.
*. J'or fj.a.6iu/jLui, see 200. y.
rui6a.v9^a.i, and poet. <riu6o/*u.i ^Esch. Ag. 9S8 (r. W-, wi^- 270), t
tmjuire, F. vrtvf 0^0.1 (irtufftTa-fai ^sch. Pr. 98, 2(K). 3), 2 A. i-rvtoftnv,
Pf. rtyffuu. Ep. 2 A. 0|p/. riT^a/Tfl ( 194. 3), Z. 50.
re/y (r. rv%-, r^v% | -\ to happen, to obtain, to hit, F. rtv%aftati, 2 A. trv-
#a, Pf. Tirw'^wxa ( 222), rarely TITI^*, Ath. 581 e. Ep. 1 A. 1%*,,
A. iOfi. Seei/^ ( 270).
*v$av (r. ^*X-, ^3-, ^iJ- 259), to contain, poet. Ar. Ran. 26O,
F. (^ly^*,, 58) i iVqtMi, r. 17, 2 A. **, A. 24, 2 Pf.
T. 268.
CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 237
. 3 O 1 . y. With v prolonged.
aXSa.'v*; (r. *$-), to nourish, poet. JEsch. Pr. 54O, 2 A. >jX$yav, <r. 70. Also
X$iVx, to nourish, to grow, ". 599, late A. iter. 4jL$firrf Orph. Lith. 364.
aX<T/v or X/<r/y (r. aX/r-), to si/1, poet., Hes. Op. 2:*9, .V28, 1 A.
L*.i<rr.<ra., Oph. Arg. 647, 2 A. JJ'X/TOV, I. H75, If. P. 7'f. alirripiw S. 807.
a/$ and eRetit* (r. J-, a/Ss- .88), to swell, F. a/^<, A. yfara, Pf. ^9
jfca. Also a/^avw, trans., I. 554.
oXta6<ivea and oXifffa'ivu (r. ol.i<r6-\ to slide, to slip, F. oXur^/rea, 2 A. u\Kf6oi.
1 A. Jx/W<7-a and Pf. <siX<V^xa, Hipp. Also aX<o^a<w, Ath. 2:56 a.
irf^awqMM, rarely oirQgcioftiti, Ath. 299 e (r. -<p^-, off<fau- 287), to smell t
F. o<rf0vira/u.ai, 2 A. uir<pgop.w>, A. P. &>ff$gci)i0nv. Ion. 2 A. uff^^o,fjt,nv, Hdt.
i. 80, late 1 A. uftp^o.^^.
See, also, /** ( 292), ^y ( 290).
^ 2O3. c, ADDITION OF .
/iiJvsw (or /Sysw), to Stop /> (r. /3w-), F. /Sua-w, A. ?Si7o-a, Pf. P. $iutrfton.
Also Pass, ftvvafixi, Hdt. ii. 96'.
ixnnp.ee.1, and poet. 'TX.O.VM (r. <-, /xay- ^ 291), to come, F. 'i^opai, 2 A. *fx-
^v, Pf. 7 y/ a<. Ep. "rxw, K. 142. For 7xr and J|, see 185. 3, i.
xwv^ (r. xt;-), to A/ss, F. x,vvvffoju.<i, A. ix.Cffct. The comp. T^offxtmii;, to
worship, is regular : F. vfgo<rxuvvtr<u, A. x-^otrntuyviffae,, and poet. T9<rx<ra, Ar.
Eq. 156.
wTor^vs^a/ (r. ^-, /V^;-), to promise, F. uro<r%v<roftai ( 222), 2 A. wtr.
ir^a^^v, If. wTs^^a/, rare A. P. vcr6<r^^>jy, PI. Phedr. 235 d. Poet, and
Ton. uf'ia^ofAct, ^Esch. Bum. 804, Hdt. vii. 104. See j'^w ( 300).
293. d. ADDITION OF vu.
(1.) If , F, or o precede, the v is doubled, o becoming w.
(2.) If A precede, the v becomes L (3.) A lingual or %wid
preceded by a diphthong is dropped before vv.
. To Pure Roots.
E'VVO^/ (r. Ft., \. 3*. $), toc/o/^, poet., chiefly Ep., F. ?<,,*, (71), a. 337,
A. iW, E. 905, Pf. P. gT^a/ and Wa/, r. 72, Hdt. i. 47. Prose form, a^.
^/vvJ7^, F. i^p/s, a^ipw ( 200. 2), r^Uffx ( 192. 3), Pf. P. w^W^ai.
Ion., xara-E/vyav . "135, ix-twv<r6eu Hdt. iv. 64.
&wU/t, (r. ?a-), to $rz>d, F. ^w, A. i'^wc-a, Pf. P. J'^a/. Late Pf.
?*, Anth.
xs^ayvt?^ (r. xs^a-, x^a- 261, x/oy- 259, 278. S), to mz>, F. xtoairu,
K<PU, A. Ixioaura. (xftyimu j. 164\ Pf. P. xix'toeta-peti, Ath. 576 a, commonly
xixKftitt, A. P. ixteio-0*iv and Uo<V. Ep. xsoaw, 11. 363 (x/f, 242. b),
<Sw/y. Kituvnti A. 260, as from Ki^a,fAa,i. Poet, and Ion., xigvvfAi, Ar. Eccl.
641 , and *^*,, Hdt. iv. 52.
xaoivvufAi (r. xoE-), to satiate, F. x0^e0*&>, A. txogiffet, Pf. P. xixaottrpat,
A. P. ixafsa-^y. Ep., F. x^ew (^ 245. 3), 0. 379, 2 Pf. intrans. sjfa ? W
( 25:3. 1), <r. 372 ; Ion. Pf. P. KDC'O^^I 2. 287. The verb xogiv, to sweep,
is regular.
(r. *fv*-), to suspend, F. x^afu, xp/M ( 2OO. 2),
238 ROOT OF THE VERB. [BOOK II
p&fcc, A. P. \Kttfttifhv, Mid. ^u.a.^m (Act. Pt. Kiftoivri; Ath. 25 d), ana
poet. n^/u.vy./u.a.i ( "278, J), Ar. Nub. 377, to AaTH/, F. xotjuytroiten. Also j-
pvtioptti, Horn. Bac. 39, P. xgw^vaj, Find. P. 4. 43, late x^aw.
**.r<iviOp.t (r. crtra-), to spread, to expand, F. orsrao-w, CTSTO/, A. iTerao-a
Pf. P. vi<r<rpi ( 261), A. P. ia-irarJnu. Ion. Pf. P. n-Krirai/Mu, Hdfc
i. 62. Ep., -ri-rvvfAi, A.. 392, n'<rv, Hes. Sc. 291 Gottl. ; late XITO.U.
puniifti (r. po-}, to strengthen, F. puyu, A. tppu<rce, t Pf. P. ippupai, A. P. ep^a;.
,' ($ 221.).
<rswi7,M/ (r. -), to extinguish, F. <rV<w, 1 A. HffSiffet, A. P. ItrSifffav.
M : .d. ffSivvv/ucti, to be extinguished, to go out, F. <r>i<rofAKt, 2 A. Act. <r?
(5 227), Pf. Act. !?*.
o-xi^tivvvfu (r. rx$-), to scatter, F. rxiboiiru, ffxibu, A. \ffx.&.ffot, Pf. P.
ir*5<7*<, A. P. IVxiSa^v. Collat. forms, chiefly poet., xttaa, Ap. Rh.
4. 500, *i$/V,, Id. 2. 6^6, xsSaw^/, Anth., A. ixtiairff*, E. 88 ; ffxtiwpi
( 259, 278. X), Hes. Th. 875, Th. vi. 98, ^fu, Hdt. vu. 140, Eur.
Hec. 916.
294. 0. To Palatal Roots.
iyiOp.i (r. Fay-), to AreaA, F. a|w, A. ?a|a (^ -189. 2), 2 Pf. intrans. ?y,
to be broken, 2 A. P. iyv (Att. a, Ep. comm. a). Ion., A. ^a, . 392,
2 Pf. iy, Hdt. Vli. 224, Jya, Hipp. ; Ep. A. Opt. (xa-ra-Fei&is, xF
F duetts, 22. J, 48. 2) xawaga/f Hes. Op. 664. In the COinp. x,a.fa.yvvfju
the i of the augm. is sometimes found out of the Ind. ; as, A. Part, xuriei^o.t
Lys. 100. 5.
ava/yw and uvo'tyvvpi (r. o/y-), to open, Impf. aviyyav ( 189. 2), TT. 221,
/. 5. 'JO, and later Jjvya, II. Gr. i. 1. 2 (Ion. av^v, H. 168), F. ava^w,
A. iy$, and later #o<z, Pf. i'y^a, Pf. P. a-viyy^ett, A. P. avs^^v, and
later fivai%0n* t Acts, 12. 10. 2 Pf. ivtyya, to stand open, Hipp. The simple
*y and 7yw / / are poet., JSsch. Pr/611, F. a j|, A. <$* H. 457, /|,
n. 446.
tt'ixwfti (r. Ji/x-), to show, F. Si/g*. See f 52. Ion. (r. Si*-) Ji^, ?$!,
&c., Hdt. 'iii. l-jy. Mid. tiwSfuu, Ep. to ^ree^, I. 196, Pf. Mt^fuu
( 47. N.), . 72. The primary sense of 3i/'xuju< is to itfrrfcA OM< </ hand,
and kindred verbs are ti%ofA*i (Ion. Ji*9^/, Hdt. vii. I 77, ; 6'f>. I.), to receive
a*,, A. Ut^nv, Pf. 3i*iy^/, F. Pf. it^^/Mai^for tiiytw, &c., see
ij, and the poet. $i$/V*<y*a/, Su^Vxa^a/, Imca-vdv, ^i^vOf^eti.
t'tpytUftt (r. i^-y-, 'fy- 268), to S/IM^ j'/i, to conjine, F. i"^w and f(a>,
A. i^^, / > r<. ii^f and ?$*(, Pf. P. iJfy,a<, A. P. T/e^v. This verb ap-
pears to have been ori^in.-illy the same with if^y, to s/ntt out, and the dis-
tinction which afterwards arose, and which was marked by the difference of
Ijn-utliing, appears not to have been always observed. Ion., in both senses,
? f y, -*, Hdt. iii. 48, 0. 325 (Ep. ii^y*, B. 617), and l^yvUft, or Jpyivfu,
Hdt. J. W>, iv. 69.
Ciyy w > (r. ^y-, ^"y- 270), to yofc, F. Ji^, A. ?C'^, Pf. P.
H*>, 1 A- P. iC^w, 2 A. P. i/yj.
ftiyvvfti (r. ^/y-), to mingle, to mix, F. /(*<'*, A. ?,t*/|a, Pf. P.
3 F. fttftfypat, iEsch. Pers. IO52, 1 A. P. i^'^v, 2 A. P. l^/y,,*. The
older form ftifyu ( 273) is always used in the Pres. and Impf. by Horn, and
Hdt. For ?^*r, &c., see 1 85. *.
(r. wy-, a-y- 266), to /rf, to fix, F. , A. f-5, 2 Pf.
CH. 10.] EMPHATIC CHANGES. 23&
intrans., as Pres., ri-rwyit, 1 A. P. \<r*%6w, commonly 2 A. P. irayw. Ep
2 A. M. S. 3 i-rr.xTo ( 185. 1} A. 378. For wyvvro, see 226. 4. Late
rxffiru, Pf. P. TsVfly^a*.
pvyvuui (r. /say-, /*!)/-)> to fcreaA, F. pjg, A. tppn%et, 2 Pf. intrans. ifpuyat
( 236. 6), a A. P. if- f 'A>yw. Ep., ^Ww, 2. 571, Pf. P. Itfn-yput, &. I 37 ;
Ion. 1 A. P. lppv%0*v, Hipp. Kindred, paaau and a.0d<rtru, -%tu, to smite.
<p(>de.(r(rtv, and rarely Pfayntyu, Th. vii. 74 (r. <p/>a.y-, $a,<r<r- 274), to fence t
F. (Pi<w, A. Sfaga, Pf. P. -TSipay^a/, A. P. ia^v. Late 2 A. P.
y. To Lingual and Liquid Roots.
tatvufti (r. $;r-, S/vi/-), to entertain, to feast, poet. T. 29, F. $/*, yEsch.
Eum. 305, A. tbeuvet, A. P. ftet'iffSw. For Opt. Sa/vwra, see 2-_'6. 4.
x.et!vvpa.i (r. xS-, xa/S- 267), to exce/, poet. y. 282, Pf. xsxa^a/, Ear.
El. 616, /**. xjxa-r^svaj A. 339, and xixa^iya;, Pind. O. 1. 42.
x.7iiv&i, and later KTivvOftt or x,n'tvDpt.i (r. *T-, xrasv- 278, XTSV- 259,
xT/y- 268, xr/vvy- 259. b, XTJ<VI/-), to slay, usually in composition with a.fa
or HUTU, F. XTSVW, 1 A. jxTS/va, poet. 2 A. s'xTavov Soph. Ant. 1 ;i40 (also in
Xen., who was partial to poet, forms, iv. 8, 2J), and poet. 'ix.ra.v ( 224. E.),
Soph. Tr. 38, 2 Pf. txrovcc, 1 Pf., less classic, iWaxas Or sxrayxa) and I*T9-
ix, 2 A. M. poet. IXTW^HV, ^Esch. Pars. 923. Ep., F. x-avjw, Z. 409,
1 A. P. exra^v, J. 537 ; late txrav^y, Anth. For the passive of XTS/VW,
the Attic writers employ SvVx<w ( 281 ).
oXXvpt (r. X-, oA-Kt;-), to destroy, F. flXe<rw ( 222. ), commonly oXw,
A. uteffot, 1 Pf. oXuXma, 2 Pf. intrans. o'x*/A, 2 A. M. uXopw. Poet. xi-
*, A. 1O, Soph. Ant. 1286 ; Impf. iter. oXtxtrxiv (or oAiWxiv, as from oXtw)
T. 135.
o^vw^ (r. a^-), to swear, F. o/tovftui, A. /** ( 222. /3), Pf. opufAoxa,
( 191. 2), Pf. P. 'op*>po<ri**i and lp*pop.xi ( 221. ), A. P. upoo-fa* and
Pres. P^. (j^ativTEf Hdt. i. 153 ; late F. o^cofu, Anth.
(o(*.o(>y-\ to wipe off, poet. E. 416, F. epo^ta, A. eSfto^a,, Eur.
Or. 219, A. P. tfMcxfav, Ar. Vesp. 560, A. M. ^a^a^jjv, 2. 124. Collat.
, Horn. Merc. 361, late p.'oyvvpi.
to stretch out, and Ep. o^'iyvUfti, A. 351, F. o^u, A. ^i|, A. P.
v, Pf. P. uiyft,ett, Hipp., ouo<.yfjs..i, II. 834.
fljy!/^/ (r. o-), to rowse, F. O^TW ( 56. /3), A. <JjT, 2 Pf. intrans., as. Pres.,
^. Ep., F. M. ooZfta,, T. 140, 2 A. w^a (^ 194. 3), 2 A. M. *>z'afw,
M. 279 (see 185. S, i) ; from r. a^s-, Impf. o^pw, B. 398, Pf. P. ^ s .
^a; ( 191.2), T. 377, S'uy. o^nrett M. 271. Kindred, chiefly poet, %-
ftxi, ovu, oa^uvu, ogova Lat. orior.
vrrdgvijfitKi (r. TT^-), to sneeze, 2 A. l-Tra^av. 2 A. P. Pf. <rTa,gii;, Hipp*
fffo^vufjt.i, vro^ivvvfti, and ffr^uvvvfAt (r. frog-, ffro^i- 288, o-T^tf- 262),
to strew, F. OTO^U and vr^uffu, A. iffrogtffet and iVrga/a-a, Pf. P. Jfa-r^^at^
A. P. tf-Tgi^>J (t<TTOg<7^>JV, Hipp.).
20G. e. ADDITION OF /*.
ifvr\Kxttx,u (r. ap.iei.aiK-), to err, poet. 2 A. tift<x-*.Kxov Soph. Ant. 91C
P<. /*-Xx and, to shorten the initial ( 263. 6), acrX** Eur. Ak
S41.
240 ROOT OP THE VERB. [BOOK I?
c* (r. <-, a-ra^-), to deceive, Ep. X. 217, F. a<*-a<p)<r, A. dwaip*
ra, Horn. Ap. 376, commonly 2 A. t)<ra.<po*, %. 379.
ysywvssy and ysywv/Vxw (r. ywv-, yiyuv- 28:-!, ysyaivs- S 288, yiyeavtffK-}
<o ca// aloud, F. ysywy^r*;, A. -}/sy<wv?<ra, 2 Pf., OS Pres., -j/sya/va, <SW.y. yiyu-
u, Imp. yiyuii ( 235), &C. Ep. Imp. or 2 A. iytyuviv (or Pf. ysyamv)
3. 469. See 246. N.
\)mififf*aftMi (r. au-, to get\ ' to get at, to reach, to enjny, poet, and Ion
N. TS.i, F. i*avJ<rofteti, 2 A. l-r^ov, A. 572, 2 A. M. eir^o^y Eur. HeL
4r, 1 A. M. iva.votip,vv, Hipp. Also sVy*/<rx&i, Theog. Ill, and ifavfia,
Hes. Op. 417. From the same root, Ty.<w (: 2-i7. ), to get from, to
take away, poet. A. 43O, 1 A. M. ecvrtiu^eifinv, JEsch. Pr. 28 ; and from the
kindred ova- ( 28), Ep. Aor. Pt. UKOVPX; A. 356, elftv^x^ivo;, Hes. Sc. 173.
ivi<rx*> (r. t^-)> t fi nd > F- ^" /irw ( 222> 2 ) 2 A> '^* or "^ a
( 188. N. , Pf. st/ ? jx<z, Pf- P- t3t*fuu t A. P. ivgilqi> ( 219), 2 A.M.
ifyoftw, and less Att. 1 A. M. tu^K/u.nv.
trrig'iu and <rrtolirx,u (r. ^TSJ-), to deprive, F. ff<ri(>yi<r(*>, A. i<r<rig*i<ret, Pf. tffri-
Z*l*, If. P. fc-rifjjitta/, 1 A. P. i<r<Vv, poet. 2 A. P. /*. a-notli Eur. Hel.
95. Mid. ffTtgofiKt, to want, F., often as Pass., fr
A.ndoc. 19. 25). Ep. 1 A. i<rTi*i<r, . 262.
f. AnnmoN OF <
W;? (r. W-)> to accustom, F. i^W, -/ ( 200. )3), Pf. t7&x ( 189. 3)
&c. ; 2 Pf., as Pres. intrans., fat* ( 236. c). Ep. Pres. Pt. intrans. Jf^
1. 540.
tXfr^ (r. FSA.T-), < /<pe, F. iX-r/Vw, -<, &c. ; Ep. sX-rw, to jriue Aope, /S. 91,
i'xro^a/ or ii\*ofMu t and 2 Pf. to*. ( 191. 3), to hope, H. 199, K. 1O5,
T. 18r, f 2 Plup. Ux<ru ( 189. 5), T. 328.
*<<*/ (r. *v-), to 7-/W5T, Ep. B. 466, A. {*avjcr, B. 334.
ro/<w Tr. <r^-), to furnish, F. x-og'tfu, -M, Pf. <rsT/xa, &c. Poet., 2 A.
f e , Soph. (Ed. T. 921 (see 194. 3), Pf. P. TI^T*/ ( 223), it is fated,
2. 329, P<. *tre*(Aits t Soph. Ant. 1337, Mem. ii. 1. 33.
SOS. g. ADDITION OF OTHER SYLLABLES.
UM (r. -, aJi-), to 6e sterf, to satiate, Ep., F. "a/r, A. 818, A. *,
E. 289, fUld $)<r (O;^. a^7i/j or '$jVs<l a. 134), Pf. 7^. etilnxu;, K. 98,
F. M. "d<rop.t, il. 717, A. M. "<ra^*/ T. 307. The F. and commonly
the A.*<r are trans., the other forms intrans. For Pros. Snf>j. (/tsv, J^sv)
tufti* (also written t^iv, as if from Idea} T. 402, see 24 2. a; for ////.
iipueu, see 250. e ; for Pres. Mid. attreti, see 242. 1. Deriv. 'a.aio^.t,
Theoc. 25. 240, A. P. *-Vv Hdt. iii. 4 1 .
$^* (r. J/t*-), to subdue, F. ^a.p.a,ru, A. iSajUflKra, 1 A. P. l^a./u,eiirf>:v,
and poet, ftp*'*** ( 223), A. 99, Eur. Ale. 1 27, 2 A. P. poet. tS^jv, Eur.
Med. 6-17. Ep. Pres. and perhaps Fut. ( 2OO. a) ^, A. 61, Z. 368,
Pf. P. itipvfuu, E. 878, F. Pf. U^fr^MM Horn. Ap. 543. Collat. poet.
forms, l*ftv<i*>, X. 221, ^^ E. 893, JEsch. Pr. 164, l*p**.%* P ind - P -
5. 1 63. Lat. domo.
?X* (r. iXx-, iXxw-), to rfraw, F. ?X$ (iX*(/<rw, Hipp.), A. i7Xxu<r*
( 189.3; Jx, Orph. Arg. 260), Pf. i7x&, Pf. P. fa*vtiuu t A. P.
Ep. iXxi, P. 395, *X*j<r*, X*j<r, X. 580.
(r. if-), to <*> F- ifwrnVw and i^W*/ ( 222), A. ^
CH 10. J EMPHATIC AND ANOMALOUS CHANGES. 241
Pf. fyuTvxa, Pf. P. ti*>r9>p,ai, A. P. ^wrr'^v, 2 A. M. fi^e^nr. Ep. and
Ion., tfypoti A. 553, Hdt. Hi. 64 (tlp'optvos Ib., 243. 4), F. tiffafteu J. 61 ;
ilourdu, -, J. 347, Hdt. iv. 145 ; l^ia, H. 128; igcu'iw Z. 145.
i4', and poet. 2^, ft. 415, ^Esch. Ag. 1597, or ft, . 341, Eur. Cycl.
245 (r. !>-, M- 282, 52, Wi-), to eaf, F. ftp< ( ^- *>) Pf.
( 236. c), Pf. P. tS&tffMi ( 222. a), PI. Phaedo, 110 e, A. P.
2 A. fyayav (r. (pay-, 30 i). Late F. (payola/ ( 247. <f). Ep. 2 Pf.
P. 542, P P. i^'V*' ( ^36- c).
i&, Soph. Aj. 459, l x faie* Eur. Ale. 179, and i%fy<*/vu, Ages. 11.5
(r. i^-), to Aate, chiefly poet, F. l^et^ea, A. #^a.
yo^a/ (ay-, ava-), to scorn, Ion. and poet., eWa<, &c. (see ^ 51), f. 378
F. as^<, A. uveffeiftv* P. 173, and VVK/U.W, P. 25, A. P. uvofffav, Hdt. U
136. Deriv., 3s/J/^, and poet, ovara^u, JEsch. Sup 11.
<rtxT&>, Ep. ws/xw fr. <rix-), to comb, shear, poet., AT. Av. 714, . 316,
F. - ( g ( 245. 2) Theoc. 5. 98, A. f *!, i^i^/iv, S. 176, A. P.
Ar. Nub. 1 356.
pXy<v, and poet. <pX{y(&y, Soph. Tr. 99, to 6wrw, F. <pxi%u, A.
A. P. lixejjv. Late 2 A. P. l^xiy/iv, Anth.
2 9 0. REMARK. A few verbs obtain a 2 Aor. with a short penult
($ 255. 5), through an extension of the root ; as, 'btiuxtu, to pursue, i$ieuxS.0ov,
Ar. Vesp. 1203, PI. Gorg. 483 a; i"x*>, to yield, s'txitov, Soph. (Ed. T. 651 ;
t'gyu, to exclude, i'i>yK0v, Soph. CEd. C. 86'J (s'^ya^v, A. 437, u^ya^ov,
E. 147), ilyu.6'ofjt.viv, ^Esch. Eum. 566; ujtivea, to ward o^", ^tva^a*, Ar.
Nub. 1323, r^-jvy.f'ofA'nv, ^Esch. Eum. 43S ; nica, to ^f), ftir-ixfoiffav A. 52;
Xx'x^v ( 273. 0), iV^s^y ( 300). Cf. i'^ov ( 278). These extended
Aorists, which are chiefly poet., are regarded by some as Imperfects, and are
commonly so accented.
3OO. 3. EXCHANGE OF LETTERS.
In the two following verbs, a passes into e aspirated ( 50).
ifu (r. ff<r-, ET-), to be occupied with, Impf. iJVav ( 189. 3), F. 'i-^u, 2 A.
to-tfav, Subj. fra, &c. Mid. Irofuu, to follow, Impf. {(V/j^jjv, F. 'i-^optti, 2 A.
l<r-r ( tt>jv, ^M^/. ffTTUfteti, &c. Poet. IO-TO/AOU, 5. 826, Impf. (considered by some
2 A.) 8o-ro^v, T. -J39. A. P. rtp-tyfai, Hdt. vi. 15. The act. 'ivu scarcely
occurs except in composition.
i'^a; and ?<r^ (r. ^-, i^;-, l^;- 263, \<rx,~ 283. c, 263), to Aawe, to
/io/J (in the sense to Aaue, the forms 'i^u and V| are preferred ; in the sense
to Iwld, '!ff%tu and (r^wa-w), Impf. tf%av and T<r^av, F. l^u and ir^ffu ( 222) ;
2 A. sV^av, Suft/. ^a; (comp. S/a^w or /a^&i, r. <r%- or <r^;-), 0/J^. <r%oiw
( 205. ), 7m/>. o-%<; (ff%t- 288 ; compare B-i;, 'is, 210. 2), and rarely,
in composition, <r%i, Inf. <r%s7r, Pt. f^uv 2 A. poet. 'io-%t6ev ( ^99), ^sch.
Pr. 16'; Pf. <<r%r,x,tt, Pf. P. iV^/*/, A. P. -i^iftif, 2 A. M/ l^a^jjv. Ep.
Pf. P<. o-yv-a^wx^TS (236. 1, 191.2, 62) B. 218. For l-r-u^aro, see
236. d; for v-s<'^J see 243. 4. Ep. deriv. forms, Iff^eivu, S. 387,
/V^xvaw, E. 89. For the compound vvt<r%*li>p,ett, see ^92 , for ai^a,/,
301. 2. For the <r in a^T (/<?/, ^*), see 2 5 and for the various
forms of the augm. (Impf. ^-r-ti^'o^v, 2 A. / w-r/-r^a^i( v ^-r-Kr^s^Tjy, &c.),
192. 3.
C. ANOMALOUS CHANGES.
3O1. Forms are sometimes associated, which must be
242 ROOT OF THE VEKr>. [BOOK Ii
referred to roots originally distinct, or ividely removed from
each other ( 257. 2) ; as,
1. u'teiu (r. a/J-), to take, F. ttloYiffu, Pf. i'^xa, Pf. P. ygtifteti, A. P. fa'ifnt
( 219) ; 2 A. Jxay (r. lx-, 189. 3), 2 A. M. lix^wtr. Poet. 1 A. M. ig.
filfra AT. Thesm. 761. Doubtful or late F. ix, sXaU^a; Ion. Pf. ^/.
jjxa, Hdt. V. 1O2, ioa.'i^n/jt.a.t, iv. 66; Ep. 2 A.M. S. 3 ylvra for FsXra
( 69. III., 1 85. 3) 0. 43. In the sense to capture, the Pass, is commonly
supplied by aX/Wa^a/ (r. aX-, whence sX- 259, Xa-, Xrx- 28O), Impf.
flliffxepw, F. a.Xu<ropai, 2 A. Xav ( 189. 2) and #X*;v, $w&/. '*X,Z, &C.,
Pf. \u.\ux,ct and '/iXuxx.
2. avi%op.tti, to endure, a compound of ? ( 300), F. uvi^xi and y-
f^rxrofAa.1, 2 A. nvss-^o^v ( '92. 3); F. rXwa-a^a* (r. <rX-, rXa- 261),
2 A. ifrXjjy ( 227), Pf. rirXvxa. (see 238. a). Ep. 1 A. rX<rra, P. 166.
Later Ep., erXs*, Ap. Rh. 3. 769, orX^X 2. 1O08.
3. 1e% f* ai ( T ' '?#-)> to 0> to come > I m P- Wg%oftw F. iXjvra^*/ (r. JXw^-,
IXst;^- 27O), 2 A. Xi;^y, commonly %\6ov ( 2^1), 2 Pf. ix*iXt^ (191.2).
Ep. 2 Pf. ^Xi?^, Hes. Th. 66O, ci'An'Xavla ( 47. N.), Dor. 2 A. ?v^v (-.. 69.
III.), Theoc. 1. 77, Lacon. X<ray ( 70. 4), Ar. Lys. 105. The Pres. (ex-
cept in the Ind.), the Impf., and the Fut. are commonly supplied in the Att.
by the verb fai ( 231 ).
4. <* (r. oct-}, to see, Impf. !^&v ( 189. 2), Pf. i^x (i^ Ar.
PL 98), Pf. P. Mi&fMu F. a^^/ r. -), Pf. P. J^^a/, A. P. ^'^?v (^.
^?y/ PL Def. 41 J a), 2 Pf. poet, and Ion. OKM-TO, Soph. Ant. 6, Hdt. iii. 63 ;
2 A. iTSo* (r. $-, the augm. uniting with the / to form u), Suhj. 'fta>, &c.,
2 A. M. ifiop.vy, Subj. ftvftKi, &c. ; 2 Pf. aTSa, (I have seen) I know ( 233) ;
Mid., poet., tftopai (r. s/'^- 268), to seem, to resemble, JEsch. Cho. 178, 1 A.
t'ureifttiv, /3. 791.
NOTE. In the preteritive oftct (^f 58, 237), the root has four forms,
(1.) #- ; 1ffp.it (Ion. TJjttty A. 124), 7<r-ri, Mi, 1<rru (Boeot. ?TT* Ar. Ach.
911), &c. ; and Ep., Inf. TV" A. 719, ^ 8 y< N. "73, Pt. I3v7, A. 60S,
Plup. P/. 3 (?3-<ray) ?<ry 2. 405 : (2.) id- ; (i7iH, s/^f , p/v, KVa^wi and
the Ep. Subj. tftoftir, ifart ( 246. 3) : (3.) 8 ^. (5 236. 1) ; ^, J^a,
&c. : (4.) lAi. ( 288) ; (ifti*) s^, i/Ji/^y, j/^Vw (rare, A. .546, Isoc. .5 b),
tfinffu (late). The Plup. is sometimes doubly augmented ( J 8;) ; thus, Ep.
fitting or fc&M X. 280, fiifti* or $;Jj <. 206, Ion. n3i Hdt. i. 45 (for fu,
one i dropped, cf. 243. 2). In the Dor., we lind the verb I<TK^I, perhaps
suggested by 3Va<r< ( 237, TJ), Pind. P. 4. 441, W Theoc. 13. 34, JWr/
15. 146, 7*^iy Pind. N. 7. 21, Pt. 1 ff t , Pind. P. 3. 52. The deficiencies
of oTiu are supplied by yi'yvufx.u ( 285).
5. T^i^w (r. Soi^;-, ri%- 263), to rn, F. &gi%op.at, commonly ^a^^w-
4t/ (r. \etp-'), 1 A. i^i|, commonly 2 A. i'^a/itay, Pf. SiSoa^xa ( 222),
Pf. P. M^tfuifuu. Ep. 2 Pf. St^a^a, t. 412. Late and rare F. ^ a/ a Ath.
416 f, fydftefiuti ( 200. b), Anth. Deriv., vp%a.fa vii. 3. 46, Ep. r^aw,
. 451, T^^, X. 163, ^aw, Hes. Fr. 2. 2.
6. 0i (r. <ptj-), to 6ear, F. ? (r. a/-), F. M. oliroftcci, F. P. a/WVa,t e<
1 A. tfyiyxos (r. lyix-, yy*- 277), 2 A. tfviyxay, A. M. vvtyxeiu.n>, Pf.
iyya^ ( 191. 2, 236. a), Pf. P. iv^'viy^*/, A. P. fivi^v, F. P. ii^i{
a-ajtta*. Ion. (r. iy<*- 268 ; ffvv-tviixireti Hes. Sc. 44()) 1 A. Hv.ix.it, E. 88.5
Hdt. iii. 30, 2 A. Opt. in', 2. 147, /n/. iyi/*i^iy T. 194, Pf. P. iriwyp*!,
Hdt. ii. 12, A. P. wti%tw, i. 66 ; 1 A. //. (aya-ara-a/) yya-a< Ib. 157
Late Pf. P. -rti-otffrai Luc. Paras. 2. For aTn, &c., ee 185. ; for
OH. ll.J FORMATION OF WORDS. 243
246. /3 ; for tpievfi, 251. 2. Deriv., <pooia>, to carry, -<n<ru, &c. (tpogyvet
251. 2), $/-, tiff-, jx-0ta> (Qot'ieo, Ar. Vesp. 125), to let pass, -<pv<ria,
-i<p/>tiffet, -iQorivSw. Lat. fero. The Aorists #vsyxa and vviyxov are both
common in the 1 st Pers. sing, of the Ind., and in the Opt. ; but in the
2d Pers. sing, of the Imp., in the Inf., and in the Part., the forms of yvzyxot
are preferred ; and, elsewhere, those of jmyxa.
7. <p-/ip.i and <$.<rx.u (\ 53, 228 ; r. 0-, <f>atr- 279J, to *ay, to ajfirm,
F. ** (r. if-, fi- 262), Pf. tf^a (S 191. l), Pf. P. ri^ai, F. Pf. i/^V.
uui, Cyr. vii. 1 . 9, A. P. IppMw or i^'^wv (Ion. s^'lnn or tigMvv, Hdt. iv.
77) ; 1 A. ti-ret (r. *V-, /V- <^ 268), 2 A. gT?rv. Non-Att., Pres. J^ /5. 162,
i/'ass;, Hes. Th. 38 ; Ion. 1 A. M. a^r-s/sra^v, refused, Hdt. i. 205 ; Poet.
1 Aer. i'F/or) ? Pind. N. 9. 78, 2 A. IUVM K. 445 ; Ep. 2 A. (r. i*s
sVr- 273, cf. m-6) <rrav, B. 484. Redupl. forms, viqxtvffxu, yEsch. Eum.
6'20, <rKp<i<rxu, Hes. Th. 655. The forms of <pao-*a;, with the F. pW, the A.
i<pj<ra, and the Mid. voice, have commonly the strengthened sense, to affirm
The 1st Aor. inf. tivcti and part. tJW? are not used by the Attics.
8. taviofiai (r. Jvs-), to buy, Impf. i^vay^jjv ( 189. 2), F. uvrifof*.xi, Pf.
laJv^a/, A. P. i/wv^V*)* 2 A. M. I'r^a.^ni (^f 49 ; r. */-). Ion. and late
1 A. M. luwffKftvy, Hipp.
CHAPTER XI.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
3 O2. The Greek, like all other original languages, is
the development, according to certain natural laws, of a small
number of germs, or primary roots. These primary roots
(which may be termed radicals, to distinguish them from the
mere roots of inflection) have a significance which is not ar-
bitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human
constitution.
NOTE. The much agitated question, whether the radicals of language are
nouns or verbs, has no propriety, inasmuch as the origin of these radicals was
prior to grammatical distinctions, and the same radical was used as noun,
adjective, verb, &c., as the case might require.
3O3. Those words in which the radicals appear in
their simplest forms are termed primitive ; and all others are
termed derivative ; while, at the same ;ime, a distinction must
be made between simple derivatives, and those words which
are formed by the union of other words, and which are termed
compound.
NOTES. . Of those words which are commonly distinguished as primi-
tive and derivative, some are directly related to each other as parent and child,
while others are merely formations from the same radical, which, however,
244 DERIVATION. [BOOK II
commonly appears in a simpler form in the one than in the other. It is im-
portant to observe this distinction, though the. same language is commonly
for the sake of convenience, employed in both cases.
B>. In tracing derivations, it is sometimes convenient to assume a theme,
either as a primitive, or as a link of connection. We must, however, b
cautious in pronouncing that to have been essential in the actual formation
of the language, which we find convenient in explaining that formation.
I. FORMATION OF SIMPLE WORDS.
3O4. Simple Words are divided in respect to their
formation into three classes.
(I.) Those which consist of the mere radical, without
change, except for euphony or emphasis.
(II.) Those which have, in addition, merely the affixes of
inflection.
(III.) Those which receive farther modifications.
The Rules and Remarks which follow have respect chiefly to the third class.
A. NOUNS.
3O5. I. FROM VERBS. Nouns formed from verbs (or
from commoL radicals, 303. a) denote,
1.) The ACTION of the verb. These are formed by adding
to the root of the verb,
a. -iris (Gen. -rtus, fern.), or -<rl (G. -<r!xs, f.) ; as, pipi-opcu, to imitate,
ft'pn-ffis, imitation; -r^a-iriru (r. irgKy-), to act, (w^ay-^/f) f^a^i;, action ; d-ww,
to sacrifice, Svola., sacrifice ; $*</*, to try, "bax.if*.*<rla., trial.
b. -, -a (G -us, -ay, f.) ; as, Qivyu (r. <pyy), to fee, Qvy-i, flight;
ip*>, to nourish, *<>$*, nourishment; %ai<u (r. -)> to rejoice, x^-ai, joy;
'iu, to corrupt, <$6o(>a., corruption. Some verbs in -ivea have abstracts in
-I/a ( 92. /3. a) ; as, #a.tbiva, to instruct, Tx^i'iA, instruction.
C. -s (G. -aw, m.) ; as, Xiy-*, to speak, Aay-of, speech; **!/, to sow,
ffvoat, towing.
d. -ros (G. -rev, m.) ; as, xuxu-u, to wail, xuxv-rof, wailing.
e. 'OS (G- -lot, n.) ; as, xj5-^<, to care, xjJ-0f, care.
f. -pot (G. -ftov, m.), or -pn (G. -u*f, f.); as, S^-/a/, to lament,
lamentation ; p.i-p.vn-fjt.a.i, to remember, f*.vr-f*.v, remembrance.
REMARK. From the tendency of abstracts to pass into concretes, verbals
of Class 1 often express not so much the action itself, as the effect or object
of the action, and thus blend with Class 2 ; as, you. (*.(**, line.
3O6. 2.) The EFFECT, or OBJECT of the action. These
are formed by adding to the root of the verb,
jut (G. -fAxrof, n.) ; as, rott-v, to make, compose, -rein -pet, thing
CH. 11.] NOUNS. 245
poem ; o-<rtiga, to sow, tr<rig/u,et, thing soum, seed; y^ciQu, to write, (yp-,t4)
., letter. See also 305. R.
3.) The DOER. These are formed by adding to the root of
the verb,
a. -<rtis (G. -TOU, m.) ; as, S-IU-O/U.KI, to behold, Sia-<rjs, beholder; irona, to
compose, foinrns, poet ; xriw, to found, xritrrns, founder.
b. -<rt (G. -rr>os, m.), or -T (G. -rooos, m.) ; as, ^fiufti (r. Sa-), to give,
2>*-<r), giver; ffu^u, to save, trurvg, saviour; r. pi-, to speak, p^-ru^, speaker
jrator.
NOTE. The feminines corresponding to the above (a. and b.) end in -r^tit
or -T** (proparoxytone, G. -?), or in -TOIS or -T/J (G. -<&?) ; as, <ra;jT^/a,
poetess, o-uTsiga, female deliverer ; avXwrv; and -T^, flute-player, uiiXwrgis and
-T^ta,, flute-girl ; trgitpjrtif, prophet, ar9<p5jr/j, prophetess.
c. -ius (G. -e<uj, m.) ; as, y^a^-w, to paint, y^a.<p-ius, painter; QJItigia, to
corrupt, $Go(>ivs, corrupter ; xil^u, to shave, xovgivs, barber.
d. -of (G. -aw, m. f.) ; rq>-u, to nourish, ro<p-os, nurse; citf&u, to sing,
os, minstrel.
REMARK. Some verbals of Class 3 are applied to things ; as, //, to
heat, pa.nrrri(>, beater, hammer, ^uirrrig, girdle, arirns, wind (blower), ip.aXsusi
stopper.
3O7. 4.) The PLACE, INSTRUMENT, or other means of
the action. These are formed by adding to the root of the
verb,
a. -rfyiov (G. -ou, n.), more frequently expressing place ; as, &oei-ofAai, to
hear, *ga-rigv, place of hearing, auditory ; ^Kairr^iav (^ixa^u), court of
justice; -xor^oi (vlvu), drinking-cup. Cf. 314. b, 315. a.
b. -T^y (G. -ov, n.), or -r^a (G. -a?, f.), more frequently expressing
means ; as, %uu, to curry, ^ixrr^ot and giW^a, currycomb, Xw-r^av (Xww), ran-
som (means of releasing), o^^r^a (o^la^a/), orchestra.
REMARK. Terminations of verbals are affixed, in general, with the same
euphonic changes as the similar affixes of inflection ; i. e. those beginning
with <r follow the analogy of -ITU of the Fut. or -/ of the Perf. pass. ; those
beginning with p, and r, of -^a/ and -<r/ of the Perf. pass. ; and those be-
ginning with a vowel, of the -d Perf. It is convenient to remember, that
verbal nouns following the 1st Pers. of the Perf. pass, more frequently denote
the thing done ; the 2d, the doing ; and the 3d, the doer. Thus,
oro'in-fta, poem, vroiv-<ris, poesy, rai-rj, poet.
3O8. II. FROM ADJECTIVES. Nouns formed from
adjectives (or from common radicals, 303. ) usually ex-
press the ABSTRACT of the adjective, and are formed in,
a. -/ (G. -ids, f.), or, if the root ends in i or a, -/ forming, with the
final vowel of the root, -/* or -oia. ; as, <ri<p-a;, wise, <roq>-ld, wisdom; iu$a,'tp,uv,
-av-as, happy, 'v^xifAov-td,, happiness ; ocXr^n;, -i-o;, true, a.Xr,ftict, truth ; tvvo-os,
COlitr. ivvov;, kind, ivvoi'2, kindness. See 92. /3, y, 315. a.
XJ46 DERIVATION. [BOOK To
b. -rns (G. -ruraj, f.), from adjectives in -as and -w$ ; as, *ro;, equal, horns
equality ; ret%vs, swift, ra.%urr,s, swiftness.
c. -trtvn (G. -ns, f.), from adjectives in -os and -uv ; as, lixcuos, just, IIX.KIO
ffuvn, justice; cu$(>cav, discreet, <ru<f>(>o(rvvn, discretion.
d. -as (G. -tos, n.), chiefly from adjectives in -us ; as, /WJ?, deep, fades,
depth ; limits, broad, iv/>os, breadth.
e. -a.s (G. -abos, f), from numerals ; as, Ivo, two, Ivtis, duad. Sen
f 25. III.
3OO. III. FROM OTHER NOUNS. Nouns derived from
other nouns are,
1.) PATRIALS (patria, native land), and similar words de-
noting persons related to some object. These end in,
a. -rns (G. -TOW) masc., and -ns ( 1 34. ; G. -rtlos ) fern, (with the
preceding vowel long in patrials ; thus, -'irns, -f,rns, -T;, -tarns, -turns ;
and also in other nouns in -ir;} ; as, 2v/j, Sybaris, 'SvZa.fnrns, o. man of
Sybaris, a Sybarite, "SvSafiri;, a woman of Sybaris; Aiytvvrn;, Tlttrartj;,
*2<ra.(>rirtis, ^ixiXiearns, a man of JEgina, &c. ; vokts, city, vroXtrris, citizen,
ireX7ris, female citizen ; r'o^ov, bow, ro^orn;, arcfter, rowans, archeress.
b. -ivs (G. -&?) masc., and -/? (G. -<of) fern. (^ 118. 3) ", as, Me^aja,
Meyara, Mtya^ey; , Megarian man, M.fyctgis, M. woman ; ^a^axav, drug,
<pa(>p,a.x.ivf , dealer in drugs, sorcerer, tpttgftetxis, sorceress; 'twos, horse, iv-rivs,
horseman, knight.
$ 31O. 2.) PATRONYMICS (so called from containing the
father's or ancestor's name, TU*TQO<; ovoput). These end in,
a. -f Ins (G. -ov) masc. (uniting with i or o preceding), and -f * (G. -f$o;)
fern.; -ulns (G. -aw) masc., and -; (G. -$;) fern., from names of Dec. I.;
and -ia$ns (G. -ov) masc., and -/* (G. -logos') fern., from names in -ios, and
(especially in hexameter verse for the sake of the measure) from many which
have the last syllable of the root long; as, Yl^ict^e;, Priam,
of P., Ylgtetpif, daughter of P. ; Kix^o-v//, KxOT/2jf, Kixgacn;
-tft/f, lln\ii$rjs 'H^axAJjif, -ious, 'HgetxXttins ' AJTA>, -eos, \nrot%ns ' Ba^iaf,
Boreas, BU^i5jf, son of B., Ua^.a.;, -Ios, daughter of B. ; Qitrnes, Qurridlns,
Qifnoif fyi^ns, -nr-os t ^i^nrttilns ' rijXs/f, Ep. G. -ni, Ep. II>)X>jxi>j,,
A. 1.
b. -v (G. -'twas, rarely -/aoy) masc., and -iuvn or -/> (G. -y) fern., only
poetic ; as, Kgav^, Saturn, K^ow <w, -favaf or -faj, *on o/ S., A. 397 ; nj-
Xiwf, n;X/<wv, A. IW8; 'Axi<rios, ' Axpfflelvn, daughter of A., S. 319; "A^n-
rraj, *A^j<rTfvj E. 412.
REMARK. Patronymics appear to have been, in their origin, diminutives
thus, n.iap,firis, little I'riam. See C- 312. Akin to the above are a fe^f
words in -/<Jia?, contr. -ibovs, son, -diet, contr. -tin, daughter; as, uy-
r^tlous, -<5, daughter's son, daughter, ultXQi&avs, -tin, nephew, niece.
311. 3.) FEMALE APPELLATIVES. These end in,
a. -ts (G. -tbos\ chiefly from ,na.sruUnes of Dec. I., and from those in -tut
as, lifftrorns, master, Itfrorts, mi.itress (^Hlso S.irTa/a, cf. b). See 134. a.
CH. ll.J. NOUNS. 247
b. -etivS, (G. -), chiefly from masculines in -<uv ; as, xiuv, -or -es, lion,
Xtas/vo, lioness ; rixrav, -evay, artisan, rixretiva, Adxav, -uvos, Spartan, A-
Also from some in -es ; as, S-taj, god, Siaiva,, goddess ( 74. ),
c. -no. (G. -t/ay), from Pccffi*.ivf, king, and ugsw?, priest; thus, /3<r/Xs/,
gweera, u^s/a, priestess.
d. -a-a-* (-rra, 70. 1 ; G. -jj), from several endings of Dec. III. ; as,
K'X/, -tttos, Cilician, K/Xr<r (cf. 273), avg, -xraf, sovereign, civcttrtrei, Sys,
-ray, hireling, S-jja-a-at, A/fwy, -way, Lybian, AiSvfftra.
NOTE. See, also, 306. N., 309, 310.
3 1 3. 4.) DIBIINUTIVES (sometimes expressing affec-
tion, often contempt). These end in,
a. -tov (G. -lov, n. ), with a syllable often prefixed (-/$<v, -ag<o, -
, -vQiov, &c.). b. -iffxos (G. -aw, m.), -<Vxj (G. ->7f, f.). Thus, srar?,
Diminutives, w//a, /i^/e cAz'/rf, ?ra/^Vxaj, young boy, vradiirxn, young
girl, wxiScioiov, v/zi'S'tpioiov, Ta<^a^t/XX;av, cr/^^'Vx9j, !r<^/irxa^/ay ft,ii^a.^
youth, {Aitd.x.iw, fjt,iif>a.x,i%iov, ^j/^axwXA^v, ftitooix.uXXi'biov, ftugoixiirxos, p,ii^a.x,t-
ffx-v Ko^n, girl, xogiov, xo(>i<rx,n, xo^itrxiov, xefilutt, xogoiiriov (for -agiov, on ac-
count of the preceding ^), xo^Kft^nv a-aj, island, vntrvfyov ^&/o, animal,
(^w<$/9v) 2^i^/ov, l^eabiipiov , ^uS<fiov. r il 2yfcgTj, <J 2wx^aT/'d/a, O Socrates I
dear Socky ! Ar. Nub. 222.
c. -is (G. -/So? and -7$os, f.) ; as, * vj, fountain, x^vis, -7los vr'tmls,,
table, -rtvetxis, -ftos, tablet.
d. -^sy? (G. -ewj, m., only of the young of animals) ; as, aeraj, eagle,
itriStvs, eaglet; Xaywy, Aare, Xay/^wj.
6. -i%vn, -eixvt}, -uXXi;, -uXsg (Dor.), &c. 5 as, ?reX/j, czYy, foXi^vri velffoS)
Wine-jar, iridiixYri KXXV^IS, finch, a,xa,v6uXXis tgus, -WTO}, love, fpuruXos,
darling, Theoc. 3. 7.
NOTE. Some diminutives (especially in -/ov) have lost their peculiar force
thus, 3-^, commonly in prose 9^/av, wild beast. Some proper names have di-
minutive forms, sometimes made by abbreviation ; as, My/xXey
great), 'A^o^j/XX/f (a^a^a, channel), A/vy,-, Mi/j ( I 26. 2).
3 1 3. 5.) AUGMENTATIVES, words implying increase
either of number, size, or degree. They end in,
a. -uv (G. -uves, m.). This ending may express either a. place, an animal,
or a person, in which any thing exists i numbers, or m /ar</e size or degree ;
as, ciftviXoc, vine, a,{A<rtXevv, vineyard, i-r<ruv ("-r-ffo^, horse-stable, auibpav, yu-
votixcav (owvg, yvvfi), apartments for men, women, oivuv (oJvt>s\ wine-cellar ; %i7-
Xaj, lip, %iiX&iv, a fish with a long snout ; yvoito;, jaw, yva,6uv, glutton; vXa-
rag, breadth, H\a,ruv. As a designation of place, -uvla. is also used ; as, po-
), rose-bed.
b. -| (G. -dxos, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and animals,
but harsher in its expression ; as, irXouros, wealth, 5rXi/ra, a rich churl. So
, Xaag, sea-wolf.
REMARK. Many derivative nouns are properly adjectives
used substantively.
*< DERIVATION. [BOOK I
B. ADJECTIVES.
314. I. FROM VERBS. These end in,
a. -ixag, -, -av, active; as, et%u, to rule, a^txos, able to rule; y^aQu, tt
describe, y><t<p.xos, descriptive, graphic. This ending is more frequently pre-
ceded by r (cf. ^ 8O6. a, b); as, vowrixbs (*onu) , poetic. But see 315. b,
b. -rfyies, -A, -ov, active ; as, ffu^u, to save, truT^ios, saving (cf. 306. b).
c. -tpof, -ev (and -os, -v, -o) implying fitness, both active and passive, ana
annexed after the analogy of different verbal nouns ; as, v$u, r^Q*
( 305. b), rgotpiftos, fitted to impart or to receive nourishment, nutritious, vig-
orous, xtffftiu.es (xta-opai, x?ws], fit for use.
d. -(tut, -ftov (G. *pMMf), active ; as, tXiiai, to pity, tXij/uuv, compassionate,
mindful.
e. -res, -vi, -ov, passive, signifying that which is done, either as a matter of
fact (like the Lat. Part. pass, in -tus), or more commonly as a matter of habit
or possibility ; thus, o^oiu, to see, ogdros, seen, visible.
f. -rlos, -a., -ox, passive, expressing necessity or obligation (like the Lat.
Part, in -ndus) ; as, -rotiw, to make, -roinrios, that which is to be made.
NOTE. Verbals in -ros and -riot commonly follow, in respect to the form
ftf the root, the analogy of the 1 Aor. pass. ; as, a'igiu, to take, Pf. P.
A. P. >j0jv, etigiros, aigirios TUVM, to stop, Pf. P. ri-ra.v/u.a.i, A. P. I
g. -tog, -j, -ev, passive (compare the Part, in -ptvoi) ; as, <riS*>, to revere,
(ft-os) fftftvos, revered, <ro6uv'os (vroSiu), longed for.
h. -&0{ (-a, -a), -as (G. -aoW), &c. ; as, %etXau, to slacken, %a> et^os,
flack; <p'tiu, to bear, Qoas, fruitful; Xiyu, to choose, Xoya-s, chosen; Xoi-rag
(Xi<Vw), remaining.
3 1 5. II. FROM NOUNS. These have the following
endings, with, in general, the significations that are annexed :
a. -/of, belonging to; if a vowel precedes, commonly uniting with it in a
diphthong (-<{, -tiof, -eio{, -uos, -vio<), and often, without respect to this,
assuming the form -u*< (Ion. -/?, $ 46. B.), especially from names of persons
and animals. Many pariah (properly adjectives, but often used substan lively)
belong to this class. Thus, eii^etves, heaven, ov^dvias, belonging to heaven, heaven-
ly, Qetiot (Qovot ), of murder, murderous ; ify^etitf (ay), pertaining to the
forum, 'A0*ec7of (*A^/). Athenian, $i7oi (^-f), divine, 'Apyitoi
-i-f), Argive, iSaf ('/*>.-), Ion. wof (*i*>f, -o-o;), of the morning,
(*t>%us), of a cubiff length ; avSoufitit ( a,v^u<rof ), human, 'Oft,Vnaf ("
Homeric, Svgnos (^f ), of wild (mists.
NOTES. . From the neuter of these adjectives has come a class of sub-
stantives denoting an appropriatt-d building or other place, instrument, &c. ; as,
Affwctiav ('Afava), vft~n, Mv<rt7o*, temple of Minerva, of Theseus, of the
Muset, xovi7o* (jttuoivf}, barber ' shop, y^af4fArt7ov (yoft,ftetrtv(), writing-
tablet, cf. 307.
*. Before -ies and -/ ( 308. a), r often passes into v : us, l,eturt, yetir,
li'ictt/nof, of a year, M<XV<oj (M/Xnraf), Milesian, dfaieteia. (a^avar*;), ill-
mortality.
'H. 11.] ADJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. 249
b. -ixee, -, -ov (if v precede, -xos : if simple < or u, -vxos ; while -etios
commonly makes -a.ix.as), relating to. These adjectives in xos are often formed
from words that are themselves derivative. They appb to things rather than
to persons. When used of the latter, the)' commonly signify related to in
quality, or jit for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations. Thus,
ri^vfi, art, rtMJMf, relating to art, artistic; S^Xa;, slave, SooXixo;, servile;
A<vj, Libyan, AiSuxog, pertaining to the Libyans or Libya; Ka^/i^af, Corin-
thian, YLoffivfaotxos rwtfcW, spondee, ff<rovb<ia,x,'os, spondaic ; 'A%a,ti>s, Acluzan,
'A%Ktxo;, and less Att. 'A%aii'x6; voivrn;, poet, fowrix'os, poetic, pv<rotxos,
((jjiTwg), rhetorical, o-rgKrnytxos (ffT^ttrnyoi), fit for a general. See } 314. a.
c. -ios, -&, -ov, and -<vog, ->j, - (proparoxytone), denoting material, -en ; as,
s, yold, xfiffios (f 1 8), golden, gJx/va? ($wX), wooden.
d. -ivos, seldom -iv'ot, expressing time or prevalence ; as, fiptgiro
by day, vrt'btvo; (), level, oguvos (o'gos, -4-aj), mountainous.
e. -TVoy, -?va;, -vaj, patrials, from names of cities and countries out of
Greece ; as, Tct^uvr7vos (Ta^aj, -avroj ), Tarentine, Ky^xjjva'j (Kw^*o; ), C^zf-
cene, 2a5/avoj 2a^s/s Sardian.
f. -f, -s^oj, ->J^of, -Xs;, -jXoj, -uXos, -us (-<r<ra, -sv, G. -ivrof), -^^>jj (-f,
G. -ij ; contr. from -o-si$vs, from iTbos, form], expressing fulness or quality ;
as, alff^es (euffxot], shameful, <poio; ($&t\ fearful, -rovn^'os <rv), painful,
S-KgiraXtos (S^a^ira;), courageous, a-ra<rjXaf (aTa'rj), deceitful, Qu^uXcs
parsimonious, vXvtis (uXri), woody, vrugoiis (*uo, -v^'os}, fiery, %etgitit
graceful, o-Qnxu^tis (v<pw%), wasp-like, ^/afAfAu^tis (^etp.ju.o;^, sandy.
3 1 G. III. FROM ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 1. From
some adjectives and adverbs, derivatives are formed in the
same manner as from nouns ; thus, xad-apo'f, c/eaw, xi9^/o?,
cleanly, &tv&eQios (eUev^f^o?), liberal, ^Jivxog (dylvg), femi-
nine, z&wivoi; (x&eg), of yesterday.
2. The adjective has in f Greek, as in other languages, two
strengthened forms, of which the one may be termed dual,
denoting choice between two objects, and the other plural, de-
noting choice among a number of objects.
The most obvious examples of these strengthened fonns are the comparative
and superlative degrees, commonly so called. Other examples of the compara-
tive or dual strengthened form are, (a) the correlatives -ritrifios \ whether of the
two ? -roTi^es, ingos (formed from the 3d Pers. pron. as the positive, ^ 23,
I 4 1 , or, as some think, from the numeral si?), one of the two, ovSirsgas, o-ro-
ngie, txa.<ri(>os. a.^on^os (see ^[ 63, and compare the Lat. uter, neuter, alter,
and the Eng. whether, either, neither, other) ; (b) the following implying a con-
sideration of two objects or properties ; $s% t rtos (poet.), Lat. dexter, right
(rather than left), a^ia-naos, sinister, left, ^tvrtoos, second, ytfAtrt^os, noster, our
(rather than yours, or any one's else), i>/u.'i<rios, vester, your, <r<pi>r<os, their, &c.
(If 24). Other examples of the superlative or plural strengthened form are,
(c) the correlatives Toirros ; which in order ? or, one of how many f
63) ; (d) all ordinals except itvnps (see ^ 25).
C. PRONOUNS.
317. For the formation of the most common pronouns,
250 DERIVATION. [BOOK II
see 141 - 154. The Greek abounds in correlative pronouns
and adverbs (see fl 63), in respect to many of which it will be
observed that, when they begin with n-, they are indefinite, or
interrogative (with a change of accent) ; with T-, definite ot
demonstrative ; with the rough breathing, relative definite, and
with OTT-, relative indefinite. Thus, TTO'CJOC / how much 1 noaoc,
of a certain quantity, rdao?, Toaovioc and roaovdt ( 150. ),
so much, oaog, as much, onooog, how much soever ; nois / when 1
TTOTE, at some time, TOTS, then, ore, when, OUOTS, whensoever.
D. VERBS.
3 1 8. I. FROM NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. Of these
the chief endings and the prevailing significations are as fol-
lows.
a. -iu, -tuu, and (mostly from nouns of Dec. I.) -a,u, to be or do that
which is pointed out by the primitive ; as, <p/Xoy, friend, <piXi&>, to be a friend,
to love, luSaipoviu (ivba.lp,ui, -evof), to be prosperous, a-Tu^ica (art/^y), to be
unfortunate, vroXiftiu (voXiftos), to wage war ; ^ovXiuu (Soo/Uy), to be a slave,
to serve, fiariXiuu (ficttriXivf), to reign, %o(>iv<u (;0f) to dance; roXpau
(TCA/K), to be bold, to dare, rifAtiw (<rif*w), to honor.
b. -au (mostly from words of Dec. II.), -/v<w and -vvu (mostly from ad-
jectives), to make that which is pointed out by the primitive ; as, StjXos, evi-
dent, $-/iXou, to make evident, ZovXou (SavXo;), to make one a slave, to enslave,
%(>vffou (j(,va'os), to make golden, to gild, <r<rigou (irrs^av), to make winged, to
furnish with wings, ffrityatv'oeo (trriQaitoi), to crown ; Xtvxxivu (Xsyxoy), to
whiten, fvpaivu (ovfioi), to signify, viuvu (^/'y), to sweeten.
c. -/, and (chiefly when formed from words which have or * in the
last syllable, or when preceded by /, cf. 310. a, 315. b) - ; from names
of persons or animals, imitative (denoting the .adoption of the manners, lanqunqe t
opinions, party, &c.) ; from other words, used in various senses, but mostlv
active ; as, M$/^<w (M5$y ), to imitate or favor the Medes, 'ExxW^iw, to speak
Greek, Aa/>i*u and A/a, to five, talk, sing, or dress like the Dorian
*riu, to be of Philij^s parti/, aX<vrtx/<w (aA&5-Tj), to play the fox ;
(wXai/Tof), to make rich, tttatfMfJ^*, to esteem hup/ty, Sigi^v (St^if), to harvest,
ieigw (tgit ), to contend, ioordZu (io^Tij), to make a feast, $/xaw (J<xj), to
j'idye, 3-ut/fta.^en (Setuft.*), to wonder.
d. -u with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently active ;
as, xafafof, pure, Ka.6a.iu, to purify, vreixiXXu (ro/xXflf), to variegate, i*.a.\a.r.
vtt (jia,Xa,x.'ot}, to soften.
.$319. II. FROM OTHER VERBS. These are
1.) Desideratives, formed in -triiu, from the Fut. ', as, yiXaw, to laugh,
fyiXxiriiu, to wish to lauph, PI. Pliaedo, 64 b, vroXi/u.*ivii*> (froXe^iw), to wish
for war, Th. i. 33. Desideratives are also formed in -<*&/ (rarely -), chiefly
from verbal nouns ; as, p,.v6tiviu, to learn, ffxfarr,;, dlsd/ile, fAa.fnna.u, to wish
to become a diacijife, Ar. Nub. 183, frgarwyix* (ffroarwyo;], to desire military
command, vii. 1. 33, Savaraw (Saxarof), to desire death, PL Phaedo, 64 b.
2.) Various prolonged forms in -*/, -<rxu, &c. (see 265-300), some-
CH. ll.J VLRBS. - ADVERBb 25 J
times frequentative or intensive, as, plvru, to throw, pivra^u, to throw to and fro,
frtvu, to siyh, ffTivai^ca, to sigh deeply ; sometimes inceptive, as, , to be at
the age of puberty, r&os.trKu, to come to the age of puberty ; sometimes causative,
as, (Ai6v<, to be intoxicated, p,<Ju<r>iu, to intoxicate ; sometimes diminutive, as,
\l.*otr<iu, to cheat, l^K-rxrvX^ta (cf. () SI 2), to cheat a little, to humbug, AT.
Eq. 1144; but often scarce differing in force from the primitive form
( 254-258,265).
E. ADVERBS.
$ 3 2O. Most adverbs belong to the following classes.
I. OBLIQUE CASES OF NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES, employed
as circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective
thus employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of
these oblique cases have antique forms, and many belong to
themes that are not in use. Examples,
1. GENITIVES, (a) in -6w, denoting the place whence ( 91) : (6) in -oo
denoting the place, where ; as, ou [sc. rbvov or %ugiou], in which place, where,
O.UTOV, there, o/xov, in the same place, otietftou, nowhere : (c) in -us ; as, tti'Qvtis ,
of a sudden, IgJJj, in order : (d) vrgoixos (*<), of a gift, gratis, &c.
2. DATIVES, 'a) in -ot, -061 of Dec. II. sing., and in -v<ri(v\ -<r/(v) of
Dec. I. pi., denoting the place where (in adverbs in -01 derived from pronouns,
this commonly passes into the idea of whither, see ^[ 63, and compare the fa-
miliar use of where, t/tere, &c., in English) ; as, *A^y?<r/, at Athens ; see
90, 96. 5 : (6) in ->j (-), - (-), -a/ of Dec. I., and in -/ of Dec. III.,
denoting way, place where, or time when ; as, raury, [sc. a^a/] in this way, thus,
[sc. *] in this place, here, iravra%n, every way, everywhere, rsJ, on foot,
i^'itf, privately, ^0.^x1, on the ground, xa.Xa.i, in olden time, Kxj<n, by the will of,
H<pi ( 89. /3. rf), ay^;/, near, ^/, early, I. 360.
NOTE. Adverbial Datives of Dec. I. are written by most editors with an
i subsc., except when they have no Nom. in use, and by some even then.
See 25. 0.
3. ACCUSATIVES ; as, a*/*wv, at the moment, gapy, on account of, S/'*jy, like,
*nd the Neut. sing, and pi. of adjectives. ,
II. DERIVATIVES SIGNIFYING, (1.) MANNER, in,
a. -us, from adjectives. The adverb may be formed by changing of the
Gen. pi. into s ; as, tropes, G. pi. ffoQuv, wise, <ro<pus, wisely, ret%vs, ret%iuv,
swift, Ta.fciug, swiftly, ff&<pus (ffizty'fls, -i&>, -&v), Ion. trotty'tag, evidently.
b. -i$ov or -Sov ('perhaps kindred with iTSas, form), chiefly from nouns ; -$?
or -a$v, chiefly from verbs (those in -a$w commonly conforming to other
verbals) ; and -let ; as, -rXiv^ov (**.'nh s \ in the form of bricks, Hdt. ii. 96,
froroul'ov (/JoT^wj), in clusters, B. 89, ava<pav$av, or -la, (avx<pai*u), openly,
xov&nv, or -la (x.vx>rw\ secretly, f#oa$v* (ivi'i^u, tr-ro^s], scatteringly
These appear to be Ace. forms (cf. 320. 3) ; thus, Sing. fern. -&u, neut,
-Sax, PL neut. -S*.
c. -i or -ti, especially from imitative verbs ( 318. c, -%< becoming -//),
and in compounds of a- privative, KUTOS, and <rf as, MJ'r/, like the Medes,
/, in the Greek language, d/Atr0i (ptffoi}, without pay, dft,et%t'i and
COMPOSITION. [BOOK n.
ttftx%>i<rti, or -/', without battle, av<ro%tii (%t'ir), "^ one ' s own hand,
, tvith tfic wfiole people. These appear to be Dat. forms (cf. :V20. 2}
d. -f added to a palatal ; as, dv*-/u,iyvDf*i (r. piy-, 294), to w> up,
confusedly, pellmell, -rct^XXa.^ .(;ra-aAXaV<ra, 274. y), alternately.
(2.) TIME WHEN, in -T? (Dor. -x), or, for more specific ex-
pression, in -/x ; as, aUdre (uJUot?), a/ another time, avtixa
moment. See 63.
(3.) PLACE WHITHER, in -as (which appears to be a softened
form of -de, 322. 111.,, or at least kindred with it) ; as, oit-
Qctvoas, to heaven, c'xetac, thither, cre'^wac, to the other &ide,
See fl 63.
(4.) NUMBER, in -lixig. See 1] 25. II.
339. III. PREPOSITIONS WITH THEIR CASES ; as,
tQfov) ngovgyov, before the work, to the purpose,
upon the affair, immediately, (<V o) dio, on account of which,
wherefore, (tv nod^v odea) fpnodwv, in the way of the feet,
3 A$r)va& (from 'A&rjvai;, and -de, an inseparable preposition de-
noting direction towards, 51. N., 150. 4), to Athens.
IV. DERIVATIVES FROM PREPOSITIONS, or PREPOSITIONS
USED WITHOUT CASES ; as, e'w ('), without, d'aot (?), w?ii/iw
/r^d?, besides.
II. FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS.
333. In composition, the word which modifies or limits
the other, usually precedes; as, vo^o-^irr t q (vofjo^, xlttr^i)
law-maker.
The exceptions consist mainly of a verb or preposition followed by a noun,
and are for the most part poetic. Amon# the verbs which are most frequently
so placed in prose are pxiu, to love, and ^r<ri, to hate ; thus, <p<X-ax^TOf,
man-loving, fAifo-'ri^'TKi, Persian-hater.
334. A. The FIRST WORD has commonly its radical form
with simply euphonic changes. These changes, besides those
which the general rules of orthoepy require, consist chiefly,
1.) In the insertion of a uniou-voivd, whicli, after a substantive or adjective,
is commonly --, but sometimes -j-, --, or -/- ; and, after a vtrh, -(., .<-, -a.,
-/-, Or -/- ; as, Tctid-o-T^i^ns (T<V, -5f, Tcf , instriirtrr, ^m-o-Xnyos (S/'xj,
Xiyw), advocate, %r,/u,iovgyos (Ion. Jjj/tt/.o-sjyaj, from ^riftios and ?^y), artisan,
(yd-a-fAtrgtet, from y, contr. ySj, and ^s-^sw, 35, 98. ) yuup,irlct, ge-
ometry, (V&-O-KOOOS ' vdoi, viu;, and xa^ta) viuxigoi, keeper of a tmiph', Savctr-
0-<f>oj!os and -n-$i>(>es (Savrf , <f>iou\ deat/i-hrimji/ii/, yEsrh. Ag. 1 1 76, Cho.
369, %i<p-t>-<f>ogos and -o-(pa^9f (%i<p<>s, -aj, <p), sword-beuring, a.yo^-A-t'oi^f
(ttyooa., viftu}, clerk of (lie market, -ro'S-A-vi-rrri^ (-rov;, v/?), foot-bath, Hdt.
U. 172, Tfc>-<-yjj (-TtJ^, y'iy*9uu.i , fin-born, i^-ei-Topi; (obof, fogi}}, tcni/-
farer, ftir-at-'roktof (pices, Xwj), half-gray, N. 361 ; K^
;H. 11.] FIRST WORD. LAST WORD. 253
chorus-leading, rtg-r-t-xigavvos (TI^TU, xtoxuves), delighting in thunder,
A. 419, Xtr-a-Tit^la. (Xe/Va/, reify; ), leaving one's post.
2.) In the insertion of <r, commonly connected by a union-vowel either to
the succeeding or preceding word, and sometimes even to both ; as, (piv-ff-
tttrvrii) fi-^/ttff'X'it (fi-rru, a,<rvif}, coward, nXt-tr-tpogos (r'lXos, -i-o;, (figa),
fulfilling, xi(>otir(poo;, horned, QuffQofios, light-bringing ; Xu-ffi-TiXris (>.uu, <ri\of),
income-paying, profitable, va.v-fft-<ro(>os (vawj, -rogos) navigable, (/u,t>y-<ro-&.) fti%o-
"ei^K^os (ftiyvufti, $ti(>5a,(>of), mixed with barbarians; S-t-cff-i^^'iet (S-tos, i%-
fyos), impiety, <pt-i<r-Gios ($'*?*>, fties), life-giving; TKfA-t<r!-^cas (rip,v&>, %?*>;),
wounding, A. 5 1 1 . In some of these cases, the <r appears to have been bor-
rowed from the theme or the Dat. pi. of nouns, and in others, perhaps, from
the Aor. of verbs, or a verbal.
3.) In adopting a shorter form from the theme, or an early root ; as,
asrrw),
o-et<pris (ee.Tju.tt, -uro;, /Jasrrw), blood-bathed, (fiX-'o-rovof (0/Xt- from
iravaj), labor-loving.
NOTES, u. The mode in which the constituent words are united often
depends, especially in verse, upon the quantity of the syllables which compose
them.
/3. In some compounds, chiefly poetic, the first word has a form like that
of the Dat. sing, or pi. without change ; as, vuxn-ro^os, roaming by night,
Eur. Ion, 718, rti%ttrt-*r).rirvi, wall-approacher, E. 31.
325, REMARKS. 1. If the first word is a. particle, it is commonly
unchanged except by the general laws of euphony. For elision in preposi-
tions, see > 41, 4-.', 192. 1. 'A^p/, like vrs^i, often retains its vowel. In
the other prepositions, the elision is rarely omitted, except in the Ion., par-
ticularly in the Ep. before some words which begin with the digamma. For
elision before a consonant, see 48. 2. Hgo sometimes unites with a vowel
following by crasis ; as, vgo-avr<ros rgouvros, ir^o-i^ea <rgou%u, K. 90 ; see
$ 192. 1.
2. Some particles occur only in composition, and are hence called insepara-
ble. Of these, the most important are,
a.) a-, commonly denoting privation or negation, and then called a- priva
tive, as, ei-va.is, without children, u-iroQos, unwise ; but sometimes denoting
union, collection, or intensity, as, a-^X<p''f (sX<pyj), brother, a.-nvfis (TS/VW),
strained. 'A- privative (commonly a.v- before a vowel) is akin to eiviu, without,
to the Lat. in-, and to the Eng. and Germ, un- ; - copulative appears to be
akin to a'^a, together. Akin to a. priv. is v- (Lat. ne) ; thus, vr,).tris (X5,-),
merciless.
b.) luff-, ill, mis-, un- ; as, ^utr-QvfAos, ill-omened, ^uff-ru^'ta,, mis-fortum,
v, un-happy.
c.) The intensive ay- (kindred with *Ags, 161. R.), 1^-, -, and $- ;
as, a/-Sxgyy, very tearful, a-crXewrflf, very rich.
B. The form of the LAST WORD depends upon
the part of speech to which the compound belongs.
1. If the compound is a NOUN or ADJECTIVE, it commonly
takes the most obvious form which is appropriate to the class
22
254 COMPOSITION. [BOOK u.
of words to which it belongs. Often, the last word, if itself a
noun or adjective, undergoes no change ; as, o^ud-dov/loc, fel*
low-slave, a-nuig, childless. If the last element is a verb,
the compound adjective or masculine substantive ends com
monly in,
a. -as. This ending (which is far the most common) has both an active
and a passive sense, distinguished, for the most part, by the accent, which, if
the penult is short, the active compound commonly takes upon the penult, but
the passive upon the antepenult; as, X/4a-oAo? (X/4ay, /3XX<w), throwing stones,
&i0o-oXt>s thrown at with stones.
b. ~ns (-tf, G. -Jay) ; as, lu-vgtx-vs, becoming, Kurugxvs, self-sufficing.
c. -is or -as (G. -eu], and -* or -, denoting the agent ( 306. a, b) ; as,
i9/jt.o-8irns^ legislator, fAugo-<rv\ys ( 92. 2), of>vi6o-6*i(>a.s, bird-catcher, pr.'l.o-
OT*)(>, shepherd, 2. 529, wa/^-oXera^, child-murderer.
REMARK. In compounds of this class, if the last word begins with , t, or
, followed by a single consonant, this vowel is commonly lengthened to n or
u ; as, ffr^artiyos (ff-r^eiro;, eiyu , general, lufffauros (W-, iXctuya), hard to
drive over, dvavuftos (a-, cvo/xa, 44. 5), nameless.
337. 2. If the compound is a VERB, it is important to
observe that verbs are compounded directly and without change
with prepositions only ; and that, in other cases, compound
verbs are derivatives from compound nouns or adjectives ex-
isting or assumed.
Thus, XetfAZavu, to take, unites directly with the prep, ava, up, to form
avaXa^favw, to take up ; but it cannot so unite with the noun 'i^yov, work, and
hence the idea to take work, to contract, is expressed by i^ya-XaSiu, derived
from the compound verbal i^yo-XeiSos, contractor. So the verb compounded
of 'j<r<ros, horse, and rgiQu, to feed, is l^r-ror^'tra from ifrorgoipuf, horse-keeper.
Sometimes the form of the verb happens not to be changed in passing through
the compound verbal ; thus, from fTres and -raiiu, is formed yiro-reios, bread-
maker, and from this again a-iro-x-oiia, to make bread.
REMARKS. 1 . The union of the preposition with the verb, as not affecting
the form of the verb, and admitting of separation by tmesis ( 328. N.), is
termed looM or improper composition, in distinction from that close or prcper
composition which forms one inseparable word.
328. 2. In PRONOUNS and PARTICLES there is a still looser form
ol composition, consisting in the aggregation of words, sometimes really and
sometimes only apparently combined in sense. In these aggregates, the or-
thography varies, the words being sometimes written together, chiefly when
the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately. Among the chief worda
that are thus affixed to others are,
a. The INDEFINITE PRONOUN *}{ as, ems, whoever, eSns, no one, fan,
if any one.
b. The PARTICLES,
(Ep. xi or xi t Dor. xa), contingent or indefinite ; as, Ss &*, whoever, tree
or JV , whenever.
CH. 11.] PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 255
yi (Dor. ya), at least, emphati* as, ?y<wyi, / at host, ffuyt, you surely t
rfuro iyt, this certainly, Ivrti yt, since at least*
$, now (shorter form of ffiri) ; as, o<r<rts $, whoever now, vuv S, just now.
^riirort (Sj? -ran), ever now; as, ifnrbrix'ort, whosoever now, <ri ^n-ran ; what
in the world ?
out (contr. from tax, it being so, ^ 55), then, therefore, yet, often added to an
indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of indefiniteness ; as,
tffrnrotJv, whoever then, o<ru<r$wro'rovv, howsoever now then.
r'i (shorter form of rtg/), very, particularly, just ; as, eWg, wlio in par-
ticular, a<r<rt, just as.
vroTi, at any time, ever, often added to interrogatives to strengthen the ex-
pression ; as, r! if art Iffn rcvro ; [what at any time is this*?] what in the
world is this f or, what can this be ?
ri, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other connec-
tive words, before their use was established, to mark them as such. In the
Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent ; but in the Att. scarce occurs,
except in an, and ua-rty as, olos ri, able, possible, and ifi urt, on condition that.
NOTE. In cases of loose composition, other words, especially particles, are
sometimes interposed. When a preposition is thus separated from a verb, the
figure is called Tmesis (rfttjfis, cutting) ; as, ** Si <r>j$jVaj, and leaping forth,
Bur. Hec. 1172.
BOOK III.
SYNTAX.
fyetmiv.
Homer.
t^ 329. SYNTAX, as the DOCTRINE OF SENTEN
CES, treats either of the offices and relations of
words as arranged in sentences, or of the offices
and relations of these sentences themselves.
NOTE. For a general view of the OFFICES OF WORDS, as subject, predi-
cate, copula, attribute, compellative (person addressed), appositive (substantive
in apposition), adjunct (modifying or limiting substantive not in apposition),
whether complement or circumstance (i. e. regarded as completing the Idea of
the modified word, especially as a direct or indirect object, or as denoting some
circumstance respecting it, as time, place, means, &c.), whether exponential or
nude (i. e. attached with or without a preposition), exponent (sign of office or
relation, as preposition, conjunction, &c.), &c. : of their RELATIONS, as agree-
ment or concord, government or regimen, &c. : of the DISTINCTIONS OF SENTEN-
CES, as simple or compound, distinct (hi which the predicate has a distinct form
as a finite verb} or incorporated (in which the predicate is incorporated in
another sentence as an infinitive or participle}, intellective or volitive (expressing
an act of the understanding, or of the will], declarative or interrogative, actual
or contingent (having respect to fact, or founded upon supposition), positive or
negative, leading or dependent, substantive, adjective, or adverbud (performing
the office of a substantive, adjective, or adverb in another sentence), protasis
(introduction, condition) or apodosis (conclusion), &c. : of their MODES OF
CONNE<rriON, incorporation, subordination, coordination, and simple succession :
of their EXPONENTS, as connective or characteristic (denoting the connection
of sentences, or simply distinguishing their character) ; conjunctions, copula-
tive, final (denoting purpose), conditional, complementary (introducing a sen-
tence used substantively}, &c. ; connective pronouns and adverbs, whether rela-
tive or complementary (referring to an antecedent, or introducing a sentence
used substantively) ; characteristic particles, pronouns, and adverbs ; &c. : of the
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS AND SENTENCES, as logical, rhetorical, rhythmical, pe-
riodic, &c.: and of the FIGURES OF SYNTAX, as, ELLIPSIS (omission), syllepsis and
zeugma (varieties of compound construction, according as the word referring to
a compound subject has the form required by all the substantives in the subject
taken together, or that which is required by one of them taken simjly} ; PLEO-
NA-M f redundance), periphrasis or circumlocution; ENALLAGE (use of one word
or form for another), metaphor, metonymy, synecdoche, synesis (when the con-
struction follows the sense, in disregard of grammatical form), attraction
(when a word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another
word), anacoluthon (a want of agreement between two parts of a sentence.
CK. 1.] GENERAL REMARKS. oUBSTANTIVE. 25T
arising from a change of construction), vision, change of number ; HYPERBA
TON (disregard of the common laws of arrangement), -anastrophe (inversion)
parenthesis, &c., see General Grammar.
33O. Among the especial causes of VARIETY in the
syntax of the Greek are,
1 .) Its freedom in the use of either generic or specific forms of expression
In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more specifically
what has been generically expressed by some older form. This older form,
thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate sphere, and itself more specific in its
expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere, is peculiarly the arbitei
of language ',
"Usus,
Quern penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi " ;
and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to em
ploy the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The result
is, that an idea may be often expressed by two or more forms, which differ
from each other in being more or less specific ; and the same form may have
different uses, according as it is employed more generically, or more specifically.
These remarks apply both to the words of a language, to the forms of those
words, and to the methods of construction. They apply with peculiar force
to the Greek, from the freedom and originality of its development, the copi-
ousness of its vocabulary, the fulness of its forms, and the variety of its
constructions.
2.) The prevalence of different dialects in states intimately connected with
each other by commerce, by alliances, and by national festivals ; and also in
different departments of literature, without respect to local distinctions (6).
It cannot be thought strange, that forms of expression appropriate to the
different dialects should have been sometimes interchanged or commingled ;
or that the laws of syntax should have acquired less rigidity in the Greek,
than in languages which have but a single cultivated dialect.
3.) The vividness of conception and emotion, the spirit of freedom, the versa
tility, the love of variety, and the passion for beauty, which so preeminently
characterized the Greek mind, and left their impress upon all its productions.
The Greek language was the development in speech of these characteristics,
the vivacious, free, versatile, varied, and beautiful expression of Greek genius
and taste.
CHAPTER I.
SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
I. AGREEMENT OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.
^ 331. RULE I. An APPOSITIVE agrees in
case with its subject ; as,
2-2*
258 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [BOOK Hi.
TLct/futruns ft* rug, Parysatis, the mother, i. 1. 4. '0 Ma/avJ^o
0-aretf.ios, the river Mceander, i. 2. 7. Ta 31 aS\a, ri<ra.v ffr^fyyi^if Ib. 10
'O vrorctftoe Xiytrcti Mugo-vctf Ib. 8. "Ov/t t"r<i slva* 'Aya&wva PI. Prot.
315 e. r Hj ulrov ffetr^a.-rtiv liro'wri i 1. 2. AtaSuv Ttff<ra,fi^v^v us $i
lav Ib.
333* REMABKS. 1. Appositives, more frequently, agree with
their subjects in gender and number, as well as in case ; as, 'Ewi;g, ^ Swsm
<* yt/yj, -row K/X/xa/y /3<r<Xs<wj, JEpyaxa, the wife of Syennesis, the king
of the CilicianS) i. 2. 12. 2o^a/vTov s TOV
ovrctf no,} rovrovsi. 1. 11.
2. ELLIPSIS. The appositive or the subject may be omitted, when it can
be supplied from the connection ; as, Auictas o \\o\v ffTa,rou [sc. uio;~\, Lycius,
the son of Polystratus, iii. 3. '20. QipiirroxXvf nx.w vetoes, tri [sc. \yu\, /,
Themistocles, have come to thee, Th. i. 137.
3. The sign of special application (us, as) is often omitted ; as,
il%ov <rxfrci<r/u.a.Tcc, the skins which they had as coverings, i. 5. 10.
Si KO.} i"i7u -ran^xK^fft ffuft&ovXov i. 6. 5.
4. SYKESIS. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is im
plied in another word ; as, 'A^va7oj &!v <rAs<ws TJJJ piy'io-m;, being an
Athenian, a city the greatest, PI. Apol. 29 d (here TXWJ agrees with '
of Athens, implied in 'A^va/af)- 'Afixovro iis Karuua, *oXiv '
2/vwcrswv d-roixovs, OIKOVVTCCS v. 5. 3 (here r/Mf refers to -roX/Tas, im-
plied in wXi) ; cf. iv. 8. 22, v. 3. 2. 2ov TW rj^gswf Ar. Ach. 93.
333. 5. ATTRACTION. A substantive intimately related to anoth-
er is sometimes put in apposition with it by attraction. In this construction,
the appositive usually denotes a part, or a circumstance, and is often joined
with a participle, taking the place of the Genitive absolute. Thus, Ei'^Xsxra
2i T tr^'odufia. avruv, tyoivlxos (*\v a.1 3-vgcti x-iKoinft'svu.t, their pnrto.h are
easily set on fire, the doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. vii. 5. 22. "AxXa
C<V a.^fjt.0. ifyyiTi, q>otvix,'Kri x.a.ra.'irnrrctft'ivot ol "riroi Ib. viii. 3. 12.
6. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an adjunct ;
and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other would seem
more appropriate. Thus, Tovrev ro tu^et 3vo rXi0, of this the breadth
is two plethra, i. 2. 5 ; but, Tw Ji ^ILa^ffvou TO tvgos 'urn* itxixn xa,} triyri
waJwv, and the breadth of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet, Ib. 8. Horapos
tvges ^uo vr&itguv Ib. 23 ; but, Tdtygnf . ., Ta f&iv tuoes of><yviu,} wivri
i. 7. 14. AUa fi.^a.1 tifQtfei but, Ava/v ^vaTv irjo<r5v, Vect. iii. 9, 10.
"KffTi Ji ft X,*'$. a ' ' ' ^' t ** affl vrti^ioi V. 3. 11. \\dTut 'A^JJv
v'oXtf Soph. CEd. C. 108 ; but, "E<rT' a^' *A^j*>> \er cmo^nros
Pers. 348.
7 ANACOLUTHON. An appositive sometimes differs in case from its sub
ject, through a change of construction : as, Mr/ <r\ 'Ef/a/y \iyu, and to
my mother, Eriboea I mean (for MT^/ T' 'EgiGtia, and to my mother Eribam},
Soph. Aj. 569. See also 5 344.
^ **4b 8. A word, in apposition with a sentence not used sitbstnntively,
is commonly in the Accusative, as expressing the effect of the action ; but is
sometimes in the Nominative, as if an inscription marking the character of
the sentence. Thus, 'EXfv *rav/A*v, MtyiXiw XwTjy nnx^ay, let us slajf
CH. 1.] USE OF THE NUMBERS. 9.5M
Helen, [which would be] a bitter grief to Menelaus, Eur. Or. 1105. 2<ri<p
fiist'iv-reti ToX'i r ovtt^os *< 3-iuv oi<ri/u,i, our garlands are profaned, a
dishonor to the city, and an insult to the gods, Eur. Heracl. 72. To 2s vreivruv
t^'fyiffTov . ., Ttjy fjt,\v ffriv %&>gav a,v%avof&ivriv ?, out the greatest thing of all,
you see your own territory increasing, Cyr. v. 5. 24. To X o i tr 6 1 o v $1, S-giyxos
afaiuv KO.XUV, 2oJx7 ywn y^at/f 'EXXa2* iiffei(pi%of*oii Eur. Tro. 489. 'H^v i
'yiMMjAiveay, TO TOV x.u[& cu 2o TTOI at/, oiio' ol ye/ravEj ff<QoOf>a, TI eLttrtfctvovrui, ' as
the comic poet says,' PI. Ale. 121 d.
NOTE. This use of the Norn, and Ace. may be often explained by attraction
(. 3J3) to the subject or object of the verb.
9. The whole and its ports, or a part, are often found in the same case,
either by regular apposition (as when the whole is simply divided into its parts,
or the parts united to form the whole), or by attraction ( 333), or from their
sustaining similar relations to the same word. This construction has received
the general name of o-^JJ^a xa,6' o'Xax xai p'toos, construction by the whole and
the part.
II. USE OF THE NUMBERS.
^ 330. I. The SINGULAR is sometimes used for the Plural
in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the expression
greater individuality or unity ; as, Tov "EM.yva, the Greek
{=.ihe Greeks}, Hdt. i. 69. "fiynsi ddxyvov o^^aTwv M'TTO, the
tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. El. 1231. ni^nlr\^ tvdvg
da%QV(ov Ib 906.
REMARK. A chorus, from its strict unity, commonly speaks of itself as an
individual, and is often so addressed or spoken of by others. Not unfrequent-
ly, the two numbers are mingled ; as, XOP. 'Eya /u.lv, u -T<, xa.} TO <ro
aifAtt, KK} roufjt,ov a, u Trig, vt^.dov tl ol [jw\ xctXeas Xiyai, all
ya,(> ii}>o/Aiff0' Upa. Soph. El. 251. r H ^tTvoi, (&h SJJT* u$ix.y6u tro)
Id. CEd. C. 174. 'H^Tv p\v iftn vreiv TtTc^surui fitXos ftivu S
^Esch. Eum. 676. 'O^yaj |(/V o-o/ . . '!>?? ^ Ib. 848.
336. II. The use of the PLURAL for the Singular is
particularly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns,
in adjectives used substantively, in the names of things com-
posed of distinct parts, and in vague expressions for persons
or things ; as,
KJ ^w^j xai S-oiX<rv no.} irovovs <pigtiv, to endure both heat, and cold,
and labor, iii. 1. 23. T $i%iee, TOV XIO/XTO;, the right of the wing, i. 8. 4.
YLa.T^ox\oi, o; ffoi -rctTgo; jjv TO. tft'i^TetTo,, Patroclus, who was thy father's
best- beloved, Soph. Ph. 434. T 2uswss-/? /Sair/Xs/a, the palace of Syenne-
sis, i. 2. 23 ; cf. Hi. 4. 24, iv. 4. 2, 7. Huv roTotii TO%OIS, with this bow t
Soph. Ph. ] 335 ; cf. Tov >rtii 288. Tuv A/OS T' t^ouv v-r^ cnvus, ' for
the foes' (Prometheus), ^Esch. Pr. 67. XaXas Toxtutrn ilx'oTus Supoupivoif,
' parents' (a mother), Eur. Hec. 40:1.
REMARKS. . An individual often speaks of himself in the Plur., as if
others were associated with him ; and a woman so speaking of herself, uses
the masculine, as the generic gender ( 330. 1 ) ; thus, A/2oj/,<*j0 y TO, A.S-
Xi-vittva //, for I am ashamed of what I have said, Eur. Hipp. 244. Sow
260 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [BOOK Hi.
evxir' av tint iv rot $' ttrpii xcet ? xAi ft* Id Ale. 277
'AAK. ' Agxovftiv riftsTf 01 fgoSvrxrxovris ffiftv Ib. 383. MHA. 'H^tJy xrtvou-
fttv, o'trig itttpviraftiv Id. Med. 1241. 'HA. Ylt<rouf*,t0', it , -retr^t vtp.u>
gauftivai Soph. El. 399. So a chorus of women (^ 33.5. RJ uses the masc.
wng. (if the text is correct), Ksi5^vv XS/-TO^<, . . AiW Eur, Hipp. 1 105.
/S. The Plur. may be used with a singular compellative, when the person ad-
dressed is associated with others; as, IT', s'^j;, vpi~s, S> 'H^a-sriSa, xaJ S^ao-xs-
n avTov /3at/A^jva/ T hptls. 0! ftlv $ri a,v<rTuvTts l^t^cttrxov H. Gr. iv. 1.
11. T H -rixvov, Ta^s<rTfly } Soph. (Ed. C. 1102. n^ao-tX^T', u <ru7, fotr^l
Ib. 1104.
$ 3 3 7. III. In speaking of two, both the PLURAL and the
DUAL are used, the one as the more generic, and the other as
the more specific form (^ 330. 1) ; thus,//oe7<5f ovo, two children ;
but, Tea nulde, the two children, i. 1. 1. Compare Twv nv&Qwv
vi. 6. 29, TW uvd^f 30, zovf uvdfjag ' . . TOVTWV, . . TW avdys 31,
32, T<W T aV5^6 34.
cyV d' tl/OOOM ZilUf, TCIO II TtXtTTI ^0/
', tTj) ou fjt.oi ^UVT'I y' u,v6if I%ITOV*
ffo^tfft' auhs. Soph. (Ed, C. 1435.
RKIHARKS. a. Hence, the union q/" the Plur. and Du. is not regarded as a
violation of the laws of agreement ; e. g. YLgo<rir/>t%ov $uo VIC^'HTKU, there ran
up two young men, iv. 3. 1 0. Awva^s/f $1 a.(A^i>Tt^a,t l<rrov, oa r* xai t-rnrrri-
u-n PI. Rep. 478 b. 'EysAa<rar>jv euv a.^u frXi-^Kvris t'n aXX>jXw PI. Euthyd.
ii73 d.
/3. In the old poetic language, a few examples occur in which the Dual is
used of more than two ( 85, 172) ; as, 35v0s <ri / <ru, Ho$x<yi, KK\
Klitiiv Aeift-rt <ri S7i, vwv ftoi <rn xoft^Yiv a.^rorittrov . . XX* t<fia/u.ct^vtT-
rov xui f-riv^iTo* 0. 185. Tli'iffitrh . . xafiTov, Xwo-avn froi'iois
Bom. Ap. 486. Some think that the Dual is never thus used, except when
two pairs or sets are spoken of.
III. USE OF THE CASES.
^ 338. Cases serve to distinguish the relations
of substantives. These relations are regarded, in
Greek, I. as either DIRECT or INDIRECT, and, II. as
either subjective, objective, or residual.
I. Of these distinctions, the first is chiefly founded upon the
directness with which the substantive is related to the verb of
the sentence. The principal DIRECT RELATIONS are those of
the subject and direct object of the verb, and that of direct ad-
dress. Other relations are, for the most part, regarded as
INDIRECT.
II. The second distinction is founded upon the kind or char-
acter of the relation. The relation is,
CH. 1.] USE OF THE CASES. 261
1. SUBJECTIVE, when the substantive denotes the SOURCE, or
SUBJECT, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words
THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING COMES.
2. OBJECTIVE, when the substantive denotes the END, or OB-
JECT, of motion, action, or influence ; or, in other words, THAT
TO WHICH ANY THING GOES.
3. RESIDUAL (residuus, remaining), when it is not referred
to either of the two preceding classes.
. 339. The latter of the two distinctions appears to have
had its origin in the relations of place, which relations are both
the earliest understood, and, through life, the most familiar to
the mind. These relations are of two kinds ; those of MOTION,
and those of REST. Motion may be considered with respect either
to its SOURCE or its END ; and both of these may be regarded
either as direct or indirect. We may regard as the DIRECT
SOURCE of motion, that which produces the motion, or, in other
words, that which moves ; as the INDIRECT SOURCE, that from
which the motion proceeds ; as the DIRECT END, that which re-
ceives the motion, or that to or upon which the motion immedi-
ately goes ; and as the INDIRECT END, that towards which the
motion tends. By a natural analogy, the relations of action
and influence in general, whether subjective or objective, may
be referred to the relations of motion ; while the relations
which remain without being thus referred may be classed to
gether as relations of rest. These residual relations, or rela-
tions of rest, may likewise be divided, according to their office
in the sentence ( 338), into the direct and the indirect. We
have, thus, six kinds of relation, which may be characterized
in general as follows, and each of which, with a single excep-
tion, is represented in Greek by an appropriate case.
A. DIRECT RELATIONS.
1. Subjective. That which acts. THE NOMINATIVE
2. Objective. That which is acted upon. THE ACCUSATIVE.
3. Residual. That which is addressed. THE VOCATIVE.
B. INDIRECT RELATIONS.
1 Subjective. That from which any thing proceeds. THE GENITIVE.
2. Objective. That towards which any thing tends. THE DATIVE.
3. Residual. That with which any thing is associated. THE DATIVE.
3 4 O. REMARKS, a. For the historical development of the Greek
cases, see 83 88. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as
the Dat.), a special form was separated to express the subjective relations, but
none to express the objective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to ex-
press the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any
262 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. [BOOK III
cause, were not referred to either of these two classes '. and hence the Dat. u
both an objective and a residual case.
/3. In the Latin case-system, which has a close correspondence with th
Greek, there is a partial separation of the indirect objective and residual, or, as
they are termed in Lat., DATIVE and ABLATIVE cases. This separation,
however, does not appear at all in the Plural, or in Dec. II., and, wherever it
occurs, may be explained by the mere precession or contraction of final vowels.
A more important difference between the two languages appears in the exten-
sive use of the Lat. ABLATIVE. The Romans were more controlled than the
Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less observant of the minuter
shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Hence, even after the full de-
velopment of the Lat. case-system, the primitive indirect case continued to re-
tain, as it were by the mere force of possession, many of the subjective rela-
tions. It is interesting to observe how the old Ablative, the once undisputed
lord of the whole domain of indirect relations, appears to have contested every
inch of ground with the new claimant that presented himself in the younger
Genitive. But we must leave the particulars of the contest to the Latin
grammarian, and content ourselves with merely referring to two or three fa-
miliar illustrations. Thus, in Lat., the Gen. (as well as the Dat.) was ex-
cluded from all exponential adjuncts ( 329), because in these the relation was
sufficiently defined by the preposition. The Gen. of place obtained admission
into the Sing, of Dec. I. and II., but not into Dec. III. (the primitive declen-
sion, cf. ^ 86) or into the Plur. The Gen. of price secured four words (tnnti,
qnanti, pluris, and minor is), but was obliged to leave all others to the Abl.
After words of plenty and want, the use of the two cases was more nearly
equal. In the construction of one substantive as the complement of another, the
Gen. prevailed, yet even here the Abl. not unfrequently maintained its ground,
if an adjective was joined with it as an ally. In some construct ions, the use
of the Gen. was only a poetic license, in imitation of the Greek.
y. The NOMINATIVE, from its high office as denoting the subject of dis-
course, became the lending case, and was regarded as the representative of the
vord in all its forms (its theme). Hence it was employed when the word was
spoken of as a word, or was used witlumt grammatical construction , :H:l).
. There are no dividing lines either between DIRECT and INDI-
RECT, or between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations
seem to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to
the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not only
varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same language,
but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the same author.
A. THE NOMINATIVE.
^342. RULE II. The SUBJECT OF A FINITE
VERB is put in the Nominative ; as,
'EwnJjj Ji iriXiurnft Aa^sT*;, x.ati nurifTn tif <r)v /3avXi/a 'AjraS-jj-
5f, TiffffcKpigirts J;aAXu rot Kt/, and when now Darius was dead, and
Artaxerxes was establiihed in the royal authority, Tissaphernea accuses Cyrus,
L 1.3.
343. RULE III. SUBSTANTIVES INDEPEND-
OH. l.J NOMINATIVE. 263
ENT OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION are put in
the Nominative.
NOTE. The Nominative thus employed is termed the Nominative independ-
ent or absolute (absolutus, released, free, sc. from grammatical fetters). Set
34O. y.
To this rule may be referred the use of the Nom.,
1.) In the inscription of names, titles, and divisions; as,
KVQOV \4vd6tiaifi The EXPEDITION of Cyrus; BiSUov iiyw-
iov, Book First.
2 ) In exclamations; as, 'Jl ova-cdhaiv' tyw, O wretched me!
Eur. Iph. A. 1315. OotiaTTa, 6>AiT, the Sea! the Sea!
iv. 7. 24.
3.) In address.
The appropriate case of address is the Voc. (S 85). But there is often no
distinct form for this case, and even when there is, the Xom. is sometimes
employed in its stead ( 81). (V/) The Nom. is particularly used, \vhen the
address is excLunutory or descriptive, or when the compdlative is the same with
the subject of the sentence ; as, r H p/Xaj, Z> q>i\es, my beloved ! my beloved !
AT. Nub. I 167. 'Icr-r/aj a xetXo; <rt xct,} traces, Hipp'nts, the noble find the
wise! PL Hipp. Maj. 281 a. (b"i .To the head of descriptive address belong
those authoritative, contemptuous, and familiar forms, in which the person who
is addressed is described or designated as if he were a third person ; as, 01 $i
eixtreti, . . iv't6i<r0i, but the servants, . . do you put, PL Conv. 218 b. 'O <!>-
*.r)0ius . . auras 'AraAA.o?, ov Ttgi/uiviTs ; The Ph'deriun there, Apollodorus,
stop! wont you? Ib. 1 7'J a. (c) In forms of address which are both direct,
and likewise exclamatory or descriptive, the Voc. and Nom. may be associated ;
as, r n (p/Aos Z Q'tXi Bux%,t Eur. Cycl. 73. r li ooras, ATv Soph. Aj. 89.
OSras eS, vo7 trov <rbV u"gits, ^'nr-roro. Eur. Hel. 1G'27. 'Agtu7t, x.ai ol
2i. 5. 39.
ANACOLUTHON, &c. From the office of the
Nom. in denoting the subject of discourse, and from its inde-
pendent use, it is sometimes employed where the construction
would demand a different case :
1.) In the introduction of a sentence; as, 'T^sT; $i, . . vvv $* xeuoof upTr
"Soxi7 iiitti ; You then, . . does it now seem to you to be just the time ? vii. 6, 37.
'J^vitfufAuv o Kv^aj . ., {'Sa^tv U.UTU, Cyrus desiring . ., it seemed best to him,
Cyr. vii. .;. 37. Ka) IvrauSoe. ju.%%o/*ivai x.tti fixtriXtus toe} Kw^aj, xo.}
tl &/*$' Kurous v-rlg IKKT'^UV, cvotrai f/Av rut a,f*,q>} j3a<r/Xs a-T^vjr*ay i. 8. 27.
(jvriirtfiv ol rs <^a,Xa,y^ ) tQivrofAivfi, . . el voaffrvy^/ivavrif ruv ee^^evruv iifif/,z-
Xavra Cyr. vi. 3. 2.
2.) In specification, description, or repetition; as, "A*.Xavs 5* a pilots . .
vast Nile hath sent; Susiskanes, P., Sfc., JEsch. Pers. 33. Ta
uftQoriouv xee.ro, xgdra; \<roXi/jt,i7r6 'A.6vva.7oip.\v . .
XoTovyjjV/< ^s . . a-r^ara-rt^iuofAivai Th. iv. 23. \ayot
Iff'odouv xctxoi, QuKa.% Ixiy^uv QuXaxa, Soph. Ant. 259.
ro^os 'Htrtuvet, "Kir'itu*, of i'va/ev Z. 395.
264 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE. [BOOK 111.
3.) In speaking of names or words as such ; thus, Tlafii>.vtpt <rw ruv -row
<wv xoivrtv 1-rtavvfjt.iee.v ff u x otp a.trn ; , he has obtained the common appellation of
the vile, SYCOPHANT, ^schin. 41. 15. Hu^iyyvee. o Kvgos o-uvtyfta, Zsvs %vp>
p. a, % as na.'i hyi(t,uv, Cyrus gave out as the pass-word, JOVE OUR ALLY AND
LEADER, Cyr. ill. 3. 58.
B. THE GENITIVE.
^ 345. THAT FROM WHICH ANY THING PRO
CEEDS ( 339) may be resolved into, i. That from
which any thing proceeds, as its POINT OF DEPART
URE ; and, n. That from which any thing pro-
ceeds, as its CAUSE. Hence the Greek Genitive is
either, (i.) the GENITIVE OF DEPARTURE, or, (n.)
the GENITIVE OF CAUSE ; and we have the follow-
ing general rule for subjective adjuncts (^ 329,
338) : The POINT OF DEPARTURE AND THE CAUSE
ARE PUT IN THE GENITIVE.
NOTE. The Gen. of departure is commonly expressed in English by the
preposition from, and the Gen. of cause, by the preposition of.
(i.) GENITIVE OF DEPARTURE.
346. Departure may be either in place or in character.
Hence,
RULE IV. Words of SEPARATION and DISTINC-
TION govern the Genitive.
There is no line of division between the two classes of word*
which are mentioned in this rule. Many words which are commonly used to
denote distinction of character referred originally to .separation of place (cf
$ 339). And, on the other hand, words which usually denote separation of
place, are often employed, by a metaphorical or transitive use, to express de-
parture or difference in other respects.
1. Genitive of Separation.
347. Words of SEPARATION include those of removal
and distance, of exclusion and restraint, of cessation and fail-
ure, of abstinence and release, of deliverance and escape, of
protection and freedom, &c. ; as,
Xft/e'ir0a/ aXXr'Xwv, to be separated from each other, PI. Conv. 192 c.
X<f TUI aXXwv, apart from tfie rest, i. 4. IS. 2^ar 2/^a Cyr. viii
7. 20. 'T-ra^uf^ vou #t$iou Ib. ii. 4. 24. &iiff%ov A.XiX<w, were dis'
tant from each other, i. 10. 4. Hofpu . . ulrau, far from him, i. 3. 12.
K<wXt5<ri/i rov Kct'nti, lie would prevent them from burning, i. 6. 2. E/' Sa-
\a.rrr>; ilyntrt H. Gr. vii. 1. 8. lev rtfi l^i -rolipov *a.vff*ff6ai, to
CH. 1.] OF SEPARATION. OF DISTINCTION. 265
cease from ti~f war against me, i. 6. 6. Tourovt . . ov <* nutria <r%s Cyr.
viii. 6. 3. B/aw rlXtvrnfv Ib. 7. 17. OSros /u.lv etlrov %f&Kgrtv t this
man missed him, i. 5. 1 '2. 'E^! v<r6n rtj; iXvfta; II. Gr. vii. 5. "-24. TV
vecixos \ff8\vis %/u.TXctitts Eur. Ale. 418. ' E -r i cr % op. i y vou ^xxovsiv, we re-
frained from weeping, PI. Phaedo, 1 17e. Kaxuv . . Xvrjoiov Soph. El. 1489.
~2,v<rai xtt.xov Id. Ph. 919. NeVai; * i<f> i vyiv ct i, Ib. 1044. 'AXugsrov
ftogav Id. Ant. 488. AiJo v^f sgn rov ftfi xaraBtJva/, will keep two men
from sinking, iii. 5. 11. 'ULLivSioot frevtvv, iXtufs^oi . . Euguffti'sus Eur.
Heracl. 87:5. "Aviv a.l<rx,vvn; xa) /3X?j ii. 6'. 6. Fa^a/v TJ ayvai *;/
PI. Leg. 840 d. Ket0etos et$ila tt PI. Rep. 496' d. "E*,,- a xa0j <r<w-
. 573 b. N0'^/i/"f ^tti TawJi Sturigev vixgw ; Eur. Ale. 43.
^ 34:8 REMARKS. . Words of SPARING imply refraining from,
and those of CONCEDING, RESIGNING, REMITTING, and SURRENDERING, imply
parting with, or retiring from. Hence, TWV fjt.lv v/AtrtfJiuv v^u poi $ti^iff6 0.1,
it is my pleasure to spare your property, Cyr. iii. 1 2. 1'8. Ka:<s7va? v-rt^u^ti-
ftv KUTU TOV fyovov, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him [JEftuhyfas] the throne,
Ar. Ran. 790. 'AXXa TJJJ ogyw; avivrt;, hut resigning your anger, Ib.
700. 17t; TUV 'Exxv iXtufi^la.; . . -ra^ a ^ u% tj/reti <S>i*.i<3-Tea, to surrender
to Philip the freedom of the Greeks, Dem. Cor. 1 247. 24. To<> ^urSvrt^on
. . xa/ fl^wv xcti S-axwv xai Xoywy wwt/xj/v Cyr. viii. 7. 10.
/S. The Gen. denoting that from which motion proceeds is, in prose, common-
ly joined to words not in themselves expressing separation by a preposition ; but
hi poetry, often without a preposition (cf. 4^9. ) ; as, Aa^tuwv . . QigovtrKv,
bringing from the house, Soph. El. iJtM. ToyV^i va^ctt yvs fXav, to drive
these children from the land, Eur. Med. 7(). 'A vaxovty itra.i x fivfuv
Soph. CEd. T. 23. 'Tp.<7{ pi* /3^ " <r >r a. <r 6 1 Ib. 142. To r' et>aa.vov *i-
fnpa. Eur. Iph. T. 1384. For adverbs in -&, properly genitives, see 91,
320.
y. In a few rare phrases, the Gen. denotes the time from which, without a
preposition ; as, MET" oX/yav s TOVTUI, and [after a little from these things]
a little after these things, H. Gr. i. 1 . 2. T^Va/ . . tni rouriuv, in the third
year [from] before these things, Hdt. vi. 40. Ast/rgga* $1 ini rovriuv, ' [from]
after/ Ib. 46.
2. Genitive of Distinction.
3 19. Words of DISTINCTION include those of difference
and exception, of superiority and inferiority, &c. ; as,
Aieagitrra.! <r't%vtis, is distinct from the art, PI. Polit. 260 c. 'HXsxr^aw
ou$i* J/^^s, differed in nothing from amber, ii. :?. 15. Haa-a; rX^> M/-
Xjrau, all excej)t Miletus, i. 1.6. A<a(paja T&/V XX<wv TeXE/wv, superior to
the other states, Mem. iv. 4. 15. TIX^E/ . . ^(wv Xtttpfivrtt, inferior to
us in number, vii. 7. 31. Ta J/xa/a . ., M of XX a r^Jv 'Six.a.'icav ; Mem. iv. 4.
25. "Erjj* $1 T -^w raw at.ya.6w PI. Gorg. 500 d. flars^ay ia-r/v tV<a-T/*>
ajtrri, *J aXXoTav l-r/a-c^*!? PI. Meno, 87 C. OwSiv XXarj/a />
fciTt <r>5; tavrov fa.Tpi^os ovrt TOV f^ofov (cf. 405) Dem. Cor. 289. 14.
OuTea <jrXavTov at-oirn $iiffT*lxtv PI. Rep. 550 e. Ta/v jxayvT TI^<TT
Cyr. >nii. 2. 21 /
REMARK. The verb Xs/Va^a/ governs the Gen. in a variety of senses,
which are naturally connected with each other, but which might be referred,
in syntax, to different heads. Thus, 2-rgaTflv . . rev AsXu/^svov Sagf, 'left
266 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE. [BOOK II?
from [or by] the spear,' i. e. ' the relics of war' ( 347, 381), Msch. Ag
517. K/*a< urtltiv' eu {*.K*etv XtXsiftf^tvai, 'not left far behind,' L e
' closely pursuing,' Id. Pr. 8.57. Fyay**? S* aSfXpay MeXteey^ay XEX^-
pivot, 'left behind by,' i. e. 'inferior to,' Eur. Suppl. 904. K< r/'j ft/as pot
irou XiAi<ftuty 7 Ql\ s ; 'bereft of ( 357), Soph. Ant. .548. Tvuftag Xu .
xopivu, devoid of understanding, Soph. El. 474. AiXupi^MU raJy iv "ExXjj^/*
v'opui, 'am ignorant of,' Eur. Hel. 1246.
^ 35O. Words of SUPERIORITY include,
.) Words of authority, power, precedence, and preeminence
Thus,
O.UTUV, that Tissaphernes should govern them, I. 1. 8
Toivruv, sovereign over all, v. 4. 15. 'HytTra raw c-r^
fiup.tt.rof, led the army,\v. 1.6. H.(>i<rGiuiiv rut a-aXXaiy rXy, to take
rank of most cities, PL Leg. 75'2 e. 'Ex ar rv 'Exxiy iii. 4. 26.
"Of xo.ivn ffr^etrou Soph. A;. 1050. "Of nlffvftva %0ov!>s Eur. Med. 19.
Bao-vXE^wy ayr&Iy V. 6. 37. Ao-*'*/v So^wir Eur. Ion, 1036. See
also 389.
Qiix ctiirof HzifXiufflv, us ettiTav xgetrur ;
Hew ffu ff T^O, T >j <y 1 7f TOVOI ; vrou ot cot \iuv
cav o$' fi>yt7r' otxofav \
^ rifAuv x,(>(t<rui. Soph. Aj. 1091>
REMARK. The primitive sense of the verb ei^u appears to have been to
take the lead. But, in early warfare, the same individual led the march, ruled
the host, and began the onset. Hence this verb came to signify to rule, and
to begin ; and, in both these senses, it retained the Gen. which belonged to it
as a. verb of precedence. Thus, 'Av^ry ^/y, to rule men, Cyr. i. 1.3.
<boyv>f &g%itv, to begin flight, iii. 2. 17. Tw Xcyaw Si fyxtrt uSt iii. 2.7
Ka<yajJ Xoyov xart)g%t* Symp. 8. 1.
/S.) Adjectives and adverbs in the comparative
degree, and words derived from them.
All comparatives may be ranked with words of superiority, as denoting the
possession of a property in a higher degree.
RULE V. The COMPARATIVE DEGREE governs
the Genitive ; as,
inurov, more powerful than himself, i. 2. 26. T 'i-riruv trot.
%ov 9- array, </ty ran faster than the horses, i. 5. 2. Tewraw Siwrij ay PL
Leg. 894 d. "Aywri^A; r&iy f^acrSuv i. 4. 17. 'Tfteii eu WaXw f'^oy iiffrtgot
i. 5. 16. 'AGgoxoftets Si wa-ri^no"! rJf ft.ii%nf, but Abrocomas came after tht
battle, i. 7. 1 2. T wfrrifa/'a r?f ^a^jy PI. Menex. 240 C. 'HrraJ^i^a
airaw Cyr. V. 3. 33. Tifiet7s rovruv i* Xtovi xriirt iii. 1. 37.
352. y.) Multiple and proportional words ( 138)
Thus,
IIaXXa?rXtta-/flWf w&iy nvrut, many times your own number, iii. 2. 14.
*;iT Si S//ji/~y Si fi'iotv atfiiTXt roTgSrov atire <rct*ret (*o7pou fn<ret Si
CII. 1., OF CAUSE. 267
di T>JJ vr^uTrif TiTa^T^v Js, <rtjs viwrigetg
i t t * r et x a 1 1 1 x. o <r a, <r *. a ff i a v rtis vgurns (a. b = 2 a. c = \^ b
So. d = 2 i. e = 3 c. /= 8 a. = 27 a) PI. llm. 35, b, c. A
Iftt xnitots aStXiJjf <ry Eur. El. 1092.
(IT.) GENITIVE OF CAUSE.
To the head of CAUSE may be refer-
red, I. That from which any thing is DERIVED,
FORMED, SUPPLIED, or TAKEN ; II. That which
exerts an influence, as an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION,
or CONDITION ; III. That which produces any
thing, as its ACTIVE or EFFICIENT CAUSE ; and
IV. That which CONSTITUTES any thing WHAT
IT is.
In the first of these divisions, the prevailing idea is that of
source; in the second, that of influence; in the third, that of
action; and in the fourth, tnat of property. Or we may say,
in general, that the first division presents the material cause ;
the second, the motive cause ; the third, the efficient cause ; and
the fourth, the constituent cause. It scarcely needs to be re-
marked, that the four divisions are continually blending with
each other in their branches and analogies.
I. That from which any thing is DE-
RIVED, FORMED, SUPPLIED, Or TAKEN. To this
division belong, 1. the Genitive of Origin, 2. the
Genitive of Material, 3. the Genitive of Supply,
and 4. the Genitive of the Whole, or the Genitive
Partitive.
1 and 2. Genitive of Origin and of Material.
^ 355. RULE VI. The ORIGIN, SOURCE, and
MATERIAL are put in the Genitive ; as,
&ettiov xa.} YIagtnrei<ri$es yiyvovreti fct^i; $ua, of Darius and Pary-
satls are born tw) children, i. 1. 1. ^oi'vlxof /u.tv u,l SvgKi -riToinfttvai, the
doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. vii. 5. '2'2. M/S; ^w-r^oy . . <fivvrts
PI. Menex. 239 a. r fl $' KXa.<rni Soph. Tr. 4O1. OiVs r; noZ,vyou
vv(A$ns rtxveoffii veaCiba. Ear. Med. 804. Ti afeXavratis rtjs
What advantage should you derive from your authority ? Cyr. vii. 5. 56.
*J/rifatf ruv ri^'urruv TOTUI a.vsl.a.vinrtt.i Ib. 81. X^jj^arwv ovvffdfAtti Eur.
Hel. 935. Eo X ov rw li-yiu PI. Pvep. :}5? b T^ *^*X?f ^ AT.
26& SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [BOOK lit
Eccl. 524. OTvtfj <p //* vroXvs ii. 3. 14 (cf. OTv n *, r. X. i. 5. 1O;
TLioitrri(f>tj . . av^ja/v Soph. El. 895. Aiftvtjv . . ^ieuretv Scares KO.} wi)
>., ' boiling with water,' PI. Phaedo, 113 a. "NLsfoffttis rou vixTugos PI
Conv. 203 b. T<wv Xyv vpeis At/<r/a; ilffrtu. ; PL Phaedr. 227 b.
NOTE. The Gen. of source or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets,
for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. ; as, ll^trtt.
31 <rvgos ^woto 9-ugzrget, and burn the gates with raging fire [from fire, as the
source], B. 415. YLugos ftiiXiffo-ifttv H. 410. Xs^asj v/^a^vof TsX^j aXos,
having washed his hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, /J. 26'1. A/
urSai iuppiTos foTetfiio7o Z. 508.
3*>6. That of which one discourses or thinks may be
regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we
speak of the matter of discourse, a matter of complaint, the
subject-matter of a composition, &c. Hence, not unfrequently
both in immediate dependence upon another word, and even in
the introduction of a sentence,
RULE VII. The THEME OF DISCOURSE OR OF
THOUGHT is put in the Genitive. Thus,
Teu ro^orov ou xoiXus ?%tt kiytiv, on, x,. <r. >.., it is not well to say of tht
bowman, that t 8fc., PL Rep. 439 b. A/a^i^svaf ulrtLv, OITW fjt.lv ^^f t*l
o'ixv 'i%efiv, observing in respect to them, how great and wfuit a country they have,
iii. 1. 19. Ttjs $t yuvetutott*' 1 '' wovrottT, but in respect to the wife, if she
manages ill, CEc. 3. I * . Tow Ko-viy v virou T'I <f>ns ; S/)ph. El. 317. K^uou-
ffat x-etilof , having he nrl respecting her son, Id. Ant. 1182. MavT?a, . . a, TOU$'
ff u p. a. r o f Id. Gid C. 354. Ketrxftu^tTv 31 rou Kw^ot/ 3oxav/u,iv, uf
i Cyr. viii. 1. 40. To? 3i olxaSi <rXaw ^ttaXXav ^uinc'oyrovv, oVj} x.o-
rett Th. i. 52. Qlfftiet y^^ "fov <ruv yivvctiav XVVUV,.OTI TOVTO <f>v(rii a,i>-
ruv TO *6oi PL Rep. 375 C. T Miya^twv ^^KTfjia. x.a.6atii7v Id. i. 140 (cf.
T0 !< bhyxpiav -(^rilpio-fjtet x.tt6t>.evfft 139). T< "Si ruv <iroD.u* KO-^UI,
tto otvti (itu-rui, "iirfwi, fi ipa. r tu v, . . u^a. X.O.TO. TO, etura. i%n ; But
what of, Sfc.f PL Phoedo, 78 d. TJJj ^i <rf <p^af, tx cov Sfioixa, Eur
Andr-361. Cf. $ 438. y.
NOTE. For the Gen. of the theme may be often substituted another case,
more frequently the Nom., in the succeeding clause ; -thus, E< 2i vt/ *.
xoroitT, but if tJte wife manages UL
3. Genitive of Supply.
357. Supply may be either abundant or defective.
Hence,
RULE VIII. Words of PLENTY and WANT gov-
ern the Genitive ; as,
. OF PLENTY. 'Ay^iuv Svoiu* -x ? nf, full of wild beasts, 1.2.7.
u<p6i<t{ . . \f'i (A <r\ affo. t wtrov, they filled the skins with hay, i. 5. 10.
TJrw S.\tt, enough of these things, V. 7, 12. Hu/u.cts ToXX^v KOU iyetiut
<ytfjtevfuf iv. 6, 27. Mi^rrj yeto <roX\nf u-rogiaf io-rlt ii. 5. 9. Tv l
fi i. 10. 12. llpa$iifftu . . 3 * <r i e
CH. l.J OF SUPILY. PAl^ITIVE. 269
$o.vv ii. 4. 14. Kooitrat fr'apa, . . 1/j.a.; rug
uuv V if pi vrKovffios xotxuv Eur. Or. 394.
42. Tpwgris . . fftffetyftivti u.v6ou<rcat Qic. 8. 8.
/3. OF WANT. T i^r^t/a/v <r<rav/ir, Ae will want provisions, ii. 2. 1 2.
S^svSovjirwy . . SiT, tfie/-e is need o/ slingers, iii. ;J. 16. O'/wv av >.*<&/>
fftccuTov ff TI r, ffotifx, t , of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5. 10. 'Av-
(toufuv a, Tog cuv i. 7. 3. 'H -^v^ri yuf&vy TOU <ruf*.a.ros PL Crat. 403 b.
YvfAvtarios r) foivruv PI. Rep. 361 b. *0x/yow Bsaj^avrsj
va/ i. 5. 14. FloXXiw* $vss/ a,vroa, ucrrt vii. 1 . 4 1 . 'Y/tav 3* l
i. ;i. 6. "A^/iAaTa . x va *ivto%uv i. 8. 20. Q'lftot, TI "^^oifia ^tJTa trou /AO
ouftsvos ; Eur. Ale. 380. 'O^<p) <p/Xai/ 5rT^o; Eur. El. 914. X^jj.
pdruv 5i^ !TivjTif Ib. 37. 'IL^tXouro S" Aflipoj <ruv itfriav i. 10. 13.
NOTE. The Geii. which belongs to Mopeti and x,tf& *** ver ^ s f mmt ma y
be retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreat.
Thus, "AXXou ov rives v ^ttjffh, whatever else you may desire, i. 4. 15.
E^o) ^0,^0-0,1 uv civ ffou ^mfu, grant me what I would entreat of yon (^ 380),
Cyr. v. 5. 35. AJtr%gov ya,^ civSgoc, rou p.u.K^ov %?i%uv ftiov Soph. Aj. 473.
4. Genitive Partitive.
RULE IX. The WHOLE OF WHICH A
PART is TAKEN is put in the Genitive ; as,
TOU aXaw frgttrivfActros, ha/f of the whole army, vi. 2. 10.
NOTE. This Gen. has received the names of the Gen. of the whole, and the
Gen. partitive ; the former from its denoting the whole, and the latter from its
denoting this whole in a state of division (partio or partior, to divide, from
pars, part}.
359. REMARKS. 1. The partitive construction may
be employed,
.) To express quantity, degree, condition, place, time, &c.
considered as a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an
extended whole. Thus,
' v-rvou *.et%av, obtaining a little sleep [a small portion of sleep],
iii. 1. 11. 'Ev rotovrca . . rov xiv^vvou f^offiovrof, in such imminent danger [ia
such a degree of], i. 7. 5. C O S' <? rovS' uSgzus \\Yi\u0tv, ' to such a pitch
of insolence,' Dem. 51.1. K) el piv lv ravry ira.^u.ffx.ivrx wffav, 'in this state
of preparation,' Th. ii. 17. Svvivifo* ej TOUTO u.va.yx,ni Th. i. 49. 'Ecr) f^iyac,
i^tu^rjffetv 6vva.fjt.iuf Ib. 1 1 8. 'E^&jsXsrv TOU rSJj IKHVUV %ea(>ot;, to make an in"
cursion somewhere upon their territory, or upon some part of, Sfc., Cyr. vi. 1 . 42.
r Hv ft'irov v/jii^a.;, it was mitt-day, i. 8. 8. TJ? rift'sox; o^/t viv, it was late in
the day [at a late hour of the day], H. Gr. ii. 1. 23. E/j roV f>u.i^s, to thi*
day, Eur. AJc. 9, Phosn. 425.
/5.) To express the whole as the sum of all the parts. Thus,
*E <ro~s a.ya.6o7<rt "Si <ra.vr l tvifriv fotpixs, and in the good dwell all the quali-
ties of wisdom, Eur. Ale. 601. O/ pit 'Afaveitot lv jra.vrl fo a.dv[jt.lec.} %ffa.v Th.
VJi. 55. 'Ev -ravrt xa,xou * PI. Rep. 579 b.
36O. 2. The whole is sometimes put in the case which
23*
270 SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [BOOK III
belongs to the part, the part agreeing with the whole instead
of governing it ($$ 333. 5, 334. 9) ; as,
'Axoueptiv vpcis . . Iviaug ffxtjvovv Iv ra.lt oixietig, we hear that you, some of
you, quarter in the houses; for vpuv iviovs, <r. X. V. 5. II. TliX.a<r9vvv<ri
KCU oi %vftfta%oi TU, %uo f&igri . . l^s^aAov, for YI.tXo^Tovvria'iuv xtzt ruv fyjptftai
X,eav, *. r. X. Th. ii. 47. A/^w^<a rixia, worlds ecoce, worsgav etlf^a^ii Eur
Ph. 1289.
NOTE. This form of construction chiefly occurs when several parts are
successively mentioned ; as, O7x//, a! p.lv TaXXa) i-rfrrtvxio-etv, eX/y/ $1 rt-
giritrxv, the houses, the greater part had been demolished, and but few remained,
Th. i. 89. Ov y&(> ra.<pov */ ru Kottrtyvvircti KO'-MV, rov /u,\v vrgoritrcts, rov ^'
KTipeiffas t%ti ; Soph. Ant. 21. In the following example, the second part
has three subdivisions ; K/ ol |sv, oi pi* . . a.vro%ui>evffiv ol $1, . . ei /tt . .
i, el "Si . ., titri $' ol Th. vii. l.>.
3. It is often at the option of the writer whether he will employ the Gen.
partitive or a simpler form of construction. The two forms are sometimes
combined; as, EJV' elv Staj, t"n &oru v o rctvree, <r.(r<ruv, 'a god, or
one of mortals,' Soph. El. 199. Hov rtg 3-svv % loti^uv i-rft^ye; ; Eur.
Hec. 164. 0?5 . . Qot.iiavffi rms $a,iftois, n Stay ruv ougavitvv Id. El.
1233.
361. According to Rule IX., any word referring to a
part, whether substantive, adjective, adverb, or verb, may take
with it a Gen. denoting the whole. Thus,
A. SUBSTANTIVES.
T T/>iro* ft i(> ot rou . . Ivr^fucou, the third part of the cavalry, Cyr. ii. 1.
6. TUv *i\Ta,<r<ruv TH a.vw, a certain man of the t&geteers, iv. 8. 4. Tut
'EAXr/ywx J i^w e?rX/T aviSti <riot.xofftoui \. 1.2. T^/a^avra p,V(>ia,-
Sf ffrgct<riS,{i.4.5. ETir" avri^ TO/V pnroguv Ar. Eq. 425.
REMARKS. . When place is designated by mentioning both the country and
the town, the former, as the whole, may be put in the Gen., and may precede
the latter; as, O< i l A.6nvoc,7oi . . ug/u,iirotv<ro TV; Xippovrnrov i 'EXioi/vr/, ana,
the Athenians touched upon the Cherronese at Eleiis [at Eleiis, a town of the
Cherronese], H. Gr. iL 1. 20. O/ rLi^e-row^fiai rtj; 'Arrixtjf is 'EXii/a-Tva
KO.} 0^/a^i 69-fXtfTif, the Peloponnesians invading Attica an far as Eleusii
and Tkrin, Th. i. 114. '0 * ffr^etros ruv lli>.9^rovvnirteav rgoiuv a$!xira
rris 'Arnxvf If 0/v'? *(>UTOV, 'came upon Attica first at CEnoe,' II. ii. 18.
#. The Gen., in all cases in which it is strictly partitive, may be regarded
as properly depending upon a substantive denoting the part ; and therefore
tin- use of this (Jen. in connection with adjectives, verbs, and adverbs may
be referred to ellipsis. Thus, T<wv AXv 'Exx^'vwv rmi [sc. av^s?]. 'E%ixv-
fAttiv't Tt [C. /ttsjaf] T5f ^aXayyaf ( 362. /3). E<Vi $' O.VTUV [sc. ToretftH
T/ntf], ovs ou$' fa.vra.'r&fft $ictGcttti<rt. IloXi^ow, xai f<toi%*!S oil ftiriji [sc.
ui^of} uiirtp ( 364). TJjf yi otiapev, i. e. ic w5r< ftifit rr,t yrtt ( 363).
y. If the substantive denoting the part is expressed, and that denoting th
whole is a form of the same word, the latter is commonly omitted ; as, Tji/1p
it^oif ruv yi^etiTtouv [sc. v5^ v ], three men of the more aged, v. 7. 17. AJ
rut TftiffSvreiruv ffrootrwyoi, iii. 2. 37. EifftQinro rn o^ntrr^i r(>o%os rut
v Symp. 7. 2.
OH. l.J PARTITIVE. 27 1
<$ 369. B. ADJECTIVES.
NOTE. The ad -calves which axe most frequently used to denote a part
are termed partitives.
a. THE ARTICLE, fovf ftlv KVTUV a-rixruvt, revs $' l<aXy, slew
some of them, and banished others, i. 1. 7.
/3. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Tv XX<w 'Exx jvut nvis, some of the
other Greeks, i. 7. 8. "Orris . . rut vruga, Ba<ri>.i<us i. 1. 5. 0? vffrt^ov
tXr)$6r,ffa.v rut iro\ii*.iut\.l. 13. T&Jv "Si /3<wy..aXXo/fi. 2. 18.
Tj?f TeiovToi; rut 'tjiyut Mem. ii. 8. 3. Y.I % <ri xctt aXXa IvJjy t/X)f
i xaXa^aw i. 5. 1. 'E.^-x.uftaivt <r i TJJ <pab.ctyyos i. 8. 18. 'Ey rsif
%uft<poois $tt$4t)s ; Soph. Ant. 1229. See .3.59. a.
y. NUMERALS. E7? T^y a-r^arnyuv, one of the generals, vii. 2. 29.
Tow? Ti<Y -rut 2a*-ryX<wy Ar. Vesp. 95. E/? S polkas Eur. Andr.
1172. c O-fl<r</ ftl rut apQi P>ct(ri*.ia. uniStvirxov \. 8. 27. ELoXXa ra
wirflz//wy i. 5. 5. 'Ox/a/ ev avruv iii. 1. 3.
S. SUPERLATIVES, and words derived from them (by virtue of the included
adjective, cf. 351). 'Ev T<> ugio-rots lltgir&iv, among the best of the
Persians, i. 6. 1. Tov vnrrareirov <ruv Kvoau er xti ffrou%uv Ib. 11.
'E-r/ <f\ilffrov o.v6(>u<ru v Th. i. 1 . TJj yjjj ^ a g/ TT Ib. '2. Tuv xu0'
iotvrous av0t>avru* K gt ir rtvff o,v<rt s [= a-^nfroi ytvopivoi], being the best of the
men of their age, Mem. iii. 5. 10. A/*, a aXX<o-Tt5sT/ rav vvv It
ivS^u-ronriv Eur. Med. 947. Ow ^JUT^W* <T^T t vo u<rt Ages. i. 3.
*. PARTICIPLES. 2t/v roTs tru^ovfi rut -ritrruv, with those present of
his faithful attendants, i. 5. 15. K) <r&Jv XX& rov fiov&oftivov , and
of the rest any one that wished, i. 3. 9. "Hxe/ t <ris % rav -n-geSei
K capita. <p'i(>uv, r, rut $aut xetTUxixgnfAtio-ftivo. Cyr. vili. 3. 41.
. OTHER ADJECm^S. "E^wv ra> lit nr6 o<puXeix,uv rou
having half of the rear guard, iv. 2. 9. T H raXa/va ra^^svwv, jff-
/atec? of virgins, Eur. Heracl. 567. Toy; ayataus ruv KV^UTTUV, the
good among men, Ar. Plut. 495. Aj/Xa/a luXatuv xv^.7i, wretched of
the wretched art thou ! Soph. El. 849. To X/<rov T?J ft picas iii. 4.6.
"ErSjMoy T^J yjf TJJV oraXX>jv Th. ii. 56. T H <p/Xa yvvettxav Eur. Ale.
460. A?t IltXatry&lv JEsch. Suppl. 967. 'Aa/a ftiyei*.*) Xil-rnv
i^^Zv Eur. Andr. 521. Tv aXXwv exivZv TO. wt^rra iii. 2. 28.
363. C. ADVERBS.
. Of PLACE and TIME ( 359. ). O^' o'<rt/ y?s t<r^ o7S, 7
no< w^ere on earth [upon what part of the earth] we are, Ar. Av. 9. TVS y*
o w S a (tt a t; PI. Rep. 592 b. n.avr;u T; y>5; PI. Phaedo, 1 1 1 a. Ilaw
frar' tT <p^v^v ; Soph. El. 390. T X o u yoto olxu rut uy^f, ' in a remote part
of the country,' i. e. 'far from town,' Ar. Nub. 138. 'Exraw^a rtu el^ttvou
a,va.<rTiq>iff()a.i Mem. iv. 3. 8. 'Erat/^a i$n ii rri; riXix/cts, you are now at that
point of life, PL Rep. 328 C. Aiw^o rov Xeyov PL Conv. 217 e. Ovx o^S-s
'it 1 tixaxov; Soph. Aj. 386. O7 <7C^l\^v6it ao-sXys/aj uvf^ta-rof Dem. 42.
tM. Oar ns tpeavrtios l\6n ; Soph. CEd. C. 170. 'E^wXTT aXXflf aXXo-
^ ray "Ovti H. Gr. vii. 1. 15. Mj ve^ofu %l rov irorxfAoti f^oZaittit, but
not to advance far into the river, iv. 3. 28. 'Exa^v^ov fii%gi vrofpa <rtjs /*-
^ e H. Gr. vii. 2.19. '0 r n v / x a . . rtis <wgf , at whatever point of time, iii. 5. 1 8.
llnvix' <TT/y a^as r>jf r,/u.i(>tts ; Ar. Av. '1498. II ga'iai'r a ra . . <rJs X<
/;, af f/te earliest age, PL Prot. 326 C.
272 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE. [BOCK III
/3. Of STATE or CONDITION ( 359. ; especially with the verbs t^u ana
%**). Tj TU%V>S ya-o uV i;, /or / am ^MS m [have myself in this stat
of] fortune, Eur. Hel. 857. 'Ava^vnVa?, us tJ%t <p/X/j K^'OS T-, TTJV . . <x'o
X/, ' in what a state of friendship he was,' i. e. ' what friendship he bore,
H. Gr. ii. 1. 14. Ajagavrtr, ? ru%ous txatrros it%sv, having pursued, at
each one had himself in respect to speed, i. e. every man according to his speed,
Ib. iv. 5. 15. '1; egyts *%*> Soph. CEd. T. 345. Hut ayutos fatftt*
how do we come on in the strife? Eur. El. 751. OS Tea rgovou . . t%it; Cyr.
vii. 5. 56. Yivavs fii %xus u^t ro7a$i, thus are you related to these, Eur
Heracl. 213. "E%ovrus i5 QpvSv, of good judgment, Eur. Hipp. 462. 'Av-
fyeiffi p,t*.Xouiriv tu ff&>fjt,a.rog i^nv PI. Rep. 404 d. "Orav . . uyitituf <rt{ i%y
KUTOf O.UTOU Ib. 571 d.
y. Of the SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 'AtpiiZiffTccra, v<ivruv, most unsparingly
of off, i. 9. 13. Ilorife.*)0)jvcti ^aX^rra rut 'ExMivuv i. 6. 5. O/ ply tyyu-
<ra.ro. ruv roXiftiav ii. 2. 1 7.
$ 364. D. VERBS.
The Genitive partitive, in connection with a verb, may per-
form the office either of a subject, an apposit-ire, or a comple-
ment ; taking the place of any case which the verb would re
quire, if referring to the whole. See 361. ft.
a. The Genitive Partitive as a Subject.
(l.) Of a Finite Verb. E/V/ ' O.VTUV, eS; ov%' av ?rayrora<r; $iecee.it><ri,
and there are some of them, which you could not pass at all, ii. 5. 18. v Hv e&
ToiiTut <ruv ffTO.6ff.ut, ovs VTP.VU ftctxpous J7Aayvv, i. 5. 7. T&Jv dt 2<KjM/wf
. . %vv0ifttvot . . ^tiGtiffctv Th. i. 115. llo\i/u.ot>, KUI p,ei%tis el fttrtjr
*lry, of war and battle, there fell to her no share, Cyr. vii. 2. 28. Ot-S' <3$
^fitt tut vrgofrx,u ovrt xKrKrfj.otrts *u ourt f*.i6ni Cyr. iv. 2. 20.
(2.) Of an Infinitive. K) \-rtfjt.iytt>vi irfyut TI -r^os Ixt/vovs, xeti ixii
tut f^at etvrovsi that there even mingled some of themselves with those, and some
of those with them, iii. 5. 16. Ow* uiro -rooffrixuv ovtivi *{%?,!, he thought
that no authority belonged to tiny one, Cyr. viii. 1. 37. AaxE? }IJMUM sTva*.
<ru,<n Tut nX,ut ftiTt7veti Rep. Ath. 1. 2.
^ 36S* /3. The Genitive Partitive as an Appositive.
The Gen. partitive in the place of an appositive is most common with sub-
stantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs, particularly those of
reckoning, esteeming, and mnkhtij. Thus, Ovx iy> TvTtt ti/xt t f nm not one
of these, Cyr. viii. 3. 45. Tv <p<XTaTa;v tpoiy' aL^ftrifti Tt>c*ut, thnu shall
be numbered as one of my dearest .children, Kur. Bacch. 1318. 'Erwy^-zyj ya.^
*< /Sac/Xnf ut Th. iii. 7O. K< i^i Teitut .. 9-if T*t <rirtiffftii*t VI.
Rep. 424 C. Tis 5awXaw; . . <rJv Ttri letVTet lo^ulfo^iut -roi^ffcifftti Ib,
567 6. T> QtvyetTut etop.*&<rtitt Isocr. 380 d.
366. y. The Genitive Partitive SA a Complement.
The Genitive partitive is used as a complement,
I.) Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the
whole object, but a part only ; as,
:H. l.J PARTITIVE. 273
A*ayrf riv /Jao/xaw ff<rpet<rov, taking a part of the barbarian army,
i. 5. 7. T<wy jt*j/y . . tQayov, ate of the honeycombs, iv. 8. 20. 'Atpni; Ji
TUI a, I % ft a, Xea Tea y , and sending some of the captives, vii. 4. 5. 2wyxXt-
favns *.o%dyovs xxi sTtXraa-Ta? x/ <ruv ovrXTrav iv. 1. 26. ~Kttgi<ro<pos
rifATii vuv ix <rns HeafAtis fict^/oft'ivovs iv. 5. 22. ,K} <r5j rt yJf i'ri^ev Th.
ii. 56. MavTiXfjj ?,'<' TiX,*ws Soph. CEkl T. 709. SuviXiyovro rav "^.iSut
Ar. Ach. 184. Ty x^iJv *;u-ra AT. Eq. 4'_'0. lianas rns $*,
just opening the door, Ar. Pax, 30.
3G7. II.) Particularly, with verbs which, in their or
dinary use, imply divided or partial action.
NOTE. The Gen. partitive may be connected with other parts of speech
ujon the same principle. Hence the rule is expressed in a general form.
RULE X. Words of SHARING and TOUCH gov-
ern the Genitive.
1. Words of SHARING include those of partaking (part-
taking), imparting, obtaining by distribution, &c. Thus,
TJJv mvbvvuv ftiTt^nt, to share in the dangers, ii. 4. 9.
r ^"'> I partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303. Tav luQgoirvvav /*tr)i-
^avref, imparting our joys, (Ec. 9. 12. Kajyavai*; acravrwv, vii. 2. 38.
"AvSas; a/ ilM4f ^Mf trj ratiSs Toy xiv&vvov Th. iv. lO. SuXX.ri'^o/u.a.i ^i
TotJ^'i <roi Katyu vrovov Eur. Med. 946. Mg/ayixTtr TV luifgoffvvuv o TW^avvaj,
' has less of,' Hier. I. 29. Tai> A/aw rXavtxToJJvTa, 'bearing more of,'
CAT. i. 6. 25. HZnt a.$6ovtus i-rrt^nn ruv txurov Mem. i. 2. 60. Taw
*.aytv *otr$ovs Eur. Suppl. 350. Hu p,G XX T a < . . ra^s Js/^aTaj Eur.
Med. 284. 'Aya^j ^t g-vX^v-rrgtet ruv iv tigyvy Tavwy, piZetia $i rut v *a-
ff v p. p. a. % o s t^yuv, agiVr 5s ^/X/aj xoivwvog Mem. ii. 1.32.
JIG 8. 2. TOUCH may be regarded as a species of par-
tial action, affecting only the point of contact. To this head
belong, either by direct connection or by obvious analogy,
verbs of laying hold of, hitting, meeting with, &c. Thus,
"Airrtff^tti <TK x<p?f, to touch the hay, i. 5. 10. 'Eir/Xa^ See. vt reti ulrou
TV; "rt/aj, lays hold of his shield-rim, iv. 7. 12. ^t^xvXa. <rvy%eivu, hits
Pheraulas, Cyr. viii. 3. 28. '^^txviTirfxi TUV <r$iv$a*vTuv, to reach the
stingers, iii. 3. 7. 'Av^wv aya.6u>v ra.ibos ii-r otvrrnr a,s , having met with the
son of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. "Orav Ss rovruv r/vej Siyys Cyr. i. 3. 5.
Taw? rt <rt)j r^x>yixns <ffoiriffiuf afroftivovf PL Rep. 602 b. Ay<r;j -^otvsiv
titrouvros av^a; Eur. Or. 793. Atira; 5 XaCo^t>af <rr t ; Je|/5f raw Kvot%cigvf
Cyr. v. 5. 7. > A<r<A.\/'a'ras< T ^ay^arwx Cyr. ii. 3.6. 'E%eftt0et
KUTOU, we shall keep hold of him, vii. 6. 4 1 . Ka/v? TJ?? fttmffa i%i<r0eii, to
strive in common for our safety, vi. 3. 17. 'E^a^sve/ B rovruv, and following
these, i. 8. 9. TJw iX-^a; yf e^^ a< Ss^ayA* t vaj Soph. Ant. 235. A-
ytrui <rrtf TsXet/raj; rw^;e7y, 'to have come to his end,' ii. 6. 29. 'Oiroiur
vivuv fipu* iru%ov, what kind of men they found us, v. 5. 15.
3O9. REMARKS, a. Hence, the part taken hold of ia
put in the Gen., in connection with other forms of construe
tion ; as,
SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [BOOK III.
s *>*ns TOV 'Ofovrtiv, they took Orontes by the girdle, i. 6. 10. Ti
iett.tba.(>t' wHvf ec.viX.xti . . <rns %ugos Ar. Vesp. 568. Taj 3t xi%iigeu/u,evtx
iyiff6a.t . . * \oxtiiAui ^Esch. Theb. 326. N< . . -vj-aws/v xi^os Ear. Here.
968. Ttiv p\ xtfut<rri)t> a,v%ivos Soph. Ant. 1221.
/3. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like the
following : TJ? KtQaXvs x.a.'rt.&yi, he broke [was fractured in] his head, Ar.
Ach. 1180. SuviT^iSn tint xupuXvs Ar. Pax, 71. 'ILriZvro rov K^ar/Vs*
ffuvr^t-^/a.t Ttis xi<pa>.))s Kurtj;, they charged Cratlnus with having broken her head.
Isocr. 381 a. E7<r xetrcifyti ris O.VTOU f&t0uav T>JJ xiQa.X.ris Ar. Ach. 1166
Cf. 437.
3 TO. 3. Several words of obtaining, attaining, and
receiving, govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily
either to distribution or to touch. Thus,
"! <rtjs vr/>o<rnx.(>u<rvf (AO'^O.; Xct'y^a.vy, that it may receive its proper portion,
PL Leg. 9O3 e. KAw^va^f TV avisvoj, to inherit nothing, Dem. 1065. 25.
Tuv 5/*(<wv rvy^eiviiv, to obtain your rights, vii. 1. 30. 'EOEIAH
0N11TOT MEN 2HMAT02 'ETTXE2, 'A0ANATOT AE YTXH2,
HEIPn TH2 YTXH2 'A0ANATON THN MNHMIIN KATAAIHEIN
Isocr. 22 b. Kixfflfv, eSn rou <ra,<f>ou O.VT t a. ff a. ; , ovrt you* xu.fS rtpuv Soph.
EL 868. O'ltcf &u,oiS! \ 'laiffovos *t/i7Eur. Med. 23.
NOTE. The student can hardly fail to have remarked the great variety of
metaphorical and transitive meanings in which words of sharing and of
touch are employed, not only in Greek, but likewise in our own and hi other
languages.
371. II. That which exerts an influence as
an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, OF CONDITION. To
this division belong the following rules, respecting,
1. the motive, reason, and end in mew ; 2. price,
value, merit, and crime ; 3. the sensible and men-
tal object ; and 4. time and place.
1. Genitive of Motive, fyc.
372. RULE XL The MOTIVE, REASON, and
END IN VIEW are put in the Genitive.
To this rule may be referred the use of the Gen., both in
regular construction and in exclamation, to express the person
or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the
sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing
is felt, said, or done. Thus,
a. WITH VERBS. Teurev ft . . X<iu, on this account I envy you, Cvr.
Viii. 4. 23. Mir 0ov vvvprovvrtt, serving for hire, Ib. vi. 2. 37. MjJi
ec i> T M * xatTafii;, paying nntliiiirj for them, Ib. iii. 1. '$7. Tw ftiv vra-Sous
Kiv U.VTOI Ib. V. 4. 32. -Zr,)(.u <rt rev vov, <rtjf J $nX/'{ trrwyu Soph.
10'J7. *H <p'i*.ov >./j . . .vroZ Id. (Ed. T. 234. Tay'rijj lx*a-
CH. 1.] OF MOTIVE, REASON, AND END IN VIEW. 275
fttti ft, I beseech you for *^r sake, Eur. Or. 671. 'Ixtnvtu rt ruvbi <youva,re9
xat ffou ytniau $i|<f <r* ttictlftovos, 'by these knees,' &c., Eur. Ilec. 752
2'rr<r0v it,ya.6oi> So^itovfl;, ' in honor of,' Ar. Eq. 106. T ov ^aStxat ftvcc; Yletfictt
For what do I [owe~\ Pasias tivelve mince? Ar. Nub. 23. Ylgoirivrorui <rtjf <r*
eetuTixx j 5 a v j j xtti ^X^ITOS TO. Ttj; vroKius if^eiy/uaTX, 'for the sake of
present pleasure and favor, 1 Dem. 34. 23. JLarappoipouffi, rev . . p.* Xvriri
Xi?v at>To7s, ' so that it may not profit,' Cyr. i. 3. 9.
/3. WITH ADJECTIVES. Evtetifta* . . rov r^ox-ov PL Phaedo, 58 e. r H
/ 7-JJy T*%*nf) Ulessefl in thy trade ! Ar. Av. 1423. T H raXa/v' \yu
rittv Soph. El. 1209. *ft WraXa/va TJ? ifjt.ni a.l6ttlia.{ Eur. Med. 1028.
y. WITH ADVERBS. TatJr!j mxa r>jf flra^a^ow, on account of this pass,
i. 4. 5. Ty^ ^iwy/v tvtxx, lest they should escape, iii. 4. :J5.
(&' ixi'ivn <rov$i TOU tfioSou %Kgiv Soph. El. 427. Yl.tv6ix.us $1 t%ovffetr
aJtX^sw ri0vvxoros,Gyr. V. 2. 7. XaXs-Tiws <pj<y atureHv Th. ii. 62.
^. WITH Nouxs. 'E^a/ fix,^a,s u%7vu,s otlrov vo<rGccX&v, ' pangs on hif
account,' Soph. Tr. 41. ELaXXaj lytvtieo rat^* v ixr7va/ X/raj, ' by thia
beard,' Eur. Or. 290. OJ'a|, TO T^o/aj (*7<ros ava<p^v rar ? / Ib. 432.
i. WITH INTERJECTIONS. <I>w rat/ av^of, ^4/as /or ^Ae noWe man! Cyr.
iii. 1. 39. A/a? xctxu* Eur. Here. 899. 05^a< $ci/u.etros xa.} rixvuv,
Ipoi V lft.au Ib. 1374. 'Oa Hiffixov a-T^ct-rtv pares rou^i ^Esch. Pers
116. 'larTara/al ralv xuxeav Ar. Eq. 1 .
5- IN SIMPLE EXCLAMATION. Tj TW^WJ, Jfy ill-luck ! Cyr. ii. 2. 3. T?i
pt*>ias, Wliat folly I Ar. Nub. 818. Tl ZftJ /3a<r<XEJ, T; Xnr<ro<r<r
r* Qgtvuv Ib. 15'5. "AfToXXo* a,#OTgovreiii, TOU % ot, a 1 p rt p r o s Ar. Av. 61.
373. REMARKS. 1. The Genitive of the END IN VIEW
is put with some words of direction, claim, and dispute.
Words of direction include those of aiming at, throwing at t
going towards, and reaching after. Thus,
ffro^a.^iffdac.1, to take aim at men, Cyr. i. 6. 29. Auro
. . tpptfrot, they threw stones at him, Eur. Bacch. 1096. Ey^w IIX-
i, to fly straight to Pellene, Ar. Av. 1421. TV? yng aurS writ
etrri; rvi; KO%%; av T / f o i t~ra. i ; For who is there that disputes with him th
sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him] ? ii. 1 . 1 1 . TW
Te<5T/ o-xovov, ro^ivtr' a,vl^o( rov'Si Soph. Ant. 1033. 'fU, fl-^et
vrirov rd^ex, trev Eur. Cycl. 51. 'liteti <rov -ro'offu, to go towards that which
is farther on, i. e. to go farther, to proceed, i. 3. 1. Ays/ ' tgis $getftou<ret
T ov f ^offuvKvu Soph. Aj. 731. Ourai yri<roiouvro ctgirtjs, these
teere rivals in valor, iv. 7. 12. IjxtrtXiK^; f&i<rKTaiot>[&ivou{
laying claim to the kingly art, PL Pol. 289 e. lay %i $ ovt7v tv . .
rStira Isocr. 98 c.
2. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of motion
pass into those of simple effort and desire. Thus, 'Upon, and, more commonly,
i<p//*a/, to send one's self to, to rush to, to strive for, to seek, to desire ; ogi'yo-
ptti, to reach after, to strive for, to seek, to court, to desire ; as, 'lipivot te%ia*
Soph. Tr. 514. To7s $?? tyit/tivots Cyr. iii. 3. 10. 'O^xfffxi rfif e^/X/aj aw
rtu Mem. L 2. 15. 2&>* petrous u^xtvprw Ib. 16. T/^jjf o^iytffSni Hier. 7.3.
276 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE OF PRICE, &C. [BC >X Hi
2. Genitive of Price, fyc.
^374. RULE XII. PRICE, VALUE, MERII,
and CRIME are put in the Genitive.
. PRICE. "Ii*ray, Sv . . KtrtSoro rsvTjxavras % a. g 1 1 x, & v , the horse, which h-t
hud sold for fifty darics, vii. 8. 6. 'QvCmSau . . f*ix(>a, fiirga roX\otJ ugyv-
fiev iii. 2. '21. IlaXXa? 7-0?? ctXXoi; iweuXouv Mem. i. 2. 60. T<wy ' ipoi*
trctfiu* (ftwyxs ^u%WS y aXXa//tt^') w ^evirov ftovov Eur. Med. 967
Ao- Si %(>v) f&ti r tu v oux uvtjrn IsOCT. 21 b. 'A^tc^/Xa^ay . . asrEA.VT^aiT'i ra-
Xavr^v fyyea Dem. 159. 13.
/3. VALUE AND MERIT. IlaXXau a/a; rjf o-r^ar/a, uwrtA TOMcA to <Ae army,
iv. 1. ^8. "Av^E; cc^ioi Tijj \Xtu6iP IK; L 7. 3. Tory XX/?Tf ia,v-rar
o^iufftttro. iii. '2. 7. Ta fjtvtjfAK <raXXo) ^eaffoviriv a%i'w; iiftuv Cyr. vii. S. 11.
Ila/^a . . y/oy ^y iraw, xaTa|/oy $' S^aw Soph. Phr 1008. "Exas-<rfly 9-y<ra?
*a-jf o.%ia,f PI. Pol. 257 b. Mg/ayoj KUTBC, <rtp.uv<rett 01 }.a.uGeivtvTit
Cyr. ii. 1. 13. E/ awy $i7 fti Ka.ro, TO $ix,a.iov rys u.%iaf rifta.ff6a.i, roureo
rtfAuff.a.1 <rt)s y H^vruvtiy fiTtjfius PL Apol. 36 e. Hgivrev yi rav y ^a/^a-
>a; roufteu <ra$t Soph. Aj. 534. II^s^ayTws T<i/y <rga^ayTy PI. Menex. 239 C
(for the common construction of <ri#u, see 403).
y. CRIME. 'A.iritiet{ Qtuyovrct, accused of impiety, PL Apol. 35 d. AJ
t *) iyxX/*aTaf, . . a,%agitrricis Cyr. i. 2. 7. Awa^/
ay Ar. Eq. 368. KaXoy/4a< Ils/a-^Ta/jay vS^ius Ar. Av. 1046. T^
warj) <po*ov i<ri%ig%o/u.a,i PL Euthyph. 4 d. 'E-Ta/T/aa-a^Eya; p.t <f>evov Dem.
55 ii. 1. Ollus 'ivox'os ia-rt Xitv or tt^'tou oltl tiiXias Lys. 140. 1. T
etlrris iyvaiets v<ri\>8uvot il rots aXXa/j Dem. 293. 28.
NOTE. The Gen. is sometimes used to express the punishment ; as, y-
r o v Jt aJVo* K^'ivoufft, and these pronounce sentence of death, Cyr. i. '2. 14. 2wX-
Xa^tysT5 wirJj'yay 3- at y -raw H. Gr. ii. 3. 12. 'AvtigaiTuv XKret'^ritynrQ'ivrui
QoLtdrov % tyf/vs PL Rep. 558 a. Tla'T* J'ya^a/ )tr^t<0 ytyvir/ Dem.
1229. 11. In this construction (which is rare except with 9^ayra^), the
punishment api>ears to be regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the
end in view ( 372) in judicial preceding.
3. Genitive of Sensible and Mental Object.
$ 37*5. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may
be regarded as its exciting cause, and, in this view, may be put
in the Genitive. Hence,
RULE XIII. Words of SENSATION, and of MEN-
TAL STATE or ACTION govern the Genitive ; as,
. OF SENSATION. 2/rat; lytva-ttvra, tasted of food, iii. 1. 3. 7<wa-at
r*f $vas, 'have a smack of,' t. e. ' try,' or ' knock at,' Ar. Ran. 462. Tat
vet7tetf . . yturrio* et'i'ftaro;, 'give a taste of,' PL Rep. 537 a. Oi"yai/ . .
if<potivt<r0cu, to catch the scent of wine, v. 8. 3. Qoovtov flxovirt $<a cay
Tiiy loiros, ' heard,' i. 8. 16. Taw Si <rayr<wy tilrrov axaw-r^aray, iva'ito*
rmwrtif, ivrmeof iT Mem. ii. 1. 31. Oil* aoeup.toi $i rov "Sovro{ Cyr. i.
3. 1O. KXi/wy -aX-/-xyaf Soph. Aj. 29O. Ovtiif Si TOI-TOTI ^a\,^a.rouf
iSiy iffiZit ovb\ euoffiov oij-rt rra.TTo*Tot TSi, oun \iyovTot nxovffi Mem
L 1. 11.
CH. l.J OF SENSIBLE AND MENTAL OBJECT. 277
/3. OF PERCEPTION, KNOWLEDGE, REFLECTION, EXPERIENCE, and HABIT
Tj,- . . i-riSovXtjs ovx ya-Jeivtre, he did not perceive the plot, i. 1. H. "0<r
aXXJXuv gwit<r th. i. 3. 'Evtupot $ TUV threat Mem. Hi. 6. 17
'Ex-to-rvftav tfvoti <rSv aftfi ra^ti; ii. 1.7. iXa $' eit'^gis fteiXXov n
ro<pos xx ilvcti ^Esch. Sup. 453. 'l^t&rvs rovrov rev 'i^yv, ' un
skilled in,' (Ec. 3. 9. Ttit a^irij? . . otilvet lit lliurtvitv PI. Prot. 3-Jfi e.
Kwov . . i ft too. yiviffda.i) to have been well acquainted with Cyrus [in the
knowledge of Cyrus by proof], i. 9. 1. rLngufttvoi ravm; rvs <ra|<wj,
' making trial of,' iii. 2. 38. T<wv rti%uv w^wv rt/v, 'attempt,' Th. vii.
19. *Eift9Ftigot yat(> Jiffctv Ttis TletQXetyovicts V. 6. 1. "Avriigot evTit ctiirav
iii. 2. 16. Twy t/*t/f etvrov I^OVTUV ii. 6. 1. 3'tvug t%&> Ttjs iv6a$t
li?i<vs PL Apol. 17 d. Ou r^iSuf av l**Htris AT. Vesp. 1429. 'H4j /^<
^rwj TfcJv T>j(r5s (AvSuv Soph. El. 372. 'Ay0tis TOV XKTCIXOVUV Dem. 15. i!7.
37G. y. OF MEMORY. Tovreav evtsts pi (At n rot, i, these things no
one remembers, v. 8. 25. - Ov^ivos 'in ravruv iftiftvnro, 'made mention of,'
vii. P. 8. TJJS et%tis f4VHf*o*ivo/Atv Isocr. 12 C. Toureu Jk aitroijf VTO
ftipviiffitirt Cyr. iii. 3. 37. Mij (*' ia/*vv<rys xaxuv Eur. Ale. 10^5.
B/aw 5s row ^a^ovroj ou ftvtietv t%sis ; Soph. El. 392. To> -roigoifa plv ^'oyu*
*. a. u p 1 0' ei/tlpu, 'forget,' Eur. Hipp. 288. "T-rvav r, X^>jv ruv x.a.6*
iia.v xaxuv Eur. Bacch. 282.
3. OF CARE. K)*r4j SsJ^aw, to care for Seuthes, vii. 5. 5. Totirow
r< Js7 u'tXitv, of this there must be to you a care, i. e. you muxf tae care <>/*
A, Cyr. i. 6. 16. T<w r^' i.vru Tt frttfia.^* t-rtfttXtTra i. 1. 5.
'A.fjt.tXi7i ripui ctvruv, 'to be careless of,' ' to neglect,' i. 3. 1 1. 'E-r/^iXijy
te.ya.6ut, iptXris xctxuv PI. Conv. 197 d. 'H rjf vyniKf tv i pi X net Cyr.
i. 6. 16. Mj ft.iretft.iXnt tret <rvs 1/u.ris luota.;, 'repent of,' Cyr. Anii. 3. 32.
E/ vofti^aifti Siov; a.v$u<vuv n q>gov<ri%nv, ovx a* ctftiXaitiv etlruv Mem.
i. 4. 11. <3>uXcto-<rofi.i*av{ <ruv viv* Th. iv. 1 1 . "Of as etvreav civet xus
Id. \4ii. !0'2.
i. OF DESIRE. 'Eguvris rovrov, desiring this, iii. 1. 29. E7 T/J Ss ^.
fix* i-ri0Dfii7, 'desires' [sets his mind upon; cf. 373. 2], iii. 2. 39.
YXi%6fctvos TOV >?y, ea^r /or ///e, or clinging to life ( 370. N.), PI. Phaedo,
117 a. TLitvjirets xgnfe.etTuv, having hungered for wealth, Cyr. viii. 3. 39.
llcXis iXiv0tieti tt^Ytffetffet PI. Rep. .562 c. KirTutris *vit tiw*is Ar.
Pax, 497.
. OF VARIOUS EMOTION. "Ayetfteti Xvitetros, I admire the spirit, Eur.
Rhes. 244. OS; oux etv av<r^t<r^aT ctvrou fietiriXivovros, who would not en-
dure him as their king, ii. 2. 1. T H iyu <rot ov <f>0 ovri<r u, which I shull not
grudge to you, Cyr. viii. 4. 1 6. AIf%gov ffriynt yt Q0<>vn<ra.i, it is mean to
grudge him our roof, i. e. to refuse him admission, Symp. 1. 12. M^i fi<n
Qtcwo-y; tlyittirtuv, 'deny,' or ' reject,' .<Esch. Pr. 583. 'Axx' ov fttyet'i^u
rou^'t ffot $u/>vfe,etros Ib. 626.
37 7. REMARKS. 1. The idea of hearing passes, by an easy tran-
sition, into that of obedience (obedio, to give ear to, to listen to, to obey, from ob
and audio, to hear}. Hence, words of obedience govern the Gen. (cf. 405. w) ;
as, TOVTOVS . . fieta-fXius ovx ctxoviiv, that these did not obey [or were not subject
to] the king, iii. 5. 1 6. 01 "Si K^oD; ov<^^ xetXouvrtvv vTr,ot>oi, ' regarded
their invitations [listened to them calling],' iv. 1. 9. 'TC-rtxaoi ru* Ma<r<rwa/-
HUV, subject to the Mossynocci. Karwxaa/ TI jjVan ruv toftuv PI. Criti. 1 20 6.
*Av}xai;a-T7 ^t TUV -r/trgo; Xoyuv aTav Tt -ru; ; ^Esch. Prom. 4O. 2^w ww-
fifftatt Th. vii. 73. Hut %PV xaXevvro; a.*u0i7v Cyr. iv. 5. 1 9.
278 SYNTAX. GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. [BOOK 111
2. Verbs of sight commonly govern the Ace. ; and many verbs which are
followed by the Gen. according to this rule sometimes or often take the Ace,
(especially of a neuter adjective) ; as, Eftaptv rovs voXipiovf vi. 5. 10. A/
t6a.wrcti i*a<rrcc Mem. i. 4. 5. See 424. 2, 432. 2.
4. Genitive of Time and Place.
378. The time and place in which any thing is done
may be regarded as essential conditions of the action, or as
cooperating to produce it. Hence,
RULE XIV. The TIME and PLACE IN WHICH
are put in the Genitive (cf. 420, 439) ; as,
1. TIME, "n/^ir* rvi ruxres, he went in the night, vii. 2. 17. Teturet
u\i rn tipias iyivtro, 'in the day,' vii. 4. 14. TJ; $i/Xf ie nxtiv, 'in
the evening,' vii. 2. 16. *l<r<rt rns fipie*s fans S/SfX&v . ., xx $s/Xj?
a<f>ixov<ro iii. 3. 11. EJV$ tvxros ^ioi n, tin xa,} fiftigots, 'whether by
night or by day,' Hi. 1.40. Ba-/X$w? ol fAa%i7rou I'ma. jj^s^wv, 'within
ten days,' i. 7. 1 8. "On ou-ru j raXXai; %(>ovov . . \<jrirv%oi> ' now for a
long time,' i. 9. 2.-). 'E%iov<ris $' U<r-rj,- a^e^a?, 'everyday,' vi. 6. I.
IlaXXax/s rvi fiju,i^as, many times a day, Ar. Eq. '250. lion? Si TCI/TO -rX-
Xeixis rov ftnvos CyT. i. 2. 9. T/ rif&tSctgtixu rov p. wag, three half-darics
a month, i. 3. 21. Ttv $' awraw S-s^at/f Th. ii. '28, 79, 80. Taw $' iviyiyvo-
pivov %i<fiZve( Ib. V. 13, 36, 51, 56, 116. "E| JTWV aXoi/raj Ar. Lys.
2^O. OJn T/J ^svaj K<p7x,7Kt %(>ovou ffu%vou PL PhflBdo, 57 a. MTKV . .
el (jt,a.x,(>av %(>ovi>v Soph. El. 477. Ouxin rev Xa/ratJ [sc. %ovoii] ireif%aifiit9
y xax^,- Dem. 44. 12.
y t7f 2. PLACE. Avrou [sc. re-raw] fttivxvrtf, remaining in that
place, i. 10. 17. TevS' ti<n^M rti%iuv, 'within the walls,' Eur. Ph. 451.
*B^*il . . 'fyxixXy/u-ivovs Soph. Aj. 1274. KartxAs/a-y . . Maxi^av/aj
*A^jyra/ IIo5/'xxav Th. V. 83. TJ; Ji '\uvtett KO.} aXXa^/ raXXa^sw a/V^^a
Hvopterrai PI. Conv. 182 b. M^'T* i/*?Ttwi/ vretrffiof Soph. (Ed T. 825.
H; 5i pii 'ftCuivyt o^av Id. CEd. C. 4OO. IliJ/^y fV/v/Wira/ Ib. 689.
'Ea-^r>jf 5* trt/^o:; J^J} /Saa-r^w^av Soph. El. 900. 'Ea-r/atf /t*ia-^ip.
Xew -T>7X!v ^>j ^JJXoj ^Esch. Ag. 1056. Aa/af Si "^0* ' ^/5j^aT{*Tavif
a/xaSr* X*Xwi; Id. Pr. 714. KTKA. Ilariga; rHy ^t^f ; XOP. 'Ex IfyS.
rev Kur. Cycl. 681.
l.'i MARKS, a,. This use of the Gen., to denote the place, where, occurs very
rarely in prose, except, in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives
1 >. 1 ) ; as, aw [sc. raaraw], in which place, where, etvrov, there, oftiv, in the
tame i^nce, ellci^tv, nowhere, &c. Cf. " 421. /3.
/3. In Epic poetry, this Gen. is sometimes employed to denote the place vp^n
or over which any thing moves ; as, "E^avra/ -ri^ieia, tliey advance upon thf
plain, B. 801. "Exa^ay <raXea; -ribioio Siovffcti A. 244. 'EXxi^jyas/ yi<a/~ fa-
fiitif ^TfixTov etgargov K. 353.
y. The ideas of plice and time are combined in expressions like those which
follow, relating to journeying (Fr. journee, a day's-march, from Lat. diurnus,
from dies, day} ; 'E-r'Taxa^ixa y^ ffra.6pt.tov ruv \yywra.T6i audit t*%e[6tv X/*
Cayi/y, 'during the last seventeen day's-marches,' ii. 2. 11. 'llpigiiiovrets .
Cho. 710.
(JH. i.j GENITIVE ACTIVE. 279
J. In the phrase /*<; X, tl ^^ m *h e following passage, the idea of time Is
combined with that of action ; "E^ov f^ia.s uoi %tigof iu iir6a,i TI, ' at a single
stroke,' ' once for all,' Eur. Here. 938.
38O. III. That which produces any thing,
as its ACTIVE or EFFiciEis 7 T CAUSE ; or, in other
words, that by which, as its author, agent, or giver,
any thing is made, written, said, done, bestowed,
&,c., or from which .any thing is obtained, heard
learned, inquired, requested, demanded, &,c.
To this division, which must obviously refer chiefly to per
sons, belongs the following rule, which will of course be un-
derstood as applying only to adjuncts.
Genitive Active.
RULE XV. The AUTHOR, AGENT, and GIVER
are put in the Genitive ; as,
a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring, Requesting, &c
TWT s ffov Tu%o*Tts, and obtaining this of you, vi. 6. 32. *fly $i <reu
rvxiTv iQiiftKt, uxoutrov ( 370) Soph. Phil. 1315. 'Axovcuv Kv^ov cg W
ia i. 8. IS. T<wv ^XlX !!//( I Iwwy^avavra, OTI ol p,\*
. <$%o*ro, 'learned by inquiry from,' vi. 3. 23. K) \<rvv6<ivoi<ro el
Tear trioi Sivotpavret, <r'i TO, icupa. XKTOtffGitrsixv, 'inquired of,' Ib. 25,
Ma^s Xt ft o v , S> war, xeti raSi Cyr. i. 6. 44. Asavra/ ^i aou xa,} TOVTO vi.
6. 33. 'Eftot xagtffeti Jv av ffov lir>dZ ( 357. N.) Cyr. V. 5. 35. 25 y
r;y' uir<.7 ftu0ov Soph. CEd. C. 1161.
381. /3. With Passive Verbs and Verbals. Hz.wyt
%; if**;, smitten by my daughter, Eur. Or. 497. <&uros ri-ret'r^fAt.vt) Soph.
Aj. 807. To/y <p/X(wy vix,tof/,ivo; Ib. 1353. TLaietf fAtgtf&*n; <rov6* viriMrr^ot.
fiis Xey^j ; Soph. CEd. T, 728. Tay **ay v'orpou Qurtvhii Id. CEd. C.
1393. "AO/x-ro; wyjT ? a,- Ib. 1521. ?**>; aXDvet, Ib. 1519. Keexut
ya.o '%u<ra,'kearas ou^ii; Ib. 1722. O/Xa/v eixXetvro; Soph. Ant. 847. Ki/yjs
$i"ba.xTo. Id. El. 3-13. This use of the Gen. is poetic, and is most frequent
with the Participle.
y. With Substantives. HtvoQeuvros Ky^ou 'Ay<r/?, Xenophons Ex-
pedition of Cyrus. Oi ft.tv v'oi ro~s ruv yr^ffStiTt^MH i-raivot; ^xl^tuffiv, at 5i
yioa.'iri>>i ra,7i TUV viuv TIU.OI.~S ayaXXaxra/, the young rejoice in the praises of
their elders, and the old delight in the honors paid them by the young, Mem. ii.
1. 33. "H^aj Xa<r/a/f, wanderings caused by Juno, ^Esch. Pr. 90O. NOTW
n B*gs . . xvpciTa, Soph. Tr. 1 1 3.
.^ 38^. IV. That which CONSTITUTES any thing
WHAT IT is. To this head may be referred what-
ever serves to complete the idea of a thing or prop-
280 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE. [BOOK III
erty, by adding some distinction or characteristic
Hence,
Genitive Constituent.
RULE XVI. An ADJUNCT DEFINING A THINC
OR PROPERTY is put in the Genitive ; as,
To Miaj a-r^tirtvftK, the army of Meno, i. 2. 21.
$ 3 8 3. REMARKS. . The THING OR PROPERTY DEFINED
may be either distinctly expressed by its appropriate word, or
may be involved in another word ; as, ftaaifavi; in ^at/Uueo, a-
jffunijs in ouTQantva ( 389). Cf. 351, 362. 3, 391. <5, 394
395. 5.
NOTE. In particular, adjectives in which a substantive is compounded with
it- privative ( 325), have often a Gen. defining the substantive. See 395.
^384. ft. A. genitive defining a substantive is sometimes
connected with it by an intervening word, which is usually a
substantive verb. See, for examples, 387, 390 ; cf. 365.
This form of construction may be referred to ellipsis ; thus,
flv [tt'rtfpwTToc] CTOJV <ug TQidxovia, he was [a man] of about
thirty years ( 387).
385. y. A substantive governing the Gen. is often understood,
particularly vies, son, eJxei, house, and other words denoting domestic relation
or abode. Thus, FXai/s o Tape*, Glus, tlie son of Tamos, ii. 1 . 3. T il A.IOS
[sc. Sv^a-rtfi] "A^n^/f Eur. Iph. A. 1570. Rv<rivvs <rvs 'l-rviev [sc. yvvtti
xoi\ Ar. Eq. 449. 0wi ^' i^iviyxuT If rev Il/TraXot/ [sc. tflxov], 'to
I'ittulus's [house],' Ar. Ach. 1222. E/'j ovbivos ltia.inca.Xov -ruvon Qoirrxra.*
Cyr. ii. .S. 9. T i 'A^K'TAV xaxwv Eur. Ale. 761 (cf. 'E 'A^ttrav ^0/Ko<
68). 'E> "A^ Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. En. "AiJ ^o< f 1241). 'Ev *A-XM
-<w [sc. fi] Mem. iii. 13. 3. E/V l^onitv [sc. avr^av] Ar. Nub. 508.
3. The Gen. is often used in periphrasis, particularly with % ^, <A/n^, and,
by the poetfc, with Ji^ay, form, body, xeiga, head, Svop,<t, name, and similar
words. Thus, At^( 'Aya^t^vavoj = 'Aya^i^vava Eur. Hec. 723. T il ^/X-
TO.TOM yvyttucof 'loxufrns xd^a. Soph. CEd. T. 950. T ll *e6tivov Stop ofAiXiett
Iptf Eur. Or. 1082. See 395. a.
i. A substantive governing the Gen. is sometimes used by the poets instead
of an adjective ; as, XfUffo* . . I-JTUV, the gold of words, for "Ewj %t>veei, yolden
words, AT. Pint. '268. r H ftnr^o; iftnt <ri*t ^Esch. Pr. 1091. T\o>it'tx.evt
/3/ Eur. Ph. 56.
38G. An adjunct defining a THING either expresses a
property of that thing, or points out another thing related^ tc
it. An adjunct defining a PROPERTY points out a thing related
to that property. Hence the CONSTITUENT GENITIVE is either,
1. the Genitive of Property, or 2. the Genitive of Relation.
CH. 1.] OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 281
1. Genitive of Property.
3 8 7. The Genitive of property expresses quality, di-
mension, age, &c. Thus,
*Hv Iruv us r^ieixavrei, he was about thirty years old [of about thirty years],
ii. 6. 2O. HoTetpov evra TO iv^of >rXi6^ou i. 4. 9, a river being [<yf] a pie-
thrum in breadth (cf. HOTK/JI.OV ro iJfoj *Xt0ict7ov i. 5. 4, and see ; 333. 6').
[Tildas] tv/>o; ilxofft <ro^uv, v-J/o; Ti IXKTOV- /u.)jxo; ' iXeyfra iTv/ i*xa-
< Tfa.^a.ffa.'yyui ii. 4. 12. '0 Si TJ iKru%icts $ i or os, but a life of quiet
[=/3/8Tay fifuxof, a quiet life], Eur. Bac. 388. 2raX/$a . . T^ vtfias [= T^U.
(ps^avj Eur. Ph. 1491. Taa-avS' ,'$ raX^j vrft'ocruvov \_= ourca TaX^ngav] ;
Soph. OEd. T. 533. Ta Se rvf&'X'vtvffa.i . . %govov vroXXov [i/rrt], *.} ?ray^a-
Xswov PL Leg. 708 d. "E<TT< fl vroXifAOS ou% 'o*\uv re-r^iov, aXXa da<ravj
Th. i. 83. "00-w T^J KVTfJS yvupnt vifetv Ib. 113. To?^' o^w waXXow <r'ovau
Eur. Ph. 719.
NOTE. It is obvious from the examples above, that the Gen. of property
performs the office of an adjective. Its use to express quality, in the strict
sense of the term, is chiefly poetic.
2. Genitive of Relation.
388. The Genitive of relation, in its full extent, in-
cludes much which has been already adduced, under other and
"nore specific heads. The relations which remain to be con-
sidered are, (a.) those of domestic, social, and civil life,
(b.) those of possession and ownership ; (c.) that of the object
of an action to the action or agent ; (d.) those of time and
place ; (e.) those of simple reference, of explanation, &c.
The Genitives expressing these relations may be termed, (a.) the Gen. of
social relation, (b.) the Gen. possessive, (c.) the Gen. objective, (d.) the Gen.
of local and temporal relation, (e.) the Gen. of reference, of explanation, *c.
380* a - GENITIVE OF SOCIAL, RELATION.
'0 TJJJ /3<r<Xsf <y want os aSsX<p;, the brother of the king's wife, ii. 3.
17. Twv *O$<rav /ker*Ai vii. 3. ! 6. AyXt/.e vovrtav i. 9. 15. *Hi
U.VTOV ffa.<T(>(ivriv Ivrtivtrs i. 1.2. B(r/XW4iv [= Bo-/Xyj &Jv vj 383. a] a, I rut
V. G. 37. T fftt-T^K-rtvovn [= 0-aT^a^-r; W<] -rjjf ^(w^ay iii. 4. 31. (See
also 350.) Ft/raw . . T^J 'EXXaSaj (cf. 399) iii. 2. 4. TJjj rX<w*
i^^o/V Ven. 1 3. 12. Toy; exu'vow ix0!trrous, . . rai/j Kvgau <f>i\ovs iii. 2. 5.
A/a r>5j taw TO;* -raXs^/a? ^gJ, through the country of their enemies, iv.
7. 19.
RE^IAKK. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for he
Dat., with some adjectives implying intimate connection; as, C O 3t Qvtra; vrvri
trvyytivs TOU KJooy tJveii, and he who once said that he was related to Cyrus,
or a relative of Cyrus, Cvr. V. 1. 24. (DiS* %i>voixof ruv X.OLTU hav A(*j
Soph. Ant. 451. Aa^sJa/'^avaf 5t y7 T/J ^wv^vw^as ; Eur. Hel. 495.
Ba*^ov wov, MivaS aftotrroXov Soph. Oid. T. 212. Tav S^xjaraz/y ;
Ofjt.uvufjt.av PI. Soph. 2 1 8 b. Hi? Iff'ofLOif' r^ Soph. El. 87. 'A*Xa/<>
Tyr ravrat XXrX&y ffic. 11. 12. T fl ^tyyas iVvaw 3/Ja^;a Soph. PU.
B67. 'O xfSsov>!T)j TO r>5; viuf *< mvruv o.ti $.Uf$iov Taca<pi/Xrra;
282 SYNTAX. - GENITIVE POSSESSIVE. [BOOK II,
PL Pol. 296 e. Ta r^otr^o^a, rnt vU VKfovirve <rvp.<poeit Eur. Hel. 508
Cf. 5 399, 400, 4O3. It will be observed, that, in some of these examples
the adjective may be regarded as used substantively, and that this construe 1
tion is not confined to the names of persons.
b. GENITIVE POSSESSIVE.
390. The Genitive possessive denotes that to which
any thing belongs as a possession, power, right, duty, quality,
&c. Thus,
T Svtvvifios fictff'iXuet, the palace of Syennesis, i. 2. 23. TLrav * 'Iu-
/*/ foXzt; Tiffffct<p'tgvousi the Ionian cities belonged to Tissaphernes, i. 1.6.
Tap p.\v yot,a vix&vruv <ro xct<retxotivnv, TUV ^f k Truft, vai v TO KfoGyflffitiiv
\<r<ri, for it is the part of victors to kill, but of the vanquished to die, iii. 2. 39.
^v j M<S0t/ xaXat/^iv*} i. 2. 13. Aurou ya.(> tlva/ <f>y<rui, ivrtiftg K/a
fa-av ii. 5. 38. Tovrov <ro tv(>os "ova trXs^a i. 2. 5* Tuv ya,(> vixtuvrwr
ttrrt KO.\ TO. letvruv ffeafyiv, x.a.} ret. reav ri <r T a /u. i vu v Xa^SavE/v iii. 2.39.
"Hv IfAuv aureut, Ifaxiffnrt y<vt<r0xi, 'your own men,' i.e. 'independent,'
Dem. 4-2. 10. TJ? ro^.tus ovrcts, true to the state, Isocr. 185 b. "IW oil
Tgofreirou yiy^a.'^afjt.a.t Soph. Q^d. T. 411. 'AXX* IffTi rau >.-
* QoGovs liyri, 'at the mercy of the speaker,' Ib 91 7. Mj$' a fj-n
ffiaurvs, ' make yours,' Id. Ant. .546.
3 O 1 REMARKS. . The idea of possession is sometimes modified
or strengthened by an adjective or adverb ; as, 'It^os e %uo{ rris 'Agrtfii'&of
the spot is sacred to Diana [consecrated to be Diana's], v. 3. 13. 'IS/wv ictv-
TOV x.rn(jt.a.<ruv, of his own acquisitions, PI. Menex. 247 b. 01 $i xiv^Svoi T*/
ttf>tffTn>c<i<ret> *$toi Dem. 26. 1 1. Ta otxiTo* ixctTtgoti trnpitov PI. Theaet
1 93 C. Tev t^uToe, TOVTOV vrort^a, xoivov otii iUvcn fu-vruiv oLvfyuwuv ; PI. CoilV.
205 a. Tjf tifAirigctf Mat/Vj; ivr i %& (>t ov Ib. 189 b.
B. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in connec-
Uoa with verbs of praise, blame, and wonder ; as, Taw-re i<ratv&> 'Ayruri^eiov, 1
fitmmend this in Ayesiltus [this cliaracteristic of Agesilaus], Ages. 8. 4. *0
ftipttyovrai f&aLXiffra. rjfituv Th. i. 84. "AxXa ri ffou froXXa ei'yec/u.a.i Symp. 8.
12. 'VJa.upa.ffa. et'vrou v^urav pi* reurt PI. Phaedo, 89 a. Tovro . . tv rolt
xvfft xetro^ti, o Kttt &%ie* Sctvpeiffati rev Sv/iiov PI. Rep. 376 a.
y. ELLIPSIS. The Assessor is sometimes put in the case belonging to the
thing possetaed, with an ellipsis of the latter, particularly in comparison ; as,
"A^fAara, . . open* \xiiiiu [= <rei( 'mt'itou 8.y*a,ffi\, chariots similar to his [char-
lOfaj, Cyr. vi. 1. .'"JO (cf. [A^ar] opotu. rolt Kv^w2. 7). 'Qf*.oia.v ret7s $ov-
X<r/j it%i r>) ifftvret Cyr. V. 1. 4. ' ^IfXifffjtivei . . nit ctlroif KV^M o-rXou
Cyr. vii. 1. '_'. "E^a^iy a-^ara \Ko.vun^ rovruv, we have bodies better able
than theirs, iii. 1. 23. M$' |r^<r>i; reiff^i [= rot, rcuvb^ x.<txa.~\ <ro7( ipto?s
KtiKoif Soph. CEd. T. 1.5O7. "A^avrif ^ia-av l^evris TO civruv i. 8. 22 (cf.
TOTI ftffov l*>* rrif eturov
J. The verbs a2>, to smell, <r^<u, to breathe, and ^a<rfaXX<w, to emit, may
take a Gen. denning a tioun implied in these verbs 383. ) or understood
with them; thus, "Oat/<r/ -ri-rrvf, they smell of pitch [emit the smell of
pitch], Ar. Arh. 1 9O. TJ5; *s<p*X^- o& pvov ( 355) Ar. l-xjcl. 524. T
i/tariuv 6%ritrii lt$ie rnr ot , 'there will be a smell of,' Ar. Vesp. 1058.
nii> pot rgwivHiKri xeiilui *iu* Ar. Ran. 338. IIa^t frvtrou
CX i Ar. Pax, 1 80.
JH. 1.] OBJECTIVE. 283
t. It mil be observed, that the Genitive possessive is the exact converse of
the Genitive of property ( 387), the one denoting that which possesses, and
the other, that which is possessed.
c. GENITIVE OBJECTIVE.
3O3. The object of an action, regarded as such, is put
in the Accusative or Dative ( 339). But if the action, instead
of being predicated by a verb, is merely represented as a thing
or property (or as implied in a thing or property ) , by a noun,
adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually regarded simply
as something defining that thing or property, and is conse-
quently put in the Genitive. Thus,
1 . GENITIVE OF THE DIRECT OBJECT. 'O <p/3ov/>a(>%as <ra j QvXa.x,a,s
i T a t < , the commander of a garrison reviews his troops, CEc. 9.15; but,
Kz^a; l^ira.ffiv -ronTra,! rut 'ExXw'v^v, Cyrus makes a review of the Greeks,
i. 7. 1 J T<2v roitvT&iv 'i^ywv i%* rao-nxo* , fitted to review such mfitters, Mem.
1. 1.7. Toy a A 6 P o y <ruv ffUffT^OLTtwrtuv i. 2. 26. 'lea l yaif/,oi . . o A 1 6^1 01
<pi\tav ^Esch. Ag. i I 56 'cf. 2-rayysf d*>t<riv y^cttf-nv 1329). Ty v-rt^SoXy
rov o^ovs iv. 4. 18 (cf. 'Tirt^'iSxXXov ra. ogq 20). Ka^S/aj triXTrt^tot, Eur.
Hec. 235 (of. Aaxyi* <p^tva Id. Ilcracl. 4K3). A<5s-xaA/xoy . . ffo(piae,s PI.
Euthyph. 3 C. Madras lur^mrit PL Rep. 599 C. "AAAat/; rotovrav
nvuv [Ao.f'nrix.ovs Ib. 475 e. "A^T/^a^j XO.KUV Eur. Hec. 686. 'Q^ifutft
. . vut <r kiovtZicav Cyr. i. 6. 35. To|<x>Jj <rt xa,} axovr iffius qtiXofta.-
tio-retrov i. i>. 5 (cf. 2<w<p ao-uv v x.ce.ra.f^a.im 3). Aa^^a ^ -raiy ffT^a.Vw
, 6w< without the knowledge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8 (cf. Aa&7v airov atrtX-
&I 17). K^^a r&Jv 'A.6v>vot.!uv Th. i. 101. 'Atra^jj xaxuv vii. 7. 33.
C}T. iii. 3. 55.
2. GENITIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT. Ew^<r^a< TO?? . . StaTj, to
to Me gods, iv. 3. 13 ; but, &iuv ii>%eis, prayers to the gods, PL
Pfoedr. 244 e. Ta -rns &tot Svpara, Eur. Iph. T. 329 (cf. Qvnv 3 1035).
T TWK *^g/o-o-&;v SonAE/ay Th. i. 8 (cf. TaJ? j|)lt?f Jot/XlUiwy Mem. i. 5.
5). 'E<rtavXivrov ffr^nrov, of a plotter against the host, Soph. Aj. 726
(cf. 'Esr/0fXwa; etuTui* 1.3). ^wyyvufAuv <ruv uvtiguftvuv a,(x,ot o <r w f/t, ei r AI t
Cyr. vi. 1. 37 (cf. 'Ey^u <roi ffvviyiyvuo'xov Ib. \ii. 5. 50).
^> 3O3. REMARKS, a. In like manner, the Gen. is employed with
nouns, to denote relations, which, with the corresponding adjectives, are denoted
by the Dat. ; as, TJjf -r&ly 'Exxyv tlvota-s, from good-will to the Greeks,
lv. 7. 20 (cf. Evvovs St <ra< <yy vii. 3. 2O). T<j Jjfr y ay^oy t^iys/a ix.
ra<ai^ Soph. (Ed. C. 631 (cf. Ty ilpivn raX< Id. Ant. 212).
ft. The Gen. is sometimes employed", in like manner, for a preposition with
its case ; as, 'Ey aroari< rrj; ys, in a descent upon the land, Th. i. 108
(cf. 'A-r'iSti \', r*v y?y H. Gr. i. 1. 18).
7. To the Gen. of the direct object may be referred the Gen. with afr/aj and
its derivatives ; as, Ta "T<OV -rjf yvovlris, the cause of the haste [that which
was causative of, &c.], iv. 1. 17. Tourav ol <ru ulr'ia., you are not responsible
fnr [the cause of] these things, CEc. 8. 2. O/ rev vro^iftav a.lrtura.roi, the prin-
cipal authors of the war, H. Gr. iv. 4. 2. Tourtv 'S.ux.oa.Tfiv o ttctT^yo^ etinai-
reu, for this the accuser blames Socrates [makes S. the author of this], Mem.
L 2. 26. See 374.
284 SYNTAX. GENITIVE. [BOOK III
J. The Gen. in its mere active uses (when employed to denote agent, posses-
tor, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, in distinc-
tion from the Gen. objective. The following passages contain examples of both
kinds: Ty TliXo-ro; ft.lv *-<T-J? IIsAa-ravy/jo-aw wrdXy-^iv, Pehps's seiz-
ure of all Peloponnesus, Isocr. 249 a. Tj ruv olxiiuv V(>oTnXtt.x.iffiis TOO
yvgus PL Rep. 329 b. T txsivuv ft'tX^wtriv rut Is fiftus ^uvuv Th. iii.
12. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. are, in like manner, used both
subjectively and objectively. See 503.
d. GENITIVE OP LOCAL AND TEMPORAL RELATION.
$ 304. The Genitive is extensively employed in defining
local and temporal relation, particularly with adverbs of place
and time, and with words derived from them. Thus,
>y>js, near the land, Soph. (Ed. C. 3S9. 'Av-r/av r)jf
H. Gr. ii. 1. 21. Tourov ivKvr'iov vii.' 6. 23. 'Avnvriga.! ruv vZ.ctyiut
Cyr. vii. 1. 7. *Av<u ruv i-r-riuv iv. 3. 3. *A%ei rou pv> rs/yj;v Symp. 4
37. 'Ei>yyus T/xgetStio-au ii. 4. 14. 'Eyyus ftu^iuv, nearly ten thousand, V.
7. 9. EJVa ruv ogiuv i. 2. 21. "Exrof rou <ri't%ouf Mag. Eq. 7. 4. 'Ex-
roy cX/ywv, ercep* a /ew ( 349), H. Gr. i. 6. 35. 2x*jvjf tviov Soph. Aj.
218. "Evij^i yJJ; JEsch. Pers. 229. "Ev^jy */ ivfiv tr<f>uv iv. 3. 28.
Ylora.ft,6Jv ivros ii. ! 11. Taw YlXevruvos '*%%! Ar. Ran. 765. "E^w T<W
vvXuv i. 4. 5. Ksu^/ xu.ru l>n yw Soph. (Ed. T. 968. KuxA* TO? O-T^-
roTibav Cyr. iv. 5. 5. Tc ftitrov ruv nt%uv, the distance between the walls,
i. 4. 4. 'Ev piffu r,puv x.a,} /3<r/A5<wj ii. 2. 3. M.ttreuffi . . rtjf -ro^tiois PI.
Pol. 265 b. Mi-ral-y rev -rorttftov KUI rqs raQgou i. 7. 15. M/ TOM
MjJ/af ni%ous Ib. "Ovrnr^tv leturuv i. 7. 9. AawXjj <r^v vra.oi6u
Eur. Hec. 48. B^oZ riXaf ^Esch. Ag. 210. H)(.r,ffiov Jvitt rou rt't^ou-
vii. 1. 39. *Er>.ja-<0 . . ruv cixguv Cyr. iii. 2. 8. Tli^ay row ?rTa.
ftou ii. 4. 28. n^oo-^ey r<wv oTX&y iii. I. 33. "Yu't^s fiuftou ^Esch. Ag.
232. It will be observed, that, in some of these examples, the word gov-
erning the Gen. is used in a secondary sense. For the Dat. after some of these
words, see S 399, 405.
e. GENITIVE OF REFERENCE, EXPLANATION, EMPHASIS, &c.
395. The CONSTITUENT GENITIVE has likewise other
bses, of which the principal are those of simple reference, of
explanation, and of emphatic repetition.
NOTE. In some of these uses, the Gen. rather denotes a relation between
two expressions for the same thing, than between two different things. In such
cases, an ujjpositive might be substituted for it ( 333. 6) ; and, indeed, in
some of the examples which follow (particularly with the compounds of &-
jirtrntive, 383. N.), we might regard the Gen. as in apposition with a sub-
stantive implied.
a. With SUBSTANTIVES. H((paftt rev a^o/i<y, pretext for assembling,
i. 1. 7. Tf/ay (wui ftifffov, three months' pay, i. 1. 10. Qa.vu.rou -riAf, tht
end [sc. of life], which is found in death, or simply, death, Msch. Sept. 9O6.
<du.va.rou n\iur<iv Eur. Med. 1 52 (cf. B/'aw return Soph. (Ed. C. 1473). Ti^a
rftt ffurn^ia.f Soph. (Ed. C. 725. E/ rie^a.{ (tribiv to-roti ff$!<ri rou awaXXatyjjvaci
raw xivbuvou Th. vii. 42. Mtyat . . ^r,/jt.a. . . rtjf ift<ri$oi, a monster of a gnat
5. ^), Ar. Lys. 1O3I. 2t/a\- ^iy/a-ray ^w^ Soph. Fr. 357 (cf. KT-
rrjy tXttQov, xaXev <ri %gtjftet xeti pfya. Cyr. i. 4. 8).
CH. 1.] OF REFERENCE, &C. - DATIVE OBJECTIVE. 285
VVXTW* Ar. Nub. 2, 2^iv^ovjr&iy fetftfoXu n xfifttt Cyr. ii. 1. 5. A/ TJ?
Tjf aSsXpJj? ar/^/av T?J xavntpog'iai, on account of his sister's being denied the
honor of bearing the sacred basket, PL Hipparch. 229 c. See also 333. 6.
/3. With ADJECTIVES. "A-rai* $t i/^ui uppivuv vafiuv, and I am childless as
to male children, Cyr. iv. 6. 2. *H rsxsa waT^a? uTKro^a. Eur. Here. 1 1 4.
aj <p/X<wv Id. Hel. 524. "Acrs-rXaj (f>K^itav X'.vxav Id. Ph. 324. YL\nyuv
Ar. Nub. 1413. X^^arwv . . 5&;8raTaj Th. ii. 65. "A-rxsvov .
Soph. El. 36. 'Aveii0ftoi &3t fyvvuv Ib. 232. "A<p<wva/ rvtr&i <r?
&(eis Id. (Ed. C. 865. *E ao-paXs? i/ rou prdiv *a.h~v Cyr. iii. 3. 31. 0-
^wj tT rA.Xw [sc. S-^airawj], you are very audacious [bold with much boldness],
Ar. Nub. 915. 0ya<r} . . ya/tou iftv u^aia, Cyr. iv. 6. 9. TiXnov tJvett
PL Leg. 643 d. Ty<pXo ft TV aXX<wv awavrwv Symp. 4. 12.
y. With ADVERBS. 'El-s^ra/ w^rv, Ixsivov svsxa, tV M?i7/ 5e permitted us, as
far as respects him t Cyr. iii. 2. 30. "Op-oiei rots <rv<p*.o7s av ^sv, svsxa 71 T
W^ST^WV oq>6.X(*.uv, ' for all the good our eyes would do us,' Mem. iv. 3. 3.
KXw; was^ftfrXaw xs/Va/, it is well situated in regard to the voyage, Th. i. 36.
Taw vfgos 'AfavKious waXs^aw xx^u; uvToTi tioxu f> sraX/f x,a.6'iffTU.(r6a.i Id. iii. 92.
TJjy TJ IT) 0^axjf *^a5aw %HfifU*t t%nv Ib. (See also 363. /3.) 'Ypaf
otovrcti Sft-rcdav yivtffdttt rou eig%a,i uurouf ruv 'EXXsiv^v H. Gr. vi. 5. 38.
S. With VERBS. T?fs \#utX'uts x/v^uvyavra [= sv Ktvbvvu ovret], being
in danger of the fine for false accusation, Dem. 835. 14. Taipau . . <rav fttr
argirio-a.;, TQV $' ar/^ao-af, having bestowed upon the one, and denied to the other,
the honor of sepulture (<reiq>ov defining Tr/*v implied in vgoriffets and inpiiffots,
383. ), Soph. Ant. 21.
^396. GENERAL REMARK. Great care is requisite in
distinguishing the various uses of the Genitive, inasmuch as,
1 .) The Gen. may have different uses in connection with the same word ;
as, with <iw and *Xv (^ 356, .S7.>, 380), with Kop.^ (^ 357. N., 380),
with <TXsavsxT<y (5 351, 367), with cr^/r-rs? ( 349, 362. ^), with voppu
and iro&ffu ^ H47 y 363). The use of the Gen. with substantives is es-
pecially various.
2.) A word may have two or more adjuncts in the Gen. expressing differ-
ent relations ; as, 'Avaa<r<; ( 381. y), o* ( 391. S), ruy%civu and Siajxai
( 3SO. a). See 393. $.
C. THE DATIVE OBJECTIVE.
^ 397. THAT TOWARDS WHICH ANY THING
TENDS (^ 339) may be resolved into, i. That
cowards which any thing tends, as an OBJECT OF
APPROACH; and n. That towards which any thing
lends, as an OBJECT OF INFLUENCE. Hence the
Dative objective is either, (i.) the DATIVE OF AP-
PHOACH, or (n.) the DATIVE OF INFLUENCE; and
wo have the following general rule : THE OBJECT
OF APPROACH AND OF INFLUENCE is PUT IN THE
SYNTAX. NATIVE. [BOOK III.
DATIVE ; Or, in other words, since neither ap-
proach nor influence are regarded as direct action,
AN INDIRECT OBJECT is PUT IN THE DATIVE.
NOTES. . The Dat. of approach is commonly expressed in Eng. by
the preposition to, and the Dat. of influence, by the prepositions to and for.
/3. The DATIVE OBJECTIVE is the converse of the GENITIVE ; the Dat.
of approach contrasting with the Gen. of departure, and the Dat. of influenet
with the Gen of cause. See 338, 339, 345.
(i.) DATIVE OF APPROACH.
398. Approach, like its opposite, departure (< 346),
may be either in place or in character. Hence,
RULE XVII. Words of NEARNESS and LIKE-
NESS govern the Dative.
NOTES. . Words of likeness are related to those of nearness, in the same
manner as words of distinction are related to those of separation ( 346. N.).
/J. For the Genitive after some words of nearness and likeness, see 389,
394.
1. Dative of Nearness.
399. Words of nearness may imply either being near,
coming near, or bringing near ; and to this class may be re-
ferred words of union and mixture, of companionship and in-
tercourse, of meeting and following, of sending to and bring"
ing to, &c. Thus,
HiXei<reti . . *y itirtiu, to approach the entrance, iv. 2. 3. 07* xia<rf
avrw, having mixed it with urine, i. 2. 13. "E^ari i>ft~>, they will follow
you, iii. 1. ^6. \\'ip.-xca* ai-nj ayyiXot, sending a messenger to him, i. 3. 8.
*K rty irKtiffiettrnref $/'<p 2iv0j xtt.$j/u.tvof vii. 3. 29. 2a/ <ri*.a,; B-go*ovf
f^irt jEsoh. Sup. 208. 'Ey-yi/f V" y'^a< Cyr. iii. 2. 8. 2x<ru }ft,
tyj, r i>f lxi/yt PI. Phsedo, 100 C. (Cf. 394.) FI/TWV t'mu r$
ii. 3. 18 (Cf. 389). 'Eire ? iWTa . . fta, Ttfftra(f>i^ti U. 4. 9. "A*t
y(r) i^ipa #*oTif, 'at daybreak,' i. 7. 2. 'O^ew . . Ta?f "Exxr
II. (Jr. Hi. 2. 5. 'A.9MfttfH^/^9t9 roif "EXXn^ IV. 8. 8.
E< oftiXv<ra,iryr ixiivtu Mem. i. 2. 15. 2a/x^aru opiXrira. 'yivo/u.ivu Ib
12 (cf. Ib. 48, and 389). 'A e /;< . . olxt,or*re f ii. 6. 28. K<,/
,*? ri; raX<^iw ( 367) PI. Rep. 370 d. Kao-Ann?* aXX>7Xf PI. Leg.
844 c. *E;i< *</ XXiXa/ n ra/ yiw ^v<r/f PI. Soph. 257 a.
'A<raTa T^ SivoQuvn EixXi/3jf vii. 8. 1. Own TCTI Kvgty liven yfaXt
\. 2. 26. Klrif a,Qix,oiro Ib. 4. ' Af&niax).nt 2/t/a/j wX^i Th. i. 13.
*H*i/ ripiv a>ij AgiffTOf Cyr. vi. 3. 15. T H*i pot yini, it belonged [came] to
me by birth, Soph. (Ed. C. 738. Ta ipai v^ff-hwra. Cyr. v. 1. 15 (see 364).
lii'rrovros *i^<y Soph. El. 747. Tot rouraig a.x,o\ovfta iraff^ovrof PL
Tim. 88 d (cf. 389. R.). *A*aXt/^ rjf Qvfu PI. Leg. 836 c. T$
rev t;*rig/vfl }/)f gllr/Aj Cyr. viii. 6. 18.
1H. l.J OP APPROACH. OF INFLUENCE. 287
vii. 2. 5 (cf. 389. R.). 'H 'oia.tax* rri *ojt>ff6i* <f>uluxrj Cyr.
L 4. 17. A*/ ayovrff airy vii. 3. 16. Avny TO xtgaj agigau Ib. 29.
REMARKS, a. Traffic is a species of intercourse; hence, Hoo-ev *iv?.ai
fai ra %otgi$iet ; How can I trade with you for your pigs ? Ar. Ach. 812
( 374). 'ilv no- op, a i vot, I will buy of you, Ib. 815. 'Eyu #iu(*,cx.t r<fi*\
AT. Ran. 1229.
/3. A substantive is sometimes repeated in the Dat., with an ellipsis, to ex-
press succession ; as, 'AXX tpovey tfiovos Ot^iTo^d "Sopo* aXsri, but slaughter
upon slaughter [slaughter foUowing slaughter] has destroyed the house of (Edi*
pus, Eur. Ph. 149G. Mj rixrtiv ir'eirav a. ret it Soph. El. 235.
2. Dative of Likeness.
^ 4OO. Words of likeness include those of resemblance*
assimilation, comparison, identity, equality, &c. Thus,
"Op, 01 01 roTf aXXa/5, like the rest, vi. 6. 16. 'E^f $1 SIM /u.lv olx. t"ot<rtf,
but me he did not liken to a god, Apol. 15. Ta aXjj^e; ivopufy ro etvro <rtf
fa.i8it* tivcti, he thought sincerity to be the same with folly, ii. 6. 22. "Itrovt
. . rovrois a/fy*av, equal to these in number, Mag. Eq. ii. 3. 'Opoius roif
5XA.o<j Mem. iv. 7. 8. 'Opoiouv itturov aXX* PI. Rep. ,S9:5 c.
Sw PL Theset. 1 76 b. To rof xaX< iiopotov Mem. iii. 8. 4. '
tS trot xa.1 rouro Mem. iv. 3. 10. 'Qf&o'tigofit.os X/ 'PL Epin. 987 b. 2-
xa,t yi ftriv oftogoi fi[&7v Cyr. V. 2. 25. 'AxXsiXwj ofAoffx^ivovvris Ib. ii.
I. 25. K.XE<K^^M not,} oftorgoivri^of ytvoftivo; iii. 2. 4. 'Q f&uvuftos \ptoi
PI. Rep. 3SO b (cf. 389. R.). Ilu^t'i'y/u.xret op.oioxa.6n ro7{ fom^oif
Ib. 4O9 b. H^off<flo{ * ru%v rufAOf <*a.hi Eur. Ion, 359. 2<pj^v it*,<pt-
ftirrcirovf Ar. Vesp. 1102. Ta St xfiu. . . ira^a <r \*<rnt roTs tXaipg.'-
M; i. 5. 2. 'AXXa <piXo<ro$ai ftl* toixetf ii. 1. 13. lisra^aL/ ^o>7 a-rs/xa^wn
ra aT PL Crat. 402 a. Hfffk^tU tis rauro [== ro avro, $ :39] ^7 uv-
rtif iii. 1. 3O. *E ru avru *<v5uw rar? <ptx.vXora.rois a.lu^ovfjt.a.1 Th. vii. 77.
*Of spot fjttas \yivtr ix, purges Eur. Ph. 151. Ow */ o-i; TW-TTS/ 7>f iVaj
rXiyaj t,4to/ ; Ar. Ran. 636. TV* I* -rat; JVt; fift7 ovri, ' on an equity with
us,' Hier. 8. 5. '0 fi^os uvurol row a.fffavi7s rets l<r^S^o7s Cyr. vii. 5.
65. A/s?Xj -^U^KS iffa,(>i6[Aovs rols etffrgais PL Tim. 41 d. 'J^jX/*a*
i So?f Symp. 8. 1.
(ii.) DATIVE OF INFLUENCE.
^ 4O1. The Dative of influence expresses a
person or thing which is affected by an action,
property, &c., without being directly acted upon.
Influence has every variety and degree. On the one hand,
it may be so immediate, that it can scarcely be distinguished
from direct action, and the Dat. expressing it is used inter-
changeably with the Ace. ; and, on the other hand, it may be
so remote, that it can scarcely be appreciated, and the Dat.
expressing it might have been omitteci without impairing' the
sense.
288 SYNTAX. -- DATIVE. [BOOK III
RULE XVIII. The OBJECT OF INFLUENCE is
put in the Dative.
4 O2. The Dative is governed, according to this rule
by,
. Words of ADDRESS, including those of call and command,
of conversation and reply, of declaration and confession, of ex-
hortation and message, of oath and promise, of reproach and
threatening, &c. Thus,
Ouros Kt^w tJVtv, </iis man said to Cyrus, i. 6. 2. Ta/
called out to Clearchus, i. 8. 12. A/aXt ^^SVTSJ jJUUfXMf, having conversed
with each othe.r t ii. 5. 42. Ta7> ri yawxX^a/f nvilfi /u.t} ^niyttv vii. 2. 1 2.
A.$y^< Tfly fjt,a.vTila.v ru ^ux.oa.rii iii. 1. 7. Ta/ 'Evt/aX/'o/ iXiXil^oufft i. 8.
1 8. To7t yy<V*9/j f y^i/y t x * X t w i iv. 3. 1 3. ' H r .* i X I r< f Tip iguvn
-rcivruv Sat.tip.at.frrt PI. Conv. 182d. *AXXjXo/j / f x i X f vo vro iv. H. 3.
'Atprtynffdi rovrsu, ri ffai a. ir i x. /> t v & p r, v \\\. 2. 2G. 'Ayyi^Xovfi vo7f
ffT^etrturetn i. 3. 21* Het^nyyti^t <ro7s (foou^ai^eis i. 1.6. ' <ri<r %vou-
ff,tt i ffoi 5i* Ta.Xa.vroi i. 7. 18. Oi ft'*/* <P op 0.1, J'ipj, rovroi; Mem. iii. 5. 20.
Ei 2i r/f airw . . ovu$/e< lb. ii. 9. 8. 'H -rt iX o u'v ulru V. 6. 34. 'Ex-
{wi Tfl7f "EXXtja-i ffv<ntivai.ffa.<r6 0.1 iii. 4. 36. 'O^-crav (rXarava; <rnXi ^i.
fvi%*> Ar. Nub. 1008. 'AvsTXt* awrw o 'ATXX^v iii. 1. 6. "(V-r-s^ ayrw
ftetfriuros wv vi. 1.22. '0 >!) pdirif, the prophet to the Thraciaiis t
i. e. </J Thracian prophet, Eur. Hcc/1267. 'AXX' ^v<r' av^} cravra Eur. Med.
1157.
1 0!l. /?. Words of ADVANTAGE and DISADVANTAGE, in-
cluding those of benefit and injury, of assistance and service,
of favor and fidelity, of necessity and sufficiency, of fitness and
unfitness, of convenience and trouble, of ease and difficulty, of
safety and danger, &c. Thus,
rf Kt^y, Parysatis favored Cyrus, i. 1. 4.
ft pa. . . T/V K^i-/, useful to the Cretans, iii. 4. 17. "Ocoj av T?
rvpq'm iii. 2. 27. U^off^^a $' fan Soph. GEd. C. 1774 (cf. '389. R.>
Ay a. 6 a. u.^ari^oit Cyr. viii. 5. 22. K^I/TTM tat/rf iii. 1.4. Xi/^at
itf-r/y ira vii. 6. 4. A-Vftetivofttvov ro7< ftiigaxioif Ar. Nub. 928. OSruf
\ttfi6ovi aXXw'Xflif iv. 2. 26. TWra/f l-rtev^t7rt V. 8.21. 0" <r
w-^iro?/*i ii. 5. 14. To/V Saaw<r< vrXavrot evliv a (f> i X 1 7 JEsch. Pers.
842. 'A^-rnftt *iptx >- Id. Pr. 501. Ta^ <p;x,- f >jy i/v Cyr. i.
/>. 13. "Of ^iXu riftui7v vretrgi Eur. Or. 924. 'Eav yra/ TWT ^;-
(iffura.i ii. 1. 10. Ilifl-ra/ avri; Kv^w ii. 4. 16. AiT ifrra|a< rot
tvToi lli^ffrt av^,' iii. 4. 35. ELaXXw* ^*iv / lififfii ( 357) Cyr. i. 6. 9.
'Ejtta} (tttv aoxtT <ri< <rovr<a* rot. I'lgnftivit V. 7. 11. Xaf/ov i*a,vot> ftvgiaif
inS^u-rets >l)tinff'i vi. 4. 3. 'E^XotrT ati rjj vfttrigx tv^ctiftov'tx ii. 5. 13.
'Ey r/y/ i ^ cr a J ci //t j V. 7. 10. "E^To^af y a"a< Zswj vii. 8. 4.
TJ >.// l*-i<jrt i. 9. 6. EJ atfAorrotret aiir* Cyr. i. 4. 18. "AxXy
Vf V 8 ' /C?'' "X 1 Tfl^* *eX M X^ *' * Soph. Ant. 736. 'Era/^auy iT<
wT<j rat/f Iffittt i. 6. 3. 'OJaf . . f*.v%a,rof ti<riX0t7v ffrga.riup.otn i. 2. 21.
*H TaiTa ra7f -aa-< tip.a%ti tovfftt ivptiiffrtgn iv. 6. 12.
I^ cr vii. 7. 51. 'Er<* / Ji? a /wa< tffriv Ib. 54.
".H I ] OF INFLUENCE. 289
4O4. y. Words of APPEARANCE, including those of
seeming, showing, clearness, obscurity, &c. Thus,
nZa-i SjX<jy iyivtro, it was evident to all, H. Gr. vi. 4. 20. 2ai etu $n
\uffu o4iv \yu rtfi ffou a,xovu ii. 5. 26. "ASjjXav ^ttsv fetvri cc,v$uirau 'ofn
TO (Jt,i\Kav i%u vi. 1. 21. Aitr%vn<r0eti ftoi Soxu i. 7. 4. Mj a,<ra%o%y ti^v
ii. 3. 9. Ta?V $ <r*a-/y iSs/xy t;a-a v iv. 5. 33. Ilae-i ra<p? Vect 4. 2.
Avro7; raX<y $0.111 rat o M^a^arrjj iii. 4. 2. AotftGaivuv raij ToXif&ietJf . .
Qotvtgouf ffei oVraj, a i> a v /; f al ayre; txtivaig Cyr. i. 6. 85.
5. Words of GIVING, including those of offering, paying
distributing, supplying, &c. Thus,
A/$<r< $ yrw Kw^o? pv^'iaus "Saftixovs, cfnd Cyrus gives him ten thousand
Juries, ii. 6. 4. T^ &' auv ffT^etnS. ran uvrsduxi Kvgos (x.iff6'ov i. 2. 12. T
^t a!XX ^/avsTjao:/ rotf ffr^a.Tnyo7( vii. 5. 2. TV? ffrgaryyoTs ^agev Ib. 3.
IV? Xofcayorf xetTtf^i^iffffn Ib. 4. 'EHfio tpoi ir'tXti rt "2,iv$ns, ol% ourug
irsXj/ ^craw, u; uv ri t/uoi $ain irriQo'i'ro, xcti XX Uf/Hv u. V or i fftisv Vli. 6.
16'. 0<4/^ax? O.VTOIS i-ragifftivo-uv iii. 3. 'JO. Tv ray 3-saw Soffit iifAiv PI.
Apol. 30 d. 2<wv 'H^axXtr Sw^n/ttarwy Soph. Tr. (>68. Bar/Xe7 la-ffpet
iv. 5. :H. OWTE ix$r>flf ?T/ V^ v p i <r 6 o1 r '/i s i. 3. 9.
e. Words of OBLIGATION and VALUE. Thus,
Ta7; ffr^ttnurttif uQiitero (uirS'os, pay was due to the soldiers, i. 2. 11. B-
n\ii av <raXXaiJ a|/a< y'wotvro ( '574), 'worth much to the king,' ii. 1. 14.
*A|/a; . . ^a.ta.rou <rn <x-oZ.it, meriting denth from [to] the city, Mtm. i. 1. 1.
* H; y |<ay t7 &ouri*.t7 u<f>t7vett, ' unworthy of the Mug,' or ' disgraceful to
the king,' ii. 3. 25. 'T^y t"i<ri<ra,t %&<>* i. 4. 15.
4O5. f. Words of OPPOSITION, including those of con-
tention, dispute, enmity, resistance, rivalry, warfare, &c.
Thus,
At/to* vfjuv a y Tirana/, to oppose to you famine, ii. 5. 19. 'E^/^ayra
ol <rtoi ffoty'itt.;, contending with him in skill, i. 2. 8. "H^a IlaXXa^ r* i'f/y Eur.
Iph. A. 183. 'Atriot tivott ro7s voXiftiais i. 8. 17. 2ra-/a^ayra awry
ii. 5. 28. T^ayya; arf i^^os iXtv0t^ia, xut vapois tvetv-r/os Dem. 72. 2.
'llt*ry tyyr<io-8T< vii. 6. 5. 'Avrife/iov XeQov ru ft.at.aTM iv. 2. 18.
Oyrs $a.<rtXi7 U,VT i* oiov piS a. TJJ? ^5Jf ( 373) ii. 3. 23. 'AXXar^/w-
Ta-ra,? Tt/Tj Dem. 72. 1 (cf. ^ 349). 'Tfraa-rJjyas/ uuro7f *K6riva,7oi ve\-
ff/i<rxv<ris iii. 2. 11. T&J if&eji ctbtXQu foXtf&ios i- 6. 8. T/avatipE^vt/ . . -a-
Xst.i/vrai. I. 8. Oi^ij awraJ i,t6a^;Tai. 8. 23. 4>/ey yag MuoK0uv!
TI uovei ffgaxiv^uitvffcti <ru fixgSagtu Th. i. 73. 'Zlirri o v v rott . . aXX>7-
Xejff-. Ar. Ach. 24. 'Hj ivtou*.ivai O.UTU i. 1. 3. 'E<r<at;Xj ipolv.6
29. A/xa^a^tvaj rf rT^/ PI. Euthyph. 4 e.
77. Words of YIELDING, SUBJECTION, and WORSHIP, including
those of homage, obedience (cf. 377. 1), prayer, sacrifice,
&c. Thus,
nv7- ra?f 9-<3?> vfo^a, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. 'E^aaJ
ci SsXsri riiSiffdix.t, you are not willing to obey me, i. 3. 6. *Ey ftai <rti
f6n<ri, if you will listen to me, i. 4. 14. Ew^sa-^ac/ <ro7s . . B-ia7<, to pray to
the gods, iv. 3. 13. 'H trr^KTia, trot i/Q t 7<ro vi. 6. 31. 'T-ra^w^ 5<r< <r
4. 18. E <ra !// af I*TI Aaxi^ctiftstieis vii. 6.43.
290 SYNTAX. - DATIVE. [BOOK III.
O< yy vat vvfixooi vii. 7. 29 (cf. 377. l).
i. 9. 17. 'A<rTTi7> fxi/y ii. 6. 19. "E0vt <ru A// vii. 6. 44.
i-roi'ti rn 9-( V. 3. 9. 2pay<ae-0-^< ry uvipu iv. 5. 4.
vo/ Sta/Vo Ar. Lys. 1277.
1OG. &. Words expressing a MENTAL ACT or FEELING
which is regarded as going out towards an object ; as those
of friendship and hatred, pleasure and displeasure, joy anc
sorrow, contentment and envy, belief and unbelief, trust and
distrust, &c. Thus,
Ky^w 0/Xa/Tt^oy, more friendly to Cyrus, i. 9. 29.
ra/> ffrga.rn'yeT; , were angry with the generals, i. 4. 12. 'E^r/Wsvav
for they trusted him, i. 2. 2. Eyva/'x&J? 'i^oi'v avrcy i. 1.5. Kaxovawf
ra~f "EXX*ja-< ii. 5. t-7. Tayra;? %tr0V) Kw^a; i. f). 26. Msv<wv jjyaXXsr*
ru iaTarav ii. 6. 26. QiiSivi ovru %a,'igtis &; Qi\ots a,ya.6o7s Mem. ii. 6.
35. Ef rivet, tugoirt xtti u/u,7v Kit} tft,<>i 0,^6 o fttvov vi. 1. 29. '^l^y'i^ovrt
t<r%v(>uf reu KXtaj^w i. 5. 11. XaATaf (p'tgu <ra~; fet^ovtri ff^K'yfjt.a.ffiv
i. 3. 3. 2riy*/ T7f 9r^y<r/v, 'to be content with,' Isocr. 159e. 'A y a-
? ro7f <rry/ctsva/y Dem. 13. 11. O^avwv <ro7s QHVIPUS T^au-ovim
i. 9. 19. r Hv iy - & Qfaw* (^ 376. ?) Cyr. viii. 4. 16. 'H^ *<-
frt7v ii. 5. 15. Tji rv%y iX-riffets Th. Hi. 97. "E-Ta-v aira^ayvrsj r
flr^ay^aar/ i. 5. 13. 'A^tJ^wy Ta?j ysyjvjj^Jvs/j vi. 2. 14. &a.up.(iu ^i
T TI <rox>LitffH ftou ruv <rvX.uv Th. iv. 85. 'Tirsorrjjo-o-av el %Xtxi; KV-TU
Cyr. i. 5. 1 . Some of these constructions may perhaps be referred to the
instrumental Dat. ( 416).
4O7. t. Words expressing the POWER OF EXCITING-
EMOTION ; as, pleasure, displeasure, care, fear, &c. Thus,
'Awi^^avio-^as/ rets rrgctrtcureiit, to displease the soldiers, ii. 6. 19. 'E^ua^
^tXwo-n, it shall be my care, i. 4. 16. "On uitrS p'tXoi, [that it should be
a care to him] that he would take care, i. 8. 1 3. Ai ro ^iXs/v aVamv, through
the interest which all fell, vi. 4. 20. Zjv< T<WX o-v, eTS' iyo-, ^sAi/ -avw
( 376. $) Eur. Heracl. 717. r ll (p/Xrarov ^iXtj^a ^aa-/* ?raT f of .^Esch.
Cho. 235. Miro^iXii ^o*, it is a regret to me, / repent, Cyr. v. 3. 6. M-
ra/tiXs/v -ri <roi tQvirfa i. 6. 7. (See 376.$.) Ta/> ^sy uroXXo/V . . n^tfx9
U. 4. 2. 'H$y evpftotSoiiri re ire/u.et y iv. 5. 27. '~fft.7v Mvirols Xwwwjauf
yrf ii. 5, 13. <l>o f i Curare* re7{ *oXtpiois Hi. 4. 5.
x. VERBAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS, having a passive
signification. The property expressed by these verbals nas
relation to an agent ; which, as if affected by the property, is
put in the Dat. Adjectives of this kind usually end in -i6<; or
-rt'oc ( 314). Thus,
vreifi, wonderful to all [to be wondered at by all], iv. 2. 15.
'H(t7v . . oifAi vravree. Towriet, I think that every thing should be done by us, iii.
1. 35. Toy ftii o*Kttbi QovXo/Aivov cc<riiya.i, ro7( o?x,oi T^viXarov woif.ru a<TiX^i7t t
'an object of envy to his countrymen,' i. 7. 4. "Iy ftei tv-r^etxrert^at
y ii. 3. 20. Oi vorupoi . . vrga7ov<ri <r^of rut Wyett XictGaro) 'yiyvovree.i, 'can
be passed by those who ascend [become passable to those who ascend],' iii. 2.
22. Ewir/4i<r fly \vreiu6a. ro7f waXi^/a/f iii. 4. 20. Heretuof . . ritfv trr.
)<Cri(, ' for ua to pass [to be passed by us],' ii. 4. 6
CH. 1.] OF INFLUENCE. 291
4LO8. L SUBSTANTIVE VERBS, when employed to de-
note possession. These verbs and their compounds are used
with the Dat., in a varibty of expressions, which are variously
translated into English. Thus,
'EvratVa Kv^a; /3<r/Xs/ , here Cyrus had a palace [there was a palace to
Cyrus], i. 2. 7. Ta7j 31 u-ro-^/'ta, ttlv n, they had a suspicion, or they suspected,
i. 3. 21. fyopo; lyivtro roTs rr^etTieurais, [to the soldiers there came to
be a running] the soldiers began to run, i. 2. 17. TIjrs vreia-iv aiff%vv*iv sTva<,
so t/i-it all were ashamed, ii. 3. 11. Yvra.(>%ii ya,(> vuv ri/u.~v ovbiv ii. 2. 11.
'llj va^aj ex,lro7s tl; ft&xnv [sc* tffvf] i. 2. 1,5. 'Avayxj ^jj /*/ [sc. sW/], / am
now compelled, i. 3. 5. T Hv air</ a-aXj^oj, Ac nw/rfe war, i. 9. 14. IIeX<j . .
aVo^a 2/rrax?, a city named Sittace, ii. 4. 13. 'Eysve-ra xa< u EXX?v/ xaJ
/3* . . ra^vifffa.t, both Greek and barbarian could go, \. 9. 13. Ow y
5v dfycoi; Tigiffr'tivui iv. 7. 2. NtJv / t^tffTiv . . av^< ysv<r^a/ vii. 1. 21.
O^svoj ^rv {tiri'in iii. 1.20 (see 364). T/ ya^ JO-T* 'Eos^^s? xa) xoXoioT; ;
yi)/- zt7ia# /ts Erechtheus to do with jackdaws [what is there to Erechtheus, and
also to jackdaws]? AT. Eq. 1022. M^Ssv Jva/ ro/ / O/X/Vww -r^y^a.,
that you had no connection with Philip, Dem. 3 - _'0. 7. T/ TO/ vofAoa no.} <ry /3a
rava; ; Id. 855. 5. 'Exs/vaw ^ouXo/j-'ivM TU.VT l<r<ri, these things are [to him
willing] according to his will, or agreeable to him, H. Gr. iv. 1. 11. E/ aira!
^t ffol /SanXa^sva* t<TT/v a.iroKwifffa.i PI. Gorg. 448 d. E" <ra/ wbtftivep tirr'tv, if
it is your pleasure, PI. Phasdo, 78 b. Os'Xavn x,d/u,oi <rovr av %v Soph. CEd. T.
13^6. r H $i oil <ria 'A^^^Xay a.^6ofjt,ivia TO.UTO., 'displeasing to Agesilaus,'
H. Gr. v. 3. 13. N/x/ xooabi^op.'itM v <ra <xii rut 'JLyttrretiuv, ' were as
Hicias had expected,' Th. vi. 46.
4O9. ft. And, in general, words expressing any action,
property, &c., which is represented as being to or for some
person or thing. Thus,
ffoi, I drink to you, vii. 3. 26. Ksvaraip/av etvraTs Ivroivtrav, they
node for them a cenotaph, vi. 4. 9. Mtyrro Kotr/u,av avS^/, the greatest orna-
nent to a man, i. 9. 23. Tija y awi'ivett ro7f sraX^/a/;, it was time for the
nemy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. *2rf>a.<rivft.a, U.VTU ffuvtXtyiro i. 1.9. O? Xs/-
jr*(p u^rjo-TgT^ys/ V. 6. 36. Ba<r/X/ev T^;s TO/ trar^xfy iv. 4. 2. "E^;a
ya xa) awra; airaJ p.a,^rv^nffat,i vii. 6. 39. 'H/tJv TOV ftiirtJov ava<rgec%cu Ib. 40.
'E<)-w trituTu TiwSe ; Ar. Rail. 11. 34. EJ^yf/v nxovtrri ftnrtn ToZ.ift.tev $ogo
^Es\ h. Sept. 416. 'E/*a) St (tt/^vii ff%i<r/u.o{ a.p.q>vx.u $/, ' awaits me [is wait-
ing for me],' Id. Ag. 1 1'49. Na^/^a* 0.^0. v^T* IO-TIV iv. 6. 15. Flaov xa/va
iTv< xa/ dvcfyxotTov divS (>&<* ots ui. 1. 43. Aaiway ^a* uVs?* iii. 2. 29. 'Aya-
^aw . . *r/aj T>J ffToeiTiS vi. i. 20. 'H . . ira,T^cuot. Ifjuv otxiot PI. Charm. 157 e
Sflj wv trvy^ctviv O.VTU \. 1. 10. 'T^aj t^a) slva/ xa) yra^r^oc, XKI QiXovs
i. 3. 6. 'Iftciriet TV yuvetixi vii. 3. 27. TeiriH . . irXat;; vi. 4. 2. AJ ^i
t*<ro$oi rots pi* uvratuyioi; ov*>reti iv. 5. 25. 'H ^j [sc. e$a? r<v<] 5/abacvr< rot
vor/u.9y iii. 5. 15. Kaxas \yu yv*ctixa,s viifi trrvyu Soph. Ant. 571. AuTti
<ri (pgiva* <r/r r* trovos Eur. Hipp. 189.
410. REMARKS. 1. The remoter relations expressed
by the Dat. (^ 401) are various in their character, having
respect to place, time, sensation, thought, feeling, expression,
action, &c. They are expressed in two ways; (a.) by the
SYNTAX. - DATIVE. [BOOK III
Dat. simply, and (b.) by an elliptical form of construction, in
which the Dat. is preceded by u>$. Thus,
*H 0gx u,urv) iirriv . . i-rt ^i^ioc, its rov TLovrov tifrkiovn [sc. nv'i or
ro'i], this Thrace is upon the right to one tailing into the Pontus, or as you sau
into the Pontus, vi. 4. 1 (cf. Th. i. 24). T Hv $' vp^ fan livrt^n -r \ioyri
uoi, and it was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing]. Soph. Ph-
354. Quopivu a / . . a tj'X/aj cifjue,ueu8n, while he was sacrificing the sun was
eclipsed, Hdt. ix. 10 (this mode of defining time by a Dat. with a participle
is especially Ion.). Kasi <ris %govof ro7tr$' io-riv ou%t*.ti&u0us ; 'since this
event,' Soph. CEd. T. 735. To fu> i^ebiv a.-rropiv V ffupa, ovx &ya.v io-
ftoy %v, 'to the external touch,' Th. ii. 49. E7 yiwauos, u; llovri [sc. <pm/],
'as you appear to one beholding,' 'in appearance,' Soph. (Ed. C. 75. 'E^ai
y, arris adixas uv folfios kiyuv ffiQuxi, x^.t'itrrnv ^tiftietv otyXiffxtivii, ' accord-
ing to my judgment,' Eur. Med. 580. Kecirot tr \yu 'rifttjfo, ro7s Qoovov
fittu Soph. Ant. 9O4. K^ty yaj wv ^Xuros, us if* 01 [sc. ^ax/], -rari,
' as it seemed to me,' 'in my opinion,' Ib. 1161. Ow pa. rot A/', t<p, oS
xouy, us y Sftoi eix^eary. "AXX* us ifto}, v ^' tyu, pjrogt PI. Rep.
536 C. To fitly oity vofftifi.it, *XXa XKI uXXa. <x a, (totXiir ovrt ., rotouToy *)
Th. ii. 51. 0t; y^ iKffa^ti ft.i, rubt $' o"%ofiicu, 'so far as lay in him,' Soph.
Aj. 1 128. Max^ay (>> *>s yigovn, vr^ovtrroiXfis o$ov, 'for an old man [as
journeys are to an old man],' Id. CEd. C. 20. TS Si fta.\nrra. -reiyray pi-
ftvnffo poi, ftribiirori dyctftiytiv, but this most of all remember [for me], I pray
you, never to defer, Cyr. i. 6. 1O. *Ej ri pat &Xi^<r. dX*ti Soph. EL 887.
Oipxi fa i ixt/yovf rovt ciyaSous roe. rs^ixa pctb'iu; vutvuniv Cyr. i. 3. 15. Ow-
Toif \yu foi . . ra.yi ^'txttiot, ra.yrd'rSanv wbn a.x.pl$>u Ib. 17.
NOTE. The use of the Dat. to express remote relation is particularly fre-
quent in the pronouns of the first and second person. In the Greek, as in our
own and in other languages, the Dat. of these pronouns is often inserted, simply
to render the discourse more emphatic or subjective. Observe the examples
just above.
411. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take
a Dat. in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence ; as,
* $' ut/raTe o Kvftd^ns, and the bailiff led the way for them, i. e.
guided them, iv. 6. 2. CM yet frxi-rtvrit ro?s rvtf>Xo7f ^yovpida. Ar. Plut. 15.
'HjaJV rant l%nyovfttiot Soph. (Ed. C. 1589. 'Ayeirrn fietfii(>otri fioig-
(*(,,{ Qoas Eur. Iph. T. 31. T il Q^MI, li/Wa/j Id. Ph. 17.
ya.^ oux. a^gi* Si07; ^sch. Prom. 940. M^j Si eoi xcii vroXiftot/;
Cyr. vii. 2. 26. T H /3i?ni f,fn7y i <* Soph. Cfetl. C. 81.
*.}( ruy^l pot nuTtifietf Eur. HeracL 452. Ta * itftTr . . <r^
C MJ i. S. 16. fut&nut ixrolin piS'io-rctro Eur. Ph. 4O. Cf. 347, 350,
421. 2.
4: 1 . 3. A Dat. depending upon a verb is often used
instead of a Gen. depending upon a substantive ; as,
O/ . . lirieot aiiroTt ^tiiyrai, the horses are tied for them, = 01 "T-TOI avrui
, their horses are tied, iii. 4. 35. 'H . . rev x-ayroi <x%*i Xs/^/<ra^y
v$a. xctrt\u0rt vi. 2. 12 (cf. "H r ~Ktigi<ro<pav et%*l rev <ro.vros xa.<ri).v-
i. 3. 1). A/a ro oWcra^as/ eturu ro <rroiriv/u,a, ii. 4. 3. To?,- /3f Sa-
ry rt iri^Sy eiviffciyoy -raXXai, xi ra/y i-r-riruy . . iXr.Qdn<ra.v iii. 4. 5.
ii ft 1 1 yvctififfd rovs iv rjj %ug<f oirotf ai'ii^iftm [= ar iy TTJ tiftei
CH. L] RESIDUAL. INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 293
i. 7. 4. A.6wctioi* . ., lurt/Jrj a,vro7s el $<ifiu.^t>i Ix, rSjf ;* aVJjX^ov Th. I.
89. Ovxirt rot Tixva *.iv<r<rn Quo; Eur. Ph. 1547.
NOTE. The Dat. (chiefly of the personal pronoun) is sometimes placed as
a simple adjunct of tho substantive ; tnd in some instances, when so placed,
appears to depend strictly upon a participle understood. Thus, 'AvoGtevrs . .
TOO; rr,v victv rtfjt.lv -r'-iXtv, look upon our new state (i. e. the new state estab-
lished for us in the dialogue), PI. Rep. 43 1 b. OS "Si trifi ftois . . ol tra^t .
y'tvnrt Hdt. i. 31.
<A 1 3. 4. Sometimes two datives following the same
word, especially in Epic poetry, appear to be most naturally,
though not unavoidably, referred to the 2%T\na x# J oAov x
ftfQoe ( 334. 9) ; as, vftevog i'/utfod,' txdaioi xaQdly, imparted
strength [to each one, to the heart] to the heart of each one,
/L 11. *Ayunfpvovt ijvdars dvpw A. 24. Cf. 438. /?.
D. THE DATIVE RESIDUAL.
414. The Dative residual is used in ex
pressing adjuncts, which are riot viewed as either
subjective or objective (^ 338, 340. a). It simply
denotes indirect relation, without specifying the
character of that relation ; or, in other words, it
denotes mere association or connection. Hence we
have the general rule : AN ATTENDANT THING OR
CIRCUMSTANCE, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, is PUT
IN THE DATIVE.
NOTES, a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in
expressing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its char-
acter, would be expressed by either the Gen. or Ace. See 340. a, 341.
/3. The DATIVE RESIDUAL is expressed in Eng. most frequently by the
preposition with, but likewise by the prepositions by, in, at, &c. Cf. 345. N.,
397. a.
^ 415. The Dative residual may be resolved
into, (i.) the INSTRUMENTAL and MODAL DATIVE,
and (u.) the TEMPORAL and LOCAL DATIVE.
(i.) INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL DATIVE.
RULE XIX. The MEANS and MODE are put in
the Dative.
4 1 O. INSTRUMENTALITY and MODE may be either ex-
ternal or internal, and MODE may apply either to action or con*
dition. Hence, to these heads may be referred,
25*
294 SYNTAX. - DATIVE. [BOOK III
1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any
thing is done, or through which any thing comes to pass
Thus,
Aiirov a,xo*r!ii rig vfciXru^ one shoots him with a dart, i. 8. 27. 'E^s/tra*
TO . . Ix-rtxeu, pursued with cavalry, vii. 6. 29. 0va<ra> fyftwuv, to pun'
ish with death. Cyr. vi. 3. 27. 2^s^/a/f S;aa/vavr? i. 5. 10. "I?nri ry
/! Ib. 12. Aitiois <r<psv$ovav iii. 3. 17. Au^oif iripu i. 9. 14. Aa-
yots t-rtiffi ii. 6. 4. Tix/taigifffai ' w ru -^/'O^M iv. 2. 4. Yi^u^u. $1 ivwt
V^iuy/tini -rXo'iotf \VTTO. i. 2. 5. 'lf*.iirf&ivoi 8-tvget%i i. 8. 6. Qixobapn-
pitov vXivSois ii. 4. 12. Kwgej mj ge v/xf ii. 5, 22. Ta7? Se X ti-ro/u, i.
tois is riXara/av lA^ffvrsj, T^V ysjv eSsiayy Th. ii. 12. ET^ov ^ttvug Ty Iv^tiq,
vi. 4. 23. 'A.-ro0vvffxti roffeu vii. 2. 32. <J>/A/ ^tv x} tvvo'iu, l-rof^ivavt
11. 6. 13. O7 oe ftvi wetgtTiv, Tovravg v\y{tro % axgetTliez vivi *J ti^ixia. f
apiXiiq. iviivKt Cyr. viii. 1. 16. YlgovitTv pi* yi 'l%u ruvret <ry avfywrivip
yv&ftri, rou; 31 %ig<riv o<r\a^io^rtirea^ 3i&>^oju.ai $1 roa "vr-rea, rov $' Ivuvriot
avetr^i-^u T-/J <rov 'I-TTOV pupy Cyr. iv. 3. IS. Y].a.<ru.; xtvvirus rS rufturt
PI. Leg. 631 c. 'II roTs piXinv i<pi<ris Ib'. 717 a. Ta ya.^ 3o\u <ru> p.*
1uca.lcu xrjp.a.r ov%i ru^i-Tou Soph. ffid. C. 10'26. The Dat. of the missile
with verbs of throwing will be specially observed.
^417. REMARK. DATIVE OF THE AGENT. The Dat.
sometimes expresses that through whose agency any thing takes
place ; as,
all things have been done by us, i. e. our work is done,
i. 8. 12. E/ t TI xaAflv . . l-ri<r^ro Vft.lv vii. 6. 32. Ta fu^at. xixttvpivei
t*n ru "2tv0y vii. 2. 18. To7; $i Kigx.ugoc.iots.. ev% lu^uvro Th. i. 51.
Te7f "EXXtjo*! p.uro~vro Id. iii. 64. \T.gofff6\oi; q>u\a.<rff<ru.i Soph. Aj.
539. "Hj trot $uff<po/>' il^ya.yra.1 xaxu. Ear. Hec. 1085. T/v< ya.(> for a
. . rgo<r<p<jflv axouffctip Ivos, ' through whom,' i. e. ' from whom,' Soph. El.
226. Ai^ara ai exrirrgav, received from him the sceptre, B. 186 (the Dat.
following. Ji'^o^a/, instead of the Gen. with , is especially Epic, and
might perhaps be referred to 409, thus, took for him. the sceptse). Qi/tio-n
. . 3i*T tiras 0. 87.
NOTE. This use of the Dat. is most frequent with verbs in the Perf. and
/'////;. This DATIVE OF THE AGKNT with passive verbs, and that with passive
nerbals ( 4O7. x), might perhaps have been referred to the same analogy.
$ 4 1 8. 2.) The way or manner, in which any thing is
done or affected, together with attendant circumstances. Thus,
Ow ya-t x<tvyri, aA.X fi-yy . . 9ro<rji<rav, for *t/iey advanced not with
clamor, but in silence, i. 8. 1 1. \\ 0,^1X6 iHv oux jv /3/ i. 4. 4. "Ll<r*i <>(>yy
ixiXiucri i. 5. 8. '\'J).KVVUV ava nodrof / 5 ^ o v v <r t r u " r *" & i. > s . I . T*4
X7f raTj xnpaXaTy iv TM iroXifttv J<ax/vJwvn/u Ib. 6. A^a/nw St?v Ib.
18. T0WT* ri/ T^eiriy iwa^iw^o-ay ffra.6fji.ouf rirrtt^us iii. 4. 23. \.loeii/op.t-
>./.. TJ[ '$ Ib. 30. Taj /3/a r^a|/,- PI. Pol. 28O d.
I;IMAI:K. Tlie pronoun auras is sometimes joined to the Dat. of an asso-
object to give emphasis ; as, My) fipeis uvru7( ra7s rgwoift xa.ra$u<rn t
test he aliniilil shift us, triremes anil till [with the triremes themselves], i. 3. 17.
IloXXot/f ya.^ ffi a.uro7{ roif 'Iwon x.a.Ta.x.^Yiu.vtffvv'x.i (!\T. i. 4. 7.
mv<ro7f v\n^tuf^a.ffi oV.^gj<rav Isocr. 176 b. The preposition s-u'v, which
vH. 1.] OF MEANS AND MODE. - OF TIME AND PLACE. 295
common in such adjuncts if the etlro; be omitted, is sometimes expressed even
with it ; as, "Qiru; . . i/ avroTo-i ro7s xngiois ixriTfttiirtiov PL Rep. 564 c.
Cf. S. 498 and T. 482.
3.) The respect in which any thing is taken or applied (cf
^ 437). Thus,
yi fipZi Xuplunr, inferior to us in number [in respect to number],
rii. 7.81 ( 349). ILsX/? . . Qei^etxos ovoftari i. 4. 1 1. TJ i<ri/u,t X Ice.
riti7*iti Tut (piXav i. 9. 24. Tjj Quvy rga^vs ii. 6. 9. XgjpKtri xet)
r i pet 7; ravruv i-rXiovix.ri7rt ( 851) iii. 1. 37. TaTf ^u%ctis ippuptvi-
ertgoi Ib. 42. 'Ev< $1 povtu rgoi^evtriy 01 ivrvtis ripeis iii. 2. 19. Tw /3 1 X-
viff-rtf rev ofXiTixou /3X<p#jva/ Th. iv. 73. *P/j plv pfactt tirxt x. 3O4.
419. 4.) The measure of difference, especially Vith
the Comparative. Thus,
X^o Ss ffv%Yeu S<r<rtov, and sometime after [later by a considerable time],
{. 8. 8. IloXXiw $1 Sffrigov ii. 5. 32. Na^/'^wv, 'off (a fjt.lv S-arroy 'i\6oi t TO-
fouTca a.<jra.a.<rx.*vu.ff f rt)'riQ'jf fictiriXiT p.a.'^taSa.t^ o & tu d\ o"^oXa/flTi^ov, voffovTot
VX.IQV ffvva.yt'i(>'.<ri}a.t (sxfiXi? ffra.nufta., thinking that [by how much] the more
rapidly he should advance, [by SO much] the more unprepared he should find the
king for battle, Sfc., i. 5. 9. 'E v i a. u r u rgnrSuTigos, a year older, Ar. Ran.
18. YlgovXetGt *-oXXf Th. vii. 80. X^avw piriitiiTa. voXXS Hdt. ii. HO.
5.) The Dative with ^a'o^wt, to use [to supply one's need
with, 284. 3]. Thus,
, using divination, Mem. i. 1 . 2. 'E^JJra ro7s %ivois, 'em-
ployed,' i. 3. 1 8. T;~j 't-r-rats a^to-To, xfitrfai, ' manage/ i. 9. 5. XUMMM
^w-a/ttvav, ' ha%nng met with,' Uem. 293. 3. Tout %(>&>/tivous IKVTM, ' asso-
ciating with,' Mem. iv. 8. 11. T H< Kv^os voXtfita. i^tjTo, which was hostile to
Cyrus, ii. 5. 11. 2<p^ vrtifofAtvoif I^^TO ii. 6'. 13.
NOTE. NfljM/^ has sometimes the Dat. after the analogy of
as, Qvff'tuis "biimffiois vop,i%ovrss, ' observing,' Th. ii. 38. Ev0-(i/a
rtpot ive'/ti^ov Id. iii. 82.
(u.) TEMPORAL AND LOCAL DATIVE.
^ 42O. RULE XX. The TIME and PLACE AT
WHICH are put in the Dative (cf. ^ 378, 439) ; as,
1. TIME. T5J 5' $mgiif [sc. ^^E^] %xtv oiyyf.\f>s t but the next day
there came a messenger, i. 2. 21. "H/era ya^ TWT>! T y pi git pct^t.7a-Sa,t )3-
ffvXsa i, 7- 14. T>j iurngetiet ovx. 'Kfetvyitrctv ol <x"i>h.t[x,iai, ovSi 7% <r o i T t) '
vn oi- TtTit^Tfi, VVKTO? vgotrtXtfovTif, x.a.Tu.'ka.u.&dt.voiHTt ^aotov i/Ti^i^iov, 'but
on the fourth, having passed them in the night ($ 378),' iii. 4. 37. Avo-ctv-
^oo? ^ TJJ ivrtovirn vvuri, ITU agfyos v, lo-ri/u-nvtv H. Gr. ii. 1. 22. Tg/r
/*>ivi av>j^;^>j ecr" "Av^ov Ib. i. 4. 21. Teu $' ivtovn tnt, ea v 'OXvpyna.f,
n TO ffretbiov Ivixa, K.OOKIVX; Ib. ii. 3. 1. Ta/ S* O,V<TM X.<>OVM, and at the same
time, tb. i. 2. 1 8. 1 Ss 'AynrtXMf ^fo r0Ti (rtrEc, ' at length,' Ib. iv.
1. 34. '11; ^ixayx'oou ^^av<w uXo^ot/i TI xcti r'i.x.v iifftbutnv Eur. Tro. 2O.
Cf. 378, 439.
2. PLACE. Ta T-rata. r r MaaSiwu *a/ SaXa^Tv/ *a) IlXara .
296 SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK II*
7y, the victories at Marathon and Salami* and Platcca, PI. Menex. 245 a.
T&iy ri Mafalo/yj /u.a%t<reif*.ivei>v xat ruv tv SaXa^; va.Vfjt.a.x.nira.vituv Ib.
241 b. Ty vra.Xa.ia.1 <pnyov ccv^ijtreti vrort ^,co$uvi Soph. Tr. 171. Quanta
Id. CEd. C. 401. 2o?s ery ffruffti roitf/ois Ib. 411. 'OSoTf x,u*
at/roy Id. Ant. 226. Ks/>evy <r$a Afytffov Eur. El. 763.
. REMARKS, a. To the LOCAL DATTVE may be referred the
use of the Dat. to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs ;
as, Avva^/y tivd^ufots ^"v, ' among men,' Eur. Bac. 310. f&fauftfaM
<ro7; T'OTI ttvQ^cafois PI. Prot. 343 C. Ovx ct l^ivoot; Ifjtoi ufAetgTitts oviibof
olliv, 'in me,' Soph. CEd. C. 966. 07a / 'Oft^^u A.ioju.ri'bvs Asyj.-, 'in
Homer,' PI. Rep. 389 e. 'Qtiufftiis ya. nlru ['O^w] Xo^s? ray 'Aya-
uiftvovtx, PI. Leg. 706 d. 'A^i^t-ria, Tpfarfn Z. 477. "Guy x^tires Ifrt p'i-
va.ffiv Kvx&uvso-ffi a. 7 1 .
/3. The use of the LOCAL DATIVE in prose is chiefly confined to those ad-
verbs of place which are properly datives ; as, retvry [sc. #*], in this region,
here (iv. 5. 36), T^I, here (vii. 2. 13), j? and ^, u;Aere (ii. 2. 21), &*.Xy,
elsewhere (ii. 6. 4), xuxXu, in a circuit, around (i. 5. 4; iii. 5. 14), olxot
(=y y ), a< Aome (i. 1. 10), 'A^'vjjw (= AJfoait), at Athens (vil 7. 57).
See 320. ';, 379. .
E. THE ACCUSATIVE.
^422. The office of the Accusative is to ex-
press DIRECT TERMINATION OF LIMIT (^ 339) ; and
the general rule for its use is the following : AN
ADJUNCT EXPRESSING DIRECT LIMIT is PUT IN
THE ACCUSATIVE.
REMARK. In a general sense, all the OBLIQUE CASES may be said to ex-
press limit ; but the Gen. and Dat. express it less simply and less directly
than the Ace. In some connections, however, these indirect cases are used
interchangeably with the Ace. See 341, 401, 414. , 424. 2.
The Accusative, as the case cf direct limit, is
employed,
(i.) To limit an action, by expressing its direct
object or its effect. Ace. OF DIRECT OBJECT AND
EFFECT.
(ii.) To limit a word or expression, by applying
*t to a particular part, property, thing, or person.
Ace. OF SPECIFICATION.
(in.) To express limits of time, space, and quan-
tity ACC. OF EXTFNT.
CH. l.j OF DIRECT OBJECT AND EFFECT. 297
(iv.) To limit a word or expression, by denoting
degree, manner, &c. ADVERBIAL Ace.
NOTES, (a.) These uses are not only intimately allied, but sometimes blend
mth each other. (b.) For the use of die Ace. to denote the subject of the In-
finitive, see the syntax of that mode.
(i.) ACCUSATIVE OF THE DIRECT OBJECT AND EFFECT.
^423. RULE XXI. The DIRECT OBJECT and
the EFFECT of an action are put in the Accusative.
Aaiy Tr<ra<piyjy, taking Tissaphernes, i. 1.2. 'J&foiiTro <rjv fvL-
Aayjjy, he made the levy, i. 1.6. 'Ywuvrsvi nXivrvv i. 1. 1. A<aA-
A.J< <roy K(/y Ib. 3. ^i^ovtret etlrov Ib. 4. 'O "Si Kvgo; wTaXay rout
Qivyovrets, ffu*.Xi%a,; ff T ^nriu pa. IvoXio^utt M/X^-ray Ib. 7.
NOTE. The distinction between the direct object and the effect of an action
is not always obvious, and it sometimes appears doubtful to which head an
adjunct is best referred.
4:24. REMARKS. 1. The term action is employed in this rule to
denote whatever is signified by a verb ; and the rule properly applies only to
the adjuncts of verbs ( 392). Adjectives and nouns, however, sometimes
take the Ace. after the analogy of kindred verbs ; thus, 2$ . . Qv.tft,oi, able
to escape you, Soph. Ant. 788 (cf. r H /* Quyu trt , Id. El. 1503). f Erj.
fryftovts Tt %<ra.v TO, -r^affyiKOvra. Cyr. iii. 3. 9. 'E^a^yy sTva/ TO, iguTufAtvet
PI. Charm. 158 c. T -rt pir'ta^a. $oiriff<rYit PI. Apol. 18 b (cf. Tut
ftiTiuouY (ppovriffTris Symp. 6. 6). Xaaj f oof o [Arto s ^Esch. Cho. 23. TSJf
vf*.o'oov <piva, *.vvm Id. Ag. 103. ~2,vi'ifTo^a. . . KO.X.O. Ib. 1090. See
also } 4;il. 1.
2. INIany verbs, which according to the preceding rules govern the Gen. or
the Dot., are likewise construed with the Accusative (see 341, 401,
422. R.) ; as, 'n^tXsTy p.\v rovf <p/Xay?, . . /3XafT$;y "Ss <rol>s i%0govs PI.
Rep. 33.4 *b (cf. 4O3). n^ai-^ova-iv at i-r-riTf vpas iii. 2. 19 (cf. 350).
*Av^ KKTria^i \oy6v PI. Euthyd. 283 b (cf. 350. R.). Ayyas^a* ovri fft
ulfffifffui ii. 5. 4 (cf. $ 375. 0). MtraSaTty etvro?s -rugoui iv. 5. 5 (cf.
Tb. 6, and 367). Asyj/y r txfaivtv etv-rou; vii. 5. D (cf. 402).
\j> 425 3. ATTRACTION. A word which is properly construed other-
wise sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction ( 329. N.),
especially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypalluge, or an interchange
of construction (wrXXay7, exchange). Thus, E< 2s /u.' uV .ii Xoy<; 'i'Jf^tf
[:= pot Noyaus or Xay/wy], if you had always begun your addresses to me thus,
Soph. El. 556. Ata-rarav y'oon . . xetrdgtu, I will begin lamentations for my
master, Eur. Andr. 1199. Cf. 427. 9, 431, 433.
l. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, often
takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in the Ace.,
by attraction ; as, "H<$/ airay, an ft'tffo* t%oi, he knew [him] that he occu-
pied the centre, i. 8. 21. Triy y wTi^CaXjy vui o^'icav iSsoVxso-ay, ft* <*(>a-
*TaX<p^s/i iii. 5. 18. "HXsy^ay rjy xvxXy -retrav ^ea^ttv, ris ixdtrrtt tin
Ib. 14. OTvav iQgao-iv, tvSee, y x,art>(>ueuy pivot iv. 5. 29. Tl; ooa. rot
, isro'm iv. 7. 11.
29S SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK II
5. PERIPHRASIS. The place of a verb is often supplied by an Ace. of iht
kindred noun joined with such verbs as voitu (or more frequently -raiio/u.xi\
&yu, f%u, ri^n/u.i t &C. ; thus, Kvgo; i^'ircttfiv X.KI oL^dpov ruv 'ExXjjvo/v ivoiyiriv
[= U-jjraa-e xai vi6pr)<rt raits "EXAnva?], Cyrus made a review and numbering
of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2. 9. 'Egsrainv rou.'ira.t Ib. 14.
Tv fagn'a.v 'froitTrt i. 7. 20.
6. Such periphrases sometimes take an Ace. by virtue of the implied verb ,
as, ^xivt} fji.lv XBI v$<T$ o.^xa.yw TOiViroiptvos [= et^a.ffec.i\, Th.
Viii. 62. T*ji- %auv KtnTctl^ofAoeJi; Xs/'av ivoulro [= IXsTjAa-rs/] Ib. 41. "A
%>]* <rt pir^tus . . tr-ra^v e%ttv [= rvrtvtuv] Eur. Here. 709. Ta $' lv p.'t-
ftu n *.r,<r<riv "<r%sis Soph. CEd. C. 583. T/v* Kti TUXUS u%' oc,xegttr<rov olpuycii
. . 'Ayizftiftvoves, [= <ri ub' uxogiffrus olfAu^ns 'AyoifAiftvovet] Id. El, 122.
In like manner, TaJJra xcif* t%tt ie'o0of \_= rouro xut lyu xo6u\ Eur. Ion,
672. Yet see 333. 5, 434.
4 2O. 7. ELLIPSIS. The verb which governs the Ace. is sometime
omitted; particularly,
a.) In EMPHATIC ADDRESS; OS, OJrj, u at, *roi [sc. Xiyea or xaXiw], You
there, ho! you / mean, Ar. Av. 274 ( 343. b). 2 ^, trt <rjy vtvavffetv u
j;, x.tt.rct(>vii p.vi ^I^^KK'IWH rciSi ; Soph. Aut. 441.
/3.) In ENTREATY ', ES, M, -r^'of ert ^<wv [sc. ixirtvea'], rXJJf /tti wja^tJva/,
/ beseech you by the gods, do not forsake me, Eur. Ale. 275. (Observe the
arrangement, which is frequent in earnest entreaty ; and compare, in Lat.,
Per omnes te deos oro Hor. Ode i. 8. 1. Per te ego deos oro Ter. Andr.
iii. 3. 6.)
y.} In PROHIBITION; as, Mj Tg<a? ?T< [sc. vren7rt], No more delays!
Soph. Ant. 577. Mj poi ftvgiaus, priSi Sttrftu^ovs %'tvov; [sc. Xeys], Do^l
talk to me of your ten thousand or twenty thousand mercenaries, Dem. 45. 11.
M fin *-(>e<p<riv Ar. Ach. 345.
J.) In SWEARING; as, Ow, <roJ' "Oxt/^wav [sc. opivftt. Cf. 428], 2Vb,
6;/ M/.v OliiHijnml Soph. Ant. 758. Ow T A;a; iff* <*.** Id. El. 106'3.
liy tliis -lli]i>is may be explained the use of the Ace. with the particles {,
/, and pa. (of which the two first are affirmative, and the last, unless pre-
coded by y/, commonly negative), according to the following
RULE. ADVERBS OF SWKARING are followed by the Accusative ;
as, N A/', Yes, by Jupiter I i. 7. 9. N*i TA> 2/ vi. 6. 34. 'AxXa, ^i
rt? Siovt, oix. "lyuyi otvrovs ^iu^u, but, by the gods, I will not pursue them,
i. 4. 8. N< (Ao, A/', Yes, indeed I v. 8. 6.
427'. 8. The ^cc. required by a transitive verb is sometimes omit-
ted; as, f O(Tri V0f foa QovKoiTo lntri\'i<reti [sc. T Jv] i. .0. 7. Cf. iv.
5. 11. AiiKtof r t Xa.ffi [sc. rev "<r<ro*\ i. 10. 15. Compare flfligcJUwMfnif
Cyr. viii. 3. 28, with 'ExvaT<f TV "<r*av Ib. 29 ; and II e iXt5y >
7<r<r, with nf9<riXi/a ulrois Cyr. V. 3. 55.
9. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Ace. is sometimes
employed, especially by the poets, <4br energy of expression ; as, "Exi^i
[= xi'igu* iTo'iii] -raXvxiguv QOVM Soph. Aj. 55. AT/* t^iuo-o. [== dipo. <rt)* yxi
livn t^itt, or o.'i t u.u.n r)y y J'Sst/a-a] Ib. 376. Tiyytt $uxi>v& 0.^0.1 Id. Tr.
849. T^<r ?J pavay Eur. Sup. 1205. Cf. 425, 431, 433.
CH. I.] OF DIRECT OBJECT. 299
1. Accusative of the Direct Object.
^ 428. I. This Ace. is often translated into English with
a preposition ; thus,
&toi/s xa) Siaj, 1 swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6. 17. Ovrot
(t\v ya.(> etvrov; i-riu^x^xdiriv, for these have been guilty of perjury against them,
iii. 1 . 22. 'Hftci; . . tu <roiuv, doing well to us, i. e. treating us well, ii. 3. 23.
'O i fiy^os ^uvetrxi l-rra. eaXey$, the siglus is equivalent to seven oboli, i. 5. 6'.
Ot^ev XXa t/v^sv>j ii. 2. 1 3. Ma^asj 3-appt7<ri, you have no fear of battles,
iii. 2. 20. OwXaTra^eva* . . *>pa;, guarding against MS, ii. 5. 3. *Arfl$Sg
K'OTIS varigetf, having run away from their fathers, vi. 4. 8. 'O xaXa/aj /'
J'^jra/, the jackdaw has departed from me, i. e. Acts /e/V me, AT. Av. 86. *H/-
r%ui$)ifAiv xetl Stovs xaci uvfyairovs vgo^ouvcti UUTOV, we were ashamed before both
gods and men to desert him, ii. 3. 22. At<r%uvirui <ro yr^a.yfji.a., he is ashamed
of the act, Eur. Ion, 3G7. Ta0? ya,^ tuffiSs7i 3-eai B-vriffxavrxs oil %etigot>ffi, for
the gods do not rejoice in the death of the pious, Id. Hipp. 1 340. A7
XO^IVOUITI, rov rafttctv "Iux%ov, 'dance in honor of/ Soph. Ant. 1153.
nr . . "Agrtpiv Eur. Iph. A. 1480.
429. II. To this head may be referred the use of the
Ace. with VERBS OF MOTION, to denote the place or person to
which ( 339, 422) ; as,
T'O-JTOV vX<u%v>, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6. *A<rru K-
po\ui Soph. CEd. T. 35. TlX^av -rar^os U%K7/>v <r<iq>ov Id. El. 893.
t'T^.iuff 'luXxius Eur. Med. 7. 'Alpixira %6'ova. Ib. 12.
vau<rroXt7; %6ova, Ib. 682. "H?>7j TiXoy (jt-oXovra.; Ib. 92O. Xo/a T/J o
ffa.Xuv ^6'ava. yift<fu ; Id. Ale. 479. Kv/W>j 5* at^avov 7xs A. 317.
via; y. 162.
NOTES, a. This use of the Ace. is chiefly poetic, and especially Epic,
Instead of the common construction with a preposition.
/3. The poets sometimes even join an Ace. of the place with verbs of stand
ing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation) ; thus, 2r$j^' etl p\v vpu* ravS*
&pa%VV rgiGov, al V \v8$' aXXav aT^ov Eur. Or. 1251. Qtiffffovr ax^av Ib.
871. Tfiro^et xa-f'^uv <Po7Sos Ib. 956. Ta-rav . . ovnva. nitveu Soph. Ph. 144.
43O. III. CAUSATIVES govern the Ace., together with
the case of the included verb ; as,
Mj [A Kvetprriffiis xaxiav, do not remind me of [cause me to remember]
my woes, Eur. Ale. 1045 ( 376. <y), 'Avetftvnra ya.^ i>fta,s xett rout . .
xiv^vvav; iii. 2. 1 1 (5 424. 2). Bat/Xf/ ft yiuirta fgurov a.x.ou.rov ptitfu 5 Eur.
Cvcl. 149. Touf -r7^tts . . yit/<TTta> a^ara; PL Rep. 537 a ( 375. a).
TIXXa XKI r^'ta, xai xa.vrola.xu. ii<u%ov* vp.a.( PI. Gorg. 522 a. See also
357.
REMARK. The verbs $t? and ^ are sometimes construed by the poets as
causatives ; thus, 2i ^s7 H^a^ius, you have need of [it needs you of] a Pro-
metheus, ^Esch. Prom. 86 ( 357). rievaw waXXew fit $s7 Eur. Hipp. 23. T/
yuo fjC fin xu.tiuv , Eur. Suppl. 789 (cf. 2a/ -rt ya.^ -rctfieov r'i jju Id. Med.
565, and 403). T< xfi QiXw \ Id. Or. 66^ (but Person reads T< Ji? $'t-
X*>, denying that this use of %-/i is Attic;. 2t %/>?> . . a<5a:Ji y. 14.
300 SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK in
2. Accusative of the Effect.
431. The EFFECT of a verb includes whatever the
agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Ace.
expressing or defining its action. The Ace. thus employed is
either, . a noun kindred, in its origin or signification, to the
verb, or /?. a neuter adjective used substantively, or /. a noun
simply dejining or characterizing the action.
a. KINDRED NOUN.
01 Jt Qgoixis i-rtt iurv%Dtra,v rovro <ro turv%v/u.et, and when the Thracians
had gained this success, vi. '3. 6. Tl? ccx'iv^uvov fi'iav %up.tv, how secure a life we
live, Eur. Med. 248. '^r^a.rnyfiffovra, tp.1 raurw rn* 0-r^a.rny'ia.v i. '3. 15
rctfttT* ya.fjt.oit r'ovSi Eur. Med. 587. T/ ?Ta<rysXa<rs roi jra.vu<r ra.ro* yfXwy ;
Ib. 1041. 'HLvriftiXouvrtti raiffu.v ivri/u.i&tietv PL Prot. 32.5 C. Ba<nXi/y <xa.irui
1ix.diora.rw @et<ri*.ivo/Aivei PI. Leg. 680 e. Qivytru oLUtpwyiuv Ib. 877 C.
Ty hgov xaXoiyisvay vraXtfta* itrr^oinvirKV Th. i. 112. T H/^v ^goftrifAa, 5=/vo
Eur. Ph. 1379. FUSjj^a xovipov IK, vtuf a^'Xara ^Esch. Pers. 3O5. A<v<r<rv*
Qevtou 1'^yp.a, ^axovraf Ib. 79. T5' a -r^otrddtKuv e^ay Soph. (Ed. C. 1 166.
'n^aUvra T^ xag-ra/ay vi. 1.7. Hogtvriov $' fiptTv rout -r^urous ffratiftovs
ii. 2. 12. "E^</ Ty aJw Hi. 1. 6. "E^ wynVs^ai . . o'^y iv. 1. 24. Tgi-
-IT< Ti<pa<rix.s olovs Hdt. vi. 1 19.
REMARKS. 1. In like manner, an adjective sometimes takes an Ace. of the
kindred noun ( 424. 1); as, MWTI n <ro<f>o; v TV ixtivuv ra^ia,*, p,nrt &/*<*-
6ns rnv a^a^/av, being neither wise with their wisdom, nor foolish with their fol-
ly, PI. Apol. 22 e. Kctxous 'Jfa.ira.t xax'iav PL Rep. 490 d. AavXoj -raj ^i-
B-utri'ietf xa.} ^ouXiias Ib. 579 d.
2. It will be observed, that usually an adjective is joined with the Ace.
of the kindred noun, and the whole phrase is an emphatic substitution for an
adverb. Thus, *ilf uxiv^uvev (iiov &'/u.'v = 'flj uxiv^uvwf %&>p,iv. This ad-
jective not unfrequently occurs with an ellipsis of the noun ; as, To ll^a-ixot
t%itro [sc. o%v/tet] vi. 1. 10. Hence appears to have arisen the construc-
tion in $ 43 2.
433. /3. NEUTER ADJECTIVE.
1o i aura, pit vTfroinxt, reiuvra, 2 Xt'yu, [he has done such things, and
says such tWngs] such has been his conduct, and such is his language, i. 6. 9.
\iytis olx a.-^a.^nrra. ii. 1. 13. Tuvret ^et^tffotvrui Ib. 1O. Ta Avxaiet
lion i. 2. 10. Mj$i <4,ittii<r0*i i. 9. 7. Miya <f>^<ras iii- 1. 27. 'Ayi-
x^ayi <ri voXtpixo* vii. 3. :53. Xrfffxfffai -ri r ffr^atrta., to make some
w.se of the army, Cyr. viii. 1.14. T eturS g^ffy ; what would you do with
him? Ib. i. 4. 13. T/ o-ipvor xa.} vrnp^ovnxtf /3Xtri<; ; why do you
look grave and thoughtful? Eur. Ale. 773. KaXox /Sxi-rw Id. Cycl. 553.
Kxt<rr /SXiTi/ Ar. Vesp. 900.
REMARKS. 1. This construction (upon which see 431. 2) is closely al-
lied with the adverbial use of the neuter adjective 440), and is, perhaps,
its origin.
2. The Ace. of the neuter adjpctive is very extensive in its use, and often
occurs where a substantive w<,uld have been constructed differently ; thus,
fAtvrei TXiovixrafy ivx, yff%uviT, iv ptv ry Sign rev ^X//, iy di T$
CH. 1.] OF EFFECT. - DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 301
raw ^]/v%ouf Ages. 5. 3. XP. 'QfQgKivu <ri \ A IK. Taw ^u-^vt
Ar. Plut. 896.
3. The Ace. of the neuter pronoun is sometimes used to denote that on ac-
count of which any thing is done (viewed originally as the effect or result of
the action); as, "A $' tx4a, but what I came for, Soph. (Ed. C. 1291.
TO.UT' iyelt tfftubov, therefore [on account of these things] / made haste, iv. I.
21. T< ra, *v. *T<ri<r/v, 'why,' vi. 3. 25. TaDV a<p/xa>jv Id. (Ed.
T. 1005. 'AXX' *l r a. rnZra. *) vy r?* PI. Prot. 310 6. Ni*<rarof 2'
jy \loiu.u.t$cJv S Ktt't pt yr,; vTt^i'TSfA'^iv Eur. llec. 13. 'Ex?v t a,6ufjtu t
on pot 1ox.it Mem. iv. 3. 1 5.
NOTE. So with ^Jj^a, thing, expressed, T/ #<* *ra-a/ \ why do yon
be there? Eur. HeracL 633. See Ib. 646, 709 ; Id. Ale. 512 ; &c.
433. y. DEFINITIVE NOUN.
<I>a'a /3Xira/v, looking terror, .-Esch. Sept. 498. 'H /3awXj . . KXi^i
tit TV, the senate looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 629. "A^jj Siliogxorav ^Esch. Sept.
53. 'AX<p<a <rviw> Ar. Av. 1121. "Aitiuv TOV 2<ratX*a vi. I. 6.
'Exr/Ja; Xs'ywv i. 2. 11. 'Ox vftrtiat vsvix.y)xon, having conquered in th(
Olympic games, Th. i. 126. f$ivixjxet<ri vetuftet^iKf Id. vii. 66. Niv/xxo.
c awrei' !Tayx^aT<a Symp. i. 2. 'Hyeavt^ovro Js war^sj ^tv a-ra^/av, . .
<rX>jv ^ xou fay [&** xui yrttyx^etTiov trtgot iv. 8. 27. IloXXai
Isocr. 71 6. Xa^aJJyra -reiitri A/ovw<r<a Dem. 535. 13.
3. Double Accusative.
The same verb often governs TWO AC-
CUSATIVES, which may be,
I.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT, in apposition with
each other ( 331) ; as with verbs of making, appointing,
choosing, esteeming, naming, &c. Thus,
BasavXtat <ri i-roitiffKv, they made you king, vii. 7. 22. Sr^aTjjyav Ss eevrot
tt.-ri'&iiZi, and he had appointed him general, i. 1.2. TLetriget 1/u.l i x. a. X < ?<r i ,
you called me father, vii. 6. 38. "Oa-r/j ' a ittwrov XjTa< a-T^arjjyev v. 7.
28. Owj ol 'Sugoi 3-toiss ivof&i^ovi. 4.9. "Ov wva^a^j A/a^t^jy -ra-rri^
Eur. Sup. 1218. "Ovo^a r; a* *XsTv ri/u.ei; ^teat> ; Id. Ion, 259. Qlftt-
ff<roxXtj; KXsa^avra* Tav w/av iffiei f&iv lS;5a|To aya^sv PI. Meno, J3 d.
Ow; flys/^ayajj traXswv t^ras/ostJa'aa'^e PI. Rep." 546 b. Kw^a; ra e"T^Tf / t4ot
xaTEvE/^s ^5fxos ^a>7, Cyrus divided the army into twelve parts, Cyr. vii.
5. 13.
NOTE. The infinitive ttvai is often used with these verbs ; as, Na^/^o; y*
w^a; IfAil iUvxt x.cti fctro'i^a. x.etl QiXevf i. 3. 6. ^oQitrTr,* Sfl TOI ovoftoi^ovri . .
rev cia Jva, PL Prot. 311 6.
5} 435. II.) The DIRECT OBJECT and the EFFECT, not in
apposition ; as with verbs of doing, saying, &c. Thus,
E7 rig n ay 0.601 n X.O.KOV vrairiftiii KUTOV, if any one had done him any
good or evil, i. 9. 11. Ta p'tyta-ret X.O.KOC, igyet^e pit 01 rots <rXs/j PL Rep.
495 b. *H< n, vi ff K ft, i Tayra* tiioiv vii. 6. 22. 'Hx/xat rttvf eu<pi^.nfft\
Strettrut Dem. 255. 7. 'AfraT/a-aa-^*/ $/*! i%0govs Eur. HeracL 852
302 SYNTAX. - ACCUSATIVE. [BOOK IU
Teturct xa.} x.a.6v(>iff' aUTev Id. Bac. 616. "0<ray iv <r7? r^Kysa^'iKis /.Xi
Xst>, r to-yetret Xiycatriv, 'say the worst things to each other,' Mem. ii. 2.
9. IlaXXa To; WflXXavj /cts Sj lgi/Vs Soph. El. 5 2O. Ta ^TE^V' i'sr*} xo-
X" Ixilvovs Id. Aj. 1107. "Etrjj xXvoJV, a vuv 0"i> T^VO v/jttA^Sif ?r0X<y
Id. (Ed. T. 339. 'E^iw<ra^jy ot^y <ri Id. (Ed. C. 1145. T/ . . y ? a-
\J/niv ay 0"i /u-oucrovroio; iv TK^M; Eur. Tro. 1 188. TOPOUTOY i%0os t^^u'i^u
ff iyu Soph. El. 1034. " }. (> K u ff K v rav<ry TOVS ffTK<riu<r<zs TOV; fAty'tfrovg
ogxovs Th. viii. 75. MsX^roj (At ty^ci-^/aro TV ygaqtviv rxvrriv PL
Apol. 19 a. Ta,(jt,i7 pi $v<rru%ifrti>ov yei/aav Eur. Tro. 357. Krworwa-i
xgtira, f&iXiov -rXasyax Id. Or. 1467. 'AXX* ayvov o^xav ffov xaga, xctrea-
ftoffet Id. Hel. 835. 'Ava^o-a/ (ZofaeftKi iwayysX/a <rs At. Plut. 764.
M/Xr/a^>jf o T>JV i Maga^am f&a%n rovs fiapScieous vixv<ra,s ^Eschin.
79. 36.
^ 436. III.) Two OBJECTS differently related, but which
are both regarded as DIRECT ; as with verbs of asking and re-
quiring, of clothing and unclothing, of concealing and depriv-
ing, of persuading and teaching, &c. Thus,
K? a / T 1 7> rXars, to asA vessels of Cyrus, or to asA Cyrus for vessel*
i. 3. 14. M;Ta/ jtj x^v-^ys rovro, do not hide this from me, JEsch. Pr. 625.
'l\(Aa,s 2i etfofrtgiT rov ftitr^ov, but us he robs of our pay, vii. 6 9. 2}
^i^atrxitv rjy ffrgarwy/cc.*, to teach you the military art, Mem. iii. I. 5. ttgof
ri fit ravree, igurqis; Mem. iii. 7. '2. 'A.vri(>i6' wfta,; -rov; T' iv "Ix/w ro-
vovg, . uvngura. <r iptl yuiiaJtxu,, ffa.l'ba.s rt Eur. Iph. T. 661. TWawra f
u Ziu, x-goffrgiwa Soph. Aj. 831. 'T^af $i o P>a.<ri>.tvs TO. VX a-ra/r*
ii. 5. 38. 'Ea <r^aTTjTi avrov TO, ^rif^ctrtt, 'demand,' 'exact,' vii. 6. 17
O/ AoK^et . . rtXj rovf xa.Tctvr*.iovr*s i^i^-iyov JEschin. 69. 29. Tavra
vroix.a.Xi7<ro roll fuvovrett Cyr. i. 4. 4. Touro fj.\v $v ftri uvatyxu^t ft
PI. Kep. 473 a. Tov fiiv tavrov [sc. ^ruva.'] ixsTvev rippi'siri C}T. i. 3. 17.
Tov fouov vpuv %X7vetv % p.* i ff %ov Ar. Lys. I 156. 'Ex^vuv iftl %ono-rn-
fiuv \a6nra. ^Esch. Ag. l'_ ; 69. 'A.$et i gt7er 0eti TOVS ivimouvras "EXXjvaj rfit
yw i..S. 4 (cf. 41 1). "Of ftt . . -4,1X0* op./* a.vo<r<rtiffa.s Soph. (Ed. C.
866. . TLV ftiv yu 3-iov roll yrttptivovi ffivvXrtxdfft Dem. 6 1 6. 19. 2)
Tttura. fjLYt fil6uv Soph. (Ed. C. 797. 2w TI yu.o pi ivfvs rovro . . ifoti-
tivti Cyr. i. 6. 'JO. Oitx ia<rn rovro y J/x? <ri Soph. Ant. 538. "O<
ft xuXvru TO tieifv Id. Phil. 1241. Tvva.7x' a^/Vrav Xi^vosv 'A^jvr/ WO-
(tvfets Eur. Ale. 4-42. Ila? ^' wirt^aynf <roSa ; Eur. Hec. 81'J (cf. '0
xaXfl/flf ^ aJ^trai, 428). X^sa /IT . . aX^jjv ^. 224. A/T^/C>!II
'A^a/a^ cv ya^av /3. 20-1. See also ^ 430.
(n.) ACCUSATIVE OF SPECIFICATION.
. RULE XXII. An adjunct applying a
word or expression to a PARTICULAR PART, PROP-
ERTY, THING, or PERSON, is put in the Accusative;
^i Ji^ivav, [bound as to the hands] with h!s fi<if/x bound, vi. 1. 8.
Kubvos eve/tut, i$(>of ^vo -rXifyuv, a river, Cydnus by name, two
plethra in breadth, i. 2. 23. Ilavra xottriffraf, best in every thing, i. 9. 2
(cf. 359. jS). 'A-roT^ivn; -rat xt<f>\eif, beheaded, ii 6. 1, 29. T ur*
iii. 1.31. Qa.upai.irut.tro **XXf *< TO piyitios ii. 3. 15.
CH. l.J OF SPECIFICATION. OF EXTENT. 303
us 3i<r%iXioi iv. 2. 2. T[u.7^as . . eti vroXXou Viovrot,; *fou; ro {Ltvxof
nee.} TO or \oiros iTvje/, vroix'iXovs cii TO, vuree., xcti TO, if/,f^off^tv iravrct
to-nypivovs KvPiptoW. 4. 32. Anvaf tifti ravrtjv rqv rt%vnv Cyr. viii. 4. 18.
IIX<v TV* oulii utrixv vii. 1. 25 (cf. 393. y). "Ocrct * /e*<w xgwiftot
Iffri ii. 5. 23. Cf. 369, 418. 3.
4 3 8 REMARKS. . This use of the Ace. is often termed synec-
doche, from its analogy to the rhetorical figure bearing that name.
/3. Where a verb is in this way followed by two accusatives, the construc-
tion (which is most frequent in Epic poetry) may be often referred to the
S^Jj^a xa^' ?Xav xou (*' l -i>o; ( > 334. 9) ; as, IT 070 y ft 'ivro; tyvyiv tgxos 00y-
ruv, What language has escaped [you, the hedge of the teeth] the hedge of your
teeth! a. 64. Tovyt . . X<V orria, Sup'os T. 406. Cf. 4lU.
y. An Ace. of specification sometimes introduces a sentence ; as, Tout
ftivrai "E X X j v a j , TOVS iv T^ 'A.ffi MJMVWWfj olo'tv vca fulfil; Z.iyi'rcti, 11
tvrovreu, 'but as to the Greeks? Cyr. ii. 1.5. To fttv oSv <r v v r a. y p a. TJ
r'oTt roX/T/f x.0.} <rov %goyov, etrov airy xgtvftsvoi $iirs*.i<ra,fAtv, i%a,/>z,ovvreus
$i%r,>.u<rau Isocr. 264 C. Tav $1 vfotov <rov Kce.ro. <rov vr<>Z.ti{,ov, (tv yivYiru.! T
iraXtJS Th. ii. 6'2. Tovs u,y^ovofjt,ou? rovrovs . vs/S <psoitrt?euir/x,v PI. Leg.
76 1 e. This construction may usually be referred to anacoluthon or ellipsis.
*&. The Ace. is sometimes used in exclamations, to specify the object of
emotion (cf. 343. 2, 372. t, ) ; as, 'Lw, Ita Xiyiia; fiogo* K'/i'Sovos, oh, oh
for the fate of the melodious nightingale, ^Esch. Ag. 1 1 46. As/vov yi rax K n-
gvxa. ray * rot/s figorouf oi%of&ivov, it ^jjBsTare votrr^yn crX/v Ar. Av
1269. This construction, which is unfrequent, should perhaps be referred to
ellipsis.
(in.) ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT.
^ 439. RULE XXIII. EXTENT OF TIME AND
SPACE is put in the Accusative (cf. ^ 378, 420) ;
as,
a. TIME. "E^zmv fi/tigtit; l<rrei, he remained seven days, i. 2. 6. 'E^ax^oj
WflXyy ^govav i. 3. 2. Z&IY eeixifffris Ivntvrov ii. 6. 29. "E^rXsav v/usoxv xal
ivxra, vi. 1. 14. Ylogsuottivat ro Xaivrov ris fif&feoif iii. 4. 6. Tob; [*** y&l>
xvvo,; rov; %a.Xfx-ov; ra,; ftlv fifAt^et; $i$ia<ri, ra.s $t YVXTO.S aaf>iZtri rourov 31,
v <rw^9v5jTS, TV vvxra. ftlv ^rtffirt, Trjv 31 r,ft</>av a,q>r,<nri V. H. 24. O/ r^ta.-
xovrtx, 'irr> yiyovoris, ' thirty years old,' ii. 3. 1 2. Tjy S-wyra rou XU^KO^OU
ivdrvtv r : i/Aoa.v 'yi'yxf/.^ftiy^v iv. .5. 24. Tg'irtiv r,fj,iooe,v KUTOV %XOVTOS Th. viii. 23.
\ix.a.rov &I%fi4ut 'iros Eur. Rhes. 44-1. n O{ rifawxi ravra. rpja. irti, ' these
three years,' Lys. 109. 12.
ft, SPACE. 'El-sXayvs* S/a ^avyiets ffret0/u.ov Vva, yraooe.irci'y'ycts oxru, he ad"
ranees through I'hrygia one day's-march, eight parasangs* i. 2. 6". 'Af's^ouir*
vou id>ra.fjt.ov ffroiSiou; vrivrixetioixec. ii. 4. 1 3. Mf/a; \(Ai yi xa.ro. yri$ o^yviuf
ytvia-ffon vii. 1. 30. Ta /SsXa; etvruv xcti J/crXa<r/ov [sc. $iei<rrr,fta] $io'<r0Kt rut
Ilt(>fftxuv <r<p'.v$ovuv iii. 3. 1 6. 'OraVav Js f^iu\-.ia.i ol "EXXjjvsj, roo-ourov
iraX/v l<rav^wa7v ftct%ofti*au; 'tin iii. 3. 10.
NOTE. In the simple designation of time and p/ace, the GENITIVE common-
ly expresses the time and place in which (-> 37S) ; the DATIVE, at which ( 4'JO) ;
and the ACCUSATIVE, through which. To a certain extent, however, the offices
of the several cases blend with each other.
304 SYNTAX. VOCATIVE. [BOOK III
(iv.) ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE.
4 4 O. RULE XXIV. The Accusative is often
used ADVERBIALLY, to express degree, manner, or-
der, &,c. ; as,
Tav T a *a, m this way, or thus, i. 1. 9. Tav nlrlt <ro#ei vi. 5. 6
(cf. XJ awri To<rea iv. 2. 13, and 418). TeXay $ i7ri, and finally [at
the end] he said, ii. 3. 26. 'A^;>iv /KJ ir\ovr7i<ra,i, 'in the first place,' 'at
all,' vii. 7. 28. '0 o%J(.os axf**!* 5/sm iv. 3. 26. Tawrav /, on ac-
count of this, Mem. i. 2. 54. Ki/va; J/xfjv, like a dog, ^Esch. Ag. 3. K*
(ov J' t^jx/f, 'opportunely,' Soph. Aj. 34. 'Auoiuv nxovrt; AT. Ach. 23.
T) uoriv fTayiviitv Hdt. ii. 2. 2vi"rT<r4a'^< <rjy T^/a*T)v [|sc. a^ov] i. 3.
14 (cf. i. 2. 2Oy. Owxawv, (p>), xa< ifi^i woXifAOU trv/u.*ovXiuitv TJJV ys if a urn*
' for the present,' Mem. iii. 6. 10. See 3'JO. 3.
4 4 1 . REMARKS. . This rule applies especially to the Ace. neut.
cf adjectives, both sing, and plur. ; as, Ta a^aTav, formerly, i. 1.6. T
pi* . ., T 5s, partly . ., partly, iv. I. 1 4, v. 6. 24. M / * ^ a y i&Qvyt re ft*
xr9nrgu0>ivui i. :5. 2. Tw^, perhaps, vi. 1. 20. To Xa<rav, henceforth,
11. 2, 5. E7 T/J ft'iya. %v TO crup-a, tfufli YI Tgotyy % a./A<f)o<ri(>ci PI. Gorg.
524 b. Taa-at/rav ya^ wXjj^n ?T^/?V /Say/Xsw; i. 8. 13. &tifc.oitbia'<rigot Si
traXi; iv. 5. 36 (cf. 419). See especially 162.
/J. A strict analysis would refer the adverbial Ace. in part to the Ace. of
effect ( 432), in nart to that of specification ( 437), and in part to that of
extent ( 422. m.).
F. THE VOCATIVE.
^442. RULE XXV. The COMPELLATIVE
of a sentence is put in the Vocative (^ 329. N.,
340. a) ; as,
K X i i */ n a i i , . . olx Irri a T Ta/irri, Clearchus and Proxenus t
you know not wliat you do, i. 5. 16. r ll a.v(*,a.<rituret.rt eivOgwrt, O most
wonderful mt in, iii. 1. 27.
443, KEMAKKS. . The /7n of address, in Greek, as in other
languages, is commonly J.
/?. The term of respectful address to a company of men is ^u, with
which may be likewise connected a more specific appellation ; thus,
ix, u avSjtf, you see, gentlemen, iii. 2. 4.
fellow-soldiers, do not wonder, i. 3. 3. T H avJfi,- "Exxij U. 3. 1 8
x.cti kodo't iii. 1. 34.
CH. 2.] ADJECTIVE. AGREEMENT. 305
CHAPTER II.
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE.
1 AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE.
{$444. RULE XXVI. An ADJECTIVE agrees
with its subject in gender, number, and case.
The -word adjective is here used in its largest sense ( 73). Thus,
pi yets uy^'icav S->jg/ f X vi vt s , a large park full of wild beasts, i. 2.
7. Tea -ruT^i u-ptyori^u, both the children, i. 1. 1. At '\UVIKK} voXsif
. . Ii$op4vai Ib. 6. TovSi rov T^oVov Ib. 9. "E^av oVX/Tj %iXious
KUI riXTao-Taj &^KKKS OKraxotri ous i. 2. 9. saw? -ravraf x) <ra-
c-aj VI. 1. 31.
NOTES, a. An adjective either assists in describing the thing which is
spoken of, or forms a part of that which is said of it. In the former case,
the adjective is said to be used as an epithet (If'idtrov, from ivri-rifafAt, to add) ;
in the latter, as an attribute (attributus, ascribed}. In the sentence, " A good
man is merciful," " good " is an epithet, and " merciful " an attribute. The
agreement of the attribute with its subject is far less strict than that of the
epithet ; while the agreement of the pronoun ( 495) is still less strict than
that of the attribute.
ft. An exception to this rule, which is merely apparent, consists in the use
of the masculine form for the feminine in adjectives of three terminations
( 133. y, *).
445. REMARKS. 1. Infinitives, clauses used substan-
tively, and words or phrases spoken of as such, are regarded
as neuter ; thus,
etlnTv, it would be foolish to ask a guide, i. 3. 16. A3
Xy jv on lyyus fau fictiriXivs x ii. 3. 6. Ow TO >jv vrtg) vrXtlrrou fotrt-
viov, XX TO tv ^v PI. CritO, 48 b. 'T^/j, S> av^if 'A0*vct7ai TO %'
'TMEI2 OT il-ru, TV raX/y X'fyu, You, men of Athens ; and when I say you,
I mean the state, Dem. C 255. 4. To MH */ TO OT r^ortSipi va, the NOT
find the NO prefixed, PL Soph. 257 b. "X^rOeu . . T *a^' a WTO, to use the
phrase xatf' WTO Ib. 252 c.
NOTE. Grammarians often speak of a word, with an ellipsis of the part of
speech to which it belongs ; as, "E<rT/ o [sc. truv'bitr/uos] a. XX a. VT) TOW ^t,
the [conjunction] XX is instead of & Soph. (Ed. C. 237, Schol. AS/TS/ n
[sc. r^oStffn'] titi, [the preposition] Ita. is wanting, Ib. 1291, Schol.
446. 2. In COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION, both syllepsis
and zeugma are frequent ( 329. N.). (.) In syllepsis, when
versons of both sexes are spoken of, the adjective is masculine ;
when things are spoken of, it is commonly neuter ; as,
26*
306 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK IIU
*fl; Si tTtit irttrioec, <ri xai finr't^ot xct'i adtXQovf xcti rw ittvrov yvvxTxx eti-
%p.etXurovs ytyivrtftivous Cyr. iii. 1. 6. h.!6et <rt xxi wX/Wa/ xa.} |wXa xeu
xigajtos KTcixTcus (At* tff.ififjt.ivix. oiio\v %i>f,ffifjt.(i ivriv Mem. 111. 2. 7.
(/?.) In zeugma, the adjective sometimes agrees with the most
prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest ; as,
f E;rTa oaXewf xa.} fiftioo\iov 'Arnxovs, seven Attic oboli and a half, i. 5. 6
^\.u6ft,iyos . . Toy Sr^a/A&^/^jjy xotl raj yawj asrsXjjXw^era Th. viii. 63. Yieti*
Jj vi yuvaTxa.s <ruvu(>/u,eav<rctf Cyr. vii. 5. GO. Mfjrgo; re xcct raw ffov va<n/6t
Soph. (Ed. T. 417.
447. 3. ELLIPSIS. The subject of the adjective is
often omitted, especially if it is a familiar word. The words
most frequently omitted are,
a. MASCULINE, avj or ctvfytu-ro;, man, %f>ovos, time ; as, 2w vTa|/ $1 'txa.-
froi TOV; ia.tiT9v []sc. av^a&f], and that each one should arrange, his own fmen],
i. 'J. 15. TDv irct^u. (2>ix.(ri}.ius i. 1.5. Tois Qiuyovra.;, the exiles, Ib. 7. Toug
xecxaiio'yovs xi uStxous [sc. av^^^roi/f J i. 9. I 3. 'ETatVas s/Aitvav *i/u.ipa; <rpi7s
J [sc. x,t Vu ?\ KtJ^oj a-TSxrs/vsv i. '2. 2>'. *Ev TOWTW xa) -&tx<riXiu; ^5jXof jj i.
10. 6 (cf. 'Ev Tovrca <ru X.^'f lv ' % ^)'
/S. FEMININE, ymfi, woman, yv or %&(>a, land, o$6;, way, rip,<gct, day, %i'n> t
hand, yvupv, opinion, ftaTga., portion, u^a,, season ; as, 'H K/Xr<r [sc. yuvv]
i. 'J. 1 '_'. riagEyj^< &i; 5/a tyiX'tag ii. 3. '27 (cf. "Orris J/a ^/X/ay TJ %actT
it-Tea.^ i. 3. 14). E/s Tiv <p/X/av U^r vi. 6. '38 (cf. E/f <p/X/av yjjv K^'txoivro
v. 1. I. See also 5 4-21. /3). T^v X/<r, [sc. a'Ssv] vropufoiuia, iii. 4. 46.
Ka/ yT ^ttv v l-ro^iuf^trctv y it liXXoi, TO. s VTCo'^vynx, ovx iv aXXj j TyTj
IxZwativ. 2. 1O. 'livnt ftaxguv iii. 4. 17. Tjj vffTt^a'u [sc. fiftigtz] ol
lifeivtifKv 01 -ro^ifAioi, avTi rn T/TJ, T? J* Tra^T; iii. i. 37 ( 4'2()). 'E $
ri ^^;a [sc. ^/^<] V. 4. 12. 'Ev Jf^/a, on the right, i. 5. 1. *Ev u^ia-noK vi.
1. 1-1. 'Ex Ttjf vmuirris [sc. yv&y**)?] iV^aTrav wavra, 'according to the vote
of the majority,' vi. 1. 18. 'A-ro rtis "<r-nt [sc. ^.oi'^ui], on equal terms, Th. i.
15. 'E-r/ T7 /Vsj xi e/ct0/ Id. i. '27. 'H rnr^/tv, destiny, Eur. Hec. 43.
[sc. 'ef], /;-om f/te /rs<, Th. i. 77.
7. NKUTER, ir^ay^a or ^^Jj^a, affair, thing, pigs;, part, **.r,0es, collection,
body, 0-r^a.rivfjt.a,, military force, xioetf, wing of an army, ^u^iov, jilnce, ground;
as, Ta jtt Jri Ki/'oow [sc. ?r^y,ztaT] . ., ra ^inoa i. 3. 9 (cf. Ta 'Qti^uffui
v^iiyfjt.a.ra. vii. '.>. 32). E/j rr J^<av [sc. X,^( AK ~\ l - 3 - ^' Ta icr/Tr^j/a, Me
necessaries of life, i. 5. 10. T T/, really, v. 4. 20. Htv0aivTOf E>.X>j.
/xa, Xenophotis Affairs of Greece, or Greek History. 'E%ixuf/.otivi rt [sc.
p.i0f~\ rni ipetXctyyas i. 8. 18. Ta ^$/a raw *^a"To; Ib. -1. Taw . . fyvixtv
Jsc. ?rXj^wj or o-T^aTiw^aTa,-], </* mercenary force [= T*/V |wy, the w/errc-
/r/Vx], i. '2. 1. T^ 'EXAwwxaw [= TV 'ExXjjW] i. 4. 13 (cf. i. '2. l). Ti
fyvirrnxof (cf. Ta/V ^wvia'Tft/^) Th. viii. G6'. Te 9^JXt; yaj ?r*y; /uaXXay oixrgoi
i^ffituv Kur. Jlcrc. 536. Te *o/yoy re ^irj^ay V. 7. 17. Ta J ivuvvftov i. 2.
15 (cf. Ta ivuvvfAov xi(>a.; i. 8. 4). 'Ev TU iftctXS [sc. X. U VV\ * v - ^* ^* *Acr
raw w-v/>Xaw i/f re r^ayij JaXXay iii. 4. '25.' See also 379. a.
NOTES, (a.) In cases of familiar ellipsis, the adjective is commonly said
io be used sulmtantiveli/. The substantive use becomes cs| ..... i.-illy firominent in
uch expressions as, IV; ^tv lutr't^is oW^svfe-/, 'your foi-s,' H. (ir. v. 2. S3;
*O T' ixt'ivov TIXUV, 'his father,' Kur. El. X".r>. (b.) The substantive omitted
U sometimes contained or implied in another word ; as, 'A^t/y3aX;vay i* r
H. 2.] SE OF NEUTER. 307
vfixguv [sc. a^uySaXwy] IV. 4. 13. Fia^ym TOV p\v <raXX^y [sc. y;y] Ar.
Eccl. 592. KaXay<r $' 'loxeiirriiv pi TOVTO [sc. ova^a] ya.^ wccr/io thro Elir.
lli. 12. (c.) In the phrase Iv ^ST^OI/, i ozw palace, at our court (licit, i. 35,
vii. 8. 4), there is either a double ellipsis for the sake of dignity (Iv ^ST^OW
7xaw $a/*tttriv) ; or a blending of the two forms of expression, tv ypuv o"*,
and EV n/tirioy a*xey.
4:48. 4. Many words which are commonly employed
as substantives are properly adjectives, or may be used as
such. Thus,
*0aT7f S Tligftif ay, and Orontes, a Persian man, i. 6. 1. Tl av^w
f'T^etTiuToti) , , uvSouv ff T g a. <r ri y u v iii. 2. 2. "Avo^a vsav/ax Cyr. ii.
2. 6. Niay/aj Xayay; Eur. Ale. 679. "EXX>jv <r/; avr^ Cyr. vi. 3.
11. "Ex**?/ \ s aTxav Eur. Med. 1331. 2raXiv y "Exxjva Id. Heracl. 130.
'EXXaSa? y?c Soph. Phil. 256. 2rgT/2,- 'EXXa^a; Eur. Rhes. '233.
r7* T^wS Id. Andr. 867. T^Sa s - ^ay 5 Id. El. 1001. 2xvlnv e?
a^av ^Esch. Prom. 2. Tw^ Ss ffwr-n g Id. Ag. 66'4. These words, as sub-
stantives, are commonly appellations oft persons or countries, avr'^, yyyjj, yjj,
&c., being understood.
5. USE OF THE NEUTER. The substantive use
of the neuter adjective ( 447. a) exhibits itself in a variety of
forms. Thus,
,) A neuter adjective with the article often supplies the place of an a6-
gtract noun; as, Ta &' a-rXai/y x< TO aX^; IV^/^E TO WTO ru tiXitiiy tliveti,
but sincerity and truth he thought to be the same with fully, ii. 6. 22. 2i!/y TU
^Dtet'iy (cf. MT atf/x/j) Ib. I S. To ^aXe-rey (]=- w ^otXswoT};^^ TW vrviufjiit-
Ttfj iv. 5. 4. Ow ya uoifftes IFTIV o egi^av TO vroXi/ XKI TO oX/yoy, 'the much
and the little,' vii. 7. M6. To irto-Tov [= ^ W<TT/J] Th. i. 68. A/a TO ava/-
fffnrov uftcuv Ib. 69. 'Xcro yo^^ raiu vrioi%a.(>oiJ; Tij; vixq; Id. vii. 7'5. To y
ip.ov Tosiiufjt.o'ii Eur. Med. 1 78. T ^izXXao-o-ayT/ T>?J ytupvi;, the [differing]
difference of opinion, Th. iii. 1 (Thuc. is especially fond of this use of the
Partic.). Ta ftlv o^/oj U.VTOU . ., TO 5i 3-a.oa-ovv, his [being afraid] fear . .,
but his confidence, Id. i. 36. 'Ev ru p.* fttXiTuvri Ib. 142.
/S.) Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with
prepositions to form many adverbial phr-.ises ; as, *A?ro TOW etiirnftarou, of their
own accord, i. 2. 1 7. *Ey yi Tea QoLtioca, openly, i. 3. 21. A/a Ta^ft>, rapid-
ly, \. 5. 9. 'E I<TOV iii. 4.47. 'Ex. <ruv IUVU.TUV iv. 2. 2S. "Acra TOV vr/jurag
iv. 3. 9. Kara TKVTK, in the same way, v. 4. 22. 'Esn Ssl-/a vi. 4. 1. AJ
TavToj, throughout, vii. 8. 11.
45 O. y.) Neuter adjectives are used in connection with words of
different gender and number (commonly as appositives, 331) ; as, <$>ota-
TMTOV 5' l^fAiK, and solitude is the most terrible thing of all, ii. 5. 9 (cf. Svft-
SovXfl i^ov x&ua, PI. Theag. 122 b). Ti evv rauTa, la-T/'v ; ii. 1. 22. Tow*
& waTa/ttat/f awa^av voft'^iri iJvsti iii. 2. 22. MvxJJyas/ ftutgov y, Mycence was a
small affair, Th. i. 1O. Et/'oa;a yaj ecvraT; . . ravTa v, ^/br Eubcea was every
thing to them, Ib. viii. 95. 'Ao-^y<rT^ay yvvvt ay^a; PI. Rep. 455 e. *A^;
/ r,(AiTi>>i -rXava-iot iliriv elVtv Ib. 556 d. "ExTaoa TO f*n'<)lv ttvcti Eur. Rhes.
818. Il^aj Ty o&iv [sc. o'yTa] Ib. Ph. 598. Ty ftrdlv ti; TO ftrf&iv Soph.
EL 1166. Tai/Ta ^t aSJyaTav l^vj, 'an impossibility,' PI. Parm. 160 a.
308 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVEr [BOOK III
Avget xaXri ev xaXev ; Id. Hipp. Maj. 288 C. "E^a/yi (pikretrov vroXis Eur
Med. 529. OJfteti ya.(> upas rw<rbi ysjj Ka/v0/aj rot. -r^ur 'iffiffSott Ib. 916
K^/vao-a ' uirruv rut Ipuv TO, /SsXrara JEsch. Eum. 487. In these cases,
an adjective agreeing in gendei and number with the substantive would either
express a different idea, or would express the same idea with less emphasis.
S.) The neuters -rXtTav or vrxiov, ptTov or iXetrrov, otrot, tttdiv, and ri ar
sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; thus, M^^/aJas
vrhiTev ri ^ubixot,, myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. K^JJrfs -rXi'i-
iv t vi l^jjxavra iv. 8. 27). 'Njfffeg trXiev % rojut ftttvuv i. 2. 11. Qvtrns &i>-
T)jf iruv x\'iot rt rirroi^oixovrK H. Gr. iii. 1. 14. "AXw*, ou fti~av $ve7v o~ret-
S/a/v, the Halys, not less than two stadia in breadth, v. 6. 9. ^ai'vi^i 3-ip.tXiu-
fag el fttTov % *\ttfUHUt Cyr. vii. 5. 11. 'A.foxrilvovtfi ruv av^aJy ou p-iloi
nvraxoriavs vi. 4. 24. Qgovgous <*.(> tturZ oux tXetrrov Ttr^axur^iXicav
H. Gr. iv. 2. 5 (cf. S^jy^ov^Ta/ . . olx ixdrrovs <rtr^etxeffiu Ib. 16). IlfA.-
ruffra,} offov [= roffovroi offoi} 'bia.xbffioi, targeteers as many as two hundred,
vii. 2. 20 (cf. 'H/tj/V Toffovrot orris offovj trv e/>s ii. 1. 16). Aiffuv . . oVa
fLvoc.tx.iuv Eq. 4. 4. A'dav; . . o<rov jttvaa/ai/f xa; iTX^ex xai jttj~a> Mag. Eq. 1.16
(cf. '0^otrgo%ovs a/Jtec^iKtou; xa.} fti'i^ous xa.} iXurrout IV. 2. 3). "Or* ovblv av
rou ftn'Siv uvriffrrif vvri(> Soph. Aj. 1231. Ttgovros . . TO ftrjSlv evros Eur.
Heracl. 166. K^t/Va-w ruv ro ftn^iv Id. Tro. 412. Aaxayvrw* iiveti ri, appear-
ing to be something, i. e. of some consequence, PI. Gorg. 472 a. (If ftvbiv and
ri did not here remain without change, they would be confounded with the
masc., and the expressions would lose their peculiar force.)
NOTES, (a) So, with the^)lur. form instead of the sing., Tlee^a^vst ripi.
(us vrXiiv Ts/V PI. Menex. 335 b. (6) In some of these cases, the neut.
adjective appears to be used like an adverb. See 529. /S.
4 5 1 i.) A neuter adjective used substantively, or as an attribute
of an infinitive or clause of a sentence, is often plur. instead of sing. ( 336) ;
as, E/ rovre ro o$u%.oftivov auroSotft'iri, j 11 ruvra, rt oQttXoivro, if this which
it due should be paid, or if both this should be due, vii. 7. 34. Oi ravra
Aiv Jf^a^< . . i/ yaj return kiyaifti Ages. ^. 7. "Oratv pit ri at.ya.6ot
t%vri) retga.xkovffi pi l-rt retvra Synip. 1. 50. 2t /wtx roffetura, %gh
wou7v, X.\O.'HH iXtivZf Ar. Thesm. 1O62. *A^' olx, '^^i rd$i ; Soph. (FA. 0.
883. 'A<rXX<w T3' . . a xttxa. XOLXO, nXa/v, 'it was Apollo,' Id. (Ed. T
1329. Qux "luvi; rait iifiv, there are here no'Ionians, Th. vi. 77. 'A^uva,
ret ^v iT/^i^iTv^ 1(1. i. 125. Ai^ay^in', &>; la/xi, rr,v&i xu.rfa.tilv Soph.
Ant. 576. ()u; ov vret^et^oria ro7f 'Aftjvctiois ifriv Th. i. 86.
NOTE. This use of the Plur. for the Sing, appears to have arisen from
the want of a noun, or definite object of sense, to give strict unity to the con-
ception. It is very frequent in demonstrative pronouns, and in verbals in -rot
and -Tif.
4 53. 6. An adjective often takes a substantive in the
Genitive partitive, instead of agreeing with it. In this con-
struction, the adjective is either in the same gender with the
substantive, or in the neuter (commonly the neut. sing.}.
Thus,
ret. o-teovoa.~iok ruv KgefyfAairu* [for fgei'yftecrci], yt*)Ji rout lu tfl^ovouvrett
[for avSe^u-rouf}, neither virtuous actions [the virtuous of actions],
nor wise men [the wise of men] Isocr. 24 d. AafAvrfortiros ri [for
SYNESIS. til 30D
rns <rii\, some distinction [something of distinction^ Th. vii. 69. *A^ T.
'|B [for *v ,>$, AY;/* c/ieeA [softnesses of cheek], Eur. Ph. 1486.
. oni Soph. Ant. 1209.
NOTE. In this way, greater prominence and distinctness of expression,
and sometimes a species of independence or abstractness ( 449. a), are given
to the adjective. Upon the whole subject, see 358 - 362.
453. 7. SYNESIS. The adjective often agrees in gen-
der and number with the idea of the speaker, instead of the"
subject expressed ; particularly with,
. COLLECTIVE NOUNS, and words used collectively ; as, 'H & fiovXv . .,
lit* uyvoovvrss, and the senate, not ignorant, H. Gr. ii. 3. .55. K.get.u'yv) y rou
'EXX:y/xai ffrou.rivfjt,ee.r9s [= ffr^a.Ticaru't] HietxtXiuapivuv iii. 4. 45. Tv rX/
[flraXrraj] . . aWi Th. Hi. 79. Asa-a? . . KTiffrw a,<r' ' A6nvtx.liuv, GavXfl-
iv <r t s Ib. 2. N as w y 6x TUV 'Afavuv %x,ov<rot,v ivei < 'A^xiSietSyiv, u; xEXtwa'ay-
<r> Id. vi. .53. Ow3" opvis i'Jfr,fjt,ovs KVopfoitSii /Soaj, uv^^o<p&o^oi> fttS^urtf
a.\'u.a.ro; A/iraf Soph. Ant. 1021.
/3. Words in the plural used for the singular (chiefly ^s/s for lyw) ; as,
'Ixsrsysjttsv . . T^flff-T/Tvwv, we [= /] beseech you, falling down, Eur. Here.
1206. "HPuov (jt,a.oTVop.iff$a. Sguir a. S^av ow /SayXa^tta/ Ib. 858. uux.t>[*,ia8at
. . x,.TYi6t7<ra. Id. Ion, 1 25O.
y. Nouns of which the gender does not follow the sex ( 75) ; as, r fl
fiJiretr, u vrignrfa ri/wHeis r'ixvav, O dearest, O most fondly cherished son,
Eur. Tro. 735. T5' Ipts . xar^aya'vra Id. Bac. 1307. Tii ^^<V icra-
tetSaSvrti AT. Plut. 292. KaXX<*a(pays BMT^J Ar. Ach. 872. Ta rsXn
Xfl6T?aTfl5f Th. IV. 15.
S. Words for which others might have been used; as, 'H veros [== va<r.
jtia] faurav ripta.'ro yivifffa,! TO?S 'Afavutotf, Kfyof/ttvon Th. ii. 47 (cf. To fttt
yy vaa-jj^a Ib. 51 ; yet see 450. y). Haa-a ^6 ytvva [= Xaoj] <I>gt;y
. . Jtfttf Eur, Tro. 531.
i. Words governing a r Genitive, to which, as the more important word, the
adjective conforms in gender and number ; as, <E>/Xra<r' A/y/Waw /3/, dearest
majesty of JEgisthus, JEsch. Cho. 893. T^a/a eXavrss Sjj-rar' 'A^yt'tun rroXos
Id. Agi 577 (cf. a). To Se r^y f^vri^ . . dfw^avvrt; PI. Leg. 657 d.
Ta T<wy ^ictxovuv . . voiovpivm Soph. Phil. 497. 'Axovu Qfoyyov ogvitav, xctxS
xXa^ayra; eJfr^ea Id. Ant. 1O01. In these expressions, the Gen. and the
word which governs it usually form simply a periphrasis, and are treated ac-
cordingly.
454. 8. An adjective sometimes agrees with a Geni-
ave implied in another adjective (commonly a possessive) ; as,
Ta ray [= you] fiow? $&>*ft, the gift of you alone, Soph. Tr. 775. Ta/">
rifttr igon [= vftav] a,v>7-vv (p/Xa/f, our own friends ( 505. 3), vii. 1. 29.
T <VsT* eturuv avn*.i<rxt<rt Dem. 25. 5. 0^>jya . . l/etey ray UUTYIS
^sch. Ag. 132-J. Tay i^ay ^b airot; raw rXa<!T<w jaw . . /3/ay Ar. Plut.
33. Tazta Swa-Twyaw *ax Soph. (Ed. C. 344. 2^y ay5f/ay xa,} ftiyaXo-
Qtoffvw kyaga/'yayraj PL Conv. 194 a. Cf. 332. 4, 383. a. In like
manner, as the Dat. may be used for the Gen. ( 412), 'EpoTtrn [
op,i%Ka wgarj|i . . uffilovfff ^Esch. Pr. 144.
310 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK III
45*5. 9. ATTRACTION. An adjective is sometimes at-,
tracted by a substantive either, (.) governing, or (/J.) in ap-
position with, its real subject ; as,
K. Touftov eJ/u,ct . . wa.<rgo;, the blood of my father, Soph. (Ed. T. 1 400
Qufto; . . ra7j feei3os Kur. Andr. 584. Sivtvv vr^o; aXXjv tffTiav vrop*uffa i u.a.t
Id. Ale. 538. MsAavas ffroXf&ov fiwXav Ib. '215. Ns/xaj av^wv ^uva^o
Soph. Ant. 793. IIoX;aj vr'ovrou 9-ivog Id. Ph. 1123. 'H TEXVWV "far o-^tf
. . fiXetffrovo-a, Id. (Ed. T. 1 375. In most of these cases, the Gen. with the
word which governs it may be regarded as forming a complex idea, which th
adjective modifies. This construction is chiefly poetic.
ft. Ot ya. o<p6oc,X[Aol, xaXX/o-rsv ov [for 'ovr&;~\, for the eyes, being the most
beautiful of objects ( 45O), PL Rep. 42O C, lout ya,^ piyHrroe. i%vfAKTito.
raj, Kvtdrotis ^ oWaj, [tiyiffrnv ^\ ouffu.v [for oWaj] /3X7v v'oXiug, asraX-
XaVrs/n iludiv PL Leg. ":>') 6. Yloivra, a, $h us i$ia; aura; otltret; [for etlrat
oTj t"ToXa J ttoavfl ( av PL Parm. 153 a. "Hx/a; . . TavTa>y XtzftfooTeiTo;, the sun,
the most splendid [sc. thing] of all things, Mem. iv. 7. 8 (this is the common
construction when the superlative is followed by a Gen. partitive of different
gender from the subject of the sentence).
NOTE. An adjective is sometimes, in the poets, attracted by a Voc. ; as,
"Ox&s xwji yivoio [for faGios, **>&, <y.], may you be happy, boy, Theoc. 1 7. 66.
*Lw tvfrwt ffl, SWv [for -flj] . . ^avj/f Soph. Ph. 759. Cf. Sic venias ho-
ditrne Tibull. i. 7. 58.
45G. 10. An adjective sometimes agrees with a sub-
stantive instead of governing it in the Gen. partitive ( 358-
360) ; as,
Ilt^} ftifut vvxrctf, about midnight [the middle of the night], i. 7. 1 (cf.
*E (jtiocf tvKTui Cyr. v. 3. 5'2). A/ p.i<rn; "Si r>js Tot-tus, and through the
midst of the city, i. 2. 23. Te XXa <rr^rtvft,et, the rest of the army, Ib. 25.
'E $' eiot<ri fiat vroiri, and going on [the extremities of the feet] tiptoe, Eur.
Ion, 1166.
457'. 11. Adjectives are often used for adverbs and
(idjunct.s, and, by the poets, even for apposilives, and dependent
clauses ; to express,
. TIME; as, 'AQixvovvrctt . . r^iretTei [= r r^'try fif*t^tf], they arrive on
the third day, v. 3. 2 (cf. iii. 4. 37, and 5 420). 'S.x.ora.tai f^affiovns ii. 2.
17. M^oTi^a Kugau . . tzpixira i. 2. 25. TtXit/Toiy f^aXtara/vic, u^ /as<
Ae became angry, iv. 5. 16.
/3. Pi^ACE ; as, 2*>jai//*iy wra<Vj/a<, tre encamp in the open air, v. 5. 21
(cf. 'Tiro rrit a.lfoia.{ iv. 4. 14). Aig/cv QStyy'ifitWVl. \. 23. 'E^i^'
iQirrui Soph. (Ed. T. 32. 0aX<r<r/fl \*^urt Ib. 1411. ^/raf J'
wTijToT/f Id. Ant. 785. 0j/^r> oi%vi~v Id. El. 313. MiraxJ^/af
aretf, amid the waves of woe, Eur. Ale. 91 ( 383. a). HoXXa 5' '^ rat/Ta
[=i rxvrri or TjfJi, 421. /3] rrg^ara, anrf 7 see here many sheep, iii. 5. 9.
'H^fljMTiv cVflw iTflf i'j. Our of, l$ri, ovriefav vrgofi%irett, 'here he comes,'
PL Rep. 327 b. 'Hf av^ o'Ji, OS the man is here, Soph. CEd. C. 32. Ila-
ftvovrai ya. t'ftt $v ntts Ib. 111. 'AXX* 3' oiratiuv i* $o/u,ut m
Eur. Ale. 137. "OS* ifc' 'O^iirrtif Id, Or. 380. T I^j li? .
' sits there,' <r. 239.
CH. 2.] ATTRACTION. - ANACOLUTHON. 311
y. MANNER; as, 2vvsXX0vTa . . a! c EXX0-<ray<nafxa< ra*X/j txovffxi, the
Hellespontic cities contributed wittingly, i. 1.9. 'O ftiv ixw* -rtivuv (cf. '0 pit
ixovffius rxXxfTufiuy) Mem. ii. 1.18. Oi ot ffTgXTtwrxi ioi^xvro Yioiea; xx)
ivtiv; IITOVTO xo-fAtvoi vii. 2. 9. Kr*?'v<rsv raS" ogxtos ^t>x<ritv Soph. CE(l.
C. 1637. 'Avufai r^i, rw K?//A a// speed, AT. Plut. 229. Toy,- vx?ay
vvro<rwov$ovs u,Kibi%a<ra.v H. Gr. ii. 4. 1 9.
o. EFFECT; as, Ei'>p>7av [^ &/< lutyriftav iUvxi] . . xoiftriffov ffroftx, hush
your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent 1 , ^Esch. Ag. 1 247. T*/v trut
u^igxruv o/uftxreav mruptvos, [deprived of your sightless eyes] rendered
sightless by the loss of your eyes, Soph. CEd. C. 1200. 2w xai ^ixet'tuv /-
xau; Qozvxs -rx^xtr-rSi Id. Ant. 791. Me/^av' ixrsvu Xoyav Id. Tr. 679.
ol't) . . aVX/Vaj Eur. Ale. 35.
1. VARIOUS RELATIONS AND CIRCUMSTANCES; as, "Axx/ 2t <r l|-
xi<r%'iXioi i-rwi7s, ' besides,' i. 7. 11. Oy y^ 'Jv %6/><rt>s ov$l a X X a ay^sv ^s.
S^a i. 5. 5. SwX/va/ rW/^vas/, mar/e o/ wood, v. 2. 5. *A$g^Sg**
[= av^o; <p&eVTa;] . . ttlpu.ros, homicidal blood, Soph. Ant. 10^2. Mar^a-
xrovov eJftx, the blood of a mother slain, Eur. Or. 8.'J3. IIaXy^ax^v
[= {ToXX&Jv ^ax^ywv] a^avav Id. El. 126. MjXa^cr^Xat/ff ffroXftous Id.
Ale. 819. 'Arra;< . . uyuv Soph. Aj. 935. 'O%v%iii [= o%i7
/Ciif>uv~\ ffvv xruftu ^Esch. Cho. 2.'{. Ila/*^ sjra^ [= rvr*>v /AJJTS^] TS y?
Id. Pr. 90> Tat/^ * tt p ft vi r u (> [= -rcivra; or xa:Ta -ravra f*.r t 7Vg\ vixgou
Soph. Ant. 1282. "EXsva; arTa>vT<? [== ^<rrf ^ar<j] Id. Ph. 1338.
458. NOTES. 1. In cases like the above, the adjective form ap-
pears to be assumed through the attraction of the substantive, or in other words,
for the sake of binding together more closely the different parts of the sen-
tence, and giving greater unity to the expression. It will be observed that,
in some of the examples, the adjective simply forms an emphatic pleonasm.
2. In some instances, a Genitive tvith its adjective appear to have been chang-
ed into two adjectives agreeing with the governing substantive ; as, HOVTIOV r
Aiyxiuv' [for -r'ovTou r Alyxiou] IT' XKTXV aX/^svav, and upon the harbourless
coast of the jEgean Sea, Eur. Ale. 595. TLorxfttu, vso-rioa <rt [for -roT/*ay
OTgay] xta-rx, with the oar of the nether stream, Ib. 459.
3. Derivative and compound adjectives are formed in Greek with great free-
dom, and the latter, especially among the poets, often appear to have taken
the place of a simple adjective or noun, by a species of emphatic or graphic
pleonasm} as, Mava^^ryxaj [= f&ovw:] -ruXou;, singly-bridled [= single]
horses, Eur. Ale. 428." 'AyiXa/,- POWOUOIS [= jSa^v] Soph. (Ed. T. 26.
The poets often repeat a noun in composition with - privative or a similar
word, to express emphatically the idea of negation or of evil ; as, MT^^ a/u.*-
rug, our [unmotherly mother] mother, yet no mother, Soph. El. 1 154. Fa^an
i.ya./jt.ov Eur. Hel. 69O (cf. Innuptis . . nuptiis Cic. de Or. iii. 58). r il *ciri
oaVa<rs JEsch. Cho. 315.
459. 12. ANACOLUTHON. An adjective sometimes
differs in case from its subject, through a change of construc-
tion (cf. 333. 7) ; as,
Sivix . . fjxtiv ^rxoxyyi^Xfi X?avre <rayf civdoxs, he commands Xenias to
come, taking his men (cf. Ylx^xyyi^^i *& ft KXsa^w Xavr/ '"xn), i. 2. 1.
AietSxivovrav ftivrot o FXewj avraTf i<r*qixvv ii. 4. 24. 'A-roSxi-^xf . . i2c
fm PI. Leg. 686 e. See the syntax of >he Infinitive and Participle.
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK IIL
NOTE. The use of other cases with the Genitive partitive (as in 364
366) may be referred to simple ellipsis.
II. USE OF THE DEGREES.
[The following observations apply both to ADJECTIVES and ADVERBS.]
$ 4 GO. I. Words are compared not only by inflection
( 155- 163), but also by the use of adverbs denoting more
and most ; as,
MaXXav 0/Xov, more agreeable, Soph. Ph. 886. Tr,us ftdXurret, QiXavs, the
most friendly, vii. 8. 1 1. r il <rA6r<rT ^ai Soph. El. 1326.
NOTES, (a) The two methods are sometimes united for emphasis or
perspicuity (cf. 161. 1, 462) ; as, 0av&v S' uv t"n f*.u,\Xov ivTu%ifrtos ft
%uv, and dying he would be happier, far happier than living, Eur. Hec. 377.
T/; XXf ^aXXav iv'Sixungos ; ^Esch. Sept. 673. IIaXv avv x^tirrav . . p.a.\-
X> % iv. 6. 11 (cf. Ib. 12). MA/<rr 2n*4Tr; Th. vii. 42. Tjy wXi/Vrat
fi^ia-Ttjn SsaJy Kt/V^/v Eur. Ale. 790. T J1 fAiyiffrov i%0ifri) 'yvveti Id. Med. 1323.
(6) So the Comp. and Sup. are united, T H vrxo-eiv xiivo, srXiav 0.^00. \x6ov<f
l^e'tirra. I* poi Soph. El. 201.
4:61. II. The COMPARATIVE is commonly construed
with the particle ^', than, or with the Genitive of distinction ;
and the SUPERLATIVE with the Genitive partitive. Thus,
<I>/XiJ<r avrov ^aXXav . . 'Ag<rg?-jv, Zowm^r Aiffi r/iore </ta Artaxerxe* t
i. 1. 4. See 351, 362. S, 363. 7.
REMARKS. 1 . The Comp. is sometimes construed with other particles,
which commonly strengthen the expression (cf. 460. ) ; as, KaAXrov . . ar^i
TOW <pii/yuv, more honorable [in preference to fleeing] Maw to flee, PI. Phsedo,
99 a. 'Ar/ you wXto, more [instead of you] than you, Soph. Tr. 577.
Ylt/*origa.i jra.^ct. ret . . fAvvtft.ovivefji.iva,, more frequent [beyond] than the
recollections, Th. i. 23. Il^af aVavray . . vXi'itu, more [in comparison with
all] than all, Id. vii. 58. Ili^a rov liovros <rotf>urioi PI. Gorg. 487 d.
*E<rT/ a <raXi/*a* av^; o-rXwv TO <rXiav, a X X a lava,vnf t [war is not of arms the
more, but of expenditure] war does not require arms more than money, Id. i. 83
( 387). TavV ifri xtitr<ra <rXv u-r 'A^yitat; fiirttv, 'better [but not to
fall] than to fall,' Eur. Heracl. 231. 'Avofarnrxoutri r^Tt^av -f/v ^Xi
ylyviffSen oloi $90.1 Cyr. V. 2. 9 (cf. n^onjav ol <p/Xa. cra^jjo-av Ib. vii. 5. 41).
Ov >r(>'ori9v i-ret.vfa.vTo, 'iuf . . x.u.riffrn<ra.v Lys. 174. 6. 'ErJ <ya,trri^i xuvrt-
fov *. 2 1 fi. In the most of t'aese examples, two forms of construction ap-
pear to have been united.
2. The construction of the Gen. with the Comp. is often elliptical; as,
*Eri< wXi/wv ^^avaj, Ii7 p afirxtiv <ro7{ KKTU, ruv iv^5i, since the time it
greater, which I must please those below, than those here [than that during which
I must please those here], Soph. Ant. 74. See 391. y.
3. By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the
Comp., (a) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows *\i7oi,
wXi/w, ?xTTav, or pCiw, $ is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em-
ployed ; as, 'Ar0xTi/vaw<r/ TUV av^wv ov fjt.i7ov fivranoffiovs, 'not less than 5OO,
vi. 4. 24. Se 450. S, and cf. Non ampliut erant quingmti, Cs. YUi. 10.
OH. 2. I tTSE OF THE DEGREES. 313
(6) To the Gen. governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed
with n ; as, T rov3' civ tugnp,' tu^av turv^'iffri^ov, n fce.7^x yYifAKi $a,tri\iws \
Eur. Med. 5,5:5. T vovv r a.ft,t'ivu ruv tpg'.vwv, n vuv q>tH Soph. Ant. 1090.
OS <ri ax ^aXXav ff-ffovbdfftti ris . ., rovro ; PI. Gorg. 5OO C. See also
464. N. (c) The Gen. sometimes' follows 3, instead of the appropriate
case ; as, Ou -x-^oyn <rXt rtis fi/At^xs, lixa, n ^ultxa, trradtuv H. Gr. iv. 6. 5
(see 439).
4G2. III. The positive is sometimes added to the su~
perlative for the sake of emphasis ; as,
xaixifrt, O vilest of the vile, Soph. (Ed. T. 334. 'A.y<t6Zi <Wi*
Cyr. i. 3. 15.
xui raXjtoj^E xec.vtzi<r%vvri <rtt,
K< ftiagl, x.0.} -rxftp, tags, xai f&taou>rcc,ri,
Huf $tug etvtjXhs,.a p. to. guv ftiagur art ;
T/ re! for ttrr ovop,' ; olx. l^ii; ; TP. M/a<wra<raj. An Pax, 182.
NOTES. . By doubling the Pos. or the Sup., we obtain similar forms of
expression, the one less and the other even more emphatic than the above ; as,
"Appvr appvruv, horrible of the horrible, i. e. most fiorrible, Soph. (Ed. T. 465.
As/Xa/a luletian Id. El. 849 ( 362. ). "E^ar Iff^ecruv x.cc.x,<i, the most
violent of the most violent reproaches, Id. Ph. 65 (cf. 161. 1, 46O. a). O
&I $oxi7 iv <r<>7; ftt'y!<r<rois piyiffrov tiva,t PI. Crat. 427 e.
3. From the doubling of the Sup., as in the last example, appears to have
arisen the phrase iv <ro7;, which is used with the Sup. to increase its force, and,
as an adverbial expression, without change of gender ; thus, 'Ev riTu [sc. <*&>-
rois] *-uroi, first [among the first] of all, Th. i. 6. 'Ev <rJ> -r^uryi Id. Hi.
81. 'Ev ro7s <rXt7ffrxi fa vtjis Ib. 17. 'Ev ro7; %ctXi<x-&ruToi, "bivyov Id. VU.
71. 'Ev ro7s peiXiirrct, most of all, PI. Crito, 52 a.
y. The numeral ; is sometimes used with the Sup., to render the idea of
individuality prominent ; as, Aa^a ll -rXitffra. . ., if; yt. uv >), IXa/^Sctvi, he
received the most presents, [at least being one man] for a single individual, i. e.
more than any one man beside, i. 9. 22. IlA.s/V<ra s/V av ^vvK^tvos &><pt-
X7v Th. viii. 68.
"$. The Greeks are fond of expressing the Sup. negatively ; as, Oi>% %xurr
[= ^aX/o-ra], not the least, especially, Mem. i. 2. 23. 'Av^syv ou TUV ubuva.-
<ruTa,T&>v Th. i. 5. ^iLiiffTov "$t xt ou Jixtyrec, Id. vii. 44.
IV. Certain special forms of comparison deserve
notice ; e. g.
1.) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, &c. ;
OS, Mj^sv lx<r$os, greater than could have been hoped, above hope, ^Esch. Ag.
266. MaXXav rov ^iovrs, more than is proper, too much, Mem. iv. 3. 8. Ki>
fov Xoyav, beyond description, Th. ii. 50.
2.) The Comp. followed by % Ka.ro., or sometimes *go; as, Me/*, $
jta.ro. ^uxoua. [sc. Irriv], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great fot
tears, Th. vii. 75. B=Xr/ov9j w xur Hvfyuffov Mem. iv. 4. 24. Ms<'2> . . H
xatr \fjCi x.at} a\ IZiuo'Jv, too great for me and you to discover, PI. Crat. 392 b.
'Ev^-sirr^w? . . >J TOO; rriv iZtvffiu.v Th. iv. 39. Cf. Prcelium atrocius, quant
pro numei-o pugnuntium Liv. 21. 29.
314 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. f BOOK III.
\ L
3.) The Comp. followed by S><rn (or ui) and the Infinitive ; as, B^a^y-ri-
{ *eT<sy us \fyxvi~ir6 itt t they shot [a shorter distance than they must in
order to reach] too short a distance to reach, iii. 3. 7. Ms?ay ri aff-n <>{/
1via.a6a.i xa.x.cv Mem. iii. 5. 1 7. We likewise find the Infin. without ua-rt or
us, and also the Pos. for the Comp. ; as, Ta ya,o yeV^a f*&7%ov % ip^s/v, for the
malady is too great to bear, Soph. (Ed. T. 1 293. T5rs;yj vpuv ft ^va/ lyxctg*
r?y, your mind is too weak to persevere, Th. ii. 61. ~Yv%gov, iQw, a<rrt AoJ.
ffctffai ia-r/y Mem. iii. 13. 3.
4 G 4. 4.) The Comp. and Sup. (for the most part joined with ulrog )
followed by a reflexive pronoun, to denote the comparison of an object with
itself; the Comp. representing it as above that which it has been or would be
in other circumstances, and the Sup. representing it as at its highest point.
Thus, 'Av^ouon/ios yiyvira,i auras etvrou, he becomes more manly than he was
before, PI. Rep. 411 C. "Oftu OWKTeari^ot eturoi O.IITUV ly'tyvovro Th. iii. 11.
"On ^uvo'ruro; tretwrou raura, jW, when you were the most skilled in these mat-
ters that you ever were, i. e. when your skill in these matters was at its highest
point, Mem. i. 2. 46. Iv' ulros O.VTOV rvy%eivu (&Xrt<rro; uv PI. Gorg. 484 e.
NOTE. To the Comp. thus construed, a specification is sometimes annexed
With % ( 461. b) ; as, Aura) tctwraiv [B-etppK%.suTSgoi f*V<y], ifii^atv pia,6u<rtv, n
9T^iv fAn.6i.7v, they have themselves more confidence when they have learned, than
they had before learning, PI. Prot. 350 a. Ta y v-ro^ot-rov uvruv <r*s l'oZ,n$
eitrfavifrigov airo iaturov irnv, % ii p,ri$' tuMntrctv Th. vii.*56.
5.) Two comparatives connected by $, to denote that the one property exists
in a higher degree than the other ; as, 2r^ar>jyo} vXtiovts % /SiA-nW;, general*
more numerous than good, Ar. Ach. 1078. 'lij Xoyoy^ot %uvi0to-Kv i-rt T
V ax.poix.trii, n a.*.n8iffriov Th. i. 21. Hgo0uftos /ttaXXa*
Eur. Med. 485.
4G5. V. The comparative and superlative are often
used without an express object of comparison. In this case,
the SUPERLATIVE increases the force of the positive, while the
COMPARATIVE may either increase or diminish it, according to
the object of comparison which is implied. Thus,
*fl B'dv/Atttrituretrt avfyu-ri, O most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. T fl
pMffi'o<ra.Tai vii. 7. 10. Tj -r;<Wy, immediately, iii. 3. 16. IIXi/w [sc. TOO
JavT9f] XfXtxra:/, [more than is proper] too much has been said, Eur. Ale. 706
(cf. MaXAav <reu 3'tovros, 463. 1 ). NwTia? ui Ii TO u.o%uv, being too young
for the command, Th. vi. 12. Max^arj^ev . . 1i*y*<ra.<r6tt.i, it is rather long
[than otherwise] to re/ate, PI. Conv. 203 a (cf. S 464. 5). *O ^i eev^ifTi^ev
ri n aL<rix/>ivet<ro, but he answered them [somewhat more insolently than he
might have done] with a degree of insolence, Th. viii. 84. MiXaj iwVava,
ayga/*aria, an energetic strain, somewhat rough, Ar. Ach. 673. Ta? $i iri-
ga/v xeti a.^oyuTi^a., ' quite confounding,' Th. vi. 46. T<; <r*!y a.fut>o<ri(>cai, one
of the more inexperienced, v. i. 8.
NOTE. The Comp. and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are
said to be used absolutely. When thus employed, the Comp. is often trans-
lated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too or rather ; and the
Sap. by the Pos. with very. In addition to the examples above, see 466.
$46(5. VI. The degrees are more freely interchanged
CH. 3.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. EPIC USE. 315
and mixed, than in English. It may be however remarked in
general, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders
the discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus,
Ttnvrnt ftct^nrrot [for ?T0Xi jttaXXay] rs to^ns acrvrci&rai, this she chooses far
rather than the virgin, Eur. Iph. A. 1 594. 2s7a . . ^axa^a-arsj, more completely
happy than you, X. 482. 'A^iaXayuretror ruv f^yiyivrifjt.ivuv, [the most re-
markable of those which had preceded it] more remarkable than any which had
preceded it, Th. i. 1. T H ftiXntrn rut trnwrou $i\uv Ar. Plut. 631. To xaX-
Xrray . . <ruv -r^or'i^eav $0.0; Soph. Allt. 100. 'H/wuy o 'ytgetirige; [for y
fctirKros], the oldest of us (though none of them were old), Cyr. v. 1.6.
'Eftoi -rix^os Ttfonxtv [sc. ^aXXav, 460], j xtivoi; yXt/xwj, his death has been
more bitter to me than sweet to them, Soph. Aj. 965 (cf. 46'4. 5). 'Avsx^a-
<ya -rtivrts eu; oX/yaj [sc. crXjyaf ] vu/o-titv, they all cried out that he had given
him too few blows, v. 8. 12 (cf. 465). *ft <p/X yvvetixuv, O [beloved of]
dearest of women, Eur. Ale. 460 ( 362. ). 0< iraXXa/, the greater number,
or the most, Mem. i. 1 . 19 (cf. Oi -rXiTirrot Ib. 1 1 *, ToTs vXtiofi H. Gr. ii. 3.
34). 'Ox/yat/f . ., <ro It *o\v i. 7. 20. O/ 2s yt^etirt^ai, but the [older] old
men, Cvr. i. 2. 4. O/ ^*!v vsa< voT; TUV vr/Jiffu<rt(>citv ivretivois %eti(ouffiv Mem. ii.
1. 33. "Icrgrov . . sraXa/Tigev iv. 5. 35. T< yjT^av, <w 2^y*^aT8j, ysyavsv,
tcAaf new <Ain</ Aas happened, Socrates, PI. Euthyphr. 2 a. Ns/yrs^&jy <nvt?
iir^f^ai/yTE; r^a.yfjt.a.'ruv, ' a revolution,' H. Gr. V. 2. 9. Ov2f xa/vT8^a,
nothing [more recent] new, PL Phaedo, 115 b. Ow ya^ ^*'if ay *rXXa*^
x9ws;v Ib. 105 a. IlaXXa ut el &i*.rTov etvra7s ffTi^ff6a.i t ' not well for them,'
Cyr. v. 1 . 12. TV /*/ ^5Jy J?Ta x^roy j wAert </te rfoes zt profit me to live t
Eur. Ale. 961 (cf. TV $*' i^e0i ^y t^a JEsch. Pr. 747). Oa/q*
f, 'oldest,' . 156.
CHAPTER III.
SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE.
4G7. The article (o, >;, TO) appears, in the Epic lan-
guage, as a GENERAL DEFINITIVE, performing the office not only
of an article as usually understood, but still more frequently
of a demonstrative, personal, or relative pronoun (see ^ 147,
148) ; as, ^
'0 ys^iwy, the old man, A. 33. Ta T* lyr, <r r ifa-op-tva, A. 7O. Ta T*
&<r/>iva. "S'ixifffcu, and accept this ransom, A. 20. '0 y, /or Ae, A. 9. "Ef
^tttvt A. I 93. T*y, tt'AoTn, A. 36. Ta plv ToXiuv l| i<rei0optt, ret
'those things which,' A. 125.
1 . These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, (a)* The
art., as usually understood, is simply a less emphatic form of the demonstr.
pron. Compare, in Eng., " That man whom you see," and " The man whom
you see." (b) Tho personal pron. of the Q d Pers. is a substantive demonstr. pron.
Compare, in Eng., "' Those that love me," and " Them that love me " ; " Those
that seek me," and " They that hate me," Prov. viii. 17, 21, 36. (The per
316 SYNTA.X OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK III
sonal pron., like the art., is commonly less emphatic than the demonstrative
asually so named.) (c) The demonstr. pron. used connectively becomes a
relative ; as, in Eng., " Blessed are they that mourn." Observe the resem-
blance in form between the English article the, and the pronouns that, this, he,
they, &c. ; the derivation of the detinite art in the French, Italian, &c., from
the Lat. demonstr. ille; and the extensive use of the German article der
die, dot.
4G8. 2. In Epic poetry, (a) The article, in its proper use as
such, is commonly not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great ex-
tent in other kinds of elevated poetry. (6) When used as a personal pro-
noun, it is most frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek
( 490, 491) ; and is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the
substantive to which it refers ; as, 'H $' if*tr IlaXXaj 'A^'nu, and she,
Pallas Minerva, followed, a. 125. Ai V ififjt.uZ > et.v 'Afavuiu <rs xtti "H^jj A.
20. Cf. 499. (c) As a demonstrative, it sometimes follows its substan-
tive before a relative ; as, 'A.vrovrsfA'Trtiv av^ TOV, S< m S-io7<rtv etfi^n-Teti K.
73. 2wv^<r/awv TKUV, us \virt\Xi E. 319. (d) The article when used as a
personal or demonstrative pronoun has sometimes, from its position (see
49 1 . R.), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the Norn, with the
common relative ; as, "Oy y Jtwraraj r.Xfav, for he returned last, . 286.
MS' os Qvyai Z. 59. "0 y ysga; trri S-atovruv, 'for this,' T. 9.
3. In the later Ion. and in the Dor. writers, this extended use of the article
was, in great measure, retained, E. g. in Hdt., the relative has in the Norn.
sing, and pi. the forms os, %, r'o, o'i, ", T and has elsewhere the T- forms
of the article, except after prepositions which suffer elision, and in the phrases,
9(5, V J, \S 0, f*'lX,Ot OU.
4. Traces of the earlier and freer use of the article likewise remained in
the Attic and common Greek ; so that we shall treat of the Att. use of the
article under two heads, (i.) its use as an article, and, (n.) its use as a pro-
noun, combining with the latter the use of the relative forms ( 148. 2) as
demonstrative or personal. We ought, perhaps, to premise, what might be
inferred from fy 467. 1, that no precise line of division can be drawn betwee".
the use of the article as such, and its use as a pronoun.
1. THE ARTICLE AS AN ARTICLE.
^ 469. RULE XXVII. The ARTICLE is pre-
fixed to SUBSTANTIVES, to mark them as definite.
1 f The Greek article is commonly translated into English by the
definite article THE ; but often when used substantively, and sometimes when
used adjectively, by a demonstrative pronoun (f > 47fi, 479, 48G. l). With a
participle following, it is most frequently tran^'ated by a relative and verb,
preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a personal or demonstrative pro-
noqn, ( 476). It is often omitted in translation, especially with proper names,
abstract nouns, nouns used generically, and pronouns ( 470, 471, 473); and
must be often supplied in translation when not expressed ( 485, 486).
2. A substantive used indefinitely wants the article ; as, KaXo? yj 9i-
r*vot, vrctg uvtoi ff-rovbtiitf %*!! (ps/Xa^iv, a favor due from a good man u
an excellent treasure, Isocr. 8 b. See 51H. .
UH. 3.] WITH GENERIC, ABSTRACT NOUNS, &C.
^ 47O. A substantive used DEFINITELY is
either employed in its full extent, to denote that
which is known, or, if not employed in its full ex-
tent, denotes a definite part.
A.) A substantive employed in its fall extent, to
denote that which is known, may be,
1.) A substantive used generically, i. e. denoting a whole class ; as, } avfytt
was, man (referring to the whole race), yv vfi, woman, el civfya-roi, men, el
'A^va/a/, the Atltenians (the whole nation). Thus, '0 avfyuvos " civfyufos "
uva/u.a,er^ti, man was named eivfyuvos, PL Crat. 399 C. '0 ya.^ ffupZovXos XKI i
fvxoipeivrys . . Iv rovrtf -rXiiffrov aXXjjXwv ^teKp'tgouiriv Dem. 291. 15. KaJ tut
'EXXjjva/y Se i%&>v oVX/raj . . r^Kxaffious, ' of Greeks,' i. 1. 2. Cf. 485. /}.
NOTE. To this head may be referred substantives used distributively, which
consequently take the article ; as, K^j i>vi<r%vt7>rizi . . T^O. *p.&a.oux.ot. TOO
ftnvo; <ru 0-T^Knury, Cyrus promises three half-darics [the month to the sol-
dier] a month to each soldier, i. 3. 21. Even with ixa-trros as, "Exa<r<rav <ri
t^va;, each nation, i. 8. 9. Kara TOV oir\lrnv ixuffrev *%vo fiva.7 Th. V. 49 (cf.
ov a.ffK,'ov iii. 5. 10. For the position of txtzfro;, see 472. .
2.) A substantive expressing an abstract idea ; as, 'H a^irri, virtue, fi xaxi,
vice, ffoQ'ia,, wisdom, ro xaXav, t/ie beautiful ( 449. a). C H eru^otrvvn, xeti Si
{yx^tiriia,, xa.} v ci*.xv Cyr. vii. 5. 75. Cf. 485. #.
3.) An infinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spoken of as such ;
as, To *Jv, to live, life ( 445). A/a ro (poSiTfffai, through fear, v. 1. 13. Et(
ro p.Y> ^ta, ro lyyli tivcti <Qo&iiff6a.i vii. 8. 20. To ovoftx o eiv0guifof, the name
iv^u-ros PI. Crat. 399 c. To OVO/AX, p *%.** Ib. 415 d. ToSvaua. *vi
igtrriv Ib. e. (In the three last examples, the article conforms by attraction
to the noun following, instead of being neuter ( 445), inasmuch as the word
wopa. expressed sufficiently shows that civfyuvros, &c., are spoken of merely as
words.)
. 4.) The name of a monadic object ; i. e. of an object which
exists singly in nature, or which is so regarded (fAavct2io(, single) ; as, <5 X<f,
the sun, fi tr&wt), the moon, n y%, the earth, o ougetvos, the heavens. Thus, "E;i
rfoipvv y yv uvo TOV ofyavou, the earth receives nutriment from the heavens, (Ec.
17. 10. Cf. 485. .
5.) The name of an art or science ; as, 'H Ictr^xvi xa.} fi xctXxsunxri x,dH
'* nxrovtxfi, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, CEc. i. 1. Cf. 485. /3.
6.) A proper name, which has been before mentioned or implied, or which is
well known; as, Kuaav ^\ p.sraTrtfivrt'rai . .. 'Avafa/vs/ auv o Kv^os, But he sends
for Cyrus. Cyrus therefore goes up, i. 1 . 2. A<a ^>^uyia; . .. Ira <$>vyi&s
rX/v i. 2. 6, 7. K!/8j T^V K./X/a'o'av tit rviv El/X/x/y awa^rs^T'j/, Cyrus sends
the Cllician qeeen to Cilicia, i. 2. 20. *T?rjj rns 'EXXaJaj, in behalf of Greece
(their native land), i. 3. 4. Cf. 485. a.
NOTES, (a) Proper names appear to take the article, from their being, In
their origin, either adjectives used substantively ( 448), or common nouns used
distinctively ( 479). Thus, 'H 'ExXaj [sc. y5], [the Greek' land] Greece
(comp. England, the land of the Angles, in French L'Angleterre, Scotland,
27*
318 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK III.
Ireland} ; '0 'ExXwWavTaj, [the sea of Helle] the Hellespont ; 'O
[sc. 'g], [the Illustrious Man] Pericles; '6 O/X/^T-O,-, [the Horse-lover,
Philip; *Av?J Mwo-a; Ta ysva; xai rouvoftae, rovro i%ti>v V. 2. 29. (6) The ad-
jective construction is especially retained in names of rivers ; as, C O Ma/avo^a*
*raTa^a; i. 2. 7. Ta5 Magrwv fora.fji.oZ Ib. 8. So, in Eng., *Ae Connecticut
full
473. B.) A substantive wotf employed in
7 ezfefttf may be rendered definite,
I.) By a limiting word or phrase.
This word or phrase is usually placed, either between the article and its sub-
stantive, or er/ter <Ae substantive ; and in the latter case, the article is often re-
peated, either for perspicuity or emphasis. Thus, Ws%p Taw M^S/a? rs/^owj, as
faros the wall of Media, i. 7. 15. To rs^ TO YlnoKia TS~%OS H. Gr. iv. 8. 9.
Ta [*.a,xa. >rti%n ruv K.ooiv0iu* Ib. 4. 1 8. To rt7%os ro IItiv0tuv vii. 2. 1 1
(cf. K< Tetwygoiiav TO fiT^a; -Xi^tiKov Th. i. 108). Ta ftlv ttrufav [^^X, ^}
Wga rtjf K/A/x/ay . ., TO 5i {^w Ta ?rga T>J; 2^/a; i. 4. 4. 'O TJJ fiaffiXiMf
yua.ixos aJsX<pof ii. 3. 28. Ta T?J Tew %CUVOVTOS <ri%vwf s^yov PL Pol. 281 a,
Ev T/~f KUfAKis T?J wfj-tj Tay sTeS/aw Taw raj> Te KSVT^/TJJV vorctfAov iv. 3. 1.
NOTES, a. On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the
definition or description of the substantive, but to that which is said about it
in the sentence, either precede the article, or follow the substantive without the
article; as, "On xtvot a QoGos t"n, xa} o\ a/>%ovns truoi, that the fear was ground-
Jess, and the generals safe, ii. 2. 21. Y/A.jv t%uy *w xj<pXj'v, having the head
bare, i. 8. 6. 'Exi;vv av xjaToy ftgouvn TM "fvr/y Ib. 1 . KaT5<rTjo-v avr/-
v TJ ^aXacyya i. 10. 10. "E^rsa^j ffytftovt rw 'HgaxXtT, follow Hercu-
les as leader, vi. 5. 24 (cf. Tw 'Hyi/wow 'H^axXsrvi. 2. 15). A/a
raw vru.(>a.'bt'iffeu, through the midst of the park, i. 2. 7 ( 456). 'Ev T>5
^tta->) Dem. 848. 13 (but, Ta ^sa-av <rr7<f>os, the centre division, i. 8. 13).' IlaX-
XA/V run ivrtrn'Stiuv fiifreis, full of the necessaries of life in great abundance, iv.
4. 7. Ta 3l tcr/Tjj^/a troXXa rjv ^oe./u,Seivtiv iv. 1. 8. 2wv oX/yo/j Ta/~f Tf)
ttvrov, with those about him few, i. e. wiVA /0 attendants, i. 5. 12 (but, 2w
<V oXiyoi; #i(>} avrov, with the few about hint). 'E,<ri%ci>g>i<rKi oXv T^ ^a
Xayya, i. 2. 17. Tf riftigaf a'Xf Hi. 3. 11. IIa<r/ . . ro7s x/itraTs xeii roit
Si&rw cra*jy, to all the judges and all the spectators, Ar. Av. 445. "iOXj f
afff-ffa. ft %ugot, the country was all bare, i. 5. 5. "Exaa-Tav TO i'^a; i. 8. 9
(*) 470. N.). To x't^ttf ixun^ov vii. 1. 23. 'Aft<f>ort^ee. TO. ura., both his ears
iii. 1.31. Av-ru TOV Aaxwvi, the^Spartans themselves, vii. 7. 1 9 (but, T
A*wvi, <A aw Spartans), lout rt ayJgaf etvrovs ii. 5. 39.
/}. When the substantive is preceded or followed by successive modification*,
the article is sometimes repeated with each ; as, To ! 'A^*J/a TO TOW A/a
Awxa/ow <i^o, Me tew;;/e o/ Lyctean Jove in Arcadia, PL Rep. 565 d. 'E ry
row A/oj T>J pvy'iffr'n logry Th. i. 126. Ta n <ni%*i ra. ioturui TO. pa-x.^*
Ib. 108.
REMARKS. 1. It is common to employ the arti-
cle even when the substantive is rendered definite by a posses-
sive or demonstrative pronoun ; as,
a. POSSESSIVE. '0 i^oi recrr^, my father, i. 6. 6. *0/tp,ct router [=ri
CH. 3.J WITH A LIMITING WORD OR PHRASE. 319
i^uey, 39] Cyi. viii. 7. 26. Tv fiptrixv xa>etv iv. 8. 6. To/ ya^y T<J/ &JM-
<riif vii. 3. 39.
/3. DEMONSTRATIVE. The pronouns atJVaj and aSs, as themselves beginning
with the article ( 1 5O), do not take it before them, and txiTvos follows their
analogy. The arrangement, therefore, with these pronouns is the same as in
472. . Thus, Taurus rots roXt/y, these cities, i. 1.8. Toy v^ rovrov
L 6. 9. TaySi ray reaVay, i. 1.9. '0 /*b yj ftt Apol. 29. 'ExsW rvt
i. 7. 18.
NOTE. In prose, when the article is omitted with a demonstrative pronoun
and a common noun, the pronoun is usually employed as a subject, and the
noun as an attribute; thus, v E<r<r< jtttv ya.^ vrtv'ta. eturt) feeing,, for this is mani-
fest poverty, (Ec. 8. 2 (cf. AWTJJ 'ivbiios, Ib.). K/yjj yag ay<rj
lyinro Th. i. 1. AU'TJJ y aP.Xn Vo$ei<ris y i. 1. 7.
4 7" 4. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is pre-
fixed to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper
name or a personal pronoun to give dejiniteness or emphatic
distinction ; as,
Ta $a.ffi\ivovra, 'A^ra^i^v, [the reigning Artaxerxes] Artaxerxes the king,
1. 1. 4. MEV&V a trraXaj, Meno the Thessalian, i. 2. 6. 'Esryal-a, ^ 2iyyi.
r/e; yt/vj, Tau K;X;'&iv fiatffiX'tus Ib. 15. > A^/a'Ta3>j / t6ay Tay p,ix,(>ov ifntaXov-
(Aivov Mem. i. 4. 2. 'Ey<y . . a s^j?rarMx&j . ., uf*,t7; ? a/ t^>j5rT)ytya/ V. 7. 9.
H reiXttiv iyu, /, ^Ae wretched one (by eminence), i. e. mos miserable, Soph.
El. 1138. 'O^y a-8 ray Jwo-TJjyay Id. (Ed. C. 745. 'O -ravrX^^y ly<w, /, <A
all-wretched, Id. (Ed. T. 1379. Ta\ -ntr^ovT^v, rov a.ff&n pi Ib. 1441. So,
when the pronoun is implied in a verb, 'Hxexo^ay a raXa? Soph. Tr. 1015.
*O rX^<wy . . %xa Eur. Andr. 1070.
NOTE. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted;
as, SivoQuv 'AJnvetlof, Xenophon, an Athenian, i. 8. 1 5. YLetrifyvois vJ
H't^irtis Ib. 1. 'Eyi raXaj, /, unhappy man, Soph. (Ed. C. 747. 'ApA.x.
jUou ^t/a-7-yoj Ib. 844.
4T5. 3. An adverb preceded by an article has often
the force of an adjective. This construction may be explained
by supposing the ellipsis of a participle, commonly wV or yevo-
fifrog. Thus,
Tey yyy %ovav, the [now time] present time, vi. 6. F 3 (cf. Tay aWa vvv xa-
9i>o Eur. Ion, 1349). 'Ey ru x%off6ii [sc. ytvoftiviv] Xoycu ii. 1.1. 'O yw
$air*Xi/j aJrof, xctXiffavros TOV TOTI fiaffri.iu;. -rxr^os %l TOV viJy Cyr. iv. 6. 3.
T>jy rr'/tay iif&ioetv iv. 6. 9. TSjf a7*^ a^aw iii. 1. 2. Ta?f irayw ray fl-T^as-
riurvv, the best soldiers, Th. viii. 1. Kao>9w ray iraXa; Soph. (Ed. T. 1.
NOTES, (a) This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used
either substantivefy or adverbially ( 476 478). (b) A preposition with its
case may be used in the same way ; as, Ta? Iv AX<p~; ^rifrn^iav, the Delphic
oracle, Cyr. vii. 3. 15. *A^ey/a . . crge? tfffi^a.v, Western Arm&iia, iv. 4. 4.
4:76. 4. The substantive which is modified is often
'omitted ; in which case the article may commonly be regarded
as used substantive! y with the word or phrase following (see
447,469. 1). Thus,
320 SYNTA.X OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK 11.
T&Jy <ra $a<rt\las [sc. avfyuv], of those from the king, i. 1.5. Twv vto}
rflv S-r'^av, Mose engaged in the hunt, or tfte hunters, PL Soph. 22O d. O; rei
^npou Th. viii. 66. O7 r" i'vSav . . xa,} at s%tv, both those within, and those with-
out, ii. 5. 32. To v'ta,v TOV vorapov, the opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2
Taw vr^otru, i. 3. 1. E/s n^MttXa [TO sptvret>.tv], 6ac&, i. 4. 15. O/ x TOS
if'iy.iiita,, those of the country beyond, v. 4. 3. TaJV vrugovfi TUV VTHTTUV i. 5. 1~5.
T/ TO XiwXwav E/'JJ tlffiXQtiv, 4'/ta # was which prevented their entering, iv. 7. 4.
'0 jtflfty uv,he that is nothing, Soph. Aj. 767. Tov pntu [oWos] Ib. 1231.
See 450.
NOTE. The phrases at a.^1 and el */, followed by the name of a person,
commonly include the person himself, with his attendants or associates ; and
sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than the person
merely. Thus, O/ up^t 'Ag*<ov, [those about Ariaeus] Arusus and those with
him, iii. 2. 2. 0< fioi 3sva<p<wv<r, Xennphon with his men, vii. 4. 16. O/ 5*
Kfitpl 'Yitrtra.tySQvviv iii. 5. 1 (cf. Tiffffxtp'tovm xeti 01 fftiv etv-rSi Ib. 3). Tyj a,fjt,<p}
(>a,ffuX>.o* xai 'Ej<r;v/^>7, Thrasyllus and Erasinides with their colleagues^
Mem. 1. 1. 18. O/ f&iv yn^i TOU; K.ooiv0iau; |y T/J Nc^j'a '/ifftfn, ei ^t A^//ii-
/a/ xa) a/ %uft.fAet%ot iv riv Sixuuvi, ' the Corinthians with their allies,' H. Gr. iv.
2. 14. llirrctxou rt xui B/avTOf, xai TA;V a^ip/ TOV M/X^av 0aX?v PI. Hipp.
Maj. 281 c.
5. When the neuter article is used substantively
with a word or phrase following, (.) the precise idea (as, in
English, of ' thing"* or ' things' 1 ) must be determined from the
connection, and (/?.) not unfrequently the whole expression
may be regarded as a periphrasis for an included substantive.
Thus,
. Ta TOW yf, <fo evils of old age, Apol. 6. Ta aftfi rev voltpav, mill'
tary exercises, Cyr. ii. 1. 21. Ta <r^< H^*vov, the fate of Proxenus, ii. 5.
37. *Ev TO?? i-rctvu, [in the above] in the preceding narrative, vi. 3. 1 . Ta
ftiv 5i Kt/^fli; djXov OT/ ovrut t%tt f(>of r./ux;, tafrtg TCI Yip.'iTtoct T/>OS IxiTvov, ' the
relation of Cyrus to us is the same as ours to him,' i. 3. 9. T w ? * ipol
ix'tirfai aT/ TUV o"xoi, to prefer remaining with me to returning home, i. 7. 4.
'E<rii 5i T T<W 9-iwv xxXus it%t*, and when the gods had been duly honored, iii.
2. 9. Ta rt^/ Tf J/*if, the circumstances of the trial, PI. Phaedo, 57 b.
Xi<^/Va(paf p*lv ffiv TiTlXtWT>5X, . . rat 5* ixtivou Ntwv 'A(r/va7af criAs, ' his
place or office,' vi. 4. I I. 'E-riffrri/tuv j7v< ruv eif*<pi T^J/J, to 6e skilled in
tactics, ii. 1 . 7. Tai/y Ta 'AfatKieuv (pgovovvTui, those that favor the cause of the
Athenians, Th. viii. 31. tb^ovuv TO, V0{ tr'i vii. 7. 30. Ta TUV a.\iiuv, the
luibit of fishermen, (Ec. 16. 7. 'Hf Js TO Taw vroTa.fji.ov o"rus i-ro^trvvfro, 'the
diversion of the river,' Cyr. vii. 5. 1 7. To TOV 'Ifiuxiitv 'ix-rov vrtrovtiiveti, to be
in the condition of the horse of fbycus, PI. Parm. 1 36 e. At^iiva/ TO TUV vctfi&v,
to have the boyish fear, Id. Pluedo, 77 d ( 432). To TOW 'SoQoxt.iovs, what is
taid by Sophocles, Id. Rep. 3'JD c. To TUV -rct^ovruv, the convenience of thost
who are present, Id. Gorg. 458 b. See 447. y.
/3. To T rv%vf, the course of fortune, = * rv%ti, fortune, Eur. Ale. 785
To TUV -rvtuftxTuv, the state of the winds, = <ra wii/potToi, the winds, Dem. 49
7. To Ji TUV xpriptiTuv, but the matter of the money, TO, %(>rif*,ocT(t, Id. 47
24. Ta Tjf oyn< = o^y*, Th. ii. 60. 'E-ryvti TO, Qxtriliuf, extolled the king,
H. Gr. vii. 1. 38. Ta 3tv OVTU frov^'opiv t'trTai Kur. Iph. A. 33. Ta /3aj
.n* lvo f Id. Hel. 276. '11; 5 fu ou$/>uv, Ta/ta, [ri
CH 3.J PREVIOUS MENTION, &C. 321
tft-a, = \yu\ 6' ol%i ffuty^ovu. Id. Andr. 235. E/ TO TV tSvovv vfaga Soph.
El. 1203. See 447. y, 45:3. i.
4: 7 8. 6. The NEUTER ACCUSATIVE of the article is
often used in forming adverbial phrases ( 440, 441), in con-
nection wif'n,
a. ADVERBS ( 475. a) ; as, To rX< [sc. ay], as to that which was of old,
i. e. formerly, anciently, PL Phaedr. 251 b. Ta <r0ff0iv, before, i. 10. 10. To
*!* Eur. Ale. 977. Tovp.yra.Xiv [TO /*?raX/v], buck, vi. 6. 38. Ta <yt -rot^ttu-
r< Ar. Vesp. 833. Ta a-a^ay Ag. 7. 7. Ta <ra,-ay PI. Tim. 41 b.
/3. ADJECTIVES; as, Ta ir^rav, at first, i. 10. 10. Ta -r^ura., first, Soph.
Tr. 757. Te <rearay, before, iv. 4. 1 4. Ta T^'TOV i. 6. 8. Ta <raXa/a'y iii.
4. 7. TaiXa^/a-ray [TO 5X^/<rTa], a* /easf, V. 7. 8. See 441.
y. PREPOSITIONS followed by their cases ; as, Te re rat/Ss, as to */ia after
this, i. e. henceforth, Cyr. v. 1.6. To I* TO^I Ib. 5. 43. T wgej to-r'tguv, to
Vie west, vi. 4. 4. See 475. b.
II.) By previous mention, mutual un-
derstanding, general notoriety, or emphatic distinc-
tion ; as,
QogvSov tjxovft 3ta. TUV ra|jwv levro;, XKI %otro Tig a 0uo$ i*v, he
heard a noise passing through the ranks, and inquired what the noise was, i. 8.
16. O/ S' lftoluX.OV f&i%l XUf&Hf TWOS'
i. 10. 11. Ta crXaTa a/rm i. 3. 1 6 (cf. A/T?V *Xo7a, Ib. 14). Aat/Xsya
^*tv 9-saTf, a T/ crar' /Vi a/ S-sa/Eur. Or. 418. "Ors &<gZ.tis vtrTtgav ayii-
(ets TV* a.*a.i6pvTov e-r^ar/av X^sy, 'that innumerable anny,' iii. 2.
13. Ti'vay foivrts TO. oroAXa {Tytw^ar' sV^' b AiX/^/ Soph. El. 563.
Tev av^a o^u, I see THK MAN [i. e. Artaxerxes], i. 8. 26. 'AvaxaA.aynTs
TOV rgadoTnv, exclaiming, ' the traitor !' vi. 6. 7. 'AvaxaXayvrs; TOV tii-
^yTv, rev av^ja ra a, y 0.601 Cyr. iii. 3. 4.
48O. REMARKS. 1. From a reference to something
which precedes, or is mutually understood, the article may be
even joined,
a.) With an INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN ; as, "AxXa i-aivw, l$* o 'I<r%oftet-
%os, $Xw ffoi . . $/y7<raa-0a/. . . Ta vroia ; i<pjy \<yu, I will then, said Ischom-
achus, relate to you other things. [The what?] What are they? said I, (Ec.
10. 1. KP. "A ' tf&vrtbuv ftciXifTct, TitvS' %xu (Q^d/ruv. 'ET. Ta re7a
rawra; Eur. Ph. 706. TP. IIaa-< It ,vp,,ffToy. 'EP. Ta TI ; Ar.
Pax, 696. 'EP. O7a ^' tx&ivru aya-rw^^a/ <rou. TP. Ta TI; Ib. 693
(Ta plur. with reference to afa, and TI sing, for plur. ; cf. Ti oZv Tavra. la-Tin \
450. y). E/y a T/ -ra^ry l'.7 TI pi TO $tivov \ya.<ru ; Eur. Bac. 492.
IlaTfoa auv oftoioT^ov TU t?Sn PI. Phaedo, 79 b. See 528. 1.
/3. With a PERSONAL PRONOUN; as, Ast^a &j, ^ J' o;, tw^uj *put oa
-a^a?aXX/j ; . . Fla?, ttfinv tya, Xy/j, xa.} fttoce. TIVO.S TO If upas ; WiR
you not, said he, come hither directly to us ? Whither, said I, do you say, and
to whom [as the you?] do I go, in going to you ? PI. Lys. 203 b. Tot ipi t
the me, i. e. me, of whom you speak, Id. Phil. 20 a.
322 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK III.
y.) With a PHONOUN OF QUALITY OK QUANTITY ; as, T ronurev ov{,
such a dream as I have described, or, such a dream as this, iii. J . 3.
rrwv TO* roiovrot Mem. i. 5. 2. Tx rnXixtturnv a^riv PL Leg. 755 b.
2. A numeral preceded by KpQi, about, has commonly the article, the round
number being apparently regarded as an object familiar to the mind, or as a
definite standard to which an approach is made ; thus, "A^ctru . . a.^} ra
ifxo<ri, chariots about the [number of] twenty, i. e. about twenty in number, i. 7
10. YLiXraffra} 11 K/U,<PI revs ^t<r%i\iovs i. 2. 9. 'A/ufo rot, Ktvrwxovret, trn U.
6. 15. So, Eit ra lxrev a^ara, Cyr. vi. 1. 50.
^481. III.) By the connection in which it is
employed; as,
irtXtvrnfft ActgiTog, xat,} xri<rrtj tis rrtv fietnXtiei
'had succeeded to the throne [sc. of Persia],' i. 1. 3. 'lovrts i
i. 2. II. A* X.'oyx<n xeti at rd^ti; xoe.ra.(f>a.v(,7s 'fyiyvavro i. 8. 8. 01 $'
tare/ n^ov -r^os <rov; vrgo<pu>.otxus , i&rouv rous Kg%ovrets ii. 3. 2.
4:83, REMARK. With substantives which are rendered
definite by the connection, the article has often the forces of a
possessive (see 503) ; as,
*EavAiTa ru ?$ iptpori^u vagtTvx^ he wished [the] his- children to be
both present, i. 1. 1. TWap^vjjf $/**>./ rav Kv^av x^os rev iliXtp'ov Ib.
3. \\voo; rt xa,refrn$fas cL-x-o rou cigftaros rot 3- tag ax a, iviSu, xu)
flv 'ivrirov rot. <ra.l-.ra, tif rets %t?uf i'A.aes i. 8. 3.
483. IV.) By contrast.
This may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which
are otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the em-
ployment of the article with the indefinite pronoun rig. Thus,
*E txiiorrep r^iTf a'v^aj, uv el fjt\v $vo ixGdvrts tis reify* t0tro rot, oVx, o *b\
tif Iptn, 'of whom two . ., but the third,' v. 4. 11. T^v 2i roXj^;v el pi*
vivif otlffSopivoi xiiXtv fygetftov . ., el $s rXXfli . . Q<tvi(>e} yfotv Qivyovris,
1 some . ., but the most,' iv. 3. 33. "l-rirov; . ., rtus pi* rivets *(*.( ipoi,
rout It r KXia^y xttra.\i\iifAfjt,ivous iii. 3. 1 9. Cf. 490. R.
484. GENERAL REMARKS. 1. The article is some-
times found without a substantive, through anacolulhon (^ 329.
N.) or aposiopcsis (ajroaiamijatf, the becoming silent, i. e. the
leaving a sentence unfinished, from design, strong emotion, or
any other cause) ; as,
'II <ruv aX/.^v 'EA.Xiy&; - , t*ri %(>ri xaxietv, i7-r' ayv/a, tin xa)
Kp<poria. raur' ti-ritv, the - , whether I should say cowardice, or /oily
of the rest of the Gree/is, or both tbcse together, Ucm. 231. 21. T? f yet.^
ifttJSj tl^v ri; lorn ffoQia, xa.1 e'l a. , /u.dgrt/i>a, u/u.7* Tetoi^afttti PI. Apol. 2O 6.
M rev - , el vu yi. Not you, by - (the name of the god omitted, aa
the old grammarians say, through reverence), Ib. Gorg. 46'6' e.
. 2. OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE With substan-
CH. 3.] OMISSION. 323
lives which will be at once recognized as definite without the
article, it is often omitted ; particularly with,
a. Proper names, and other names resembling these from their being specially
appropriated or familiar appellations of persons ( 471) J thus, A/aXX ror
Kv*ax. . . ^uXXxpSavti Kl^ov i. 1.3. lips K%v Ib. 6, 7. lips rov Ku^ot
Ib. 10. 'O S* Kvps Ib. 7, 10. K^tf Si i. 2. 5. See i. 5, 11, 12. E/j TJ
KA/x/ i. 2. 20, 21. E/f K/Xfx/av Ib. 21. "A^a wX/y Svvavn ii. 2. 13.
"A/^at reji fiXiu tiuoftivsu Ib. 16. To7j ei^ovfi rSJj S-xXxfrns, . . <ra<V TJJJ y!Jf
Rep. Ath. 2. 4. Ta7j /c*iv Ko.ro. SxXxrrxv &g%ovfir t . . ra/s Si xaros yijv Ib. 5.
n^os io-x-ix, . . -r^os ttv V. 7. 6. "On fto^ixs . 0S/, vorof Ss Ib. 7. Ti
Ixtivuv vrXoTov. . . "E;A ys xlruv xxt rixvx xo.} yuvx7xM( i. 4. 8. Aa??y
xai aiTv xa) yuvctixo, xcti vcti^tts */ ra %gjftotret vii. 8. 9. 2tv Tor? 3*a/V
iii. 1.23. Il^of T/WV S^saiv Ib. 24. 2uv Searj vii. 7. 7. Il^o? S^fwv v. 7. 5.
A/xa/av Iff-r; xa; cr^oj Stay xeti vrgog o,v6^ufuv i. 6. 6'. Ta fT^o; rot/j S-t/y,
ra <Ta? TOW; xvfyetwraus Lac. 13. 11. Hence /3<r/Xsi/f , in its familiar appli-
cation to the .m</ q/" Persia, commonly wants the article ; as, TLogtvtreu
us P>a,<rt\ia., goes to the king, i. 2. 4. Cf. Tov /3a<r/Asa ii. 4. 4.
/3. Abstract nouns, names of arts and sciences, and generic terms ( 470) \
thus, Eugof tlxoffi fofruv, v\J/os ^s Ixxroy ii. 4. 12. To tvoa; vrtvryixov'ret vroiut,
xeti ro u^of yfivr^xovTa, iii. 4. 10. 'Xwa xaXX0f$ xa) fay'^iv; ai$w i ytiTov CyT.
Vlii. 7. 22. Qetvftiio-iKi TO xaXXaf xai ro ftiyitiog ii. 3. 15. Ka) uvbgtiet, xa.)
uvn, xut itMMUffni PL Phaodo, 69 b. Fe^^y/av T xa/ r^v
CEc. 4. 4. "Or< izrt S-avarov ayo/ro i. 6. 10. QtotriSiffrarov
o; PL Leg. 902 b.
4 8 6 y. Substantives followed by the article with a defining word
or phrase ; thus, Kw^aw a.-jror'tfjt.'urat.i fi xtQa.*.* xut j^ii^ * ^i%i \. 10. 1. 'EirJ
fxtjvftv iovris TV Stvotyuvros vi. 4. 19.
NOTES. 1 . Proper names, followed by the article, are rarely preceded by
it, except with special demonstrative force. Thus, Ha^v<rrts . . fi ftrtr^
i. 1. 4. 2a<pa/v6Tas t o 2rt/^^aX/a; . ., 2&/*T>7j Si a 'A^xios i. 2.3. *E
jfLippavytrtu rri xctruvrtTigas 'A.idau i. 1 . 9 (cf. 'Ex <r>jf Xtppovwffov i. 3. 4)
But, '0 St 2/Xdve,- a 'A^^etxiur;, but that Silanus the Ambraciot (who had
been the chief soothsayer of the army), vi. 4. 13.
2. In this construction, the substantive is sometimes first introduced as in-
definite, and then defined; and this subsequent definition sometimes respects
simply the kind or class. Thus, KJVJ M/'Saw xatAaw/^yj?, a fountain [that
called Midas's] which was called the fountain of Midas, i. 2. 1 3. IleXXo) Si
o! fjt.iya.Xoi, and many struthi, the large ones, i. e. ostriches, i. 5. 2
. waXXa ra srAaTS*, ' of the broad kind,' V. 4. 29.
S. Two or more nouns coupled together ; as, Ilt^} Si ruv roiuvbt ri ft xu\vtt
lilXfaTv, aTav 'Hx/au rs x) o*iXny?i; xo:< eiffr^euv xa.} ytj; xeti ulSioos xett aigof xtti
flffgoj xxi y'SflSTOf xxi uguv xeti \vixvrov ; PL Crat. 408 d (cf. Ton ;A/ov, 'H ft*
Xw, T aa-r^a Ib. 408, 409). See other examples in 485.
i. Ordinals and Superlatives ; as, Ka) r^irot tros r$ -foXifAoi irtXf vrot Th
ii 103. E/y 'Ifffavs, rijs KiXixixs \ff%xrni vroXiv i. 4^ 1.
^> 4 8 7". 3. The PARTS OF A SENTENCE may be ranked as follows,
with respect to the frequency of their taking the article : (a) An appositive^
appended for distinction. See * 472, 474. (b) The subject of the sentence.
SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [fiOOK III
(c) An adjunct not governed by a preposition, (rf) An adjunct governed by a
preposition, (e) An attribute. This commonly wants the article, as simply
denoting that the subject is one of a class. To this head belongs the second
Ace. after verbs of making, naming, &c. ( 434).
4. Hence the article is often used in marking the subject of a sentence, and
sometimes appears to be used chiefly for this purpose. Thus, M Qvyvi il*
<po$oj, lest the departure should be a flight, vii. 8. 16. 'E^T^/ov 3' %v TO %u-
fiov i. 4. 6. T H<rav SI ^itot,} etl irXi7ffTeti, and the greater part was spelt, V. 4. 27
( 455). KaXoyV/ yi axoXeiffiav TO vfo Tut r,%ovuv cig%ttr4eti PI. PhflBdo, 68 6.
Ao' aSv yrctgavrXnfficas tlffiv a.ya.oi xai xoe.xdi 01 ot.ya.6ol TI xoti 01 xxxoi ; Id.
Gorg. 498 c. T %}; rsvn Se*a t<rr/v, ta;ice ^/?ue is te, Mem. iv. 4. 7. O/
ftv^oi i-r-jriis ovSlv XXo ftugtoi il/riv eivfycaToi, ten thousand horsemen are noth-
ing else than ten thousand men, iii. 2. 18. Ki 0E02 v 'O AOFO2 St.
Jn. 1. 1.
T/j o aldsv, t/ TO ^5jv ytv IO'TI xu.T@eivi.7i,
To xr^7 ^f y'xaro; voitTai. Eur. Pol. FT. 7.
5. There are some words, with which it is especially impor-
tant to observe the insertion or omission of the article ; as, "Axxo $i o-TgctTiv
ftt, and another army, i. 1.9. To aXXo ffTgetTtvftet, the rest of the army, i. 2.
"25. 'Aft<f>ix^oiTtis Ktti aXXo/, 'and others,' iv. 2. 17. 'E-ToEi^<rv, y ol Hxxoi,
'the others,' 'the rest,' Ib. 10. IIoAt TOU fTarivftctTos, 'much of,' iv. 1. 11.
To ff.lt> $n (ToXy TOU 'Ex>.>?v/x<jt;, 'the greater part,' i. 4. 13. YloXXot, many,
iv. 6. 26. Tous *o\*.ov s , the most, Ib. 24 ( 466). 'Ox/yo/ uv-ifavrxov, fe*
died, iv. 2. 7. I IXs/w TOVTUV a-roXavti o o%Xo; -n oi oXiyoi, ' the few,' ' thfl
aristocracy,' Rep. Ath. 2. 10. See 472. a.
6. When two words or phrases are connected by a conjunction, if the}' re-
fer to different objects, the article is more frequently repeated ; but otherwise,
not $ as, Ta TI fiagSctgixov Ktti TO ExX)wxov ivTa.v&oe, ffTgccTivjAtx. i. 1 J. 1. Tai
*ExXjyft; xa.} TUV fia,%u.uv Ib. 14. Toy; vio-Tovf xcti ttivovs xait fitGaiovs i. 9.
30. TJjf r^oV^iv <piX/a.s v*raf*,vwp.a,Ta, xa,} fiffTia; i. 6. U. 'O 5' ay ^ rsXawy
ro ufetvTa, %f>ovoi ytyovut TI xa) wv xa/ io-6ft,t*os IffTi ftovos PI. Tim.
38 c.
7. When two nouns are related to each other in a clause, and have the same
extent of meaning, the article is commonly joined with both, or with neither;
as, IlXflVf/ ftiv ^taoa.( xa.} a.vG^tu'jruv ltr^u^a.-oufa,, To7{ Si jU'xfo-< TUV o$vv xa} Ttf
^iifiruffffa.! TO.{ *bvvu.[Aiif ntrQivrii i. 5. 9. Oy^ftroT* eigut . . Xyir/TiXtirTt^av u.'Sixi*
%ixa.ioffvrns PI. Rep. U54 a. Awo-/riXo-Tijoi w abix'ta, Ttjs $ixia<rvvyf Ib b.
'II ffu/jtnffi <(>ciofttt,xot [_Kfo$i$ou<ret Ti^vri]. . . 'H TOIS o'-^ois TO, fi^urftoiTa Ib.
332 c.
8. The insortion or omission of the article often depends, both
in poetry and prose, upon euphony and rhythm, and upon those nice distinction*
in the expression of our ideas, which, though they may be readily felt, are often
transferred with difficulty from one language to another. In general, the inser-
tion of the article promotes the perspicuity, and its omission, the rimrlty of dis-
courbe. It is, consequently, more employed in philosophical than in rhrtnricat
composition, and far more in prose than In poetry. It should be remarked,
however, that, even in prose, there is none of the minutine of language in
which manuscripts differ more, than in respect to its insertion 'or omission,
specially with proper names.
9. The article is sometimes so closely united with the word following, that
CM. 3.] USE AS A PRONOUN.
a second article is prefixed, as if to a single word ; thus, \oyos *o\ o xara,
TO.VTOV [= TO O.LTO, $ 97. N.] X^j yiyvbfjt.ivts, -regi TI S-a-rs^av [= ra
irfa, 39] oJv, *< fioi TO TU.UTO* . ., xi o r ov SctTi^ov H.VX.XO; PI.
Tim. 37 b. Ta <rt 9-aT^flv xJ TO TKUTOV Ib. 44 b (see ^ 479, 48O). T
Ta ^n^tv [sc. avrft/v], </ise w/to are that which is nothing. Eur. Tro. 412 (see
$ 4.50. S, 476').
II. THE ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN.
<ftOO. A. The ARTICLE, if we include both its aspirat-
ed and its i- forms, is used as a PRONOUN, by Attic* writers,
only in connection with certain particles.
NOTE. By the use of the article as a pronoun, is meant its substantive use
independent of a modifying word or phrase ( 476). This use is explained,
as in the case of other adjectives ( 447), by the ellipsis of a noun. As a
pronoun, the article in Attic writers is either demonstrative or personal, the
cases in 493 excepted.
1 . With P.IV and It ; as, 'O Ss [sc. adtXQos'] vt'dtTKi, and he [the brother]
Is persuaded, i. 1. 3. O/ tu.lv U%OVTO, KXsa^oj $1 -ffi^nfjt,tvi, they (Chirisophus
and Meno) went, but Clearchus stayed, ii. 1. 6. 11? in, Katpiiuv Xi
tx, $1 TUV ftei^iffT \yu Soph. (Ed. C. 741.
REJIAKK. The article with pi* and & is commonly used for contradistinc-
tion (cf. 483), and we may translate o pi* . ., o li, this . ., that, the one . .,
the other, one . ., another, &c., and 01 ftlv . ., ei $i, these . ., those, some . ., others,
&c. Thus, '0 /A&V f&KiviTcti, o $t tru<^^ov{!, the one is mad, the other is rational,
PI. Phaedr. 244 a. Oi ju.lv i-ragzuovro, ol $' IIVTOVTO, the one party (the Greeks)
marched on, and the other (the Persians) followed, iii. 4. 16. Ba<nXuy TS xJ
tl "EXAjjvs; . ., 01 /u.lv ^ieax.ovTis . ., ei $' a^-ra^avTJS, ' these . . those,' i. 1O. 4.
Tel/s ftlv KVTUV u.wix.Ttivi, TOU; 3' s^?Xsv, fc some . . others,' i. 1. 7 ( 362. a).
'Ev /ntv ctget Ta7g fft>f/,!f>cavoiifAiv, Iv %i To7f ov PI. PhfEdr. 263 b. "E-TE^Ta (fiuviiv
Ttio-Kv KXivovTis, i^O^KVTo TOVTO ju.lv ix. TVS, TotJro $1 Ix. TV; Rep. Ath. 2.8. Ta
fjt.lv t-rafav, . . TtXos $1 xaTE/sravj, he received some wounds, fmt finally slew,
i. 9. 6. '0 fjt.lv ygxiv, 01 $1 lirtttovro, he (Clearchus) commanded, and the rest
obeyed, ii. 2. 5. T5J p,lv ya,o U.VOOM, TV $1 ivoStv, lygfftftt* TO ogos, for we shall
find the mountain, here easy, and there difficult, of ascent, iv. 8. 10 ( 421. ^).
T fjt.iv TI fj,ot,x i 'o/jt.<.v/)i, TO, *ol x.tii tt.vu.woc.vafjt.s.vai, ' [as to some things . . as to
others] partly . t partly,' ' now . . now,' iv. 1. 14 ( 441).
49 1. 2.) In poetry, with yaj ; as, n e * ifyot QavoTius few
o yrt fJt.i'yiffTo; etl/ToTg Twy%oivn $ogv%ivwv, ' for he,' Soph. El. 45. TJJf yotf
vrityOxa, fjt-uTgos Soph. Qid. T. 1082. To yag . . ffvuviov fAi^os, for this is a rare
lot, Eur. Ale. 473.
S.) As the subject of a verb, after xa), and ; as, Ki TOY
and that he bade him give it, Cyr. i. 3. 9. Kai rax aVoxg'ivxo-tKi Xiy>iroe,i Ib. iv.
2. 13.
REMARK. The proclitics in the nominative (o, fi, ei, ou, 148) require, from
the very laws of accent, that the particle, in connection with which they
are used, should follow them. If, therefore, it precedes, they become orthotone,
or, in other words, take the forms which commonly belong to the relative pro-
noun ^ 148. 2). This change takes place with */ uniformly, and with Ii
28
326 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK III
when it follows foi ?<p ( 228) ; thus, K/ 3; \6a.vi*,a.ffi, and he wondered, i.
8. 16. EMI , " Ovx tvifivftvo-tis ; " f^j PL Conv. 201 6. Kai o? iivrov vii
6. 4. r H $' os, said he, PI. Rep. 327 c. T H $' o,-, T>.uvxuv, said fo, i. e.
. . os, , . . . ,
Glauco, Ib. b. r H *' #, said sAe, Id. Conv. 205 c.
493* B. The article in its -c- forms likewise occurs,
I.) As a DEMONSTRATIVE OF PERSONAL PRONOUN,
1.) Befoie the relatives os, o<ro s , and eTas ; as, Tow a io-nv, of that which, it,
PL Phaedo, 92 d. II e ) ra ip' J X"H Id. Phil. 37 e. Kai TOV ft fy,
^tfff'orns TOVTOV Tva Lys. 167. 15. Ilt^i TJ^va/v T<VV oVa/ wt/ rayra i/
PI. Soph. 241 e. U^efnitH *i pint* rout oKem? evros Dem. 613. 9. The
sentence introduced by the relative may be regarded as a defining clause, to
which the article is prefixed (see 472).
2.) In particular forms of expression ; viz.
. Ilftf rou (also written #orov), before this; thus, To yt #o TOV */>
Hffiet PI. Ale. 1O9 e. O/ ^' eixi<ren ptyxovffiv aXX* ow* v rga TOW AT. Nub.
5. O/ w^o rou <p!*.oi, 'former friends,' Eur. Med. 696. See ^75. b.
/3. Ty, [through this as a cause, 4 1 6] for this reason, therefore ; thus, Ty
roi . . ^aXXov trxifriov PI. Theaet. 179 d.
y. To yi, followed by on ; as, To yi iu oTbct, on . ., this I well know, that
. ., PI. Euthyd. 291 a. To yi ft x.a.ra.vwio', . ., 'on Id. Pol. 305 C.
$. The article doubled with xcti or % ; as, E/ TO XKI ro ive'ivo-tv eivfya-roi
tvroffi, ovx, y a^ri^avsv, if this man had done this and that, he would not have
died, Dem. 308. 3. Ta xot,} rot. tft-rovta; Id. 560. 1 7. 'A$ix.vovpai us rot
*/ TO, I go to this one and that, Lys. 94. 3. With the article again re-
peated ', "En yat.^ TO jceti TO Tewfoti, xat.i TO f&w ^roi^ffott, for this and that wt
ouyltt to have done, and this not to have done, Dem. 1 28. 1 (>. "Of i'<p>j $/~v oun*
Vorti(>i~<r0<X:t KivOvviviiv TO ffTfiotTriyov, OTU; f&vi <ra, ri TO, yivritrirot.!, aXX* oVv;
T, 'not these or those, but THESE,' Id. 1457. 16. The nominative Si xi of
(491. R.) occurs, Hdt. iv. 68.
3.) Through poetic license, in imitation of the earlier Greek ; as, Toy . .
f SiV0v, him destroy, Soph. (Ed. T. 200. Tr poi /AiXtrfai, take care of these for
me, Ib. 14'i6. M/ ya.^ ^VK* Ttis i>vta*.yt7 ^'IT^IOV ei^oi Eur. Ale. 883.
'A.fTi(a.(, ov*v <fifftvuo-iv t ivToXus TI TUV JEsch. Ag. 7.
493. II.) As a RELATIVE PRONOUN.
This substitution of the r- for the aspirated forms ( 1 47) occurs in no
Attic writers except the tragedians, and scarcely in these, except to avoid hia-
tus, or lengthen a short syllable. Thus, K.Ti/vao- TIVS oil x,<>riv XTVI~V, having
ilain those whom she ought not to slay, Eur. Andr. 810. To Stov, TOV vwv \i.
ytts, the god, whom you now blame, Ib. Bac. 7 I 2. JSoiTs IxtTvov, ovr/v' T/y
^oX7 i<f>iifti<rfa, rev $' OVTO; *.iyti , Soph. (Ed. T. 1054. 'AyaXftctt' /i^o,
T . . arto-Ttgno-' I/AOIUTOV Ib. 1379. "Ayof . . ^tixvvvoii, TO p.nri yn . . sr^or-
Ji^irai Ib. 1426.
REJIARK. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found
with ^i and 2i for the T- forms ( 490. 1 ) ; thus, UO^HS 'Exifivtittf, &t
ftlt va;^v, li} f St rou; <$vya%u.f xa.ra.yuv, ' some destroying, and to others.
Cfl. 4.J PRONOUN. AGREEMENT. 327
Dem. 248. 18. *A? ftiv xa<rt/Xj^i srA<; TUV atfTvyiiTovuv, Ttvaif Je fo^dil
Id. 282. 11. Yvuju.ce. o' oi( ftt a,x,a.iooi oX*ou, <ro7f 0* tif ftiffov %KII EllT. Ij)h.
T. 419. So, 'Ori pt . ., art 2, sometimes . ., at other times, Th, vii. 27
'Ori Si Ven. 5. 8.
CHAPTER IV.
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN.
I. AGREEMENT OF THE PRONOUN.
^494. RULE XXVIII. A PRONOUN agrees
with its subject in gender, number, and person.
By the subject of a pronoun is meant the substantive which it represents.
The rule, therefore, has respect either to substantive pronouns, or to adjective
pronouns used siibstantively. The construction of adjective pronouns regarded
as such belongs to RULE XXVI., and even their substantive use is explained
by ellipsis ( 447. a). Thus,
Ba<r;Xyf TJJ ^tv -Too; iavro* [i. 6. /3<r;Xs] lcr/ayXj? olx, yff6a.vs.Ta, the
king did not perceive the plot against himself, i. 1.8. 'A-ro <rJj ^^?j, %t
[sc. a.zxsis] U.VTOV ffKr^a-r 'freiqtrt, from the government, of which [govern-
ment] he had made him satrap, i. 1 . 2. Ilavrwv o<roi . . afyoi^ovrcu Ib.
Ilfoj TOV a^fXipov, u; ifiGouXiuei O.VTU. '0 $i vrtifara.1 ( 490) Ib. 3.
*T,tta j . ., aVo* 59-TS iv. 6. 14. Qavfteiffrov foiiii, Si . . S/So/f Mem. ii. 7. 13.
495. The remarks upon the agreement of the ADJEC-
TIVE ( 444 459) likewise apply, so far as gender and num-
ber are concerned, to that of the PRONOUN, and some of them
*o even a greaier extent ( 444. ). Thus,
a. MASCULINE FORM FOR FEMININE.
ti TU %i(>f, as -soj T TO
& <p t f& i v a TOVTOV rga.vroiv'ro vr&os TO 1ioc,x,uXviiv a,\Xrt\u Mem. ii. 3. 18.
See 444. /3.
NOTE. In speaking of person? vaguely, or generally, or simply as persons,
the masculine gender often takes the place of the feminine, both in pronouns
and in other substantive words which admit it : thus, Suv o Is T al x,w
["== T? fjt,riT^\ [A oftTt.tiJv Soph. (Ed. T. 1184. Oi5i y& xoixus fa,<r^ovTt
ftTffo; uv Titty TooffylyviTiii Id. EL 770. H ffTs7(>o: outrct p.ijff%o; avx. avi^sreti
riKTevrets aXXaws [= rixTouiretv XXjv] Eur. Andr. 711. 2vvt)(.nXv0ctffir
*>; ift.1 !H*rtt3it\ttftfA9tu aosX^a/ TI xeti a,o-X($tba."i XKI ave^a/ Toffcturui, UITT
iiva,t iv TV OIKIX Tiffffagcurxatitxet TOVf t^ivS'i^ov;. . . XArov ju.lv evr
IC/-T/V, u S&Jx^arij, TOVS oixtiovs trt^ie^xv a.-raXXv/Atvouf, aSvv
Ti$in Mem. ii. 7. 2 (cf. Ib. 8). See 336. a.
i28 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III.
4OO. b. USE OF THE NEUTER.
Ti y rovrov fAaxagi/v'Ttgav, rov yrt /u,t%0tivect ; Cyr. viii. 7. 25 ( 445).
"EvtbgtvffetfAtv, o T i /> fi/u.; xa,} atyKTyiva'at ivroirio't iv. 1. 22. T/j ovx civ ofto*
keyniruiv O.VTOV (^av^tff^xi ft.rir qXiftav (Jt-nr uXx^ova tf>aivta'0eti ro7; ervvauffit ^
'~ES'oxn J* y xftiporiga. ravret, 11 . . Mem. i. 1. 5 ( 450). The neuter
referring to words oj other genders, and the neuter plural for the singular
( 450, 451), are particularly frequent in pronouns.
c. COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION.
'Agreio%os <tt M/^/<rjy, ei jjVay ii. 5. 35. IlaXXflyf $1 av^ftj xai yu
vxTxa-i xocXa.; xr^trri, ovs oil ^.n^iffSa-i $tr:<rii, XX* avroi . . r<r0vr/ vii. 3
31. 'A^ipaXj/av xai iSxXuotV) & OUTI xaTa^irera/ Cyr. viii. 2. 22. ITaXXa
o' 9gu "r^o^xTae. xai aiyets xxi fiovs xxi ovovg, a etfo^et^ivTa. iii. 5. 9. 'AtraX-
Xaytvrc; fok'ifiuy xai ntvSuv&v xxt Ttte/z^v;, ft; y . . xa.6iff<rct[Atv Isocr. 163 b.
See ; 446. Zeugma is far less frequent in the construction of the pronoun
than in that of the adjective.
497. d. SYNESIS.
Ti 'Agxa.'bixo* iiri.irtx.oi, Jv ^i KXey iv. 8. 18. Ta Vo^ttvra, civ fXn-
fa, ?<? ^ixtiirovfiv PL Phaedr. 260 a. Ba<r/Xs^y . . el $' u^-rei^ovrif i.
10. 4 (cf. Ib. 2 and 5). Oixr^a, ya.^ rif'ovSa.^it, $ . . xivvv xuria-%ov
Eur. Iph. A. 985. r H ^iXi ^t/^a, 5; . . Wj Soph. Phil. 714. T il
*a) r/-T>j ^v^rt, o*?cy ^W a ?roX tfut rif*.a,f ; Cyr. vii. 3. 8. Tfxvay, . . aw'f
Eur. Suppl. 1 2. See 453.
NOTES. 1 . In the construction of the pronoun, the number is often changed
for the sake of individualizing or generalizing the expression ; as, "Orris $'
a$ixvt7ro . ., ^ravraf . . a.<rf7rifA-rtre, and whoever came, he sent them all
back, i. I. 5. 'Affvrei^ireti rvray, u av vrtgtrwy%eiiiri PI. Rep. 566 d. "Of v
xa.ju.Yri run OIXIT&IV, TOVTUV rot ifiju.i).*i<riov fKyruv, 'ovus Si^arst'jTai
CEc. 7. 37. Tvrvt . ., J v . . *oX*.o} 'ivovr*. Ib. 21. 8. "AXXav; B'
ix.i>.iui xiyiiv, 5<a T< i*ff-Tfl( iirXjy>}, am/ /e 6aJe //je res< say, on what ac-
count each one had been struck, V. 8. 12. Ilfaiftary tv) ixarn*>, eutrrivuf
ITO f%uv n vii. 3. 16. YLt7gv XetGt~* . . <HO{ ixetffre! itrn, XKI <riv a/a
ixafra/; S/avsT^a/ vi. 6. 33. T ll attfiffat'itt ruv S-tXoyrwv x/v^fvityi/y, oVaw
T/f tHoiro Ku^y ulo-6r,o'io'fa,i i. 9. 15 (see Ib. 16). "Hy Ji T<J TOVTUV <ri Ttt-
fecSxivti, %n/u,i* avro7f iri^i<ry Cyr. i. 2. 2. E/ Ji T< xaxs? crXiy irr
iyatfois, rouruv (4iri%ovffot Eur. Ale. 744. *AX;^is jy ipiXoi . .
el fr0Xt/f, Ae was a <rwc friend ; of whom the number is not great, Id.
l. 867. A. u r o v g y o : , o'lirig xa,} ftovai ffu^ouffi ynt Id. Or. 720. Qt-
avrig out $*l *.} iwa/yj? ro crXJj^aj PI. Rep. 55'1 a.
2. A pronoun often refers to a subject which is implied in another word (cf.
4.14) ; as, <J?iv>yti . . if Kioxvga.ii, uv ctiruv [i. 6. rut Ki^xi/^a/wy]
tvi^irns, he flies to Corcyra, being a benefactor of theirs, Th. i. 1 36. 'Ar
YLiXo<r tvvriff ov . ., / ruv^t xgtirirovs nV/ Id. vi. 80. T* i/*w; i-ruo-oSov,
fy [i. 6. t^ai] /*r/r' oxvi7n Soph. (Ed. C. 730. riaT*a S' i<rr/' xxrtffxet-
$*, eturof Ji . . vr'irvu Eur. Ilec. 22. 'Ay t/^iya/of , uv [i. e. w^iva/ft/yj ^t* 1
ifc{ Tv^try Ib. 416.
4O8. e. ATTRACTION.
A pronoun is sometimes attracted by a word hi its own clause, or a word In
pposition with its real subject (cf. 455) ; as, IWy4jy **xv<riv luiru, o-ri^
CH. 4] PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND REFLEXIVE. 329
[for %vt] iftei xuXXifrot %eiov tffri, I will give you, as a residence, Blsanthe,
which is my finest town, vii. 2. 38. 'E^rr/a?, ov' ou<ri oiriurt^ov %agiov Cyr. vii.
5. 56. Ov^lv ctiixov Ita.'ytyt.vnpu.i voioav %wt/> [for c<rtt>, 445] vo/u,i%u p<Xi-
<rt)v tivai xaAA./Wv a-raXoy/aj Apol. 3. 0av?v . . aum ya,(> flv uv w^a-
TW TaAA.flsyj7 ^Esch. Pr. 754. 'Eari vruXetf rtjs K/X/x/aj x/ TJJ; 2i//'f.
r H<r* 2i -raturet [for aurai] ^uo ni^v) i. 4, 4. Ka/ /x7 tv avfytuvrois wus oil
xotXev, o irdvTct ri^eaxi ra, uvS^tu-r^a, \ PL Leg. 937 d. This construction
may be commonly explained by ellipsis ; thus, 'E<rT/f, ov [%<u(>'iou] ovrt o<ri&>~
Tigav %ia(>iov, tlie hearth, than which [spot] there is no holier spot.
4OO. ADDITIONAL REMARKS. 1. A pronoun, for the sake of
perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in anticipation or repetition of its subject,
or is itself repeated; as, T7 yce.^ TOUTOV //.KKK^IUTIPOV, <rov yn [AiysOwveti ; For
what is happier than this, to mingle with the earth? Cyr. viii. 7. 1^5. Teureo
Tiuuucct, TJ7f Iv Yigwritvi'iM ffirrifftus PL Apol. 37 a. KsTva xaXXrov, TIXIHV,
Iffbrnra. riftuv Eur. Ph. 535. 'Ay'ietf Jg 'A^xaj xa) 2wx<ri; <5 'A%ettv; t
xa.} rovreo -ri0av'&rr)v, ' these also died,' ii. 6. 3O. BaovXea . -, aux oTBa. o rt
6i7 KVTOV ofAotrai ii. 4. 7. 'AXx/?/ad>jf . ., OUTU x,oc,xt7vos '/i/u.i^^ia'iv KU-TW
Mem. i. 2. 24. 2x^/ os, o/'ii/ oW< (tto/ rso; , aJaj &!v cra^/ iftt, 'iirura, [to*
ftifttpri Cyr. iv. 5. ^9. OT^< ^ o-o/ . . i^s/v av lifibt?$ai ffoi CEc. 3. 16.
"Eff-T/ ya^ T/J cy ir^otru 2-T^T>;j craA./? r/f Eur. Andr. 7.->3.
NOTK. Homer often uses the personal pron. oj", with its noun following ;
as, "Hv uooe. ol S-icavru}/ t%t voipivt Xa,uv N. 600. "H f4.iv tysigtv Navffixtiai*
wvtfXov Z,- 48. Cf. 468. b.
OOO 2. A change of PERSON sometimes takes place; (a) From
the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially in quotation ; as,
Ayo/T* etv ft. di rot. i iv oivog Ixvo^&v, oj . . xoixTae,vav, take o\^t of the wtty a sense-
less man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. Ka/ OUTOS i$*i " MtXtiv fo^v-
tffSat, r^offXa.^uv e^iA-avraj ix, vretvros rou ffru.rtvp.a.Tos. 'Fjyea ya.t>" t$*l,
"oTSa" iv. 1. 27. S^e i. 3. '^O ; iii. 3. 12; iv. 1. 19; v. . '25, 26. .
(i) From a speaker's addressing a company, now as one with them, and now
as distinct from them; as, Aav&sm/v v^a? its otryv <retgK%nv r /i fo\n nftut
xa.SiffTnx.iv Soixetrt ya.^ . ., a7<r/vj <rt0vxa,f&tv Isocr. 141 d.
II. SPECIAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS.
IO1. Of the observations which follow, many apply
equally to PRONOUNS and ADVERBS of the same classes.
A. PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND REFLEXIVE.
t>O2. In the use of the pronouns, especially those of
the classes named above, it is important to distinguish between
the stronger and the weaker forms of expression ; that is, be-
tween those forms which are more distinctive, emphatic, or
prominent, and those which are less so.
I. In the weaker form, the FIRST and SECOND PERSONAL PRO-
NOUNS are omitted in^the JVom., and are enclitic in the oblique
cases sing. ; but in the stronger form, they are expressed in the
JVbm., and are orthotone throughout. In the weaker form, the
THIRD PERSONAL PRONOUN is omitted in the IVbm., and is com-
28*
330 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III
monly supplied by avrog in the oblique cases ; in the stronger
form, it is supplied by o and o'c, which are simply distinctive
and are limited in their use ( 490-492), and by ouroe, ods
and exetyo?, which are both distinctive and demonstrative. Thus,
"A-fuvra, ffuoe. uvi^uxa. trot, ivii xa.} <rv Iftai aar^/|? TOV avja, I gave yon
back every thing safe, when you a/so had shown to me the man, v. 8. 7. 'Ey
(tv, v50f, >jS>j i/f&tis ivKivu owa; "$i XKI VJAM; Ifti iTouv'striTS, Iftoi [*.tXYi<rsi t
r> ftvxtTt fAt Kt/^ov vop.i%tn i. 4. 16. Oy're y ,/!? Ixu'vcv 'in ffT^KTiurui,
ivti yt ov ffvW7TO[j.*8a. aura, OUTI txt7vos ITI v\fjuv (tiffdoboTV)? i. 3. 9. OVTI ffU
ixsivttf <Qi\i~is, OUTI txtTvctt ff'i Mem. ii. 7. 9. ETp^ ^\ TO [&\v ^^ov MV&; xa/ oi
<ruv UVTW, TO 'Si iv&vuftov KXfa^^flf, XK} ol ixiivou i. ^. 15. Ky^oj o xa< ttftfiis
TOUTOU i. 8. 6. TSWTW o'u i j'yvo^voj s K?^aj, TtyKtrSri Tt KUTOV, xxi dioeafftv avTU
i. 1. 9. "HJ* tfJv 3-itvtTTa.i Soph. Ant. 751. K?VO$ ra xsivov fT'/ty'tru, xciya
raSt Id. Aj. 1039. See 49O-492.
5OJ5. IT. In the stronger form, the Gen. subjective
(5) 393. <5) i^i7/i a substantive is commonly supplied in the FIRST
and SECOND PERSONS, and sometimes in the THIRD, by the pos-
sessive adjective (cf. ^ 457, 458) ; in the weaker form, it is
often omitted, especially with the article ( 482). The Gen.
objective (^ 392) sometimes follows the same analogy. Thus,
ya. iroi p.a,x{iff6ai, u Ky, TOV a^fX^av ; " " N^ A/"," ^>j o
yi A^s/y xctt HaguffKTi'bos IffTi ffa.7;, ipo; %l aSi*.tpo; " i. 7. 9. T<
v ffTt{>n6riva.i. . . Ilj^i TUV *f*tl4{itt dyctfuv ii. 1 . I '2. K/VV T xat
rw \\ Itrou xeivfiv #<* Soph. Tr. 485. T o-ov >.i^of, the marriage you talk of,
Soph. Ant. 573. To o-ov .ya,^ "A^<yo; ol Itiaix' lyu Eur. Heracl. iJ84. 2<i
^<v, u 'EXfv>j, 'the dispute for you,' Eur. Hel. 1160. Ewv/a x,<tl <piXta T$
ipy, good-will and affection tome, Cyr. iii. 1. '28. <I>/A/ r? vy, love to you,
vii. 7. '29. Mi fAiroLpiXiiv troi Ttj; i/u-tji 2&<a;, that you may not regrtt your
present to me, Cyr. viii. 3. 32. &^vo f ovftos ^Esch. Pr. 388. See 454,
4 8 '2.
NOTES, (a) The POSSESSIVE PRONOUN is modified like the personal pronoun
of which it supplies the place ; as, T yi <rov [o^aX^av], TOV *ei<ri&>{, at least
yours [your eye], the ambassador, Ar. Ach. 93 (^ 332. 4). See 454. So,
since vrer/utt may be followed by the Dot., as well as the Gen. ( 403, 411),
Aft-iTi^au [= n^?y] VoTftou, xXuvo7f Aet&atxtietHriv Soph. Ant. 860. (6) The
only POSSESSIVE of the 3d Pers., which has a place in Attic prose, is fftpirtgos,
t/n-ir ; and even this is used reflexively, and with no great frequency. Thus,
ilf \unuv fovovnTtti TOVS <r<piTi(>vs, when they saw their own men in distress,
Cyr. i.*4. il. (c) The Dat. for the Gen. belongs particularly to the weaker
form of expression. See 4 1 2.
5O4. III. In REFLEX REFERENCE, the weaker form is
the same with that of the common personal pronoun ; the
stronger form is the so-called reflexive ( 144). The weaker
form belongs chiefly to those cases in which the reflex refer-
ence is indirect and unemphatic ; the stronger, to those in
which this reference is either direct, or, if indirect, is specially
emphatic or distinctive. Thus,
. 4.] PERSONAL, POSSESSIVE, AND REFLEXIVE. 331
flVa7ay y <ri vp.7* owh ^aX/a-Ta truftlpiouv, do whatever you think
will be most advantageous to yourselves, ii. 2. 2. KtXtuoviri ^ia.ffutra.v<rcx. O.VTCIS
rat. ^T^oSxTct, TO. /u,tv avrov Xa7y, TO. Vi ffty'tcrtv ctfc^ouvxi vi. 6. 5. KJ ouTag
, y UtTO vriffTOY 01 lJvoC.1, TO.^]i KVTOV IV01 KyW ^ItXtXtTl^OV, % \KUTM !. 9. 29.
'ilj {T0y ooftuvr; x0' ttv<ri)l>;, ffoupus vofti^ovrt; ivri ffifoi; "tr^cti V. 7. 25. Al
ys/y T ixiXfufy awTavj, art afc^jy v riTTov tr<pi7f dyoiyouv <rt)v ffT^ot,riv, J Ssva-
Quv vii. 5. 9. E/j Tjy IKVTOV ffxrivtjv . . Tft/y T^) awroy . . irsoJ T'/iv O.VTOU
ex*l*i/i* i. 6. 4. 'ExiAfpg TW; <f>iXavs To7s TO, la.wrcuv ffupcfra, ayounv "ififois
IjtcCtfcAXf/y TOVTOV Toy ^/Xoy, <uf pw THVUVTIS TOUS \O,VTOU (p/Xowj uytuffiv i. 9. 27.
lla/av d' rjXixixv \fjt,u.vrw t\6t7v oivctftivu ^ . . 'Kav TrifAt^ov vf(>oou iftctvrov ill. 1.
14. 'E^awTii y Jflx o-nys/Ssya/ vii. 6. 1 1 . IloXXst/ ^a/ ^x<I ^?y Ib. 18.
2v ^ttty ^yoy,<*vf cei>Tas ivri^Tiftiou; tivizi eria.v<ru, Ii7veti ^ e\
lip' luvTet7s Mein. ii. 7. 9. 'A^XsTv npu* etvruv i. 3. 11.
W^y air^y y;xar Hi. 2. 14 ( 352).
OOo. REMARKS. 1. As pronouns are used mainly for distinction,
the choice or rejection of a pronoun in a particular instance depends greatly
upon the use of other pronouns in the connection. The use of the pronouns
is likewise much influenced in poetry by the metre, and even in prose, to some
extent, by euphony and rhythm.
2. With respect to POSITION, the weaker form of the Genitive, from its want
of distinctive emphasis, commonly follows 472. a, but the stronger form, and
the possessive adjective, 472. I. Thus, 'EcnXa,ayra/ avrou <rJ? "rvo; iv.
7. 12. "Hy <rt; U.VTUI rgi\}/y TO.S yitufji.a.f iii. 1.41. T<w ffuftari eturou . .,
TO ^y ixurau ru/un i. 9. 23. 'H Ixtivuv u^^s KO.} n ^Ers^a V-TO^'IK iii. 1. 21.
T vfo^vyiu, TO, ixi'ivou i. 3. 1. 'AfivifAij/i pou rov "%i<rvrorn Ar. Plut. 12.
T /S/ay Ty i^at/TOw PI. Gorg. 488 a.
3. The place of the Gen. possessive of the reflexive pron. is commonly sup-
plied in the plur. by the possessive pron. with ulruv. In the sing, this form
of expression is poetic. See 454.
sf OOG 4. The third person being expressed demonstratively in other
ways, the pronoun ou became simply a retros2)ective pronoun, i. e. a pronoun
referring to a person or thing previously mentioned. As such, it performed
the office both of an unemp'hatic reflexive ( 5O4), and of a simple personal
pronoun, and was sometimes used as a general reflexive, without respect to per-
son. In this last use, it was sometimes imitated by its derivatives (even in
the Attic, by Ittvrou and fQingos}. Thus, BawXfwa/TS ^ST a-fitriv [= y^ry],
' among yourselves,' K. 398. A&;^a<r/y o7<riv [= />] dvaftroi; a.. 402. <t>g-
\fAct.7i\ t%ct>v ^'^ai''yfje,ivov T^ j>X&>/u,nv . 320. AE? vifjt.'a.f uvigiffSot.!
Yift,a,s a,vrovs], we ought to ask ourselves, PI. Phsedo, 78 b. Ex-
as [W \yu VTO jfgoSvf/.lee.f oifji.ee, \XUTOV = if*,tt,UTov~\ rt x,ec,t vftJuf
l^tzTKrvo'KS Ib. 91 C. Kx/w . . ctVTYi f^of KUTriv Soph. El. 283. A.lff%uvtis
aroX/y Ty cturos uvrov, you yourself disgrace your own city. Id. (Ed. C. 929.
Oi^ yot,(> T \xureu [== fftuurov] irv yi v/'y^y ogxs Mem. i. 4. 9.
uurtis eiffdec, ^Esch. Ag. 1397. E?<r^ iiirlg ffurygiets .uruv [= v
<p/>av<r'i%irt Dem. 9. 13. 2<pirj [= VfAtrsgy] a.fo fivrigi r'
Ap. Rh. 4. 1327.
^ 5O T. 5. Some of the forms of ev are used with great latitude of
number and gender ; thus, (a) ph and y/y commonly sing., but also plur.
(especially y/y) ; as, y/y, him, ^Esch. Pr. 333, her, Eur. Hec. 515, it, Soph. Tr.
145, them, masc. Soph. (Ed. T. 868, fern. Id. CEd. C. 43, neut. ^Esch. Pr
r/y yiriv [
lawrovs [
332 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III
55 ; ft'iv, them, Ap. Eh. 2. 8 : (ft) e-tpi properly plur., but also (especially in
the tragic poets) sing. ; as, <r<pi, them, masc. A. Ill, fern. Soph. CEd. T. 1 505,
Awn, ^Esch. Pr. 9, her, Eur. Ale. 834: (c) <r/v rarely sing. ; as, Horn. H. 19
19, JEsch. Pers. 759 : (d) t commonly sing. masc. and fern., but sing. neut
A. 2:)6, plur. Horn. Ven. '268. (e) So the derived possessives; as, log, their
Hes. Op. 58; rtinps, his, Id. Sc. 90, Pind. 0. 13. 86, my, Theoc. 25. 163
( 506), thy, Id. 22. 67 ; rQvins, his, Ap. Eh. 1. 643.
6. The place of ou as a reflexive is commonly supplied in Att. prose by
IKVTOU, and as a simple personal pron., by alrog. The plural occurs far
oftener than the singular, which, except the Dat., is in Att. prose very rare.
The disuse of the Nora. sing, of this pron. ( 1 43. 4) is explained by its re-
flexive character (cf. 144).
7. A common reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal pronoun ; as, 07
<p6ovoufftv \KUToif ^uaXXov tj <ro7s XXo/V civfgtv'ffoi; Mem. ili. 5. 16. 'Av<ri t/Qoow
fAivuv IU.VTU.S, rio'teu; XXjXaj tcuguv Ib. ii. 7. It?. l^uvvivixwxctrt [t,i<r aXX*jXa/v
ruv oi "XoXtfAiuv ol ?ToXXsi fAtv ffuvrirrwreti ftz0' ittwruv Cyr. vi 3. 14.
B. ATT02.
508. The pronoun avi6<; marks a return of the mind
to th same person or thing ( 149). This return takes place,
I.) In speaking of REFLEX ACTION or RELATION. Hence
aiiiog is used with the personal pronouns in foiimng the RE-
FLEXIVES. See 144, 504.
II.) In designating a person or thing as THE SAME which
has been previously mentioned or observed. When thus em-
ployed, (twos (like the corresponding same in English), being
used for distinction, is preceded by the article ( 472). Thus,
T 5i etvrn *i/u.i(>et, and upon the game day, i. 5. 1 2. E/f ro etlro ff%v/u,K
1. 1O. 1O. Ourof 2i o a.lr'ot t and this same person, vii. 3. 3. 'Exi/Va TO, aura
Mem. iv. 4. 6. TCCUTO. lf** X n iii. 4. 28 ( 39). See 400.
5OO. III.) For the sake of EMPHASIS, one of the most
familiar modes of expressing which is repetition. When cKio$
is thus employed in connection with the article, its position con-
forms to 472. a. Thus,
Aiirot Mtvwv ISavXiro, Meno himself wished it, ii. I. 5. "Ofrit . . alrot
uorttf f)ft.7t, uurof Ji|/af $ol{, uiiroi iZufccrvffuf ffvvi^aSt revt ffT^ttrrtyovt
lii. '_'. 4. K.uoof <jra.oiXa.vvuv aura; ffuv \\iynr,n i. 8. 12. AUTO. TO, a.irt
ruv olxiut |yX, the very wood from the housi-s, ii. 2. 1 6. Ka) Sioffi&iirra..
rov eturo i<rn -riivruv uuv civfyturof, 'the very most religious,' PI. Leg. 902 b.
OSrot I' uu Vo eturtu $u.<ri\iut riTtxyftivoi ' $<ruv, 'before the ]>cr>cn of the
kiiii,'.' i. 7. 11. Hoof a-lria TV ffrotTivfta.ri, [by the army itself] r/W tn the
arm;/, \. S. 14. 'Tcrif odru rou \auruv ffT^urivfJutrof, 'directly above,' iii.
4. 41. Ei etvro} el <rr&nurai . . OI^OIVTO, 'of their own accord,' vii. 7. S3.
E/ ttvreiif roif $ga<ri ffvwltiro Iwfi, ' with simply the men,' ii. 3. 7. 'E
rti civtv rw trirou TO o-^ov otlro \f6lr,, ' by itself,' or ' alone,' Mum. iii. 14. 3
Avrtvs rovi ffT^urnyovs airoxaXi^aj, having called tlie generals apart, vii. 3. 35.
See 418. R M 472. .
cu. 4.J Avtoj.
\j> 5 I O. RKMARKS. 1. The emphatic (tiros is joined with pronouns
in both their stronger and their treitkr.r forms. Hence it is often used in the
Nominative with a pronoun which is understood ( 502). Thus, Ol $1 trr^xnu'
TO.I, el ri UUTOU Ixsivov xoti ol XXa/, ' both his own,' i. 3. 7. Aurou raw-raw
tvtxsv, on this very account, iv. 1. 22. Airy 1/u.oi . . $o%<i PI. Phffido, 91 a.
AVTW ftai 'ioixsv Ib. 60 C. 'llj uuras ffti af&oXo'yi7s i. 6. 7. "lij i'^j UVTOJ Ib.
G. Avros tf'w ivraiSiuo'KS CEc. 7. 4. Aura; iwctioiuffcts Ib. 7. Auras iifti)
Sv ^*jTs7f ii. 4. 1 6. Airo/ xeti'ovtriv, they themselves burn, in. 5. .5. 'Ia<r^a/ ai-
TO; TO rgKvftoi Qvtri, ' that he himself healed,' i. 8. 26. Xtugti eciiros, he goes
alone, iv. 7. 11. Alro} ya,^ io-ftiv, for we are by ourselves, PI. Leg. 8:36 b.
2TP. T! S y v-rae oM <rvs Kpftafyas ** ; 1MA0. Aiirie. 2TP. T'j
*vra,- ; MA0. 'Zaxocirvs. ' [Himself] The great man. What great man ? '
AT. Nub. 218.
2. In like manner, KVTOS is used without another pronoun expressed, in th
oblique cases of the third person ; as, .upa, ayovrsj alrcu <rt K} T>? I yuvetixi t
bringing presents both for himself and for his wife, vii. 3. 1 6. "E-rift^/tv .
fT^a.TnuTa.i oS; MV<UV sT^s, x.cti etvToy i. 2. 20. LlaXXoyj ^EV r&y ag'Ta^ovTWf
KTxri/vav, a/ Se x< ttbruv a.^ifa.iiav i. 10. 3.
NOTES. . From the gradual extension of this use to cases in which there
was no special emphasis, appears to have arisen the familiar employment of
ttlva; in the oblique cases, as the common pronoun of the third person. See
502. In this unemphatic use, ctlros must not begin a clause.
/S. Sometirnes (chiefly in the Epic), ulros occurs in the oblique cases, with
the ellipsis of a pron. of the 1st or 2d Pers. ; as, Auruv yag dvca^op.10' a<pg-
2/V/v [sc. ^v] x. 27. AWTJJ'V [sc. r't] %. 27.
5 1 1 . 3. The emphatic ai>ro; often precedes a reflexive, agreeing
with the subject of the latter. Hyperbaton ( 3'29. N.) is sometimes employed
to bring the two pronouns into immediate connection. Thus, 'Avoxnweti xi-
yiTttt CLUTO; TV \a.vrou %ti(>i 'AgTctyiifffyiv, and he is said [himself] with his own
hand to have slain Artagerses, i. 8. 'J4. O; $1 "Exxjvj . . eevro] lip' tmuru*
t%uouv, 'by themselves,' ii. 4. 10. To ^ fyev ctvro xctd* a-vro ta-^ovra. Mem.
iii. 14. 2 (cf. Ib. 3, and 509). ' To7s -r auros oturou x"npu.<riv ^uvsreei ^Esch.
Ag. 836. Ta?ov fce.XKiffT^iv vvv vretpattrxtt/ei^t'rai \v atiTog au<rifi Id. Pr. 920.
See 464, 506.
4. The emphasis of avros sometimes lies in mere contradistinction ; as, 'Axx*
KIITK ffiyu , . rav /S^ara/V ^ yfwftetTa etxavtrctTS, ' those things I omit J but
hear,' ^Esch. Pr. 442. "On xttt tor) TO. n$ia, lip' T povct $axi7 ft etxg<x.?iei
fov; owSttuirDV? ciynv, O.VTV\ /u.\v ov ^wvara/ ciyiiv, n ' tyxodriict Mem. iv. 5. 9
"Of, u -retT, <ri r oux Ixeuv xaxrccvav, tr'i r KUTKV, who involuntarily have slain
hath you, my son, and you, too, my wife, Soph. Ant. 1 34O.
5. The use of KUTO; with ordinals deserves remark ; thus, Yli^ixXtj; . . <rr^.
rriye; uv 'Afavetievv %'sxaros etvros, Pericles being general of the Athenians [him-
self the tenth] with nine colleagues, Th. ii. 1 3 (cf. ' A^HTT^KTOV . . (AIT aX-
X*>v $tx ffTgxrr.'yotJvros Id. i. 57). 'E,%iirtffJ/etr A.t/irix>.icc <r'ifA<rrov etlroi
ffT^xmyov Id. iii. 19. 'H;^E^j TosffSswrns VIXXTO; auras H. Gr. ii. 2. 17.
But, with the omission of auras, AaojTaj . . Xa?&v a.vrv [i. e. rriv a^^J
?&o/uas, ' with six confederates,' PL Leg. 695 c.
C. DEMONSTRATIVE.
5 1 3. I. Of the PRIMARY DEMONSTRATIVES, the more
334 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III
distant and emphatic is Ixtirog * the nearer and more familial
is OUTO? or ode ( 150). Thus,
'Eay Ixtivois Bax'/J, xa) rawrat/f xotxus ifowffovffi, if those should wish ttj
they will even injure these, PL Phaedr. 231 c. 'ExiT**? plv <rx*.n<pos, ovrot
t\ irtoQttfs Id. Euthyd. 271 b.
NOTES. . The two may be combined to mark the connection of the MORB
REMOTE with the NEARER ; as of the past with the present, of a saying with
its illustration, of that which has been mentioned with that which is present be-
fore us, &c. Thus, Tour [sc. la-] \Kt7v ovyu 'iXtyov, this is that which I said,
Ar. Ach. 41. TOVT' \xt7vo " TLraurQ' treti'gou;, (Mt ro truyyivt; ftovov" EllT.
Hec. 804. T&* Urn* this is what I spoke of, Id. Med. 98. "H*' Ivv
Soph. Ant. 384.
$. OSros sometimes marks the ordinary, and ixt~vos the extraordinary ; as,
*E;xavT; rovrous rt rou? vroXurtXiis %iruvas, having on the rich tunics which
they are in the habit of wearing, i. 5. 8 (see Cyr. i. 3. 2). Fiyavaav pjrots
jfy^afa/ xctl ptiyeiXoi T/JO Iftou, KXX<VT^aras ix,t7vos, *. T. X., ' that wonderful
Callistratus,' Dem. 301. 17. Tax 'A^rs^v Uiry0 Id. 34. 20.
' t> 1 U. II. The pronouns oyro? and ode have in general
the same force, and the choice between them often depends
upon euphony or rhythm ; as, TOVTOI (pdtiv xgr], rude x^y nuvraq
at6nv Soph. Ant. 981. Yet they are not without distinction.
Ouroc, as formed by composition with vro'c, is properly a pro-
noun of identification or emphatic designation (it may be re-
garded as a weaker form of o auro'c, the same, 502) ; while
o<5, arising from composition with <5?, is strictly a deictic pro-
noun (duxrixof, from dee'xrv.ut, to point out], pointing to an
object as before us (see 150). Hence,
1.) If reference is made to that which precedes, or which
is contained in a subordinate clause, ovum is commonly used ;
but if reference is made to that which follows and is not con-
tained in a subordinate clause, ode. Thus,
t rovrov xeti <rJi, and of this (which has been stated}, this (which
follows) is also a proof, i. 9. 29. *Eri TOVTOI; Sivotfiuv ra^i tl-rt, to this Xen-
O/i/ion refilled as follow*, ii. 5. 41. Tat/ra, ? n Saxjf <ro7{ Sie/V, fd<r%iiv iii.
L'. 6. Taj/ra 74 i-rifretfti, art fto^iets ^i^ V. 7. 7. Tawra -r^-rov ^ir,
xerifay X<av t7>j iii. 1. 7.
NOTE. To the retrospective character of ajTra; may be referred, (a) Id
use, preceded by x/, in making an addition to a sentence, the pronoun either
serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or, in the neuter Ace.
or Nom. (commonly plur.\ of the sentence itself (cf. ^ 334, 451). The con-
struction may be explained by ellipsis. Thus, Sivevs -rgeirrixti vtn waXXauf Si-
^iirSa.!, KO.\ ravroui [sc. Vi%i<r6a,i~\ fAfyuXo-r^vruf, it becomes you to entertain
many guests, and these magnificently, (Ec. 2. .5. "2ufi/u,tt,%a* Juja-irae/, xeti rou-
ruv -rXi/avwy Mem. ii. 6. 27. ''ESoMnrav ry AJMM)*^MN, *< rawra [sc. Ivroin-
a-av} titans, they assisted Lacedcemon, and [they did] </ia< knowing, Ag. 1. 38.
Mtvwv* 5i oix il^ririi, xtti Tetvree, fcto 'Agictinv uv, but Meno he did not ask for t
and that although h* '. from Ariams, ii. I. '5. Ai = ^t/P.|j r^ TA/, *)
CH. 4.] DEMONSTRATIVE. 3^5
ntvTa a<rti%itr>rov ourtti Ag. 2. 24. (6) The use of ravro and ratJra in as-
tcnt ; as, " T Ao* aw -rXevrioif o.v'Sgcicri (Jt-x^ouvreti ctvro} ovns voXiftov o,0Xvrai ; "
" NJ raUra ys [sc. J<TT;]," i$r>, 'Certainly it is so,' PL Rep. 4-22 b. EL OS-
KOVV Irto'ov y'i <riv Ix, Actx.sSai/u.ovos pint avuras n ; K. TatJr', eS Vifffortt Ar.
Pax, 274. BA. 'AXX' ilr'tupi*. <&. Taura vwv, <Vi 3oxi7 Id. Vesp. 1008.
514. 2.) "oSs surpasses in demonstrative vivacity ; but
ouro? in emphatic force and in the extent of its substantive use.
Thus,
OIA. T H rav^e <pgei%iis ; 'AFT. Tat/ray, oWi tiffo^S;, CEd. /s r/7/5 ^Ae 7mm
you speak of? Mess. 77e VERY MAN, whom you behold, Soph. (Ed. T. 1120.
0EP. IlaTay v^ *a) Xsy/j ; OIA. Tav^', os Tci^ffTtv Ib. 1 1 2G. 2w
ro7<rbi roT; -ret^oviri vJ/y ii. 3. I 9. KarasA/fTavrsf Tav^i rax v^ . . Ivti ourof
uvros tfioKoyil vi. 6. 26. 'H^a; Tat/VSs XaSevrsj, taking us who are here, Th.
i. 53.
NOTE. To the ofeicfc'c power of eS ( 513), may be referred the very fre-
quent use of this pronoun by the Epic and Dramatic poets for an adverb of
place ( 4.57.* /B) ; and perhaps, in no small degree, the general fact, that it ia
far more extensively employed in poetry than in prose.
5 1 5. 3.) In the emphatic designation of the first and
second persons by a demonstrative, ode commonly denotes the
first person, as the nearer object ; and ovio$, the second. In
denoting the first person, the demonstrative may be regarded
as simply deictic ( 513) ; in denoting the second, as expres-
sive of impatience, authority, contempt, familiarity, &c. For
the use of ovrog in address, which is employed both with and
without av, see 343. 3. Thus,
Mj S-vJJa*^' y!T ravS' av^aj == \[/,ov~\, a' fyea vroo ffov^ do not you die for
this man [for me], nor yet I for you, Eur. Ale. 690. 4>avsi/j av rovS* rav^aV
[= Iftou'] IftQaws Soph. CEd. T. 534 (but, 'Avj* '<&' [= <rii], us Zeixtv, sis
<rgicts iXZ Ib. 1 1 60). Tyo-Hi y< Z.tutrnf 'iri, at least, while I am yet alive, Id.
Tr. 305. ' TaSs [=' vpiT;, 4.5O] . . wrot, xaX87ra/, xui <pv*.(txts Msch. Pers.
1 . QuTOff} a,vrig [== ffu~\ ou x'tzufffrcti (^Xvei^uv. E/cre ftot, u 2<yx^Tj, eux
alff^uvrt PI. Gorg. 489 b. OJraj <rv, f -rgiffGv, [This you, or You there,
457.0], Ho there! old man, Soph. (Ed. T. 1121. OSros <rv, *Z>s Iwo
riX6tf ; Ho villain ! how earnest thou hither ? Ib. 532. Kurn ffv, fat ffr^n ;
Ar. Thesm. 610. Owraj, ri o-iftvov . . frxivrug ; Fellow! why that solemn look?
Eur. Ale. 773 ( 432). See 343. 3. This use of foi is very frequent iu
the tragedians.
5 1 G. III. Other compounds of aviog and ds ( 150. )
are distinguished in like manner with OVTOC and ode ' thus,
'0 Kwoa? uxoufftt; TOU T*uguou Toiuvret, roid^t vfgas UVTOV tXt%& CyT. V.
2. 31 ( 513. 1). '0 /u.lv our us tJ-rtv 5i. 3. 23. KXeos^aj p\v ouv TO-
ffnvra. iJvri Tt<rtrat(Qipvris 5s uoi o,<rri{t,t'i(p&9) ii. 5. 15. OUTUS iffri Js/voj
Xy/, utrri ft. -TTitimt Ib. 'Eysvsra OVTUS, atrffif* ffv i^tyts vii. 2. 27.
Ta^flwray ilwiv, on ou TUV viKuvreav ?>j ii. 1. 9. 'H^fTj ToffouTOi ovrtf,
otrous fv ogeis Ib. 16. 'H^f/V roirat^i ovrtf ivixu/usv TOV fieurtXiet ii. 4. 4
( 514). 'OP. "Yirovros outrx yiy\<uirx.u -roXu. HP. TeiKUrx fAiffilrmt
y* z i V 6ffit yvw, 'Even so,' Eur. El. 644 (^ 513. 6).
'J36 PRONOUN. - INDLFINITE. [BOOK ill
D. INDEFINITE.
517. Of the indefinite pronouns, the most extensive
in ils use is T<C, which is the simplest expression of indefi-
niteness or general reference. As such, it is not only joined
directly with substantives, or used by itself substantively or
adverbially, but it is also joined with other pronouns, with nu-
merals and other adjectives, and with adverbs. It more fre-
quently follows the word with which it is thus joined, and is
never placed at the beginning of a sentence, unless perhaps
when it is emphatic. It is variously translated into English,
and is sometimes best omitted in translation. Thus,
rif Ji/Jurniri, a certain man asked, ii. 4. 15.
with a certain Charon, H. Gr. v. 4. 3. TgoVM TIV'I, in some way, ii. 2. 17
E" Tifi v?ro<r%oiTo TI, if he made any promise to any one, i. 9. 7. Au-rvt7v o T
us i% f .i, to make a supper of what one has, or each one. has, ii. 2. 4. E<5 /tti
TH ^ogu SnZtifffu, ' each one,' B. 382. ~M.tr iT TH ixiTvov, there .are those who
hate him, or many a one hates him, Dem. 42. 17. "H rivet olVivu. oTa, / know
[either some one or none] scarcely an individual, Cyr. vii. 5. 45. 'H plv yu.%
y^a-fa HUT etv-rov ToiaSi <ri; , for the accusation against him was something
like this, or to this effect, Mem. i. 1. 1. 'Qvo'ieuv viva* vpuv tru%ov, what sort
of persons they found us, v. 5. 1 5. Tloirw n; t'tti ^u^et, how extensive a coun-
try it was, ii. 4. 21 . Fla,- Ii ns . .' 'Iv y't TI, uv tiXvfn, Ilui7ra, and every
one presented at least some one thing of what he had taken, Cyr. v. 5. 39. Atyii
ri( i/y, a certain one speaks, Soph. Ant. 269. 'H^^asy , Hfoftjj*tm<4 rivets,
some [i. e. about] seventy days, r fh. vii. 87. TSTT^' U.TTO. ptvpara. PI. Phaedo,
1 12 e. Tjv X^o, x&Xfv n %v/ux Cyr. i. 4. 8. Ow voXXu nvi v<vo^ii<rn^ov t
not inferior in any great degree, Th. vi. 1 . FlaXXot/j ^i rivus iXiyftoii; eivtv xa,i
X.U.TU, ' quite a number of turnings,' Cyr. i. 3. 4. M/x^sv ri //.igos, quite a
tmall part, Ib. vi. 14. M/x^ay nvoi eifya, worth but little, Mem. ii. 1.19.
'Ox/ya/ r/if ovrif, being [some few] but few, iv. 1.10. Tl; Ss/vtjv T/V Xtytif
lvva.fjt.iv rau (fnX^ara; tfvat, ' what a fearful one,' or 'how fearful,' Mem. i. 3.
I 2. 'Ey rvy^oivu fV/Xrjff-^wv TH uv eivfyuvei PI. Prot. 234 c. 'Eiip.i rif
yt\o7o; 'iKr^'.t Ib. 340 d. MXXv TI aweirircti, will suffer somewhat more, iv.
. 2fi. T IIrTO r< air^avev ; Did hn die nt nil the /ess? V. 8. 11. 2^5v <n
*i ffr^ATtoc. vi. 4. 2O. Ow ravw*T/ tofti^u uffQetXtf tUvxt revro vi. 1. 26.
T< uwetxovstv CEc. 9. 1. ^itufyi'ovrui TI Th. i. 138.
5 1 8. REMARKS. . TJ; may be regarded as the Greek indefinitt
article; but it is not commonly expressed with a substantive, unless some
proninu'in-.r. is j;iven to the idea of indefiniteness. See iv. 3. 1 1, and 4(i!. 2.
/3. Tis is sometimes emphatic and consequently orthotone (yet editors difler) ;
as, 2ip,*vvt<T0cti ut T< oWi, ^o /</vV/c themsrlrrs us if thi-y n-tn; something, PI.
Pha-dr. 242 e. Ei'sXw/f i<>/ i/v/ T TO^ TiTiXtvrwxoo-/, / am confident that
there is something for tlte di-ad. Id. Pluvdo, H:\ c. "K5a|i T< i<Vi7v, /<e seemed to
[say something] Aare reason or to be in the right, Id. Amat. 133 c.
7. An indefinite form of expression is sometimes employed for a definite;
thus, E/ aJ T<; TOVTOH v$i%n IU.UTOV, if therefore* one gives himself np to these
[== if I give myself up], Cyr. vii. 5. 41. ]$ovXivi(r6a.t, -rus TI; rovs avJ^aj
riXa, to counsel, how one [= we] shall drive off" the men, iii. 4. 40. Kaxej
tfxu Tiv't [= ffoi\ Ar. Kan. 552. E< /t*i nt r/^af atr^jva/, i/" one permitt
[= you permit] us to depart, iii. 3. 3.
CH. 4.] RELATIVE. 337
E. RELATIVE.
5 1 9. I. Relatives refer to an antecedent either as deft"
nite or as indefinite ; and are, hence, divided into the DEFINITE
and the INDEFINITE RELATIVES.
REMARKS. 1 . In the logical order of discourse, the antecedent, according
to its name, precedes the relative, but this order may be inverted, whenever
the perspicuity, energy, or beauty of the sentence is promoted by the change.
-2. INDEFINITE RELATIVES are formed, either from the definite relatives by
adding ris or a particle (commonly av), or from the simple indefinites by pre-
fixing of (in the shortened form a-) ; thus, orris ore; v, whoever, ofoTos, of
u'/uft kind soever, owo<ros, how much soever, ox-art, whensoever. See 153,
817, S'28.
5 2O. II. The DEFINITE RELATIVE is often used for
tie indefinite, as a simpler and shorter form ; and the INDEFI-
NITE sometimes takes the place of the definite, giving, however,
a somewhat different turn to the expression. Thus,
Out ingot. WiXovraj xtv^uvtutiv, rovrou; KCU o%avras Ifo'ni, whomsoever he
snic it'illing to incur danger, these he both made rulers, i. 9. 1 4. "Ex/ov roivrai
orr a, xKuffifAa. IM^MV vi. 3. 19 (cf. K//v a-ravra 'dry Ivruy^avonv xot,vffifjt,cf
Ib. 15 ; and, "Edx-rrov x-avrx; ovoirovf \viXa.(j.ot.vi ro xioois vi. 5. 5).
'Oaolri s TV T/ <r ff a. <f> y o v ; uTriffrixv, orris ^.iyuv . ., and see the perfidy
of Tissaphernes, [one] a man who saying . ., iii. '2. 4. Qiix etlff^uvio-h otlrt
S-'ou; OUT avfyuTov;, o'trivif opoffavris a.'ffol.uXtxttri ii. 5. 39. Ta<r5i
TV%OIS teufffftu* fru.fftXius, 'do-Tif .. /3/anuVi/, ' one who will live,' Eur.
Ale. 239 (see Ib. 659). N^r? IxiTvov, ovrtv' fyrlus fto\i7v tyiipiffa
Soph. (Ed. T. 1034. XaXssra p.iv rot. -rx^ovra, o-rort av^a/ ffrgetrnyuv rotau-
ruv o-r too 1*160. iii. "2. '2 (> 5'21. /3). See 525. ft. '
NOTES, (a) After the plural iravrs;, all, oa-rts and o; &v are used in the
singular, but ao-oi and ovro>rot in the plural See above and 497. 1, 521.
(6) The use of an indefinite relative, referring to a definite antecedent belongs
particularly to those cases in which the relative clause is added, not to distin-
guish, but to characterize, thus representing the antecedent as one of a class.
. HI. The relative should correspond with its an-
tecedent in specific meaning, as well as in grammatical form.
Thus, the definite relative with oviog should be o<; ' with iot-
ovrog, olo? ' with Toaovroc, oaoc ' &c. The exceptions to this
rule arise mostly from the use of a simpler, more familiar,
or more emphatic pronoun, in the place of that which is
strictly appropriate. Some apparent exceptions arise from
ellipsis. Thus,
Krriffo.ff6a,i Ou-
vr,6ni}; ftrio' et'yoi.fS.v X/ rx; roieturot; zoiroi; Jv [_= o'ieav\ xoti ro7{ tyetvXoif
fe,irta-rtv, A.X' Ixsi'va; uv a^s/j civ rot-noo^ xaivuvri<rtii, ' such glory as many ob-
tain, &C.,' Isocr. 40^ d. llavra/v, oo-oi [for a?, Or SC. TtfrWTwv] its K<rrXi/
i, ' of all who muster,' or 'of all, as many as muster,' L 1. 2
338 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III.
(cf. Tlafn, els Irvyxotvst, tSou i. 8. l). TIa, eVa \yu fiuveipvi vii. 6. 36.
"TatJr," t<fn, " x,& *<> otret a to; Ixiltufftv " ill. 1. 7. 'Efra. y ^i-
fetf, offuff-ri^ i*oivGv<roc,v /a ruv Ket^ov^uv iv. 3. 2.
REMARKS, a. "0? is also used for eles with an ellipsis of the antecedent ,
88, "! y >?f Ss [= roiovros a7a?] ii, as long as you are what [= such as^
you are, PI. Phsedr. '243 e. "H yt % s/>< Id. Theaet. 1 97 a.
/3. The place of a relative pronoun is often supplied by a RELATIVE ADVERB,
chiefly in designations of place, time, and manner ; as, E/j #*>/ay, cVsv o'\/>v-
veci S-aXTTv, to a jo/ace [whence], from which they would behold the sea, iv.
7. 20. 'Ev ru 0ti, iv0avrt iffxvvovv iv. 8. 25. Ta uuro (r^pa. . . utr-rt^
re -rguro* p,tt%evf*,ivos ffwyu, the same order [asj with that in which he first ad-
vanced to the battle, i. 10. 10. 'OftoTx yu.^ fj^ot ^oxeviri vrdff%iiv, cucririg 7
vtf sraXXa itrQ'tuv ftn^s-rart ifA-r'iirXa.iro Symp. iv. 37. Kw ffcii Stoi vrogoitv, ut
lyi ^X Soph. (Ed. C. 1 1 24.
5*22. IV. The relative pronouns belong to the class
of adjectives ( 73), and, as such, agree with a substantive
expressed or understood. This substantive, or one correspond-
ing to it, is also the antecedent of the relative. It is commonly
expressed in but one of the two clauses, more frequently the
former, but often the latter ; and may be omitted in both, if it
is a word which will be readily supplied ( 447). Thus,
awryf ffT^a,TiuTKf t eSs [sc. ffT^a,TiuToe.g~^ Msvwv fT^s, he sent with
her the soldiers, which [soldiers] Meno had, i. 2. 20. ' A.fo'X'ip.^a.i fgos letu-
T [sc. ro 0-TjaTft^a,] S iJ%iv ffr^drivfAa., to send back to him the force which
he had [what force he had], Ib. 1. Ky^a; i t%Mv oS; *?*, and Cyrus hav-
ing the men whom I have mentioned, Ib. 5. E/; w* atp/xovro xupriv, [sc.
ttvTvi fi )taf*,r)\ fjiiya.\ri *ri jv iv. 4. 2. KarairxEz/a^on-a TI ^f eig%
i. 9. 19. AvT*f [sc. roffaurovs /3oi/f,] cj-o/ /Sat? vii. 8. 16.
y^ l/V/y, a7-/y tu^oftctt 3-a?V AT. Ran. 889. OTS', y iVj\^|y 'EofAiov
l^o' Eur. Or. 1 1 84.
REMARKS. 1 . Other words, belonging alike to both clauses, are subject to
a similar ellipsis ; thus, TW<pyK tVi<payj [sc. if^y], out TI ira* l-rn-ien
ifX^i* ?^;<wy, Tissaphernes appeared, having both the cavalry which he hud him-
telf brought [had come having], iii. 4. 1 :J. 0/i? roirtvruv T'I^I a-xi^s, aV*
^*7y, <r^exi/Ta< [= OJf vrgoxiirai fxi-^if tftgi rotrovruv, fifi oyuv rifuv fxi-^if
PI. Rep. 533 e.
2. It will be observed, that when the antecedent is expressed in the same
clause with the relative, it is commonly put at the end, as though the rest of
the clause were regarded as modifying it like an adjective. See 526.
^ 123. 3. The ELLIPSIS of & demonstrative pronoun before the rela-
tive is very frequent ; as, indeed, of the whole antecedent, when it can be sup-
plied from the relative. When this ellipsis of the antecedent takes place, 'i<rr
often unites with the relative to form a species of compound pronoun or advert
remaining itself unchanged, whatever may be the appropriate number, tense,
Or mode. Thus, n^avJaAXayra TgirSiif vrgurov ftiv Xi/f/a-a^ay, on &%&>*
ygtl-ro Ittt ' a? [= riffotv $' (xtTva/, a/J xeit 3ivo(f>uvrct, they proposed as am-
bassadors, first Chirisophus, because he had been chosen commander ; and some
also [ther were also those who proposed] Xenophon, vi. 2. 6. nx> 'lA/yy, *<
CH. 4.] RELATIVE. ATTRACTION. 339
'A%cttwv, KoCi t/TTiv uv ciXXuv iQvuv Th. iii. 92. K/ ttrrt p\v out ttvrui xctrt-
CzAay H. Gr. ii. 4. 6. "Ea-T/y ovo-Tivet; avfyuvruv Tt0au/u,ttxas i<ri ffo^let ; Mem.
i. 4. 2. (Of. E/V) S' U.ITUY oS} ou$' uv fa.vrdt.'xoi.fft 0iK&a.r/iTi ii. 5. 18 ; ll<r
Si a? / -ry fgoo-'tifHoov v. '2. 14 ; and, with the singular for the plural in the
Imperfect also, T Hv 01 TOVTUV TCUV fffa.6[Jt.uv oS; vrxvu pta.xoovs %Xot,vviv i. 5. 7
See 364.) f fl? / T<J; fttTttfiiXtiv itr0' on, so that [there were times
when] sometimes he even regretted it, ii. 6. 9. "Eo-Ti s 'iv6ct, and there are places
where, or in some places, Cyr. viii. 2. 5. ^Ea-r/y aVj <nj vftcis i^ce.vra.Tno-oii \
Is there any way in which one could deceive you ? or, 7s it possible that one should
deceive you? V. 7. 6. Ov ya.^ tff6' ofou p oXtif Soph. (Ed. T. 448.
NOTES, (a) From a similar union of tvi [^- tviffri} with the relative, have
arisen the compounds i'v/a/, some, and t^We, sometimes. (Ii) The ellipsis some-
times extends even to the substantive verb itself ; thus, "Ovrtu [for "Er<n
TOW], in some places, Lac. 10. 4.
534. V. The intimate relation of clauses connected
by a relative pronoun, or a kindred particle, often produces
an ATTRACTION, sometimes simply affecting the position or
form of particular words, and sometimes even uniting the
two clauses in one Not unfrequently a combination results,
which may be regarded as a species of compound or complex
pronoun. Thus,
S) 525. A.) A word or phrase is often made a part of
the relative, instead of the antecedent, clause ; and sometimes
the two clauses are blended in their arrangement. Thus,
Aoyous otxouirov, out ffoi $u?Tv%t7s v\x.u tpiguv, hear the sad tidings which I
bring you, Eur. Or. 853. E/? "A^sv/av w|s/v, w? 'Ojovra; $0%* *aXX>5f xoti
1 1^ a, i /A o y n s [for vfoXXtiv */ sy^a^ova] iii. 5. 17. E/rs ^ra?^', ov \\ \f&rit
%tgos IlaXwdw^av i' TI rar^aj tv %r.p.oi; s%nsi ti ^>5, 'tell me respecting iny
son Polydorus, whom you have,' Eur. Hec. 986. T/Tjy <y fi&/v Stiirrouffa,*,
ov cry TO vix^ov otTtivra,; Soph. Ant. 404. "Ers^a <roiotv i ra, a. *&n TIVZS rat
tp a, v <r a, ff [Jt, a, T a, uvo afH(>ta.s otX*i6ri x&Xouffiv PL Theaet. 167 b. QVTOI, ITU
ivH'ius %ff6ovro TO <x 'fay 'ft&, aft^tu^ria'ctv [for ivrti Y,ff0ov<ro TO f^ei'yf^et, ii/&itas
aviZugtio-av], these, when they understood the matter, immediately withdrew, H
Gr. iii. 2. 4. See 522.
REMARK. We observe this construction particularly,
a.) In expressions of time and possibility with the superlative ; as, Hu^et.
r'ofi.t6a. #a.(>t7*eti, OTO.V Ti-^nrTO. ^iot.<rooi^ > ufjt.i6a, [for fa,o-7va.i Tii^iffTa., OTetf
tHMrfm&ifU/*], we shall endeavour to be present [most quickly, when] as soon
as we have accomplished, Cyr. iv. 5. S'.i. c iij Tti^nrra. tuf v*i$Kivsv, ifvuvTt
iv. 3. 9. 'Ew< rtXdi. Ta^/ff-ra, . . a-ri^oTo, as soon as he had come, he sold, vii.
** 6. "Hyatyay . . ovroffou; tyu ttXtiffTov; i^tiveiftriy, I have brought [the most
\raich] as many as I could, Cyr. iv. 5. 29. "E^wv if-rieis u; civ ^6>nfett ?rX/-
fToui, bringing as many horse as he should be able, i. 6. 3 (5 521. /3). 'Hj /u.oi-
XiffTK iduvKTO ivrmgvz'TOfAZves i. 1.6. ' ' A.Triyovro . . ofoi ioyyavra irooffura.761
vi. 6. 1. 'EXawvwy u; ^uvatTov %v Toi%nrTet, riding as fast as was possible, Cyr.
V. 4. 3. rie/a 'ofjt.a.1 % Syyarey [sc. sVra/j fAxXifTot i. 3. 15. A/*<ysy . . ut
ttev TI [sc. ^v] pa), i fro. v.$i/}.a.yu.i\>!*i; ii. 4. 24. "E<wj ay TKVTU. uf tw
ivijTai Meiu. iv. 5. 9.
340 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK Il k
NOTE. The word denoting possibility is often understood ; thus, 'flj ra-
Xttrra [sc. vva<rov y] <roo<viff6a.i, to march as quickly as possible, i. 3. 14
ll*/j v vrooiue'ifAitJci Tt v; ot<r$oiXio'T(t'rK, xai . . u; xgoc,nf<rat ftx%aifjt,st!ai iii
2. 27. "Iy <ij vrXiiffTOt f&iv '/ifiutv Sv ra?j ovrXoi; utrtv, u; \\O.^KTTCH d\ imiuoQt
gun Ib. 28. A<*o</y its TV 'Atria.* on roi^nrTa. [sc. v ^v>jTa/] vii. -'. 8
(a-n in this construction with the superlative is the neuter of otrn;, used ad-
verbially). "Q'Tru; OTI KIT 0,^0.0- x.iva.ffTsra.T at XeiSai $a.<rtXict, that he might take
the king as unprepared as possible, i. 1.6. "Or* irAs/Wans KoCi ^^^.r'urrou; Ib
"0r<wj V fyo-TK ^Esch. Ag. GOO. "Oay TK^KTTO. Soph. El. 14JJ3.
/3.) In the use of the indefinites, which, even in composition with o; ( 519.
2), often seem to belong in force to the antecedent cla ise ; thus, 'Ilytf^ovet
tt.lrf.'iv Kt/9v, oa-Ti; . . cr|/ [= vytftovet <rtva., o;], to ask Cyrus for some giiide,
who would conduct them, i. 3. 14. "E<r<r/v on [= n, o] trt '/$ t x.n<ra. ; Is there
alight in which I have wronged you ? i. 6. 7. K/ XXsv aW/va ^wu^ia.
v. 5. 1 2. Ow ^1/x.T^iSuv, ofou (in hftfirtffuS ivixot, . . ixK0'-%iTo, ' [anywhere,
where he did not] except where,' i. 5. 9. See $ 52O, 523.
S2G. B.) The RELATIVE takes the case of the ante-
cedent. This is the common construction, when the ANTECE-
DENT is a Genitive or Dative, and the RELATIVE would prop-
erly be an Accusative depending upon a verb. Thus,
'Ex ruv -jroXnuy, Jv T/<r<r^i^y>jf Irvy^etviv ?%*>, from the cities, which Tis-
taphernes happened to have, i. 1.8. T' av^/, J v 'iXno-6i, irttiroftat, I will
obey the man, whom you may choose, i. 3. 15. A$* r5jj iXsw^i^'a;, r,i xixTvrfa
i. 7. 3. (Cf. 'Ev T?J ff-x-ovboug, &s . . ivawtrctv iv. 1. 1. Yo7g xrr,vifiv, a. ix
rvv Teco%uv tXaSov iv. 7. 17.) Tayrwv, <Jv ^w ^a-ra/vto- ^= -i/ ^a-Ta/vatf,
434] xaXt7j CElc. ii. 1. "A^^avraj ttra/sj XKn/rrg i^f-a %&>oa,s i. 9. 14
(^ 522. 2). But utrtg tH%* olxiruv firry p.ovca Soph Gd. C. :J.S4. Ms<r-
J/3ft/j aJ^i^ UT; *^'J firav Mem. ii. 7. 13. Xi/^Aivej yi aWaj a'/at; XS^E^I
V. 8. 3.
REMARKS. . If the ANTECEDENT is a demonstrative, it is commonly omit-
ted; as, 2i [sc. Ixi/va/;] off "i%*i, with those whom 1 have, vii. .<. 48. *A/*^J
J iT^av iv. 5. 1 7. 'Av^' Jv iw tfuSov i. 3. 4. 'H^9X<av reeiri ^uffiiv ou Xo-
rigot tQtgev Ib. 21. 'E$r,Xu(n 2 Tet/ra a7; T*J u*-Tig('a iVgaTTi ii. 2. 18.
/3. Sometimes, though rarely, the Dot. and even the Nom. are attracted in
like manner ; as, r il [= tx/va>y, a7j] fa/frit, -roXXayj, wy o/" tAo.se whom
he distrusted, Cyr. V. 4. 39. 'Eg <Sv [= ixi/xa/y, a] ^s^' Uar^a/y ytyayiv, /rom
it-Artf Ac hag b*en with either party, Isocr. 69 C ( 4.>()). BxTTia-^a; ^' ui
[= tx/vy, a] w^ry irgifxiva.tr'reti, to be injured by those things which have beef,
prepared by us [in respect to which preparation has been made by us], Th. vii.
67. Oi$t KM itiorit rut r.t -rt^i 2ae^J/,- Hdt. i. 78. When the subject of a
verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. Cf. 529.
y. The relative followed by /SewAu may, as if a compound pronoun ( 524),
agree with the antecedent in any case ; thus, Hiai \\tXuyvurou, r, aXXaw OTOU
[= a<r;y] /SawXu, respecting Polygnotus, or any other one whom you please, PL
Io, 533 a. Ta JUa, orrif /SawXu A.Xa; ai0p,o; Id. Oat. 432 a. O7as TOU-
t-ut os /SawXi/ tt^yctfToti Id. Gorg. 517 b. Compare, in Lat., quivis.
t. RELATIVE ADVERBS are likewise affected by attraction ; thus, A/txa^/-
Cyr iltut aViy [= ixi^tv ofou] Ifi^id^ro vrafixs, they immediately brought
over tlieir children [whence] from tht place* where they had p 'it them for safety.
CH. 4.] RELATIVE. - ATTRACTION 341
Th. i. 89. 'E* S* 7?,-, Ufa [= o5] ^oilxuro Soph. Tr. 701. X ? u x;ii
efot [ = Ixttirt o-rov] %6ovoi X^V^O.VTI lyrofttv lipas Eur. Iph. T. 1 1 8. Cf.
^ 527. K., 531.0.
$ t>27. C.) The ANTECEDENT takes the cose of Z/ie rela-
tive. This is termed INVERTED ATTRACTION. Thus,
Av?Xy aoroi o *Ar0XX $ia7f [= Ssawj ] 01; t$ti vuv, Apollo made known
fa him the gods to whom he must sacrifice, Hi. 1.6 (cf. v<ra./Aivo; ols nvi/iXiv
o Si'os Ib. 8). "0<n A.etxila.ife,enoi fuvreav [= vf<iv<ra.~\, y Jtavra/, srsT^ayanj
Ty H. Gr. i. 4. 2. 'Ay*voto- ^e* ^vy>i roXrr&y [= craX/ra/y] wy a<p/xs-rtf
%0ovet Id. Med. I 1. Tao-Ss [= A'/Ss] S' cifffifi titro^x:, e| oA/<wy ci^nXov itifiou-
fai fitay, ^eooau/ri Tgos <ri Soph. Tr. 283. Aoyoj S' f IfA-r't-rruKiv a.^rtea; iftot
frii^ovn ^sw^, ffv/uctXov yvupw Id. OEd. C. 1 1 50. Toy v^ rovrav, ov -ret-
Xeti %*iri7i, . . OUTOS lirriv iv6a.lt Id. (Ed. T. 449 ( 499). Karvagirets ^i, oSf
vfjt,tri(>av$ tpctri itvxi, it n O.VTUV i/Xw^a^sy, alrot oClria't tlffn V. 5. 1 9.
REMARK. Inverted attraction appears also in ADVERBS ; thus, B-^va/ xiUdtt
[= xitiri], otitv <7fi(> jjxu, to return thither, whence he came, Soph. CEd. C. 1227.
K< etXXoffi [= aXXa^aw], ovoi y u<pixr!, a.ya.vrno'ovtrt ft PI. Crito, 45 b. Cf
526. $, 531. /S.
D.) The two clauses are ~br ought into one by
the ellipsis of a substantive verb (cf. 538). This is termed
CONDENSED CONSTRUCTION, or CONDENSATION. The verb is
omitted either (a.) with the antecedent^ or (b.) with the rela-
tive.
a.) WITH THE ANTECEDENT. We here distinguish the fol-
lowing cases :
1 .) After a demonstrative pronoun or article, the RELATIVE is also omitted,
and the ANTECEDENT takes its place in the construction. This form of con-
densation is particularly frequent in questions and exclamations, especially with
the poets. Thus, T< r'oV aubas [== T/ i<r<ri robt, o astray] ; What is this,
which you say? Eur. Ale. 106. T<V ax^a TOV' [= rt; otvyo IO-TI o^i t ov] i-ri
fx,rjva,7{ t>(>u j What man is this, whom I see by the tents? Id. Hec. 7:i3. T/
TOUT' cii>%a7ov \vvifiis xaxy ; Soph. CEd. T. 1O33. O7y 5^/Jvav T>7vS' 1(putra.;\
What a viper is this, which thou hast produced ! Eur. Ion, 1 262. Tauro pit
etitv 3-etvftitffTov Xiytis PI. Prot. 3 1 8 b. T/f o -ratios [_= T/? itrn o vroto;, es]
Kvrau; "KIT* ; Soph. Ph. 601 (see $ 480. a). KXv yi pat <rouvti$os i%/uvttit.
fctf, the reproach which you have cast upon me is an honor, Eur. Iph. A. 305.
In the following sentence, there appears to be a union between an exclamation
without a verb, and a relative clause ; Tai/j i/u,as 'fit -retr^ Savurovf uixiTg
[= T H S-o.va.Tii ot.lx.ii:, oSi <3 vctTyg f/te;] ! The cruel death my father saw!
Soph. El. -205. Expressions like the following are still more elliptical ; "Ev&
Tgifufy'tet [= lo-rj %<voiev, a T^srt/^y/a] xct^sTrou, where there is a place,
which is called Tripyrgia, H. Gr. v. 1. 10. 'Ey J xaXouptv TO ii.y, in which
is that which we call LIFE, PL Phaedo, 1 07 c.
2.) (KSii'j with oa-rii ol (or sometimes ; aii) forms a species of compound
pronoun (^ 5"J4) ; as, Ot^s/? OO-TI; alx a,fi^ira.i, there is no one, who will not
not refrain, Ven. I'J. 14 (cf. Otiuf v, ea-r,; ovx ftra H. Gr. vii. 5. 26). K*.
rotyi'^iu y fiftuv ov&tt; veri; ou, every body would laugh at us, PI. Hipp. Maj.
299 a. Qtitts Si altf ru^' m/Su7 Soph. CEd. T. 373. OwSiva* ' - ofttit
29*
342 SYNTAX OF Ttf - 1'RONOUN. [BOOK III
orov eti vravrav av vpuv x0* fiXixia.v varrig tfnv PI. Prot. 317 C. Ow-
STM ovx, a.vrox.otvetuivo; Id. MeilO, 70 C. fls^/ av ali^-.vtx. KIV^UVOV [== ovbii
Kivbuvos ,] ovnv olx vffsfi'ivxv ai vr^'iyovat Dem. 295. 7. So, with an in-
terrogative for ov^tis, T/ o'/ttrh OVTIVU. ov Peu.%tiq, -ffgatpdffii o.'roffT'/ia'itrfa.t
Th. iii. 39.
5 2O. b.) WITH THE RELATIVE. This occurs with
the relatives of comparison, otoc, o;oc, ^A/xuc, which then unite
with the substantive or adjective following, to form a species of
compound adjective. To this, as to other adjectives, the article
may be prefixed ( 412). Thus,
Xa^/^a^svav O'IM ffoi a.vbpi [= v$ot TaiouTtu, stag <n> si], obliging a man such
as you are [a SUCH AS YOU man], Mem. ii. 9. 3. O/ ola'i <ri(> vft'Js oivS^ts,
but [the SUCH AS YOU men] men of your rank, or men like you, Cyr. vi. -.'. 2.
Il^aj eiv^^x; ToXpLVi^ou; o'lov; x.cti ' A.6f)voiiov; Th. vii. 21. "Ovro; <rov <7ra.yov olou
^iivoTUTou [= roiovrov, oJo; \ffrt JjyvrTflj], the cold being [such as is mo?t
dreadful] of the most intense kind PL Conv. 220 b (see iv. 8. 2 ; vii. 1. 24).
Ma^a/j/av offov v;Xj \cix.uvixr,v [= roirotJTOv, o<rri ICTTI Qvn^W Aaxaiv/xiiJ, (t
knife about the size of the Spartan small-sword, iv. 7. 1 6. E/xaj av^a xvtpov.
fl^ix,av QovKvoioriv \= TriXiKavTov, r,Xlx,os QoiDUjbiO'/i; 10-ri^, i%}*ia'0eti Ar. Ach
70:}. At/vox roTo-iv n^.itaiiri va/v Id. Eccl. 465. In like manner, 'lev vt^trrov
evrof ol% ovvrio <rvs r^tuSo; PI. Phaedo, 104 a,
RKMAKKS. . A substantive of a different number following the relative
remains in the Nominative ; as, Nsav/aj $' a'lovs [= roiovrovs, oto;~\ <rv, but young
men such as you. Tuv a/eav-ri^ ctvros ovruv, of men like him, H. Gr. i. 4. 16".
/3. In this construction, otros is commonly used in the neuter form otrov, as
indeclinable, and may be often regarded as a mere adverb ( 450. 5, 6) ; thus,
O< l-rfiHi TOUTOU otrov i%a,)co<rioi, ' as many as 600,' or, ' about 600/ i. 8. 6.
Aa&>y . . 'otrov rgi% > oivtx,ov O.OTOV vii. 3. 23. 'A.Tl%ii otrov ica.poio'tiyyriv, l about
a parasang,' iv. 5. 10. K< jr^a.ra. o'trov 3-y/*ara, and sheep [as many as the
sacrifices would be] enough for sacrifice, vii. 8. 1 9. So, doubled, "Oirov otrov
Ar. Vesp. 213. See 450. 1.
y. In the Epic, the demonstrative is sometimes expressed instead of the
relative ; as, TvfAfat . . ir/uxia ro7ov [= <ro7ov, oios lo-ri tTuiKvi] "Y. 246.
i3O. E.) A RELATIVE PRONOUN takes the place of a
demonstrative pronoun and a connective particle.
The term demonstrative pronoun, as here used, includes the personal oronoun
and the article. See 467. 1. Of this form of attraction there ire two
kinds, according as the demonstrative belongs to the Jirxt or the tecoud of the
two clauses which are united.
a.) When the demonstrative belongs to the first clause. In this kind of
attraction the pronoun is commonly either governed by a preposition or adverb t
Or is itself used adv>hi<t//i/. Thus, 'E<p* J [= l-rl rovru, utrri} (*M xetitiv retf
*&>/u.a.f, upon this condition, that they should not burn the villages, iv. 2. I 9 (cf.
'K-rJ rttirif, utrn Th. iii. 1 1-4). 'E0* eu TI [= iwJ rouraa, aiVrt] TX7 trvX-
liytiv, for the purpose of collecting [for this purpose, tliat we might collect]
vessels, vi. K. 22. Mi;^/ oZ [= TW ^vaw, on \ iToov, until [the time when]
tliey saw, v. 4. 16 . cf. Mf^^/ rotrovrou, 'iu; Th. i. 90). Wi%t ov [= TOV %u.
you, ic^a] 5/a x.<z.up,u, ov Juvavra/ o!ict7v a-tf^tuirot, ' to the region where,' i. 7. 6
OH. 4.J RELATIVE. - ATTRACTION. 343
Awf .%! ai7 [= rou ro-rov, ol] a<npaAij utro won, ' as far as,' Cyr. V. 4.
16. 'ErtJ Tfio'rip.^'intv revs 'A^wxXa/s/V f-'^X,^ o^oirov nlroi xiXivoitv H. Gr
iv. 5. 12. 'Eg arai/ nrs},u!<rj, since he had been abroad, vii. 8. 4. 'Ev w S
iirX^avra, ararf whilst they were arming, ii. 2. 15. OSras St ^aa/ <p/Xaf ^ty/-
rra;, ay'vi*' [aw i'vexa = rovrou ivtxct, art} 'Argtfiets ffruyti, ' because,' Soph.
Ph. 585. 'Av6' Jv [= 'AvrJ rawTot/, art], because, Id. Ant. 1068. Ov $a*i"*
ra< . . 'biaipiaiiv ra. ixovo-ia. rut uxovftuv, y [return, on] o p,lv Ixuv ruv7
<f>a.yti oil, eVari fiofaoiro Mem. ii. 1.18.
NOTE. Hdt. sometimes uses pix^i ou or orw as a compound adverb gov-
erning the Gen. ( 394) ; as, Mt#g< aJ cxru irv>yu* i. 181. Mt^< oraw
ii. 173.
b.) When the demonstrative belongs to the second clause ; as,
fit ovru ftotiyirai, o<rns [= utrn ixi7vos] ov fiouXtrut ffoi QiXos ttvtti \ Who it
so mad, that he does not wish [or a* not to wish] to be your friend? h. 5. 12
(see Ib. fi. 6 ; vii. 1. 28). 'A-roguv Itrrt . ., oirnif 10'ii.oufft, it is the part of
those without resource, that they should wish, or to wish, ii. 5. 21. Oux ternt
ourca ftugos, Si S-avsTv l^a. Soph. Ant. '22O. Taa-avrav aXyaj, aw [= uffri uv-
TOV\ rer' ay KiXnftrett, such grief, that he will never forget it, Eur. Ale. 1 98.
Kara/xr^wy rr.v n yvvottxa, o'iou av^oj [_ = on TOIOVTOU av5gof] ffr'i^oiro, xa.)
rov av^at, a7a [=a'ri <ra/ayrjvj yt/vra xa.ra.Xt'ru* olxir' O^OITO, commiserat-
ing, both the wife, that she had lost such a husband, and the husband, that, leaving
tuch a wife, he would never be/iold her more, Cyr. vii. 3. 1 3. 01 S 3io-yrori9
frivtaa-tv, o"y \x $op.u a.vu^tra.t Eur. Ale. 948 ( 425. 4).
NOTES, a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative
in explanation, or the assignment of reason or purpose ; as, aty^ao-Tav voiiTs ,
Si . 'Sftust y u conduct strangely, [who give] that you give, or in giving, Mem.
ii. 7. 13. "OsrXa XTUVTK.I, of; a/tuvovvritt roiii a^ixovvras, they prepare arms,
that with these they may repel assailants, Ib. 1. 14. Kai ?reA.< vrift-<J/ov nv\
SffTii ffnftctviT, and send ^me one to the city, to give notice, Eur. Iph. T. 1 208.
/3. RELATIVE ADVERBS likewise exhibit this form of attraction (cf. 526.
S, 527. R.) ; as, Ew^a/^wv ya.^ [Aoi o avw^ ityaivtro, . . us \_=on ourai] cibtuf
xcti ytvvetia; iTthtuTcc., for the man appeared to me happy, that he died so fear-
lessly and nobly, PI. Phaedo, 58 e. 2a<pj'v v t6^i* 'EXXa;, us yrdov
Eur. Iph. T. 1180.
REMARK. FORMS OF COMPARISON are especially
liable to attraction and ellipsis (cf. 391. y, 461) ; thus,
Mavoi n ovrn opaia. 'i-r^a.rvvt, a-rig [= ixiivoi;, Mwtf] ait ju.tr ei\Xuv ovrtf,
[like things, which] things like to those which,' v. 4. 34. 'Eax /u.iv fi <rja|/f
| ras/J'T/.3(r/, o"oe.ft(> xa.} vrgoirtiiv i%g*iro ro7; %'ivoi; i. 3. 18. Own ya.^ iru^ot
iir* eiyr^uy vwzorsgav fii}*9i, oiov [= roiovrav, eJvj ro TJ 'Alfioootrst; "rim ix
ipuv "E^wj Eur. Hipp. o3O. Toa"eyTav %l oia.<pioztv x^ttaj oil ruv oouX&v, airo*
/ fti* oauA.oi cixavrti ro7{ ^sir^raraij uwgi'Toi/irtv, r,/u.a.; 01 . . txavretf 6t7 fon.7*,
insomuch as this, that slaves,' Cyr viii. 1. 4. TWoyVav ^tavav <rt tyiyvuffxov,
la a* [=o<rav rouro, en] ijxouov 'A0ti*ct7iv t~vai. ' so far as this, that I heard,'
iii. 1. 45. Ta /u.tv av^a rotrourov iy'iyvutrxov, on [= aVav rouro, on] tig fiftuf
V. 8. 8. AmaVs^o; ysyavsva/ rriv ri^vnv roffovr-M, 'offu o f&iv ret ettirov ftovat
PI. Euthyphr. lid. "E-re/ v/v ruv^t -r^riffrov uxrurce. (^^.i-rov
I <povi7v flUsv p.'ovn, 'inasmuch as,' Soph. Tr. 3 1 2. H^otX6ovris ore*
y xctigoi itvu.1 tig ro ^nTvo<roit7o-6ei.i, ' until,' vi. 3. 1 4.
344 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK [II.
NOTE. "Ofav el, [just so much as not to be] only not, all hut, is used as
simple adverb (also written oa-ovav) ; thus, Tov ,8X>.ovT xeti oa-av oL -rxooyrei
vr'eXifjtev Th. i. 36. "Ocrov ou ira,ilri ffin vii. 2. 5.
533. VI. A RELATIVE sometimes introduces a clause
which (a.) has another connective or a participle absolute, or
which (/I) is properly coordinate; and, on the other hand, a
COORDINATE CLAUSE sometimes (/.) takes the place of a rela-
tive clause, or (d.) is used in continuation of it. Thus,
, ror tt fgotovro, ox. KV uvet*
Aavro, the Olynthians could now mention many things, which, had they then fore-
seen, they would not have perished, Dem. 128. 17. "Of i-nibv x.a.rf.pa.e<v . .,
ixiTvof . . nva.yxu.o'i, [when who perceived . ., he compelled] who, when he
perceived . ., compelled, Lac. 10. 4. OJ? sov [= at, l^ov a,uro7{] <TKVTO. 1%U9
ra ruv vroMruv, ouo v t%ouv PI. Rep. 466 a. Cf. . 539. 2.
/3. Taiavret QwftKi f*.ot,vrtKa.} ^lu^iaitv cuv ivrgivrov <rt> ftv^ir, such things were
decreed by prophetic responses ; to which do you pay no regard, Soph. (Ed. T.
723. 'OP. YvQa* apip' tiftw ^roXiTtti i*} <pov V Sirfai xt'-* 1 *' nTA. "H
K(ivii ri xfipo, \ '[Which will decide what?] And what will this decide f
Eur. Or. 756.
y. 'JL^ireiffeti . . 'O^urria, y "Sifftxpo*, % aXXawj pv^'tous v ns it-rot, to examint
Ulysses, or Sisyphus, or [one might mention ten thousand others] ten thousand
others whom one might mention, PL Apol. 41 b.
y d. i^ov 01 i tt
Ix-oiwfft, xxi ffr^ctrrtyov It aitrov oi.f&u%i i. 1.2. This construction is adopt-
ed chiefly to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with the fol-
lowing
REMARK. The repetition of the relative is commonly avoid"
ed, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a demonstrative
or of a personal pronoun , as,
'Af>a,7es 5i, v tif*,i7{ ^iXa^asv /3<nXe xxfaffreivKi, */ [sc. J] iJaixa^ain xeii
[sc. ** jT] faciGofitt* <rtffra, [w -r^a^utrtiv aXXjXowf, and Ariteus whom wa
wished to make king, and to whom we gave and from whom we received pledges
that we would not betray each other, iii. 2. 5. 'Kxs7*oi, ots ri p\^n <rjj avrut
^VXTK, XXa ftr) ffufjt.a.ra. vXa.'rrovTif %u<ri PI. Phiedo, 82 d. 'ILua; Ss, olf
xrittfMa* fti ovbiif Tdgio-nv, i<rrt>a.rivo'ot./ji.iv Si tf' etlrov iii. 1. 17. TIou 5ii
ixtTttf iffTi* o av!j, 8; iruviS^oa. *i,uiv, HO.} ffu ftoi ftoi\at i^extis Sauu.x.'i^'.ii UVTOV \
Where now is that man, who hunted with us, and whom you seemed to me greatly
to admire f Cyr. iii. 1. 38. 'KxsTvo; TS/VKV, o7j ovx i%a./>i%ovt' el Xiyovns, ovb'
\<pi^.9Ui ttVTOUf Dem. 35. 3. Ka/ vt/y T'I %P*I Soav ; offTif i[A<Q(tvus &so7{ \%ftz'ioo-
uoti, ptffu Ji ft 'Exxjiw fr^etref Soph. Aj. 457. So, when the pronoun is
repeated in the same sentence ( 499); as, rWr*a /3a^?^, y ^5jv f
Uaiui> riiX' iivlg Ni/Xtfw pous, 'whom you ought to drive [her],' Eur
Andr. 649.
F. COMPLEMENTARY.
t>35. From the connective, and, at the same *ime, in-
definite character of the complementary pronouns and ;id verbs
OH. 4.] COMPLEMENTARY. 345
( 329. N.), their proper forms are those of the indefinite rel-
atives (^ 519. 2). But, when there will be no danger of mis-
take, there is often employed, for the greater brevity and vi-
vacity, in place of the full compound form, one or the other
element, either the relative or the indefinite. Of these, the
latter is far the more frequently used, but with this distinction
from the indefinite in its proper sense, that the accentuation of
the compound form is retained, as far as possible. Thus,
Il^< S/fXa* tivtti, o TI ol a.\Xoi *EXAjyf a,f/>x.(>ivouvTeti, before it is evident,
ti-h<tt the other Greeks will answer, i. 4. 14. Il*/v 5riXay iivxi, TI -rotrto-ovtriv it
a'/.^oi "EXXrjvs; Ib. 13. Tlf ^fiXe'ifi, ous Tiftai i. 9. 28. "H^iTo, <r i s o S-o-
t/o; t*rj. . . K.ee.1 iigiTO, a T t tin TO ffvvf^ua, \. 8. 1 6. ^.idyvucriv Ifgtvuv,
otrTis T aX*}^j iffrn, eg TI /u.*i (piXos Eur. Hipp. 924. 'Qfoioit p-tv Xa-
yif iviiffi Kv9V, XXj yiy^a.<jf7a.t ii. 6. 4. 'Ogcuv, v a't o i s ler/u.i* ill. I. 15.
Ovx oioet, our' atiro vroiov av T%OUS OVTI ovrot av TI; (^ivyuv a.fotyiu'yoi, otl<r'
tif vro7ov cii f KOTOS afob(>ain, ei!0' a* as v tls \%Vov ^ea^lov attroffTetiti ii.
5. 7. To rvs *%*)! y.^ u<f>a,vts, ol yrgoSr,<riTi Eur. Ale. 785. ~2uviovXivtTO
rt IT us v TVH ftu%n* -jroiotTo i. 7. 2. 0< $' fyuruv KVTOV TO ffT/>tt,Ttv(*.u.)
ifoa-ov Tt i*n Kcti i-ri riti fvviiXt'yf&ivov IV. 4. 17.
ttt v r ii. 8. 2.
>30. REMARKS. 1. The indefinites thus employed
and accented are termed in Etymology, from the most promi-
nent of their offices, INTERROGATIVES ( 152. 2, 317). As
complementary words, they were employed in indirect ques-
tion ; and hence appears to have arisen their use as direct
interrogatices, through an ellipsis. Thus, from the indirect
question, l^liri, liva. yvwfirjv f'%fi$ TTfyl T??C noyflvtc, say, what
opinion you have respecting the march (ii. 2. 10), by the omis-
sion of fins, comes the direct question, Tlva yi'M^i]v e%fic nfgl
T/]C iiuytlu^ ; What opinion have you respecting the march ?
So, from y/g|Ts ovv TT^OC |U, rl iv -o) f'^fff, tell me, therefore,
what you have in mind (iii. 3. 2), comes, Tl iv ro> ^T / What
have you in mind 1
NOTES, a.. In other languages, as the Lat., with those derived from it,
and the Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed ;
and hence, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the in-
terrogatives. Thus, who, which, when, &c., are both relative and interrogative.
. In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter forms
above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both ; thus, O"^*/, -rang, n
tt<ru.s\ oix p i'cya.<ra.t\ O" my father, what have you said! hnw you treat
me! Soph. Tr. 1203. O7* ?gy* oixovirto-0', oia. ' il<r'o^ia-6\ orov $'
Id. CEd. T. 1223.
537. 2. A COMPLEMENTARY PRONOUN Or ADVERB, used
as an echo to an interrogative, has, for distinction's sake, its
full form ; thus,
AAM. T7f y{ Ti AIK. [Sc. 'E^wraj] *0ent ; UoX/r
346 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK III.
Lam. For who are you ? Die. [Do you ask] IVuo f A good citizen, Ar. Ach.
594. XAP. OSros, ri *o7 { } AION. "O <r, * ; Id. Ran. 198. ET0.
Ti y^a.fyw <rt yiy^ctfTcti ; SflKP. "Hr/a5 Ov yivvi, ipoiys Soxw
PL Euthyphr. 2 b. KA. n*Jf v TKUTK y 'irt Zwy%uga7/*.iv -, *A0. "Osrw; i
Id. Leg. 662 a.
3. A complementary clause often expresses merely a con-
dition or a circumstance ; and the complementary construction
is sometimes used where the relative might have been. Thus,
AeT, r<y irr/, fiftoe ft, whoever she may be t Soph. El. 1123. Tav av^
KTajySa; Tawrev, JW/f IS-T/, yjf Id. (Ed. T. 236. Aat/Ast/o^sv Ssa??, a r< -raf'
tictv oi 9-ia/ Eur. Or. 418. Ki Ix&vovs xgivut trvvi^yovt tivxi, o n Twy%eivai
f>eu\'off.ivos x.ot.ri^ya.'^iffScn \, 9. 20 (cf. Stmjyoj . . tivcti TOUTOU, orov Ib. 21).
"HJ/ff-T" av axouirxifAi TO ovopK, rif oSrus Iffri SHVOS Xty;v [= ovo/tot rovTov, or-
ris ] , most gladly should I hear the name, who there is of such power in speaking
[= the name of him who is], ii. 5. 15. T A^X WTJJO< av /*<wv avSosj apii.
ttns 2><rtv iii. 1. 21.
538. 4. CONDENSATION. The antecedent and com-
plementary clauses are sometimes brought into one by the el'
lipsis of a substantive verb (cf. 528). The verb is omitted
either (.) in the antecedent, or (/?.) in the complementary
clause.
a. In the A3TTECEDENT CLAUSE. This occurs with adjectives of admiration,
which unite with the complementary word (commonly oa-os or <J;) to form a
complex adjective or adverb (cf. 528. 2, 529) ; thus, 0y^<rrv o<rj
[= QavftotfTov la-Tiv, oVjv] srs^J 9^ttf,'uu tx,u, it is wonderful how much re-
gard he has for you, PI. Ale. 151 a. MT ftgurot ^a.ufAO.ffrou ofav Id. Rep.
350 d. Qetvf*.K<r<roi> rivet %/ovov o<roi Id. Epin.982 C. Qau/u,eto-ru; us [=0w-
fjnttrroi ia-r/v, us] tTiirfav Id. Phaedo, 92 a. a,v/u,ff<rus f*oi ttvig us fetoot
$OXY Ib. 95 a. 'A^^^avav Vav ^javav, aw inconceivably long time, Ib. 80 C.
*Ai/3Xi^i TI ^t/ Ter? o^>6oi\f/./>ts oi/u.y%6tyo* n oiov Id. Charm. 155 C. 'TT*t-
ft/iJJ; i,- #/*/ Id. Conv. 173 C. r H <rif} awrat- o^Xaf v*i$vris ofot Ar. Plut.
750. *A<p0ovai o<r of Hdt. iv. 194.
ft. In the COMPLEMENTARY CLAUSE. To this ellipsis may he referred the
employment of a complementary word (commonly with ovv or Sj ), as a mere in-
definite; thus, M>}5' aW/vaawv pio-Hov [= purSo* rivet, offns ovv ">?] -r^offrxiTri-
fats-, not demanding any pay whatever [it might be!, vii. 6. 27. "H XX* on-
tvv or any thing else whatever, Cyr. i. 6.22. O^S' OTIOVV <n^i ravrov ifiju.vr.T^,
he tf.ade not the least mention of this, Ib. 1 2. 'Q-rutrovv, in any win/ tr/uiti rt- /,
Ib. ii. 1.27. "Orv S-/i craajjyyt/'/i^avTaf, so/ne owe whosoever it mi^ht have been]
having suggested it, iv. 7.25. "Ec-r/ -yaff onouv ir^etyfAa. 'OT<U 2 i-rviroui
\%tvTt eiftiivov otyvoiiv <n yiyvwffxuv ; PI. Ale. 143 C. Mrj'n ^ittxoviotv f&*i&' ?
r/a xixrfljutyflf PI. Leg. 919 d. E7 ns etbtxo'm oforlotus Cyr. iii. 2. 23.
NOTE. For an additional remark upon complementary words, see 539. 2.
G. INTERROGATIVE.
5JJ9. The interrogatives are, in Greek, simply the in-
definites with a change of accent. For their origin, their com*
plementarv iise* and their use in exclamation, see 535, 536
CH. 4.] INTERROGATIVE. - "AMos. 347
For the use of the article with interrogatives, see 480. For examples
of condensed interrogative sentences, see 528. 1.
REMARKS. 1 . The neuter rl unites with several particles to form elliptical
expressions ; which, with various specific offices, serve in general to promote
the vigor and vivacity of the discourse ; as, T/ ya.^ [sc. i<rri, or xiy<Ti] \
it%avTUS ec'ifieuftiviav tif&uv, \yu nvt ifAvrotiuv tlfti ; ' What then?' V. 7. 10. T<
Jv ; v. 8. 11. T; K ; Mem. ii. 1. 3. T< ftro, \ Vect. 4. 28.
2. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than the English, in the
construction and position of both INTERROGATIVE and COMPLEMENTARY
WORDS ; and even (6) allows the use of more than one in the same clause.
Thus, (a) T/ . . fiuv xoiovvra., ra-vra. xetriyvvxas avrov ; [Having seen him
doing what] What have you seen him do, that you thus judge of him? Mem. i.
3. 10. "Gray TI ifoivuruffi, vo/u,n7; uu-rov; ffou QgavTifyiv ; Ib. 4. 14. 'Ey&i out
TOV ix. vraixs <je'o\iut ffTgetmyov vrgoa^oxw TOC.VTK vrgci^nv ; iii. 1. 14. E7 rif
igoira riftZs, ruv rl foifuv t'tiriv ol l^uyooi^oi ivriffTriftovis PI- Prot. 312 C. "Ivet rl
[sc. yivrtnxi} retvree. Xtys/? ; [That what may be] With what intent, or Why,
do you say this? Id. Apol. 26 d. I1TA. 'ilj rl ft rftt ; 'OP. "fit m ii.
Tivffca pi ffutrai Eur. Or. 796. "On ft rl yi [sc. <rr/v] ; [Because there is
what?] Why so? PI. Charm. 161 c. ETr sXat/vo^evwv, xui W^^EVWV, xett
ri KXXOV ov%) T<z0'%ov<ruv, x'a.ffa, ft oixouj&ivri [Aiffrvi yiyovt <7T(>o&oTuv, ' what evil
not suffering?' i.e. 'suffering every evil,' Dem. 241. 28. Cf. 533.
(6) Tif rivos et'irtos Ifri, yivn<rtra.i <pctvi/ov, it will become evident who is
guilty [and] of what, Dem. 249. 8. T/v? eSv, t<p*i, vvo rivuv iv^ai^tt At
ivoLi;, ri vr7detf vvro yoviav ; Mem. ii. 2. 3. ILortgo; ga
; Eur. Phcen. 1288. Tit ctv foe, vrego; xaxuv yivoirt ; Id.
Ale. 213. AiiWsrs, . . ola, #{os o't'uv iv^^uv <ratr%6> Soph. Ant. 940.
i^, o-ret -r^os * art gat T&u Id. 1342.
H. "AAA02.
^54:0. The pronoun Hos is not only used retrospect-
ively, but also prospectively and distributively ; that is, it may
denote, not only a different person or thing from one which
has been mentioned, but also, from one which is to be men-
tioned ; or it may, in general, denote a difference among the
several individuals or parties which compose the whole num-
ber spoken of.
When aXXflj is prospective, and is followed by another A.Xa,- or an equiva-
lent pronoun used retrospectively, it is commonly translated by one. When it
is distributive, it is combined with another eLxXos , or with one of its derivatives,
and is commonly translated by two pronouns, as one . . another, this . . that,
&e., the sentence being resolved into two. Examples are subjoined of XXf
and its derivatives, as used,
a.) RETROSPECTIVELY. "Qfov ^>\ ixavo* tgyov ivi t^i/n xa'sx, aXX* o^rrax,
XX a & l%6vv 'i^iiv, aXXw fl5j*r, aXXai etorovs iroitiiv, ' for one man to boil
meat, for mother to roast it, &c.,' Cyr. viii. 2. 6. Ms/vayrs? Ji TWTJ T
vfti^etv, ry XX) lrjt)9yTa, ' on the next,' iii. 4. 1. See 457. i.
1 . /3.) PROSPECTTVELY. Ta TI XX tr/'^j<rj, */ /u.viot>f
Jj/*oyj, Ao^A honored me in every other respect, and gave me ten thousand da-
rics, i. 3. 3 ( 432, 488. 5). OwSsv XX* <rj?;y<rf Jr)<w<ravTSf, having dan*
nothing else than ravage, H. Gr. vii. 4. 17.
348 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK III
NOTES, (a.) The neuter aXXa is often used with ri, <ri, ovb'tv, and pv^'m.
with the ellipsis of a verb, commonly TOI&, irodirffia, vreiff%u, ilpi, or yiyva/u.en
thus, T/ XXo Jr< L SC - sTa/Wv] % iviSoiiXivffav -, What elst have they dene but
plot against usf Th. iii. 39. "AxXa n civ % . . otyuvi^ol^Ja, ; ii. 5. 10. 'Ex<ra*
ou$l XXaJ rovs Ki-rruxorets n^iXa.vvuv 1610.70, 'did nothing but,' Cyr. i. 4. 24.
E/ . . ftn&v XXa pirwyxois Ib. 6. 39. (b.) Hence arises the use of XXd
TI %, or, the n omitted, aXXa ri (also written XXar/), as an interrogative
phrase; thus, "AxXa n n vi(i rXj/Wa/ vow , Do you [do any thing else than
regard] not regard it of the highest consequence? PI. Apol. 24 c. "AxXa <r n
w? xwXus< ; Does any thing whatever forbid? iv. 7. 5. "AXXa rt out o't yt
QAoxifiits (QiXovffi TO xi$t ; Z?o not then the covetous love gain ? PL Hipparch.
226 e.
y.) PROSPECTIVELY and RETROSPECTIVELY. "AxXoj xx
i7x*, one drew up another, v. 2. 1 5. "AXXa? aXXay . . tfyetus, they were dash-
ing, one against another, Soph. El. 728 (cf. 145). TaV aXXaf, aXXs^' otrt-
(os, now one, and then the other, Ib. 739. "AxXa-ri xett aXXart, [at one time
and at another] now and then, ii. 4. 26. So, when two are spoken of, '0 SIT*.
(as rtt trt^av iretiit, the one strikes the other, vi. 1. 5.
$.) DlSTRIBUTIVELY. OwTai (tiv, u KXsaj^i, aXXa; aXXa \iysi, these men,
Clearchus, say, one one thing, and another another, ii. 1. 15 ( 451, 497. 1).
CM Si waXt,u/a/ . . aXXa; XXj ir^ftro IV. 8. 19. Oy ^ 'in Mtfot, XX*
XXa/ XXo^i, no longer in a body, but some in this direction, and others in that t
\. 10. 13. E7xy2i XXa< XX; i. 6. 11. "AXXaTt XXn ei*o*ivuv U.
Gr. L 5. 20.
CHAPTER V.
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
I. AGREEMENT OF THE VERB.
543. RULE XXIX. A VERB agrees \ th
its subject in number and person ; as,
'Eyi X'^<y**', I shall t<t1iK, i. 7. 9. Tu o^St ii. 1. 12. 'llrtini ^*ji/~'
L 1. 1. 'Tft-tTf Vo\in i. 4. 15. A/I/^ITJ T&; <pX*yyi i. 8. 17.
NOTE. AOKKKMKNT, whother in the appositfve, the adjective, the jtronaun,
or the verft, has the same general foundation, and, to a great extent, the same
varieties and exceptions. The four rules of agreement may be thus presented
in a tabular form :
An APPOSITIVE } ~\
An ADJECTIVE ( agrees with ( GENDER, NUMHER, and CASE.
A PRONOUN f its subject in f^ GENDER, NTMJJKK, and PERSON.
A VERB 3 3 NL.HMKR, and PKRSON
CH. 5 ] AGREEMENT. ELLIPSIS. 319
54-4. REMARKS. 1. In COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION, both
syllepsis and zeugma are common ( 329. N.) ; thus,
r,f*.H; Sivixf xeu Ilaff/wy i. 4. 8. K/9t aTflTi^ura/ tj xi*
i f> ^i^iee. lia<nXyj 5f x) at irvv U.UTM ^iiaxiav iifffifru \. 10. 1
ot x,cti ai ffvv KUTM Toi TI XX irXX '^la.^ra.l^auat Ib. 2. Ky*f <rt
a. wa^JjX^i, xJ i<yivo*ro i. 7. 16. 'Eyrw xai <r<p ftetgsia ffi>ft$og
Eur. Ale. 404. 2y ' pia*etgiet fAnxugios &' o ffo; Tons fixsrot
Ear. Or. 86. A*i?f tv n ) 2/^^/a; PI. Phsedo, 77 d. Cf. 446, 497
NOTES. . When the subject is divided or distributed, the verb sometimes
agrees with the whole, and sometimes with one of the parts ; thus, "0r t$i/-
/VTO Vxairroy, where they each could, iv. 2. 12. 'Avs-rai^yra St, oVw jT^y^a.
ri i'xacfTToj Hi. 1. 3. IlavTif ^t ajro/ xara Vvj, iv -rXa/ir/w <rX^f< cLvS^u-jruv
TO iStos i*9tv&>ro i. 8. 9. "AXXaj w^o,- aXXon ^cfoXXav H.Gr. H. 3. 23.
. Zxx os <2xx* Xlyj/ ii. 1. 15. See 360, 497. 1, 542. J.
/5. In syllepsis, the poets sometimes adopt the following arrangement (termed
by grammarians S^JJ^a 'AXxftuvixov*) ; Ilt/^Xfyj^wv T piovffiv KuxBro; TI
*. 513. E/ 5s *'"A & X uftpK X ns <I>ff T. 138.
545. 2. ELLIPSIS. When the subject is sufficiently
indicated by the form of the verb or the context, and no stress
is laid upon it, it is commonly omitted. This remark applies,
a.) To the first and second personal pronouns, and likewise
to the third, when its reference is sufficiently determined by
the connection ; thus, jBbtfi <5* rJatfeYfi daqnoq . .,
and wj/ie/i Darius ivas sick, he wished, i. 1. 1. See 502.
NOTE. The personal pronouns are implied in the very affixes of the verb.
See 171, 172.
54 O. b. ) To the third personal pronoun, when refer-
ring to a subject which is indefinite, or general, or implied in
the verb itself ; thus,
'Er; trvvsffxoruft, when it grew dark, Cyr. iv. 5. 5. "fto-tun, there was an
earthquake, Th. iv. 52. Ketrivi-^/t %tovi TJV Qgxxnv Xv. */ vavs Toretftav;
\-vrSf. Ar. Ach. 138. 'O-v/'S w, it ioas late, ii. 2. 16. r H a.p.^1 yo -rX*?-
^wo-asy i. 8. 1. 'H? sa/xv, as it seems, vi. 1. 30. OS 2t ^;u, [and it has
itself thus] and thus the matter stands, v. 6. 12. *Ey TOUTM "<r%iro vi. 3. 9.
KaX&Jj {Vr/ vii. 3. 43. 'E^Xom ^ Mem. i. 2. 32. 'Hj 5s yr<i ol iriu-
%&>(}{ but when [it did not succeed to him] he met with no success, Th. i. I 09.
Kara. $n%ut>ii ettiToTs iv. 8. 20. Ma^;jj 5sT, there is need of a battle, or there
must be fiyhtino, ii. 3. 5 (see 357, 430. R.). 'Epot /*tXr>< irj} T^<p?j
etiiT&v, [there shall be to me a care] / will take care of their support, Cvr. iv.
5. 17 (see 376. .). T7j ft\v vruGofAivois KV-TOU iruvitpigt, <ro7; St f&tt <Tii09fA':*ns
fttrlpuXt Mem. i. 1.4. Afyfly^y, art i<rt rovro igxavrui, ' they say,' Cyr. i.
2. 6. Ka< oy^y pivroi ou$l rovrov fu.fa'iv iQairav (cf. TJfavfiimi TIS iXjysra)
i. 8. 20. "Ovrsg w*r%9<tfn iv >ro7s ,t*yaXo/f ayutrt Th. vii. 69. Oun ci^tt y-
ra.'SixtTv $i7, . . ortouv r<r^>), it is not riyht then to return an injury, whatever
one may suffer, PL Crito, 49 c. 'H TOV o<W< ill'ivxt [etpoiMa.}, a. oix. oTbtv,
the folly of one's supposing that he knows what he does not know, PL Apol. 29 b.
"Bflrii tVX!nyi L sc. o <raXir/y*Tjf J , when ^he blew the trumpet] the trumpeter
30
350 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK III
blew, or at the sound of the trumpet, i. 2. 17. 'Etrvftvvt TO~S "Ex\n<ri rr, crti}.
ftyyt ill. 4. 4 (cf. 'Ev rovruf rriftetivti o aa.^<riyTit iv. 3. 32). 'Ex^v^s roTf
"EXX*}^ [sc. o x*v%], proclamation was made to the Greeks, iii. 4. 36. TOT vo-
ttav lp.lt uvrov dvayvutrtrai Dem. 465. 14. Oivo%oivit [_SC. o ejvo%6as] <$ 142.
NOTES. . When the pronoun is wholly indefinite in its reference, or, in
other words, when the verb simply expresses an action or state without predi-
cating it of any person or thing, the verb is termed impersonal (in, not, persona,
person). A verb thus employed is a compendious form of expression for the
kindred noun with a substantive (or other appropriate') verb ; thus, It rains
= There is rain, or Rain falls. An impersonal verb, from its very nalure ia
in the 3d per s. sing.; and an adjective joined with it is in the neut. sing., or .n
the neut. plur.for the sing. ( 451).
&. A verb is often introduced as impersonal, of which the subject is after-
wards expressed in an Inf. or distinct clause; as, 'Ecre< ' tioxti etiir*> rfttj <ro-
givtfUai, and when now it seemed best to him to march, i. 2. 1. 07s xa.0j>cii tit
K.<rreuXov <ri$iov dfyo'iT^iffdou \. 9. 7. AJjXav riv, OTI tyyus *ov ficuriXius riv U.
3. 6. Ov r,v Aafi/V, [it was not, to take them, i. e. there was no such thing
as taking them] it was not possible to take them, i. 5. 2. "Em XttpZoiviiv Ib. 3.
"E^ttrnv IfMv Turret Xai7v, it is permitted you to take pledges, ii. 3. 26. "E|.
cnv o/>av t you can see, iii. 4. 39. 'Eymro . . <rogivt<r0eti i. 9. 13. See 523.
y. Personal and impersonal constructions are so blended and interchanged,
that it is often difficult to determine, whether a verb is to be regarded in a par-
ticular instance as personal or impersonal, and whether a neuter pronoun or
adjective connected with it is to be regarded as Nom. or Ace. ; as, T< $i7 avror
ulritv ; [What needs him, or, What does it need him, 432] What need i
there that he should ask ? ii. 1 . 10. For the change of impersonal to personal
constructions by attraction, see 551.
S. For the construction of verbs with the GEN. PARTITIVE, see 361. /3,
364.
547. 3. The SUBSTANTIVE VERB is very often omitted^
especially if it is merely a copula. Its omission is particularly
frequent with verbals in -i'o?, in general remarks and relative
clauses, and with such words as ';'x?/, zy*wr<t axot,-,
d)ott, <5>J>lo, ITOI/UO?,
Thus,
Teura ev fainriat [sc. Ifri], this must not be done, i. 3. 15. *E ru air^of
tftv al <rnyee.i, in the cave, whence the springs, i. 2. 8. Iloretftov, ou TO iv^ot
f -ration (cf. OtT *Tv TO tv/>os) i. 4. 1. A.Vff^^fTovs iTv< dvciyxn araxrat/; er j
(cf. 'Attiyxn ya.^ t<rn) iii. 4. 19. *Hf TO tlxes iii. 1.21. Ti^et Xiyir i. 3.
12. AJiAo, y*e ii. 4. 19. Cf. 528, 538.
4. SYNESIS affects the number of the verb in
two ways :
I.) A plural verb may be joined with a singular Norn., if
more than one are referred to ; as,
T rX?^>f i$n<pi<rarra, the majority voted, Th. i. 125. 'O XXa; trr^etrot
JtiriSetttov Id. IV. 32. ^.nftoirSivns p,tru ruv %v<rra.rnyuv 'A*ovi/v trTivbn-
vat Id. iii. 109. To 5 rut ri<rSvr'tu* fipvv . . tiyovpifa PI. Leg. 657 d
See 453, 497, 544. a.
CH. 5. J SYNESIS. - ATTRACTION. 351
54LO. II.) A singular verb may be joined with a plu-
ral Nom. regarded as but a single object of thought. This
occurs chiefly in two cases: (a) When the nominative is
neuter, according to the following
SPECIAL RULE. The NEUTER PLURAL has its
VERB in the singular.
That the want of agreement has in this case become the rule, seems to have
arisen from the fact, that the neuter plural commonly denotes a mass of lifeless
things, and likewise to be connected with the usage in 336, 451. Excep-
tions are, however, frequent ; chiefly, when things that have life are denoted,
or when the idea of plurality is prominent, or in the non-Attic poets for the
sake of the metre. Thus, T ivtrfdita. ETJA/TS, provisions failed, iv. 7. 1.
Hko7et 3' Ifiiv ifnytfrn v. 6. 20. TWT idoxti eatpi&ifta MVU.I, these things [or
this'] seemed to be useful, i. 6. 2 (cf. 451). 'Etravfa Kv^u /3<7/Xna ^v i.
2. 7 (cf. Ib. 8). 'Evravfa <rv res, St/svvjV/oj /W/Xua Ib. 23 ( 336). Ta
r'tXrt ruv AuxttixifAoviuv ofAO<ra.vrit nlrov i%iwtff4>ae.v, ' the rulers,' Th. iv. 88
(cf. 453. y). *Tir0?vy< viftotvro ii. 2. 15 (cf. iv. 5. 25). Ta vvcofyytu
iXxuvsro iv. 7. 24 (cf. i. 5. 5). v H-y $i <rxvrx $uo <rti%n i. 4. 4. <t>av
riffa.ii xxi 'Iffuv xu,} a.t6^u<jf<av *%vn fo\\a, i. 7. 17. Ta 5' ugftra. icptgovTo i.
8. 20. "Aa-T^ee iv rri ivxri avsip?vy, a fifA~v rot; agxs r5s vux-ros tftifetvi^tt
Mem. iv. 3. 4. "Egya ysvavrc A. 310. For such examples as "CWt Saarai
C- 131,*see 337.
NOTE. In the following example, apparently upon the same principle, a
eeries of feminine plurals denoting natural phenomena is followed after an in-
terval by a substantiye verb in the singular ; K/ ya.g wa^va/ xui %a.Xet%ai
XXI tOVfiaXl IX fXlOVi^lXg XXI XXOffAlXS fio] XXjX TCtlV TOIOVTUV y'iyiiTO.1 tail)-
r,xZ* PI. Conv. 188 b. Cf. 6.
(b) When the verb precedes, and is hence introduced as
though its subject were, as yet, undetermined (cf. 546. /?j.
This construction is almost confined in prose to sazt and ty
(compare, in French, the use of il est, and il y a). Thus,
"Eff-n ya.% tf^oiyt xxi Qtupo} xxl h^, for [there is to me] I have both altars
and sacred rites, PI. Euthyd. 302 c. r Hv V afttpix-Xtxrai x\ifut*ts Soph. Tr.
520. "Ea-n revru %fr<ra ru $ia PI Gorg. 500 d. Tiyvurai . . u^tt't Tt xa,}
yeiftoi Id. Rep. 363 a. See $ 523.
RKMARK. A few other examples of the Nom. pi. masc. or fern, with a
verb in the sing, occur in the poets ; as, Ko^a/ xa.<rivh*o6i* Horn. Cer. 280.
*Yp.>ot . . TiXXtrxt Pind. Ol. 11. 4. This construction was termed by the
old grammarians 2^55,ca n/J^/xo or
^ 55O. 5. ATTRACTION. The verb is sometimes attract-
ed by a word in apposition with the subject ; usually an attri-
bute coming betiueen the subject and the verb ; as,
To X,ia(>'iov rouro, oftg fgorigot *E! 'OS IxasXayvra, this place, which
vas before called The Nine Ways, Th. iv. 102. *E<rrt>i ft 1uo *.o<p*> fi
Vboftivn v-fynXiu Id. iii. 112. "Ara $i TO ftiffav <rui rn%uv rifftti
ft7 f i. 4. 4.
352 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK HI
^ool. 6. A verb, of which the proper subject is an
Inf. or distinct clause (or which is impersonal with an Inf. or
clause dependent), often takes for a Nom. the subject of tha
Inf. or clause. In this case, the Inf. sometimes becomes a
Part. Thus,
A.iytri 'AvoXXuv lx$s~oi ~M.a/>ffuav, Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas )
A.iyira.i, 'AfoXXuvtx, sx.'S-Jaai M<rvay, it is said, that Apollo flayed Mar-
8yas, i. 2. 8 (cf. Aiytrcu $1 xi rou; aXXot/j Tlieffaj . . 'bta.x.ivbvvivtiv i. 8. 7).
'EXtyavTo <rmj, us yiyvuirxovtri Vect. i. 1. '0 'Atrtrugios sis TJJV %&>!>(* eturau
\p.ctXi7v a.yyi\\ira.i Cyr. V. 3. 30. Tlj ayyi^^oiro o ftlv Ylu'ffetv'bgos nrtXtv-
rr,%.&s, that [Pisander was announced as having died] it was announced, that
Pisander was dead, H. Gr. iv. 3. 13. 'Ott,oXoyt7<rce,i wgos Tavr^v x^xrurros
cri ytvifftfett i. 9. 20 (cf. 'OfAo^aytTreti . ., rait; ^uvrots ix TUV TiSvuuriav ytyo-
*iya.i PI. Ph<edo, 72 a). 'O fttv ouv vrgiffvur&gos ra^aiv iTvy^Kvi [=Tey irpiff-
Gunoov va.f>tivoe,i iTuy%etvi], the elder, therefore, happened to be present, i. e. it
hii/>/>ened, ttiut the elder was present, i. 1.2. "Or; rovn^oTa.Tel yi tl<rtv, ov^i ffi
Xa.vftt.vtuo'iv \j= X^av/J CEc. i. 19. 'Agxitr&i B-vrurxatiff' \yu \_ ^-'A.exia'ii if&\
Sv!<7X/v], it will be enough that I should die, Soph. Ant. 547. "Axis [sc. ti/ti]
toirtuff iyu Id. (Ed. T. 1061. Toffovrav ugxu troi traQniifftiit /u.ovov, 'it is enough
that I communicate,' ^Esch. Pr. 621. Ow f^o<r^xop.iv xoXa/v n>7ffli, it doe*
not belong to these to punish us, Eur. Or. 771. Kfs/W*>v yaj "Ada, xiv6av>
for [he were better lying] it were better he were lying in the grave, Soph. Aj,
635. AA.s <rt v ?r<r<, on ufigt<pai7ro, it was manifest to all, that,lie wot
exceedingly alarmed, Cyr. i. 4. 2 (cf. "0<rt /ttev <r<po$ct Yivia.6ft<ritv, vroifi $5jAo
iyiviro H. Gr. vi. 4. 20). A^Ao; w a.viu^.tvos, it was evident that he was sad,
Or, he was evidently sad, i. 2. 11. Sr^ywv It Qetvigo; plv rtv oll'ivtt, OTM Jt
tpetiv QiXos ttvxi, rovrtu Iv^nXot ly'iyvtro i-riGovXsveav ii. 6. 3. 2t ovv rt/jt.7v $i-
KKIOS ti uvri%Koi%i<rdat, it is therefore just that you should requite us, Cyr. iv. 1.
20. Tout ffatfious . foXXov ^o> [= croA-Xaw $t7 ifts] (> a.<r & %ovf Xtytiv,
[much is wanting in order that I should call] / am far from calling the wise
frogs, PI. Thea;t 167 b. O7 TotrouTou ^iovtri ^p.ila'fa.i rriv Tgctemret TJV v/ut-
rifv Isocr. 300 a. In like manner, Aurou oXlyov l*fitra.vro; xetraXsv<r0riveti,
when he had [wanted little of] narrowly escaped being stoned to death, i. 5. 14.
See 546. y.
NOTE. Sometimes the two modes of construction are united ; as, 20) y&
i -ra.<iu yi ri0iO,inv<r0ui o 'A<rc\Xuv, xa,'t <rt Taivret ixtivw
JEr. vii. 2. 15. "HyyiXras/ . . H TI f*x%*) xot.vv lo-%i>a.
KU.\ iv airy feXXovf . . ritiveivtti PI. Charm. 1 53 b. "E5a^v ctlroi,
ytvoftivrif, ffxrivro; vrt<ri7 tls T^ raT^aIv otxtxv, xoti \x rourott X<
ra<rav iii. 1.11.
7. The verb ttf>n is often separated from its subject by some
of the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastically ; as, " EJ \iyits"
1<P t " u "Stftftiet," o Kio)?;, " You speak well, Simmitis," snid Ccbas, PI. I'lia-do,
77 C. 'O '\\fiotx\ris aixiuffas recur!*, " *I1 yvvctt" i'ip, " ovop.it. Si ffot TI fVr/y ;"
Mem. ii. 1.26. 'A-rex^ivtrai o Xi/j iraQes " BXir/'oy," f^u, " irgaj TO, o^n"
iv. 1. 20. See v. 1. 2; vi. 1. 31.
II. USE OF THE VOICES.
$ 553. For a general statement of the use of the voices,
see ) 165, 166. Irregularity and variety in their use arise
CH. 5.] USE OF VOICEb. 35?
chiefly from the following sources : (a) From the use of
the same verb as transitive and intransitive, or as causation
and immediate. See 555. (b) From the formation of v
new theme, with a strengthened meaning. See ^ 265, 319. 2
(c) From the variety and extent of the refexive uses of thr
verb, and their intimate connection, on the one hand, with tlv>
intransitive, and on the other, with the passive use. Sef
165, 1G6, 557-561. (d) From a transition of meanin*
in the verb, See 556, 561. 2. (e) From ellipsis. Se*
555.
554. As in most of the tenses the same form is botf
mid. and pass., it is but natural that the distinction should bf
sometimes neglected in the Fut. and A or. ( 166). This oc
curs chiefly,
.) In the use of the Fut. mid. for the Fut. pass., as a shorter and moi
euphonic form ; thus, 'E| s/u.ou ri^^trsTxi, he shall be honored by me, Soph. Ant
210. TSji^oj x.xd' -/iftuv o'lffirett T?$' v^'ioa. Eur. Or. 440. Ma<rr/ya/a-Ta
fT^Kuffircti, ^t%r,ffira.i, lx,x,u.uSr,a-irce.t ruif6oc.\fjt.ia PL Rep. 361 e.
/S.) In the use of the Aor. pass, for the Aor. mid. This occurs chiefly ii
deponents ( 166. 2), and in other verbs in which the proper passive is want
ing or rare. Thus, 'Il^do-fa TI etvrov, admired him, i. 1.9. A/asXt^svTi.
XX7Xa/?, having conversed with each other, ii. 5. 42. 2vvXXayvr/ i. 2. 1
AtrJnvai Ib. 14. "Hfffa Ib. 18. 'ESwvj^o-av iii. 1. 35. 'Evrip.sXrJti'nrt Ib
38. <ta?>j^vT; XX>;Xai;s ii. 5. 5.
NOTES. (1.) Whether verbs of the classes just mentioned employ th
mid. or the pass, form of the Aor. must be determined by observation
(2.) Sometimes, though rarely, the Fut. pass, occurs as mid., and the Aor
mid. as pass. ; thus, 'EfftfAiX*i0nffop.ivKt Mem. ii. 7. 8. Ka-rsV^iTa S'^T/ Ss/vij
Eur. Hipp. 27.
A. ACTIVE.
5>t5. I. In many verbs in which the active voice is
commonly or often transitive, it is likewise used intransitively
or reflexively ( 553). This use may be often explained b)>
the ellipsis of a noun or reflexive pronoun ( 427). Thus,
C O S /3a<r/A.tif ro5t/r>7 /u,tv oux vytv [sc. TO trTiirtuf*.a,~ , but the king did not
[lead on his army] advance in this direction, i. 10. 6. "Ayi $97, come now, ii.
2. 10. $>--0t 2f] roivvv Rep. Ath. 3. 5. Ba/X* [sc. ataurot} I; x-ioaxa,- !
[Throw yourself to the crows] Go, /eerf ^e crows! Go to the dr>;/x .' Ar. Pint.
782. 'HSflvjj 5y,- [sc. sawrayl, (/irinpi [himself i t//J <<> pleasure, Eur. Ph. 21.
'AvaxaXoTr', <w KKirlywrov *,.(*. Id. Or. 294. 'Evrsttfsv i|Xai/vs/ i. 2. 7 (cf.
427). ODrw 5s .-^^, "^ '/'MS it has itself] Me matter stanih. v. 6. 12.
ET^av $<tvus, they were in a sad condition, vi. 4. 23 (see - 363. 6). Fl^a-
'*^; J ' > [sc- Tflv wv], to ^/t'e attention, Mem. iv. 5. 6. 'T-ra Ji/x v D<riv [sc.
ivr] v. 7. 12. Yluvi TOU loyou Ar. Ran. 580 (cf. i. 6. 6, and see 560. 1).
NOTES, (a) "E^w used reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent
to </*/ with an adjective; thus, EUVOIX&JS i^om TLvveixai <Wv i. 1. 5.
3t>4 SYNTAX. USE OF VOICES. [BOOK III.
'AMpus ?#aTij = *A6upai cms iii. 1. 3. The poets even join ?& with an
adjective ; as, "E^' %tru%o;, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. Med. 550. (6) For the
-ntransitive use of the second tenses, see 257. /3.
5*>O. II. The active voice, through a transition of
meaning, sometimes supplies the place of the passive ; as,
EJ H.X.OVU, to hear agreeably, and hence, from the bewitching sweetness of
praise, to be commended or spoken well of ; as, Wiya, $1 tu ot.3t.ovuv UKO \\.x.t<r.
%i/,'i&iv a.vfo&i'X'wv Vli. 7. 23. "Iva ^^ O.VTO} a, & o u u ff i SJiJlivf, Aa lAijF
themselves may not be spoken ill of, Rep. Ath. 2. 18. Kx vs<v t avaXx/j, to 6*
called a coward, ^Esch. Pr. 868. (Cf., in Lat., bene audire, male audire.)
'A*i0avfv v-ro N/xav^aw, he [diedj was killed by Nicander, \. 1. 15 (sea
295, rtlvu). 'ESvvxro . . i\iiv. . . Ourus lu-Xw. He was ablt to tulit
it. . . It was thus taken, iii. 4. 12 (see 301. 1). Oi i * *i -a vuxcrtt T-
\>tn v*o roZ Iriftov, those of the Rhodians who had [fallen out of the city] been
banished by the people, H. Gr. iv. 8. 20. "On ipsuyott* o'l'xofav v-ro rov l-n-
p.*w, thut they were [fleeing] banished from home by tlie people, H. Gr. i. I. 27.
AtriSiiet; Qivyovra. i/<ro MsX/row, accused of impiety by Melitus, PI. Apol. 35 d
( 374). KT<rr? 1$ vftZv, appointed by you, Dem. 49. 11. Cf. 561. 2.
For the Inf. act. instead of pass., see 621. 0.
B. MIDDLE.
557'. The reflexive sense of the middle voice is far
from being uniform either in kind or force. It not only varies
in different verbs, but often in the same verb when used in
different connections. It is,
a.) DIRECT ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Ace.
of the reflexive pronoun ; as, Aavroti [= Aavit laurov"], he is washing himself,
or bathing, Cyr. i. 3. 11. Ilavris pi* jX/^ovr, they all anointed than selves,
H. Gr. iv. 5. 4. '^,rl^ot.w<rSa.^ TvTf Ag. 2. 15. "Or V \yu \yx.a.\v^>u-
ftou Cyr. viii. 7. 26. 'E^r/^e^^sv^v, bearing herself on, i. e. rushiny on, i. 9.
6. Tv J/'*wv ofrixofttvas, refraining [holding himself] from injustice, Mem.
iv. 8. 4. 'O $' aXXaf ffrf>a.To; . . i|nworX/|T TAXfl/V ftiv x,cti xXo/V ^irufff
. . u-rXt^o* $ K.U.} 'iTfauf r^a/u.iTuTt^iets Cyr vi. 4. 1. <J>wyJJ aXX0; <zXXj
Ir^d-jriro iv. 8. 19 (cf. E/j Qvyvv tr^i-^t ravf V^a-xur^tXiovs i. 8. 24).
b.) INDIKECT; so that the middle is equivalent to tho
active with the Dat. or Gen. of the reflexive pronoun ; as,
fytuf pit* \\t<r6a,t [= iXi~y iawT*";] aXXswf, rat. $' tvir-nbuet
[= y0i/v taj/ToTj], to [take for themselves] choose other generals, -and
to supply themselves with necessaries, i. 3. 14. IlaTSa . . rl <jfai9Vfj.a,t, I m<tkt
you a son to mi/self, or / make you my son, Cyr. iv. 6. 2. 'A-ro ytu^y'tat TOI
frit* w<Hi/Wai (Ec. 6. 11. "Or* rtfi vXt'ur'rov -roietro, that he [made it to him-
self] esteemed it of flu- utmost ri>nsr(/nfnrp, i. 9. 7. Y^a.'ra.f'r^f^a.fAivo; p\v -reivTen
5vgovf, ' having subjected to himself,' Cyr. i. 5. 2. KtJ^sv 3t fAira.'r'ifj.Ttra.i,
but he sends for Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1.2. TatJray QvXa.T-TKrfu.t,
to iratch him for your oivn sufifi/, to lie <i your (/until mjainst him, \. 6. 9. <-
fVTai Ji o"x.ofiv . . xeLfiavrt, u{ a,vt> rev t JTTa.ft,6U eiovfftt.fffat.1 \AT. l. 2. 8. *-
ra.fjt.ivov TOV dxiveix.r,v, drawing hi* srymltnr. i. 8. 29. Qifftcti ra. ovXet i. (5. 4
Kia Sipttof t-ri ra yova.ro., ' upon his own knoes,' vii. 3. 23. 'A-r^v<
express your opinion, \. 6. 9. Ila^a /*' uvofAiH^ire, he called me his
Soph. (Ed. T. 1021. 'A<r03/tai, to piw /> /w ' p r o^, hence
CH. 5.J MIDDLE. 353
to sell; as, Txvrx eivrotopivos, eSn 2ii#j eivtiuxi* wrt vptv *-i ytytopwu., hav-
ing sold these things, he has neither paid over the proc&ds to Seuthes nor to us,
vii. 6. 41. AJa/t*a<, to loose for ones self, to deliver, to ransom, to redeem ; as,
E7 rivet; IK. TUV vroXt/tiuv iXutreift,r,v Dem. 316. 3. Ti0n/u,i OT y^a^u vaftov, to
make a law for another, r'i0tp.xt or ygxtyoftxi voftov, to make a law for ones self;
as, Qtoi/s JtfAxi rev; voftovg rourous <rt>7; dv^u-roi; t~vxi, I think that the gods
have instituted tliese laws for men. Ot av^wcra/ xi/rovs 'Mivro, men hare insti-
tuted them for themselves, Mem. iv. 4. 19. No^av ovroi s^x-^xv, these men (the
Thirty) enacted a law, H. Gr. ii. 3. 52. *Hv v'opous xaXawj >y^x-^uvTxi, if they
(the citizens) should enact good laws, CEc. 9. 14. BauXsww, to give counsel to
another, $au\tvof*.xi, to give counsel to one's self, to deliberate, to resolve (^ 35).
T^a^ja;, to take vengeance for another, to avenge, ri/tugiopixi, to take vengeance
for one's self, to punish.
559* c.) RECIPROCAL ; so that the middle is equivalent to the ac-
tive with the reciprocal pronoun ; as, Ma^a^sva; xxi /3a-<Xi<j KU.} Kt/^a; xxl ol
up.(p' XUTOV;, 'fighting with each other,' i. 8. 27. 'A^ip/ uv fT^ov ^ix(f>e^o/u,tvot t
" quarrelling,' iv. 5. 17. A/*jXAa|v<rfl \<rovs "-rfovs], ' exchanged,' Cyr. viii.
3. 32. Hence the middle is extensively used in expressing actions which im-
ply MUTUAL RELATION ; as those of agreement and contention, of greeting and
companionship, of intercourse and traffic, of question and answer, &c. Thus,
~2>virl6if4.a.i, to agree, $ia>.vof<.cti, to become reconciled, <rviv$cf*,a.t, [to pour out li-
bations together] to make a treaty, a.yuvl^o^a.1, to contend, a^/XXaa^a/, to vie,
p,ei%af*eti, to fight, Ktr^ru^oftxi, to embrace, to salute, i-r 0/4x1, to attend upon, to
follow, "StxXi'yoftui, to converse, uviopxi, to buy, vruv0civefAxt, to inquire, u<roxg'iva-
fteti, to answer, &c.
d.) CAUSATIVE ; so that the middle denotes what a person procures to be
done for himself; as, uj>&x,x i-rotrnrxro, she had a corselet made, Cyr. vi. 1.51.
"A a a-a-r-raf . . IvtvoiYiro Ib. i. 4. 1 8. 'AwaXXwvaj av^}/t voiyo'xju.tvof V.
3. 5. *Eya y>xg ff& rxvrx l-rtrw^i} t'%i$x%x/u,vv,for I had you taught these things
onpurpose, Cyr. i. 6.2. T^XT^XV <ri l\i<rixw <x-xgir'i0*ro Th. i. 130. 'Exs-
Xtt/oi- tivoyoxQiirSxi -rxvrx;, they commanded all to [have their names registered]
give in their names, H. Gr. ii. 4. 8. Y^ofj.x'i nvx, to have the name of any ont
taken down as a criminal, hence to accuse ; as, 0; yx^Kf*.ivot 2<wxrjy Mem
i. 1. 1. HgiffStviv, to go as an ambassador, Tgt<rZiv9/u,xi, to send an ambassa-
dor ; as, "Of <rsg Ifgio-Giuiv ctvroa <x-xvroiri vii. 2. 23 ; Qj vro^iftioi i-rgiirSujovrf
Ag. 2.21. M/^a, to let upon hire, ftio-ttaopxt, [to procure to be let to one'r
self upon hire] to hire; as, IlXa7av ^/a-ta/a-a^svay vi. 4. 13.
5 GO. e.) SUBJECTIVE; so that the middle represents the action aa
more nearly concerning the subject, than the active (see 174). Thus, (1.) if
the active is a causative verb, the middle may form the corresponding immedi-
ate , (2.) if the active expresses an external or physical action, the middle may
express the analogous internal or mental action ; (3.) if the active represents
a person as having a particular office, condition, or character, the middle may
represent him as making it more his own by acting in accordance with it. Thus,
(1.) Ftvu, to make another taste, yt.vopxt, to taste for one's self (see 375,
430). Hxuu, to make to cease, -rxvopxi, to cease ; as, "K-rxviri ftlv rouruv -raX-
\ot>{ Mem. i. 2. 2 ; Txvrx li-x-av ivxjj<rxr i. 3. 12. <t>olu, to cause to fear,
to terrify, QoZiopxi, to fear ; as, Tov; l-rafiivou; vroXip'tov; <f>a^y,<rxt iv. 5. 17;
'E^ofatWa xvrov \. 9. 9. A-if^vvz), to put to xhwne, xly^'jvaftxi, to be ashamed.
*lfT*!fti, to make to stand, to station. 'ifTxpxi, to stand (^f 48). TLoiftxu, to put
to sleep, X6iu.tt.ofjt.xi, to sleep. 'Oajyw, to stretch out, agi-yof&xi, to reach after t
356 SYNTAX. - US* OF VOICES. [BOOK III
hence to desire. TLsMu, to persuade, -x-ti0op.txi, to believe, to obey.
"
. . .
, to observe, o-x.o-Ttofi.eti, to consider ; as, 01 &a%ciya'i \<rx.'ovovv, tl
i TO %woiov v. 2. 20. "AyaXXw, to adorn, dya,>.Xo/u,ai, to pride ones self.
, to tell, tpgoi&ftKi, to tell one's self, to reflect. (3.) Hokirtvu (from <TTO-
X/TJJ, citizen), to be a citizen, ToXirtvoftsei, to conduct one's self as a citizen, to
engage in politics, to manage state affairs; as, QuyaSo. l| 'Afaviuv, . . veXiTtu-
ivTet <ra.(? alrdts [i. e. ro7f 0&><v<r/] H. Gr. i. 5. 19; 01 fti* troXiTivoftivei It
u.} votovf r\6ttra.t Mem. ii. 1.14.
^ 5>G 1. REMARKS. 1. If the reflexive action is direct or prominent,
the reflexive pronoun is commonly employed ; more frequently with the active
voice (if in use), but often with the middle ; as, 'Exs79j aT<r<p!sv IKVT'OV, fie
slew himself, Dem. 127. 3. Oi p'tv <p*tri &ac,<riXsa. x<*.<.u<r*i rivet, WHTQa.l.a.t ulroi
K.J0M, ei 01 titvrov iVKrifxi'^u.ffdtit i. 8. 29. > E'T/ff'<paA.j0'TiQsy VTjy . . xocrg*
fxt!/a.x.iv \OLVTM Dem. 22. 13. 'Iv/yro; ovofAK x.xi %uvufe,iv x'tDi<jroiri<ra.<r6u.i V. 6.
17. iX/EXsyovra T \a.vro7f, they talked with themselves, v. 4. 34 (cf. 559).
O 2t/v<r/v T^oj txvrov i. 2. 26 (cf. 558). 2jmyvovTa X-
Ib. 27. See * 504.
2. The middle voice, b} T a transition of meaning, (a) often becomes in its
force the active of a new verb ; and (6) sometimes, like the active, supplies the
place of the passive ( 556). Thus, (a) Kovrru, to smite, Kovropui, to
smite one's self through grief, hence to bewail; as, K.ovria-0' "A^wvtv Ar. Lys.
396. See 558 560. (6) 'A^r^Xevro i/ft TI TUV vroXiftiuv xou ^toyaf^
'were destroyed by,' v. 3. 3. 'Axav<ro/u.iti KO.XO:, I shall be called a villain,
Soph. CEd. C. 988 (cf. 556). OwSt Tovruv ffTt^fovrtti, they shall not [want]
be deprived of these, i. 4. 8.
3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so indistinct, that it
may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the sense ; that is, the
n-tin- or the middle may be employed at pleasure; thus, A/rr ai-rav i. 1. 10.
'HiTovftti* /30-/Xt ii. 3. 19. IlflXt/ <p9/. . . M/x^av <p!*uivv Mem. iii. 14. 1
IIsAu'x yi fiifftio* . . tyigeiro CEc. i. 4. M/<r^ov TOUTOV <ptfi Ib. 6. lla^Xa'ja
f l^uft.ff.a'j^ouf wufiftfh . . p/Xa* Towffofuv TOV Ila^Xatyova V. 5. 22 (cf. Ib
12, 558). O/ ffTfaTiZrKt fiyo^ov TO. i-riTr^iia. i. 5. 10 (cf. i. 3. 14, 558)
E7wi OTI Suircti TI fiouXaiTo. Ka) urtiXduv \6viro vii. 2. 14. 'E-TfT vffetv fr
&et<ri\ia ii. 6. 29. 'E<r) Toy adiXQoy 'A^Tet^i^nv \<TT^U.TIV\T ii. 1. 1. Ib
some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, especially Epic.
4. It follows naturally from the distinction between the two voices, that ths
middle is more inclined to take its object in an indirect case than the active ,
thus, 0< 2t QuXetxif <r{rtX<ryrif IXo/Sfljaw* UVT'O* Cyr. i. 4. 8. 'O i7o{ au-
rtf \\ttiop7rt Ib. 9.
C. PASSIVE.
^ ^5O2. The passive voice has for its SUBJECT an object
of the active, commonly (.) a direct, but sometimes (,?.) an
indirect object. Any other word governed by the active re-
mains unchanged with the passive. The SUBJECT OF THE AC-
OH. 5 ] PASSIVE. H57
TIYK is expressed, with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposi-
tion (commonly -10, hut sometimes ?7o, ?$, TI^K, or 77o ( i.-), or,
less frequently, by the simple Gen. or Dat. (^ 381, 417), or,
yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, especially Kp.), by the Dat.
with VTIO. Thus,
a. Fltgupf i~T0 5' uuTYt vfo TOU Ndtrxx, and it was surrounded by the Mascaa
[= YL'.oi'ppti $' avTiiv a M<rxy, and the fiascos surrounded it], i. 5. 4. Oi>~
$ivet KO^'IVU UTO fXtt'ovuv iet<$t\ri<r(a.t, I judge that no one has been loved by more
{]= Koiyv -rXt'iovs vrttpiXnxiveii oi/^ivot, I judge that more have loved no one], i. 9.
28. E/ 9-XT<r}f rfffyeivro, if they should be excluded from the sea, H. Gr. viL
1. 8 ( 347). T*v I 1 iWi Xa>s m<rXW7 i. 10. 12 ( 357). 'H/ay . .
Ja^JJva; a/ retvr&s T; <raXe/j i. 1.8 (fy 404. S). May<r/xjv ^ev vcra Axfi-rgou
wiliWSiifj having been taught music by Lamprus PL Menex. 236 a ( 436).
*Eya> (TxWfly Tt ravra, vvo ffov Cyr. v. 5. 16. 2yX>j^;j y 'H^axXjj: ra;
/Saw? . . i/TTo NXs<wf, ybr ffercules having been robbed of his klne by Ndeus,
Isocr. 1 19 d. Ti Jjfra . . ou KO.I <ru rv-rrit <ras 1<ru,; TrXwyu,! ifto'i, why then are
not you beaten the same number of blows with me, Ar. Ran. 635 ('. 435). Ta/-
ovray 7/u.ijfAct Ttftvtreti TO <rtT[x.n/ji,ivi)v, olov TO TI/U,VOV Ttftvsi, the thing cut is cut
such a cut as the cutter cuts, PI. Gorg. 476 d. Ta i*.iya.\u. [sc. fjt,v<rTri^iot~\ pi*
fc.ur.erai, foiv TO, fffAix^ti, you have been initiated into the greater mysteries be-
fore the less, Ib. 497 C. "AXXa/ TI yvupai 0.$' lx.trTuv SXsyovTo Th. iii. 36.
'Ex $oc.fi\iws "e)^a/u,i\itx,i i. 1. 6. TLxooe, jro.vruv ofioXoytiTot.! i. 9. 1. 'O^aXa-
yiiTtu vrgo; oravrwv Ib. 20. 'ICtfo fi\iu>s TtTcfyft'svot, '/) V<JTO TOV ^iicrSa.i j <tXXi
Tivt ce.va.yx,y xaTi^of^ivoi ii. 6. 13. X/a; vfo TU vrctTpt Tt@petfAfii.ivos, 'brought
up [under] by his father,' PI. Rep. 558 d.
/3. H*Ltt.Ti<f>Davn6w v-r o.uTo7v, I was despised by them [= K<re<pav>j(ra<rjv ptv,
they despised WIK], PL Euthyd. 273 c $ 375). Ta x^ecnTv tiovZv. . . K^ra^T'
av v-ro TOV "E^ra? Id. Conv. 196 C ( r 350). 'A-ria-TovvTeti $' v$' a<reivTU9
n.tXovoyvrio-iuv, and they are distinsted by all the Pelopomiesians [= O/ Js Os-
XaiT*vy/!<r/9/ u-retvTt; affio-TOucnv etiiTo7(], Isocr. 92 a ( 406). O/ TUV 'A0yvet,iiv
'friTsroaftftivai TV* <puXxy, those of the Athenians who had been intrusted with
the guard [= /j YI QuXetxii i-rtTiT^u-TTo, to whom the guard had been intrusted"*,
Th. i. 126. O/ Kaj/v^/a/ TavTa. 1-rnrTct^.ftivot, the Corintldans having received
these directions, Id. v. 37.
5G3. REMARKS. 1. When the active has more than one object, it
is commonly determined which shall be the subject of the passive by one or
the other of the following preferences ; (a) The passive prefers, us its sub-
ject, a direct to an indirect object of the active. (6) The pasisire prefers, as
its subject, the name of a person to that of a thing. If these preferences con
flict, sometimes the one prevails, and sometimes the other. The latter prefer-
ence often leads to construction by synecdoche ( 438) ; thus, 'A-rorftv0ivTss
TO.; xiipXflff, cut off as to their heads [= 'A-roT/unhio-uv TUV x<pXwv, their
heads being cut off], ii. 6. 1 (cf. Kvoov a.yrcT'tju.v- : Tt y xiQctXri i. 10. 1). A/I-
Qfaoftivoi . . TOVS o$0a^u.oij; [= "E^avrs; TOV; opSa.Xfj.out "bti(()6a,(>[*.ivov$\ iv. 5.
12. Ta urn TiT^wrvfAiinv, having his ears bored, iii. 1. 31.
064. 2. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle rather
than of the active ; and hence deponents may have a passive. Thus, M/O-&W.
titiveti 21 olx. i-ri TOUT* i'<p<rav, 'that they had not been hired/ i. 3. 1 ( 559. d).
;, corselets well made, Mem. iii. 10. 9 (cf. 'Av^avraj
'having made,' Ib. ii. 6. 6). 'EgyarSiwraf, it shatt be
358
SYNTAX OF THE VERB.
[BOOK in
performed, Soph. Tr. 1218. 'EavMv Tt t^et, and wool was bought, Mem. ii. 7
12 (* 301. 8). To :Wi Th. iii. 38. '!!,- fra&fuu rxti Soph. Ant. 66.
This passive occurs chiefly in the Per/., Plup., and Aor.
3. If an active or middle which has no object is changed to a passive, it
becomes, of course, IMPERSONAL ( 546. ) ; and it may become so, with an
indirect object. Thus, 'YcrJjjxra, a beginning had been made [= 'T-rtj^av, they
had begun], Th. i. 93. 'Ecrn&j eturoTf wag'o-xttjxffro, when preparation had
been made by them [= 'Ein/5>j <rct,gi<rx,it>ct<r{t,ivai Vav, when they had made prepa-
ration], Ib. 46. KaXa; av iroi a.vrix,i*tro [= av uvixixi<ro] ; Would [it have
been answered well by you] your answer have been a good one ? PI. Gorg.
453 d.
III. USE OF THE TENSES.
56*5. A general view of the distinctive offices of the
Greek tenses, particularly as employed in the Indicative, has
already been presented ( 167, 168). In explanation and
completion of that view, it is essential to observe,
I. That, out of the Ind., the tenses, except the FuL, have
no direct reference to a distinction of time, but simply to the
RELATION or STATE of the action as indefinite, definite, or
complete, or, in other words, as doing, done, or having been
done ( 168).
Hence, if we omit the Fut., each of the three states or relations has but a
tingle tense-form out of the Ind. This form, as it marks the distinction of
time only occasionally and indirectly, may be tenned achronic (-, not, x,^ ntm
x'os, relating to time) \ while the forms of the Ind., as they properly and directly
mark this distinction (though sometimes used achronicully], may be termed
chronic. The time of an action expressed by an achronic tense must be in-
ferred from the connection. Thus (the star denoting that a form is wanting),
IND.
SUBJ.
OPT.
IMP.
INF.
PAKT.
|F* ;
Future *
[(see 581).
j f Present * \
| I (see 575), L
| | Past, )
& |^ Future,
| C Present,)
I* < Past, >
O (.Future,
Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronic, Achronic.
Achronic, Achronic, Achronic,
Future,
Achronic,
Achronic,
Future,
Achronic,
Achronic,
Future,
Achronic,
Future,
Achronic.
Future.
Achronic.
Future.
566. II. The use of generic forms for specific ( 330)
has a peculiar prominence in the doctrine of the Greek tenses.
CH. 5.] USE OF TENSES. 359
REMARKS. . The PRES., in its widest generic sense, includes all the other
tenses (see /S) ; as a definite tense use.i achronkally ( 565), it includes the
Impf. The IMPF., in its widest generic sense, includes all the past tenses
( 173) ; and the AOK., all the indefinite and complete tenses. The PBBF., as a
generic tense, includes the Plitp.
/3. Tlie distinction of generic and specific belongs not merely to grammatical
forms, but also to the ideas which these forms represent. Thus the idea of
PRESENT TIMK, which applies specifically only to the passing moment, extends
in its generic application to any period including this moment ; and we speak
of the present month, the present century, &c. In its widest extent, therefore,
it includes all time. Hence general truths, existing states and habits, and oft-
recurring facts, belong appropriately to the present time.
III. The relations of time have nothing sensible
to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges therefore with
freedom through all time, the past, the present, and the future ;
and, without difficulty, conceives of the past, or future as
present, and even of the present or future as already past.
That the Greek language should have a peculiar freedom in
the interchange of tenses, is but the natural consequence of
the wonderful vivacity of the Greek mind. See 330. 3,
576, 584, 585.
REMAR' s. . The Pres. tense, when employed by the figure of vision, in
speaking of past events, is termed the HISTORIC PRESENT. See 576.
ft. Common facts, imagined scenes, and general assertions, not being con-
fined to any particular time, may often be expressed in the present, past, or
future, according to the view which the speaker chooses to take. E. g. we
may say, " The wisest often err," or " The wisest have often erred," or " The
wisest will often err." Thus, C H /ulv ya.o tvret^iat vu^iv SextT, f> $i a<ret%iet
roXXous fan a.-roXuZ.iKiv, for good order seems to preserve, but disorder
has already destroyed many, iii. 1. 38. O^sv tirri xie$u>.<ca>r*oav rou vixxv
o ya. xgx-ruv elfta. rv<r ffuvyg-retxi Cyr. iv. 2. 26. 'H e -^/vx^i
u'Ta.X^.a.Trofjt.iiin TOU ff<upa.<ros, ilSus 5/a(T<pt5<r<r/ xi uvra\uXiv PI. Phifido,
80 C. K^T? $ f*,y%<z.vK7f yoxvXou Sj0; oo</r<rioiret, X<r/ay;v 3-' "if wo*
v-rei^Tttt Soph. Ant. 348. "Avogo; \-r ovSiv tg%s<reti TO ftiXXov "A/Sat fio-
vov <ptv%iv oiix iKu.'Z.iru.i Ib. 360. 'Ev fraXXo7f fjiiv, u Ayuovlxi, <ro\v ^nffTu-
f rt TUV ff<rov$ce.ieuv vu/j.a.{ x,a,i rot; TUY <pvAv "Siavaia; -raXw
av o era? aiuv iZ > .*.i^iii* Isocr. 2 a. See f 575-578.
NOTE. The use of the Aor. by Homer in comparisons is particularly fre-
quent; as, "H^/cre $', u; an ns fyus fy*i* II. 432, cf. T. 33, &c. See also
575.2.
y A past tense may be used, in speaking of that whi* h is present, with ref-
erence to some past opinion, feeling, remark, action, or obligation ; thus, Ky^r^/f
vx cio ^v B-iog, Venus was not then merely a goddess (as we supposed her to
be), Eur. Hipp. 359. T A^' ol <robt v ro MV^ZOV, l<p' o-r^ vy.; Kftcis ; PL Phaedr.
230 a. A*9/fMptM IxiTvo xxi Xur,<rop.t0a, o <ru /u.lv ^ixotieu fi'tXriov iy'iyviro,
* di &$i%,*> ofTu^Xvra, we xhfill corrupt and injure that, which (as we said) it
360 SYNTAX. USE OF TENSES. [BOOK III
Improved by justice, and ruined by injustice, PI. Crito, 47 d. 'Ttvai r*
el ffT^etrnyoi <rvift.iov Ar. Ach. 1073. TI<p>.t ftlv Kvoo? , [Cyrus ought to
be living] Would that Cyrus were living ! ii. 1. 4. Qi/x i%(>w ftivroi ffx.ovt7v ,
But ought you not to be considering ? Apol. 3. Cf., in English, the familiar
use of ought, the Impf. of owe, as a Pres.
5G8. IV. The tense may vary according as an action
is viewed in its relation to the present time, or to the time of
another action, either past or future. The tense of an Inf.
or Part, is commonly determined by its connection with anoth-
er verb, without regard to the present time. In the Ind., the
tense is properly determined by the relation of the action to
the present time ; but in Greek, if the Ind. is dependent upon
another verb, its tense is often determined by the time of that
verb, particularly in indirect quotation. In the Subj. and Opt.
modes, from their very nature, there is commonly a union of
the two considerations. Thus,
v'S^i 'ncatrru ^utruv, he promised to give each man (the giving
future at the time of the promise , i. 4. 13. "E^;y ofXircts .viri <r^iee.xo-
r'tav;, he went up, having (at the time of his going up ) three hundred hojuites,
1. 1.2. 'Av'itrrxvTe . . *.i%av<rt; a, lyiyveao-xov, they rose to say (future at the
time of the rising) what, they thought (past at the time of the narration), i. 3.
13. Il.iffTtv0iis a%.*i0tvffti*, Si tXiyt;, Ivrtjeag vii. 7. 25. EIVs . ., froctTriyovt
uiv \\iff6at a.XX'Wf u; TO-j^wra., it [tvi $ov\i r ra.i KXtap^a; a.fa.yuv . . fiyiftovei
airi7v Kt/0v, o<rn; . . u-rx^tt, recommended, that thry should immediately choose
other generals, if Clearchus [is] was unwilling to lead them ; that they should
ask Cyrus for a guide, who [will would conduct them back, i. 3. 14. Ta? $i
vfo-^/ia (A\I v, on eiytt *(>ot fiairiXia, and they hud indeed a suspicion, that he
was leading them against the king, i. 3. 21. 'Etai^atf-i, <ris r^ayysXX< i. 8.
16. 'E.-rifAt*.t7ro, o <n vraiyirii ftettriXivs Ib. 21.
REMAHK. An INFINITIVE, denoting an action which must be future, from
the very nature of the governing word, often employs the Fut., but far more
frequently the appropriate uchronic tense ; thus, Su^^ags/y vvri<r%n7ro i$i/>
Ji rat XMfAttf fjt,Yi Mutiny vii. 7. 19. 'Y<ri<r%v&vra.i >r/o<)v/u,ariov av<ra7; ffvcrr^o.
viuiffSitt Ib. 31. Miju.y)jtrfxi i>'riir%vi7<r0t vii. 6. 38. 'T^rif^sro pot fiovKw
r*ffto.t, loiffcti d- fjn v/Aois i>ci>.iu<riv ii. 3. 20. See 583.
A. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE.
5) IO9. The INDEFINITE and the DEFINITE tenses are
thus distinguished. The former represent an action simply as
performed ; the latter represent it dcfuiilch/ as performing.
The former merely express that an action has been, is, or will
oe performed ; the latter present a picture of the action in the
course of its performance. The former take a single glance
at it, as one complete act conceived of as momentary ; the
latter observe its progress, as begun and going forward by con-
tinued or repeated effort, but not yet complete.
If action is conceived of as motion in a straight line, the definite tenses may
CH. 5.] DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 361
be said to present a side view of this line, so that it if seen in its full kngtk ;
but the indefinite tenses to present only an end view of it, so that it appears M
a mere point. Thus,
Definite View. Indefinite View.
$ 57O. Hence an action is represented,
a.) By the definite tenses, as continued or j>- olonged ; but
by the Aor., as momentary or transient. Thus,
Ttvs fiiv ouv wsXrayraj t^i^etvro el Qoiga,goi xxi IJU,O.%OVTO fwsion 01 \yyv\
rtffec.1 ol ovrXiTO.!, tT^a.fov<ro. JKLa/ el f&lv <7n\rce.<nou ivQu; iifovro dtuxovng. The
barbarians then received the targeteers (momentary) and fought with them (con-
tinued) ; but when now the Jioplites were near, they turned to flight (momentary).
And the targeteers immediately followed pursuing them (continued), v. 4. 24.
"Iv rt . nffv^ioiv t%y, anf>vXee.x.TOf A*!^? Dem. 45. 2. i^txXtyou, *i
p.ti6i fguroi Ttvif ilff'iv, converse with them, and learn first who they are, iv.
8. 5. 'Ears/Jay oLfu.vra. atcauff^n, xgivetTi, KOU f/.ri vrgortfiov yr^o^a.^iiviTt
Dem. 44. 2. Aafyvcti ol TOC.VTKS TK; vroXn: ^aXAOv, rj Tifftroaft'iovviv cio-^itv aw-
r&J i. 1. 8. A?<y, having taken (momentary). "E^;<wv, having (continued),
i. 1. 2.
NOTES. 1. Any dwelling of the mind upon the agent, mode, or circum-
stctnces of an action, and any attempt at graphic description, commonly lead to
the use of the definite tenses; thus, *A?TX^/VVTO (Kxla^aj 2" tXgysv), they an-
swered (and Clearchus was the speaker), ii. 3. 21 (cf. ii. 5. 39 ; iii. 3. 3).
Stvatyuv, yio/u.r,vivi $t Tiftriffititos V. 4. 4. See 576.
2. In the IMPERATIVE, the momentary character of the AOR. is peculiarly
favorable to vivacity, energy, and earnestness of expression ; thus, 2u ouv -rgcs
3-ti/v ffi>f/.iuXii/ffov '/if&tv ii. I. 17. 'AxaucreiTi ouv ff.au Too; 9-&>v V. 7. 5
" BXi'v/'OV,' ity'i-, " Tgos TO. oori, xcti ?5s u; U.VMTOC. <ffu.vra, tffi IV. 1. 20.
57 1. b.) By the definite tenses, as a habit or continued
course of conduct ; but by the Aor., as a single act. Thus,
'EfTf/ ^ tt^ov OLVTOV, oiiri Tgcfffav vrgoffixvvitjv, Kttl TOTt 'XgtHTtx.vvriffav, cm?
rclien those saw him who were before in the habit of prostrating themselves before
him. they prostrated themselves even then, i. 6. 10. A/s<p^/j ya.^ trgaffiovns
<rov; ff r r^a, r riu ! ra,f, xcti ivx yt Ko^ayov $ii$0ttga.v iii. 3. 5. "O<rr;f 5' K'ptxvtTrt
. . f(H>; etv<rov, ?ravT; ovfca S/ar/^fij acrsT^^rsTa i. 1. 5. IlaXXax/j lewis fTi
rat,; S-t/^a; aT'/irou*. '0 Jj iX-r/^asj Xiyuv lirjyi i. 2. 11. 'S.r^ov^ov %i ol'Siii
tXxGiv ol $1 <^*yvrj ruv Ivvluv ra%i> ITXVOVTO i. 5. 3. Hence the great
use of the definite tenses in the description of character. See Anab. i. ch. 9 ;
ii. ch. 6.
573. c.) By the definite tenses, as doing at the time
of, or until another action ; but by the Aor., simply as done in
its own time. Thus,
o, iTdov fixtriXnev <rt. In this it-ay, they made four day's- mar cl its. And
while they were makiny the fifth, they saw a palace, fii. 4. 23. ' A-rixniiotr vv~
362 SYNTAX. - USE OF TENSES. [BOOK III.
%*av;, . . xet] it'axov f^X.V * & ov i tne V slew many, and continued the pursuit un
til they saw, v. 4. 16. Tovrov ix&Xiuo-i $/ i^i; Aa i-i KVTU <rr\v ri yvvetixt*
xeti rjv trxnvnv Cyr. V. 1. 2. Twrv ovv ixiXtufftv o K.u/?oi $/<> t> ^.a-rritt
<rov "Agao'crjjy, lui av O.UTO; XoiGy Ib. 3.
573. d.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted, or
designed (doing, not done) ; but by the Aor., as accomplished
(done). Thus,
T.Xset(>%os TOUS OCVTOU ffT^etrieaTots IGici^tTO tivai ol ^l uvrov <ri 'i"otXXov. . .
r*rj fic.lv ftixoov l^itpvyi TO /AW XKTK^iT^u^ijyxi, uerngoY * \fti 'iyvca, OTI ot> 5w-
vrxrtTctt $ia,<ru,ffQa.i. Clearchus attempted to force his soldiers to proceed ; but they
began to stone him. He then narrowly escaped being stoned to death (the com-
pletion of the act of stoning) ; and afterwards, when he became convinced that
he should not be able to prevail by force (to accomplish his attempt). 5. 3. 1.
vuv lyivid* vloj ov-TOffl, . . Tigi rauvof&etTOf o*j 'vnutitv \^.oioooovfjt,t0<t> C H
ol TOU Teivr'X'ov 'TtDijU.*!* *Pt<-
. ( P s t% i -r <r i $ * . When tldit
son was born to us, thereupon we began to quarrel about the name. For she
insisted on tacking "jr-rot to his name, and / was for giving him his grand-
father's name, Phidonides. At last we made a compromise, and named him Phi-
dippides. Ar. Nub. 60. "Or* e^SaXXov <rous S-tols, when I was for expelling the
gods, Ib. 1477. 'Exa/vo^v g/pu xx' U-sxAs^sv . . "Ajrs^/f Eur. Iph. T. 26.
Hdt. i. 69.
NOTES. . Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative to deny
the attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action ; thus, K.A ; eux
jtnGifet^tv If} rov XoQov, Clearchus did not undertake to march upon the hill, i.
10. 14. HivoQuv rovs ft.iv TiXrettrrK; ovx, %yn iii. 4. 39. 'EcrsJ Si eutiii;
TiXtytv, iloriv iii. 2. 38. 'Efrt/ Ss evTtv &><pi>.ift.ov i'Xtyiv, oguvros <rov irigou Kit"
rtffQii'yri. '0 Ji Xa/Toj i'Xi|sv. And when he would say nothing useful, he was
put to death in the sight of the other. But the second said. iv. 1. 23.
/3. A person is often spoken of as having done what he has attempted to do;
thus, MEN. A/xa<a ya. To5* iv<rv%itv XTJ/VVT (JLI ; TETK. Kri/vavra j
As/vay y iivrcts, tl xcii %r,( Savw. MEN. 0sV ya.^ ix.<r*>%u ftt, T<y3i S' o*%ofjt,cti.
Men. /'or is ft rt</At </ia< Ae should prosj>er, having slain me ? Teuc. Having
slain you ? You tell a wonder, indeed, if, being dead, you are yet alive. Men.
For heaven preserves me, but, so far as lay in him, I am no more. Soph. Aj.
1126( 410). 2a ^w^av aa-t&eAav, rixvoi ?xrma * uxouffa, Eur. Ion,
1498.
e.) By the definite tenses, as introductory; but
by the Aor., as conclusive. Thus,
0? er<vv Ki/fa . . el' K-rt^ivuro, who asked Cyrus ; and he answered,
i. 3. 20 (cf. 'A&i;' . . a.va.yyilXa.1 Ib. 19). 'Axovrtttrts rauree. i*ii0ovro xol
. 16. Oi"EMi*ins iGovliuovro xet) arixe'iwro ii. 3. 21.
NOTE. Verbs of asking, inquiring, commanding, forbidding, deliberating, at-
tempting, endeavouring, besieging, wounding, and some others, are introductory
in their very nature, and hence incline to the use of the definite tenses ; thus,
T/ 3i7 etlrov a/TE/V, xa,} ol XetSii* \\Qovra. \ Why must he ask for them (which
of itself accomplishes nothing), and not come and take them (which is final) ?
ii. 1. 10. 2wXAi<r; fra^iu^a. 'uroXtoxti M/X^rav xa.} XO.TO. yw *" x<rk
CH. 5.J DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE.
3Xarry, xtti \<rii^u.ro xa.ra.ytu rov; Ixftfruxortts i. 1. 7. KaJ TaXXt.f
MHtW i fMnMff l xa.\ (xa.rrio'a-v ru 'EXXiya>y iii. 4. 26.
575. REMARKS. 1. As the Aor. is an achronic tense, except in
the Ind. ( 565), it is in this mode only that the Pres. indefinite is wanting
( 168. ). It is commonly supplied by the Pres. definite, but sometimes by
the Aor. or Per/. See REM. 2, and 233, 577, 578.
2. The AOR. in the Ind. is properly a past tense ; but, from the want of the
Pres. indefinite, it often supplies the place of this tense, or is used achronicully.
In these uses, it differs from the Pres. definite, in representing the action either
more simply or singly, or with a certain expression of instantaneousness, energy,
decisiveness, or completeness. 'Avj 5' eVav <ro7f tv^ov a.^dvtra.t %uvav, 'i%ta p.t'kai
i<roe.vtrt xx-fiiav a<r?, and when a man becomes weary of the society of those at home,
going abroad he relieves his heart at once of its disgust, Eur. Med. 244. K)
xu; y& \vru6itffct Tgo; fi'ixv ?ro5/ sac*v^gy, tfrti 5* a.u&i; t jv ;X vroSot, Id. Or.
706. "Ory S' tx rX{0v<aj xi fovyoict; ri;, uffvrig euro;, iff^vffy, v\ <xg&>rii
tepefy tufts a,} ju,txoov vr<ra7o'fiet KTctvrot a,vi%a.'trio'i xoct St'iXDfftv, ' instantly tosses
off and dissipates,' Dem. 20. 25. Ta^u J-rtv PL Rep. 406 d. 'Ei-far igy,
I fully approve the act, Soph. Aj. 536. 2a/ nturct . . vx^vt/ra. Id. Phil. 1433
2i . . fTcrov TJJ^I yni 'i%u ft^v, ' I bid you peremptorily,' Eur. Med. 271.
$' otoi toyo* iffr igyaffriav Ib. 791. 'A-rsTrwo-a T-o/av^s ffvyyiviiet.it
r/*^av Id. Iph. A. 509. "H^jj* aors<Xa?;, \y'i\a.tro, (J/oXoxo/x.'rieiis,
(Jt,'o6u*, jfiHx,t>Kx,vira,, I enjoy your threats, I laugh at your boast-
ings of smoke, &c., Ar. Eq. 696. 'E^la^jjy TO pvfa, I welcome the omen, Soph.
El. 668.
5 7 O. 3. The Greek has the power of giving to narration a wonder-
ful variety, life, and energy, from the freedom with which it can employ and
interchange the Aor., Impf., and Historical Pres. Without circumlocution, it
can represent an action as continued or momentary ; as attempted or accom-
plished ; as introductory or conclusive. It can at pleasure retard or quicken
the progress of the narrative. It can give to it dramatic life and reality by
exhibiting an action as doing, or epic vivacity and energy by dismissing it as
done. It can bring a scene forward into the strong light of the present, and
instantly send it back again into the shade of the past. The variety, vivaci-
ty, and dramatic life of Greek narrative can be preserved but very imperfectly
in translation, from the fact that the English has no definite tenses, except by
circumlocution, and has far less freedom than the Greek in uniting the past
and present tenses. Thus, *E?rt/ $1 xa.i evraw^' i-gugovt a/ExXjvf, X/Vov<
di Kcti rov Xa<py el lwft.7; ov ftriv in otS^ooi, aXX* aXXa/ aXXa^sy ^<Xot/ra S"
o Xaipflf Ttat ivrvriur TsXaj dt xa,} wvri; a.'Xi^u^nira.v. '0 flJy KXsa^^a; ou*
ave/assy Iffi Tfly Xa^av, XX* ityro KUTOV ffr^treis <ro a*Ta<rty*, Tf^^rs/ Auxtat
~oi 2u(>axo<riov xot,} aXXav ffi rav Xa^ay, xxt xtXtuii, xurtoovrcts TO, v^rlo TOV Xa-
<pou, ri Iffriv, u-retyyiTXuti. Kai a At/x/a; ^'Xaa-8 rt, xttl ft&v oLvrttyyiXXti, on
Qtuyovffiv ava xgdrof. 2^;^ay 5* on return y, xce,} %Xtos lluiro, 'Eyrat/^a S*
tfTtiffut 01 "Exxjyej, / yifMMt rod aVXa o.v&<ra.vovro xcti cipct p\v lfat>i&a.Z,ov t
ori ovbctftou Kw^aj Qetivuro, olV aXXof *' ctvrou ovSut Tallin i. 10. 13 16.
See iii. 4. 25 - 27, 38, 39 ; i. 8.23-27; iv. 7.10-14; v. 4. 16, 17; vi. 1.
5-13.
4. There is no precise line of division between the offices of the definite and
indefinite tenses. In some cases it seems to be indifferent which are employed.
And the definite tenses, as the generic forms ( 566. ), often occur, where the
indefinite would seem to be more strictly appropriate. The use of the Impf.
for the Aor. occurs especially in Horn, and Hdt.
SYNTAX. USE OF TENSES. [BOOK III
5. In verbs in which the Aor. was not formed, or was formed with a differ*
ent signification, the Impf. remained as both the definite and indefinite past
tense ; as nv and t<f>w (^ 53, 55, 301. 7), which are more frequently used
as Aor.
B. INDEFINITE AND COMPLETE.
577. I. The indefinite and the complete tenses are
thus distinguished. The former represent an action as per
formed in the time contemplated ; the latter represent it as, ai
the time contemplated, having already been performed. In the
former, the view is directed to the action simply ; in the latter,
it is specially directed to the completion of the action, and to
th'e state consequent upon its performance. Hence arise two
special uses of the complete tenses ; the one to mark emphat-
ically the entire completion or the termination of an action ;
and the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an
action. Thus,
ToKLvra. pi* -rivo'irixi, such things has he done (and is now upon trial for),
i. 6. 9. *E*ur avyx<w waX/v \fypt7i eirr a xixXotfxuiri pov, ' whatever
they may have stolen from me (and may have in their possession),' Ar. Eq.
1147. r HA0a el 'IvSw ix. ruv vrot-tfiiuv, ov; i-rtfofttpti Kv^o; i-ri xara.ir%or% t
Ka,} lAsyav, on Kga?*^? /tttv ys^&y . . f,gw/u,ivos it* ruv .feXifjiiuv ^iSoypiva*
i' i*t) reiffi rats <rvfjt.fx.ti%on . . rce.^ilvon . . Ttvroju.tpivo.i ot K^o-av / si; A
Kioa.ip.ovu vri^i %t//u.p.a.%ius Cyr. vi. 2. 9. Yltgt p.\v ouv <ruv t^iuv TO.VTO. pot vgo-
ti^Mu -rs^i $1 rut KOIVUV . . , 'let these things have been premised,' Isocr.
43 d. '\t<r&u vft&iv t> (?>(>oibi>Tvis vvv $1 . $on6wffa.rt t let your sluggishness have
reached its full limits; and do yitu now assist, Th. i. 71. Tawra piv ?v, u Ew-
tvbvipi rt ica.} &io*vfo$at, jrifa.'tffQu <rt Vft7t, xai liruf IX.OC.YUS t%tt ro $\ ^j /u.1 -
r vctiiro. i-n^ti^urov PI. Euthyd. 278 d. 'A.-rii^yot.ff6tu ^) ^7y ttcti cturn . . fi
troKiriio, Id. Rep. 552 e. rij^ri/fa^w, [let it have been tried] let a trial l>e
made, Ar. Vesp. 1 1 29. *E/oTif Si tiro* T 9^v xfxXiTo-^a/, and going out
they commanded the door [to be closed and to remain so] to be kept closed, H.
Gr. v. 4. 7.
578. REMARKS, a. The consequences of an action are usually
more obvious and more permanent in that which is acted upon, than in that
which acts. The receiver feels the blow more deeply and longer than the giv-
er. We find here a reason why the complete tenses are used so much more in
the passive than in the active, and why, in the active, so many verbs want
them altogether ( 256, 580).
/?. As the object of the complete tenses is to ascribe the consequences of an
action, rather than to narrate the action, they naturally occur more frequently
in the Part, than in the other modes. Some modern languages, as the Eng-
lish, the French, the German, have no pass, form by inflection, except th
Perf. Part.
y. For the same reason, the transition in 233 is natural and easy. We
Bubjoin an example, which marks strikingly the distinction between the Perf.
used as a Pres. and the Aor. ; TVvv ai SKVOVTH, those who have died (refer-
ring to the past event) are dead (referring to the present state consequent upo
the event), Eur. Ale. 541 (but, >/>*-;, / am dyiiu), Ib. 264).
CH. 5.] INDEFIN'TE AND COMPLETE. - FUTURE. 365
J. In the Epic, the use of the Plup. as Impf. or Aor. is more extended than
in the Attic, and has perhaps some connection with the usage in 194. 3.
Thus, Bi7xi<, went. A. 221. BXJW; E. 66.
5 7 d. {. The Perf. is sometimes called a past, and sometimes a
present tense ; and neither without reason, since it marks the relation of a past
action to the present time. The action which it denotes is past ; but the state
consequent, to which it also refers, is present. The tense is therefore in its
time, as in many languages in its form, COMPOUND, having both a past and a
prfnent element. The comparative prominence of these elements varies in dif-
ferent languages, in different words in the same language, and in different uses
of the same word. We remark, in general, that the present element has a far
greater prominence in the Greek than in the English Perf.
. An action is sometimes so regarded as continued in its effect, that the
Pres. supplies the place of the Perf. This is the common use of the Pres. in
%x.u, to come, and o't^of^a.1, to go (cf., in Eng., / am come, and / am gone) ; and
is not unfrequent in OC.KOVU and *\vta, to hear, /u.atv0av<v, to learn, vixtiu, to con-
quer, and some other verbs. In these verbs, the Impf. may supply the place
of the Plup. Thus, E/j *Xav #*r, you [come] have come opi>ortunely, iv. 7.
3. KtJaa? $1 ouiru %iv, and Cyrus had not yet come, i. 5. 12. Ourt asraSs^a-
K&a-tv, oTSo, yat.^ own O"%OVTUI, ' whither they have gone,' i. 4. 8. Ti? hftiTt
Koveu.tv, as we [hearj have heard, v. 5. 8. "Agrt (ia.v6u.vu Eur. Bac. 1297*
N/x&v*iv n QetrtXiet ii. 1. 4.
^5 SO. II. Unless the attention is specially directed to
the effect of an action, the generic Aor. more frequently sup-
plies the place of the specific Perf. and Plup. ( 566. ), as a
more familiar, more vivacious, and often a shorter or more
euphonic form. This use prevails especially in the active
voice ( 578. ). The Aor. often occurs in immediate con-
nection with the Perf. or Plup. Thus,
'E^' >j [xvjj Xsy&rcti M/day TCV Sarw^av B-nosutreti, oivu xsgciffecs ot,v<^riv, at
which \_fountain~\ Midas is said to have caught the Satyr, having mixed it with
wine i. 2. 13. TUT>IV <r*iv <rX/v i%iXtfov 01 Ivaixovvris, this city its inhabitants
had left, Ib. 24. Ntw & 0TraXa7; . . ifioMtjo-i, and now it has aided the Thes-
sa/ians, Dem. 22. 7. Totaura <7ra.$uv X.KI <rei<r%c<tv, having suffered and suffering
such things, Id. 576. 18. 'Aoro^s^axorsj rrsy KO.} ftwrigct;, 01 i x) r'txva,
xacretXiffoyrt; vi. 4. 8. TLtvurrtGovs -rsTairtict, KKI <roXXw; xiv^vvous viropivuv
riva.yK6t.ffi, xa,i -r^os raus "EXXvj ^/a^s^Xjjxs Isocr. 1 63 a. Ov% i iirxsju./u,tvof
iw^' o fAtgift,vvffcts TO. ^iKKiee, Xiyiiv Dem. 576. 22. 2TP. "Iva pi ^/Ja|jy, <unri^
xra ri ; Ar. Nub. 238.
NOTE. The use of the Aor. for the Perf. is especially common in the Part.
C. FUTURE.
3 8 1 . I. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion
for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com-
monly enough to mark the action simply as future. Hence
the inflection of most verbs has but a single Put., the indefi-
nite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures, if they require
31*
3GG SYNTAX. - USE OF TENSES. [BOOK III
to be distinguished from this, to be expressed by a ParticipL
and substantive verb ; as,
\\a.^Kovira, /u.oi if rat TO \oi-rov, Scyros shall hereafter content me (contin
ued, 570) Soph. Ph 4*9 TW Wa< ft&ov Id. (Ed. C. 653. "Av^ *.
reixoivovris iffto-Qt, you will have stain . man, vii. 6. 36. Ta liovra. i<ro/x.i0a
tytuxoTis, xoii Xoyuv ftarxiuv dffrjt.Xat'yju.ivoi Dem. 54. 22.
II. The Future Perfect expresses the sense of
the Perf. with a change of the time ; that is, it represents the
state consequent upon the completion of an action as future
As it carries the mind at once over the act itself to its com-
pletion and results, it is sometimes used to express a future
action as immediate, rapid, or decisive, and hence received its
old name of paulo-post-future (paulo post futurus, about to be
a little after}. In verbs in which the Perf. becomes a new
Pres., the Put. Perf. becomes a new Put. ($ 233, 239).
Thus,
"Hv $ [in yivnroc.1, ftcirtiv \ft,o\ xtxXa,u<rtTou, but if there should not be, I shall
have wept in vain, Ar. Nub. 1435 (-J 564. 3). Ow$/y . . p,iTt>yyK<pvtrtTai,
aXX', c5ffTi/> v TO V^UTOV, 'fyyty^oi^eTcn, no one shall be enrolled (the simple
act) elsewhere, but shall remain enrolled (the state consequent upon the act of
enrolment) as he was at first, Id. Eq. 1370. <!> a,t rs^|iT/, speak
and it [shall be done at once] is done, Id. Plut. 1027. "Gray fo p* trSivu,
*-t*av<roju.(ti, ' I shall desist at once,' Soph. Ant. 91. No^/^sn iv <r$ TJI
vifiigoi \(JL'\ Tt xetTctxixoTJ/fo-fai, xxt upas ol <ro\v i/uov vtrTt^ov, ' shall be imme-
diately CUt down,' i. 5. 16. 'Eav y aja I/tot a|j TIVO, . . ulr'txa. pa.*.*.
lit* Tifaeivcti, vifavZu eSrot, ' he shall be dead,' i. e. ' he shall die instantly,
PI. Gorg. 469 d (cf. KTiay&f iWa/, An<r%nrf*.ivov 'ifTcti Ib.). Ms^vjjo-o^e^a,
we shall remember, Cyr. iii. 1. 27 ( 233). EMits 'AgictTos utftirT^ii urTt
<piXos fif*7* ou'biif XiXi/'-^iray, Arimus will immediately withdraw ; so that no
friend will remain to us, ii. 4. 5.
. III. A future action may be represented more expressly aa
on the point of accomplishment, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, pur-
pose, &c., by the verbs ^tXXw, 16'ii.u or Ssx<w, /WXa^a/, $t7, ^^, &c., with the
Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., Aor., or Put., according to the view taken of
the action in respect to definiteness and nearness (C^ 568. R.). Thus, 'I^v
wrSa . . p/AXmi u.-rohv<rxitv, seeing a boy about to die, vii. 4. 7. C O vru.6fji.oi
Ivta. iytceXXi xa<rXwt/ i. 8. 1. MiXX^fravra Tt <ra.4iiv Cyr. vi. 1. 40. E/ fAtr
vrXo7u. 'ifftffdctt f*i}.}.u txava, if there are to be vessels enough, v. 6. 12. Oil*
iTv, I am not willing to go, or I will not go, i. 3. 10. 'Ey* .'^iXw, Hi
lfia.f iii. 5. 8. Bot/Xiui<r^/, o TI %>> Ton7v i. 3. 11.
REMARKS, (a) The ideas of destiny, purpose, &c., are often expressed ly
the simple Put. Especially is the Fut. Part,, both with and without us,
used continually to express purpose ( 635). Thus, OJ tls TV* QouriXixni
Tt%vri* TotidiuofAivoi . . TI !)!&' oouirt TUV i% uvoi'yxYif xctxaTaffvvvrav, it yi Tit-
rr,ffovffi xo.} li-^viffovffi KO.\ ftyuffouvi xtti uyowrvniroviri, ' if they must hunger
and thirst,' Mem. ii. 1. 17. Tav o^u; Qiuo-ofttvov, he that would live well, PI.
Gorg. 491 e. 2wXX^fv/ KJ/^ov us a-Ttxrivu*. he apprehends Cyrus [as about
to put him to death] with the design of putting him to death, i. 1.3. "
CR. 5.] USE OF MODES. INTELLECTIVE. 3fi7
c/? igavtrx, he sent one to say, ii. 5. 2. Tliftipjlt}; wa^a <r/Xwj xtXstJ<ra/ ii.
1. 17. M^ay^!,- ffuw.i i. 10. 10. See * 531. . (6) Instead of ihe
Fut. Part., the Pres. is sometimes employed to denote purpose, according to
573, especially with verbs of motion; thus, Tawr* ix^ixxguv X^av, / went
to avenge this wrong, Eur. Suppl. 154.
5 84. IV. A future action, in view of its nearness, its certainty, its
rapidity, or its connection witii another action, may be conceived of as now
doing, or even as already done ( 567) ; and may hence be expressed by the
Pres., Aor., or Perf. Thus, Kaxov %xn riv'i, evil is coming upon some one, Ar.
Ran. 552 (cf. AUO-H rts lix-nv Ib. 554). 'A-ruXo/t<<r0' *, */ XKXOV Vo<reiffo-
u<* viav -*/, -r^iv r'oV \fyvr*.vx,iva.t Eur. Med. 78. E7 fAt T'O^UV iyxoa.<rr,<
aiffffvfftrai, oXwXa, */ a\ <rgotr'$ia(p0<(>&, if, while possessed of the bow, he shall
discover me, I am undone, and I shall destroy you besides, Soph. Ph. 75. E/ SI
Sj x.a.TO.K'rivitri fts, o v'cp.os a.v.7ree,i Eur. Or. 940. Qvx ti Z,uvig%a>v, vv'ix.' $
ffiffufffitQa. Ki'ivov &iov ffu'i-vros, n oi%op,tff0' up, ; Soph. Tr. 83. ' A.vriff'ra.Xx.a,
ffoi TV$ rov Xoyov lu^oi Isocr. 2 b. For presents which are commonly used
as futures, see 200. b.
585. V. The FUTURE sometimes occurs for a. present or past tense,
as a less direct and positive form of expression, or as though the action were
not yet finished ; thus, Toupov 5' lyu . . tr-riou,' j$i7v fiovXvtroftai, 'I shall wish,'
i. e. ' am resolved,' Soph. (Ed. T. 1076. XOP. H.a,7lts riSvuffi x,* 1 ?' /"^aJa
ffifav. 'IA2. O't/u.ot, ri *.'i%tt; ; "II? /*' a^/Uo-aj, yvvui Eur. Med. 1309.
n<Sf <f>r,; ; <ri xi^tis ; "H? ft KVtuXeiret;, yvvat Id. Hel. 780. This exclama-
tory use of ri X|/j for ri *.iyns or rl 'i^a.;, as though the communication
were not yet finished, belongs particularly to Euripides.
IV. USE OF THE MODES.
5 8 G. For a classification and designation of the modes
according to the character of the sentences which they form
( 329. N.), see fl 27.
A. INTELLECTIVE.
5 8 T. Intellective sentences express the actual or the
contingent. ( 329. N.). The idea of contingency is expressed
in two ways ; by the form of the verb, and by a particle, com-
monly iiv (Ep. x or xe'r, Dor. x). The two ways are often
united for the stronger expression ; and they may be both neg-
lected, if the idea is either not prominent, or is too obvious to
require expression. The forms of the verb which in them-
selves express contingency are the Subjunctive and Optative
modes ( 169). Intellective sentences not employing these
modes (either because they are actual, or because their con-
tingency is simply expressed by a particle or is not expressed
at all) employ the Indicative, which is the generic mode
( 177,330. 1).
REMARKS. 1 . It may be said in general, that the Tnd. expresses the actual ;
the Subj. and Opt., the contingent. But it must be understood that this, like
3f>8 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III.
all similar statements in grammar, has primary reference to the conceptions of
the mind, rather than to the reality of things ; that is, to employ the techni-
cal language of philosophy, it must be taken subjectively, rather than objectively
The contingent is often, from strong assurance or vivid fancy, spoken of as
actual ; while, on the other hand, the actual, from diffidence or courtesy a
some other cause, is not unfrequently spoken of as contingent. This state-
ment is also limited by the generic use of the Ind., as mentioned above.
2. An action which is now future has, from the very nature of things, somf
degree of contingency ; and therefore, in the Fut. tense, no distinction is made
between the Ind. and the Subj., but any rule requiring in other tenses tin
Subj. in this requires the Ind. And even the use of the Fut. opt. appears ta
be limited to the oratio obliqua, in which it takes the place of the Fut. ind. in
the oratio recta ( 607, 608).
\) 5 9 9 3. The particle of contingence, a.v, may commonly be dis-
tinguished from the conjunction oiv for id* ( 603) by its position, as it never
stands first in its clause, which is the usual place of the conjunction. It chief-
ly occurs with the past tenses of the Ind. and with the Opt., to mark them
as depending upon some condition expressed or implied ; with the Subj. after
various connectives ; and with the Inf. and Part., when the distinct modes
to which they are equivalent would have this particle. It is extensively used
with the Subj., in cases where it would have been omitted with the Opt., for
the reason, as it would seem, that the separation, in form, of the Subj. from
the Ind. was later and less strongly marked than that of the Opt. ( 177).
The insertion or omission of a* for the most part follows general rules, but in
some cases appears to depend upon nice distinctions of sense, which it is diffi-
cult to convey in translation, or upon mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its
use in not a few cases, manuscripts differ, and critics contend. Verbs with
which y is connected are commonly translated into Eng. by the potential
mode.
589. Contingency is viewed as either present or past;
that is, a contingent event is regarded either as one of which
there is some chance at the present time, or merely as one of
which there was some chance at some past time. PRESENT
CONTINGENCY is expressed either by the Subj., or by the pri-
mary tenses of the Ind. ; and PAST CONTINGENCY, either by
the Opt., or by the secondary tenses of the Ind.
The tenses of the Subj. and Opt. are therefore related to each other as
vresent and past tenses, or, hi sense as well as in form ( 168, 196), as ////
and secondary tenses ; and the rule above may be thus given in a more con-
densed form :
PRESENT CONTINGENCY is EXPRESSED BY TUB PRIMARY TENSES ; PAST
CONTINGENCY, BY THE SECONDARY.
NOTE. Future contingency is contained in present ; for that which will b
contingent, is of course contingent now.
$ *5DO REMARKS. 1. It cannot be kept too carefully in mind, that
the distinction above has no reference to the time of the ncrnrrmce. of an event,
but only to the time of its ,-nHtiiiaem-i/. Tims, in the t\><> >.-i,tc!ices. " I can
go if I wish," and "I could go, if I wished," the time of the .'/'"'we/ itscll is in
CJI. 5.J INTELLECTIVE. 369
both the same, 5. e. future. But in the former sentence, the contingency is
present, because it is left undecided what the person's wish is, and therefore
there is still some chance of his going ; while in the latter, the contingency is
pist, because it is implied that the person does not wish to go, and therefore,
although there was some chance of his going before his decision, there is now
no chance. Hence, in the former sentence, present tenses are employed ; and
in the latter, past.
2. The limits of past are far wider than those of present contingency ; for
there is nothing which it is proper for us to suppose at all, of which we may
not conceive that there was some chance at some distant period in past eternity.
The dividing line between present and past contingency may perhaps be thus
drawn ; whatever is supposed with some degree of present expectation, or in
present view of a decision yet to be had, belongs to the head of present contin-
gency ; but whatever is supposed without this present expectation or view of a
decision, to the head of past contingency. Past contingency, therefore, includes,
(1.) all past supposition, whether with or without expectation at that time;
(2.) all supposition, whether present or past, which does not imply expectation,
or contemplate a decision, that is, all mere supposition ; (3.) all supposition,
whether present or past, in despite of a prior decision. Thus :
.A. PRESENT CONTINGENCY.
I will go, if I can have leave (and I intend to ask for it).
I think, that I may go, if I can have leave.
I wish, that you may go.
B. PAST CONTINGENCY.
(1.) Past supposition.
/ thought, that I might go, if I could have leave.
I wished, that you might go.
(2.) Present supposition not implying expectation or contemplating a de-
rision.
/ would go, if I should have have (but I have no thought of asking
for it).
/ could go with perfect ease.
I shoidd like to go.
(3.) Present supposition in despite of a prior decision.
. In regard to the present.
/ would go, if I had leave (but I have none, and therefore I shall
not go).
/3. In regard to the past.
/ would have gone, if I had had leave (but I had none, and there-
fore did not go).
5O 1. 3. As the differe ice between the Subj. and Opt. is one of
time, rather than of essential office, some have chosen to consider them as
only different tenses of a general conjunctive or contingent mode. With this
change, the number and offices of the Greek modes are the same with those
of the Latin, and the correspondence between the Greek conjunctive and the
English potential modes becomes somewhat more obvious (see f 33). Ac-
cording to this classification, which deserves the attention of the student.
370 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the old phraseolo-
gy, the
Present Subjunctive becomes the Definite Present (or the Present) Conjunctive
Present Optative " " Definite Past (or the Imperfect) Conjunctive.
Aorist Subjunctive " " Aorist Present (or Primary) Conjunctive.
Aorist Optative " " Aorist Past (or Secondary) Conjunctive.
Perfect Subjunctive " " Perfect Present (or the Perfect) Conjunctive.
Perfect Optative " " Perfect Past (or the Pluperfect) Conjunctive.
4. Contingent sentences, like actual ( 566-568, 576, 584, 585), are
liable to an interchange and blending of tenses. Past contingency is often
conceived of as present ; and present, as past. Hence, primary tenses take
the place of secondary, and secondary of primary. This interchange may be
observed particularly between the Subj. and Opt. modes.
592. The Subj. and Opt. occur, for the most part, in
dependent clauses ; and indeed some grammarians have re-
fused to regard them as being ever strictly independent. It
results from the principles already laid down, that, in their use
as dependent modes, the Subj., for the most part, follows the
primary tenses ; and the Opt., the secondary. To this gen-
eral rule, however, there are many exceptions.
NOTE. In the application of this rule, the tenses of the Imperat., as from
its very nature referring to present or future time, are to be regarded as pri-
mary tenses J those of the Inf. and Part., as primary or secondary, according
to the finite verbs, whose places they occupy, or, in general, according to those
upon which they themselves depend.
59*1. In the expression of contingency, the Ind. is
properly distinguished from the Subj. and Opt. by the greater
positiveness with which it implies or excludes present anticipa-
tion. Thus supposition with present anticipation is expressed
by the primary tenses ; but there is here this general distinc-
tion, that the Fut. Ind. anticipates without expressing doubt,
while the Subj. expresses doubt. On the other hand, supposi-
tion without present anticipation is expressed by the secondary
tenses ; but with this general distinction, that the Opt. supposes,
either with some past anticipation, or without regard to any de-
cision, while the secondary tenses of the Ind. suppose in despite
of a prior decision.
RKMAKKS. . Tn the expression of contingency, the Impf. ind. has com-
monly the same difference from the Aor. and Plup., as, in English, the Impf.
ind. and potential from the Plup. In respect to the time of the acJion,
therefore, the contingent Impf. ind. commonly refers to present time, and the
Aor. and Plup. to past. See 599, 601. $', 603. *.
|3. We may, say in general, that supposition as fact is expressed by the ap-
propriate tense of the Ind. (i--i 587, 603. ) ; supposition that may become
fact, by the Subj. ; supposition without regard to fact, by the Opt. ; and sup-
position contrary to fact, by the past tenses of the Ind. ; while in these tensoa
CH. 5.] INTELLECTIVE. 371
there is this distinction, that the Impf. expresses supposition contrary to present
fact, but the Aor. and PI up. contrary to past fact.
y. The Epic sometimes joins xi with the Fut. ind., when it depends upon a
condition expressed or understood ; as, E< $' 'O$v<riv; 'ixSoi . ., atya xt . .
eiv or Iff IT en g. 539. A similar use of av in the Att, is rare and doubtful.
^ Of 4: 2. Indefiniteness constitutes a species of contingency. Hence
(1.) the construction with the relative indefinite ( 606) ; and (2.) the use
of av with the past tenses of the Ind. to denote an action, not as occurring at
a definite time, but from time to time, as the occasion might occur, or, in
other words, to denote a habitual action ; thus, IlaXXax/s y./> 'ityn p-lv civ TWOS
loa.v t for he would often say, that he was in love with some one, Mem. iv. 1 . 2.
I'M d'i TIVX o^curi Ss/vav oWa oixavoftoy . ., oiioivtt av fuvfori a.tyi'i'kiro, aXX* dti
x-Xilu vr^otrt^i^ov i. 9. 19. E" <r/f KVTU ^oxoiri . . ft^xxivitv, . . ivctifftv v, xeti
oLfta, KUTOS roffiXa.^a.viv ii. 3. 11.
The contingent modes are often used where the
Ind. might have been employed. The Opt. with Sv for the
(.) Pres. or (/?.) Fut. ind. is particularly frequent ; and often
serves, by suggesting instead of asserting, to give to the dis-
course that tone of moderation and refined courtesy, which
was so much studied by the Greeks, especially the Athenians.
(See 604. b, 605. 5.) The use of the Subj. for the Ind. is
more limited, and occurs chiefly (for the Fut.) in (/.) earnest
inquiry respecting one's self, and in (d.) strong denial. Thus,
a. AUTO aiv . . TO ^iav i?j S-arrav ya,(> a,va.Xu<rov<ri, this [would be] is the
very thing we want ; for they will sooner expend, iv. 7. 7. Ka/ ^-^UVTIS p\v
olx. av a/<r<r7<ra/v, *jv ^i n "Styiry . ., B-n^utri ft-'i^t ^ilffvou Cyr. i. 2. 1 1 (cf.
594). 2HK. A^jjyo^/a a^a rig \<TTH y -roinrtxr,. KAA. ^nfjt.'t, 2I1K.
Olx.ovv j>nTOix.v Ivpnyotia. av tin PI. Gorg. 502 d. This use of the Opt. is
particularly frequent in argumentative conclusions.
ft. <$>n(t.}, xa.} olx. oiv 0v0/7v, / confess, and [would not] will not deny it,
Dem. 576. 17. 'AXX* ovxlr av x^xt/u-i Ar. Plut. 284. MEN. Oy* av /MJti-
ftnv. IIP. QLV 'iyuy u.q>wop.a.i Eur. Iph. A. 3'10. This use of the Opt. is
particularly frequent in the first person.
y. Ilo? fiu ; -rat. VTU ; <ri Xiyea ; Whither [can] shall I go ? where stop f
what sayf Eur. Ale. 864. EJVa/^v, ffiyapiv, $ T! ^^a.trop.tv 5 Id. Ion, 758.
E/Ti/v Ti "buffus, % ffT(>ix.q>iis OVTUS lea ; Soph. Ant. 315. Ka^fl-Ax<y rov ffov
fi&tov; Ib. 554. See 611. 3.
NOTE. In the Epic language, the use of the Subj. for the Fut. ind. is more
extended.
$. Ou yac.^ fft ftri . . yvuff ov$' v^rafrtvffovtriv, for they [cannot] will not know
nor suspect you, Soph. El. 42. Ai^ria-ns, xa.} KVO^UOUV ov ft* "btiffris vii. 3. 26.
*0 T^riar/o* P>or)6'ho'u $v Tt . ., ovbtl; ftvix'tTt f&iivri iv. 8. 13.
NOTES. (1.) This use is most frequent in those forms of the Subj. which
have no forms of the Ind. closely resembling them, viz., the Aor. pass, and the
2d Aor. It is, on the other hand, less frequent in the Pres., resembling the
Pres. ind., and in the 1st Aor. act. and mid., resembling the Fut. ind. (cf. 601.
N.). In this emphatic negation, the Subj. is regularly preceded by a double
372 . SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
negative, ou p.*. The construction may be explained by supplying a word oj
phrase expressing fear ^cf. 602. 3) ; thus, Ow ^oixa. p* yvua-t, I have MO
fear that they would know. Compare such passages as, Ou $cos, p.r, <ri ay-
yu Mem.ii. 1. 25 ; Oi>%i lus, H* ft fiM*y Ar. Eccl. 650. (2.) The similar
use of ou p.* with the Fut. ind. is to be explained in the same manner ; as,
OS ffoi pri fti0i-4>i>peti von, never will I follow you, Soph. El. 1052.
596. We proceed to the application of the general
principles which govern the use of the distinct modes, to par-
ticular kinds of sentences, which may be termed, from their
offices or connectives, desiderative (expressing wish, from de-
sidero, to desire), final, conditional, relative, and complemen-
tary ($ 329. N.).
(i.) Desiderative.
^597. .A wish is expressed either with or without o
definite looking forward to its realization. In the former case,
it is expressed by the primary tenses ; in the latter case, by
the secondary. In the former case, (a.) if the wish is expressed
with an assurance that it will be realized, the Ind. Fut. is used
but, (/?.) otherwise, the Subj. mode. In this use, both the Ind.
Fut. and the Subj. may be regarded as less direct modes of
expression instead of the Imperat. In the latter case, (/.) if
the time for realizing the wish Is already past, the secondary
tenses of the Ind. are used with ft y'^ and '# * but, (d.) other-
wise, the Opt. mode. "(See 590, 593.) Hence .the Opt.
becomes the simplest and most general form of expressing a
wish ; and from the frequency of this use, it has derived its
name ( 169. 3). Thus,
(.) "fit ouv foirifftri, xai viifi(r6i poi, thus then [you will do] do, and listen
to me, PI. Prot. 338 a. M5b ruvV i^iT; Msch. Sept. 250.
NOTES. (1.) A wish is often expressed in the form of a question. Hence
in Greek, as in other languages, the interrogative Fut. often supplies the place
Of the Imperat. ; as, Oux a|^' us rd%iffra. ; xeti . ceQiri parity, [Will you
not carry] (kfrry her away instntitly, and le.ace hern/one, Soph. Ant. 8b5. "A|-u
rif fA&i>y liZ^o rv /WJ^ poi ; 1'etvrn* $' Ixrt Id. (Ed. T. 1069. Ou ff.ri X*X-
rtif, A.X' otKaXovSriffus i/u.o'i ; [Won't you not talk] Dont talk, hut folloir IH<\
Ar. Nub. 505. (2.) For the Fut. with *** in the plare of the Iinpcnit., st-n
C 60-2. 3. (3.) The Aor. and 1'res. are also u^ed with TI lv oi. or rl <>u. in
tlie earnest expression of a wish; as, T Jv, 'itpn a Kw^oj, ov . . 'i\i\a.j /u.oi ;
Why then, said Cyrus, hare yon not told mef i. e tell me, Cyr. ii. 1. 4. T/ nun, i?
6" Si, ov* tpurft ; PI. Lys. 211 d.
t5O8. (/3.) M xvctjuivtapi*, let us not wait, iii. 1. 24. Mj ^iXXw-
fjtn, u uvlpit, XX* K*tX0evTts iftn otioiTrtt II). 46. ^vo ruv -r^r'vra.rut CTT^X-
TWyoi {V/^tiXuWwv o-r/<r^fl<pwX*<w 5* w^iT? iii. 2. 37. 'AXX p 'ix. yi Trio-It
ytjs ro^iu.'.virov u-, T^/<TT, /u,v$' aurou Soivu Soph. Tr. 801. <!>!', ix-rvfofteu
Eur. Here. 529. M vowrr.i rauTa.,f/<> nut do this, vii. 1.8. M3iv a.fvu.-/,fr,rl
i'vtx* T<W yi-ytv*iftivMv "an ya.* V. 4. 19.
fU. 5.] IN DESIDERATIVE SENTENCES. 373
NOTES. (1.) The use of the Subj. as Imperat. occurs chiefly in the 1st
Pers. (where the Imperat. is wanting, 170. N.), and in the Aor with p*.
In the 2d Pers., the distinction is rarely neglected, that in prohibition* with pn
anil its compounds, the Prts. is put in the Imperat., but the Aor. in t/ie Su/>j. j
as, M>) fxduri p.1- . . p.iiri roXtftt'irt vi. 6. 18. M*?T' oxvi'in, p.r,r <Z.$YJT' 'i-ris
Soph.UM.C. 731. MfiS' icnxu/Si . 168. MD*' ivtwrys 263. In the
3d Pers., the distinction is less observed. The foundation of the distinction
seems to have been this ; that the Pres. forbids an action more definitely than
the Aor. (; 569), and hence naturally adopts a more direct form of expression.
Thus, prohibition in the Pres. is often designed to arrest an action now doing,
while prohibition in the Aor. merely forbids, in general, that it should be done ;
as, Mj S-auftci^iri, be not wondering, i. 3. 3 ^see O! fo oguvn; U*&futt9 Ib. 2) ;
but Mj5s . . SogjjTi, nor should you think, iii 2. 17. (2.) The use of the Subj.
as Imperat. may be explained by ellipsis thus, 'O^Srs w uvap.ivivp.tv, see that
we do not wait". 2*a*-<< p.* vrowyg raZru. See 592, 601, 602. 3; and
compare 595. -y, 3, 611. 3.
5OO. (y.) EWi ffoi . . rort (rvvtyivoftw, Would that I had then been
with you ! Mem. i. 2. 46. E#* ii%ts . . /SsX-r/W <f>^ivxs, Would that you had a
better spirit, Eur. El. 1061. Ei ya. ro<ru.vrYiv $vvtx./u.iv tH%ov Id. Ale. 1072.
In these expressions of wish there is properly an ellipsis ; thus, E/0* ti%is &i*.*
T'IOVS Qgivctf, X,K\US oiv ti%i, or fjKptffl civ, if you had a better spirit, it would be
well, or / should be glad. See 600. 2, 603. *.
NOTE. A wish in opposition to fact may be also expressed by the Aor.
vQiXov (^ 268), ought. With this verb, the particles of wishing are some-
times combined for the sake of greater strength of expression. Thus, "ilQi-
Xi ftiv Kugos %yv, [G. ought to be living) Would that Cyrus were living 1
ii. 1.4. 'O&frfa 5' afiXov, Would that I had perished! Soph. (Ed. T. 1157.
E7^' u$tX 'Aoyous (Ji-n ittx.f'rtio-Sa.t <rx.ti$'>; Eur. Med. I. E< yu.% u$i*.ov PL Cri-
to, 44 d. So the Impf. tS<pn*.ev, Eur. I ph. A. 1291. In later writers, u$t*.n
aud uq>t*.i are sometimes used as particles.
GOO. (S.) O/ Slot etvor'io-aivro, May the gods requite! iii. 2. 6.
ITflXXa ftoi XKya-Sa, yivatTO V. 6. 4. ~M.K<rt vroXi[jt,ti<rt A<uHMU^My^Mf) Gea^oi<r(ii <ri
vi. 6. 18. Il^a^aj J' o [in TV%oi(*-ti voffTrio'a.ift.i ya- EuT. Ale. 1023.
NOTES. 1. The Opt. of wish is sometimes used, especially in the 3d Pers.,
as a less direct form for the Imperat. Sometimes the two forms are united,
and these again with the Subj. ( 598) ; as, "A.yid' } *if*.t7i -rig piv T 'or &%&>-
fttv . ., >; T/J . 'A^/X>!< 9fet^fretirt t $01*} %i X^KTOS ft'iyct^ ftri'bi <TI Svf&ef otv'tff&ta
T. 119. See Soph. Ant. 151.
2. The Opt. of wish may be introduced by the particles 11, t'ife, il yi^ (Ep.
and Dor. aMt, .\ yaj), &s , and in interrogation by <r&>s v. E7 uot yivmro tpjoy-
yos, O, that I had a voice! Eur. Hec. 836. EJ/i pfatn ywm Soph. CEd. T.
10&S. t E/ ya.% ysvoiro Cyr. vi. 1.38. 'Ilj oXaiTo *a.yx.a.x.us Eur. Hipp. 407.
Hat av oAo^y ; [How might I die?] Would that I might die! Id. Ale. 8u5
These expressions, except the last, are elliptical ; thus, E? /u.u yivmro qS'oy
yo?, fi'botft.nv oiv, If there were a voice to me, I should be glad ; 'Bou\oif*,v* oiv ut
cXoiro va.yx.at.Ku?. See 599, 603. y. Very rarely, iltt is joined with the
Subj. in the expression of wish ; as, EM' . . fa Soph. Ph. 1092.
3. Except in interrogation, v is not used with the Opt. of wish, which is
thus often distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses. Thus, r ll -raT, yi-
veic warjof ivrv^iffrigos, TO. $' aXX* 2/MMf xa< ytvfl<* av vv *;, My son,
374 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other respects tike him; antl
then you would no' be bad, Soph. Aj. 550.
(n.) Final
^ 6O 1. After final conjunctions (IV, OTTW?, 5?, pij ocpgn
poet.), a present, purpose is expressed by (.) the Sub}., or
(/?.) in the Fut., by the Ind. ; but a past, purpose by (y.) the
Opt., or sometimes (5.), when the realization is now impossi-
ble, by the past tenses of the Ind. (See 589, 593). In
nnal sentences, introduced by a relative ( 531. a), the modes
are used in the same manner. Thus,
(.) ''! ti^nTi, so that you may know, i. 3. 1 5. 'E^o/ 2a? etvra., ovruf . .
Cyr. i. 4. 10. "Siu^ovXiuu tyu, rovav^a TOUTOV Ixfoouv <ron7er6a.i us <r-
XKrvot us pnxin My i. 6. 9. After o-r us and ?, a is sometimes inserted ;
as, "A%ns fifiois, of us av ifiupiv Cyr. Hi. 2. 21. 0^^ /3aX', <uj v riyta.r tx-
JEach. Pr. 706.
(/3.) 'AXX* flVa/y ra/ yti*; JT' ixsivy yivTHffopiSct,, tftivra. tfoifirtov, but surely we
must do every thing, that we may never come into his power, iii. 1.18.
NOTK. After W?, the 1st Aor. subj. is rarely used in the active and mid-
dle voices, but instead of it the Fut. ind. Cf. 595. S.
(y.) K.vo/>i TKt *a.v; /u.trsfi/u.-^'ix.'ro, ofus ocrX/raj a.<7roi<i<riitv, Cyrus sent for
the ships, in order that he might land hoplites, i. 4. 5. Ba^?a^v IftpiXiiTo, at
voXtfttTv n ixetvot t*n<rav i. 1. 5. 'EJoxj* etvroTs dviivcii . . , p,r> ns iTifaffiS yi-
voiro iv. 4. 22. E<Vy (Hist. Pres., 567. a) Vopovs, "' &Mo S ft ns ttittv
Eur. Hec. II 48.
(.) T< p ov . 'i*riivs il6u;, us 'fiii%/z, fAJwori l/tavrev j WTiy did you not
instantly slay me, so that I might never have shown myself? Soph. (Ed. T. 1391.
"!' n TvQXof Ib. 1389. QVX.OVV i%(>tiv ai YIt]yai<rov ^tv^xi -rrt^ov, of us t<fetivou
Ar. Pax, 135. "Iva /*$/; a.vrai>s $ti<p0tigiv, XX' iort<5>) <p/'*9/vro I/; TV >./.
x/y, xf>-n<rifjt.t>i y'fyvotvro PI. Meno, 89 b. "E5i; ra ivi^u^o. ron \o.i7v, us f&n$',
tl ifrovXiro, tivvot.ro civ TKUTO. i^afxrctv vii. 6. 23.
GO 2* RKMARKS. 1. A past purpose, still continued or conceived
of as present ( 591. 4), may be expressed by the Subj. ; and on the other
band, a present purpose, viewed as doubtful or as connected with something
past, distant, or contingent ( 590), may be expressed by the Opt. The
Subj. for the Opt. may be 'remarked particularly after the Aor. used for the
Perf. ( 580), and in indirect quotation ($ 610). The two modes are some-
times both used in the same connection. Thus, 'Ef'trriois ei ou*. tyu^*, "not.
us n^io-ro. "oioiyris PI. Crito, 43 b. *E}A.^a "ooftuv* p.* pot ri fii/u,-J/i]0-0i Eur.
Med. 214. "il/^ira f^iffStis oiyovtroi, o'i-ri^ TO. ff$irtot. <p(>oio-u<riv Th. vii. 25.
ri4<rtX^i/V ix.i'Aii>M, ti TH i"n ., '/> oifa.yyilXiuo-i ii. 5. 36. Compare "tfiSoTv-
ro and i-rifuvreti iii. 4. 1,34. "\aut ~oi fou ri olfao-Koi-TTti <ri n elfOTH^i^n, us
ttfofios iin rj obos ii. 4. 4. 2r5}-a ^*i xd%ftgDo-ov, us vrutioifiifa Soph. QEd. C. 1 1.
A'triTr <rXr, us oLfofXtonv . . 9r't/u.\]/ai ai xat} f^oxttraXn^of^ivous TO. a*^,
tfus ff.fi <p0aaruri i. 3. 14. 'ilf SGgtv $tiu/u,iv A.lyiff6ov &io7s, yoovs r aQtint
Eur. El. 58.
2. After words of fear, the final conjunction pn, lest, is commonly used, but
ometimes also the fuller o-rus t**i, or some other connective ; thus, 'Ef oZovir
CH. 5.] IN FINAL AND CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 375
ftri \TiSo7vro ttlroit . . ei Te*.ifiei, they feared [lest the enemy should attack J
that the enemy would attack them, iii. 4. 1. A/&>;, py XtzZtuv pi 'bix.w i-nOy i.
3. 10. <l>(>Zovftxi Si, p.* rivets faovas r$ova.7s tugr,<rt>p.<v ivavricts PI. Phil. 13 a.
*E<pirTO . . /u.r> ol 1vva.i<ro iii. 1. 12. K/vSyvay p.* XuGutri vii. 7. 31. Ai$ai%'
o-rus ft* riv^opou, I am afraid [as to this, viz. how I shall not find] that I shall
find, Ar. Eq. 112. "Oo-<wj \a.6u, $i&oixet, I fear [as to this, viz. how I may es-
cape] that I cannot escape, Eur. Iph. T. 995. Mj rg'tirr,:, ow; <ri rig . . V-
-T<r<, /ear no that any one will tear you, Id. Heracl. 243. Mr; ^ii<rr,s -rot!', us
- . o-^i-rai Soph. El. 1309. 'EpoSf?, on oQMfftirfai i'^X/U Cyr. iii. 1. 1. <>-
Govftivoi di, T&/J ^^r) W5;XoiJvT< vvra.x.ouo'a.t Ib. iv. 5. 19. 'ATa* ^aoj, ' (T/V&
^<rcra/vv Eur. Med. 184.
3. A verb of attention, care, or /ear, is sometimes to be supplied before
ofus or p.* as, "0#us ouv 'iviaQi oivb^is [sc. again, ffo-ri7<rt, or iytp.tXi7ff6i\, see
tfien that you be men, i. 7. 3. A?[SC. <rxo-T~y] o-', oVaj -rar^o; ^/|/j iv i%4(o7fj
tie; i a"ow ' rgcityfls Soph. Aj. 556. 'AXA.' ovras f*-*! ^X> *'S <r> s' "*/**' C s< ^. ^^9/-
] PI. Meno, 77 a. M . . ^a<f>h!^ Eur. Ale. 315. Cf. 595. S, 598. 2.
(in.) Conditional
GO 3* In sentences connected by conditional conjunc-
tions, there is a great variety of conception, and consequently
of expression. The CONDITION may be assumed, either (.) as
a fact, or (/?.) as that which may become a fact, or (/.) as a
mere supposition without regard to fact, or (<5.) as contrary
to fact. In the first case (.), it is expressed by the appro-
priate tense of the Ind. ; in the second (/?.), by the Subj. ; in
the third (/.), by the Opt. ; and in the fourth (<5.), by a past
tense of the Ind. (see 590, 593). Of these mo'des, the
Ind. and Opt. are usually connected by a, and the Subj. by
id? (= a and av the contingent particle) or its shortened forms,
TJV and V exceptions (f. ), however, occur, though rare in the
Att. writers, and some of them doubtful. The form of the
CONCLUSION is, for the most part, determined by thai of the
condition. In the first case (a.), the conclusion is regularly
made by the appropriate tense of the Ind. ; in the second (/?.),
by the Fut. ind. ; in the third (/.), by the Opt. with V and
in the fourth (5.), by a past tense of the Ind. with av. The
form of the conclusion (.), however, often depends upon other
causes, besides its relation to the condition, and cases of ana-
coluthon are very frequent. There is (?;.). sometimes even a
union of different forms in the same construction. If (#.) the
conclusion is itself a dependent clause, its form is commonly
determined by this dependence, and the condition usually con-
forms. Thus,
(a.) Ei ft\9 ufe,t~; \6i\iri l^o^a.1 t-ri ravret, ififfSttt vplv ficvXofteti ti S*
iis TarTT p.1 viyt.7ffl>.i, ovSiv Vo$u.ffiZ,op,iii iii. 1. 25. E?T >oi irtXii TI
ux oSrug IriXfi vii. 6. 16.
REMARK. Supposition is sometimes made in the Greek, as in other Ian-
376 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
guages, by the Tnd. without a conjunction ; as, Ka) Sj #ai~xiv tlra truf ,
Eur. Hel. 1059.
(/J.) "Hv ya.(> TOUTO \a.up.t.v, ov vvi<rsvT/ ^m/v, for if we take this, they wiJJ
not be able to remain, iii. 4. 41. *Hv 5i tyivyy, bfttTs ixi7 <TO? ravra /BawXsuo'a-
(ifcs&e i. 3. 20. 'Eav ^a/ <TIO-^JT, . . <T(>oTi/u.rifftff0i i. 4. 14. See Ib. 15.
(a. and /3.) Oix a^a i'n fx,a%i7Tai, tl v Tavrxig ov fAct^tiron retlg fiftigais a
' aXnStuffyS) ti-ria-^vovf^cti [= ^uuto\ i. 7. 18.
NOTE. The place of the Fut. in the conclusion may be supplied by the
game forms of expression as are elsewhere substitutes for this tense ; thus,
"Eav ayv xara f&'ioo; <f>v^.KTTufAtv *ai rxovrufAtv, fi<r<rov av ^vvxivro r,/
el fl*0X^iai V. 1. 9 ( 595. )3). "Hy yo,(> tvgtQri Xiyeav ffoi TMUT', 'iyuy av
r^iwya/jv fo.6ot Soph. CEd. T. 839. *Hi ^' fif^i?; vix^ffufti^ fifAOt; ^? . . ota<Ji.
ffett i. 7. 7 (^ 583). Kav rovr, i<f>n t vtxuptv, <ra.v6' r,p7v -Trtfoinrcti i. 8. 12
( 584).
(y.) Ow* av awv etuftci%oif&i, ti oi voXiftioi . . iTctitaXevStttv, I should not,
then, wonder if the. enemy should pursue, iii. 2. 35. Wi ovv e>(>uyv iifteis trturvgioi
n $ov\ivafjt.ivovf, 'i/Jsiui at <rgof vftas iii. 3. 2.
(5.) E< /ctiv ibjouv cirogauvrcts ufAci;, TUVT ecu Icrxowovv , .. 'E-rsi o oou, . T.
X., //" / saw you in want, I should be considering this . .. But since I see, &c.,
V. 6. 30. Oi* av iiroitiffty 'Ayam'asj TatJra, i/ ^ttri y airov xXf<r, Agnsias
would not have done this if I had not commanded him, vi. 6. 1 5. E< $t roura
wavTf ivotov/jt-iv, olvra.y'rts v ti'X'ciiXofjt.ifot, V. 8. 13. E/' ^i) Ufts7$ ri\6tTi, iTogsuo-
fAlSot, civ ii. I. 4. - (y. and S.) E< /ttiv vobfftSlv n^rnfreif/.^v, eii&' ay <rt/v/;Ki^vul?7j(rci
vot no.} vDv civil/at. Ow^i ya^ av M5xoj jCti o /Satr/Xfyf iT/a/', / i%s>~etvoi/tt
rouf ivt^yirctf. Had I known this before, I had never accompanied you ; and
now I shall depart. For King Medocus would by no means commend me, should
I drive out our benefactors, vii. 7. 1 1.
(i.) Ef <rou ffTi^6u Soph. CEd. C. 1443. The use of i< with the Subj. is
almost entirely confined to the Ion. and Dor.
(.) E< (Ait \vauvu ctvrov, $ietias a'v [Ai no.} ouvtvirSt KOI.} fturdtrt vii. 6. 1 5.
E< 5i *aJ %uvn0t7ri ra. rt t>(>n xhi-^ai . ., rf|iTi isr) <rous -rorotftevs (cf. 'E<p' ov sX-
^a/T a, / TO"AXt/> 5/a?a/'?Ti) V. 6. 9. E/ t%oip.i, us TA^HTTO. eVXa tTa/au
^tj> Cyr. ii. 1. 9. Oi* a w^aSa/nv TOV ira'^a TOV iVijav, i/' / rat/r'
fircti Ar. Eccl. 161. Ei yaj yt;ar*i? if <rob' %Xou<riv S-geitrous, . . <ra.(?
rn.ura.ls v a cXXvvai vornf Eur. Or. 566.
(.) Ei J i/3ri T?Tfl . ., 7ir av i-ri Tt/f vrovovi . ., xa)
^O/TO av avr>;y Yen. 12. 22. As/vav av ifi, i/ v^v fj.it . . 99yyv&put . .
I^;ITI, iv 5l r^i rius Xf>ovw . . S-avaTij; i*Xa^Ti Lys. 179. 32. Ei fit*
vXeia iffifffa.i piXXu i*ava . ., n/(7; ay -rXia/Atjv t! 31 /tiXXoifH* V. 6.
12. Oi* av . . ayo^iuis, olVi xi . . dvititis P>- 184.
(^\ "Ecra^ii/fljttwy, "ya, ii n Jiairo, uQtXoi'nv ttlrov i. 3. 4 ( 601). 'Er/?at/Xiw-
ivftt, u(, ^y Jwvwyrai, aa'aXfV&a'iy iii. 1. 35. ETTy, si a.vToy ooiti Ifrietf %it.iouf t
on . . *ara*av0i av i. 6. 2.
OO4. REMARKS. 1. The condition is often (.) under-
stood ; or (/5.) instead of being expressed in a distinct clause,
ts incorporated in the conclusion ; or (/.) is expressed by a
relative clause, or by an independent instead of a dependent
sentence. In all these cases, the form of the conclusion is
CiJ. 5.] IN CONDITIOT^AL SENTENCES. 377
properly the same as if the condition had been formally ex-
pressed. Thus,
(a.) "E-n out av yivaie TM l/u-v a^fX^a) TO\I{AIOS, i/ati d\ <p/Xoj ; Would you
then [if I should now forgive you] be in future an enemy to my brother, and a
friend to me f i. 6. 8.
NOTES, a. Among the conditions most naturally supplied, and therefore
most frequently omitted, are those of inclination with possibility and of possi-
bility with inclination ; since these are the two great conditions of human con-
duct. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with av
to denote one of these ideas, the other being implied as a condition j rhus,
Ow* av yva/r<j, he would not be able (if he should wish), i. e. he could nc,t, i. 9.
23. Ot TOUT av TIS ti'rat, nor could any one say this, i. 9. 13. AUTOI pi*
av i-rogivfaretv, they could themselves have marched [might if they had chosen],
iv. 2. 10. 'Il^aj 5' avtiptjvtyuyt %g>ivctt, and I miyli t Itave said that we ouyht,
iii. 2. 24 Ov5' O.VTOV a,<r>>K>r{lita.i av WtXaiftiv, nor should we MV'.S/J to slay him (if
we could), ii. 3. 23. "HW av a*^Va//, / should most gladly hear (if I
might hear), ii. 5. 15. T?v iXjz/^/av lA./>sv av i. 7. 3. 'Oxv/jv p.lv av i.
3. 17. 'ESoi/Xtf^v y av, I should have wished, PI. Phsedr. 228 a.
b. To the use of the Opt. with av just noticed, may be referred its em-
ployment to express permission, or command in the softened or indifferent lan-
guage of permission; as, 2u /u.lv x.a/u.i,oi; av <ria.vTOY, you may now betake your-
self [might if you wished], Soph. Ant. 444. "AyoiT .* ^ara/sv av^' ix-ra-
luv Ib. 1339. Xwo7s av <1ffu> trvv Tei%ti Id. El. 1491. Its use for the Pres.
and Fut. ind. (S 595) may be referred in like manner to ellipsis.
c. From the different idiom of the two languages, the Opt. is often best
translated, as in the examples just given, by our Pres. potential ; thus, 'Ax A*
il-raiTi av, but you may say [might if you were disposed], vii. 6. 1 6. <t>a/*jTi
a Ib. 23. See also 600.
(/3.) BavXfl.'^jjv ' av, eixovTas uvriuv [_="* a-T/a/^/] KJ^ry, Xa^~v OC.UTOY i.
^tjv, r^iivot,T' av WOO,TTH a ISauXsra Mem. i 4. 14. "Avw TOU TO, TotttVTot
l^/v [=^ < ,") TO. Tato-vTO, /;^v], . . OVK av oia; T' riv PI. Pha^do, 99 a. Ni-
jtuvT's ftkv ov&tvot. av xarxavfl;v, ^TT*)^VT&IV ^f OLUTUV t>v$ii; av X/^^/>? iii. 1. 2.
"llircrf^ av ^^tift,oi TJ; irtaj vixtjs i. 5. 8. "Avrto av civ $ oca wot Iv ipn/Aia. ireir,(riia t
<tXXj e olx. av ToX^t*&/v v. 4. 34.
(y.) "OffTi; ^ ^^tiTcav <rvvei$s.Y [= ti TIS fuvii^i't^ O.IITUI vraoyfttXtixeit;, TOVTOI
\yu OUVTOT av iu$u,if&oviirccif&i ii. 5. 7.
$ 6O5. 2. The place of the Opt. in the conclusion is sometimes
supplied by the Ind. expressing such ideas as possibility, propriety, necessity,
habit, or unfinished action, commonly without av as, Oux %v Xec<7v. ti /u.-/i . .
S-notoiv i. 5. 2. Qlot ya,o, tl -ravt- -rgetiuftoiTa, prfiiov r,v iii. 4. 15. .'! TI; KV-
Ttu (pezvioos yivaiTa ivri^sixvutrfeti pauXe/u.ivo;, vrtoi TOIVTO; \foii~To i. 9. 1 6. See
Ib. 1, 19, 28; ii. 3. 1 1 ; iv. 1. 14; and 594. "iLx-r^av, ii aXaWra i.
4. 7. Aitr%gov yo,g %v TO, p,\v ipo, ^/aTscr^a^a/, 'for it would have been
base,' vii. 7. 40 ( 604. /J).
3. The conclusion has sometimes a second condition, to which it? verb con-
forms ; as, 'Eav V t> 'iXnfffi, alx, av etup.cio-oufii, si TIVO. iu*iTi vi. 1. 29.
"Hxovav . . on, ii ^tixfanv , ., ^v ^tv fiaukivvTect, ^tctGwovTai iv. 1. 3.
4 The particle av is sometimes omitted where it would regularly be insert-
378 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
ed ; as, 'T3.itr%vvo/tiv ftivrai, / . . tl^Ta-r^y, / certainly should be ashamed, if
I had been deceived, vii. 6. 21. E/ ' dpe'ivov ei 9-i< yvup-w i%ovtriv, turu%ris
t*W lyea Eur. Ph. 1200. E/ ^\ pri . . yo-ftsv . ., QoGov -TTx^ff^iv Id. Hec. 1111.
Auy/zfftv TI'S av^&Jy v^ft^atrlct x.u.ra.ffj^oi j Soph. Ant. 604. OUTS ^outr tXay
nor could she have done it ujiobserved, Id. El. 914.
5. Attic courtesy ( 595) often gives the conditional form to complementa*
ry clauses after words of emotion ; as, T&t Wctu/Actret, ti [= or/] . . rifas,
this I wonder at, that you place, PI. Rep. 348 e.
(iv.) Relative.
GOG. A sentence, which is introduced by a relative
(or by a similar particle of time, or place) referring to that
which is indefinite or general or not yet determined, has a
species of contingency ( 594), and may hence employ the
Subj. or Opt. ; the Subj., when a future determination is now
contemplated, but otherwise, the Opt. ( 590. 2). Which
mode should be employed will commonly depend upon the
preceding verb (^ 592). After these connectives V is regular-
ly used with the Subj. (sometimes compounded with the con-
nective) ; but not with the Opt., unless for some additional rea-
son. Thus,
iTt7v vrctgK TOUTOV, u [^definite, viz. Cyrus~\
TJV Ta/v. E/ t x,eti TU viysft'ovt wtfriuirofAtv, cu ([indefillitej av
'the guide whom Cyrus may give us,' i. 3. 16. *Ey&> ya,^ oxvoiw p\v av
vet TXaitx. if/.itiviiv, rif/uv J/j, . . <pooift*)v o' av TCU '/iyt/u.ovi) u $oit], S'<TO-^/,
* the vessels which he might give us,' Ib. 17. "0 n av $!, vrtio-oftai Ib. 5.
*(JTU oi t^cti*! (p/Xo; tlva/, TOVTV i'vd!>.oj ty'iyvtro iiri&ouXiuuv ii. 6. 23. 2t/
VfAiv fA\v av oi[jt.a.i iHvai Ttftias, OTOV civ ta i. 3. 6. "O'Tow ,4tv trT^ocTiryo; truing i"^,
Tflv ffr^itTnyov ?ra^xaXowv ovoftv oi o"%oira, TOV u^ayT^atTtiyov iii. 1. 32.
ri0v<rtav 5' ttftTv <roiif wgufovs ffTaSftovs ui av ouve!>/jt.ifa. p.ax,^oTa.Tov{ ii. 2. 12.
2/Tat/vra/ . ., J'rav [= ort av] oi eio%ovrif ffti/u.weairi Crr. i. 2. 8. "On ^' i'|a
riv 3i/vv ytv/vT, . . aV'AnTov ii. 6. 12. *Ey& $i,.e-roTetv [= aVert av] xa/-
{Of >J, | vii. 3. 36. 'YJrioiviv ei-ro 'iTfev, o-rort yv/u,va,<reti fiavXeiro i. 2. 7.
TV wv, ^<pj. Teioviriv, i-rv [= i(r/ av] a.lfftluv'ra.i ; Cyr. iii. 2*J . 'E-rav [= ivrti
vj d( TaX/v a.}.ifffr, ii. 4. 3. 'Er/' r/f d/&;xa/. fgt&gaf&ovrts iVrao'av i. 5. 2
"ICa>j jtttv av raj T/J, ^^up.at.i tTi^dav [=^ t?T/5>7 avj ? a^r/iva/ /3ut/X>!T/, .
X.O.KUI; <reiei> i. 4. 8. "E&;; KJ^w truiu./ui^,iia.v ii. 1. 2. ']wj/5>i ^1 T/ f/u^aya/fv,
iv. 5. 8. As/Va/ airot/, ^<j <r/>o<rfiii tear a \vtrctt . ., r^;v av otirw ffV[&-
eti i. 1. 10. 11^/y ctlrvii; x.a.rtt.ya.yot \. 2. 2. M^^/ av xaTa^rr^ii
i. 4. 13.
NOTES, (a) The omission of av with the Subj., in sentences like the pre-
ceding, is most frequrnt in the Kp. ports, and rarest in Att. prose. (A) In
Epic similes, as presenting imagined scenes, the Subj. sometimes occurs in rel-
ative clauses; as, "il<rn X/> nilyivuaf, e'v pet xvvit . . lluvrcti P. 109. 'flf t
TI -rou ariXaef H. 16.
( v. ) Complementary.
GOT. As the complementary sentences which it is most important
CH. 5.J IN COMPLEMENTARY SENTENCES. 379
here to notice occur in what is termed the oratio obllqua, it will be necessary
to remark upon the character of this form of discourse, and upon its distinc-
tion from the oratio recta.
There are two ways of quoting the words of a person. In
the first, we simply repeat his words, without change or in-
corporation into our own discourse ; as, He said, " / will go."
This is termed DIRECT QUOTATION, or in Lat., ORATIO RECTA.
In the second, we make such changes and insert such connec-
tives as will render the quotation an integral part of our own
discourse ; thus, He said, that, he would go. This is termed
INDIRECT QUOTATION, or in Lat., ORATIO OBLIQUA. This dis-
tinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of persons,
and even to general truths and appearances.
NOTE. Of these two methods of quotation, the former is dramatic in its
character, presenting before us the speaker in the utterance of his own words ;
but the latter is narrative, simply relating what the speaker has said. This
relation is made in Greek, by the use either of the distinct modes with their
connectives or of the incorporated modes. We have occasion at present to
treat only of the use of the distinct modes. For the use of the incorporated
modes, see 619.
GO 8. In the oratio obliqua, a thing is presented not as
actual, but as dependent upon the statement, thoughts, or feel-
ings of some person, and consequently as having some degree
of contingency. Hence it is properly expressed by a contin-
gent mode. This use, however, is confined to the Opt., which
limitation may be explained as follows. The oratio obliqua,
from the very nature of quotation,. commonly respects the past,
and the cases in which it respects the actual present are too
few and unimportant to require special provision ; while in
those cases, so constantly recurring, in which the past is spoken
of as present, the very vivacity and dramatic character of this
form of narrative forbids the use of a contingent mode. Hence
the Subj. is used in the oratio obliqua only in such cases as
would admit it in the oratio recta, while, on the other hand, of
the distinct modes,
The optative is the mode appropriate to the oratio obliqua in
past' time.
With this Opt. &V is not joined, unless for some additional
reason. Thus,
*Hxt> ayytXaj Xsywv, en XjX/T&i? i*n "Suiwifis rot. cixgct, a messenger came
toying, that Syennesis had left the heights, i. 2. 21. ASreti yfturcav O.VTOUS,
nvt; tnv. 'O 6\ \o/jt,r,vtv; nwt Yligfirn, oft Ttzoa. QxffiXiia; Togii/oivro TPO; ro
fa.T^a.'rnv. A.I dt aTs^o/vavro, on oux ivrotJuQa. E/'JJ, aXX* dwigai oirov fa.pu.ffa.y-
fyr,v iv. 5. 10. ' Qt t'lvriv o 2arw0of on olf/.u^iiri, it i/.vj oricawviiTinv, iirr.Piro
' "A* 5s a-ieaVM, olx. 0.0 ,". if"n, " olfAu^o/uia.! ;" H. Gr. ii. 3. 56. "O n ^t foirtffot
it $it<rr,/tvt ii. 1. 23. "E.nr&ovrt ol ^tv "EXXijvij, on /W/Xsvj . . iv ro7{ ffx,it,a
380 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
Qogois t*ri, QxffiXtvs 5* ay %xovft Tiffffettyigvou;, on ol "EXX;vy vixuiv \, 10. 5
*Ey/yyy<rxTe, 'on oTcrs/ct"Taf t'lvi iii. 3. 4. 2^? Tao"/y jjj tt'oxti ilvacu on i
e*raXaj t'l'w iii. 1. 10. *Hyve/, a n TO irat,6os tin iv. 5. 7. 'ViguTUftnvos ^, T*a
$et<roi ttri iv. 4. 17. 'EiTfv$yra ^T/ TOU 2'vVay, voTtoa, <TaX / tc/aj ;'; ) <fiiXo 9
vii. 1. 14. 'ExaXf/ . ., /u,vvf&t]v raXa/&v ffvrtoftaTtuv s%ouir', v(f>' av B-oivai fttt
alTo; Soph. (Ed. T. 1245. 2xaT*v, u* fcC*/MM> ii. 4. 24. 'O $' t^Xira.
>, OT/ . . -T^awj Xya/ i. 5. 14. 'E^^*aay, oV< ovba.fx.ou K-vaa; QOIIVOITO i. 10.
16. T/a-<raipvjj 5<XX< (Hist. Pres., 567. a) rav Kt^ay Vo; rev aSsXffay,
; lonayXwa< awTw i. 1.3. See i. 6. 3.
GOO. REMARKS. 1. The Greek, from its peculiar spirit
of freedom, vivacity, variety, and dramatic life ( 330, 576),
often interchanges and blends the forms of indirect and direct
quotation, commonly passing from the former to the latter, but
sometimes the reverse. Thus,
A.) A sudden change is often made from indirect to direct quotation.
This change may be made either (a.) after the introductory particle ; or
(/3.) in the body of the quotation, commonly after a relative, a parenthetic
clause, or one of the larger pauses, and in the last case with the frequent
insertion of tiff]. Thus, (a.) H^vos ttviv, on " AVTOS /'<*<, ov Z,>rt7s,"
Proxenus said, " I am the very person you inquire /or," ii. 4. 1 6. O< 2 T'Tay,
tn " ix.a.vo'i lo~fAii> ' V. 4. 10, "Iffu; ay *'Ta/v, on " u 2^x^a<rf, /u.ri Qacufita^t
TO, Xiy'o/^ivac, " PI. CritO, 50 C. (/3.) 'Eor^J/xyyf ^, " us tuyit!i$ tin, hy-p'ovx
" ^gJJya/ oifiavcti) fASfAvnf&ivvvs otras Tt vtiju^'is KUTOI x.a.6* OI.VTOV; vtvixriX.ee.Tt
xaci vavf tlXYityoiTt" Hk Gr. i. 1. 28. "EXyy, on " op^us $nvTo . .. 'AXX*
iyai,' 'i$ti, " 5vyxaa"^>}y." * A.<x"ixgiva.To, on " oublv ay TOIITUV il-rot tig T^V ffTpoi*
T/ay tifjttts Jf ^yXX^Tf," ttyri, " tl fiovhto'01, XiytTt " V. 6. 37.
G 1 O. B.) Indirect quotation, without losing entirely its character,
often adopts, in whole or in part, the modes and tenses of direct quotation, a*
the Pres., Fut., and Perf. ind. for the Opt., the Subj. for the Opt., &c. Thus,
'KTU iT-ray, OTI ivi TO ffTgacTiup.0, yxovriv, i'Xfy'y, OTI TO ffT^xTtvftx ac.iro'Si'Suri,
H r lu'ii tlti'i/ sniii. tlutt they . are i were come for the unin/. hr rc/i/ii'tt, that he re-
sign.sj resigned t/ie army (here the regular forms of indirect quotation would be
fixonv and a-TBo^a/w, while those of direct quotation would be Hxop.iv and u,-robl.
tupi, so that the person of the one form is united with the mode of the other),
vii. 6. 3. "Kyy, on ol 1uvrriTat i. 3. 2. 'TVa-v^/a p.\v jfy, on &yit (cf. "On
$ \<xi /3a-/Xes aya/) Ib. 21. OUTOI ?Xiyay, OTI Kvpt; p.tv riOvvixiv, 'A/>ta.7os ^
<XXa vrofyyia v'tpoivro ii. 2. 15. See iii. 5. 13; vi. 3. 1 1 ; vii. 1. 34. 'E$a-
-i/ 2jXa ilvai, OTI Ki^trovTon OLVTOV, |7 ris trnj'n<pioi vi. I. 25. "EXiye, art
*tt>} O-TO*$UV rixoiiv, a.v'>f, o'tTivts Ixttvo} tffovrett ii. 3. 4. See Ib. 6.
^ O 1 1 . 2. The use of the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, may extend not
merely to the leading verbs in the quotation, but also to verbs joined with
these by relatives and other connectives (cf. $ 619. ); as, "EXyay, OTI . . tin
. ., oY ^-TIJ Hxeitv, 'through which they had come,' iii. 5. 15. "EXiyav . .,
ITI TU.VTO; |/a Xtya/ 2fyVjf %n/u,uv ya.o lit], 'for it was winter,' vii. 3. 13.
Even though an infinitive precedes; as, 'Eoa, ayi/v TO ffTa.rivpa. XO.TU, pio-ai
r TUV voXtpiuv, on ixu fioio-iXivs *, 'because there was the king,' i. 8, 12.
3. In complementary sentences, where doubt is expressed, and a primary
CII. 5.] VOLITIVE. - INCORPORATED. 381
tense precedes, the Suhj. is sometimes used, especially in the 1st Pers. The
connective is sometimes omitted, and even the leading verb itself. Tints, Oi*
o/T, I/' X^t/<ravT rovnu $& Cyr. viii. 4. 16. BottXn SC. u;\ &a.$&/u.a.i j \V\lt
tliou I take? Soph. Ph. 761. QiXtis piivufttv ; Id. El. >50. EiVs /SayX
v^afffns *l <piXjj PI. Phaedo, 95 d. Al. \.\a.^a.tvu rot trtwaiv. . . AI2X.
[Sc. Ila^am?; y;J 'Eyi a-ieu-ru ; Bacch. I advise you to be silent. yEsch. /
be silent? Ar. Ran. 1132 (cf. 537). The use of the Subj. in 595. y
may in like manner be explained by ellipsis.
B. VOLITIVE.
6 1 2. The most direct expression of an act of the will
( 329. N.) is by the Imperative mode ( 169. 4). For other
less direct methods, see 597 - 600, 602. 3, 604. b.
KKMARKS. 1. From the fondness of the Greeks for passing from indirect
to direct forms of expression (cf. 576, 609, 670), the Imperat. is some-
times found in dependent sentences ; thus, 0v*jTo,- V 'O^io-TVi UOTI ^ A/a*
a<rv, and Orestes was mortal ; so that [do not grieve] you should not grieve to
excess, Soph. El. 1172. Y^a.^u 2j, UT-TI, civ &ou^w<r$t, xuoorovvtros.Tt, and 1
will propose it in writing, so that if you will, [vote itj you may vote it, Dem.
129. 1. AsH-au, art, &>v p.iv itp'uvrxi, . . x<ra<r^Wv, to show them, that, what
they desire [let them gain they must gain, Th. iv. 92. 'E^ravs^wra; TX;V,
vut 'ncf^ttytiui Tttlf <wS7j {/' -X^UTOV iv rovf rif*.7v ot.giirx.OY x,s'tir6w PI. Leg. 800 e.
OTir^' ouv S ltt.7ov ; Do you know then, what [do] you should do ? Ear. Hec.
225 (cf. O7<^' ovv S $(>eiirti; ; Id. Cycl. 131 ). Ol<r0' u: -rointrav ; avr) TCUV /-
jMtxwv Iff 1 uvroixot><rov, no.ro. x/V uLros fJt,o.^uv Soph. CEd. T. 543. 'AXX' oitr?
ftoi <rvfjt,'Va.\9v ; Eur. Heracl. 451. OT<r^ vwv a pot yiv'teSu ; Do you know
then, what [let be donej must be done for me? Id. Iph. T. 1203. <I>vAaxf,
01 teyevrw Hdt. i. 89.
O 1 3. 2. In general but earnest address, the 2d Pers. of the Im-
perat. is sometimes used with <ra.s, or r/j, or both, instead of the 3d Pers. ; as,
X&t/ oii/oo TO,; V7rvi(>'trv); rs/s, TxTt ff<pivdovtiv T'IS ftoi $OTW, Come hither '
every man alias, bird\ of you ! Shoot, smite. Let some one give me a sling,
Ar. Av. 1186. 4>wA.arr ras ns Ib. 1191. "Ira ns, EiVayyEXXi Eur. Bac.
173. See 500. a.
3. Such familiar imperatives as Hyi, iivi, /$, and <p^, may be used in the
singular, as interjections, though more than one are addressed ; thus, "Ayj 5,
u,x.i)uffa.ri Apol. 14. Wi-r't p.oi, <ri Ta-ff^tr, uvb^is ; Ar. Pax, 383.
4. An act of the will may respect either the real or the ideal. Hence in
Greek, as in other languages, the Imperat. may be used to express supposition
or condition; thus, "Opus t il^aSu pot, but yet [let it have been said by me]
tuppose me to have said, Mem. iv. 2. 19. IlXavrs* rt ya.^ . ., xctt Soph.
\nt. 11 68.
C. INCORPORATED.
6 1 4. I. The Greek has great freedom in respect to
the employment of distinct or incorporated sentences, and in
respect to the mode of their incorporation. Thus (.) a de-
pendent clause may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (/?.) its
sutyect or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in
382 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III.
the leading clause, leaving it otherwise distinct ; or (/.) its
verb may be also incorporated as an Infinitive; or (3.) its verb
may be incorporated yet more closely as a Participle. The
union often becomes still closer by an attraction, which renders
the subject, of the Inf. or Part, the same with the subject or an
adjunct of the principal verb. This attraction has three forms ;
in the first (.), the principal verb adopts the subject of the de-
pendent clause ; in the second (.), the. Inf. or Part., referring
to the same person or thing with the principal verb, adopts the
same grammatical subject ; in the third (??.), the Inf. or Part.
adopts for its grammatical subject, an adjunct of the principal
verb. E. g.
a.. "Hitrhra, an <ro Mtvwvof ffrt>a.Ttuf&a. tj^t] iv K/X/x/a iTv, he perceived, that
the army of Meno was now in Cilicia, i. 2. 21. Aiyovtriv, on i*} TOUTO 'i^x, 9 '"
veti Cyr. i. 2. 6. Ylapaxii/oi^ovro, oiruf xa.ro, KO%V$W iiro<.*.otj<riv Th. ii. 99.
/3. H Htff0i<ro TO Tt Mfv&ivd; (rr(>a.rtvf*,a,, on fl^x it KtXixia %, he perceived the
army of Meno, that it was now in Cilicia, i. 2. 21 v. I. 'ILxlyovro <rmj, us
yiyvuirxovfft Vect. i. 1. See 425.4, 551. a and /3. for examples,
see 551. N.
y. Aitrffttvoftivos avrovg ft'iya fot^a, fiairtXiT Actgii/v ^vvxtrffcei, perceiving them
to have great influence with King Darius, Th. vi. 59. Tlet/iHrxsvci^tTa fiayftTv
Th. iii. 110. lliirrovf vififH Ifurxo-ffttv CEc. 4. 6. r HX^v . . (ZonfaTv TV #u-
rftii Ages. i. 36.
3. Oy ^uvKftut . . ffl oc,la6tff6a.t ftiu[ttvov, I cannot perceive you attempting,
ii. 5. 4. \\xi<rKiv.' t tTo ya,(> -ro/iiuffo/tivos H. Gr. iv. 2. 41 ( 583. a)-
"Eflrija.^-! Tivet iaouvree, ii. 5. 2. 'E^^o^etj^a . . @ori0riffovTts revraif vii. 7. 17.
y and 6. "EJo^tv uuToJs ^ra^/rwrja i; revs A.etxtba.ifj.vious tJveti, run ^i*
\yx,y.r l fjt.u.r(tit Tioi fjt.v}6\v a.'ToXoyriffOfit.ivoii;, , . onZ.uira.1 at Th. i. 72.
i. For examples, see 551.
. ']i.voftigo/u.tv eifyei iiveti [= fi/u.cis a.'uvs Tva<], we thought that we were wor-
thy, Cyr. vii. 5. 72 (cf. Na^/2^* ycto ifta,urov toixivxi Ib. V. 1. 21). Na,iui
. . a3^a ee.ya.6ot ct-roxnivuv [= oietwrov ai-roxriivovTa. , consider yoursdf putting
t<> di'utU a ijood man, vi. 6. 24. OT^a/ jlv< Tiftios i. 3. 6 (cf. OJJua; ^tv, MX 5'
iyu, Anfi/'v /*i PI. Charm. 173 a). 'O^w /utv l^a^a^Taywv Eur. Med. 3:")0 cf.
'Oou di fjt tgyov Ss;vy i^tigyet/rfAitnv Soph. Tr. 706). Owx a KOI'ITTUV ifiit u*,
TotUTOt, irgavitet).i7ro Tabs ffiivovTUf, aXX* aTSg lu n$n ixvrov riTTova, oWa, TKVTCI
i Cyr. i. 4. 4. AjXa? npuv rov -rXourov Ar. Pint. 587 (cf. 'ATopwa*
dyaffui u.Tu.v<ruv outretv ttlr'ntt ifti Ib. 468). Sapjj avtp.i~ot. tpottvit; \a6^.0(
lit fiftH; yiyu; Soph. El. 23. See 627, 633. - and 2. 'Ea^a/v ou xct-
roaffouvris, x,eii rov; yrgetTiearett d-^&o/u.ivavi, they saw that they were uusuccessfut
and the soldiers displeased t 'fh. vii. 47.
W. "E^o^sv cuv aurnT; vvffxiuaiffa.[jiii*is & t*%o* xeti oTXiretf&ivoit ir^otiveti, it
therefore seemed best to them, that having packed up what ihcy lutd, a
themselves in full armor, they should advance, ii. 1. 2 ( 627. ).
$t>oiovvros Sf&f&a, <rov K.ae.rnyo^t.7, for your eye proves that you feel kindly, yEsch.
Ag. 271 ( 633).
^ O 1 J RKMAUKS. 1. An especial variety of coustruction is ob-
CH. 6.J INCORPORATED. 383
Served with such words as vvvotia., a-vyyiveua-xtu, loixa, oftotog lift'* 'TLyu ffi
ffuveAot [SC. ffl] . . f^u'i dvtffrciptvov (v. L etvnrroi.p.i*y}, I [know with you
your rising] remember your rising early, (Ec. 3. 7. ^vvii&ut yu.^ ro~; pi* . .
ytyivfiftivois (v. 1. rols . . yiy.v^f^'ivov;}, <rov; $t . . i/Xj<poTj Isocr. 319 e.
Svvoibo. IfAauTw <ro<pos uv PI. Apol. 21 b. ']L/u.o,urM ya.o %i/vfiiiv ovblv i-rtirTKfAi-
M Ib. 22 d. 'Ejuat/ra ^vvot^x, on . . Xiyu Ib. Ion, 533 C. "Es<xay /3a<r;AUj
tivai, you seem to be king, Cyr. i. 4. 9. 'Eoixan rvouvvitri fiaXA.o ri 'roXirtietit
ri^of^ivai, 'you seem more pleased,' H. Gr. vi. 3. 8. . "Eoixen ti\n67i ttgwxon,
you seem like one who has spoken the truth, i. e. you seem to have spoken t/ie truth,
PI. Ale. 124 b. "Eoixi y fcf<rr a.* v typo. Zuvrdivrt PI. Apol. 26 e. "(.\uiai
\vu -.< oux 0(>0w; ufAoXoynxotri Id. MeilO, 97 a. "0/u.oioi fa*9 Su.vu.a.'^tiv (.. /.
Ba.i/fta.^ovrts}, they seemed to be wondering, iii. 5. 13.
2. The contingent particle may be joined with the Inf. and Part., when-
ever it would be joined with the distinct modes of which they supply the place.
The Inf. and Part, are then commonly translated into Eng. by the potential
mode ( 588). Thus, E/ $ T/J ita<rei<rn0vvui civ a/Wa/, if any one thinks that
he could be deceived, v. 7. 1 1 ( 604. a). u il<r<rs xcti 3rv* v yuia.i vi. 1.
31. T a olofttfa -jrahlv (cf. T/ olopidix, vniffifffat) ; iii. 1.17. See vi. 1. 20,
and 595. /3. 'Q{ ouru fsgtyivofttvof civ TUV dvri<rr&<rtMT&iv, as though he
would thus prevail over his opponents, i. 1. 10. Tlj a,*.ov<ros av rou ^u^lov v.
2. 8.
6 1 O 3. From the intimate union prevailing between the Inf. or
Part., and the principal verb of the sentence, a word properly modifying the
one is sometimes placed in immediate connection with the other. We remark,
iu particular, (a) Such adverbs as a^a, ayr/'xa, tvfus, i,cti<pvvs, and ^sra^y,
joined with the Part, instead of the principal verb ; as, "A/u.ct <ra.vr IITUV av-
ff<m [saying this, he at the same time rose up], as soon as he had said this, he
rose up, iii. 1. 47. "Ocr&>? ftij, a/^a. dt'7rot)vr l <rxovTO$ TOV tivSgcairov, $tK<rxiboiYvuTKi
rt T^UX,* ^' Phaedo, 77 b. EWt/j ouv fti'tbuv o K'uftuXos vxrvrd^iTo, immediate-
ly, therefore, upon seeing me, Cephulus saluted me, PI. Rep. 328 c. *Hv ai/roTs
ift^u^toi, TO fttra^i/ vrogtuoftivous [tiri itrS'niv [AWTI vr'ivtiv, it was their custom,
while marching [in the mean time], neither to eat nor drink, Cyr. viii. 8. 1 1.
(6) A particle joined with the principal verb instead of the Inf. or Part., par-
ticularly a, and ov wifch (pnpi as, 2t/v w^7v ftlv a.t oi/teu tivai v'tfuog, with
you, I think that I should be honored, i. 6. 6. X^ir/^o/ a.v i'Soxovv UVKI v. 6. 1.
Ovx 'itya.oa.v livai, they said they would not go, i. 3. 1. 'E-yjj^sro KVTOV, il ovhi-
nuoi. Ovx i'ip>j [sc. Vx/Ti;/y], ' He said No? v. 8. 5.
4. In the use of the incorporated modes with adjuncts, there is often a union
of two constructions ; as, *Ayy<\Xt ' OOX.M wgoffrdiis [uniting ciyyeXXt S'
ogxcp and ciyyiXXt ^', ogxo* f(>oirTi@i'tf\ and announce I with an oath, adding it],
adding an oath, Soph. El. 47. "Or/ /3XXs<v $tri<roi dvKioovf^ivov; <roe,lis ficaXoif
Cyr. ii. 3. 17. TV fif&uv %ttf<rt<r0i ^(wv 0.060.1 [uniting T/' r,fj,uv *&ir,<Tta@t. and <ri
'SiYtiriirfa ypiv % i (>n(io.a(la,t\ \ [What shall you want of us to do with us?] In
what shall you wish to employ us ? V. 4. 9. TLri/vptif TUV av^dv <ruv ix <rr,f
ft'iffctffffat Th. V. 15.
G 1 7. 5, The Inf. and Part, may be used impersonally, as well as
the finite modes ( 546) ; thus, "fWi xai airy /utruftixuv ii. 6. 9. Msra.
piXov vro7s PI. Phsedo, 113 e.
6. From the familiar association of the Ace. with the Inf. ( 626), and the
Gen. with the Part. ( 638), words commonly governing other cases are often
followed by these in connection with an Inf. or Part. Thus, 'T^aj -r^rvmu
384 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK 111
xai df&titavetf xet} #(>oGuf*.origovs tJvui iii. 2. 1-5 (cf. 'Aya^aJV ft i>p.7v <rgo>rrit$
l7a iii. 2. 11). ria^ayye/Xa? Tjy trguTw %iXu>orvv tvtfffai Cyr. ii. 4. 3 (see
402, 424. 2). Ot^tv %%6iro o-vruv reZ.iftovvruv, he was not at all displeased
witli their being at war, i. 1. 8 (cf. *2iv6n; Ii %%0iro etiiru vii. 5. 7. See
372. a, 406). '11,- 'i^ovros tiroes \ftw Soph. Tr. 394 ( 375, 377. 2)
Sometimes the Ace. occurs for another case with the Part., if its use is analo-
gous to that of the Inf. ; as, 2e pit tu r^trtrovr' i<ri%aiu Soph. Aj. 136.
"H^y . . tlXoyoZvra. <rt Id. Phil. 1314. Cf. 406.
G 1 8. II. The relations of dependent sentences are ex
pressed with greater explidtness by the distinct modes with
their connectives ; but with greater brevity, and often greater
energy and vivacity, by the incorporated modes. There are
few of these relations which cannot be expressed by the latter.
Hence, in the wide range of their use, these modes may ex-
press the subject, the direct or indirect object, the time, cause,
purpose, manner, means, condition, restriction, preliminaries^
result, &c., of the verbs with which they are connected.
REMAKKS. 1. The use of both the incorporated modes is far more exten-
sive in Greek than in English. Hence we often translate the Greek Inf. and
Part, by finite verbs with connectives (that, when, while, as, and, if, although,
because, since, in order that, &c.). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom,
the Inf. and Part, are interchanged in translation ; as, T $t TUV tpiXuv p'ovot
eatro tidivKi pSffTov ov a^t/Xaxra Xa^u^ays/y, but he thought that he alone knew it
to be most easy to seize the unguarded property of friends, ii. 6. 24. Il^eartvur
vrttpj olf iGauXtro \et,vrov tyi'kCiffSou, to hold the first place with those by whom he
wished himself beloved, Cyr. viii. 2. 26.
G 1 O. 2. The use of the 'incorporated modes, particularly the Inf.,
is very great in the oratio obliqua ( 607), sometimes (a.) extending even to
subsidiary clauses (cf. ^ 611. 2); and being interchanged and blended not
only (/3.) with other forms of the oratio obliqua, but also (y.) with those of
the oratio recta. Thus,
^a/n 'AgiuTo; tJvai TUgrus Ixvrov ftiXriovus, o; olx u
i*/3jva< TJV ^v-^tiv, <ro(>iviff6u.t . . tij r'o-rev . ., in
PI. Rep. 614 b.
/?. ' A.yy'iX'kii Asoxj/XX/daf, OTI vix,euiv Tl ctu A.etx.ida.if/,o*ioi, xotl al-uv p\v
Ti6va.va.i oxru H. Gr. iv. 3. 1. ' lf f&lv ffT^aT^yriirovTot i/u.1 . . fttjoiif vfj.au Xi-
y'i<ru . . uf 5t -rtiffafteci i. 3. 15 ( 640). 'AwyyiXAv raji Kvgw, on raffu.vra.
i*H i'v^ov aya^a, o<ra. . . pi) ay iTiXi't-rnv Cyr. V. 2. 4. See 628.
NOTE. "On and us are sometimes even followed, after an intervening sen-
tence, by an Inf. or Part., instead of a finite verb ; as, E3Vi Si, on, " i<ri/Ba
ra%ifret rt aT^ttTi'ttt, Xi^>j, ii$li{ a, T o * i ft ^ t iv etvTOv" iii. 1. 9. 'Kva^/yiy on,
tt n ouTOf vetiSoi, avrot ay XafiTv Cyr. V. 4. 1. '\^yoj yaj, lu \ff6 OTI, us
\l*.a.VTov <rii6u, . . 1/u.i iUvcti rouruv ?ya PI. Gorg. 453 b. A!tr0a,y)/u,ai ouv trou
. ., on, o-roff ay ^>5 . ., ov ^vvetftivov Ib. 481 d. \\oui St o KXswy xai a
&V[AO<r0ivn(, on, il *ai ovroffovovv /ttaXXiy {vbu<rov<rt, $i<t<fifaYi<TaftiYovi urou( Th.
iv. 37.
y. "E^n "ilfXw vopvivfa, . .. 'Ey ya e ," tyn, " oil* " iv. 1. 27. Kxi-
MaXa fioXif," Jfip. " 5/a^a^a^yflf rf* Xtyi/y ya^ 'Aya^'f/oy on V
tin. . ."O/ttui 3i tiffiittu," <?, "ixiXtt/ix" vii. I. 39.
en. 5.] INFINITIVE. 385
/3 and y. 'Acrix^/vara, 3V/ " dxouoi ' A.0oxof&a
0TO.ft.Of i7y/ . . xav jt<i ^ ix.it, TV /xjv " i'ip>;
Ixi? ** TavT froui.ivffop.tiot" i. 3. 20.
(i.) T%e Infinitive.
^ 62O. I. The general rule for the construction of the
Infinitive is the following :
RULE XXX. The INFINITIVE is construed as
a neuter noun (^ 445). Hence,
(a) The Inf. may be the SUBJECT of any word which would
agree with a noun ; whether appositive, adjective, article, pro-
noun, or verb. () The Inf. may DEPEND upon any word
which would govern a noun ; whether substantive, adjective,
verb, adverb, or preposition, (c) The Inf. may be used, like
a noun, to express a CIRCUMSTANCE ; particularly such as are
denoted by the instrumental and modal Dat. ( 415), and by
the Ace. of specification ( 437). Thus,
<X>!/y5/v auToTs r<pX<rToy lirriv % fiftTv, to fly is safer for them than for us,
ill. 2. 19. Tij ovx KJCoXoutia, il-n TO <n \<7rt0r,iriffl?a.t xau \vffttv TW yi$t(>ot.v ii. 4.
19. AW* ivixytriv ^aXs?v troi Soph. Ant. 233. Ot^sv oJav Itrr [= roiovrat
irnv, Tav] axavo-eti, there is nothing [such as] like hearing, or, it is best to hear,
Ar. Av. 966. OwSiv oiov <ro KUTOV i^uTZv PL Gorg. 447 c. 'Ev ya.^ ru xga-
T-?V ta-ri xctt TO Xxft^ttviiv V. 6. 32. YL(>o$tt.iris . . TW utiooi^stv ffT^dnvf^a,
pretext for assembling an army, i. 1. 7. Il^a^affvv ffTo&Tzvuv ivi TOVS tj-
ce.tov; H. Gr. iii. 5. 5. 'Avr/Tao-^s/v Sk av^ti; Kiy^Dvos ii. o. 17. "A^|avTSj rou
d;am/v i. 4. 15. Tvj TOIK^' i->r'sff<rv, S-ott/ftcitroti fttv a|/, er-rou^; yi P.IVTIH
<rr>; \fjt.r,i oux. a|/ Soph. CEd. T. 776. KaXvftn TOV XKI'IIV i-riovrxs i. 6. 2
( 347). Qisx, ixcvXvi fictfftXils TO Kvoov <r TO an up at, $nzGa,iviiv i. 7. 19.
'Arfs'yvux.tvui TOU (AU.^ff6a.t Ib. A/a TOV \vrio(>xt7v ii. 6. 22. 'HyaXXsro T&/
IzxTiKTav 'bvva.fffot.i, TCU irXu.ira.fftlui "^tv^ti Ib. 26. Mav^avs/v ya^ fixo/xty Soph.
CEd. C. 12. ( \)ov<>u/u.ivi)i 011% '/ifna,; /u,avov, XXa KoCi TO xo.To.'X'tiriiv iii. 2. 19.
A/a TO -TXXy; ^ ;y uWgiTets xett %iet TTIY iwifAiXticiv i. 9. 27. 'Ilj ^raXs^try
TS ixetvoi ilrttroiv i. 1. 5. 'A^ioj'^avsf tifft%.0s7v ffTot,Tivfjt,a,Ti i. 2. 21. tE'aye/V
tfs/vcj, a terrible fdlow to eat, vii. 3. 23. As/vj Xsys/v ii. 5. 15. 'O^av ^TW-
l yvo; Jiv, xa/ T'/f <p&vJ7 T^a^w? ii. 6. 9. ITLgiwii ya,(> &>s Tuootwo; ilirooZv Soph.
El. 664. 'E-T/ y&o Ttx.7; vtzutn 'OKITTO'I ilfftv a.f*,vviirfot,i Th. iv. 10. 'Pa^Ta/ Si
t; TO &}*a.irTiff6ai Id. vii. 67. Yltutrti 3i x/zoftot p,t7^ov iXvrftas xXvstv ^Esch.
Ag. 266. Yl^iu Xtysiv Ib. 868. MtJ^o; XV^VTIOO; Xtyitv Eur. Iph. A. 318.
X~I, WAV* ytiva.ixo; ovvixoc, ffT^etTriXee.Tt7v, TXX' oiiSsv, w xax/iTT Tif/,uot7v tpikoit
Eur. Or. 718. OiV ofAoiov ovStv OUT Iffov $oTo7s, ?rXy ovofttiffeii, ' in nothing
except name,' Eur. Ph. 501.
NOTES. . Iii some cases it seems indifferent whether the
Inf. is regarded as the subject of a verb, or as depending upon the verb used
impersonally. See 546. /3, y.
/3. In Greek, as in Eng., the Inf. Act. is often used, where the Inf. Pass.
might have been used with reference to a nearer, more explicit, or more natu-
ral subject ; as, TWrwv <raoi^oyTa., giving himself up L for beating] to be beaten,
386 SYNTAX - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
PI. Gorg. 480 d (cf. Tlet^eiir^ri . . S-s^x-rtu^veti Id. Charm. 1 57 b). TTaji-
%ov<rtf fif&eif etUTOu; iv vrottTv ii. 3. 22. &t$u<ri fiovxeXnuriv tx.0i7vxi fig'ti^os Eur
Ph. 25. Ta/~> pxtrrois IvTuy^eivnv, the easiest things to meet with, Mem. i. b. 9.
'A-xoufizi fjiiv 'iff 00$ TKTIV xr^TJ, fatfiiviti 6 ovx. a,<rvfA($oo6* Isocr. 265 C.
632. REMARKS. 1. The article is often prefixed to
the Inf. to give prominence to its substantive character, or to
define the relation which it sustains as a substantive, by mark-
ing the case. If the Inf. is governed by a preposition, the in
sertion of the article is required. The article is often prefixed,
especially in the tragedians, where it would not have been ex-
pected, and is often in the Ace. (of direct object, effect, or
specification), where another case might have been expected.
Thus,
To 2f OVK MiXtiffuv, [willed not the doing it] were not willing to do it,
Soph. (Ed. C. 442. IltMo?uu TO ^" Id. Ph. 1252. "O* <ri xuXvtrti TO fyXt
Ib. 1241. 'EXftios . . ro ft* 9-etftTv Soph. Ant. 235. T^TUI TO p* Svs'r
Ib. 778 (cf. 370). Kafocts V igtWapai TO Sffltv Ib. HO 5. 'Eyu etinof . .
TO tri a,<fox/>iva,ir0ai PI. Lach. 190 e. Ta TI * p,vt fixivrtiv iroifia., and ready to
leave the light, Soph. El. 1079. To /u.iv vo<rra.\u.i<ffcatlv . . -r^oSu^os Th. ii.
53. Ta ffiyZv ov ff6ivu Eur. Iph. A. 655. 'Eya y*^ lxSaA.r fj.lv etTdou/^ctt
^KKO^V, TO prt }a.x.pj><ra.i X aZt>tf aftov/tKi raXas Ib. 451. For other examples,
see 620, 623.
NOTE. The Inf. with rov as the Gen. of motive ( 372) is particularly
frequent with a negative ; as, Toy p* nvas tiT>i<rcti, in order that none may in-
quire, Th. i. 23.
623. 2. The Inf., both with and without the article, is
used in a great variety of expressions which may be referred
to the Ace. of specification, and the adverbial Ace. When
thus employed, it may be termed the INFINITIVE OF SPECIFICA-
TION, and the ADVERBIAL INFINITIVE. In these uses it is vari-
ously translated, and in some of them it is often said, though
not in the strict sense of the term ( 343. N.), to be absolute.
Thus,
'E* $ti/u,ttTO( rev vvxTt^au, $oxi~v Ipoi, from some night vision, faccording to
the seeming! as it seems to me, or methinks, Soph. El. 410. 'Axx' i/xa<r/ /wi,
favs, but to guess, joyous, Id. (Ed. T. 82. *Ev tu -yaj ^ ftoi -rctvret, ytyvuffx.ui
tcttXuf Eur. Med. 228. 'E t TO axp&f [= u*pGZs, 449. 01 i/n7v, to speak
correctly, Th. vi. 82. 'O\iyov $m vXiious A*ixTov&<riv, have slain, [to want
little] almost a greater number, H. Gr. ii. 4. 21. M/x^aw $< Isocr. 70 e.
'Oxiyou [sc. Ji7v] vrcitrcti, almost all, PI. Phsedr. 258, e. K/ /umgav sc. $i?n]
Kxi79 i%iTga,%v}.i<riv Cyr. i. 4. 8. 'Ey Slav vroi/}i<r0' e^i K^swv, TO -rgetfo-m
HO.} TO 0owA.li/i/> Soph. (Ed. T. 1416. For other examples, see 620, 622.
NOTE. The use of iTvai as the Inf. of specification, or the adverbial Inf.,
will be particularly remarked, (.) with ix&v, chiefly in negative sentences;
(0.) with some adverbs and prepositions, followed f>y tln-ir ruses, cliiefly preceded
by TO. Thus, OW'TI c-t/v^'xaj ^-IK^/^HV ttcut iTvai, nor wwld I prove faint
* tna engagements, [as to the being willing] so far as di'pe.nih vpn-i my otvn will
CH. 5 ] INFINITIVE. 387
Cyr. v. 2. 10. Ovtt |$v/y U*y iT/ y'^uret wa^i^u?, ' willingly,' Ib. ii. 2. 15.
To vvy tivxt, as to the [now being] present state of affairs, for the present, iii. 2.
37. To ^i TJ?V S ? tiveti,for to-day, PL Crat. 396 d. To xra rovrov Tv/,
as to Me situation of affairs with resfect to him, i. e. so far as regards him, i. 6.
9. To tvt rovroi; iivect, so far as iepends upon these, Lys. 180. 41. To l-ri
r$Z; i7y< Th. iv. 28.
634. 3. PLEONASM AND ELLIPSIS. The Inf. (.) is
sometimes redundant, and (/?.) is sometimes omitted. It (y.)
not unfrequently depends jpon a word omitted, or implied in
another verb, especially in indirect quotation. Thus,
(.) Xa^v y<nS;%w<r,y i%uv, in return gives [to have] pleasure, Soph. CEd.
C. 232. Airyo-oftttt S< ir' ol pa.xov yi^us Xa^?y Id. Aj. 825. The Inf. added
for the sake of expressing an idea more fully or precisely is termed the Inf
epexegetic (iTiZwytinxos}. (/3.) E/j ro fiatXaviTov fiovXofx.a.1 [sc. /sva/] Ar. Ran.
1279. 'E*At>o*t . . Tai/j 'iv^ixet Ivri <roy ^a^ttsyjjy H. Gr. ii. 3. 54. "K<p} o
*O^ovT}j [sc. oiViiu ffow<ra.i], Orontes [said that he had so done] assented, i. 6.
7. (7.) O/ s ffipuTTtiv ix'iXtvov el yu.(> av ^uva,ff6ot,i *oj>iv0wvKt [sc. i'^airav],
few* </iey Aade Aim &7Z <Aem ; /or [they said that] they were unable to proceed, iv.
5. 16. See vii. 7. 19.
625. 4. The Inf. often forms an elliptical command,
request, counsel, salutation, exclamation, or question ; as,
2w fioi <pee/v [sc. WiXi], do you [/j/eose to] fe me, PI. Soph. 262 e. M^
\ft\ a.lriuff6eu rovruv, do not blame me for these, Ib. 218 a. 07? /*j vtXei&ti
^sch. Pr. 712. 0io/ iraXrVa/, f*.j p,& ^ovXitut rv%i7v [sc. $ori] 1 Ke ^f)O/s of
the city, O [grant] that I may not fall into slavery! Id. Sept. 253 (cf. T ft Zi,
So? /tti rttra.ff6ett ftogov -rasrjaj Id. Cho. 18). N/x, Qwyysvou, . . &iff6u,t r^o-rett-
av fifta,;, O Victory, befriend, grant that we may erect a trophy, Ar. Lys. 317.
K.< fa.^a,ffrytva.i <ra.vr'i [sc. tars, wagaivu, or Ss?], and /e< it be impressed upon
every one, Th. vi. 34 (cf. U.^ettTrtru Ii <nvi xai rtis Ib. 68). KHP. 'Axav.
T6, X<w roiff o-rXira,; . . a,<riiveti [sc. xsXsvira/, Ss?, or ], Herald. Hear, ye
people ; it is ordered that the hoplites depart, or Me hoplites must depart, Ar. Av.
448. Tov J i^avra . . x.a.ra.6vttv V. 3. 13. Tov "lava, %aigtir SC. xtXivea], 1
bid Ion hail, PL Ion, 530 a. 'E/*\ va.6t.7v rttii [sc. luv'o* Irri], <f>tv I That I
should suffer such things [is horrible], alas I JLsch. Eum. 837. r H fictcriXiu,
xoregov Xtytiv . . n fftyeiv [sc. #gJ, Of xt\tuni\ \ Hdt. i. 88. r A ^<Xo/, ^rao 1 '
^v; x. 431.
NOTES, a. In exclamation, the article is usually prefixed ; as, <f>D, TO xai
Aot? E?V <r/>'o<rq>6i'yfAa. roiovb' eifyos I Ah, the hearing the voice of such a man I
Soph. Ph. 234. T5J; ru^ns I To ipl vy xX^ivrtt ltv rv%t7v ! My ill-luck!
That I should happen now to have been summoned hither! Cyr. ii. 2. 3 ( 372.
). I1EI20. To S* ip.1 Ko^uv-n <rti6!>fjttvoi, roy a^X/ay / obov vri^itX6i7v ffretitet
-Xe?y >5 %iXiet! ET. To ^' ^i xoAo/y srttSbp.ivov, <rov ^vffftogov ! avrofiro$*iffeu
ravs oyu%ets ruv tictx'rvXuv 1 Ar. Av. 5.
/3. In a few poetic passages, the Inf. follows l ya,^ or tlh, to express wish
(cf. 597, 600. 2) ; as, A; y^ . . l^iftit . 311. See . 376.
626. II. The sttfy'ec* of the Inf. is very often, either
properly or by attraction ( 425. 4, 614), the direct object of
388 SYNTAX. - USE OF MODES. [BOOK III
a preceding verb, and consequently in the Ace. Hence has
arisen an association between this case and the Inf., which has
led to the following rule.
NOTE. The Inf., on the other hand, extensively constitutes an indirect ob
ject of the verb or other word on which it depends. From the prevalence of
this use appears to have arisen the resemblance in form of the Greek anc
Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the use of the prepositions to and zu before the Inf.
in Eng. and German. Thus, nivtixi rov pdvnv Xsys/v, had persuaded the
prophet [to the saying] to say, vi. 4. 14. Tow? q>vydl.s ixiXtua-t trvv uvrtf
fr^ctriuttrffeti, he invited the exiles [to the serving] to serve with him, i. 2. 2.
RULE XXXI. The SUBJECT OF THE INFINI
TIVE is put in the Accusative ; as,
*H/at/ . . dotiqvctt 01 reiurctg ra.% voXtis ftciXXov, r, Titrffct^i^vriv cig%uv etiiruv,
be requested that these cities should be given to him, rather than that Tissuphernen
should rule them, i. 1. 8. Kjvouvsutiv ouz iSou&ovro, VTO A.iju.av <ri <xu.Qt~iv XUTO'JS,
did not wish to incur the risk [that they should suffer any thing] of their suffer-
ing from hunger, Th. iv. 15. NEA/V voin<riv iviftive-v rtXttr^vxi Id. iii. 2. <!>-
ft ' ol ffoQoi, . . 3-tavi xeti ctvSc^ufov} rtjv xotviaviuv crvvi%tiv PI. Gorg. 507 6.
GSJ7. REMARKS. 1. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf.
considered simply as such. If, on the other hand, (a.) the subject of an Inf.
has a prior grammatical relation, it may be in any case which this prior rela-
tion requires. If it is the same with the subject of the principal verb, it is
seldom repeated, except for special emphasis or distinction ( 614. ); and is
. then commonly repeated (as in other emphatic repetitions) in the same case
(cf. 499). Not unfrequently (/J.) there is a mixture of constructions which
may be referred to ellipsis or anacoluthon. Thus,
. T Hx^ov ifi rivet ruv toxovvruv ffoQvv tiveti, I came to one of those who were
thought to be wise, PI. Apol. 21 b. Talf ov^ivi i-rirgi-^/ ovra.s Kctittu sTva*, wht
iL'ill permit no one to be bad, iii. 2. 31. Nt/v rot i^itrriv, u Sivotyuv, civ"Soi yt
t'urSiti vii. 1. 21. '0^*oA.oy/V ovv iri^i I/At ei^ixos [= ci^ixav <rt] yiyivw6a.i \
Do you confess then [to have been unjust] that you have been unjust to me f i.
6. 8. Tauro 3' i-rain ix rev %ctXi<rot iHveti, and this he effected by being severe,
ii. 6.3. I \a.ff6u.i etirof ro r^u.v(jt,u. <pn<ri, he says that he himself healed the
wouna, i. 8. 26. *O ^i Cifiv, art ff<riifa.<r6at,i fiovXotTO, i<p' u prirt ai>ro{ rout
"EXAjf utixtii, pvrt ixiivov; xet'mv ret; eix'ietf iv. 4. 6. N<y<i<; r t u.af
ftiv a,ti%tff6a.'t <rv, ct u r o s %i ruvr'/jtriiv \ xoii fif&iif ff.lv a.To^f]fit7ff^ai fov, ffu
It abli ovru ^rttuffiirStti t Dem. 580. 9. See s 614. ^.
/3. ^ioff.a.1 i>f4.etv, Si civ^gi; ^utourrcii, ret "bixctiet [SC. vfietf] ^/ntylffotffScti, Iv-
tvp.ovp.'ivouf, I entreat you, Judges, [that you would vote] to vote what i
right, reflecting, Lys. 118.2. Kaxovoyou ft.lv ya,(> \<rn, xfiiiivr a.-rofoe.viiv
ffr^arviyov St, ftet^efttvov roTf oro\tftioif Dem. 54. 1. Ou y^ ft* T0f rou KtJ-
(>ov rgovrou, %%ovTct fjivt ^ttiovcti i. 2. 11. "Su/u,Gou^tutt ref SivoQ&vri, tXSov-
ret tif AiX^oi/y [sc. Ixtivov] avctxamuircti rei B-iu, he advises Xenophon [that going
to D. be should consult] to go to Delphi and consult the god, iii. 1. 5. "E$oi
etvraTf, #gatpv>.ctxa,s x etrct <rrri <r a, y ret. f ffwyxet*.i7* iii. 2. 1. To/V wiXra-
ffvot.'If ireift ira.(>riyytXXi ^iriyxuXufAivouf 1'tvee.i, . . xcti rotif re^oraf ifi-
SiS^irfcti V. 2. 12. 07{ i% (>%*: ii'T^i^iv, Y! fictff^iuv u i iir iv i7v/, f) a, I rout
r <p^>ff^l Ixavov; PI. Gorg. 492 b. T IL <rat.Litrrt pi* ffrim* ir\9inau -retr^cao*
CH. 5.] INFINITIVE. 38tf
Ti, fo^ifTi d Xyy ; Too-ovdi <rov %govau etXix.<rget ytj^or
Soph. El. 959. 'Ewi^rw <ri [for which <roi might have been used, if
allowed by the metre] TM xriguyftKTi, tying <rs/Vf, iftuivnv, . . us OVTI yqs
TVO-$' avor'iu puiffTo-Jt Id. (Ed. T. 350.' See 459.
2. Cases of special attraction and anacoluthon likewise occur in connection
with the Inf. ; as, 'EX<T<a/y . . olV uv OC.VTOS, ou$i at [for TOUS] 1% O.VTOU, -ra.u-
Hdt. i. 56. Tovs $i etvoKoivKo-doit, . . cturoi "^utriiv Ib. 2.
3. The subject of the Inf. is very often indefinite, and is then commonly
omitted. It follows from the rule, that words agreeing with this omitted sub-
ject are in the Ace. Thus, 2HK. Otiee/tus *? 3i7 aStxuv. KP. Oy JJJr*.
2ilK. Ou$l ot^ixovfAivov cigtt, oLvraSiKiTv. Soc. One ought then by no means to
injure. Cr. Surely not. Soc. Not then, whtn injured, to injure in turn. PI.
Crito, 49 b.
628. III. By a mixture of constructions, the Inf. is
often used after a connective (commonly &>$, waif, oto?, or
oao?), instead of a finite verb, or of the Inf. without a con-
nective ; as,
K) xosTa/va us liri TOV trtgov olvetGttivtiv, and were descending, so as to as-
cend the second [= us dva,&a,7iv, that they might ascend, which is the reading of
Dindorf and Kriiger], iii. 4. 25. c YVs>.a<ry yj <rwxvr^a-cti, riding up to meet
him, i. 8. 15. Ylorctfitos voffovTOS TO fioifla;, u; (trioi TO. oogotrct utfig'txuv iii. 5. 7
Tlj jMjy 9-tmXavn [sc. XoyoJ] iivr<7v, [so as to speak with a discourse bringing
all together] to speak comprehensively, to say all in a word, iii. 1. 38. 'lij B*
iv /S^a^s? /T/""y, but to speak in brief, Ag. 7. 1. 'ttf tiros il-riTv, so to speak,
PI. Gorg. 450 d. "Hf yi at/rua-i Vo^ai Id. Rep. 432 b. 'ilj piKoov piya,\<a
tixaiffui Th. iv. 36. "Hj y \fjt-a} %vf0eu x^tTtj Eur. Ale. 801. 'loXtiv sXs^aj,
s y t-rnxci^iiv ipi, you speak of lole, [at least for me to conjecture] methinks,
Soph. Tr. 1220. 'Hj ra.'l.u.ia. tUveti, considering [that they are ancient] their
antiquity, Th. i. 21. BaJXsra/ vroviTv, u<rn <ffoA.ip.t7v, chooses toil, so as to be [or
that he may be] at war, ii. 6. 6. "E;& ya. rgiygu;, unrri i*.i7v TO IXBIVWV <7r\o7~
at, 'so as to take,' i. e. 'so that I can take,' i. 4. 8. 'E<ro/Va, urn $!/ w-
vu i. 6. 6. Kguwyriv 5TXX) ifoiauv xecXouvrss ccZ.XriXot/$, uffTi a.i TOVS foXt-
fAiou; dxoutiv utrti oi ftiv \yyuTttToe, TUV troZ.ifii&jv xa.i 'ifyvyov ii. 2. 17. 'E^'
pri xetltiy iv. 2. 19 (see 530). *E<p' J vi vXa7a, ffvXX'iyw vi. 6. 22. "Owns
rnv ot-^X^v f&*l TOIOUTOI iffovTut ol fo'^.lra.i, oloi vrovw^ov TIVOS a,}ff^^ou 'i^you lift-
tirffxi, ' such as to desire ' f = TOIOUTOI oloi ,* itpiuvTo, such as would desirej,
Cyr. i. 2. 3. TotouTous etv6^u-Trous, o'ious fAidv<r6'i*Tt*t o^^ilffSm Dem. 23. 16.
"Offov t&'ovov ytufftuffSon tatiTey xctTOiXtTuv \_ ==: ToffouTov flavor o'cro* uv yiu<rctiTo],
leui-ing for himself so much only as [he could taste] to taste, i. e. merely enough
for a taste, vii. 3. 22. Ns/^o^jy*/' TI TO. O.VTUV ittota-Tai offov etvo^yv, ' merely
enough for subsistence,' Th. i. 2. 'EXs/crsra rtjs VUXTOS oa-ov ffx.oTa.lov; S/sX^rv
TO Ti'Siw iv. 1. 5. "Oa-a, (t'tvToi nbn "$ox&7v HUTU, but so far as [seemed to hinij
he could judge at present, Th. vi. 25. "0<roy yi p itiivai Ar. Nub. 1252. "O
n xa.!Jt tfiivui Id. Eccl. 350.
620. REMARKS. 1. It will be observed, that, in some of the ex-
amples above, there is an ellipsis before the connective, and that in some the
connective itself suffers attraction. From the frequent use of oJo; as above,
with an ellipsis of its corresponding demonstrative (^ 523 , it seems to have
been at length regarded, especially in connection with TS, as a simple adjective
of quality, and to have been construed accordingly; thus, "O7o/ TI lawi
390 SYNTAX - USE OF MODES. [BOOK 111.
riftiv ffvp.'TfiaQa.i Vioi rris ^tobov ;" O/ Ti titfov, "n "ixotvot tffpiv tis rwi %u
^a.* 6/<rAA./v." " Shall you be [such as to] able to cooperate with us respecting
the passage?" Ami they replied, " We are able to make an irruption into the coun-
try." \, 4. 9. '0 ya.o o"io( TI uv yiyvtvtrxttv n TOV; catpiXiftov; Ki><ro7; t xcei
TO'JTOV; ^vyeifttyof yrat-7v Ifi0up.i7v oiXXfaeuv Symp. 4. 64 (v 507. 7). Ow^J
elov TS v . . 'biiuxttv, [there was not such a state of things that one could pur-
sue] it was not possible to pursue, Hi. 3. 9. Ow otov ri <roi Xavtieiviiv, it is not
possible for you to conceal it, vii. 7. 22 ($ 403). Oti ya.% nv u^u, ola. TO wi^iot
eio^tiv, for it teas not a time [such as to irrigate] suitable for irrigating the plain,
ii. 3. 13. To * oa,y flu. fi'iyy, iiveti, *#/ [&?) oiav vtwrigw fioiiX.iua'Kffffiti, ' not suita-
ble for a young man to direct,' Th. vi. 12. 3uyyga.tptir0a.i Xoyw; olovs its
rv, ^iKKarrri^toi:, to compose discourses adapted to courts of justice, PI. Euthyd.
272 a.
2. By a similar mixture of constructions, -r^v #, f^on^av %, vffrt^t #, are
sometimes followed by the Inf. instead of another mode ; as, "Ta-T^av . .
O.LTOUS oixiffeti [for vffTi^av cj!icnreiv or vtrri^M rou oix'urett . Th. vi. 4.
(n.) The Participle.
O3O. I. The Participle, in its common uses, is either
preliminary, circumstantial, complementary, prospective, or
definitive; that is, it either (1.) denotes something preceding
the main action of the sentence ; or (2.) it expresses some
circumstance of that action ; or (3.) it serves as a complement
of the action ( 329) ; or (4.) it denotes a purpose or conse-
quence of the action ; or (5.) it defines some person or thing
connected with the action. See 618.
63 1. 1. As a Preliminary Part., the Aor. is especially
common. It is often best translated into Eng. by a finite verb
with a connective, or by the Pres. Part. ; as,
rov{
Cyrus received the exiles, and raising an army besieged Miletus, i. 1.7. M-
fetv i\6uv, Go and learn, Ar. Nub. 89.
NOTE. To the preliminary Part, may be referred the use of (tafuv and <r-
6ui wit!i ri or o n, to form an intensive (and often severe or sarcastic) ' why '
or 'because* \ thus, T/ ya.^ p.a.6'ovr i{ <rau; 3-iavi vS^irrv \ For having learned
what new wisdom did you insult the gods f i. e. Why did you insult them 9 or,
What possessed you to insult them? Ar. Nub. 1506. T< #a.0u<ra.t . . i7g<r< yv-
/<' ; Having experienced what change do they resemble women f i. e. How is it
that they resemble f Ib. 340. &txaiori(>ov TX iifAfrt^ov vrarigot <rvfroifti, o rt
t,' PL
p.a.6uiv a-aifovi unit eSreai tQGffiv, ' because he begat,' PL Euthyd. 299 a.
O32. 2. The Circumstantial Part, is very common in
Greek, especially in the Pres. It may sometimes be translated
by an adverb or a circumstantial adjunct ; as,
Auva^/v jflfM^iy u( piiKurTa. i5i/r inxgwrroftHof, ' as secretly as possible,'
i. 1.6. "A-j KoCi oto~<>t*.ives ttvov, 'in the beginning,' Th. iv. 64. Touf -re*..
Xi*f . . euro (^^afv^ei^au a.fea.p'ivovs, the most [beginning with] and particular-
ly Thrasymac/itis, PI. Rep. 498 c. TiXiurZ* t%*).uraivi iv. 5. 16 ( 457. a).
CH. 5.] PARTICIPLE. 391
'Avv<rctf re't%t AT. Plut. 229 ( 457. y).
l^tai xiXious, 'with 1000 hoplites,' i. 2. 6. 07 Xj/ga/*eyo< %u<rt, who live by
plundering, Cyr. iii. 2. 25.
NOTE. The participle 'i^uv, both with and without an Accusative, is joined
with some verbs, chiefly of trifling and delay, to give the idea of continuance
or persistency (cf. 637. a) ; as, lloToc. virob'nfttt.ra. QXuac.(>i7s 'i%w ; [Holding
on upon what shoes are you trifling?] What shoes are you trifling so pertina-
ciously about? PL Gorg. 490 e. "E%uv <p*.udt7s, [you trifle, holding on upon
it] you persist in trifling, Id. Euthyd. 295 c. A*ge/> *%*>* Id. Gorg. 497 a;
Ar. Ran. 512. TJ wrTf t%u ntf rjy dvgair ; Ar. Nub. 509. Ti 2%r
PI. Phaedr. 236 e.
G33. 3. The Complementary Part, is particularly fre
quent with verbs of sensation, of mental state and action, of
showing and informing, of appearance and discovery , of con-
cealment and chance, of conduct, and success, of permission and
endurance, of commencement and continuance, of weariness and
cessation, of anticipation and omission. Thus,
i/^ay b K/X/x/a aW, /<e heard [of Cyrus being in C.] <Aa Cyru
was in Cilicia, i. 4. 5. 'E&J^a ?rXs/ayo? ev^-ov, /te sa?0 &a /te/-e w?as weerf q^
more, vi. 1. 31. "I^S-/ ^svra* avo*i<ros uv, but know that you are senseless, ii, 1.
13 ( 614. . Cf. "And knew not eating death," Par. JLosf, ix. 792).
Kar^a^av avao-Taj ^oX/y V. 8. 14. E^sva/ truvo7ffav, to know that it would be
advantageous, Dem. 55. 2. Tl^a? av^cs wVS-sT rdtxv/uivti Eur. Med. 26. 2w-
c/^a l^WT*i *vra 'nJtivo-fAtvos i. 3. 1 ( 615. 1). <&ovii $tu; Soph. Ant.
996. "E/^s^yjjTtf ya^ ;V<!yy Cyr. iii. 1.31. TipufAivoi %tzigau(riv, they delight
in being honored, Eur. Hipp. 8. ' AvroXsifovrt; KUTOV as,%6ovra.t. . . "H^ovrai
ir^KTrovrif Mem. ii. 1. 33. MsTg.wiXavra aTa^SwxoTSj Th. v. 35. As^a-
xu~a.v yeXav Soph. Ant. 483. 'Era/-^;wv5^$ . . ^vatJvrs; Id. OEd. T. 635.
AS/IW f^ura, /u,lv ffoQo; yiyu;, iVs/ra ffuQguv Eur. Med. 548. Ki/^ov rs Isr/-
frooLTivovru. -r^earos ij'yyiiA.ci ii. 3. 19. 'E^fvo^sv 7j uftohoyriffa.^? $ix<xt'eif
auffiv ; PL Crito, 50 a. Ou y*^ tySovav TOIS tyotYt^u; <x \owrovaw i<pet/vt<ro i. 9. 19.
Ey'f/ff'xo* ovia.pt.ca; uv aXXt/f TOVTO ^a-T^a^a^evaj Isocr. 311 C. 0? v ^Xsy-
^Suffi ^/a?XXavTj ii. 5. 27. T^s^o^Evav sXac^avsv, [was secret being main-
tained] a;s secretly maintained, i. 1. 9. Aa^j7v airov oWsA&yv, ^o conceal from
him our departure, or, fr> d^pnrt without his knowledge, i. 3. 17. "Ofu; ptt} Xa-
^>j; ffiaiiTov iyvouv, that you may not be unconsciously ignorant, Mem. iii. 5. 23.
"Ea-r* v Xa.6tafjt.iii [sc. ^aj awrat(f] u^a?raT/ yjvo^eva^, till insensibly we become
water-drinkers, Cyr. vi. 2. 29. ITa^y frwy^avi, happened [being] to ie
present, i. 1. 2. C 0<rr/f i%0(>o; uv xugi7 Eur. Ale. 954. 'A%txi7<rt . . fo^iftau
cif>%ovris, you do wrong in beginning war, Th. i. 53. 'ExXs<Vsa-^/ iu vrotuv
Mem. ii. 6. 5. E/'TE* yrv^>j(ra/v . . sXovref Eur. Or. 1212. C H -raX/j ectiTo7s
ovx, IftT^i-^n vetf>a.aivov<ri TOV va^av Isocr. 268 e. Nixeapivn ya.^ OasXXaf au*
a^|ra< Eur. Heracl. 352. 'T-r^la^fv xxxus TOIOUYTIS v. 5. 9. A<*yav<r/
p.a.vSiivov'ris 'bixa.uHruvflv. they spend their time in learning justice. Cvr. i. 2. 6.
Air^'Say<r/ ftti.truffa.t Ib. 12. A/aywy/^a^sva/ . . 5/a<rXav<nv Ib. M^ xd,/u,r,s
Ifi/.ov civ^ax ivipyiTUv PI. Gorg. 470 C. 'E'Tat/a'avTa WaXe/ttat/vTSj vi. 1. 28.
*A dtfta.i ay ira.utra.t ivofcXovvrct ii. 5. 13. "Owvuf ^^ tySd.ffcao't ft,r,n o Ky^aj /ttw-
r o< K/X/XEJ xraXavT;, </taf neither Cyrus nor the Cilicians might anticipate
them in taking possession, or take possession before them, i. 3. 14. <$>6a.vovffi- iw<
va/ cix^M ytvoftivot TOUS x'o'b.if&iovs iii. 4. 49. Oi* i<p0*)o i tt w6'o(*.ivoi <rov ?T^<
rij> 'ArT.xijy iraXi^ttay, xott . . ^xov, they no sooner heard of the war wound At'
392 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK 111.
tica than they came, Isocr. 58 b. Owriwwv va,7$as evxir ccv <p6iivois, you cannot
now be too soon in begetting children, Eur. Ale. 662. Olx, v $0<ivais . . Xiyui
you cannot tell me too soon, i. e. tell me at once, Mem. ii. 3. 11. "Axx y 2*
\-vi\iltu X'tyuv PI. Phil. 26 b.
634:. NOTES. . With these verbs, the Part, av is sometime*
omitted (cf. 547) ; as, 2ws Mi [sc. *J], know that you are safe, Soph. (Ed.
C. 1210. E/ y't^uv KV^U Ib. 726. 2i liXufftt XKXOV [sc. oW] Ib. 783
AflXa? re yivvj,t*' ^ov Id. Ant. 471. Nwv ' a.y^o7tri rvy^oivti Id. El. 313.
/3. Many of these verbs likewise take the Inf. ; but often with this distinc-
tion from the Part. ; viz. that the Inf. denotes something dependent upon the
action of the verb, but the Part, something which exists independent of it.
Thus, "Ay a<r| t*.tt,0u[Atv a,yot ^jjv, if we should once have learned to live in
idleness, iii. 2. 25. "Iv (t.u.S'n ffetyurrYis *>, that he may learn that he is a
schemer, vEsch. Pr. 61. Tva/ rgitpuv <rjy y\u<rffu,v ruru^uTi^ttv, 'learn to keep,'
Soph. Ant. 1089. 'Eo-j^av yvuriv oLVHrrouptvoi, when they perceive that they
are distrusted, Cyr. vii. 3. 17. Miftvritrtia v*j a.ya,6os itvui, let him remember
to be a brave man, iii. 2. 39. 'AI.ifAvtjfAeii . . uxaua-ce,; vrori, I remember to have
once heard, Cyr. i. 6. 3. ToDrfl ftiv ovx, etiff%vvofAai xiytuv * n n uif%uvoi-
ftnv av hiyttv, I am not ashamed to say this (which is said) ; but I should be
ashamed to sav that (which from the shame is not said), Cyr. v. 1. 21.
y. The complementary Part, sometimes occurs with an impersonal expres-
sion, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple verb.
When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is sometimes implied in
the Part. Thus, 'Epoi -r^'tfoi v paXta-rct ivipiJLOfAivy, it would become me
most of all to attend, CEc. 4. 1. OJy oiifo a'-rag iXv<rir'iXvrt x-utlofi.ivetf Isocr.
174. 14. E/ voXipoufftv ftnvov iffTttt, whether it would be better for them to go
to war, Th. i. 118. Mso-roj v B-vp,>>u/u.tvos, I was sated with passion, Soph.
CEd. C. 768. ArjXa? jj"v Ktiu^.m i. 2. 11. KaTXoi yiyvavrui T^off-roiou-
ptvo, pi, ttiiv*,, ill'oTigli otfiv PI. Apol. 23 d. See 551, 614. <.
^ G35. 4. Prospective Part. This appears chiefly in
the Fut. Part, denoting purpose, commonly translated by the
Inf. (^ 583. a, 618. 1).
636. 5. The Definitive Part, is equivalent to a relative
pronoun and finite verb, and is most frequently translated by
these. ' It is often used substantively, and may not unfrequenlly
be translated by a noun. It occurs chiefly with the article, but
sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. Thus,
AZ6if i a f>y*ifo/Atvot elicits irriti, and again there will be no one who wih
guide us, ii. 4. 5. O/ fcr/MX<frtr(f (cf. 0? uWia Jx?ip0}ira) i. 7. 13.
Tavs IxTi^rruxoTcti, those who had been banished, or the exiles, i. 1.7 ( 556).
T/V 'yuvetftivois (cf. T/> yivivtri) Apol. 20. 2fvyyv . . Tout -rg9fft).0ovrs
O.VTV xui ruv aXXcjy rav /SawXfl^tvaK, ' and of the rest [him that wished] any
one that wished,' i. 3. 9. *H &ttft&nu Xy/*tv vyx>), the so-called necessity
Of Diomed, PI. Rep. 493 d. "Iv', a/Wif \K\~vns t%H Ji/'va^/* T*)X u$ix.ii<rov<ra.i
xcti x.a.rct&ovXufftfAivn* u.va.ira.f rov? "KxXwua?, ouru TTJV ffuffauffctv v/u.i7s x.a.1
Qov0y<reu<ra.v <T/irt* iroipYiv 'i^r,T\ 1 )-m. 101. 1 H. "Ar/zyr ycto roX/u-uiri $tivat
Qct'ivircti, for every t/tini/ Oftpe/tft futffiil to those irhu <ir>' rfnittniit/. Mnr. Ph.
870. lliTo*0i*ui . . itt A. ^, to htive suffered [what t;mls to harm]
OH. O.J PARTlLlKl.fi. 393
// itijtiri/, Soph. CEd. T. 510. A;as<pi/ Si raift'To^.v (Jt.tt.6uv (AYI ftottovTOS, xa.)
o yt/ff.vacffoi/u.tv,}, raw p.* yiyvp.va.rp.ivou PI. Leg. 795 b. See 447. a, 449,
469, 476.
II. The Part, with such verbs as fy
fyojUKt, &c., often takes the place of a finite verb,
either to supply some deficiency in inflection, or for the sake
of more definite or emphatic expression. Thus,
Tli-roinxus tin iv. 8. 26. TWay^ixu/ i. 7. 11. *H-av ix-rtfruxorn
ii. 3. 10. T Hv Sc evfov -ri-rovSui vi. 1. 6. Ef>; ^;w iv. 4. 18. TayVa iTf
ty<r ifl-T/v PI. Leg. 860 e. Hu$ . . JJT vraa-^ovris rd^i , Eur. Cycl. 381.
E7j frwyvtsii Id. Ale. 464. "Ayr/Saws iVi/ Soph. Ant. 1067. MTOVVTJJ n
y'lyvovrcti, PI. Leg. 908 b. Mn x-^obovs fip*s y'tvy Soph. Aj. 588. U.tXu
Sixatufii; yEscli. Ag. 392. IloXXa xgypietrei i^of^tv a,vvgTaxo<rs;, [having
plundered many things we have them] we have plundered many things, i. 3. 14.
"A viJv x.xra.<rT^i-^/a.u.tv9s s%sis vii. 7. 27. Ta icr/T5^s<a -ravree. J%ov avaxixo-
fjt.Krpt.ivoi iv. 7. 1. Ta tvtrttisia, iv TOUTUIS a,va.xtx.ftiff pivot %ffotv Ib. 17. Tot
Xfly'jv ^t <roy craXa/ $a.vpa.ffu,$ 'i%u PL Phaedr. 257 C. Toy ^v vgoriffets, TOV '
u-T t (Aiiffets t%ti Soph. Ant. 22. K^y^ayr' l^/y Ib. 32. 'Arift.eiira.ff' i%t Ib.
77. RtSovX'.uxa; t%n Id. CEd. T. 701. Ow rayro Xs^y f^a^a/, / am not
going [or come] to say this, Ages. 2. 7. "E^^a^tta/ a-rofuvovfttvos vvvi PL Theag.
129 a. "Llt%sro a-riuv wxros, he [departed going oflf] went off in the night,
lii. 3. 5. "ii/^era aTsAavvwy, rorfe q^", ii. 4. 24. Oi%irai a,vuv Soph. Ph.
414.
NOTES, (a) The Perf. Part, with tlpt is especially common, particularly
in the passive, either to supply the deficiencies in the inflection of the complete
tenses ( 168. , 169. /3, 213. 2, 234), or to direct the attention more ex-
pressly to the state consequent upon an action. "E^a occurs most frequently
with the Aor. act. part, and in the dramatists, commonly conveying the ac-
cessory idea of possession, continuance, or persistency (holding on upon an ac-
tion. Cf. 632. N. ). "E,(>%oft&i with the Fut. Part, forms a more immediate
Fut. The Part, of a verb of motion with o1^ofjt.an is a stronger form of expres-
sion for the simple verb, (b) The substantive verb is sometimes omitted
( 547); as, As^ay^ey' [sc. le-rJy], us toixt, T'yJs xa.TSa.viiv Soph. Ant. 576.
^638. III. A Part, with its subject, or an impersonal
Part. ( 617), often forms so distinct a clause, that it is said
(though not in the strictest sense of the term, 343. N.) to be
put absolute. This occurs most frequently in the Gen., and,
after this, in the Ace. The far less frequent instances in
which the Nom. and Dat. are used in the same way, may be
commonly referred at once to anacoluthon, or other construc-
tions already mentioned ( 344, 401, 410, 420). The Gen.
and Ace. absolute may also be referred, though often less di-
rectly, to the Gen. and Ace. of time ( 378, 439) ; and as, in
this use, a Part, and substantive commonly denote an event, but
an impersonal Part, a continued state, the following general
rule has arisen, which is not, however, without exception.
RULE XXXII. A PARTICIPLE AND SUBSTAN-
394 SYNTAX. USE OF MODES. [BOOK III.
TIVE are put absolute in the Genitive ; an IMPER-
SONAL PARTICIPLE, in the Accusative ; as,
[NoTE. Among the following examples of the rule have been inserted some
exceptions, for the sake of comparison.]
Tavro Ji Xtyovros KUTOV, vrKgvvrui <n?, and [he saying this] upon his saying
this, some one sneezes, iii. 2. 9. "Offns, !ov ^sv ligww t%nv . ., a.l^7ra,t ?rXi.
ftt7v, who, [it being permitted him to have] while he might have peace, prefert
war, ii. 6. 6. Msra i rat/rat, *fit} fi\iou ^vvavrog ii. 2. 3. 'AvsSj? ivi rot. ogn,
oidtvoi KtuXvovros, ' without opposition,' i. 2. 22. Ou$l pyv fievfatra.!, <vo\\uv e'y-
rut yr'igKv, avails etvroTs tiuvvurtrati, XiXt/^sv*)? TJJ yt$V(>tt.s, nor, although there were
many upon the other side, could any one come to their assistance, if the bridge were
destroyed, ii. 4. 20. 2/rsv $t eV/XsXa/sraraf, o't'vou $t [*.?&' If^utviffSui ra.gov, it-ro
oi irovuv WaXXdwv offxyo^iutivruv V. 8. 3. 'Ey xctXu vfaga.'rufcov trtylffi %uftetXt7v)
xat x"etvr<z%o0tv auruv otiroxiKXinrfAtvuv Th. V. 60. Ey Ss vretgec.<r%ov, but when
a favorable opportunity offers, Id. i. 120. Ot> fgoirvx./)*, when it is no interest
of ours, Id. iv. 95 ' Afttportoais filv ^oxouv civtt%ugi7v, . . KV^ufiv 5i ou$iv . .
ofr)vix,K X>& o^fj.'Ho'tia.i, VUX.TO; Tt ifiytvoftivris Ib. 125. Aiboyft'-vov di Ku<ro~f
Id. i. 125. Aoav a.uro7; oLvro %t>vobou, uffTi "Sietvavftet^i7v Id. viii. 79. Ao|v-
ros 1>\ TOUTOU H. Gr. i. 1. 36. Aa|rv e xat rovreuv Ib. V. 2. 24. Aa|vTas
5t ra.vret X,KI ri^et.vSivra, Ib. iii. 2. 19. Ao|av 5* rotvra. [sc. -rei^v, or the sing.
and plur. joined, see 450, 451, 549^, anrf </i/s seeming best, iv. 1. 13.
Aa^-an ^7v rawra, l-ffo^tvofAiSo. PI. Prot. 314 C. *A^jXv o'v, aVars <n? . . dQ&i-
fVffireti Th. i. 2. Aiff%go* ov ra avr/Xsys/v CyT. ii. 2. 20. TIgofret%6lv yo.
etvru . . Kvety^ei-^ui Lys. 183. 12. AjA<w0VTef, ar< iv <rrf vaw<r/ TV 'ExXiv<;
ra ^o,y (Jka.ro. iyivtro Th. i. 74. 'Eo-ayyjX^vr^v, aV< 3?oivtff<reu vr,is i 1 ""' <*.v-
reus rXeat/a-/y Ib. 116 ( 451). Iltg) trumpets [sc. /Saz/Xyia-^a<] ?r^ax//48va
AT. Eccl. 401.
^ G3O REMARKS. 1. Absolute and connected constructions of the
Part, are, in various ways, interchanged and mixed ; the former giving more
prominence to the Part., and sometimes arising from a change of subject ; the
latter showing more clearly the relation of the Part, to the rest of the sen-
tence. Thus, A</vVT6vv [sc. etlruv} ftivroi, a FXawf eturo7f i-ri(pav [= $tet-
Ga/vtvffiv tri/V"l, as they ivere crossing, however, Glus appeared to them, ii. 4.
24. To/V TgoTigois p-ira. KJ^ow ava<n . . x,au rast/ra, oix i<r] fiei%vv lovreaf
[= lovfft^, aXXa xaXat/vref rav fa.'r/o; KJ/^v i. 4. 12. A/ ^a, v TO.\H n
levruv KOU /u,a%ftivei>v V. 8. 13. Ovxin uv ovroi xXtwrat/ir/* ipyfcrtt, XX* eSt
etlroi JtAtpGoivirt %ti(>iv *<rn, utr<rs/> v/u.t7( ret roiiTuv fAifftfotpogouvrif, aXX* aw TOV-
TU1 TO. VfJt,'iTl^Ot, xXfTTflVTWy IjVS. 178. 38.
2. The substantive is sometimes omitted, and sometimes, though loss fre-
qvcntly, the Part, of the substantive verb (cf. 547) ; as, 'Evrsi/^sv <r^o'iovre^
[sc. awTwvT, ityaivira *%vitt, ' as they were advancing,' i. 6. 1. O< 5* ilVa*,
J^TjVavTaf !"8C. air*t/], OT< Maxj^yiy iv. 8. 5. lloffif pi* y ,/, KetrSa-voMTot
[sc. craa-iw,-], aXXaj ?y Soph. Ant. 909. Ourta %' i%ovruv [SC. iawra r^etyf^.a.-
TV], and affairs [having themselves^ 555] standing thus, iii. 2. 10. Oir
ftlv ytyvoftivuv, <ru.$us eTJa Cyr. V. 3. 13. "Axayro; /Jar/Xtf [sc. a'yraj] ii. 1.19.
*E%iffTt <f>uvi7*, u; iftav ftovns -riXaf Soph. CEd. C. 83. Tlj iiQnynrov rivet
Id. Oikl. T. 1260.
3. The use of the Ace. for the Gen. absolute chiefly occurs after us ( 640^
or when the subject is a neuter adjective (cf. 432. 2).
CH. 5.] PARTICIPLE.
64 O. IV. A Part., whether absolute or dependent, is
often preceded by ug (or a similar particle of special appli-
cation), chiefly to mark it as subjective, i. e. as expressing the
view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement of some one,
whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part.
thus construed often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf.
Thus,
. ., us iTiGovXtvavros Ttorottpi/jvous, he gave command [as he
would give command, T. plotting] a* if Tissaphernes were plotting, or under
pretence that T. was plotting, i. 1. 6. *ltovro afoXuXiveti, us IxXuxvias rvt
x-oXtas, they thought they were lost, inasmuch as the city was taken, vii. 1. 19.
'\\KtXiutrt . ., us tig Utifioxs fiauXofAivo; ffrgetrtvttrdoii, us Tgayftoiruv vra,ot%ov-
ruv n.ttffj$uv i. 1. 11. 'llf tftov oSv iovros, . . ouru rjv yvupnv t%irt, [as if
then I should go, so have your opinion] be assured, then, that I shall go, i. 3.
6. "EXsys Sf<ir, us x,a.ra,ffri]ff4fjt,iviuv rovrutv tis ro $iov Ib. 8. T rXa~a
etir'Tv xtXivavrvs, uffv.^ vrdZ.iv rov ffroXov Kvgov /u.ri -raiov/^ivau Ib. 16. 'lf
olxir ovruv ffuv rixvuv, <?>(>ovri%i ^ Eur. Med. 1311. 2r<nav <ToXX)v ciyuv,
us $oY,6Yxrcav fioHriX'J, bringing a large force to aid the king, ii. 4. 25 ( 583. a)
KaTairxst/a^eir^a/ us O.VTOV wov oixwtrovT/xs (cf. Mi'vs/v cra^ao-xst/a^o^Evayj) iii. 2.
24. Karax/,a^a, utr-rt^ t%ov ruru^iav aiyitv, we lie down, as if it were permitted
us to enjoy our case, iii. 1. 14. A^-j/xvAaytEvowf iivott, us, ovorotv ffy/trtvy,
ixovri^itv 3ttjffov,V. 2. 12. \iyovfftv ripeis us oXuXortts ^Esch. Ag. 672. Aj-
Xa?j S' us n eryftKvuv Soph. Ant. 242. 'iij -roXtftov OVTOS vrctg u/auv a.fa.'y-
*ytXu ; ii. 1. 21. c !^ ju.lv ffT^<rnyriffovTit ifti Tawr^v T^V ffTpaT^yixv, (traits
vpuv Xtyiru, let no one of you speak, as though I were to take this command, i.
3. 15. 'Avxyav, us ovTt* Vtov vi. 4. 22. 'A-ro TUV vrovnguv uvfyuvruv s7^-
yovfiv, us rtjv ftlv ruv %f>r)trruv 0/u.iXtot.v eL<rx.rxriv <rJj a,<rys, TMV 5s ruv <rovnuv,
Ka.Ta.Xvffin Mem. i. 2. 20. Ev%iro $i <*os rovs Siovs ee.vXus ra.yu.6u. ^3ava/,
yj TOUS S-tous xaXX/ff-ra tt%o<ra,s Ib. iii. 2. 'H $1 yvap.v ij, us its "ra,s TO,^K
ruv 'E,XXr,vuv iXuvrot. [sc. TO. cigftaret], and the plan was, that they should drive
against tiie ranks of the Greeks, i. 8. 10. See 662.
O4 1 V. ANACOLUTHON. From the variety of the of-
fices and relations of the Part., and its frequent separation from
its subject, its syntax is peculiarly affected by anacoluthon ;
consisting either (a.) in the transition from one case to another,
or (/?.) in the transition from the Part, to another form of the
verb, or the converse. Thus,
at. T Hv g f> yvuju.n rou 'Agiff<rius [== ?^o|s ruf 'Agiff<ri~^, ro p,lv fjt,i6* tuvrel
fr^etroTidav %%avn iv ru \o6[Jt,w ifirri^iiv Th. i. 62. "E^o^sv etvraTs [= I^i
^/VavreJ .., tcr/xaXayvTf Id. iii. 36. K./ ^tif&offitx xpanrret ^ittSivrtx
vac, rov ToXijAov, lo'iu. Ix.at.ffroi ro7s ivrtrnStufAKffiy a.uro'v a.^6ia6ivns Id. vi. 15.
f& 't%u [ == Kioavf&ai] iv rubi <r'orfjt,<u rvy^eivovirot, Eur. Hec. 970. Ill-
a/ o' eturi (toi tyiXev xiag [= rgoftos 'i%u /"&]> rov^t x-Xvoutra.* o r ix,rof
. Cho. 410. "T^rtfri ftei fyiiffo;, . . *.ue u <r av Soph. El. 479. 'H^
[== ripuv, ^412] ^' uuri x.a.nx.Xai.ffSrt QiXav ra^, ^ttiravrui <Q6oyy6i i. 256.
For other examples see 344, 459, 627, 639.
6. "AXXa rt rpaftu vrtigdffctvris, *< f&*i%&vflv T(>e<rnyoiya Th. iv. 100*
O/ ffr^ctrnyot itrree.^io.'^ov, KXtoivug ftiv xeti Qgwiirxof vrgos 2ft/^jv Qo
eiyitv . . * TifAttriuv $t ftv4vftt7r vii. 2. 2. 'ii< <ri/%oi vows "
396 VERBAL IN -xsog. - PARTICLE. [BOOK IIL
f outfit, ^la, <ro <p*vyj/v, ri aXXrr i vrt-rX tovaa. Th. vii. 70. In the following
example, there is a remarkable transition from the infinitive construction to
the participial; A/t/yTa<, T p* faiigos o<r [for iTva<], is separated, sou*
not to be main land (see $ 622), Th. vi. 1.
(in.) Verbal in -
642. From the verb is formed a passive adjective in
-TS'OS, expressing obligation or necessity ( 314. f ). This verbal
is often used impersonally, in the neut. sing, or plur., with toil
( 546. a). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf. act. or mid.
with del or ^77 thus, Sxfnisov poi doxtl tivai [ axtmtufJut
day], i seems to me that it is to be considered [= //m/ z0e ought
to consider], i. 3. 11. 'tidoxu dttoxisov *'*, i7 seemed that they
must pursue, iii. 3. 8. Hence it imitates in two ways, as fol-
lows, the construction of this Inf., and is therefore treated of in
this connection.
y 04:3. Impersonal verbals in -TC'OV, or -re'a, (a.) govern
the same cases as the verbs from which they are derived ; and
(/S.) have sometimes their agent in the Ace. instead of the Dat.
( 407. x). Thus,
(a.) Tlj vriifriov i*v> KXsa^^a, that they must obey Clearchus, ii. 6. 8
( 405. j). Ylogsuriov 3' fipTv rov? f^urovt ffra.6 ftoug ii. 2. 12 (^ 431).
Ilavra ?ra/>jTov iii. 1. 18 (cf. the personal form, Flavra -ru/JiTta Ib. 35).
GSf ou vretgu'Soriiit <ro7$ 'A.6rivoe.ioif tfr'tv Th. i. 86. Yvvctixos ovdotfius r,<r
fn-ritt Soph. Ant. 678 (5349). (/3.) Kara^aTisv aSv Iv ^bi/ *yT,
eocA one therefore must descend in turn, PL Rep. 520 d. Tl? aiVi f*,i<r0o{f>o-
viai tiri ctXXoiii rt roiif tr -r go. T 1 1> o fti v o u f, oil-n fti^DtTion TUV vrox'yfAa.Tcaf
v^iietriv n 9rtvretxtf%iXiois Th. viii. 65.
G44U REMARK. Constructions are sometimes blended; thus,
(a.) The impersonal with the personal construction of the verbal ; as, Taj
vfo6i fits rets T gear at, *J ti n<r<ra< v/tTv tlffiv, opus i <r nr x t v T i a i ITU,.
$if<rtiot [for ras v-rv0i<rfis tdflMCV&r, or a! vvo6'i<rnt i-riffxiTTteti] PI. Phaedo,
107 b. -7^(6.) The Dat. of the agent with the Ace. ; as, '11 pit vtt/<rr .
U-;^r>f PL Rep. 453 d. ?.) The verbal with the Inf.; as, 'EWw-
uiets <f>ns ou xoketfriov, . . luvra. 5t nira.; . . Iroiftei^ttt PL Gorg. 492 d.
CHAPTER VI.
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE.
^ 645. Tho particle, in its full extent, in-
cludes the ADVERB, the PREPOSITION, the CONJUNC-
CH. 6.] ADVERB. - PREPOSITION. 397
TION, and the INTERJECTION. Of these, however,
the interjection is independent of grammatical con-
struction. The other particles are construed as
follows.
A. THE ADVERB.
^ 646. RULE XXXIII. ADVERBS modify sen-
tences, phrases, and words ; particularly verbs, ad-
jectives, and other adverbs. Thus,
nA*v r^tarvifftv o Kt/^aj, again Cyrus asked, i. 6. 8. *H2ty \-rii6ovro i. 2.
2. 'Og0ia la-^S^us Ib. 21. 'HftiXtifAtvetis /*A.Xov i. 7. 19. Trjv ov <rigiTti%i-
fiv, the not blockading, Th. iii. 95. 'H p.* ^vii^ee, Ar. Eccl. 115. Tws O.-JTO
cv 'E-rt-ro^uv <ruXit xetretScifias, ' the descent back,' Th. vii. 44.
REMARKS. 1. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usually parsed
as modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase. Such parti-
cles may also give a special emphasis, or bear a special relation to other words
in the sentence or phrase ; thus, 'H^sTj yi wxupiv, we at least are victorious
(here y, in modifying the sentence n/ttTs vixuf*iv, exerts a special emphasis
upon /*/>) ii. 1. 4. "Hxovirtv ou^iis ' yt reji Qavigcy i. 3. 21. 'AgiaTog
&, . . xui ov rot ftiootTcti, and Ariaus, even he attempts, iii. 2. 5. K)
fttrefriftToftivov cturou, evx. \.6't\ta IMiTv, even though he sends for me, 1
am not willing to go, i. 3. 10. Yloo&txvvtjffet*) xetivi'tg II^OTIS i 6. 10. E<-
JOTI rot p.ot rciffS' ayysX/ay S' i6uu%tv ^Esch. Pr. 1040.
^ 64L 2. Of the negative particles ol and ^97, the former is used in
simple, absolute negation, and the latter in dependent or qualified negation, hence
in supposition, prohibition, &c. ; or, in the language of metaphysicians, ou is
the objective, and pv the subjective negative (cf. 587. 1). It follows that ov
is most used with the Ind., and p.* with the other modes ; and that, with the
same mode, ov is more decided and emphatic than ^>j. Thus, Qlx, oTba., I do
not know, 5. 3. 5. Qvvon \%t7 ou'Sit; Ib. 'Ea s (jw 2<a>, and if he would not
give, i. 3. 14. "Q-rcas (AW <p0eitru<ri Ib. M*T; fjt.%. Kw^nv vof&il^irt i. 4. 16.
Oi/x. a.Kouttv ttrn, xeti p* ^v a. (tri %{f&iS i Soph. CEd. C. 1175. 'E^a/ rat
ff&iv Xoyuv aioiffTOV ou$t, ftni' oi^tffStin ifori Id. Ant. 499. Ta f*.*\ ovroc, uf oux
Srct iv. 4. 15.
NOTE. Interrogation is sometimes expressed by negative assertion, and
assertion by negative interrogation. Hence negative particles sometimes ap-
pear to pass into interrogative or affirmative ones ; as, Mj <roi Saxovftt* , [We
do not seem to you, do we ?] Do we seem to you f ^Esch. Pers. 344. T H ftrirtt
faoivvsi ; rt f&fin; ff ctvTon xn'ivr, ; i. 405. Qvxovt . . ^ri^rctvffeftett ; [Shall I
not then cease?] I shall cease then, Soph. Ant. 91. Qitxovt . . ixetvug l^'iru
PL Phaedr. 274 b.
B. THE PREPOSITION.
$648. RULE XXXIV. PREPOSITIONS gov-
34
398 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK III
ern substantives in the oblique cases, and mark
their relations ; as,
a. -ro 2a^&;y, xai t^tXaim; S/a rr,s Av^tag . . t*J rsv Ma/av^a
iroretpov, he set out from Sardis, and marches through Lydia to the river Me-
ander, i. 2. 5.
Or, more particularly,
, and rc^o govern the Genitive.
and ai5v " " Dative.
and etf " " Accusative.
, <Jm, XT, /UT, and vne'p " " Gen. and Ace.
f0/, TIRO'S, and VTTO " " Gen., Dat., and Ace.
NOTES, . The Dative sometimes follows ft<pi, v, and pi<ra, in the poets;
and dft$i even in prose, chiefly Ionic. Thus, 'A^pi ^Xj^ar? ^Esch. Pr. 71.
*Av TJ vw<r/ Eur. Iph. A. 754. Msra ;^<r/v Soph. Ph. 1110.
/3. The words above mentioned (with their euphonic, poetic, and dialectic
forms, as t* for U;, ^ 68, t/v for o-v*, EJ for t/'j, lv< for lv, -r^ari and ?rar/ for w^s,
v-ra.t for w-ra) are all which are commonly termed prepositions in Greek, though
other words may have a prepositional force ( 657. a). These prepositions have
primary reference to the relations of place, and are used to express other rela-
tions by reason of some analogy, either real or fancied (cf. ' 339).
y. *E and #o, by the addition of s (expressing motion or action, cf. 84),
become (t;, 58) tie or Is (cf. 57. 4), and vroos thus, lv, in, ils, into.
&. To the prepositions governing the Ace., must be added the Ep. suffix -S,
to (cf. 150, 322) ; as, OXi/^-Xi A. 425 (cf. U<>os "Oxup. 420). "Ax-
2i A. 308 (cf. E/V i'x 314). "ATSfch [= tig *Aft* s $>ov, 385. y] H. 330.
It is sometimes used pleonastically ; as, "OvSt $ep.ov$i /3. 83. E/f ciXaSt *.
351.
649. REMARKS. 1. The use of the different cases
with prepositions may be commonly referred with ease to fa-
miliar principles in the doctrine of the cases ; thus,
GENITIVE, (.) Of DEPARTURE or MOTION FROM (^ 347). 'A-ro rJf
>>;, from the province, i. 1. 2. 'Ex Xippovjtou flgpMMpMMf Ib. 9. Fla^a
ficttrtXiuQ rXXo< <r^of Ki/^ov awJjX^ox i. 9. 29. 'AXXo^ivo/ xa-ra rris "r'fr^a.s^
leaping down from the rock, iv. ii. 17. (/3.) Of OuiGIM and MATERIAL ( 355).
Yfyovuf 0,-ro Aetp.ecgoe.7ov ii. i. 3. OTv <rt ix, rrts /3aXvK Tiwooi^svav <rtif al<r
TOV <f>oirtx,es i. 5. 10. - (y. Of TlIEME ( 356). IIi^J vftuv iv'iuv YIM.OUOV, I ln-unl
respecting some of you, vi. 6. 34. Tjf J^>jj . . -rjf a^^/ TO Ta<r^df Cyr. iii.
1.8. - (3.) PARTITIVE ( 358). O/ uvropeXriravrif i* Tft/v <ro>.if*.i*>v i. 7.
13. (i.) ACTIVE (- 380). For examples, see 562.
DATIVE, (.) Of NEARNESS ( 399). 2wv rf <pvyft, with the exiles
i. 1. 11. T* * iawry Ib. 5. (.) Of PuACE ( 420). Br/A.im i>
KiX/ya7j i^y^va, iw) ru.li ienya.lt rev blagrvau arorctpov, vvo <ry dxgovroXtt i.
2.8.
ACCUSATIVE, (3.) Of MOTION TO ( 429). ' Aqmtiiiro .
came to him, i. i. 5 Kart'amv its wtS/'ov i. 2. 22. Ils^-^a; .
Ib. 17. 'AviSn ta-J TO. S(n Ib. 22. Kara Z A { d<f>iou viL
CH. 6.] PREPOSITION. 399
2. 28 'TV AVTU. ra. rit%t) a.y\n Cyr. V. 4. 43. (/.) Of SPECIFICATION
( 437). Ax/u-^a. xxi x.a.<r* oppa. xui <fvftv Soph. Tr. 379. Kara yvaput
%j Id. GEd. T. 1087.
^ G*>O. NOTES. . It is common to explain many of the uses of the
cases mentioned in Ch. I. by supplying prepositions ; when, in reality, th
connection of the cases with the prepositions is rather to be explained, as abovq
by reference to these uses, and to the principles on which they are founded
In many connections the preposition may be either employed or omitted, oi
pleasure ; a.s, "il<rvri/> Js <ris ayaXXira* \<x\ StocriGiia . ., eurta Msvwv yXA.iT
veu lr*r Ivmsfa ii. 6. 26. Kett x/>u,wyri iroXXJJ ivri&triv i. 7. 4. 2uv T0A.
X>5 K^oc-vyr, xa,} r^ovy yiiffxv iv. 4. 14.
/3. The poets sometimes omit the preposition with the first, and insert M
with the second, of two nouns similarly related ; as, 'OSo; . . AsA<puv xd-r,
^xvXtots Soph. CEd. T. 734. 'A.y^aus fftyt x'ifj.^/a.i xuvrt vroiftviuv VOJA/ZS Ib.
761.
X 6 O 1 y. In the connection of the preposition with its case, we are
to consider not only the force of the preposition in itself, but also that of the
c;tsu with which it is joined. Thus ira.ga. denotes the relation offside or near-
Hfsf ; and with the Gen., it signifies from the side of, or from; with the Dat.,
at the We vf, or beside, near, with ; with the Ace., to the side of, or to. E. g.
T-zi/T-a oixevo-Kvris, o<ri eu <f>x/n xa.^a. ^KtriXta *o(>ivta6u.t) ivyvtffu* #0,^0, Si
Hiviou KXI Ylet<riaos fallout % $iff%i%.ioi, Z.uovrts f oir\a, net} TO. <r*tva-
f-ofia, itrr(>ctro'rtbiu<ra.vra fct^a, KXta^^yi. 3. 7.
J. An elliptic use of the adjective after a preposition deserves notice ; thus,
'IXaoa/ "Si ivri ffx-vQ^uirui [sc. yuvaixuv, Of = avrJ TOI> etUTCtf iinett ffttvQoet-
vet/i] hffat.v, KO.} avri t>$oouju.lvwv laurels fl^ieas a.X\riXa.f tuficai, they were cheerful
instead of [being] downcast, <:., Mem. ii. 7. 12. ' faS'tuv a^jjXov iv/iova-ai
fr'o* Soph. Tr. 284.
i. The omission of the preposition with the second of two substantives having
a similar construction will be observed, not only after a conjunction, but also in
the case of the relative, in the questions and answers of a dialogue, &c. ; as,
*Acr rt TUV vt&Jv xxi TJJJ ytji H. Gr. i. 1.2. *E> TU %goy;y, u v/t&uv axovu
Svmp. 4. 1 (cf. *A?r' txiivau yot-^ rou ^gavay, a^' ou TOVTOV Yi^a.<r&vi* f*!- Conv.
213 c). "Twroto^i v'ip" "T/'yaf M; " "Toy wwaXa^avm " PI. Rep.
456 d. 'H? ra.fia. t^i^avi XKI tvigyirets, [sc. ?ra^a] 'A^va/oi/f ubteag i-jetitaa
Th. vi. 50.
. The complement of a preposition is often omitted when a relative follows.
See 526. a.. So Els [sc. rav ^ovov] on ft. 99. 'E; J, until, Hdt. i. 67.
G52. 2. A preposition in composition (.) often retains
its distinct force and government as such. But (/5.) it com-
monly seems to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. 657. /?),
and the compound to be construed just as a simple word
would be of the same signification. Hence (/.) the preposi-
tion is often repeated, or a similar preposition introduced.
The adverbial force of the preposition in composition is par-
ticularly obvious (d.) in tmesis ( 328. N.), and (.) when the
preposition 's used with an ellipsis of its verb (chiefly sail).
Thus,
400 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK III
at"rJ ffr^a. rtturtt?, he sent with her soldiers, i. 2. 20.
(>. Hgotrivriff^'i 3l O.UTCU <r*iv ^vya.r'i^a. Cyr. viii. 5. 18 fcf. TUp-ru 'Aga
^tXfAtjv . . wgoi SivopuvTo, vii. 6. 43). '}L-riwKtiiffa.s O.UTU H Gr. i. 6. 23
^'cf. IlAm iV alrovi Ib. 1. 11).
NOTES. (1.) Hence verbs compounded with i*!, #0,00., and *aj are com'
monly followed by the Dat. of approach (t- 398). (2.) The preposition, as
such, and the general sense of the compound, often require the same case, as,
particularly, in compounds of acra, ig, and <ruv. See 347, 399.
y. 'Efti^uvro /a-AA.v tig TJJV K//Ux/av i. 2. 21. !!
y i. 9. 29.
$. Tmesis occurs chiefly in the earlier (especially the Ep.)
Greek, when as yet the union of the preposition and verb had not become firm-
ly cemented. In Att. prose it is very rare, and even in Att. poetry (where it
occurs most frequently in the lyric portions), it seldom inserts any thing more
than a mere particle between the preposition and the verb. Thus, 'A-ra Xo/yo*
O./AVVCU [= >.*>iyov a-ra^tJya/], to ward off destruction, A. 67. IJ S' ty%'.et
ft-Kxgoc, vifYiyiv I 1 . 135. 'A-ro fj.lv ffiuvrov uXser&s Hdt. iii. 36. 'Ex ^ vrrdn-
ffot.s, and leaping forth, Eur. Hec. 1172. A/a p.' t<p0tiKs, Kara $' txruvas Id.
Hipp. 1357. *AVT' t5 riiffi-rai PI. Gorg. 520 e.
NOTES. (1.) The preposition sometimes follows the verb ; and is some-
times repeated without the verb ; as, IIs^-v^ayToj, 2 yvva.t, ftirei Eur. Hec.
504. 'AvraXtT VoXtv, KTO tl -ru.r'tK Id. Here. 1055. Kara p.\Y fxva-oiv A^v-
fiay fot.iv, xxra, $1 Xa^a^jy Hdt. viii. 33. So, "Qovvro . . 'Ayetftiftvuv, oil
[sc. ufwro'] 3' 'Otvffivs T. 267. "EXivov . ., xa$ Vt E. 480. (2.) In the
earlier Greek, what is called frnesis is rather to be regarded as the adverbial use
of the preposition ( 657. /3), than as the division of a word already com-
pounded.
t. "AXX* a [for etvettrr^i] '<% i^avwv, but [rise] up from the seats, Soph.
Aj. 194. EinMM ra^a [for va.^<rr^\ Eur. Ale. 1114. "Ev< [for iir] S*
iv rty hgy %&y KO.} iMpin x.a,l u,X<rrt v. 3. 11.
C. THE CONJUNCTION.
RULE XXXV. CONJUNCTIONS con-
nect sentences, and like parts of a sentence ; as,
'Htftfmfl, Aa~0; x.0.} vvufrtui, Darius was sick and apprehended, \. 1. 1.
Tiffffcttpiovni 2/aaAXi< <rov Kti^av irgot rov a^fX^ov, us iir<$ou).tvoi aury. *O Ji
irittireti TI */ <rnXX/t<av/ Kv^ay i. 1. 3. "Ho-Ti airw ^ttaXXay (pi\av{ tt-
10,1 i\ ftfi\i7 Ib. 5. IIXE/4(/; MT^lXMI i. 3. 7. "Efaa x
i. 8. 1.
REMARKS. 1 . By //Ae /)/< o/ 1 sentence are meant words and phrases of
like construction, or performing like offices in the sentence, and which united
by conjunctions form compound subjects, predicates, adjuncts, &c. Some con-
nective adverbs also may sometimes be regarded as uniting like parts of a sen-
tence.
2. Like parts of a sentence are commonly, but not necessarily, of the same
part of speech and of similar form. In many cases, it seems to be indifferent
whether we regard a conjunction as connecting like parts of a sentence, or (sup-
plying an ellipsis) as connecting whole sentences.
JII. 6.] CONJUNCTION. CONCLUDING REMARKS. 401
3. A conjunction often connects the sentence which it introduces, not so
much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word or
phrase in it; thus, Yl^offSeiXXoviri . . XK-rtuXtfovris <pa$ov rt>7s vroXiftiot;, il /Say
}.<H*TO (ptvytiv iv. 2. 11.
O ">>. 4. A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, accord
Ing as a word is regarded as belonging to a compound part of a sentence, or to
a new sentence ; thus, HXOUO-IUTIOM ply KV, / i<rw<povus, V? tpa] \lftovs Cyr.
viii. 3. 32. 'Ex $uvori/>e<iv roiuv^t itrtaQriffot.* Th. vii. 77. Ta/V s viurigois
xat.1 ftUXXov axftd^ouiriv, vt \yu [sc. et.xpt.a.'^u], <7ra,(>u.ivu Isocr. 188 a. '\\fjLtiav
2s eifitivov, v\ IxtTvei, TO ^sAXav vrgoogeti/Ltivivv Dem. 287. 27. Ov^otftou ya,/>
itrriv 'Ayo^etTav 'A.dvvoc,7ov iTvot/, uffftp get ffv ov*. ov Lys. 136.27. "Es-
fri 3-', UVJTIO 'HyiXo%os, *if*,7v Xtyuv Ar. Ran. 303.
5. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admissible,
the one with, aud the other without, a connective. The two forms are some-
times blended. See 5 461. 3, 609, 619. N., 628.
6. A conjunction is sometimes used in Greek, where none would be employed
in English ; e. g., when raA.w'f is followed by another adjective ; as, YloXXd rt
xeti 'friT^nee, "SiiXiy/M'ro V. 5. 25.
GSG. 7. The Greeks, especially the earlier writers, often employ the
more generic for the more specific connectives ( 330. 1), or instead of other
forms of expression ; as, 'Ex/tartan ff^oXvi ll -rXt',uv % 9-sXw ^SO-T/ ^/,
' [and] for I have more leisure,' ^Esch. Pr. 817. Tvy%av, TJ *xjj^' v<rcr-
frou 3rv\nt %K*uffa, Ko.1 pi Qtoyyos olxn'ou xa.xoupKl.Xti ^/' UTUV, 'just as I am
drawing the bars, there strikes,' Soph Ant. 1 186. Kxt nb* r Y>V iv TU T^-TM
rruSpu, xeti XtipcroQos avrcj> i%aXivrciv0v iv. 6. 2. Ou% o/u-oius TS^Wxa*-/,
X.K} "Qftvges (cf. v 400), they have not composed in the same manner [and] as
Homer, or with Homer, PI. Ion, 531 d (cf., in Lat, similis atque, &c.).
NOTE. The student will not fail to remark, (a) The frequent use, in the
Epic, of Vt for yeio, and in general of coordination in the connection of sentences,
for subordination. (6) The frequent use of ya.^ in specification, where we *
should use that, namely, now, &c. ; as, T<ySs SJjAav nv <ry ult ya^ 9fo<rtv r,p'i-
IB . . txiXivi ii. 3. 1.
D. CONCLUDING REMARKS. .
^ G57. I. In Greek, as in other languages, the different
classes of particles often blend with each other in their use.
Thus, (.) adverhs sometimes take a case, as prepositions ;
(/?.) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad-
verbs ; (/.) the same particle is used both as an adverb an J as
a conjunction, or as a connective and a non-connective ad-
vej-b. E. g.
. For examples, see 347, 349, 372. y, 394, 399. Horn, uses i1<ru and
t<ru as protracted forms for ih thus, "AyyuXor . . "IXiov tlcru H. 145 (cf. E/V
"lA/av 143). 'Ayayrnriv itru xXitrtr.v H. 155.
/3. r H fi?iv xtXiuffM, xu.tr tQuv^u rt -root [sc. rovra}, ' in addition to this,'
'besides,' yEsch. Pr. 73. U^s J' 'in iii. 2. 2. 'E Ji [sc. rawra/j], and mean-
while, Soph. (Ed. T. 27.
34*
402 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK III,
y. KE^av 5 (conjunction) ^raTf^TETa/ . . *,} o-r^a-rnyov 2$ (adverb) aw
Tflv aiTift/|s i. 1. 2. '11? $ vi/y ;/, ;aXr0y, /, al'opsvoi Iv TV 'EXXa/ xw'
icra/vat/ x/ T^JJs nu^itr^on, y<r/ 5s rovrun ot/5' a]aa<a/ 7-0?? aXXa/j \ffofAi6a. vi. 6.
16. 2a<p/yTay ft <roy STty^aX/ay, *ai (conjunction) 2syx0r>;y TOV 'A^a/oi^
%'s.vou; OVTKS xeti (adverb) TOVTOWJ, txiXtvo'tv i. 1. 11. n^olray jy loxx^vt , .
lira ft foigi i. 3. 2. "AXXaj ft A/fy, xa2 aXXaj, sTra *roXXa/ i. 5. 12
Tawra ivroiouv, fti%gt o-xoros tyivtro iv. 2. 4 (cf. 394). flx^y / <r
**->jXra ^ayrj i. 2. 24 (cf. 349).
NOTE. The adverb r^/v is construed in four ways; (1.) as a connective,
with the appropriate mode ; thus, Mj v^ixrhv KOCTK^VITUI . ., -r^/y y atra) trv/*-
GovXiu<rnr<x.i, 'before he should consult,' i. 1. 10 (-r^iv is followed by the Subj.
r Opt., only when a negative or interrogative sentence precedes) ; (2.) as hav-
ing a prepositional force, with the Inf. ; thus, Il^/y rrrao <r<rnonx. $isX0i7* t
before [completing] they had completed four stadia, iv. 5. 19 ; (3.) as a simple
adverb, with n and the appropriate mode : thus, II^/y iy'ivovro, before that
they had come, Cyr. i. 4. 23 ; (4.' with % and the Inf. instead of another
mode ( 629. 2). This construction is less Attic.
O58. II. Both adverbs, and prepositions with their
cases, are often used substantively. An adverb and a preposi-
tion governing it are often written together as a compound
word. Thus,
"Gray ft rovruv aX/j t%nn. but when you have had enough of this, v. 7. 12.
E/j [t\v aVa| xa.} /S^a^wv %/>ovov, for once and a short time, Dem. 21.1. E/f
vv PI. Tim. 20 b. Ms^/ liretvt* v. 5. 4. n ?fl VXa/ Ar. Eq. 1155. *E^-
*go<r0tv iii. 4. 2. Tla^awr/xa CyT. ii. 2. 24. *Hy . . vvlg y/tto-u TOV o'Xow
frffKriu[t*ros 'Agxefiss, above half of the whole army were Orcadians, vi. 2. 10.
A/T? U.LTOV /j liiff%i\ious %'tvout i. 1. 10. 'Ex TUV a.u.^1 raits ftvoiou; V. 3. 3.
Svvi^^xfAtv us tis tTrocxoff'tovf H. Gr. IV. 1. 18. ^uvuXfyftivuv ill fti* ^wX
irtgi l-rraxoiriovs Ib. ii. 4. 5.
' Ot>9. III. One preposition or adverb is often used for
another (or a preposition is used with one case for another), by
reason of something associated or implied. This construction
is termed, from its elliptic expressiveness, construct prcBg-
nans. Thus,
.) A' PREPOSITION of motion for one of rest. O/ i* rns a.y^a.t . . iQwyot
[tx for i, by reason of 'itywyov following], those in the market fled [from it], i.
2. 18. A< ft xrfya.} eturou tliriv ix ruv fieuriktiuv Ib. 7. 'Atpixveuvreti rut ix
TOV ^u^'iou rgi7( a.y'Sfti V. 7. 17. To/V ix IliJXaw \n$6{!<rt, those taken at Pylus
and brought thence, Ar. Nub. 186. O/' u<ro ruv xa.ra.<rr(>u[*.a.reav ro7f eixovrt-
eit . . \%(>uvro Th. vii. 70. E/'j ava.'yxnv xi'ifjtiffet, we have come into necessity,
and lie there, Eur. Iph. T. 620. 'Ey ft rrj v-rtgGoX.fi rut onui rvv tis ro vrtkiov,
i. 2. 25.
/}). A PREPOSITION of rest for one of motion. 'Ev Aivxettia a.*wa.v [It for
tit, to imply that they were still there], had gone to Leucadia, or were absent in
/,., Th. iv. 42. O/ 3* iy ry 'H^<a xetnt-rttfuvyerif (cf. Eif ft ro "ll^/oy xat-
H. Gr. iv. 5. 5. 'Ev T <rora.ju.ey i-riffo* Ag. 1. 32.
y.) An ADVERB of motion for one of rtf. Ty iiib*6iv [for iy5y] T<
TOI Ar. Tlut. 2^8. M*r<*j<r/j rat/ r?Tfli/ rot; {y^i'yft tlf aXXay ra- PL
CH, 6.] ELLIPSIS.
Apol. 40 c. 1107 xctxuv fyvftietv iv^a -, ' Whither can
1157.
$.) An ADVERB of rest for one of motion. "Qfov [for o#oi] QiGvxtv,
72f, no one knows where [for whither} he has gone, Soph. Tr. 40. HUV
-ofAt* Ar. Lys. 1230.
'J 66O. IV. In the doctrine of .particles, especially con-
nectives, the figures of syntax hold an important place ; thus,
A. ELLIPSIS.
Ellipsis here consists either (.) in the omission of the par-
ticles themselves, or (/I), far more frequently, in that of words,
and even whole sentences, connected or modified by them.
a. Among the particles most frequently omitted are copu-
lative and complementary conjunctions ( 329. N.) ; as,
YLoffav VTUT^UV, yovicav, yvvxixuv, fet'i^u* iii. 1. 3. "E^s/f WaX<v,
vgweti;, 'i%sii ,V**'*'* tX,~'i etv^ox; TOUOVTOVS vii. 1.21. Qil<n <rXiv6v<^
(tout ff>atriib.ous riffctv, ou [for avrs] > uXoue i yietv JEscll. Pr. 450. 'Qftvve
ra.vra.i xa.i vrtiiras, [sc. aV/J ftr,* . . i,6vop.r,v VI. 1. 31.
V. 6. 17. ' A.<ru,yyitKov woffii, yjxnv ovfws Ta,^t(r<r l^affnav tfoXli *
yvvotljca. <rif<rriv %' tv IqMflU tv^at -^Escli. Ag. 604. See 611. 3.
NOTE. Hdt. sometimes uses evxav with the ellipsis of a conditional or other
conjunction '. as, QSxav -rowirni TAUTK, ypiis . . ixXstyopiv, if then you will
not do this, we shall desert, iv. 1 1 8.
OO1. /?. Connected sentences especially abound in el-
lipsis, from the ease with which the omission can be supplied
from the connection. We notice, among the great variety of
cases that might be mentioned, the frequent ellipses,
1.) In replies; as, ""Ea'T/v o <rt trt fiSixttffx ;" '0 o' eiftx^ivx<ro, OTI ou
[= ovx iVr/v] i. 6. 7. E/wovraj $i TOU 'O^avraw, OTI oii$\v a,$ixwd&if Ib. 8.
NOTE, (a.) In a dialogue or address, a speaker often commences with a
connective (most frequently- an adversative or causal conjunction), from refer-
ence to something which has been expressed or which is mutually understood ;
88, 'AXX* o^ctn, but you see, iii. 2. 4. 'E^ai $' el QoiuXov lox.ii Clviu vi. 6. 12.
O?/ ya.o trot ftx^i7irfxt, Z Kvg'., <rov etii^Qov , i. 7. 9. (6.) In like manner the
Voc. is often followed by a connective ; as, r fl yvva.i, tip*, ovopa. 5e <roi ri io-rut \
Mem. ii. 1. 26. Tl K/^*j, T'H ya.^ . . ^ys^avfyVs/ ; *. 501.
2.) Between two connectives ; as, 'AxXa [sc. -rmve^tti] ya% xa.} -rsja/v!/*
fa&l* iii, 2. 32. Cf. V. 7. 11. 'Axxi ya.o V&t Ma . iii. 2. 25. Il^a. r*v
S-ocXafTTav r,ti xa,} [sc. ruvry yu~\ ya. #Sj ytrSivii vi. 2. 1 8. Ka) ya.(> xai
xx-rvof Ifot'mro ii. 2. 15. And yet, perhaps, in such examples as these, aX-
X ya.% or XKI ya.% may be regarded as forming but a single compound con-
nective, or one of the particles may be regarded as a mere adverb ( 657. 7).
x{ 662 3.) WUh &;, especially in expressing comparison, design,
pretence, possibility, &c. ; as, 0arTv j [sc. ovru ra.%v us TIS . uitro, quicker
than [so quick asj one would have thought, i. 5. 8. Ms/ava Yiyn<ra.(4.i*ot ttvati j
404 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK III.
us \*i Tltifffttts rrjv fec^airxiu^v, thinking that the preparation was greater than
[so great as] it would be against the Pisidians, i. 2. 4. B^a^wrE^a faitv^n,
% us itixvtifffai, hurled [a shorter distance than so as to reach] too short a dis-
tance to reach, iii. 3. 7. *E<pv7 xtviogros, u<rvrtg vttpiXv XIVX.YI i. 8. 8. Tlf
tig ftei%vv ?ra-*i/0Y*v8?, arrayed as [he would array] for battle, Ib. I.
'EwExa^cTTEv, us its xvXu<riv Ib. 23. <&ivyeti<riv 0.110, K^U,TO; us Voos T^V a.'Xt
rou vrorctfAou txa<riv iv. 3. 21. 'Alga/u, ^j fV< rovrovs i. 2. 1. "iltrtftg o7?>
ix'il.tvfft i. 5. 8. '11; ex T&iv vugovruv [sc. eSyyavra j, lnvTai-Ojasva* Th. vi. 70.
KigctirovvTioi, us ecv x,a.} iuguxoTts TO vra,g \ctvro7s -vgeiyftei, dt'nrxvrss> the Cera
suntians alarmed, as they would naturally be having seen what had happened
among themselves, v. 7. 22. Tl? l<ri TO iroXv, as things are for the most part,
commonly, iii. 1. 42. See 410, 525. a, 640.
NOTES, (a.) From the frequent use of us with the accusative after verbs
of motion to express the purposed end of the motion (vS 429), it came at last
to be regarded as a mere preposition, supplying the place of <r^'os or i/;, but
chiefly before names of persons; as, \.\OOIIHTKI us pa.o-tZ.ia, goes to the king, i.
2. 4. (6.) '1; is often used to render expressions of quantity less positive ;
as, *E%uv [sc. ouru voX^ovs] us vtvrttxofftovs, having such a number as 500, i.
e. about 500, i. 2. 3.
G O . 4.) With adversative conjunctions, with which we must some-
times supply the opposite of that which has preceded ; as, KJ p,n
rr,ir$' etTOtrreiXvri ym, XX' oL^ivXovrov Ktti xetratrroirvv ^oftuv [sc.
Soph. El. 71. E/ p.lv f$ov*.tra,,, \'j,iru ti ^' [sc. pv\ /SauXsra/], e n
VOVTO -roniru PI. Euthyd. ^285 c.
5.) With f, before which there is sometimes an ellipsis of ^aXXav as, Z.
touai xsebaivuv [sc. /*aXXav], n iiftcis fi'diiv Lys. 171. 8. Tj rtjs vp.ir't^a,f
voXius ru^nv av iXo'tf^nv, . . % rnv ixtivov Dem. 24. 16. See 466.
6.) With conditional conjunctions ; as, E/ ff.lv av n t%us, u MJaa-Jjf,
irga; w/ttaj Xtyiiv [sc. Xsys ^>j] il 5i p.* [sc. 'i-tis} t r^iis f^os ff\ *%o/u.iv vii.
7. 15. E?Tt ciXXo TI SiXoi %(>?]<r0eii, ilr \ir Atyufrov ffrgetTivnv, ffuyKO.ro,-
froi^/oiiv<T ecv AVTU ii. 1. 14. Ka/ vt/v, av ^iv a Kyooj (->ouXr,rct,i [xaXctt; i%u] *
ti 'Si f*,vi, vftits yi TV* T%itr i rriv wdgtirTi Cyr. iv. 5. 10. "Exa/av *< ^<Xov xa)
i" r< aXXa xgriiTtfAov n [sc. */av rawTa] i. 6. 1 (i? T/S so used is equivalent to
cffTis')' O/ $i eiXXoi etTuXovTO V-TO TJ TUV ToXij&iuv x,ai %iovos, xui it TIS voiref
T. 3. 3. "ErnVavrfl, TX^v t? r/f TI txXi^iv iv. 1.14. Ewva< rurttv, ^rX xat-
f'oTov 11 Triv 2/xfX/av ov<ro ccurai/; "bovXufft<r6tt,i Th. vi. 88. "AXXe/ fAiviovfft . .
i/ Si xa) &VTOI [sc. eu /ti toufi], <fnuyovTuv I. 45. E/ 5' ayt [= t/ ^i pouXti,
&yt, but if you will, come] A. 302, and often in Horn.
NOTE. When two similar clauses are connected, a pronoun, preposition, or
>ther word is sometimes (chiefly by the poets) omitted in the first clause, and,
for the sake of emphasis or the metre, or by reason of other ellipses, inserted
. in the second ', as, Zuygti, 'Argios vlt, rv%' |/ $E' Ta/v Z. 46. *E
HtiXou o%ii ap,u*TOo,f . ., n oyi HOLI ^.rxor^tv (>. 326. See 650. /3.
B. PLEONASM.
^ 6G4. Under this head we remark,
1.) The redundant use of negatives. This appears chiefly
a.) In connection with indefinites, which in a negative sentence are all
regularly combined with a negative ; as, Ow^ran i^i? ovtt'is i. 3. 5. OiSw
n tvbo.fi.us ovtiiftiu,* x,oi**i*iet* t%ii PI. Farm. 166 a.
CH. 6.] PLEONASM. 405
/3.) In divided construction ; as, Ovx aif%vvt<r6t ovrt B-iovg our uvd^ufovt
ii. 5. 39. Mty rtXtiru ft.nri \[*.ei ftyrt XX* vSi. 1. 6. Ov ya. iirnv o/rnf
Ktfyuxtuv ffu0r,o-trcti) ovrt vp.7v ovn ctXXeu evStvi xXntlu yvnffius tvctvnovptvot PL
Apol. 31 e.
y.) In the emphatic use of ouoi and pn^i as, Ov ft.lv 2? ovSl rovr civ nt
tlfoi i. 9. 13. Ma ro'ivvv ftn'o'i vii. 6. 19. Ovxovv $ouXira,i . ., ov$t voXXe~
S7, he does not therefore wish, no, far from it, Dem. 100. 9.
GGt>. 3.) In the use of nn with the Infinitive, after words implying
some negation ; as, Nat/xXn'go/? aviTvi p.n 'bta.ytiv, he forbade the shipmasters to
ctoss [saying that they should not cross], vii. 2. 12. 'E^vyt ro p.n xee.ru-
Tirpu6nva.i i. 3. 2. "Efyi rov (&n xaraStJvcti iii. 5.11 (cf. 2,%n(ru fft -rn^av Eur.
Or. 263). KaXt/dvrs; /u.n^x/u.ti . . Togi%itr0ai vii. 6. 29 (cf. KuXvirtii rov xxitiv
i. 6. 2). ~K.uXvft.uroi fttj uv^nSnvut Th. i. 16. 'E/Atfotiuv rov p,ri n%n t'tvui iv.
8. 14.
NOTE. Ov is sometimes used in like manner, with a finite verb supplying
(with on or us ) the place of an Inf. ; as, 'A^vtTo-ffxi . ., on ov <ra^v, to deny
that he was present, Rep. Ath. 2. 17. 'ilj 3' ovx ixtTvof tytu^yn r^v <ytjv, ovx
HovvctT K^vtiftjvxi Dem. 871. 14.
GGG. i.) In the use of ft, ov with the Infinitive and Participle, as
A simple negative. This chiefly occurs (1.) after negative and interrogative sen-
tences, and (2.) after some expressions of shame and fear. Here p.n ov takes
the place of simple ffft, and (3.) may even be wholly redundant after words
where ftri would be so (<i 665). Thus, (1.) Ov^iij <yi p &v ^rt'urniv a.vf^u'ruv
ro pi) ovx i>Jitv, none of men can persuade me not to go, Ar. Ran. 65. Oi> ya.^
uv ftetxgav 1%vtvov cc-vros, ftt) ovx f%cav n o~vft,oXov Soph. CEd. T. 220. T/f
ft.nXa.vri ft-n ov%i ifa.vrot. xa.ravetXu^vos.1 ; PL Phfledo, 74 d. (2.) Tlirri veto-it
ulo-^vvnv fTva/, fin ov <rvff<rov1)a,%ttv ii. 3. 11. (3.) Ovx tvot,vnaffopa.t ro pn ov
yiywCtv jEsch. Pr. 787. T/ ^rx fttXl.ii; p.r> ov yiyuv'iffxiiv j Ib. 627. T/
fvrobuv pi) ov%i . . u,iroGa.vi7v \ iii. I. 13.
.) In the occasional use of ov to strengthen the negative f idea implied in
, than ; as, T/ ovv $t7 Ixt7vov rov ^'ovov a.vocft.'tvnv, . . ^aXXov % ov^ us roi^itrrct
. . rnv il^nvnv -ron7o-Sa.i, ' rather than make peace,' = ' and not rather make
peace,' H. Gr. vi. 3. 15, El roiwv ns vpuv . . XX&? -rus t%u rnv loynv ivt
NttSieiv, n us ov %'iov ctvrov ri6va,va,t Dem. 537. 3. "Hx/ yot- o \\i(>o'ns ou&'iv
n ftcc.XXov l-r np.'is, n ov XKI i<*l i/pictf Hdt. iv. 1 1 8. (Compare, in French
and ItaL, Vous e~crivez mieux que vous ne parlez, Egli era piii ricco che voi non
siete.}
NOTES. (1.) Two negatives in the same sentence have commonly their
distinct force, (.) when one applies to the whole sentence, and the other to a
part only ; and (/3.) when two sentences have been condensed into one. Thus,
(a.) Ov ftp} [*\v ffov X'fyu , ., TIPI I/AOV 'SI ov, I do not say it of you, and not
of myself , PI. Ale. 124 c. Ov vvv txi7vai VKioftsvoi, . . ov^l K-ro^xvi7v oi rXn-
ttovts lvvu.vrai\ iii. 1. 29. (/3.) See the examples in 528. 2; to which
may be added, with an ellipsis of the relative, Ov^tis ovx 'i-rao-^t Symp. i. 9.
(2.) For ov p.*. see 595. 1, 2, 597. 1.
G67. 2.) The repetition of various particles for greater
clearness or strength of expression, particularly after interven-
406 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK HI
ing clauses, in divided construction, and with important or en>
phatic words ; as,
x, or/, tl p.t) xarctGrio-ovrett olxytrovrts xo.} vttfovreti, ori Ko.va.xa.vtu
\ii. 4. 5. At&aixa, (*.*) a* aTa ptHlup.'* o.^yoi sj . ., /t>j, utr<rtg at XuroQa,
yoi, l<r i^.u.6 ufjuS 01. ill, 2. 25. Otix v lx.tx.vos sTva/ oip.o.1, ovr a 0/X0 u<f>i>.t)ireci t
our a fl0 aXe^a^ai i. 3. 6. K0vx a v yvvo,ixuv %o-ffovts xo-Xo'if^id' $.1
Soph. Ant. 680. Ta^;' av xa^' av ro t *vry x^i Tt/^^t7v SsX0* Id. (Ed. T.
139. T li Tsxv0 u ytvvnov Id. Phil. 799. BJ f*n i* rig v<rXa0< PI. Gorg.
480 b.
3.) The multiplication of particles of similar force, and the
employment of needless connectives ; as,
Mi Vgordtv xaraXf/o-a* *(>os rovs et,vriffra.fftuT<ts^ vf^tt a avrtf <rvp.Sovl.tv-
i. 1. 10 (cf. i. 2. 2). OJ *eo<r0tt <r^} $ . . lyivovro Ag. 2. 4. "0<r
*o /So?? tvixa Th. viii. 92. T ^ ^ a e' >** !*! Leg- 701 d. See
461. 3, 609 a, 619. N., 628, 655. 5.
C. ATTRACTION.
668. The influence of attraction sometimes passes
even beyond a connective ; as,
"<r/v, eu \ojtucrw o! uvS^uwoi, vi TOU et.'ya.Sou [for
through the attraction of oj] PI. Conv. 205 e. 'H|/'0vy, Aivrgiov ju.lv p.* .<*-
$ouveti ("rai/f AaxsSa/^av/aw;), (/ f*.vi ftovXovrai a.vota,Y<ris [for xvctSeivrets, by
attraction to the subject of $ovXovra.i] Tt . ., 0,^0^0^0.1 Th. v. 50. *E^ax^
rovs *' t1 TOU aXXaw -rtd'ovruv (see ^ 663. 6) Th. vii. 21. See 627. 2.
D. ANACOLUTHOX.
66O. Anacoluthon is frequent in the connection of sen
tences. The clause completing the construction is often either
omitted or changed in its form. Hence, also, the regular cor-
respondence of particles is sometimes neglected. Thus,
Tlf y&P lyu Ytxoufu, TIVOS, OTI KX<ay$0; J* l^u^a,vTiav uoftoffTrts ptiXXii
^i/ [for u( %x,ovffa,, K.yUavJja; ytesXXs/, or fixovva., on Kxiatv^o; /teXXs/] \"i. 4.
IS. ' \\ir,o o'o' u{ toixiv cv viftt7v [for ug 'ioixiv, ou vifti7, or loixiv ou f'/^sTv]
Soph. TV. 1238. 'AXXa fit]*, i^u <ya,o xeti ruura,, i Jv J^w tXw/3af, x*i
$ov\ri<ri<r6a.i QiXov r,f*,7v itioti - oTbcc fi.lv ya.% [for aXXa ftijv, tu yaa, /5a,
or aX>. ^iv i^w 0T yaj] ii. 5. 12. See iii. 2. 1 1. TeZv Si 'A^vctiuv irv^t
ya,P TotffSi'iet fooTtaov iv <ry A.ctxt$atif&ovi Ttoi aXXw -ret. a OUT a,, XKI . . i'5i^t
etureiif Th. i. 72. Oil* iV^' T< juetXXov, <J avSoif 'A^wvar*/, Toiirti oSrea:, us
TOV TotauTtv oiv$/>ee. iv TlgUTetvtitp O"i i ri7tr0u,i [for T/ ^aXXov fr^E-rs/, w, or <ri
vgirii ourusi us\ PI. Apol. 36 d. E/$flTif 0ix v o/toiuf ftHHtitrrttt txi il tx
ruv viuv foo; <rtt./}i<rxiU6t<rp.iveus ixiSei'otiv t n [for xa/ l/J xa.ro, yr,* iovrtf
i yveT0t'itifftt,t Th. vi. 64.
67O. NOTE. After a connective, a distinct sentence often takes the
place of a part of a sentence, and sometimes the reverse ; as. "E^ovrui . .
xyobxif el fjiiv 0tXX0j fidoSeioai, ^v J' aiiruv 4VnX7M| iTf "LXX^v , fur i<f 0* eej>
T O. 'E.I, Mere come heralds; the rest barbarians, but [there was] one o/*
them Phalinu*, a (Ji-ff.lt, ii. 1. 7. Sue i. 10. ! 2. n{j/t!X*t/v oWif
CH. 6.] ANACOLTTTHON. COMBINATIONS. 407
vrt yetg . . ^toovrts [for ouri ^i^ovrtf, or oSrt yot^ ?2/2aa-v. The construction
might be made regular by repeating Ta^jj^tXaw] Th. i. 25. See 641. /}.
671. V. The Greek especially abounds in combina-
tions of particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of
particles. The use of these sometimes extends farther than
their origin and structure would strictly warrant. A few ex-
amples of these combinations and phrases are given below,
but the subject in its details belongs to the lexicographer rather
than the grammarian.
1. aXXa y<% xeti ya.^, SC6 661. 2.
2. asXX* >? [from aXXa # or aXXa >], other than, except ; as, 'Agyugtov (A\I
ovx. $%&>, <zXX* *J fAixgov Tt vii. 7. 53. OiSa^oy . ., XX* xasr' aury)v TTJV aoe
iv. 6. 11.
3. aXX<w$ Tt xal, both otherwise and in particular, especially ; as,
ft/<w avJ^/, a,XXu; rt xeti ci^ovn, xaXXfav ttvxi xrrip.ot, vii. 7. 41.
4. ?5>.ov or/, if is evident that, evidently, tit oH3' OTI, eT$' o<rt, ffa.<$ 1ff6 f on,
and similar phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (quite like adverbs),
or annexed to them ; as, Ta p.iv ^ Kvgou &JXa on auras t^ti i. 3. 9. Ov-r
y vftiis, *u oT$' OTI, Ivrcttiffettrtit Dem. 72. 24. May<ur7a; yag sT try . ., fj M'
Sr t Ar. Plut. 182.
5. i/ ye, i7^ f <w<psXev, see 599, 600. 2.
6. 11 It pi, but if not, otherwise, used even after negative sentences ; as,
Mj vowy; return ti i p.r>, t<p*i, alrlctv t%us, do not do this ; otherwise, said
he, you will have blame, vii. 1. 8. OwV Iv rw vlctn roc, cVXa ify l%tit tt &
)i a <rora,p.os iv. 3. 6
7. 7 ri, us ri, and e-ri ri, see 539. a.
. 8. (t,rt ri yt, not to say aught surely, i. e. much less, or much more; as, Ovx
fw J' awrav a.^youvrtt ov$t ro7; Qit-ots l<ffiralrrtH wrig awraw T< ira^sry, /t*n ri yt
Irt ro7s $*o7 s Dem. 24. 21.
9. "On fAYi after negatives, except [= o n p* itrn, what is not] ; as, Ow ya.^
Sir xtfvv, on pr> put Th. iv. 26.
10. aw ya. aXXa, /or iV is not otherwise, but, i. e. for indeed; as, Ow yaf
XX' >j yJ /3/ tXxti Ar. Nub. 232.
11. ov pivrat aXXa, au /*^v aXXo:, yet no, 6uf, i. e. nevertheless, or nay ra<A-
er ; as, 'O "-TTOS Ti-rrti tif yovetra, xa.t pixgov xtixtivo* l^rp^a.^Kurtj oil phr
*>.X' t-rifttM* o Kv^os Cyr. i. 4. 8.
12. ov% ori, fjt.vt on, au% oiroi, ou% of us, ftr> ovca;, ov% eTa, / do not say that,
not to say that, &c., i. e. not only, or not only not (the three first phrases usu-
ally mean not only, and the three last not only not) ; as, Ou;^ on ftovo; a K^/-
ruv it rtffv^'ia. ^v, otXXoi xeti at fyiXoi cturoZ, not only was Crito himself unmolest-
ed, but also his friends, Mem. ii. 9. 8. Mi ya.^ on o-%ovroi, aXXi xi out
eu QoZouvrxi, . . ui3ouvrtxi Cyr. viii. 1. 28. "A.^otio'roi yxp xa,} yuvati%it . .,
frit on a.vO<i<ri, 'not to say men,' PI. Rep. 398 e. Oi^; oVov alx rip.vva.vre,
cXX* old \ftu6rnfKv Th. iv. 62. 'H; 01 \ot.xiboiiu.ovt9i v% a-rwy n/u.ct>o^>retivr9,
XXa xa,} iTxivvrxiiv, tfl'tt the Lfirt"l<pntniiiniis lunl not <mli/ not ptntix/ini, l>ut
408 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICLE. [BOOK III.
had even commended, H. Gr. v. 4. 34. Ou% OTWS S&> Saw? vii. 7. 8. M>
o-rus O%tiff6a.i in pvQfAu, aXA' olV o^6ov<rfu.i i$vva.ff0t Cyr. i. 3. 10. T\.fr.vp.id'
fifths, ol% ofus tri va.vifOfjt.lv Soph. El. 796.
NOTE. Oi>% on is sometimes although [not because, denying an inference
which might be drawn] ; as, 'lLyyvup.au ^ iv-iMa-to-fai, ei>% on QTKI^II x.a.1
<t>v<rtv iwXvo-ttav ttveti PI. Prot. 336 d.
13. oSvttca. and Mo$ixet \_-=rourov tvtxa, on, 530, 40.5, 372-7],
poet., on account of this, that , because, and, with certain verbs, that; as,
ZjjA&J a-' ofovvtx Ixro; uiria; x,vgs7s, I envy you [because] that you are free
from blame, ^Esch. Pr. 330. *\a6t rsvre -r^urtn, ovvixa. "EXXvj saym Soph.
Ph. 232. Ot/'vsxa is sometimes used by the Att. poets, like a simple adverb,
with the Gen. ; as, Vuvcuxo; ouvtxa., [because of] for the sake of a woman,
JSsch. Ag, 823.
14. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently in
the Epic, either one or both the prepositions are used adverbially ( 657. ),
or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of the
Other ; as, 'A/x,<pt fifi xgwvyv, round about the fountain, B. 305. A<* Ix. fiiya.-
010 K. 388. IIs< cro y iyx," S-we* A. 180. A/a^a P. 393. Hu^l
rou . . a.^yuojn>u Hdt. iii. 91. 'T?r' i fiihiav, from beneath the weapons,
A. 465.
672. VI. POSITION OF PARTICLES. 1. Prepositions
regularly precede the words which they govern. For the ac-
centuation when they follow (which is chiefly poet., and in Att.
prose occurs only with ntgl governing the Gen.), see 730,
731. N.
NOTE. The great fondness of the Greeks for connecting kindred or con
trasting words as closely as possible often produces hyperbaton in the construc-
tion of the preposition with its case, as well as i n other constructions ; thus,
II^oj aXXar' aXXav, for a'XXari f^og aXXav, ^Esch. Pr. 276. ITa^a <j9/X?s 0/'Ay
<pi(>ii >yvvouxo{ yf/ Id. Cho. 89. See 511. 3. For hyperbaton in earnest
entreaty, see 426. ft.
673. 2. Connective and interrogative particles, with
the exceptions mentioned below (NOTE ), commonly stand
first in their clauses.
NOTES, . The following particles cannot stand first in a clause ; v (not
for lav, 588), a^a (paroxytone), au (poet, awn), ttZfis (Ion. aJ<nj), y^,
yi, lal, Si, Sj (except in Horn, and Pind.), 5j^y, ^ra, 9-nv (poet.), HI (!'-!' ,
fjt.it, ftivroi, pw, wv (enclitic i Ep. also /, 66. a), ovv, #i(>, TI, <rai, <rei\u*,
and the indetinite adverbs beginning with <r (vari, *ov, &u., ^ 63). Thus,
*0 Ji frnVira/' <ri xcci fuMct/xSiivu, and he is both persuaded and apprehends,
i. 1. 3.
/3. "On is sometimes placed after a subordinate clause; as, Ki/jy iT-riv, tl
rtf $oiv ifrietf %i*.iov;, on . . xaraxava/ [for ori, it . ., *araxaya/J i. 6. 2.
oturu <ra.uTO. ffupvr>>6vfjt,nl!ii>n, on ol fAtTX/u,iKirti vii. 1. 5.
y. A sentence introduced by a connective often follows the Vocative, instead
of including it. By this arrangement, immediate attention is better secured.
Thus, "H^a/a-ri, troi Si #* pi^tT* tsr/<r<raAaf [for cat Si, "H^c-<ri], and you,
Vulcan, must hted the commands, ^Esch. Pr. 3.
CH. 6.] POSITION 409
3. The adverbs ?ix and %<*!* commonly follow, but some-
times precede, the genitives which they govern ( 372. y). Observe the ar-
rangement, Ins *o<r6iv mxa rtoi \p\ agir*; i. 4. 8 ; and, OJVtg etvros tvixa
L9. 21.
4. A particle is sometimes placed in one clause which belongs more strictly
to another (cf. 616) ; as, Oi* off tl *ur*ifu [for ol$' t il vrti<ratfA ]
Eur. Med. 941.
5. In emphatic address, the sign u is sometimes placed as follows ;
S <paivvor*To* Soph. Aj. 395. Quvpeifi Z ^irtn PL Euthyd. 271 0.
Id. ApoL 25 c.
BOOK IV.
PROSODY.
Eumen.
^ 675. Prosody treats of QUANTITY, of VER-
SIFICATION, and of ACCENT.
CHAPTER I.
QUANTITY.
{$676. In Greek, all vowels and syllables are
divided, in respect to QUANTITY (i. e. the time of
their utterance according to the ancient pronuncia-
tion), into the long and the short; and the long
are regarded as having double the time of the short.
NOTE. Hence the unit in measuring metrical quantity is the short sylla-
ble, or the breve (brevis, short), and a long vowel or syllable is equal to two
breves. ' For the marks of quantity ( ), see 16. 4.
677. Quantity is of two kinds, natural and local.
Natural quantity has respect to the length of the vowel in its
own nature ; but local quantity, to the effect which is produced
by the position of the vowel in connection with other letters
or syllables. With reference to the first distinction, vowels
and syllables are said to be long or short by nature ; with ref-
erence to the second, by position. Thus, in o/uqpaS, both sylla-
bles are short by nature, i. e. in the natural quantity of the
vowels ; but both become long by the position of these short
vowels before two consonants ( 51, C88).
NOTE. The quantity of a syllable is always the natural quantity of
the vowel which it contains, unless some change is produced by position.
CIJ. 1.] NATURAL QUANTIFY. 411
Hence it is usual, in prosody, to regard the vowel as the representative of the
syllable ; and language is often applied to the vowel which in strict propriety
belongs only to the syllable. Thus, in o/^ipal-, it is common to say that the
vowels are long by position ; while, in strict accuracy, the quantity of the
vowels themselves is not changed, but the syllables become long from the time
occupied in the utterance of the successive consonants.
I. NATURAL QUANTITY.
^678. RULE I. The vowels 77 and o, all
diphthongs, all vowels resulting from contraction or
crasis, and all circumflexed vowels, are long ; as
the vowels in rjfiav, nktiovs, yhaaods (^ 34), tivs
( 58), x&v (^ 40), Acts, r^ilv^ nvg.
REMARK. All vowels which result from the union of two vowels have,
from their very nature, a double time. See 25, 29 - 31, 723.
^679. RULE II. The vowels s and o are
short ; as in
% 68O. RULE III. The doubtful vowels
( 24. /3) are commonly short ; as in ^d.^.vKi.
To this general rule for the doubtful vowels there are many
exceptions ; which renders it necessary to observe the ACCENT,
the SPECIAL LAWS OF INFLECTION AND DERIVATION, the DIA-
LECT, and the USAGE OF THE POETS.
A. ACCENT.
681. From the general rules of accent (726), we
learn, that in natural quantity,
a.) Every circumflexed vowel is long ( 678).
/3.) In paroxytones, if the vowel of the ultima is short, the vowel of the pe-
nult is also short ; and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penult is long y
the vowel of the ultima is also long. Hence, in ^a/vaSay, xa^Kive;, and #X-
^vSo?, the vowel of the penult is short ; and, in A$a, 0mg, and Kapt/s, the
vowel of the ultima is long.
y.) In proparoxytones and properispomes, the vowel of the ultima is short ;
as in Koovga, tivveiftts, fr&SMf /3&>Xa,
B. INFLECTION.
682. In the common affixes of declension and conju-
gation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of contrac-
tion, -a in the Sing, of Dec. I., and -&ol for vol in the nude
Present.
\
412 NATURAL QUANTITY. [BOOK IV.
Thus, Dec. I., PI. Ace. -us ( 34), Du. Nom. - ( 86), Aor. Pt. -ires, -<rS.<r&
( 58, 132), Pf. PL 3 -van ( 181. 2); see ff 5, 29, 30. For special
rules in regard to the Sing, of Dec. I., see 92, 93 ; for -U, - 'aj in Dec.
III., see 116. For the dialectic affixes, see JJ 8, 10, 15, 32. For -dot,
becoming -tug in Dec. II., see 98. /3. For the doubtful vowels in the aug-
ment, see 188.
683. SPECIAL RULES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
1. The doubtful vowels are long in the last syllable of the
root,
a.) If the characteristic is ; as, *<, -x-a.tu.vo! 3iA<p/?, SsXpTvaf <N.
*t/f, <I>5flf. Except in the adjectives ft'tXas, f*fa&os, reiXas, TaXaoj, and
in the pronoun rtt , rfros.
/}.) In most palatals, if a long syllable precede ; as,
y.) In words in -is, -dog, and in some oxy tones in -iy, -iSa* ; as,
xrnfti's, xvijftiftes
>.) In a few other words ; as, *^
None of these words are pures, except -y^aus, yj aaj, and vaus , v&'os. None
of them are labials, except a few monosyllables, in which r is the characteris-
tic ; as, fty, pivros yv^t yvir'os. None of them are neuters in , -aro$.
2. Monosyllabic themes are long ; as, xt?, xio$ " pv$,
nvoog. Except the pronoun T*?.
NOTE. In accordance with this analogy, the neuter * (f 19) is length-
ened.
3. Nouns in -wv, and in -i<v, G. -tovo?, have commonly
the a and i long ; as, onatay, xttov (G. xtovo?) ; but <4vxAtwi>
(G. -twvos). For comparatives in -/wv, see 159. .
684. SPECIAL RULES OF CONJUGATION. 1. Before
the OPEN TERMINATIONS,
a.) is short, except in /,*<, to heal, *, and xX ( 267. 3). In
Epic anA lyric poets, the is sometimes long for the sake of the metre.
b.) i is commonly long ; thus, xavfw, to cower with dust, #* ( 282) But
Xc* (r; 189. 4), Mt* ( 298); 3a- (^ 58) ; *'t^i, ^r ( 278).
c.) is variable; thus, > ( 272. /3), ^a^uw, to u>eep, S^ta* ( 219).
X-S*, to binder; Itftw ( 264).
2. Before the REGULAR CLOSE TERMINATIONS,
.) In lingual and //^w/W verbs, the doubtful vowels are shorf ; thus, Ive^a.
fu t uvop&xa, l**ff* t ?/3xrr* ( 275); x^to-w, xixo^rxa (^ 40); xX5^, to
rinse, F. xXt5<rw, A. 7*Xi/9- TIT***, iT^y (^ 268) ; *ix^r, xi^s/u,.
( 217. a); wisrAiJ^a/ ( 270). Except /3i^, to u?e/j/A rfo;, F. /3^f<rw, A.
/3.) In pure verbs, (a) a is short, except when tlit- theme ends in -KU pure,
or- c **i thus, <r<r<r, i4 ( 219) ; Iffxtia.**, yiAa<r ^ a < (': 219. , 293);
JH. 1.] BER.VATION. - DIALECT. - AUTHORITY. 413
but, \laLffa., $j{<r ( 218). (6) i is commonly long; thus, xovfu (1. b),
F. x1<r, Pf. P. xixeiTfteti. But fyftfuti, 'Kptf/tnt, and, in the Att. poets, <p0t -
fu, ttpfltra. ( 278). (c) is variable; thus, F. a,vu<ru, lot-xfiffa (1. c).
See, also, S y ' ( 219) and ^i ( 264).
3. Before the TERMINATIONS OF VERBS IN -fit, the doubtful
vowels are short, except in the Ind. sing, of the Pres. and
Tmpf. act., and in the 2d Aor. act. See 224.
4. Before a CHARACTERISTIC CONSONANT,
i.) In the theme, a. is commonly short, but i and u long ; thus, Xas^f *,
fActv0avtu ( 290); xXfva; (269); X<yva/, ftvgqtuu ( 270). But J*M
( 292), r fv, pSf Ep., ptf Att. ( 278).
ii.) In the liquid Fut., and in the 2d Aor. ( 255. J), the doubtful vowela
are s/iorf, but in the liquid Aor., and in the 2d Perf., they are long ; thus, xfl
vu, x-Mvu, 'ixpvtt, t-rXuva ( 56) ; iA.aSv, iV/yav; ivrufafw (^ 290); t<ryj,
t^tyrjv, i?wyv( 294); XeXaxa, xsx^ya, ^uxee. ($ 236. 2). Except 2
A. tay ( 294 ; Att. a, Ep. commonly a). See, also, 236. E.
C. DERIVATION.
^685. RULE IV. DERIVATIVES follow the
quantity of their primitives.
This rule applies to compounds, as well as to simple derivatives. In applying
the rule, observe 307. R. Thus, &nou, F. vK<r/v, Pf. P. n6fys.pu.
Vgoddfto: ("Tgo, S-Oftof}, Ivrluog (tv,
NOTES, (a) For the quantity of the different terminations of derivation,
see T 62, 305 - 321. For r paragogic, see ' 150. 7. The final / in com-
pound adverbs ( 321. c) is likewise sometimes long. (6) For the lengthen-
ing of an initial vowel in the second part of a compound, see 326. R. In
some compounds, a, is lengthened without passing into ; as,
D. DIALECT.
G8G. The Doric for 77 is long; and , where the
Ionic uses y, is commonly long ( 44. 1). See also ^ 47.
E. AUTHORITY.
G 8 T. For doubtful vowels which are long, and which
are not determined by the rules already given, observe the
usage of the poets, and the marks of quantity in the lexicons.
Among the most familiar examples are "drn, destruction, e-rs^eg, follower,
vQga.yis, seal, r^a^yj, rough, Q^veigo;, talkative, uixtot, outrage, *v/ ("/), grief,
axgiSr,;, exact, atv, axe, 5tv, whirlpool, xetftlvas, oven, xlviu, to move, xxfuir,
bed, Xiftog, hunger, ftfx^'os, small, vlxn, victory, ojafXa?, crowd, flyr,, silence, %,-
Xrv;, bridle, ciyxDotz, anchor, yityu^a., bridge, il&uvm, account, iir^i'^os, strong,
xivlute;, danger, Xy-rjj, grief, vrOgo;. wheat, <rSXa,u, to plunder, "CX*?, forest, ^i7Xj,
tribe, %eO<roi, gold, -^D^fi, snul.
414 QUANTITY. [BOOK nr.
NOTE. Vowels, whose quantity is not determined by general or special rules,
are said to be long or short by authority ; i. e. the authority of the poets.
II. LOCAL QUANTITY.
^688. RULE V. A vowel before two con-
sonants or a double consonant is long (^ 51,
677. N.) ; as in o^^?a|, s^ni^oviss
NOTE. This rule ol position holds, when either one or both of the conso-
nants are in the same word with the vowel ; and commonly, also, when both
consonants or the double consonant begin the next word.
689. EXCEPTION. When the two consonants are a
mute followed by a liquid in the same simple word, the quan-
tity of the vowel is often not affected, especially in Attic po
etry.
NOTES. 1. This exception results from the easy flowing together of the
mute and liquid, so that they produce the effect of only a single consonant.
2. In the Att., the quantity of the vowel is commonly not affected, if the
mute is smooth or rough, or, if middle, is followed by . A middle mute fol-
lowed by any liquid except commonly renders the vowel long. Thus, the
penult is regularly short in rtrXj, rixvov, vror/tos, ^fyetxpos, -ytvifan,
and long hi
3. According to Person, the tragic poets sometimes leave a vowel short be-
fore the two liquids /cty.
69O. REMARK. A short vowel is sometimes length-
ened before a single consonant or another vowel, especially in
Epic poetry. This occurs chiefly in the following cases :
1.) When the consonant maybe regarded as doubled in pronunciation. This
applies especially to the liquids, and in the case of these (chiefly initial p,
cf. 64. 1) sometimes extends even to Attic poetry ; as, AloXov [as if -oAX-]
*. 36, fc* t<par A. 274, *raXX A./rro^i E. 358, ipi* pi*ov Soph. (Ed. T.
847, piy pdKos JEsch. Pr. 1023.
2.) When the diqamma ( 22. $) has been dropped ; as, y&\ ftiv [F^,
142. 4, 143. 0] 1.419, xf* i xvn t X. 42, -r^t 7x [Fr*av] I. 147.
Epic usage appears to have been variable in respect to the digamma. It some-
times appears to have had the force of a consonant, and sometimes only that
of a breathing.
3.) Before a masculine caesura ( 699. 4), and sometimes, without a caesura,
by the mere force of the arsis ( 695) ; as, ovop.& OS t . 366, et-rt tVi Z.
62, a-rSi^iry 0. 283, 'dfatotrot us . 309, Swyarfga r E. 371, oy oX5r l<rt A.
342.
NOTB. In Hexameter verse, one of three successive short syllables, a short
between two long syllables, and a short syllable at the beginning of a line,
must of necessity be made long. The second case sometimes occurs in the
( 695). Thus, 'drovitrfai 5. 46 ; 'ArxlnvioZ "Sue B. 731 (cf. 'A.r*Ai|.
CH. l.J POSITION. 415
frv vloi A. 194), &\offV3Z*Is lrri?n A. 36,"Ea;f 'S raW A. 193 ; 'E<rw.
2* (f) X. 379, <I>fx. >. A. 145, Ar ^i T. 357 (cf. K*> 3/ 358),
^tf E. 31. See other examples above.
^ 691. RULE VI. A long vowel or diphthong
at the end of a word may be shortened, if the next
word begins with a vowel.
REMARKS. 1. In the thesis of Hexameter and Pentameter verse ( 704,
705), this shortening is the general rule ; as, 'Hptr'sgiy iv< 7* i> "Ag yil rvkob
<rarejf. A. 30. T7, /u> KridroD, o $' a/ Ev^urou 'Axra^iuvof. B. 621.
2. This rule does not apply to the Iambic and Trochaic metres of the drama,
as there the hiatus is not allowed.
3. A long vowel or diphthong is sometimes shortened before another vowel,
in the middle of a word; as, 'i^tttn v. 379, o!W () N. 275, roloZros Soph.
Ph. 1049, $j/Araf Ar. Plut. 850. See also 150. y.
4. Some explain this shortening by supposing the long vowel (, w, = ft, ,
29. a) or diphthong to be half elided before the following vowel (olxo i) ; or
the subjunctive of the diphthong to be used with a consonant power
692. RULE VII. The last syllable of every
verse is common.
That is, the metrical pause at the end of the verse renders the quantity of
the last syllable indifferent ; and it may be regarded as either long or short
according to the metre.
NOTE. In some kinds of verse, the scansion is continuous ; i. e. the verses
are formed into systems ( 700), at the end of which only a common final
syllable is allowed, the preceding syllables being all subject to the rules of
prosody, as though in the middle of a verse.
693. REMARKS. 1. In respect to quantity, both natural and lo-
cal, the different dialects and kinds of poetry vary greatly. The greatest li-
cense appears in Epic poetry, which arose before the laws and usage of the
language became fixed ; and the least in the dialogue of comedy, which con-
formed the most closely to the language of common life. Of elegiac, lyric,
and tragic poetry, the two former approached more nearly to the Epic, and the
latter to the comic.
2. In giving the rules of quantity, never adduce position, unless some
change has been made from the natural length of the vowel. For convenient
distinction in metrical analysis, a vowel whose quantity is to be referred to
Rules I. and II. may be said to be long or short by nature; to Rule III.,
by the general ruk for the doubtful vowels; to Rule I V., by derivation ; to Rule
V., by position before two consonants, or a double consonant ; to Rule VI., by po~
ntion before a word beginning with a vowel; to Rule VI L, by position at the end
of the verse. When the quantity is not determined by general rules, cite spe-
cial rules ; or if these do not apply, adduce authority ( 687), ctesura, arsi n
the necessity of the verse ( 690), &c.
416 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK IV
CHAPTER II.
VERSIFICATION.
GQ4L. Greek verse is founded upon RHYTHM, i. e. the
regular succession of long and short quantities. The simplest
and most familiar rhythms are those in which a long syllable
alternates with one, or with two short syllables (_ ^ _ ^ _ ^ _,
or ).
NOTE. In versification, the elementary combinations of syllables are termed
FEET ; regular combinations of feet, VERSES (versus, a turn} ; and regular
combinations of verses, STANZAS, STROPHES (<rr^ o<pj, a turning round), or SYS-
TEMS ( 700).
^ G9t>. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with
a greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is
termed ARSIS (uQaig, elevation) , while the alternate weaker tone
is termed THESIS (&eatg, depression). These terms are also
applied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced.
In the exhibition of metres, the arsis (also termed metrical ictus)
is marked thus ( ' ).
NOTES. . As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substi-
tution of 4, ^ for j_ in the arsis, and of _ for ^ _ in the thesis, may be
made without affecting the rhythm. In this way, as the short syllables have
more vivacity, ease, and lightness, and the long syllables, more gravity, dig-
nity, and strength, the poet has the power of greatly varying the expression
of the verse ; while, at the same time, the facility of versification is very much
increased.
C. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by the
prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot receives
the ictus upon the first syllable ; while, in Iambic and Anapaestic verse, every
foot receives it upon the second, except the anapaest and proceleusmatic, which
receive it 'upon the third.
GOG. In the series j_^^j_^,^,j_^^, the thesis is
equal in time to the arsis ($ 676), and the rhythm is termed
equal or quadruple (_ ^ v = 4 breves) ; but in the series
j- ~ j- ~ _L ~ tne thesis is half the arsis, and the rhythm is
termed triple ( = 3 breves).
REMARKS. 1. Of these, the former is the more stately in its movement,
and the more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed
from common discourse ; while the latter has more nearly the movement of
common conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kind*
of verse, and to dialogue.
9. Not only do the equal and triple rhythms differ from each other in ex
CH. 2
RHYTHM. FEET.
417
pression ; but the same rhythm has a different expression, according as it
commences with the arsis or the thesis. In the former case (Dactylic j __ _
| _. __ _ | __ > and Trochaic j_ _ | i_ _ | j_ _), the movement, passing
from the heavier to the lighter, has more ease, grace, and vivacity ; in the
latter (Anapaxtic ___ ^ | ___ i \ __ _^, and Iambic _i_ \ __ i_ \ __ /_)
the movement, passing from the lighter to the heavier, has more decision, em-
phasis, and strength.
3. Other rhythms are, formed by doubling the arsis, or by prolonging the
thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms. Thus, by doubling tho
arsis, we obtain the rhythms, __ i_ j_ __ i_ j __ ^ j __ , and ^ __ >_ j_ _ ^
JL _L __ L _L _ Of these, the first, according to its division into feet
( 607), is Cretic J___L|_L_J_|J__L, Bacchic - J. J. I ^ J. J. I
, __ i_ j_ t or Antibacchic J__L_|j_j__|_L_L _; and the second, Chori-
ambic J__^_L|J.^ V J_|_I___/_, Antispastic _ j_ J_ . | j_ J. ^
| ^ j_ /_ ^, Rising Ionic _ __ L _L | _ _L J. I ___ L l.or Falling Ionic
_/_. __ | j_ j_ _ ^ | j_ j_ __ . Verses, in which the equal and triple rhythms
are united, are termed logacedic (Xoyctoi^ixei, from Xoyo?, discourse, and <,
tong ; see REM. 1 above). The most irregular kinds of verse are termed poly-
tchematist (vreJiutr^nfteiria'ros, multiform) and asynartete (Je.ffuva.^rnros, disjointed}.
GO 7. FEET of the same metrical length are termed
isochronous (tao^ovoc, of equal time). In the table of feet
below, the measure of Class I. is two breves ; of Class II.,
three ; of Class III., four, &c.
I. Tlfflx*t,
IL "luuSos,
III.
IV. 'A/u.<pifteiitos
iw y,
'.*,, y,
V.
'lavixos a^Tfl
'lutixos a,*'
MA.ir<raj,
Pyrrhic,
Iambus, Iamb,
Trochee, Choree,
Tribrach,
Dactyl,
Anapaest,
Spondee,
Amphibrach,
Proceleusmatic,
Amphimacer, Cretic,
Bacchius,
Antibacchius,
Paeon L,
IL,
ptitt.
f&HXOf*
Paeon IV,
Choriamb,
Antispast,
Diiamb,
Ditrochee,
Falling Ionic,
Rising Ionic,
Holossus,
418 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK IV
VI. 'Eflr^ras ', Epitrite I., ^ ___ l>yiiavrai.
, Epitrite II., _ ^ __ IV*O<TU-XUV.
', Epitrite III., __ ^ _ jyt//ics.
, Epitrite IV., ___ ^ (l
VII. &o%fuos, Dochmius, ^, ___ ,
uff<rov$uos, Dispondee, __
NOTES. . The Pyrrhic appears to have been so named from its use in the
war-dance (^fvfp^n) ; the Iamb, from its early use 'in invective (la,<rru t - to
assail) ; the Trochee from its rapid movement (rfixu, to run) ; the Dactyl,
from its resemblance to the finger ($u.x<rv\os) in containing one long part and
two short ones, or from the use of the finger in measuring, or in keeping time j
the Anapaest, as the Dactyl reversed (va-r<roj, struck back} ; the Spondee,
from its use in solemn rites (fvov^v, libation) ; the Bacchius and Paeon, from
their use in songs to Bacchus and in paeans ; the Tribrach as consisting of
three short syllables ; the Amphibrach, of a short on each side of a long ; the
Amphimacer, of a long on each side of a short ; the Antibacchlus, of a Bac-
chius reversed ; the Choriamb, of a Choree and Iamb ; the Diiamb, Ditrochee,
and Dispondee, of two Iambs, &c. I shall be pardoned, I trust, for adding a
few lines from Coleridge's Metrical Lesson to his Son.
" Trochge | trips frSm | long t5 | short.
From long to long, in solemn sort,
Slow Sponjdee stalks ; | strong foot! | yet ill able
Ev6r t6 | come up with | Dactyl trisyllable.
Iam|blcs march | fr<5m short | t5 long.
With a leap | and a bound | the swift An|apafsts throng.
One syllable long, with one short at each side,
Amphibrachys hastes with | a stately | stride."
ft. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are commonly measured, not by
single feet, but by dipudies or pairs of feet (Ws$<, double foot, from S/V and
irov;). When they are measured by single feet, a verse of one foot is termed
a monopody ; of two, a dipodij ; of three, a tripody ; of four, a tetrapody, or
quaternarius ; of six, a hexapody, or senarius, &c.
698. VERSES are named, (1.) From the prevailing
foot; as, Iambic, Trochaic, Dactylic, Anapcestic. (2.) From
some^poet who invented or used them, or from the species of
composition in which they were employed ; as, Alcaic, from Al
caeus ; Sapphic, from Sappho ; Heroic, from its use in cele
brating'the deeds of heroes. (3.) From the number of
measures (i. e. of feet, or dipodies, 697. /?) which they contain ;
as, monometer (/JOVO^T^OC, of one measure), dimeter (difjnyog,
of two measures), trimeter, tetrameter. (4.) From their degree
of completeness ; thus a verse is termed acatalectic (xr>l);-
XTO?, not tearing off, sc. before its time, from - priv. and XT-
iif/<u), when its measure is complete; catalectic (xTyU;xr/xo'c),
when its last foot is incomplete ; brac-lnjcntalectic (jfyr>i'f l
short), when it wants a whole foot at the end ; hyper catalectic
(vnt(), over), when it has one or two syllables over ; and ace-
CH. 2.J hiNDS OF VERSE. CJESURA. 419
phalous (axeyctJiog, headless) when it wants a syllable at the
beginning.
REMARKS. . A catalectic verse is said to be calalectic on one syllable (in
syllabam), on two syllables (in dissyllabum), &c., according as the imperfect
foot has one, two, or more syllables. Dactylic verses ending with a spondee
or trochee ( 692) are by some regarded as acatalectic, and by others as cat-
alectic on two syllables ; e. g. the common Hexameter ( 704).
ft. A lyric verse sometimes begins with an introductory syllable, termed an
anacrusis (a.va.x.(>ou<ris, striking up} ; or with two such syllables, forming what
ia termed a base (/5<r/?, foundation}. In these introductory syllables, the
quantity is commonly indifferent. A base sometimes consists of more than
two syllables, and the term is sometimes applied to a monometer in any spe-
cies of verse.
y. In the dramatic poets, exclamations often occur extra metrum (i. e. not
included in the metre); as, OtS! Eur. Ale. 536, 719, 1102. Ti <p Soph,
(Ed. C. 315. Tx*<v ! Ib. 318.
GOO. CAESURA. Composition in verse consists of two
series ; the metrical series, divided into feet and verses ; and
the significant series, divided into words and sentences. These
two series must, of course, correspond in their great divisions ;
but if this correspondence is carried too far, it gives to the
composition an unconnected, mechanical, and spiritless char-
acter. The life and beauty of poetry depend essentially upon
the skilful and varied interweaving of the two series. The
cutting of the metrical series by the divisions of the significant
series is termed ccesura (Lat. from credo, to cut). It is of two
principal kinds ; the ctssura of the foot, and the ccesura of the
verse. The former is the cutting of a foot by the ending of a
word ; the latter is the cutting of a verse by a pause permitted
by the sense (termed the c&sural pause).
REMARKS. 1. (a) The caesura of the verse is more frequently, but not
necessarily, a caesura of the foot, (b) When a foot-caesura separates the arsis
from the thesis, it is likewise termed a ccesura of the rhythm, (c) A caesura is
sometimes allowed between the parts of a compound word; as, Kr p os\rt
^fxrtHyXa^ar? | -rtitoDs. &scb. Pr. 172. (rf) A syllable immediately pre-
ceding a caesura is termed a ccesural syllable.
2. The coincidence of the divisions of the metrical series with those of the
significant series is termed diaeresis (^tx't^ttris, division). The most important
diaereses are those at the end of verses, systems, or stanzas. A foot-diaeresis
occurs whenever the division of words corresponds with the division of feet.
Hence a verse-caesura may be a foot-diaeresis ; e. g. the pastoral (REM. 5).
3. The verse-caesura (often called simply the caesura) not only contributes
to the proper interweaving of the metrical and significant series, but affords a
grateful relief to both the voice and the ear. See REM. 6. <
4. When the csesura follows a syllable pronounced with the arsis, it ia
termed masculine ; with the thesis, feminine. A caesura in the second foot il
420 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK IV
named trlemim (rgiyftiftsoj:, from <rgt~s, three, fi/u-, half, and pigo;, part, occur
ring after three half- feet) ; in the third, penthemim (viv<ri, Jive} ; in the fourth,
hephthemim (ivrci, seven); in the fifth, enneemim (ivviot, nine}, &c. These
names are also given to verses, or parts of verses, consisting of l, 2, &c.,
feet.
5. The caesura often occurring in Hexameter verse after the fourth foot
(which is then commonly a dactyl) is termed the bucolic or pastoral caesura
from its prevalence in pastoral poetry.
6. The expression of the verse is affected by the place of the caesura. In
general, the earlier caesuras give to the verse more vivacity ; the later, more
gravity. The most frequent caesura is the penthemim. The effect of the
caesura in producing metrical variety will be seen by observing that the two
most common metres, the Hexameter and Iambic Trimeter, are divided by the
two most common caesuras, the penthemim and hephthemim, into two parts,
having the ratio of 5 and 7, of which (with the partial exception produced by
the feminine caesura in the Hexameter), the one always begins and ends with
the arsis, and the other with the thesis.
TOO. Metrical composition is either in MONOSTIOHS,
SYSTEMS, or STANZAS, (a) MONOSTICHS ([lovoaTixog, of a single
line) are formed by the repetition of the same metrical line, as
in Hexameter verse ( 704), Iambic Trimeter ( 712), &c.
(b) SYSTEMS are formed by the repetition of similar rhythms,
with continuous scansion ( 692. N.) and an appropriate close.
See 708, 714, 718. (c) STANZAS (also called strophes) are
formed by the union of different kinds of verse. A stanza
consisting of two lines is called a distich (8'nnixog^ of two lines) ;
of three, a tristich ; and of four, a tetrastich.
NOTES. 1. The most common systems are easily arranged in dimeters, with
here and there a monometer ; and close with a dimeter catalectic. See
708.2,714, 718.
2. The Greek choral odes were written in stanzas of very varied structure,
but commonly arranged in duads or triads (sometimes in tetrads or pentads}.
A duad consists of two stanzas, corresponding in metre throughout. Of these
the first is termed the strophe (rrgoipri, turning round, stanza}, and the second
the antiilrophe (a.vnir<r(>oQfi, counter-turn, or -stanza). A triad consists of a
trophe and antistrophe, preceded, divided, or followed by a third stanza of
different metre, which according to its place is termed pro'dde (V^awSof, from
flrgo, before, and a!5>j, ode), mesode (pio-of, middle], or epode (Ifi, after}. Of
these, the epode is far the most common. The odes of Pindar m> written
each in a peculiar metre, but nearly all in strophes, antistrophes, and epoiles.
In the same ode, the strophes and antistrophes are all written in one metre,
and the epodes all in a second, different from the first. In the drama, on the
contrary, the metre of one duad or triad is nut repeated in a second.
7O I. REMARKS. 1. In SCANNING, observe not only the division
into dipodies and feet, but also the arsis or metrical ictus ( 695), and the
verse-caesura ( ffe9). Unless these are carefully marked, thj metrical char-
acter and expression of the verse are lost.
2. SYNIZESIS ( 30). (a.; In Epic poetry synizesis is verv frequent
CH. 2.J DACTYLIC VERSE, 42.1
especially when the first vowel is i ; thus, , i, uu ; i, (M , t0 u ; i, i* ,
as, n*Xflj2i A. 1; xtvfSf |va 15; see 121. 2, ^ 23. We find more
rarely 0.1 ; /, //, ,, <, < ; n/ ; o ; voi ; &c. Synizesis sometimes occurs
between two words, when the first is #, , $n, ^ i-rti, or a word ending in
the affix -t> or -* ; as, f; E. 349, iTl^M* 261, EUXtjfrTf/iX' A. 277,
M 1 P. 87.
(b.) In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly, (a) In the endings -*,
, -ia of Dec. III. ( 116. a). (6) In a few single words and forms ; as,
&if Eur. Or. 399. (c) In the combinations } e and ^ eu, which are
always pronounced as one syllable. (d) In some other combinations in
which the first word is j, , /*, ir/', or \yu as, pii~i$bw Eur. Hipp. 1335,
lytTilp Soph. Ph. 585.
3. HIATUS. Hiatus between words was admitted the most freely in Epic
poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of the di-
gamma ( 22. 3). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic poetry, es-
pecially in the Tragic Trimeter ( 712), where it was scarce allowed, except
after the interrogative r!, and some interjections, or words used in exclama-
tion ; as, oi'fyul \yu\ ^sch. Ag. 1257.
7 O 2. 4. In the following exhibition of metres, the division of feet
will be marked by a single bar ( | ) ; the division of dipodies by a double
bar ( || ) ; and the verse-caesura by an obelisk ( f ), sometimes doubled ( J ).
A base is denoted by B. In the examples which are given, the accents and
breathings are mostly omitted, that they may not interfere with the marks ot
quantity ; and these marks are employed alike to denote the metrical quan-
tity, whether natural or local. Hence the common syllable at the end of a
line ( 692) is marked according to the rhythm in which it occurs. Some
examples are added of analogous metres in our own language.
A. DACTYLIC VERSE.
7O3. The place of the fundamental dactyl is often sup-
plied by a spondee (_ ^ ^ = __ ).
7O4. I. The common HEXAMETER or HEROIC VERSE
consists of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or
spondees, the fifth commonly a dactyl, and the sixth always a
spondee.
KEMARKS. 1. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic,
and has commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs
most frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables.
2. The favorite caesura of the verse is the penthemim, which is almost
equally masculine and feminine ( 699, 4). After this, the most frequent cae-
suras are the masculine hephthemim, and the pastoral (<S 699. 5). Even
when the penthemim is not the principal verse-caesura, it is yet seldom wanting
as a foot-caesura. It is stated, that in the first book of the Iliad, 290 lines
bave the masc. penthemim, 3 1 5 have the fern., and only 6 have neither.
36
422
VERSIFICATION.
[BOOK IV
SCHEME AND EXAMPLES.
3. 4.
7t~_~ I 7t"i
5.
6.
AXXa xS.
Ar xf <r5
5j 'a^jvwv
<* il xuv xAr'
-A. 25.
f 't *r,S6\ou \ 'Aa-oXlXaJvdf. A. 14.
t a,1\y&* re" rf Xiraiv. A. 66.
. \ 'f&T& t folal V 'K.viffrH. A 68.
, f| x S6ftf\wt **? A. 44.
Coleridge's "Homeric Hexameter Described and Exemplified."
Strongly it | bears us a: long t in I swelling and ! limitless | billows,
Nothing belfdre and I nothing be hind, f but the | sky and the i dcean.
7O5. II. The ELEGIAC PENTAMETER consists of twc
dactylic penthemims ( 699. 4), the first containing two dac-
tyls or spondees with a caesural syllable, and the second two
dactyls with a final syllable. It commonly alternates with the
Hexameter, forming what is termed, from its early use in plain-
tive song, the Elegiac Metre.
SCHEME AND EXAMPLES.
f
"
-L ~ ~
t' '
"ir
, t
'is Tgai-|v tri"*Xff I wr
G0I, f x&\xus $' 'civo I
i" a, fi <rpl*tfv, ilftoi 3i jwfjyA ITieog. 11
Described and Exemplified by Coleridge..
In the Hex'ameter | rises t the | fountain's | silvery | column ;
In the Penitameter | aye fi falling in | melody | back.
7O6. III. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a.) Pure, con-
sisting of dactyls only ; (b.) Impure, consisting of dactyls arid
spondees ; (c.) JEolic, containing, in place of the first foot, a
mere base ( 698. /?) ; (d.) Logaadic (696.3), in which
dactyls are united with trochees. Thus,
1. DIMETER.
(a.) MffrT*5'ffj ttftit. Ar. Nub. 303.
(b.) AIM>NI<; (_L^^ | _ _) H-TV/*, | $V. Sapph. 1. 4.
(b.) Hypercat., Dactylic Penlhemim. *Ax^i|i">T4 -rd'^ft. ^Esch. Sup. 844.
2. TKIMKTKK.
(b.) nXX* y^ \ "Sxrr '*x& p,a.trlt. Soph. Tr. 112.
(c> PHKUECKATic(B. I j_ ^ w | j __ ) ""ExST a.i <pi\S* \ 'tro^. Find. 0.1.6.
GLYCONIC. Td edv [ rol -rA^.^tiy/^' 'f%*,
(B. j_ w _ | J ___ ) Tov <rov | 2aTf4?>v>, \ rov <rov, 'u
Tx>et<5> | Otii*6\1d, fat**- Soph. (Ed. T. 119&
CII. 2.] tACTYLIC AND ANAPAESTIC VERSE. 423
(d.) Mj5rr '8\<rn <pu\yoT(t "ay. /Esch. Pr. 907.
<a.) Hypercat. IIoXX* /3^!r to&\tuiGSft;\t. jEsch. Sup. 543.
3. TETRAMETER.
(a.) ALCMAXIAN. MD<r', 'ay?, \ Kaxxr3lra <jyS.\ri Ai8s. Alcm.
(b.) Spondaic. Ztvs r5Xt5|K>Of | 'a/u.<pi yv^vaixos. .^Esch. Ag. 62.
(c.) rXSx* *7*ey '*\tt X *,6, | "S^irgv. Sapph. 20 (37).
(d.) LESSEK ALCAIC ( j_ ^ ^ \ _, ___ | j_ ^ | _.__).
X f t/<roxo>a ZfQO ^ ft.1\yatet. Ale. 5 (24).
(.a.) Hypercat. T<$y /*ry|xy Aavi.iv 'i/VoUxjj^/ y|y. Soph. Aj. 225.
4. PENTAMETER.
y?, f. '"$*! Aayo^arraj. ^Esch. Ag. 123.
(c.) O/vof, | ' <prXf I */-, t Xi>i ra/-", xr 'a;X^f . Theoc. 29.
(d.) 'H- ?r5X;j, | ' yfvt a, ra. Xrva, | vCy '. Soph. El. 1314.
Hotfi&f | Vj TOTI I ^jrv5^fiv gt? | 'o^a. Soph. Ant. 135.
SAPPHIC (_L~^_..jl.
AT $i | ^* | pa texir, | 'xxa | Isfit. Sapph. 1.21
PlLVIXECIAN (B. | j_ | j_ _ | 2_ | ' . )
Te Atr.ovTo^a ^av, rov j 'o^ #r s . Theoc. Ep. 20.
5. HEXAMETER.
(a.) IT ? 5f <rf 7/lvsraSjf, | ' (p^XSf, | ' }g*r fturoirSi \ "ExXa^r. Eur. Sup. 277.
(b.) 'AXX' ' I vvrat\s QlM'riJTSs '*\ftttS8fti \9etl %&&*. Soph. El. 134.
(c.) Ki*.S[petI rtva. \ rdv ^^\itro. Mf"|y xa )A.f <r-r. Ale. 49.
(d.) "H- rX* ^a r/yr | ray Ji/ira'Xa/To'y 'f^X*) T/J | 'a^ay. ^Esch. Pr. 165.
B. ANAP^STIC VERSE.
^ 7O7. The place of the fundamental anapaest is often
supp'lied by a spondee or dactyl, and sometimes, though very
rarely, by a proceleusmatic ( ___ = ~ ~ =
_-_).
7O8. I. The Anapaestic, from its strong, even move-
ment, was a favorite metre for marching songs ; and it was
greatly employed in SYSTEMS, by the dramatic poets, as inter-
mediate between the Iambic of the common dialogue, and the
lyric metres of the choral odes.
REMARKS. 1. The general distinction (to omit modifications and excep-
tions) was this. The Iambic portions of the drama were spoken while the
performers were stationary ; the lyric, while thev were dancing ; and the Ana-
paestic, while they were coming in, or going out, or marching to and fro.
2. These systems are scanned continuously ( 692. N.\ but are usually ar-
ranged. so far as convenient, in dimeters (whence the common name of this
species of verse, the AXAP.KSTIC DIMETER). They uniformly close ~vvith the
dimeter catalectic, called, from its use in proverbs (^raofl/^j'a/), the purcemiuc
verse (see 700. 1). The use of the paroemiac, however, is not confined to
the close of regular systems.
VERSIFICATION.
[BOOK iv
3. This verse requires a ccesura after each dipody, except in the paroemiac.
This caesura is sometimes deferred, so as to follow a short syllable at, the begin-
ning of the next dipody.
4. In respect to the feet, the following should be observed, (a) An ana-
paest must not follow a dactyl in the same dipody, and rarely follows it in suc-
cessive dipodies. (6) A dactyl rarely follows an anapiest or spondee in the
same dipody. (c) The third foot of the paroemiac is regularly an anapaest ; so
that the system may close with the cadence of the common Hexameter. A
spondee, however, is occasionally admitted (cf. 704. 1).
SCHEME AND EXAMPLES.
1.
Dimeter Acatalectic.
2. 3.
Paroemiac.
2. 3.
~ ~ J. II - ~ JL
til
TtvvetT 6; '''W^,
v, | ** Sf4,oi || Iz'&oxtfffctr. Eur. Med. 759.
^ til TxT\a7<r;*. JEsch. Pr. 93. .
"H~5~ I ffA.^w||c*f t " *' '7v I Xola-jj. Soph. Aj. 146.
Though her eye | shone out, t || yet the lids | were fi'x'd,
And the glance | that it gave 1 1| was wild | and unmix'd
With aught | of change, t || as the eyes | may seem
Of the restjless who walk t II in a troiiblled dream.
Byron s Siege of Corinth.
TOO. II. The combination of the regular dimeter with
the paroemiac (cf. 713, 717) forms the ANAI'JESTIC TETRA-
METER CATALECTIC of comedy, also called, from its use by the
great master of comic verse, the Aristophanlc.
SCHEME AND EXAMPLKS.
1.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
~ ~ JL
^_
vx '
t|U^^
~~JLU
^ ^ JL
w > /
-. J-
_ JL
til _ J_
- J-\\\
_ JL
_ _/_
i, ~
L ^
nl*.-
II
t-
7.
Kaf p.
T*{ 'H'f
T<- yao
y t || '
t || 'ut oC
v t || *'"
I |! '
, Us I || 'r
6v, | i rc||r<t yi>dv roy.
Ar. Vesp. 548.
At your word | oflF I go, t II and at startling will show, f || con vine ing th
stiff ||est opi'n ion,
That rega lia and throne, t || sceptre, kingldom and crown, 1 1| are but dirt
to judi||cial domin ion.
CH. 2.] ANAPJESTIC AND IAMBIC VERSE. 425
First in pleas' ure and gle, f || who abound \ more than we*; J |j who with
liix|ury nearj;er are w&Llded?
Then for p'anlic and frights, f || the world through [ none excites, J || what
your dijcast does, e'en || tho' gray-head ;ed.
Mitchell's Translation.
7 1O. III. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of
other kinds of Anapaestic verse, both common and logacedic
( 696. 3) ;
Monom. Hyperc. Tef<roMfA\*tov7\\K&v. Find. O. 13. 1.
Dim. Hyperc. ToVf" pi v | viiff&\\pory.r6f \ Kttt *S.{io\rof. Eur. Here. 1018,
Frim. Brachyc. 2i pit oS* \ x&r&*.tD\\<rop.tv, 'u\p.i&H || xi w <j3axj. Ar. Ach
285.
LOGA<EDIC. 1 An., 1 lam. NT/ttsa | &" rtfs. Find. N. 6. 34.
1 An., 3 lam. Af%iftfr\titMmi \ 6&>v \ ytvos. Ar. Thesm. 312.
1 An., 4 lam. Cat. X*)V* [ V*| r5>\Ss x*!/*>v. Find. O. 4. 14.
2 An., 1 lam. T ftt> 'A^rx^ao I ^"Ao*. Find. O. 9. 1.
2 An., 2 lam. Cat. 'CTAfyoi^avrsv |"xr,xr/v. ^Esch. Pr. 547.
2 An., 3 lam. 2t/"xi7^|<r' '^ox)Tof 'ni^ov; | vl6tt. Eur. Ion, 1447.
3 An., 2 lam. AoXf"^o | ^t"v 'f | xara r!ra J j r^oVffv. Ar. Av. 451.
4 An., I lam. 'IoT|rf y&fc.ur, | "o* ra> | 'oTcosralrgror. ^Esch. FT. 55S.
C. IAMBIC VERSE.
7* 1 1 . The place of the fundamental iambus may be
supplied by a tribrach ( _ _ ^), except at the end of a
line. To add dignity and variety to the verse, the first foot of
a dipody is very often lengthened to a spondee, and not unfre-
quently to a dactyl or an anapaest.
NOTE. The comic poets admit the anapaest in every place except the last
of a verse or system. The same license exists in tragedy in proper names
containing two short between two long syllables.
7 IS. I. The IAMBIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC (often
called the Senarius, 697. /S) is the principal metre of dra-
matic dialogue ( 708. 1 ) .
REMARKS. 1 . This verse has for its caesura the penthemim or the heph-
themim, the former much the most frequently. The latter is sometimes an-
ticipated by the elision of the syllable after which it would properly fall, form-
ing what has been termed by Person the quasi-ccesura. Lines occur, though
rarely, which have neither of these caesuras.
2. The Tragic Trimeter admits the tribrach in every place but the last ;
the spondee in the 1st, 3d, and 5th places ; the dactyl in the 1st and 3d ; and
the anapaest in the 1st. The feet which are admitted only in comedy or in
proper names ( 711. N.) are placed within parentheses, in the following
scheme.
36*
426
VERSIFICATION.
[BOOK iv
1.
SCHEME AND EXAMPLES.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
^ /
f /
1" /
.
f
f /
JL
_t J_
Cf-)
^ v /
(_ ^ j_
^ t ^ /
^ f ^ /
-. ^ ' )
| 9/ff. JEsch. Pr. 14.
ij|^fa. Ib. 2.
O&fidv \ ff^6f,Tv. Ib. 16.
wr. Ib. 18.
j|vov t w^oj /3iav jj %tt(>oii | pivSv. Ib. 353.
w||?ro>^6vr f I '" ||-Tirxf | va.rfi^. Soph. (Ed. C. 1317
rl* /UJ5 | Qtrtirt' - t I Vy || ""*' i Ila^fy. Eur. Hec. 387.
i'X i" ptfj IJ yvtifiois \ 'vfo\ffvr(ffa.i \ fo'lfius- Soph. Aj. 1091.
Love watch ;ing Mad]jness f with | unalj|tera,ble mien.
Byron s Ckilde Harold.
7 1 3. II. The IAMBIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC is pe-
culiar to comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cat-
alectic (cf. ^ 709, 717) ; and has commonly a caesura after
the first dimeter.
NOTE. The same metre (following of course accent and not quantity) is a
favorite verse of modern Greek poetry. In our own language, it is chiefly
used in comic songs and ballads.
2.
SCHEME AND EXAMPLES.
3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
_ JL
-i-
in prop.\
name*. /
Quxovv I
"0" ^
*' f o Jf<r!<ror>if f || *o "5f | *?
fa-rov Xfysw $ f ^
J. n
'ara|Tf. Ar. Plut. 260.
Aur6|ra rfs||es o'er | the hills, 1 1| by gracelful Hours || attend ed,
And in | her train, || a mdr ry troop 1 1| of bright-ieyed Loves || are bldndled
PercivaCs Classic Melodies.
^ 7* 1 4. III. The Iambic verse sometimes occurs in SYS
TEMS of the common form ( 700. 1) ; as,
r. Eq. 453.
CH. 2.]
"AMBIC AND TROCHAIC VERSE.
427
7 I 5. IV. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of
other kinds of Iambic verse (for the iambus in logaoedic verse,
see 710).
Monom. Hyperc. 'EVar'^oj 'Dp\\yeSv. Find. P. 6. 7.
Dim. Brachyc. 't-rfo- ri pal || fyciffds. Soph. El. 479.
Dim. Hyperc. 2tf <reT \ <rij rol \\ Kxrj\ieJ^f*s. Soph. Ph. 1095.
Iriin. Cat. 'Of r -y 'tj!|^8 | ffStvos \\ K^ro.i\6v. ^Esch. Pr. 429.
Tetrum. Tv $<I\vci TXa||rav, ^t^vo. V iD\ou<ro,v \ vgos u.l\6a.\fjt.utv \ <ru.6n. Soph
(Ed. C. 1077.
(<rx2>v, limping) or CHOLIAMBUS (xuX.tctp.Sos, lame Iambus\ a
form of the Trimeter, introduced by Hipponax, and having, for satiric or
comic effect, a spondee in the last place.
Er I' 'ff\fft xtfU'ytiSt | t *'" || ? I ^nff^Sn. Theoc. Ep. 21.
D. TROCHAIC VERSE.
^ "7 1 6. The place of the fundamental trochee may be
supplied in any part of the verse by a tribrach (_ ^ _ ^ ^ ^).
The last foot of a dipody is often lengthened to a spondee or
anapaest. The dactyl is admitted in proper names, except in
the 4th and 7th places.
7 1 7. I. The TROCHAIC TETRAMETER CATALECTIC oc-
curs in both tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters,
the second catalectic (cf. 709,713) ; and has commonly a
caesura after the first dimeter.
1.
SCHEME AND EXAMPLES.
3. 4. 5. 6.
JL ~
7. 8.
t
t
JL ~
JL **
les.)
n prop, nan
'^ffif f ]| at '.\*&*
/ afrftv f |j -^wgr
Ar.-Vesp. 1101.
Smdll re| flection || and in sp^ction, 1 1| n(?eds it, | friends of || mine, to | s&,
1'n the | wasps and || lis your | chorus, 1 1| wondrous | simi||larijty.
MitcheWs Translation.
^718. II. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in
SYSTEMS of the common form ( 700. 1) ; as,
T
I Pvf
a5ff[tTT& ". Ar. Pax, 578.
428 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK IV
7 1 0. III. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, ot
other kinds of Trochaic verse (for the trochee in logacedic
verse, see 706).
Trim. Au^\u <f>u\\v& Yv(s^ogjjar iSrXw. Find. 0. 3. 9.
Trim. Cat. Tr yag | TV rov||<nw xij\Sr^y\\TKl Sojaf. Ib. 12. 4.
Tetram. 'Evrr | pa $s\\u* 'f\x&ri \\ pvtf\& *-&\\<r& i\Xiv06s. Find. I. 4. 1
E. OTHER METRES.
The metres which remain are LYRIC, and for the
most part admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the
substitution of two short syllables for one long, or of one long
for two short. Examples are given of some of the most im-
portant.
1. Cretic System. <3>ffvr2Vov | xar ys'voU
| tfJfffGts \ x-go&vos,
T&v tpvyaba. \ p.fi vrgS^uf,
Ta 'Ixoifii I 'ixG$7(.etTf
| 'opsv&v. JEsch. Sup. 418.
2. Bacchic Tetram. Tr s '&%&, \ r! s '5^& {
C_Lj_) ^Esch. Pr. 115.
3. Choriambic System, closing, as is usual, with a bacchius.
Kr5 'ofu { | Qciwti. Ar. Vesp. 526.
4. Rising Ionic System. Hftrl^&xft \ pi* '3 vf<rf \vrr5Xfs 'vdfi
u | tr^ilnA vogjlftov afiiT^eif. ^Esch. Pers. 65.
ft. Paeonic Tetram. Cat. r n-^**4 e r* | Acrifttvis, t I '** ?**&]$&?**,
(j. - ~ -) Ilar^j 'i<f>8\TtG<r&s 'or? f | ^tT^ii^\xuTa.reSf.
AT. Vesp. 1275.
6. Dochmiac System. Mifarai trr^rof \
xovls
Sopt. 79
^ 7 SB 1 NOTE. An antispast (avr'iff*itff<ra{, drawn in contrary direc-
tions) is a combination of an iambic with a trochaic rhythm, and admits in
the first part any foot which is admitted into Iambic verse, with the appro-
priate ictus ; and in the second part, any foot which is admitted into Tro-
chaic verse, with the appropriate ictus. The addition to this combination
of a long syllable (which, in connection with other rhythms, may be resolved
into two short) forms a dochmins fio%/4i9;, oblique, crooked), which has con-
sequently a triple ictus, with great variety of structure. Thus (1.) , __ L_L~_L>
(2.) ~O~J.~_L; (s.) _o.i~,--L;(4-)~^~A~-JL;(5.)_.L-L~j-;
(6.) _^,i__j_;&c.
CH. 3.] ACCENT. 421*
CHAPTER III.
ACCENT.
$ 732. In e^ery Greek word, one of the three last syl-
lables was distinguished by a special tone of the voice.
REMAKKS. 1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the
accent. Its precise nature we cannot now determine. It seems to have re-
sembled, in some degree, but with important differences, that which we call
accent in English orthoepy. That it never fell upon any syllable before the
antepenult, shows that the Greeks felt the same difficulty in the utterance of a
long train of syllables after their accent which we feel after ours. See also
733. 2.
2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity with-
out regard to accent ; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon accent with-
out regard to quantity. We cannot resist the conclusion from this, that in the
ancient language the distinction of quantity was the more prominent to the
ear ; while in the modern language the reverse is strikingly true ( 19). At
the same time, the distinction of accent was evidently the more intellectual in
its character ( 734) ; and, if less marked by the ear, was far more so by
the understanding.
3. To those who pronounce the Greek in the usual method, according to
quantity, the study of the accent is still highly useful, as serving, (a) To
distinguish different words, or different senses of the same word ; as tifti (en-
clitic, 732), to be, ilpi, to go ; o, the ( 731), o, which; von ; when? vari
(encl.), once; AA, other things, aXX, but; hdaGoXo;, throwing stones, Xdo-
6aAj, thrown at with stones ( 739. 6). (6) To distinguish different forms
of the same word ; as the Opt. /Sat/AszW/, the Inf. fiovXivffa,i, and the Imp.
Pou*.iv<rui (^ 34, 35). (c) To ascertain the quantity of the doubtful vow-
els ( 681, 726). (d) To show the original form of words. Thus the cir-
cumflex over npu, $^u, l*Xu, marks them as contract forms of the pure
verbs rtfteiu, <fnxiu, 'SvXeu. (e) To show how words are employed in the
sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained by pro-
clitics and enclitics ( 730-732).
4. Upon some of the minute points of accentuation, authorities and critics
differ. But this only furnishes another point of analogy between the Greek
accent and our own. Indeed, there is no subject, either in grammar or in any
other science, upon all the minutiffl of which there is a perfect oneness of
opinion.
793. In accentuation, a long vowel or diphthong in the
ultima, and often in the penult, is regarded as forming two
syllables ( 29. , 676). We may say, in such cases, that
the vowel or syllable forms two accentual places.
REMARK. In accentuation, the inflection-endings ai and o*
are not treated as long vowels, except in the Optative (cf.
41)
430 ACCENT. [BOOK iv.
NOTE. This treatment of final / and at as short vowels appears not to have
prevailed in the earliest form of the language, nor in the Doric dialect, which
was characterized by its closer adherence to old usage ( 735. a). In the
Opt, it seems not to have prevailed from the natural dwelling of the voice
upon the termination ( 177). Traces of the old usage appear in the accent
nation of so many Inf. forms upon the penult ( 746) ; although tne circum-
flex accent is not here excluded (cf. 726. R.).
1. Accentual places are counted according to the foil owing
method. The ultima is counted as the 1st place, if its vowel is short, but as
the 1st and 2d places, if its vowel is long. If the ultima forms two places, the
penult forms, of course, the 3d place, and completes the number which is al-
lowed. If, on the other hand, the ultima forms only a single place, then the
penult forms the 2d place ; and, besides this, if its vowel is long, it ahcaya
forms in dissyllables, and sometimes forms in polysyllables, the 3d place also. If
the ultima and the penult form but two places, then the antepenult is the 3d
place. In the following words, the numbers denote the accentual places ;
1 21 3 21 2 1 3 21 32 1 32 1 3 21
321 3 21 32 1 32 1 3 21 321 32
', exovautg, kxovaci, exovaai, noJiffiovg, nofapog,
2. An ascending line (') was adopted by the Greek grammarians as the
mark of an accented place, and a descending line ( v ) as the mark of an un-
accented place. A syllable in which an accented was followed by an unac-
cented place received, of course,, a double mark ( /v ). The words above, in
which the accentual places are numbered, are all accented as far from the end
as possible. If, therefore, all their accentual places were distinctly marked,
they would be written thus ;
Ao/oi), AO/O, TzAouroi), 7zAot)TO, nloviol,
ovi kxovualg, kxovaot, kxovaai, no^sfiovc:, JzoAf^uoc,
3. But it is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark
unaccented syllables, and when the two marks ( " ) fall upon the same sylla-
ble, it is more convenient in writing. to unite them into one ( A , or, as rounded
for greater ease in writing, " or ~ ). Dropping, therefore, the marks over
the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus ;
$c'C} nciig^ hoyov, Ao^oc,*, TzAouzof, TiAouro?, TzAouzot, Ttfjoawnotg,
exovauig, kxovaa^ exotum, itoMftoVfi 7zoAf//o, 7zoAf/*ot.
4. The following words are accented upon the first place ; Say, Sfy,
%i'i, ratios, yw//, (!>a.<rtXivs. The following, upon the second ; /Saw;,
9TV{, ffoQov, rtprif-, via;, niei, Xayi, 0/Xa/, %uvett, -ri/tvf, offriov, /3a<r/Xiy, vi
The following, upon the third ; Xaywv, rr5j, yyvatTxa, oufiu., ff&ftotroi, tr
^ 725. A syllable is termed acute, if it simply forms an
accented place ; circumjlexed, if it forms an accented followed
by an unaccented place ; grave, if it receives no accent ; as
the final syllables in V^pt, ftaadevg ' aoyov, itfif^ ' Ao'/f, utu/u.
A word is f OXYTONE )" ( Acute -
< PERISPOME, > if its Ultima is < Circumflexed.
termed an | BARYTONE] / ) Grave _
JII. 3.] GENERAL LAWS. 431
is f Z,A } * " Pc '< is !
11 ( PROPAROXYTONE, if its Antepenult is Acute.
NOTES, (a) The terms above are formed from the words <rova; (Lat. ac-
eontus), tone, o%vi (Lat. acutus), sharp, ff< t tr*up<vos (Lat. circumfiexus), bent
round, circumflexed, fict^v; (Lat. gravis), heavy, grave, irg, near, and T^O,
before. (6) The paroxytones, proptrispomes, and proparoxytones are all in-
cluded in the general class of barytones.
726. To the principles of Greek accentuation which
have now heen given, may be referred, almost throughout, the
following general laws of accent and accentual changes.
I. GENERAL LAWS OF ACCENT.
1. One accent, and only one, belongs to each word.
Hence a-vv and <$;, compounded, become rvvobos ffuv and <^i^u, ovptyi^u.
For apparent exceptions, see 731, 732.
2. The accent never falls upon any syllable before the ante-
penult.
Hence Svo/^a, piytSos become, in the Gen., ovc/xaras, ftiyifaos.
3. The antepenult can receive only the acute accent, and can
receive this only when the ultima is short.
Hence SaX<r<r, v^<w-ay, <z-o<ru<raY, become, in the Gen., 9-Xa<r*>;?, av^w-
fou, -ff^offu-rou. For S-aXao-o-a*, av^w-ro/, see . 723. R.
NOTES, a. If the ultima is long merely by position, still the antepenult
receives no accent ; hence e^/f&iXa| (*), though Ig'iSuXo;.
/3. In accentuation, i before u in the terminations of the Gen. and of the
Attic Dec. II. is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable ( 35, 95. 3. a,
98, 116. a, S) ; hence, 'Ar^Se*/, -rescue , -roXtuv - uveuytuv. So, also, with an
intervening liquid, in adjectives compounded of yiXus and xigo,; ( 136. 1);
as, <p/XysX<wj, eixias ' and, according to the same analogy, the compound ad-
verbs tx-retXe
4. The circumflex never falls upon any syllable that is no';
long by nature.
Hence Qau;, pvf, *?, become, in the Nom. pi., &oi;, puts (i/), wavrsj (a).
5. The penult can receive the circumflex only when the ul-
tima is short by nature.
Hence poura, 5j<rf, <rvxv, become, in the Gen., pavo-m, wirou, o-vxou. For
ftotJerxi, vqirai, see 723. R.
REMARK. In the old language and in the Dor. (cf. 723. N.), a final
syllable long merely bv position appears to have forbidden both the acute upon
the antepenult, and the circumflex upon the penult. From the common ac-
centuation (which forbade i^a/>.a, but permitted (g<aXa$, see N. above),
432 ACCENT. [BOOK iv
the circumflex upon the penult appears not to have been deemed quite sc
great a remove from the end of the word a^the acute upon the antepenult
.(cf. 723. N.). Even after the dropping of <r in the 3d Pers. pi. of verbs
181. 2), some forms of the Doric retained the old accentuation; as, ty^ai
Qovr ly^ti^av.
6. If the ultima is short by nature, and the penult is long by
nature and accented, it must be circwriflexed.
Hence 3-fy, K'IUV, ytup-n, 'Ar^iting, become, in the Nom. pi.,
( 723. R.), 'Arbeit. For i"6i, i^ } aW, &c., see 732. d.
II. ACCENTUAL CHANGES.
727. The accent is subject to the following changes :
(a) The acute may be changed to the circumflex; as, b //'(>,
driqeg. (b) The circumflex may be changed to the acute ; as,
/uoi}(jtt, juova/c. (c) The acute may be softened upon the ulti-
ma ( 729). (d) The accent may be thrown lack, that is,
transferred to a preceding syllable ; as, yQaya, fygayov.
(e) The accent may be brought, forward, that is, transferred
to a succeeding syllable; as, &IJQ, drjgog. (/) The accent
may be thrown upon the preceding word ; as, ampa /*oi ($ 732).
(g) The accent may be omitted ; as, ramo ' TKXQ ipoi '
o rovg' q>zAw as ( 728. b, c, 731, 732).
728. Changes in the accent arise, principally, from,
I.) The ADDITION or LOSS of syllables ; as, ovopa, oro^inrog
(5) 726. 2) ; (j/TTTw, QtnTsw ( 288) ; xov<pog, xovcpoityog (^ 156) ;
natiqog, nuiQog ( 741). See III. c.
II.) Change in the QUANTITY of vowels. See 726. 3-6.
III.) CONTRACTION, CRASIS, or APOSTROPHE, as follows.
a. CONTRACTION. An acute syllable, followed by a grave,
is contracted with it into a circumflexed (^ 724. 3, 725) ; other-
wise 4he accent is not affected by contraction, except as the
general laws may require ; as, voog vovc, ripd** TI/KW
T//U, Ttfiaolp.rjv ji^tft^rjv' kanxoTog forwro? (^ 726. 6).
REMARK. Some contract forms are accented as though made by inflection
without contraction ; or fall into the analogy of other words. Thus,
1 .) In contracts of Dec. II., (a) The accent remains throughout upon the
same syllable as in the theme ; as, ri/rxf, wi^-rXcoj/, contr. rif/VXflt/f, -rtfi.
rXi/- Gen. it-y^u (^f 17). (//) The Nom. dual, if accented upon the ulti-
ma, is always oxytone ; as, w, Ivru (^f 9). (c) Except in the Nom. dual,
all simple contracts in -ovf or -t/ are perispome ; as, %(>vfftes %gu<revs (^f 18),
xavtav X.O.VOUM, bdsskr.t. (r^) In oxytones of the Attic Dec., tin- Grn. sing, has
the acute ; which may be explained by supposing one a to have been dropped
from the original form (cf. 243. 2) ; thus, &o t (H 9), G. a (86), a,
by contraction t*>, nv ( 98. 0).
CH. 3.] ACCENTUAL CHANGES. 433
2.) The contract Ace. of nouns in - is oxytone ; as, # # (^ 14).
So Dat. (^eT/) x$ perispome ( 104). These cases follow the analogy of
744.
3.) The contract Gen. pi. of r^^t (^ 14), awragx*;;, and compounds in
*t6r,t is paroxytone ; as, r^in^iuv r^i^uv.
4.) The Sul>j. pass, of verbs in -p,t, and of Perfects used in the sense of the
Pres., is often accented as though uncontracted ; thus, rifafteti, <nVj, rifarai
ttiufjt.a.1 xixruftai, pifji.vup.Ki ( 234). And, on the other hand, the Opt.
pass, of these verbs is accented by many as though contracted ; thus, vthlo,
NOTE. In diceresis, or the resolution of a diphthong, a circumflexed sylla-
ble is resolved into an acute and a grave ; as <>
b. CRASIS. In crasis, the accent of the first word is omitted.
The accent of the second remains without change, except as
required by 726. 6 ; as, TUVIO, for TO amo ' iAAw, for T Ua
(yet some write
c. APOSTROPHE. When an accented syllable is elided, the
accent is thrown back upon the penult, as acute ; thus, delv
Buy, for duvet enr) ' Tro'JU' tnaSov (nolla}. Except in preposi-
tions, and the particles U, prjds, ovds, and the poetic yds and
ids ' as, nag' epoi, att' ey<a.
799. IV.) The CONNECTION OF WORDS in discourse, as
follows.
A. GRAVE ACCENT. Oxytones, followed by other words in
closely connected discourse, soften their tone, and are then
marked with the grave accent ( 14) ; as, em T xA xul aya&u.
EXCEPTION. The interrogative T/J , and words followed by enclitics ( 732),
never take the grave ; as, T/y il 5 Who art thou 9
NOTES, a. In the application of this rule editors vary. The best usage,
However, retains the acute accent only in the case of unconnected words or
phrases, and before the period, colon, and such other pauses as require to be
distinctly marked in reading.
/3. The syllable over which the grave accent is written is still regarded as
acute, although its tone is softened, and the word to which it belongs is still
termed an oxytone. Syllables strictly grave are never marked, except for
grammatical illustration, as in 724.
73O. B. ANASTROPHE. In prepositions of two short
syllables, the accent is usually thrown back upon the penult,
when they follow the words which they would regularly pre-
cede, or take the place of compound verbs, or are used adver-
bially ; as, do/jwv VHSQ, for vntQ dofitav ' oteaag &TIO t. 534, for
ajroAsaws (^ 653) ; TntQ<t, for Tidgfan ' nva, for nvnairittt
($ 653. e) ; 7Tu, in the sense of exceedingly ( 657. /5). This
434 ACCENT. - PROCLITH-b, ENCLITICS. [BOOK IV.
change of the accent is termed anastrophe (wi'uai^oqp/;, turning
back).
NOTES, (a) Grammarians except 5< and ava (except for avaWjjA), to
distinguish them from the Ace. A/a, and the Voc. ava (^ffl 11, 16). (6)
Both in anastrophe and in the common accentuation of prepositions (' 750. 2),
the attraction of the accent towards the word upon which the preposition ex-
presses its force will be observed.
C. PROCLITICS. A few monosyllables, beginning
with a vowel, are commonly connected in accentuation with the
following word, and lose, in consequence, their proper accent.
They are hence called atonies (aiovu, toneless), or, with more
precision, proclitics (nqoxUvta, to lean forward}. They are,
(1.) the aspirated forms of the article, 6, ??, ol, ul' (2.) the
adverb ov, not ; (3.) the prepositions tig, into, lv, in, 1$, out of;
(4.) the conjunctions a, if, MS, as.
NOTE. The proclitics retain their accent when they close a sentence, or
follow the word which they would regularly precede. Hence, a I "%*** but,
vf ycco ov ut Sto{, but, S-eo; us tx, xctxuv, but, Ko.tt.ut f .
} 732. D. ENCLITICS. Some words are attached, in
accentuation, to the preceding word, and are hence called en-
clitics (tyxlinxos, from fyxUvta, to lean upon). They are,
(i.) The following oblique cases of the personal pronouns;
1st Pers. [j,ov, pot, /us ' 2d P. </ov, aol, as ' 3d P. ov, ol, t ' viv,
ocplot, aye. For other enclitic forms of the personal pronouns,
see fl 23. (n.) The indejinite pronoun i<V, in all its cases,
and the indejinite adverbs THO$, nw, ny, not, nov, no&l, no&tv,
HOTS (fl 63). (in.) The Pres. ind. of flfif, to be, and qp^/i/,
to say, except the 2d Pers. sing. (iv.) The particles yl, vvv,
Tieg, ri, rol the poetic &yv, xs(v), vv, od ' and the insepara-
ble -W. See 152.2.
REMARKS, a. (a) An enclitic throws back its tone, hi the form of the
acute accent, upon the ultima of the preceding word ; as, ay^*roj Itrn $i?e
fjt.oi tt <r!f <ma Qvffi poi wji7v/. (6) If the ultima of the preceding word
has already an accent, the accent of the enclitic unites with it, and disappears ;
as, aj rtf 0/X<5 ft. (c) The accent of the enclitic, if a monosyllable, ia
also lost after a paroxytone ; as,
b. An enclitic retains its accent, (1.) At the beginning of a clause; as,
2w ya. xgdros \<rr} fAtyiffrov. (2.) After the apostrophe; as, <rXX0) $' titriv
(3.) If it is emphatic; as, ol K^ov, XXa <ri, not Cyrus, but you. (4.) If
it is a personal pronoun, preceded by an ortliotone preposition which governs it ;
as, <ra rot, rij< you, -r^oi <ri. But vr^ot pi, and sometimes rij / pov and
w^flj ft, occur. (5.) If it is a dissyllaltle, preceded by a paroxytone; as, ?
(tori ivu.*ria; f$i<rtv.
c. When Ifr! is prominent in a sentence, it becomes a paroxytone ; a%
Jrr<, it it to.
CH 3.J DETERMINATION OF ACCENTED SYLLABLE. 435
d. (.) An enclitic is often joined in writing to the preceding word, as if
forming with it but one compound word ; thus, ^JJT/;, etiivort, tSen. (ft.)
This is always the case with the preposition -l<, to; as, "OXv^cravJs, to Ohjm-
PHS, ' xiv<ri*etis. (7.) In pronouns and adverhs compounded with -Si ( 150,
^| 63. IX.), the syllable preceding -5i always takes the accent, which is acute-
or circumflex according to the rule in 744. (.) In lycu, \ftol, and ip,i,
the accent is thrown back when yi i* affixed ( 328. b) ; thus, 'iyuyi, 'ipoiys,
Hfttyt. (s.) EJVs and va.i%~i are accented as if formed by the attachment of
enclitics.
733* NOTES. 1. A word, which neither leans upon the follow!. v
nor upon the preceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distil c-
tion from the proclitics and enclitics, an orthotone (operates, erect in tone).
2. Both proclitics and enclitics are more abundant in English than in Greek,
and these classes of words furnish another strong analogy between the Greek
and the English accent ( 722. l). The words in English which are used
in translating the Greek proclitics and enclitics are themselves, for the most
part, either proclitic or enclitic. Thus, in the sentence, Give me the booh (pro-
nounced Glvme thebook), the pronoun me is enclitic, and the article the, pro-
clitic. In the sentence, If John 's in the house, don't tell him a word of this,
the words If, in, the, a, and of, are proclitics, and the words is, not, and him,
enclitics.
III. DETERMINATION OF ACCENTED SYLLABLE.
731. GENERAL PRINCIPLE. In each word, the accent
belongs to that syllable upon which the attention is most strong-
ly foed.
NOTE. If, from the general laws of accentuation, this syll. cannot receiv*
the accent, it draws it as near to itself as possible.
REMARKS. 1. In the origin of language, the attention is absorbed by the
greater distinctions of thought ; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it
passes to the less, and then to those that are still subordinate. Hence, in the
progress of a language, its accent is subject to change, as well as the forms of
its words, its vocabulary, and its constructions. In the Greek, as in other
languages, the accent was originally confined to the syllables containing the
essential ideas of words, i. e. to their radical syllables (see 83, 171). But,
in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to throw the
accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified, either through
inflection, derivation, or composition. This tendency would of course vary
greatly in different classes and forms of words. It would naturally be the
strongest where the root was the most familiar ; or where the formative part
was the most significant or characteristic. On the other hand, any strength-
ening of the radical, or weakening of the formative part, would have a ten-
dency to produce a contrary effect. In illustration of these tendencies (which
of course are subject to the general laws of accent), it will be observed, that,
(a) In neuter nouns, the affix, from its inferior importance, almost never
attracts the accent ( 737. i, 738. d). (b) In demonstrative pronouns, the
deictic -$ always draws the accent to the preceding syllable ( 732. y), and
the still stronger - always takes it upon itself ( 150. y). (c) In verbs,
the accent is always attracted by the augment, while it can never pass beyond
it ( 748. 4). (d) The old weak root of the 2d Aor. ( 257. 1) yields tho ac-
436 ACCKNT. [BOOK iv.
cent to the affix in several cases where the strengthened root of the Pres re-
tains it ( 746 - 748). (e) In derivative adjectives, those endings which ex
press most strongly character or relation attract the accent ( 737-739).--
(/) In composition, the accent is usually attracted by that word which defines
the other, and thus gives its special character to the compound ( 323, 739).
In the active compound verbals, the idea of the. action is more prominent than
in the passive; and hence appears to have arisen the distinction in 739. b.
' ^ 735. 2. That the different dialects should have often varied in
accent will occasion no surprise in those who have compared the pronunciation
of our own language in different parts of its native isle. That these differences
are often neglected in our copies of the classics has arisen from the late period
at which the marks of accent were introduced ( 22. ), and the tendency at
that time to conform every thing to the Attic standard ( 4). From the
testimony of the old grammarians we learn, that, (a) The Doric was char-
acterized by its adherence to general rules and old usage ( 723. N., 726.
R.). (b} The Lesbian ^Eolic was characterized by its tendency to throw
the accent as far back as possible. In words of more than one syllable, it is
said to have admitted the accent upon the ultima in prepositions and conjunc-
tions only. (c) The Attic (to which the Ionic appears to have more nearly
approached) was characterized by an expressive variety of accent, and a
greater inclination to mark the minuter shades of thought and species of re-
lation.
A. ACCENT IN DECLENSION.
^ 73O* I. Th'e accent of the THEME must be learned
from special rules and from observation.
a, RULES FOR SIMPLE WORDS.
SPECIAL RULES OF DEC. I. All contracts are perispome ; as, 'E^aJjf , p.**.
Of other words, (a) All in -* are paroxytone ; as, ra^ia.} . (b) Most in
-ts are paroxytone, except verbals in -rw from mute and pure mots of verbs in
-u, which are commonly oxytone ; as, 'Ar^n'S*??, vavrns, vJ-aXr*!?, vr^^Trf,
r^affTtirm tixKffrts, -roinrfif. (e) Nouns in -a short ( 92) throw the
accent as far back as possible ; as, yX<r<ra, Xf<v, xVi<i, /u.v7a. (rf) Most
abstracts in -i&, those in -<ru*v, and those in -u from verbs in .ivu ( 305.
b, 308. a, c), are paroxytone ; as, <ra<p<, a-A><paa-i>vj, -ra/Si/a. (e) Most other
verbal^ in - long or -, especially those formed after the analogy of the 2d
Perf. ( 307. R.), are oxytone; as,
7 3 7. SPECIAL RULES OF DEC. II. (a) Adjectives in -<* preceded
by a mute are commonly oxytone, especially those in -xaj, verbals in -raj, and
Ordinals in -a-ra? ; &S, rentes, a.o%utof, og&ros, tlxarres, ^aXuraf, ffolfos, $aX<f,
ayaS'o;. (b) On the contrary, primitive nouns with u mute root are more
frequently accented as far back as possible ; as, Xayaj, K^'IKOS, <**.<>UTOS, -^a.u.
6os. (c) All ordinals not ending in .*<ros are accented as far back as possi-
ble ; as, Stxa-rof . (rf) Adjectives in -Xay, -jay, and -vos (except those in
-ivof denoting material or country, 315. c, e) are commonly oxytone; as,
tiff%/>o(,
<ri5/vaj, K//xva?, 2f5/ayaf wX<0f, TotgavrTves* (e) Nouns in -pot with a
long penult are commonly oxytone ; while adjectives in -pot are commonly
accented as far back as possible ; as, cJt/c^af, /Sa/^a? ^7a-//t*j. (/) Noun*
in -at pun are more frequently ox\ tone ; as, , dot* ul'o;. t/e,-. (g) Ver-
CH. 3.] IN DECLENSION. 437
bnis in ->? (5 314. f), multiples in -T/ -,-( 138. 4), and most adjectives in
-txio; from nouns of Dec. I., in -iis- and m -'. : , >w accented upon the penult ;
as, vriHVTla;, 3*'TXo*f, /iy^aTaj, o<ro?o;, i^>o:. - (/' Adjectives ill -His, ill -'fl?
l>rrrfih-il by a conxonnnt. and in -to, joined immediately to the, root, are com-
iiMiily accented as far bark as possible, as, S-/,gnr>;, av^av/oj, %ou<rso;. (i)
Very few neuters; are oxytone ; and most neuters arc accented as far back as
possibly ( 734. a) ; as, f^ooiov, TOTWOIO*, ico^t^iav, o^viov, sXa/ov.
SPECIAL BULKS OF DEC. III. (a) All nouns in -KV, -tv;, -a,
*i; (G. -j), -as (-2os), -I; (-r5<}.-). all masculines in -r,^ nouns of more than
ono syllable in -Cj, and almost all nouns in which the characteristic is v preceded
by a, i, j, or t t are oxytone ; as, TO.IO.V, tT-irtusi *i%&>* /'5&ij, Xas/ATa-, -^j,
ff^gefyiS, -7$o; t o TaT;^, XJ/UK'V, -fvaj, Xs/jv, -5v9j, ^sXipj?, -7vo;. - (/>) All nouns
in -swv, names of months in -&>, and most feminities and- auymentatives in -v,
are oxytone ; other words in -eav are more frequently paroxytone ; as, KVXIUV,
'A.\i0ieTr)oituv, ^sXrSaiv, a./u,vrt/.&iv K^ov/wv, T^/?&/V, x^v^eav. - (c) Monos\'llabic
nouns which have the Ace. in -a are commonly oxytone ; those which are
neuter (see d below), and most which have the Ace. in -v, are perispome ; as,
a7, iravs, Sj, $u; TO tf>us, TO -rug (so likewise the neut. adjective -a-av, ^f 19) ;
/Sot/?, vituf. (d) In neuter nouns ( 734. u), in words in -g and -i, in verbals
in -TU^, and in nouns in -is or -us with the Gen. in -sa/?, the accent is thrown as
far back as possible ; as, xigus. n7%o;, fiou^uiftec *, xaXat^o^ ( 726 R.) ;
tfouftisi viltxvs. (e} Female appellatives in -/,- (306. N., 309-311)
have the accent upon the same syllable as the masculine, except when this is
a proparoxytone or dissyllabic barytone (in which case the feminine commonly
becomes oxytone) ; as, avXvrvs, ttitXriT^'is TXT>JJ, -roXJrjs Il^//*/5f,
11 ^ iet/u.if eti%ftei)(.earos, a.l^f^ee.XuTi} tligirn;, lltgffif. - (/) Simple adjec-
tives are commonly oxytone, if the characteristic is a vowel ; paroxytone, if it
is a consonant ; as, <nz<p>k, t^i/i ^Xj, <W (Tf^f 17, 19).
b. BULKS FOR COMPOUND WORDS.
^> 3O In composition, there is a general tendency to throw the
accent as far back as possible. But, (a) Compound adjectives in -ns are
more frequently oxytone ; as, ilxovvhi (those in -&<B-/jj are always paroxytone;
so compounds of n0a:, *&>, and some other words}. (6; Compounds in
which -as is affixed to the root of a verb united with a noun are commonly
oxytone, if the pKuuh is long ; but if the prnult is short, they are commonly
paroxytone when active in sense, and proparoxytone when passive ; as, <riro-
<a-oia; (^ 327); X/^oSaAo,- and X/AsoXj ( 32(5. a). <c) Compound adjec-
tives of Dec. III., with a palatal or lingual characteristic, in which the latter
part is a monosyllable derived from a verb, are commonly oxytone ; e. g. all
in -<rp, -TXJ|, -*<*, -focal, -xj;, -4vj?, -K/tn; ; as, &-repp*>%. (d) VVorda
derived from compound words are commonly not accented as though them-
selves compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule ; thus,
Ka.ra.ffx.iua.^cii, xa.'ra.ffx.sutt.a'r'os ( 737. tt), a.-x.a.Tot,<rx,tva.<rTo;. See v 734. f.
II. In declension, the accent commonly remains,
so far as the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as in
the theme.
REMARKS. 1. In Dec. I., the affix -u* of the Gen. pi., as contracted from
.aw 95. 3), is always circumriexed. Grammarians except, chiefly for
the sake of distinction from other words, A i^t/n, u/ichuvy, el irturiai, trade-
*
438 ACCENT- - IN DECLENSION. [BOOK IV
winds, o xXouvvs, wild-boar, and o %virryis, usurer ; Gen. pi. aQvuv, &c. Fo.
an apparent exception in adjectives in -eg, see 2 below.
2. In adjectives in -aj, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as the
general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the masculine ; thus, <p'i)*.i>>s
(Tf 18), <p/x/(Z, PL <p/'x/a/, <piXtcc , M. and F. <p/x/&/v (as if a common form for
the two genders, cf. 133. , y, 2; the Dor. Gen. pi. in -v, 95. /3, where
the feminine has a special form, follows the rule in I above, as tpiXieiv) ; while,
from the noun f) ip/X/a, friendship, p/X;'/, QiXiuv so xct^Knvut iv. 5. 14, as
properly an adjective. In other adjectives, the feminine retains the accent
of the theme, but subject to the same changes as hi nouns of Dec. I. ; as, pi-
Xj, ptXaivK, piXutvvs, p,t*.etivuv (^ 19). Except poetic feminines in -UK, be-
longing to adjectives in -'; ( 134. y} ; as, Hpyivris, *ywi. Observe the
accentuation of ^/a, ^/aj, &c. (^ 21).
7 4L 1 3. In Dec. III., dissyllabic Genitives and Datives throw the
accent upon the affix ; as, yvvos, alyi, r^xw, xotr't, xXidoTv (^ 11); -rar^j,
&v$ouv, xvirl, ugvi (^ 12).
NOTES, (a) Except those which have become dissyllabic by contraction,
participles, and the Gen. pi. and dual of these ten nouns, IKS , V"* > 4*s> ,
eSs, *ciis, <rns, T^y, <p<ys, <p*>s (light), and of the adjective *,- thus, woXsi"
yroX&i (] 14), IK^O; no { ( 108. N.) ; Mvros, 2ovn, Ivvruv (^ 22); ,
Q&TUV, ureiv (\ 11). (6) The contraction is not regarded in accenting the
Gen. and Dat. of J s (1 14, 121. /), ?, vria.^ $* ( 104. N. ; yet
see eJf above), and 0g| (G. -xo?). (c) Observe the accentuation of ovbtis
(5 21), r/f, rif (t 24), yyvw' ( 101. y), ayr e ( 106. 2). (d) The Attics
are said to have made the Gen. pi. of numeral substantives in -as perisDome ;
thus, (ivgiubuv, as if contracted from the Ion. ftv^itx^iat ( 120. 2).
^ 742 4. From the natural tone of frequent address, the accent of
the Voc. in a few familiar words is thrown back as far as the general laws
permit; viz. Dec. I. $<r-ror>j?, master; Dec. III. yuw ( 101. y), '
Jlaa-'/dwv, ffurrt^ ( 105. R.), avwg, warijf, S-t/yar*}^, A^jjr*^ ( 106),
brother-in-law i thus, Jta-crora, SJyan
NOTE. In the Voc. sing., iw and o/ final are always circumflexed ; as, <V.
iriy, r,%o~, aftoT (^ 14).
^ 743. 5. The tendency in compounds and comparatives to throw
the accent as far back as possible ( 739, 745) leads to the accentuation of
the antepenult in the Voc. and Neut. sing, of some nouns and adjectives of
Dec. III. whose theme is accented upon the penult. These are, (a) Com-
paratives in -ut ; as, ^5f<wv, ffitov. (6) Most compound paroxytones in -en
and -;, except those in -<p^uv, -ygvf, -&>$*{, -u\.n;, and -ugns ; as, ii5/^*;,
Neut. and Voc. ti$Kip.o* ulSa^nt, N. and V. a.u6d Jij 'Aya^ut^ywv, V. 'Aye-
V. 2w*gTif, 'HgaxXtif (Tf 14).
6. (.) Observe the accentuation of pArtif, 9-wyarn, Avpvrrit (^[ 12,
106. 2), and of StXia? ( - s 104. N., 728. R.). (/3.) The forms in #(),
-^/, -6t ( 89-91, 320), follow the general rule, unless a short vowel pre-
cede, in which case they are commonly paroxytone. (y.) For the irregulari-
ties and peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, see
\] 21, 23, 24.
^ 74'1. III. A long vowel in the ultima* belonging to an
OH. 3.] IN COMPARISON. - IN CONJUGATION. 439
affix of declension, can receive only the acute accent in the di-
rect, and the circumflex in the indirect cases ; as, TI^T), -%?, -j],
v\v, -nl, -w*', -Ic, -we, -, -t*iv (H 7) ; odov, -M, -o/, -<wi>, -oig,
OVQ, -oi, -on> (1| 9) ; /UTIWJ', -oiv (fl 11).
Kxcept in the peculiar datives ipoi, ftoi, a-oi (^f 23, 141).
B. ACCENT IN COMPARISON.
<$ 74:5. Comparatives and superlatives, whether adjectives
or adverbs, are accented as far back as the general rules of
accent permit ; thus, ^dv?, ydtwv, ridlov (^ 743. 5), jjdunog.
C. ACCENT IN CONJUGATION.
^746. Verbs are accented as far back as the general
laws permit, with the following exceptions (see ^ 723. N.,
734. c, d).
1 . These forms are accented upon the PENULT ; (a) All Infinitives in
at ; as, fiiGouXtvxivou, /3yXi/4jv/, /Wava/, iyreiveti (* 48). Except dialectic
'orms in -,tm< ( 250). (6) The Inf. of the 1st Aor. act. and 2d Aor.
mid. ; as, /SawXtva-a/, X/oriWa/ (^ 37). (c) The Perf. pass. Inf. and Part.}
as, /3s?o/Xiw0^/, fitZeuXtuftives. Except a few preteritive participles ; as, #,-
aj (^1 59). So xiipua;, from xiTftati ( 232), which otherwise is accented as
an uncontracted Perf. ; thus, xuToixsif&ui, xTxs?<r^a/. In a few Epic forms,
the retraction of the accent extends even to the Inf. ; as, xa^j^< T. 335,
vo{ E. 24 ( 286). (d) All dialectic infinitives in -^s ( 250).
7 4 7. 2. These forms are OXYTONE ; (a) Participles in -?, G. -ros,
except in the 1st Aor. act.; as, ftiSov^tvxuf, faovXivSt'i;, Itrra.;, ffrois but,
f>9vXiuffKs. (b) The 2rf Aor. act. part.; as, X<?ry, <rraj. (c) The 2
Aor. imperat. forms, /Vt, say, i>.0i, come, iw^i, _/?wrf, and, in strict Attic, iJi,
see, and X/St, taAe. Except in composition ; thus,
7 4 8. 3. These forms are PERISPOME ; (a) The 2<f Aor. inf. in
tit ; as, X/-rr. (6) The 2rf Pers. sing, of the 2rf Aor. mid. imp.; as, X/-
<roy, Jaw (^f 51 ). Except in compounds of more than two syllables from verbs
in -pi ; as, a.<ro%ou but T^OU. Some exceptions also occur in compound
and even in simple verbs in -a.
4. The accent of a verb in COMPOSITION can never be thrown farther back
than the augment ( 734. c), or farther than the tone syllable of the word
prefixed; thus, -ra^i^ea (*, t%u, ^ 300),
74O. REMARKS, a. In those forms in which the accent of the
Perf. and 2 Aor. differs from that of the Pres., a want of uniformity has some-
times arisen from different views in regard to their etymology. Thus, 2 Aor.
forms are sometimes accented as Pres. ; as, Inf. apuv.$uv t tr^ttv. Ft. <r%i0tor
( 299) ;'-;, <r e /, ?<WS< (1 49).
/3. Monosyllables long by nature, except Participles, are generally circum-
flvred; thus, i7, , w, *!v (,f 55) ; <r^, <r^sry, <r^ ( 300).
y. For the accentuation of $/ti (^ 53) and tip! (^ 55), see 732.
440 ACCENT. - IN PARTICLES [BOOK IV.
$. The Ionics, in dropping one t from -U<, -ia, do not change the accent ,
thus, QoSio ( 243. 2). So \arau (^f 55), as if syncopated from tVirai, re-
mains paroxytone in composition ; thus, <jra.ffr.t.
t. Examples of irregular or various accentuation are <f>*s, $0.61 or ^a^/, 7/np.
iTwoy or iivo* ( 53) ; lut ( 56) ; /&, to go, poet., /*. *<i Ion. tut (] 55) ;
*K, ^^' ( 284. 4).
D. ACCENT IN PARTICLES.
x) dO 1. ADVERBS, (a) Adverbs in -us derived from adjectives
are, with very few exceptions, accented like the Gen. pi. of their primitives
(fy 321. a) ; as, <<p*if, TU%IUS. (b) Derivative adverbs in -Sav, -&*, -<, -/,
and -| ( 321. b, c, d) are commonly oxytone ; those in -^>j, -axts ( 321.
b, 4), and -u, paroxytone ; as, urXo&jS
2. PREPOSITIONS. The primitive prepositions ( 648. /3) are all oxytone ;
as, iartf, Ka.ro,. For the removal or loss of the accent, see 730, 731.
3. For proclitic and enclitic particles, see 731, 732. The accentuation
of those particles which remain is best learned by observation.
GREEK INDEX.
[In this and the following Index, figures immediately preceded by the mark IT refer t*
paragraphs in the Tables; other figures refer to sections in the body of the Grammar,
with their subdivisions. The references to the Tables are usually followed by other
references in illustration. The letter f immediately attached to a figure (thus, 32 f) sig-
niries and C/ie following. The signs > and < denote the change, by contraction or
ot herwise, of the words or letters at the opening into those at the angle. The sign X ^ e "
notes opposition or distinction. The abbreviation cj- stands for conjugation, contr. for
contraction, const, for construction, cp. for comparison, dec for declension, der. for
derivation, encl. for enclitic, ina. for inserted, num. for numeral, poa. for position, r. for
root. w. for with, &c.]
c, f 3 : 24 ; > i, a, *,'* added in 2. aor., '299. j<
W, 28, 44, 203. /3, 259, |*A*jj*i, 32O. 2, 421. 0. L
266 f; &> a and ,/, elided, 4 1 ; < a, ,}<
29. a : a < v, 50 ; con-
tr. w. other vowels, 32 f,
45 ; contr. of for v,
34, 45. 5 ; < t, 59 ;
Dor. , 6, 44 f, 95 f :
45. 5, 86, 132. '2 ; > y a.
in augm., 188. '2; conn,
vow., 205 ; final in ac-
cent., 723. R.
u.Tbop.t, -ioftai, CJ. 288.
in neut. pi., 80 ; in Dec. j /%*,-,! 14 : 1 12f, 1 15. a.
i., \ 6 : 86, 92 f ; in ace. -/va in der., 311.
of Dec. in., 1OO ; conn. ./ in der., 318. b.
vow. in cj., 1 31 : 178f,l7|, ^ I 1 : 101.
203 f ; changes in r., -a^f, adj. in, 138. 3.
259, 266 f ; added to r.,
vi, dec., 136. 3.
287 ; -a in der., 305. b ; a-l^u, cj., 301.
- privative, 325, 383 ; % < oti'tpiu, 268 ;
pn
copulative, 325 ; F >
aw, a,'22.S, 117,267.3.
a.y.6'os, cp., 1 60.
ayysXXw, ^ 41 : 217,
a.y.',o M , cj., 268. [277. a.
y%*o;, 1 17 98.
7 vC^, cj., '294.
y^, -;, cp., 161. 2,
16.'., ;"w. gen., 394.
7*;, cj., 194. N., 236.
c ; ays, 6 1 3. 3.
a^x^w,-, dec., 136. a.
-a5jj in der., 310. a.
"A/^s, dec., 124. .
$/*?, 1 17 : 13O.
ifiu < aj/5^, CJ., 260.
i'.l^u > r^, cj., '268.
-*; in der., 3 1 8 f.
a>j5iwv, dec., 123. a.
M'iffffu, cj., 275. .
/*(, aj<r, CJ. 288.
:ia <^ a
122. 5
IO9, 132.
289 ; w. gen., 375. /3 ;
w. dependent verb, 614,
633. [162.
tff%gbf t -gas, Cp., 159,
etiTititf^Ki, ci'i'-nof, W. gen.,
374, 393.
?, 288 ; augm., 189.4.
*;, cj., 286.
-ax <? , adv. in, 139, 321.
dx/u.riv, adv. ace., 32O, 440.
axoXt/^oj, w. gen., 389.
R. ; w. dat., 399.
-axo;, -ai'xsj, in der., 315.
a**y&, cj., 269. 7 ; w,
gen. and ace., 377, 380,
a ; as pass., 556 ; w.
part., 633.
&x.o;, use, 456.
, cp., 160
u, cj., 270.
, -Va/, Cj., 291.
, cj., 269.
, cj., 273. 0.
X<jj in der., 315, f.
iXsww, cj., 264.
iX/'v&y, -&;, CJ., 288.
Xto-xoftxi, CJ., 301. 1,
556 ; w. gen., 374. y.
X/ra/vw, -r^et'ivu, CJ., 291 ,
X*^rv, 2 aor., 299.
XXa X XXa, 722. a ;
introd., 661. a; aXX
ya^, 661. 2 ; aXX' ^f,
67 i. '2.
XXaVavw, CJ., 274. y.
XXjXv, J 23 145.
XXo^ai, CJ., 277. a.
XXs, dec., 97. '2, 154 ;
use, 54Of; w. gen., 349;
as adv., 457. i ; X J
"XX af , 456, 488. 5;
XXo T/ , aXX T<, 541.
b ; aXXos aXXov, 542.
;XX&>? TE x.a.1, 671. 3.
X;, dec., 1O5.
\\vffx-ia, CJ. 273. .
' , cj., 289.
,-, dec., 124. y.
, w. dat., 399 ; W.
rt., 616. a.
e *T cj ; , 289.
compt., 16O.
-j^w, cj., 282.
12 : 106. 1.
442
GREEK INDEX.
tift<ri%a, cj., 300.
dvuytuv, ^ 9 ' 98, 726. /3. etvrixa, w. part., 616. a.
K/tffXKxiffxu, cj., 296.
-a| in der., 313. uurof, f 24 149 ; com
pW, CJ., 264.
5'? w. gen., 374. /3 ; w.
pounds, 144, 150; cp.,
apvvu, cj., 299.
dat., 404. t.
261. 2 ; w. dat. of as-
eif&tp'i) const., 648 ; el
-aa > -<w, -a, -aw, 95. 3.
soc. obj., 418. R. ; \r
cc/xpi, 466. N. ; dftift
WT, neut. pi. 1 30. /3.
cornpt. and superl., 464
ra, ilxofft, 480. 2.
etvraugau, cj., 296.
use, 5O8 f ; as pers.pron.
ct/u,<ptivv1}fti, cj., 293.
aVaip/a-xa, CJ., 296.
5 1 0. a ; o uvro;, the same,
a,<pw, 1 21 : 137. y.
aor^ e av, t57 : 227,285.
508. ii. ; w. dat., 400 ;
av added to r., 28 9 f.
d-r'tytiofAett, -dvofAtti, CJ.,
etlro'i itrftiv, 510 ; ^ixccret
av Dor. for -v, 95. 0.
289.
awraj, 511.5. [144
av conjunct., < lav, 603 ;
atrXea;, -at/f, ^| 25. 4 ;
auTsw <C tai/rav, ^ 23
X av contingent, 588.
cp., 156. b. [562.;a^a/4a/, cj., 222. a.
av contingent, 587 f; af-
aVa, const., 648; w.pass., a^a^a/, -vupott, cj., 286.
fixed, 328 ; expr. habit, joV^a,*"', *e//, 285, 558.
594; w. opt. for ind., *A*-a'XXv, dec., 105. R.,
595 ; not w. opt. of) 107, N., 742.
wish, 600. 3; in con- at^-a^j, 284 % 5.
elusions, 603 f. ; w. opt. civ, cj., 272.
expr. permission or com-
mand, 604. b ; in rel.
clauses, 606 ; w. inf. and
E e > & f , 48. 2 ; pos. ;
673. a ; jjv'as pres., 567,
{<, cj., 285. [y.
part., 615. 2 ; pos., 673.
a, 674. 4,616.6; omit-'
ted, 605. 4, 606. a ; re-
peated, 667.
ava, const., 648 ; sc. a-r?-
&, 653. t, 730 ; w. num.,
137. i.
eivccita<rxoftati t CJ., 280. y.
eitKxui t%<u,w. gen., 37 6. $.
avaX<Vx, -a, cj., 28O.
dvtKfti/uvri/rxu, w. acc. and
gen., w. 2 acc., 430.
oW|, ^ 11 : 102. a.
avatryf*;, dft,#vutu, cj., 264.
>*,*, cj, 290.
ay^a^a/, Cj, 301.2.
ayit;, W. gen., 347.
*y! ? , $12: 1 06 ; av^,
742 ; in address, 443;
a4' wv, because, 530.
-yC^, cj, 294.
22: 109, 132,
dt'tffx*,, cj., 279. [268.
"A^jjj, dec., 114. N., 1 16.
a^a-raw, pf., 238. a. [a.
a^/a-raj, Superl., 1 60.
a.[*,'o&, -TT<W, CJ., 275. >j.
a^vaf, 1 12 : 106. 1.
-a^a,- in der., 314. h.
aao<, CJ, 219.
a3r, ra
1 30. a ; cp., 1 58.
&pfa. 1 17 : 105. 1.
adv. acc., 44O.
cj., 222 ; w. gen.,
&XP aJ, 530.
-a<w in der, 31 8 f.
aw, breathe, ti'iu, a.'ttrSu, cj^
288.
aw, satiate, cj, 298. [3.
-awv, ^> -c<wv, -av, -av, 95.
0, 1 3 : 49. 2 ; 0* > ^,
51 ; 0O
52 ; 0<a ^
> <p, 6 1 ;
,X, /SX, 64. 2.
/Sa/v-w, cj., 278 ; i'ev, ^ 57 :
227 ; /3afor/JJj^,210.N.
/SaXXw, CJ., 2ii3, 277. a.
/3aV, CJ., 272.
/Sa<r/Xwj (SC. e), 485. a J
cp., 261. 2.
fido-xu = fitt'iva, 278.
, &c., 160.
cj, 285 ; 0i.
fys^, 238. a.
/S/ow, -uffxou.a.t, cj., 280
350 ; aea>vof as adv, /3Xa, cp., 158. a.
632. i/SXaTTw, CJ, 272.
-a f in der, 139, 308, 314. '/SXaa-ravw, -iw, cj., 289.
urrrig, -rgeitri, 59. 7. /SX/Va-w, cj., 275. .
aWi/, f 14 : 1 13. 2. /JXa-*, CJ, 281. J.
-ara<, -ara <^ -ra/, -VTa, /Ja^aj, ^[ 7 : 94, 96. a.
60, 213. 2, 248. /. 0aa-x. cj. 222. J.
oVi^a* = ?TIJ ay, 39. N. 2. QovXtuv, f 34 f ; trans-
dat, 405. . I'ArXaf, dec., 109. 1. | lated, ^ 33; /Sat/Xn/'wv,
yJw, -WT, ayw, cj., 272. 'Ar^i^nf, ^f 7 : 92f,31O. ^ 22 : 109, 132.
/3, 246. a; Arya-af as arra, aTTa = a'r/ya, r/va, /5awXa/*a/, CJ, 222. 2 ; use,
adv., 457. y, 632. I ^ 24 : 15->f. 526. y, 583, 611. 3.
vw, cp., 161. 2, 163 ; ai > i in augm., 188.2. 0avr, t 14 : 112f, 117.
w. gen., 394. J, aJ^/,-, pos, 673. a. /SjaSw'f, cp, 159. i.
191.3, 238. 0.'ai|w, -ay<w,^43: 222,289. Circes, dec., 123.0.
VT/, const, 648 ; deriva-
tives, w. gen, 394 ; w.
GREEK INDEX.
443
cj., 287.
0t/i, /3M, cj., 292.
y, double office, ^ 3 : 49.
y^Xa, dec., 103. N.
y^<w, CJ., 288.
y, w. art., 490 ; in
specification, 656. 6 ; in-
trod., 661. N. ; pos.,
673. .
/a .,rr,^ dec., 106. 2, 0.
yi, affixed, 328 ; pos.,
673. ; encl., 732.
yiywviv, -iffKU, CJ., 296.
ysXaw, CJ., 219. .
ytXwj, dec., 1O4.
y% f , J 14: 114f.
yivu, w. acc. and gen., w.
2 acc., 430.
ytjgeiu, -O-X.M, CJ., 279.
yi'yaj, 1 13 : 109.
yiyvofAxi, yivoftttt, cj., 286,
238. a ; w. dat., 408 ;
w. part., 637.
285 ; iyv*"> ^57: 224.
2, 227 ; w. part, and inf.,
633, 634. /}.
y, dec., 107. N.
j 16: 126. 2.
i, 1 7: 92. 1.
y, CJ., 287.
yavy, dec., 123. y.
Fafyw, -a/y, dec., 123. .
y ? ?, ^ 14: 34. a, 114,
117, 121. /.
ya<p<w, 1 36 : 217 ; use
in mid., 558, 559. d.
ywy, dec., 101. y, 63,
742.
yv-4,, ^ 11 : 83f, 101.
7 9'*.N.,96..
'3 : 2<r> <rr, ^ >
uropped before <r, 55 ;
bef. x, 6 1 ; inserted, 64.
2 ; in r., 273, 282.
A in declension, 1 1 7 f.
-S, adv. in, 321. b.
$, voc., 732.
$Wa/, fut , 285.
/>, ^ 12: 105. 1,57. 4.
etivVfti, CJ., 295.
aiopxi, CJ., 267. 2.
otitu, cj., 267. 3.
*v, cj., 277. 0. [87.
axf t/0>, -<;, dec., 1 24. 0,
cj., 298.
^ e , f 13: 109. y.
et0oi><v, CJ., 289.
i, conjunct, and adv.,
657. y ; 3s, 490 ; fori
y^, 656; introd., 661.!
N. ; pos., 673. .
-3t, insep. particle, 150,'
322, 648. 3 ; accent.,
732. d.
j<7w, cj., 282; 3t3x,
58: 237.
|f 52 : 225, 294.
r, f 23 : 146.
pf., 238. .
dec., 104. N.
sX<p/V, -y, dec., 1O5. 3, a.
i^f, dipt., 127 ; in pe-
riphrasis, 385. 3.
svi^ay, .fov, dec., 124. 0.
^x fl/ tta/, cj., 259.
%w, cj., 259.
ss-^sj, dec., 125. a.
S(rrTa, VOC., 742.
i%efAi, -vvf&eti) cj., 294.
3s&;, 6ind, cj., 219, 284.
iu, need, cj., 222. 3, y ;
pt. w. num., 140. /3 ; 3ir,
impers., w. gen., 357 ;
w. acc., 430. R. ; w. inf.,
583 ; ftix^ov [3 rv], &c.,
623 ; 3o/*/, w. gen.,
357. N.
', 3VaTi affixed, 328;
3j, 3?^y, 3?ra, pos., 673.
et.
\ifti, 551, 634. y;
?, 671.4.
, f 47 : 216, 218.
, dec., 106, 742.
-, 1 9 : 726. 5.
Jy, adv. in, 321. b.
ia, const., 648.
./T, pref., 1 92. 4.
226. 4.
w, cj., 285.
= ^, 284.
xu, cj., 285 ;
157 : 227.
tiiu, f 51 : 201. 3,
224 f., 284; M, ^22*
%a,-nft<ti t cj., 28S, 224.3.
/>/, w. inf., 551.
, dec., 126. 2.
w. gen., 352.
, 1 1 8 : 33. ft
138. 4.
V^f, I 17 : 130. y.
, contr., 33. .
cj., 282.
cj., 298 ; w gen.,
374. y.
cj., 288 ; $0g
638.
-3y, adv. in, 321. b.
to(>v, f 16: 123. y.
^ f , f 22, ^51 : 109. ,
132.
'S^apovpcti, fut., 301. 5.
$, ins. of <r, 221. .
^ e e^, cj., 259. .
^vtrr, cj., 272.
^'va^a/, augm., 189. 1.
Sl/'va;, JwX CJ., 278 ; fttff,
f 57 : 227 , $Jf, f 22 :
109, 132.
Jw, $6u, 1 21 : 137. y.
tvopKt, cj., 270. 8.
3w-, 325 ; augm., 193.
^X, f 3 : 22. , 24 ;
i X , 24 ; t > i, , ,
v,28, 44. 3,111 f,118f,
259. b ; i > 11, 44. 4,
203. , 206. 0, 242. b ;
i>jandi/, 29. , 36 C
44.4; i<>, 50; i < -,
3OO ; contr. w. othei
vowels, 32 f; ins. aftei
contr., 35, 98. /3 ; by
Ion., 48. 1, 120. 2,242.
a; sign of plur.,83, 172;
charact., changed, 1 lOf ;
conn. vow. in pron., 141;
in cj., 175, 203 f; in
augm., 173, 187f; in
redupl., 19Of; ins. in
opt., 1 84 ; in fut., 2OO. 3,
245. 2 ; before close afl%
444
GREEK INDEX.
222. a, ; changes in r.,
259,268, 270. 1O ; >a
in 2 pf., 236 ; added to
r., 287 f; 10. in plup.,
179,203. N.; iF > w,
. i, , v, 22. 2, 1 I 7, 1 2 1 . 3,
220, 264. [;, 603.
lav, compos., ^> tj'v, av, X
Sf, dec., 108. N.
ic.vrav > awrsw, f 23 .
144; use, 504 f; for
other pronouns, 506 f.
i, cj., 189. 3, 218.
tSnv, see /3a/v.
iyyvs, cp., 163. 0; w.
gen., 394.
fyu'ew, cj., 268, 238. /3.
, dec., 119. 2.
iy, ^ 23: 141f; use,
502 f; fywyi, 732. d.
iSwy, see 0vy.
i5, cj., 298, 246. /3.
cj., 275. .
cj., 222. 2 ; w.
inf., 583.
fti for S 1 23 : 142. 3.
w;$>, cj., 297.
w < it, 29. , 36 ; > */~
46 ; in 2 pers., 37. 4 ; in
augm., 189. 3; in re-
dupl., 191; connect, vow.
of plup., 1 79, 203 ; >
01, 236 ; ua in opt., 184.
a, 205. 3.
-i/, adv. in, 321.
/, proclit, 731 ; ti y,
Mi, i/, 597, 599 f, 625.
/3 ; tl X , 603 ; w.
gubj., 63. i ; i7r<f,663.
6 ; ti ft* ii', 6f>7. 2 ; ti
3i, i/ SV', 663.6,671.6.
-ua in der., 308. a, 811.
tftoftcti, iI3av, cj., 301. 4 ;
i/Jdij, 1 22, 1 58 II '.'.
*, 132. I, 301. 4; fti,
613. 3, 747. c.
i!Vi, 732. t; see it.
I xa. = ?a,xa, 273. .
1H8. N., 273. a.
*<r/(), ^ 25 : 66. a.
cj., 188. 3, 2<9.
f , dec., 1 23. .
JXav, 2 aor., 301. 1.
i>a' f , 1f 24 : 151 ; use,
/'Xa, CJ., '268.
503. f
lift/, be, f 55 : 230 ; dial.
^at/, ljua/, i^f X A*ay, ^a4
252; encl.,732 ; X ifa,
^, 142. 1, 502.
7'22. a ; w. gen., 364 f.
S^-Ta^yv, 3 2 '2.
384; w.dat., 408; omit-
iv, in compos., 68. 3 ; pro-
ted, 547, 634. , 6:39. '2;
clit., 731 ; w.dat., 648;
auxil., 6:37 ; i<rnv 01,
for i/j, 659. |8 ; iv Tai>
t** St &C., 523 ; t,ri, *y,
w. superl., 462. /3 ; ir
w. pi. nom., 549. b; y
J, 53<); ly/, 6-18. /3; ?
as aor., 576. 5 ; iTva< w.
for i'ysa-r/, 653. *, 73O.
verbs of naming, &c.,
i'v<a/, -ar, 523. a.
434. N. ; as inf. of spe-
Iva'igw, ivitei'?u, CJ., 276.
cif., 623. N.
j'ySa^v for i'v<5av, 659. y.
eT/*/, go, 1 56 : 231 ; dial.,
lvy*r, '2. aor., 301.6.
252. 7; as fut., 231,
m*, w. gen., 372. y ,
S01.3;,i;for7A, 210.N.
pos., 674.
j7|a<r/, 273. .
mavw, cj., 273. a.
sTsrav, -a, ^ 53 : 301. 7 ;
'/vyy^/, cj., 293.
i/Vi, 613. 3, 747. c.
ia^;X, pref., 192. 3.
"^yvfyw, ?y, cj., 294,
i| > U, 68. 1 ; proclit.,
299.
730; cp., 161. 2; w.
lloOfAU.1, -UTO.U, CJ., 298.
pass., 562 ; w. gen., 648 ;
? e , cj., 301. 7.
for , 659. * ; ig orai/,
*r f , t 21 : 105. 1, 137;
530.
w. gen., 362. y ; w. dat,
J/(pv>jj w. part., 616. a.
4OO ; w. superl., 462. y.
iva.' w. ace., 424. 1.
-HJ, adj. in, 56. 4, 5, 31 5. f.
igav absolute, 6:38.
i/f, I?, der. and constr.,
-ios in der., 3 1 5. c.
648, 659. a ; w. num.,
7*, Cj., 273. a, 2:38. ;
137. ; proclit., 731 ;
const., 615; Ja<y^,
tis 07t, aj, 65 1 . .
238. /3.
ilffxeu, cj., 273. a.
Ea^Ta^, augm., 189. 5.
iJV, iV<w, w. gen., 394;
\TCtVo'nTK,9fjtOH, CJ., ^96.
w. ace., 657. at.
2*^vay, Cj., 274. *.
i7W, cj., 236. c, 297.
{a-/, const., 648 ; w. num.,
tx < ig, 68. I, /3.
137. i; pos., 65 2. 1.
?, cp., 163.
lr/*Xjv, monopt., 1 27.
ixs7vaf, 97. 2, 150: !xu-
scnXro'awv, cp., 158. Q.
ya<r/, 1 5(). y ; use, 5 1 2.
\TiftiXofAiti, -loftcti, cj.,28S
ix*Xwa-/a^&;, pref, 192. 4.
w. gen., 376. 3.
ixuv tjvtti, 623. a.
iviffr.fA*t, pref., 192. 3.
iXa-<ry, -rrwy, Cp., I 60 ;
iri%ettf, cp. l.")8.
iXarray, asindec., 4. Go. 5.
iiri^u^o; w. gen., 391 .
fXaJ^, iXw, CJ., 278.
iqr^/a^^v, see -rt'iourfou
iX^ty'f, cp., 160, 16!. 1.
\*Tirs, .*,(, 1 34. /}.
iXtv<r af 4 t , Alt,, 301. 3.
Sfww, cj., 3(X).
iXTjXiyjtta*, ^[ 44 : 217. y.
\fyei^o/u,ai, augm., 189.3.
iX*4/, -xiw, cj.. 298.
i ? 5, cj., '276.
Vx^/y,-, dec., 58. /}.
!/*, CJ., '269.
iXcr/?;*, -^ra^a,, cj., 297.
if<V, cj., 269.
Iftavrov, ^ 23: 144; use,
tV<roftari, fut., 298.
504.
'%*if, -5 f , ^ 7 : 94.
3REEK INDEX.
446
1(fi, augm., 189. 3.
tpp'u, cj., 222. 1.
ipp'uftivos, cp., 156. y.
t^nyyavai, cj., 290.
tova, nude forms, 246. .
fy%uat, cj., 301. 3, 238.
; ' w. fut. part., 637 ;
1^.6'i oxyt., 747. c.
ig, t^nxet, ^53- 301.7.
(;, dec., 1O4.
*rA/, cj., 298.
!#, *W, cj., 298.
ifTi&u, augm., 189. 3.
I* rut, T 22, ^ 48 : 131.
0, 237.
V^arf, cp., 161. 1, 2.
tT7^as, cp., 161. 2.
11; < to, tou, &c., 45. 3,
121. a, 142. c, 243.
J, augm., &c., 193.
tfyif, dec., 133. 0.
<t$, cj., 222. 3.
v6v(s\ 67. 2 ; w. gen.,
373 ; w. part., 616. a.
y t< Vx, cj., 296 ; idgi,
oxyt., 747. c.
iiff, v, dec., 136. 3.
fv* in den, 306. c., 309.
S%vs, 1 17: 102f.
-iiw in der., 318.
i<p' J, tp' J Tt, 530 ; w.
inf., 628.
>, cp., 159. [298.
-gctivu, CJ.,
!, cj., 300 ; augm., 1 89.
3 ; w. adv., 555. a ; and
gen., 363. ; auxil.,
i^w, cj., 222. [6 3 '2. N
-*, -<wv. Ion. gen., 95 f.
-iea in der., 318.
t*>s, dec., 123. y.
F, 21 f; in dec., 117; in
cj., 220, 264, 267. 3 ;
sign of pers., 143.
, IT 3: 51. N. ; > TT,
70. 1 ; > ,J, JJ, J, 70.
V.; in r., 273 f, 282.
, cj., 280. y, 33. a
<yvfyu, cj., 294.
y'f, Zav, IT 16* 123. y.
/y, wyav, dec., 1 25. .
., 293.
^j, dec., 135.
n, IT 3 : 24 ; X , '-'4 ;
Ion., 44. 1 ; > , 29,
37. 2; contr. 31 f; in
plup., 20-?. N. ; in subj.,
204 ; ins., 222.
- in der., 305. b.
', w. compt., 461, 463f
omitted, 461. a ; pleo-
nastic, 461, c ; w *ra,
% f(>o;, ft &s, n utrrt, 463 ;
5 , 666. ?.
' y ?, 491. R. [301. N.
r $5/v, IT 58 : 203. N., 237,
'Sf, monopt., 127.
^j, IT 19: 112f, 117.
N., 132. 1 ; cp., 159.
1u, -eftcti, CJ., 290.
xitrros, superl., 160.
**>, w. adv. and gen.,
363. 0; asperf., 579.?.
X/'xaj, IT 63 ; in condens.,
529.
'/, IT 59 : 275. ?.
IAU.^ dec., 103. N.
/*/ for <pnpi, 228.
,*/-, use of compounds,
1 40. y.
v < sv, 603.
ny, nvy*flv, 301. 6.
^r ? , IT 11 : 103.
[WxXewj, IT 14: 115.
01 121.4.
, cp. 161.2.
met, 134. -
, IT 1 4 : 114. 2
<[ -Hf in nom., 37. 2.
-? in form., 326.
r,ffireuy, -<rr<vv, compt., 1 60.
,-, cp., 1 56. y.
IT 14: H2f, 115.
, 728. 2.
r,<us, dec., 1 23. y.
, IT 3 ; Sr >
^S, 52 ; fy* >
$ dropped before <r, 55 ;
before x, 61 ; sign of
gen., 84 ; of pers., 172;
ins. in du. and pi., 174
changes of in cj., 181,
210; 3 added to r., 28 i
$ annexed, 182 ;
9-<r, tense-signs, I 98 f ;
38
omitted, 1 99. n.
Xj,-, dec., 1 24. .
LX, pf. Ttfn^et, '236. 2
9-a varan, use, :i74. N.
j., 272.
S-ao-iTft/v, -rruv, compt.,
159. 0.
y, 39. N. 2.
rrf f, 5:i8. a.
9-i/w, Cj., 26-8. [583.
&Xw, cj., 222. 2 ; w. inf.,
0^/j, dec., 1 23. y ; 3i/*/{
tfl-W, ib.
-4tv, gen. in, 91, 320. 1.
S^<ra, dec., 123. y.
Siffftos, dec., 125. a.
06T/s, dec., 119. 1.
$i&>, run, cj., 220. [7 ?2.
3v, pos., 673. a ; encl.
S-wj, IT 12: 57. 3.
3^^, cj., 218.
3/yyavw, CJ., 290.
3vsV*, cj., 281, 237,
239. a ; pass, of XTU'IKW,
'295, 556 , use of tenses,
578. y. [y.
fyeiffffw < ra^etffffu, '274.
^w, ins. of <r, 221. a.
9- e /|, IT 11 : 101.0.
fyt*r*, t CJ., 272.
^wo-*w, CJ., 281. J.
, dec., 106, 742.
IT 7 : 93.
vu, cj., 219.
S^ ? , IT 14: 114. 2.
, IT 3 : 24 f; subsc., 2.5.
3 ; in contr., a 1 f ; in
crasis, 38 ; sign of dat.,
82. 0, 83, 176; affixed
to demonstratives, I 5O.
y, 734.6; connect, vow.,
177, 205; r > 7 and i*
in r., 269 ; i in redupl.,
-i, adv. in, 321. ['283
.; in der., 308. a.
'Iw?,-, dec., 1 26. 2.
-< in der., 319. 1 .
/$ 7v, 2aor., 301. 4.
-/5*/f in der., 3 1 2. d.
-/$j;, -^; in der., 310-
w. gen., 391. .
cor.tr.. 244. a.
416
7REEK INDEX.
ftgvw, cj., 275. .
<$**, dec., 104.
/> w. gen., 391. .
t% added to r., 297.
-i in der., 318.
?, -y, cj., 275. .
<V/, 1 54: 229, 284;
<,KI w. gen., 373. 2.
'Introts, dec., 126. 2.
.<', adv. in, 321. 2.
ixviopKi, 'ixeu, -O.YU, cj.,
292.
-,xy in der., 314, 315.
Jxr/ya?, dec., 124. /3.
It.eiirxofe.eti, CJ., 279.
-/^of in der., 314. c.
<v, const., 601 ; W T< ;
5S9. a.
ivn in der., 310. b.
/? in der., 315.
-/ay in der., 3 1 2.
-/of in der., 3 1 5.
<Wiv,-, IT 14, IT 16: 111$
l-Ji.3.
/V-raTa<pt&;, redupl., 193.
iVra^a/, CJ., 287.
<* in der., 309 f.
i-x added to r., '296
-lerxos, -}, in der., 312. b.
5W/, IT 48; y24 f, 284;
iWjx, 233 f, 237;
J<rrwf, IT 22 : 1 32. j8 ;
<rr for <TT^, 210. N. ;
ia-Tjjga,, 239 ; i<rrj<r X
i<rr, 257. /3.
"*, cj., X ?*, 300.
<V"f, IT 14 : 83 f, 117.
<<*, dec., 1O7. N.
-/' in der., 310. b ;
quant.^683. 3.
-iu*n in der., 310. b.
y$, ** > **, 52 ; xp
> y*, 5>; changes be-
fore x, 61;-* (')>*,
65 ; * annexed, 66. 2 ;
* < , r, 69. n. : tense-
sign, 1 98 ; omitted, 1 99.
*&*/, cj., 267. 2. [n.
xct0i%epeti, cj., 275. .
x^fi/5<w, pref., 192. 3.
Ka.6np.nt, IT 59 : 275. .
., 275. ^.
/, crasis, 40; w. num.,
140; w. oSros, 513. a;
for other connectives,
656' ; conj. and adv.,
657. y; *} ?*, 491 ;
(rXi; */, 655. 6 ; xci4
y e , 661. 2.
XKtvvfteti, CJ., 295.
xa/nw, cj., 267. 2.
xa/<w, xaw, CJ., 267. 3.
xeixog, cp., 16O.
xa,*.i<u, cj., 261.
xaXoy, cp., 159.
xdXus, dec., 123. y.
xa^va;, CJ., 223, 277. /S.
xKpvru, cj., 272 ; xi-
xetftfiai, IT 44 : 217. y.
*, dec., 125. /3 ; in
periphrasis, 385. J.
XT, const., 648 ; w.
num., 137. f.
*i(0, 66. ; = v, 328,
587, 593. y ; pos., 673.
a ; encl., 732.
Kia.^ dec., 108. N.
xi$aa, -avvvfAi, CJ., 293.
IT 60 : 232.
igw, cj., 268.
xaJiiuv, -*, CJ., 279. .
pf., 295.
cj., 274. J, 238.
uta, CJ., 221. [/S.
XIXO/U.KI, aor., 194. 3.
Ofti, -ei&, CJ., -9^.
^ 11 :1O4, 121.e,5.
, cp., 261. 2.
cj., 270. 9.
, const., 369. /3.
fii, sc. a xf|, 546.
vw, CJ., 29O.
x/vjj^/, cj., 293.
Mf^mMW w. gen., 395. $.
x/^v*)^/, -aw, cj., 293.
/, 1T 14 : 117.
xi%oivu, -<*;, CJ., 290.
xi%vi[Ai, CJ., 284.
x/'w, 2 a. in -a^ay, 299.
xX5 t , dec., 1 24. /3.
*X^, cj., 277. a.
/w, xXa, CJ., 267. 3.
is, IT 11 : 104.
Xj;'*, cj., 270. 10.
, cp., 161. 2.
ivvu, cj., 272.
iv, cj., 269.
vu, 2 aor., 227. y
as pass., 556.
xy<pf, dec., 123. ft.
xa/yoy, gram, term, 7 ; w
gen., 391. .
xa/yya f , dec., 124. ft.
xo/u.%*,, IT 40 : 273. 2.
&, CJ., 297.
xa-rrw, cj., 272 ; xa?rr
^<a/, bewail, 561. a.
IT 11 : 101.
{ivvt/fii, -t, cj., 293.
g/ra-<w, CJ., 275. ti.
of in der., 315. b.
e, cj., 238. /3, 274. J
t f , dec., 115. 1.
, 160.
-etopeci, CJ., 293.
/yay, dec., 124. . [a.
;, cj., 54. y, 56, 2 17.
CJ., 27-2.
y>a w. gen., 292. 1.
pf. xsxT^a/, t*.
, 191. 3, 234.
/yw, -yp^i, xrtvrtfti, CJ.,
/f, dec., 105. i. [^95
jiw, cj., 288.
/y, dec., 107. N.
t/A;v5&i, -w, xv^la. CJ.
wy<w, cj., 292. [288
^<, -i<w, cj., 288 ; w. gen.,
370.
^y, IT 12: 106 ; cp.,
26 1 . 2.
uets, dec., 1 23. /3.
X, IT 3 : X < , 54, 277
; X<r, 56, 59.
Sa;, XSf, dec., 124. a.
yy, cj., 290; w.
gen., 370.
ayiwy, dec., 123. y.
ae/, cj., 290.
W. gen., 392. 1.
, cp., 1 56. y.
a^yft>, cj., 290; Xaff'
oxyt., 747. c.
a^Vw, cj., 222.
y^y<w, CJ., 290; with
part., 633
X-x*, cj., 273. *.
GREEK INDEX.
44T
Xiy*, pf., 191, 236. a
Xi<V, IT 37 : 217, 236.
1, 246. /3, 290; XnVo-
f*.* t , w. gen., 349. R.
X*y, f 13 . 109.
X/Xa/o^a*, X<w, CJ., 286
X<>y,Vl2 . 105.1,57.4.
X^^avw == X,W, 290.
X/V, monopt., 127.
X^*y, 1 22, 1 37 : 109,
132, 747. b.
Xflya;, 1 9 : 86.
-Xaf in der.. 31 5 f.
X0v, cj., 260.
Xw^voj, dec., 125. a.
Xi^a;, 2 aor., 227. y.
Xw*;y, Xfo-Tsj, 160.
it, IT 3 ; changes before,
53 ; ^X > /SX, 64. N. ;
sign of Ipers., 143, 171;
changes of in cj., 181,
209.
f, X , w. ace., 426. S;
^ rax , 484.
-P.O. in der., 306. 2.
f^yaS/j, dec., 119. 2.
ftu.xcc.0, -xxtax, 134. d.
<**^, cp., 159. i.
ftoiXet, cp., 1 63. a, ; /ctaX-
Xav, p.iiXitrTot. in cp., 460 ;
/*XXey omitted, 653. 5.
/t*aX,-, monopt., 127.
/*a^av<w, CJ., 290 ; ' ^a-
^v ; 631. N.; w. part.
and inf., 634. 0.
lt4<, ftetiefta,, CJ., 278.
fiae*rtt, Cj., 272.
/tagrw,-, dec., 123. y.
M*<r*2f, dec., 126. 2.
F.etXop.u.1, cj., 222. .
xtyf, 1T 20 : 135 ; cp.,
1 59 ; ^/tv, IT 1 7 : 107.
uifuaxu, -vu, CJ., 279,
319. 2.
ftiipttai, cj., 268; 191.1.
ytis/iiiv, cp., 160 ; fiiTo*
as indecl., 450. 2.
^Xj, IT 19 : 105. 2,
132. 2; cp., 158. a.
^*X, monopt., 127.
^sXi, dec., 103. N.
XXa,, cj., 222. 1 ; w.
inf., 583.
., 222. 2, 261 ;
(ttXj< impers., w. gen.,
376. 3; w. dat., 407. t.
iuoytz., fAif&auS) 238. at,
f&iv, w. art., 490 ; ftiv,
ftivroi, ft,**, pos., 673. .
y, cj., 222. 2, 286.
'.igftygi^u, CJ., 276.
f* f , Dor. for -/tiy, 70. 3.
Affos, cp., 156. c, ; use,
(T, const., 648. [456.
(T|U, w. gen., 394 ;
w. part., 616. a.
!T<r<n w. gen., 364 ; w.
dat., 408.
l #e'(0. 67 ; w. gen.,
394 ; connective, 657. y ;
ftiXZi J, 530.
>, w. subj. and imp.,
598;, final, 601 f; w.
words of fear, 602. 2, 3 ;
X ou, 647 ; redund.,
664 f ; pn$i emphat., 664.
y ; p.* oi>, 666 ; p-h TI
y, 671. 8 ; /*> on,
?;, 671. 12.
u7$!/'f 137. /3 ; fttitiv as
indecl., 450. *.
ftt]xti3/u.a.i, CJ., 287. a.
[;, dec., 126. 2.
W, dec., 119. 1.
'TWJ, IT 12 106. 2.
flT<i/f, dec., 124. y.
-^/, verbs in, 1T48f . 208.
2, 224 f.
t/a? ^s/e^ 3 "9- ^
t/yvC/*/, fjs.'tffyta t cj., 294.
i/x^aj, cp., 160; (Jt.nti>v
(Ji7), 623.
(4ctf4f*, cj., 285 ; ^-
^vj/, 191.3, 233 f;
w. gen., 376 ; w. part,
and inf., 634. .
'.iftvta, -u%a, CJ. 286.
H'V, ace., IT 23 : 142. 5,
143. y ; use, 507 ;
encl., 732.
1W, dec., 124. y.
ivaas, ^va, IT 7 : 94.
ftva.ap.eti, CJ., 285.
fut., 281. ^.
1T 9 : 726. 3.
os in der., 305. f.
Ofuv, dec., 105. .
oD, jtta/, fti, enclit., 732,
X ifuu, &c., 142. l r
502; pet ins., 410. N.
U)uit>(*.eti) CJ., 287. a,
236. 2.
fx.ux.vs, dec., 124. .
U.UOI/H X ftuoioi, 137. .
-^&/ in der., 314. d.
, IT 3 ; > a, 50 ; changes
of, 54 ; changes of v<r,
56 f, 105, 109; ,, final
cons., 63 ; paragogic,
66, 211. N. ; in tv and
truv, 68. 3 ; sign of pi.,
83, 1'7 2, 177; of object,
84, 87, 176; dropped
and changed in r., 217;
added to r., 271, 277 f;
ins. in r., 278. 2, 289 f.
'i, X ^*, w - a cc., 426. 3.
;, cj., 267.
*, vi*,-, IT 9 : 98,728.1.
S f , IT 14, IT 16: 34.*,
114, 117, 121. 6.
i5T, T 7 : 92 f.
i added to r., 292.
>Taf, superl., 156. J.
^w, cj., 222. 2.
>t, cj., 220, 282.
>!;, IT 9 . 98, 728. 1.
7, X (", w. ace., 426. 1.
'- pri\ r ative, 325. a.
'4, vw, cj., 282.
/^w, V<VTW, cj., 275. 9>.
/xaw, w. 2 ace., 433, 435.
'/, ace., 1T 23 : 142. 5,
143. y ; use, 507 ; encl.,
732.
<V*;'2>, w. dat., 419. N.
oaj, vf, IT 9 : 98, 728. 1.
- ves in der., 314, 315.
o-Qiv, -i%u, w. gen., 347
, added tor., 293 f.
vw(v), 66. ; pos., 673.
; encl., 732.
/|, dec., 102. a.
, IT 23 : 141f.
VCtlfAU.lV = VifAU) 287.
SV, y&Jro;, dec., 125. a.
i, IT 3 ; < ^, y-, x <,,
51 ; > , 68. 1 ; Dor.
443
GREEK INDEX.
for <r, 245. 1.
alxaj omitted, 385. y.
&M<pv, IT 13 : 109.
oifu*Z*j cj., 274. ^.
| y ', == c-w'v, 648. /3.
-a/a, gen. in, 99. [3, y.
ftixpf, V 3 : 22. y, 24;
8/V< > aT^*/, cj., 222.
X w, 24 ; a > aw, a<, w.
a7a? , 1T 63 52 1 ; in con-
44. 4, lllf, 117, 156.
dens., 529 ; = or i roi-
1, 203. a ; aa > and
ouros, 531 ; in exclam.,
w,29., 36,44.4, 244;
536. /3; w. inf., 628 f;
contr. w. other vowels,
atas TS, 629.
32f, 45 ; conn, vow* in
alj, IT 14: 114. 2, 121.
Dec. II., IT 6 : 86 ; in
/, 741. b.
cj., IT 31 : 175, 203 f;
o r i<r6' o \Kffov ; 612. 1.
charact., changed, 1 1 f ;
a/<rr^4, augm., 189. 4.
ins., 222, /3 ; in pf.,
o'iffu, fut., 301. 6.
236 ; changes in r., 259,
o"%ofteti, cj., 222. 3 ; as
269 ; of > aw, a, 22. J,
pf., 579. ; w. part.,
117.
637. [295.
', IT 24 : 97, 147f; era-
aXexa oAXw>/, 246. N.,
sis, 39 ; proclit., 731 ;
oXtyos, cp., 1 60 ; oXiyoi
X a, 722. a ; w. gen.,
X w oA/ya<, 488. 5 j
362, ; early use, 467 f.
aX/yaw (Ss7v), 623.
use as art., 469 f ; use as
oXtff^eivca, -0a.ivu t CJ., 291.
pron., 490 f; w. inf.,
oXXww/, cj., 295.
622 ; ,' pi,, Si, y e ,
eXaXw^w, CJ., 274. 5.
49 Of.
'O^j^a;, i Homer^ 421. a.
4-, pron. and adv. begin-
oftvuftt, cj., 295.
ning w., IT 63 317.
o/u.oii; tifti, const., 615.
e5|o;, .ofAKi, cj., 273. /3.
Oftooyyufti, CJ., 295.
ft, 1T24 : 150; X awVa,-,
eva^, dipt, 127.
513f; = adv.,5H.N.;
avs/jav, -a,-, dec., 124. /3.
= iy, 515; o?;, 1 50. y.
av/v^/, cj., 284.
e'^ay, IT 9 744.
OVO/HCC in periphr., 385. S.
aSawf, IT 13 109. .
o^^, cj., 275. ?.
tbuoipin, cj., 270.
av^a^, cj., 298.
*OWwf, IT 16 : 121. 3.
oV-, pron. and adv. begin-
%*, cj., 222. 1 ; w. gen.,
ning w., 31 7, 519. 2.
391. 5.
e-raw, eVa< waw, wa7 a J,
-a^t, gen. in, 91, 320.
01, IT 63 ; w. gen., 363 ;
-*<, dat. in, 90, 320.
interchanged, 6">9.
a^awvixo;, 40. J ; const.,
'Ocrawj, IT 13 109. 2.
530, 671. 13.
Tf , const., 60 1 f.
; < an, ey, 37. 3 ; < a,
ogoica, cj., 301. 4.
ai, 45. 5, 86 ; ^> M in
ty, -y^/, CJ., 295.
augm., 188. 2 ; < n in
a'^v/f, dec., 123. y.
pf., 236, 1 ; final in ac-
e^vw^, cj,, ^'.J").
cent., 723.
fyvvo-u, reilupl., 191. 2.
-a/, dat. in, 90. 4, 320.
e ^f, dec., 1 23. y.
7*, 1F58 237, 30 1. N. ;
at, rel., IT 24 147f, 468;
alT ?, 671. 4.
use, aa rel., 519 f; as
a/5ii>, -a.'iiu, -O.1U, cj., 291.
complain., 535 f; w.
0/J/Vawj, IT 1 6 : 123, 124,
modes, 606 ; */ o;, 491.
136. 2.
R. ; Jv ^I'K, Jt', 493. R. ;
MWf w. gen., 391. *.
os fafatt, 525. /J.
os possess., IT 24 : 151
use, 503 f. [326
-os in der., 305, 306, 308
orafj IT 63 : 521 ; in con
dens., 529 ; w. adj. of
admiration, 538. a, ; w.
inf., 628 ; eVev as indecl.,
450.S; as adv., 529. /2;
oVav aw, 532. N.
eW dec., 127. [728. 1.
eVTSaV, -, IT 9 : 98,
frf,1T 24 j 153,519.2;
irreg. forms, a-raw, ar,
urrat, oruy, oroift, ^ 24
1 53 ; interchanged w.
os, 520 ; complein. use,
535 f; w. modes, 606,
608 f ; o TI {MtSui, *u.
tuv, 631. N.
-arras, adj. in, 138. 2.
Offtpgat'ivoftett, -eioftai, oj.,
on \v. modes, 606. [291.
on, not elided, 42. ;
w. superl., 525. N. ; re-
dund., 609 ; w. inf. and
part., 619. N. ; repeat-
ed, 667 ; pos., 673. ft ;
art ri ; 539. a ; ort ^ajj,
671. 9.
ou <^ ca, 29. a. ; <C a, a,
aa, 36; <aF, 22.3,117.
aw, IT 23 141 f; end.,
732 ; use, 506.f.
aw > aw*, aw, 68. 2, /J ; X
p.*, 647 ; redund., 664 f;
el p.*, w. subj. and fut.
inil., :V.5. 5, N., 597. 1 ;
aw Qnftt, 616. 6 ; awSJ
emphat., 664. y ; aw y e
, 671. 10 ; au^^-
, 671. 11 ;
671. 12.
wW, dec., 123. /3.
vlils, IT 21 137. /3;
aw3c<f arris aw, 528. 2.
; in Hdt., 660. N.
aw < <, affixed, 328 ,
pos., (573. a..
ol'vtxa <C w i'vixa, 40. J*
const., 530, 671. 13.
1Tll:33.y,104.N.,741.
GREEK INDEX.
449
VT<W, -**, cj., 282.
<riXa$ and deriv., w. gen.,
TXV/y, cp., 161. 2.
ins, IT 24 : 1 50 ; X
394 ; w. dat., 399.
TX?<nrw, cj., 274. y.
Ix'Jvo;, 5 1 2 ; X o^i, 5 1 3 f ;
vipvu, pf., 236. a.
-TXaaf, num. in, 138. 4.
in repetition and assent,
-in;, -129. 1 ; cp., 157.
3-Xi5v, cj., 270.
513. N. ; in address,
riv^ixus t%ti, w. gen.,
wX&;w, cj., 264.
343. 3, 515 ; rirovi,
372. y.
wiu, cj., 220, 264 ; w
150. y.
<rifrff, dec., 113, 119. 2.
gen., 391. 5.
2fr(0, 67 : X *5i, 516.
a-ifl- e ^ai, pf., 297.
ryy, dec., 123. y.
tyu'X*, cj., 268.
Tfwwy, cp., 1 58. jS.
wa<siw in periphr., 425. 5.
c0sX*J) monopt., 1 27.
<r^, affixed, 328 ; pos.,
waX <? , IT 14, IT 16: 111.
iQXifxaw, cj., 289.
673. ; end., 732.
2, H3f, 118, 121.
a0f, constr., 601.
fgfo, cj., 288, 246. /3.
jroXi^omous, dec., 136. a.
fyapai, fut., 301. 4.
r^/, const., 658 ; not
waXuVawj, dec., 136. 2.
-a'w in der., 318.
elided, 42 ; as adv., 657,
waXiJs, tf 20 : 135 ; cp.,
w, IT 3 ; 99 > ^, 51 ;
730; el *-i;i, 466. N.
159 ; w. */, 655. 6;
w$ > 03, *8 > 04 52 ;
<rigvvp.i v,vgu<rx,u, 285.
<raXX/ X a; -raXXa/, 488.
w/ct ^> /K^, 53 ; wx ]> 0,
<ri wi(), 66. a.
ra^&/, cj., 288.
61; w( )>0, 65 ;w
orkVa'co, ^TScrTw, cj., 275.9-.
T^/^, cj., 297.
> x, 69. 11. ; < 0, 69.
vriTcivvujm, -eiu, CJ., 293.
wofpu, irg'offu, w. gcn^
a ; pron. and adv. be-
Ttrofteti, -et/teti, CJ., 287.
347, 363. a.
ginning w. w., 1T 63 :
Ktvfofteti, CJ., 290.
ra0i/a;, cp., 156. b.
;?>, cj., 276. [317.
yr'i<pxfitxi, cj., 274. J.
n<^, dec., 105. R. k
war.?*, IT 11: 102, 741. a.
wt0y ry, 2 aor., 274. $.
107. N.
re/a, cj., 222. 3.
fryyvufti, CJ., 294 *, srjyvu-
*, dec., 119. 2.
waXa/aj, cp., 156. y.
ra, opt., 226. 4.
?r a-rciv ft a. i, -toftai, CJ., 287*
re, const., 648, 651. y,
?#*, IT 14: 111, 113f,
Tars, vf. interrog., 328 ;
652. 1 ; w. pass., 562 ;
117. N.
wars, way, Tea;, &C., pos.,
w for wagsa-T/, 653. f,
fr/^wX^i, cj., 284.
673. ; encl., 732 ; X
730.
ripv&fu, cj., 284.
wars ; wow ; &C., IT 63
r0m, pref., 192. 4.
/, cj., 278.
535 f.
wa^ay, absol., 638.
vtvoeiffxa, CJ., 285.
WOT/, w^ar/, 48 2, 0.
tw, IT 19 : 109, 132,
T/TTW, T<TW, cj., 286 ;
WOTV/, fern., 136. /J.
683. N., 738. c; w. 2
as pass., 556 ; Wf-rr^j,
wayj, IT 11 102, 112. .
pers. imp., 613. 2; wa-
238. a.
w^Saj" IT 20 135.
TIJ, w. rel., 520. a.
ri-rvyifti, -vu, CJ., 293.
wea<ra-a;, IT 38: 217, 274.
w*W, cj., 275. .
?r/ay, fem. v'nioa,, 132. 3,
vrziffGvs, 136. a. ; fem.
**, cj., 281. i, 238.
134. 2; cp., 158. /S.
ws<rs<e, &c., 134. J ;
; TJ -retfeav ; 631. N.
*X?*,, cj., 274. s.
cp., 157. 3.
waT*<r<r, cj., 274. y.
srXa*fl/f, -aw?, 109. 2.
Tglcto-fa,, IT 49 : 301. 8;
Tarsia/, CJ., 288.
-rXaava;, -iwy, num. in,
w. gen., dat., and acc. t
wr>ja, IT 12 106, 742.
138. 5.
374. a, 399. a.
n*Tg9*X, IT 16 121.4.
arXarrw, CJ., 275. .
wo/y, const., 657. N. {
wr e a?, dec., 124. y.
TXi/'^y, wXa;y, -X ra-Tay,
w e /y , 629. 2, 657. N.
rtvu, ins. of -, 221. at.
1 59 ; rX?y, 1 59. y ;
W/, wo/^w, cj., 282.
n-ii'fo, IT 39 : 217, 238.
rX7ay as indecl., 450. S ;
w^a, cp., 161. 2 ; const.,
0, 269.
wX?ay, crXsTirTot in cp.,
648 ; <Ta raw, 492. .
WE/VA, contr., 33. a.
rXi*, cj., 259. [460.
W8f < w^aT, 48. ;
Huga/ivf, IT 14: 116. 0.
wX9yxry, cp., 157. R.
const., 648, 652. 1 ; w.
wi/ e , cj., 268. [281. $.
rX,w, cj., 220, 264. N.
pass., 562 ; as adv., 657.
9tlfofteu t fut., IT 39 and
<rXa/j, dec., 135.
Waa-/3aXX,W. gen., 39 1 ..
WXTw, W/'**,, Cj., 298.
<rXy, w. gen., 349; asjwflaT^af, cp., 161. 1, 2.
rsXo<, -&, ., <rXa-
connect., 657. y; <rXiy
w^a^yau, 322 ', cp., 161.2.
/*., cj., 282.
I/, 663. 6.
w^a0goy, -0g--, 134. X
450
GKEEK INDEX.
r^Xoos, -vs, dec., 124. /3. *>*', cj., 264, 246. *. r^n^s, IT 24 : use, 503
tr^Tos, cp., 161. 1, 2.
0-n^am/, nom. omit., 546. 6, 506 f.
m-nLpVftm.i, cj., 295.
-sV<w, cj., 266. <rp/j^?, cp., 156. .
<TTV, IT 9 744.
rf, dec., 123. y. {182. 2^* *a4' aXav 2 /*
"Tfirra, cj., 274. y.
-rf, -ft*, sign of 2 pers., f o?, 334. 9, 413, 438
/!, -i, dec., 124. .
-/, -(T/j, in der., 305. a. /3 ; 'AXx^av^av, 544. /3
vu*0a.vofKi, cj., 290.
o-rraj, dec., 125. a. ' Iljy^xav, 549. R.
*% dec., 124. /3.
r, added to r., 279 f, r*, raw, , cj., 282.
*rj av, in wish, 600. 2.
319. 2.
26>a<r)ff, IT 14 : 111
g , IT 3 ; aspirated, doubled,
ffHittivvUtAt, cj., 293.
113f, 743.
13. 2, 690. 1 : e <r,
ff-xfXXojtta/, jVxXwv, 227. /S. aupa,, 1T 11 : 103.
changes of, 56 f, 70. 1 ;
ffKiKTopau, a-xo-riu, cj., o-&J?, dec., 135.
f, final cons., 63.
r, IT 7 ' 88, 93. [288. ran e . voc., 105. R., 742.
pfites, cp., 1 60.
ffxtiwf*,,, cj., 293. jra^wv, cp., 158.
^T, cj., 272.
-<rxav, -<rxo/A*\>, iter. form,
T, IT 3 ; TT > ffT t T0 >
/i, cj., 276.
re> dec - 103 ' N - L 249 '
r^, 52 ; T^ > *-,*, 53 ;
/, cj., 264.
<r^^<|, dec., 123. y.
dropped before , 55 ;
ffyrSfu, piffffu, cj., 294.
0-00^1, cj., 264.
bef. x, 61 ; rr <C *,
/jjV e , IT 12: 57. 3.
rig, IT 24: 151 ; use, 503.
70. 1 ; T in neut. lin-
piyota, contr., 244. a.
ro<pflf, IT 18 : 131 ; -,-,
guals, 103 ; sign of pers.,
fi-rra, -iu, -*, CJ., 288,
-<Sj, cp., 156, 162.
143, 147, 171 ; changes
319. 2.
**, cj., 219, 221.
of in cj., 181, 211 ;
fit, 1T 12 : 105. 3.
<r*-/ e *;, CJ., 268.
added to r., 27 If ; pron.
-{as in der., 315. f.
fvivtiu, cj., 222.
and adv. beginning w.,
puvvDftt, cj., 293.
<r?To ? , IT 1 6 : 121.4.
1T 63: 317.
r X f, 10. 1 ; r, 10. 2,
- in der., 311. d.
TXy, cp., 158.
1 1 . a ; > i, 50 ; > t,
fvufftost dec., 125. a.
TKftei = ty*, 477. /S.
300 ; ff > T, Dor., 70.
-r^, dec., 104. N.
r*fii*s, IT 7 : 86, 93.
2 ; changes of linguals
-rxx, cj., 277. .
TV, monopt., 127.
and liquids w. er, 55f,
fTiv*fr, -x*>, cj., 274. S.
TA^o-ffffu, cj., 274. y.
68. 3 . * > TT, 70. 1 ;
ffTigidt, -gitrxuj -gof&ett, cj.,
TciTi, dec., 125.
f dropped between two
<rrturu.t t -<ra, 246. a. [296.
TO.O(Tl*>, TTTU t CJ., 274. y
cons., 60 ; final cons.,
*-T;;C, ; , dec., 124. /S.
Tairav, Tir, 97. N.
63 ; dropped and assum-
<TTO ? vt/^, rr^fyvv^.A-r^y-
T^t5s, - S , cp., 1 59, 1 62
ed, 67 ; sign of subject,
v</>, cj., 295.
rttu;, -u*, dec., 124. y.
84 ; of pi., 84 ; of pers.,
<rr<p*;, <rroo$tu, trru$<iu,
TI, affixed, 328 ; pos
143, 172 ; dropped in
cj., 259.
673. ; encl., 732.
cj., 182, 210.3, 247. c;
rv, IT 23 : 141 f; use,
-TI, adv. in, 321. 2.
tense-fign, 178, 198;
502 f; ffov, fo/, tri, end.,
TK'VW, cj., 268; 217. a.
changes, 200 f; added
732 ; rwyi, 328 ; /',
-T^ in der., 306. N.
to r., 271, 273 f; - ( ,
ins., 410. N.
ru X ct, IT 14 : 113. 2,
adv. in, 321.
ffu-yyiyvuffxu, const., 615.
115. 1.
2 in declension, 117.
fux, IT 9 87.
TiXivTar, as adv., 457. *
ffxX<riu, cj., 274. i ; -,
run, ^y, in compos., 68. 3 ;
632.
SC. o <rXny*Tr'y, 546.
const., 648 ; w. num.,
nX, cj., 219, 221.
**/, cj., 282.
137. i.
TXf, adv. ace., 440.
rf&,f 17 : 112f; -tfr,
-<rvvn in der., 308.
Tl^W, TOLfAVU^ CJ., 277. .
-, cp., 157, 162.
(ri/v/iSa, const., 615.
-Tiaf, verbal in, 314 \v
r&iwSfu, cj., 293.
ff$U.'C'tJ, -TTU, CJ., 274. S.
dat., 407.*; const., 6-12 f.
-(Tt, adv. in, 321. 3.
fifuXXu, cj., 277. a.
T e f, dec., 104.
fiuvTov, ffuvrov, IT 23 :
/ / * ^ r o
Ti>>jy, dec., 132. 2.
144 ; use, 504.
141 f; use, 506 f; encl ,
rirrtif, TITT^.J, IT 21
fit* in der., 319. 1.
732.
137 ; ri^ifrir, 65. N
GREEK INDEX.
451
rTi, CJ., 285.
riu%tu, CJ., 270. 9.
rn'xw, cj., 266.
150, 516. [308, 309.
rne, -rm, in der., 3O6,
-T^OX in der., 307.
-rfyios in der., 314. b.
r'tyois, dec., 119. 2.
c/<V<, J 5O : 224 f, 284.
rixru, cj., 272. /S.
r^, '| 45: 216, 218;
riftauv, ^ 22.
r</, 1 7 : 93, 744.
rifivsig, rifA;, 109. 2.
r/'v, cj., 278.
r) f , indef., f 24: 105./S,
152f; encl., 732; irreg.
forms, rtv, r&, arrx,
152, 153. ; affixed,
328 ; use, 5l7f; w. 2
pers. imp., 613. 2 ; <n
as indecl., 450. "3.
<ris, interrog., f 24 : 152.
2 ; 729. E. ; use, 535 f;
w. art., 480. ; in con-
dens., 528. 1 ; ri ya.% ;
ri It } &c., 539. 1 ; ri
Xcc<; ; 585 ; ri ovv ou ;
ri ov ; as imp., 597. 3.
-r,s in der., 306. N., 309,
311.
rtrfuo-xu, r^uu, CJ., 285.
nruffKipeu, cj., 285.
T/a/, cj., 218,278.
rXriffOfAoe,!, rf.TXrix.ce., 301.
2, 238. .
r ys, ro xa.1 T, 492 ; TO
>w i7v/, 623. /3; TO/,
T/, 148. N. [a.
TO/, encl., 732 ; pos., 673.
rotauroi, rotoatii, ^ 63 :
97. N., 150,516.
ro^u t -ivu, CJ., 285.
-rag in der., 138, 305,
314 ; verbal in, w. dat.,
407. x.
rotrauros, T0ffeo$i, ^ 24,
f 63 97. N., 150,516.
-T in der., 307. b.
r-xsJV, ^ 21 : 137.
Tgj-w, cj., 259.
r{t^*, cj., 263.
cj., 301. 5. [N.
-Tgif in der., 306.
Ti;T,f, -T, 134./3.
cj., 269. [7L ; 8. :i.
, 1 14: 112, 115,
i/f, dec., 136. 2.
-V/TaAav, 140.y.
in der., 307. b.
, dec., 119. 1 .
*?"%*>, cj., 282.
., cj., 267. 3.
t, cj., 290 ; w.
gen., 370, 38O. a, ; w.
part., 633.
t/woDTflf, f 63 : 150. a.
wV<rw, cj., 272.
w^(T/f, dec., 119. 2.
w<p<w, cj., 270.
v$cas, dec., 124. y.
ru, therefore, 492. /3.
-TWJ in der., 306. b.
v^/Xv, T 3: 22. a, 24 f;
w init, aspir., 13. 1 ;
contr., 34, 36 ; w < F,
50 ; v ^> v and iw in r.,
270.
u*itrrrif, cp., 157. R.
Z&, dec., 103. N.
i/<a;, f 16 : 123. y, 124.
/3 ; omitted, :>S5.
-uvu in der., 3 1 8. b.
u**i = l*'o, 648. 0.
t/'wa^, dipt, 127. [648.
y?T, cp., 161. 2 ; const,
v-rrixooi, w. gen., 377 ; w.
dat, 405. >j. [292.
vw, cp., 161. 2 ; const.,
648 ; w. pass., 562.
vrrigos, cp., 161. 2.
v<petivea, CJ., 267.
f 3; $<r > ^, 51 ;
r, p$ > /35, 52 ;
*, 53 ; (fix > <p,
, 2. aor., 298. [61.
fts/, ^42 : 267, 236.2;
is, 5 22 : 109, 132;
, t 22 : 56.
y|, f 1 1 : 101.
os j/jts/, 551, 634. y.
w, t 53 : 301. 7.
, w. gen., 348.
, -rraf, &c., 160.
fae*, cj., 301. 6; ^s,
613.3.
<P<u>yeu, CJ., 270. 9; 88
pass., 556.
?/<, f 53: 228, 284.
R., 301. 7; encl., 732:
t<p>7, 552 ; i(p>j as aor
576. 5.
<p0eiva, cj., 278 ; w. part.,
fSi/t*, cj., 268. [63
ip^'vw, (p^/w, cj., 278
(p^oiV, dec., 123. y.
-ft, dat. in, 89.
f 46 : 216, 218
,^ 18: 131,740.2
, dec., 136. 1
/Xj, cp., 156. y, a.
cj., 29.
j., 301. 6.
, cj., 275. ^
iff ITU, (figayvufti) CJ., 294.
eae, dec., 104. N.
;*>}, -|, dec., 124. a.
cj., 274. y.
65. N.
, 65. N.
y4 = ftt>y, 270.9-
, -a%0i, 246. jb.
, w. acc., 424. 1.
i;*, cj., 21 8 ; ?ipyv, 227. -y.
j, f 1 1 : 103, 741. a.
3; ^ > I 51;
^, 61 ; ^, ins., 90. 3 :
added to r., 282.
, cj., 275.
etigta, CJ., 267.
;y5vw, CJ., 290.
^e'itis, 1 19: 57, 109,
1;3'2; cp. 157.
fys, 1 11: 102 . ^-
g*v, w. gen., 372. y.;
pos., 674.
ffxa, %etivu,c]., 281. f.
, t 12: 123. y.
igaiv, %tignrrof) 16O.
^iv, dec., 123. a
;, CJ., 264.
yj, dec., 123. y.
, ^ inserted, 221. a.
452
GREEK INDEX. ENGLISH INDEX.
cj., 218.
, 284 ; contr., 33. a. ;
, vr. dat., 4 1 9. 5.
, dec., 1 '23. y.
>!, impers., cj., 284. 4 ;
w. ace., 430. R.; w.
inf., 583.
tft"> c J-> 284 ' 2 4 w -
gen., 357. N.
in periphr., 385.
; r
432. N.
[ 1 .
1 8 : 131, 728.
ff6Ktus, dec., 1 36. 1 .
s, dec., 123. y, 104.
iif, cp., 156. R.
3 : 22. -y, 24 f;
X , 24; in contr., 32 f;
in subj., 204 ; verbs in,
J 34 f : 1 70. ; - in
der., 318. d.
u in address, 443 ; pos.,
674. 5.
u^t X oSruf, 516.
-ttins in der., 315f.
Mia, cj., 288, 189. 2.
-av, -uv'tu. in der., 313.
euviap.au, cj., 301. 8 ; w.
gen., dat., and ace., 374.
a, 399. .
elvr, < a avy'^, 39.
us, proclit., 731 ; omitted
before appos., 332. 3 ;
w. dat, 410 ; vr. super).
5 25. ? = OTt oiifcaf
531.0; w. adv. of ad-
miration, 538. a. : w.
part., 583. a, 640 ; in
wish, 600. 2 ; final, GO 1 ;
omitted, 611. 3 ; w. inf.,
628 ; ellips. w., 662
as prep., 662. a \ us ri
539. a.
us, adv. in, 321.
*Wt, w. part., 640 ; el-
lips, w., 662.
u< rn, w. inf., 628.
, Ion., 25, 45. 6.
<<piXa, in wish, 567. y.
599. N.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Ablative in Latin, 340. /S.
Absolute, nom., 343 ; compt. and su-
perl., 465 ; inf., 623 ; part., 638 f.
Absorption of vowels, 3 1 .
Abstract noun, 305, 3O8 ; > concrete,
Acatalectic verse, 698. [.'505. R.
Accent, 722 f; marks of, 14, 22. a. ;
principles, 722 f; uses, 722. 3 ; gen.
laws, 726 ; changes, 727f ; in apostr.,
con tr.,^ eras., 728 ; determination of,
73-1 f; 'hist., 734 f; in dial., 735;
in declens., 736 f; in Dec. I., 736,
740. 1 ; in Dec. n., 728. 1, 737 ;
in Dec. in., 728. 2, 3, 741 f; in fern.
adj., 740. 2 ; in comp. pron., 732. 3 ;
in interrogatives, 152. 2, 535 ; in
compar., 745 ; in conj., 728. 4, 746 f;
in compos., 739 ; in particles, 750 ;
showing quant., 681.
Accentual places, 723f ; changes, 727 f.
Accusative, 78, 81, 339; changes in,
34, 63. R., 84, 9C>. 4, 97, 10O, IO2.
y, 1 07, 1 lOf, 1 1 4 f ; in appos. w. sent.,
834. 8 ; expr. dir. limit, 339, 422 f;
of dir. obj. and eff^ 423 f ; w. verbs
and verbals, 424 ; w. verbs gov. gen.
and dat., 424. 2 ; by attr., 425, 427.
9 ; in periphr., 425. 5, 6 ; w. verb
omitted, 426 ; with , /, pa, 426.
S; omitted, 4'J7 ; of dir. obj., 428 f;
w. verbs of motion, 429 ; w. causa-
tives, 430 ; w. 3i?and ^, 430. R. ;
of effect, 4:H f ; of kind, noun, 431 ;
w. adj., 431. 1 ; of neut. adj., 432;
of defin. noun, 433; double, 434 f;
w. verbs of making, &c., 434 ; doing,
&c., 435 ' asking, &c., 436 ; of spe-
cif, or synecd., 437f, 563 ; in ex-
clam., 438. J; of extent, 4S9 ; adv.,
44Of ; of rel., attr., 526; w. inf
and part., 617, 626 f; abs., 638 f; w
verbal in riot, 643 f; w. prep., 648 f
Acephalous verse, 698.
Achronic forms, 565.
Active voice, 165, 174, 555 f; as in-
t rans. or reflex., 555 ; as pass., 556
w. reflex, pron., 561. 1 ; interch. w
mid., 561 ; verbals, 305 f, 314, 392
ENGLISH INDEX.
153
A-itual sentence, M29 ; mode, J 27 :: Alcaic, C9S ; lessor, 7O6. 3.
177, 587. Alrmaiiian vor.se, 7O6. 8.
Acute accent, 14, 722f ; }> gravej 7'29 ; Alexandrine dialect, 8.
st/ll. 72.;. Alphabet, 11 l(>f, .If; Hebrew, 2 1
Address, nom. in, 343. 3 ; voc. in, Anacoluthon, :V29; in synt. of appos.,
44-_>f ; sign of, 443. 333. 7 ; nom., 344 ; adj., 4,59 ; compt.,
Adjective, 73 ; declens., f 17 f: 12Sf:' 461 ; art., 4^4; verb, 6O9 ; inf. and
of one term., 129 ; of two terra., <J 17: part., 6)9. N., 627 f; part., 638 f,
ISO; of three term., 1 18 f: 131 f; 641; verbal in -no?, 644; particle,
irreg., 135f; num., 137f; compar., 669.
155f ; deriv., 3Hf, 458.3 ; compos., Anacrusis, 698. .
324, 326, 458. 3 ; synt., agreement, Analysis, forms of, ^ 6.5 f.
444 f; in comp. const., 446; used Anapsest, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696 ; verse,
subst., 447 f; use ofneut., 449f; for 697. 0, 707 f.
abstr. noun, 449. ; in adv. phrases, Anastrophe, 730.
449. /3 ; w. words of diff. gend. and Anomalous nouns, 122f: adj., 135f;
aumb., 450; in pi. for sing., 451 ; compar., 16Of; changes in r. of verb,
w. impers., 546. ; agreeing w. idea, 301.
453 ; agreeing w. gen. implied, 454; Antecedent, def. or indef., 519 ; in
attracted, 455 f; for adv., adjunct, clause w. rel., or omitted, 522 f, 525;
&c., 457 ; in anacol., 459 ; use of in case of rel., 527 ; clause united w.
degrees, 460 ; w. prep., 651. 2. rel. clause, 524 f, 528 f; w. complem.
Adjective clause, 329, 492. 1, 522. 2; clause, 5:*8. [accent., 726.
pronouns, 147 f; synt. 444 f, 494 f. Antepenult, in pronunc., 18. 5; in
Adjunct, 329 ; complem. X circumst., Antibacchius, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696. 3-
expon. X nude, 329. Antispast, 697 ; -ic verse, 696. 3, 721.
Adonic verse, 706. 1 .
Adverb, num., ^ 25
l.'>9 ; compar.
155, 1 62 f ; deriv., 320 f; synt., 646f,
657 f; w. art. = adj., 475 ; attr.,
526. S, 527. R., 531. C ; as prep.,
as conn, and non-conn., 657 ; used
subst., 65* ; in const, praegn., 659.
Adverbial clause, 329; ace., 440 f;
phrases, 478 ; inf., 623.
^Eolic dialect. 1, 3, 6f; digamma,
22. 2; opt., 184. , 205.3; verse,
706.
Affixes, open X close, 82. t; of de-
clens., ^ of: 80 f; analyzed, 1 6
83. 3; in dial., 95 f, 99, 120f; of Appellatives, der. of fern., 311.
pers. pron., 141f; of verb,
28 f
17 If, 195f; classes, 195; orders,
196; elements, ^ 31 : 197f; union
w. r., 21 6f; in verbs in -^/, 224 f ;
in complete tenses, 233 f; dial., 181 f,
24 1 f.
Agent, deriv., 306. 3 ; w. pass, verbs
and verbals, 380, 407. , 417, 462,
64 2 f.
Agreement, 329; of subst., 331 f; of
adj., 444 f ; of pron., 494 f ; of verb,
543 fc
Antistrophe, 700. 2.
Aorist, 167f, 178; second, 178. g,
180, 199, 255 ; in pures, 1T 57 : 227 ;
sign changed in, 56, 201 ;. X pres.
and impf., 569 f. imp., 570. 2 : used
achronically, 575 ; X perf. and plup.,
577 f; for perf. and plup., 580 ; for
fut., 584 ; X impf., as conting., 593 ;
X pres., w. pv, 598. 1 ; accent, 734.d,
746 f.
Aphaeresis, crasis referred to, 38.
Apodosis, 329, 60 3 f.
Aposiopesis, 484.
Apostrophe, 1 6, 30, 4 1 f ; accent, 728. c.
Apposition, 331 f; for part, const., 360.
Appositive, 329, 33 If.
Aptote, 1 26. N.
Argive dialect, 1 ; ts in, 58. )S.
Aristophanic verse, 709.
Arsis, 695 ; affecting quant., 690. 3.
Article, IT 24 : 147f; in crasis, 39,
used to mark gend., &c., 74. /3 : pre-
pos. X postpos., 147; synt., 467 f;
Ep., Ion., and Dor. use, 467 f ; as an
art., 469 f; how translated, 469. 1 ;
w. subst. in its full ext., abstr., inf.,
454
ENGLISH INDEX.
prop, name, &c., 470 f; w. subst. def.
from lira, word, 472 f ; position, 472 ;
w. pron., 473, 480, 483, 528. 1 ; pos.
w. oSros, fit, \Ki7vos, 474. & ; w. ad-
verb, 475, 478 ; used subst., 476 f;
w. ap.<p'i or <rti, 476. N. ; in periphr.,
477 ; in adv. phrases, 478 ; w. subst.
def. from prev. ment., &c., 479 f;
= poss. pron., 482 ; without a subst.,
484 : omitted, 485 f; marking subj.
of sent., 487. 4 ; doubled, 489. 9 ;
as a pron., 467 f, 490f; w. p'tv, Si,
490 ; w. >/, x.a,i, 491 ; in its T-
forms, as demonst. or pers., 492 ; as
rel., 493 ; w. inf., 622f.
Aspirate, 1 3 ; asp. or rough mutes, IT 3.
Associated consonants, \ 8.
Asterisk, 16.4.
Asynartete verse, 695. 3.
Asyndeton, 660.
Atonies, 731.
Attenuation of vowels, 28 f.
Attic dialect, 1 , 4 f ; old, middle, new,
4 ; A.tticists, 8 ; declens., 98 ; gen.,
116. S; redupl., 191. 2, 283; fut.,
200 ; opt., 205, a. ', forms in imp.,
213. 3.
Attraction, 329 ; in synt. of appos.,
333 f; ace., 425, 626 ; adj., 445 f;
pron., 5.24 f, 538 ; verb, 55Of ; inf.
and part., 61 4f, 626 ; particle, 659,
Attribute, 444. a. [668.
Augment, 1 73, 1 87 f ; syll. 1 87 ; temp.,
187f ; in comp. verbs, 192f.
Augmentatives, deriv., 313.
Authority in prosody, 687.
Auxiliary verbs, 180, 234, 583, 637.
Bacchias, 697 ; -ic verse, 696. 3, 720.
Barytdfee, 725 ; verb, 216. a.
Base, in cj., 2O2. a. \ in vers., 698. /3.
Boeotian dialect, 1.
Brachycatalectic, 698.
Brackets, 16. 4.
Breathings, \ 3 : 13} marks of, 22. a..
Breve, 676. N.
Bucolic caesura, 699. 5.
3yzantine dialect, 8.
Qesura, of foot, verse, rhythm, masc.,
fern., &c., -al pause, syll., 699 ; af-
fecting quant., 690. 3.
Cardinal numbers, J 21, ^ 25 : 137.
Cases, dir. X indir., cams recti X ob-
Ugui, 78, 83 f; hist, of, 83 f; use of,
338 f; relations of, dir., indir., subj
obj., resid., 338 f; in Lat, 340. /J.
Catalectic, 698 ; in syll., &c., 698. a.
Causative verbs, 319 ; w. ace., 430.
Characteristic (last letter, or letters, of
root), 92 f, 98, lOOf, 170. /3, 216f
Chief tenses, 168. [exponents, 329
Choral odes, 7OO. 2.
Choriamb, 697 ; -ic verse, 696. 3, 72O.
Chronic forms, 565.
Circumflex accent, 14, 724 f.
Circumflexed syll., 725 J vow. long,
678, 726. 4.
Circumlocution, see Periphrasis.
Circumstance, 329.
Close vowels, 24 f; affixes, 82. i.
Cognate vowels, 26. 5 ; consonants, 49 ',
in dial., 69.
Collective, w. plur., 453, 497, 548.
Common dial., 4, 7f; gend., 74.
Comparative, 155f, 316 ; w. gen.,
351, 461 ; w. dat., 419 ; w. 3 and
oth. particles, 461, 463 f; ellip. and
mixed const., 461. 2, 3 ; w. iXcr/^ay,
^iovrof, $ xitrei, % uffri, &C., 463 ;
w. reflexive, 464 ; two, w. jj, 464. 5 ;
abs., 465.
Comparison, 155f, 316 ; of adj., 155f,
316. 2; of adv., 162f; of other
words, 161 ; by use of adv., 460;
double, 161, 460 ; accent in, 745.
Compellative, 329, 442.
Complement, -ary adjunct, conjunc-
tion, pron., adv., 329.
Complete tenses, IT 26 : 168 ; hist of,
179, 186; four formations in act.,
186 ; as indef., 233 ; inflection, 2:53 f;
older and more used in pass, than act.,
240, 256, 578 ; most used in part.
578. /3; X indef., 577 f.
Composition, 323 f; form of 1st word,
324 f; 2d word, 326 f; close or prop.
X loose or improp., 327 ; accent in,
734. /, 7.59.
Compound word, 303 ; form, of, 323 f;
verbs, prefixes of, 192. 3 ; const. t
329, 446, 496. C, 544.
Conclusion, forms of, 603 f.
Concord, 3'J9.
Concrete < abstr., 305. R.
Condensed construction, 528 f, 538.
Condition, forms of, 603 f.
Conditional sentences, modes in, 603 &
ENGLISH INDEX.
Conjugation, ^ 26 f : 164f; principles,
164f; hist, 171 f; prefixes, ^ '28
187f 5 affixes, ^f '28 f: 195f; root,
170. , '254 f; quantity in, G8'2, 684 ;
accent in, 746 f.
Conjunctions, 329; synt. of, 654 f;
generic for spec., 656 ; omitted, 660;
introd., 661. N.
Conjunctive mode, 169. y, 591.
Connecting vowels of dec., IT 6 ' 82. 3 ;
of verb, J 31 : 175, 178 f, -2O2f : in
hid., '203 ; in subj., '2O4 ; in opt.,
2O5 ; in imp. and inf., 206 ; in part.,
207 ; wanting, 208, 224 f, 237 f; in
dial., 246.
Connective exponents, pron., adv., 329 ;
position, 673.
Consonants, f 3 : 49 f; becoming vow-
els in Gr. alphabet, 22 ; euph. chang-
es of, 50 f; final, 63 ; paragogic, 66 ;
dial, var., 69 f; in poets, 71 ; added
to r., 271 f; two lengthen syll., 677,
688 f.
Contingent sentences, 329 ; modes, IT 27 :
169, 177, 587 f ; par tides, 5 87 f; con-
tingency, pres. or past, 589 f.
Contract verbs, IT 45f ; 216 ; in dial.,
241 f; forms of verbs in -^/, 225 f,
241 f; pf. part, 237.
Contraction, 30 f; omitted, 37. R. ; in
dial., 45 ; in Dec. i., 94 ; in Dec. n.,
98 ; in Dec. ra., 1O4, 107f, 109. 2,
115f; in augm., 188f; in verb, 216,
2-26, 241 f; in pf. part., 237; in r.
of verb, 260 ; accent in, 728. a.
Coordinate consonants, 49', in dial.,
69 ; sentences for subord., 53 3 f, 656.
Copula omitted, 547.
Coronis, 1 6.
Correlatives, pronominal, ^ 63 : 317.
Correspondence of a, i, u, with , *, F,
50, and page v.
Crasis, 30, 38 f; accent in, 728. b.
Cretan dialect, 1 ; >; in, 58. /3.
Cretic, 697 ; verse, 696. 3, 720.
Dactyl, 697 ; -ic verse, 696, 7O3f.
Dative, 78,84, 339 f; sing, not elided,
42. a; pi. in Dec. in., 51, 57 f, 114.
3; objective, 339, 397 f; of approach,
397 f; of nearness, 398f ; w. verbs
of traffic, 399. a ; expr. succession,
399. ; of likeness, 400 ; of influence,
4Olf; w. words of address, 402 ; ad-
vantage, &c., 403 ; appearance, giv-
ing, oblig., val., 404 ; oppos., yield-
ing, &c., 405 ; w. words expr. menta".
act or feeling, or power of exciting
emotion, 406 f; w. verbals, 4O7. * ;
w. subst. verb, 408 ; w. other words,
409 ; expr. remote relations, w. *.?,
410 ; fto',, ffo'i, &c., 410. N. : for gen.,
411, 5O3. c; residual, 339f, 414 f;
instrum. and mod., 415 f; of inrAru-
ment, &c., 416; of agent, 417; of
way, manner, respect, &c., 418; w.
etvrot, 418. R. ; of meas. of (aft.,
419; TV. ^uofAat and vopigu, 4 1 9. 5 ;
temporal and local, 420f ; of rel., attr.,
526. 0; w. prep., 6 8f.
Declension, f 4f : 73 f, three metliods,
79, 85 f, 185; gen. rules, 80 f; af-
fixes,^ 5f: HOf; Dec. I., \ 7f: 86,
8Hf, 92 f; dial., IF 8 : 9 f; Dec n.,
1T9f: 86 f, 97f; dial., f 1O: 99;
Dec. ra., IT 11 f: 85f, lOOf; dial.,
IT 15: 120f; special law of Greek,
110; irreg. and dial., IT 16: 152 f;
defect, 126 f ; of adj. and part., IT I7f :
128f; of num., j 21 : 137f; of
pron., Tf 23 f 141f; quantity in,
682 f. accent in, 736 f.
Defective nouns, 12Cf ; verbs, 287. 2.
Definite tenses, ^ 26 : 1 68 ; X indef.,
569 f; descriptive, 57Of, 576; in
verbs of asking, &c., 574. N. ; article^
469 ; relatives, 519 i.
Definitive, old, I47f, 467 f; noun, 433.
Degrees of compar., 155 ; use of, 460f;
interch. and mixed, 466.
Demonstratives, IT 24: 15G, 512;
omitted before rel., 523 ; in attr.,
526 f; for rel., 534.
Deponent, mid. X pass., 166; pass,
of, 564.
Derivation, 1T 62 : 303 f; quantity in,
685 ; accent in, 734. e, 736f.
Desiderative verbs, 319 } sentences,
modes in, 597 f.
Determination of accented syll., 734. f,
Diaeresis, 16. 3, 26, 46 ; accent in, 728.
N. ; in vers., 699. 2.
Dialects, 1 f ; Ion., Ep., Horn., 2 ; MoL,
3; Att., Comm., 4, 6f; Dor., 5;
Maced., Alex., Hellen., Mod. Gr. or
Romaic, 8 ; dialectic variations in
orthog., 23 ; vow., 43 f; cons., 69 f;
456
ENGLISH INDEX.
Dec. i., IT 8 : 95 f; Dec. n., IT 10
99; Dec. m., IT I5f: 12Of; adj
IT 20: ISL'f; num., IT 21 : l?7f;
pron., 1T23f: 142f; prefixes of verb,
1 94 ; affixes, 1 8 1 f, 241 f ; synt.,
3,O. 2 ; accent, 735.
Diastole, 16. 2.
Digamma, 13. 4, 2 If, 89, 117, 142f,
220, 222. y, 264, 267. 3, 690. 2.
Dimeter, 698, 7OO. 1.
Diminutives, gender, 75 ; der., 3 1 2.
Diphthongs, ^ 3 : 24 f; prop. X im-
prop., 25 ; corresponding, 29 ; re-
solved, 46 ; long, 678 ; shortened
before a vowel, 691 ; forming 2 ace.
Dipody, 697. ft. [places, 723.
Diptote, 127. ft.
Direct cases, 78, 83 f, 338f ; obj. t 422f ;
Distich, 700. [qut., 607 f.
Distinct sentence, 329 ; modes, IT 27 :
587 f; in depend, clauses, 614; X
incorp., 618.
Divided construction, 544. .
Dochmius, 697 ; -iac verse, 720 f.
Doric dial., 1, 5f ; fut., 203. 3.
Double consonants, IT 3 : 51 ; lengthen
syll., 688 ; verbs,^ 43 f 170. ft, 222.
Doubtful vowel, 24. ft, 680 f.
Duad in vers., 700. 2.
Dual, 77 ; old pi., 85, 1 72 ; w. pi., 337.
Ecclesiastical dialect, 8.
Elegiac poetry, 2 ; verse, 705.
Elision, 30, 4 1 f, 192. R.
Ellipsis, 329 ; in synt. of appos., 332 ;
gen. part., 361. ft ; gen. possess.,
391. y; dat., 399. /3,410 ; acc.,426f ;
adj., 447 f; compt., 461. 2; art.,
475, 485f ; pron., 502f, 513. N.,
521$ 525. N., 528 f, 538, 539. 1,
541 ; verb, 545 f; inf., 624 f, 627 f;
part., 634. *, 639. 2 ; prep., 650f ;
particle, 66Of.
Emphatic changes in r. of verb, 265 f.
Enallage, 329.
Enclitics, 732.
Ending, see Flexible.
Enneemim, 699. 4.
Epen thesis, see Insertion.
Epic language, 2, 6.
Epicene, 74. y.
Episema, IT 1 : 1 1, 22. J.
Kpithet, 444. a.
Epode, 700. 2.
Equal rhythm, 696.
Erasmian pronunciation, 20.
Etymology, 1 4f : 72 f.
Euphonic changes of vowels, 27 f: of
consonants, />0f ; in Dec. I., 92 f; in
Dec. n., 9L , in Dec. m'., lOOf ; in
conj., 181, 2 1 6 f ; in r. of verb, 2o9 f ;
inflection, 86, 175f.
Exclamation, note of, 15 ; nom. in,
34:3. 2 ; gen. in, 372 ; ace. in, 438. S;
inf. in, 6-5.
Exponents, connect. X charact., 329.
Exponential adjunct, 329.
Falling Ionic, 697 ; rhythm, 696. 3.
Feet, 694, 697 ; exchange of, 695. ;
ictus of, 695. ft ; caesura of, 699.
Feminine, 74 f ; dec., 88 ; in adj., 1 3 1 f
same form as masc., 129f, 133. N. ;
ccesura, 699. 4.
Figures of syntax, 329.
Final consonants, , , f, 63 ; conjunc-
tions, 329 ; sentences, modes in, 601 f.
First tenses, 178, 180, 186.
Flexible endings of declens., ^ 6 : 82.
3 ; of verb, IT 31 : 209 f; in dial.,
247 f.
Formation, ^ 62f: 72, 302 f; of sim-
ple words, 304 f; compound, 323 f.
Fractional numbers, 1 40. y.
Frequentative verbs, 319.
Future, i67f, 178 : wants subj. and
imp., IfJ9. ft; sign changed in, 56,
200; second, 18O, 199, 255; use,
565 f, 5Slf; part. expr. purpose,
583. a, 635 ; for pres. or past tense,
585; opt., 587. 2; ind. for imp..
597 ; w. 2w, <)! f.
Future Perfect, 168. , 179, 239,582.
Gender, 74 f; rules of, 75f.
jenitive, 78, 84, 339 ; of departure,
345 f; of separ., S46'f ; w. words of
sparing, &c., 348 ; of distinction, M46,
349 f; w. Xi/V,a<, 349; R. ; w.
words of authority, &c., :>50 ; w. aj-
X&,, 350. R. ; w. compt., 351, 461 ;
and #, 461. c; w. multiples, &c.,
352; of cause, 353 f; of origin and
mat., 355 f; for dat.. 355. N. ; of
theme, 356 ot supply, w. words of
plenty and want, 3.;7 ; w. Sia^*/ and
Xttt", 3.57. N. ; partitive, 35f,
expr. quantity, &c., 359 ; w. subst.,
361 ; expr. country, 361. ; w.adj.,
ENGLISH
nit., superl., &c., 362, 461 ; w. adv.
of place, time, state, &c., 3G3 ; w
verb, as subj., 364 ; as appos., 365 ;
as complem., 866 f ; w. words of shar-
ing and touch, 367 f; as part taken
hold of, 369 ; w. words of obtain-
ing, &c., 37O; of motive, &c., 372 f;
w. words of direction, claim, dispute,
373 ; of price, value, merit, crime, 374 ;
of punishment, 374. N. ; of sensible
and mental object, 375 f; w. words
of obedience, 377 : of time and place,
378 f; act. or ejfic., 380 f; w. pass,
verbs and verbals, 381 ; constituent,
adjunct defining thing or property,
382 f; w. compounds of a- priv., 3S3 ;
w.subst. verb, 384 ; w. subst. omitted,
in periphr., 385 ; of property, 387 ;
of relation, 388 f; social, w. adj. of
connection, 389 ; possess., 390 ; w.
4r>7
ii^as, Tliat, &c., and verbs of praise,
blame, and wonder, 391 ; > case of
thing possessed, 391. y ; w. S&, &c.,
391. S ; objective, w. verbals, 392f ;
w. abstracts, tttnos , &c., 393 ; of loc.
and temp, relation, 394 ; of reference,
&c., :i95 ; w. part., G17. 6; abs.,
638 f; w. prep., 648 f.
Glyconic verse, 706. 2.
Government, 329.
Grave accent, 14, 724, 729; syllable,
Hebrew Alphabet, 21. [725.
Hellenistic dialect, 8.
Hephthemim, 699. 4 ; anticipated,
Heroic verse, 698, 704. [712. 1.
Heteroclites, 122, 124.
Heterogeneous nouns, 122, 125.
Hexameter, 698. 3, 704.
Hiatus, how avoided, 30 f : in early
Greek, 89, 117f; in poetry, 701. 3.
Historical tenses, 168 . present, 567.
a, 576.
History of orthog., 21 f; declens., 83f,
H7f: pron., 143f; conj., 171 f;
root of cj., 254 f; formation, 3O2 ;
accent, 722f, 734.
Homeric dialect, 2.
Hyperbaton, 329, 426, 511, 672.
Hypercatalectic, 698.
Hypodiastole, 16. 2.
Iamb, 697 ; -ic rhythm, 696 ; verse,
697. 0,71 If. [cal, 695.
Ictus, in pronunc.. 18.5, 19; rnetri-
Immediate verb X onus., 560.
Imparisy liable, S2. N.
Imperative, 169, 177, 61 2f; wants
1 pers., 170, 598. I ; perf., 235
577; in depend, sent., 612. 1; w.
ra,- and T/?, 6 1 3. 2 ; expr. supposi-
tion, 613. 4.
Imperfect, 167$ 178 ; generic use,
566. a. ; for pres., 567. y ; X aor.,
569 f; X aor. and plup., as con ting.,
593.
Impersonal, 546, 564. 3, 617 ; part.,
in ace. abs., 638.
Improper diphth., 25 f; redupl., 283.
Inceptive verbs, 3 1 9.
Incorporated sentence, 329 ; modes,
1T 27 : 614f ; w. adjuncts, 616. 4 ;
X distinct, 618; wide range of, 6 1 8 f ;
how translated, 6 1 8. 1 ; in oratio ob!.,
619; w. on and us, 619. N.
Indeclinable, 126. 1.
Indefinite pron. and adv., f 23 f, ^f 63 .
146, 152f, 317, 517f; art., 518. ;
re/., 519f; tenses, t 26 : 168 ; X def.,
569 f; X complete, 577.
Independent, nom., 343.
Indicative^ 169, 177, 587 f; X subj.
and opt., 587 f; expr. conting., 593 ;
habit, w. ay, 594; wish, 597 f; pur-
pose, 601 f; in condit. sent., 603 f;
expr. possibility, &c., w. ay, 604. a ;
without ay, 605 ; in quot., 6O9f.
Indirect cases, 78, 83 f r 338 f; obj.,
397 f; quot., 6O7f.
Infinitive, 169, 176, 614 f; synt., 614 f;
impers., 617; construed as neut. noun,
445, 62()f; act. = pass., 621. /3 ;
w. art., 622 f; as ace., 622f ; of spe-
cif. and adv., 623 ; abs., 623 ; re-
dundant and omitted, 624 ; in com-
mand, exclam., &c., 625 ; resem-
blance to dat., 626. N ; w. ace., 626f ;
w. other cases, 627 ; w. ;, urn, etas,
offos, 628. f ; w. <rg/y, rgjy n, &C-, 629.
2, 657. N.
Inflection, IT 4 f : 72 f; three methods
in nouns and verbs, 1 85.
Inscription, nom. in, 543. 1.
Inseparable particles, 1 50, 325.
Insertion of i in contr., 35 ; of cons.,
64 ; to prevent hiatus, 89, 117f; of
f in conj., 221 ; of n, i, e, , 222 ;
of f and v in root, 273, 277, 289 ; of
458
ENGLISH INDEX.
vow. and r in compos., 324.
Intellective sentence, 329 ; modes,
IT 27: 587 f.
Intensive verbs, 3 1 9.
Interjection, w. gen., 372. < ; inde-
pendent, 645.
Interrogative pron. and adv., ^ 24,
t 63 : 152. 2, 317, 536, 539; po-
sition, 673 ; sentences expr. wish, 597.
Intransitive use of second tenses, 257.
ft ; of act. voice, 555.
Inverted attraction, 527.
Ionic dial., 1 f ; old, middle, new, 2 ;
letters, 23 ; forms in pf. and plup.,
Iota subscript, 25. 3, 31. N. [213. R.
Irregular nouns, 122f; adj., 135f;
com par., 160f.
Isochronous feet, 697.
Kindred vowels, 28 ; noun in ace., 431.
'opa, 1 1 : 11, 21 f.
Labiils, IT 3: changes of, 51 f; in
De< . in., 1T 1 1 : 101 ; verbs, IT 36 f.
Laco lie dialect, 1.
Last syllable of verse common, 692.
Lesb an dialect, 1, 3, 6f.
Letfcrs, IT 1 : lOf, 21 f.
Liga< ores, ^ 2 : 10. 2.
Ling tals, Tf 3 ; changes of, 51 f ; in
Dec ra., ^ 11 : 102 f; verbs, ^ 39 f.
Liqui Is, IT 3; changes of, 54 f; in
Dec m. f f 12: lO5f; verbs, l*\f
56, 170. ft t 223, 266.
Liqui 1-mutes, f 13: 109.
Local quantity, 688
Loga edic verse, 696. S, 706, 710.
Long vowels, IT 3 : 24 f, 29, 676 ; form-
ing I ace. places, 723 ; vowel short-
ene( before another vowel, 691 ; syll.,
by uat. and pos., 67 8 f.
Maced&uc dialect, 8.
Masculine, 74 f; form for fern., 133,
495 ; pi., used by a woman speaking
of herself, 336. a. ; co-sura, 699. 4.
Megarian dialect, 1.
Mesode, 700. 2.
Metaplasia, 122f.
Metathesis, 56 f, 59, 64 ; in verbs, 223,
227. ft, 262, 281. [699.
Metre, 694 f; -ical ictus, 695 ; series,
Middle mutes, IT 3 : 49 ; > and <
smooth and rough, 52 ; inserted, 64.
2; voice, 165 f, 180, 553 f; interch.
W. pas*, 554 ; w. dir. reflex, sense,
557 ; indir. 558 ; recipr., cans., 559
subjective, 560 ; w. reflex, pron.
561. 1 ; as act. or pass., interch. w
act., 561 ; root, 254.
Modem Greek, 8 ; pronunc., 19.
Modes, f 27: 164, 169; hist, 176f,
conn, vowels, 2O3f; use, 586 f; in-
tellective, 587 f; in desid. sent., 597 f
final, 601 f; condit., 603 f; rel., 606 ;
complement., 607 f; volitive, 612fj
incorp., 61 4 f.
Monometer, 698.
Monopody, 697. ft.
Monoptote, 127. ft.
Monostichs, 700.
Motion, movable, 74. J.
Multiples, IT 25 : 137f ; w. gen., 352
Mutes, ^ 3 ; changes of, 5 If, 69 f;
m. and liquid as affecting quant., 689 ;
in Dec. m., ^ 1 1 : 101 f; verbs, J 36 f:
Names of letters, 21 f. [1 70. ft, 266.
Nasals, f 3 : 49f, 53 f, 64. 2.
Nature, long or short by, 677 f.
Negative pron. and adv., ^f 63 : 1 37. /3;
subject. X obj., 647 ; as interrog. or
affirm., 647. N. ; redund., 664 f; w.
inf., 665 f.
Neuter, 74f; dec., 87 ; in adj., 13Of;
in syllepsis, 446 ; use of, in adj. and
pron., 449 f, 496 ; plur. w. sing, verb,
549 ; impers., 546. a..
New root, 254.
Nominative, 73, 84, 339 f; for voc.,
81, 343. 3; in appos. w. sent., 334;
as subject, 339 f, 342, 543 ; by attr.,
551, 614 ; independ., 343 ; in ana-
col., 344 ; of rel., attr., 526. ft.
Noun, declens., IT 7f; 92 f; anoma-
lous, defective, &c., 122f; deriv.,
3O5f; compos., 324, 326.
Nude, 22-1 f, 237 f; inflection, 84, 175,
208 ; adjunct, 329.
Number, 77, 83, 85; signs of, 83 f,
172; in verb, 164, 170f; use and
interchange of, 335 f.
Numerals, ^ 21, f 25: 137f; how
combined, 14O ; letters as, IT 1 : 11.
Obelisk, 16. 4.
Object, 338 f; indir. in dat., 339, 397 f;
dir. in ace., 339, 422 f.
Objective affixes, 1f30f: 195, 209 f,
voice, I74f; cases, 338 f gen., 392
dat. 397.
ENGLISH INDEX.
Oblique cases, 78. ft ; as adv., 320.
Odes, choral, 700. 2.
Old root, 254.
Onomatopes, palatals in -, 273. 1.
Open vowels, 24 f; affixes, 82. t.
Pastoral caesura, 699. 5.
Patrials, derivation, 309, 315. a, e.
Patronymics, derivation, 310.
Paulo -post-future, 582.
Pentameter, 698. 3, 705.
Optative, 169, 177, 587 f; X ind., ! Penthemim, 699. 4, 704. 2. [726
587, 593; fut. 587. 2; X subj., j Penult, in pronunc., 18. 5 ; in accent.,
588f; follows sec. tenses, 592; w.iPerfect, 167f, 179, 186, 233f; com-
v, for pres. or fut. ind., 595 ; expr.
wish, 597 f ; purpose, 601 f ; for subj.,
6O2; in condit. sent., 603 f; expr.
possibility, command, &c., \v. a,
604 ; in rel. sent., 606 ; in indir.
quot., 608 f.
Oratio recta X obliqua, 607 f.
[5.
Ordinals, IT 25 : 137 f ; w. ***** 511.
Orthography and Orthoepy, \ 1 f : 10 f;
hist, of, 2 If.
Orthotone, 733.
Oxytone, 725.
Paeon, 697 ; -ic verse, 720.
Palatals, ^ S changes of, 51 f; in
Dec. m., ^ 11 : 101 ; verbs, ] 38.
Paragogic consonants, 66 ; /, 1 50. N.
Parisyllabic, 82. N.
Paroemiac verse, 7O8. 2.
Paroxytone, 725.
Parsing, forms of, f 65 f.
monly wants subj., opt, and imp.,
169. 'ft ; as pres., 233 ; pt. in dial.,
253; X aor., 577 f; both past and
present, 579 ; for fut, 584.
Periphrasis, 329 ; in synt. of gen.,
385, 453. ; ace., 425 ; art., 476f;
verb, 637.
Perispome, 725 ; verbs, 216. .
Person, 143; signs of, 14:3, 171 ; in
verbs, 164, 17Of; change of, 500.
Personal pronouns, 1T 23: 141f; w.
yi, 328 ; use, stronger and weaker
forms, 5O2f ; implied in affixes of
verb, .545.
Phaloecian verse, 706. 4.
Pherecratic verse, 706. 2.
Pindar, dialect of, 3 ; metre of, 700. a
Pleonasm, 329 ; in synt. of gen., 395 ,
adj., 458 ; compt. and sup., 46Of ;
[487.! art, 468.6; pron., 499; verb, 552;
Parts of sentences as joined with art,| inf., 624 ; prep., 65-2 ; particle, 664 f.
Participle, 1 69, 176; declens., t 22 : Pluperfect, 167f, 179, 186, 233 f; in
128f ; synt., 614f, 630f; as adj., ! to. > t,, 179, 203. N. ; as aor., 233 ;
444f; expr. purpose, 583. a, 635, X aor., 577f; X impf., as conting.,
64O; impers., 615. 5; prelim., 631 ; 593.
circumst, 632 ; = adv. or adjunct, Plural, 77, 83, 85, 172 ; for sing., 336;
632 ; complem., w. verbs of sensation, ! w. dual, 337 ; w. sing., 450, 453,
chance, anticipation, &c., 633 f; XJ 497, 548 f.
inf., 634. /3 ; w. adj. and verb, &c., Polyschematist verse, 696. 3.
634. y, prospect, 635 ; defin., 636 ; .Position of art, 47 -J ; of particles, 672 f;
w. tifti, lx, u i *X 6 / u ' a ' t > o*%of*&h &c., in prosody, 677, 688 f.
637 ; abs., 638 f; w. us, &c., 640 ; Positive degree, 155 ; added to superl.
anacol., 641.
Particle, in compos., 325, 328 ; synt,
and doubled, 462 ; for compt and
superl., 466.
645 f; as affected by ellips., 6 6Of; Possessive pron., f 24: 151, 502 f;
pleonasm, 66'-1 f ; attr., 668 ; anacol., j gen., 390.
669 f; combinations, 671; position, Postpositive article, 447.
672 f ; accent, 75O. [N. j Precession of vowels, 2 f, and page v. ;
Partitive gen., 358 f; adjectives, SflgJ in dial., 44; in r. of verb, 259.
aBsive, 165f, 180, 553 f; w. gen., ' Prefixes of verbs, ^ 28: 173, 179,
331; w. dat, 417; interch. w.i 1 87 f; in dial., 194.
mid., 554 ; ho%v construed, 562 ; pre- Preposition, w. case, &c., as adv., 322:
fers dir. to indir. obj., pers. to thing,; synt, 648 f, 657 f; omitted and ins.,
563; COD verse of mid., 564 ; impers., | 650, 651. i; w. adj., 651. S; iu
564.3. I compos., 652 f; as adv., 657; w.
460
ENGLISH INDEX.
case, used subst., 658 ; in const,
praegn., 659 ; position, 672 ; accent,
730 f, 750. 2.
Prepositive vowel, 24 f; article, 147.
Present, I67f, 178; as generic tense,
566 ; historic, 567, 576 ; X aor.,
569 f; for perf., 579. ; for fut.,
584 ; X aor. w. ^jj, 598. 1.
Preteritive verbs, IT 58 f; 233 f.
Primary ictus, 18.5; tenses, 168, I73f;
X sec. in expr. conting., 589 f; fol-
lowed by subj., 592 ; affixes, ^ 31 :
Primitive, 303. [196.
Proclitics, 731.
Prohibition w. pf, 598.
Pronominal correlatives, IT 63 : 317.
Pronoun, IT 23 f: 141f ; subst., H 23 :
141 f; pers., 141 f; reflex., 144;
recipr., 145 ; indef., 146 ; adj., f 24
147f; def., I48f: art., rel., 148;
iter. 149 ; demonstr., 150; poss., 151 ;
indef., 152f. compos., 144f, 149f,
153, 328; art. as, 467 f, 490f;
tynt., 494 f; masc. for fern., 495;
w. subj. implied, 497 ; attr., 498 ;
repeated, 499 ; change of numb, and
pers., 495, 500; spec, observ. on, 501 f;
pers., poss., and reflex., stronger and
weaker forms, &c., 502 f; use of ev,
&C., 503 f; UUTOS, 508 f; demonstr.,
51 2 f ; as adv. of place, 514. N. ; for
pers. pron., 515; indef., 517 f; for
def., 518. y\ relative, 519 f; inter-
changed, 520 f; w. an tec. in same
clause, or omitted, 522 f; w. JW<,
523; attraction, 524 f; of words be-
longing to the antec. clause, 525 ; of
rel. by antec., 526 ; of antec. by rel.,
527 ; jv. ellipsis of subst. verb, 528 ;
rel. omitted, 528. 1 ; = demonstr.
and conn, particle, 530 f; w. another
conn., &c., 533 ; repetition of, avoid-
ed, 534 ; complem., 535 f; in con-
dens., 538; interrog., 536, 539 , aX-
Xot, 540 f.
Pronunciation, Eng. method, 17 f;
Mod. Gr., 1 9 ; Eraamian, 20 ; an-
cient, of vowels, 24. y.
I'roode, 700. 2.
1'roparoxytone, 725.
Proper diphthong, 25 ; name, w. art.,
471. 6; redupl., 283.
Properispome, 72$.
Proportionals, 137f; w. gen., 352.
Prosody, 67 5 f.
Protasis, 329, 603 f.
Punctuation, 15.
Pure nouns in Dec. ni., IT 14 : HOf
verbs, H 45 f: 170. 0.
Quadruple rhythm, 696.
Quantity, 676 f; marks of, 16. 4,
natural, 677 f; local, 677, 688f ; in
dec., 682 f; in conj., 682, 684; i
deriv., 685 ; in dial., 47, 686.
Quasi-caesura, 712. 1.
Quaternarius, 697. /3.
Quotation, direct X indirect, 607 f.
Radicals, 302.
Reciprocal pron., IT 23 : 145 ; use of
mid., 559.
Redundant nouns, 122; verbs, 257. 3
Reduplication, 179, 190f ; Att., 191.
2, 283; in comp. verbs, 192f; in
root, 283 f; proper, &c,, 283.
Reflexive pron., IT 23 : 144, 502 f; w.
compt. and superl., 464 ; of 3d pers.
for 1st and 2d, 506 f; for recipr.,
'507. 7 ; w. etvTos, 464, 511 ; sense
of mid., 165f, 557 f.
Regimen, 329.
Regular affixes of verb, IT 29 f : 215.
Relative pron. and adv., IT 24, IT 63 :
148, 153, 317; synt., 519f; sen-
tences, modes in, 606. See Pronoun.
Residual cases, 338 f; dat., 414f.
Resolution of diphthongs, 46.
Rhythm, 694 f; kinds of, 696; caesura
of, 699. 1.
Rising Ionic, 697 ; verse, 696. 3, 720.
Romaic language, 8.
Roman letters corresp. w. Gr., IT 1 : 12.
Root of noun, how obtained, 79 ; of
verb, 170. a, ; union with affixes,
216f; old, middle, new, 254 ; tenses
arranged in respect to, 255 f; chunyet
of, in verb, IT 61 : 254 f; euphon.,
259 f; emphat., 265 f; anom., 301 ;
primary, 302.
Rough breathing, 13; w. init. and v,
fo. 1, 2; mutes, IT 3 ; > smooth,
Sampi, IT 1 : 11, 21 f. [62, 69, 263.
Sapphic verse, 698, 706. 4.
Scanning, 701. 1 ; continuous, 692.
Second tenses, 178, 180, 186, 236,
255, 257 ; more inclined to in trans
257.0; X first, 199. II.
ENGLISH INDEX.
40 J
Secondary ictus, 18. 5; tenses, IT 26
168, 173f ; X prim, in expr. con-
ting., 589 f; followed by opt., 592;
expr. wish, 597 f; affixes, IT 31
Semivowels, ^ 3 : 63. [196.
Senarius, 697. 0, 712.
Sentence, kinds of, 329 ; words in ap-
pos. w., 334.
Short vow. and syll., IT 3 : 24 f, 29,
676, 679 f; > long, in dec., 92,
llOf; in compar., 156: in verb, 183,
218f, 224, 266 f; in compos., 326. R.
Sign, see Tense-sign. [der. of, 304 f.
Simple vowels, IT 3 : 24 ; word, 303 f;
Singular, 77 ; for plur., 335 ; w. plur.,
450, 453, 497, 548 f.
Smooth or soft breathing, 13 ; JEol.
and Ep. for rough, 13., 4 ; mutes, ^ 3 ;
> rough, 52, 65.
Sounds, abrupt and protracted, 17. N.
Special application, sign of, 332. 3, 640.
Spondee, 697 ; -aic verse, 704. 1.
Stanza, 694, 700.
Strophe, 694, 700.
Subject, a- sign of, 84 ; of finite verb,
342 ; of inf., 620.
Subjective affixes, V 29 f : 195, 209 f;
voice, 174f; cases, 338 f; sense of
mid., 560.
Subjunctive vowel, 25 f; mode, 169,
177, 587f; X ind., 587, 593; X
opt., 588 f; follows prim, tenses, 592 ;
for ind., 595; for imp., 597 f; expr.
purpose, 601 f; for opt., 602; in
condit. sent., 603 f; in rel. sent., 606;
in complem. sent., 611. 3 ; in quot.,
608 f.
Substantive, 73; synt., 331 f; agree-
ment, 331f; pron., IT 23: Ulf;
synt., 494 f; verb, omitted, 547, 639.
2 ; w. gen., 364 f, 384 ; w. dat., 408 ;
omitted in condens., 528 f, 538 ; num.,
IT 25 : 139, 308. e; clause, 329.
Superlative, 155f, 316 ; w. gen., 362f,
461 ; w. dat., 419 ; w. pos., doubled,
w. iv ro7s, w. tT; } neg., 462 ; w. re-
flex., 464 ; abs. 465 ; attr., 525. a.
Syllabic augment, 187.
Syllable, affixed to r., 287 f; quant, of,
677. N.
Syllepsis, 329 ; in synt. of adj., 446 ;
pron., 496. c; verb, 544.
Syncope, in liquids of Dec. m., 106f;
in fut., 200. 2 ; in r. ofcverb, 261.
Synecdoche, 438. , 563.
Synecphonesis, or Synizesis, 31, 701. 2.
Synesis, 329 ; in synt. of appos., 332
4 ; adj., 453f ; pron,, 497 ; verb
54 8 f.
Syntax, IT 64 : 329 f; variety in Greek,
330 ; figures of, 329. N. ; of subst.,
331 f; of adj., 444 f of art, 467 f;
of pron., 494 f; of verb, 543 f; of
particle, 64 of.
System in vers., 694, 700.
Temporal numbers, ^ 25 137f ; aug
ment, 187f.
Tenses, IT 26 : 164, 167f; formation,
IT 28 ; hist of, 173f; signs of, IT 31 :
178, 186, 198f, 245 : first X second,
178, 180, 186, 199, 255 f; how asso-
ciated, 215. 3; arranged in respect
to root, 255f; use, 565f; chronic X
achron., 565 ; generic X spec., 566,
576. 4, 580; interchange, 567, 576,
584 f; def. X indef., 569 f; indef.
X complete, 577 f; fut., 581 f; prim.
X sec. as conting., 589 f.
Tense-signs, IT 31 : 178, 186, 198 f;
changes of, 56, 199f ; in dial., 245
Tetrameter, 698.
Tetraptote, 127. 0.
Tetrastich, 700.
Theme, of noun, 79 ; of adj., 128 ; of
verb, 1 70. . [690. N.
Thesis, 695 ; vowel lengthened in,
Third future, see Future Perfect.
Time of verb, 168 ; of vow. and syll.,
Tmesis, 328. N. r 652 f. [676f.
Tone, special, 722f.
Triad in vers., 700. 2.
Triemim, 699. 4.
Trimeter, 698; iambic, 712.
Triple rhythm, 696.
Tripody/697. 0.
Triptote, 1 27. 0.
Tristich, 700.
Trochee, 697; -aic rhythm, 696;
verse, 697. 0, 716 f.
Ultima, in accent., 723 f, 726.
Union of syllables, 30 f, 45f.
Vau, IT 1 ; 11, 21 f. See Digamma.
Verb, conj. of, IT 26 f: 164f ; depo-
nent, 166; hist., 171f; prefixes,
IT 28: 187f; affixes, 1T28f: 195f;
in -fu X in -*., 208. 2 ; in -fti, IT 48 f
ENGLISH INDEX. LIST OF AUTHORS, &C.
224 f, 251 ; preteritive, IT 58 f: 233 f;
root, 254f ; dial., IT 32 194, 181 f,
241 f ; translated, IT 33 ; deriv., 318 f;
compos., 323 f, 327 ; synt., agreement,
543 f; w. subject omitted, 545 f;
impers., 546 ; pi. w. sing, nom., 548 ;
sing. w. pi. nom., 549 ; attracted,
550 ; taking nom, by attr., 551, 614 ;
quantity in, 682, 684 ; accent in, 734,
736 f.
Verbal nouns, 305 f; adj., 314 ; adv.,
321 ; compound, 323 f; w. gen., 381,
392 f; w. dat. 407. * ; w. ace., 424 ;
in -riot, impers., 642.
Verse, 694 f; kinds, 696, 698 ; caesura,
699 ; systems, &c., 700 - scanning,
701; dact., 703f; anap., 707f;
iamb., 711 f; troch., 716f; various,
Vision, 567. [7 2 Of.
Vocal elements, IT 3.
Vocative, 78, 84, 339 ; same w. nom.,
80 f; synt., 442 f; accent, 742 f.
Voices, hist, of, 174f, 180 ; vse, 553 f;
mid. and pass, interch., 554 ; act.,
used intrans. or reflex., 555 ; as pass,
556 ; mid., having dir. reflex, sense,
557 ; indir., 558 ; recipr. and caus.,
559; subjective, 560 ; pass., 562 f;
impers., 564. 3.
Volitive sentence, 329 ; mode, IT 27 :
169, 177, 612f.
Vowels, IT 3 : 24 f ; < old consonants,
22 ; simple, compound, long, short,
doubtful, open, close, prepos., subjunct.,
24 f; precession, 28 f, and page v. ;
kindred, 28; union of, 30 f; con.
traction, 31 f; crasis, 38 f; apostro-
phe, 41 f; dial, van, 43 f; connect,
of dec., IT 6 : 82. 3, 86, 92 f; changes
in Dec. in., 11 Of; connect, of conj.,
IT 31 : 175, 178 f, 202f ; changes in
perf., 236; in r. of verb, 259 f;
lengthened, 266 f; added, 287 f;
union, in compos., 324 ; quantity,
67 6 f.
Writing, mode of, 23.
Zeugma, 329; hi synt. of adj., 446;
pron., 496. c ; verb, 544.
LIST OF AUTHORS AND WORKS CITED,
AND OF ABBREVIATIONS.
[The --works of Xenophon are commonly cited without naming the author, and tho
Anabasis without even naming the work (by simply giving the book, chapter, and sec-
tion ; thus, iv. 3. 17). The Iliad and Odyssey are commonly cited by giving simply the
letter denoting the book, with the verse, using a capital letter if the citation is in;u!e
from the Iliad, and a small letter if it is made from the Odyssev (thus, A. 232, for 11. i
232 : f>. 305, for Od. ii. 305). In Homer, the references arc made to the verses of Wolf;
in Hesiod, to those of Gaisfurd ; in Pindar, to those of Heyne ; in the Dramatic Poets, to
those of Dindorf; and in the Pastoral Poets, to those of tfiessling. hi Herodotus. Thu-
cydides, Xenophnn, Diodorus Siculus, Dio Cassius, and Pau.sanias, they are madi; to
boofts and chapters : and also, in Xenophon, to the sections of the usual more minute
division as given by Schneider, Dindorf, dec. In Demosthenes, they are made to the pages
and lines of Reiske ; in the other Orators and in Plato (including Tinurus Locrus) to the
pases and lines or division letters of Stephens; in Strabo to the pages, and in Athenajus
to the paeres and division-letters, of Casaubon. The fragments of Alcaeus, Sappho. Co-
rinna. Kpicharmus, and Sophron are numbered according to Ahrens, with the numbers
of other well known editions (as those of Alcaeus by Matlhin. and of Sappho by \IMIU)
usually following in parentheses; those of Anacreon, according to Bergk ; those of Calli-
machus, according to Blomfield ; those of Hesiod, Simonides, and Tyrtaeus, according to
Gaisford; those of Hipponax, according to Welcker : those of Pindar, according to
Bflckh ; those of the Dramatic Poets, according to Dindorf; dec. Cases of abbreviation
LIST OF AUTHORS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
463
not given below, and those in which the same abbreviation or initial stands for different
words, are either explained by the immediate connection, or (as indeed many of those
below) can scarce fail of being obvious in themselves.]
Accusative (Ace., A.).
Active (Act.).
Adjective (Adj.).
-Solic (.Eol.. M.}.
^Eschines (JEschin.).
yEschylus (yEsch.): Aga-
memnon (Ag.), Choe-
phori (Cho.), Eumenides
(Eum.), Persae (Pers.),
Prometheus (Prom., Pr.),
Septem contra Thebas
(Sept., Theb., Th.), Sup-
plices (Suppl., Sup.).
Alcitus (Ale.).
Alcinan (Alcm.).
Alexandrine (Alex.).
Anacreon (Anacr.).
Andocides (Andoc.).
Anthologia (Anth.).
Antimachus (Antim.).
Antipater Thessalonicensis
(Antip. Th.).
Antiphilus (Antiphil.).
Aorist (Aor., A.).
Apollonius Dyscolus de
Pronomine. [Rh.).
Apollonius Rhodius (Ap.
Apud (ap.) = quoted in.
Aratus (Arat.).
Archilochus (Archil.).
Aretseus.
Aristophanes (Ar.) : Ach-
arnenses (Ach.), Aves
( Av.), Ecclesiazusae (Ec-
cl), Equites (Eq.), L;
sistrata (Lys.), Nubes
(Nub.), Pax, Plutus
(Plut.,Pl.),Ranae(Ran.),
Thesm ophoriazusse (The-
sm.), Vespae (Vesp.).
Aristoteles (Aristl.).
Article (Art.).
Athenaeus (Ath.).
Attic (Att., A.).
Augment (Augm.).
Bion.
BoBotic (Bo3ot., B.).
Caesar (Caes.).
Callimachus (CalL) : Epi-
grammata (Ep.), Hym-
(Tro.). Fragmenta
ni in Delum (Del.), Dia-
(Fr.), Archelai (Arch.),
nam (Di.), Jovem(Jov.),
IVleos (Pel.), Polyi'di
LavacrumPalladis( Lav. ).
(Pol.), Incerta ;Inc.).
Cicero de Oratore (Cic. de
Exempli gratia (E. g.)
Or.).
= for example.
Collateral (Collat,).
Feminine ^Fem., P.).
Common (Comm.), com-
Fragment (Fr.).
monly (comm.).
Future (Fut., F.).
Comparative (Compt.,
Gaisford's Edition(Gaisf.).
Comp.).
Genitive (Gen., G.).
Confer (Cf.) = compare,
Gottling's Edition(Guttl.).
consult.
Hellenistic (Hellenist.,
Contracted, -ion (Contr.).
Hel.).
Dative (Dat., D.).
Herodes Atticus (Herod.
Declension (Declens.,
Att.).
Dec.).
Herodotus (Hdt., Herod.).
Demosthenes (Dem.).
Hesiodus (Hes.) : Opera
Derivative, -ion (Deriv.,
et Dies (Op.), Scutum
Der.).
Herculis (Sc.), Theogo-
Dialects (Dial.).
nia (Theog., Th.).
Dinarchus (Dinarch.).
Hesychius (Hesych.).
Dindorf 's Edition (Dind.).
Hippocrates (Hipp.).
Dio Cassius (Dio Cass.).
Hipponax (Hippon.).
Diodorus Siculus (Diod.).
Homerus (Horn.) : Ba-
Diogenes Laertius (Diog.
trachomyomachia (Ba-
Laert.).
tr.), Hymni (Hym., H.),
Doric (Dor., D.).
in Apollinem (Ap.),Bac-
Dual (Du., D.).
chum (Bac.), Cererem
Enclitic (Enclit., Encl.).
(Cer.), Mercurium
English (Eng.).
(Merc.), Venerem ( Ven.),
Epic (Ep., E.).
Ilias(ll.),0dyssea(0d.).
Epichannus (Epicharm.,
Horatius (Hor.).
Epich.).
Ibidem (Ib.) = in the
Euripides (Eur.) : Alces-
same work or part of a
tis (Ale.), Andromache
tvork.
( Andr.), Bacchse (Bacch.,
Id est (i. e.) = that is.
Bac.), Cyclops (Cycl.),|Idem (Id.) = the same
Electra (El.), Hecuba
author.
(Hec.), Helena (Hei.;,
Imperative (Imperat.,
Heraclidae (HeracL),
Imp.).
Hercules Furens (Here.),
Imperfect (Impf.).
Hippolytus (Hipp.), Ion,
Indicative (Ind.).
Iphigenia in Aulide(Iph.
Infinitive (Infin., Inf.).
A.), Iphigenia in Tauris
Inscriptiones (Inscr., In-
(Iph. T.), Medea (Med.),
sc.), Boeotica (Boeot.),
Orestes (Or.), Phosnissae
Cretica (Cret.), Cumaea
(Phcen., Ph.), Rhesus
(Cum.), Heracleensia
(Rhes., Rh.), Snpplices
(Heracl.), Potidaica (Po-
(Suppl., Sup.), Troades
tid.).
464
LIST OF AUTHORS AND ABBREVIATIONS.
Intransitive (Intrans.).
Ionic (Ion., I.).
Isocrates (Isocr.).
Iterative (Iter., It.).
/ TO, X<* (. r. X.)
= -c.
Laconic (Lacon., Lac.).
Latin (Lat.).
Livius (Liv.).
Lobeck on Phrynichus
(Lob. ad Phryn.).
Lucianus ( Luc.) : de His-
toria Scribenda (de Hist.
Scrib.), Parasitua (Pa-
ras.).
Lycophron (Lye.).
Lycurgus (Lycurg.).
Lysias ( Lys.).
Masculine (Masc., M.).
Megarian (Meg.).
Middle (Mid., M.).
Mimnermus (Mimn.).
Neuter (Neut., N.).
Nominative (Nora., N.).
Optative (Opt.).
Orpheus (Orph.) : Argo-
nautica (Arg.), Hymni
(Hyin.), Lithica(Lith.).
Participle (Partic., Part.,
Pt>
Passive (Pass., P.).
Pausanias (Pausan.).
Perfect (Perf., Pf.).
Person (Pers., P.).
Philetas (Philet.).
Pindarus (Find.) : Isth-
mia (I.), Nemea (Nem.,
N.), Olympia (0.), Py-
thia 0>.).
Plato (PI.) : Alcibiades
(Ale.), Amatores (A-
mat.), Apologia (Apol.),
Axiochus (Ax.), Char-
mides (Charm.) Con-
vivium (Conv.), Craty-
lus (Oat.), Critias (Cri-
ti.), Crito, Definitiones
(Def.), Epinomis (E-
pin.), Euthydemus (Eu-
thyd.", Euthyphron (Eu-
thyphr.),Gorgias(Gorg.),
Hippias Major (Hipp.
Maj.), Hipparchus (Hip-
parch.), Ion, Laches
(Lach.), Leges (Leg.),
Lysis (Lys.), Menexenus
(Menex.), Meno, Par-
menides (Farm.), Phae-
do, Phaedrus (Phaedr.),
Philebus (Phil.), Politi-
cus (Polit, Pol.), Pro-
tagoras (Prot.), de Re-
publica (Rep.), Sophista
(Soph.), Theaetetus (The-
aet.), Theages (Theag.),
Timajus (Tim.).
Plato Comicus : Metoeci.
Plautus (Plaut.) : Tri-
nummus (Trinumm.).
Pluperfect (Plup.).
Plural (Plur., PI., P.).
Plutarchus (Plut.).
Poetic (Poet., P.).
Pollux (Poll.).
Positive (Pos.).
Pratinas (Pratin.).
Present (Pres., Pr.).
Primitive (Prim.).
Pronoun (Pron.).
Quintus Smyrnaeu \
(Quint.).
Reduplication (Redupl.,
Redpl.).
Root (r.).
Sappho (Sapph.).
Scholia (Schol.)
Scilicet (sc.) = under-
stand, namely.
Scripta Sacra (S. S.) :
Septuagint (LXX.),
Deuteronomy (Deut.),
Psalms (Psj, Matthew
(St.Matth., Mt), Mark
(Mk.), Luke (Lk.), John
(St. Jn.), Acts, Romans
(Rom.), Ephesians (Ep.
Ephes.), Revelations
(Rev.).
Simon ides (Simon.).
Singular (Sing., S.).
Sophocles (Soph.) : Ajax
(Aj.), Antigone (Ant.),
Electra (El.), (Edipua
Coloneus ((Ed. C.), CE-
dipus Tyrannus (Oid.
T.), Philoctetes (Phil.,
Ph.), Trachmia (Tr.).
Sophron (Sophr.).
Strabo (Strab.).
Subjunctive (Subj .).
Superlative (Superl.,
Sup.).
Syncope, -ated (Sync.).
Terentius (Ter.) : An-
dria (Andr.).
Theocritus (Theoc.) : Bu-
colica, Epigrammata
(Ep.).
Theognis (ITieog.).
Thucydides (Thuc., Th.).
Tibullus (Tibull.).
Timaeus Locrus (Tim,
Locr., Tim.).
Transitive (Trans.).
Tyrtanis (Tyrt.).
Varia lectio (v. /.) = va-
rious reading.
Vocative (Voc., V.).
Xenophanes (Xenophan.).
Xenophon (Xen.) : Age-
silaus (Ages., Ag.), A-
nabasis (Anab.), Cyro-
p3dia (Cyr.), de Re
Equestri (Eq.), Hiero
(Hier.), Historia Groeca
(H. Gr.), Lacedaemoni-
orum Respublica (Lac.),
Magister Equitum (Mag.
Eq.), Memorabilia So-
cratis (Mem.), (Econo-
micus (CEc.), de Re-
publica Atheniensium
(Rep. Ath., Ath. i, Sym-
posium (Symp.), Vecti-
galia (Vect.), Venatio
(Yen.).
THE KXT).
INDEX
OF
CITATIONS FROM XENOPHON'S ANABASIS
IN "A
GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, BY A. CROSBY, *a w
' Accomplished XENOPHON ! thy truth hath shown
A brother's glory sacred as thy own.
O rich in all the blended gifts that grace
Minerva's darling sons of Attic race !
The Sage's olive, the Historian's palm,
The Victor's laurel, all thy name embalm !
Thy simple diction, free from glaring art,
With sweet allurement steals upon the heart ;
Pure as the rill, Chat Nature's hand refines,
A cloudless mirror of thy soul it shines.
Thine was the praise, bright models to afford
To C.ESAR'S rival pen, and rival sword :
Blest, had Ambition not destroyed his claim
To the mild lustre of thy purer fame I "
CITATIONS FROM THE ANABASIS
[The following Index conforms to the Second (Stereotype) Edition of the Grammar
The numbers inclosed in parentheses denote the sections of the Anabasis which art
cited ; those following them, the sections 01 the Grammar in which the citations are
made.]
BOOK I.
CHAP. I. (1) 337, 355, 423, 444,
482, 543, 545, 654 ; (2) 331, 361,
389, 423, 434, 470.1, 471.6, 494,
521, 534, 551, 558, 568, 570, 633,
649. , 657. Y ; (3) 342, 392. 2, 405.
t, 423, 481, 482, 485. a, 490. 1, 494,
583. a, 608, 654, 673. a ; (4) 331,
403, 423, 461, 474, 486. 1 ; (5) 362.
ft 376. 8, 406, 447. , 476, 497. 1,
555. a, 571, 601. y, 620, 649. C, 649.
tf, 654; (6) 349, 390, 402, 423, 441,
444, 485. a, 525. a, 525. N., 562. a,
632, 640 ; (7) 362. a, 395. a, 423,
447. a, 473. N., 485. a, 490. R., 574.
, 620, 631, 636; (8) 350, 375. ft
405. t, 473. ft 494, 526, 562. a, 570,
617. 6, 626 ; (9) 409, 440, 444, 457.
y, 473. ft 486. 1, 488. 5, 502, 554. ft
633, 649. a ; (10) 395. a, 409, 421. ft
485. a, 561. 3, 606, 615. 2, 657. 1,
658, 667. 3 ; (11) 332. 1, 640, 649. t,
657. Y .
CHAP. II. (1) 447. y, 459, 488. 6,
522, 546. ft 554. ft 662 ; (2) 406,
606, 626. N., 646, 667. 3; (3)211.N.,
486. 1, 662. b ; (4) 399, 485. a, 662.
3, 662. a ; (5) 333. 6, 390, 416, 485.
, 522, 648; (6) 439. a, 439. ft 471.
6, 474, 632; (7) 331, 357, 408, 444,
471. 6, 471. 5, 472. a, 549. a, 555,
606, 659 a; (8) 331, 333. 6, 405. t,
471. 6, 547, 549. a, 551, 649. n ; (9;
425. 5, 444, 480. 2 ; (10) 331, 432 ;
(11) 404. >, 433, 450. 5, 481, 551, 571,
627. ft 634. y ; (12) 119.2, 332.1,
404. d, 447. ft 474 ; (13) 390, 399,
486. 2, 580 ; (14) 425. 5, 488. 6, 554.
/*; (15) 137. e , 408, 447. a, 447. y,
502 ; (17) 408, 449. ft 472. a, 546,
649. ; (18) 362. ft 554. ft 659. a;
(19) 403 ; (20) 440, 447. a, 471. 6,
485. a, 510. 2, 522, 652. a; (21) 394,
420. 1, 485. a, 608, 614. a, ft 620,
646, 652. y ; (22) 638, 649. ^ ; (23)
333. 6, 336, 390, 437, 456, 549. a;
(24) 580, 657. y : (25) 456, 457. a,
488. 5, 659. a ; (26) 351, 392. 1, 399,
561. 1; (27)561. 1.
CHAP. III. (1) 373. 1, 476, 505.
2, 564. 2, 573, 616. b ; (2) 237, 439.
a, 441, 598. 1, 610, 657. y, 665 ; (3)
406, 443, 447. y, 541, 598. 1 ; (4)
436, 471. 6, 486. 1, 526. a, 603. ^;
(5) 408, 606, 647, 664. a ; (6) 357. ft
405. T?, 409, 434. N., 606, 614. t, 616.
6, 640, 667. 2 ; (7) 510. 1, 651. y,
CITATIONS FROM
654 ; (8) 392. 1, 399, 640 ; (9) 362.
, 404. 8, 447. y, 477. a, 502, 636,
671. 4 ; (10) 583, 602. 2, 633, 646. 1 ;
(11) 376. (J, 504, 583,642 ; (12) 347,
547, 560. 1 ; (13) 568 ; (14) 436,
440, 447. ft 479, 525. N., 525. ft 558,
561. 3, 568, 602.1, 633, 637, 647;
(15) 431, 525.a, 526, 547, 601. a,
619. ft 640 ; (16) 411, 445, 479, 606,
609, 640 ; (17) 194. ., 392. 1, 418.
R., 604. a, 604. ft 606, 633 ; (18)
419. 5, 532 ; (19) 574 ; (20) 500,574,
603. ft 619. ft y ; (21) 140. y, 378,
382, 402, 408, 449. ft 470. N., 526. a,
568, 610, 646. 1.
CHAP. IV. (1) 486. , 547 ; (2)
140; (3) 561.2; (4) 394, 418.2,
472, 498, 549. a, 550 ; (5) 361, 372.
y , 394, 601. y, 633; (6) 487. 4; (7)
605. 2 ; (8) 426. <J, 485. a, 544, 579.
L, 606, 628," 674. 3; (9) 387, 434 ;
(J I) 418. 3; (12) 406, 639. 1 ; (13)
347, 447. y, 488. 5, 535, 568, 606 ;
(14) 405. 17, 535, 603. /9; (15) 357.
N., 404. , 476, 543, 603. ft 620 ; (16)
407. e, 502, 574, 647 ; (17) 351 ; (18)
405. 17.
CHAP. V. (1) 362. ft 447. ft ; (2)
351, 400, 486. 2, 546. ft 605. 2, 606 ;
(3) 546. ft 571 ; (4) 387, 421. ft 562.
a ; (5) 362. y, 457. , 472. a, 549. a ;
(6) 428, 446. ft; (7) 364.1, 366,
427. 8, 523 ; (8) 418. 2, 512. ft 604.
ft 662 ; (9) 275. t, 419. 4, 449. ft
4^8. 7, 525. ft-, (10) 332.3, 355, 357.
a, 368, 416, 447. y, 561. 3, 649. ft-,
(1 1 ) 406, 485. a ; (12) 347, 416, 472.
a, 485. a, 508, 579. t, 657. y ; (13)
237, 406; (14) 357. ft 551, 608;
(15) 362. , 476 ; (16) 351, 442, 582.
CHAP. VI. (1) 362. d, 448,639.2,
663. 6 ; (2; 347, 402, 549. a, 603. #,
620, 665, 673. ft ; (3) 403, 488. 6,
;>'jr>. , 608 ; (4) 504 ; (5) 332. 3,
363. y ; (b) 347, 473. a, 485. a, 510.
1,555,688; (7) 407. , 510. 1..525.
ft 624. ft 661. 1 ; (8) 405. t, 478. ft
831. a, 627. a, 646, 661. 1 ; (9) 432.
473. ft 558, 577, 601. a, 623. N.'
(10) 369. a, 485. ft 571, 646. 1 ; (11)
362. <J, 542. (J.
CHAP. VII. (1) 392. 1, 456 ; (2)
399, 535 ;. (3) 191. 3, 357. ft 374. ft
526, 602. 3, 604. a ; (4) 404. y, 407.
*, 412, 477. a, 650. a ; (5) 234. ft
359. a; (6) 530; (7) 603. N. ; (8)
'362. ft; (9) 394, 426. (J, 503, 543,
661. a; (10) 137. a, 480. 2; (11)
457. e, 509, 637; (12) 351 ; (13) 362.
ft 636, 649. d ; (14) 333. 6, 420. 1 ;
(15) 394, 472 ; (16) 544 ; (17) 549.
a ; (18) 378, 402, 473. ft 603. ft ;
(19) 620, 646 ; (20) 425.5, 466.
CHAP. VIII. (1) 418. 2, 472. a,
521, 546, 583, 654, 662, (3)482
(4) 336, 447. y ; (6) 416, 418 2, 472.
a, 502, 529. ft ; (7) 551 ; (8) 359. a,
419. 4, 481, 662 ; (9) 368, 470. N.,
472. a, 544. a; (10) 640; (11) 418.
2; (12) 402,417,509, 611. 2; (13)
380, 407. i, 441, 4'72. a ; (14) 509 ,
(15) 474. N., 628 ; (16) 375. a, 479,
401 . R., 535, 568 ; (17) 405. t, 543 ;
( 18)263.6, 362. ft 402,418.2, 447. y ;
(20) 357. ft 546, 549. a ; (21) 425.4,
568; (22) 391. y ; (23) 391. y, 405.
t, 662; (23-27)576; (24) 511. 3,
557 ; (26) 479, 510. 1, 627. a; (27)
344. 1, 362. y, 416, 559. c ; (29) 558,
561.1.
CHAP. IX. (1) 375. ft 562. a ; (1
31) 571 ; (2) 437 ; (3) 392. 1 ; (5) 392.
1, 419. 5 ; (6) 403, 490. R., 557 ; (7)
153. y, 226. 3, 432, 517, 546. ft 558;
(9) 560. 1 ; (10) 226. 3 ; (11) 435 ;
(13) 363. y, 408, 447. a, 546. ft 604.
a, 664. y ; (14) 408, 416, 520, 526 ;
(15) :W9, 497. 1 ; (16) 497. 1, 605. 2 ,
(17) 405. / ; (18) 605. 2 ; (19) 406,
522, 594, 605. 2, 633 ; (20) 537. 3,
551, 562. a ; (21) 153. y, 537. 3. 674.
3; (23) 462. y; (23) 409, 505.2.
THE ANABASIS.
604. a ; (24) 418. 3 ; (25) 378 ; (26)
406 ; (27) 504^ 620 ; (28) 535, 562.
a, 605. 2 ; (29) 406, 504, 513, 649. a,
652. y ; (30) 488. 6.
CHAP. X. (1) 486. y, 544, 563 ;
f2) 497, 544; (3) 510.2; (4) 347,
490. R., 497 ; (5) 161. 2, 497, 608
(6) 447. a, 556 ; (10) 472. , 478. a,
478. ft 508, 521 . ft 583. a ; (11) 479 ;
(12) 357. a, 562. a, 670 ; (13) 357. ft
542. a; (13-16) 576; (14) 573. a,
(15) 427. 8 ; (16) 608 ; (17) 379
BOOK II.
CHAP. I. (1) 475, 561. 3; (2)
606, 614. n ; (3) 385. y, 610, 649. ft ;
(4) 567. y, 579. t, 599. N., 603. <J,
646.1; (5) 509; (6) 490.1; (7).
375. ft 477. , 670 ; (9) 516 ; (10)
403, 432, 546. y, 574. N. ; (11) 373.
I, 394; (12) 503,543,633; (13)237,
400, 432 ; (14) 404. e , 663. 6 ; (15)
542. ^ 544. a; (16) 450. 8, 516;
(17) 570. 2, 583. a ; (19) 639. 2 ;
(21 ) 640 ; V 22, 450. y ; (23) 608.
CKAP. 1. (1) 376. t, 619. a ; (2)
504; (3)394,638; (4) 517; (5)441,
490. R. ; (6) 140 ; (10) 536, 555 ;
(11) 379. y, 408; (12) 357. ft 431,
606, 643 ; (13) 428, 485. a ; (15)
530, 549. a, 61 0,661. 2; (16) 485. a,
509, 546; (17) 363. y, 457. a, 517,
628 ; (18) 526. a ; (21) 421. ft 472.
a.
CHAP. III. (1) 656. N. ; (2) 481 ;
(4) 610; (5) 546; (6) 445, 546. ft
610; (7)509; (9)404.y; (10)637;
(11) 408, 594, 605. 2, 666. e ; (12)
439. a ; (13) 629. 1 ; (14) 355 ; (15)
349, 437, 485. |S; (17) 389; (18)
3P9; (19) 514, 561. 3, 633; (20) 407.
x, 568. R. ; (21) 571. 1, 574; (22)
428, 621. ft; (23) 405. t, 428, 516,
603. a; (25) 404. e ; (26) 440, 546.
ft. ; (27) 447. ft ; (28) 472.
CHAP. IV. (2) 407. e ; (3) 412,
606 ; (4) 485. a, 516, 602. 1 ; (5)
582, 636 ; (6) 237, 407. x ; (7) 499,
(9) 367, 399 ; (10) 511. 3; (12) 387,
416, 485. ft; (13) 408, 439. ft; (14)
357. a, 394 ; (15) 513. a, 517 ; (16)
403,510. 1, 609 ; (19) 547, 620; (20)
638 ; (21) 517 ; (24) 459, 525. a,
608, 637, 639. 1 ; (25) 640 ; (26)
542. y ; (28) 394.
CHAP. V. (2) 583. a, 614. 8 ; (3J
428 ; (4) 424. 2, 614 8 ; (5) 554. ft ;
(7) 405. 17, 535, 604. y ; (9) 357. a,
450. y ; (10) 357. ft 541. a ; (11)
419.5; (12) 531, 669; (13) 403,
407. i, 633 ; (14) 403 ; (15) 406,
516, 537. 3, 603. a, 620 ; (17) 620 ;
(18) 364. 1, 523 ; (19) 405. t ; (21)
531 ; (22) 416 ; (23) 437 ; (26) 404.
y; (27)406,633; (28)405. t; (32)
419. 4, 476 ; (35) 496. c ; (36) 602.
1 ; (37) 477. a ; (38) 390, 436 ; (39)
343. 3, 472. , 520, 570. 1, 664. ft;
(41) 513; (42)402, 544. ft
CHAP. VI. (1) 375. ft 437, 563 ;
(1 - 30) 571 ; (4) 404. 8, 416, 421. ft
535; (6) 347, 531, 628, 638; (8)
643 ; (9) 418. 3, 523, 617. 5, 620,
627. a ; (12) 606 ; (13) 416, 419. 5,
562. ; (15) 480. 2 ; (18) 449. a ;
(19) 405. 17, 407. t ; (20) 387 ; (22)
400, 449. a, 620; (23) 153. y, 551,
606 ; (24) 618. 1 ; (26) 406, 620, 650.
a ; (28) 399 ; (29) 368, 437, 439. a ;
561.3; (30)499.
BOOK III.
CHAP. I. (2) 475, 604. ft; (3)
32. y, 375. , 480. y, 544. a, 555. a,
660; (4) 403; (5) 627.,*; (6)107
., 402, 431, 527 ; (7) 402, 513, 521 *
CITATIONS FROM
(8) 527; (9) 619. H.J (10) 608; (11)
359. a, 551. N. ; (12)602. 2; (13)
666. ; (14) 504, 539. 2, 640 ; (15)
535 ; (17) 534, 615. 2 ; (18) 601. ft
643; (19) 356; (20) 408; (21) 505..
2, 537. 3, 547; (22) 428; (23) 336,
391. y, 485. a; (24) 485. a, 598; (25)
603. a; (27) 432, 442, 465; (29)
376. , 666. a ; (30) 400 ; (31) 437,
472. a, 563; (32) 135, 606; (33)
394 ; (34) 443 ; (35) 407. *, 554. ft
603. ^, 643; (36) 399; (37) 351,
418. 3; (38) 554. ft 567. ft 628;
(40) 378 ; (41) 505. 2 ; (42) 418. 3,
662 ; (43) 409 ; (45) 532 ; (46) 598 ;
(47) 616. a.
CHAP. II. (1) 627. |; (2) 448,
476. N., 520, 657. ft-, (4) 389, 400,
443, 509, 520, 661. a ; (5) 389, 534,
646. 1 ; (6) 513, 600 ; (7) 350. R.,
374. ft ; (9) 477. a, 638 ; (10) 639.
2; (11) 405. t, 430, 617. 6, 669;
(13) 479; (14) 352, 504; (15) 617.
6; (16) 375. ft; (17) 350. R., 598.
I ; (18) 487. 4; (19) 418. 3, 424. 2,
620; (20) 428; (21) 374. a; (22)
407. x, 450. y ; (24) 604. a, 640 ;
(25) 634. ft 661. 2, 667. 2; (27)
403, 525. N. ; (28) 362. t, 525. v. ;
(29) 409 ; (31) 627. a ; (32) 661. 2 ;
(35) 603. y ; (37) 361. y, 598, 623.
w. ; (38) 375. ft 573. a ; (39) 376. ,
390, 634. ft
CHAP. III. (2) 536, 603. y; (3
518. y, 570. 1 ; (4)608 ; (5) 571, 637 '
(7) 368, 463. 3, 662 ; (8) 642 ; (9)
629. 1; (10) 439. /?; (11) 378,472.
a; (12) 500; (16) 357. ft 439. ft
465; (17) 416; (19j 483; (20) 332.
2, 404. <J.
CHAP. IV. (1) 540, 602. 1, 602
2; (2) 404. y, 658- (4) 546} (5)
407. i, 412 ; (6) 362. t, 439. a ; (7)
478. ft; (10)485.,*; (12)556; (13)
522. 1; (15) 605. 2; (16) 490. R.;
(17) 403, 447. p; (19) 547; (20)
407. x, (21) 137. t; (23) 418. 2,
572; (24) 336; (25) 447. y, 628;
(25-27) 576; (26) 350, 574. w.;
(28) 508; (30) 418. 2; (31) 389;
(34) 409, 602. 1 ; (35) 372. y, 403,
412; (36) 402, 546; (37) 420. 1,
447. ft 457. a ; (38) 576 ; (39) 546.
ft 573. a ; (40) 518. y ; (41) 509,
603. /*; (45) 453. a; (46) 447. ft;
(47) 449. ft ; (49) 633.
CHAP. V. (1) 476. v. ; (2) 476 ;
(3) 476. N. ; (5) 510. 1 ; (8) 137. t,
583 ; (9) 259. a, 457. ft 496. c ; (10)
470. N.; (11) 347, 665; (13) 610,
615. 1; (14) 421. ft 425. 4; (15)
409, 611. 2; (16) 364. 2, 377. 1;
(17) 525 ; (18) 237, 363. a, 425. 4.
BOOK IV.
CHAP. I. (1) 526; (3) 605. 3;
^5) 628; (6) 350; (8) 472. a; (9)
377. 1 ; (10) 517 ; (11) 488. 5 ; (13)
638 ; (14) 441, 490. R., 605. 2, 663.
6; (16) 232. a; (17)393. y; (19)
237, 500; (20) 552, 570. 2; (21)
432. 3 ; (22) 496. b, 510. 1 ; (23)
573. a; (24) 431; (26) 366; (27)
600, 619. y ; (28) 374. ft.
CHAP. II. (2) 437; (3) 399, 450.
a; (4)416,657. y; (7)488.5; (9)
362. t, ; (10) 447. ft 488. 5, 604. a ,
(11) 654. 3 ; (12) 544. a ; (13) 440 ;
(15) 407. x ; (16) 447. y ; (17) 237
447. a, 488. 5, 649. a ; (18) 405. C ,
(19)530,628 ; (23) 449. (t; (26) 403.
CHAP. III. (1) 472, 560. 2; (2)
521 ; (3) 394 ; (6) 671. 6 ; (9) 449.
ft 525. a ; (10) 337. a ; (11)518. a,
(12) 220 ; (13) 392. 2, 402, 405. 17 ;
(21) 662; (26) 440; (28) 363. a,
394 ; (32) 546 ; (33) 483.
THE ANABASIS*.
VI 1
CHAP. IV. (2) 119. 2, 336, 409,
622; (4) 475; (6) 627. o; (7) 336,
472. a; (13) 447. b; (14) 457. ft,
478. ft, 650. a ; (15) 647 ; (17) 535,
608 ; (18) 392. 1, 637; (20) 392. 1 ;
(22)601. y; (24) 461. 3.
CHAP. V. (4) 405. 17, 449. a ; (5)
424. 2 ; (7) 608 ; (8) 606 ; (10) 529.
ft, 608 ; (11) 427. 8 ; (12) 266, 563 ;
(15) 266 ; (16) 457. a, 624. y, 632 ;
(17) 526. a, 559. c, 560. 1 ; (19) 657.
N. ; (22) 366 ; (24) 439. a; (25) 409,
549. a ; (27) 407. i ; (29) 425. 4 ;
(33) 404. y ; (34) 404. <J ; (35) 466 ;
(36) 421. p, 441.
CHAP. VI. (2) 411, 656; (9)
475 ; (11) 460. a, 671. 2; (12) 403,
460. a; (14) 494; (15) 409; (24)
488. 5; (26) 488. 5; (27) 357. .
CHAP. VII. (1 ) 549. a, 637 ; (2)
408; (3)579. C; (4) 476; (5) 541.
b; (7) 595. o; (9) 237; (10-14)
576 ; (11) 425. 4, 510. 1 ; (12) 368,
373. 1, 505. 2; (16) 116. d, 529;
(17) 526,637; (19) 389; (20) 393.
a, 521. ft; (24) 343. 2, 549. a ; (25)
538. ft.
CHAP. VIII. (2) 529; (3) 402,
(4) 361 ; (5) 213. R., 570, 639. 2 ;
(6) 473. a ', (8) 399 ; (10) 490. R. ;
(13) 595. <J; (14) 665; (18) 497;
(19) 542. 3, 557 ; (20) 236. c, 366,
546; (22) 332. 4 ; (25) 295, 521. ft;
(26) 517, 637; (27) 433, 450, <J.
BOOK V.
CHAP. I. (1) 447. ft', (2) 552;
(8) 465 ; (9) 603. N. ; (10) 220 ; (13)
470. 3 ; (15) 556.
CHAP. II. (5) 457. t ; (8) 615.
2 ; (12) 627. ft, 640 ; (14) 523 ; (15)
542. y ; (20) 560. 2 ; (29) 471. a.
CHAP. III. (2) 332. 4, 457. a ;
(3) 561. 2, 658, 663. 6 ; (5) 559. d ;
(9) 405. rj ; (11 ) 333. 6, 653. ; (13)
391. a, 625.
CHAP. IV. (3) 476; (4)570.1;
(9) 616. 4, 629. 1 ; (10) 609 ; (11)
483; (12) 447. ft', (15) 350; (16)
530, 572, 576 ; (19) 598 ; (20) 447.
y ; (22) 449. ft ; (24) 570 ; (27) 487.
4; (29) 98. a, 486. 2; (32) 437; (34)
532, 561. 1, 604. ft.
CHAP. V. (3) 332. 4 ; (4) 140,
658; (5)140; (8) 579. C ; (9)633;
(11) 360. 2; (12) 525. ft, 561. 3;
(15) 368,517; (19) 527; (21) 457.
p; (22) 561. 3; (25) 655. &
CHAP. VI. (1) 375. ft, 616. b ; (4)
600 ; (9) 450. 3, 603. ; (12) 220,
546, 555, 583, 603. 17 ; (17) 561. 1,
660; (20) 549. a; (24) 441; (25)
500 ; (26) 500 ; (29) 405. C ; (30)
603. 9; (32) 620; (34) 402; (36)
409; (37) 350, 389, 609.
CHAP. VII. (5) 485. a, 570. 2 ;
(6) 485. a, 523 ; (7) 485. a, 513 ; (8)
478. ft; (9) 394, 474; (10) 403,
539. 1 ; (11) 403, 615. 2, 661. 2 ;
(12) 357. a, 658; (17) 361. y, 447.
y, 659. ; (22) 662 , (25) 504 ; (26)
234. a ; (28) 434.
CHAP. VIII. (3) 157. R., 375. a,
526, 638 ; (4) 192. 4 ; (5) 616. b ; (6)
426. d; (7) 502; (8) 532; (11) 517,
539. 1 ; (12) 466, 497. 1 ; (13) 603.
<J, 639. 1 ; (14) 633 ; (21) 403 ; (22)
157. R. ; (23) 278 ; (24) 284, 439. a;
(25) 376. y.
BOOK VI.
CHAP. I. (5) 542. y; (5-13) I (14) 439. a, 447. ft; (15) 431. 2
W6; (6) 433,637; (7) 431; (8) 437; (18) 133. <J, 447. ft; (20) 409, 441,
CITATIONS FROM THE ANABASIS
615. 2; (21) 404. y; (22)402,640;
(23) 457. p; (25) 610; (26) 517;
(28) 633; (29) 406, 605. 3; (30)
546; (31) 444, 552, 615. 2, 633, 660.
CHAP. II. (1) 119. 2; (6) 523;
(10)358,658; (12) 412; (14)406;
(15)472. ; (18)661.2.
CHAP. III. (1) 412, 477. a ; (2)
137. e ; (6) 431 ; (9) 546 ; (11) 610 ;
(14) 532; (15) 520 ; (17) 368; (19)
520 ; (23) 380 ; (25) 380, 432. 3.
CHAP. IV. (1) 410, 449. ft ; (2)
409; (3) 403; (4) 478. y ; (8) 428,
580 ; (9) 409 ; (11) 194. 1, 477. a ;
(13) 194. 1, 486. 1, 559. d; (14)
626. N. ; (18) 669 ; (19) 486. y ; (20)
407. t, 517; (23) 416, 555; (24)
450. <J.
CHAP. V. (5) 520; (6) 440; (10)
234. a, 377. 2 ; (24) 472. a.
CHAP. VI. (1) 378, 525. a; (5)
504; (7) 479; (12) 661. a; (13)
475; (15) 603. 3; (16) 400, 657. y ;
(17) 428 j (18) 598. 1, 600; (22)
530, 628; (24) 614. ; (26) 514;
(29) 337 ; (30) 337 ; (31) 337, 405.
t ; (32) 337, 380 ; (33) 380, 497. 1 ;
(34) 337, 426. <J, 649. y; (38) 447. ft
457. a, 478. a.
BOOK VII.
CHAP. I. (5) 673. p ; (6) 664. p ;
(8) 598, 671. 6 ; (14) 608 ; (19) 640;
(21) 408, 627. a, 660 ; (23) 472. a ;
(24) 529; (25) 437; (28) 531 ; (29)
454 ; (30) 370, 439. p ; (34) 610 ;
(39) 394, 619. y ; (41) 357. p.
CHAP. II. (2) 641. p; (5) 399,
532. N.; (6) 525. a; (8) 525. v. ;
(9) 457. y ; (11) 472 ; (12) 402, 665;
(13) 421. p ; (14) 561. 3 ; (16) 378 ;
(17) 378; (18) 417; (20) 450. <J;
(23) 559. d; (26) 402; (27) 516;
(28) 649. # ; (29) 362. y ; (32) 416,
447. y; (38)367,498.
CHAP. III. (3) 508; (13) 611.
2; (16) 389, 399, 497. 1, 510. 2;
(20&194. 1,303. a; (22) 628; (23)
529. /?, 558, 620 ; (26) 409, 595. <J ;
(27) 409; (29) 399; (31) 41)6. c;
(JW) 119. 2; (33) 432; (35) 509;
(36) 606; (39) 161. 2, 473. a; (43)
546; (46) 301. 5; (48) 526 a
CHAP. IV. (5) 366, 667. 2 ; (7)
583; (14) 378; (16) 476. N ; (19)
237.
CHAP. V. (2) 404. 8; (3) 404.
9; (4) 404. 9', (5) 376. 9', (7) 617.
6 ; (8) 376. y; (9) 424. 2, 504.
CHAP. VI. (1) 137. y ; (3) 610
(4) 403, 491. R.; (5) 405. 5; (9)
436; (11) 504; (15) 603. t; (16)
404. a, 603. a, 604. c; (17) 436,
(18) 504 ; (19) 664. y ; (21) 605. 4 ;
(22) 435; (23) 394, 601. <J; (24)
153. y ; (27) 538. p ; (29) 416, 665 ;
(32) 417 ; (36) 521, 581 ; (37) 344.
1 ; (38) 434, 568. R.; (39) 409 ; (40)
409; (41) 368, 558; (43) 405. /, 652
p; (44) 405. ,.
CHAP. VII. (6) 237; (7) 485. a
(8) 671. 12; (10) 465 ; (11) 603. 3,
(15)663.6; (17) 614. <J; (19) 472
a, 568. R., 624. y ; (22) 434, 629. 1 ;
(23) 556 ; (25) 568 ; (27) 637 ; (28
440; (29) 405. 17, 503; (30) 477. a
(31) 349, 418. 3, 568. R., 602. 2
(33) 509 ; (34) 451 ; (36) 449. a
(40) 605. 2 ; (41 ) 671. 3 ; (42) 357.
a ; (51) 403 ; (53) 671. 2; (54) 403 ,
(55) 200. N. ; (57) 124. p. N., 421. ft.
CHAP. VIII. (1) 399 ; (2) 535
(4) 403, 530; (6) 374. a; (9) 485.
a; (11) 449. p, 460; (12) 119. 2,
(16) 487. 4, 522; (19) 529. p; (20)
470. 3; (26) 140.
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.
JUL 17 i342
2bOct'55UJ
< i~.fnift
3J&R.VUJU 1
M ' -"**
AUG 1 R ?nm
rlvta i O LUUv
1
LD 21-100m-7,'40 (6936s)
YR no 1 74
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES
~7
1